JP7332883B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a slot machine has been known as one of gaming machines (see Patent Document 1, for example).

JP 2015-016110 A

The problem to be solved by the present invention is to improve the performance as a gaming machine.

The present invention solves the above-described problems by the following solutions (the structure of the corresponding embodiment is shown in parentheses).
The present invention
having a reel (31);
having a start switch (41),
having a stop switch (42),
having an RWM (53) region,
Having a first display means (instruction monitor (obtained number display LED 78)) capable of displaying advantageous operation information of the stop switch,
Having a second display means (role ratio monitor (management information display LED 74)) capable of displaying role ratio information,
It is possible to execute a predetermined pseudo-game effect that can temporarily stop the reels by operating the stop switch,
A game in which a predetermined pseudo-game effect is performed, and a game in which a predetermined lottery result is determined by an internal lottery (a certain game is a game in which a predetermined lottery is performed on the first display means). Refers to a game that displays advantageous operation information of the stop switch corresponding to the result), the first display is displayed from the time when the predetermined lottery result is determined by the internal lottery until all the reels are temporarily stopped as a predetermined pseudo-game effect. Advantageous operation information of the stop switch corresponding to the predetermined lottery result is not displayed by the means, all the reels are temporarily stopped as a predetermined pseudo-game performance, and then the first display means corresponds to the predetermined lottery result. Advantageous operation information of the stop switch can be displayed (Fig. 392),
When the start switch is operated as a trigger for executing the internal lottery of the certain game, the process of outputting an external signal corresponding to the number of bets is started before the execution process of a predetermined pseudo-game effect,
When the start switch is operated as a trigger for executing the internal lottery of the certain game, a process for outputting a test signal regarding the operation mode of the stop switch can be executed before the execution process of a predetermined pseudo-game effect. year,
In the certain game, during the period in which a predetermined pseudo-game effect is being executed, a process for outputting a test signal indicating that the pseudo-game effect is in progress can be executed,
A predetermined process capable of determining which stop switch among all the stop switches is being operated before starting the game medium imparting process, and by the predetermined process, which one of all the stop switches is operated can be executed. If it is determined that the stop switch has been operated ("Yes" in step S1362 in FIG. 244), the game medium imparting process (process of step S294) is not started.
The predetermined processing is a logical operation (AND operation) using specific data capable of determining whether or not the data in the specific area storing information regarding the operation of each stop switch in the RWM area is "0". ), and
When the result of the logical operation is not "0", it is determined that one of all the stop switches is operated,
The second display means has a first display portion (digit 1b), a second display portion (digit 2b), a third display portion (digit 3b) and a fourth display portion (digit 4b). ,
The first display unit has a plurality of segments (segments A to G and P) including a DP segment (segment P),
The second display unit has a plurality of segments (segments A to G and P) including a DP segment (segment P),
The third display unit has a plurality of segments (segments A to G and P) including a DP segment (segment P),
The fourth display unit has a plurality of segments (segments A to G and P) including a DP segment (segment P),
It is characterized in that the test pattern can be displayed on the second display means.

According to the present invention, performance as a gaming machine can be improved.

1 is a block diagram showing an outline of control of a slot machine, which is an example of a gaming machine, in the present embodiment; FIG. FIG. 4 is a front view for explaining how a medal inserted from the medal slot passes through an insertion sensor in the present embodiment; FIG. 4 is a diagram illustrating a voltage drop when a power failure occurs in the first embodiment (A) using a time chart; In the first embodiment (B), it is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the insertion sensor and the passage of medals. In 1st Embodiment (B), it is a figure explaining ON/OFF of an injection|throwing-in sensor with a time chart. In the first embodiment (C), it is a schematic diagram when medals are discharged from the medal payout device. In the first embodiment (C), it is a schematic diagram showing the state of ON (detection) / OFF (non-detection) of the payout sensor when medals are delivered from the medal payout device. In 1st Embodiment (C), it is a figure which shows the on/off of a payout sensor with a time chart. FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective view showing an outline of a main control board and a board case in the second embodiment; In the second embodiment, (a) is a plan view showing a board case containing a main control board. (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA showing Example 1 of the gate trace. (c) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line A--A showing example 2 of gate traces. FIG. 12 is a diagram illustrating the flow of processing when disconnection occurs between the main control board and the sub-control board in the third embodiment; In the fourth embodiment, it is a sectional view (schematic diagram) explaining the movement of the stop button of the stop switch, (a) shows a no-load state, (b) is when the detection sensor is turned on from off. (c) shows the state when the stop button is pushed all the way down, and (d) shows the state when the stop button is released and the detection sensor turns off from on. In the fourth embodiment, it is a diagram showing the relationship between the movement of the stop button and the excitation state of the motor in a time chart, (a) shows example 1, (b) shows example 2. FIG. FIG. 12 is a time chart showing the relationship between power on/off and voltage level in the fifth embodiment, where (a) shows the power off after starting the main program, and (b) shows the time before starting the main program. Indicates power off. In the sixth embodiment, (a) is a plan view of the medal payout device showing the state before the last discharged medal touches the fixed shaft and the movable shaft, and (b) is a plan view of the medal payout device showing the state before the last discharged medal touches the fixed shaft and the movable shaft. FIG. 10 is a plan view of the medal payout device showing a state before contact with the movable shaft and a state in which the hopper disc has advanced in rotation from (a). In the sixth embodiment, (a) is a plan view of the medal payout device showing a state in which the last discharged medal is in contact with the fixed shaft and the movable shaft, and (b) is a movable medal pushed by the last discharged medal. FIG. 4 is a plan view of the token payout device showing a state in which the shaft has moved; In the sixth embodiment, (a) is a plan view of the token payout device showing the moment the last ejected medal is ejected from the ejecting section, and (b) is a plan view showing the state after the last ejected medal is ejected. FIG. 4 is a plan view of the token payout device showing a state where the rotation of the hopper disc is stopped; FIG. 14 is a time chart showing the relationship between the drive signal for the hopper motor, the drive state of the hopper motor, and the discharge state of medals from the discharge unit in the sixth embodiment. FIG. FIG. 20 is a diagram showing the relationship between the operation of the main control board, the drive state of the hopper motor, the detection state of the payout sensor, and the ejection timing of the medals in the sixth embodiment. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing the flow of payout processing in the sixth embodiment. FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing a modified example of the flow of payout processing in the sixth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 20 is a side sectional view of the slot machine with the front door closed in the seventh embodiment, and is a diagram for explaining the positional relationship between the main control board and the sub-control board; FIG. 14 is a diagram for explaining the positional relationship between the main CPU on the main control board and the electrolytic capacitors on the sub control board when the slot machine is viewed from the front with the front door closed in the seventh embodiment; ) shows Example 1, and (b) shows Example 2. FIG. 12C is a diagram illustrating the positional relationship between the main CPU on the main control board and the electrolytic capacitors on the sub control board when the slot machine is viewed from the front with the front door closed in the seventh embodiment; ) shows Example 3, and (d) shows Example 4. FIG. 22 is an enlarged side cross-sectional view of the lower front portion of the housing of the slot machine (part A in FIG. 22) with the front door closed in the eighth embodiment, and is a diagram for explaining the gap between the cabinet and the front door. be. In the ninth embodiment, (a) is a diagram showing the types of special bonuses (accessories) and end conditions, and (b) is a diagram showing the types of game states and the specified number of each game state, (c) is a diagram showing a number table for internal lottery and advantageous section lottery in setting 1. FIG. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation determination table used in common by non-RT and RT (non-AT) in 9th Embodiment. It is a diagram showing an effect determination table commonly used inside the RB and inside the BB in the ninth embodiment. FIG. 20 is a diagram showing an example 1 of test pattern display of management information display LEDs in the tenth embodiment; FIG. 22 is a diagram showing Example 2 of test pattern display of management information display LEDs in the tenth embodiment; In the eleventh embodiment, (A) is a diagram showing various LEDs on the display substrate, (B) is a diagram showing management information display LEDs, and (C) is a diagram showing set value display LEDs. is. FIG. 20 is a diagram showing the relationship between digits 1a to 5a and digits 1b to 5b and segments A to G and P in the eleventh embodiment; FIG. 22 is a diagram showing output ports in the eleventh embodiment; In the eleventh embodiment, (A) is a diagram showing the relationship between interrupts, LED display counter values, digit signals, and segment signals. (B) is a diagram showing an LED display request flag. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing addresses, label names, names, etc. of data stored in RWM; FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining the concept of a difference counter value, (a) showing example 1 and (b) showing example 2; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the relationship between the difference counter value and the advantageous interval, (a) showing example 1 and (b) showing example 2; 4 is a flowchart showing program start processing (M_PRG_START) by the main control board; FIG. 38 is a flow chart showing setting change processing (M_RANK_SET) in step S212 in FIG. FIG. 38 is a flow chart showing power return processing (M_POWER_ON) in step S213. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing main processing (M_MAIN) in the eleventh embodiment; FIG. FIG. 41 is a flow chart showing game start set processing (M_GAME_SET) in step S272 in FIG. In FIG. 41, it is a flow chart showing AT game number counter update processing in step S281. 41. It is a flowchart which shows the advantageous area transition lottery process in step S283 in FIG. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing advantageous section transition processing in step S347 of FIG. 44; FIG. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing AT lottery processing in step S355 of FIG. 45. FIG. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing AT initial game number determination processing in step S363. FIG. 42 is a flow chart showing a push order instruction number setting process (M_ORD_INF) in step S284 of FIG. 41; FIG. FIG. 41 is a flow chart showing medal payout processing (MS_WIN_PAY) due to winning in step S294. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing game end check processing (M_GAME_CHK) in step S301 of FIG. 41; FIG. FIG. 51 is a flow chart showing Example 1 of advantageous section counter management in step S416 of FIG. 50; FIG. FIG. 51 is a flow chart showing example 2 of advantageous section counter management in step S416 of FIG. 50; FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing interrupt processing (I_INTR); FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing power-off processing (I_POWER_DOWN) in step S453 of FIG. 53; FIG. FIG. 53 is a flow chart showing LED display control (I_LED_OUT) in step S453. 29 is a flowchart showing sub-difference number counter management processing in the eleventh embodiment. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing sub-difference number counter management processing in the eleventh embodiment, and is a flowchart continued from FIG. 56 . In the twelfth embodiment, (A) shows the role condition device and the operation end condition, (B) shows the specified number for each RT, and (C) shows the winning number for each winning number. It is the front view, the top view, and the right view which show the outline|summary of a structure containing the reel and stop switch in 13th Embodiment. 20 is a time chart showing timings of starting and ending display of the pressing order instruction information when the start switch is operated after the minimum playing time has elapsed in the fourteenth embodiment (A). 20 is a time chart showing timings of starting and ending display of the pressing order instruction information when the start switch is operated before the minimum playing time elapses in the fourteenth embodiment (A). FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing main processing (M_MAIN) in the fourteenth embodiment (B); FIG. FIG. 20 is a time chart showing timings of starting and ending display of the pressing order instruction information when the start switch is operated after the minimum playing time has elapsed in the fourteenth embodiment (B); FIG. 20 is a time chart showing timings of starting and ending display of the pressing order instruction information when the start switch is operated before the minimum game time elapses in the fourteenth embodiment (B). FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing main processing (M_MAIN) in the fourteenth embodiment (C); FIG. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing medal payout processing (M_WIN_PAY) due to winning in the fourteenth embodiment (C); FIG. FIG. 20 is a time chart showing timings of starting and ending display of the pressing order instruction information when the start switch is operated after the minimum game time has elapsed in the fourteenth embodiment (C); FIG. 20 is a time chart showing timings of starting and ending display of the pressing order instruction information when the start switch is operated before the minimum playing time elapses in the fourteenth embodiment (C). FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing main processing (M_MAIN) in the fourteenth embodiment (D); FIG. 20 is a time chart showing timings of starting and ending display of the pushing order instruction information when the start switch is operated after the minimum playing time has elapsed in the fourteenth embodiment (D). 20 is a time chart showing timings of starting and ending display of the pushing order instruction information when the start switch is operated before the minimum playing time elapses in the fourteenth embodiment (D). FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing main processing (M_MAIN) in the fourteenth embodiment (E); FIG. FIG. 20 is a time chart showing timings of starting and ending display of the pushing order instruction information when the start switch is operated after the minimum playing time has elapsed in the fourteenth embodiment (E); FIG. FIG. 20 is a time chart showing timings of starting and ending display of the pressing order instruction information when the start switch is operated before the minimum playing time elapses in the fourteenth embodiment (E); FIG. FIG. 32 is a front view showing an outline of a configuration including a reel, an operation instruction lamp and a stop switch in the fourteenth embodiment (F); 20 is a time chart showing timings of starting and ending display of the pressing order instruction information when the start switch is operated after the minimum playing time has elapsed in the fourteenth embodiment (F). FIG. 20 is a time chart showing timings of starting and ending display of the pressing order instruction information when the start switch is operated before the minimum game time elapses in the fourteenth embodiment (F); FIG. 20 is a time chart showing timings of starting and ending display of the pressing order instruction information when the start switch is operated after the minimum playing time has elapsed in the fourteenth embodiment (G). 20 is a time chart showing timings of starting and ending display of push order instruction information when the start switch is operated before the minimum playing time elapses in the fourteenth embodiment (G). FIG. 20 is a diagram showing execution timing of medal addition processing in the fifteenth embodiment (A). FIG. 32 is a diagram showing execution timing of medal addition processing in the fifteenth embodiment (B). FIG. 22 is a diagram showing execution timing of medal addition processing in the fifteenth embodiment (C). FIG. 21 is a schematic front view of a medal selector, a shoot path 48, and a shoot sensor 49 in a sixteenth embodiment; FIG. 32 is a front view of a passage forming member in the seventeenth embodiment; FIG. 32 is a rear view of the passage forming member in the seventeenth embodiment; FIG. 32 is a left side view of the passage forming member in the seventeenth embodiment; FIG. 86 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA of FIG. 85 of the passage forming member in the seventeenth embodiment; FIG. 22 is a diagram showing main RWM storage areas described in the eighteenth embodiment; FIG. 20 is a time chart (example 1) showing output timings of the external signal 4 and the external signal 5 in the eighteenth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 20 is a time chart (example 2) showing output timings of the external signal 4 and the external signal 5 in the eighteenth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flowchart (example 1) showing external signal output processing in the eighteenth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 344 is a flowchart (example 1) showing external signal output processing in the eighteenth embodiment, and is a flowchart continued from FIG. 344 ; FIG. 20 is a flowchart (example 2) showing external signal output processing in the eighteenth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flowchart (example 3) showing external signal output processing in the eighteenth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 32 is a block diagram showing an outline of control of the slot machine in the nineteenth embodiment (A); 19 is a time chart showing the relationship between a setting change state, a setting change end sound, a lamp effect, and one game time, which will be described later, in the nineteenth embodiment. It is an external perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine viewed from the front side (player side). It is the appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko game machine from the back side. It is a block diagram in the pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart for explaining the flow of startup after power-on of the pachinko gaming machine. 101 is a flowchart showing setting change processing in step S702 of FIG. 100; It is a flow chart showing the flow of one game in the pachinko game machine. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the board case (upper case and lower case) and the main control board as seen from the front side; FIG. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the board case (upper case and lower case) and the main control board as seen from the rear side; FIG. 4 is an external perspective view showing a state in which a main control board is housed in a board case; FIG. 4 is a front view of a state in which a main control board is housed in a board case, viewed from the front side; FIG. 4 is a front view of the state in which the main control board is accommodated in the board case, viewed from the rear (rear) side; FIG. 4A is a side cross-sectional view showing a fitted state of an upper case and a lower case, where (a) shows a temporary fitted state (before sliding movement) and (b) shows a final fitting state (after sliding movement); . FIG. 10 is a plan view of the vicinity of the side wall seen from the side of the lower case in the temporarily fitted state; FIG. 4 is a plan view showing a state in which a harness is connected to a connector of the main control board; It is a front view which shows harness and its connector terminal in detail. It is a perspective view which shows the example which hides the lead wire regarding starting. FIG. 4 is a side cross-sectional view showing the positional relationship between the upper case of the substrate case, the cover, the setting key insertion opening, and the setting change (reset) switch. FIG. 23 is a diagram showing a pattern arrangement of reels in the twenty-third embodiment; FIG. FIG. 22 is a diagram showing display windows, effective lines, etc. in the twenty-third embodiment; FIG. FIG. 14 is a diagram (1) showing a symbol combination for a winning combination, the number of payouts, and the like in the twenty-third embodiment; FIG. 21 is a diagram (2) showing a symbol combination for a winning combination, the number of payouts, and the like in the twenty-third embodiment; It is a diagram (3) showing a symbol combination of a winning combination, the number of payouts, etc. in the twenty-third embodiment. FIG. 24 is a diagram (4) showing a symbol combination of a winning combination, the number of payouts, etc. in the twenty-third embodiment; It is a diagram (5) showing a combination of symbols for a winning combination, the number of payouts, etc. in the twenty-third embodiment. It is a diagram (6) showing a combination of symbols for a winning combination, the number of payouts, etc. in the twenty-third embodiment. It is a diagram (1) showing a conditional device and a winning combination in the twenty-third embodiment. It is a diagram (2) showing a condition device, a winning combination, etc. in the twenty-third embodiment. It is a diagram (3) showing a condition device, a winning combination, etc. in the twenty-third embodiment. It is a diagram (4) showing a condition device, a winning combination, etc. in the twenty-third embodiment. FIG. 23 is a diagram showing a number table (non-RT) in the twenty-third embodiment; FIG. 23 is a diagram showing a number table (RT1) in the twenty-third embodiment; FIG. FIG. 32 is a diagram showing an entry table (during 1BB operation and RB non-inside) in the twenty-third embodiment; FIG. 32 is a diagram showing a numerical table (during operation of 1BB and inside RB) in the twenty-third embodiment; FIG. 23 is a diagram showing a numerical table (during 1BB operation and RB operation) in the twenty-third embodiment; FIG. 22 is a diagram showing RT transitions in the twenty-third embodiment; It is a diagram showing the transition of the main game state in the twenty-third embodiment. FIG. 21 is a diagram (1) showing contents of RWM in the twenty-third embodiment; FIG. 22 is a diagram (2) showing the contents of RWM in the twenty-third embodiment; FIG. 21 is a diagram (3) showing the contents of RWM in the twenty-third embodiment; FIG. 24 is a diagram (4) showing contents of RWM in the twenty-third embodiment; FIG. 22 is a diagram (5) showing the contents of RWM in the twenty-third embodiment; FIG. 26 is a diagram (6) showing contents of RWM in the twenty-third embodiment; FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing main processing (M_MAIN) in the twenty-third embodiment; FIG. 19 is a flow chart showing start switch acceptance processing (M_START_CTL) in the twenty-third embodiment. 19 is a flow chart showing a symbol stop signal set (S_IF_SET) in the twenty-third embodiment; FIG. 23 is a diagram showing a stop acceptance specification table 1 (TBL_ORD_INF1) and a stop acceptance specification table 2 ((TBL_ORD_INF1)) in the twenty-third embodiment; It is a flow chart showing the start of standby effect (M_TARPIC_EXE) in the twenty-third embodiment. FIG. 24 is a diagram showing a reel effect data table (TBL_TARPIC_DAT) in the twenty-third embodiment; FIG. FIG. 23 is a diagram showing reel effect execution timer tables 1 to 8 (TBL_TARPIC_TM1 to TM8) in the twenty-third embodiment; 23 is a flow chart showing reel stop acceptance check (M_STOP_CHK) in the twenty-third embodiment. FIG. 23 is a flow chart showing a stop symbol set (M_STOPPIC_SET) in the twenty-third embodiment; FIG. 139. It is a flowchart which shows the game end check process (M_GAME_CHK) in step S753 of FIG. 148. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of completion|finish of a main game state game in FIG.148 S941. FIG. 150 is a flow chart showing advantageous section end preparation (M_ADVEND_STBY) in step S957 of FIG. 149; FIG. FIG. 23 is a flow chart showing interrupt processing (I_INTR) in the twenty-third embodiment; FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing reel drive management (I_REEL_ADM) in the twenty-third embodiment; 19 is a flow chart showing reel control data address setting (C_RLDAT_SET) in the twenty-third embodiment. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing reel drive control (I_REEL_CTL) in the twenty-third embodiment; FIG. 155 is a flowchart continued from FIG. 154; FIG. 22 is a diagram showing an acceleration/deceleration pulse output counter table (TBL_PULSE_UP) in the twenty-third embodiment; 19 is a flow chart showing reel drive pulse update (I_PULSE_INC) in the 23rd embodiment. FIG. 23 is a diagram showing a reel driving pulse table (TBL_REEL_PULSE) in the twenty-third embodiment; FIG. FIG. 23 is a flow chart showing deceleration start check (I_REDUCE_CHK) in the twenty-third embodiment; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing an immersion prevention output in the twenty-third embodiment; FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing confrontation effect output control in the twenty-third embodiment. FIG. 22 is a diagram for explaining volume setting in the twenty-third embodiment; FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing volume setting in administrator mode in the twenty-third embodiment. 3 is a diagram showing the hardware structure of the main CPU; FIG. FIG. 165 is a diagram showing in more detail the structure of the ROM and RWM of FIG. 164; (A) is a diagram showing A to F, H, L, and Q registers, and (B) is a diagram showing the structure of the F register. (A) is a diagram showing an example of an instruction, and (B) is a diagram for explaining execution of the instruction. FIG. 22 is a diagram showing instruction types (1) in the twenty-fourth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 22 is a diagram showing types (2) of instructions in the twenty-fourth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 24 is a diagram showing types (3) of instructions in the twenty-fourth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 22 is a diagram showing types (4) of instructions in the twenty-fourth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 24 is a diagram showing the contents of an RWM storing data relating to advantageous intervals (AT) in the twenty-fourth embodiment; FIG. 22 is a diagram showing content (1) of RWM in the twenty-fifth embodiment; FIG. 22 is a diagram showing content (2) of RWM in the twenty-fifth embodiment; FIG. 32 is a diagram showing content (3) of RWM in the twenty-fifth embodiment; FIG. 22 is a diagram showing definition data (1) in the twenty-fifth embodiment; FIG. 32 is a diagram showing definition data (2) in the twenty-fifth embodiment; FIG. 32 is a diagram showing definition data (3) in the twenty-fifth embodiment; FIG. 32 is a diagram showing definition data (4) in the twenty-fifth embodiment; FIG. 22 is a diagram showing an outline of various tables used in the twenty-fifth embodiment; FIG. It is a diagram showing a first reel pattern arrangement table (TBL_PICARG_1). It is a diagram showing a first reel symbol combination table (TBL_PICCMB_1) (1). It is a diagram showing a first reel symbol symbol combination table (TBL_PICCMB_1) (2). It is a diagram showing a first reel symbol combination table (TBL_PICCMB_1) (3). It is a diagram showing a second reel symbol arrangement table (TBL_PICARG_2). FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a second reel symbol combination table (TBL_PICCMB_2) (1); FIG. 11 shows a second reel symbol combination table (TBL_PICCMB_2) (2); FIG. 11 shows a second reel symbol combination table (TBL_PICCMB_2) (3); FIG. 11 shows a third reel pattern arrangement table (TBL_PICARG_3); FIG. 11 shows a third reel symbol combination table (TBL_PICCMB_3) (1); FIG. 11 shows a third reel symbol combination table (TBL_PICCMB_3) (2); FIG. 11 shows a third reel symbol combination table (TBL_PICCMB_3) (3); It is a diagram showing a payout number table (TBL_WIN_CTL). 10 is a flow chart showing a reel stop reception check (M_STOP_PIC). FIG. 195 is a flow chart showing a stop pattern set (M_STOPPIC_SET) in step S1024 of FIG. 194; FIG. FIG. 195 is a flow chart showing a reel design data set (M_PICDAT_SET) in step S1033 of FIG. 195. FIG. 197 is a flowchart showing table selection (R_TBL_SEL) in step S1043 of FIG. 196; 197 is a flowchart showing 4-bit data acquisition (M_4BITDAT_GET) in step S1045 of FIG. 196; FIG. 197 is a flow chart showing a bit count (M_BIT_COUNT) in step S1052 of FIG. 196; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing 1-line display judgment (M_LINE_JUDGE); FIG. 201 is a flow chart showing specified data acquisition (M_SELDAT_SET) in step S1103 of FIG. 200; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing RB operation management in the twenty-fifth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 22 is a diagram showing the configuration of an RWM 53 in the twenty-sixth embodiment; FIG. (A) is a diagram showing a symbol control data table (TBL_PIC_DAT), and (B) is a diagram showing a reel symbol search table address offset table (TBL_PIC_SRCH). FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a first reel symbol search table (TBL_PICARG_1) (1); FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a first reel symbol search table (TBL_PICARG_1) (2); FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a first reel symbol search table (TBL_PICARG_1) (3); FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a first reel symbol search table (TBL_PICARG_1) (4); It is a figure which shows a 1st reel symbol search table (TBL_PICARG_1) (5). FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a second reel symbol search table (TBL_PICARG_2) (1); FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a second reel symbol search table (TBL_PICARG_2) (2); FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a second reel symbol search table (TBL_PICARG_2) (3); FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a second reel symbol search table (TBL_PICARG_2) (4); It is a figure which shows a 2nd reel symbol search table (TBL_PICARG_2) (5). FIG. 11 shows a third reel symbol search table (TBL_PICARG_3) (1); FIG. 11 shows a third reel symbol search table (TBL_PICARG_3) (2); FIG. 11 shows a third reel symbol search table (TBL_PICARG_3) (3); FIG. 11 shows a third reel symbol search table (TBL_PICARG_3) (4); FIG. 11 shows a third reel symbol search table (TBL_PICARG_3) (5); FIG. 22 is a diagram showing a payout number table (TBL_WIN_CTL) (1) in the twenty-sixth embodiment; FIG. 22 is a diagram showing a payout number table (TBL_WIN_CTL) (2) in the twenty-sixth embodiment; FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing main processing in the twenty-sixth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 223 is a flow chart showing processing when a start switch is accepted in step S1133 of FIG. 222; FIG. FIG. 224 is a flow chart showing reel rotation start preparation processing in step S1142 of FIG. 223. FIG. FIG. 223 is a flow chart showing reel stop control in step S1135 of FIG. 222. FIG. FIG. 225 is a flow chart showing design array address buffer setting in step S1165 of FIG. 225. FIG. FIG. 223 is a flow chart showing display determination processing in step S1137 of FIG. 222. FIG. FIG. 22 is a diagram showing an example 1 of a pattern arrangement table in the twenty-seventh embodiment; FIG. FIG. 32 is a diagram showing Example 2 of a pattern arrangement table in the twenty-seventh embodiment; FIG. FIG. 20 is a diagram showing display windows, effective lines, and RWM areas in the twenty-eighth embodiment; It is a figure which shows the pattern arrangement|sequence in 28th Embodiment. FIG. 32 is a diagram showing a first reel pattern arrangement table (TBL_PICARG_1) in the twenty-eighth embodiment; FIG. 32 is a diagram showing a second reel pattern arrangement table (TBL_PICARG_2) in the twenty-eighth embodiment; FIG. 123 is a diagram showing a third reel pattern arrangement table (TBL_PICARG_3) in the twenty-eighth embodiment; FIG. 32 is a diagram showing role definitions in the twenty-eighth embodiment; FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing main processing (M_MAIN) in the twenty-ninth embodiment; FIG. 32 is a diagram showing contents of RWM in the thirtieth embodiment; 29 is a flowchart showing main processing (M_MAIN) in the thirtieth embodiment; FIG. 239 is a flow chart showing a reel stop acceptance check in step S1312 of FIG. 238. FIG. FIG. 239 is a flowchart showing an input check in step S1313 of FIG. 238; FIG. FIG. 239 is a flow chart showing an all-reels stop check in step S1316 of FIG. 238. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing main processing (M_MAIN) in the thirty-first embodiment; FIG. 32 is a diagram showing contents of RWM in the thirty-second embodiment; FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing main processing (M_MAIN) in the thirty-second embodiment; FIG. 245 is a flow chart showing a reel stop acceptance check in step S1361 of FIG. 244. FIG. FIG. 246 is a flow chart showing the step-out inspection preparation in step S1374 of FIG. 245. FIG. FIG. 247 is a flow chart showing a step-out inspection in step S1382 of FIG. 246; FIG. FIG. 247 is a flow chart showing waiting for stop acceptance in step S1387 of FIG. 246; FIG. FIG. 32 is a diagram showing contents of RWM in the thirty-third embodiment; FIG. FIG. 22 is a diagram showing signals input to input port 0 in the thirty-third embodiment; FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing main processing (M_MAIN) in the thirty-third embodiment; FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing a modification of main processing (M_MAIN) in the thirty-third embodiment; FIG. FIG. 32 is a diagram showing content (1) of RWM in the thirty-fourth embodiment; FIG. 32 is a diagram showing content (2) of RWM in the thirty-fourth embodiment; (a) is a diagram showing a stop switch determination table (TBL_STPBTN_CHK), and (b) is a diagram showing a stop acceptance determination table. 29 is a flowchart showing main processing (M_MAIN) in the thirty-fourth embodiment; FIG. 257 is a flow chart showing a reel stop acceptance check in step S1421 of FIG. 256. FIG. FIG. 258 is a flow chart showing a stop acceptance check in step S1432 of FIG. 257; FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a stop switch reception table (TBL_STOP_BTN); 29 is a flow chart showing reel stop acceptance check in the thirty-fifth embodiment. FIG. 22 is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the operation order of stop switches 42, the stop order of reels 31, the stop display of symbols, and the output of tenpai sounds in the thirty-sixth embodiment. FIG. 22 is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the operation order of stop switches 42, the stop order of reels 31, the stop display of symbols, and the output of tenpai sounds in the thirty-sixth embodiment. FIG. 22 is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the operation order of stop switches 42, the stop order of reels 31, the stop display of symbols, and the output of tenpai sounds in the thirty-sixth embodiment. 29 is a flowchart showing main processing (M_MAIN) in the thirty-sixth embodiment; FIG. 32 is a diagram showing a pattern arrangement of reels 31 in the thirty-seventh embodiment; FIG. 20 is a diagram (1) showing types of winnings, symbol combinations, payout numbers, etc. in the thirty-seventh embodiment; FIG. 21 is a diagram (2) showing types of winnings, symbol combinations, payout numbers, etc. in the thirty-seventh embodiment; FIG. 21 is a diagram (3) showing types of wins, etc., symbol combinations, payout numbers, etc. in the thirty-seventh embodiment; FIG. 22 is a diagram (4) showing types of winnings, symbol combinations, payout numbers, etc. in the thirty-seventh embodiment; FIG. 20 is a diagram (5) showing types of wins, symbol combinations, payout numbers, etc. in the thirty-seventh embodiment; FIG. 21 is a diagram (6) showing types of winnings, symbol combinations, payout numbers, etc. in the thirty-seventh embodiment; FIG. 29 is a diagram (7) showing types of wins, etc., symbol combinations, payout numbers, etc., in the thirty-seventh embodiment; FIG. 20 is a diagram (8) showing types of winnings, symbol combinations, payout numbers, etc. in the thirty-seventh embodiment; It is a figure which shows the pattern design combination in 37th Embodiment. It is a diagram (1) showing a condition device number, a condition device, a winning combination, etc. in the thirty-seventh embodiment. It is a diagram (2) showing a condition device number, a condition device, a winning combination, etc. in the thirty-seventh embodiment. It is a diagram (3) showing a condition device number, a condition device, a winning combination, etc. in the thirty-seventh embodiment. It is a diagram (4) showing a condition device number, a condition device, a winning combination, etc. in the thirty-seventh embodiment. It is a diagram (5) showing a condition device number, a condition device, a winning combination, etc. in the thirty-seventh embodiment. It is a diagram (6) showing a condition device number, a condition device, a winning combination, etc. in the thirty-seventh embodiment. It is a diagram (7) showing a condition device number, a condition device, a winning combination, etc. in the thirty-seventh embodiment. It is a diagram (8) showing a condition device number, a condition device, a winning combination, etc. in the thirty-seventh embodiment. It is a diagram (9) showing a condition device number, a condition device, a winning combination, etc. in the thirty-seventh embodiment. It is a diagram (10) showing a condition device number, a condition device, a winning combination, etc. in the thirty-seventh embodiment. It is a diagram (11) showing a condition device number, a condition device, a winning combination, etc. in the thirty-seventh embodiment. FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a number table (winning probability for each winning number) in the thirty-seventh embodiment, and is a diagram (1) showing non-RT and non-internal. FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a number table (winning probability for each winning number) in the thirty-seventh embodiment, and is a diagram (2) showing non-RT and non-internal. FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a number table (winning probability for each winning number) in the thirty-seventh embodiment, and is a diagram (1) showing RT1 and non-internal. FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a number table (winning probability for each winning number) in the thirty-seventh embodiment, and is a diagram (2) showing RT1 and non-internal. FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a number table (winning probability for each winning number) in the thirty-seventh embodiment, and is a diagram (1) showing non-RT and inside 1BB. FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a number table (winning probability for each winning number) in the thirty-seventh embodiment, and is a diagram (2) showing non-RT and inside 1BB. FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a number table (winning probability for each winning number) in the thirty-seventh embodiment, and is a diagram (1) showing the inside of RT1 and 1BB. FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a number table (winning probability for each winning number) in the thirty-seventh embodiment, and is a diagram (2) showing inside RT1 and 1BB. FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a number table (winning probability for each winning number) in the thirty-seventh embodiment, and is a diagram (1) showing 1BB operation and RB non-inside. FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a number table (winning probability for each winning number) in the thirty-seventh embodiment, and is a diagram (2) showing 1BB operation and RB non-inside. FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a number table (winning probability for each winning number) in the thirty-seventh embodiment, and is a diagram (1) showing RT2 (during operation of 1BB and inside RB); FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a number table (winning probability for each winning number) in the thirty-seventh embodiment, and is a diagram (2) showing RT2 (during 1BB operation and inside RB); FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a number table (winning probability for each winning number) in the thirty-seventh embodiment, and is a diagram (1) showing 1BB operation and RB operation; FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a number table (winning probability for each winning number) in the thirty-seventh embodiment, and is a diagram (2) showing 1BB operation and RB operation. FIG. 32 is a diagram showing RT transitions in the thirty-seventh embodiment; FIG. 32 is a diagram showing an instruction function in the thirty-seventh embodiment; FIG. In the thirty-seventh embodiment, it is a diagram showing an image display example when it is decided to execute AT in a non-RT and 1BB internal game, and 1BB is to be won. FIG. 20 is an RT transition diagram in the thirty-eighth embodiment; FIG. 20 is a time chart showing the relationship between RT transition, the start and end of an advantageous section, and the presence or absence of AT winning in the thirty-eighth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 20 is a diagram (1) showing symbol combinations for winning combinations, the number of payouts, etc. in the thirty-ninth embodiment; FIG. 22 is a diagram (2) showing the combination of symbols for a winning combination, the number of payouts, etc. in the thirty-ninth embodiment; FIG. 21 is a diagram (3) showing the combination of symbols for a winning combination, the number of payouts, etc. in the thirty-ninth embodiment; FIG. 24 is a diagram (4) showing the combination of symbols for a winning combination, the number of payouts, etc. in the thirty-ninth embodiment; FIG. 21 is a diagram (5) showing symbol combinations for winning combinations, the number of payouts, etc. in the thirty-ninth embodiment; FIG. 21 is a diagram (6) showing the combination of symbols for a winning combination, the number of payouts, etc. in the thirty-ninth embodiment; FIG. 29 is a diagram (7) showing the combination of symbols for a winning combination, the number of payouts, etc. in the thirty-ninth embodiment; It is a diagram (1) showing a condition device number, a condition device, a winning combination, etc. in the thirty-ninth embodiment. It is a diagram (2) showing a condition device number, a condition device, a winning combination, etc. in the thirty-ninth embodiment. It is a diagram (3) showing a condition device number, a condition device, a winning combination, etc. in the thirty-ninth embodiment. It is a diagram (4) showing a condition device number, a condition device, a winning combination, etc. in the thirty-ninth embodiment. It is a diagram (5) showing a condition device number, a condition device, a winning combination, etc. in the thirty-ninth embodiment. It is a diagram (6) showing a condition device number, a condition device, a winning combination, etc. in the thirty-ninth embodiment. It is a diagram (7) showing a condition device number, a condition device, a winning combination, etc. in the thirty-ninth embodiment. FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a number table (winning probability for each winning number) in the thirty-ninth embodiment, and is a diagram (1) showing the prescribed number “2” during non-RT and non-internal. FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a number table (winning probability for each winning number) in the thirty-ninth embodiment, and is a diagram (2) showing the prescribed number “2” for non-RT and non-internal. FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a number table (winning probability for each winning number) in the thirty-ninth embodiment, and is a diagram (1) showing the prescribed number “3” for non-RT and non-internal. FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a number table (winning probability for each winning number) in the thirty-ninth embodiment, and is a diagram (2) showing the prescribed number “3” for non-RT and non-internal. FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a number table (winning probability for each winning number) in the thirty-ninth embodiment, and is a diagram (1) showing the specified number "3" in RT1 and 1BBB. FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a number table (winning probability for each winning number) in the thirty-ninth embodiment, and is a diagram (2) showing the specified number “3” in RT1 and 1BBB. FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a number table (winning probability for each winning number) in the thirty-ninth embodiment, and is a diagram (1) showing the prescribed number “3” in non-RT and 1BBA. FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a number table (winning probability for each winning number) in the thirty-ninth embodiment, and is a diagram (2) showing the prescribed number “3” in non-RT and 1BBA. FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a number table (winning probability for each winning number) in the thirty-ninth embodiment, and is a diagram (1) showing the specified number “2” in non-RT and 1BBA. FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a number table (winning probability for each winning number) in the thirty-ninth embodiment, and is a diagram (2) showing the prescribed number “2” in non-RT and 1BBA. FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a number table (winning probability for each winning number) in the thirty-ninth embodiment, and FIG. FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a number table (winning probability for each winning number) in the thirty-ninth embodiment, and is a diagram (2) showing the specified number “2” in RT1 and 1BBB. FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a number table (winning probability for each winning number) in the thirty-ninth embodiment, and is a diagram (1) showing the specified number "3" during RBA operation. FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a number table (winning probability for each winning number) in the thirty-ninth embodiment, and is a diagram (2) showing the specified number "3" during RBA operation. FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a number table (winning probability for each winning number) in the thirty-ninth embodiment, and is a diagram (1) showing the specified number "3" during RBB operation. FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a number table (winning probability for each winning number) in the thirty-ninth embodiment, and is a diagram (2) showing the prescribed number "3" during RBB operation. FIG. 32 is a diagram showing RT transitions in the thirty-ninth embodiment; 29 is a flow chart showing processing at the time of starting by main game state in the thirty-ninth embodiment. FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing processing at the time of total stop by main game state in the thirty-ninth embodiment. FIG. FIG. 338 is a flow chart showing advantageous section clear counter management processing in step S2615 of FIG. 337. FIG. In the forty-fifth embodiment, it is a time chart showing an example of a slot machine in which effective management of push buttons is performed by a timer. FIG. 20 is a time chart showing an example of a slot machine in which push buttons are effectively managed by feedback commands in the fortieth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 10 is a time chart (example 1) showing push button activation management when the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine; FIG. 10 is a time chart (example 2) showing push button activation management when the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine; 10 is a time chart (example 3) showing push button activation management when the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine; 10 is a time chart (example 4) showing push button effective management when the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 22 is a diagram for explaining the configurations of a main CPU, ROM, and RWM in the 41st embodiment; FIG. FIG. 20 is a diagram showing addresses, label names, number of bytes, and names of data stored in RWM usage areas in the forty-first embodiment; FIG. 22 is a diagram showing addresses, label names, number of bytes, and names of data stored outside the use area of the RWM in the 41st embodiment; 347 is a diagram showing addresses, label names, number of bytes, and names of data stored outside the use area of RWM in the forty-first embodiment, following FIG. 347; FIG. (A) is a diagram showing various LEDs on a display substrate in the forty-first embodiment, and (B) is a diagram showing a management information display LED in the forty-first embodiment. FIG. 20 is a diagram showing the relationship between digits 1 to 9 and segments A to G and P in the 41st embodiment; FIG. 20 is a diagram showing signals output from output ports 2 to 7 in the 41st embodiment; FIG. 32 is a diagram showing the relationship between digits and segments in the forty-first embodiment; (A) is a diagram showing the relationship between the LED display counter 1 (_CT_LED_DSP1) and the signal output from the output port 3 in the 41st embodiment; (B) is a diagram showing the LED display counter 2 ( _SC_LED_DSP2) and a signal output from the output port 6, and (C) is a diagram illustrating an LED display request flag (_FL_LED_DSP) in the forty-first embodiment. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing program start processing (M_PRG_START) in the 41st embodiment; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing power return processing (M_POWER_ON) in the forty-first embodiment; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) in the 41st embodiment; FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing initialization processing (M_INI_SET) in the 41st embodiment; FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing setting change confirmation processing (M_RANK_CTL) in the 41st embodiment; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing interrupt processing (I_INTR) in the 41st embodiment; FIG. FIG. 23 is a flow chart showing power-off processing (I_POWER_DOWN) in the forty-first embodiment; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing RWM checksum set processing (S_SUM_SET) in the 41st embodiment; FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing LED display control (I_LED_OUT) in the forty-first embodiment; FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing unrecoverable error processing 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) in the 41st embodiment; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing a ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY) in the 41st embodiment; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing blinking request flag generation processing (S_LED_FLASH) in the forty-first embodiment; FIG. FIG. 23 is a diagram showing a flashing/non-corresponding item determination value table (TBL_SEG_FLASH) in the 41st embodiment; FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing a ratio display timer update process (S_RATE_TIME) in the 41st embodiment; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing a ratio display process (S_LED_OUT) in the 41st embodiment; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing a blink bit check count table (TBL_FLASH_CHK) in the 41st embodiment; FIG. FIG. 23 is a flow chart showing unrecoverable error processing 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) in a modified example of the 41st embodiment; FIG. FIG. 20 is a diagram showing signals output from output ports 2 to 5 in a modified example of the forty-first embodiment; FIG. 22 is a diagram showing the relationship between LED display counter 1 (_CT_LED_DSP1) and signals output from output ports 3 and 6 in the modification of the 41st embodiment; FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an internal memory of a main CPU 55 in the 42nd embodiment, (A) shows an overview of the internal memory, and (B) shows an internal register area. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing a detailed configuration of an F register; FIG. 22 is a diagram showing a stack area in the forty-second embodiment; FIG. FIG. 32 is a diagram showing main instructions in the forty-second embodiment; FIG. It is a figure which shows the aspect of LDF instruction and LD instruction. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing aspects of a CALLEX instruction; 1 is a diagram showing an example of a conventional CALL instruction and RET instruction; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing program start (M_PRG_SET) in the 42nd embodiment; FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example using CALLEX and jump instructions; In the 43rd embodiment, it is a diagram showing an example of temporarily stopping "7"-"7"-"7" on the middle line by a pseudo-game effect. It is a time chart showing the (motor) drive signal control (example 1) during the pseudo game production. It is a time chart showing the (motor) drive signal control (example 2) during the pseudo game production. It is a time chart showing the motor drive control of each reel during the pseudo game production. It is a flow chart showing the control of the lamp during the pseudo-game production. It is a diagram showing an example of shaking fluctuation during the pseudo-game production. It is a diagram showing random delay processing after the end of the pseudo-game effect. It is a diagram showing the lighting / extinguishing of the pseudo-game display lamp during the pseudo-game production. It is a diagram showing a display indicating that it is during the pseudo-game production during the pseudo-game production. It is a schematic diagram showing the front appearance of the slot machine. It is a time chart showing a pseudo-game display lamp and a pseudo-game display. It is a time chart showing a pseudo-game signal, a pseudo-game progress signal, and the like. FIG. 22 is a diagram showing storage areas of an RWM 53 in the forty-third embodiment; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing game start set processing (M_GAME_SET) in the 43rd embodiment; FIG. FIG. 397 is a flow chart showing medal acceptance start processing in step S2869 of FIG. 395. FIG. FIG. 397 is a flow chart showing start switch acceptance processing (M_START_CTL) in step S2889 of FIG. 396; FIG. It is a flow chart showing pseudo-game effect processing in step S2923 of FIG. 152 is a flow chart showing external signal output in step S466 of FIG. 151 in the forty-third embodiment. 152 is a flow chart showing test signal output in step S842 of FIG. 151 in the forty-third embodiment. FIG. 400 shows example 1 of the flowchart following FIG. FIG. 400 shows example 2 of the flowchart following FIG. FIG. 32 is a diagram showing an example in which three reels (main reels) can be seen through the display window (glass plate) in the forty-fourth embodiment; This is an example in which a reel viewing area is formed within the area of the image display device. FIG. 32 is a diagram showing an example corresponding to a video reel in the forty-fourth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 32 is a diagram showing an example corresponding to a video reel in the forty-fourth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 32 is a diagram showing an example corresponding to a video reel in the forty-fourth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 32 is a diagram showing an example that does not correspond to a video reel in the forty-fourth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 32 is a diagram showing an example that does not correspond to a video reel in the forty-fourth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 32 is a diagram showing example 1 of a sub-reel (there is a risk of misrecognition) in the forty-fourth embodiment; FIG. 32 is a diagram showing example 2 of a sub-reel (there is a risk of misrecognition) in the forty-fourth embodiment; FIG. 22 is a diagram showing example 3 of a sub-reel (there is a risk of misrecognition) in the forty-fourth embodiment; FIG. 32 is a diagram showing example 4 of a sub-reel (no risk of misrecognition) in the forty-fourth embodiment; FIG. 32 is a diagram showing example 5 of a sub-reel (no risk of misrecognition) in the forty-fourth embodiment; It is a front view of the pachinko game machine in the 45th embodiment. It is an external perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine in the forty-fifth embodiment as seen from the front side (player side). FIG. 20 is a front view of the right base member with the upper frame lamp cover and the right frame lamp cover removed, according to the forty-fifth embodiment; FIG. 20 is a right side perspective view of the right base member with the upper frame lamp cover and the right frame lamp cover removed, according to the forty-fifth embodiment; FIG. 30 is a rear view of the right base member with the upper frame lamp cover and the right frame lamp cover removed, according to the forty-fifth embodiment; FIG. 20 is an enlarged front top view of the right base member with the upper frame lamp cover and the right frame lamp cover removed in the forty-fifth embodiment; FIG. 20 is an upper enlarged perspective view of the right base member, viewed from the left side, with the upper frame lamp cover and the right frame lamp cover removed, according to the forty-fifth embodiment; FIG. 20 is an enlarged view of the upper left side surface of the right base member with the upper frame lamp cover and the right frame lamp cover removed, according to the forty-fifth embodiment; FIG. 32 is an enlarged top bottom view of the right base member with the upper frame lamp cover removed in the forty-fifth embodiment; FIG. 421 is an enlarged cross-sectional view taken along line AA of FIG. 420; 117 is a front view of the right base member with the upper frame lamp cover, the upper portion of the right frame lamp cover, and the right frame lamp substrate removed in the forty-fifth embodiment, and is a view corresponding to FIG. 116; FIG. FIG. 20 is an enlarged rear view of the right base member with the upper frame lamp cover removed and the right frame lamp cover attached in the forty-fifth embodiment; FIG. 32 is an enlarged cross-sectional view of the lens portion of the right frame lamp cover in the forty-fifth embodiment; In the forty-fifth embodiment, (a) is a time chart showing effect pattern 1 when losing in the pachinko game machine, and (b) is a time chart showing effect pattern 2 when losing in the pachinko game machine. FIG. 20 is a diagram for explaining substantially the same color using a chromaticity diagram according to the CIE standard color system in the forty-fifth embodiment; FIG. 20 is a diagram illustrating similar colors using a chromaticity diagram according to the CIE standard color system in the forty-fifth embodiment; FIG. 424 is a view showing a modification of the AA cross section of FIG. 420 and corresponding to FIG. 424; FIG. 32 is an external perspective view of a slot machine in a modified example of the forty-fifth embodiment, viewed from the front side (player's side); In the modification of the forty-fifth embodiment, (a) is a time chart showing effect pattern 1 when the slot machine does not win, and (b) is a time chart showing effect pattern 2 when the slot machine does not win. is.

In this specification, the meanings of terms are as follows.
A “bet” is a bet of medals (game media) to play a game. To bet medals, the actual medals are inserted from the medal slot 47, or the bet switch 40 is operated to bet credited (stored) medals.
On the other hand, "credit (also referred to as "reservation")" is different from the above-described "bet" and refers to the accumulation of medals inside the slot machine 10 . As used herein, the term "credit" does not include "bet."
Furthermore, "throwing in" refers to betting or crediting medals.
Also, the “specified number” refers to the number of bets that can be started (executed) in the game. For example, in a game with a prescribed number of "2" or "3", the game can be started with either the bet number of "2" or "3", and the game cannot be played with the bet number of "1".
For convenience of explanation, the "specified number" may also be referred to as the "bet number".
On the other hand, the term "number of bets" may refer to anything other than the "specified number". For example, in a game with a prescribed number of "2" or "3", the bet number is "1" (the bet number at that time) when one medal is inserted (before the game starts).

“Maintenance” means that the player inserts medals from the medal insertion slot 47 (described later).
“Handling bet” means that the player bets on medals by handing over the medals from the medal slot 47 .
“Cleaning credit” means that the player credits medals (adding credits) by cleaning the medals from the medal slot 47 .
“Bet medals” means the medals that are bet on.
“Reserved Medals” means Medals that are credited (reserved).

A "reserved bet" is a bet that a player operates a bet switch 40 (described later) to bet part or all of the credited medals within the range that can be betted in the game in order to play the game. It means to
“Automatic bet” means that the number of medals that were betted in the previous game is automatically betted by the control processing of the slot machine 10 when the replay wins.
Here, when the symbol combination corresponding to the small combination has been stopped and displayed (meaning that the symbol combination has stopped on the active line; the same shall apply hereinafter), this is referred to as "winning a small combination". On the other hand, in the "Regulations Concerning Approval and Type Examination of Gaming Machines (hereinafter simply referred to as "rules")", when the symbol combination corresponding to replaying is stopped and displayed, the conditional device for replaying is activated. are interpreted as not “winning”. However, in the present application (this specification, etc.), replay is also treated as one of the combinations (replay combination), and stop display of the symbol combination corresponding to replay may be referred to as "replay win".
“Settlement” means paying out bet medals and/or accumulated medals to a player. In this embodiment, the settlement process is executed when the settlement switch 43 (described later) is operated.

“Payout” refers to paying out medals to a player based on winning a winning combination or paying out medals through the above settlement. When paying out medals to the player based on winning a role, the medals are stored as credits (adding the stored medals, in other words, updating the electronic data stored in the RWM 53 (described later)) and paying out the medals. This includes both dispensing actual medals from a mouth (not shown). The payout of medals is controlled such that, for example, "50" is credited as the limit number of medals, and medals exceeding the credit number of "50" are actually paid out to the player.
Note that "payout" may also be referred to as "grant". Therefore, the "number of payouts" may also be referred to as the "number of awards."

The "game medium" is medals in this embodiment, but electronic information (electronic medals, electronic data) is used as the game medium in the case of, for example, an enclosed (ECO) gaming machine. It should be noted that "electronic information" means that, for example, when money (banknotes) is inserted into a lending machine, it is converted into electronic information corresponding to the money, and part or all of the electronic information is used to play a game on a game machine. It is possible to credit the game machine as a game medium for performing.
Note that the "game medium" may also be referred to as "game value".

Further, when the game medium is electronic information, "payout of medals" means crediting (adding) to a game medium credit device provided in the gaming machine. Therefore, "payout of medals" does not mean only that the medals are actually paid out from the hopper 35 (described later). addition) is also included.

``N-1'' game, ``N'' game, ``N+1'' game, . When it is a number, the game of the "N"th game is called "this time game". Also, the game of the "N-1"th game is referred to as the "previous game". Furthermore, the game of the "N+1"th game is referred to as the "next game".

In this specification, numbers with "(B)" at the end of numbers (especially 8 bits) mean binary numbers. Similarly, numbers with "(H)", "H" or "h" at the end of the numbers mean hexadecimal numbers. Specifically, for example, a numeric value indicating "16" in decimal is expressed as "00010000(B)" in binary and as "10(H)", "10H" or "10h" in hexadecimal. . Numerical values representing decimal numbers are written as "16(D)" as necessary.
However, when it is clear whether it is a binary number, a decimal number, or a hexadecimal number, "(B)", "(D)", "(H)", "H" or "h" The trailing sign may be omitted.

The "operation mode" of the stop switch 42 means the pressing order of the stop switch 42 and/or the operation timing (timing of pressing the stop switch for stopping the target symbol on the activated line).
In addition, the "advantageous operation mode" of the stop switch 42 means that in a game in which the game result (symbol combination that stops on the active line) is advantageous/disadvantageous depending on the operation mode of the stop switch 42, there is a payout or a large number of payouts. An operation mode in which a symbol combination stops, an operation mode in which a symbol combination that shifts (promotes) to an advantageous RT stops, or an operation mode in which a symbol combination that does not shift (falls) to a disadvantageous RT stops. The "advantageous operation mode" is also called a correct operation mode or a correct pressing order.

"A game in which the game result is advantageous/disadvantageous depending on the operation mode of the stop switch 42" is, for example, a game in which one of the winning numbers "3" to "8" shown in FIG. game). Also, although not shown in FIG. 58, for example, in a game in which multiple types of replays have been won (when duplicate replays have been won; a game in which a so-called "push order replay" has been won), the RT may be shifted depending on the type of replay won. is also equivalent.

The “instruction function” means a function of instructing the player how to operate the stop switch 42 . The instruction function is, in principle, a function of instructing the player on an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch 42 .
In other words, "instruction function" refers to a device that facilitates winning.
It should be noted that "display" is to show the content of the "instruction" in a visible manner, and "notification" is to notify the player of the content of the instruction. Therefore, the "instruction function" is both a "display function" and a "notification function".

Further, there is a possibility that notification of the operation mode of the stop switch 42 is not limited to notification of the most advantageous operation mode. The notification of the operation mode of the stop switch 42 that is most advantageous may be the "activation of the instruction function", but the notification of any operation mode including the operation mode of the stop switch 42 that is most advantageous is the "operation of the instruction function". It may also be referred to as "activation".
For example, if the pressing order bell shown in winning numbers "3" to "8" in FIG. 1, but instead assume that you get either 1, 3, 4, 10, or a dropout (no win), depending on the order of pushing.
Here, informing of the pressing order for winning the 10-card combination is informing of an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch 42, and of course corresponds to "activation of the instruction function".
On the other hand, the notification of the pushing order for winning the one-hand, three-hand, or four-hand, may be regarded as "notification of advantageous operation mode (operation of instruction function)", and "advantageous operation mode It does not have to be "notification of

The pushing order for winning the 4-card hand is the pushing order for not winning the 10-card hand, so it is not the most advantageous operation mode. However, the number of payouts is "4" for the number of bets of "3", and the number of difference in the game is "+1".
Similarly, the pushing order for winning the 3-card hand is not the most advantageous operation mode because it is the pushing order for not winning the 10-card hand. However, since the number of payouts is "3" for the number of bets of "3" and the difference number is maintained at the current state (the difference number is not decreased), it is not necessarily a disadvantageous operation mode.

Furthermore, similarly, the pushing order for winning a winning combination of 1 is not the most advantageous operation mode because it is a pushing order that does not win a winning combination of 10 cards. Further, in this operation mode, the number of payouts is "1" for the number of bets of "3", and the difference number is reduced. However, since it can be said that it is an operation mode that does not miss a role, it may not be said to be a disadvantageous operation mode.

In the present embodiment, when the pressing order bell is won, the operating mode (correct pressing order) in which the winning combination with the largest number of payouts wins is reported.
However, for example, when the difference counter value (described later) in the advantageous section approaches the upper limit value ("2400 (D)"), but the number of remaining games in the advantageous section (advantageous section clear counter value described later) has a margin. , when winning the push order bell, it is conceivable to notify the pushing order for winning, for example, a 3-card hand or a 4-card hand as described above, and to control the difference counter value to maintain the current state.

Also, in this embodiment, the activation of the pointing function is limited to one defined number. For example, assume that the specified number for activating the pointing function is set to "3". In this case, in a game with a prescribed number of "2" or "3" in AT, when the game is started with the bet number of "3" and the pushing order bell is won, the instruction function can be activated. On the other hand, when the game is started with the number of bets "2", the instruction function cannot be operated even if the winning order bell is won.

The "game section" includes a "normal section (non-advantageous section)" and an "advantageous section". In addition, the 5.9 machine had a "waiting section" (a game section that was won in the advantageous section lottery but has not yet moved to the advantageous section), but the current regulations for the 6 machine do not include "waiting section" etc. is not provided. However, it is not limited to this, and game sections other than the normal section and the advantageous section may be provided.
"Normal section" means that a signal related to the instruction function, specifically, a pushing order instruction number and a winning and replay condition device number (information that can determine the correct pushing order), which will be described later, is sent to a peripheral board (for example, the sub-control board 80). ) and has no effect on performance related to the instruction function (no processing related to the instruction function is executed). In other words, the normal section is a game section in which the operation mode cannot be notified. However, in addition to the lottery for the role, it is possible to determine whether or not to move to the advantageous section (lottery etc.).

Since the instruction function must not be activated in the normal section, the pressing order instruction information cannot be displayed on a predetermined display device (such as an LED) electrically connected to the main control board 60, and the instruction function cannot be displayed. Therefore, the image display device 23 electrically connected to the sub-control board 80 cannot display (notify) an advantageous operation mode.

On the other hand, the "advantageous section" is a game section having performance related to the instruction function (in which the instruction function may be operated). It refers to a game section in which a signal relating to the instruction function can be transmitted to the sub-control board 80 only when the push order instruction information is displayed so that the content (operation mode of the stop switch 42) can be identified. In other words, the advantageous section is a game section in which the instruction function can be operated (the instruction function may be operated), that is, a game section in which the operation mode of the stop switch 42 can be displayed (may be displayed).
However, the sub-control board 80 cannot output an effect that contradicts the content of the instruction given by the main control board 60 or the received signal related to the instruction function.

In addition, even if the advantageous section is a game in which the game result is advantageous/disadvantageous depending on the operation mode of the stop switch 42, the instruction function does not need to be activated.
On the other hand, during the advantageous section, in a game where the game result is advantageous/disadvantageous depending on the operation mode of the stop switch 42, the instruction function may always be operated to display the operation mode of the stop switch 42.
AT (notification game state) is a game state in which the operation mode of the stop switch 42 is notified in a game in which the game result is advantageous/disadvantageous depending on the operation mode of the stop switch 42 . Therefore, AT is always in the advantageous interval and AT is never executed in the non-advantageous interval.

In addition, in a game in which the game result is advantageous/disadvantageous depending on the operation mode of the stop switch 42, the AT may always notify the operation mode of the stop switch 42 (at 100%), but the ball output rate in a predetermined period It is conceivable not to notify the operation mode of the stop switch 42 even in a game in which the game result is advantageous/disadvantageous depending on the operation mode of the stop switch 42 in order to keep the game within the range defined by the rules.
For example, when the upper limit value of the difference number counter is approached during AT, but the number of AT games still remains, the operation mode of the stop switch 42 is temporarily not reported from the viewpoint of extending the life of the AT. (not activating the indicating function) is also conceivable.

In addition, various settings can be made for the relationship between the advantageous section and the AT. For example, the first method is to set “advantageous section=AT”. In this case, winning the advantageous section and winning the AT are equivalent. Then, AT is started from the first game in the advantageous section. Also, the AT ends when the advantageous section ends.

Secondly, it is possible to set "AT≠advantageous section".
In this case, the AT start (execution) condition is not satisfied just by moving to the advantageous section. When it is decided to execute, the AT is executed until a predetermined termination condition of the AT is satisfied. In addition, when it is non-AT when shifting to the advantageous section, for example, the main game state may be set to normal section, omen, CZ (chance zone (a period in which AT is likely to win)) or the like.

When shifting to the sign after shifting to the advantageous section, the game may be shifted to the main sign without fail, and after the predetermined number of games of the main sign is completed, the game may be shifted to AT. Alternatively, at the time of transition to the advantageous section or after the transition to the advantageous section, it may be determined by lottery or the like whether it is a real omen or a false omen, and when it is determined to be a real omen, it may be shifted to AT after the main omen is completed. . Further, when it is determined to be a false precursor, after the false precursor ends, the advantageous section may be maintained, or the section may be shifted to the normal section.
Furthermore, both the AT and the advantageous section may be terminated when the AT termination condition is satisfied. Alternatively, although the AT ends, if the conditions for ending the advantageous section are not satisfied, the advantageous section may be continued (non-AT and advantageous section). The same applies when AT is started at the same time as the advantageous section.

Further, the number of times of playing the advantageous section is determined when the advantageous section is started, and a lottery or the like regarding the advantageous section is not executed during the advantageous section.
Furthermore, when starting the advantageous section, the initial number of games in the advantageous section is determined, and during the advantageous section, it is decided (lottery, etc.) whether or not to add (add) the (remaining) number of games in the advantageous section. Things are mentioned.
Furthermore, a predetermined termination condition is set for the advantageous section, and when the predetermined termination condition for the advantageous section is satisfied, even if there is a remaining number of games in the advantageous section (or remaining number of AT games), at that point Ending the advantageous section with

Here, the “predetermined condition for ending the advantageous interval” means that the difference counter value (to be described later) exceeds “2400 (D)” or the advantageous interval clear counter (to be described later) (the number of games played during the advantageous interval) is “ 1500 (D)”. When any one of these conditions is satisfied, it is determined that the termination condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, and the next game is shifted to the normal section (non-advantageous section). In this case, even if the final game is AT, the AT ends at the same time as the advantageous section ends.

In an advantageous section, an advantageous section display LED (also referred to as a "section indicator") 77, which will be described later, is lit. The advantageous section display LED 77 may be always lit during the advantageous section, or may be illuminated when a predetermined lighting condition is satisfied after shifting to the advantageous section.
Here, the "predetermined lighting condition" is, for example, when the instruction function is operated in a game state in which the area Sim is in an advantageous area and the area Sim ball-out rate exceeds "1". It should be noted that once the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on, the lighting is maintained during the advantageous section.

In addition, the "interval Sim (simulation) ball payout rate" means that the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is always stopped and displayed (even if the combination of "PB ≠ 1" is won, the symbols corresponding to the combination is stopped), and when there are multiple types of symbol combinations corresponding to the winning combination, the symbol combination that is most advantageous to the player (when the bell is won in the order of pressing the bell, the highest payout is achieved). This is the payout rate when it is assumed that the display is stopped. The calculation of the section Sim ball-out rate does not include the number of balls (number of payouts) due to the operation of the accessory (1BB operation, etc.). In addition, in the game winning the replay, when the number of bets is "3", the number of payouts is counted as "0", and in the replay based on the winning of the replay (the next game of the game winning the replay), the number of bets It is calculated as "0" and the number of payouts "x"("x" is the number of payouts in the game). Alternatively, the number of payouts for the game winning the replay and the number of bets for the next game may not be counted.
Furthermore, the “game state in which the interval Sim ball-out rate exceeds “1”” includes RT and the main game state in which the interval Sim ball-out rate is set to exceed “1”.
Here, RTs with a section Sim payout rate exceeding "1" include, for example, RTs with a high replay winning probability.
Assuming that CZ (chance zone), AT, pullback section, etc. are usually provided as the main game state, AT can be mentioned as the main game state in which the section Sim ball-out rate exceeds "1".

When the advantageous interval ends, more specifically, in the final game of the advantageous interval, the advantageous interval display LED 77 is extinguished during, for example, a game end check process, which will be described later, or a game start setting process in the next game of the last game in the advantageous interval. do. When the conditions for ending the advantageous section are satisfied, the advantageous section display LED 77 is extinguished in subsequent interrupt processing by executing the processing for initializing the advantageous section display LED flag, which will be described later.

The “process related to the advantageous section” includes, for example, the following processes.
1) Advantageous section (transfer) lottery 2) Advantageous section clear counter update (subtraction, clear)
3) Updating the difference counter (calculation, clearing)
4) Update of advantageous section type flag 5) Control of advantageous section display LED 77 (update of advantageous section display LED flag)

Also, the “processing related to the instruction function” includes, for example, the following processing.
1) Display of push order instruction information (activation of instruction function)
2) AT lottery 3) In the case of a game number management type AT (specification that ends AT when the number of remaining games becomes "0"), updating the AT game number counter (subtraction, addition, clearing)
4) In the case of the difference number management type AT (specification that ends AT when the remaining difference number becomes "0"), updating the AT difference number counter (subtraction, addition, clearing)

According to the current rules, both the processing related to the advantageous section and the processing related to the instruction function can be executed in one prescribed number in one gaming state (RT), except for the following. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the specified number "3" enables execution of the processing related to the advantageous section and the processing related to the instruction function, and the specified number "2" makes it impossible to execute the processing related to the advantageous section and the processing related to the instruction function. and
However, during the advantageous interval, it is necessary to update the advantageous interval clear counter and update the difference number counter regardless of the specified number.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the combination lottery result is non-winning (for example, when the winning number is "0" in FIGS. 26 and 58, which will be described later), in other words, in the game when the conditional device is not activated, It is decided not to execute the processing related to the advantageous section (advantageous section transition lottery). However, this is not the only option, and the processing relating to the advantageous section may be executed even if the combination lottery result is non-winning.
On the other hand, in the present embodiment, even if the result of the winning lottery is non-winning, if the probability of non-winning is a predetermined value or more (when the probability is not extremely low, for example, "1/17500" or more), the instruction function Processing (AT lottery processing) can be executed.

Furthermore, as a result of executing the advantageous zone transition lottery (processing related to the advantageous zone), when the advantageous zone transition lottery is won, the next game will be the advantageous zone. Therefore, it is not possible to execute the advantageous zone transition lottery (process related to the advantageous zone) and execute the correct pressing order (process related to the instruction function) in the game in which the advantageous zone is won.
However, it is permissible to perform the advantageous zone transition lottery (process related to the advantageous zone) and the AT lottery (process related to the instruction function) in one game. Furthermore, for example, when a specific combination lottery result is obtained, the advantageous section and AT may be determined (without executing the lottery).

The management information display LED (also called "role ratio monitor" or "ratio indicator") 74 consists of four LEDs, for example, as shown in FIG. LED for displaying which item among the items by a predetermined symbol or the like) and a two-digit ratio segment (LED for displaying the calculated ratio).

The management information display LED 74 repeatedly displays the ratio of the following five items 1) to 5) at predetermined time intervals.
1) Either the advantageous section ratio (cumulative) (7U.) or the instructed accessory ratio (cumulative) (7P.) 2) Continuous accessory ratio (6000 games) (6y.)
3) Accessory ratio (6000 games) (7y.)
4) Continuous accessory ratio (cumulative) (6A.)
5) Role ratio (cumulative) (7A.)

For example, when displaying the role ratio (total), when the ratio is "50"%, the symbol "7A." indicating the role ratio (total) is displayed in the identification segment, and "50" is displayed. Show on ratio segment.
Here, "total" refers to the total sum of the numbers that have been counted up to that point, and in the present embodiment, the number of games is counted until it reaches at least "175000" games. When the total number of games is less than "175000", the ratio is displayed by, for example, blinking display, and when the total number of games is "175000" or more, the ratio is displayed by lighting display, for example. Even after the cumulative number of games reaches "175000" or more, the cumulative total continues to be added until it reaches a value (upper limit) that can be stored in a predetermined address of the RWM 53 .
Also, "6000 games" is the total number of games played for 15 sets of "400" games for one set.

The “advantageous section ratio” refers to the ratio (proportion) of staying in the advantageous section to the total game section (non-advantageous section + advantageous section). Specifically, for example, when the number of games played in all game sections is "1000" and the number of games played in the advantageous section therebetween is "700", the advantageous section ratio is "70%".
Further, the "instruction-inclusive role ratio" is a value obtained by dividing the sum of the number of payouts when the role is activated and the number of payouts in the game in which the instruction function is activated, by the total number of payouts. In the case of a slot machine in which no role is installed, the "indicated role ratio" is a value obtained by dividing the number of payouts in the game in which the instruction function is activated by the total number of payouts.
The sum total of the number of payouts at the time of operating the role and the number of payouts in the game in which the instruction function is operated is counted by the instruction-inclusive role-thing counter.

Furthermore, the "number of payouts in the game in which the instruction function is activated" is based on the operation of the stop switch 42 according to the pressing order displayed by the operation of the instruction function, for example, the winning number " When 10 bells from 3 to 8 are won, 10 is added to the instructed accessory counter.
On the other hand, in the game in which the instruction function is activated, when one bell in the example of FIG. "1" is added to
Similarly, in the game in which the instruction function is activated, if the stop switch 42 is operated in an order different from the displayed order of pushes, and thus the winning combination is missed (when the combination is not won), the indicated role counter is not added to In other words, the count value in the previous game remains unchanged.

In the example of FIG. 26, which will be described later, when the common bell (winning number "3") is won during AT, the instruction function is activated in the same way as when the winning order of the bell is won, and the winning number display LED 78 is pressed. There are a case where forward instruction information (dummy) is displayed and a case where the instruction function is not activated. When the instruction function is activated when the common bell is won, the number of payouts in the game is added to the instruction-included accessory counter.

On the other hand, when the common bell is won and the instruction function is not activated, the number of payouts in the game is not added to the instruction-included accessory counter. However, the total number of payouts is added to the counter. In this case, the sub-control board 80 may notify the correct key pressing order by image or sound.

"Continuous bonus ratio" refers to the ratio of the number of payouts at the time of activation of the first class special bonus (RB) to the total number of payouts. Therefore, in this embodiment, it refers to "the number of payouts during 1BB operation with respect to the total number of payouts".
For example, when the total number of payouts for the number of games played is "6000" and the total number of payouts is "2000", and the number of payouts when the "first class special bonus (RB)" is activated is "500", the "continuous bonus Ratio (6000 games)” becomes “25 (%)”.

Further, the "accessory ratio" refers to the ratio of the number of payouts at the time of activation of the accessory to the total number of payouts. Here, the "accessories" include, in addition to the above-mentioned first class special accessories, second-class special accessories (CB) and MB (also called 2BB). is continuous operation.), SB (single bonus) is included.
In addition, in the above five items, if the game machine does not have the function corresponding to the item, the ratio segment is lit and displayed as "--".
For example, if "RB (first class special role)" is not provided, there is no continuous role ratio, so when ratio display numbers "2" and "4" are displayed, the ratio segment is set to "-- ” lights up.
As described above, five types of ratios are displayed on the management information display LED 74. However, as shown in FIGS. do.

In addition, it is stipulated by regulation that the advantageous section ratio and the instructed accessory ratio should be 70% or less. Further, it is stated that the role product ratio should be 70% or less, and it is stipulated that the continuous role product ratio should be 60% or less.
Therefore, by looking at the information displayed on the management information display LED 74, it is possible to confirm whether or not the information is within the legal range.

Note that a game machine with a specification of 70% or less advantageous section ratio is called a "7U" type, and a game machine with a specification of 70% or less instruction-inclusive role ratio is called a "7P" type. A game machine having an advantageous section is either a "7U" type or a "7P" type. In the case of the "7U" type, the advantageous section ratio (total) is displayed on the management information display LED 74, and in the case of the "7P" type, the instructed accessory ratio (total) is displayed.
In the '7U' type, the ratio of the advantageous section to the total game section should be '70'% or less, but in the '7P' type, the total number of payouts due to the operation of the instruction function and the operation of the accessory is The number of payouts may be 70% or less, and for example, the entire period or most of the game sections may be advantageous sections.

For example, when moving to a non-advantageous section, set so that you will win the advantageous section lottery with a probability of 100%, and set it so that you will win the advantageous section lottery with a probability of almost 100% (for example, about 98%). Alternatively, it may be set so that the advantageous section lottery is won with a high probability (for example, 70%).
The "7U" type cannot refer to the setting value itself to perform processing related to the instruction function (for example, AT lottery), but the "7P" type refers to the setting value itself and performs processing related to the instruction function. Is possible.
In the twelfth embodiment, which will be described later, most of the inside of the BB2 is in an advantageous section, and a lottery is conducted to determine whether or not AT is to be executed in this advantageous section.

Also, the management information display LED 74 can be applied to a pachinko game machine as a performance display monitor.
In this case, the management information display LED 74 (performance display monitor) is composed of a two-digit identification segment and a two-digit ratio segment, as in the case of the slot machine (rotary game machine). Then, the real-time (measured) base value for every 60,000 out balls (the 'base value' indicates how many safe balls are out of 100 out balls), and 60,000 ”, the base values of 1, 2, and 3 times before are displayed in sequence. For example, the identification seg of the real-time base value is displayed as "bL.", the identification seg of the previous base value is displayed as "b1." is displayed, and the identification segment of the base value three times before is displayed as "b3.".
In this way, the management information display LED 74 is applied not only to slot machines but also to pachinko game machines among game machines.

An embodiment of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings and the like.
FIG. 1 is a block diagram showing an outline of control of a slot machine 10, which is an example of a game machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 1 is a block diagram common to the first to fifth embodiments.
A main control board 50 and a sub-control board 80 are provided as representative control boards provided in the slot machine 10 .
The main control board 50 has an input port 51 and an output port 52, and is equipped with an RWM 53, a ROM 54, a main CPU 55, and the like (not meant to include only those shown in FIG. 1). The appearance of the main control board 50 and how the main control board 50 is housed in the board case 56 will be described in the second embodiment (FIGS. 9 and 10).

In FIG. 1 , a main control board 50 and peripheral devices for game progress including operation switches such as the bet switch 40 are electrically connected via an input port 51 or an output port 52 . The input port 51 is a connection portion for inputting a signal such as an operation switch, and the output port 52 is a connection portion for transmitting a signal to a peripheral device such as the motor 32 .
In FIG. 1, input peripherals are indicated by arrows from which signals from the peripherals are directed to the main control board 50, and output peripherals are indicated by arrows from the main control board 50 to the peripherals. (The same applies to the sub-control board 80).

The RWM 53 is a storage medium capable of storing (updating) various data (variables) based on game progress and the like.
The ROM 54 is a storage medium for storing programs and various data (for example, data table) necessary for progressing the game.
The main CPU 55 refers to a CPU (an IC having a calculation function) provided on the main control board 50, and executes a program necessary for the progress of the game, performs calculations, etc. , and payout at the time of winning.

Further, on the main control board 50, an RWM 53, a ROM 54, a main CPU 55 and an MPU including registers are mounted. Note that the RWM 53 and ROM 54 may be provided externally in addition to being mounted inside the MPU.
An MPU including the RWM 83, the ROM 84, and the sub CPU 85 is also mounted on the sub control board 80, which will be described later. It should be noted that the RWM 83 and ROM 84 may be provided externally instead of being mounted inside the MPU.

In FIG. 1, the medal inserted from the medal slot 47 is sent inside the medal selector.
The movement of medals inserted from the medal slot 47 within the medal selector will be described later with reference to FIG. 2 and the like.
As shown in FIG. 1, the medal selector is provided with a path sensor 46, a blocker 45, and an insertion sensor 44 (a pair of insertion sensors 44a and 44b) (but not limited to these). These are electrically connected to the main control board 50 .
A medal inserted from the medal slot 47 is first detected by the path sensor 46 .

Furthermore, a blocker 45 is provided downstream of the passage sensor 46 . The blocker 45 permits/disallows insertion of medals, and when the insertion of medals is not permitted, forms a medal passage for returning the medals inserted from the medal insertion port 47 from the payout port. do. On the other hand, when the insertion of medals is allowed, a medal passage is formed to guide the medals inserted from the medal insertion port 47 to the hopper 35 . The blocker 45 is, for example, a switching member that forms a medal passage for guiding medals to the hopper 35 side by closing an opening (opening leading to a medal return opening) formed in a part of the medal passage in the medal selector. and an actuator for driving the switching member.

Here, the blocker 45 prohibits the insertion of medals during the game (from the start of rotation of the reels 31 until all the reels 31 stop, and when the payout corresponding to the winning combination ends). do. That is, the blocker 45 permits insertion of medals at least when no game is played.

Further downstream of the blocker 45 in the medal selector, an insertion sensor (optical sensor) 44 is provided. The insertion sensor 44 is composed of a pair of insertion sensors 44a and 44b arranged at a predetermined distance in this embodiment. is configured to be detected by Then, based on the timing at which the pair of insertion sensors 44 are turned on/off, it is determined whether or not the correct medals have been inserted.

Further, as shown in FIG. 1, the main control board 50 includes, as operation switches operated by the player, a bet switch 40 (40a or 40b), a start switch 41, a (left, middle, right) stop switch 42, and a A settlement switch 43 is electrically connected.
Here, the "operation switch (or simply "switch")" is based on the operation of the operation body by the player (operator) (receiving external force) to switch on / off of the electric signal. It refers to a device (including electric circuits and/or electric parts), and does not limit the shape of an operating body operated by a player.

When the operation switch is in the off state, for example, light from the light emitting element continues to enter the light receiving element (while the light receiving element continues to detect light, the operation switch is in the off state). When the player or the like operates the operation switch (the operation body of the operation switch), the light from the light emitting element does not enter the light receiving element. When this state is detected, an electrical signal is sent to the main control board 50 indicating that the operation switch is turned on. Contrary to the above, when the operation switch is in the off state, the light from the light emitting element does not enter the light receiving element, and when the light from the light emitting element enters the light receiving element, the light is turned on. You may

In the present embodiment, the operating body of the start switch 41 is a lever (bar) shape (therefore also referred to as "start lever (switch) 41"), and includes a bed switch 40, a stop switch 42, and an adjustment switch. The operation body 43 is in the shape of a push button (thus, it is also called "bet button (switch) 40", "stop button (switch) 42", and "settlement button (switch) 43"). In addition, in the fourth embodiment described later, the operation body of the stop switch 42 (the part that the player presses) is called a "stop button 42a".

Although not shown in FIG. 1, an LED (light emitting means) is provided on the operation body of the operation switch and/or around or near it. When the operation of the operation switch is permitted, for example, an LED or the like corresponding to the operation switch emits blue light. By emitting red light from an LED or the like, the permission/non-permission state of the operation switch is indicated to the player.

Specifically, for example, when all the reels 31 are rotating and the operation of the stop switch 42 can be accepted, the LEDs of all the stop switches 42 emit blue light to notify the player that the operation is possible. shown in When one stop switch 42 is operated, the reel 31 corresponding to the operated stop switch 42 is controlled to be stopped. After that, the rest of the stop switches 42 become operable only when the excitation state of the motor 32 corresponding to the reel 31 controlled to stop is terminated and the detection sensor 42e (4th sensor 42e to be described later) of the operated stop switch 42 is terminated. embodiment) is turned off. Therefore, during that time, the LEDs of all the stop switches 42 emit red light. When the excitation state of the motor 32 corresponding to the operated stop switch 42 ends and the detection sensor 42e corresponding to that stop switch 42 is turned off, the LED of the already operated stop switch 42 is turned off. The LEDs of the stop switches 42 that have not yet been operated, while still emitting red light, are caused to emit blue light.

The bet switch 40 is an operation switch operated by the player when betting the accumulated medals for the current game. In this embodiment, a 1-bet switch 40a for inserting one medal and a 3-bet switch 40b for inserting three (maximum number, specified number) medals are provided.
A bet switch for betting two cards may be provided without being limited to this.

In addition, the specified number is determined in advance depending on, for example, when the accessory is not activated/when the accessory is activated. Concretely, it is set such that when the accessory is not activated, when the SB is activated, when the 1BB is activated, there are 3 sheets, and when the 2BB is activated, there are 2 sheets. Two medals can be inserted by operating the 1-bet switch 40a twice, and three medals can be inserted by operating it three times. Also, when the prescribed number is 3, operating the 3-bet switch 40b allows 3 medals to be inserted at once, and when the prescribed number is 2, operating the 3-bet switch 40b. Two medals can be inserted at a time. If the 3-bet switch 40b is operated when less than the specified number has already been bet, the bet processing is performed so that the number of bets is 3.

Also, the start switch 41 is an operation switch that is operated by the player when starting the reels 31 (all of the left, middle and right reels).
Furthermore, three stop switches 42 are provided corresponding to the three (left, middle, and right) reels 31, and are operation switches operated by the player when the corresponding reels 31 are to be stopped.
Further, the settlement switch 43 is an operation switch operated by the player when paying out (paying out) the medals betted and/or stored (credited) inside the slot machine 10 .

Further, as shown in FIG. 1, a display substrate 75 is electrically connected to the main control substrate 50 . In practice, a relay board is provided between the main control board 50 and the display board 75, and the main control board 50 and the relay board, and the relay board and the display board 75 are connected. 1, illustration of the relay board is omitted. As described above, the main control board 50 and the display board 75 may be directly connected by a harness or the like, but another board may be interposed between them.
Further, the control boards are not limited to being directly connected to each other by a harness or the like, but may be connected via another board (relay board or the like). For example, one or more other boards (relay boards, etc.) may be interposed between the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 .

The display substrate 75 is mounted with a credit number display LED 76 and an acquired number display LED 78 .
The credit number display LED 76 is an LED for displaying the number of medals accumulated (credited) inside the slot machine 10, and is composed of two digits, upper digits and lower digits.

The winning number display LED 78 is an LED that displays the payout number (the player's winning number) when a winning combination is won, and is composed of upper and lower digits, similar to the credit number display LED 76. .
Note that the acquired number display LED 78 may be controlled to be extinguished when there are no medals to be paid out. Alternatively, the upper digits may be turned off and only the lower digits may be displayed as "0".

Also, the acquisition number display LED 78 normally displays the acquisition number, but functions as an LED that displays the content (type) of the error when an error occurs.
Furthermore, the acquired number display LED 78 functions as an LED for displaying pressing order instruction information (notifying an advantageous pressing order) in a game that notifies the pressing order during AT. Therefore, the acquired number display LED 78 in the present embodiment is an LED that also displays the acquired number, the error content, and the pressing order instruction information. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is of course possible to provide a dedicated LED or the like for displaying the pressing order instruction information.
It should be noted that, during AT, notification of an advantageous pressing order is also performed by the image display device 23 connected to the sub-control board 80 .

In FIG. 1, a main control board 50 is electrically connected to a motor (a stepping motor in this embodiment) 32 and the like of the pattern display device.
The symbol display device includes (three in this embodiment) reels 31 that display symbols, motors 32 that drive the respective reels 31 , and reel sensors 33 that detect the positions of the reels 31 .

The motor 32 serves as driving means for rotating the reels 31, is connected to the center of rotation of each reel 31, and is controlled by reel control means 65, which will be described later. Here, the reel 31 is composed of a left reel 31, a middle reel 31, and a right reel 31. A stop switch 42 operated when the left reel 31 is stopped is the left stop switch 42, and when the middle reel 31 is stopped, a stop switch 42 is operated. The stop switch 42 to be operated is the middle stop switch 42 , and the stop switch 42 to be operated when stopping the right reel 31 is the right stop switch 42 .

The reel 31 is ring-shaped, and a reel tape on which a plurality of kinds of patterns (symbols constituting a combination of patterns corresponding to a role) are printed is attached to the outer peripheral surface of the reel 31 .
Also, each reel 31 is provided with one (or two or more) index. The index is provided, for example, in a convex shape on the peripheral side surface of the reel 31, and is used when detecting whether or not the reel 31 has passed a predetermined position, whether or not it has made one revolution, and the like. Each index is detected by the reel sensor 33 . A signal from the reel sensor 33 is electrically connected to the main control board 50 . Then, when the index detects (turns off) the reel sensor 33, the input signal is input to the main control board 50, and it is detected that the reel 31 has passed a predetermined position.

In addition, the symbols on the reference position at the instant when the reel sensor 33 detects the index of the reel 31 are stored in the ROM 54 in advance. As a result, it is possible to detect the pattern on the reference position at the moment the index is detected. Furthermore, from the moment when the reel sensor 33 detects the index of the reel 31, by how many pulses the (stepping) motor 32 is driven, the symbol counted from the symbol on the reference position can be stopped on the effective line. can be identified.

A medal payout device is electrically connected to the main control board 50 . The medal payout device includes a hopper 35 for storing medals, a hopper motor 36 driven when the medals of the hopper 35 are paid out from the payout port, and a payout for detecting the paid out medals from the hopper motor 36. A sensor 37 is provided.

The medals that have been cleaned and accepted (determined to be normal) from the medal slot 47 are formed to be accommodated in the hopper 35 .
The payout sensor (optical sensor) 37 consists of a pair of payout sensors 37a and 37b arranged at a predetermined distance in this embodiment. Then, when medals are paid out, the predetermined moving member (movable piece 39a in FIG. 7 to be described later) is moved by the medals. The payout sensors 37a and 37b are turned on/off by movement of a predetermined moving member. Based on whether the payout sensors 37a and 37b are turned on/off within the range of the predetermined time, it is determined whether or not the medals have been correctly paid out.

For example, when it is not detected that the pair of payout sensors 37 are ON even though the hopper motor 36 is being driven, it is determined that no medals have been paid out, and a hopper error (no medals) is detected.
On the other hand, when at least one of the payout sensors 37 continues to output the ON signal, it is detected that a medal jam has occurred.
The details of these operations will be described later with reference to FIGS. 6 to 8. FIG.

When starting a game, the player inserts medals that have been credited in advance by operating the bet switch 40 (stored bet), or inserts medals from the medal insertion slot 47 (repair bet). When the start switch 41 is operated with the prescribed number of medals for the game being bet, a signal generated at that time is input to the main control board 50 . When receiving this signal, the main control board 50 (specifically, the reel control means 65 to be described later) performs a lottery by the combination lottery means 61, drives and controls all the motors 32, and rotates all the reels 31. Control to rotate. As the reels 31 are rotated by the motor 32 in this way, the symbols on the reels 31 are moved up and down within the display window at a predetermined speed.

By pressing the stop switch 42, the player stops the rotation of the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 (for example, the left reel 31 corresponding to the left stop switch 42). When the stop switch 42 is operated, a signal generated at that time is input to the main control board 50 . Upon receiving this signal, the main control board 50 (specifically, the reel control means 65, which will be described later) drives and controls the motor 32 corresponding to the stop switch 42 so that the lottery result of the combination lottery means 61 (internal lottery The stop control of the reel 31 related to the motor 32 is performed so as to correspond to the result determined by means).

Then, the game result of the current game is displayed by the combination of symbols when all the reels 31 are stopped. Furthermore, when the combination of symbols corresponding to one of the winning combinations stops on the activated line (when the winning combination is won), the payout of medals corresponding to the winning combination is performed.

Next, a specific configuration of the main control board 50 will be described.
As shown in FIG. 1, the main CPU 55 of the main control board 50 is provided with the following winning lottery means 61 and the like. Each means below in this embodiment is an example, and is not limited to the means shown in this embodiment.

The role lottery means 61 lotteries (determines and selects) winning numbers. Here, the "lottery of winning numbers by the role lottery means 61" is the same as the "internal lottery" in the regulations of the Entertainment Business Act (regulations regarding certification of gaming machines and model testing, etc.; hereinafter simply referred to as "rules"), The result of the lottery by the role lottery means 61 is the same as the "result determined by the internal lottery" in the rules. Therefore, the combination lottery means 61 is also referred to as "internal lottery means 61" in accordance with the rules.
When the winning number is determined by the combination lottery means 61, the winning and replay condition device number and the accessory condition device number are determined based on the winning number, and the winning and replay condition device becomes operable in the game, In addition, the accessory condition device is determined. Therefore, the combination lottery means 61 is also called condition device number determination (lottery or selection) means, winning combination determination (lottery or selection) means, or the like.

The combination lottery means 61 includes, for example, a lottery random number generation means (hardware random number, etc.), a random number extraction means for extracting the random number generated by the random number generation means, and a random value extracted by the random number extraction means. winning number determination means for determining a winning number.

The random number generating means generates random numbers in a predetermined range (for example, "0" to "65535" in decimal). The random number is, for example, a random number in which a counter that counts once every 200 n (nano) seconds continues to count the range of "0" to "65535" as one cycle. continue to count.

The random number extraction means extracts the random number generated by the random number generation means at a predetermined time, in this embodiment, when the start switch 41 is operated (turned on) by the player. The determination means determines the winning number corresponding to the area to which the random number belongs by collating the random number extracted by the random number extraction means with a lottery table described later.

The winning flag control means 62 controls ON/OFF of the winning flag corresponding to each winning combination based on the result of the lottery by the winning combination lottery means 61 . In this embodiment, a win flag is provided for each role for all the roles. Then, when any winning combination is won in the lottery by the combination lottery means 61, the winning flag of that combination is turned on (a winning flag is set). Note that the winning of a combination includes the case where there is one winning combination (single winning) and the case where there are multiple winning combinations (double winning).

The pressing order instruction number selection means 63 selects a pressing order instruction number (a number corresponding to the correct pressing order) based on the lottery result of the winning number by the role lottery means 61 (when the pressing order bell or the pressing order replay is won). decision).
The "pressing order" of the pressing order instruction number selected here means a pressing order (correct pressing order) that is advantageous for the player. For example, when the bell is won, it means the order of pushing the high bell (correct order of pushing). In addition, at the time of replay duplicate winning, it refers to a pushing order that promotes to an advantageous RT or a pushing order that does not fall to a disadvantageous RT.

In this embodiment, each winning number is provided with a unique pushing order instruction number.
Then, when winning the push order bell or push order replay during AT, the main control board 50 displays the above-described acquired number display LED 78 with the push order instruction information corresponding to the push order instruction number, specifically " =*” (“*”=1, 2, . . . ). Thus, the function of displaying push order indication information upon activation of a conditional device with an advantageous push order is also referred to as an indication function.
Also, when winning the push order bell or push order replay during AT, the main control board 50, at the start of the game (after the start switch 41 is operated and the winning number is determined), the sub control board 80, a command corresponding to the push order instruction number is transmitted.
When the sub-control board 80 receives the command, the sub-control board 80 displays an image of the correct key pressing order on the image display device 23 .

It should be noted that the push order instruction number selected by the main control board 50 can be transmitted to the sub control board 80 only during the advantageous section (AT). Therefore, even if the pressing order instruction number is selected by the pressing order instruction number selection means 63 in the normal section, the pressing order instruction number is not transmitted to the sub-control board 80 . Note that it is not necessary to select the push order instruction number in the normal section.

The effect group number selection means 64 selects a number to be transmitted to the sub-control board 80, which is the effect group number corresponding to the winning number.
Here, an effect group number corresponding to the winning number is determined in advance. When the winning number is determined by operating the start switch 41, the effect group number selecting means 64 selects the effect group number corresponding to the winning number of the game, and the main control board 50 selects the selected effect group. The number is transmitted to the sub-control board 80. The sub-control board 80 outputs an effect related to the winning combination based on the received effect group number. The effect group number is selected for each game and transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub-control board 80, unlike the pressing order instruction number.

Also, the main control board 50 does not transmit the winning number of the game to the sub control board 80 . Therefore, the sub-control board 80 cannot know the winning number of the game. However, since the sub-control board 80 receives the effect group number every game, it is possible to output the effect based on the received effect group number. However, even when the pressing order bell or pressing order replay is won, the correct pressing order cannot be determined from the effect group number, so the sub-control board 80 does not notify the correct pressing order based on the effect group number. . On the other hand, during AT, when winning the push order bell or push order replay, the main control board 50 transmits the push order instruction number to the sub control board 80 . As a result, the sub-control board 80 can notify the correct pressing order based on the received pressing order instruction number.

The reel control means 65 controls all (three) reels 31 to start rotating when receiving a command to start rotating the reels 31, particularly when detecting the operation of the start switch 41 in this embodiment. .
Furthermore, after the win number is determined by the combination lottery means 61, the reel control means 65 refers to the on/off of the win flag in the current game, and refers to the stop position determination table corresponding to the on/off of the win flag. is selected, and when the stop switch 42 is operated, the stop position of the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 is determined based on the timing when the operation of the stop switch 42 is detected, and the motor 32 is operated Drive control is performed to stop the reel 31 at the determined position.

For example, in a game in which at least one winning flag is ON, the reel control means 65 validates a symbol combination corresponding to a winning combination (a combination in which the winning flag is ON) within the range of stop control of the reels 31. The reels 31 are controlled to stop so that they can be stopped on the line, and the reels 31 are controlled to stop so that the symbol combination corresponding to the combination other than the winning combination (the winning flag is turned off) is not stopped on the effective line.

Here, "within the range of stop control of the reel 31" means the time from the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated until the reel 31 actually stops, or the amount of rotation of the reel 31 (the number of moving symbols (frames)). means within range.
In this embodiment, the reel 31 is rotated at a constant speed of about 80 times per minute.
Then, when the stop switch 42 is operated, the time from the moment the stop switch 42 is operated until the reel 31 is stopped is within 190 ms, except for a predetermined reel 31 (for example, the middle reel 31) during MB operation. is set to Thus, in the present embodiment, the maximum moving symbol number from the moment the stop switch 42 is operated until the reel 31 stops is set to 4 symbols, except for the predetermined reel 31 during MB operation.

On the other hand, for a predetermined reel 31 during MB operation, the time from the moment the stop switch 42 is operated until the reel 31 is stopped is set within 75 ms. Thus, for a predetermined reel 31 during MB operation, the maximum moving symbol number from the symbol at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated until the reel 31 stops is set to 1 symbol.

At the moment when the operation of the stop switch 42 is detected, if any of the symbols within the range of the stop control of the reel 31 is a symbol to be stopped on a predetermined effective line, the stop switch 42 is operated. Then, the symbol is controlled to stop on a predetermined effective line.
That is, if the reels 31 are stopped immediately at the moment the stop switch 42 is operated, if the pattern of the winning combination corresponding to the winning number does not stop on the predetermined effective line, the reels 31 are not stopped until the reels 31 are stopped. By controlling the rotational movement of the reel 31 within the range of the stop control, the symbol of the combination corresponding to the winning number is controlled to stop on a predetermined effective line as much as possible (pull-in stop control).

Conversely, if the reels 31 are stopped immediately at the moment the stop switch 42 is operated, the symbol combination of the winning combination that does not correspond to the winning number will stop on the effective line. By controlling the rotational movement of the reels 31 within the range of the stop control, control is performed so that the symbol combination of the winning combination that does not correspond to the winning number is not stopped on the effective line (kicking stop control).
Furthermore, in a game in which a plurality of winning combinations are won (for example, when the bell is won in the order of pressing), the order of priority of winning combinations is determined in advance according to the order of pressing the stop switch 42 and the operation timing of the stop switch 42. In accordance with a predetermined order of priority, the drawing-in stop control of the symbol associated with the highest priority combination is performed.

The winning judgment means 66 judges whether or not the symbol combination of the reels 31 stopped on the active line corresponds to any winning combination when the reels 31 are stopped.
Here, the winning determination means 66 does not actually detect whether or not the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination has stopped on the activated line. Specifically, from the conditional device operated in the game, the pressing order of the stop switch 42 and / or the operation timing of the stop switch 42, the symbol combination that stops on the effective line before the reel 31 actually stops is set in advance. Alternatively, the symbol combination stopped on the activated line after the reels 31 are stopped is determined in advance.

The control command transmitting means 71 transmits information (control commands) necessary for the effects output by the sub-control board 80 to the sub-control board 80 .
The control commands include, for example, information when the bet switch 40 is operated, information when the start switch 41 is operated, and a pressing order instruction number (only during AT and when a winning number having a correct pressing order is won). , effect group number, RT (game state) information, information when the stop switch 42 is operated, information on winning combination, and the like.

In FIG. 1, the sub-control board 80 controls the selection, output, etc. of effects (information) during the game and during the game standby.
Here, the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 are electrically connected, and the main control board 50 (control command transmission means 71) is unidirectionally transmitted to the sub-control board 80 by parallel communication. Sends information (control commands) required for output.
The main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 are not limited to being electrically connected, and may be connected using optical communication means. Furthermore, both the electrical connection and the optical communication connection are not limited to parallel communication, and may be serial communication, or both serial communication and parallel communication may be used.

Like the main control board 50, the sub control board 80 includes an input port 81, an output port 82, an RWM 83, a ROM 84, a sub CPU 85, and the like.
The sub-control board 80 is electrically connected to performance peripheral devices such as the following performance lamps 21 as shown in FIG. However, the peripheral devices for presentation are not limited to these.
The RWM 83 is a storage medium that can temporarily store data and the like taken in when the sub CPU 85 controls the effect.
In addition, the ROM 84 is a storage medium for storing a program, various data, etc. for performing a lottery related to an effect as data for effect.

The effect lamps 21 are made up of LEDs, for example, and light up in a predetermined pattern when predetermined conditions are met. The effect lamps 21 are arranged on the inner peripheral side of each reel 31 and are used to illuminate the patterns displayed on the reels 31 (three patterns that are vertically continuous and visible from the display window) from behind. Fluorescent lamps that illuminate symbols on the reels 31 from above, and frame lamps that are arranged in front of the front door of the slot machine 10 and blink when winning a winning combination are included.

Also, the speaker 22 outputs a predetermined sound when a predetermined condition is satisfied in order to perform various effects during the game.
Furthermore, the image display device 23 is composed of a liquid crystal display, an organic EL display, a dot display, etc., and displays various effects images during the game (correct pressing order, effects corresponding to the conditional devices that operate in the game, etc.). , and game information (such as the number of games played during the operation of the accessory, the number of games won during the advantageous section (AT), the number of winnings, etc.).

FIG. 2 is a diagram showing how the medal M inserted from the medal slot 47 passes through the insertion sensors 44a and 44b, and is a schematic diagram seen from the front. In FIG. 2, the inside of the medal selector is shown. Also, the medals M indicate M1 to M4 according to their positions. The position of M1 indicates the state in which the medal M is placed on the medal placement portion 47b of the medal slot 47 (the state before being released). That is, at the position M1, the lowest point of the outer peripheral edge of the medal M and the upper surface of the medal placing portion 47b are in contact with each other when viewed from the front.
In addition, in FIG. 2 (and FIG. 4 to be described later), it is assumed that the entire substantially square portions displayed as the input sensors 44a and 44b are the light receiving and emitting ranges (sensor eyes) of the input sensors 44a and 44b, respectively. not the housing of the input sensors 44a and 44b).

Also, the position of M2 indicates the position at the moment when the medal M becomes invisible when viewed from the front. That is, the position M2 is a position where the highest point of the outer peripheral edge of the medal M and the upper surface of the medal placement portion 47b overlap. For example, assuming that the player releases the medal M when the medal M is at the position M1, the medal M drops from the position M1. Therefore, at the position of M2, it is released from the player's hand and is falling (moving) downstream.
It should be noted that the "upstream side" indicates the medal slot 47 side, and the "downstream side" indicates the side of the insertion sensor 44b (hopper 35 side). In terms of the positions of the medals M, the order is M1->M2->M3->M4 from the upstream side to the downstream side.

In the example of FIG. 2, the passage sensor 46 is arranged so that the medal M is detected by the passage sensor 46 when the medal M is positioned at M2.
Further, the position of M3 indicates the position at the moment (ON) when the medal M is detected by the insertion sensor 44a. The position of M4 indicates the position at the moment (OFF) when the medal M is no longer detected by the insertion sensor 44b.

The medal insertion slot 47 is a portion for inserting medals M into the inside of the slot machine 10 (medal selector) when the player bets or credits the medals M as game media. The medal slot 47 includes a medal guard portion 47a and a medal placement portion 47b. The medal placing portion 47b has a substantially curved surface (having a slightly larger curvature than the peripheral edge of the medal M) extending in a direction perpendicular to the plane of the drawing so that a plurality of (up to about 10) stacked medals M can be placed at the same time. curved surface).

The substantially curved surface of the medal placing portion 47b and the surface of the medal guard portion 47a with which the medal M contacts (the surface visible in FIG. 2) are formed to intersect substantially perpendicularly.
Further, although not shown in FIG. 2, an opening through which one medal M can flow is provided at the intersection of the medal placing portion 47b and the medal guard portion 47a. When two medals M are stacked, the medal M does not drop from the opening, but when the thickness is one medal M, the medal M is formed to flow down from the opening. Therefore, the player places, for example, a plurality of stacked medals M on the medal placing portion 47b, presses the plurality of medals M in the direction of the medal guard portion 47a, and strengthens the pressing force. By weakening it, the medals M placed on the medal placing portion 47b can be dropped into the medal selector one by one through the opening.

When the medal M is inserted (released downward) from the medal insertion slot 47, the medal M flows down the passage in the medal selector. A passage sensor 46, an insertion sensor 44a, and an insertion sensor 44b are provided in the medal selector from the upstream side. Further, the above-described blocker 45 is provided between the path sensor 46 and the entry sensor 44a (under the entry sensor 44a in FIG. 2).

When the medal M enters the medal selector, it is first detected by the path sensor 46 . The path sensor 46 is a sensor provided for determining the presence or absence of medal clogging or fraud. Furthermore, when the medal M is no longer detected after the lapse of a predetermined time, it is determined that the operation is normal. On the other hand, when the path sensor 46 continues to detect the medal M even after the predetermined time has elapsed after detecting the medal, it is determined that a medal retention error has occurred. Further, when the passage sensor 46 stops detecting the medal M before a predetermined time elapses after detecting the medal M, it is determined that the medal M is illegally passed.

When the medal M flows down in the medal passage, it reaches the position of the blocker 45. - 特許庁The blocker 45 is arranged on the lower side of the medal passage. When the blocker 45 is in the ON state (the output port related to the blocker 45 among the output ports 52 is ON), the medal flow path is formed so that the medals M can be detected by the insertion sensors 44a and 44b. In other words, it has the role of sending the medals M that have moved from the upstream side to the insertion sensors 44a and 44b without sending them out of the medal passage.

On the other hand, when it is in the OFF state (out of the output ports 52, the output port related to the blocker 45 is OFF), the blocker 45 moves so as to be displaced in the vertical direction with respect to the plane of the drawing in FIG. to form an opening (pitfall) in the medal passage. As a result, when the blocker 45 is in the OFF state, the medal M drops from this opening just before reaching M3 and is sent out of the medal passage (M5 in FIG. 2). The medal M dropped from this opening is returned to a medal return port (not shown) without being detected by the insertion sensor 44a.

For example, when the prescribed number of the game has already been betted and the number of credits has reached the upper limit, the blocker 45 is controlled to be in an OFF state because no more medals can be betted and credited. As a result, even if the medal M is inserted from the medal slot 47 in this state, it falls from the opening and is returned to the medal return slot.
On the other hand, when the blocker 45 is in the ON state, the opening is blocked by the blocker 45, so that the medals M flowing down the medal passage pass over the blocker 45 and are detected by the insertion sensors 44a and 44b. Can move sideways.

In this embodiment, the blockers 45 are arranged as shown in FIG. 2, but the arrangement is not limited to this. Regardless of whether the blocker 45 is on or off, the passage sensor 46 can detect the medal M, and when the blocker 45 is on, the medal M can be guided to the insertion sensors 44a and 44b, and When the blocker 45 is in the OFF state, it is sufficient that the medals M can be sent to the medal return port without being detected by the insertion sensors 44a and 44b. In other words, the blocker 45 should be positioned between the path sensor 46 and the entry sensor 44a.

Further, the path sensor 46 may be positioned upstream of the blocker 45, and is arranged at a position where the medals M inserted from the medal slot 47 can be detected even when the blocker 45 is in the OFF state. All you have to do is In FIG. 2, the passage sensor 46 is arranged so that it can detect the medal M when the medal M is positioned at M2. It is also possible to arrange the path sensor 46 so as to detect the medal M when it moves to the right.

The inserted sensors 44a and 44b are sensors for detecting the medals M that have passed through the blocker 45, and these two sensors are installed with a predetermined distance therebetween. First, when the medal M reaches the position of M3, the insertion sensor 44a on the upstream side becomes capable of detecting the medal M (turns from off to on). When the medals M further flow down, the insertion sensor 44b next detects the medals M (turns from off to on). By judging the ON/OFF timings of these two insertion sensors 44a and 44b, it is determined whether or not the inserted medals M are normal. When the medal M reaches the position of M4, it is no longer detected by the insertion sensors 44a and 44b. The medals M that have passed through the insertion sensors 44 a and 44 b are sent to the hopper 35 .

In FIG. 2, the medal selector is designed as follows.
First, when the medal M is positioned at M2, that is, when the medal selector is viewed from the front, the medal M is positioned at M4, that is, at the moment when the medal M is no longer detected by the inserted sensor 44b. (in FIG. 2, the movement trajectory is indicated by a dotted line) is set to time T2. Note that the value is obtained when the hand is released from the medal M (with an initial speed of "0") when the medal M is positioned at M1, and the medal is released downward. Therefore, the speed when the medal M is positioned at M2 exceeds "0".

Also, the acceleration of the medal M increases as it moves further downward from the position of M2. On the other hand, in FIG. 2, an impact member (not shown in FIG. 2) is provided at a portion where the medal passage bends from the vertical direction to the horizontal direction. When the medal M comes into contact with this impact member, the speed of the medal M is decelerated toward the insertion sensors 44a and 44b.
Then, the time from the moment when the medal M is positioned at M3 (the moment when it is detected by the insertion sensor 44a) to the moment when it is positioned at M4 (the moment when it is no longer detected by the insertion sensor 44b) is set as time T3. .

<First Embodiment (A)>
FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a time chart for explaining the first embodiment (A) of the present embodiment.
FIG. 3 shows voltage levels when the slot machine 10 is powered off (for example, when the power switch 11 is turned off or when a power failure occurs).
In FIG. 3, the voltage when the power supply is normally turned on is assumed to be the supply level V0. In the state of supply level V0, the slot machine 10 operates normally.

FIG. 3 shows an example in which a power failure occurred (an event in which power supply was interrupted occurred) at time S11. In this embodiment, when a power failure occurs, the voltage drops to the power failure detection level V1 at time T0.
The time T0 from when the power failure occurs (time S11; supply level V0) to when the power failure is detected (time S12; power failure detection level V1) is at least 20 interrupts (1 interrupt time 2.235 ms x 20 interrupt = 44.7 ms) or longer.
A voltage monitoring device (power failure detection circuit) (not shown) is provided on the main control board 50 . When the power supply voltage drops below a predetermined power supply interruption detection level V1, a power supply interruption detection signal is input to a predetermined bit in the input port 51. By detecting whether or not the signal has been input, the power supply is detected. Detect disconnection.

When the voltage further drops from the power-off detection level V1 and becomes less than the driving voltage limit V2 of the main CPU 55, the main CPU 55 cannot be driven (the operation of the main CPU 55 cannot be guaranteed).
In the example of FIG. 3, at time S13, the voltage level reaches the drive voltage limit V2 of the main CPU 55, and then drops to Low. The main control board 50 cannot execute the power-off process when the voltage becomes less than the drive voltage limit V2. is set to

Power-off detection is executed in interrupt processing executed every 2.235 ms, but when power-off is detected two consecutive interrupts, power-off processing is executed in the next interrupt processing. Therefore, in FIG. 3, time S12 is the timing at which it is determined that the voltage is equal to or lower than the power-off detection level V1 two times in a row by interrupt processing, and that power-off has occurred. Then, power-off processing is executed in the next interrupt processing.
In addition, in the interrupt processing, the following processing is executed. First, it is determined whether or not a power cutoff has been detected, and when a power cutoff has been detected, the process proceeds to power cutoff processing (without transitioning to normal interrupt processing). In the power-off process, first, the output port 52 is turned off. The processing of turning off the output port 52 turns off the blocker 45 . In addition, stack pointer saving processing, power-off processing completion flag (flag for determining whether or not power-off has been performed normally) setting processing, RWM 53 checksum execution processing, RWM 53 write prohibition processing, etc. After sequential execution, it enters a reset wait state (loop processing state). This reset waiting state is designed so that no processing is performed.
Therefore, as shown in FIG. 3, in the interrupt process subsequent to the interrupt process (time S12) in which the power-off is detected, the power-off process is executed and the blocker 45 is turned off.
It should be noted that the power-off process is not limited to being executed in the interrupt process subsequent to the interrupt process that detected the power-off, and the power-off process may be executed within the interrupt process that detected the power-off. In this case, "T1=S12-S11".

On the other hand, FIG. 3 also shows medal positions (M2, M4) after the medals are inserted. In FIG. 2, it is assumed that the player releases the medal M while the medal M is positioned at M1. In this case, the medal M falls at an initial speed of "0". As a result, the medal M is released into the medal selector. In FIG. 3, the time S11 at which the power failure occurred coincides with the time at which the medal M reaches the position of M2.

As shown in FIG. 2, the time from the moment when the medal M is positioned at M2 to the moment when the medal M is positioned at M4 is set to T2. It is assumed that the medal M is later positioned at M4.
In this case, the present embodiment is designed to satisfy the relationship "T2>T1".

Therefore, if the power is cut off at the moment when the medal M is positioned at M2, the power cut-off process is executed before the medal M reaches M4, and the insertion sensor 44b stops detecting the medal M. Therefore, when a power failure occurs at the moment when the medal M is positioned at M2, the medal M is sent to the medal return port (lower tray) without being detected by the insertion sensor 44b. Therefore, the medal M does not normally pass through the insertion sensors 44a and 44b. Therefore, the medal M is swallowed, but after the power failure occurs (after time S11), the processing of adding "1" to the medal M (adding "1" to the bet or credit) is executed. not. This eliminates the possibility that the bet or credit processing will be executed after the power failure occurs.

For example, in the case where the power is cut off at the moment the medal M is positioned at M2, when the time T1 has passed (at the time of the power cut-off process), when the medal M is positioned immediately before M4 in FIG. has passed the position of M3), the medal M is detected by the insertion sensor 44a, but is not detected by the insertion sensor 44b, and the power is turned off.
Also, in the case where the power is cut off at the moment when the medal M is positioned at M2, when the time T1 has passed (at the time of the power cut-off process), the medal M is positioned upstream from the position of M3 in FIG. At that time, the medal M is turned off without being detected by either the insertion sensor 44a or the insertion sensor 44b.

Also, in FIG. 2, the time from the moment when the medal M is positioned at M2 to the moment when the medal M is positioned at M3 is time T2'.
In this case, it is preferable to design so as to satisfy the relationship "T2'>T1".
In the case where the relationship is designed as described above, if the power is turned off at the moment when the medal M is positioned at M2, when the medal M reaches M3, the blocker 45 is turned off by executing the power shutdown process. ing. Therefore, the medal M is sent out of the medal passage without being detected by the insertion sensor 44a, and sent to the medal return port.

Here, the difference between the prior art and the first embodiment (A) will be described.
Conventionally, when the power interruption occurs at the moment when the medal M is positioned at M2, the medal M has already passed the position of the insertion sensor 44b when the power interruption is detected and the blocker 45 is turned off. Therefore, after the power failure occurred, the medal "1" addition processing (bet processing or credit processing) was executed. However, it is not preferable to execute the medal addition process after power failure occurs. This is because all the processes related to the progress of the game should be stopped immediately after the power failure occurs.
Therefore, if configured as in the first embodiment (A), even if the player inserts the medal M from the medal insertion slot 47 and the power is cut off at the moment when the medal M is positioned at M2 (immediately after insertion), , the medal "1" addition processing is not executed, so the function of the slot machine 10 can be enhanced.

<First Embodiment (B)>
The first embodiment (B) defines the relationship between the input sensors 44a and 44b and power off.
FIG. 4 is a front view showing the process from when the medal M is detected by the insertion sensor 44a until it is no longer detected by the insertion sensor 44b. In FIG. 4, the direction of the arrow indicates the advancing (flowing down) direction of the medals M. As shown in FIG.
FIG. 4(a) shows the moment when the medal M is detected by the insertion sensor 44a. At this time, the closing sensor 44a is turned on from off, and the closing sensor 44b remains off. This position corresponds to M3 in FIG.

Next, when the medal M advances to the left side in FIG. 4 and enters the state shown in FIG. become. Therefore, in FIG. 4B, the input sensor 44a is on, and the input sensor 44b is turned on from off.
In FIG. 4, even when the inserted sensors 44a and 44b overlap the medal M, both the inserted sensors 44a and 44b and the medal M are shown by solid lines. It does not represent the positional relationship of 44b. The insertion sensors 44a and 44b may be arranged on the front side or the back side of the medal M in the direction perpendicular to the paper surface of FIG.

When the medal M progresses further and becomes the state of FIG. 4(c), the medal M is detected by both the insertion sensors 44a and 44b. Therefore, the input sensor 44a in this case is on, and the input sensor 44b is also on.
Here, the diameter of the medal M is, for example, 25 millimeters (so-called 25 pies (φ)) in general specifications, and 30 millimeters (so-called 30 pies (φ)) in special specifications. Therefore, it is necessary to set the distance between the insertion sensors 44a and 44b so that the state of FIG. 4(c) can be obtained. Here, as will be described later, it is determined whether or not the state of FIG. 4(c), that is, the time during which both the insertion sensors 44a and 44b are ON (detecting medals M) is within a predetermined range. determines whether or not to determine a medal insertion error. Therefore, the distance between the input sensors 44a and 44b also varies depending on how the time during which both the input sensors 44a and 44b are ON is set.

When the medal M further advances from the state of FIG. 4(c), the insertion sensor 44a stops detecting the medal M as shown in FIG. 4(d). In this case, the input sensor 44a is turned off from on at the moment, and the input sensor 44b remains on. When the medal M advances further, the insertion sensor 44b stops detecting the medal M as shown in FIG. 4(e). Therefore, in this case, the input sensor 44a remains off, and the input sensor 44b is turned off from on. The position of the medal M in FIG. 4(e) corresponds to M4 in FIG.

FIG. 5 is a time chart showing ON/OFF of the input sensors 44a and 44b. In FIG. 5, time S21 is the moment when the input sensor 44a turns on from off (while the input sensor 44b remains off), which corresponds to the timing of FIG. 4(a).
Next, let S22 be the moment when the insertion sensor 44b detects the medal M (turns on from off) (FIG. 4(b)). Furthermore, let S23 be the moment (FIG. 4(d)) when the insertion sensor 44a no longer detects the medal M (changed from on to off). Further, the time when the inserted sensor 44b no longer detects the medal M (changed from on to off) (FIG. 4(e)) is S24.

Here, if the time Ta (from time S21 to S23) during which the insertion sensor 44a detects the medal M is within a range of 6.705 ms (3 interrupts) or more and less than 185.505 ms (83 interrupts) (Condition 1), the main control board 50 judges that the medal M passes normally, and judges that a medal passing error occurs when it is out of this range.

In addition, the time Tb (from time S22 to S23) during which both the insertion sensors 44a and 44b detect the medal M is within a range of 4.47 ms (2 interruptions) or more and less than 118.455 ms (53 interruptions). If so (Condition 2), the main control board 50 determines that the medal M has passed normally, and if it is out of this range, it determines that there is a medal passing error.

Furthermore, if the time Tc (from time S22 to S24) during which the inserted sensor 44b detects the medal M is within the range of 6.705 ms (3 interrupts) or more and less than 185.505 ms (83 interrupts). (Condition 3), the main control board 50 judges that the passage of the medal M is normal.
If all of the conditions 1 to 3 described above are satisfied, it is determined that the passage of the medal M is normal, and if at least one of the conditions is not satisfied, a medal passage error is determined.

Also, as shown in FIG. 5, when both the input sensors 44a and 44b are turned off (time S24), the input monitor counter is decremented by "1".
Here, the insertion monitoring counter becomes "+1" when the passage sensor 46 described above detects the medal M, and when the medal passes through the insertion sensors 44a and 44b normally (both the insertion sensors 44a and 44b are turned off). →When ON→OFF (that is, at time S24), the counter is decremented by "1". That is, during normal operation, "1" and "0" are repeated.
On the other hand, when the passage sensor 46 does not detect the medal M and only the insertion sensors 44a and 44b detect the passage of the medal, the insertion monitoring counter becomes "-1", and the main control board 50 determines that a medal passage error has occurred. do.

Further, when the path sensor 46 detects the medal M (insertion monitoring counter=“+1”) and the insertion sensors 44a and 44b do not detect the passage of the medal M, the path sensor 46 further detects the medal M. Then, when the insertion monitoring counter reaches a predetermined value of "2" or more, the main control board 50 determines that a medal jam error has occurred. For example, when the normal value of the insertion monitoring counter is set to "0" to "2", the main control board 50 determines that there is a medal clogging error when the insertion monitoring counter reaches "3" or more. be done.
The input monitoring counter is cleared when the blocker 45 is turned on from off.

In FIG. 5, at time S24, the insertion sensor 44b is turned off from on, the insertion monitoring counter is decremented by "1", and when it is determined that the medal M has passed normally, the main control board 50 inserts the medal. Execute the transaction (bet transaction or credit transaction). For example, if the number of bets is less than the specified number at that time, the number of bets is added by "1". Specifically, when the prescribed number in the game is "3" and the bet number at that time is "0", the bet number is increased from "0" by adding "1" to the bet number. Update to "1".

At that time, if the number of bets has already reached the specified number and the number of credits has not reached the maximum number of "50", the number of credits is added to "1". For example, if the number of credits at that time is "10", the number of credits is updated to "11".
When the number of bets reaches the specified number and the number of credits reaches the maximum number of "50", the main control board 50 turns the blocker 45 off. Thereby, even if the medal M is inserted from the medal insertion slot 47, the medal M is returned. In other words, in that case, even if medals M are inserted, they are not detected by the insertion sensors 44a and 44b.

In FIG. 5, in addition to the ON/OFF states of the input sensors 44a and 44b, the timings when the power failure occurs and when the power failure is detected are displayed. In FIG. 5, examples 1 and 2 are shown, both of which are exemplified by the case where the power supply is interrupted at the timing (time S21) when the input sensor 44a is turned on from off.
In example 1, power failure is detected after time T1 has elapsed from time S21 when the power failure occurred. Here, in example 1, it is set to "T1>T3". Therefore, when the insertion sensor 44a detects the medal M at the moment when the power is cut off, when the power cut-off process is started, the "1" addition process for the medal M has already been executed.

Here, the time T3 from time S21 to S24 can be expressed as "Ta+Tc-Tb". Therefore, the minimum time for time T3 is 8.94 ms, which corresponds to 4 interrupts.
Also, the maximum time of time T3 corresponds to 113 interrupts and is "252.555 ms".
Then, in Example 1, it is set so that the power-off process is always executed after time S24 has elapsed. Therefore, for example, the time T1 from the occurrence of power failure (time S21) to the execution of power failure processing is set to be 114 interrupts or more.

With the above settings, even if the power is cut off at the moment when the insertion sensor 44a detects the medal M (time S21), the power cut-off process is executed after the "1" addition process for the medal M is executed. , the medal M is normally bet or credited. Therefore, swallowing of medals M can be prevented.

Further, Example 2 is an example in which the power-off process is executed before the medal M addition process of "1" is executed, contrary to Example 1. That is, in Example 2, the setting is made so as to satisfy the relationship "T1<T3".
Time T3 from time S21 to time S24 corresponds to four interrupts at the minimum time, as described above. Therefore, in order to satisfy the relationship of "T1<T3", it is necessary to execute power-off processing within three interrupts from the occurrence of power-off. However, since it is difficult to set the power-off processing to be executed within 3 interrupts from the occurrence of power-off, the minimum time of time Tc is set to be longer than 4 interrupts. For example, setting the minimum time of time Tc to 15 interrupts. If the time T1 from the occurrence of power failure (time S21) to the power failure process is set to about 10 interrupts, when the power failure occurs at time S21, the power failure process is executed before time S24. becomes possible.

After the power-off process is executed, the process of adding "1" to the medals M (bet or credit) is not executed. Therefore, in Example 2, even if the insertion sensor 44a detects the medal M at time S21 (when the power is cut off), the processing of adding "1" to the medal M1 is not executed. As a result, there is a demerit that the medal M is swallowed. , the power-off process can be executed as quickly as possible.

<First Embodiment (C)>
The first embodiment (C) defines the relationship between the payout sensors 37a and 37b and power off.
When adding the medals to be paid out to the credits, the hopper motor 36 is not driven, and the credit number storage area provided in the RWM 53 of the main control board 50 is updated. Further, the value indicated by the credit number display LED 76 is updated so as to correspond to the credit number stored in the storage area.

When the medals are to be paid out after the number of credits reaches the upper limit "50", the hopper motor 36 is driven to pay out the medals from the hopper 35 (discharge from the payout port). In this case, the payout sensors 37a and 37b are configured to detect ON/OFF each time one medal is paid out. When the on/off detection result by the payout sensors 37a and 37b is within the normal range, it is determined that one medal M has been correctly paid out, and when the detection result is not within the normal range, the medal M is not paid out correctly, and the main control board 50 judges that there is a medal payout error.

FIG. 6 is a plan view for explaining the operation when medals M are paid out from the medal payout device. Although not shown in FIG. 6 , a hopper disk (a substantially disc-shaped rotating disk) is attached to the bottom of the hopper 35 , and the hopper disk is rotated by driving the hopper motor 36 . A plurality of openings capable of holding the medals M are formed along the outer periphery of the hopper disc. The medal M in the hopper 35 is configured to enter the opening of the hopper disk. When the hopper motor 36 is driven in this state, the hopper disk rotates and the medals M held in the opening of the hopper disk are discharged one by one. A new medal M in the hopper 35 enters into the empty opening after the medal M is discharged.

In FIG. 6, the medal M positioned at M1 is shown immediately after being ejected from the opening of the hopper disk. Both the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b are parts constituting the medal payout device. The fixed shaft 38a is a shaft that does not move when the medals M are paid out. On the other hand, the movable shaft 38b is a shaft that reciprocates each time one medal M is paid out. In an unloaded state, the movable shaft 38b is arranged at the position indicated by the solid line in the drawing, and is fixed to the fixed shaft by a spring (not shown in FIG. 6, which corresponds to the spring 39b in FIG. 7 described later). 38a side is biased. The medal M (M1) immediately after being ejected from the opening of the hopper disk comes into contact with both the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b.
In addition, when the medal M is placed at the position (M1) indicated by the solid line in FIG. Narrower than diameter. Therefore, at this time, the medal M cannot pass through between the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b.

A pushing force in the F1 direction in FIG. 6 acts on the medal M ejected from the opening of the hopper disk. Then, when the pushing force in the F1 direction acts on the medal M, the medal M becomes movable in the F1 direction, and the pushing force pushes the movable shaft 38b in the F2 direction in the figure. Note that the fixed shaft 38a does not move. As a result, the movable shaft 38b moves in the F2 direction in the figure while maintaining the state of contact with the medal M. As shown in FIG. Further, the movable shaft 38b moves to a position where the medals M can pass between the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b. In other words, the gap between the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b becomes wider than the diameter of the medal M. The position of the movable shaft 38b at this time is indicated by a chain double-dashed line in the figure.

As a result, the medal M passes through between the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b and is ejected in the F1 direction (toward the medal payout port) in the figure. The medal M at this time is indicated by a chain double-dashed line in FIG. 6 (M2). When the medal M is ejected, the force pushing the movable shaft 38b in the F2 direction is released. As a result, the movable shaft 38b is again returned to the position indicated by the solid line in FIG. 6 by the force of the spring.

FIG. 7 is a plan view for explaining the on (detection)/off (non-detection) states of the payout sensors 37a and 37b when the medals M are paid out as described above in the medal payout device. FIG. 7 shows how the movable piece 39a moves in the order of (a)→(b)→(c)→(d)→(a) each time one medal M is paid out.

FIG. 7(a) shows the state of the movable piece 39a when the movable shaft 38b is arranged at the position (initial position) indicated by the solid line in FIG. The movable piece 39a is attached so as to be rotatable around the central axis in the drawing, and is biased clockwise by a spring 39b.
When the movable piece 39a is biased clockwise in the drawing, the movable shaft 38b in FIG. 6 is biased toward the fixed shaft 38a in the drawing.
In a state in which the movable piece 39a is biased clockwise in FIG. 7 by the spring 39b and no force other than the tensile force of the spring 39b acts on the movable piece 39a, the movable piece 39a is held by a predetermined stopper (not shown). ), it stops at the position shown in FIG. 7(a).

As shown in FIG. 7A, payout sensors 37a (upper side in the drawing) and 37b (lower side in the drawing) are arranged on the left side of the movable piece 39a. The movable piece 39a is formed so as to extend toward the dispensing sensors 37a and 37b, and when it is stopped at the position shown in FIG. ing.
In FIG. 7, both the payout sensors 37a and 37b show the housings of the sensors, and the light emitting/receiving parts (eyes of the sensors) are omitted from the illustration. In this respect, it is different from the insertion sensors 44a and 44b shown in FIGS. 2 and 4, in which only light receiving/emitting parts (sensor eyes) are illustrated.

Here, the dispensing sensor 37a is in the ON state (for example, FIG. 7A) when the movable piece 39a is detected, and is in the OFF state (for example, FIG. 7B) when the movable piece 39a is no longer detected. is set to be
Similarly, the payout sensor 37b is turned off when the movable piece 39a is not detected (for example, FIG. 7(a)), and turned on when the movable piece 39a is detected (for example, FIG. 7(c)). is set to
In the state of FIG. 7A, the payout sensor 37a detects the movable piece 39a and is on, and the payout sensor 37b does not detect the movable piece 39a and is off.

As described with reference to FIG. 6, when the pushing force in the F1 direction in FIG. 6 acts on the medal M, the movable shaft 38b starts to move in the F2 direction in FIG. When moved, the movable piece 39a starts to rotate counterclockwise in FIG. 7(a) against the biasing force of the spring 39b. When the movable piece 39a moves to the position shown in FIG. 7(b), the tip of the movable piece 39a comes out of the payout sensor 37a. As a result, the dispensing sensor 37a does not detect the movable piece 39a, and is turned off. Further, even if the movable piece 39a rotates to the position shown in FIG. 7(b), the tip of the movable piece 39a does not reach the payout sensor 37b. Therefore, in the state of FIG. 7(b), the payout sensor 37a is off and the payout sensor 37b is off.

In FIG. 6, when the movable shaft 38b moves further in the F2 direction and reaches the position indicated by the two-dot chain line in FIG. 7, the movable piece 39a further rotates counterclockwise and reaches the position shown in FIG. 7(c). As a result, the tip of the movable piece 39a enters the payout sensor 37b, and the payout sensor 37b detects the movable piece 39a. Therefore, in the state of FIG. 7(c), the payout sensor 37a is in the OFF state and the payout sensor 37b is in the ON state.

In FIG. 6, when the medal M is further ejected from the position M2, the force that urges the movable shaft 38b in the F2 direction in FIG. return. The return force at this time is due to the force of the spring 39b in FIG. As a result, the movable piece 39a rotates clockwise in FIG. 7, the tip of the movable piece 39a comes out of the payout sensor 37b, and the payout sensor 37b stops detecting the movable piece 39b. FIG. 7(d) shows the state at this time. In the state of FIG. 7(d), the payout sensor 37a is in the OFF state, and the payout sensor 37b is in the OFF state.

When the movable piece 39a further rotates clockwise, the tip of the movable piece 39a enters the payout sensor 37a, and the payout sensor 37a detects the movable piece 39a. This returns to the state (initial state) of FIG. 7(a). In the state of FIG. 7(a), as described above, the payout sensor 37a is in the ON state and the payout sensor 37b is in the OFF state. Also, when returning to this position, the movable shaft 38b returns to the position indicated by the solid line in FIG.

FIG. 8 is a time chart showing on/off of the payout sensors 37a and 37b.
In FIG. 8, it is assumed that the medal payout process has started and the hopper motor drive signal is on.
In FIG. 8, before time S31, the state is shown in FIG. 7(a). When time S31 is reached, the state shown in FIG. 7B is reached, and the payout sensor 37a is turned off (the payout sensor 37b is in the off state). Next, when time S32 is reached, the payout sensor 37b is turned on. This state is the state shown in FIG. 7(c). In FIG. 8, the time from S31 to S32 is Td.

The state where the payout sensor 37a is off and the payout sensor 37b is on continues until time S33, at which time the payout sensor 37b is turned off. This state is the state shown in FIG. In FIG. 8, the time from S32 to S33 is Te. Then, when time S34 is reached, the state (initial position) of FIG. 7A is restored, and the payout sensor 37a is turned on. In FIG. 8, the time from time S32 to S34 is Tf.

In the payout process, the main control board 50 monitors the on/off time of the payout sensors 37a and 37b, and determines that a medal payout error has occurred when the time is not within a predetermined time range.
For example, in FIG. 8, time Td is set to less than 29.055 ms (13 interrupts). Therefore, when the payout sensor 37b is turned on by the 12th interrupt after the payout sensor 37a is turned off, it is determined to be normal, but if the payout sensor 37b is not turned on by the 12th interrupt. If not, it is regarded as a medal payout error.

Also, the time Te during which the payout sensor 37a is off and the payout sensor 37b is on is set to 11.175 ms (5 interrupts) or more and less than 62.58 ms (28 interrupts). Therefore, when the time S32 is reached (when the payout sensor 37b is turned on), the time Te until the payout sensor 37b is turned off is monitored. , the main control board 50 determines that there is a medal payout error.

Furthermore, after the payout sensor 37b is turned on (time S32), the time Tf from when the payout sensor 37b is turned off to when the payout sensor 37a is turned on (time S34) is 11.175 ms (5 interrupts ) and less than 62.58 ms (28 interrupts). Therefore, at time S32 (when the payout sensor 37b is turned on), the payout sensor 37b is turned off and the time Tf until the payout sensor 37a is turned on is monitored. If the time is not within the predetermined time range, the main control board 50 determines that a medal payout error has occurred.

In addition, in FIG. 8, similarly to FIG. 3 and FIG. 5, the time from occurrence of power failure to power failure processing is also displayed.
First, it is assumed that a power failure occurs at the timing of time S31, that is, at the timing when the payout sensor 37a is turned off. In this case, in the example of FIG. 3, an example of detecting a power failure by the 20th interrupt was explained, but in the example of FIG. When T1 elapses), power-off is detected and power-off processing is set to be executed.

Here, since the maximum time (normal time) of the time "Td+Tf" is "12+27=39" interrupts, the time T1 from when the power is turned off until the power-off process is executed is set to 40 interrupts (89.4 ms), for example. set. With this setting, even if the power is cut off at the moment when the payout sensor 37a is turned off, the power cutoff process can be started after the payout process of one medal is normally completed. That is, it can be set to "(Td+Tf)<T1".

Conventionally, power outages (power outages, etc.) may occur during medal payout processing. In this case, depending on the timing of the medal payout process and the power shutdown, it may be determined that the medals have been paid out even though the medals have not been paid out, causing a loss to the player.
In contrast, in the first embodiment (C), medals can be paid out correctly even if the power is cut off during the medal payout process.

In particular, when the medal payout process is started, that is, even if the power is cut off at the timing of time S31 in FIG. Therefore, for example, when the payout sensor 37a is in the OFF state or at the timing when the payout sensor 37b is in the ON state, the power-off processing is not executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the interruption of the medal payout process before the (one) medal payout process ends normally due to the execution of the power-off process in the middle of the medal payout process.

If the time T1 is set longer than necessary, there is a risk that the next medal payout process will be executed. Therefore, the power-off process is executed at least before the next medal payout process is executed. In FIG. 8, for example, assuming that the cycle of one medal payout process is time T4 and that the payout sensor 37a changes from the ON state to the OFF state at the timing of time S35, "T1<T4" is set.

<Second embodiment>
The second embodiment relates to gate traces formed on the board case of the main control board 50 .
In the prior art, the shape, size, position, and the like of the gate mark on the substrate case were determined by the mold designer when the mold was manufactured, solely for the convenience of mold manufacturing.
However, since the trace of the gate is an uneven surface, even if a hole is made aiming at the trace of the gate, there are cases where it cannot be visually recognized (not noticed).

If the main CPU 55 of the main control board 50 is arranged directly below the trace of the gate, the main CPU 55 can be accessed by making a hole in the trace of the gate and inserting a wire through the hole. be done). In particular, if the gate marks are formed to be thinner than the other portions, it becomes easier to make holes than the other portions.
Therefore, in the second embodiment, it is prevented that the gate mark of the substrate case is used to cheat.

FIG. 9 is an external perspective view showing the main control board 50 and the board case 56 (upper cover 57 and lower cover 58) in exploded form.
The substrate case 56 is composed of an upper cover 57 and a lower cover 58, both of which are (injection) molded products of transparent resin. Therefore, when the main control board 50 is housed inside, the state of the main control board 50 can be visually confirmed clearly from the outside of the board case 56 .

On the main control board 50, there are electronic components such as the above-described main CPU 55, management information display LED 74 (4-digit LED, also called "role ratio monitor" or "ratio indicator"), and set value display LED 73. is installed. Although many electronic components such as the RWM 53 and ROM 54 are mounted on the main control board 50, they are not shown in FIG. In addition, although not shown in FIG. 9, the main control board 50 is equipped with bed switches 40a and 40b, a start switch 41, a stop switch 42, a passage sensor 46 in the medal selector, and LEDs for failure confirmation of insertion sensors 44a and 44b. It is Note that the failure confirmation LED is not limited to this.
For example, the failure confirmation LED of the start switch 41 is extinguished when the start switch 41 is off, and is turned off when the start switch 41 is operated (when the start switch 41 is operated and the sensor detects that it is on). ), the LED is turned on (lit).

The failure confirmation LED of the start switch 41 and the failure confirmation LEDs of other operation switches and sensors, which will be described later, are extinguished when the operation switch is operated (when the sensor detects that it is on), and when it is off. It may be configured to light up.

In addition, two failure confirmation LEDs for the bed switches 40a and 40b are provided for the bed switches 40a and 40b, and are extinguished when the bed switch 40 is not operated. It is an LED that lights up when it receives the electrical signal at that time.
Furthermore, the path sensor 46 and the insertion sensors 44a and 44b are provided with a total of three failure confirmation LEDs for each sensor. LEDs.
Then, for example, the administrator operates the start switch 41 and confirms whether the failure check LED of the start switch 41 mounted on the main control board 50 is on/off, thereby determining whether the start switch 41 has failed (energized). can be confirmed. The same is true for other switches or sensors.

The failure confirmation LED may be turned on/off by operating the start switch 41 or the like when the front door is opened during normal operation (not during setting change and setting confirmation). . Alternatively, after the front door is opened and a door open error occurs, a predetermined operation may be performed to enable failure confirmation. Further, the light may be turned on/off by operating the start switch 41 or the like at all times (even during setting change or setting confirmation).

Also, the model number of the board is displayed (printed, etc.) on the main control board 50 . Although not shown in FIG. 9, model numbers and the like are similarly displayed on the upper surfaces of the RWM 53 and ROM 54 .
Further, screw holes 50a for passing screws are formed in the four corners of the main control board 50. As shown in FIG.
On the other hand, bosses 58c for screwing are formed at the four corners on the inner side of the lower surface of the lower cover 58. As shown in FIG. When the main control board 50 is placed on the lower cover 58, the screw holes 50a and the bosses 58c overlap, and screws are passed through the screw holes 50a and screwed to the bosses 58c, thereby fixing the main control board 50 to the lower case 58. can do.

When the upper cover 57 is placed on the lower cover 58 in this state, the upper cover 57 and the lower cover 58 are formed in a shape to be fitted (in FIG. 9, the specific shape of the fitting portion is omitted from illustration). ) Further, crimped portions 57a are provided on both left and right sides of the upper cover 57 in the figure. Similarly, crimped portions 58a are provided on the left and right sides of the lower cover 58 in the figure. In FIG. 9, illustration of the specific shape and detailed shape of the crimped portions 57a and 58b is omitted.

After the upper cover 57 and the lower cover 58 are fitted together and crimped using the crimped portions 57a and 58a, at least a part of the crimped portions 57a and 58a must be destroyed (plastically deformed). The cover 57 and the lower cover 58 cannot be opened.
Thereby, the security of the main control board 50 can be ensured.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9, gate traces 57b are provided at two places on the outer side of the upper surface of the upper cover 57. As shown in FIG. In the board case 56 (the state in which the upper cover 57 and the lower cover 58 are fitted together), the side on which the main control board 50 is accommodated is called the "inside", and the side exposed to the outside is called the "outside". .
In FIG. 9, the gate traces 57b are provided at two locations, but they may be provided at any number of locations.

Here, the "gate" is the sprue when resin (hot water) is poured into the mold during resin molding, and the gate mark is the mark that remains at the boundary between the gate and the molded product after resin molding. be.
When the substrate case 56 (upper cover 57, lower cover 58) has a shape as shown in FIG. 9, the mold for the substrate case 56 is a mold divided vertically in FIG. 9 to reduce the cost. In the case of a multi-cavity mold, it is preferable to use a pin gate, and from the viewpoint of the fluidity of the resin (hot water), it is preferable to provide the gate near the center of the molded product. Therefore, in the second embodiment, the gate positions of the upper cover 57 and the lower cover 58 are formed on the upper surface instead of the side surface in FIG.

Furthermore, considering the cutting of the protrusions of the gate traces during molding, it is preferable to provide the gate traces on the outside.
As described above, the gate mark 57b of the upper cover 57 is provided on the outer side of the upper surface.
For the same reason as above, the gate mark 58b of the lower cover 58 is also provided on the outer side of the lower surface (the surface opposite to the visible surface in FIG. 9). In FIG. 9, the gate traces 58b of the lower cover 58 are provided at two locations like the gate traces 57b of the upper cover 57, but they may be provided at one location, or may be provided at three or more locations. good too.

In addition, when the resin (hot water) flows from the gate into the mold, if the resin (hot water) spreads unevenly in the mold and a cooling time difference occurs, the molded product may warp. Therefore, it is preferable to arrange the gate position of the molded product at a position where the resin (hot water) spreads uniformly in the mold. Furthermore, when gates are provided at a plurality of locations, it is preferable to make the distance from the end of the molded product to the gates and the distance between the gates as uniform as possible.

10A is a plan view showing the positional relationship between the gate mark 57b of the upper cover 57 of the board case 56, the gate mark 58b of the lower cover 58, and the main control board 50. FIG. FIG. 10A shows a state in which the main control board 50 is accommodated in the board case 56 (a state in which the main control board 50 is fixed to the lower cover 58 and the upper cover 57 and the lower cover 58 are fitted together). ) is viewed from above. Also, the main control board 50 is shown as seen through from the upper surface side of the upper cover 57 .

Furthermore, (b) shows Example 1 of a cross-sectional view taken along AA in FIG. (a), and (c) shows Example 2 of a cross-sectional view taken along AA in FIG. indicates In these cross-sectional views, hatching is omitted from the viewpoint of ease of viewing the drawings.
As shown in FIG. 10(a), when the main control board 50 is housed in the board case 56, the vertical direction of the upper cover 57 (the side of the main control board 50) (directly below) from the two gate traces 57b is: The model number display, management information display LED 74, setting value display LED 73, and main CPU 55 (socket) are set so as not to be positioned. As described above, the RWM 53, ROM 54, and failure confirmation LED are also mounted on the main control board 50, but it is preferable that the gate mark 57b is not positioned directly above them.

The reasons for arranging the gate marks 57 as described above are as follows.
Even after the slot machine 10 is placed on the market, the main control board 50 needs to be visually checked to see if it has been tampered with. In particular, it is necessary to confirm whether or not the main CPU 55 and the like (including the RWM 53 and ROM 54; the same shall apply hereinafter) are conforming, and whether or not they have been altered by cheating. Furthermore, since the main control board 50 is housed in the board case 56 and the board case 56 is sealed as described above, it is necessary to visually check the main control board 50 from the outside of the board case 56. be.
The board case 56 containing the main control board 50 is mounted inside the housing of the slot machine 10, for example, inside the rear surface thereof. This is because the numerical values displayed by the set value display LED 73 and the management information display LED 74 are mounted at positions where they are easy to see.

Therefore, it is considered that the administrator of the slot machine 10 looks at the substrate case 56 (main control substrate 50) from a direction perpendicular to the upper surface of the upper cover 57. FIG. That is, it is considered that the board case 56 (main control board 50) is visually observed as shown in FIG. 10(a). Therefore, if the main CPU 55 and the like are arranged in the vertical direction (directly below) the gate trace 57b, the gate trace 57b may hinder the visibility. In particular, the information displayed (printed, etc.) on the upper surface of the main CPU 55 or the like is also made visible without impeding visibility.

Since the entire upper cover 57 is molded from a transparent resin, visibility is not completely hindered even if it is directly below the gate marks 57b. However, as shown in FIGS. 10(b) and 10(c), the cross section of the gate trace 57b becomes an uneven surface, which reduces the visibility directly below the gate trace 57b (worse than a flat surface). It is certain. In addition, in the cross-sectional view of FIG. 10(b), since the upper end surface of the projection 57d is a cut surface, it may be whitened due to stress during cutting of the resin. Therefore, in this case as well, the visibility directly below the gate mark 57b is obstructed.

Moreover, since the upper surface of the upper cover 57 is transparent and has no unevenness except for the gate mark 57b, even if a hole is made by shoveling, it can be easily noticed visually.
On the other hand, the gate mark 57b is an uneven surface obtained by cutting the resin. For this reason, if the gate hole 57b is pierced and then sealed with, for example, a resin material, it may not be possible to visually determine whether or not the gate trace 57b has been pierced. For this reason, there is a possibility that a goto act using the gate mark 57b will be performed.

On the other hand, if a hole is made in the gate mark 57b, if the main CPU 55 and the like are positioned in the vertical direction (directly below) the gate mark 57b, it is easy for the player to cheat. Therefore, if the main CPU 55 and the like are not arranged in the vertical direction (directly below) the gate trace 57b, it becomes difficult to access the main CPU 55 and the like, and it is possible to make it difficult to do something.

In addition, since the model number displayed (printed, etc.) on the surface of the main control board 50 is also important information for checking whether there is any fraud, the model number display A gate trace 57b is prevented from being arranged right above the area. Furthermore, when there is a gate mark 57b directly above the model number display, in order to prevent unauthorized modification of the model number display by opening a hole in the gate mark 57b to access the inside of the board case 56, The gate marks 57b are not arranged right above the model number display.

Furthermore, it is necessary to see the numerical value displayed on the setting value display LED 73 when changing the setting or confirming the setting. Also, regarding the management information display LED 74, it is necessary to see the numerical values displayed in order to confirm whether the advantageous section ratio, the accessory ratio, and the like are within appropriate ranges. Therefore, the traces of the gate 57b are not arranged right above these LEDs. Furthermore, in the same manner as described above, holes are made in the gate traces 57b by using the gate traces 57b, and the LEDs in the substrate case 56 are accessed through the holes. The gate mark 57b is prevented from being arranged thereon.

Further, regarding the above-described failure confirmation LED, the administrator of the slot machine 10 operates the operation switch to confirm whether or not the failure confirmation LED corresponding to the operation switch lights up. For this reason, it is preferable that the gate mark 57b is not located right above the failure confirmation LED. In the same manner as described above, the failure check LED is not arranged in the vertical direction (directly below) the gate trace 57b to make it difficult for cheating to occur.

In FIG. 10, cross-sectional views of Example 1 shown in (b) and Example 2 shown in (c) have the same outer shape of the gate marks 57b. In Example 1 of (b), the inner side of the upper surface of the gate mark 57b remains flat. On the other hand, in example 2 of (c), the inside of the upper surface of the gate mark 57b is formed in a protruding shape (thickness).
The outside of the gate mark 57b has a protrusion 57d at its center and a depression 57c formed so as to sink into a cylindrical shape at its outer periphery. The boundary between the gate and the molded product is connected during molding, and this boundary is cut by a cutter when separating the molded product from the mold. Therefore, the upper end surface of the projection 57d is the cut surface by the cutter. There are two methods for cutting the boundary between the gate and the molded product: automatic cutting by a molding machine during injection, and cutting in a post-process.

Here, when cutting the boundary between the gate and the molded product, processing the cut surface into a completely smooth surface, in other words, making the height of the projection 57d almost "0" to a smooth surface reduces the cost. high and difficult. Therefore, the depression 57c is formed so that the projection 57d does not protrude above the upper surface of the upper cover 57 even if the projection 57d has some height. As a result, for example, when an assembling worker touches the upper cover 57, it is possible to prevent injury due to the projections 57d.

As shown in FIG. 10(b), when the recessed portion 57c is provided in the gate mark 57, the thickness of the upper cover 57 is reduced accordingly. In this way, if there is even a portion with a thin wall thickness, there is a risk that it will be easy to make a hole in the recessed portion 57c and access the inside of the substrate case 56. FIG.
Therefore, in example 2 of FIG. 10(c), a projection 57e is provided on the opposite side (inner side) of the upper surface outer side where the gate mark 57b is provided, and the thickness of the recessed portion 57c is prevented from becoming thin. there is If the projecting portion 57e is not provided to provide a thinned portion, it is possible to make it difficult to make a hole in the recessed portion 57c.

In addition, the protrusion 57e not only contributes to fraud countermeasures by preventing a portion of the thickness of the gate mark 57b from becoming thin, but also functions as a dimple (hot water pool) during molding. In FIG. 10 ((b)), when the resin (hot water) is injected from the gate (position corresponding to the protrusion 57d) of the mold, and the resin (hot water) collides with the inside of the upper surface, the resin (hot water) There is a risk that the flow will suddenly change and it will not be possible to flow stably. Therefore, by providing a dimple (hot water pool) at a position facing the tip of the gate, when the resin (hot water) is injected from the gate, it reduces the sudden change in the flow of the resin (hot water), (Hot water) becomes able to flow stably. The protrusion 57e may have various shapes such as a square cross section, a triangular cross section, a trapezoidal cross section (in the case of FIG. 10(c)), and a dome cross section. Any shape may be used as long as the shape can prevent this.

Regarding the visibility of the gate trace 57b in the vertical direction (directly below), a smooth lower side of the gate trace 57 is superior to an uneven shape. Therefore, the shape shown in FIG. 10B is superior to the shape shown in FIG. Also, the shape of FIG. 10B simplifies the shape of the mold as compared with the shape of FIG. lower cost).

Further, the gate mark 58b of the lower cover 58 is also provided on the outer side (lower side in FIG. 9). Furthermore, a projection 57d and a depression 57c shown in FIG. 10(b) are formed on the outside. This is because, as described above, it is convenient in terms of molding to provide the projection 57d and the recess 57c on the outside of the molded product.
Then, when the main control board 50 is fixed to the lower cover 58 , the pin positions of the main CPU 55 and the like of the main control board 50 are set so as not to be positioned in the vertical direction of the gate mark 58 b of the lower cover 58 . This is because a hole is made in the gate mark 58b of the lower cover 58 to prevent access to the pins of the main CPU 55 and the like.
When the gate mark 58b of the lower cover 58 has the shape shown in FIG. 10C, the protrusion 57e in FIG. Needless to say, the pins protruding from the lower surface side of the control board 50 and the protrusions 57e are formed so as not to interfere with each other (contact).

Further, as shown in FIG. 10(a), when the upper cover 57 and the lower cover 58 are fitted together, the gate marks 57b of the upper cover 57 and the gate marks 58b of the lower cover 58 overlap in the vertical direction. It is preferable to dispose (shift) so as not to In particular, in the case of the gate traces 57b and 58b shown in FIG. 10(b), the thickness of a portion of the gate traces 57b and 58b (recessed portion 57c) is thin, but the thinner portion is the upper cover. By arranging the 57 and the lower cover 58 at positions that do not overlap each other, it is possible to prevent overlapping of parts that are likely to be targeted.
Further, when the gate mark 57b of the upper cover 57 and the gate mark 58b of the lower cover 58 overlap in the vertical direction, the position of the gate mark of the other cover can be known by just looking at one cover. turn into. In order to prevent this, the gate marks 57b of the upper cover 57 and the gate marks 58b of the lower cover 58 are arranged not to overlap in the vertical direction.

<Third Embodiment>
In the third embodiment, when a command is transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub control board 80, communication between the main control board 50 and the sub control board 80 is temporarily disabled (disconnection). After that, it relates to processing when communication is restored, when communication fails due to the influence of noise, etc.).
As described above, the control command transmitting means 71 of the main control board 50 transmits to the sub-control board 80 commands such as the pressing order instruction number and the information of the operated stop switch 42 . Then, the sub-control board 80 outputs an effect based on the command received from the main control board 50, and updates the effect according to the operation of the operation switch during the game.

Here, there is a possibility that the connection between the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 will be disconnected and communication will be disabled. Possible causes include poor contact and radio-controlled goto. When the sub-control board 80 stops receiving commands from the main control board 50, the effect stops at the current state. Neither the main control board 50 nor the sub-control board 80 determines the presence or absence of disconnection in communication between them. Therefore, even if a disconnection occurs between the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80, the main control board 50 can continue to progress the game (operation of the bet switch 40, the start switch 41, and the stop switch 42). etc.) to continue the command transmission process to the sub-control board 80 . On the other hand, when the sub-control board 80 does not receive a command from the main control board 50, it maintains the rendering state at that time.
Even when the line between the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 is broken, for example, during AT, the main control board 50 operates the instruction function to display the number of acquisition LEDs 78 in the pressing order. Display instructional information. As a result, even when the sub-control board 80 does not function normally, the player can see the pressing order instruction information and operate the stop switches 42 in the correct pressing order.
Furthermore, since the player can compare the pressing order instruction information displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78 with the effect content (correct pressing order) displayed as an image on the image display device 23, the information of the two is contradictory. If so, it can be known that the image display by the sub-control board 80 is defective.

For example, when disconnection occurs in the middle of the "N" game and communication is restored in the middle of the "N+1" game, the sub-control board 80 can receive commands sent from the main control board 50. Occasionally, the presentation cannot be suddenly switched to the "N+1" game. Even when the communication is restored, the sub-control board 80 does not receive a command related to the operation of the start switch 41 (a command for notifying the start of the game), and notifies that the "N+1" game item has started. This is because it cannot be determined. Therefore, when the communication between the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 is disconnected and then restored, the player may be misunderstood depending on the content of the presentation.
Therefore, in the third embodiment, when the communication between the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 is disconnected and then restored, the performance is given a sense of incongruity while minimizing misunderstandings for the player. Outputs a rendition that does not exist.

11 shows the operation of the main control board 50 in the third embodiment (referred to as "main action" in FIG. 11) and the display of effects by the sub-control board 80 (referred to as "sub-display" in FIG. 11). .), and shows five examples consisting of pattern 1 (example 1) to pattern 5 (example 5).
Patterns 1 to 5 each show an example in which communication becomes impossible (disconnection occurs) in the middle of the "N"th game, and communication is restored in the middle of the "N+1"th game.
In addition, in the main operation of FIG. 11, "bet" means when the bet switch 40 is operated and the specified number is effectively betted. Further, "start" means that the game is started by operating the start switch 41 after the specified number has been betted. Furthermore, for example, "right stop" means that the right stop switch 42 has been operated (the right reel 31 is stopped).

Further, in the sub-display, "pressing order effect" means, for example, in a game in which the pressing order bell or pressing order replay is won, the correct pressing order is displayed as an image. Specifically, for example, "right-left-middle display" means an effect for notifying that the correct pressing order is "right-left-middle". For example, "left middle display" is an effect after the left stop switch 42 is operated, indicating that the second stop switch to be operated is the left and the third to be operated the middle stop switch. It means a performance to inform.
Furthermore, for example, the "right stop effect" is a effect that the right stop switch 42 has been operated (the right reel 31 has stopped) when a command indicating that the right stop switch 42 has been operated is received. means.

In pattern 1, when the start switch 41 is operated in the "N" game, the main control board 50 draws a winning combination as described above. In this game, "right, left, middle" is an example of winning the pressing order bell, which is the correct pressing order. In this case, the main control board 50 transmits a pressing order instruction number (command) corresponding to the correct pressing order "right, left, middle" to the sub control board 80 during AT. When the sub-control board 80 receives this command, it outputs to the image display device 23 a pressing order presentation that displays the correct pressing order of "right, left, middle".
Although not shown, the main control board 50 displays the pressing order instruction information corresponding to the correct pressing order "right, left, middle" on the acquired number display LED 78 (operation of the instruction function).

Next, it is assumed that the player operates the right stop switch 42 as the first stop (right stop) after seeing the correct pressing order. As a result, the right reel 31 stops and a command to that effect is sent to the sub-control board 80 . When the sub-control board 80 receives the command, it outputs an effect (right stop effect) in which the right stop switch 42 is operated (the right reel 31 is stopped), and displays right-left center display, left-center display (in addition, other , such as "-left center", "x left center", etc.).
Pattern 1 shows an example in which a disconnection occurs after the right reel 31 stops and communication between the main control board 50 and the sub control board 80 becomes impossible (sub disconnection). That is, this is an example in which communication becomes impossible in the middle of a game.

Even if communication between the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 becomes impossible (even if the sub-control board 80 does not function), the game can proceed. The example of pattern 1 shows an example in which the left and middle stop switches 42 are respectively operated (the left and middle reels 31 are stopped) after the disconnection occurs in the "N" game (left middle stop ).

Next, it is assumed that a bet operation for the "N+1" game is performed and the start switch 41 is operated. In the "N+1"th game, as in the "N"th game, "right, left, middle" shows an example of winning the push order bell (or push order replay), which is the correct push order. In addition, in the "N+1" game, similarly to the "N" game, an example is shown in which the stop switch 42 is operated in the right, left, middle pressing order. Any role lottery result may be used.

When winning the push order bell (or push order replay) having the correct push order in the "N+1" game, the main control board 50 displays the push order instruction information on the winning number display LED 78. - 特許庁Therefore, even if the image display device 23 does not display the image of the correct pressing order, the player can operate the stop switch 42 in the correct pressing order according to the pressing order instruction information displayed on the winning number display LED 78. Become.

In the "N+1" game, the player operates the right stop switch 42 first. After that, it is assumed that communication between the main control board 50 and the sub control board 80 is restored before the second left stop switch 42 is operated.
Accordingly, when the player operates the left stop switch 42 which is the second stop switch 42 , the command is transmitted to the sub-control board 80 . When the sub-control board 80 receives this command, it updates the image display so as to correspond to the received command. That is, an image indicating that the left stop has been performed is displayed (left stop effect). Here, the sub-control board 80 updates the effect that has already been displayed, that is, the effect of the "N" game.

Therefore, actually, the second stop switch 42 (left) of the "N+1" game is operated, but the sub-control board 80 indicates that the second stop switch 42 (left) of the "N" game is Outputs the effect when operated. Since the second correct pressing order in the "N"th game is left, in this example, the operation is performed in the correct pressing order. Therefore, the sub-control board 80 outputs the left stop effect (the pressing order correct effect) and outputs the final middle display effect.

Then, in the "N+1" game, when the last middle stop switch 42 is operated, a command to that effect is transmitted to the sub-control board 80. - 特許庁When the sub-control board 80 receives this command, it outputs an effect corresponding to the third stop of the "N" game, that is, an intermediate stop effect.
Even if a winning combination having the correct order is won in the "N+1" game, and the correct order is other than right, left, middle, under the situation of pattern 1, the effect is output as described above. be done. That is, in the "N+1" game, when the pressing order operated by the player is right, left, or middle, even if the pressing order corresponds to the incorrect pressing order, the pressing order fails as in pattern 2 described later. No performance is output.

Furthermore, in the "N+1" game, if a winning combination that does not have a correct pressing order is won, or if the winning combination is not won, if the pressing order operated by the player is right, left, middle, the above-mentioned The same effect is output as That is, even if the "N+1" game item does not have the correct pressing order, the sub-control board 80 (in the example of pattern 1) indicates that the left stop switch 42 has been operated after the communication is restored. When the command is received, the left stop effect (pressing order correct effect) is output, and further, the middle display is output.

Next, when a bet for the "N+2" game is made and the "N+2" game is started by operating the start switch 41, the main control board 50 instructs the sub control board 80 to say " N+2" transmits a command corresponding to the start of the game. As a result, the sub-control board 80 outputs an effect at the start of the "N+2" game. Specifically, when the start switch 41 is operated, commands for the effect group number and the pressing order instruction number are transmitted to the sub-control board 80 . When the sub-control board 80 receives these commands, it performs a push order effect and a display of the correct push order as at the start of the "N" game.

As described above, in pattern 1, until the third stop of the "N+1" game, the sub-control board 80, based on the command received from the main control board 50 ("N+1" game), continue to output, and when the 'N+2' game is started, the 'N+2'game's effect is updated.
In addition, when the game ends, the main control board 50 may transmit a command indicating the number of winning coins to the sub-control board 80, and the sub-control board 80 may also display an image of the number of winning coins during the AT. In such a case, the sub-control board 80 cannot receive the command for the winning number at the end of the "N"th game, that is, during disconnection. ” The number of coins obtained at the end of the game will remain displayed. Then, when the communication is restored and the command for the winning number is received at the end of the "N+1" game, the sub-control board 80 updates the image display so that the number obtained at the end of the "N+1" game is displayed. .

In pattern 2, the main operation is the same as in pattern 1. Also, the disconnection timing is the same as pattern 1, but the communication recovery timing is different from pattern 2. FIG. Pattern 2 is an example in which communication is restored after the left stop, which is the second stop, in the "N+1" game.
In pattern 2, the main action and sub-display in the "N" game are the same as in pattern 1, so the description is omitted.
Next, in the "N+1" game, the stop switches 42 are operated in the order of right, left, middle, and communication is restored after the left second stop.

Immediately before the communication is restored, the sub-control board 80 is outputting the right stop effect for the "N" game item and the middle left display. In this state, communication is restored, and when the player operates the stop switch 42 (third stop) during the “N+1” game, the command is sent to the sub-control board 80 . When the sub-control board 80 receives the middle stop command while displaying the middle left, the sub-control board 80 determines that the pressing order is incorrect, and outputs a pressing order failure presentation. Note that, in the third embodiment, after the pressing order failure effect is output, the subsequent pressing order effect is not output.

It should be noted that, in the "N + 1" game, when it is assumed that the stop switch 42 is operated in the order of pressing the middle left and right, communication is restored after the middle left stop, and the right stop command is sub-controlled by the right stop after that. Also when it is transmitted to the substrate 80, the pressing order failure effect is output in the same manner as described above. Since the sub-control board 80 is in the process of outputting the right stop effect and the left center display, if the right stop command is received at this time, it means that the same stop command has been received twice in one game. . Even in such a case, it is processed as failure in the pressing order without performing error notification or the like, and the effect is output.
When the "N+2" game is started in the same manner as in pattern 1, a command for starting the "N+2" game is transmitted to the sub-control board 80 . Thereby, the sub-control board 80 starts the effect of the "N+2" game.

In pattern 3, the main action and sub-display of the "N"th game are the same as in pattern 1.
Pattern 3 shows an example in which communication is restored after the first stop right and the second stop in the "N+1" game. Therefore, in the "N+1" game, after communication is restored, a left stop command, which is the third stop, is transmitted to the sub-control board 80 . Since the sub-control board 80 outputs the "left center display" for the "N" game, when the command for left stop is received in this state, it is judged as the correct pressing order. Therefore, the sub-control board 80 outputs a left stop effect (correct pressing order effect) and then outputs a middle display.

However, on the main control board 50 side, the "N+1" game ends with the left third stop. Next, when the game shifts to the "N+2" game, and a command for starting the "N+2" game is transmitted to the sub-control board 80, the sub-control board 80 receives the command and receives the "N+2" game. Switch to the performance at the start. Therefore, the left stop effect and middle display that have been output until then are cancelled. Also, even if a command for the start of the "N+2"th game is received while the middle display is being output, no error notification or the like is performed, and an effect for the start of the "N+2"th game is output according to the received command. .

Pattern 4 is an example of displaying the number of remaining games during AT in the sub-display. Also, in pattern 4, the main operation, disconnection timing, and communication recovery timing are the same as in pattern 3. FIG.
The main control board 50 transmits a command indicating the number of remaining AT games to the sub control board 80 at the start of each game. When the sub-control board 80 receives a command for the remaining number of AT games from the main control board 50, it updates the display of the remaining number of AT games. During the AT, the display of the number of remaining games is not performed independently, but is output together with pattern 3's pressing order effect.

In pattern 4, when the start switch 41 is operated (at the start of the game), the main control board 50 transmits a command indicating the number of remaining games during AT to the sub-control board 80 . Here, in the "N"th game, it is assumed that the number of AT remaining games is 10 games.
The sub control board 80 displays the number of remaining games during AT (10 remaining games) based on the command received from the main control board 50 at the start of the "N"th game.
Then, if the disconnection occurs in the middle of the "N" game, and the disconnection state continues at the start of the "N+1" game, the main control board 50, at the start (at the start) of the "N+1" game, Although processing for transmitting a command for the remaining number of games played during AT (9 games) is executed to the control board 80, the sub-control board 80 cannot receive the command (due to disconnection). Therefore, in the "N+1"th game, the "remaining 10 games" of the "N"th game remains displayed.

Then, when the communication is restored in the middle of the "N+1" game (after the left middle stop) and the game shifts to the "N+2" game, the main control board 50 changes to the sub control board 80 at the start of the "N+2" game. In response, a command for the number of remaining games (8 games) during AT is transmitted. When the sub-control board 80 receives this command, it updates the display of the remaining 10 games to the display of the remaining 8 games.

Pattern 5 is the same as pattern 4 in terms of the main action, disconnection timing, and communication recovery timing, but is an example in which the "N" game is the remaining AT game.
The main control board 50 transmits to the sub control board 80 a command indicating the number of remaining games during AT (one remaining game) at the start of the "N"th game (when the start switch 41 is operated). When the sub-control board 80 receives this command, it updates the display to one remaining game (from the display of two remaining games up to that point).
When disconnection occurs after the right stop of the "N" game, the main control board 50 determines that the number of remaining games during AT is 0 at the start of the "N+1" game (when the start switch 41 is operated). A command indicating that it is a game is transmitted to the sub-control board 80, but the sub-control board 80 cannot receive the command (same as pattern 4). Therefore, at the start of the "N+1" game, the display indicating that there is one AT game remaining is continued.

Further, the sub-control board 80 outputs an AT end effect when ending the AT. The AT end effect is executed at the end of the game based on receiving (at the start of the game) a command indicating that the number of remaining games during the AT is 0 games.
However, in the example of pattern 5, the sub-control board 80 does not receive the command indicating that the number of remaining games during the AT is 0, so the AT end effect is not output. Therefore, even when the "N+1" games are finished, an effect indicating that there is one AT game remaining is output.

When the "N+1" game is completed and the "N+2" game is started, the main control board 50 sends a command indicating normal game (non-AT) to the sub control board 80 at the start of the "N+2" game. Send. Upon receipt of this command, the sub-control board 80 erases the display of "1 game remaining" and outputs normal (non-AT) effects.
At the end of the AT, an image such as "Pachinko/Pachislot is a game machine for moderate enjoyment" is displayed in order to prevent addiction. However, in the case of pattern 5, since the sub-display has not returned to normal at the end of the "N+1" game, the image cannot be displayed. Therefore, as a countermeasure against this, the game history is managed on the side of the sub-control board 80, and when the next game ("N+2" game in the example of FIG. 11) is started across the end of AT, The image display may be performed at the start of .

In the above patterns 1 to 5, when disconnection occurs in the "N" game, the sub-control board 80 continues to output the effect immediately before the disconnection in the "N" game until the communication is restored, and "N+1 ' When the communication is restored in the middle of the game, the continuation of the effect output as the 'N' game is output based on the command received at the 'N+1' game. Therefore, for example, in pattern 1, when a left stop command is received after communication is restored in the "N+1" game, regardless of whether the stop switch 42 was actually operated in the correct order, the correct answer is received. The pressing order effect is output.

On the other hand, in pattern 1, for example, in the "N+1"th game, if a command for intermediate stop is received after communication is restored, the order of pressing the effect output at that time, that is, the "N"th game Since the incorrect pressing order is displayed for the middle left display, the pressing order failure presentation is output regardless of whether the stop switch 42 is actually operated in the correct pressing order. However, even if the pushing order failure effect is output in the "N+1" game, if the player operates the stop switch 42 according to the correct pushing order in the "N+1" game, the symbols are advantageous to the player. Since the combination is stopped and displayed, the player is not disadvantaged.

As described above, when the communication is restored in the "N+1" game, in the "N+1" game, the effect that takes over the effect before disconnection ("N" game) is output, and the "N+2" game is output. Reset rendition at start (return to correct rendition). As a result, it is possible to minimize the output of an unnatural performance in both the game in which the disconnection occurs and the game in which the communication is restored, and to prevent the player from being misunderstood as much as possible.

Also, in the example of FIG. 11, after the disconnection occurred in the "N" game, the communication was restored in the "N+1" game. However, it is the same as in FIG.
For example, if a disconnection occurs in the "N" game and communication is restored in the "N+a" game (a = "2" or more), the disconnection in the "N" game will continue until the "N+a-1" game. The effect just before the previous one continues to be output. Then, in the "N+a"th game in which the communication is restored, the continuation of the "N"th game effect in which the output has been continued is executed based on the command received after the communication is restored. Next, at the start of the "N+a+1" game, the effect (correct effect) at the start of the "N+a+1" game is updated.

<Fourth Embodiment>
When the reel 31 is rotated and stopped, the motor 32 performs acceleration, constant speed, deceleration, and stop processing, all of which are in an excited state. Then, when the rotation of the motor 32 is stopped, the four phases are simultaneously excited for a predetermined time (time T11 to be described later) (hereinafter referred to as "four-phase excitation state").
The fourth embodiment relates to the time relationship between the operation of the stop button 42a of the stop switch 42 and the four-phase excitation state when the motor 32 is stopped.
FIG. 12 is a sectional view showing the relationship between the operation of the stop button 42a and the detection sensor 42e in the fourth embodiment. It should be noted that hatching is omitted in FIG. 12 from the viewpoint of visibility of the drawing. Also, FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram for explaining the fourth embodiment, and does not mean that the actual product has the structure shown in FIG. In FIG. 12, the process from when the stop button 42a is pushed to when it returns is illustrated in the order of (a)→(b)→(c)→(d). In the drawing, the upper side is the player's side, and the lower side is the inside of the slot machine 10 . In the drawing, the side above the front door 12 is the side seen by the player.
Furthermore, the line along which the detection sensor 42e detects the moving piece 42d is indicated by a dotted line. It is assumed that the moment when the tip of the moving piece 42d contacts the dotted line is the moment when the detecting sensor 42e detects the moving piece 42d.

In FIG. 12(a), the stop button 42a is the operating body of the stop switch 42, and is operated (pushed inside the slot machine 10) when the player turns on the stop switch 42. As shown in FIG. The player side of the stop button 42a is arranged to protrude from the front door 12 provided on the front surface of the housing of the slot machine 10 by about several millimeters. When viewed from the front of the player side, this portion has a substantially cylindrical shape. In the unloaded state, the stop button 42a is urged in the F3 direction (outward direction, player direction) in FIG. The player-side end of 42 a protrudes from the front door 12 . In this state, the bottom surface of the stop button 42a (hereinafter referred to as "flange-shaped portion") and the front door 12 are in contact with each other.
On the other hand, the stopper 42b is provided inside the front door 12 (inside the housing), and contacts the stop button 42a when the stop button 42a is pushed, prohibiting further movement of the stop button 42a. is.

A movable piece 42d that can be moved integrally with the stop button 42a is provided on the bottom side of the stop button 42a in the drawing. Furthermore, a detection sensor 42e for detecting the movement of the moving piece 42d is arranged directly below the moving piece 42d. In the no-load state shown in (a) of the drawing, when the stop button 42a is biased toward the front door 12 by the biasing force of the coil spring 42c, the tip (lower end in the drawing) of the moving piece 42d is It is arranged at a position away from the detection sensor 42e. Therefore, in the state of (a) in the drawing, the detection sensor 42e does not detect the moving piece 42d, and is in the OFF state.

Next, as shown in (b) of the drawing, when the player stops the rotation of the reels 31, the player pushes the stop button 42a in the F4 direction. As a result, the stop button 42a moves downward in the drawing against the biasing force of the coil spring 42c. When the stop button 42a moves downward in the drawing, the moving piece 42d integrated with the stop button 42a also moves downward in the drawing. As a result, the tip of the moving piece 42d enters the detection sensor 42e. Then, when the tip of the moving piece 42d contacts the dotted line of the detection sensor 42e, the detection sensor 42e is turned on from the off state. FIG. 12(b) shows the position of each member at the moment when the detection sensor 42e is turned on from the off state. At the moment the detection sensor 42e is turned on, the flange-like portion of the stop button 42a is not yet in contact with the stopper 42b, and there is a gap between the stop button 42a and the stopper 42b.

When the stop button 42a is further pushed from the state of FIG. 12(b), as shown in FIG. 12(c), the flange-like portion of the stop button 42a comes into contact with the stopper 42c. This position is the deepest part when the stop button 42a is pushed. In addition, in the state of FIG. 12(c), the detection sensor 42e is in the ON state because the tip of the moving piece 42d is being detected by the detection sensor 42e.

When the player releases the push of the stop button 42a from the state of FIG. 12(c) (excluding the force in the F4 direction in FIG. 12(c)), the stop button 42a is pushed by the urging force F3 of the coil spring 42c. A force is applied to return to the initial position. As a result, the stop button 42a and the moving piece 42d integrated with the stop button 42a move upward in the figure. As a result, the tip of the moving piece 42d is no longer in contact with the dotted line of the detection sensor 42e, and the detection sensor 42e changes from the on state to the off state (FIG. 12(d)).

FIG. 12(d) shows the arrangement of each member at the moment when the detection sensor 42e is turned off from the on state. In the state of FIG. 12(d), the stop button 42a has not returned to the final position. When the stop button 42a is further released from the state of FIG. 12(d), the stop button 42a comes into contact with the flange-like portion of the front door 12, and the stop button 42a stops at this position. This state is the state shown in FIG. 12(a), which is the no-load state of the stop button 42a.
The state of FIG. 12(b) showing the timing when the detection sensor 42e is turned on from the off state and the state of FIG. 12(d) showing the timing when the detection sensor 42e is turned off from the on state are generally different. Although they are the same, there is no particular problem even if there is a slight deviation.

13A and 13B are time charts showing the relationship between the operation of the stop button 42a and the excitation state of the motor 32, etc., in the fourth embodiment. FIG. 13A shows Example 1, and FIG. show.
In FIG. 13(a), the stop button 42a is at the initial position (FIG. 12(a)) in the no-load state, and the moment when the stop button 42a starts to be pushed is S41. S42 is the time when the stop button 42a is pushed and the detection sensor 42e is turned on from off, that is, when the state shown in FIG. 12(b) is reached. Further, the stop button 42a is pushed from that position, and the time when the stop button 42a reaches the deepest portion (the state shown in FIG. 12(c)) is defined as S43. The times S41, S42, and S43 described above depend on the pressing speed of the player and are not constant. If the stop button 42a is pushed slowly, the time from time S41 to S43 is lengthened, and if the stop button 42a is pushed quickly, the time from time S41 to S43 is shortened.

Next, at time S44, the depression of the stop button 42a is released. It is assumed that the stop button 42a is positioned at the deepest position at time S44.
When the stop button 42a is released from being pushed, the spring force of the coil spring 42c acts to return the stop button 42a to the initial position, as described above. It is assumed that the operator of the stop button 42a does not touch the stop button 42a from the moment the stop button 42a is released.
S45 is the time when the detection sensor 42e is turned off, that is, when the state shown in FIG. 12(d) is reached. Here, the time from time S44 to time S45 is assumed to be T11.

The time T11 is a variable determined by the spring force (spring constant) of the coil spring 42c and the stroke (travel distance) of the stop button 42a from the deepest position to the position where the detection sensor 42e is turned off. In Example 1 of (a), the spring force (spring constant) of the coil spring 42c and the stroke of the stop button 42a are designed so that the time T11 is 100 ms.

On the other hand, when the turn-on of the stop switch 42 (specifically, the turn-on of the detection sensor 42e) is detected (in the state of FIG. 12(b)), the reel control means 65 controls the reel corresponding to the stop switch 42 The stop control of 31 is executed, and the reel 31 is stopped at a position corresponding to the result of the combination lottery by the combination lottery means (the result determined by the internal lottery means). The time from when the stop control of the reel 31 is started (after the detection sensor 42e is turned on) to when the reel 31 is stopped is, as described above, (except for the predetermined reel 31 during the MB game). It is set within 190 ms (when the number of symbols on the reel 31 is 21, the number of moving frames is within 5, and when the number of symbols on the reel 31 is 20, the number of moving frames is within 4). Therefore, the time from the start of deceleration of the reel 31 to the stop of the reel 31 is not constant because it varies depending on the winning combination lottery result and the position of the reel 31 at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated.

Furthermore, after the reel 31 is moved to the predetermined position, the reel control means 65 causes the motor 32 to be in a state in which four phases are simultaneously excited (brakes are being applied) for a predetermined time (the four-phase excitation state described above). ).
Here, the motor 32 in the present embodiment is a four-phase stepping motor, and during the rotation of the motor 32 (reel 31), for example, 1-2 phase excitation is performed (not limited to 1-2 phase excitation). do not have). Therefore, even while the motor 32 is rotating, there is one excitation state. When stopping the rotation of the motor 32, the four-phase excitation state is set.
When performing a bound stop after moving the reel 31 to a predetermined position (when making it appear that the reel 31 is vibrating at the stop position), for example, the 3-phase excitation state should be set instead of the 4-phase excitation state. is also possible.

The moment the motor 32 stops rotating, there is a risk that the motor 32 and the reel 31 will go over the desired stop position due to the inertia of the motor 32 and the reel 31 during rotation. By setting a four-phase excitation state and generating a static torque, it is prevented from moving from the stop position by inertia. When the motor 32 is in the four-phase excitation state, acceptance of the next operation of the stop switch 42 is not permitted. At the time of the first or second stop, acceptance of the operation of the next stop switch 42 is permitted only when the detection sensor 42e of the operated stop switch 42 changes from the on state to the off state (returns to the state of FIG. 12(d). ), and when the four-phase excitation state of the motor 32 whose rotational drive is stopped ends.

The reason for such control is as follows.
In order to hold the reel 31 at the stop position, the motor 32 is controlled to be in a four-phase excitation state. It's getting bigger. Therefore, in order to reduce this load, it is possible to accept the operation of the next stop button 42a after the four-phase excitation state of one motor 32 is finished.

In example 1 of FIG. 13(a), when the winning combination lottery result by the winning combination lottery means (the result determined by the internal lottery means) is a predetermined result (for example, when the bell is won in the order of pushing), the four-phase excitation state is established. The excitation time T12 from start to finish is set to 90 interrupts (2.235×90=201.15 ms). Here, the reason why the excitation time T12 in the four-phase excitation state is set to "90 interrupt" when the winning combination lottery result is a predetermined result is that the excitation time T12 is always constant regardless of the winning combination lottery result. It means that it is not necessarily

Therefore, in example 1 of the fourth embodiment, it is set to be "T11<T12".
Here, when the stop control of the reel 31 is started from time S42, the reel 31 stops within 190 ms. As described above, when the number of symbols on the reel 31 is "21", the number of moving frames during the stop control is within 5 frames (minimum of 1 frame), or when the number of symbols on the reel 31 is "20" Since the number of moving frames during the stop control is within 4 frames (minimum 1 frame), the reel 31 stops within about "40" to "190" ms from time S42.
On the other hand, the time from when the detection sensor 42e is turned on from the off state until the stop button 42e reaches the deepest position and the pressing force of the stop button 42e is released (time from time S42 to time S44) is , "40" to "180" ms. Therefore, the time when the four-phase excitation state of the motor 32 is started and the time S44 when the depression of the stop button 42a is released are close to each other (almost at the same time).

Therefore, in Example 1, the four-phase excitation state is started at the timing (time S44) when the depression of the stop button 42a is released. It is designed so that the four-phase excitation state of the motor 32 ends (time T12 elapses). Therefore, when the four-phase excitation state of the motor 32 ends, it can be set so that the next operation of the stop button 42a can be accepted.
In this way, if the detection sensor 42e is designed to be turned off before the end of the four-phase excitation state, it is possible to permit acceptance of the next operation of the stop button 42a when the four-phase excitation state is ended. . This allows the game to proceed at high speed.

On the other hand, in example 2 of FIG. 13(b), from the moment when the push of the stop button 42a reaching the deepest part is released (time S44) until the detection sensor 42e turns off (at time S45). This is an example in which the time T11 (until arrival) is set to 300 ms. Therefore, the return time of the stop button 42a is three times longer than in Example 1. As described above, the return time of the stop button 42a can be set (adjusted) by the spring force (spring constant) of the coil spring 42c and the stroke of the stop button 42a.

On the other hand, in example 2, the time T12 from the start to the end of the four-phase excitation state is set to 45 interrupts (100.575 ms).
In Example 2, as in Example 1, the four-phase excitation state is started at the moment (time S44) when the stop button 42a that has reached the deepest position is released. It is designed so that the detection sensor 42e is turned off after the excitation state ends. Therefore, when the detection sensor 42e is turned off, it can be set so that the next operation of the stop button 42a can be accepted.

In this way, by designing the four-phase excitation state to end when the detection sensor 42e is turned off, acceptance of the next operation of the stop button 42a is permitted when the detection sensor 42e is turned off. can do. This allows the game to proceed at high speed.
As described above, both Example 1 and Example 2 have advantages in terms of control.
Examples 1 and 2 of FIG. 13 show examples in which the time T12 from the start to the end of the four-phase excitation state is different. However, for example, when the four-phase excitation time T12 is a constant value, if "T11<T12", the next stop button 42a can be accepted when the four-phase excitation state ends. Therefore, when the four-phase excitation time T12 is a constant value, the game can be completed at a higher speed in Example 1.

<Fifth Embodiment>
The fifth embodiment relates to the relationship between power on/off and program activation.
FIG. 14 is a time chart showing an outline of control in the fifth embodiment.
In FIG. 14, (a) is a diagram showing a state when a power failure occurs after the main program (program of the main control board 50) is activated. It is assumed that the power is turned on at time S51 and then turned off at time S55.
When the power is turned on at time S51 (when the power switch 11 is turned on in FIG. 1), power supply starts to both the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80, and the main control board 50 and The voltage level on the sub-control board 80 gradually increases and reaches the supply level V0 (the level when the power is on). In FIG. 14, the voltage supply level V0, the power failure detection level V1, and the drive voltage limit V2 are the same as in FIG. 3 (first embodiment (A)).

S52 is the time when the voltage levels of the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 reach the supply level V0 after the power is turned on at time S51. After that, the sub-program by the sub-control board 80 is activated from time S53 when time T22 has elapsed from time S52. Thereafter, the main program by the main control board 50 is activated from time S54 when time T23 (T23>T22) has elapsed from time S52. In this way, the sub-program is started first and then the main program is started when the main control board 50 transmits the first command after power-on to the sub-control board 80. , the sub-control board 80 side to be ready to receive the command.

Next, when a power failure (the power switch 11 is turned off, a power failure, or the like) occurs at time S55, the voltage levels of the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 gradually decrease. Even if the voltage level drops, the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 can execute power-off processing as long as the voltage is equal to or higher than the drive voltage limit V2.
Further, when the power failure occurs at time S55, the voltage becomes the power failure detection level V1 at time T0 (20 interrupt) as in FIG. 3, and the power failure is detected (time S56). Furthermore, after the detection of the power-off, the power-off process is executed, for example, after one interrupt, as in FIG. It is assumed that the power-off process ends at time S57.
After that, when time S58 is reached, the voltage drops below the drive voltage limit V2, and the program (process) cannot be executed. Therefore, control is performed so that the power-off process is completed before reaching time S58.

When the main program starts at time S54, the main CPU 55 is set, the RWM 53 is checked, whether or not the previous power-off was normal, confirmation of the setting key switch state, etc. are performed, and then interrupt processing is started. . When the setting key switch is off, the power failure recovery process (initialization of a predetermined range of the RWM 53, etc.) is executed after starting the interrupt process. On the other hand, when the setting key switch is on, the setting change process is started after the interrupt process is activated.
Then, as shown in FIG. 14(a), when power is cut off after starting the main program, when the setting key switch is off, the power cut-off process is executed after the power cut-off recovery process is completed. do. This allows the program to terminate normally.
On the other hand, if the power is turned off after the main program is started, and the setting key switch is on, the power is turned off without starting the setting change process. This is because a problem may occur if the setting change process is executed after a power failure occurs.

In order to execute the main program normally, the setting of the main CPU 55 and the check of the RWM 53 are always executed even when the power failure is detected at the same time as the start of the main program.
Furthermore, after starting the main program, even if the power supply is turned off after that, the program is always executed until the interrupt start. This is for detecting power interruption in interrupt processing. As in the first embodiment (A), for example, at the "N"th interruption, a voltage drop (power interruption detection level V1) at which it is determined that a power interruption has occurred is detected, and the next "N+1" game is detected. However, when the voltage drop is detected, power cutoff is detected at the "N+1" interrupt (determined as power cutoff). Then, power-off processing is executed from the "N+2" interrupt.

In the example of FIG. 14(a), the main program is started at time S54, and the power is turned off at time S55. However, even if the power is cut off at the same time as the time S54 (startup of the main program), the power cutoff process can be completed before the voltage reaches the driving voltage limit V2.
Note that in FIG. 14(a), the time T21 from when the power is turned on (time S51) until the voltage reaches the supply level V0 (time S52) is when the voltage goes low after the power is turned off (time S55). is set to be shorter than the time T24.
Also, the time T23 (the time from when the voltage reaches the supply level V0 to when the main program starts up) is set to be shorter than the time T24.

FIG. 14(b) shows an example when the power is cut off before the main control board 50 starts the main program. In the example of FIG. 14B, the power is turned on at time S51 and turned off at time S59. Here, time S59 is earlier than time S54 in FIG. 14(a). That is, after the power supply (supply level V0) necessary for starting the main program is supplied, the power supply is interrupted before the predetermined time (time T23) elapses (before the time S54 is reached), and the voltage drops. For example. In such a case, the main program will not start. Therefore, after that, the voltage gradually decreases, and finally the power supply becomes Low level.
In the example of FIG. 14(b), when the power is turned on again, it can be started normally.
Also, although not shown in FIG. 14, it is conceivable that the power failure occurs immediately after the subprogram is activated (after time S53) and before time S54 (before the main program is activated). be done.
When the power is turned off at the above timing, the subprogram executes the power-off processing of the subprogram. Then, it is possible to end the power-off processing of the subprogram before the voltage supplied to the sub-control board 80 reaches the driving voltage limit V2.
Also, since the power cutoff at the above timing is the power cutoff before the start of the main program, the main program is not started as described above.

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above, the present invention is not limited to the contents described above, and various modifications such as those described below are possible.
(1) In this embodiment, the passage sensor 46 is provided. This is because the passage sensor 46 is effective as an anti-fraud countermeasure as well as increasing the precision of medal insertion determination. However, the passage sensor 46 may not be provided, and only the pair of entry sensors 44a and 44b may be provided.

(2) In FIG. 2, the insertion sensors 44a and 44b are configured to detect the medals M moving in the substantially horizontal direction, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the medal M is dropped substantially vertically downward, the insertion sensors 44a and 44b may detect the medal M. As shown in FIG.
(3) In FIG. 2, the blocker 45 is arranged on the lower side of the medal passage, but it is not limited to this. Any mechanism may be used as long as it has a function of ejecting the medal M out of the medal passage before the medal M is detected by the insertion sensor 44a.
In addition, as shown in FIG. 2, the insertion sensors 44a and 44b are shown to detect a slightly higher position than the central position of the medal M when viewed from the front, but the actual product may be configured in this way. does not mean The insertion sensors 44a and 44b may be arranged in any manner as long as they are arranged so as to reliably detect the passing medals M.

(4) In FIG. 3, the time T2 is the time from the moment when the medal M is positioned at M2 to the moment when the medal M is positioned at M4, but it is not limited to this. For example, when the medal M is at the position M1 in FIG. 2, the time from the moment it is released until it reaches M4 may be set to T2, and "T2>T1" may be set. Alternatively, the time required for the medal M to reach M4 from any predetermined position between M1 and M2 may be T2, and "T2>T1" may be set.

(5) In the first embodiment (A), when the power is cut off at the moment when the medal M is positioned at M2, the power cut-off process is executed until the medal M reaches M4. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the power is cut off at the moment when the medal M is positioned at M2, the power cut-off process may be executed until the medal M reaches M3. That is, in this case, the medal M is not detected by the insertion sensor 44a due to the power-off process.
Alternatively, when the power is cut off at the moment when the medal M is positioned at M2, the power cut-off process may be executed before the medal M reaches the insertion sensor 44b. In this case, the medal M is detected by the insertion sensor 44a, but is not detected by the insertion sensor 44b, and the power-off process is executed.

(6) Furthermore, in the first embodiment (A), a power failure occurs at the moment when the medal M is positioned at M2, and the time T1 until the power failure is detected and the power failure process (blocker off) is executed. is set shorter than the time required for the medal M to reach the position where the blocker 45 is installed from the position of M2 (this time is referred to as "T2'"). With this setting, when the power is cut off at the moment when the medal M is positioned at M2, when the medal M reaches the position of the blocker 45 from the position of M2, the blocker 45 is already turned off. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the medal from passing through the insertion sensors 44a and 44b.
In the above description, the position of the medal M2 may be the moment the hand is released at the position of M1, or a predetermined position between M1 and M2.

(7) As shown in FIG. 3, in the first embodiment (A), the power-off processing (blocker off) is executed in the interrupt processing subsequent to the interrupt processing in which the power-off is detected. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be set so that the power-off processing (blocker off) is executed after, for example, "2" to "5" interrupt processing counting from the interrupt processing that detected the power-off. Alternatively, power-off processing (blocker off) may be executed in interrupt processing that detects power-off.
(8) In the first embodiment (A) of FIG. 3, the time T0 required for the voltage to reach the sustain level V1 from the supply level V0 when power failure occurs is set to 20 interrupts, but it is limited to this. Various settings can be made depending on the performance of the power supply.

(9) In the first embodiment (C) of FIG. 7, the payout sensors 37a and 37b detect the movable piece 39a when the medals M are paid out by the medal payout device. However, not limited to this, the payout sensors 37a and 37b may detect the medals M themselves to be paid out. For example, the payout sensors 37a and 37 may be arranged like the insertion sensors 44a and 44b shown in FIG. 4 to detect the passage of the medals M (to be paid out).

Further, when the payout sensors 37a and 37b are arranged in such a manner, when the medal M passes through the payout sensors 37a and 37b,
Payout sensor 37a ON, payout sensor 37b OFF (time S31')
Payout sensor 37a ON, payout sensor 37b ON (time S32')
Payout sensor 37a off, payout sensor 37b on (time S33')
Payout sensor 37a off, payout sensor 37b off (time S34')
follow the course of
Then, the time from time S31' to time S34' is set to be shorter than time T1 (the time from occurrence of power failure to execution of power failure processing).

(10) In the second embodiment, the gate mark 57b is formed so that the projection 57d and the depression 57c are on the outside. is also possible. The gate mark 58b of the lower cover 58 is also the same. In this case, if the gate marks 57b are shaped as shown in FIG. 10(b), the outside of the upper cover 57 or the lower cover 58 becomes a smooth surface. On the other hand, if the shape shown in FIG.

(11) In the second embodiment, as an example of the board case 56, an example in which the main control board 50 is housed inside has been given. However, it is possible to apply the second embodiment not only to the main control board 50 but also to other control boards for which it is desired to prevent fraud, such as the board case of the sub-control board 80 . As shown in FIG. 1, the sub-control board 80 also includes the RWM 83, the ROM 54, the sub-CPU 85, and the like. For example, the CPU 85 is not arranged, and the RWM 83 and ROM 54 are also not arranged. Similarly, the model number display area of the sub-control board 80 should not overlap in the vertical direction (directly below) the trace of the gate.

(12) In the third embodiment, the pressing order effect during AT and the display of the operated stop switch 42 (stopped reel 31) and the remaining number of games during AT are given as examples. The third embodiment can be applied even in the case of displaying the number of obtained coins in a game (BB game, etc.) and the number of remaining obtainable coins.
For example, the acquired number at the start of the "N" game is "200", the acquired number at the start of the "N+1" game is "209", and the acquired number at the start of the "N+2" game is "218" sheets. Also, the main control board 50 is assumed to transmit a command regarding the winning number to the sub control board 80 at the start of each game.
Then, as in the example shown in FIG. 11, it is assumed that disconnection occurs during the "N"th game, and communication is restored during the "N+1"th game.

In this case, the sub-control board 80 displays "200" as the winning number in the "N" game. Also, at the start of the "N+1" game, the command regarding the number of winning cards is not received (due to disconnection), so the display of the number of winning cards of "200" is maintained even in the "N+1" game. Next, when the sub-control board 80 receives a command regarding the number of wins at the start of the "N+2" game, it updates the display to the number of wins of "218" based on the command.

(13) FIG. 11 of the third embodiment shows an example in which the image display is returned to normal at the start of the "N+2" game. However, without being limited to this, the image display may be returned to normal after the “N+1” game is completely stopped or when a bet operation is performed after that. Alternatively, it is also possible to restore the image display to normal at a predetermined timing based on a command sent to the sub-control board 80 during or after a full stop.

(14) In the third embodiment, for example, in the middle of the disconnection "N+1" game, there is a case where the player wins a lottery that adds the number of cards that can be acquired during AT or the number of games played (addition). In this case, since the "N+1" game is disconnected, the sub-control board 80 cannot receive the command based on winning the additional lottery. Therefore, in this case, for example, at the start of the "N+2" game, the main control board 50 transmits a command indicating the result after the addition (addition) lottery, and at the start of the "N+2" game, the sub control board 80 Displaying game information (the number of obtainable numbers and the number of games played) after addition.

(15) In the third embodiment (FIG. 11), for example, when disconnection occurs after the right first stop of the "N" game, and communication is restored before the first stop switch 42 of the "N+1" game is operated. can be considered. Then, in the "N+1" game, it is assumed that the player makes the right first stop. In this case, when the sub-control board 80 receives the right first stop command in the "N+1" game, it means that it has received the stop command for the stop switch 42 that has already been operated. Output. Then, at the time of the betting operation after the "N+1" game is completely stopped or at the start of the "N+2" game, the image display can be restored to the normal one.

(16) In the third embodiment (FIG. 11), when the acquired number is displayed as an image during AT, the following method can be given as an example of the update processing of the acquired number of images before and after disconnection.
The main control board 50 transmits a command indicating the number of acquired coins to the sub control board 80 when there is a payout process. Here, when disconnection occurs in the middle of the "N" game, the sub-control board 80 cannot receive the winning number of the "N" game. It is assumed that the sub-control board 80 displays "100" as the winning number during the AT immediately before the disconnection of the "N" game. In addition, the "N" game eye and the "N+1" game eye in AT are assumed to win 10 cards.
In this case, the number of coins acquired during the AT at the end of the "N"th game should originally be "110", but remains "100" (because the wire is disconnected). Then, it is assumed that the communication is restored in the middle of the "N+1" game. As a result, the sub-control board 80 can restore the winning number during the AT to the normal value based on the winning number command received during the payout process for the "N+1" game. Here, the value may be returned to the normal value at the time of the payout process of the "N+1" game, or may be returned to the normal value at the start of the "N+2" game as in the example of FIG. Further, it may be updated to "110" at the time of payout processing for the "N+1" game, and updated to "120" at the start of the "N+2" game.

(17) In the present embodiment, the slot machine 10 is illustrated as an example of a gaming machine, but the present invention can also be applied to pachinko gaming machines, for example. In a pachinko machine, the starting gate (the winning gate that starts the pattern variation by the symbol variation display device and triggers the acquisition of random numbers for the jackpot lottery), the electronic chew winning gate (when the game ball wins, the next winning To make it easier, there is a prize opening that opens for a certain period of time and then closes.In addition, the electric chew is not limited to a tulip shape. be provided. The first embodiment (B) can be applied to these winning slots.

Specifically, for example, at the starting port, there are a winning sensor (a sensor that first detects a game ball that has entered the starting port) and an ejection sensor (a sensor that detects a game ball after being detected by the winning sensor). is provided. In addition, the attacker is provided with a V-winning sensor (a sensor that detects the game ball that has won the attacker's prize first) and an ejection sensor (a sensor that detects the game ball after being detected by the V-winning sensor). .
For example, in the case of the starting port, when power is cut off at the moment a game ball is detected by the prize winning sensor, it is set so that the discharge sensor can detect the game ball before the power cutoff process is executed. As a result, even if the power supply is interrupted at the moment the game ball is detected by the winning sensor, the prize balls can be counted correctly. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the prize balls from not being paid out even though the game balls have entered the prize winning opening. The same applies to the attacker's V winning sensor and discharge sensor.

(18) In the present embodiment, the slot machine 10 is taken as an example of a game machine. (so-called "pachi-slot gaming machines"), but can also be applied to, for example, casino machines and sealed gaming machines (medal-less gaming machines) that do not use medals for games as game media.

Here, an enclosed game machine (medal-less game machine) can eliminate, for example, the medal payout device (a unit including the hopper 35, the hopper motor 36, and the payout sensor 37) in FIG. Also, the medal slot 47 and the medal selector can be eliminated. Then, all the electronic medals (electronic game media) granted by winning a winning combination are stored in the credit amount display LED 76 . In this case, it is conceivable that the credit amount display LED 76 is composed of, for example, five digits (up to "99,999" electronic medals can be stored).
The present invention can be applied to all of the above-described embodiments and the following embodiments, except for the first embodiment, even in such casino machines and enclosed-type gaming machines (medalless gaming machines).

<Sixth embodiment>
The sixth embodiment relates to control of the medal payout device 15 by the main control board 50. FIG.
Here, FIGS. 15 to 17 are diagrams for explaining the relationship between the position of the hopper disk 101, the position of the tokens, and the drive control of the hopper motor 36 in the sixth embodiment.
Also, FIG. 15(a) is a plan view of the medal payout device 15 showing the state before the last discharged medal touches the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b, and FIG. 15(b) is a plan view of the last discharged medal. Fig. 10 is a plan view of the token payout device 15 showing a state before contact with the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b and showing a state in which the hopper disk 101 has advanced in rotation from (a).

Furthermore, FIG. 16(a) is a plan view of the medal payout device 15 showing a state in which the last discharged medal is in contact with the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b, and FIG. 16(b) is a plan view of the last discharged medal. FIG. 11 is a plan view of the token payout device 15 showing a state in which the movable shaft 38b is moved by being pushed;
Furthermore, FIG. 17(a) is a plan view of the medal payout device 15 showing the state at the moment when the last discharged medal is discharged from the discharge part, and (b) is a hopper after the last discharged medal is discharged. FIG. 10 is a plan view of the token payout device 15 showing a state where the disk has stopped rotating;

In the sixth embodiment, the medal dispensing device 15 includes a hopper 35 that stores medals, a hopper disk 101 provided at the bottom of the hopper 35, and a hopper motor 36 that rotates the hopper disk 101. Also, the fact that the medal payout device 15 is electrically connected to the main control board 50 is the same as in the first embodiment. The main control board 50 controls driving of the hopper motor 36 .

As shown in FIGS. 15 to 17, the hopper disk 101 is formed in a disc shape, and has a holding portion which is an opening capable of holding medals stored in the hopper. 102 are provided along the outer circumference of the hopper disk 101 .
Furthermore, each holding portion 102 is formed in a circular hole shape penetrating from the upper surface to the lower surface of the hopper disk 101 . The medals stored in the hopper 35 are formed so as to enter each holding portion 102 from the upper opening of each holding portion 102 and be held by each holding portion 102 .

Furthermore, in the sixth embodiment, when the hopper motor 36 is driven during the medal payout process, the hopper disc 101 shown in FIGS. 15 to 17 rotates clockwise. Then, when the hopper disk 101 rotates clockwise, the medals held in each holding portion 102 move clockwise along with the hopper disk 101 in an arc, and are sequentially discharged from the discharge portion 103 .
When the medals are ejected from the ejection section 103, the holding section 102 holding the medals is emptied. Then, other medals stored in the hopper 35 newly enter into the empty holding portion 102 .

Further, as described in the first embodiment (C), the medal payout device 15 has a fixed shaft 38a and a movable shaft 38b. In the sixth embodiment, a discharge portion 103 from which medals are discharged is provided between the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b.
As shown in FIG. 16(b), when the medal pushes the movable shaft 38b, the movable shaft 38b moves, and when the space between the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b becomes wider than the diameter of the medal, the medal moves toward the fixed shaft 38a. and the movable shaft 38b. At this time, medals are ejected from the ejection section 103 .
Also, the moment when the medal passes between the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b and the movable shaft 38b returns to its original position (the position indicated by the solid line in FIG. 6), the medal is ejected from the ejection section 103. moment. When the movable shaft 38b returns to its original position, the payout sensor 37 detects that the medals have been discharged from the discharge section 103. FIG.

In one payout process, the last medal to be discharged from the discharging section 103 will be referred to as the "last discharged medal". It's called "Emission Medal".
15 to 17, medals are indicated by two-dot chain lines. The medal with the character "A" is the last discharged medal in one payout process, and the medal with the letter "B" is the first discharged medal in the next payout process.

Further, the position of the holding unit 102 where the last discharged medal was held at the moment when the last discharged medal was discharged from the discharging unit 103 in one payout process is referred to as a "first position", and is referred to as a "first position". The position of the holding unit 102 that holds the first ejected medal in the next payout process at the moment the last ejected medal is ejected from the ejecting unit 103 in the process is referred to as the "second position".
FIG. 17(a) shows the state at the moment when the last ejected medal is ejected from the ejecting section 103 (the hopper disk 101, each holding section 102, each medal marked with letters "A" to "D", and the fixed shaft 38a). , and the positional relationship of the movable shaft 38b). In FIG. 17(a), the position of the holding portion 102 where the medal with the letter "A" was held is the first position, and the medal with the letter "B" is held. The position of the holding portion 102 is the second position.

In the sixth embodiment, when one payout process ends, the main control board 50 moves the holding section 102 holding the first ejected medal in the next payout process to the first position and the second position. The drive of the hopper motor 36 is controlled so that the rotation of the hopper disk 101 is stopped in the state of being positioned between .
FIG. 17(b) shows a state in which the rotation of the hopper disk 101 has stopped after the last ejected medal has been ejected from the ejection section 103. FIG. In FIG. 17(b), the first position and the second position are indicated by dashed lines. Also, in FIG. 17(b), the medals marked with the letter "B" are the first ejected medals in the next payout process. Then, as shown in FIG. 17(b), the hopper disk 101 is rotated while the holding portion 102 holding the medals marked with the character "B" is positioned between the first position and the second position. has stopped rotating.

Here, in the sixth embodiment, a DC motor (direct current motor) is used as the hopper motor 36 .
For this reason, at the end of the payout process, the main control board 50 supplies the hopper motor 36 with a current in the opposite direction to when the medals are discharged, thereby suddenly stopping the driving of the hopper motor 36 and causing the hopper disk 101 to rotate. can be stopped suddenly.

Further, as described above, when the medals are ejected from the ejecting portion 103 and the movable shaft 38b returns to its original position, the payout sensor 37 detects that effect.
Therefore, when the payout sensor 37 detects that the last ejected medal has been ejected from the ejecting section 103, a current in the opposite direction to that used when ejecting the medals is supplied to the hopper motor 36 to rotate the hopper disk 101. When suddenly stopped, the holding section 102 holding the first ejected medal in the next payout process can be stopped at the second position.

Also, by supplying a current to the hopper motor 36 in the direction opposite to when the medals are ejected, the hopper motor 36 can be driven in the opposite direction, and the hopper disk 101 can be rotated in the reverse direction (counterclockwise rotation). .
Therefore, even if the holding unit 102 holding the first ejected medal in the next payout process has passed the second position at the end of the payout process, the current in the direction opposite to that when ejecting the medals is supplied to the hopper. The hopper disk 101 can be reversely rotated and returned to the second position by flowing the motor 36 .
By returning the holding portion 102 holding the first ejected medal to the second position, the first ejected medal can start moving from the same second position each time. As a result, the same operation can be performed for each payout process, so that the first ejected medal can be stably ejected.

Here, when a constant current is supplied to the DC motor as the hopper motor 36, the rotation of the drive shaft is gradually accelerated from a stopped state, and then reaches a constant speed (constant speed).
FIG. 18 is a diagram showing a time chart showing the relationship between the drive signal of the hopper motor 36, the drive state of the hopper motor 36, and the discharge state of medals from the discharge section 103 in the sixth embodiment.
In FIG. 18 , the upper line indicates the drive signal of the hopper motor 36 , the middle line indicates the drive state of the hopper motor 36 , and the lower line indicates the discharge state of medals from the discharge section 103 .

The drive signal for the hopper motor 36 is a digital signal that is output from a predetermined output port provided on the main control board 50. When the drive signal for the hopper motor 36 turns from off to on, a constant current is supplied to the hopper motor 36. When the drive signal for the hopper motor 36 turns from ON to OFF, the current flowing through the hopper motor 36 becomes "0".
Furthermore, in FIG. 18, the drive state of the hopper motor 36, "stop", indicates a state in which the drive shaft stops rotating, and the drive state of the hopper motor 36, "constant speed", indicates that the drive shaft is (constant speed) is reached.

As shown in FIG. 18, when the drive signal for the hopper motor 36 is turned on from off, the drive state of the hopper motor 36 gradually increases from "stopped" and then reaches "constant speed".
In addition, the part where the line indicating the drive state of the hopper motor 36 slopes upward to the right indicates that the rotation of the drive shaft of the hopper motor 36 gradually accelerates.

In this way, the hopper motor 36 using the DC motor gradually accelerates the rotation of the drive shaft when the drive signal is turned on from off.
Therefore, when the holding portion 102 holding the first ejected medal is stopped at the second position, the rotation of the drive shaft of the hopper motor 36 gradually accelerates until the holding portion 102 reaches the first position. Therefore, it takes a longer time than the medal discharge interval at constant speed.
That is, when the holding portion 102 that holds the first ejected medal is stopped at the second position, the time required from the start of driving the hopper motor 36 until the first ejected medal is ejected from the ejecting portion 103 is 36 is rotating at a constant speed, the medal ejection interval is longer.
As a result, the player may feel that the discharge of the first (first) medal is delayed.

Therefore, in the sixth embodiment, when one payout process ends, the main control board 50 moves the holding section 102 holding the first ejected medal in the next payout process between the first position and the second position. The drive of the hopper motor 36 is controlled so that the rotation of the hopper disk 101 is stopped in the positioned state.
When the holding part 102 holding the first ejected medal is stopped between the first position and the second position, the distance to reach the first position becomes shorter than when it stops at the second position. . As a result, the time it takes to reach the first position is shorter than when it stops at the second position. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling that the ejection of the is delayed.

Also, when the holding portion 102 holding the first ejected medal is stopped between the first position and the second position, as shown in FIG. A portion corresponding to between is positioned in front of the discharge portion 103 .
As a result, an illegal act such as a wire or the like is inserted from the medal dispensing opening provided in the lower front portion of the front door 12, and an illegal act (a fraudulent act) of trying to access the holding portion 102 of the hopper disc 101 with this illegal implement is committed. Even if the hopper disk 101 is broken, the portion of the hopper disk 101 corresponding to between the two adjacent holding portions 102 can serve as a barrier to prevent access to the holding portions 102 by unauthorized instruments.

Further, when the driving state of the hopper motor 36 is "constant speed", the hopper disk 101 rotates clockwise at a constant speed. At this time, the medals held in each holding section 102 are sequentially discharged from the discharging section 103 at regular intervals.
Further, as shown in FIG. 18, when the drive signal for the hopper motor 36 is turned off from on, the drive state of the hopper motor 36 gradually decreases from "constant speed" and then reaches "stop".
In FIG. 18, the portion where the line indicating the drive state of the hopper motor 36 is slanted downward to the right indicates that the rotation of the drive shaft of the hopper motor 36 is gradually decelerated.

In this way, the hopper motor 36 using the DC motor gradually decelerates the rotation of the drive shaft when the drive signal is turned off from on.
Then, the last discharged medal passes between the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b (discharging portion 103), and the movable shaft 38b returns to its original position, whereby the last discharged medal is discharged from the discharging portion 103. When this is detected by the payout sensor 37, the main control board 50 turns the drive signal for the hopper motor 36 from ON to OFF.
As a result, the rotation of the drive shaft of the hopper motor 36 is gradually decelerated, and the holding portion 102 holding the first discharged medal in the next payout process is positioned between the first position and the second position. Then, the rotation of the hopper disk 101 is stopped.

Further, as shown in FIG. 18 , when the drive signal for the hopper motor 36 is turned on from off, the main control board 50 then transmits a payout start command to the sub control board 80 . This payout start command is a command indicating that the main control board 50 has started the payout process.
On the other hand, when the sub-control board 80 receives the payout start command, the sub-control board 80 starts processing related to the output of the payout sound. After that, the output of the payout sound from the speaker 22 is started.

Further, as shown in FIG. 18 , when the drive signal for the hopper motor 36 is turned off, the main control board 50 then transmits a payout end command to the sub control board 80 . This payout end command is a command indicating that the main control board 50 has ended the payout process.
On the other hand, when the sub-control board 80 receives the payout end command, it ends the processing related to the output of the payout sound. As a result, the output of the payout sound from the speaker 22 ends.

Here, the "payout sound" means a sound output from the sub-control board 80 in accordance with the payout of medals. As the payout sound, for example, a sound such as “purururu” can be output from the speaker 22 .
In addition, the "process related to the output of the payout sound" refers to a series of processes such as a process of selecting a sound to be output, a process of selecting a channel for outputting the selected sound, and a process of outputting the selected sound from the speaker 22. is what it means. By executing this series of processes, the payout sound is actually output from the speaker 22 .

When the drive signal for the hopper motor 36 is turned on, the main control board 50 transmits a payout start command to the sub-control board 80. When the sub-control board 80 receives the payout start command, the sub-control board 80 processes the output of the payout sound. is started, the output of the payout sound from the speaker 22 can be started before the first ejected medal is ejected from the ejection unit 103 .

When the drive signal for the hopper motor 36 is turned off, the main control board 50 transmits a payout end command to the sub-control board 80. When the sub-control board 80 receives the payout end command, the sub-control board 80 processes the output of the payout sound. , the output of the payout sound from the speaker 22 can be terminated when the discharge of medals from the discharge unit 103 is stopped.
This can give the player the impression that the payout of medals and the payout sound are synchronized.

FIG. 19 is a diagram showing the relationship between the operation of the main control board 50, the drive state of the hopper motor 36, the detection states of the payout sensors 37a and 37b, and the timing of discharging medals from the discharge section 103. As shown in FIG.
When a winning combination with a payout is won, the main control board 50 sets payout number data in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53 and turns on the drive signal for the hopper motor 36 .
For example, when 10 medals are won and 10 medals are paid out, "10" is set as payout number data in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53 .
That is, when paying out "N" medals (N≧1), "N" is set as payout number data in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53 .

Further, when the drive signal for the hopper motor 36 is turned on, the hopper motor 36 is "started" (starts driving) from the "stopped" state, goes through "acceleration", and reaches "constant speed".
At the end of one payout process, the holding unit 102 holding the first ejected medal in the next payout process is stopped between the first position and the second position. At the start of , the hopper motor 36 reaches a "constant speed" by the time the holding section 102 holding the first ejected medal reaches the first position.
That is, the stop position of the holding portion 102 holding the first discharged medal is set so that the hopper motor 36 reaches the "constant speed" before the holding portion 102 holding the first discharged medal reaches the first position. are doing.

Then, after the hopper motor 36 reaches "constant speed" through "stop" through "acceleration", the holding part 102 holding the first discharged token reaches the first position. The medals are surely discharged from the discharge part 103. - 特許庁
Furthermore, at the timing of (a) in FIG. 19, the payout sensors 37a and 37b are both off.
The timing of (a) in FIG. 19 corresponds to the state of (a) in FIG. 7 in the first embodiment (C).

Also, in the sixth embodiment, the payout sensor 37a is set to be low active unlike the first embodiment (C). That is, the payout sensor 37a is set to be off when the movable piece 39a is detected, and to be on when the movable piece 39a is not detected.
On the other hand, the payout sensor 37b is set to be highly active as in the first embodiment (C). That is, the payout sensor 37b is set to be off when the movable piece 39a is not detected, and to be on when the movable piece 39a is detected.
Therefore, in the sixth embodiment, both the payout sensors 37a and 37b are turned off at the timing of (a) in FIG.
In the sixth embodiment, the payout sensor 37a is set to be low active, and the payout sensor 37b is set to be high active. waveform is turned on and off.

At the timing of (b) in FIG. 19, the medal pushes the movable shaft 38b to move the movable shaft 38b, and the payout sensor 37a is turned on and the payout sensor 37b is turned off.
The state of (b) in FIG. 19 corresponds to the state of (b) in FIG. 7 in the first embodiment (C).
Furthermore, at the timing of (c) in FIG. 19, the space between the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b becomes wider than the diameter of the medal, and the payout sensor 37a is turned on and the payout sensor 37b is also turned on. Become. At this time, medals are discharged from between the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b (discharging portion 103).
The state of (c) in FIG. 19 corresponds to the state of (c) in FIG. 7 in the first embodiment (C).

Furthermore, at the timing of (d) in FIG. 19, the movable shaft 38b is being biased by the spring 39b and is in the process of returning to its original position, the payout sensor 37a is in the ON state, and the payout sensor 37b is in the OFF state. becomes.
The state of (d) in FIG. 19 corresponds to the state of (d) in FIG. 7 in the first embodiment (C).
At the timing (e) in FIG. 19, the movable shaft 38b is urged by the spring 39b to return to its original position, and the payout sensors 37a and 37b are both turned off. At this time, the main control board 50 determines that one medal has been discharged, and updates the payout number data.
The state (e) in FIG. 19 corresponds to the state (a) in FIG. 7 in the first embodiment (C).

When paying out "N" medals, (a) to (e) in FIG. 19 are repeated until it is determined that the "N"th medal has been discharged.
Then, when determining that the “N”th medal has been ejected, the main control board 50 turns off the drive signal for the hopper motor 36 .
Further, when the drive signal for the hopper motor 36 is turned off, the hopper motor 36 goes through "deceleration" and then "stops".
As a result, the process of paying out "N" medals is completed.

FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing the flow of payout processing in the sixth embodiment.
In the payout process by the main control board 50, first, payout number data is set in step S101. This process is a process of storing payout number data in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53 of the main control board 50 . For example, when paying out "N" medals (N≧1), "N" is stored as payout number data. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S102.

At step S<b>102 , the main control board 50 turns on the drive signal for the hopper motor 36 . When the drive signal for the hopper motor 36 is turned on, the hopper motor 36 is started. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S103.
In step S103, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the payout sensor 37a is on. As described above, in the sixth embodiment, the payout sensor 37a is set to be low active, and the state in which the movable piece 39a is not detected (the state in which the movable shaft 38b is pushed by the medal and moved) is ON. is set to be

If "Yes" in step S103, the process proceeds to next step S104, and the main control board 50 determines whether or not the payout sensor 37b is off. Here, when "Yes" in step S104, the process proceeds to the next step S105. On the other hand, if "No" in step S104, an error occurs.
Here, if the payout sensor 37b is already on when the payout sensor 37a is turned on from off, the result in step S104 is "No". In this case, it is conceivable that the ejection portion 103 is jammed with medals (medal jam error). Also, when a medal clogging error occurs, the error continues until the jammed medals are removed (the cause of the error is removed) and the reset switch is operated. Then, remove the jammed medals and operate the reset switch to clear the error.

Although not shown in the flowchart of FIG. 20, if "No" continues for a predetermined period of time ("No" remains unchanged for a predetermined period of time), an error occurs. In this case, it is conceivable that the medals in the hopper 35 are empty (hopper empty error). Further, when a hopper empty error occurs, the error continues until the hopper 35 is replenished with medals (the cause of the error is removed) and the reset switch is operated. Then, when the hopper 35 is replenished with medals and the reset switch is operated, the error is canceled.
At step S105, the main control board 50 again determines whether or not the payout sensor 37a is on. Here, when "Yes" in step S105, the process proceeds to the next step S106. On the other hand, if "No" in step S105, an error occurs as in the case of "No" in step S104.

In step S106, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the payout sensor 37b is on. Then, when "Yes" is determined in step S106, the process proceeds to the next step S107, and the main control board 50 determines again whether or not the payout sensor 37a is on. Here, when "Yes" in step S107, the process proceeds to the next step S108. On the other hand, if "No" in step S107, an error occurs as in the case of "No" in step S104 or S105.

Proceeding to step S108, the main control board 50 now determines whether or not the payout sensor 37b is off. Then, when "Yes" is determined in step S108, the process proceeds to the next step S109, and the main control board 50 determines whether or not the payout sensor 37a is off. Further, when the result of step S109 is "Yes", the process proceeds to step S110, and the main control board 50 determines whether or not the payout sensor 37b is off.
If "Yes" in step S110, the process proceeds to next step S111. On the other hand, if "No" in step S110, an error occurs as in the case of "No" in steps S104, S105 or S107.

In step S111, the main control board 50 updates the payout number data. This process is a process of subtracting "1" from the payout number data stored in the predetermined storage area of the RWM 53 and storing the data after the subtraction as new payout number data.
In the next step S112, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the payout number data is "0". Here, when "Yes" in step S112, the process proceeds to the next step S113, and the main control board 50 turns off the drive signal for the hopper motor . When the drive signal for the hopper motor 36 is turned off, the hopper motor 36 stops. Then, the payout process according to this flowchart is terminated. On the other hand, when "No" in step S112, the process returns to step S103. As a result, the next medal will be paid out. Then, the process of returning from step S112 to S103 is repeated until the payout number data becomes "0".

Here, the medals ejected from the ejection section 103 are normally guided to the medal receiving tray through a path called a medal chute.
However, in rare cases, the medals ejected from the ejecting section 103 may hit the inner wall of the medal chute and bounce back to the ejecting section 103 . At this time, the bounced medal may hit the next medal to be ejected from the ejecting section 103 and push back the medal to be ejected.

Therefore, in the sixth embodiment, like steps S103 to S110 in the flowchart of the payout process of FIG. 20, the payout sensors 37a and 37b are repeatedly turned on/off in the order of "payout sensor 37a" → "payout sensor 37b". do.
This makes it possible to detect an error in which the medals about to be ejected from the ejecting section 103 are pushed back.

For example, suppose that one medal is about to be discharged, and this medal pushes the movable shaft 38b, causing the movable shaft 38b to move, and the payout sensor 37a to turn on and the payout sensor 37b to turn off. (timing of (b) in FIG. 19). At this time, it is assumed that the medal paid out in front of this medal bounces back, hits this medal, is pushed back, and the payout sensor 37a is turned off. In this case, it becomes "No" at step S105 of FIG. 20, and an error occurs.
Also, for example, assume that the medal is pushed back at the timing of (c) in FIG. 19 and the payout sensor 37a is turned off. In this case, it becomes "No" in step S107 of FIG. 20, and an error occurs.

<Modified Example of Sixth Embodiment>
Although the sixth embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the contents described above, and various modifications such as those described below are possible.
(1) In the sixth embodiment, the hopper disk 101 is provided with eight holding portions 102, but the number of holding portions is not limited to eight. can be set as appropriate.
(2) In the sixth embodiment, the hopper disk 101 is formed in a disk shape, but the hopper disk 101 may be formed in a sprocket shape, for example. That is, the holding portion 102 is not limited to a circular hole shape as long as it can hold a medal.

(3) In the sixth embodiment, the rotating direction of the hopper disc 101 during the payout process of medals is clockwise. The medals held in the tray may be sequentially ejected from the ejection section 103 .
(4) In the sixth embodiment, a DC motor (direct current motor) is used as the hopper motor 36, but the hopper motor 36 may be a stepping motor, for example.

(5) The flow of the payout process in the sixth embodiment is not limited to the flow shown in the flow chart of FIG. 20, but may be the flow shown in the flow chart of FIG. 21, for example. Even with such a flow of payout processing, ejection of medals can be detected. However, in such a flow of payout processing, it is not possible to detect an error in which the medals bounced off the inner wall of the medal chute push back the medals to be ejected next.
20 and 21, the same step number is given to the same process.
(6) The first to sixth embodiments and the various modifications shown in the first to sixth embodiments are not limited to being implemented independently, but can be implemented in combination as appropriate.

<Seventh Embodiment>
It relates to the arrangement of the main control board 50 attached inside the cabinet 13 and the sub-control board 80 attached to the rear surface of the front door 12 .
FIG. 22 is a side sectional view of the slot machine 10 with the front door 12 closed, and is a diagram for explaining the positional relationship between the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80. FIG.

The housing of the slot machine 10 includes a box-shaped cabinet 13 with an opening on the front side, and a front door 12 attached to open and close the opening of the cabinet 13. - 特許庁
The cabinet 13 is configured in a box shape with an open front side by assembling a bottom plate 13a, a back plate 13b, a right side plate, a left side plate, a top plate, and the like.
Furthermore, a medal payout device 15 is arranged in the lower part of the cabinet 13 (on the bottom plate 13a). This medal dispensing device 15 is for dispensing medals, and includes a hopper 35 for storing medals, a hopper disk 101 provided at the bottom of the hopper 35, and a hopper motor 36 for rotating the hopper disk 101. I have.

Furthermore, a plate-shaped reel base 110 supported by the back plate 13b, the right side plate, and the left side plate is provided above the medal payout device 15 inside the cabinet 13. A display device 14 is arranged.
The symbol display device 14 also has a rectangular frame-shaped reel frame 14a, and three reels 31 are arranged side by side inside the reel frame 14a.

Furthermore, a motor 32 is connected to the rotation center of each reel 31, each motor 32 is fixed to a reel bracket, and each reel bracket is supported by the reel frame 14a.
Further, a transparent reel board case 121 is arranged on the reel frame 14a, and a reel control board 120 is accommodated in this reel board case 121. As shown in FIG. This reel control board 120 controls driving of the three motors 32 .

A transparent main board case 56 is arranged above the pattern display device 14 inside the cabinet 13 . More specifically, the main substrate case 56 is fixed at a position above the pattern display device 14 on the front side of the back plate 13b of the cabinet 13 (the inner surface side of the housing). The main control board 50 is accommodated in the main board case 56 .
The main control board 50 controls the progress of the game, and includes an input port 51, an output port 52, an RWM 53, a ROM 54, a main CPU 55, and the like. Further, the main control board 50 includes a bet switch 40, a start switch 41, a stop switch 42, a symbol display device 14, a medal payout device 15, a reel control board 120, and a sub-control board via an input port 51 or an output port 52. 80 and the like are electrically connected.

Further, the front door 12 is attached so as to cover the opening on the front side of the cabinet 13 so as to be able to open and close the opening of the cabinet 13 . More specifically, the left side of the front door 12 is attached to the front side of the left side plate of the cabinet 13 via a hinge. By rotating the front door 12 around the hinge, the front opening of the cabinet 13 can be opened and closed.

A transparent display window is provided in the central portion of the front door 12 . This display window is arranged at a position corresponding to the front of the pattern display device 14 . The player can visually recognize the three symbols attached to each reel 31 of the symbol display device 14 through the display window.
A bet switch 40, a start switch 41, a stop switch 42, an adjustment switch 43, a medal slot 47, and the like are arranged on the front side (player side) of the front door 12 and below the display window. .

Furthermore, in the lower part of the front side (player side) of the front door 12, there is a medal payout opening through which medals paid out from the medal payout device 15 pass, and medals paid out from the medal payout opening are received. A medal receiving tray is arranged.
Furthermore, an effect lamp 21, a speaker 22, an image display device 23, and the like are arranged above the front side (player side) of the front door 12. As shown in FIG.

A transparent sub-board case 87 is arranged on the upper part of the rear surface of the front door 12 . More specifically, the sub board case 87 is fixed at a position corresponding to the rear surface side of the front door 12 (the inner surface side of the housing), above the pattern display device 14, and on the rear side of the image display device 23. ing. The sub-control board 80 is accommodated in the sub-board case 87 .
Also, the sub-control board 80 controls performance, and includes an input port 81, an output port 82, an RWM 83, a ROM 84, a sub-CPU 85, an electrolytic capacitor 86, and the like. Also, the sub-control board 80 is electrically connected to the production lamp 21 , the speaker 22 , the image display device 23 , the main control board 50 and the like via the input port 81 or the output port 82 . Then, the sub-control board 80 determines at what timing and what kind of effect to output based on the control command received from the main control board 50, and according to the determination, the effect lamp 21, the speaker 22, It controls the output of the image display device 23 .

As described above, the main board case 56 is arranged above the pattern display device 14 inside the cabinet 13 , and the main control board 50 is accommodated in the main board case 56 .
A sub-board case 87 is arranged above the pattern display device 14 on the rear surface of the front door 12, and the sub-control board 80 is accommodated in the sub-board case 87. As shown in FIG.
As shown in FIG. 22, when the front door 12 is closed, the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 are arranged to face each other.
The distance between the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 when the front door 12 is closed is set wider than the width of the reel control board 120 in the depth direction.

Here, an electrolytic capacitor 86 for power storage is arranged on the sub-control board 80 . Also, the electrolytic capacitor 86 is filled with an electrolytic solution. If the electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub-control board 80 ruptures due to a malfunction, the filled electrolytic solution may scatter. At this time, if the electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub-control board 80 is arranged at a position facing the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50, when the electrolytic capacitor 86 ruptures due to a malfunction, the scattered electrolyte will It may adhere to the main CPU 55 and cause the main CPU 55 to malfunction. Moreover, there is a possibility that the main CPU 55 will be damaged by the impact when the electrolytic capacitor 86 explodes.

Therefore, in the seventh embodiment, electrolytic capacitors 86 are arranged on the sub-control board 80 at positions other than the position facing the main CPU 55 .
As a result, even if the electrolytic capacitor 86 ruptures due to a malfunction and the electrolytic solution scatters, the scattered electrolytic solution can be prevented from adhering to the main CPU 55, thereby preventing the main CPU 55 from malfunctioning. be able to. Also, the main CPU 55 can be prevented from being damaged by the impact when the electrolytic capacitor 86 explodes.
Also, if the electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub-control board 80 is arranged at a position facing the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50, noise from the electrolytic capacitor 86 may cause the main CPU 55 to malfunction. To prevent malfunction of the main CPU 55 due to noise from the electrolytic capacitor 86 by arranging the electrolytic capacitor 86 on the control board 80 at a position other than the position facing the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50. - 特許庁can be done.

23A shows the positional relationship between the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50 and the electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub control board 80 when the slot machine 10 is viewed from the front with the front door 12 closed. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing Example 1;
In FIG. 23( a ), the circle indicated by the dashed line is the electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub-control board 80 projected onto the main control board 50 .

In Example 1 shown in FIG. 23(a), there is one electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub control board 80, which is arranged above the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50 in the vertical direction, and the main CPU 55 in the horizontal direction. It is arranged on the left side of the main CPU 55 on the control board 50 .
By arranging the electrolytic capacitors 86 on the sub-control board 80 at different positions in both the vertical and horizontal directions with respect to the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50, The electrolytic capacitor 86 can be positioned at a position other than the position facing the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50 .

<Modified example of the seventh embodiment>
Although the seventh embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the contents described above, and various modifications such as those described below are possible.
(1) The number of electrolytic capacitors 86 on the sub-control board 80 is not limited to one, and may be, for example, two as shown in FIG. 23(b).
FIG. 23(b) shows the positional relationship between the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50 and the electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub control board 80 when the slot machine 10 is viewed from the front with the front door 12 closed. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing Example 2;

In FIG. 23(b), similarly to FIG. 23(a), the projection of the electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub-control board 80 onto the main control board 50 is indicated by a dashed line.
In FIG. 23B, the electrolytic capacitor 86 on the upper left and the electrolytic capacitor 86 on the lower right are arranged at different positions both vertically and horizontally with respect to the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50 .
23(b), the two electrolytic capacitors 86 on the sub-control board 80 are arranged at a position other than the position facing the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50. As shown in FIG.

(2) The number of electrolytic capacitors 86 on the sub-control board 80 may be four, for example, as shown in FIG. 24(c).
FIG. 24(c) shows the positional relationship between the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50 and the electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub control board 80 when the slot machine 10 is viewed from the front with the front door 12 closed. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing Example 3;
23A and 23B, the electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub-control board 80 is projected onto the main control board 50 and indicated by a dashed circle.

In FIG. 24(c), the sub-control board 80 has four electrolytic capacitors 86, three of which are located at different positions in both the vertical and horizontal directions with respect to the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50. are placed. The remaining one electrolytic capacitor 86 is arranged at the same position in the vertical direction as the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50, although the horizontal direction is different.
Even with this arrangement, the four electrolytic capacitors 86 on the sub-control board 80 are located at positions other than those facing the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50 .

(3) The electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub-control board 80 may be arranged at a position separated from the main control board 50, for example.
FIG. 24D shows the positional relationship between the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50 and the electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub control board 80 when the slot machine 10 is viewed from the front with the front door 12 closed. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing Example 4;
23A, 23B and 24C, the electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub-control board 80 is projected and indicated by a dashed circle.

In FIG. 24(d), as in FIG. 23(a), the number of electrolytic capacitors 86 on the sub-control board 80 is one, but unlike FIG. 86 is arranged at a position separated from the main control board 50 .
Thus, even when the electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub control board 80 is arranged at a position separated from the main control board 50, it is arranged at a position other than the position facing the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50. There will be

Then, as shown in FIGS. 23A, 23B, 24C and 24D, the electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub-control board 80 is placed on the main control board 50 at positions other than those facing the main CPU 55 . By arranging at the position of , even if the electrolytic capacitor 86 ruptures due to a malfunction and the electrolytic solution scatters, the scattered electrolytic solution can be prevented from adhering to the main CPU 55, and the main CPU 55 will eventually malfunction. You can keep it from happening.

(4) As shown in FIGS. 9 and 10 of the second embodiment, a management information display LED 74 (also called a "role ratio monitor") is arranged on the main control board 50. FIG. This management information display LED 74 displays management information such as an advantageous section ratio, a continuous character ratio, and a character ratio.
In addition, the "advantageous section ratio" means the ratio of the advantageous section to the total game section (normal section + waiting section + advantageous section), and the "continuous accessory ratio" is the number of medals acquired. Means the ratio of the number of medals obtained when the special role (RB) is activated, and the "percentage of medals" means the ratio of the number of medals obtained when the role is activated to the total number of medals obtained.

Also, the electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub control board 80 may be arranged at a position other than the position facing the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50 and at a position other than the position facing the management information display LED 74. good.
As a result, even if the electrolytic capacitor 86 ruptures due to a malfunction and the electrolytic solution scatters, the scattered electrolytic solution can be prevented from adhering to the management information display LED 74. Information can be kept from being unverifiable.
In addition, it is possible to prevent the management information display LED 74 from being damaged by the impact when the electrolytic capacitor 86 ruptures.
(5) The first to seventh embodiments and the various modifications shown in the first to seventh embodiments are not limited to being implemented independently, but can be implemented in combination as appropriate.

<Eighth Embodiment>
The eighth embodiment relates to the gap between the cabinet 13 and the front door 12 in the lower part of the housing of the slot machine 10. FIG.
FIG. 25 is an enlarged side cross-sectional view of the lower front portion of the housing of the slot machine 10 (part A in FIG. 22) with the front door 12 closed, and explains the gap between the cabinet 13 and the front door 12. It is a diagram.

As shown in FIG. 25, the lower portion of the cabinet 13 is provided with a first closing portion 13c that protrudes toward the front door 12 when the front door 12 is closed.
That is, the first closing portion 13c is a plate-like protrusion that protrudes forward from the front end portion of the bottom plate 13a of the cabinet 13. When the front door 12 is closed, the direction in which the first closing portion 13c protrudes is is in the direction of the front door 12.
Further, the first closing portion 13c is formed horizontally from the right end to the left end of the front end portion of the bottom plate 13a of the cabinet 13. As shown in FIG.
Furthermore, the first closing portion 13c is made of sheet metal and fixed to the front end portion of the bottom plate 13a of the cabinet 13 with screws.

As shown in FIG. 25, a second closing portion 12a protruding toward the cabinet 13 when the front door 12 is closed is located below the first closing portion 13c in the lower portion of the front door 12. is provided.
In other words, the second closing portion 12a is a plate-like protrusion that protrudes rearward from the lower back surface of the front door 12. When the front door 12 is closed, the direction of protrusion of the second closing portion 12a is 13 direction of the cabinet.

The second closing portion 12a is arranged below the first closing portion 13c.
Furthermore, the second closing portion 12a is formed horizontally from the right end to the left end of the lower back surface of the front door 12. As shown in FIG.
Further, like the first closing portion 13c, the second closing portion 12a is also formed of sheet metal, and is fixed to the lower back surface of the front door 12 with screws.

As shown in FIG. 25, a third closing portion 12b projecting toward the cabinet 13 when the front door 12 is closed is located above the first closing portion 13c in the lower portion of the front door 12. is provided.
That is, like the second closing portion 12a, the third closing portion 12b is a plate-like projection that projects rearward from the lower back surface of the front door 12, and when the front door 12 is closed, the third closing portion 12b can The protruding direction of the 3 closing part 12b is the cabinet 13 direction.

Similarly to the second closing portion 12a, the third closing portion 12b is formed oblong from the right end to the left end of the lower back surface of the front door 12. As shown in FIG.
Furthermore, unlike the second closing portion 12a, the third closing portion 12b is arranged above the first closing portion 13c.
Furthermore, the third closing portion 12b is also formed of sheet metal, like the first closing portion 13c and the second closing portion 12a, and is fixed to the lower back surface of the front door 12 with screws.

When the front door 12 is closed, the first closing portion 13c is arranged between the second closing portion 12a and the third closing portion 12b.
For this reason, when the front door 12 is closed, the gap between the cabinet 13 and the front door 12 in the lower part of the housing is curved like a U-shape left and right reversed, as shown in FIG. shape. As a result, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts (such as fraudulent acts) in which a wire is passed through the space between the cabinet 13 and the front door 12 to access the medal payout device 15 or the like.

A door sensor for detecting opening of the front door 12 is provided on the front side of the left side plate of the cabinet 13 . This door sensor is configured using an optical sensor having a light emitting/receiving section, and is electrically connected to the main control board 50 .
Furthermore, on the front side of the left side plate of the cabinet 13, there is provided a detection piece that can be moved in the front-rear direction by opening and closing the front door 12. As shown in FIG. When the front door 12 is closed, the detection piece is pushed backward by the front door 12, and when the front door 12 is opened, the detection piece protrudes forward by being biased by a spring.

Furthermore, when the front door 12 is closed, the detection piece is pushed rearward by the front door 12 and enters the door sensor. At this time, the door sensor is in the state of detecting the detection piece, and is in the OFF state. That is, the door sensor is set to be low active.
On the other hand, when the front door 12 is open, the detection piece is urged by the spring to protrude forward and out of the door sensor. At this time, the door sensor does not detect the detection piece and is turned on.

The main control board 50 determines that the front door 12 is closed when the door sensor is off, and determines that the front door 12 is open when the door sensor is on.
In this manner, the opening/closing of the front door 12 is detected by moving the detection piece in the front-rear direction and turning on/off the door sensor.

Further, when the front door 12 is opened from the closed state, the detection piece moves forward from the state of being pushed in, goes out from the state of entering the door sensor, and turns the door sensor from the off state to the on state.
The position of the front door 12 when the door sensor first detects the opening of the front door 12 is referred to as the "detection start position".
Further, when the door sensor first detects the opening of the front door 12 means the moment when the door sensor changes from the OFF state to the ON state.

In the eighth embodiment, not only when the front door 12 is closed, but also when the front door 12 is at the detection start position, the first closing portion is positioned between the second closing portion 12a and the third closing portion 12b. 13c are arranged.
That is, the first closing portion 13c is arranged between the second closing portion 12a and the third closing portion 12b even at the moment when the front door 12 is opened from the closed state and the door sensor changes from the off state to the on state. is formed as

Therefore, when the front door 12 is opened from a closed state, the door sensor is first turned on from an off state, and then the first closing portion 13c is removed from between the second closing portion 12a and the third closing portion 12b. It will be.
When the door sensor is turned on, the main control board 50 determines that the front door 12 is open, and transmits a door open command to the sub control board 80. The sub control board 80 transmits the door open command. is received, the fact that the front door 12 is open is notified by the speaker 22, the image display device 23, and the like. As a result, the hall clerk can be notified that the front door 12 is open.

Therefore, the first closing portion 13c does not come off from between the second closing portion 12a and the third closing portion 12b before the notification that the front door 12 is open is started, and the front door 12 is opened. Since the gap between the cabinet 13 and the front door 12 has a curved shape even at the position where the notification to the effect that the wire is started is started, the wire cannot be inserted into the housing from the gap between the cabinet 13 and the front door 12. It is possible to prevent a fraudulent act (a fraudulent act) of accessing the medal payout device 15 or the like by passing it through.

In the sixth embodiment, by stopping the holding portion 102 holding the first ejected medal between the first position and the second position, a The corresponding portion can be positioned in front of the ejection portion 103, thereby preventing fraudulent acts such as inserting a wire or the like from the medal ejection port to access the holding portion 102 of the hopper disk 101. As described above, by providing the configurations of both the sixth and eighth embodiments, it is possible to more firmly prevent fraudulent acts such as inserting a wire or the like to access the medal payout device 15 .

Here, the distance between the first blocking part 13c and the second blocking part 12a is defined as "h1", the distance between the first blocking part 13c and the third blocking part 12b is defined as "h2", and the second blocking part 12a and the third blocking part 12a are defined as "h2". Let "h3" be the distance from the third blocking portion 12b, and let "w" be the projection width (depth) of the second blocking portion 12a.
Let "d" be the diameter of the medal and "t" be the thickness of the medal.
A typical medal size is 24.5 to 25.5 mm in diameter and 1.5 to 2.0 mm in thickness.
In the eighth embodiment, the relationship between the distance "h2" between the first closing portion 13c and the third closing portion 12b and the thickness "t" of the medal is set to satisfy "h2>t". ing.

Here, when the hall clerk opens the front door 12 to replenish the hopper 35 with medals, the medals may drop onto the bottom plate 13a of the cabinet 13.例文帳に追加
In particular, since the hopper 35 is replenished with medals through the opening on the front side of the cabinet 13, the medals may drop near the front end of the bottom plate 13a of the cabinet 13, that is, near the first closing portion 13c.

At this time, if it is set so as to satisfy "h2>t", even if the front door 12 is closed while the medals have fallen near the first closing portion 13c, the medals that have fallen near the first closing portion 13c will not be removed. , enters between the first closing portion 13c and the third closing portion 12b. Thereby, the front door 12 can be closed without damaging the front door 12 and the cabinet 13. - 特許庁In addition, the front door 12 does not become unable to be closed due to the token being caught between the first closing portion 13c and the third closing portion 12b.

Further, in the eighth embodiment, the relationship between the protrusion width (depth) "w" of the second closing portion 12a and the medal diameter "d" is set to satisfy "w<(d/2)". It is
By setting so as to satisfy "w<(d/2)", it is possible to prevent medals from being placed on the second closing portion 12a.
As a result, it is possible to prevent the front door 12 from being closed while the medals are placed on the second closing portion 12a. 12 and the cabinet 13 can be prevented from being damaged.

<Modified example of the eighth embodiment>
Although the eighth embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the contents described above, and various modifications such as those described below are possible.
(1) In the eighth embodiment, the door sensor is configured using an optical sensor having a light emitting/receiving unit.
Further, even when the door sensor is configured using the proximity sensor, the second closing portion 12a and the third closing portion 12b can be detected not only when the front door 12 is closed but also when the front door 12 is at the detection start position. The first closing portion 13c is arranged between the .

(2) In the eighth embodiment, a detection piece is provided on the front side of the left side plate of the cabinet 13 so as to be movable in the front-rear direction by opening and closing the front door 12 . When the front door 12 is closed, the detection piece is pushed backward by the front door 12 and enters the door sensor. I tried to go outside from inside the door sensor. However, it is not limited to this.
For example, a door sensor for detecting the opening of the front door 12 may be provided on the front side of the left side plate of the cabinet 13 and a detection piece may be provided at a position corresponding to the door sensor on the front door 12 . When the front door 12 is closed, the detection piece provided on the front door 12 enters the door sensor, and when the front door 12 is opened, the detection piece provided on the front door 12 goes out of the door sensor. can be

(3) In the eighth embodiment, the door sensor is provided on the cabinet 13 side.
(4) In the eighth embodiment, the door sensor is turned off when the detection piece is detected, and turned on when the detection piece is not detected. That is, the door sensor was set to be low active. However, it is not limited to this.
For example, contrary to the eighth embodiment, the door sensor may be turned on when the detection piece is detected, and turned off when the detection piece is not detected. That is, the door sensor may be set to high active.
In this case, the main control board 50 determines that the front door 12 is closed when the door sensor is on, and determines that the front door 12 is open when the door sensor is off. configured as follows.

(5) In the eighth embodiment, the first closing portion 13c is formed horizontally from the right end to the left end of the front end portion of the bottom plate 13a of the cabinet 13. As shown in FIG. In addition, the second closing portion 12a and the third closing portion 12b are formed oblong from the right end to the left end of the lower back surface of the front door 12. As shown in FIG. However, it is not limited to this.
For example, the first closing portion 13c may be composed of two members, a first member extending from the right end to the center of the bottom plate 13a and a second member extending from the center to the left end of the bottom plate 13a. You may comprise from three members which carried out.
Similarly to the first closing portion 13c, the second closing portion 12a and the third closing portion 12b may be composed of two members or may be composed of three members.
Thus, the first closing portion 13c, the second closing portion 12a, and the third closing portion 12b are not limited to being composed of one member, and may be composed of a plurality of members.

Also, the first closing portion 13c does not extend from the right end to the left end of the front end of the bottom plate 13a of the cabinet 13, and for example, the first closing portion 13c is provided near the right end or near the left end of the front end of the bottom plate 13a of the cabinet 13. You may have a part which does not have.
Similarly, the lower part of the back surface of the front door 12 may have a portion where the second closing portion 12a and the third closing portion 12b are not provided.
In this way, even if there is a portion where the first closing portion 13c, the second closing portion 12a, and the third closing portion 12b are not provided, the inside of the housing from the gap between the cabinet 13 and the front door 12 does not enter. It is possible to prevent fraudulent acts of accessing the medal payout device 15 or the like by inserting a wire or the like.
Also, the first closing portion 13c may be part of the bottom plate 13a of the cabinet 13, or may be a separate member from the bottom plate 13a of the cabinet 13. As shown in FIG.
Similarly, the second closing portion 12 a and the third closing portion 12 b may be part of the front door 12 or may be separate members from the front door 12 .

(6) In the eighth embodiment, when the front door 12 is closed, the first closing portion 13c is arranged between the second closing portion 12a and the third closing portion 12b.
At this time, a gap may be formed between the first closing portion 13c and the second closing portion 12a, or the first closing portion 13c and the second closing portion 12a may be in contact with each other.
Similarly, a gap may be formed between the first closing portion 13c and the third closing portion 12b, or the first closing portion 13c and the third closing portion 12b may be in contact with each other.
Alternatively, the entire first closing portion 13c may be arranged between the second closing portion 12a and the third closing portion 12b, or a part of the first closing portion 13c may be arranged between the second closing portion 12a and the third closing portion 12b. good too.

Furthermore, when the front door 12 is closed, the first closing portion 13c may contact a position on the rear surface of the front door 12 between the second closing portion 12a and the third closing portion 12b. .
Further, contrary to the eighth embodiment, the first closing portion 13c may be provided on the front door 12 side, and the second closing portion 12a and the third closing portion 12b may be provided on the cabinet 13 side.
That is, a first closing portion 13c projecting from the lower back surface of the front door 12 toward the cabinet 13 is provided. A protruding second closing portion 12a may be provided, and a third closing portion 12b may be provided that protrudes toward the front door 12 from a position above the first closing portion 13c at the front end of the bottom plate 13a of the cabinet 13.

(7) In the eighth embodiment, the relationship between the distance "h2" between the first closing portion 13c and the third closing portion 12b and the thickness "t" of the medal is set to satisfy "h2>t". .
However, the setting is not limited to this, and may be set so as to satisfy "h2<t", for example.
If set so as to satisfy "h2>t", when the front door 12 is closed with medals falling near the first closing portion 13c, the medals falling near the first closing portion 13c will move to the third closing portion. 12b is pushed into the cabinet 13 against its rear end. Thereby, the front door 12 can be closed without damaging the front door 12 and the cabinet 13. - 特許庁In addition, the front door 12 does not become unable to be closed due to the token being caught between the first closing portion 13c and the third closing portion 12b.

(8) In the eighth embodiment, the relationship between the protrusion width (depth) "w" of the second closing portion 12a and the medal diameter "d" is set so as to satisfy "w<(d/2)". did.
However, the setting is not limited to this, and may be set so as to satisfy "(d/2)<w<d", for example.
By satisfying "(d/2)<w", a medal can be placed on the second closing portion 12a. Further, by satisfying "w<d", even if an attempt is made to close the front door 12 with medals placed on the second closing portion 12a, the medals will be placed on the second closing portion 12a before the front door 12 is closed. Since the placed medal hits the front end of the cabinet 13, the front door 12 does not close.
As a result, it is possible for the hall clerk to know that the medals are placed on the second closing portion 12a. It can be removed to close the front door 12 .

(9) The relationship between the protrusion width (depth) "w" of the second closing portion 12a and the diameter "d" of the medal, and the distance "h1" between the first closing portion 13c and the second closing portion 12a and the medal The relationship with the thickness “t” may be set so as to satisfy “(d/2)<w” and “h1<t”.
As described above, by satisfying "(d/2)<w", medals can be placed on the second closing portion 12a. Further, by satisfying "h1<t", even if an attempt is made to close the front door 12 with medals placed on the second closing portion 12a, the medals will be placed on the second closing portion 12a before the front door 12 is closed. Since the placed medal hits the front end of the first closing portion 13c, the front door 12 does not close.
As a result, it is possible for the hall clerk to know that the medals are placed on the second closing portion 12a. It can be removed so that the front door 12 is closed.

(10) The relationship between the protrusion width (depth) "w" of the second closing portion 12a and the diameter "d" of the medal, and the distance "h1" between the first closing portion 13c and the second closing portion 12a and the medal The relationship with the thickness "t" may be set so as to satisfy "d<w" and "h1>t".
By satisfying "d<w", the entire medal can be placed on the second closing portion 12a. That is, the medal can be placed on the second closing portion 12a without part of the medal protruding from the second closing portion 12a. Further, by satisfying "h1>t", a medal can be inserted between the first closing portion 13c and the second closing portion 12a.

Therefore, when the front door 12 is closed with medals placed on the second closing portion 12a, the front door 12 closes with the medals placed between the first closing portion 13c and the second closing portion 12a. It will be. Thereby, the front door 12 can be closed without damaging the front door 12 and the cabinet 13. - 特許庁Also, the front door 12 does not close due to the tokens placed on the second closing portion 12a hitting the first closing portion 13c or the front end portion of the cabinet 13.
(11) The first to eighth embodiments and the various modifications shown in the first to eighth embodiments are not limited to being carried out independently, but can be carried out in combination as appropriate.

<Ninth Embodiment>
The ninth embodiment relates to the stop control of the reels 31 on the main control board 50 side and the control of the effect output on the sub control board 80 side.
FIG. 26(a) is a diagram showing the types of special prizes (accessories) and end conditions, and FIG. 26(b) is a diagram showing the types of game states and the specified number of each game state. (c) is a diagram showing a number table for internal lottery and advantageous section lottery in setting 1. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 26(a), in the ninth embodiment, as special bonuses (accessories), BB (first-class bonus continuous operation device; first-class big bonus), RB (first-class special bonus ; regular bonus), and MB (second type role continuous operation device; second type big bonus).
Here, BB is a device capable of continuously operating RB. That is, the RB game is continuously executed during the BB game. Also, during the RB game, the probability of winning a small winning combination increases. Furthermore, when the number of medals to be paid out during the RB game exceeds 100, the RB game ends. Furthermore, when the number of paid out medals during the BB game exceeds 250, the BB game ends.

Also, MB is a device that can continuously operate CB (second class special role). That is, the CB game is continuously executed during the MB game. Furthermore, during the CB game, regardless of the result of the lottery by the lottery lottery means 61, all minor winnings are repeatedly won, and the stop switch 42 is operated for a specific reel 31 (for example, the left reel 31). The time from the instant when the reel 31 is stopped until the reel 31 stops is within 75 ms (maximum moving frame number is 1 frame). Furthermore, the CB game ends after one game, and when the number of medals paid out during the MB game exceeds 14, the MB game ends.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 26(b), in the ninth embodiment, there are seven game states: non-RT, RT, RB inside, BB inside, RB game, BB game, and MB game. there is The main control board 50 controls the transition of these game states.
Here, the "specified number" means the number of inserted medals at which the start switch 41 can be operated (game can be started). In the ninth embodiment, the specified number in MB is set to "1", and the specified number in game states other than MB is set to "3".

In addition, "RT" means that the type (number) of condition devices (accessories, replays, small winnings) to be selected by lottery and the winning probability thereof are unique.
Furthermore, "non-RT" does not mean that it is not included in the concept of RT, but means that the type of conditional device to be the lottery target and its winning probability are different from RT.
When the RT start condition is satisfied in any game state, the next game shifts to RT, and when the RT end condition is satisfied in RT, the next game shifts to non-RT.

Also, when a special role is won, winning information of the special role is carried over to the next game until the symbol combination corresponding to the won special role stops on the effective line.
A game in which the special role is not won is called "non-internal", and the special role is won, but the symbol combination corresponding to the won special role is not stopped on the effective line, that is, the special role is won. A game in which information is carried over is called "internal".

Also, the probability that a desired pattern to be stopped and displayed on the effective line can be stopped on the effective line during the period from the moment the stop switch 42 is operated until the reel 31 stops (the maximum number of moving frames) is called "pull-in." rate (PB)”.
If the stop switch 42 is not operated at an appropriate position of the reel 31 (at an operation timing that allows the target symbol to be stopped on the effective line within the range of the maximum number of moving frames), the target symbol is stopped on the effective line (effective line). line) is called "PB≠1".
On the other hand, regardless of the position of the reel 31 at the moment the stop switch 42 is operated (regardless of the operation timing of the stop switch 42), the target symbol can always be stopped (drawn) on the effective line. It is called "PB=1".

Also, when BB is won and the symbol combination corresponding to BB stops on the effective line (BB wins), the BB game is started from the next game although no medals are paid out in the game this time. During the BB game, the probability of winning a small winning combination is increased by continuously executing the RB game. Then, when the number of paid out medals during the BB game exceeds 250, the BB game is terminated, and the next game returns to the game state before shifting to the BB game.
Furthermore, if BB is won but the pattern combination corresponding to BB does not stop on the effective line, the winning information of BB is carried over to the next game until the pattern combination corresponding to BB stops on the effective line. A game state in which winning information of BB is carried over is called "inside BB".
It should be noted that the transition timing into the inside of the BB can be appropriately set. For example, in the game in which the BB is won, after all the reels 31 are stopped, it may be moved to the inside of the BB. You can move inside.

Also, when RB is won and the symbol combination corresponding to RB stops on the effective line (RB wins), the RB game is started from the next game although no medals are paid out in this game. During the RB game, the probability of winning a small winning combination increases. Then, when the number of paid out medals during the RB game exceeds 100, the RB game is terminated, and the next game returns to the game state before shifting to the RB game.
Furthermore, if RB is won but the pattern combination corresponding to RB does not stop on the effective line, the winning information of RB is carried over to the next game until the pattern combination corresponding to RB stops on the effective line. The game state in which the winning information of RB is carried over is called "inside RB".
It should be noted that the transition timing into the inside of the RB can be appropriately set in the same manner as the timing of transition into the inside of the BB. For example, in the game in which the RB is won, after all the reels 31 are stopped, the reels 31 may be moved into the inside of the RB. You can move inside.

Also, when the MB is won and the symbol combination corresponding to the MB stops on the effective line (MB wins), no medals are paid out in the game this time, but the MB game is started from the next game. During the MB game, the CB game is continuously executed. When the number of medals to be paid out during the MB game exceeds 14, the MB game is terminated, and the next game returns to the game state before shifting to the MB game.

Furthermore, when the MB is won but the pattern combination corresponding to the MB does not stop on the effective line, the MB winning information is carried over to the next game until the pattern combination corresponding to the MB stops on the effective line. The game state in which the winning information of the MB is carried over is called "inside the MB".
In the ninth embodiment, since the symbol combination corresponding to the MB is set to "PB=1", when the MB is won, the symbol combination corresponding to the MB is always stopped on the active line in the current game. , and MB.

Further, the condition device (role) of the ninth embodiment is roughly classified into a special prize (role product), a replay (replay prize), and a small prize.
Furthermore, there are three types of special roles, BB, RB, and MB, two types of replays, Replay 1 and Replay 2, and small roles of common bell, left correct bell, and middle correct bell. , right correct bell, watermelon, cherry 1, and cherry 2.
The left correct bell, the middle correct bell, and the right correct bell are collectively referred to as "push order bell".
Further, the "condition device" is operated corresponding to the winning number determined by the lottery by the combination lottery means 61. - 特許庁When one winning number is determined, one or a plurality of conditional devices corresponding to the winning number are activated, and winning flags corresponding to the activated conditional devices are turned on.

As shown in FIG. 26(c), in the ninth embodiment, one winning number from "0" to "16" is determined by lottery by the role lottery means 61, and the determined winning number corresponds to the winning number. Any conditional device from non-won to MB will be activated.
Both of the two types of replays are individually elected, and do not overlap with other conditional devices (roles).
Also, there are four types of bells: a common bell, a left correct bell, a middle correct bell, and a right correct bell.

Furthermore, Watermelon has a case where it is elected alone and a case where it is concurrently elected with BB.
Furthermore, Cherry 1 has a case of winning alone and a case of double winning with BB, and Cherry 2 has a case of winning alone, a case of double winning with RB, and a case of double winning with BB. .
In addition, BB has a case where it wins alone and a case where it wins more than once with watermelon, cherry 1, or cherry 2, but RB never wins alone, it only wins more than once with cherry 2, and MB can only be elected alone, and will not be elected in duplicate with other roles.

In addition, "dividend" means the number of medals to be paid out when the symbol combination corresponding to each conditional device is stopped (the winning combination is won).
In the ninth embodiment, regarding the left correct bell, the middle correct bell, and the right correct bell, the payout differs between the prescribed number of 3 (game state other than during MB) and the prescribed number of 1 (in MB). The payout is the same for the specified number of 3 and the specified number of 1.

In addition, the left correct bell is a pressing order bell in which the left first stop is the correct pressing order and the rest of the left stop is the incorrect pressing order. , one medal is paid out in the order of pressing the wrong answer, and with the prescribed number of 1, 14 medals are paid out in the order of pressing the correct answer, and 15 medals are paid out in the order of pressing the wrong answer.
Similarly, for the middle correct bell, the middle first stop is the correct pushing order, and for the other than the middle first stop, the incorrect pushing order. For the right correct bell, the right first stop is the correct pushing order. , Right first stop is the pressing order bell that is the incorrect pressing order.
Note that the common bell is a bell that pays out eight medals regardless of the order in which it is pressed.

Further, as described in the first embodiment, the main CPU 55 of the main control board 50 includes the combination lottery means 61 (internal lottery means 61). The combination lottery means 61 draws lots for winning numbers. Then, when a winning number is determined by lottery by the combination lottery means 61, a condition device corresponding to the determined winning number is activated.
Also, the winning number lottery by the role lottery means 61 (internal lottery means 61) may be referred to as "internal lottery".
As shown in FIG. 26(c), in the ninth embodiment, one of winning numbers "0" to "15" is determined by lottery by the combination lottery means 61. FIG. Also, the winning numbers "0" to "15" correspond to the condition devices "non-winning" to "MB", respectively. Then, when the winning number is determined, the condition device corresponding to the determined winning number is activated.

For example, if the winning number "1" is determined, the "replay 1" condition device corresponding to the winning number "1" is activated. Also, when the winning number "8" is determined, the "watermelon + BB" condition device corresponding to the winning number "8" is activated.
As described in the first embodiment, the combination lottery means 61 includes random number generation means, random number extraction means for extracting the random number generated by the random number generation means, and random number extraction means based on the random number extracted by the random number extraction means. A winning number determining means for determining a winning number is provided, and when the winning number is determined, a condition device corresponding to the determined winning number is activated.
For example, the random number extracted by the random number extracting means may be the same between the non-internal and the internal, and the operating condition device may be the same. The conditional equipment used may be different.

Further, as described in the first embodiment, the main CPU 55 of the main control board 50 is provided with winning flag control means 62 . The winning flag control means 62 controls ON/OFF of the winning flag corresponding to each winning combination based on the winning number lottery result by the winning combination lottery means 61 .
In the ninth embodiment, winning flags are provided for each combination for all combinations. Then, when the winning number is determined by the lottery by the combination lottery means 61, the winning flag control means 62 turns on the winning flag of the combination included in the condition device corresponding to the determined winning number (sets the winning flag). .

For example, in non-RT, when the winning number "1" is determined by the lottery by the role lottery means 61, the winning flag of "replay 1" included in the condition device of "replay 1" corresponding to the winning number "1" It is turned on, and other winning flags are turned off.
Similarly, in non-RT, when the winning number "10" is determined by the lottery by the role lottery means 61, "Cherry 1" and "BB" included in the condition device of "Cherry 1 + BB" corresponding to the winning number "10" , are turned on, and the other winning flags are turned off.

In addition, since winning information for roles other than special roles (BB, RB, MB) is not carried over, even if a winning flag for a role that does not carry over winning information is won in the game this time and the winning flag for that role is turned on, that role will not be carried over. The winning flag is turned off at the end of the game this time, regardless of whether or not the player wins.
On the other hand, since the winning information of the special role (BB, RB, MB) is carried over, when the special role is won in the game this time and the winning flag of the special role is once turned on, the special role will be played. The winning flag is kept on until winning, and when the special combination wins, the winning flag is turned off.

For example, in non-RT, when the winning number "10" is determined by the lottery by the combination lottery means 61, "Cherry 1" and "BB" included in the condition device of "Cherry 1 + BB" corresponding to the winning number "10" However, if "BB" did not win in the game this time, regardless of whether "Cherry 1" won in the game this time, "Cherry The win flag of "1" is turned off, and the win flag of "BB" is kept on. In this case, from the next game, it shifts to inside the BB.

In addition, for example, when the winning number "9" is determined by the lottery by the role lottery means 61 in the BB, in addition to the winning flag of "BB" carried over, "Cherry" corresponding to the winning number "9" The winning flag of "cherry 1" included in the conditional device of "1" is turned on. That is, the two winning flags of "cherry 1" and "BB" are turned on.
For this reason, in non-RT, when the winning number "10" is determined by the lottery by the role lottery means 61 (double winning "Cherry 1 + BB"), and when the lottery by the role lottery means 61 is made inside the BB, the winning number "9" ” (single winning in “Cherry 1”), the ON/OFF state of the winning flag is the same.

Also, during the MB game, the winning flag control means 62 sets the winning flags of all the small winning combinations (common bell, left correct bell, medium correct bell, right correct bell, watermelon, cherry 1, and cherry 2). turn on. Therefore, although it is not won by lottery by the role lottery means 61, it is in the same state as winning all the minor roles.
For example, during the MB game, when the winning number "0" is determined by the lottery by the role lottery means 61, none of the roles are included in the "non-winning" corresponding to the winning number "0", but all The winning flags of the small wins (the seven small wins mentioned above) are turned on.
Also, for example, during the MB game, when the winning number "1" is determined by the lottery by the role lottery means 61, "Replay 1" included in the condition device of "Replay 1" corresponding to the winning number "1" In addition to the win flags, the win flags for all minor wins (the above seven minor wins) are turned on.

Further, as described in the first embodiment, the main CPU 55 of the main control board 50 includes reel control means 65, and this reel control means 65 includes a plurality of stop position determination tables corresponding to on/off of winning flags. Prepare. Each stop position determination table defines the stop position of the reel 31 with respect to the position of the reel 31 at the moment the stop switch 42 is operated.
A winning number is determined by a lottery by the combination lottery means 61, and when the winning flag control means 62 controls ON/OFF of the winning flag of the combination included in the condition device corresponding to the determined winning number, the reel control means. 65 selects a stop position determination table corresponding to ON/OFF of the winning flag.

When the stop switch 42 is operated, the stop position of the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 is determined based on the selected stop position determination table and the position of the reel 31 at the moment the stop switch 42 is operated. Then, the reel 31 is controlled to stop at the determined position.
The stop position determination table selected when the winning flag for Replay 1 is ON and the winning flags other than Replay 1 are OFF is such that the symbol combination corresponding to Replay 1 is stopped on the effective line, and The stop position of each reel 31 is determined so that the symbol combination corresponding to the combination other than Replay 1 does not stop on the activated line.

Furthermore, the stop position determination table selected when the winning flag of the left correct bell is ON and the winning flags other than the left correct bell are OFF is that when the stop switch 42 is operated for left first stop, , When the symbol combination for paying out 8 medals stops on the effective line and the stop switch 42 is operated other than the left first stop, the symbol combination for paying out 1 medal stops on the effective line. , the stop position of each reel 31 is determined.

In addition, the column of "internal lottery set number" in FIG. 26(c) shows the set number of each winning number in each game state. Dividing the internal lottery number by "65536" gives the winning probability.
For example, since the winning number "4" in non-RT is "3000", the winning number "4" is determined by the lottery by the role lottery means 61 in non-RT, and the "left" corresponding to the winning number "4" The probability that the conditional device of "correct answer bell" is activated is "3000/65536".

Also, in the column of "internal lottery setting" in FIG. 26(c), the "*" mark indicates that the advantageous section lottery can be executed.
Here, the “advantageous section” means a game section having performance related to the instruction function (in which the instruction function may be operated).
Also, the "instruction function" means a function of displaying (informing) the player of an "advantageous operation mode".
Furthermore, "activation of the instruction function" includes displaying the correct order of pressing when the winning order of the pressing bell is won.

Furthermore, "advantageous section lottery" means a lottery for determining whether or not to shift to an advantageous section.
Then, when winning in the advantageous section lottery and moving to the advantageous section, it becomes possible to activate the instruction function, and it is possible to notify the correct pushing order when the pushing order bell wins.
For example, the set number "8000" of the winning number "3"("commonbell") in non-RT is marked with "*". If the winning number "3"("commonbell") is determined by the lottery, it means that the advantageous section lottery can be executed.

Also, as shown in FIG. 26(c), in non-RT, when the winning number "0" (non-winning) is determined, and the winning numbers "4" to "6"("left correct bell", " When it is determined to be "middle correct bell" or "right correct bell"), the advantageous section lottery is not executed, but in other cases, the advantageous section lottery can be executed.
In addition, inside RT, RB, and inside BB, when the winning numbers "4" to "6"("left correct bell", "middle correct bell", or "right correct bell") are determined Except, when non-RT and set numbers are determined to be the same winning number, the advantageous section lottery can be executed.

Also, inside the BB, the winning information of the BB is carried over, so when the winning number "9" (single winning of "Cherry 1") is determined inside the BB, and in non-RT (non-internal) The ON/OFF state of the winning flag is the same as when the winning number is determined to be "10" (double winning of "Cherry 1+BB").
In addition, the number of winning numbers "10" (double winning of "Cherry 1 + BB") in non-RT (non-internal) and the number of winning numbers "9" (single winning of "Cherry 1") in BB are set to the same "200".
Therefore, when the winning number "9" (single winning of "Cherry 1") is determined in the BB, the advantageous section lottery can be executed.

In addition, when the winning number "9"("Cherry1" wins alone) is determined in the RB, the "Cherry 1" winning flag and the carried-over "RB" winning flag are turned on. .
In addition, “BB” and “RB” are the same in that they are both special roles (accessories), and the winning number “10” (“Cherry 1 + BB” duplicate winning) in non-RT (non-internal) The registered number and the registered number of the winning number "9" (single winning of "cherry 1") in the RB are set to the same "200".
Therefore, even when the winning number "9"("cherry1" is won alone) is determined in the RB, the advantageous section lottery can be executed.

In addition, when the winning number "12" (double winning of "Cherry 2 + RB") or winning number "13" (double winning of "Cherry 2 + BB") is determined in non-RT, and during RB or BB When the number "11" (single winning of "Cherry 2") is determined, the winning flag of "Cherry 2" and the winning flag of the special role (accessory) are turned on.
In addition, the winning number "12" (double winning of "Cherry 2 + RB") and the winning number "13" (double winning of "Cherry 2 + BB") in non-RT are added up to "300", inside RB and BB Matches the number "300" of the winning number "11" (single win of "Cherry 2") in the interior.
Therefore, even when the winning number "11"("Cherry2" wins alone) is determined in the RB and BB, the advantageous section lottery can be executed.

In addition, the column of "advantageous section lottery set number" in FIG. 26(c) shows the set number of each winning number. The odds of winning can be obtained by dividing the winning lottery number by "16384".
For example, in non-RT, inside RB or inside BB, when the winning number "1" (single winning of "replay 1") is determined in the lottery by the role lottery means 61, the probability of winning in the advantageous section lottery is It becomes "20/16384".
Also, for example, in non-RT or RT, the probability of winning in the advantageous section lottery when the lottery by the role lottery means 61 determines the winning number "8" (double winning of "watermelon + BB") is "10000/16384 ”.

As described above, in the ninth embodiment, the symbol combination corresponding to MB is set to "PB=1".
In addition, as shown in FIG. 26(c), MB lottery is performed in non-RT and RT. The game is shifted to the MB game from the next game without being inside the game.
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 26(c), during the MB game, a lottery for replay 1 or replay 2 is carried out, and regardless of the lottery result of the lottery means 61, all the small wins are repeatedly won. Become.

For this reason, when the winning number "1" (single winning of "Replay 1") is determined during the MB game, the winning flag of "Replay 1" and all small combinations (common bell, left correct bell, middle Winning flags of the correct bell, right correct bell, watermelon, cherry 1, and cherry 2) are turned on.
Similarly, when the winning number "2" (single winning of "replay 2") is determined during the MB game, the winning flag of "replay 2" and the winning flags of all minor combinations are turned on.

Then, when the winning number "1" (single winning of "replay 1") is determined during the MB game, that is, when the winning flag of "replay 1" and the winning flags of all minor combinations are turned on. , the same stop position determination table as when only the win flag for the left correct bell is ON is selected. However, during the MB game, the specified number is 1 (1 card is inserted), and the payout is different from non-RT, etc., and 14 or 15 cards are paid out.
As a result, when the winning number "1" (single winning of "replay 1") is determined during the MB game, when the stop switch 42 is operated with the left first stop (when the pressing order is correct), 14 When the symbol combination that pays out 15 medals stops on the effective line and the stop switch 42 is operated other than the left first stop (when the pushing order is incorrect), the symbol combination that pays out 15 medals is stopped. Stop on a valid line.

Similarly, when the winning number "2" (single winning of "replay 2") is determined during the MB game, the same stop position determination table as when only the winning flag of the right correct bell is ON is selected. At the first stop (when the pressing order is correct), 14 cards are paid out, and at times other than the right first stop (when the pressing order is incorrect), 15 cards are paid out.
In the first game during the MB game, the pressing order for paying out 14 cards is notified, and in the second game during the MB game, the pressing order for paying out 15 cards is notified.
As described above, the termination condition of the MB game is set to the fact that the number of paid out medals exceeds 14, so by performing such notification, 29 medals are paid out during the MB game. can be made In addition, since the prescribed number is set to "1" during the MB game, the player can acquire 27 medals obtained by subtracting the inserted number "2" from the payout number "29".

Also, in order to inform the player of the pushing order that is advantageous to the player during the MB game, it is necessary to shift to the advantageous section.
Therefore, as shown in FIG. 26(c), in non-RT or RT, when the winning number "15" (single winning of "MB") is determined in the lottery by the role lottery means 61, winning the advantageous section lottery The probability is set to "16384/16384", that is, "100%".

Also, as described in the first embodiment, the main CPU 55 of the main control board 50 has the effect group number selection means 64 . This effect group number selection means 64 selects the effect group number corresponding to the winning number to be transmitted to the sub-control board 80 .
As shown in FIG. 26(c), an effect group number corresponding to the winning number is predetermined. Specifically, the effect group numbers "0" to "3" are determined corresponding to the winning numbers "0" to "3", and the effect group number "4" corresponding to the winning numbers "4" to "6". ” are determined, and effect group numbers “5” to “13” are determined corresponding to winning numbers “7” to “15”.
Then, when the winning number is determined by lottery by the role lottery means 61, the performance group number selection means 64 selects the performance group number corresponding to the determined winning number.

Further, as described in the first embodiment, the main CPU 55 of the main control board 50 has the pressing order instruction number selection means 63 . This pressing order instruction number selecting means 63 selects the winning number corresponding to the pressing order bell (left correct bell, middle correct bell, right correct bell) by lottery by the lottery lottery means 61. This is for selecting a pressing order instruction number (a number corresponding to the correct pressing order) corresponding to the .

Further, as described in the first embodiment, the main CPU 55 of the main control board 50 has the control command transmission means 71 . The control command transmitting means 71 transmits information (control commands) necessary for the effects output by the sub-control board 80 to the sub-control board 80 .
In the ninth embodiment, the control command transmitting means 71 includes, as control commands, information when the bed switch 40 is operated, information when the start switch 41 is operated, a pressing order instruction number (during AT and correct pressing). (only when the winning number corresponding to the condition device with order is determined), the effect group number, information when the stop switch 42 is operated, information on the winning combination, etc., as well as the game state (non-RT, RT , inside RB, inside BB, inside RB, inside BB, inside MB), effect group number, etc. are transmitted to the sub-control board 80 .

As a result, the sub-control board 80 side determines the game state on the main control board 50 side and the condition device (excluding the left correct bell, the middle correct bell, and the right correct bell) operated by the winning lottery means 61. be able to.
On the side of the sub-control board 80, it can be judged from the effect group number that one of the left correct bell, the middle correct bell, or the right correct bell has been won. It is not possible to judge which one of the winners (correct answer order).
Also, during the AT, the correct pressing order can be notified by the pressing order instruction number.

Further, the sub-control board 80 controls the selection, output, etc. of effects during the game and during the game standby.
The main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 are electrically connected, and the main control board 50 (control command transmission means 71) is unidirectionally transmitted to the sub-control board 80 with information ( control command).
Similar to the main control board 50, the sub control board 80 includes an input port 81, an output port 82, an RWM 83, a ROM 84, a sub CPU 85, and the like.
Also, the sub-control board 80 is electrically connected to the production lamp 21 , the speaker 22 , the image display device 23 , etc. via the input port 81 or the output port 82 .

Furthermore, the sub CPU 85 of the sub control board 80 is provided with effect output control means 91 and the like, and the ROM 84 of the sub control board 80 is provided with a effect determination table and the like.
Furthermore, the effect determination table defines the effect to be output, and is provided in a plurality. to be output.
That is, the effect output control means 91 determines at what timing and what effect to output based on the control command received from the main control board 50 and one of the effect determination tables, and Accordingly, the outputs of the production lamp 21, the speaker 22, and the image display device 23 are controlled.

FIG. 27 is a diagram showing an effect determination table commonly used for non-RT (non-internal) and RT (non-AT and non-internal), and FIG. 28 is a effect determination table commonly used for inside RB and inside BB. It is a figure which shows.
As shown in FIG. 27, in the ninth embodiment, 18 types of effect patterns from "no effect" to "continuous effect" are provided. Each production pattern from "character production (lively)" to "continuous production" defines production with different contents.
For example, the "fixed effect" is a effect that allows the player to know that the special combination has been won, and the "notification effect after the first stop" is the effect after the first stop (after the first stop switch 42 is operated). ``Left first stop effect'' is a effect that indicates that the left stop switch 42 should be operated first; This is the production that is output by

In addition, the column of "effect pattern allocation number" in FIG. 27 shows the allocation number of each effect pattern when each effect group number is received. The selection probability of each effect pattern is obtained by dividing the effect pattern allocation number by "256". In addition, in FIG. 27, the name of the corresponding condition device is described under each production group number.
For example, in non-RT, the winning number "1" (single winning of "replay 1") is determined by lottery by the role lottery means 61, and the selection probability of "no effect" when the effect group number "1" is transmitted is The probability of selection of “character production (lively)” is “20/256”, the selection probability of “conversation production (lively)” is also “20/256”, and the probability of selection of “cut-in production” is “128/256”. (strong effect)” is “0/256”.

As described above, the control command transmitting means 71 sends information indicating the gaming state (non-RT, RT, inside RB, inside BB, during RB, during BB, during MB) to the sub-control board 80, and Send the performance group number.
Then, the effect output control means 91 of the sub control board 80 selects the effect determination table corresponding to the game state based on the information indicating the game state received from the main control board 50, and the selected effect determination table and the main Based on the performance group number received from the control board 50, the performance of any performance pattern is determined, and the outputs of the performance lamp 21, the speaker 22 and the image display device 23 are controlled according to the determination.

Here, in non-RT (non-inside), when the winning number "14" (single winning of "BB") is determined by lottery by the role lottery means 61, and the effect group number "12" is transmitted, effect output The control means 91 selects the effect determination table shown in FIG. 27 that is commonly used for non-RT and RT (non-AT), and places the column of effect group number "12" ("BB" wins alone) in this effect determination table. Using the numbers, it is determined which of the production patterns to output the production. As shown in FIG. 27, when "BB" is won alone in non-RT, for example, "continuous effect" is selected with a probability of "40/256".

On the other hand, in the inside of the BB, when the winning number "0"("non-winning") is determined by the lottery by the role lottery means 61 and the effect group number "0" is transmitted, the effect output control means 91 Select the effect determination table used in common inside the RB and inside the BB shown in FIG. Determines whether to output pattern effects. As shown in FIG. 28, when "non-win" inside the BB, for example, "determined effect" is selected with a probability of "80/256".
In this way, the performance output control means 91 is for the game in which ``BB'' is won alone by the role lottery means 61 in non-RT (non-inside), and the game in which the role lottery means 61 wins ``non-win'' in BB. A performance to be output is determined by using a different performance determination table for a game. Therefore, the selection probability of each effect pattern is different.

Also, in the non-RT mode, when the winning number "14" (single winning of "BB") is determined by the lottery by the role lottery means 61, the winning flag control means 62 on the main control board 50 side sets the winning number "14". , the win flag of 'BB' included in the condition device of 'BB' corresponding to ' is turned on, and the other win flags are turned off. Further, the reel control means 65 selects the stop position determination table corresponding to when the "BB" win flag is on and the other win flags are off. This stop position determination table will be referred to as a "BB single stop position determination table".

The "BB single stop position determination table" is used to stop each reel 31 so that the symbol combination corresponding to BB is stopped on the activated line and the symbol combination corresponding to the combination other than BB is not stopped on the activated line. position is determined.
Then, when the stop switch 42 is operated, the reel control means 65 controls the stop switch 42 based on the "BB single stop position determination table" and the position of the reel 31 at the moment the stop switch 42 is operated. The stop position of the reel 31 corresponding to is determined, and the reel 31 is controlled to stop at the determined position.

In addition, when the winning number is "0"("non-winning") in the lottery by the combination lottery means 61 inside the BB, the winning flag control means 62 on the main control board 50 side displays the carried over "BB". 's win flag remains on, and the other win flags are turned off. Further, the reel control means 65 selects the stop position determination table corresponding to when the "BB" win flag is on and the other win flags are off. That is, the same "BB single stop position determination table" as when "BB" is single-won by the combination lottery means 61 in non-RT is selected.
Therefore, when "not won" by the combination lottery means 61 inside the BB, the stop control of the reels 31 is performed in the same way as when "BB" is won alone by the combination lottery means 61 in non-RT. Further, "stop control of the same reel 31 is performed" means that when each stop switch 42 is operated in the same manner (push order and operation timing), each reel 31 stops at the same position, and the same reel 31 stops at the same position. Means that the stop roll is displayed.

In this way, when "BB" is won alone by the winning lottery means 61 in non-RT and when "non-winning" is won by the winning lottery means 61 inside the BB, on the side of the main control board 50, the same The stop position determination table is used to determine the stop position of the reel 31, but on the sub-control board 80 side, a different effect determination table is used to determine the effect to be output. Therefore, the selection probability of each effect pattern is different.
Thus, even if the stop control of the reels 31 on the main control board 50 side is the same, different effects can be output on the sub control board 80 side, and the effects can be diversified.
Further, even if the stop control of the same reel 31 is performed on the main control board 50 side and the same stop number is displayed, a different effect is output on the sub control board 80 side, so that a special combination is won. It is possible to make it possible for the player to guess that it is inside (inside).

Furthermore, by selecting different effect determination tables on the side of the sub-control board 80 when non-RT "BB" is won alone and when "non-win" inside BB, "BB" alone in non-RT can be selected. At the time of winning, a performance determination table with a low selection probability of the fixed performance (a performance that the player can understand that the BB has been won) is selected, and at the time of ``not winning'' in the BB, a performance with a high selection probability of the fixed performance. A decision table can be selected.
As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand that "BB" has been won in the game in which "BB" has been won. By making it easy for the player to understand, it is possible to make the player aim for the winning of 'BB', prevent the inside of the BB from continuing indefinitely, and prevent the player from being disadvantaged.

Also, in non-RT, when the lottery by the role lottery means 61 determines the winning number "8" (double winning of "watermelon + BB"), and the effect group number "6" is transmitted, the effect output control means 91 The effect determination table shown in FIG. 27 that is commonly used for non-RT (non-internal) and RT (non-AT and non-internal) is selected, and the effect group number "6" ("Watermelon + BB" duplicate winning in this effect determination table is selected. ) is used to determine which effect pattern effect is to be output. As shown in FIG. 27, when "watermelon + BB" double winning in non-RT, for example, with a probability of "50/256", "character effect (lively)", "conversation effect (lively)", or "cut-in effect (lively)" "strong effect)" is selected, and "continuous effect" is selected with a probability of "30/256".

On the other hand, in the inside of the BB, when the winning number "7" (single winning of "watermelon") is determined by the lottery by the role lottery means 61 and the effect group number "5" is transmitted, the effect output control means 91 selects the effect determination table shown in FIG. 28 that is commonly used inside the RB and inside the BB, and uses the number set in the column of the effect group number "5" (single winning of "watermelon") in this effect determination table. , determines which of the production patterns to output the production. As shown in FIG. 28, when "watermelon" in the BB is won alone, for example, "character effect (lively)" or "conversation effect (lively)" is selected with a probability of "73/256", and "20 /256” to select a continuous effect.
In this way, the effect output control means 91 can be used for a game in which "watermelon + BB" is repeatedly won by the role lottery means 61 in non-RT (non-inside), and a game in which "watermelon" is won alone by the role lottery means 61 in BB. A performance to be output is determined by using a different performance determination table depending on the game played. Therefore, the selection probability of each effect pattern is different.

In addition, during the non-internal mode, by showing the player a continuous effect over a plurality of games, in order to sustain the player's expectation for winning "BB" for a long time, selection of continuous effect at the time of duplicate winning of "Watermelon + BB" Set a high probability.
On the other hand, in the BB, if the player is shown a continuous effect over a plurality of games, the winning of the "BB" will be delayed and the medals of the player will be reduced. The selection probability of the continuous performance at the time of ``non-winning'' is set to be high in order to make the player aim for the ``BB'' prize at an early stage.
It should be noted that the winning probability of each combination and the number of payouts at the time of winning may be set in the BB so that the player's medals do not decrease, and then the selection probability of the continuous effect may be set high.

Also, in non-RT (non-inside), when the winning number "8" (double winning of "watermelon + BB") is determined in the lottery by the role lottery means 61, the winning flag control means 62 on the main control board 50 side , two winning flags of "watermelon" and "BB" included in the condition device of "watermelon + BB" corresponding to the winning number "8" are turned on, and other winning flags are turned off. Also, the reel control means 65 selects the corresponding stop position determination table when the two winning flags of "Watermelon" and "BB" are ON and the other winning flags are OFF. This stop position determination table is called a "watermelon + BB duplication stop position determination table".

The "watermelon + BB overlap stop position determination table" is designed so that the symbol combination corresponding to watermelon or BB can be stopped on the active line, and the symbol combination corresponding to the combination other than watermelon and BB is not stopped on the active line. It defines the stop position of the reel 31 .
Then, when the stop switch 42 is operated, the reel control means 65 determines the position of the reel 31 at the moment the stop switch 42 is operated based on the "watermelon + BB overlap stop position determination table" and the stop switch 42. The stop position of the reel 31 corresponding to 42 is determined, and the reel 31 is controlled to stop at the determined position.

Further, in the inside of the BB, when the winning number "7" (single winning of "Watermelon") is determined by the lottery by the role lottery means 61, on the main control board 50 side, the winning flag control means 62 keeps " While maintaining the win flag of "BB" on, in addition, the win flag of "Watermelon" included in the condition device of "Watermelon" corresponding to the win number "7" is turned on, and "Watermelon" and "BB" are turned on. ” is turned off. As a result, the two winning flags "watermelon" and "BB" are turned on. Also, the reel control means 65 selects the corresponding stop position determination table when the two winning flags of "Watermelon" and "BB" are ON and the other winning flags are OFF. That is, the same "watermelon + BB stop position determination table" as when "watermelon + BB" is won by the combination lottery means 61 in non-RT is selected.

Therefore, when "watermelon" is won alone by the role lottery means 61 in the BB, the stop control of the reels 31 is performed in the same way as when "watermelon + BB" is won by the role lottery means 61 in non-RT. .
In this way, when "watermelon + BB" is won by the combination lottery means 61 in non-RT, and when "watermelon" is won alone by the combination lottery means 61 in the BB, on the main control board 50 side, The same stop position determination table is used to determine the stop position of the reel 31, but on the sub-control board 80 side, a different effect determination table is used to determine the effect to be output. Therefore, the selection probability of each effect pattern is different.

Also, when "Cherry 1 + BB" is won in non-RT, and when "Cherry 1" is won alone in BB, when "Watermelon + BB" is won in non-RT and in BB Similar to the case where "Watermelon" is won alone, on the main control board 50 side, the same stop position determination table is used to determine the stop position of the reel 31, but on the sub control board 80 side, a different effect determination table is used. Use to determine the effect to output. Therefore, the selection probability of each effect pattern is different.

Furthermore, when "Cherry 2 + BB" or "Cherry 2 + RB" are won in a non-RT, and when "Cherry 2" is won alone in BB or RB, "Watermelon + BB" in non-RT As in the case of double winning and the single winning of "watermelon" in the BB, the main control board 50 side determines the stop position of the reel 31 using the same stop position determination table. On the board 80 side, a different effect determination table is used to determine the effect to be output. Therefore, the selection probability of each effect pattern is different.
Thus, even if the stop control of the reels 31 on the main control board 50 side is the same, different effects can be output on the sub control board 80 side, so that the effects can be diversified.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 27 and 28, when "watermelon" is won alone in non-RT and when "watermelon" is won alone in BB, the allocation numbers of each production pattern are the same. Therefore, the selection probability of each effect pattern is the same.
However, when "watermelon" is won alone in non-RT, the "watermelon" winning flag is on, and the corresponding stop position determination table is selected when the other winning flags are off, When "watermelon" is won alone during BB, the two winning flags of "watermelon" and "BB" are on, and the corresponding stop position determination table is selected when the other winning flags are off. do. Therefore, the stop control of the reels 31 is different between when "watermelon" is won alone in non-RT and when "watermelon" is won alone in the BB.
In this way, the selection probability of each effect pattern is the same on the sub-control board 80 side when "watermelon" is won alone in non-RT and when "watermelon" is won alone in BB. , the stop control of the reel 31 is different on the main control board 50 side.

As described above, in a plurality of game states, the random numbers extracted by the random number extraction means of the combination lottery means 61 are the same, and the winning numbers determined by the winning number determination means of the combination lottery means 61 are the same. When the same condition device is activated, the stop control of the reels 31 for each game state (selected stop position determination table) is the same, but the selection probability of each effect pattern (selected effect determination table ) are different.

Further, in a plurality of game states, the random numbers extracted by the random number extraction means of the combination lottery means 61 are different, and the winning numbers determined by the winning number determination means of the combination lottery means 61 are the same. When the device is activated, the reel 31 stop control (selected stop position determination table) is the same for each game state, but the selection probability of each effect pattern (selected effect determination table) may differ. .

Furthermore, in a plurality of game states, the random number extracted by the random number extraction means of the combination lottery means 61 is different, and the winning number determined by the winning number determination means of the combination lottery means 61 is different. is activated, the reel 31 stop control (selected stop position determination table) is the same for each game state, but the selection probability of each effect pattern (selected effect determination table) may differ.

<Modified example of the ninth embodiment>
Although the ninth embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the contents described above, and various modifications such as those described below are possible.
(1) Types of wins, types of conditional devices, types of game states, specified numbers in each game state, dividends at the time of winning each win, allocation of internal lottery numbers, and advantageous zone lottery positions shown in the ninth embodiment The allocation of numbers, the types of effect patterns, the allocation of allocation numbers for each effect pattern, and the like are merely examples, and can be appropriately set according to game contents.

(2) In the ninth embodiment, only the number tables for the internal lottery and the advantageous section lottery in setting 1 are shown. A number table for the lottery and the advantageous section lottery can be provided.
(3) In the ninth embodiment, the control command transmitting means 71 transmits information indicating the game state and the effect group number to the sub-control board 80 . Thereby, the sub-control board 80 side judges the game state and the condition device on the main control board 50 side, and selects an effect pattern with a probability corresponding to the game state and the condition device. However, it is not limited to this.
For example, the control command transmitting means 71 may transmit a winning number determined by internal lottery to the sub-control board 80, and transmit information indicating a condition device corresponding to the winning number determined by internal lottery. good too. Then, on the sub-control board 80 side, the condition device on the main control board 50 side may be judged based on the information indicating the winning number and the condition device received.

Also, for example, the control command transmitting means 71 transmits information indicating the condition device determined by the internal lottery and information on the winning combination to the sub-control board 80 . Then, the sub-control board 80 side may determine the gaming state on the main control board 50 side based on the information indicating the condition device and the information on the winning combination.
Furthermore, for example, the sub-control board 80 receives information indicating that "BB" has been won, but if it does not receive information indicating that "BB" has won, the game state on the main control board 50 side will be changed. It can be determined that it is inside the BB.
Then, based on the game state on the main control board 50 side determined by the sub control board 80 side, and the information indicating the effect group number, winning number, and condition device received from the main control board 50, the sub control board 80 side A production pattern may be selected.

(4) For example, the control command transmitting means 71 transmits to the sub-control board 80 information indicating ON/OFF of the winning flag corresponding to each combination and information on the winning combination. Then, the sub-control board 80 side may determine the game state and condition device on the main control board 50 side based on information indicating ON/OFF of the winning flag and information on the winning combination.
For example, if the information indicating that the win flag of 'BB' is on is received but the information indicating that 'BB' has won is not received, the gaming state on the side of the main control board 50 is in the middle of BB. can be determined.

Further, since the "BB" lottery is not performed inside the BB, when the information indicating that only the winning flag of "BB" is ON is received inside the BB, the internal lottery on the main control board 50 side is performed. , it can be determined that the winning number "0"("notwinning") is determined.
Then, based on the game state on the main control board 50 side determined by the sub control board 80 side and the condition device on the main control board 50 side similarly determined by the sub control board 80 side, the effect pattern on the sub control board 80 side may be selected.

(5) In the ninth embodiment, "single winning" means winning only for a role other than the special role, and not winning the special role at the same time. , It is used in the sense that a special role and a role other than the special role are elected at the same time.
For example, the winning of "watermelon + control role 1" in the BB is a double winning in the sense that multiple types of roles are won at the same time, but only the roles other than the special role are won. Since they are not elected at the same time, in the sense of the ninth embodiment, they are elected singly.

In addition, when "Watermelon + Control 1 + BB" in non-internal wins (double win) and when "Watermelon + Control 1 in BB" wins (single win), on the main control board 50 side, Since the ON/OFF state of the winning flag is the same, the stop position of the reel 31 is determined using the same stop position determination table, but the winning number and the effect group number are different. A performance to be output is determined using a different performance determination table.
Note that the "control combination" is a combination for changing the stop position determination table to be selected by changing the on/off state of the win flag, thereby varying the stop control of the reels 31. It's not a role for

(6) In the ninth embodiment, when the winning number "11"("Cherry2" is won alone) is determined in the RB and BB, the advantageous section lottery can be executed. The advantageous section lottery may not be executed when a winning combination that is duplicated with the special winning combination is won.
(7) The first to ninth embodiments and the various modifications shown in the first to ninth embodiments are not limited to being implemented alone, but can be implemented in combination as appropriate.

<Tenth Embodiment>
The tenth embodiment relates to display control of the management information display LED 74. FIG.
The main CPU 55 is in a setting change state (setting change mode, setting change in progress) and a setting confirmation state for 5 seconds from a predetermined timing (for example, when power is turned on, when the first interrupt process is started, when a program is started, etc.) based on power-on. In (setting confirmation mode, setting confirmation) and in the RWM abnormal error state, control is performed so that all the LEDs of the management information display LED 74 are turned on.
As described in the second embodiment, the management information display LED 74 is composed of 4-digit LEDs, so when all the LEDs are turned on, "8888" is displayed. As a result, it is possible to check whether there is any problem with the LEDs of the management information display LEDs 74 .

If the setting key switch is on when the power is turned on, the setting change state is entered in which the setting value can be changed. Furthermore, when shifting to the setting change state, all the LEDs of the management information display LED 74 are turned on.
The 5 seconds from the predetermined timing based on power-on is set to be longer than the time required from power-on to transition to the setting change state if the setting key switch is turned on at power-on. there is

Here, for example, assume that the lighting period of all the LEDs of the management information display LED 74 from a predetermined timing based on power-on is set to a time shorter than the time required from power-on to transition to the setting change state. In this case, first, all LEDs of the management information display LEDs 74 are turned on, after which the management information is once displayed on the management information display LEDs 74, and then all the LEDs of the management information display LEDs 74 are turned on again. For this reason, there is a possibility that the administrator (hall clerk) may suspect that there is some kind of problem with the gaming machine.

Therefore, the lighting period of all LEDs of the management information display LED 74 from a predetermined timing based on power-on is set to 5 seconds.
Note that the lighting period of all LEDs of the management information display LED 74 from a predetermined timing based on power-on is not limited to 5 seconds, and may be any time as long as it is longer than the time required from power-on to transition to the setting change state. can be set to

The test pattern display of the management information display LED 74 will be further described below.
In the tenth embodiment, the four-digit LEDs of the management information display LED 74 are referred to as "digit 6", "digit 7", "digit 8", and "digit 9" from left to right.
Also, of the four-digit LEDs of the management information display LED 74, the left two LEDs (digits 6 and 7) are referred to as "identification segments", and the right two LEDs (digits 8 and 9) are referred to as "ratio called "Seg".

Furthermore,
Digit 6: Identification Seg High Digit Digit 7: Identification Seg Low Digit Digit 8: Ratio Seg High Digit Digit 9: Ratio Seg Low Digit.
Furthermore, in the tenth embodiment, each LED (digit) of the management information display LED 74 is an 8-segment LED consisting of segments A to G and segment DP.

The display of the test pattern on the management information display LED 74 is for checking whether all the segments (segments A to G and DP) are correctly lit and extinguished. Therefore, during the period (time) during which the test pattern is displayed, all segments are set to have a lighting state and a lighting-out state.
When the test pattern is displayed on the management information display LED 74, it is displayed at one of the following timings.
(1) Within 5 seconds from the specified timing based on power-on (2) Within 5 seconds from setting change start processing (3) Setting change (mode) in progress (4) Setting confirmation (mode) in progress (5) RWM abnormal error in progress

As a test pattern, first, a predetermined display is switched every second and displayed for 5 seconds. The time for which one display is maintained is not limited to 1 second, and the display time of the test pattern is not limited to 5 seconds (other than 5 seconds may be acceptable).
Then, the test pattern is set so that all the segments of all the LEDs have a lit state and an extinguished state during the test pattern display time of 5 seconds.
Secondly, the test pattern is to blink all segments of all LEDs. Even with this setting, all segments of all LEDs can be turned on and off with one flashing (lighting and extinguishing).

FIG. 29 is a diagram showing an example 1 of test pattern display of the management information display LED 74. As shown in FIG.
In the test pattern display of FIG. 29 and FIG. 30, which will be described later, lit segments are indicated by solid lines, and unlit segments are indicated by dotted lines. In addition, the segment DP indicates the lighting state with a black circle, and indicates the lighting state with a white circle.
Further, in the following description, "." indicates that the segment DP is in the lit state, and "." indicates that the segment DP is in the extinguished state.

In example 1 shown in FIG. 29, two types of display of each LED of the test pattern are provided.
One of them is a pattern that displays "0.". More specifically, it is a pattern in which segments A to F and DP are lit and segment G is unlit.
The other is a pattern that displays "-.". More specifically, it is a pattern in which segment G is lit and segments A to F and DP are unlit.
Therefore, '0.' and '-.' have a reverse relationship in terms of lit and unlit segments, respectively.

In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 29A, "0." is displayed in the identification segment upper digits and the ratio segment upper digits, and "-." is displayed in the identification segment lower digits and the ratio segment lower digits.
Furthermore, in example 1 shown in FIG. 29, the display state shown in FIG. 29(a) is maintained for one second. Note that the count for one second can be measured by the number of interrupt processes. For example, when the display of FIG. 29(a) is started, "447 (D)" is set in the counter, and "1" is decremented for each interrupt processing. Terminate the display of a). As a result, the display of FIG. 29A can be maintained for "2.235×447=999.045ms".

When the display of FIG. 29(a) for about 1 second ends, the display next shifts to that of FIG. 29(b).
In addition, the display of FIG. 29(b) is obtained by replacing the LED displaying "0." and the LED displaying "-." in the display of FIG. 29(a). That is, the display of FIG. 29(b) displays "-." is displayed as "0."
Furthermore, as in the case of FIG. 29(a), the display state shown in FIG. 29(b) is continued for one second (447 interrupts).

The display contents of FIGS. 29(a) and 29(b) are switched and displayed every one second, and are executed for five seconds. Therefore, in FIG. 29, (c) and (e) are the same display contents as (a), and (d) is the same display contents as (b).
When the display of the test pattern (for 5 seconds) is completed, the display shifts to the normal ratio display.
In FIG. 29, (f) shows an example in which "7.U.5.0." and the advantageous section ratio are displayed. Also, the character product ratio may be displayed instead of the advantageous section ratio.

As described above, when "0." and "-." or the light cannot be turned off) can be easily determined visually.
When displaying the ratio, neither the identification segment nor the ratio segment is displayed as "0.-." or as "-.0.". Therefore, there is no risk of confusion between the test pattern and the original ratio display.

FIG. 30 is a diagram showing Example 2 of the test pattern display of the management information display LED 74. As shown in FIG.
In example 1 of FIG. 29, the test pattern is displayed for 5 seconds, with the display contents changed every second. As described above, such a test pattern is suitable for display within 5 seconds from a predetermined timing based on power-on or within 5 seconds from setting change start processing.
On the other hand, the test pattern display example 2 shown in FIG. 30 is suitable when the test pattern is displayed until a predetermined termination condition is satisfied, such as during setting change, setting confirmation, or RWM abnormal error. .
It goes without saying that the test pattern display of FIG. 29 may be used when the display is continued until a predetermined termination condition is satisfied.
Similarly, the test pattern display of FIG. 30 may of course be used in the case of displaying within a predetermined period after the test pattern display start condition is satisfied.

In example 2 of FIG. 30, "8.8.8.8." is a state in which all segments of all LEDs are turned on, and "*" is a state in which all segments of all LEDs are turned off. *.*.*."("*" indicates that segments A to G are turned off) are alternately repeated. In other words, it is a pattern that flashes "8.8.8.8.".
In Example 2 of FIG. 30, all segments are maintained in the ON state shown in FIG. 30(a) for 0.3 seconds, and then all segments are maintained in the OFF state shown in FIG. 30(b) for 0.3 seconds. By repeating the lighting state shown in FIG. 30(a) and the lighting-out state shown in FIG. 30(b), the flashing state is obtained.

In the tenth embodiment, the blinking interval is set to 0.3 seconds. For example, "134 (D)" is set as the initial value of the timer, the timer value is decremented by "1" every 2.235 ms of interrupt processing, and when the timer value becomes "0", the lighting time or It is judged that the light-out time has passed. Thus, by counting the number of interrupts "134", "299.49" ms can be counted.

In example 2 of the test pattern display in FIG. 30 as well, "8." Therefore, it is possible to easily visually determine a segment failure (cannot be turned on or turned off).
Also, when displaying the ratio, neither the identification seg nor the ratio seg is displayed as "8.8.". For example, when the ratio reaches 88%, the display blinks regardless of the ratio, but in that case, "8.8." On the other hand, in the display of "8.8.", since the segment DP is also illuminated, the two cannot be confused.

Each ratio displayed on the management information display LED 74 is updated (calculated) at the end of the game (after all the reels 31 stop and the payout process ends). Then, the updated ratio is displayed in subsequent interrupt processing. Here, if the power is interrupted immediately before updating the ratio and the test pattern is displayed for 5 seconds after the power is restored, the update (calculation) process of the ratio is performed during the 5 seconds during which the test pattern is displayed. to run. Then, when the display of the test pattern is finished and the ratio display is started, the ratio updated after the power-off is restored is displayed.

<Eleventh Embodiment>
FIG. 31(A) is a diagram showing various LEDs on the display board 75 in the eleventh embodiment, and FIG. 31(B) is a diagram showing the management information display LED 74 in the eleventh embodiment. Further, FIG. 4C is a diagram showing the setting value display LED 73 in the eleventh embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 31A, the credit display LED 76 is composed of digit 1a (upper digit) and digit 2a (lower digit). The acquisition number display LED 78 is composed of digit 3a (upper digit) and digit 4a (lower digit).
Here, "digit" means a display unit (display), and particularly in this embodiment, it is composed of a seven-segment LED (so-called seven-segment).
These digits 1a-4a are all seven-segment displays with dot segments (segment P). In particular, the segment P of the digit 4a (lower digit of the acquisition number display LED 78) functions as the advantageous section display LED 77. FIG.

The digit 5a is composed of six dot LEDs, and these six dot LEDs are collectively referred to as status display LEDs 79. FIG. In FIG. 1, the credit number display LED 76 and the acquired number display LED 78 are shown, but the status display LED 79 is not shown. However, actually, as shown in FIG. 31A, the display board 75 is provided with a credit number display LED 76, an acquired number display LED 78, and a status display LED 79. FIG.
In the state display LED 79, the 1-bet display LED 79a to 3-bet display LED 79c are LEDs for displaying the number of medals betted at that time. When one medal is bet, only the 1-bet display LED 79a lights up. When two medals are bet, the 1-bet display LED 79a and the 2-bet display LED 79b light up. When three medals are betted, the 1-bet display LED 79a, the 2-bet display LED 79b, and the 3-bet display LED 79c are all lit up.

The game start display LED 79d is an LED that lights up when medals are inserted and the start switch 41 becomes operable. Therefore, it does not light up when medals are not bet (or replay is not automatically inserted).
The insertion display LED 79e is an LED that lights up when medals can be inserted. That is, after the game is over, it lights up before the medals for the next game are inserted, indicating a so-called bet waiting state. It should be noted that even after the replay has been activated, it lights up when it is possible to bet according to the number of credits. When the number of bets reaches the maximum (when no more bets can be made), the insertion display LED 79e is extinguished.

The replay display LED 79f is an LED that lights up when a replay win is made, and when an automatic bet is made based on the replay win, the replay display LED 79f lights up to notify the player of the automatic bet state.
As the state display LED 79 not shown in FIG. 31(A), for example, a settlement display LED (an LED that lights up during settlement processing) can be cited, but illustration thereof is omitted in FIG. 31(A).

In FIG. 31B, the management information display LED 74 is the same as that shown in FIGS. 10, 29 and 30, and consists of four digits 1b-4b. These digits 1b-4b are seven-segment displays with dot segments (segment P), similar to digits 1a-4a described above. The digits 1b to 4b indicate upper information type, lower information type, upper numerical value, and lower numerical value, respectively.
Also, the segment P of the digit 2b (information type lower order) functions as a digit separator display LED. The digit separator display LED is used to clarify the separator between the information type and the numerical value.

Also, the segment P of the digits 1b to 4b can be illuminated when the test pattern is displayed, as shown in FIGS.
Furthermore, in FIG. 31(C), the setting value display LED 73 is the same as that shown in FIG. ) digit 5b.
Also, as shown in FIG. 10, the management information display LED 74 (digits 1b to 4b) and the set value display LED 73 (digit 5b) are mounted on the main control board 50. FIG.

FIG. 32 is a diagram showing the relationship between digits 1a to 5a and digits 1b to 5b and segments A to G and P in this embodiment.
A digit consisting of 7 segments is a 7 segment composed of 7 bar-shaped segments A to G and 1 dot-shaped segment P. FIG. An LED composed of segments A to G without segment P may be referred to as "7 segments", and an LED composed of eight segments including segment P may be referred to as "8 segments". In the book, the term "7 segments" is used to include an LED composed of eight segments.

As shown in FIG. 32, of the digit 1a, for example, the segments A to G form 7 segments of the upper digits of the credit number display LED 76, and the segment P is unused. Similarly, segments A to G of digits 2a and 3a constitute the lower digits of the credit number display LED and the upper digits of the earned number display LED 78, respectively, and the segment DP is unused.
The segments A to G of the digit 4a constitute the lower digit seven segments of the winning number display LED78, and the segment P constitutes the advantageous section display LED77.

The digit 5a is an LED that constitutes the status display LED 79. FIG. As shown in FIG. 32, segment A of digit 5a corresponds to 1-bet display LED 79a, segment B corresponds to 2-bet display LED 79b, . . . segment F corresponds to replay display LED 79f. Also, segments G and P of digit 5a are not provided.

Digits 1b to 4b form a management information display LED 74, and segments 1b and 2b display information types of the management information. Segments 3b and 4b display numerical values corresponding to information types displayed in segments 1b and 2b among the management information. Segments P of digits 1b, 3b, and 4b are normally unlit, but as shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, illuminate when the test pattern is displayed. In addition, the segment P of the digit 2b functions as a digit separator display LED to clarify the boundary between the digits 1b and 2b indicating the information type and the digits 3b and 4b indicating the numerical value and to facilitate confirmation. While the test pattern is being displayed, the digit separator display LED may be repeatedly lit and extinguished in the same manner as the segments P of other digits, or may be lit all the time.

Further, among the digits 5b, segments A to G constitute seven segments of the set value display LED 73, and segment P is an LED that lights up during setting change. That is, when the segment P of the set value display LED 73 is turned off, it indicates that the setting is being checked, and when the segment P is lit, it indicates that the setting is being changed. The segment P of the set value display LED 73 is not necessarily limited to such usage. For example, the segment P of the setting value display LED 73 may be a segment that lights up when the setting value is confirmed during setting change.

Also, FIG. 32 illustrates the configuration of the segment data. The segment data is 1-byte data, and the D0 bit corresponds to the segment A, the D1 bit corresponds to the segment B, . . .
For example, when displaying "0" in the digit 1a, the segments A to F are lit and the segments G and P are extinguished, so the segment data is "00111111(B)".

When the digit 4a is displayed as "1" and the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit, the segments B, C, and P are lit, so that the segment data becomes "10000110(B)".
Furthermore, when three medals are betted before the start of the game and the game can be started, the 1-bet display LED 79a, the 2-bet display LED 79b, the 3-bet display LED 79c, and the game start display LED 79d are lit. The segment data of 5a is "00001111 (B)".

FIG. 33 is a diagram showing the output port 52 in the eleventh embodiment. Note that the types of output ports are not limited to those shown in FIG.
As the output ports 52 of the eleventh embodiment, one output port (output port 2) for transmitting digit signals and two output ports (output ports 3 and 4) for transmitting segment signals are provided. .
The output port 3 is an output port for transmitting segment signals of a credit number display LED 76, an acquired number display LED 78, and a status display LED 79 (digits 1a to 5a).
Output port 4 is an output port for transmitting segment signals of management information display LED 74 (digits 1b to 4b) and setting value display LED 73. FIG.

For output port 2, digits 1-5 are assigned to bits D0-D4, respectively. Here, the digit 1 signal includes both the digit 1a signal and the digit 1b signal, and the same applies to the digit 2-5 signals. Therefore, for example, when a "1" signal is output from the D0 bit of output port 2, both digit 1a (credit number display LED 76 (upper digit)) and digit 1b (management information display LED 74 (information type upper)) A drive signal is provided.

Also, in output port 2, bits D5 to D7 are unused.
Output port 3 is an output port for segment A to P signals of digits 1a to 5a, and segment A to P signals are assigned to bits D0 to D7, respectively.
Similarly, output port 4 is an output port for segment A to P signals of digits 1b to 5b, with bits D0 to D7 assigned to the segment A to P signals, respectively.
Furthermore, the output port 5 outputs external signals 1 to 5, a data strobe signal, a medal insertion signal, and a medal payout signal.

Here, the "external signal" is a signal to be output to the outside of the slot machine 10 (hall computer 200, data counter installed in the hall, etc.) via the external common terminal board 100. FIG. Specifically, for example, an advantageous section, an AT, a specific RT, external signals 1 to 3 indicating that the accessory is in operation, an external signal 4 indicating that an error occurred in the slot machine 10 or that the power supply was interrupted, etc. , an external signal 5 indicating the opening of the front door of the slot machine 10 is provided.

A data strobe signal is a signal to be transmitted to the sub-control board 80 . Upon receiving the data strobe signal, the sub-control board 80 controls to acquire the sub-control data signal from the buffer provided in the sub-control board 80 based on the rise of the data strobe signal.
Output ports (not shown) other than the output ports 2 to 5 shown in FIG. , a sub-control data signal, a test signal, and the like are output.

FIG. 34A is a diagram showing the relationship between interrupts, LED display counter values, digit signals, and segment signals in the eleventh embodiment. In addition, FIG. 4B is a diagram showing an LED display request flag.
In this embodiment, as the processing of the main control board 50, the main processing (M_MAIN) (FIG. 41 to be described later) performed for each game, and in parallel with this main processing, interrupt processing ( I_INTR) (FIG. 53 to be described later) is executed.

The LED display counter is 1-byte data and is a counter that is continuously updated for each interrupt. The LED display counter is a counter for determining which digit among digits 1 (1a and 1b) to 5 (5a and 5b) should be lit. As for each bit of the LED display counter, the D0 bit is assigned to the digit 1 signal, the D1 bit to the digit 2 signal, . . . , and the D4 bit to the digit 5 signal. Then, in one interrupt process, dynamic lighting of digits 1 (1a and 1b) to 5 (5a and 5b) is performed so as to light the digit corresponding to the bit "1" in the LED display counter.

The LED display counter of this embodiment takes a value of "00010000 (B)" as an initial value. Then, the LED display counter updates the bit "1" of the LED display counter value by shifting it to the right by one digit as the interrupt progresses from "1" to "2" to . . . (for each interrupt). In addition, in FIG. 34, in the interrupt next to the interrupt "5", the LED display counter becomes "00000000 (B)" by shifting one digit to the right. Set the LED display counter to "00010000 (B)". As a result, the LED display counter repeats the values "5"→"4"→...→"1"→"5"→"4"→... for each interrupt process. That is, five interrupts constitute one cycle.

From the above, the LED display counter value is
"N" interrupt: 00010000 (B)
"N+1" interrupt: 00001000 (B)
"N+2" interrupt: 00000100 (B)
"N+3" interrupt: 00000010 (B)
"N+4" interrupt: 00000001 (B)
"N+5" interrupt: 00000000 (B) → 00010000 (B) (initialization; same value as "N" interrupt)
"N+6" interrupt: 00001000 (B)
:
becomes.

In the eleventh embodiment, digits 1a to 5a and digits 1b to 5b are turned on with five interrupts forming one cycle. Specifically, in FIG. 34A, for example, when the interrupt is "1", that is, when the LED display counter value is "00010000 (B)", the digit 5 signal is output. The output of the digit 5 signal enables digits 5a and 5b to be illuminated. Therefore, the status display LED 79 and the set value display LED 73 can be turned on. At the time of the next interrupt "2", the LED display counter becomes "00001000 (B)", a digit 4 signal is output, and the lower digits of the acquisition number display LED D78 and numerical lower digits of the management information display LED 74 can be illuminated. .

FIG. 34B is a diagram showing the data configuration of the LED display request flag. The LED display request flag is data indicating a digit whose lighting is permitted. As shown in FIG. 34B, the LED display request flag is 8-bit data corresponding to the digit 1 signal at the D0 bit, the digit 2 signal at the D1 bit, . . . , the digit 5 signal at the D4 bit. be. Each bit of the LED display request flag matches the bit of output port 2 .
As shown in FIG. 34B, digits 1 to 5 can be illuminated during normal operation, digits 3 to 5 can be illuminated during setting change, and digits 1 to 5 can be illuminated during setting confirmation. be. In addition. "Normal" refers to game standby and game play.

Then, in the interrupt process, the LED display counter and the LED display request flag are ANDed, and the digit corresponding to the "1" bit becomes the digit to be lit in the current interrupt process.
For example, if the LED display counter is "00010000 (B)" and the LED display request flag is "00011111 (B) (normal)", the AND operation of the two results in "00010000 (B)". Only the signal becomes "1". However, during normal operation (during game standby and during game play), a segment signal is output from the output port 3 to enable lighting of the status display LED 79, but no segment signal is output from the output port 4, and the set value display LED 73 (digit 5b) is controlled not to light up.

On the other hand, during the setting change, for example, at the interrupt timing when the digit 5 signal is turned on (the LED display counter is "00010000 (B)"), the segment signal is output from the output port 4, and the set value display LED 73 (digit 5b) is turned on. Lighting is possible.
Also, during the setting change, for example, at the interrupt timing when the digit 3 or 4 signal is turned on (the LED display counter is "00000100 (B)" or "00001000 (B)"), the digit 3 signal (acquisition number display LED 78 (upper digits) and a digit 4 signal (lower digits of the acquisition number display LED 78) are output, and the acquisition number display LED 78 is caused to display "88" (content indicating that the setting is being changed).

Furthermore, at the interrupt timing when the LED display counter is "00001000 (B)" (interrupt "2" in FIG. 34), when generating the segment signal for output port 3, the value of the advantageous section display LED flag is referred to. by Then, when the advantageous section display LED flag is ON, a value obtained by ORing the generated segment signal and "10000000 (B)" is output from the output port 3 as a segment signal. As a result, the segment P (advantageous section display LED 77) of the digit 4a can be lit.

FIG. 35 shows the address, label name, number of bytes, name and content of data stored in the RWM 53. FIG.
Note that the data shown in FIG. 35 is for use in the explanation of the eleventh embodiment, and the data stored in the RWM 53 is not limited to these.

Address "F000(H)" is a storage area for set value data (_NB_RANK). When the setting value is "N", "N-1" is stored as the setting value data. In this embodiment, it has set values "1" to "6". Therefore, any value from "0 (H)" to "5 (H)" is stored as the set value data.
Then, the set value display LED 73 displays "N", which is obtained by adding "1" to the set value data, as the set value.

Address "F010(H)" is a storage area for credit amount data (_NB_CREDIT). The credit amount data is data to be displayed on the credit amount display LED 76 . In this embodiment, any value from "0" to "50(D)" is stored as the credit amount data.
Here, in the present embodiment, a value obtained by converting the credit amount into a decimal number is stored as the credit amount data. For example, when the number of credits to be displayed is "29", the value "29(H)" is stored. In other words, "00101001(B)" is stored at address "F010(H)". As a result, the lower 4 bits of D0 to D3 of the address "F010(H)" are data for displaying the lower digit of the credit number ("9" in this example), and the upper 4 bits of D4 to D7 are , is data for displaying the upper digits (“2” in this example) of the number of credits. In this embodiment, the upper limit of the number of credits is "50 (D)", so the data value to be stored is in the range of "0" to "50".
In this embodiment, the address of the RWM 53 for storing the credit amount data itself is not provided, and the credit amount data is provided as the display data of the credit amount display LED 76 .

The address "F011(H)" is a storage area for acquisition number data (_NB_PAYOUT). Acquisition number data is data to be displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78 . In the acquisition amount data, similarly to the credit amount data described above, the lower 4 bits of D0 to D3 are data for displaying the lower digits, and the upper 4 bits of D4 to D7 are for displaying the upper digits. Data.
In this embodiment, when a small winning combination is won, the payout number data corresponding to the winning minor winning combination is stored as the winning number data in order to display the payout number corresponding to the winning minor winning combination on the winning number display LED 78.例文帳に追加Specifically, when a small win is won and medals are paid out, the win number data is added as the medals are paid out, and the display of the win number display LED 78 is updated. For example, when "1 (H)" is stored as the acquisition number data, the acquisition number display LED 78 displays "01".

Here, in the payout number data (_NB_PAY_MEDAL) of the address "F040 (H)" described later, for example, "8 (H)" is stored when an 8-card hand is won, and the payout number data is stored at the time of medal payout ( (including addition to credits) is decremented by "1" according to the number of payouts, such as "8"→"7"→...→"0".
On the other hand, the winning number data stored at the address "F011(H)" is "0"→"1"→"2"→ . . . , "1" is added each time one medal is paid out. Therefore, the display of the acquisition number display LED 78 also counts up like "0"→"1"→"2"→...→"8".

In addition, in this embodiment, "88" is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 during the setting change. Therefore, during setting change display data for displaying "88" is stored as acquisition number data during setting change. By displaying "88" on the winning number display LED 78, it is possible to recognize from the front side of the game machine that the setting is being changed. Furthermore, by lighting "88" and all segments, it is possible to confirm that there is no segment defect (that there is no segment that cannot be lit). Since the upper limit of the payout number of medals is 15, it can be understood that when "88" is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78, it is not the display of the payout number.

Furthermore, in a twelfth embodiment to be described later, when the condition for designating the specified number (the number of medals to bet in the game this time) is satisfied, the before the acquisition), instruct (display, notify) the specified number to the acquired number display LED 78 . In this embodiment, "0A" is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78 to indicate the specified number "2". Therefore, when instructing the specified number, the specified specified number display data for displaying "0A" is stored as the obtained number data. Although the details will be described later, the specified specified number display data for displaying "0A" is "0B(H)".

Further, when winning a push order bell or the like during AT, push order instruction information is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 . The pressing order instruction information corresponding to winning numbers "3" to "8" shown in FIG. 58 to be described later is "=1" to "=6", respectively. Therefore, when the pressing order instruction information is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78, the pressing order instruction number is stored as the acquired number data. Although the details will be described later, the pressing order instruction numbers corresponding to the pressing order instruction information "=1" to "=6" are "A1(H)" to "A6(H)", respectively. For example, when the pressing order instruction information is displayed in a game in which the winning number "3" is won, the pressing order instruction number "A1(H)" is stored as the win number data. As a result, the push order instruction information “=1” corresponding to the push order instruction number “A1(H)” is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 .

Also, when a predetermined error occurs, the error number is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 . Therefore, when a predetermined error occurs, error number display data for displaying the error number is stored as the acquired number data. For example, when the error number to be displayed is "HP", the error number display data for displaying "HP" is stored as the acquired number data.

The address "F030(H)" is a storage area for the action status flag (_FL_ACTION). The operating state flag (_FL_ACTION) is a flag for determining whether or not replays and accessories are operating. For example, when 1BB is activated, the D2 bit of the activation status flag is set to "1".
This operating state flag is updated in the game start setting process described later (step S317 in FIG. 42). For example, in step S313 of FIG. 42, the D0 bit of the symbol combination display flag, which will be described later, is read, and when it is determined that the D0 bit is "1", it is determined that the symbol combination corresponding to the replay is stopped and displayed, and the operating state is reached. Set the D0 bit of the flag to "1".
The replay operation status flag (D0 bit) is cleared at step S413 in FIG. 50 (game end check process), which will be described later.
In addition, the operating state flag of the accessory is also cleared in the game end check process (not shown in FIG. 50).

The address "F031(H)" is a storage area for the symbol combination display flag (_FL_WIN). The symbol combination flag is a flag for judging the symbol combination that is stopped and displayed, and in this embodiment, Replay is assigned to the D0 bit and 1BB is assigned to the D2 bit. Therefore, the replay and 1BB bits of the symbol combination display flag are assigned to the same bits as the replay and 1BB bits assigned to the operating state flag, respectively.
During the main process of FIG. 41, in step S291, the prize determination means 66 determines whether or not the symbol combination corresponding to the combination has been stopped. Then, the symbol combination display flag is updated according to the stopped symbol combination. For example, when it is determined that the replay symbol combination is stopped and displayed, the D0 bit of the symbol combination flag is set to "1".
The symbol combination display flag is cleared at the start of the next game, specifically at step S279 (start switch acceptance process) during the main process of FIG.

Address "F040(H)" is a storage area for payout number data (_NB_PAY_MEDAL). The payout number data becomes data indicating a value corresponding to the payout number when a small winning combination is won in the game and the payout number is determined (step S293 in FIG. 40). When a minor winning combination is won, payout number data corresponding to the winning minor winning combination is stored, and medal payout processing is executed. Here, the payout number data is subtracted by "1" each time one medal is paid out ("1" is added to the number of credits or one actual medal is paid out (from the hopper 35)). That is, it has a role as the number of times the payout process is executed. Thus, when the medal payout process is completed, the payout number data becomes "0".

The address "F041(H)" is the storage area of the payout number data buffer (_BF_PAY_MEDAL). Similar to the payout number data, the payout number data buffer becomes data indicating a value corresponding to the payout number when a small winning combination is won in the game and the payout number is determined. Here, unlike the payout number data, the payout number data buffer is not decremented for each medal payout process, and the initially stored value is maintained. Then, the value is maintained until the medal payout number update process (step S293 in FIG. 41) in the next game. For example, when a small winning combination of 8 payouts is won in the relevant game, "8 (H)" is stored as the payout number data buffer, and in the next game when the winning combination is not won, the payout number data buffer is stored. "0" is overwritten.

The address "F042(H)" is a storage area for automatic bet number data (_NB_REP_MEDAL). The automatic bet number data indicates the number of medals to be automatically bet upon winning a replay, and stores "2" or "3" in this embodiment.
The automatic bet number data is set at step S325 during the game start setting process of FIG.
Address "F043(H)" is a storage area for bet number data (_NB_PLAY_MEDAL). The bet number data indicates the number of bets in the current game, and in this embodiment, any one of "0" to "3" is stored. The bet number data is processed in medal management processing (detecting inserted medals and performing bet processing and credit addition processing) in step S276 during the main processing in FIG.

The address "F051(H)" is the storage area of the LED display counter (_CT_LED_DSP). The LED display counter is the one shown in FIG. 34A, and is updated each time an interrupt process is performed, as described above.
The address "F052(H)" is a storage area for the LED display request flag (_FL_LED_DSP). The LED display request flag is the one shown in FIG. 34B, and takes a value corresponding to normal operation, setting change operation, or setting confirmation operation.

Address "F061(H)" is a storage area for the advantageous section type flag (_NB_ADV_KND). The advantageous section type flag is a flag indicating whether the current game section is a normal section or an advantageous section.
The advantageous section type flag stores "00000000 (B)" in the normal section, and the D0 bit becomes "1" when the normal section shifts to the advantageous section.
The timing at which the advantageous section type flag is updated will be described later.

The address "F062(H)" is a storage area for the advantageous section display LED flag (_FL_ADV_LED). The advantageous section display LED flag is a flag indicating whether or not the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit. When the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned off, the advantageous section display LED flag is "0", and when the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit, the advantageous section display LED flag is "1".
The advantageous section display LED 77 may be turned on at any time after transition to the advantageous section (for example, the advantageous section display LED 77 may be turned on at the same time as the transition to the advantageous section).

On the other hand, even after shifting to the advantageous section, the advantageous section display LED 77 may not be turned on.
Specifically, first, there are cases where the advantageous section display LED 77 is not turned on when transitioning to the advantageous section, but is turned on afterwards (during the advantageous section).
Secondly, the advantageous section display LED 77 is not lit when transitioning to the advantageous section, and when the advantageous section end condition is satisfied before the condition for lighting the advantageous section display LED 77, the advantageous section display LED 77 is not turned on once. The advantageous section may end without lighting.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, in a game state in which the interval Sim is in an advantageous interval and the interval Sim ball-out rate exceeds "1", when the instruction function is activated (when the correct pressing order is notified), the advantageous interval is displayed. LED 77 is lit.
Furthermore, once the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on, the lighting is maintained during the advantageous section.
Further, during the game end check processing in the final game of the advantageous interval, processing for turning off the advantageous interval display LED 77 is executed. Specifically, when the advantageous interval end condition is satisfied, the advantageous interval display LED flag storage area is initialized (the advantageous interval display LED flag is cleared). As a result, the advantageous section display LED 77 is extinguished in subsequent interrupt processing.

Furthermore, the lighting timing when the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit in a game that activates the instruction function is, for example, when the start switch 41 is operated (more specifically, after the reel 31 starts rotating, the reel 31 until the rotation reaches a constant speed state).
However, it is not limited to this, and other lighting timings include, for example,
1) Before the start switch 41 is operated 2) After the start switch 41 is operated, when all the reels 31 are in a constant speed state and the operation of the stop switch 42 can be accepted,
3) when at least one reel 31 is stopped and at least one other reel 31 is rotating;
4) When all reels 31 are stopped,
5) After all the reels 31 have stopped (the relevant game is finished) and before the settlement switch 43 can be operated before the start of the next game.

However, when the advantageous zone display LED 77 is lit in a game in which the instruction function is activated, it is necessary to determine the winning combination in the game, so the time before the start switch 41 is operated (before the combination lottery) is excluded. .
When the advantageous interval display LED 77 is lit in the game in which the instruction function is activated, the start switch 41 is operated and the lottery for the winning combination is executed. The timing at which the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on before reaching the constant speed state is the shortest timing.

The address "F063(H)" is the storage area for the advantageous section clear counter (_CT_ADV_CLR). The advantageous interval clear counter is a decrement counter for counting the number of games played during the advantageous interval. The advantageous section clear counter is "0" during the normal section, and is set to "1500 (D)" as an initial value when shifting to the advantageous section. Also, the advantageous interval clear counter is set to be decremented by "1" per game not only during the advantageous interval but also during the normal interval. However, the minimum value is "0". Therefore, in the normal section, when the advantageous section clear counter (before subtraction) is "0", even if "1" is subtracted, the value after subtraction is "0". Therefore, during the normal section, "1" is subtracted for each game, but "0" is maintained. In other words, when "0" is stored in the advantageous section clear counter, it is a normal section (non-advantageous section).

Further, when the game is shifted to the advantageous section, the advantageous section clear counter is set to "1500 (D)" as an initial value, so that the advantageous section clear counter becomes "1499 (D)" in the next game.
Note that the advantageous section clear counter stores an initial value of "1500 (D)" at maximum, and thus consists of 2 bytes. In other words, when a value other than "0" is stored in the advantageous interval clear counter, it is an advantageous interval.

The address "F065(H)" is the storage area for the difference number counter (_SC_24HGAME). The difference number counter is a counter that stores a value corresponding to the cumulative value of the number of difference coins during the advantageous interval, and is also called "MY counter".
The difference number counter does not simply store the accumulated value of the difference number of sheets, but stores the "value corresponding to" the accumulated value of the difference number of sheets. For example, when the difference number becomes a value corresponding to a minus value, the value is corrected to "0 (H)". Therefore, "accumulated value of difference number ≠ difference number counter value".
The difference number counter is an increment counter for determining whether or not the value corresponding to the cumulative value of the difference number of sheets during the advantageous section exceeds "2400 (D)". Therefore, the difference number counter consists of a 2-byte storage area.

It is sufficient for the difference number counter to count the cumulative value of the difference number of sheets at least during the advantageous interval, and it is not necessary to count during the non-advantageous interval (normal interval).
Here, when updating the difference counter value on the condition that the game is in the advantageous section, it is necessary to perform a process for each game to determine whether the game is in the advantageous section. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the update of the difference counter value is executed including during the non-advantageous section (normal section). In this way, the difference counter value can be updated without determining whether or not the game is in the advantageous section every game, so the processing can be simplified.

Furthermore, even when the difference number becomes negative in the game this time and the value corresponding to the cumulative value of the difference number becomes the carry-down data, the difference number counter value is updated. However, if the result of the calculation is that the difference counter is the data that is carried down, the difference counter value is corrected to "0".

To give a specific example (assuming that the difference number counter value at the start of the first game is "0 (H)"),
1st game: When the number of bets is "3" and the number of payouts is "0", the difference counter after calculation is "FFFD (H)" and the difference counter after correction is "0 (H)".
Second game: number of bets "3", number of payouts "9", difference counter after calculation "0006 (H)" (no correction)
3rd game: number of bets "3", number of payouts "0", difference number counter after calculation "0003 (H)" (no correction)
4th game: number of bets "3", number of payouts "1", difference counter after calculation "0001 (H)" (no correction)
Fifth game: number of bets "3", number of payouts "0", difference counter after calculation "FFFE (H)", difference counter after correction "0 (H)"
is updated as
Even if the difference counter of the previous game is "0 (H)" and the difference counter of the current game is "0 (H)", the difference counter value reflecting the difference of the game is changed again. Since it is a calculated result, such a case also corresponds to "update" of the difference number counter.

As described above, when the post-calculation difference counter value is a value that has undergone a carry-down, the difference counter value is corrected to "0" (the initial value "0" is set). A method of determining whether or not a digit has been digitized will be described later.
By updating the difference counter value in this manner, the difference counter value increases as the game progresses, for example, when the number of payouts is greater than the number of bets, that is, when the difference number is increasing. On the other hand, when the number of payouts is less than the number of bets, for example, in a game during a normal period, the difference counter value is increased by the number of payouts when a payout based on winning a small combination is made, but after that, the number of payouts is increased. falls below the number of bets, it eventually becomes "0".

36A and 36B are diagrams (slump graphs) for explaining the concept of the difference counter value, in which (a) shows example 1 and (b) shows example 2. FIG. In FIG. 36, the horizontal axis is the number of games played, and the vertical axis is the number of differences.
Example 1 shows an example in which the differential number initially progressed in the negative direction as the game progressed, but then turned upward in the middle of the game, for example, when AT was started. Since the difference number counter counts the moment when the difference number becomes the lowest value in the progress of the game as "0", the range indicated by the arrow in the figure is counted by the difference number counter as the amount of increase in the difference number. be done. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the difference counter value exceeds "2400 (D)", the advantageous section ends (the next game is controlled to be a normal section game).

In addition, when the difference counter exceeds "2400 (D)", the conditions for ending the advantageous section are satisfied. does not meet the conditions for ending the advantageous section.
In the next game, assuming that the maximum number difference in the gaming machine is obtained, the bet number is "1" and the payout number is "15", so the difference number in the next game is "+14". The difference counter value at the end of the next game is "2414 (D)". When the difference counter is "2414 (D)", it is determined that the condition for ending the advantageous section is satisfied.
Therefore, the maximum possible value of the difference number counter is "2414 (D)".

Whether or not the difference counter has exceeded "2400 (D)" can be determined not only by reading the difference counter value stored in the RWM 53, but also by temporarily storing it in a register for updating. It also includes determining the value of the difference number counter (same below).
Further, when it is determined whether or not "2400 (D)" has been exceeded based on the difference counter value temporarily stored in the register, when it is determined that "2400 (D)" has not been exceeded, The register difference counter value is stored (saved) in the RWM 53 . On the other hand, when it is judged that it exceeds "2400 (D)", the difference counter value is not stored in the RWM 53, and the difference counter value stored in the RWM 53 is controlled to be cleared. is also possible.

Further, Example 2 shows an example in which, as in Example 1, the difference number progresses in the negative direction as the game progresses, but the difference number turns to increase as, for example, AT is started in the middle of the game. . In example 2, even when the differential number counter exceeds "2400 (D)", the cumulative value of the differential number is not positive, but even in such a case, the advantageous section ends. That is, irrespective of the cumulative value of the difference number accompanying the progress of the game so far, if the difference number counter value exceeds "2400 (D)" counting from the time when the difference number reaches the minimum value, the advantageous section (The next game is controlled to be a normal section game).

When the difference counter is updated during the normal section, the difference counter may exceed "2400 (D)" even during the normal section. For example, such a situation can occur when a special role is won many times and the special game is repeated. In such cases,
1) A method of updating the difference counter value as it is until the advantageous section starts;
2) When "2400 (D)" is exceeded, a method of temporarily resetting the difference counter value to "0" at that time.
For example, when the difference counter exceeds "2400 (D)" during the advantageous interval, the difference counter is cleared based on the end of the advantageous interval. If the process is executed regardless of whether or not, it is cleared even when the difference number counter exceeds "2400 (D)" during the normal interval.

On the other hand, if the processing for clearing the difference counter is specific to the advantageous section, the difference counter will not be cleared even if the difference counter exceeds "2400 (D)" during the normal section.
When starting the advantageous section (the first game of the advantageous section), the difference counter is cleared (set to the initial value "0". Step S354 in FIG. 45 to be described later). Therefore, it does not matter how many difference number counters there are before the start of the advantageous section.
and,
1) When the difference counter exceeds "2400 (D)" during the advantageous section,
2) When the number of games in the advantageous section reaches 1500 games,
satisfies the termination condition of the advantageous section.
When the conditions for ending the advantageous section are satisfied, the difference counter is cleared (initialized). The reason why the difference counter is cleared at the end of the advantageous interval is to prevent data (values) relating to the advantageous interval from being carried over to the normal interval when the advantageous interval ends and the normal interval is entered. Clearing of the difference number counter is executed in step S435 in FIG. 51, which will be described later.

FIG. 37 is a diagram (slump flag) showing the relationship between the difference counter value and the advantageous interval, (a) showing example 1 and (b) showing example 2. FIG.
In Example 1, in the normal section, the difference number decreases as the game progresses, and the difference number further decreases from the time when the advantage section starts ("A" in the figure) until it progresses to "B" in the figure. example. In addition, AT does not start at the same time as the start of the advantageous section, and the beginning of the advantageous section is CZ, omen, AT preparation (for example, when the RT state is a low probability state, the RT state is changed from a low probability state to a high probability (While waiting for a replay to win), the difference may decrease even after the advantageous section starts. Further, even when AT is started, if the winning order bell continues to be difficult, the difference may decrease.

Since the difference counter value is initialized at the start of the advantageous section, it becomes "0" at "A" in the figure. In addition, as described above, the difference number counter value is maintained at "0" under the condition that the difference number is decreasing. Therefore, the difference counter value remains "0" from point "A" to point "B" in the figure.
Also, an example is shown in which the number of differences turned to increase from point "B". This also increases the difference number counter value. Then, when it is determined that the difference counter value has exceeded "2400 (D)" (when the point "C" is reached in the figure), it is determined that the conditions for ending the advantageous section are satisfied, and the advantageous section ends. (Moving to normal section).

In this way, the positive count by the difference number counter starts at the point when the difference number becomes the lowest value after the start of the advantageous section, not the difference number from the start of the advantageous section. Tokens will not be given to the player beyond the range where the number of balls is increased (the range from "B" to "C" in FIG. 37(a)). As a result, it is possible not to arouse the gambling spirit of the player.

The above point will be described more specifically with numerical examples.
For example, if the specification is such that AT is started by lottery after the start of the advantageous section, the difference number may decrease as the game progresses in the advantageous section and non-AT.
For example, it is assumed that player X wins the advantageous section and starts the advantageous section, but the AT does not start and the game is stopped when the difference number becomes "-200".

Next, it is assumed that when the player Y starts playing the game on the gaming machine and the difference becomes "-50", the AT is won and the AT is started. After starting the advantageous section, when the advantageous section (AT) is continued until the difference number exceeds "+2400", Player Y will be able to obtain "2400+250=2650" medals. .
Therefore, as described above, after starting the advantageous section, by setting the end condition as "from the time when the difference number reaches the minimum value to when it exceeds '+2400'", for example, other players can It prevents you from being able to acquire it, including, so as not to arouse the gambling spirit.

Example 2 shown in FIG. 37(b) shows an example in which the number of differences decreases in the normal section, becomes positive at point "D" on the way, and furthermore, the advantageous section starts at point "E". In such a case, as described above, when the difference counter value is updated including the normal section, the difference counter value is positive at time "E" in the figure. However, at the start of the advantageous section (“E” in the figure), the difference counter value is initialized (cleared, ie, updated to “0”).
Therefore, the increment before the advantageous section (the increment from "D" to "E") is not counted by the difference number counter. Therefore, the difference counter continues to be positively counted from point "E", and when it exceeds "2400 (D)", the advantageous section ends.

Returning the description to FIG.
The address "F067(H)" is a storage area for the AT flag (_FL_AT_KND). The AT flag is a flag for determining whether or not AT is in progress, and is set to "0" during non-AT and to "1" during AT. The timing at which the AT flag is set to "1" is when the AT lottery is won, and this is executed in step S364 of FIG. 46, which will be described later. Also, the AT flag is turned off at the end of the final AT game, which is executed, for example, in a game end check process (step S415 in FIG. 50), which will be described later. Further, the data cleared (initialized) at the end of the advantageous section includes an AT flag.

The address "F068(H)" is the storage area of the AT game number counter (_CT_ART). The AT game number counter is a decrement counter that counts the number of games during AT (including ART). Unlike the advantageous section clear counter, the AT game number counter stops counting (decrementing) after it reaches "0".
The update (subtraction) of the AT game number counter during AT is after the start switch 41 is operated during the main process (step S281 in FIG. 41 to be described later).

In addition, in this embodiment, since the initial value of the number of AT games may exceed "255 (D)", the AT game number counter is composed of a 2-byte counter. When the number of AT games is maximum "255 (D)" or less, the AT game number counter may be composed of a 1-byte counter.
When starting AT (or when shifting to AT preparation), the initial value is set to the AT game number counter. The initial value may be a constant value, or may be determined by lottery or the like when AT is won. Moreover, after determining the initial value, the number of AT games may be updated to "0" without being changed thereafter. Alternatively, when a predetermined condition is satisfied during AT, the number of AT games may be added, and when winning an additional lottery, the number of AT games may be increased. In this case, the increment is added to the AT game number counter.
This AT game number counter is also included in the data cleared at the end of the advantageous section.

In this embodiment, since the number-of-games management type AT is exemplified, an AT game number counter is provided. Therefore, in the case of the difference number management type AT, an AT difference number counter is provided instead of the AT game number counter. Then, at the start of AT, the initial value of the obtainable difference number is set. Also, when winning the addition, the number of additional winnings is added. Then, each time a payout is made, the difference number of the game is subtracted, and when the AT difference number counter becomes "0", the AT is terminated.

Next, each process during a game will be described using a flowchart.
FIG. 38 is a flow chart showing program start processing (M_PRG_START) by the main control board 50 . When the power is turned on, the program start processing in FIG. 38 is executed.
In FIG. 38, when the program is started in step S201, the main control board 50 initializes registers in the next step S202. Specific processing includes, for example, the setting of the communication speed of the serial communication circuit provided in the main CPU 55, the setting of the type of interrupt (for example, setting to maskable interrupt, etc.), and the parity bit to be added to the control command to be transmitted. setting (for example, setting to even parity, etc.). In other words, initial values necessary for normal operation of the slot machine 10 are set in various registers.

Next, proceeding to step S203, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the power-off processing completion flag is a normal value. In this embodiment, when power is turned off, a power-off processing completion flag is stored (step S484 in FIG. 54, which will be described later). This power-off processing completion flag is a flag for determining whether or not the previous power-off was performed normally when the power was turned on. When it is determined that the power-off processing completion flag has a normal value, the process proceeds to step S204, and when it is determined that the value is not normal, the process proceeds to step S206.

In step S204, the checksum of the RWM 53 is calculated. Specifically, the checksum calculation is performed for the same range as the checksum of the RWM 53 executed during the power-off process (for example, the work area used by the program, the unused area, and the stack area).
In step S205, it is determined whether or not the range of the RWM 53 for calculating the checksum has been completed. Specifically, the next address is specified from the address of the RWM 53 where the current checksum is calculated, and it is determined whether or not the next address is the address for which the checksum is to be calculated. If it is determined that the checksum calculation has not ended, the process returns to step S204 to continue the process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the range of the RWM 53 for calculating the checksum is completed, the process proceeds to step S206.

Also, in the subsequent processing, when data stored in multiple ranges (addresses) of the RWM 53 are to be initialized, the same processing is executed in the designated range of the RWM 53 in this embodiment.
When it is determined in step S203 that the power-off processing completion flag is not a normal value, an abnormal value is set as power-off recovery data without executing the checksum calculation of the RWM 53 .

At step S206, the main control board 50 stores the power-off recovery data in a predetermined register (eg, B register). Here, when it is determined that the power-off processing completion flag is a normal value and the checksum calculation (entire range) of the RWM 53 is normally completed, the normal value is stored as the power-off recovery data. On the other hand, when the power-off processing completion flag is an abnormal value ("No" in step S203), or when it is determined that there was an abnormality during the checksum calculation (entire range) of the RWM 53 in step S204, power-off Abnormal values are stored as recovery data.

In the next step S207, the level data of a prescribed input port 51 is stored in a prescribed register (for example, A register). Next, proceeding to step S208, it is judged based on the level data of the predetermined input port 51 whether or not the designated switch is on. In this embodiment, the "designated switch" means a signal of a door switch (switch that turns on when the front door 12 (housing) is opened) of the predetermined input ports 51, a setting door switch (The door provided on the setting key switch. The setting door may be omitted.) Signal of the setting key switch (switch that is turned on when the setting key is inserted and rotated in a predetermined direction) signal There are three.

The door switch signal is on (the front door 12 is open), the setting door switch signal is on (the setting door is open), and the setting key switch signal is on. Allow setting changes only at certain times. When all three designated switches are on, it is possible to shift to the setting change processing of step S212, but when at least one designated switch is not turned on, it is not permitted to shift to the setting change processing of step S212. .
That is, even when the door switch signal is off (the front door 12 is closed) or when the setting door switch signal is off (the setting door is closed), the setting key switch signal cannot be turned on, and there is a high possibility of fraud, so transition to setting change processing is not permitted.

Therefore, when it is determined in step S208 that all the designated switches are on, the process proceeds to step S209, and when it is determined that they are not on, the process proceeds to step S211.
In step S209, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the power failure recovery data is abnormal. This power-off recovery data is the data stored in the register in step S206.

When it is determined that the power failure recovery data is abnormal, the process proceeds to the setting change process (M_RANK_SET) in step S212, and when it is determined not to be abnormal, the process proceeds to step S210. In step S210, it is determined whether or not the setting change prohibition flag is ON. Here, the setting change disable flag is one of the data stored in the RWM 53, and is disabled from the start switch acceptance process (step S279) to the game end check process (step S301) in FIG. 41, which will be described later. is a flag that When the setting change prohibition flag is on, the process proceeds to step S211, and when it is not on, the process proceeds to the setting change process (M_RANK_SET) of step S212.
In addition, although the setting change disable flag is provided in the present embodiment, the setting change disable flag does not have to be provided when the configuration is such that the setting change is always possible. In that case, the processing corresponding to step S210 becomes unnecessary.

In step S211, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the power failure recovery data is a normal value. This process is equivalent to step S209. Then, when it is determined that the power failure recovery data is a normal value, the process proceeds to step S213 to perform power recovery processing (M_POWER_ON). On the other hand, when it is determined that the power failure recovery data is not a normal value, an "E1" error occurs, and the process advances to step S214 to perform unrecoverable error processing.

FIG. 39 is a flow chart showing the setting change process (M_RANK_SET) in step S212 of FIG.
First, in step S221, a "predetermined range" is stored in a register as an initialization range within the use area of the RWM 53. FIG. Here, "within the used area" refers to an area in the storage area of the RWM 53 for storing data relating to the progress of the game. The ranges shown in FIG. 35 are all within the use area. On the other hand, "outside the use area", which will be described later, refers to an area in the storage area of the RWM 53 for storing data irrelevant to the progress of the game. Specifically, there is a storage area in which data relating to the display of the management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor) is stored.

The "predetermined range" is the range to be initialized when it is determined that the power-off process has been executed normally. The initialization range that does not initialize the flags of the special roles that have the "predetermined range".
Therefore, in a twelfth embodiment, which will be described later, when the BB2 is inside (when the winning flag of the BB2 is ON) before the power is turned off, if the power is turned off normally, the setting change process is executed. However, the winning flag of BB2 is maintained.
On the other hand, the "predetermined range" does not include data on advantageous sections or AT. Therefore, addresses "F061(H)" to "F068(H)" in FIG. 35 are to be initialized here.

Next, proceeding to step S222, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the power failure recovery data (the value stored in step S206) is a normal value. When the power-off recovery data is determined to be a normal value, the process proceeds to step S224, and the "predetermined range" stored in step S221 is maintained. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S222 that the power-off recovery data is not a normal value, the process proceeds to step S223.
In step S<b>223 , the main control board 50 stores “specific range” in the register as an initialization range within the use area of the RWM 53 . Here, the "specific range" is the initialization range when it is determined that the power failure is not normal, and is the entire range within the use area including the set value data (address "F000(H)").

Then, in step S224, the predetermined range set in step S221 or the specific range set in step S223 is initialized (within the use area of the RWM 53). In the next step S225, it is determined whether or not the initialization started in step S224 has ended. When it is determined that the initialization is completed, the process proceeds to step S226.

In step S226, the AF registers (A register and F register (flag register)) are saved. Although the AF register is originally intended to be saved in the F (flag) register, the AF register is saved for the convenience of the instruction. Then, in step S227, a predetermined range outside the use area is stored as the initialization range of the RWM 53. FIG. Also, the "predetermined range" is the initialization range when it is determined that the power-off process has been executed normally.

In the next step S228, similarly to step S222, it is determined whether or not the power failure recovery data (the value stored in step S206) is a normal value. When the power-off recovery data is determined to be a normal value, the process proceeds to step S230, and the "predetermined range" stored in step S227 is maintained. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S228 that the power-off recovery data is not a normal value, the process proceeds to step S229.
In step S<b>229 , the main control board 50 stores “specific range” in the register as an initialization range outside the use area of the RWM 53 . Here, the "specific range" is the range to be initialized when it is determined that the power failure is not normal, and is the entire range including the ring buffer storing the number of games and the number of payouts for ratio display.
Then, the process proceeds to step S230, and initialization of the predetermined range set in step S227 or the specific range set in step S229 (outside the use area of the RWM 53) is started.

In the next step S231, it is determined whether or not the initialization started in step S230 has been completed. When it is determined that the initialization is completed, the process proceeds to step S232.
At step S232, the AF register saved at step S226 is restored. In the next step S233, start setting of interrupt processing is performed. Here, various registers corresponding to the interrupt process specified in step S202 are set. Since timer interrupt processing is used as interrupt processing in this embodiment, processing for setting the period of timer interrupt (“2.235 ms” in this embodiment) is included. After the processing of step S233, interrupt processing is executed. In other words, the interrupt processing is not executed before the "interrupt activation".
In the next step S234, an output request is set at the start of setting change. This process is a process of setting (storing) a control command to be transmitted to the sub-control board 80 in a register in order to inform the sub-control board 80 of starting the setting change process.

"Output request setting" means a process of setting a control command to be transmitted to the sub-control board 80. FIG. Further, the control command here means not only the command to be actually transmitted, but also the command that is the source of the command to be actually transmitted.
Next, proceeding to step S235, the main control board 50 executes the control command set 1. FIG. This process is a process of storing a control command to be transmitted to the sub-control board 80 in the control command buffer (RWM 53).

Next, proceeding to step S236, the main control board 50 executes 2-byte time waiting processing (wait processing) for starting the setting change. In this embodiment, it waits until the number of interrupts "224" is counted (until the set number of interrupts becomes "0" by subtracting "1" for each interrupt number). This waiting is also called delay processing or waiting processing because the main processing does not proceed. It should be noted that during this waiting time (during 2-byte time waiting processing), the main processing is prevented from proceeding, but the interrupt processing is executed.

Thus, the reason why the two-byte time waiting process (wait process) is executed in step S236 is that the initialization process of the RWM 53 on the main control board 50 side ends in a relatively short time, whereas the sub control board 80 side Since the initialization process of the RWM 83 takes time, the main control board 50 side executes a two-byte time waiting process. In particular, the main control board 50 side cannot know whether the initialization process has been completed on the sub control board 80 side.

Therefore, while the sub-control board 80 is still in the process of being initialized, the main control board 50 has already completed the initialization, and the process proceeds further. 80 can be prevented from being out of sync with the progress of the control process.
After executing the output request set and the control command set 1 at the start of the setting change, the sub-control board 80 starts initialization of the RWM 83, and a sufficient time for completing the initialization of the RWM 83 is set as a wait time. do. As a result, after the RWM 83 is initialized on the sub-control board 80 side, the main control board 50 side proceeds to step S238 and subsequent steps.

Note that the control command for starting the setting change set in steps S234 and S235 is transmitted to the sub-control board 80 even during the 2-byte time waiting process in step S236. However, while the 2-byte time wait process is being executed in step S236, the process after step S237 does not proceed (the main process does not proceed).

After the end of the 2-byte time waiting process in step S236, the process advances to step S237 to store setting change display data as acquisition number data. Next, in step S238, the value "00011100 (B)" corresponding to the setting being changed is stored in the LED display request flag.

By the processing of steps S237 and S238, when interrupt processing is executed after these processing, lighting of digits 3a, 4a, and 5b (acquisition number display LED 78 and set value display LED 73) becomes possible.
Specifically, in the interrupt process executed after the process of step S238, "8" can be displayed for each of the digits 3a and 4a ("88" can be displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78), and the digit b5 (setting value display The current set value can be displayed on the LED 73).
Note that the obtained number data and the LED display request flag are initialized by the initialization processing in the use area of the RWM 53 in step S224, so the values before step S237 are "0".

Next, the process advances to step S239 to execute an interrupt waiting process. This process is a process of waiting until one interrupt time (2.235 ms) elapses. Then, after one interrupt time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S240.
In step S240, it is determined whether or not operation of a setting change switch (not shown in FIG. 1) has been detected. Here, whether or not the setting change switch is turned on is determined by judging rising data of the input port 51 including the setting change switch. When it is determined that the operation of the setting change switch has been detected, the process proceeds to step S241, and when it is determined that it has not been detected, the process proceeds to step S242.
In step S241, the set value data of the RWM 53 (address "F000(H)") is stored (updated). When the interrupt processing is executed after the set value data is updated, the set value display LED 73 displays the updated value.

In the next step S242, it is determined whether or not the operation of the start switch 41 has been detected. In this embodiment, when the start switch 41 is operated during setting change, the setting value at that time is determined.
When it is determined that the start switch 41 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S243, and when it is determined that the start switch 41 has not been operated, the process returns to step S239.

In the above processing, step S239 (interrupt wait) is provided to clear rising data of the setting change switch.
For example, if the process of step S239 is not provided, if it is determined that the rise data of the setting change switch is ON in step S240, the set value data is updated in step S241, and the start switch 41 is turned ON in the next step S242. If it is determined that it is not, the process proceeds to step S240, and it is determined whether or not the rise data of the setting change switch is ON.

After it is determined to be ON in step S240, if the interrupt process is executed even once, the rising data of the setting change switch is turned OFF. However, until the interrupt process is executed, it continues to be determined that the rising data of the setting change switch is ON in step S240. As a result, the set value data continues to increase by "2" or more just by operating the setting change switch once. Therefore, in step S239, an interrupt waiting process is executed.

In step S243, it is determined whether or not a setting key switch (not shown in FIG. 1) has been turned off. If it is determined that the setting key switch has been turned off, the process advances to step S244 to clear the acquisition number data (to "0"). This is to erase the display of "88" indicating that the setting is being changed. Next, the process proceeds to step S245 to store the value "00011111 (B)" corresponding to normal in the LED display request flag.

The display of the digits 3a and 4a (acquisition number display LED 78) changes from "88" to "00" by the interrupt processing executed after the processing of step S244.
In addition, "0" is displayed on each of the digits 1a and 2a ("00" is displayed on the credit number display LED 76) by the interrupt processing executed after the processing of step S245. Also, since the bit corresponding to digit 5 of the LED display request flag is "1", digit 5a (status display LED 79) can be lit. On the other hand, the digit 5b (setting value display LED 73) is not lit because the setting is not being changed or confirmed.

Next, in step S246, similarly to step S234, an output request setting at the end of setting change is performed. This process ends the setting change process, and transfers data corresponding to the determined setting value (specifically, setting value data stored at address "F000(H)") to the sub-control board 80 side. This is a process of setting a control command to notify to. Next, proceeding to step S247, the main control board 50 executes the control command set 1 as in step S235. Then, the process proceeds to step S248 and shifts to the main process (M_MAIN).

FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing power restoration processing (M_POWER_ON) in step S213 in FIG.
First, in step S251, the stack pointer (SP register) is restored. Here, the stack pointer is an area (stack area) of the RWM 53 that stores data at the time of power failure (eg, register values, instruction processing of main processing before interrupt processing, etc.) when power failure occurs. Of these, it indicates the area (address) to be stacked next.
In the next step S252, the set value data is read, and whether the range of the set value data is within the normal range (set value 1 to set value 6), in other words, "F000 (H)" It is determined whether or not the set value data is within the range of "0 (H)" to "5 (H)". When it is determined that the set value data is within the normal range, the process proceeds to step S253, and when it is determined that the set value data is not within the normal range, an "E6" error occurs, and the process proceeds to step S264 to shift to unrecoverable error processing. .

Proceeding to step S253, an unused area in the used area of the RWM 53 is set in the register as an initialization range. Then, in the next step S254, initialization of the RWM 53 within the range set in step S253 is executed. Here, it is conceivable that a value may be stored in the RWM 53 due to noise or the like even in an unused area. In the unlikely event that a value is stored in an unused area, it may lead to fraudulent acts, so please initialize the unused area when the power is turned on (usually once a day). there is
In the next step S255, it is determined whether or not the initialization of the RWM 53 (unused area within the used area) has been completed.

In step S256, the AF register is saved. This process is the same as the process of step S226 described above. In the next step S257, the initialization range of the unused area outside the used area of the RWM 53 is set in the register. Then, in the next step S258, initialization of the RWM 53 within the range set in step S257 is executed.
In the next step S259, it is determined whether or not the initialization of the RWM 53 (unused area outside the used area) has been completed. In step S260, the AF register is restored. This process is the same as the process of step S232 described above.

In the next step S261, a predetermined input port 51 is read. This processing is processing for updating each data (level data, rising data, falling data) of the input port 51 before power-off to the latest data.
Next, the process proceeds to step S262 to activate an interrupt. This process is, for example, the process of setting the cycle of the timer interrupt, and is the same process as step S233 described above.
Next, in step S263, the power-off processing completion flag is cleared, that is, set to "0". Then, the processing according to this flow chart ends.

In the above program start processing, setting change processing, and power recovery processing,
1) In the program start processing of FIG. 38, if "No" is determined in step S203 (when the power-off processing completion flag is an abnormal value), or if there is an abnormality during checksum calculation in step S204, step In S206, the abnormal value is stored as recovery data after power failure. In this case, since it is judged as "Yes" in step S209, the process advances to the setting change process (FIG. 39) in step S212.
Then, in the setting change process of FIG. 39, since it is judged "No" in steps S222 and S228, the entire range inside and outside the use area of the RWM 53 is initialized, that is, after "F000(H)" is initialized.

2) In the program start processing, when the power-off processing completion flag is determined to be a normal value and the checksum calculation is performed normally, when the setting change processing is performed, steps S222 and Since "Yes" is determined in S228, the process proceeds to steps S224 and S230, respectively, and the specified range (within the use area and outside the use area) of the RWM 53 is initialized.

3) In the program start processing, when the power-off processing completion flag is determined to be a normal value and the checksum calculation is performed normally, if the setting change processing is not performed, the power restoration processing ( 40). In this case, if the set value is normal in step S252 in FIG. 40, the RWM 53 is initialized (within and outside the use area) at the time of normal power-on. This initialization is a process of initializing the unused area of the RWM 53 as described above.

FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing main processing (M_MAIN) in this embodiment. The main processing is processing for one game. While the game is in progress, the main process is repeated every game.
First, in step S271, a stack pointer is set. As described above, the stack pointer is an area of the RWM 53 that stores data at the time of power failure (for example, register values, instruction processing of main processing before interrupt processing, etc.) when power failure occurs. Setting the stack pointer is the process of setting the register value to the initial value in the area of the RWM 53 .

In the next step S272, game start set processing (M_GAME_SET) is performed. This process is the process shown in FIG. 42, which will be described later, and is the process of generating, updating, storing, etc. the operating state flag.
In the next step S273, bet medals are read. This process is a process of reading how many medals are currently bet, and reads bet number data or automatic bet number data.
In the next step S274, it is determined whether or not there are bet medals based on the number of bets read in step S273.

When it is determined in step S274 that there are bet medals, the process proceeds to step S276, and when it is determined that there are no bet medals, the process proceeds to step S275 to perform medal insertion waiting processing, and then proceeds to step S276. In the medal insertion waiting process of step S275, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch is on.
In step S276, management processing of inserted medals is performed. This process is a process of determining whether or not the medals have been cleaned, whether or not the settlement switch 43 has been operated, and the like.

In the next step S277, update processing of soft random numbers is performed. This process is a process of updating (for example, adding "1" each time) a processing random number for processing (computation processing) the random number (hard random number or built-in random number) used in the combination lottery means 61 . A soft random number is a 16-bit random number with a range from '0' to '65535(D)'. As an update method, a process of adding an interrupt count value (a count value (variable) incremented at the time of an interrupt) to the value before updating may be executed.

At the next step S278, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the start switch 41 has been operated. When it is determined that the start switch 41 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S279, and when it is determined that the start switch 41 has not been operated, the process returns to step S273. Even when the start switch 41 is operated, if the number of bets has not reached the prescribed number for the game, it is determined "No" in step S278.

In step S279, a process for accepting a start switch is executed. This process is a process of setting a setting change prohibition flag, setting an output request at the start of rotation of the reel 31, and setting the number of times of output for outputting a medal insertion signal as an external signal to a hall computer or the like. .
In the next step S280, the acquisition number data is cleared. Therefore, when the start switch 41 is operated, even if the specified specified number display data and the payout number data were stored as the acquisition number data before that, they are cleared.
Here, although the details will be described later, in the twelfth embodiment, there is a case where a specified number is instructed (displayed) on the acquired number display LED 78 before the game is started. Therefore, when the start switch 41 is operated, there is a case where the instruction specified number display data is stored as the acquisition number data. Therefore, when the start switch 41 is operated, the acquisition number data is cleared, and the acquisition number display LED 78 is displayed with "00" (or extinguished).
Also, at the time of step S280, when the payout number data of the previous game is stored as the winning number data, the payout number data is cleared at this step S280.

Next, the process proceeds to step S281, and the main control board 50 executes a process of updating the number of AT games. This process is a process shown in FIG. 43 to be described later, and is a process of subtracting the number of AT games when a predetermined condition is satisfied during AT. Therefore, this process is not executed during non-AT.
Further, during AT, whether or not to add the number of AT games is performed based on the combination lottery result of the combination lottery process in step S282. For example, when a rare combination is won, the number of times AT is added to the game may be determined. Therefore, when the AT game number is added and the addition amount is added to the AT game number counter, it is executed after the process of step S282 (illustration is omitted in FIG. 41).
It should be noted that after the start switch reception (step S279), the AT game number counter is updated in step S281, but not limited to this, after the combination lottery process in step S282, after all the reels 31 stop (step S290 onwards) AT game number counter update may be performed.
In addition, in the specifications of the difference number management type AT, when the AT difference number counter is provided, after all the reels 31 are stopped and after the medal payout process due to winning is completed (after step S300), the AT difference number counter update.

In step S282, the combination lottery means 61 executes a combination lottery (corresponding to the above-described "internal lottery") at the timing when the start switch 41 is operated, that is, when the operation signal of the start switch 41 is received. The random number at the time of lottery is obtained in step S279. Then, in step S282, a process of determining whether or not the obtained random number value corresponds to any winning combination is performed using the combination lottery table.

In the next step S283, the main control board 50 executes an advantageous section shift lottery process. This process is the process of FIG. 44, which will be described later. In the present embodiment, an AT lottery is executed together with the advantageous section transition lottery. As shown in FIG. 44, which will be described later, when it is in the advantageous section but not in AT (for example, when the main game state is CZ), in step S348 in FIG. 44, AT lottery processing is executed.
Next, the process proceeds to step S284 to set the push order instruction number (M_ORD_INF). This process is the process shown in FIG. 48. During AT, when the instruction function is activated in the game (the push order instruction number is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78), the push order instruction number is generated, This is the process of displaying the pressing order instruction information.

In the next step S285, reel rotation start preparation processing is executed. This process executes a process of determining whether or not the minimum game time (4.1 seconds) has passed, and proceeds to the next step S286 if the minimum game time has passed.
Here, the RWM 53 is provided with an area for storing the timer value of the minimum game time (not shown in FIG. 35), and the initial value is "1834 (D) (2.235 ms×1834≈4099 ms)". is. In step S279, if it is determined that the minimum game time is "0", the initial value "1834 (D)" is set as the minimum game time (timer value). Then, the minimum game time is decremented by "1" for each interrupt process. When proceeding to step S285 of the next game, it is determined whether or not the minimum game time is "0", and when it is determined to be "0", the process proceeds to step S286.

At step S286, the reel control means 65 drives and controls the motor 32 to start the reel 31 to rotate. Then, when the reel 31 reaches the constant speed state, acceptance of operation of the stop switch 42 is permitted, and the process proceeds to step S287.
In step S287, it is checked whether the reel 31 has been stopped. Here, it is detected whether or not the operation signal of the stop switch 42 is received, and when the operation signal is received, the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 is determined based on the lottery result of the combination and the position of the reel 31. is determined, and the reel 31 is controlled to be stopped at the determined position.

In the next step S288, the reel control means 65 checks whether or not all the reels 31 have stopped, and proceeds to step S289. In step S289, it is determined whether or not all reels 31 have stopped. If it is determined that all reels 31 have stopped, the process proceeds to step S290, and if it is determined that all reels 31 have not stopped, the process returns to step S287. .

In step S290, the acquisition number data is cleared (set to "0"). For example, by activating the instruction function during AT, there is a case where the push order instruction information (for example, "=1") is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 . In this case, the display of the acquisition number display LED 78 becomes "00" by the interrupt processing executed after the processing of step S290.
It should be noted that the acquisition number display LED 78 may be extinguished. Specifically, "00010011 (B)" may be stored in the LED display request flag, or data for extinguishing may be provided as segment data and the data may be output.

In step S291, the display determination of the pattern is performed. Here, the prize determination means 66 determines whether or not the combination of symbols corresponding to the combination has stopped on the activated line.
In the next step S292, it is determined whether or not a symbol display error has occurred. When it is determined that a display error has occurred, the process proceeds to step S304, and when it is determined that no display error has occurred, the process proceeds to step S293. move on.
Here, since the reel 31 is stopped based on the stop position determination table, the reel 31 normally does not stop at a position other than the position determined by the stop position determination table. However, as a result of the symbol display determination, when a symbol (kicking away symbol) which should not be displayed on the active line is displayed, it is determined to be abnormal ("E5" error), and the process proceeds to step S304. Execute unrecoverable error handling.

When it is determined in step S292 that no display error has occurred, and the process proceeds to step S293, the payout number is updated. This process is a process of storing the number of payouts in the game as the number-of-payout data and the number-of-payout data buffer described above.
In the next step S294, the payout means 67 pays out medals (M_WIN_PAY) corresponding to the winning combination. This process is the process shown in FIG. 49, which will be described later. Next, the process advances to step S295 to perform an interrupt waiting process. In the next step S296, interrupt processing is prohibited. The processing of steps S295 and S296 prohibits the interrupt immediately after the interrupt.

In the next step S297, the AF register is saved. This process is similar to step S256 in FIG. Next, the flow advances to step S298 to execute ratio setting processing. This "ratio setting process" is a process of updating various counter values, calculating ratios, etc., in order to display five types of ratios on the management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor). Then, when the process proceeds to step S299, the AF register saved in step S297 is restored, and the interrupt is permitted (restarted) in the next step S300. In this way, when the ratio setting process is executed, the AF register is saved and the interrupt process is prohibited.

The reason why interrupt processing is prohibited during the execution of ratio set processing is that the ratio set processing uses a program stored outside the usage area, and when the program outside the usage area is being executed in the main processing. This is because if an interrupt process is entered in , the program in the used area and the program outside the used area will coexist, and the processing will become complicated.

Next, the process advances to step S301 to perform game end check processing (_M_GAME_CHK). This process is a process shown in FIG. 50, which will be described later, and clears a condition device (winning combination) flag. Then, in step S302, an output request is set at the end of the game, and in the next step S303, a control command is set 1. These processes are processes for setting control command data for transmitting to the sub-control board 80 that one game has ended.
When the process of step S303 is completed, the process returns to the beginning of the main process (step S248).

FIG. 42 is a flow chart showing the game start setting process (M_GAME_SET) in step S272 in FIG.
First, in step S311, a game standby display time is set (stored in a predetermined storage area (not shown in FIG. 35) of RWM 53). Since the game standby display time in this embodiment is set to "26846" interrupt (≈60000 ms, ie, about 60 seconds (1 minute)), "26846" is set in the predetermined storage area of the RWM53. When the game standby display time is set in step S301, the value is decremented by "1" for each interrupt process from this point.

When the game standby display time becomes "0", the acquisition number data is cleared in step S275 (waiting for medal insertion) in FIG. As a result, "00" is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78. FIG. For example, even if the number of medals paid out to the game last time is "8" and the player completes the game by operating the settlement switch 43, "00" will be displayed after about one minute. be done. As a result, it is possible to reduce the number of vacant machines by recognizing them as vacant machines by hall clerks and other players.
In addition, instead of displaying "00" on the acquired number display LED 78, the acquired number display LED 78 (upper digits and lower digits) may be extinguished, or the upper digits of the acquired number display LED 78 may be extinguished and the lower digits may be turned off. may display "0". In any case, it suffices if the display is executed so that the hall clerk or another player can recognize the empty table.

Next, the process proceeds to step S312, and initialization processing of the pressing order instruction number is executed. This processing is processing for clearing the push order instruction number stored in the predetermined storage area of the RWM 53 .
In the next step S313, the data of the symbol combination display flag is acquired. In the next step S314, it is determined whether or not the 1BB actuation symbol is displayed. In this processing, when the D2 bit corresponding to 1BB in the data of the symbol combination display flag is "1", it is determined as "Yes", and when it is "0", it is determined as "No". When it is determined that the 1BB operation pattern is displayed, the process proceeds to step S315, and when it is determined that it is not displayed, the process proceeds to step S316.

In step S315, the obtainable number of coins when 1BB is activated (during 1BB game) is saved. This process is a process of storing the maximum number of wins that can be obtained in the 1BB game in a predetermined storage area (not shown in FIG. 35) of the RWM 53 . Then, the process proceeds to step S316.
In step S316, an operating state flag is generated. This process is a process of generating the value of the operating state flag based on the symbol combination display flag.
Furthermore, in the next step S317, the operating state flag is updated, and in the next step S318, the operating state flag is stored. This process is a process of storing the generated operating state flag (stored in, for example, the A register at this time) in the address "F030 (H)" of the RWM 53 . As a result, the information on the operating state flag up to that point is replaced with the information on the operating state flag updated in step S317.
For example, when a 1BB symbol combination is displayed (at the time of 1BB winning), the D2 bit corresponding to 1BB of the operating state flag changes from "0" to "1".

In the next step S319, it is determined whether or not the RB operation has started. In the present embodiment, in the 1BB game, the RB operation flag is turned off (“0”) at the end of two games (or two wins), but when the end condition of the 1BB game is not met ( When the D2 bit corresponding to 1BB of the operation state flag is "1"), it is set to "1" in this game start set process. When it is determined in step S319 that it is time to start the RB operation, the process proceeds to step S320, and when it is determined that it is not the time to start the RB operation, the process proceeds to step S321.

In step S320, the number of games played and the number of prizes won when RB is activated are saved. This process stores (stores) "2 (H)" in the number-of-games counter (not shown in FIG. 35) provided in the RWM 53 when RB is activated, and This is a process of saving (storing) "2(H)" in the winning number counter (not shown in FIG. 35). Then, the process proceeds to step S321.

Both the number-of-games counter when RB is activated and the number-of-wins counter when RB is activated are set to "2 (H)" as an initial value, and each time the number of games or the number of winnings increases by "1", A counter that is decremented by "1" each time. However, not limited to this, the initial value of these counter values is set to "0", and each time the number of games played or the number of wins increases by "1", the counter values are incremented by "1", and these counter values are set to "2 ( H)” may be determined.

In the next step S321, it is determined whether or not the condition specifying the specified number is satisfied. Here, in the eleventh embodiment, there is no case where the specified number is instructed. However, in a twelfth embodiment, which will be described later, there is a case where a prescribed number is instructed at the start of a game, so this processing is included in this flow chart. If it is determined that the condition for designating the specified number is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S322, and if it is determined that the condition for designating the specified number is not satisfied, the process proceeds to step S323.
In step S322, the instruction specified number display data is stored as the acquisition number data. In the twelfth embodiment, there is a case where the prescribed number "2" is instructed, and when the prescribed number "2" is instructed, the acquisition number display LED 78 displays "0A". Then, the instruction specified number display data for displaying "0A" is defined as "0B (H)" (details will be described later), and in this step S322, "0B (H)" is obtained as the acquisition number data. memorize
The reason why "0A" is displayed instead of "02" when the specified number "2" is displayed is to avoid confusion with the number of payouts, the error number, and the pressing order instruction information.
The display of the number of payouts is any one of "01" to "15", and "A" is not displayed in the lower digits. Also, the error number is not displayed with "A" in the lower digits.

Here, the error number (the number displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78 when an error occurs) in this embodiment is as follows.
HP: Medal jam error HE: Medal empty error (no medal in hopper 35)
H0: Discharge sensor 37 error CE: Medal retention error CP: Medal illegal passage error CH: Passage sensor 46 error C0: Insertion sensor 44 error C1: Medal abnormal insertion error FE: Sub-tank (not shown in FIG. 1) Full dE: Front door open E1: Power failure recovery error E5: Display judgment error E6: Setting value error E7: Random number error

Note that the types of errors are not limited to the above. An error whose upper digit of the error number is "E" means an unrecoverable error.
As described above, since "A" is not displayed in the lower digits of the error number, there is no chance of confusion between the error number and the prescribed number of instructions.
Further, the pressing order instruction information displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78 by the operation of the instruction function is "=1" to "=6". Therefore, there is no confusion between the pressing order instruction information and the prescribed number of instructions.

In addition, in step S322, before storing the specified specified number display data as the winning number data, there is a case where the payout number data in the previous game is stored as the winning number data (when a small winning combination was won in the previous game). ). Note that the payout number data is stored in step S399 of the medal payout process (see FIG. 49 to be described later) for winning a prize. Therefore, when storing the specified specified number display data, the payout number data up to that point may be overwritten. However, without being limited to this, a process of clearing the obtained number data may be provided before step S322 (for example, immediately before step S311).

In the next step S323, based on the symbol combination display flag acquired in step S313, it is determined whether or not the replay symbol combination is stopped. When it is determined that the symbol combination for replay has been stopped and displayed, the process proceeds to step S324, and when it is determined that the symbol combination for replay has not been stopped and displayed, the process proceeds to step S326.

In step S324, the main control board 50 reads bet medals. This process is a process of reading the number of medals betted in the previous game (bet number data). Next, in step S325, automatic bet number data is set. This process is a process of storing the bet number read in step S324 in the automatic bet number data.
Next, the process proceeds to step S326 to set an output request for an operating state. In the next step S327, control command set 1 is executed. Specifically, it transmits to the sub-control board 80 information indicating that the replay has been activated or that the 1BB has been activated. Then, the processing according to this flow chart ends.

It should be noted that before (meaning before the filing of the present application, not "known"; the same shall apply hereinafter), during the bet number addition process, specifically, during the main process of FIG. 41, in step S276 In the medal management process, the clearing process of the acquired number data was executed. As a result, even if a small winning combination was won in the previous game and the payout number data at the time of winning the minor winning combination was stored as the winning number data, the winning number data was cleared when the bet number was added.
However, in this embodiment, when the condition for instructing the specified number is satisfied before the medal management process is executed, the specified specified number display data is stored as the acquired number data.
When the specified number is instructed, it is necessary to prevent the specified specified number display data from being cleared during bet processing. This is because, in the present embodiment, when the specified number is instructed, the state of specifying the specified number is maintained at least until the start switch 41 is operated.
Therefore, in the present embodiment, the acquisition number data is not cleared in the medal management process, and the acquisition number data is cleared in the process of step S280 in FIG. 41 when the start switch 41 is operated.

However, not limited to this, when the prescribed number is instructed, the instructed prescribed number display data is cleared after the start switch 41 is operated, but when the prescribed number is not instructed, as before, when adding the bet number Acquisition number data may be cleared (by medal management processing). In this case, for example, in the process of adding the number of bets, before executing the clearing process of the acquired number data, it is determined whether or not the stipulated number has been instructed in the current game, and when it is determined that the stipulated number has been instructed. is not cleared, and clears the acquired number data when it is determined that the specified number is not specified.

FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing AT game number counter update processing in step S281 in FIG.
First, in step S331, it is determined whether or not the AT flag is on ("1"). When it is determined that the AT flag is on, the process proceeds to step S332, and when it is determined that the AT flag is not on, the processing according to this flowchart is terminated. That is, if it is not in AT, the AT game number counter is not updated.

In step S332, it is determined whether or not the number of bets is "3". This process reads the bet number data or automatic bet number data of the RWM 53 and determines whether or not the bet number for the game is "3". When the number of bets is "3", the process proceeds to step S333, and when the number of bets is not "3", the processing according to this flowchart ends. In this embodiment, during AT, only when the game is played with the number of bets (specified number) "3", the AT game number counter is updated (the process relating to the instruction function is executed). In other words, even during AT, when the game is started with the number of bets (prescribed number) "2", the AT game number counter is not updated.
On the other hand, as will be described later, the advantageous section clear counter and the difference number counter are updated regardless of the number of bets.

When proceeding to step S333, the main control board 50 subtracts "1" from the value of the AT game number counter. Then, the processing according to this flow chart ends.
In the case of the difference number management type AT, similarly, when the AT difference number counter is provided, the AT difference number counter is not decremented (updated) when the bet number is not "3" even during the AT.

FIG. 44 is a flow chart showing the advantageous zone transition lottery process in step S283 in FIG.
In the present embodiment, the AT lottery process (step S348) is provided in the advantageous zone transition lottery process, but the process is not limited to this, and the advantageous zone transition lottery process and the AT lottery process are executed independently. may For example, in FIG. 41, only the advantageous section shift lottery process may be performed in step S283, and the AT lottery process may be executed after step S283.
First, in step S341, it is determined whether or not the number of bets (specified number) in the current game is "3". When it is determined that the number of bets is "3", the process proceeds to step S342, and when it is determined that the number of bets is not "3", the processing according to this flowchart is terminated.
Therefore, when the number of bets (predetermined number) is "3", the advantageous section transition lottery in step S345 and the advantageous section transition process (process related to the advantageous section) in step S347, which will be described later, can be executed, and step S348 is enabled. AT lottery processing (processing related to the instruction function) can be executed. However, when the number of bets (prescribed number) is not "3", these processes are not executed.

In step S342, it is determined whether or not the advantageous section type flag is "0". When it is determined that the advantageous section type flag is "0" (non-advantageous section), the process proceeds to step S343, and when it is determined that the advantageous section type flag is "1" (advantageous section), step S348. proceed to When the advantageous section type flag is "1" (when already in the advantageous section), the advantageous section transition lottery is not performed, but the AT lottery is performed.

In step S343, it is determined whether or not the combination lottery result in the current game is a target lottery result, that is, whether or not the winning combination for the lottery of the advantageous section is won. Here, detailed explanation is omitted, but for example, if you win a special role alone, if you win a special role and a small role, if you win a small role (rare small role), it is the target lottery result. to decide. In addition, the target lottery results do not include non-winners. This is because the process relating to the advantageous section is not executed in the game in which the combination is not won (the game in which the conditional device is inactive).
If it is determined in step S343 that the target lottery result has been obtained, the process proceeds to step S344. elected).

In step S344, it is determined whether or not the target lottery result is a specific lottery result. Here, although detailed explanation is omitted, for example, among the roles to be drawn, the middle stage cherry (single winning or double winning with special role) is set as a fixed role (a role that will always be won) in the advantageous section transition lottery. However, when the middle cherry is won, it may be determined that it is a result of a specific lottery.
When it is determined in step S344 that it is the specific lottery result, the process proceeds to step S347, and when it is determined that it is not the specific lottery result, the process proceeds to step S345. In other words, when it is not a specific lottery result, the advantageous section transition lottery is performed, and when it is a specific lottery result, the advantageous section transition process (step S347) is executed without performing the advantageous section transition lottery (always transition to an advantageous section). do). It should be noted that it is also possible to execute the advantageous zone transition lottery even if the result of the specific lottery is determined, and to set such that the advantageous zone transition lottery is won with a probability of 100%.

In step S345, an advantageous section transition lottery is performed. As the advantageous interval transition lottery, for example, a lottery table in which numbers corresponding to the lottery result are predetermined is used to perform lottery in the same manner as the lottery lottery. For example, if the winning number is "A", there is a 35% chance of winning in the advantageous section, if the winning number is "B", there is a 60% chance of winning in the advantageous section, and so on. are mentioned.
If the winning combination lottery result is not eligible for the advantageous section lottery, the result is "No" in step S343. At times, in the advantageous section transition lottery, a lottery is conducted using a lottery table having at least "1" or more. However, the winning probability of the advantageous section transition lottery is set to "1/17500" or more.

Next, in step S346, it is determined whether or not the advantageous section has been won in the lottery in step S345. When it is determined that the advantageous section has been won, the process proceeds to step S347, and when it is determined that the advantageous section has not been won, the processing according to this flowchart is terminated.
In step S347, advantageous section transition processing is executed. This process is the process shown in FIG. 45, and is the process of setting flags, counters, etc. based on the winning of the advantageous section.
At the next step S348, an AT lottery is conducted. This process is the process shown in FIG. Then, the processing according to this flow chart ends.
In addition, not limited to the example of this embodiment, AT may always be started (without AT lottery) when shifting to an advantageous section. Alternatively, when shifting to the advantageous section, it is always non-AT, and after shifting to the advantageous section (for example, after playing a predetermined number of games), it may be determined whether or not to execute AT.

FIG. 45 is a flow chart showing the advantageous section transition processing in step S347 of FIG.
First, in step S351, the main control board 50 turns on ("1") the advantageous section type flag. Next, proceeding to step S352, the main control board 50 sets the advantageous interval clear counter to the initial value of the number of games played in the advantageous interval "1500 (D)".

In the next step S353, "0" is set in the difference counter. If the difference counter continues to be updated during the normal section (non-advantageous section) and is always set to "0" at the end of the game when it is not the advantageous section, the process of step S353 is unnecessary. However, the initial value "0" may also be set for noise prevention.
At the end of the advantageous section, the initialization process including the difference counter is executed, so the difference counter is "0" at the start of the normal section. Therefore, in the case of specifications that update the difference counter only during the advantageous interval, the difference counter at the start of the advantageous interval is "0", so it is possible to omit the processing of step S353. .
On the other hand, when the difference counter continues to be updated during the non-advantageous section as in the present embodiment, the difference counter may be positive even immediately before the transition to the advantageous section. Therefore, the difference counter is set to "0" in step S353. Then, the processing according to this flow chart ends.

FIG. 46 is a flow chart showing the AT lottery process in step S348 of FIG.
First, in step S361, an AT lottery is executed based on the combination lottery result. For this lottery, as in step S345, an AT lottery may be performed using a lottery table in which winning numbers are determined for each combination lottery result.
It should be noted that the AT lottery does not necessarily have to be executed, and for example, a combination lottery result that is not determined by the AT and a combination lottery result that is always determined by the AT may be provided.
In the next step S362, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the AT has been won in the AT lottery in step S361. When it is determined that the AT has been won, the process proceeds to step S363, and when it is determined that the AT has not been won, the process proceeds to step S365.

In step S363, the main control board 50 executes AT initial game number determination processing. This process is the process shown in FIG. 47, which will be described later. Next, proceeding to step S364, the main control board 50 sets the main game state to AT and turns on the AT flag. Then, the processing according to this flow chart ends.
Here, the main game state of the present embodiment includes normal (non-advantageous section), CZ (advantageous section and non-AT), AT, and 1BB operation. It should be noted that it is possible to provide an omen as a main game state after the AT is won and before the AT starts, but in this embodiment, for the sake of simplification of explanation, when the AT is won, the AT is started immediately. and Information on the main game state is stored in a predetermined area (not shown in FIG. 35) of the RWM 53 .
On the other hand, when it is determined that AT is not won in step S362 and the process proceeds to step S365, the main control board 50 sets the main game state to CZ. Then, the processing according to this flow chart ends.

FIG. 47 is a flow chart showing AT initial game number determination processing in step S363 in FIG.
In FIG. 47, at step S371, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning combination lottery in the current game is winning of a fixed combination. As described above, a rare combination such as middle stage cherry is set as the fixed combination. When it is determined that the fixed combination has been won, the process proceeds to step S372, and when it is determined that the fixed combination has not been won, the process proceeds to step S373.
In step S372, the initial number of AT games is set to "100 (D)" and stored in the AT game number counter. On the other hand, in step S373, the initial number of AT games is set to "30 (D)" and stored in the AT game number counter. Then, the processing according to this flowchart is terminated.

In the example of FIG. 47, the specification is such that the number of AT initial games is distributed according to whether or not the winning combination is won. A lottery may be conducted. In other words, even if the lottery result is one combination, any number of games may be selected from a plurality of number of games.
Also, during AT, the AT game count determination process shown in FIG. 47 may be executed as an addition lottery for the AT game count. When the AT game number addition lottery is won, the determined addition number is added to the AT game number counter.

FIG. 48 is a flow chart showing the push order instruction number setting process (M_ORD_INF) in step S284 of FIG.
First, in step S381, it is determined whether or not the instruction condition (the condition for operating the instruction function) is satisfied. When the relevant game is AT and a combination having an advantageous pushing order such as pushing order bell is won, it is determined that the indication condition is satisfied.
In addition, when winning the advantageous section in the game this time ("Yes" in step S346 in FIG. 44) and winning AT ("Yes" in step S362 in FIG. 46), the advantageous section from the next game , this time the game is not an advantageous section. Therefore, since the instruction function cannot be activated in the current game, the result is "No" in step S381.
When it is determined in step S381 that the instruction condition is satisfied, the process advances to step S382, and when it is determined that the instruction condition is not satisfied, the processing according to this flowchart is terminated.

In the next step S382, it is determined whether or not the number of bets in the current game is "3". In this process, it is determined whether or not the bet number is "3" by reading the bet number data or the automatic bet number data of the RWM 53 .
When it is determined that the number of bets is "3", the process proceeds to step S383, and when it is determined that the number of bets is not "3", the processing according to this flowchart is terminated. As described above, in the present embodiment, the condition for activating the instruction function (executing the process related to the instruction function) is set to the number of bets "3" (one prescribed number). Therefore, even if the game is started with the number of bets "2" during the AT, for example, and a winning combination with an advantageous push order (for example, the push order bell) is won, the instruction function does not operate (the correct push order is not reported).

In the next step S383, the winning number (condition device number) is set. The winning number (condition device number) determined in the winning lottery process is stored in a predetermined area (not shown in FIG. 35) of the RWM 53 . Then, in step S383, the value stored in this storage area is stored in the A register.
Next, the process advances to step S384 to set a pressing order instruction number table (not shown). Here, the leading address of the pressing order instruction number table is stored in the HL register. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S385.

In step S385, designated address data is set. In this processing, the value obtained by adding the A register value to the HL register value is set as a new HL register value, and the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value is stored in the A register.
That is, the data stored in the winning number (condition device number) is used as an offset value, and the data corresponding to the address obtained by adding the offset value to the head address of the push order instruction number table is obtained. As a result, the pressing order instruction number corresponding to the winning number is stored in the A register.
Then, in step S386, the A register value (push order instruction number) is stored in a predetermined area of the RWM 53 (area for storing the push order instruction number; not shown in FIG. 35).
In the next step S387, the A register value (pressing order instruction number) is stored as the acquired number data.

In the eleventh embodiment, the lottery winning combination is the same as in FIG. 58 (twelfth embodiment) described later. Then, when the winning numbers "3" to "8" are won during AT, the pushing order instruction number corresponding to the winning number is set. The relationship between the winning number and the push order instruction number stored in the winning number data is as follows.
Winning number "3": Push order instruction number "A1 (H)"
Winning number "4": Push order instruction number "A2 (H)"
Winning number "5": Push order instruction number "A3 (H)"
Winning number "6": Push order instruction number "A4 (H)"
Winning number "7": Push order instruction number "A5 (H)"
Winning number "8": Push order instruction number "A6 (H)"

For example, when the winning number "3" is won during AT, the pushing order instruction number "A1(H)" is stored as the winning number data by the pushing order instruction number setting process of FIG. As a result, the push order instruction information "=1" corresponding to the push order instruction number "A1(H)" is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 by LED display control (I_LED_OUT) in FIG. 55, which will be described later.

After step S387, the process advances to step S388 to determine whether or not the advantageous section display LED flag is on (lit). When it is determined that the advantageous section display LED flag is on, the processing according to this flowchart is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the advantageous section display LED flag is not ON, the process proceeds to step S389.
In step S389, it is determined whether or not the game state (RT or main game state) of the current game is a game state in which the section Sim ball output rate exceeds "1". It should be noted that whether or not the game state is such that the interval Sim payout rate exceeds “1” is preset, and here, it is determined whether or not the game state is the preset game state. Specifically, the data of the current RT and the main game state are stored in a predetermined area of the RWM 53. By reading this data, the game state of the current game exceeds the section Sim ball payout rate "1". Determine whether or not When it is determined that the game state is in which the section Sim ball output rate exceeds "1", the process proceeds to step S390, and when it is determined that the section Sim ball output rate does not exceed "1", the processing according to this flowchart is terminated. do. In step S390, the advantageous section display LED flag is turned on. Therefore, the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit by the interrupt processing executed after step S390. Then, the processing according to this flow chart ends.

As described above, in the game in which the instruction function is activated, when the advantageous interval display LED 77 is not yet lit and the interval Sim ball-out rate exceeds "1", the advantageous interval display LED 77 is turned on. Since the conditions for lighting are satisfied, the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit.
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, when winning the advantageous interval transition lottery, the advantageous interval display LED 77 may be lit before the start of the next game. Alternatively, after moving to an advantageous section, before activating the instruction function, or even if the section Sim ball output rate does not exceed "1", at any timing (when the arbitrarily set lighting condition is satisfied) ), the advantageous section display LED 77 may be lit.

FIG. 49 is a flow chart showing the medal payout process (MS_WIN_PAY) by winning in step S294 in FIG.
First, in step S391, the main control board 50 acquires payout number data. This process is a process of storing the value of payout number data in the A register.
Next, in step S392, it is determined whether or not medals are to be paid out. Specifically, it determines whether or not the payout number data (A register value) is "0". When it is determined to be "0", that is, when it is determined that no medals have been paid out, the processing according to this flowchart is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not "0", that is, when it is determined that medals will be paid out, the process proceeds to step S393.

In step S393, the value of credit amount data is acquired.
Next, proceeding to step S394, it is determined whether or not the number of credits has reached the limit value. Specifically, when the credit amount data obtained in step S393 is "50 (D)", it is determined that the credit amount has reached the limit value, and the process proceeds to step S398. (D)", it is determined that the number of credits has not reached the limit value, and the process proceeds to step S395.

In step S395, a waiting time for credit addition is set. In this embodiment, in order to set about 100 ms as the standby time, the number of times of interrupt processing is set to "46" (46×2.235 ms=about 100 ms). Specifically, "00000000 (B)" is set as the B register value, and "00101110 (B)" is set as the C register value.
Next, the flow advances to step S396 to execute 2-byte time wait processing. This process is a process of decrementing the BC register value for each interrupt process and waiting until it becomes "0".

When the 2-byte time waiting process in step S396 ends, the process proceeds to step S397 to add "1" to the value of the credit amount data. As a result, the display of the credit amount display LED 76 becomes "+1" due to the interrupt processing executed after the processing of step S397. For example, the display of the credit amount display LED 76 changes from "08" to "09". After the process of step S397, the process proceeds to step S399.

When the process proceeds from step S394 to step S398, a single medal payout process (a process of paying out actual medals from the hopper 35 to the player) is executed. In this process, the hopper motor 36 is driven, and as shown in FIGS. 7 and 8, when the on/off of the payout sensors 37a and 37b is detected at a predetermined timing, it is determined that one medal has been paid out correctly. to decide.
By the above processing, the number of credits is increased until the number of credits reaches the limit value, and when the number of credits reaches the limit, the processing of paying out actual medals from the hopper 35 is executed.

In step S399, "1" is added to the acquisition number data. As a result, the display of the acquisition number display LED 78 becomes "+1". For example, the display of the acquisition number display LED 78 changes from "02" to "03".
In the next step S400, "1" is subtracted from the number-of-payouts data. In this step S400, only the payout number data is updated, and the value of the payout number data buffer is not updated.

Next, in step S401, it is determined whether or not medal payout has been completed. This process is a process of determining whether or not the updated payout number data has become "0". When it is determined that the number of payout data is "0", the processing according to this flow chart is terminated, and when it is determined that the number of payout data is not "0", the process returns to step S393 to continue the processing.

In the above payout process, when performing the payout process of adding "1" to the number of credits, a standby time of about 100 ms is set by the processes of steps S395 and S396. As a result, the player can see that the display of the credit amount display LED 76 counts up. For example, when the display of the credit number display LED 76 before credit addition is "08" and eight medals are added to this, "display "08"→waiting process for 100 ms→display "09"→100 ms Standby processing → . . . → 100 ms standby processing → display “16”. On the other hand, if a waiting time is not provided when adding "1" to the number of credits, the display will appear to change from "08" to "16" in an instant.
Then, as in the present embodiment, when adding the number of credits, by executing a 2-byte time waiting process for each addition of "1", a payout sound ("plur... ”) can be synchronized with the counting up of the number of credits.

On the other hand, when the number of credits exceeds the maximum number of "50 (D)" and medals are actually paid out in the process of step S398, the 2-byte time waiting process of steps S395 and S396 is not provided.
This is because the hopper motor 36 is driven to actually pay out one medal, and it takes about 100 ms to pay out one medal. Therefore, when actually paying out medals, it is possible to synchronize the payout sound output from the sub-control board 80 side without providing a two-byte time waiting process.

FIG. 50 is a flow chart showing the game end check process (M_GAME_CHK) in step S301 of FIG.
First, in step S411, a process of clearing the flag of the condition device (also called winning information, stored in a predetermined area (not shown in FIG. 35) of the RWM 53) is performed. This processing is processing for clearing conditions other than the conditional device for the special combination, and when it is determined that the symbol combination corresponding to the special combination has stopped on the effective line, the processing for clearing the conditional device for the special combination is also executed. In the next step S412, the replay display LED 79f is extinguished. This process is a process of setting the bit corresponding to the replay of the medal management flag (not shown in FIG. 35) provided in the RWM 53 to "0". Next, in step S413, the replay activation flag is cleared. This processing is processing to set the D0 bit of the operating state flag to "0".

In the next step S414, it is determined whether or not the AT game number counter has become "0". Here, the AT game number counter is updated in step S281 (FIG. 43) during the main process of FIG. 41, as described above. Thus, in this embodiment, the AT game number counter is updated after the start switch acceptance process (step S279 in FIG. 41), but not limited to this, for example, in FIG. check processing) or within the processing of step S301 (for example, before step S414 in FIG. 50).
Furthermore, in the present embodiment, an example of a game number management type AT that updates the AT game number counter is shown. determine whether it happened or not. Note that the AT difference number counter is updated after the medal payout process (step S294 in FIG. 41) due to winning.
When it is determined that the AT game number counter is "0", the process proceeds to step S415, and when it is determined that it is not "0", the process proceeds to step S416. At step S415, the AT flag is turned off.
Next, the process advances to step S416 to execute advantageous section counter management. This process is a process of updating the advantageous section clear counter and the difference counter, etc., and is the process shown in FIG. 51 or FIG. 52, which will be described later. Then, the processing according to this flow chart ends.

51 and 52 are flow charts showing the advantageous section counter management in step S416 of FIG. FIG. 51 shows example 1 and FIG. 52 shows example 2. FIG.
The following processing is executed in the advantageous section counter management.
1) Updating the advantageous section clear counter 2) Updating the difference counter 3) Determining whether or not the conditions for ending the advantageous section are satisfied 4) When the conditions for ending the advantageous section are satisfied, initialize (clear) )
Also, the advantageous section counter management is executed regardless of the number of bets (predetermined number).
In this embodiment, the advantageous section counter management is executed regardless of whether the section is an advantageous section or a non-advantageous section (normal section). However, it may be configured such that it is judged whether or not it is in the advantageous section, and the advantageous section counter management is executed only when it is in the advantageous section.

In Example 1 of FIG. 51, in step S421, the address value of the advantageous section clear counter is stored in the HL register. Therefore, "F063(H)" is stored in the HL register.
In the next step S422, "1" is subtracted from the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register. The subtraction here is, for example, as follows.
"0010 (H)" → "1" subtraction → "000F (H)"
"0001 (H)" → "1" subtraction → "0000 (H)" (zero flag = 1)
"0000 (H)" → "1" subtraction → "0000 (H)" (carry flag = 1)

As described above, even if "1" is subtracted from "0000(H)", there is no digit reduction, and "0000(H)" is maintained. In this way, no matter what the value before subtraction is, it is one instruction (one step) that only subtracts "1". is unnecessary, and the process of adding the value of the carry flag after the subtraction is also unnecessary. Therefore, the time required for updating the count value can be greatly reduced. Further, by configuring in this way, it is possible to determine whether or not it is in the advantageous interval from the value of the advantageous interval clear counter, and to determine whether or not the conditions for ending the advantageous interval are satisfied (for example, when the game in the advantageous interval reaches 1500 Judgment as to whether or not a game has been executed, whether or not an arbitrary termination condition has been satisfied, etc.) is also unnecessary.

In the next step S423, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the advantageous section clear counter value before subtraction is "0". This process is determined by whether or not the carry flag has become "1" in the subtraction process of step S422.
When the carry flag becomes "1" (when the value before subtraction is "0"), the process proceeds to step S436; when the carry flag is not "1" (when the value before subtraction is not "0") The process proceeds to step S424. It should be noted that when the carry flag becomes "1" (when the value before subtraction is "0"), this game is not a game in an advantageous section (this game is a game in a non-advantageous section (normal section) is).

At step S424, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the subtraction result (after subtraction) at step S422 is "0". This process is determined by whether or not the zero flag has become "1" in the subtraction process of step S422. That is, it is determined whether or not the value before subtraction was "1".
When the zero flag is "1", the process proceeds to step S435, and when the zero flag is not "1" (when the subtraction result is not "0"), the process proceeds to step S425. When the zero flag becomes "1" (when the subtraction result is "0"), the game in the advantageous section of the current game ends (the next game is a non-advantageous section (normal section) game). ) means that

In step S425, the value of the difference number counter is acquired. This process is a process of reading the value of the difference number counter and storing it in the HL register.
Next, proceeding to step S426, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the replay operation symbol is displayed in the current game (whether or not the replay wins). In this process, it is determined whether or not the D0 bit of the symbol combination display flag is "1". When it is determined that the regame operation pattern is displayed, the process proceeds to step S434, and when it is determined that the regame operation symbol is not displayed, the process proceeds to step S427.

In step S427, a payout number data buffer is obtained. This process is a process of reading the payout number data buffer and storing the value in the A register.
In the next step S428, a process of adding the number of payouts to the difference number counter is executed. This process is a process of adding the A register value (payout number data buffer value) to the HL register value (difference number counter) and storing the added value in the HL register.

Next, the process proceeds to step S429 to acquire the value of the bet number data. This process is a process of reading the bet number data and storing the value in the A register.
In the next step S430, the number of bets is subtracted from the difference counter. This process is a process of subtracting the A register value from the HL register value and storing the subtraction result in the HL register. Here, when the HL register value is less than "0", the carry flag becomes "1".

In the next step S431, it is determined whether or not the subtraction result in step S430 is less than "0". In this process, it is determined whether or not the carry flag has become "1" as a result of the subtraction in step S430. move on. On the other hand, when the carry flag is not "1" (when the subtraction result is not less than "0"), the process proceeds to step S433.

In step S432, a process of clearing (setting to "0") the HL register value is executed. Then, in the next step S433, the difference counter value is saved. This process is a process of storing the HL register value in the difference number counter. Therefore, when the process proceeds to step S433 via step S432, the difference number counter becomes "0".
In the next step S434, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the difference number counter has exceeded the upper limit value. The upper limit value of the difference number counter is set to "2400 (D)". In this process, a comparison operation is performed between the HL register value and "2401(D)". In this comparison operation, the carry flag becomes "0" when the HL register value is larger, and becomes "1" when the HL register value is smaller. Therefore, when the carry flag is "1" (when the HL register value is smaller), it is determined that the upper limit is not exceeded, and the processing according to this flowchart is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the upper limit is exceeded (when the carry flag is "0"), the process proceeds to step S435. When the difference counter exceeds the upper limit value, the condition for ending the advantageous section is satisfied.
In step S435, the RWM 53 initializes the storage area relating to the advantageous section (clears the data relating to the advantageous section). The data relating to the advantageous interval includes an advantageous interval clear counter, an advantageous interval type flag, a difference number counter, an advantageous interval display LED flag, an AT flag, an AT game number counter, and the like. Furthermore, there is information on the main game state. Note that the information about the advantageous section does not include the RT status number, the LED display counter, and the like. Specifically, in FIG. 35, "F000(H)" to "F052(H)" are not included.

For example, the data cleared in step S435 does not include the LED display counter.
Now assume that the LED display counter is cleared. In that case, the LED display counter becomes "0" due to the end of the advantageous section. Specifically, if the LED display counter is initialized when it is "00000010(B)", the LED display counter would normally be updated to "00000001(B)" in the next interrupt processing, and the LED Although the LED corresponding to the display counter (specifically, the upper digits of the credit number display LED 76) can be turned on, the LED display counter becomes "00010000 (B)". As a result, the display of the LED whose LED display counter corresponds to "00000001(B)" is delayed, so that it may appear as if it is turned off for a moment.

Furthermore, the data cleared in step S435 does not include, for example, the following data.
1) Excitation information of the motor 32 2) Error information when an error occurs 3) Data for displaying the management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor) (total number of games counter, total payout counter, etc.)
4) Timer value for minimum playing time (4.1 seconds) (set at step S285 in FIG. 41)
5) Input port 51 information 6) Control command buffer data 7) Stack area data 8) External signal information The above are examples of typical data, and the data that is not cleared is limited to the above data. It does not mean that you will be

Next, proceeding to step S436, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the advantageous section type flag is "0" (normal section). When the advantageous section type flag is "0", the processing according to this flowchart is terminated. On the other hand, when the advantageous section type flag is not "0", especially when it is determined that the advantageous section type flag is "1" (advantageous section) in this embodiment, the process proceeds to step S437. The reason why the advantageous interval type flag is "1" at this time is that the advantageous interval transition lottery was won in the game this time, and the advantageous interval type flag was set to "1" at step S351 in FIG. In this case, it is judged as "Yes" in step S423, and the process proceeds to step S436. On the other hand, when proceeding to step S436 via step S435, since the advantageous section type flag has been cleared in step S435, it will not be determined as "No" in step S436.

In step S437, an initial value is set in an advantageous section clear counter. This process is a process of setting "1500 (D)" in the advantageous section clear counter. Here, "1500 (D)" is stored at the address indicated by the HL register value. Note that "F063 (H)" is set in the HL register in step S421. Then, the processing according to this flow chart ends.

In the above advantageous section counter management, when updating the difference number counter, the number of payouts is first added (step S428), and then the number of bets is subtracted (step S430). The reason for this processing is as follows.
For example, assume that the number of bets is "3 (D)" and the number of payouts is "9 (D)" when the difference counter is "2 (D)".
Here, when the number of bets is first subtracted from the difference number counter, it becomes "-1 (D) (actually, "FFFF (H)")", and the carry flag becomes "1". Adding the number of payouts adds "9 (D)" to "-1 (D)", resulting in "8 (D)", and the carry flag is "1" (the carry is that it will occur).

Since the difference number of the game this time is "+6", simply by adding the difference number "+6" to the difference number counter "2(D)" before the update, the carry flag becomes "1" and irregular situation arises. In other words, the process of step S431 (whether the subtraction result is less than "0") cannot be determined by whether the carry flag is "1". If the determination is made based on whether or not the carry flag is "1", it will be determined "Yes" in step S431 even though the carry flag has not occurred, and the difference counter will be initialized in step S432. It will set the value. The carry flag is set to "1" regardless of whether a carry or a carry occurs as a result of the subtraction.

On the other hand, when the difference number counter is "2 (D)", if the number of payouts "9 (D)" is added first, the difference number counter becomes "11 (D)" at that time, and then bet. Subtracting the number yields "8(D)". In this case, since no carry occurs, the carry flag is "0".
For the above reason, when updating the difference counter, if the number of payouts is first added and then the number of bets is subtracted, the judgment processing in step S431 can be executed by simple processing using the carry flag.

Also, in the advantageous section counter management of this embodiment, the advantageous section counter subtraction process (step S422) is first executed, and when the value before subtraction is "0" ("Yes" in step S423, i.e. If it is a non-advantageous section), the process proceeds to step S436 without executing the difference counter updating process (steps S425 to S430). Therefore, in this embodiment, the advantageous section counter management is executed regardless of whether the section is an advantageous section or a non-advantageous section. is not executed to improve processing efficiency. For this reason, the processing order is such that the subtraction processing of the advantageous section clear counter is performed first, and then the difference counter update processing is performed. Of course, it is determined whether it is in the advantageous section, and if it is in the advantageous section, the advantageous section clear counter is decremented if the specification is to execute the subtraction processing of the advantageous section clear counter and the update processing of the difference number counter. It is also possible to execute the process of updating the difference number counter prior to the process.

Further, even when the determination in step S426 is "Yes" (when the replay wins), the process of step S434 is executed. By doing so, even if an abnormal value (a value exceeding 2400 (D)) is stored in the difference counter due to noise or the like at the end of the game, the answer at step S434 is "Yes". , can end the advantageous section. On the other hand, if such confirmation is unnecessary, the processing of this flowchart may be ended when "Yes" is determined in step S426.

Further, in the example of FIG. 51, it is determined whether or not the re-game operation symbols are stopped and displayed in step S426, and when it is determined that the re-game operation symbols are stopped and displayed, update processing of the difference number counter (steps S427 to S430) is skipped to speed up the processing.
In particular, in a game in which the replay operation symbols are stopped and displayed, it is conceivable that the number of payouts in the relevant game is regarded as "0" (deemed number of payouts), and the number of bets in the next game is regarded as "0", and the difference counter is updated. . However, for example, SB (single bonus) is provided as a winning combination during an advantageous section, and when SB is won, one SB game with a bet number of "1" is executed in the next game, but this SB game There is a case where the replay is won and the replay operation pattern is stopped and displayed. In this case, since the next game is not an SB game, the bet number is "3" (a game other than the SB game cannot be played with the bet number "1"). However, in this case, since the number of assumed payouts in the SB game does not match the number of bets in the next game, how the difference number counter should be counted becomes a problem.
Therefore, in the present embodiment, the above problem can be solved by not updating the difference number counter in the game in which the replay operation symbols are stopped and displayed.

FIG. 52 is a flow chart showing example 2 of advantageous section counter management in step S416 of FIG. In FIG. 52, the same step numbers are assigned to the same processes as in FIG.
In Example 1 of FIG. 51, the number of payouts is first added to the difference counter, and then the bet number is subtracted from the difference counter.
On the other hand, in Example 2 of FIG. 52, the number of bets is first subtracted from the difference counter, and then the number of payouts is added to the difference counter.

In the example of FIG. 51, if the number of bets is subtracted from the difference counter and then the number of payouts is added, the carry flag may become "1" even if there is no carry-over in the end. It has been explained that whether the carry flag is "1" or not cannot be determined whether it is "0" or not.
On the other hand, in Example 2 of FIG. 52, after subtracting the number of bets from the difference number counter (step S430), the number of payouts is added (step S428), and in step S441, without referring to the value of the carry flag, It is determined whether the calculation result is less than "0".
Specifically, in step S441 of FIG. 52, step S441 determines whether or not the D7 bit (most significant bit) of the H register (register that stores upper digits) value of the HL register value is "1". is less than "0".

for example,
Difference number counter value (HL register value) = 0000 (H) (before operation)
Bet number data = 3 (H)
Payout number data = 0 (H)
Suppose that
In this case, the difference counter value after calculation is
0000(H)-3(H)=FFFD(H)
becomes.
therefore,
H register value = FF (H) (1111/1111 (B))
L register value = FD (H) (1111/1101 (B))
becomes.
Note that "/" indicates a delimiter for every 4 bits in binary notation.

In the above example, the HL register value before calculation is "0000 (H)", but the HL register value before calculation is not "0000 (H)"value", for example,
Difference number of games this time = 03 (H)
HL register value = 0001 (H) (before operation)
, the HL register value after the operation is
HL register value = FFFE (H)
becomes.
therefore,
H register value = FF (H) (1111/1111 (B))
L register value = FE (H) (1111/1110 (B))
becomes.

Furthermore, when the HL register value is not "0000 (H)" and "difference number in current game<HL register value", for example, firstly,
Difference number of games this time = 03 (H)
HL register value = 0100 (H) (256 (D)) (before operation)
, the HL register value after the operation is
HL register value = 00FD (H)
becomes.
therefore,
H register value = 00 (H) (0000/0000 (B))
L register value = FD (H) (1111/1101 (B))
becomes.

Secondly,
Difference number of games this time = 03 (H)
HL register value = 00FF (H) (255 (D)) (before operation)
, the HL register value after the operation is
HL register value = 00FC (H)
becomes.
therefore,
H register value = 00 (H) (0000/0000 (B))
L register value = FC (H) (1111/1100 (B))
becomes.

Furthermore, thirdly,
Difference number of games this time = 03 (H)
HL register value = 0960 (H) (2400 (D)) (before operation)
, the HL register value after the operation is
HL register value = 095D (H) (after operation)
becomes.
therefore,
H register value = 09 (H) (0000/1001 (B))
L register value = 5D (H) (0101/1101 (B))
becomes.

On the other hand, the upper limit of the difference number counter is "2400 (D)". Here, if "2400 (D)" is expressed in binary,
"0000/1001/0110/0000 (B)"
becomes.
Since the upper limit value of the difference counter is "2400 (D)", when a value exceeding "2400 (D)" is stored in the difference counter, it is determined that the condition for ending the advantageous section is satisfied, and the difference number is The counter is cleared (step S435 in FIGS. 51 and 52).
At the end of the current game, the difference counter value reached "2400 (D)", but since it did not exceed "2400 (D)", it was determined that the conditions for ending the advantageous interval were not satisfied, and the next game was played. Suppose you migrate. In the next game, the difference number increases most when the number of bets is "1" and the number of payouts is "15 (D)", so the difference number in the game is "14 (D)". becomes.
Therefore, the difference number counter value in this case is "2414 (D)".
Here, if "2414 (D)" is expressed in binary,
"0000/1001/0110/1110 (B)"
becomes.

Also, when the difference counter value reaches "2414 (D)", it exceeds "2400 (D)", so the difference counter is cleared in the game and becomes "0 (D)".
As described above, the maximum value that the difference number counter can take during the game is "2414 (D)", that is, "0000/1001/0110/1110 (B)".

Therefore, when the HL register value is "2414 (D)",
H register value = 0000/1001 (B)
L register value = 0110/1110 (B)
, and the D7 bit (most significant bit) of the H register value is "0".
Therefore, the D7 bit of the H register value is always "0" when the HL register value, that is, the difference counter value is in the range of "0(D)" to "2414(D)".

As described above, the D7 bit (most significant bit) of the H register value is always "0" and never becomes "1", except for the case of carry-down.
In order for the D7 bit of the H register value to become "1", the difference number counter value must be "32768 (D)". The advantageous section will not continue until

On the other hand, as mentioned above,
Bet number data = 3 (H)
Payout number data = 0 (H)
HL register value (difference number counter) = 0000 (H) (before operation)
, the HL register value after the operation is "FFFD(H)".
Here, "FFFD(H)" is
"1111/1111/1111/1101 (B)"
is.

therefore,
H register value = 1111/1111 (B)
L register value = 1111/1101 (B)
, and the D7 bit of the H register value becomes "1".
Similarly, before the operation,
Bet number data = 3 (H)
Payout number data = 0 (H)
HL register value (difference number counter) = 0002 (H)
, the HL register value becomes "FFFF(H)" when the difference number counter is updated.

Here, "FFFF(H)" is
"1111/1111/1111/1111 (B)"
is.
therefore,
H register value = 1111/1111 (B)
L register value = 1111/1111 (B)
, and the D7 bit of the H register value becomes "1".
Thus, when a carry occurs, the D7 bit (most significant bit) of the H register value becomes "1".

From the above, as a result of updating the difference number counter, the D7 bit of the H register value is "0" when there is no carry-down, and the D7 bit of the H register value is "0" when there is a carry-down. 1”.
Therefore, when determining whether or not the operation result is less than "0" in step S441 of FIG. 52, it is determined whether or not the D7 bit of the H register value is "1". When the D7 bit of the H register value is "1", it is determined that the operation result is less than "0".
In this way, it is possible to determine whether the operation result is "0" without determining whether the carry flag is "1" as a result of the operation.
Since it is determined whether or not the operation result is "0" without using the carry flag, there is no problem even if the number of payouts is added after subtracting the number of bets from the value of the difference number counter.

Further, as is clear from the above, even if the maximum value "2414 (D)" that the difference number counter can take is not limited to the D7 bit (most significant bit) of the H register value, the D6 bit, D5 bit, and The D4 bit is also "0".
On the other hand, when a carry-down occurs in the difference counter value, not only the D7 bit (most significant bit) of the H register value, but also the D6, D5 and D4 bits become "1".

Therefore, in step S441 in FIG. 52, instead of determining whether the D7 bit of the H register value is "1", it may be determined whether the D6 bit is "1". , may determine whether the D5 bit is "1", and may determine whether the D4 bit is "1". In either case, when the bit is "1", the operation result is less than "0", and when it is not "1", the operation result is not less than "0".
As is clear from the above, also in example 1 (step S431) of FIG. It is also possible to determine whether there is

51 and 52, the advantageous section clear counter is updated (step S422), the difference number counter is updated (steps S428 and S430), and whether or not the advantageous section clear counter is "0" is determined. Determination (step S424), determination of whether or not the difference number counter has exceeded the upper limit (step S434), and initialization of information on the advantageous section (step S435) are performed regardless of the number of bets (prescribed number) in this game. , is executed. Therefore, even if the advantageous section clear counter becomes "0" or the difference counter exceeds the upper limit as a result of playing the game with the number of bets (prescribed number) "2", the advantageous section ends. do.

FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing interrupt processing (I_INTR) by the main control board 50 (main CPU 55). As described above, the main control board 50 performs the interrupt processing shown in FIG. 53 at a 2.235 ms cycle (but not limited to this time cycle) in parallel with the main processing.
After shifting to interrupt processing in step S451, in step S452, as initial processing, register value saving and duplicate interrupt prohibition processing are performed. Here, since the registers of the main CPU 55 used in the main processing are used in the interrupt processing, the current register values are saved in the stack area of the RWM 53 . Furthermore, the interrupt disable flag is turned on so that the next interrupt processing is not started during the interrupt processing. This is because, for example, an execution request for interrupt processing may be made during execution of power-off processing.

In the next step S453, power-off processing (I_POWER_DOWN) is executed. This process is a process shown in FIG. 54, which will be described later, and is a process of detecting whether or not a power-off detection signal has been input.
In the next step S454, the interrupt counter value is updated. Note that the interrupt counter value is stored in a predetermined area (not shown in FIG. 35) of the RWM 53. FIG.
In the next step S455, timer measurement is performed. This process is a process of subtracting the time set in the main process. Specifically, for example, whether or not the minimum game time (4.1 seconds) has passed can be mentioned.

Next, the process proceeds to step S456 to perform LED display control (I_LED_OUT). This process is a process shown in FIG. 55, which will be described later, and is a process of lighting LEDs (digits 1 to 5) according to the state of the slot machine 10. FIG.
Errors that occur in the slot machine 10 include non-recoverable errors and recoverable errors. In the case of non-recoverable errors, an error display is output by the main processing (for example, step S304 in FIG. 41), but the error is recoverable. An error is displayed by this LED display control every time an interrupt is processed.

Next, in step S457, the input port 51 is read. As a result, whether or not the bed switch 40, start switch 41, stop switch 42, etc. have been operated, switch signals, and input signals from various sensors are read, and data based on the input port 51 (level data, rise data, trailing edge data) is generated and stored in a predetermined area of the RWM 53 (not shown in FIG. 35).

In the next step S458, it is determined whether or not the set value is within the normal range. Here, the set value data stored at the address "F000(H)" is read, and whether the range of the set value data is normal (whether the set value data is within the range of "0" to "5"). ) determines whether or not If it is determined that the set value data is within the normal range, the process proceeds to step S459, and if it is determined that the set value data is not within the normal range, the process proceeds to step S470 to shift to unrecoverable error processing. The error in this case is called an "E6" error in the present embodiment, and the fact that it is "E6" is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 .

In step S459, internal random number check processing is performed. In this embodiment, a flag is provided that turns on when an error occurs in the internal random numbers, and it is determined whether or not this flag is on.
Specifically, for example, when an abnormality in the clock frequency of the random number for the combination lottery (such as when the random number update is slow) is detected, the error flag is turned on.
Then, in step S460, it is determined whether or not an error has occurred in the internal random number (whether the error flag is ON). If it is determined that the error has occurred, the process advances to step S470 to shift to unrecoverable error processing. The content of the error display at this time is "E7".

In step S461, drive control of the reel 31 is performed. This control is performed for each reel 31 (left, middle, right), and includes stop, constant speed, acceleration, deceleration, start of deceleration, and standby depending on the operating state. When the drive control of the reel 31 is completed, the flow advances to step S462 to perform port output processing. In this process, the excitation output of the (reel) motor 32 and the hopper motor 36 and the excitation output of the blocker 45 are performed.

In the next step S463, an input error check process is executed. This processing is processing for determining whether or not there is an abnormality in various sensors.
In the next step S464, control command transmission processing is performed. This process is a process of transmitting the set control command (the untransmitted control command stored in the command buffer (not shown in FIG. 35) of the RWM 53 ) to the sub-control board 80 .
Specifically, when the control command is set in the command buffer, in the subsequent interrupt processing (if the command buffer is empty, in principle, the next interrupt processing after that time), this step S464 A control command is transmitted to the sub-control board 80 by .

In the next step S465, the data for the external signal stored in RWM 53 is stored in the register. Then, in the next step S466, an external signal is output from the output port 52 (output port 5 in FIG. 33) (the signal is transmitted to the external common terminal board 100).
Next, the flow advances to step S467 to perform ratio display preparation processing. This process is a process of updating a timer related to the ratio display of the management information display LED 74, outputting segment data, and the like.

In the next step S468, random number update processing is performed. Next, in step S469, the register value saved in step S452 is restored, and the next interrupt is permitted. Specifically, the register data stored at the start of interrupt processing is restored, and the interrupt prohibition flag is turned off so that the next interrupt processing can be started. Then, the processing according to this flow chart ends.

As shown in the above processing, the credit number display LED 76, the acquired number display LED 78, the status display LED 79 (79a to 79f), the set value display LED 73, and the management information display LED 74 are turned on/off by the interrupt processing every 2.235ms. controlled.
Furthermore, when a control command that has not been transmitted to the sub-control board 80 is stored in the command buffer for each interrupt process, the transmission process is performed.

Note that interrupt processing is not performed during unrecoverable error processing (interrupt processing is interrupted until normal recovery is performed).
An unrecoverable error is a serious error that cannot normally occur, and processing based on abnormal data (data update of the RWM 53 based on data from the input port, transmission of control commands to the sub-control board 80, etc.) is executed. In order to prevent this, the interrupt itself is prohibited.
If an unrecoverable error occurs and an unsent command is stored in the control command buffer, the command is not sent to the sub-control board 80 . This is because the control command stored in the buffer may not be correct.

FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing power-off processing (I_POWER_DOWN) in step S453 of FIG.
In step S481, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the power-off detection signal was turned on in the previous interrupt process. Here, a voltage monitoring device (power failure detection circuit; not shown) provided on the main control board 50 detects a predetermined input voltage when the voltage drops below a predetermined value (V1 or less in the example of FIG. 3). Since a power-off detection signal is input to a predetermined bit of the port 51, it is detected whether or not the signal has been input. Furthermore, when the power-off detection signal is turned on, it is stored at a predetermined address of the RWM 53 .
When it is determined that the power-off detection signal is on in the previous interrupt processing, the process proceeds to step S482, and when it is determined that it is not on, the processing according to this flow chart ends.

At step S482, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the power interruption detection signal is on in the current interrupt process. When it is determined that the switch is not on, the processing according to this flowchart is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is on, the process proceeds to step S483.
When both of the above steps S481 and S482 are determined to be "Yes" (when the power failure detection signal is input in succession for two interruptions), it is determined that the power failure has occurred, and the process proceeds to step S483 and subsequent steps.
In step S483, the outputs of all output ports 52 are turned off. By this process, for example, when the motor 32 is being driven (while the reel 31 is rotating) or the hopper motor 36 is being driven (while medals are being paid out), the driving is stopped.
Next, in step S484, a power-off processing completed flag is stored in the RWM53. This process is a process of storing in the RWM 53 data indicating that normal power-off processing has been executed.

In the next step S485, checksum data of the RWM 53 is calculated. This process calculates a checksum including the work area (RWM 53) used by the program, and the target program use area includes the program work area, unused area, stack area, and the like.
Then, in the next step S486, it is determined whether or not the calculation of the entire range of the checksum has been completed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the checksum calculation is completed, the process proceeds to step S487.

In step S487, the calculated checksum is stored in the RWM 53 at a predetermined address. Here, the data to be stored in the RWM 53 is 1-byte data (also called complement data) that becomes "0" when all the data in the program use area and the value stored in the predetermined address are added at the checksum of the RWM 53. ).
When executing the checksum of the RWM 53 at the start of the program, all the data in the program use area of the RWM 53 in the same range as above and the checksum data are added. If the checksum data thus calculated is "0", it is determined to be a normal value, and if not "0", it is determined to be an abnormal value.
Next, the process advances to step S488 to enter a reset wait state. When the voltage reaches a predetermined value, a reset signal is output from the voltage monitoring device (power-off detection circuit) provided on the main control board 50, so in step S488, the output of the reset signal is awaited.

FIG. 55 is a flow chart showing LED display control (I_LED_OUT) in step S456 in FIG.
First, in step S491, output ports 2 and 3 (see FIG. 33) are turned off. This process is a process of outputting "00000000 (B)" from the output ports 2 and 3. FIG. In the next step S492, output port 4 (see FIG. 33) is turned off. This process is also a process of outputting "00000000 (B)" from the output port 4 in the same manner as the above process.

In step S493, the LED display counter is updated. In this process, the bit "1" of the LED display counter is updated by right-shifting by one digit.
In the next step S494, it is determined whether or not the LED display counter is "0". If it is determined to be "0", the process proceeds to step S495, and if it is determined not to be "0", the process proceeds to step S496. .
In step S495, an LED display counter is initialized. Here, processing is executed to change the LED display counter "00000000 (B)" to "00010000 (B)". Then, the process proceeds to step S496.
In step S496, the LED display counter and the LED display request flag stored in the RWM 53 are obtained. Here, the value of the LED display counter is stored in the D register, and the value of the LED display request flag is stored in the E register.

Next, in step S497, error number display data, LED display data, and bet display data are acquired. Here, in the storage area of the RWM 53, a storage area for storing error number display data when an error occurs and LED display data indicating ON/OFF of the game start display LED 79d to the replay display LED 79f among the status display LEDs 79 are stored. Storage areas and storage areas for storing bet display data indicating ON/OFF of (1 to 3) bet display LEDs 79a to 79c are provided.
Specifically, the LED display data is configured as follows.
D0: Not used D1: Not used D2: Not used D3: "1" when game can be started, "0" when game cannot be started
D4: "1" when medals can be inserted, "0" when medals cannot be inserted
D5: "1" when replay winning, "0" when replay not winning
D6: Not used D7: Not used Bits D3 to D5 of the LED display data correspond to segments D to F of the status display LED 79 shown in FIG.

Also, the bet display data is configured as follows.
When 0 bet: 00000000
When betting 1 card: 00000001
When 2 cards are bet: 00000011
When 3 cards are bet: 00000111
Bits D0 to D2 of the bet display data correspond to segments A to C of the status display LED 79 shown in FIG.
Then, in step S497, the error number display data is read and stored in the B register. Also, the LED display data is read and stored in the A register, and the bet display data is read and stored in the C register.

In the next step S498, the A register value (LED display data) and the C register value (BET display data) are ORed (synthesized), and the result of the calculation is set as segment data for the output port 3. FIG. An OR operation of the A register value (LED display data) and the C register value (BET display data) provides data indicating whether the state display LED 79 is on or off. When there is a request to display digit 5 ("Yes" in step S516), this segment data is output from output port 3. FIG.
Next, in step S499, the register for setting the segment data for output port 4 is cleared.

In the next step S500, the value obtained by ANDing the LED display counter value (D register value) and the LED display request flag value (E register value) is stored in the D register, and whether or not the value is "0" is determined. to judge. When it is judged to be "0", it is judged that there is no display request, and the process proceeds to step S516. On the other hand, if it is determined not to be "0", it is determined that there is a display request, and the process proceeds to step S501.

In step S501, the LED segment table 2 is set. Here, the LED segment table of the present embodiment includes an LED segment table 1 that defines segment data when displaying an error number, and an LED segment table other than the error number (credit amount, payout amount, setting value, display during setting change, pressing order An LED segment table 2 defining segment data for displaying the instruction information and the prescribed number of instructions) is provided and stored in the ROM 54 in the usable area. Then, in step S501, the top address of the LED segment table 2 is read and the value is stored in the HL register.

Here, offsets and segment data are defined as follows in the LED segment table 2 set in step S501.
Offset "0": Segment data to display "0" Offset "1": Segment data to display "1" Offset "2": Segment data to display "2" Offset "3": Display "3" Segment data Offset "4": Segment data that displays "4" Offset "5": Segment data that displays "5" Offset "6": Segment data that displays "6" Offset "7": Segment data that displays "7" Segment data to display Offset "8": Segment data to display "8" Offset "9": Segment data to display "9" Offset "A": Segment data to display "=" Offset "B": "A" segment data to display

For example, first, if payout number data "10 (H)" is stored in the acquisition number data, the offset of the upper digits of the number of payout data is "1" and the offset of the lower digits is "0". becomes. As a result, when the digit 3a is illuminated, segment data indicating "1" is obtained, and when digit 4a is illuminated, segment data indicating "0" is obtained.
Secondly, for example, when setting change display data "88(H)" is stored in the acquired number data, the offset of the upper digits of the setting change display data is "8", and the lower digits are offset. offset is "8". As a result, when the digit 3a lights up, the segment data displaying "8" is obtained, and when the digit 4a lights up, the segment data displaying "8" is obtained.

Furthermore, thirdly, for example, when the push order instruction number "A1(H)" is stored in the acquisition number data, the offset of the upper digit of the push order instruction number is "A", and the offset of the lower digit is "A". The offset is "1". As a result, when the digit 3a is illuminated, segment data indicating "=" is obtained, and when the digit 4a is illuminated, segment data indicating "1" is obtained.
Further, fourthly, for example, when the specified specified number display data "0B(H)" is stored in the acquired number data, the offset of the upper digit is "0" and the offset of the lower digit is "B". becomes. As a result, when the digit 3a is illuminated, segment data indicating "0" is obtained, and when digit 4a is illuminated, segment data indicating "A" is obtained.

Next, the process proceeds to step S502, and first, set value data is obtained. Here, the set value data stored at the address "F000(H)" is read and stored in the A register. Next, "1" is added to the A register value to generate set value display data, which is stored in the A register. This setting value display data becomes an offset value when displaying the setting value.
As will be described later, the segment data stored in the address (of the LED segment table 1 or 2) of the value obtained by adding the offset value to the head address value of the LED segment table 1 or 2 is acquired.
Next, the process advances to step S503 to determine whether or not there is a request to display the set values. Here, when the D register value is "00010000 (B)" and the setting is being changed or confirmed, it is determined that there is a setting value display request. When it is determined that there is a request to display the set value, the process proceeds to step S514, and when it is determined that there is no request to display the setting value, the process proceeds to step S504.

In step S504, credit amount data is acquired and stored in the A register. In the next step S505, the upper digit offset is obtained. This process executes an operation of dividing the credit amount data (A register value) obtained in step S504 by "10 (D)", stores the quotient value in the A register, and stores the remainder value in the E register. processing.
In the next step S506, it is determined whether or not there is a request to display the upper digits of the credit amount. This processing determines whether or not the D0 bit (the bit corresponding to digit 1a) of the D register value is "1", and determines "Yes" when it is "1". When it is determined that there is a request to display the upper digits of the credit amount, the process proceeds to step S514, and when it is determined that there is no display request, the process proceeds to step S507.

In step S507, it is determined whether or not there is a request to display the lower digits of the credit amount. This process determines whether or not the D1 bit (the bit corresponding to digit 2a) of the D register value is "1", and if it is "1", determines "Yes" and proceeds to step S513. . On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no request to display the lower digits of the credit amount, the process proceeds to step S508.

In step S508, the acquisition number data is read and stored in the A register. Here, payout number data is stored in the winning number data at the timing when medals are paid out based on the winning of a minor winning combination. Further, at the timing during setting change, display data during setting change "88 (H)" is stored. Furthermore, when it is time to instruct the specified number, the specified specified number display data "0B(H)" is stored. Further, at the timing when the instruction function is activated (the push order is notified), the push order instruction number "=x (x=one of 1 to 6)" is stored. Any of these data is acquired and stored in the A register.

In the next step S509, it is determined whether or not it corresponds to the error display. In this process, the B register value (error number display data stored in step S497) is read, and it is determined whether or not it is "0". If it is "0", it is determined that an error is not being displayed, and the process proceeds to step S511.
In step S510, the LED segment table 1 for error display is set. A description of the specific configuration of the LED segment table 1 will be omitted. In step S510, a process of storing the top address of the LED segment table 1 in the HL register is executed. Therefore, in this case, the head address of the LED segment table 1 is set (stored in the HL register) instead of the head address of the LED segment table 2 set in step S501.

In the next step S511, an offset for upper digits is obtained. In this process, when an error is displayed (when the B register value is not "0"), an operation is performed to divide the B register value by "10 (D)", the quotient is stored in the A register, and the remainder is is stored in the E register. On the other hand, when the error is not displayed (when the B register value is "0"), the A register value (payout number data, setting change display data, prescribed number display data, or push order instruction number) is set to "10 ( D)" and store the quotient in the A register and the remainder in the E register.

In the next step S512, it is determined whether or not there is a request to display the upper digits of the acquisition number display LED78. In this process, it is determined whether or not the D2 bit (the bit corresponding to digit 3a) of the D register value is "1", and if it is "1", it is determined that there is a display request. When it is determined that there is a display request, the process proceeds to step S514, and when it is determined that there is no display request, the process proceeds to step S513.

Proceeding to step S513, the offset for the lower digits is acquired. This process is a process of storing the data stored in the E register in the A register. That is, the upper digit value and the lower digit value are exchanged between the A register and the E register. Then, the process proceeds to step S514.
In step S514, segment data is acquired. This process adds the data stored in the HL register (leading address of LED segment table 1 or 2) and the data (offset value) stored in the A register, and corresponds to the address after the addition (LED segment This is the process of storing the segment data of table 1 or 2) in the C register.

In the next step S515, segment data for output port 4 is set. The data set here is segment data for displaying the set value (digit 5b). Since the digits 1b to 4b are lit in the ratio display process (step S522) described later, the segment data of the digits 1b to 4b are not set here.
Therefore, at step S515, when "Yes" (setting value display request is present) at step S503, and segment data for setting value display is acquired at step S514 and stored in the C register, the C register value is output. Set as segment data for port 4.

Next, in step S516, it is determined whether or not there is a request to display digit 5. Here, the display request for digit 5 is made when the D register value is "00010000 (B)". When it is determined that there is a request to display digit 5, the process proceeds to step S520, and when it is determined that there is no request to display digit 5, the process proceeds to step S517.

In step S517, segment data for output port 3 is set. Here, the C register value stored in step S514 is set as segment data for output port 3. FIG. When "Yes" is determined in step S516 (when there is a request to display digit 5), the data set in step S498 becomes the segment data for output port 3. FIG.

In the next step S518, the data for the advantageous section display LED 77 is set. Here, the value of the advantageous section display LED flag is obtained, and it is determined whether or not the value is "0". If the value of the LED flag indicating the advantageous section is not "0", it is determined whether or not the digit to be lit in this interrupt process is the digit 4a. When the D3 bit of the D register value is "1", it is determined that it is time to light the digit 4a. In this case, the segment data set in step S517 and the data obtained by performing the OR operation of "10000000" are set as the segment data for output port 3. FIG. As a result, data is set that enables the segment P (advantageous section display LED 77) of the digit 4a to light up.

Next, in step S519, the segment data for output port 4 set in step S515 is cleared. This is to prevent the digit 5b (set value display LED 73) from lighting when there is no request to display digit 5 ("No" in step S516).
Then, in step S520, the digit signal is output from the output port 2, and the segment signal is output from the output port 3. Here, the D register value is set as digit data for output port 2 and output from output port 2 .
The data of the segment signal output from the output port 3 is the data set in step S498 (when digit 5 lights up) or the data set in step S517 (when digits 1 to 4 light up).

Next, in step S521, the segment signal is output from the output port 4. FIG. The segment signal data output from the output port 4 is the segment data set in step S515 (when setting value display is requested) or the data cleared in step S519 (when setting value display is not requested). In other words, when the segment data for output port 4 is cleared in step S519, output port 4 outputs "00000000 (B)".
Next, the process advances to step S522 to shift to ratio display processing (processing for lighting the management information display LED 74). Note that, in the present embodiment, description of the ratio display process is omitted. Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

Next, the relationship between the advantageous interval display LED 77 and power interruption (when power interruption occurs while the advantageous interval indication LED 77 is lit) will be described.
In the interrupt process, when power interruption is detected in FIG. 54, the process proceeds to step S483 and subsequent steps. In this case, the data stored in the RWM 53 is retained even after the power interruption.
After the power is turned on, in the program start process (M_PRG_START) of FIG. 38, if the setting key switch is off, it is judged "No" in step S208. The process proceeds to power-off recovery processing (M_POWER_ON; FIG. 40) in S213.

In the power-off restoration process of FIG. 40, the initialization range of the RWM 53 is set in step S253, and this range is the unused area of the RWM 53, as described above. Therefore, in FIG. 35, the advantageous section display LED flag at address "F062(H)" is not subject to initialization. The same applies to the LED display counter at address "F051(H)".

In the power-off restoration process of FIG. 40, when the initialization of the RWM 53 is completed, an interrupt is activated in step S262. Therefore, after step S262, the interrupt processing of FIG. 53 is executed at intervals of 2.235 ms. When the interrupt process is executed, the LED display counter value is read in step S496 during the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) of FIG. Further, when "No" is determined in step S512, it is when there is a request to display the digit 4a. In this case, when it is not an error display ("No" in step S509) and the advantageous section display LED flag is "1", in step S518, the D7 bit of the segment data is set to "1", and the segment Data is output (step S520). As a result, the advantageous section display LED 77 lights up.
As described above, when the power is turned off while the advantageous interval display LED 77 is lit, the advantageous interval indication LED 77 is lit again when interrupt processing is executed in the power failure recovery processing.

On the other hand, when the power is turned on with the setting key switch turned on after the power is turned off, the following occurs.
In the program start process of FIG. 38, when the setting key switch is on, the result of step S208 is "Yes", and the process proceeds to the setting change process (M_RANK_SET; FIG. 39) of step S212.
In FIG. 39, the initialization range of the RWM 53 is specified in step S221, and this initialization range also includes the advantageous section display LED flag of the address "F062(H)". When it is determined that the power-off recovery is not normal and the process proceeds to step S223, the entire range of the RWM 53 (including the address "F062(H)") is initialized.

Therefore, by the initialization of the advantageous section display LED flag, even if "1" indicating lighting has been stored, it becomes "0" indicating lighting off.
After that, in step S233 of FIG. 39, an interrupt is activated. When the interrupt is activated, the current setting value is displayed on the setting value display LED 73 when the lighting timing of the setting value display LED 73 comes in the LED display control (FIG. 55). Then, in step S240 in FIG. 39, the setting value can be changed (the setting value can be changed by turning on the setting change switch).

Also, in FIG. 39, when the interrupt process is activated in step S233 and the LED display control (FIG. 55) is executed, even when the lighting timing of the digit 4a comes, the value of the advantageous section display LED flag is already " 0”, the advantageous section display LED 77 remains off.
As described above, when the power is turned on with the setting key switch turned on and the setting change process is started, the advantageous section display LED 77 does not light up. Further, even if the setting change process is ended and the main process is started, the advantageous section display LED 77 remains off.

Also, in the main processing of FIG. 41, if the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit and power is cut off during the loop from step S286 to step S289, that is, during rotation of the reel 31, the following will occur. .
When the interruption of the power supply is detected in the interrupt process, all the output ports 52 are turned off in step S483 in FIG. As a result, the rotating reel 31 (motor 32) also stops due to the power cutoff.

Next, when the power is supplied, the power restoration process (M_POWER_ON) of FIG. 40 described above is performed, and the state before the power interruption is restored. As a result, the drive signal for the motor 32 is output from the output port 52 in the same manner as before the power was turned off. Here, the drive signal for the motor 32 before power-off is a signal for maintaining a constant speed state. In this embodiment, when the motor 32 (reel 31) is in a constant speed state, one interrupt (2.235 ms) is assumed to drive one step. However, even if a constant-speed drive signal is output from the beginning to the motor 32 after it has stopped driving, the motor 32 cannot be driven because the rotational torque is weak.

Therefore, since the reel 31 does not rotate, the index sensor 33 does not detect the index of the reel 31 (the index is not turned off). When it is determined that the index is not detected for a certain period of time, it is determined that the reel 31 is not rotating, and the motor 32 is reaccelerated (restarted). The acceleration of the motor 32 is, for example, first driven by 1 step with 20 interrupts (20×2.235=44.7 ms), then driven by 1 step with 16 interrupts, then driven by 1 step with 12 interrupts, and so on. This is a method in which one step is driven in a gradually decreasing time. The acceleration state requires a time of about 100 steps, for example. Thereby, rotation of the reel 31 can be started.

On the other hand, when the power is turned on and an interrupt is activated in step S262 in FIG. 40, digits 1a to 5a are dynamically lit based on the value of the LED display counter. When the value for lighting 3a (“00000100 (B)” in FIG. 34) is reached, the LED display counter becomes “00001000 (B)” after 4 interrupts from that point, and the digit 4a (advantage zone display LED 77) lights up. The time has come.

On the other hand, the power is turned off before the index of the reel 31 is detected by the reel sensor 33 (for example, when the reel sensor 33 detects the index of the reel 31 in the remaining "1" to several steps), and after the power is turned on. Even if it is determined that the index of the reel 31 is not detected by the reel sensor 33 and acceleration is performed again, as described above, at least several tens of interrupts are required before the reel 31 (motor 32) reaches the constant speed state. need.
Therefore, after the power is turned on, the reel 31 enters the constant speed state after the advantageous section display LED 77 lights up. In other words, when the operation of the stop switch 42 can be accepted, the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit.

Further, when the reel 31 stops at a position where the index of the reel 31 is relatively distant from the reel sensor 33, several to several tens of interrupts are required until it is determined that the reel sensor 33 does not detect the index of the reel 31 after the interrupt activation. requires. Therefore, in this case, the advantageous section display LED 77 lights up before the motor 32 is accelerated again.
As described above, the advantageous section display LED 77 is set to light up until the reel 31 rotates again and returns to the constant speed state after the power is turned off.

Also, in the main process of FIG. 41, if the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit and the power is cut off while the hopper motor 36 is being driven in the medal payout process for winning a prize in step S294, the following will occur. . In addition, as described in the sixth embodiment, the hopper motor 36 is a DC motor.
49, in step S398, the hopper motor 36 is driven, and when the payout sensors 37a and 37b normally detect the movable piece 39a as shown in FIG. , S31 to S34), it is determined that one medal has been paid out normally. The hopper motor 36 continues to drive until it is determined that the medals corresponding to the number of payouts have been paid out.
During the payout of medals, if a power cutoff is detected in interrupt processing before all the medals are paid out, all the output ports 52 are turned off in step S483 in FIG. The drive signal is also turned off. As a result, the medal payout process is interrupted.

Next, when the power is supplied, the power return process (M_POWER_ON) of FIG. 40 described above is performed, and then the main process (FIG. 41) of step S294 (the medal payout process for winning a prize) is returned to. As a result, the drive signal for the hopper motor 36 is output from the output port 52 in the same manner as before the power was turned off. It should be noted that, as shown in FIG. 41, the main process does not proceed until the payout process due to winning in step S294 is completed.
On the other hand, when the power is restored from the power-off, the lighting timing of the digit 4a (advantageous section display LED 77) arrives within 4 interrupts, as described above.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 8, the time required to pay out one medal is approximately 100 ms, although it cannot be generalized. Therefore, the advantageous section display LED 77 lights up before the medal payout process due to winning is resumed after the power is turned off and the remaining medals are paid out. In other words, after the power is turned off, the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit at the time when the medal payout process due to winning is completed.

Further, as a method of preventing the advantageous section display LED 77 from momentarily turning off when there is an instantaneous power interruption, the following method can be used.
As shown in FIG. 54, when a power failure is detected, the outputs of all ports 52 are turned off in step S483. is not output. As a result, the advantageous section display LED 77, which is the segment P of the digit 4a, is extinguished.

Therefore, the process proceeds to step S488 in FIG. 54, after waiting for reset, when the advantageous section display LED flag is "1", an ON signal of D3 bit (digit 4a) is output from the output port 2, and For example, an ON signal of D7 bit (segment P) is output from the output port 3 . In FIG. 54, the process proceeds to step S488, and interrupt processing does not occur in the loop processing after waiting for reset. As a result, even if an instantaneous interruption occurs, the advantageous section display LED 77 can be prevented from turning off visually.
Alternatively, in the process of step S483 in FIG. 54, output ports 2 and 3 may not be turned off, but other output ports may be turned off. Even with this control, it is possible to prevent the advantageous section display LED 77 from turning off due to a momentary interruption.

In this embodiment, the segment P of the digit 4a is set as the advantageous section display LED 77, and the advantageous section display LED 77 is illuminated by dynamic lighting. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the advantageous section display LEDs 77 may be composed of separate and independent LEDs. If the advantageous section display LED 77 is statically lit and the output port corresponding to the advantageous section display LED 77 is not turned off even when the power interruption is detected, the advantageous section display LED 77 is prevented from being extinguished at the time of momentary interruption. can do.

Next, the differential number display on the sub-control board 80 side will be described. The sub-control board 80 displays the difference number of sheets on the image display device 23 during AT. Therefore, in this embodiment, the RWM 83 of the sub-control board 80 is provided with the following storage areas.
has:
1) AT flag 2) Sub difference number counter 3) Pullback flag 4) Pullback game number counter

The main control board 50 transmits a command corresponding to ON/OFF of the AT flag to the sub control board 80 every game. It should be noted that the command may be transmitted only when the AT flag on the main control board 50 side turns from off to on or from on to off.
The sub-control board 80 receives information on/off of the AT flag from the main control board 50 and turns on/off the AT flag provided on the sub-control board 80 side. Further, the sub-control board 80 stores that the AT flag on the sub-control board 80 side has turned from off to on (AT flag rise data) and from on to off (AT flag fall data). .

Further, as described above, the main control board 50 updates the AT game number counter every game during the AT, and when the AT game number counter becomes "0", the AT ends. Furthermore, when the difference counter reaches "2400 (D)" or when the advantageous section clear counter reaches "0", the AT (and the advantageous section) is ended.
Since the main control board 50 executes the initialization processing of the difference counter when ending the AT and advantageous section, the difference counter becomes "0" when the next game shifts to the normal section.

On the other hand, the sub-control board 80 has a sub-difference number counter for counting the difference number during AT. The sub-difference number counter is "0" at the start of AT (except when AT is won during a withdrawal period described later and AT is started), and after that, the difference number is updated every game. It should be noted that, unlike the difference number counter of the main control board 50, when a digit is digitized, the digit is not corrected to "0", and the digit is left as it is.

For example, when starting AT,
1st game: Non-winning role (difference number "-3")
Second game: Non-winning role (difference number "-3")
3rd game: winning the push order bell (difference number "+5")
4th game: Non-winning role (difference number "-3")
5th game: winning the push order bell (difference number "+5")
Suppose that
In this case, the sub-difference number counter (2-byte counter)
1st game: 0 (H) - 3 (H) = FFFD (H)
Second game: FFFD (H) - 3 (H) = FFFA (H)
3rd game: FFFA (H) + 5 (H) = FFFF (H)
4th game: FFFF (H) - 3 (H) = FFFC (H)
5th game: FFFC (H) + 5 (H) = 0001 (H)
and will be updated.

When the replay is won, the sub-difference number counter is not updated in the same way as the difference number counter. It should be noted that, without being limited to this, the number of payouts may be set to "0" in the game at the time of winning a replay, and the number of bets in the next game (during replaying) may be set to "0" to calculate the sub-difference number.
Furthermore, as described above, the difference number counter of the main control board 50 executes the initialization process when the advantageous section ends. Even if it ends, there is a case where the initialization processing is not immediately executed and the count is not stopped. The sub-control board 80 turns on (“1”) the withdrawal flag when ending the AT and continuing the counting of the sub-difference number counter.

The sub control board 80 judges the sub difference number counter value at the end of AT, and when the sub difference number counter value is less than (or less than) a predetermined value (for example, "2000 (D)"), the sub difference number counter continue counting. On the other hand, when the sub-difference number counter value exceeds a predetermined value (or is equal to or greater than a predetermined value), the sub difference number counter is cleared. If the sub-difference number counter is close to the upper limit and the AT ends, and the AT is pulled back, the sub-difference number counter value may reach the upper limit immediately. , so as not to carry over the difference in the number of sheets to the next AT.

The pullback flag is a flag for determining whether or not the AT has been pulled back (whether or not it has been re-elected) within a predetermined number of games (“50” games in this embodiment) after the AT is finished.
At the end of AT, the pullback flag is turned on, and "50 (D)" is set in the pullback game number counter. The pullback game number counter is for counting the number of games after the end of the AT (during the pullback period). At the end of AT, "50 (D)" is set in the pull-back game number counter, and thereafter, if AT is not won, "1" is continued to be decremented every game. Then, when the pullback game number counter becomes "0", the AT pullback fails, the pullback flag is turned off, and the sub-difference number counter is cleared (initialized).
After the end of AT, the sub-control board 80 updates the sub-difference number counter when the pullback flag is on.

Also, during the pullback period (when the pullback flag is on), if you win a special role such as BB and execute a special game such as a BB game, during the special game, the pullback game number counter is subtracted (updated )do not.
On the other hand, when the AT is won before the pullback game number counter becomes "0", the pullback of the AT is successful, and in the subsequent AT, the number of sheets which inherited the difference number of the previous AT is displayed as an image.
for example,
The difference in the number of cards in the first AT: +1000 The difference in the number of cards between the end of the first AT and winning the second AT: -100 If the difference in the number of cards at the start of the second AT is "+900" An image is displayed.

Also, an upper limit value that can be counted by the sub-difference number counter is set. In this embodiment, it is set as follows.
1) Upper limit in AT: 2414 (D)
2) The upper limit value when the symbol combination corresponding to the special role is stopped during AT and the number of wins (expected difference number) in the special game related to the special role is "250 (D)": "2414 (D )−250(D)=2164(D)”
3) Upper limit during withdrawal period: 2000 (D)

As shown in 1) above, when the sub-difference number counter value exceeds "2414 (D)" during AT, the sub-difference number count is stopped and the sub difference number counter is cleared.
In this embodiment, the sub-difference number counter value and the difference number displayed on the image display device 23 are interlocked (matched). For example, when the sub-difference number counter reaches "1000 (D)" during AT, the image display device 23 displays an image such as "number of sheets obtained during AT: 1000".

As described above, when the difference counter of the main control board 50 exceeds "2400 (D)", the AT (and the advantageous section) is ended. Therefore, as described above, the maximum value that the difference number counter can take is "2414 (D)".
Therefore, the maximum countable value of the sub difference number counter on the sub control board 80 side is also set to "2414 (D)" in accordance with the difference number counter of the main control board 50 .
Since the maximum value of the sub-difference number counter is "2414 (D)", the maximum difference number of images displayed on the image display device 23 is "2414". As a result, it is possible to prevent the image display of an excessively large difference in the number of bets, and to prevent the image display that significantly arouses the gambling spirit.

Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 26 (ninth embodiment), when the number of cards that can be obtained in the BB game is 250, the BB is won during the AT, and the symbol combination corresponding to the BB is selected. When is stopped and displayed, the value of the sub-difference number counter at that time is determined. When the sub-difference number counter value exceeds the above-described "2164 (D)", it exceeds "2414 (D)" at the end of the BB game. Clear the number counter (above 2)).

In this case, the image display device 23 displays images such as "Congratulations" and "Congratulations" as images corresponding to the number of difference. In this way, instead of displaying "Congratulations" or the like from the start of the BB game, the sub-difference number counter is not cleared at the start of the BB game, and the sub-difference number counter is not cleared until it exceeds "2414 (D)". The counter may continue to count, and when it exceeds "2414 (D)", the sub-difference number counter may be cleared and an image such as "Congratulations" may be displayed.

Furthermore, there is a possibility that the difference number of sheets increases during the withdrawal period. For example, as a result of winning a special combination during the withdrawal period and completing the special game, the difference number counter value may increase.
In particular, if the specifications are such that AT is won when a specific BB is won, AT is shifted to after the BB game is finished. On the other hand, when the sub-difference number counter is near the upper limit at the end of the BB game, even if the difference number is taken over at AT after the end of the BB game, the upper limit is reached immediately. Therefore, when the sub difference number counter value exceeds "2000 (D)" during the withdrawal period, the sub difference number counter is cleared. For example, during the AT withdrawal period, if you win a BB with AT and complete the BB game, when the sub difference number counter value exceeds "2000 (D)" at the end of the final game of the BB game, Clear the sub difference number counter. As a result, the display of the difference number starts from "0" in the AT after the BB is finished.

In addition, as described above, even if the game shifts to the special game during the pullback period, the pullback game counter is not decremented during the special game. Then, when a special role is won during the pullback period, updating of the sub-difference number counter may be continued or interrupted during the special game. As an example of interrupting the update, for example, when winning the BB with AT when the sub-difference number counter value during the withdrawal period is "1000 (D)", the sub difference number counter value is set to "1000 (D)". to stop. Even if "250" coins are obtained in the subsequent BB game, the "250" cards are not added to the sub-difference number counter. Therefore, when shifting to AT after the BB game ends, the number of difference starts from "1000".

On the other hand, as an example of continuing to update the sub-difference number counter, for example, when the sub-difference number counter value during the pullback period is "1000 (D)", a BB with AT is won, and then in the BB game "250", the sub-difference number counter at the end of the BB game becomes "1250 (D)". Then, when the AT is shifted to after the BB game ends, the number of difference starts from "1250".
Further, in the case of continuing to update the sub-difference number counter, for example, when the sub-difference number counter value during the withdrawal period is "1800 (D)", the BB with AT is won, and "250" is reached in the subsequent BB game. When the number is obtained, the sub difference number counter at the end of the BB game becomes "2050 (D)" and exceeds "2000 (D)". Therefore, the sub difference number counter is cleared by the end of the BB game, and the display of the difference number starts from "0" in the AT after the BB game ends.

In addition, the sub-difference number counter may update the difference number of the game regardless of the number of bets. Update the number.
Here, the difference number counter of the main control board 50 is updated regardless of the number of bets in the game.
On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the condition for updating the sub-difference number counter is defined to be when the number of bets (specified number) is "3", and when the game is started with the number of bets (specified number) of "2". does not update the difference number in that game.

Next, sub-difference number counter management processing will be described using a flowchart.
56 and 57 are flowcharts showing sub-difference number counter management processing in the eleventh embodiment. FIG. 57 is a flowchart following FIG.
In step S531 of FIG. 56, the sub-control board 80 determines whether or not the AT flag is on (whether or not AT is currently being performed). When it is determined that the AT flag is on, the process proceeds to step S533, and when it is determined that the AT flag is not on, the process proceeds to step S532.

In step S532, the sub-control board 80 determines whether or not the pullback flag is on. When it is determined that the pullback flag is on, the process proceeds to step S533, and when it is determined that the pullback flag is not on, the processing according to this flowchart is terminated. That is, when the AT is not in progress and the withdrawal flag is off, the sub-difference number counter is not updated.

In the next step S533, the sub-control board 80 determines whether or not a bet command has been received from the main control board 50. When the start switch 41 is operated and the number of bets for the game is determined, the main control board 50 transmits a bet command capable of determining the number of bets for the game to the sub-control board 80 . When it is determined that this bet command has been received, the process proceeds to step S534.

In step S534, it is determined whether or not the number of bets (specified number) is "3" based on the received bet command. When it is determined that the number of bets is "3", the process proceeds to step S535, and when it is determined that the number of bets is not "3", the processing according to this flowchart is terminated. Thus, in the present embodiment, the sub difference number counter is updated only when the number of bets is "3". Therefore, even during the AT or pullback period, when the number of bets is other than "3", the sub-difference number counter is not updated in the game. As is clear from FIGS. 51 and 52, the difference number counter on the main control board 50 side is updated regardless of the number of bets (specified number) in the game.

When proceeding from step S534 to step S535, the sub-control board 80 subtracts the bet number (“3”) from the sub-difference number counter. Next, proceeding to step S536, the sub-control board 80 determines whether or not a payout command has been received. During the main processing (M_MAIN) of FIG. 41, after the display determination is performed in step S291, the main control board 50 transmits to the sub control board 80 a payout command capable of determining the number of payouts.
When it is determined in step S536 that the payout command has been received, the process proceeds to step S537, and the sub-control board 80 adds the payout number to the sub-difference number counter.
In the next step S538, the sub-control board 80 determines whether or not the AT flag is on. If it is determined that it is on, the process proceeds to step S539, and if it is determined that it is not on, the process proceeds to step S547 in FIG.

In step S539, it is determined whether or not the AT flag is turned on in the current game (whether or not the AT flag is turned on). When it is determined that the AT flag is turned on in the game this time, the process proceeds to step S540, and when it is determined that the AT flag is not turned on in the game this time (the rise of the AT flag is off), the process proceeds to step S543. Therefore, the process proceeds from step S539 to step S543 when it is AT from before the previous game.

In step S540, the sub-control board 80 determines whether or not the pullback flag is on. When it is determined that the pullback flag is on, the process proceeds to step S541, and when it is determined that the pullback flag is not on, the processing according to this flow chart ends. For example, when the AT flag is turned on in the current game (“Yes” at step S539) and the pullback flag is off (“No” at step S540, i.e. when it is not during the pullback period), the sub-difference number at this time Since the counter is "0", there is no need to update the sub-difference number-of-sheets counter, and the processing according to this flowchart is terminated.

When proceeding from step S540 to step S541, the sub-control board 80 turns off the pullback flag. At the next step S542, the sub-control board 80 clears the pullback game number counter. Here, if "Yes" in step S539 and "Yes" in step S540, it corresponds to the case where the AT is won during the pullback period. Therefore, in this case, the pullback flag is turned off and the pullback game number counter is cleared.
Next, proceeding to step S543, the sub-control board 80 determines whether or not the sub-difference number counter exceeds the upper limit "2414 (D)". When it is determined that the sub-difference number counter exceeds "2414 (D)", the process proceeds to step S546. Then, in step S546, the sub difference number counter is cleared. This may occur when the number of difference sheets increases during the withdrawal period after the end of AT and the sub-difference number counter exceeds "2414 (D)".

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S543 that the sub-difference number counter does not exceed "2414 (D)", the process proceeds to step S544, and the sub-control board 80 stops displaying the symbol combination corresponding to BB in the current game. or not. When the symbol combination corresponding to BB is stopped and displayed, the command is transmitted from the main control board 50 .
"Yes" in this step S544 is when the BB with AT is won during the withdrawal period. In this flow chart, it is assumed that the symbol combination corresponding to BB is stopped and displayed in the game in which BB is won.
When it is determined that the symbol combination corresponding to BB is stop-displayed, the process proceeds to step S545, and when it is determined that the symbol combination corresponding to BB is not stop-displayed, the processing according to this flow chart is terminated.

In step S545, the sub-control board 80 determines whether or not the sub-difference number counter exceeds "2164 (D)". When it is determined that the sub-difference number counter exceeds "2164 (D)", the process advances to step S546 to clear the sub-difference number counter as described above and terminate the processing according to this flowchart. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S545 that the sub-difference number counter does not exceed "2164 (D)" (while maintaining the sub-difference number counter value), the processing according to this flow chart ends.

As described above, when the BB game of this embodiment ends with a payout of more than 250 coins as shown in FIG. When exceeding, it will exceed "2414 (D)" (upper limit) by the final game of the BB game. Therefore, in the example of this flowchart, when the BB game is started (before the start), it is determined whether or not the sub difference number counter exceeds the upper limit value during the BB game. Before starting, the sub-difference number counter is cleared. Since the difference number displayed on the image display device 23 is based on the sub-difference number counter, in the BB game after the sub-difference number counter is cleared, the difference number itself is not displayed or the difference number is not displayed. For example, "Congratulations" or "Congratulations" is displayed instead of displaying the number of sheets.

At step S538, it is determined that the AT flag is not ON, and when proceeding to step S547 of FIG. , that is, whether or not the AT has ended in the game this time). When it is determined that the AT flag is turned off in the game this time, the process proceeds to step S548, and when it is determined that the AT flag is not turned off in the game this time (falling of the AT flag is off), the process proceeds to step S551. .

In step S548, the sub-control board 80 determines whether or not the sub-difference number counter is less than "2000 (D)". When it is determined that the sub-difference number counter is less than "2000 (D)", the process proceeds to step S549. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not less than "2000 (D)", the process proceeds to step S557.

At step S549, the sub-control board 80 turns on the pullback flag. Next, proceeding to step S550, the sub-control board 80 sets the initial value "50 (D)" to the pullback game number counter. Then, the processing according to this flow chart ends.
By the processing of steps S548 to S550 above, when the sub difference number counter is less than "2000 (D)" at the end of AT, the pullback flag is turned on, and the initial value of the number of pullback games is "50 (D)". to set. The reason why "50 (D)" is set as the initial value of the number of pullback games is that the AT pullback within 50 games is the AT consecutive chan (the condition for handing over the sub-difference number to the next AT). Therefore, the number of pullback games can be variously set such as "30 (D)", "100 (D)", etc., in addition to "50 (D)".
Also, when the sub-difference number counter is "2000 (D)" or more at the end of the AT, even if the AT is pulled back afterward, the sub-difference number counter may exceed the upper limit value during the AT after the pull-back. is high, so the pullback flag is not set in such a case.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S548 that the sub difference number counter is not less than "2000 (D)" and the process proceeds to step S557, the sub control board 80 clears the sub difference number counter. Then, the processing according to this flow chart ends. In other words, when the sub-difference number counter is greater than or equal to "2000 (D)" at the end of AT, the sub-difference number counter starts from the initial value "0" even if the AT is performed after that.

Further, when proceeding from step S547 to step S551, the sub-control board 80 determines whether or not the current game is in BB operation (BB game is in progress). 35 is transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub-control board 80. As shown in FIG.
When it is determined in step S551 that the BB is not in operation, the sub-control board 80 proceeds to step S552 and determines whether or not the pullback flag is ON. When it is determined that the pullback flag is on, the process proceeds to step S553, and when it is determined that the pullback flag is not on, the processing according to this flow chart ends.

In step S553, "1" is subtracted from the pullback game number counter. In other words, during the pullback period, when the BB is in operation (during the BB game), the pullback game number counter is not updated (decremented). In addition, the pullback game number counter may be subtracted even during the BB game during the pullback period.
In the next step S554, the sub-control board 80 determines whether or not the pullback game number counter has become "0". When it is determined that the pullback game number counter is not "0", the processing according to this flowchart is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the pullback game number counter is "0", the process proceeds to step S555.

At step S555, the pullback flag is turned off. In the next step S556, the pullback game number counter is cleared. When "Yes" in step S554, the pullback game number counter is "0", so the process of clearing the pullback game number counter in step S556 may be omitted. However, when it becomes "No" at step S560, which will be described later, the withdrawal game number counter is cleared via step S556.
Next, proceeding to step S557, the sub-control board 80 clears the sub-difference number counter. In this way, when the pullback flag is off and the pullback game number counter is "0" (cleared), the sub-difference number counter is cleared (set to "0"), and thereafter remains at "0" until the AT starts. maintain.

When it is determined in step S551 that the BB is in operation and the process proceeds to step S558, the sub-control board 80 determines whether or not the current game is the final game during the BB in operation (BB game). Whether or not the BB game is the final game may be determined on the side of the sub-control board 80 by calculating the number of payouts from the start of the BB game. You may decide based on the incoming command.
When it is determined that it is the final game of the BB game, the process proceeds to step S559, and when it is determined that it is not the final game, the processing according to this flow chart is terminated.

In step S559, the sub-control board 80 determines whether or not the pullback flag is on. When it is determined that the pullback flag is on, the process proceeds to step S560, and when it is determined that the pullback flag is not on, the processing according to this flow chart ends.
In step S560, the sub-control board 80 determines whether or not the sub-difference number counter is less than "2000 (D)". When it is determined that the sub-difference number counter is less than "2000 (D)", the process proceeds to step S561, and the pullback game number counter is reset to "50 (D)". Then, the processing according to this flow chart ends. As a result, the BB game is executed when the pullback flag is on, and when the sub difference number counter is less than "2000 (D)" in the final game of the BB game, the pullback period (50 games ) will be newly set. That is, when the number of pullback games is set to the initial value "50" after the end of AT, the BB game is executed during the pullback period, and the difference number counter is less than "2000 (D)" in the final game of the BB game. , the number of pullback games is reset to "50".

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S560 that the sub-difference number counter is not less than "2000 (D)", the process proceeds to step S555. After step S555, the pullback flag is turned off, the pullback game number counter is cleared, and the sub difference number counter is cleared. This ends the pullback period. Thus, in the final game of the BB game, the sub-difference number at that point in time is determined during the pull-back period, and when the sub-difference number is "2000 (D)" or more, the pull-back period is terminated. .

In the above sub difference number counter management, the sub difference number counter is updated at the timing of receiving the bet command. That is, the sub-difference number is updated before all the reels 31 are stopped. On the other hand, since the difference number counter is executed in the advantageous section counter management of the game end check process, the subtraction of the bet number is also executed after all the reels 31 are stopped.
Therefore, for the sub-difference number counter as well, after all the reels 31 are stopped, subtraction of the bet number and addition of the payout number may be executed in the same manner as the difference number counter.

Further, even if the difference number at the end of the game becomes negative (even if there is a carry-down), the sub-difference number-counter stores that value (a carry-down value). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the sub-difference number counter is negative at the end of the game (when a carry occurs) like the difference number counter, it may be corrected to "0".
Furthermore, even if the sub-difference number counter may become negative, the image display device 23 displays the difference number "0".

In this case, processing may be performed as follows.
The sub-difference number counter is a 2-byte counter as described above, and its upper limit value is "2414 (D)", that is, "096E (H)". Therefore, the value of the most significant digit is "0(H)". Therefore, by determining whether the value of the most significant digit is "0 (H)", it is possible to determine whether or not the digit has been digitized. Then, when it is determined that there is a digit drop (the value of the most significant digit is not "0 (H)"), the difference number displayed on the image display device 23 is set to "0".

In the examples of FIGS. 56 and 57, BB is taken as an example, but the invention is not limited to this, and a sub-bonus (AT that looks like a bonus (BB)) can be applied in the same way. A sub-bonus is one in which the number of games played, the number of payouts, or the number of difference is set as an end condition. In this case, in step S544, it is determined whether or not the sub-bonus symbol is stopped. Also, in step S551, it is determined whether or not the sub-bonus game is being played. Furthermore, in step S558, it is determined whether or not it is the final game of the sub-bonus game.

<Twelfth Embodiment>
Next, a twelfth embodiment will be described. The twelfth embodiment instructs a specified number (bet number) before starting a game when a predetermined condition is satisfied.
The display of the pressing order instruction information is the operation of the instruction function (processing related to the instruction function). Here, the "instruction function" is a device that facilitates winning. Therefore, the prescribed number of instructions is not the actuation of the instruction function (processing related to the instruction function). However, without being limited to this, the prescribed number of instructions may be defined as one of the processes related to the instruction function.

FIG. 58 is a diagram showing the role product condition device, the specified number for each RT, and the winning number in the twelfth embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 58(A), BB1 and BB2 are provided as the role item condition device (special role). When BB1 is won and the symbol combination corresponding to BB1 stops, the BB1 game is started. The BB1 game ends when more than 100 coins are paid out. After the BB1 game ends, it shifts to non-RT.
Also, when BB2 is won and the symbol combination corresponding to BB2 stops, the BB2 game is started. The BB2 game ends when 30 or more coins are paid out. After the BB2 game ends, it shifts to non-RT.

As shown in FIG. 58(B), RT includes non-RT, BB1 inside, BB2 inside, BB1 in operation, and BB2 in operation.
Non-RT continues until either BB1 or BB2 wins. If BB1 is won in non-RT, the game moves to inside BB1, and if BB2 is won, the game moves to inside BB2.
During the inside of BB1, it continues until the symbol combination corresponding to BB1 is stopped and displayed. When the symbol combination corresponding to BB1 stops inside BB1, the BB1 is in operation, that is, the BB1 game is entered. Similarly, during the inside of BB2, it continues until the symbol combination corresponding to BB2 is stopped and displayed. When the symbol combination corresponding to BB2 stops inside BB2, the BB2 is in operation, that is, the BB2 game is entered.
In addition, the special role which can carry over winning is restricted to one. Therefore, BB2 is not elected when it is inside BB1. Similarly, when BB2 is inside, BB1 is not won.

As shown in FIG. 58(B), the specified number is limited to "3" while BB1 is in operation and BB2 is in operation (when the role product is in operation). A game cannot be started with the number of bets "1" or "2".
On the other hand, the prescribed number for non-RT, inside BB1, inside BB2, which is when the role product is not activated, is "2" or "3". As a result, the game can be started if the prescribed number is either "2" or "3".
In FIG. 58(C), the internal lottery number indicates the number when the denominator is "65536". For example, the winning probability of winning number "1" (normal replay) in non-RT is "9000/65536". Also, the advantageous section lottery number indicates the number when the denominator is "16384". Therefore, when the advantageous section lottery number is '16384', it means that the advantageous section is won with a probability of '16384/16384'.
Also, as shown in FIG. 58(C), in non-RT, BB2 is selected by lottery with the specified number "2", but BB1 is not selected by lottery. Conversely, with the prescribed number of "3", BB1 is drawn, but BB2 is not drawn.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 58(C), when the specified number of non-RT is "3" or the specified number inside BB2 is "3", the lottery for the advantageous section is possible. In addition, in the lottery for the advantageous section, it is set so that the advantageous section is always won except when the winning combination is not won. Therefore, in the twelfth embodiment, it is possible to make the game section almost the advantageous section. In other words, the twelfth embodiment is the "7P" type specification described above.

In the twelfth embodiment, it is assumed that the game progresses inside the BB2 and with the prescribed number of "3". Then, an AT is drawn by lottery inside the BB2, and when the AT is won, the AT is executed. In addition, it is assumed that BB2, which has carried over winning, is not allowed to win.
For example, if you are currently non-RT, you need to move from non-RT to inside BB2 (win BB2 in non-RT). In order to win BB2 in non-RT, it is necessary to play the game with the prescribed number "2".
Therefore, if it is not RT at the present time, the game is played with the prescribed number of "2" to win the BB2, and the next game is shifted to the inside of the BB2. Furthermore, since the lottery for the advantageous section is received within the BB2 when the prescribed number is "3", the game proceeds with the prescribed number "3" inside the BB2.

Also, BB2, who has won with the specified number of "2", cannot stop and display the symbol combination unless the specified number is "2". Similarly, BB1 who wins with the prescribed number of "3" cannot stop and display the symbol combination on the active line unless the prescribed number is "3".
For this reason, when BB2 is won with the prescribed number of "2" in non-RT, and when the game is progressing with the prescribed number of "3" while shifting to the inside of BB2, even when the role is not won, BB2 The symbol combination corresponding to is never stopped on the active line.
As described above, in the twelfth embodiment, the symbol combination corresponding to the winning special role is stopped and the special game is started. In other words, it is for creating the inside of the BB.

As shown in FIG. 58(C), in non-RT, BB2 can be won with a probability of about "1/5", so it is possible to shift from non-RT to inside BB2 at an early stage.
Also, in the BB2, when winning a small winning combination or replay, the player wins in the advantageous section with a probability of 100%. Therefore, inside BB2, most of the game period is an advantageous section. Of course, it is also possible to set the winning probability of the advantageous section to less than 100%.

In addition, the instruction function can be activated (execution of processing related to the instruction function) only when the game is played with one prescribed number, particularly in the present embodiment, the prescribed number "3". Therefore, when the AT is won during the advantageous section in the BB2 and the AT is executed, when the game is started with the specified number "3" and the pushing order bell is won, the instruction function is activated. , the push order instruction information is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 . On the other hand, when the game is started with the specified number (bet number) "2" during AT, even if the winning order bell is won, the instruction function is not activated.

Further, as in the eleventh embodiment, even when a game is played with the specified number "2" during AT, the difference number counter is updated based on the number of bets and the number of payouts in the game, and Update the advantageous section clear counter. However, the AT game number counter (in the case of the difference number management type AT, the AT difference number counter) is not updated. On the other hand, when the game is played with the specified number "3" during AT, the difference number counter, the advantageous section clear counter, and the AT game number counter (in the case of the difference number management type AT, the AT difference number counter) Update on everything.
In addition, regardless of the specified number, as for RT, when the transition condition is satisfied (when the symbol combination satisfying the transition condition is stopped and displayed), the transition is always made. On the other hand, the main game state (usually, CZ, AT, etc.) may be set to be transitionable to any specified number, or the game may be played with one specified number (for example, "3"). It may be set to enable migration only when

In the inside of BB2, when the game is started with the prescribed number "2" due to the player's operation error, and the combination is not won in the game, the symbol combination corresponding to BB2, which carries over the winning, can be stopped and displayed. becomes. On the other hand, when the game is started with the prescribed number of "2" due to the player's operation error, and any combination is won in the game, the winning combination won in the game is given priority. The symbol combination corresponding to BB2 which has winning is not stopped and displayed. However, when the replay is won in the game, the next game will also be played with the number of bets "2", so the symbol combination corresponding to BB2 which has the win will be stopped and displayed in the next game as well. there is a possibility.

If the game is started with the specified number "2" in the AT inside BB2 and the symbol combination corresponding to BB2 is stopped and displayed, the BB2 game is started. Then, when the BB2 game ends, it shifts to non-RT (AT). In this non-RT mode, information corresponding to the prescribed number "2" is displayed on the obtained number display LED 78 to inform the player that the game should be played with the prescribed number "2" (instruction of the prescribed number). . This is because the game is played with the specified number "2", the BB2 wins, and the BB2 shifts to the inside of the BB2. Therefore, in AT and non-RT, the specified number "2" is instructed until BB2 is won.

As described above, when displaying information corresponding to the specified number "2" on the obtained number display LED 78, "0A" is displayed. In addition, the specified number "2" instruction is not limited to "0A", and may be any other display if not confused with the number of payouts, the setting change display "88", the error number, and the push order instruction information. may be For example, since the maximum number of medals to be displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 is "15", for example, "22" may be displayed as information corresponding to the specified number of "2".

Further, in this embodiment, the prescribed number is instructed only during AT, and the prescribed number is not instructed during non-AT. For example, after the BB2 game ends, when the game is shifted to non-RT, if it is not AT at that time, the specified number is not instructed. Therefore, in this case, it is necessary for the player to play the game with the specified number of "2" and shift to the inside of the BB2.
As shown in FIG. 58, in the case of a non-RT and non-advantageous section, if a game is played with the prescribed number of "3" and a small win or replay is won, the advantageous section is also won. Then, when it becomes a non-RT and advantageous section, the specified number "2" may be indicated (even if it is non-AT).
Furthermore, not limited to the above, when shifting to non-RT, the prescribed number "2" may be indicated regardless of AT/non-AT, advantageous section/non-advantageous section.

Also, in the non-RT mode, when the player has set the number of bets to "2", the specified number may not be indicated, and when the player has set the number of bets to "3", the specified number may be indicated. In the main processing of FIG. 41, the number of bets is determined in the medal management processing of step S276. (performs clear processing of winning number data), and when the current bet number is "3", instructs the prescribed number "2" (stores the instructed prescribed number display data as the winning number data). mentioned.

Further, when the BB2 game is ended and the game is shifted to non-RT, wait processing may be executed at the end of the final game of the BB2 game. During this wait process, the game cannot progress (progress of the main process shown in FIG. 41). For this reason, after the wait process is completed, the next game (non-RT) game start set process is performed, where the specified number is instructed.

In non-RT during AT, the instruction of the specified number "2" continues until BB2 is won. Therefore, there are cases where the game ends in one game, and there are cases where the game is played a plurality of times.
Also, as shown in FIG. 58(C), when a non-RT game is played with the prescribed number of "2", replays (normal replay, watermelon play, cherry replay) may be won. When winning the replay as a result of playing the game with the prescribed number of "2", it is optional whether or not to instruct the prescribed number of "2" in the next game. In non-RT and AT, until BB2 is won, regardless of whether or not the symbol combination corresponding to replay has stopped, the specified number "2" may be indicated before the game starts. Alternatively, when the symbol combination corresponding to the replay is stopped and displayed, the player cannot arbitrarily select the prescribed number (bet number) in the next game (replay), so the player should not instruct the prescribed number in that game. can be

This is the same when, for example, in non-RT and AT, as a result of playing a game with the prescribed number of "3", the symbol combination corresponding to the replay is stopped and displayed. In the next game (replay), the player cannot arbitrarily select the prescribed number (bet number), so in this case as well, the prescribed number may not be specified. Alternatively, even if the number of bets in the game cannot be selected, the prescribed number "2" may be indicated for the purpose of calling attention.
In non-RT and AT, the game is played with the specified number "2", winning BB2, and when the next game moves to inside BB2, after that, unless it moves to non-RT again, the specified number is indicated not performed.

In addition, the timing for instructing the prescribed number is after all the reels 31 have stopped and, if there is a payout based on the winning of a small win, after the payout process is completed, and the start switch 41 for the next game is operated. Before (for example, before betting on medals is possible (before acceptance of betting)). Therefore, after the payout based on the winning of the small win in the final game of the BB2 game, the specified number "2" is instructed before the next game (non-RT) starts. As shown in FIG. 42 (eleventh embodiment), in step S321 of the game start set process (MS_GAME_SET), the main control board 50 sets the specified number of instruction conditions when the game is non-RT and AT. determine that it satisfies

Then, when it is determined in step S321 in FIG. 42 that the specified number instruction condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S322, where "0B" is added to the acquisition number data as specified instruction number display data corresponding to the specified instruction number "2". (H)” is stored.
As a result, in the subsequent LED display control (FIG. 55), at the timing of lighting the digit 3a (higher digits of the acquired number display LED 78), the higher digits of the instruction specified number display data "0B (H)" are displayed in step S511. segment data indicating "0" is obtained based on the LED segment table 2 in step S514. By outputting this segment data from the output port 3 in step S520, "0" is displayed in the digit 3a (upper digit of the acquired number display LED 78).

Further, at the timing when the digit 4a (lower digits of the acquisition number display LED 78) is lit, the lower digit offset "B(H)" is acquired in step S513 from the prescribed specified number display data "0B(H)". In step S514, segment data for displaying "A" is acquired based on the LED segment table 2. FIG. By outputting this segment data from the output port 3 in step S520, "A" is displayed in the digit 4a (lower digit of the acquired number display LED 78).

In the main processing (M_MAIN) of FIG. 41, the game start set processing in step S272 is processing before a bet is possible and before the start switch 41 is operated. Before the switch 41 is operated, the prescribed number of instructions is displayed.
Further, as shown in FIG. 42, after the commanded specified number display data is stored as the acquired number data in step S322, the automatic bet number data is set in step S325. Therefore, when instructing the stipulated number in the next game after winning a replay, the stipulated number is instructed before automatic betting. As a result, the specified number can be quickly instructed to the player.
Further, in FIG. 41, when the operation of the start switch 41 is detected in step S278, the obtained number data (indicated specified number display data) is cleared in step S280. As a result, "00" is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78 in the interrupt processing after step S280.

Here, the information "0A" corresponding to the prescribed number of instructions "2" is displayed on the obtained number display LED 78, and when the game is played with the prescribed number "2", the instruction function is performed even during the AT. does not work. In other words, even when winning the push order bell in the game, the push order instruction information is not displayed on the winning number display LED 78 . This is because, in the present embodiment, the processing related to the pointing function is limited to when the prescribed number is "3". Therefore, when the start switch 41 is operated after the acquisition number display LED 78 displays the information "0A" corresponding to the prescribed number of instructions "2", the acquisition number display LED 78 is displayed at least until all the reels 31 are stopped. is "00".

On the other hand, in AT and non-RT, the information "0A" corresponding to the prescribed number of instructions "2" was displayed on the winning number display LED 78, but the game was played with the prescribed number "3" and the winning order bell was won. When it does, the push order instruction information (for example, "=1") is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 . This process is executed in step S284 in FIG. Therefore, the acquisition number display LED 78 in this case displays the information "0A" corresponding to the prescribed instruction number "2" before the start of the game, and when the start switch 41 is operated (with the prescribed number "3"), " 00" is displayed, and when the winning order bell is won, the pushing order instruction information (for example, "=1") is displayed.

Also, when the push order instruction information is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78, it is cleared at step S290 (after all reels are stopped) in FIG. Since the winning number data is cleared in step S280 after the start switch 41 is operated, the process of step S290 may be skipped in a game in which the pressing order instruction information is not displayed on the winning number display LED 78. FIG.
Then, when a small winning combination is won and the medal payout process due to the winning is executed in step S294, the winning number data is incremented by "1", and accordingly, the winning number display LED 78 displays the payout number. be.

Then, when the process proceeds to the game start setting process in step S272 of the next game, as described above, when the condition for instructing the specified number is satisfied, the acquisition number display LED 78 displays information corresponding to the specified specified number. When displaying the information corresponding to the prescribed number of instructions, the prescribed number of instructions display data is stored as the winning number data. Therefore, the acquisition number data may be cleared before storing the information corresponding to the prescribed number of instructions. For example, in FIG. 42, before step S311, the acquisition number data may be cleared.

In addition, in AT and non-RT, although the prescribed number "2" was instructed, it is ignored and the game is executed with the prescribed number "3", BB1 is elected, transitions to inside BB1, Furthermore, it is conceivable to execute a BB1 game.
In order to suppress such actions, for example, it is possible to not execute processing related to the instruction function within BB1. Further, the BB1 game is set such that the ball output rate is less than "1", and the medals cannot be increased in the BB1 game.
It should be noted that since it is up to the player to decide which stipulated number of games to play, even if the stipulated number of "3" is played in a game in which the prescribed number of "2" is indicated for AT and non-RT, the game will not be played. No penalty will be imposed on the person.

In the above example, when the specified number is specified, the specified specified number is displayed on the obtained number display LED 78 (on the main control board 50 side). In addition to displaying on the number display LED 78, the specified specified number may be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 23 or the like (on the sub-control board 80 side).
Here, the display start timing for displaying the prescribed instruction number on the liquid crystal display device 23 or the like is set to be substantially the same as the display start timing for displaying the prescribed instruction number on the acquired number display LED 78 (before the game starts). be done.
Furthermore, the display end timing after displaying the specified number of commands on the liquid crystal display device 23 or the like may be the same as or different from the display end timing after displaying the specified number of commands on the acquired number display LED 78 .
As the display end timing after displaying the prescribed number of instructions on the liquid crystal display device 23 or the like,
(1) When the start switch 41 is operated (2) When all reels 31 are stopped (3) When the start switch 41 is operated in a game with a specified number of "2" (4) All reels in a game with a specified number of "2" When 31 is stopped (5) After winning BB2 in a game with a specified number of "2" (6) When all reels 31 are stopped in a game with a specified number of "2" and winning in BB2.
Further, when the prescribed number of instructions is displayed on a dedicated display, it is possible to continue displaying the prescribed number of instructions on the image display device 23 or the like over a plurality of games.

<Thirteenth Embodiment>
In each of the above embodiments, the number of reels 31 and stop switches 42 is three.
In contrast, in the thirteenth embodiment, the number of reels 31 and stop switches 42 is four.
FIG. 59 is a front view, a plan view, and a right side view showing an outline of a configuration including reels 31 (31A-31D) and stop switches 42 (42A-42D) in the thirteenth embodiment. In the front view, the reels 31A to 31D are shown unobstructed by the front surface of the front door 12. As shown in FIG. Further, in the plan view, the reel 31 positioned behind the front surface of the front door 12 is shown. Also, in the right side view, illustration of the medal slot 47 is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 59, a control panel 12c is provided on the front surface of the front door 12, and the operation buttons 24 and the medal slot 47 are arranged on the control panel 12c. The medal slot 47 is the same as that shown in FIG. Also, although not shown in FIG. 1, the operation buttons 24 are electrically connected to the sub-control board 80 to enable two-way communication with the sub-control board 80 . For example, the operation button 24 is formed so that at least a portion thereof can be lit, and the lighting mode of the operation button 24 can be controlled under the control of the sub-control board 80 . Also, when the operation button 24 is operated, the signal is input to the sub-control board 80 .
Below the control panel 12c of the front door 12, a start switch 41 and four stop switches 42A to 42D are arranged.

In the front view of FIG. 59, a vertical line passing through the midpoints of the four reels 31A to 31D is defined as a line L1 (center line). Line L1 is located at an intermediate position between reels 31B and 31C. W1 (uniform) is provided between the reels 31A and 31B, between the reels 31B and 31C, and between the reels 31C and 31D. Therefore, the reels 31A and 31B and the reels 31C and 31D are arranged symmetrically with respect to the line L1.
Also, the four stop switches 42A to 42D are all W2 (uniform) between the stop switches 42A and 42B, between the stop switches 42B and 42C, and between the stop switches 42C and 42D. A line L1 is arranged to pass through an intermediate position between the stop switches 42B and 42C.

Also, the gap W2 between the stop switches 42 may be the same as the gap W1 (W2=W1), larger than the gap W1 (W2>W1), or smaller than the gap W1 (W2<W1).
Furthermore, in the front view, a vertical line passing through the left end of the leftmost reel 31A is defined as a line L2, and a vertical line passing through the right end of the rightmost reel 31D is defined as a line L3. In this case, the leftmost stop switch 42A is arranged on the right side (closer to the center) than the line L2, and the rightmost stop switch 42D is arranged on the left side (closer to the center) than the line L3.

Furthermore, in the front view, if the interval (center-to-center distance) of the reels 31 is W3, the distances between the reels 31A and 31B, between the reels 31B and 31C, and between the reels 31C and 31D are all W3 (constant). is.
Assuming that the interval (center-to-center distance) of the stop switches 42 is W4, the distance between the stop switches 42A and 42B, between the stop switches 42B and 42C, and between the stop switches 42C and 42D is W4 (constant ).

Further, as shown in the front view of FIG. 59, a portion of the spherical body (operating portion) at the tip of the start switch 41 is arranged so as to cross the line L2. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the spherical body (operating portion) at the tip of the start switch 41 may be arranged on the left side (outside) of the line L2 without intersecting the line L2, or may be arranged on the line L2 without intersecting the line L2. may be placed on the right side (closer to the center) of
Also, in the front view, the medal slot 47 is arranged so that the medal slot 47 and the line L4 intersect. However, not limited to this, for example, the medal slot 47 may be arranged on the right side (outside) of the line L4 so as not to cross the line L4. Alternatively, the medal slot 47 may be arranged on the left side (closer to the center) than the line L4.

The operation button 24 is formed horizontally, and the line in contact with the left end of the operation button 24 is defined as line L4, and the line in contact with the right end of the operation button 24 is defined as line L5.
In this case, the stop switch 42A is arranged so that a portion of the leftmost stop switch 42A intersects the line L4 in the front view. Further, the stop switch 42D is arranged so that a portion of the rightmost stop switch 42D crosses the line L5.

Further, as shown in the plan view, an index 12d is formed on the control panel 12c. The index 12d is formed by engraving, printing, or the like, and in the example of FIG. Furthermore, the left index 12d is arranged on the center line of the stop switch 42A (it may be slightly deviated from the center line). Also, the index 12d on the right side is arranged on the center line of the stop switch 42D (there is no problem even if it is slightly deviated from the center line).

With the arrangement described above, the player can operate the leftmost stop switch 42A using the left end of the operation button 24 as a guide. Similarly, the rightmost stop switch 42D can be operated using the right end of the operation button 24 as a guide.
Alternatively, the player can operate the stop switch 42A using the left index 12d as a guide. Similarly, the stop switch 42D can be operated using the right index 12d as a guide.

When there are three reels 31 and three stop switches 42, as shown in FIG. 58 (twelfth embodiment), a maximum of "3!=6" push orders can be provided. On the other hand, when there are four reels 31 and four stop switches 42, a maximum of "4!=24" push orders can be provided.
Then, the larger the number of pressing order of the stop switch 42, the more the number of outs per 100 ins when the base during non-AT (when the role is not activated and during non-AT. For example, for 100 ins) If the number of outs is 50, the base is 50.) can be lowered.

Assuming that the number of reels 31 and stop switches 42 is four, the pressing order bells drawn by lottery are 1234 bells (stop switches 42A→42B→42C→42D refer to the correct pressing order), 1243 bells, . , 4312 bells, and 4321 bells. Then, as shown in FIG. 58, if the winning numbers of the pressing order bells are the same, the winning numbers of the pressing order bells can be set to "1500". In this way, since the winning number of each pressing order bell can be set to "1/4", the probability that the pressing order operated by the player will match the correct pressing order when the pressing order bell is won is reduced accordingly. can do.

Here, when the number of reels 31 and stop switches 42 is three, images such as "123" or "left center right" can be displayed during AT. Therefore, it is easy to intuitively understand the order of pressing correct answers.
On the other hand, when the number of reels 31 and stop switches 42 is four, the following method can be used as to how to inform the correct pressing order during AT.

For example, as a first method, the stop switches 42A, 42B, 42C, and 42D are set to "1", "2", "3", and "4", respectively, and the order of the stop switches 42 to be operated is notified. be done. For example, when the order of pressing the stop switches 42 is the order of the stop switches 42C, 42D, 42A, and 42B, "3412" is notified (at least one of image display, sound display, and lamp color notification is given). ) is mentioned. Alternatively, the stop switches 42A, 42B, 42C, and 42D may be set to "A", "B", "C", and "D", respectively, and in the above example, "CDAB" may be notified.

As a second method, the base of the reel 31 and/or the stop switch 42 may be colored for identification.
For example, the color of the base of the reel 31A and/or the stop switch 42A is white, the color of the base of the reel 31B and/or the stop switch 42B is blue, the color of the base of the reel 31C and/or the stop switch 42C is yellow, The color of the base of the reel 31D and/or the stop switch 42D is set to red (different colors, respectively). In the above example, instead of the notification "3412", "yellow, red, white, and blue" can be notified (at least one of image display, sound display, and lamp color notification).

Furthermore, as a third method, among the stop switches 42 to be operated first to fourth, the image corresponding to the stop switch 42 to be operated fourth (last) is darkened (or hidden). are mentioned. In this case, "Brightness of the image corresponding to the stop switch 42 to be operated first>Brightness of the image corresponding to the stop switch 42 to be operated second≧Brightness of the image corresponding to the stop switch 42 to be operated third Image brightness≧Image brightness corresponding to stop switch 42 to be operated fourth.
Then, when the first (first) stop switch 42 is operated, the image corresponding to the first stop switch 42 is darkened (or hidden), and the image corresponding to the stop switch 42 to be operated fourth is displayed. For example, the brightness of the image corresponding to the stop switch 42 to be operated third is set to be approximately the same as the brightness of the image corresponding to the stop switch 42 to be operated third.
For example, as in the above example, when the pressing order of "3412" is displayed as an image, "3-12" is first displayed as an image. Note that "●" is an image corresponding to the "4"th pressing order, and may be darkened (concealed) so that the character "4" cannot be seen at all, or the character "4" may be hidden. The characters may be dimmed to the extent that they are identifiable.

When the image is displayed as "3●12", the image is displayed in the same manner as when 6 options are selected, so the player can intuitively understand the pressing order. Then, when the first stop switch 42C is operated, one of the following 1) to 3) is executed.
1) Change the display of "1" corresponding to the operated stop switch 42C to "●", and change the previous "●" to "4". Specifically, the image is displayed as "342".
2) The "1" corresponding to the operated stop switch 42C is changed to "-" or "○", and the previous "●" is changed to "4". Specifically, the image is displayed as "34-2" or "34∘2".
3) Change the "1" corresponding to the operated stop switch 42C to blank (no image), and change the previous "●" to "4". Specifically, the image is displayed as "34*2"("*" means blank).

In addition, after the second stop, similarly to the above, images such as "34●●", "34--", "34○○", and "34**" may be displayed.
Further, after the third stop, images such as "●4●●", "-4--", "○4○○", and "*4**" may be displayed.
Alternatively, after the third stop, the push order image itself may be deleted.
As in the first method described above, even if all the pressing orders are displayed as "4312", after the stop switch 42 is operated, the image corresponding to the operated stop switch 42 is displayed. is erased as described in 1) to 3) above, the operated stop switch 42 becomes easier to understand, which is preferable. Specifically, after an image of "4312" is displayed, "43 2" (after operating the stop switch 42C)→"43 ●●" (after operating the stop switch 42D)→"4 ●●" (after operating the stop switch 42B) After the operation), an image is displayed (“●” may be “○”, “−”, or “*” as described above).

Furthermore, as a fourth method, a four-character idiom is used to notify the pressing order. For example, when "spring, summer, autumn and winter" is used as one of the four-letter idioms to indicate the pressing order, the correct pressing order is "spring→summer→autumn→winter".
Then, when the pressing order is "3412" as described above, "Autumn/Winter/Spring/Summer" can be reported (image display, voice display) as in the first method.
Alternatively, as in the third method, an image display of "Autumn Spring Summer" is displayed before the first stop, and an image display of "Autumn Winter Summer" is displayed after the first stop.
In any of the first to fourth methods, if an error in the order of pressing occurs in the middle of the process, the image of the order of pressing may continue to be displayed, or the image of the order of pressing may be displayed immediately after the error in the order of pressing occurs. You can erase the image.

In the thirteenth embodiment, when the 24-choice push order bell is provided as described above, 24 kinds of push order instruction numbers and push order instruction information are provided. For example, if the push order instruction information is "A1" to "A9", "AA", "AC", "AF", "F1" to "F9", "FA", "FC", and "FF", 24 types can be provided.

Although the eleventh to thirteenth embodiments of the present invention have been described above, the present invention is not limited to the contents described above, and various modifications such as those described below are possible.
A. Eleventh Embodiment (1) In the non-advantageous section, the lottery for the advantageous section is performed only when the combination lottery result is the target lottery result. The reason for this setting is that, as described above, when the winning combination lottery result is not won (as a result of the internal lottery, the condition device does not operate), the advantageous section transition lottery, which is the process related to the advantageous section, is performed. This is because I thought it preferable not to do so. Therefore, it is not always necessary to set in this manner, and the advantageous section transition lottery may be executed when the winning combination is not won.

(2) In the eleventh embodiment, the AT lottery process is executed after the advantageous section transition lottery. Here, a combination lottery result (winning number) that is always determined in an advantageous section is provided, and when the winning combination lottery result is obtained, the advantageous section transition process (Fig. 45) is executed without executing the advantageous section transition lottery. You may Similarly, a combination lottery result (winning number) that is always determined by AT is provided, and when the combination lottery result is obtained, AT setting processing (steps S363 and S364 in FIG. 46) is performed without executing the AT lottery. may be executed.
In addition, a combination lottery result (winning number) that is always determined to be an advantageous section and AT is provided, and when the combination lottery result is obtained, the advantageous section transition lottery and AT lottery processing are not executed, and the advantageous section transition process and AT set processing may be performed.
Further, in the case where a combination lottery result (winning number) that does not win the advantageous interval transition lottery is provided, the advantageous interval transition lottery may be executed even when the combination lottery result is obtained. In this case, the number of wins in the advantageous section may be set to "0".

(3) When the AT is won, the initial number of AT games is determined, the game number is stored in the AT game number counter, and when the AT game number counter becomes "0", the AT is ended. However, the AT is not limited to such a game number management type AT, and may be a difference number management type AT. In the case of the difference number management type AT, when the AT wins, the initial value of the obtainable difference number is determined and stored in the AT difference number counter (different from the difference number counter). Then, the difference number is subtracted from the AT difference number counter each time there is a payout, and when the AT difference number counter becomes "0", the AT is terminated.
Even in the case of such a difference number management type AT, the AT difference number counter is decremented when the number is one specified number (eg "3"), but when the number is another specified number (eg "2"), the AT difference number counter is subtracted. Do not decrement the difference number counter.

(4) In the setting change process (M_RANK_SET) in FIG. 39, the setting change is enabled after the initialization process is executed. Therefore, when the advantageous interval display LED 77 is on before the power is turned off, the advantageous interval indication LED 77 is extinguished before the setting change becomes possible when the setting change process is started. However, not limited to this, after ending the state in which the setting change is possible (after "Yes" in step S242 in FIG. 39), before proceeding to the main process (before step S248), the advantageous section display Clearing (initialization) processing of the LED flag may be executed. By doing so, it becomes possible to perform control so that the advantageous section display LED 77 is extinguished after the set value is determined.

(5) One advantageous section clear counter and one differential number counter are provided. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and two advantageous section clear counters and difference number counters (important counters) may be provided to confirm consistency.
For example, as the advantageous section clear counters, a first advantageous section clear counter and a second advantageous section clear counter are provided. During the advantageous interval, both the first advantageous interval clear counter and the second advantageous interval clear counter are updated each time the game is completed. Further, for example, in FIG. 51 and FIG. 52, in the determination of step S424, the first advantageous section clear counter is determined. When it is determined that the first advantageous section clear counter is "0", whether or not the value of the second advantageous section clear counter is "0", or whether the first advantageous section clear counter and the second advantageous section clear It is determined whether or not the counter has the same value. If it is determined to be "0" or the same value, the process proceeds to step S435.

The difference number counter is the same as above.
A first difference counter and a second difference counter are provided as difference counters. Then, each time a game is completed, both the first difference counter and the second difference counter are updated. Further, for example, in FIG. 51 and FIG. 52, in the determination of step S434, the first difference counter is determined. When it is determined that the first difference counter exceeds the upper limit, it determines whether the second difference counter exceeds the upper limit or whether the first difference counter and the second difference counter have the same value. determine whether If it is determined that the value exceeds the upper limit value or is the same value, the process proceeds to step S435.

By determining the advantageous interval clear counter value and/or the difference counter value in the above manner, even if the counter value becomes an abnormal value (illegal value) due to the influence of noise or the like, the advantageous interval clear counter value is "0" and/or whether the difference counter value has exceeded the upper limit.
If the first advantageous zone clear counter and the second advantageous zone clear counter do not match, or if the first difference counter and the second difference counter do not match, for example, an error is displayed and the game proceeds. (Main processing) may be stopped.

(6) In the sub-difference number management process of FIG. 56, it is determined in step S544 that the symbol combination corresponding to BB is stopped and displayed, and the process advances to step S545 to determine that the sub-difference number counter has exceeded "2164 (D)". When the sub-difference number counter is cleared, the BB game may output a special effect different from the normal BB game. A special effect during the BB game can suggest to the player that the sub-difference number counter has been cleared.

Also, when the symbol combination corresponding to the BB is stopped and displayed, the sub-difference number counter is not judged, and in the BB game, the sub-difference number counter is for example "2000 (D)" (an example of the threshold value, and this value is not limited to ). When it is determined that the sub difference number counter has exceeded "2000 (D)", the sub difference number counter is cleared, and a special effect (effect indicating that the sub difference number counter has been cleared) is performed from the next game. may be output.

Furthermore, in the above case, when the power is cut off in the game in which the sub-difference number counter exceeds "2000 (D)" during the BB game (no special effect is output yet), the power is restored from the cut off. The special effect may be output from the game played. In this case, when the power is restored from the power-off, the sub-difference number counter value and the fact that the BB game is being played may be read to determine whether or not to output the special effect.

Further, when the power is cut off during the rotation of the reel 31 in the game in which the sub-difference number counter exceeds "2000 (D)" during the BB game, the special effect can be output from the game that has recovered from the power cut. good. Therefore, in this case, if the power is not cut off, the special effect will be output from the next game, but if the power is cut off while the reel 31 is rotating, the special effect will be output from the game. Become.

(7) During AT, the game is played with the specified number of "2" (when the specified number is "2", the instruction function does not operate), the pressing order bell is won, and the stop switch 42 is accidentally operated in the correct pressing order. , When there is a payout of a small combination and the difference counter exceeds "2400 (D)", at the end of the game, it is possible to output an effect that informs the end of AT, such as displaying an image such as "END". preferable. This is to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable because the AT ends in a game in which the order of pressing the correct answer is not notified.

(8) On the other hand, as described above, in order to prevent the AT from ending in a game in which the correct pressing order is not notified, for example, when the game is played with the prescribed number of "2", the pressing order bell is won. Even if the stop switch 42 is operated in the correct order, the payout number of the game is set to "2" or less (the difference number of the game is "0" or less) so that the AT does not end in the game. may

(9) As shown in FIGS. 56 and 57, the sub difference number counter continued counting during the BB game. However, it is not limited to this, and when winning BB during AT and shifting to BB game, the sub difference number counter may not be updated (update of sub difference number counter is interrupted during BB game). .
In this case, for example, before step S531 in FIG. 56, it is determined whether or not the BB is in operation (determined by the operation state flag). Then, when the BB is in operation, the processing according to this flow chart ends.
Further, when the sub-difference number counter is not updated during the BB game, the processing of step S551 and steps S558 to S561 in FIG. 57 becomes unnecessary. Then, when "No" in step S547, the process proceeds to step S552.

B. Twelfth Embodiment (1) As in the eleventh embodiment, in FIG. 58, when the combination lottery is not won, the transition lottery for the advantageous section (processing related to the advantageous section) is not executed. As noted above, the rules are considered. Therefore, if the rules are not taken into account, the transition lottery for the advantageous section may be executed when the winning combination is not won.
In addition, as shown in FIG. 58, the transition lottery for the advantageous section (processing related to the advantageous section) is performed with only one prescribed number (in the example of FIG. 58, the prescribed number "3") in one gaming state (RT). I decided to do it. This is done in consideration of the fact that, according to the rules, the transfer lottery for the advantageous section (processing related to the advantageous section) is limited to only one specified number in one gaming state (RT). Therefore, if this point is not taken into consideration, in one gaming state (RT), the transfer lottery for the advantageous section may be executed with a plurality of specified numbers.

(2) In the twelfth embodiment, the specified number "2" is specified for non-RT and AT. However, when the game is the final game of the AT game, it is not necessary to indicate the specified number.
(3) In the twelfth embodiment, the game is played inside the BB2, and it is irregular that the BB2 wins and shifts to the BB2 game. However, the specification is not limited to this, and the BB2 game may be executed by causing the BB2 to win when the AT end condition is satisfied after the AT is executed inside the BB2. In this case, when the AT end condition is satisfied inside the BB 2, after the game that satisfies the AT end condition is finished (all reels 31 are stopped, and payout processing is executed when a minor win is won), Before the start of the next game (non-AT) (before the betting becomes possible), the specified number "2" is instructed to prompt BB2 to win. In the twelfth embodiment, since BB2 is won with the prescribed number of "2", the prescribed number for winning BB2 is "2". , when the BB is to win, the prescribed number "1" is indicated.
Further, the BB game with such specifications may be a BB game with increased medals or a BB game with decreased medals.

(4) When instructing the specified number, it is executed in the game start set process (step S322 in FIG. 42). However, it is not limited to this, and may be executed in the game end check process (FIG. 50). For example, in the BB2 game, it is determined whether or not it is the final game of the BB2 game, and if it is the final game, the prescribed number of the next game is indicated during the game end check processing. However, when a small winning combination is won in the final game of the BB2 game and there is a payout, and the number of payouts is displayed on the winning number display LED 78, the prescribed number is indicated after the number of payouts is displayed. If the LED for instructing the prescribed number is a dedicated LED, the prescribed number for the next game can be instructed to the dedicated LED while the number of payouts is being displayed on the winning number display LED 78 .
Furthermore, in the case of executing the freeze in the last game of the BB2 game, when instructing the specified number of the next game at the end of the game, any timing before executing the freeze, during the execution of the freeze, or after the end of the freeze may be

(5) As in the twelfth embodiment, the function of the 3 (MAX) bet switch 40b can be changed when a game can be executed with any one of a plurality of prescribed numbers. For example, in the game in the advantageous section, in a situation where it is advantageous to play the game with the prescribed number "3" (for example, in FIG. 58, when inside BB2), the 3 (MAX) bet switch 40b is dedicated to betting 3 You can set it to a button. That is, when the number of credits is "3", it is set to bet "3" when the 3-bet switch 40b is operated in a situation where it is advantageous to play the game with the prescribed number of "3" in the advantageous section. do. On the other hand, when the number of credits is "2", if it is advantageous to play the game with the prescribed number of "3" in the advantageous section, even if the 3-bet switch 40b is operated, "2" is not bet. set as

Alternatively, even if it is possible to play the game with the specified number of "3", if the number of credits is "2" and the 3-bet switch 40b is operated, "2" is set to bet. good too. In particular, in FIG. 58, in non-RT and AT, it is preferable to set so that "2" bet is made when the 3-bet switch 40b is operated when the number of credits is "2".

(6) As in the twelfth embodiment, when most of the game sections are set as advantageous sections, the instruction function can be activated at any timing. For example, a difference number counter (different from the difference number counter) capable of counting the minus of the difference number is provided, and the payout rate for a predetermined period is calculated. When the payout rate for a given period reaches a given lower limit (the given lower limit is, for example, set higher than the legal lower limit), an instruction function is activated to increase the payout rate. good too. Then, when the ball output rate increases and recovers to the reference value, the operation of the indicating function is terminated.
Such activation of an indicator function when a predetermined lower limit is reached may or may not be included in "AT". However, since there is no change in activating the instruction function, this corresponds to processing related to the instruction function.

(7) In the twelfth embodiment, the obtained number display LED 78 is used as the LED for displaying the information corresponding to the prescribed number of instructions. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be set to other existing LEDs, or may be separately provided with dedicated LEDs for displaying information corresponding to the prescribed number of instructions.
When a dedicated LED for displaying information corresponding to the specified number of instructions is provided separately, even if the start switch 41 is operated after the information corresponding to the specified number of instructions is displayed in the game start set process, the specified number of instructions is displayed. It is not necessary to erase the information corresponding to . Further, even if all the reels 31 are stopped, a small winning combination is won, and medals are paid out, the information corresponding to the prescribed number of instructions does not have to be erased.
In addition, when a dedicated LED is provided to display information corresponding to the prescribed number of instructions, the prescribed number of instructions will not be confused with the number of payouts, error numbers, etc., so the prescribed number can be indicated in any display mode. can be done. For example, if the specified specified number is "2", "2" can be displayed.

(8) In the twelfth embodiment, an example of instructing the prescribed number "2" was given, but depending on the specifications of the gaming machine, the prescribed number "1" or the prescribed number "3" may be instructed. Conceivable. If the specification has the possibility of indicating any of the prescribed numbers "1" to "3", the display of the acquisition number display LED 78 when instructing the prescribed number "1" is set to "A1", and the prescribed number For example, "A2" is used to indicate "2", and "A3" is used to indicate the specified number "3".

C. Thirteenth Embodiment (1) In the front view of FIG. 59, the line L1 is set to pass through the centers of the four reels 31 and the centers of the four stop switches 42 . However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the four stop switches 42 as a whole may be arranged more to the right than the position shown in FIG. Conversely, all four stop switches 42 may be positioned to the left of the position shown in FIG. 58, for example, so that a portion of stop switch 42C intersects line L1.

(2) As shown in the front view of FIG. 59, Roman numerals from "1" to "4" are written below the four reels 31, but these Roman numerals may be lamps. In this case, for example, when the stop switch to be operated next is 42C, the lamp of Roman numeral "3" is turned on.
In addition, different colors are assigned to the ranges in which the Roman numerals "1" to "4" are indicated, and the stop switches 42A to 42D may also be assigned colors corresponding to the Roman numerals "1" to "4". mentioned. In the example described above, the color of the stop switch 42A is white, the color of the stop switch 42B is blue, the color of the stop switch 42C is yellow, and the color of the stop switch 42D is red. In this case, the range of Roman numerals "1" should be white, the range of Roman numerals "2" should be blue, the range of Roman numerals "3" should be yellow, and the range of Roman numerals "4" should be red. be done.

(3) Also, the image display device 23 may be included in the portion including the periphery of the reel 31 . A different color is assigned to each stop switch 42 as described above. In this case, for example, when the stop switch 42B (blue) is specified when notifying the pressing order, the surroundings of the reel 31B may be illuminated in blue.

(4) In the front view of FIG. 59, the interval W3 between the reels 31 is set longer than the interval W4 between the stop switches .
However, without being limited to this, the interval W3 between the reels 31 and the interval W4 between the stop switches 42 may be set substantially equal. Alternatively, the interval W4 between the stop switches 42 may be set longer than the interval W3 between the reels 31 .

(5) In the thirteenth embodiment, a maximum of 24 push orders can be provided as the push order bell. However, it is also possible to provide not only this but a 1st stop pushing order bell. Here, in the prior art, there are three options for the first stop push order bell. On the other hand, in the thirteenth embodiment, four options can be set. When the correct push order is displayed as an image when the first stop push order bell is won, for example, if the correct stop switch 42 is the stop switch 42C, an image display of "xx1x" can be used.

Furthermore, it is also possible to provide first stop and second stop push order bells (push order bells for which the correct push order is set for the first stop and second stop). For example, the first stop is set by the stop switch 42C, the second stop is by the stop switch 42A, and the third and fourth stops are optional (either of the stop switches 42B and 42D). In this case, 12 choices can be set for the order of pressing correct answers. Furthermore, when displaying the order of correct keystrokes as an image, in the above example, an image display of "2x1x" may be used. After the stop switch 42C is operated, an image display such as "2x-x" can be mentioned.

D. Others All the embodiments and various modifications described in this specification are not limited to being implemented independently, and can be implemented in combination as appropriate.

<14th Embodiment>
The fourteenth embodiment relates to the timing of starting and ending the display of the pressing order instruction information.
Fourteenth embodiments (A) to (G) in which the display start or display end timing of the pressing order instruction information is different will be described below.

<14th Embodiment (A)>
60 and 61 are time charts for explaining the fourteenth embodiment (A).
FIG. 60 shows the timing of the start and end of display of the push order instruction information when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) after the minimum game time elapses, and FIG. 41 is turned on (operated), the timing of the display start and display end of the push order instruction information is shown.

Here, the hardware configuration in the fourteenth embodiment (A) is the same as the hardware configuration shown in FIGS. 31 to 35 of the eleventh embodiment.
Also, the main processing (M_MAIN), push order instruction number set (M_ORD_INF), medal payout due to winning (M_WIN_PAY), interrupt processing (I_INTR), and LED display control (I_LED_OUT) in the fourteenth embodiment (A) are Main processing (M_MAIN) in FIG. 41 of the embodiment, push order instruction number set (M_ORD_INF) in FIG. 48, medal payout by winning in FIG. 49, interrupt processing (I_INTR) in FIG. 53, and LED display control (I_LED_OUT ).
Then, in the fourteenth embodiment (A), similarly to the eleventh embodiment, when the pressing order bell is won during AT, the winning number display LED 78 displays the pressing order instruction information.

If the input port read process is executed in step S457 of the interrupt process (I_INTR) in FIG. 53 and the start switch 41 is turned on at this time, then "Yes" in step S278 of the main process (M_MAIN) in FIG. becomes.
Also, as shown in FIG. 41, if "Yes" is determined in step S278, then winning lottery processing (step S282), advantageous section transition lottery processing (step S283), and pushing order instruction number setting (M_ORD_INF) (step S284) ).

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 48, in the pushing order instruction number set (M_ORD_INF), when the condition for activating the instruction function is satisfied, that is, when a winning combination having an advantageous pushing order such as a pushing order bell is won during AT. , a push order instruction number corresponding to the winning number is generated and stored as winning number data. Then, by the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) during the interrupt process (I_INTR) executed after this process, the push order instruction information (for example, "=1") is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 .

Further, in the fourteenth embodiment (A), as in the eleventh embodiment, interrupt processing (I_INTR) is executed every 2.235 ms. Furthermore, dynamic lighting of digits 1 (1a and 1b) to 5 (5a and 5b) is performed so that five interrupts constitute one cycle.
Therefore, in the fourteenth embodiment (A), as shown in FIGS. 60 and 61, the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) before the minimum playing time elapses, or the start switch 41 is turned on after the minimum playing time elapses. is turned on (operated), after the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) and before the reel 31 starts to rotate, more specifically, the pushing order instruction number is stored as the winning number data. Within 5 interrupts (2.235×5=11.175 ms) from , display of the push order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78 will start.

After the push order instruction number is stored as the acquisition number data, the push order instruction information may be displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78 at the first interruption, and the push order instruction information may be displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78 at the fifth interruption. Information may be displayed.
Also, although not shown in FIG. 41, control command set 1 is executed between step S284 for setting the pushing order instruction number (M_ORD_INF) and step S285 for preparing to start reel rotation. In the control command set 1 between this push order instruction number set and reel rotation start preparation, the effect group number or push order instruction number is stored as a control command in the control command buffer. Then, the control command stored in the control command buffer is transmitted to the sub-control board 80 by the control command transmission (step S464) during the interrupt processing (I_INTR) executed after this processing.

Further, in the fourteenth embodiment (A), the control command is composed of the first control command and the second control command. Both the first control command and the second control command are 1-byte data. The first control command is data indicating the type of control command, and the second control command is data indicating a parameter (variable). One control command is composed of 2-byte data of the first control command and the second control command.
Furthermore, in the fourteenth embodiment (A), two sets of 8-bit parallel communication lines are used. 2 control command is sent to the sub-control board 80; As a result, a control command consisting of 2-byte data can be transmitted to the sub-control board 80 in one interrupt process.

Furthermore, in the fourteenth embodiment (A), a 64-byte storage area is secured in the RWM 53 as a control command buffer. As described above, since one control command consists of 2-byte data of the first control command and the second control command, 32 control commands can be stored in the control command buffer. By transmitting control commands during interrupt processing, the untransmitted control commands stored in the control command buffer are transmitted to the sub-control board 80 in the order in which they were stored.
If the control command is stored when the control command buffer is empty, the control command is transmitted to the sub-control board 80 by the control command transmission during the interrupt processing that comes next at that time.

As described above, in the fourteenth embodiment (A), as shown in FIGS. 60 and 61, the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) before the minimum playing time elapses, or the start switch 41 is turned on after the minimum playing time elapses. is turned on (operated), after the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) and before the reel 31 starts rotating, more specifically, the pushing order instruction number is stored in the control command buffer. After about one interrupt (2.235 ms), the push order instruction number is transmitted to the sub-control board 80 .

In the fourteenth embodiment (A), the sub-control board 80 is composed of a first sub-control board (sub-main control board) and a second sub-control board (sub-sub-control board). The first sub-control board and the second sub-control board are control boards subordinate to the main control board 50, and control the selection, output, etc. of effects during the game and during the game standby. Also, the second sub-control board is a control board that belongs to the lower level of the first sub-control board. Control commands are unidirectionally transmitted from the main control board 50 to the first sub-control board, and the first sub-control board and the second sub-control board communicate bi-directionally.

Also, the first sub-control board determines what kind of effect to output at what timing based on the control command transmitted from the main control board 50 . Then, the first sub-control board transmits a control command related to the determined effect to the second sub-control board.
Further, the second sub-control board is electrically connected to peripheral devices for effects such as the effect lamp 21, the speaker 22, and the image display device 23. As shown in FIG. Then, the second sub-control board selects an effect based on the control command transmitted from the first sub-control board, and controls to output various effects from the peripheral device for effect.

Specifically, when the first sub-control board receives a control command transmitted from the main control board 50, it stores (saves) the received control command in a predetermined storage area.
Further, the first sub-control board executes sub-main processing every 16 ms, analyzes the control command in the loop processing during this sub-main processing, and as a result, determines that the control command is related to an image. stores an image command corresponding to the analysis result in the command buffer.
Further, the first sub-control board transmits the image command stored in the command buffer to the second sub-control board in command transmission processing (executed before loop processing) during the next sub-main processing.

Therefore, after the main control board 50 transmits the push order instruction number as the control command to the first sub-control board, until the second sub-control board receives the image command, it takes 32 ms (= sub-main processing period). It takes about 16 ms×2).
Then, the second sub-control board executes drawing processing based on the received image command, and displays an image on the image display device 23 .
Further, in the fourteenth embodiment (A), the second sub-control board executes drawing processing at 30 fps (frames per second). Therefore, it takes about 33.33 ms to display one image on the image display device 23 .

As described above, after the main control board 50 transmits the pressing order instruction number as a control command to the first sub-control board, the second sub-control board displays an image (pressing order instruction image) for instructing the pressing order on the image display device. 23, it takes about 65.33 ms (=32 ms+33.33 ms).
Therefore, in the fourteenth embodiment (A), when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) after the minimum playing time has passed, as shown in FIG. , that is, before the rotation of the reel 31 reaches a constant speed and the operation of the stop switch 42 becomes acceptable, display of the push order instruction image on the image display device 23 is started.

On the other hand, for example, when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) one second before the minimum playing time elapses, it takes about one second from the turning on (operation) of the start switch 41 to the start of rotation of the reels 31. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 61, display of the push order instruction image on the image display device 23 is started before the rotation of the reel 31 is started.
Further, in the fourteenth embodiment (A), as shown in FIGS. 60 and 61, the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) before the minimum playing time elapses, or the start switch 41 is turned on after the minimum playing time elapses. Regardless of whether it is turned on (operated), display of the push order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78 is started first, and then display of the push order instruction image on the image display device 23 is started.

Also, although not shown in FIG. 41, the control command set 1 is executed between the reel stop acceptance check in step S287 and the all reel stop check in step S288. In the control command set 1 between this reel stop acceptance check and all reel stop check, a control command regarding the operation of the stop switch 42 and a control command regarding the stop position of the reel 31 are stored in the control command buffer. Then, the control command stored in the control command buffer is transmitted to the sub-control board 80 by the control command transmission (step S464) during the interrupt processing (I_INTR) executed after this processing.

Furthermore, the first sub-control board analyzes the received control command, and as a result, determines that the control command is related to the operation of the first stop switch 42 (the stop switch 42 corresponding to the reel 31 that stops first). When done, an image command corresponding to the operation of the first stop switch 42 is transmitted to the second sub-control board.
Similarly, when it is determined that the control command is related to the operation of the second stop switch 42 (the stop switch 42 corresponding to the reel 31 that stops second), the image command corresponding to the operation of the second stop switch 42 is sent to the second control command. 2 sub-control board, and when it is determined that it is a control command related to the operation of the third stop switch 42 (the stop switch 42 corresponding to the reel 31 to be stopped last), respond to the operation of the third stop switch 42 An image command is sent to the second sub-control board.

When the second sub-control board receives an image command corresponding to the operation of the first stop switch 42, the second sub-control board displays an image corresponding to the operation of the first stop switch 42 (for example, prompting the operation of the second stop switch 42). (push order instruction image) is displayed on the image display device 23 .
Similarly, when an image command corresponding to the operation of the second stop switch 42 is received, an image corresponding to the operation of the second stop switch 42 (for example, a push order instruction image prompting the operation of the third stop switch 42) is displayed. It is displayed on the image display device 23 .

Further, when an image command corresponding to the operation of the third stop switch 42 is received, for example, the display of the push order instruction image is ended, and an image corresponding to the operation of the third stop switch 42 (for example, all reels 31 are stopped) is displayed. (image corresponding to the state) is displayed on the image display device 23 .
Therefore, in the fourteenth embodiment (A), as shown in FIGS. 60 and 61, the display of the push order instruction image on the image display device 23 ends after the third stop switch 42 is turned on.

Further, as shown in FIG. 41, when all the reels 31 are stopped ("Yes" in step S289), the acquired number data is cleared (step S290). For example, it is assumed that pressing order instruction information (for example, "=1") is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 when the pressing order bell is won during AT. In this case, the display of the acquisition number display LED 78 becomes "00" by the interrupt processing executed after the processing of step S290.
For this reason, in the fourteenth embodiment (A), as shown in FIGS. 60 and 61, when all the reels 31 are stopped, display of the pressing order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78 ends.
Further, in the fourteenth embodiment (A), as shown in FIGS. 60 and 61, the display of the push order instruction image on the image display device 23 is finished first, and then the push order instruction on the obtained number display LED 78 is completed. Information display ends.

Further, as shown in FIG. 41, in step S294, medal payout (M_WIN_PAY) is executed by winning a prize. Further, as shown in FIG. 49, "1" is added to the winning number data in step S399 during medal payout (M_WIN_PAY) due to winning. As a result, the display of the acquisition number display LED 78 is incremented by "1" by the interrupt processing executed after the processing of step S399. For example, the display of the acquisition number display LED 78 changes from "00" to "01".
Therefore, in the fourteenth embodiment (A), as shown in FIGS. 60 and 61, the number of won medals is displayed on the win number display LED 78 when the medals are paid out.

In the fourteenth embodiment (A), all reels 31 are stopped when the pressing order bell is won during AT and the pressing order instruction information (for example, "=1") is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78. Then, the acquisition number data is cleared, and the display of the acquisition number display LED 78 becomes "00". After that, the display of the acquired number display LED 78 remains "00" until the medals are paid out. For example, when 10 medals are paid out, the display of the winning number display LED 78 is changed in the order of "00"→"01"→"02"→...→"09"→"10" when the medals are paid out. count up.

As described above, in the fourteenth embodiment (A), once the combination lottery process (step S282) and the advantageous section shift lottery process (step S283) are executed, the pressing order instruction number setting (step S284) is executed next. do.
Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 60 and 61, the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) regardless of whether the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) before or after the minimum game time has elapsed. After that, and before the reels 31 start rotating, display of the pressing order instruction information on the obtained number display LED 78 can be started. That is, after the start switch 41 is turned on (operated), display of the pressing order instruction information on the obtained number display LED 78 can be started immediately.

<14th Embodiment (B)>
The fourteenth embodiment (B) differs from the fourteenth embodiment (A) in that the display start timing of the pressing order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78 is different from that of the fourteenth embodiment (A). is the one that starts the
FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing main processing (M_MAIN) in the fourteenth embodiment (B), and is a flowchart corresponding to FIG. 41 of the eleventh embodiment.
In the flowchart of the fourteenth embodiment (B) shown in FIG. 62, the step numbers different from those in FIG. 41 are underlined, and the same steps as those in FIG. 41 are given the same step numbers. .

In FIG. 41, the processing is executed in the order of setting the pressing order instruction number, preparing to start reel rotation, and starting reel rotation. In the fourteenth embodiment (B), as shown in FIG. Processing is executed in the order of number setting and reel rotation start.
That is, in the fourteenth embodiment (B), the order of steps S284 and S285 is reversed from that in FIG. 41, and after the reel rotation start preparation is executed, the pressing order instruction number setting is executed.

If the input port read processing is performed in step S457 of the interrupt processing (I_INTR) in FIG. 53 and the start switch 41 is turned on at this time, then "Yes" in step S278 of the main processing (M_MAIN) in FIG. becomes.
Further, as shown in FIG. 62, if "Yes" is determined in step S278, thereafter, winning combination lottery processing (step S282), advantageous section transition lottery processing (step S283), control command set 1 (step S601), reel rotation start. Preparation (step S285) and push order instruction number setting (M_ORD_INF) (step S284) are executed.

In step S601, control command set 1 is executed. In this control command set 1, an effect group number or a pressing order instruction number is stored as a control command in the control command buffer. After step S601, the process proceeds to step S285.
Further, in step S285, reel rotation start preparation is executed. In this reel rotation start preparation, first, it is determined whether or not the timer value of the minimum game time (minimum time from the start of rotation of the reels 31 to the start of rotation of the reels 31 in the next game) is "0".

The RWM 53 is provided with an area for storing a timer value for the minimum game time. Also, the initial value of the timer value is "1834 (D) (2.235 ms×1834≈4099 ms)". Furthermore, the timer value is decremented by "1" every interrupt processing (2.235 ms). When it is determined that the timer value is not "0", it is determined again whether the timer value is "0", and when it is determined that the timer value is "0", the initial value of the timer value is set. set, and proceed to step S284.
In this way, in the reel rotation start preparation of step S285, it is determined whether or not the minimum game time has passed, and when it is determined that the minimum game time has passed, the process proceeds to step S284.

Further, as shown in FIG. 62, in the fourteenth embodiment (B), when the reel stop acceptance check in step S287 is executed, the process proceeds to step S602.
In step S602, control command set 1 is executed. In this control command set 1, a control command regarding the operation of the stop switch 42 and a control command regarding the stop position of the reel 31 are stored in the control command buffer. After step S602, the process proceeds to step S288.
Execution of the control command set 1 between the reel stop acceptance check in step S287 and the all reel stop check in step S288 is as described in the fourteenth embodiment (A).
Other than the above, it is the same as the flowchart of FIG. 41 of the eleventh embodiment.

63 and 64 are time charts for explaining the fourteenth embodiment (B).
FIG. 63 shows the timing of the start and end of display of the push order instruction information when the start switch 41 is operated after the minimum game time has passed, and FIG. It shows the timing of the display start and display end of the pressing order instruction information when the button is pressed.

As described above, in the fourteenth embodiment (B), once the advantageous zone transition lottery process of step S283 is executed, the process proceeds to step S601, and the control command set 1 is executed. In this control command set 1, an effect group number or a pressing order instruction number is stored as a control command in the control command buffer. Then, the effect group number or the pressing order instruction number stored in the control command buffer is transmitted to the sub-control board 80 by the interrupt process executed after this process.

Therefore, in the fourteenth embodiment (B), as shown in FIGS. 63 and 64, the start switch 41 is operated before the minimum game time elapses, or the start switch 41 is operated after the minimum game time elapses. After the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) and before the reel 31 starts rotating, more specifically, after the pushing order instruction number is stored in the control command buffer, one interrupt (2. 235 ms), the push order instruction number is transmitted to the sub-control board 80 (first sub-control board).

Further, in the fourteenth embodiment (B), when the control command set 1 in step S601 is executed, reel rotation start preparation is next executed in step S285, and then the push order instruction number set is executed in step S284.
Therefore, in the fourteenth embodiment (B), as shown in FIGS. 63 and 64, the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) before the minimum playing time elapses, or the start switch 41 is turned on after the minimum playing time elapses. is turned on (operated), when the reel 31 starts rotating, display of the pressing order instruction information on the obtained number display LED 78 is started.

Also, as described in the fourteenth embodiment (A), after the main control board 50 transmits the push order instruction number to the first sub control board, the second sub control board instructs the image display device 23 to push order. It takes about 65.33 ms to display the image. Therefore, in the fourteenth embodiment (B), when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) after the minimum playing time has passed, as shown in FIG. Display of the push order instruction image on the image display device 23 is started before it becomes possible.
On the other hand, for example, when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) one second before the minimum playing time elapses, it takes about one second from the turning on (operation) of the start switch 41 to the start of rotation of the reels 31. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 64, display of the pushing order instruction image on the image display device 23 is started before the rotation of the reel 31 is started.

Furthermore, when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) after the minimum game time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. Display of the push order instruction image on the display device 23 is started.
On the other hand, when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) before the minimum game time elapses, as shown in FIG. At this time, display of the push order instruction information on the obtained number display LED 78 is started.
That is, depending on whether the start switch 41 is operated before or after the minimum game time elapses, the display of the push order instruction information on the winning number display LED 78 and the push order instruction on the image display device 23 are started. The order with the image display start is reversed.

Here, in the fourteenth embodiment (A), regardless of whether the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) before the minimum playing time elapses or whether the start switch 41 is turned on (operating) after the minimum playing time elapses , after the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) and before the reels 31 start rotating, display of the pressing order instruction information on the obtained number display LED 78 is started. That is, immediately after the start switch 41 was turned on (operated), display of the pressing order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78 was started.

However, if the display start timing of the push order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78 is too early, the start switch 41 will be turned on when winning a role having an advantageous push order such as a push order bell in a role lottery (internal lottery). After (operation), the player immediately understands.
In this case, although there is no advantageous pushing order, there is a risk of discouraging the player who is waiting for the winning of the rare combination, which is the condition for determining the addition of the number of AT games played.

Therefore, in the fourteenth embodiment (B), when it is determined that the minimum playing time has passed, the push order instruction number is stored as win number data, so that when the reel 31 starts rotating, the win number display LED 78 can be pressed. Start displaying turn indication information.
As a result, when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) before the minimum game time elapses, the display start timing of the pressing order instruction information on the winning number display LED 78 can be delayed until the minimum game time elapses. , the player who has been waiting for the winning of the rare combination is not discouraged immediately after operating the start switch 41.例文帳に追加

Also, when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) after the minimum game time has passed, it is determined that the minimum game time has passed, and after the push order instruction number is stored as the acquisition number data, 5 interrupts (2.235 ×5=11.175 ms), display of the push order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78 will start.
Furthermore, in the fourteenth embodiment (B), before storing the push order instruction number as the acquisition count data, the push order instruction number is stored in the control command buffer and transferred to the sub-control board 80 (first sub-control board). However, it takes about 65.33 ms from when the main control board 50 transmits the push order instruction number to the first sub-control board until the second sub-control board displays the push order instruction image on the image display device 23. time.

In this way, the time required from the time when the pressing order instruction number is stored as the acquisition number data until the pressing order instruction information is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78 is set to "X", and the main control board 50 stores the pressing order instruction number. When the time required for the second sub-control board to display the pushing order instruction image on the image display device 23 after transmission to the first sub-control board is "Y", the image should satisfy "X<Y". is set to
Also, when the cycle of the interrupt process is "T" and the number of digits to be dynamically lit by the interrupt process is "N", the push order instruction number is stored as the acquired number data, and then the acquired number display LED 78 is pressed. A maximum of "T×N" time is required until the forward indication information is displayed. Therefore, it is set so as to satisfy “T×N<Y”.
As a result, when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) after the minimum game time has elapsed, the display of the push order instruction information on the win number display LED 78 is started first, and then the push order instruction information on the image display device 23 is displayed. Display of the instruction image is started.

<14th Embodiment (C)>
The fourteenth embodiment (C) differs from the fourteenth embodiments (A) and (B) in the timing of ending the display of the pressing order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78. to end the display of
FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing main processing (M_MAIN) in the fourteenth embodiment (C), and is a flowchart corresponding to FIG. 41 of the eleventh embodiment.
In the flowchart of the fourteenth embodiment (C) shown in FIG. 65, the step numbers different from those in FIG. 41 are underlined, and the same steps as those in FIG. 41 are given the same step numbers. .

In FIG. 41, when it is determined in step S289 that all the reels 31 have stopped, the process proceeds to step S290 to clear the acquisition number data, but in the fourteenth embodiment (C), as shown in FIG. When it is determined that all the reels 31 have stopped, the process proceeds to step S291, and symbol display determination is performed without clearing the acquisition number data.
Further, in the fourteenth embodiment (C), the payout of medals (M_WIN_PAY) (step S603) due to winning is different from that of the eleventh embodiment shown in FIGS. 41 and 49. FIG.

Input port read processing is performed in step S457 of the interrupt processing (I_INTR) in FIG. 53, and if the start switch 41 is turned on at this time, then "Yes" in step S278 of the main processing (M_MAIN) in FIG. becomes.
Also, as shown in FIG. 65, if "Yes" is determined in step S278, thereafter, winning combination lottery processing (step S282), advantageous section shift lottery processing (step S283), pushing order instruction number setting (M_ORD_INF) (step S284). , control command set 1 (step S601), and reel rotation start preparation (step S285).
Note that step S601 is the same as in the fourteenth embodiment (B).

Further, in FIG. 65, executing the control command set 1 (step S602) after the reel stop acceptance check (step S287), and then executing the all reel stop check (step S288) is the same as in the fourteenth embodiment. It is similar to FIG. 62 of (B).
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 65, when it is determined in step S289 that all the reels 31 have stopped, the process proceeds to step S291 to determine the display of symbols. That is, in the fourteenth embodiment (C), after all the reels 31 are stopped, the acquired number data is maintained without being cleared.

FIG. 66 is a flow chart showing medal payout (M_WIN_PAY) due to winning in the fourteenth embodiment (C), and is a flow chart corresponding to FIG. 49 of the eleventh embodiment.
In the flowchart of the fourteenth embodiment (C) shown in FIG. 66, the step numbers different from those in FIG. 49 are underlined, and the same steps as in FIG. 49 are given the same step numbers. .

As shown in FIG. 66, in the fourteenth embodiment (C), when payout number data is acquired in step S391, the process proceeds to step S611, where the payout number data is stored as acquired number data, and then the process proceeds to step S392. That is, in the fourteenth embodiment (C), payout number data is stored as acquisition number data between step S391 and step S392.
Further, as shown in FIG. 66, in the fourteenth embodiment (C), when the one medal payout process is executed in step S398, the process proceeds to step S400, and "1" is subtracted from the payout number data. Therefore, in the fourteenth embodiment (C), unlike the eleventh embodiment shown in FIG. 49, "1" is not added to the obtained number data between step S398 and step S400.

67 and 68 are time charts for explaining the fourteenth embodiment (C).
FIG. 67 shows timings for starting and ending the display of the push order instruction information when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) after the minimum game time has passed, and FIG. 41 is turned on (operated), the timing of the display start and display end of the push order instruction information is shown.
As described above, in the fourteenth embodiment (C), even after all the reels 31 have stopped, the acquired number data is maintained without being cleared. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 67 and 68, even after all the reels 31 are stopped, the winning number display LED 78 continues to display the pressing order instruction information (for example, "=1").

Further, in the fourteenth embodiment (C), when payout number data is stored as acquisition number data in step S611 of FIG. As a result, the acquired number of medals (for example, "10" when paying out 10 medals) is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 .
Therefore, in the fourteenth embodiment (C), as shown in FIGS. 67 and 68, the winning number display LED 78 displays the pressing order instruction information (for example, "=1") until the medals are paid out. Subsequently, when the medals are paid out, the display of the winning number display LED 78 is switched from the pressing order instruction information to the winning number (for example, from "=1" to "10").
It should be noted that the timing of starting to display the number of medals obtained, the timing of transmitting the pushing order instruction number as a control command, and the timing of starting and ending display of the pushing order instruction image on the image display device 23 are the same as in the fourteenth embodiment ( It is the same as A).

Further, in the fourteenth embodiment (C), even after all the reels 31 are stopped, the winning number data is maintained without being cleared, and the payout number is used as the winning number data in step S611 of payout of medals (M_WIN_PAY) by winning in FIG. Store data.
Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 67 and 68, even after all the reels 31 are stopped, it is possible to continue to display the pressing order instruction information on the obtained number display LEDs 78 .
Furthermore, until medals are paid out, the winning number display LED 78 continues to display the push order instruction information, and when the medals are paid out, the display of the winning number display LED 78 is switched from the push order instruction information to the number of wins. Although the LED 78 is used as an indicator for both the pressing order instruction information and the number of winning cards, it is possible not to interfere with the display of the number of winning cards.

<14th Embodiment (D)>
The fourteenth embodiment (D) differs from the fourteenth embodiments (A) to (D) in the display start timing of the pressing order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78, and the reel 31 can be stopped. Sometimes, the display of the push order instruction information is started.
FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing main processing (M_MAIN) in the fourteenth embodiment (D), and is a flowchart corresponding to FIG. 41 of the eleventh embodiment.
In the flowchart of the fourteenth embodiment (D) shown in FIG. 69, the step numbers different from those in FIG. 41 are underlined, and the same steps as in FIG. 41 are given the same step numbers. .

As shown in FIG. 69, in the fourteenth embodiment (D), when the rotation of the reel 31 is started in step S286, the process proceeds to step S604 to determine whether or not the reel 31 can be stopped. That is, it is determined whether or not the rotation of the reel 31 has reached a constant speed and the operation of the stop switch 42 can be accepted. When it is determined that the reel 31 can be stopped, the process advances to step S284 to execute the pushing order instruction number setting (M_ORG_INF).
The contents of the processing in the push order instruction number set (M_ORG_INF) in step S284 are the same as those in the eleventh embodiment and the fourteenth embodiment (A) to (C).
Also, the contents of the processing in the control command set 1 in steps S601 and S602 are the same as those in the fourteenth embodiment (B) and (C).

70 and 71 are time charts for explaining the fourteenth embodiment (D).
FIG. 70 shows the timing of the start and end of display of the push order instruction information when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) after the minimum game time elapses, and FIG. 41 is turned on (operated), the timing of the display start and display end of the push order instruction information is shown.
As described above, in the fourteenth embodiment (D), when the reel 31 becomes stoppable, the pressing order instruction number setting is executed. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. Regardless of whether the switch 41 is turned on (operated) or the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) after the minimum playing time has elapsed, when the reels 31 become stoppable, the winning number display LED 78 displays the pressing order instruction information. is started.

Also in the fourteenth embodiment (D), similarly to the fourteenth embodiments (A) to (C), when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) after the minimum playing time has elapsed, the , after the reels 31 start rotating and before the reels 31 can be stopped, the image display device 23 starts displaying the push order instruction image, and the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) before the minimum game time elapses. ), as shown in FIG. 71, before the reels 31 start rotating, the image display device 23 starts displaying the pushing order instruction image.
Therefore, in the fourteenth embodiment (D), similarly to the fourteenth embodiments (A) to (C), the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) before or after the minimum playing time. Regardless of whether the reels 31 can be stopped, display of the pushing order instruction image on the image display device 23 is started.

Furthermore, in the fourteenth embodiment (D), regardless of whether the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) before or after the minimum playing time has passed, when the reels 31 can be stopped, , display of the push order instruction information on the obtained number display LED 78 is started.
Therefore, in the fourteenth embodiment (D), as shown in FIGS. 70 and 71, regardless of whether the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) before or after the minimum playing time elapses, First, the display of the pressing order instruction image on the image display device 23 is started, and then the display of the pressing order instruction information on the obtained number display LED 78 is started.

Further, in the fourteenth embodiment (D), the display start timing of the pressing order instruction information on the obtained number display LED 78 can be delayed until the reel 31 can be stopped, so as in the fourteenth embodiment (B). , the player who has been waiting for the winning of the rare combination is not discouraged immediately after operating the start switch 41.例文帳に追加
Furthermore, in the fourteenth embodiment (D), although the display start timing of the pressing order instruction information on the acquisition number display LED 78 is delayed, the pressing order instruction information is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78 when the reel 31 can be stopped. is started, the player can be informed of the pressing order instruction information before the player operates the stop switch 42. - 特許庁

<14th Embodiment (E)>
In the fourteenth embodiment (E), similarly to the fourteenth embodiment (B), display of push order instruction information is started at the start of rotation of the reel 31, and medals are paid out in the same manner as in the fourteenth embodiment (C). In some cases, the display of the push order instruction information is ended.
FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing main processing (M_MAIN) in the fourteenth embodiment (E), and is a flowchart corresponding to FIG. 62 of the fourteenth embodiment (B) and FIG. 65 of the fourteenth embodiment (C). .
72, steps S271 to S286 are the same as in FIG. 62 of the fourteenth embodiment (B), and steps S287 to S303 are the same as in FIG. 65 of the fourteenth embodiment (C).

73 and 74 are time charts for explaining the fourteenth embodiment (E).
FIG. 73 shows timings for starting and ending display of the push order instruction information when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) after the minimum game time has passed, and FIG. 41 is turned on (operated), the timing of the display start and display end of the push order instruction information is shown.
As shown in FIGS. 73 and 74, in the fourteenth embodiment (E), similarly to FIGS. 63 and 64 of the fourteenth embodiment (B), when the reel 31 starts rotating, the winning number display LED 78 The display of the instruction information is started, and the display of the pressing order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78 is ended when the medals are paid out in the same manner as in FIGS. 67 and 68 of the fourteenth embodiment (C).

The timing of starting to display the number of medals obtained, the timing of transmitting the pushing order instruction number as a control command, and the timing of starting and ending display of the pushing order instruction image on the image display device 23 are the same as in the fourteenth embodiment (B ).
Further, in the fourteenth embodiment (E), similarly to the fourteenth embodiment (B), when it is determined that the minimum playing time has elapsed, the pressing order instruction number is stored as the winning number data so that the reel 31 , the display of the push order instruction information on the acquisition number display LED 78 is started.
Therefore, when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) before the minimum playing time elapses, it is possible to delay the display start timing of the pressing order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78 until the minimum playing time elapses. , the player who has been waiting for the winning of the rare combination is not discouraged immediately after operating the start switch 41.例文帳に追加

Furthermore, in the fourteenth embodiment (E), as in the fourteenth embodiment (C), even after all the reels 31 have stopped, the win count data is maintained without being cleared, and medal payout (M_WIN_PAY ), the payout number data is stored as the winning number data in step S611.
Therefore, even after all the reels 31 are stopped, it is possible to continue to display the push order instruction information on the winning number display LEDs 78 until the medals are paid out. Since the press order instruction information is switched to the acquired number, the acquired number display LED 78 is used as a display for both the pressing order instruction information and the acquired number, but the acquired number can be displayed without hindrance.

<14th Embodiment (F)>
FIG. 75 is a front view showing the outline of the configuration including the reel 31, the stop switch 42, and the operation instruction lamp 25 in the fourteenth embodiment (F).
As shown in FIG. 75, in the fourteenth embodiment (F), a stop instruction lamp 25 is provided below each reel 31 . The stop instruction lamp 25 indicates the reel 31 to be stopped, and is composed of an LED lamp.

The left stop instruction lamp 25 is provided below the left reel 31 and lights when the left reel 31 is instructed to stop.
Similarly, a stop instruction lamp 25 provided below the middle reel 31 and turned on when instructing the middle reel 31 to stop is the middle stop instruction lamp 25 .
A right stop instruction lamp 25 is provided below the right reel 31 and lights up when instructing the stop of the right reel 31 .
The sub-control board 80 controls lighting/extinguishing of each stop instruction lamp 25 .

Here, the sub-control board 80 is composed of a first sub-control board and a second sub-control board, and the stop instruction lamp 25 is electrically connected to the second sub-control board.
Then, the second sub-control board controls lighting/extinguishing of each stop instruction lamp 25 and displays an image on the image display device 23 based on the control command transmitted from the first sub-control board.

Specifically, when the conditions for activating the instruction function are met, that is, when a win with an advantageous push order such as a push order bell is won during AT, the main control board 50 performs control during the main process (M_MAIN). In command set 1, the push order instruction number as the control command is stored in the control command buffer.
Then, the main control board 50 transmits the control command (step S464) during the interrupt process (I_INTR) executed after this process, and transmits the push order instruction number as the control command stored in the control command buffer to the first sub-sub. Send to control board.

Further, when the first sub-control board receives a control command transmitted from the main control board 50, it stores (saves) the received control command in a predetermined storage area.
Furthermore, the first sub-control board executes sub-main processing every 16 ms, analyzes the control command in the loop processing during this sub-main processing, and as a result determines that it is the push order instruction number. , the lamp control command and the image command according to the analysis result are stored in the command buffer.

Furthermore, the first sub-control board transmits the lamp control command and the image command stored in the command buffer to the second sub-control board in the command transmission process during the next sub-main process.
For this reason, as in the fourteenth embodiment (A), after the main control board 50 transmits the pressing order instruction number as the control command to the first sub-control board, the second sub-control board transmits the lamp control command and the image. It takes about 32 ms (=sub-main processing cycle 16 ms×2) until the command is received.

Based on the received lamp control command, the second sub-control board controls lighting/extinguishing of the (left, middle, and right) stop instruction lamps 25, and performs drawing processing based on the received image command. Then, the image is displayed on the image display device 23 .
For example, when receiving a lamp control command and an image command indicating left first stop, the second sub-control board turns on the left stop instruction lamp 25 and turns off the middle stop instruction lamp 25 and the right stop instruction lamp 25. At the same time, an image prompting the operation of the left stop switch 42 is displayed on the image display device 23 .

Further, in the fourteenth embodiment (F), the second sub-control board executes interrupt processing every 1 ms, and controls lighting/extinguishing of each stop instruction lamp 25 in this interrupt processing.
Therefore, the second sub-control board takes about 1 ms from receiving the lamp control command transmitted from the first sub-control board to lighting the stop instruction lamp 25 corresponding to the reel 31 to be stopped. need.

Furthermore, as described above, it takes about 32 ms from when the main control board 50 transmits the control command to the first sub-control board until the second sub-control board receives the lamp control command.
Therefore, it takes about 33 ms (=32 ms+1 ms) from when the main control board 50 transmits the control command to the first sub-control board until the second sub-control board turns on the stop instruction lamp 25 .

Also in the fourteenth embodiment (F), as in the fourteenth embodiment (A), the second sub-control board executes drawing processing at 30 fps (frames per second), so that one image can be displayed as an image. It takes about 33.33 ms to display on the device 23 .
Therefore, in the fourteenth embodiment (F), as in the fourteenth embodiment (A), after the main control board 50 transmits the control command to the first sub-control board, the second sub-control board It takes about 65.33 ms (=32 ms+33.33 ms) to display the push order instruction image on the display device 23 .
As described above, in the fourteenth embodiment (F), the stop instruction lamp 25 is turned on first, and then the push order instruction image is displayed on the image display device 23 .

76 and 77 are time charts for explaining the fourteenth embodiment (F).
FIG. 76 shows timings for starting and ending the display of the push order instruction information when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) after the minimum game time has passed, and FIG. 41 is turned on (operated), the timing of the display start and display end of the push order instruction information is shown.

Although not shown, also in the fourteenth embodiment (F), similarly to the fourteenth embodiment (B), the pressing order instruction number setting is executed after the reel rotation start preparation is executed.
Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 76 and 77, in the fourteenth embodiment (F) as well, as in the fourteenth embodiment (B), whether or not the start switch 41 is operated before the minimum playing time elapses. Or, regardless of whether or not it has elapsed, display of the pressing order instruction information on the obtained number display LED 78 starts when the reel 31 starts rotating.

Also, although not shown, in the fourteenth embodiment (F), when it is detected that the third stop switch 42 is turned on, the acquisition number data is cleared. Then, the display of the acquisition number display LED 78 becomes "00" by the interrupt processing executed after this processing.
Therefore, in the fourteenth embodiment (F), as shown in FIGS. 76 and 77, when the third stop switch 42 is turned on (operated), display of the pressing order instruction information on the obtained number display LED 78 ends.
The timing of starting the display of the number of medals obtained and the timing of transmitting the pushing order instruction number as a control command are the same as in the fourteenth embodiment (A) to (E).

Further, as described above, it takes about 33 ms from when the main control board 50 transmits the control command to the first sub-control board until the second sub-control board turns on the stop instruction lamp 25. It takes about 65.33 ms from when the main control board 50 transmits the control command to the first sub-control board until the second sub-control board displays the push order instruction image on the image display device 23 .

Therefore, when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) after the minimum playing time has passed, as shown in FIG. The instruction lamp 25 lights up, and then the image display device 23 displays a push order instruction image.
On the other hand, for example, when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) one second before the minimum playing time elapses, it takes about one second from the turning on (operation) of the start switch 41 to the start of rotation of the reels 31. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 77, before the reel 31 starts rotating, the stop instruction lamp 25 is first turned on, and then the push order instruction image is displayed on the image display device 23 .

Further, when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) after the minimum playing time has elapsed, first, as shown in FIG. lights up, and finally, a push order instruction image is displayed on the image display device 23 .
On the other hand, when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) before the minimum playing time elapses, as shown in FIG. An order instruction image is displayed, and finally, the push order instruction information is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 .

Further, in the fourteenth embodiment (F), similarly to the fourteenth embodiments (B) and (E), when it is determined that the minimum game time has elapsed, the pressing order instruction number is stored as the acquisition number data. Thus, when the reel 31 starts rotating, display of the pressing order instruction information on the obtained number display LED 78 is started.
Therefore, when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) before the minimum playing time elapses, the display start timing of the pressing order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78 can be delayed until the minimum playing time elapses. , the player who has been waiting for the winning of the rare combination is not discouraged immediately after operating the start switch 41.例文帳に追加

As shown in FIGS. 76 and 77, regardless of whether the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) before or after the minimum game time has passed, the stop instruction lamp 25 is turned on first. After that, a push order instruction image is displayed on the image display device 23 .
Both the stop instruction lamp 25 and the image display device 23 are controlled by the second sub-control board. 25 lights earlier.

<14th Embodiment (G)>
The fourteenth embodiment (G) is provided with a dedicated 7-segment display (7 segments) for displaying the pressing order instruction information, and the timing of ending the display of the pressing order instruction information is the same as that of the fourteenth embodiment (F). , and the rest is the same as the fourteenth embodiment (F).
A dedicated 7-segment display for displaying the pressing order instruction information is referred to as a pressing order instruction LED.
Further, in the fourteenth embodiment (G), the RWM 53 secures a storage area for the pressing order instruction data. The push order instruction data is data for displaying the push order instruction information on the push order instruction LED.

78 and 79 are time charts for explaining the fourteenth embodiment (G).
FIG. 78 shows timings for starting and ending display of the push order instruction information when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) after the minimum game time has passed, and FIG. 41 is turned on (operated), the timing of the display start and display end of the push order instruction information is shown.

Also in the 14th embodiment (G), similarly to the 14th embodiments (B) and (F), after the reel rotation start preparation is executed, the pressing order instruction number setting is executed.
For this reason, as shown in FIGS. 78 and 79, in the fourteenth embodiment (G) as well as in the fourteenth embodiments (B) and (F), when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated), the minimum game is played. Regardless of whether it is before the time elapses or after the time elapses, the display of the pushing order instruction information starts when the reel 31 starts rotating.
In the fourteenth embodiment (G), the push order instruction number is set in the push order instruction data storage area of the RWM 53 . As a result, the push order instruction information is displayed on the push order instruction LED in the interrupt process executed after this process.

In addition, in the fourteenth embodiment (A) to (F), since the push order instruction information is displayed on the winning number display LED 78, by clearing the winning number data by the time the medals are paid out, the winning number display LED 78 It was possible to display the number of medals obtained.
On the other hand, in the fourteenth embodiment (G), even when the medals are paid out, the pushing order instruction data is maintained without being cleared, so as shown in FIGS. The pressing order instruction information (for example, "=1") continues to be displayed on the order instruction LED.

Furthermore, in the fourteenth embodiment (G), when the payout of medals is completed, the push order instruction data is cleared. Then, the display of the push order indication LED becomes "00" by the interrupt process executed after this process.
Therefore, in the fourteenth embodiment (G), as shown in FIGS. 78 and 79, the display of the pushing order instruction information on the pushing order instruction LED ends after the medals are paid out.

As described above, in the fourteenth embodiment (G), the push order instruction information is not displayed on the acquired number display LED 78, but is displayed on the dedicated push order instruction LED. Even if it continues, the display of the number of acquired medals can be prevented.
The timing of starting display of the number of medals obtained, the timing of transmitting the push order instruction number as a control command, the timing of starting and ending the display of the operation instruction lamp 25, and the start of displaying the push order instruction image on the image display device 23. And the display end timing is the same as in the fourteenth embodiment (F).

<Summary of the 14th embodiment>
From the time the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) to the time the reel 31 can be stopped (the rotation of the reel 31 reaches a constant speed and the operation of the stop switch 42 can be accepted). If displayed, the player can be notified of the correct order of pressing before the player turns on (operates) the stop switch 42 .
Therefore, the timing for starting the display of the push order instruction information is
1) When the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) 2) After the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) and before the reel 31 starts rotating 3) When the reel 31 starts rotating 4) After the reel 31 starts rotating and before the reel 31 becomes stoppable; and 5) when the reel 31 becomes stoppable.

Further, in the case where the pressing order instruction information is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78, if the display of the pressing order instruction information is finished from the time when the third stop switch 42 is turned on (operated) to the time when the medals are paid out, the medals are displayed. can be set so as not to interfere with the display of the acquired number of
Therefore, the timing for ending the display of the push order instruction information is
1) When the third stop switch 42 is turned on (operated) 2) When the third stop switch 42 is turned off after being turned on (when the player releases the third stop switch 42)
3) when all reels 31 are stopped; and 4) when medals are paid out.
In the case where the pressing order instruction information is displayed on the dedicated pressing order display LED, the pressing order instruction information may continue to be displayed when the medals are paid out, and the display of the pressing order instruction information may be terminated after the medals are paid out. .

In addition, until the sub-control board 80 (second sub-control board) displays the push order instruction image on the image display device 23, the main control board 50 generates the control command, and the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 , the control command is received and analyzed by the sub-control board 80, and the drawing processing and display are performed by the sub-control board 80 (second sub-control board), so a certain amount of time is required.
Therefore, even if the main control board 50 displays the push order instruction information on the obtained number display LED 78 and transmits the control command to the sub control board 80 at the same time, the push order instruction image is not displayed on the image display device 23. will be delayed.

Depending on whether the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) before or after the minimum game time has elapsed, the reels 31 start rotating and the pushing order instruction image starts to be displayed on the image display device 23. order may be changed.
Therefore, the timing of starting to display the push order instruction image on the image display device 23 is as follows.
1) after the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) and before the reel 31 starts rotating; and 2) after the reel 31 starts rotating and before the reel 31 can be stopped.

Also, after the main control board 50 transmits the control command to the sub-control board 80, until the sub-control board 80 (second sub-control board) finishes displaying the push order instruction image on the image display device 23, , takes a certain amount of time.
Therefore, the display of the push order instruction image on the image display device 23 ends after the third stop switch 42 is turned on (operated).
Then, the display start timing of the push order instruction information on the acquisition number display LED 78, the display end timing of the push order instruction information on the acquisition number display LED 78, the display start timing of the push order instruction image on the image display device 23, and the push order The display end timing of the instruction image on the image display device 23 is not limited to the combination shown in the 14th embodiment (A) to (G), and can be set by any suitable combination.

In a game in which the pressing order instruction information is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78, even if an error in the pressing order occurs in the middle of the game, the pressing order instruction information is displayed until a predetermined time after the third stop switch 42 is turned on (operated). may continue to be displayed as it is, or the display of the pressing order instruction information may be terminated when an error in the pressing order occurs.
Similarly, in a game in which the push order instruction image is displayed on the image display device 23, even if a mistake in the push order occurs in the middle of the game, the push order instruction will continue until a predetermined time after the third stop switch 42 is turned on (operated). The image may continue to be displayed as it is, or the display of the pressing order instruction image may be terminated when an error in pressing order occurs.

In addition, when the replay wins when three coins are inserted, three medals are automatically betted and the game can be started. The LED 79f lights up.
At this time, when the third stop switch 42 is operated and the symbol combination corresponding to the replay is stopped and displayed, first, the 1-bet display LED 79a lights up, the 2-bet display LED 79b, the 3-bet display LED 79c, and the game start display. The LED 79d and the replay display LED 79f are turned off.

After that, the 2-bet display LED 79b and the 3-bet display LED 79c are sequentially lit, and finally, the 1-bet display LED 79a, the 2-bet display LED 79b, the 3-bet display LED 79c, the game start display LED 79d, and the replay display LED 79f are lit.
When a replay win is made when three cards are inserted, the 1-bet display LED 79a lights up, and the 2-bet display LED 79b, 3-bet display LED 79c, game start display LED 79d, and replay display LED 79f go out. The display of the instruction information on the acquisition number display LED 78 may be ended.

In addition, when a small winning combination is won, the display of the pressing order instruction information on the winning number display LED 78 ends when the third stop switch 42 is turned on, when the third stop switch is turned off, when all reels 31 are stopped, or when medals are paid out. When the replay wins, the 1-bet display LED 79a lights up, and the 2-bet display LED 79b, the 3-bet display LED 79c, the game start display LED 79d, and the replay display LED 79f go out. Display of the instruction information may be ended.
In other words, the display end timing of the pressing order instruction information may be different between when a small win is won and when a replay win is won.
Of course, the display end timing of the pressing order instruction information may be the same between when a small win is won and when a replay win is won.

Although the fourteenth embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the contents described above, and for example, the following modifications are possible.
(1) In the fourteenth embodiment (A), two sets of 8-bit parallel communication lines are used. By transmitting two control commands to the sub-control board 80, it is possible to transmit a control command consisting of 2-byte data to the sub-control board 80 in one interrupt process.

However, not limited to this, for example, a control command consisting of 2-byte data may be transmitted to the sub-control board 80 using only one set of 8-bit parallel communication lines.
In this case, the first control command and the second control command may be sequentially transmitted in one control command transmission during interrupt processing. As a result, a control command consisting of 2-byte data can be transmitted to the sub-control board 80 in one interrupt process.

Alternatively, the control command transmission during one interrupt process may transmit the first control command, and the control command transmission during the next interrupt process may transmit the second control command. As a result, a control command consisting of 2-byte data may be transmitted to the sub-control board 80 in two interrupt processes.
Furthermore, control commands may be transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub-control board 80 not only by parallel communication but also by serial communication.
Furthermore, the control command may be transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub-control board 80 by electrical connection, and the control command may be transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub-control board 80 by connection using optical communication means. good too.

(2) In the fourteenth embodiment (A), the main control board 50 transmits the push order instruction number as the control command to the sub control board 80 (first sub control board), and the sub control board 80 (second sub control board). The board) executed drawing processing based on the received push order instruction number, and displayed the push order instruction image on the image display device 23 .
However, not limited to this, for example, the main control board 50 transmits the condition device number as a control command to the sub control board 80 (first sub control board), and the sub control board 80 (second sub control board) Drawing processing may be executed based on the received conditional device number, and the pressing order instruction number may be displayed on the image display device 23 .

Also, for example, the main control board 50 transmits the effect group number as a control command to the sub-control board 80 (first sub-control board), and the sub-control board 80 (second sub-control board) transmits the received effect group number The drawing process may be executed based on , and the push order instruction number may be displayed on the image display device 23 .
(3) The first to fourteenth embodiments and the various modifications shown in the first to fourteenth embodiments are not limited to being implemented independently, and can be implemented in combination as appropriate.

<Fifteenth embodiment>
The fifteenth embodiment relates to the timing of addition processing for medals inserted from the medal slot 47. FIG.
Fifteenth embodiments (A) to (C) in which the medal addition processing timing is different will be described below.

<Fifteenth Embodiment (A)>
The configuration of the medal selector in the fifteenth embodiment (A) is the same as the configuration of the medal selector shown in FIG. 2 of the first embodiment.
That is, when a medal is inserted from the medal slot 47, the medal flows down the medal passage in the medal selector. A passage sensor 46, an insertion sensor 44a, and an insertion sensor 44b are provided from the upstream side on the medal passage in the medal selector. A blocker 45 is provided between the passage sensor 46 and the entry sensor 44a.

A medal inserted from the medal slot 47 first passes through the path sensor 46 and then reaches the position of the blocker 45 . Also, when the blocker 45 is in the ON state, the medals flowing down the medal passage pass through the blocker 45 and then reach the positions of the insertion sensors 44a and 44b.
The input sensors 44a and 44b are installed with a predetermined distance therebetween.
Before the medals reach the positions of the inserted sensors 44a and 44b, the inserted sensors 44a and 44b are both off.
Also, when the medals flow down the medal passage, first, the insertion sensor 44a is turned on from off, and the insertion sensor 44b remains off.

Further, when medals flow down the medal passage, the insertion sensor 44a remains on, and the insertion sensor 44b turns on from off.
After that, when the medal further flows down the medal passage, the insertion sensor 44a is turned off from on, and the insertion sensor 44b remains on.
After that, when the medal further flows down the medal passage, the insertion sensor 44b is turned off from on while the insertion sensor 44a remains off.
The medals that have passed through the insertion sensors 44 a and 44 b reach the hopper 35 .

FIG. 80 is a diagram showing execution timing of medal addition processing in the fifteenth embodiment (A).
At the timing of (a) in FIG. 80, the input sensors 44a and 44b are both off.
At the timing of (b) in FIG. 80, the input sensor 44a is on and the input sensor 44b is off.
The state of (b) in FIG. 80 corresponds to the state of (a) in FIG. 4 in the first embodiment (B).
80 continues for a predetermined time or longer, the main control board 50 determines that a medal passing error has occurred, and transmits an error command to the sub control board 80. FIG. Then, when the sub-control board 80 receives the error command, it outputs an error sound from the speaker 22 .

At the timing of (c) in FIG. 80, the input sensors 44a and 44b are both ON.
The state of (c) in FIG. 80 corresponds to the state of (b) or (c) in FIG. 4 in the first embodiment (B).
Also, if the state of (c) in FIG. 80 continues for a predetermined period of time or more, the main control board 50 determines that there is a medal passing error, and the sub-control board 80 receives an error as in the case of (b) in FIG. Send command. Then, when the sub-control board 80 receives the error command, it outputs an error sound from the speaker 22 .

At the timing of (d) in FIG. 80, the input sensor 44a is off and the input sensor 44b is on.
The state of (d) in FIG. 80 corresponds to the state of (d) in FIG. 4 in the first embodiment (B).
Further, if the state of (d) in FIG. 80 continues for a predetermined time or longer, the main control board 50 determines that there is a medal passing error, as in the case of (b) and (c) in FIG. Send an error command to the board 80 . Then, when the sub-control board 80 receives the error command, it outputs an error sound from the speaker 22 .

At the timing of (e) in FIG. 80, the input sensors 44a and 44b are both off.
The state of (e) in FIG. 80 corresponds to the state of (e) in FIG. 4 in the first embodiment (B).
In addition, in the state of (e) in FIG. 80, the main control board 50 determines that medals have been inserted, and executes medal "1" addition processing (bet processing or credit processing).
Here, when the state (e) in FIG. 80 is reached, if the number of bets is less than the specified number, the main control board 50 executes the processing of adding "1" to the number of bets. For example, when the prescribed number in the game is "3" and the bet number at that time is "1", the bet number is increased from "1" to "2" by adding "1" to the bet number. update to.

In addition, when the state of (e) in FIG. 80 is reached, if the number of bets has already reached the specified number and the number of credits has not reached the maximum number of "50", the main control The board 50 executes processing for adding "1" to the number of credits. For example, if the number of credits at that time is "20", the number of credits is updated to "21".
Further, when the state of (e) in FIG. Then, when receiving the input command, the sub-control board 80 outputs the input sound from the speaker 22 .
When a medal passage error occurs before the state of (e) in FIG. 80 is reached, the main control board 50 does not execute the medal "1" addition process and does not transmit an insertion command.

Also, when a plurality of medals are inserted from the medal slot 47, (a) to (e) in FIG. 80 are repeated.
Then, in the state of (e) in FIG. 80, by executing the bet number addition processing of "1", when the bet number reaches the specified number, the main control board 50 causes the start switch 41 to be operated. The game is put into a state where it can be accepted (game can be started), and the game start display LED 79d is turned on.

<Fifteenth Embodiment (B)>
The fifteenth embodiment (B) differs from the fifteenth embodiment (A) in the execution timing of the medal "1" addition processing.
The configuration of the medal selector in the fifteenth embodiment (B) is also the same as the configuration of the medal selector shown in FIG. 2 of the first embodiment.

FIG. 81 is a diagram showing execution timing of medal addition processing in the fifteenth embodiment (B).
Since (a) to (c) in FIG. 81 are the same as (a) to (c) in FIG. 80, the description is omitted, and (d) and (e) in FIG. Since it is different from (d) and (e) in FIG. 80, it will be described below.

At the timing of (d) in FIG. 81, the input sensor 44a is off and the input sensor 44b is on.
The state of (d) in FIG. 81 corresponds to the state of (d) in FIG. 4 in the first embodiment (B).
Then, in the fifteenth embodiment (B), when the state of (d) in FIG. 81 is reached, the main control board 50 determines that medals have been inserted, and performs medal "1" addition processing (betting processing or credit processing). ). At this time, when the number of bets is less than the specified number, the bet number is added to the number of "1", and when the number of bets has already reached the specified number, the credit amount reaches the maximum number of "50". If the number of credits has not yet reached, the process of adding "1" to the number of credits is executed in the same manner as in the fifteenth embodiment (A).

Furthermore, in the fifteenth embodiment (B), the main control board 50 transmits the input command to the sub control board 80 when the state of (d) in FIG. 81 is reached. Then, when receiving the input command, the sub-control board 80 outputs the input sound from the speaker 22 .
However, in the fifteenth embodiment (B), when the state of (d) in FIG. 81 continues for a predetermined time or longer, the main control board 50 determines that there is a medal passing error and transmits an error command to the sub control board 80. . Then, when the sub-control board 80 receives the error command, it outputs an error sound from the speaker 22 .

For this reason, in the fifteenth embodiment (B), there is a case where it is determined that there is a medal passage error and an error sound is output after executing the medal "1" addition processing and outputting the throwing sound.
In this way, when the state of (d) in FIG. 81 is reached, the medal "1" addition processing is executed and a throwing sound is output, and then the state of (d) in FIG. When the error sound is output continuously, the error sound is output after the insertion sound is output, so that even if an error occurs, the player can be notified by the insertion sound that the medals have been inserted. .
When a medal passing error occurs in the state of (b) or (c) in FIG. 81, the main control board 50 does not execute the medal "1" addition processing and does not transmit the insertion command.

At the timing of (e) in FIG. 81, the input sensors 44a and 44b are both off.
Also, when a plurality of medals are inserted from the medal slot 47, (a) to (e) in FIG. 81 are repeated.
Then, when the bet number reaches the specified number by executing the bet number "1" addition processing, the main control board 50 operates the start switch 41 in the state of (e) in FIG. A state is set in which the game can be accepted, and the game start display LED 79d is turned on.
Therefore, in the fifteenth embodiment (B), the medal "1" addition processing is executed, the timing of outputting the throwing sound and the operation of the start switch 41 can be accepted, and the game start display LED 79d is lit. different from the timing.

Here, as described in the fifteenth embodiment (A), at the timing of (e) in FIG. It is common practice to
However, if the medal flows down the medal passage to the position of (d) in FIG.
Therefore, in the fifteenth embodiment (B), at the timing of (d) in FIG. 81 (when the insertion sensor 44b remains on and the insertion sensor 44a turns off from on), the medal "1" is displayed. Execute addition. As a result, it is possible to prevent so-called swallowing of medals, in which medals enter the hopper 35 even though the medal addition process is not executed.

Further, in the fifteenth embodiment (B), as described above, when the state (d) in FIG. An error command is transmitted, and the sub-control board 80 outputs an error sound from the speaker 22 . In this case, when the error sound is output, the medal addition processing has already been executed and the throwing sound is output, so the error should be canceled and the medals stuck in the medal selector should be put into the hopper 35. - 特許庁As a result, the player can be prevented from being disadvantaged.

Further, when medals are continuously inserted from the medal slot 47 and the number of credits reaches the maximum number of "50", the 51st medal is removed from the medal passage at the position of the blocker 45. It is returned from the medal payout port 16. - 特許庁
At this time, at the timing when the fiftieth medal becomes the state (d) in FIG. 45 off. As a result, the fifty-first medal can be reliably returned from the medal pay-out port 16 without being swallowed.

Further, in the fifteenth embodiment (B), in the state of (d) in FIG. 81, when the bet number reaches the prescribed number by executing the process of adding "1" to the bet number, the start switch 41 is operated. can be accepted. At this time, when the start switch 41 is operated, the main control board 50 transmits a start command to the sub control board 80 . Then, when the sub-control board 80 receives the start command, it outputs a sound effect from the speaker 22 .

Here, as in the fifteenth embodiment (A), at the timing of (e) in FIG. 80, when the operation of the start switch 41 is made ready to be accepted and the input command is transmitted to the sub-control board 80, There is a possibility that the input sound and the effect sound based on the operation of the start switch 41 will overlap.
Therefore, in the fifteenth embodiment (B), the input command is transmitted to the sub-control board 80 at the timing (d) in FIG. 81, and the start switch 41 is operated at the timing (e) in FIG. make it acceptable. As a result, it is possible to avoid overlap between the input sound and the sound effect based on the operation of the start switch 41 .

<Fifteenth Embodiment (C)>
The fifteenth embodiment (C) is the same as the fifteenth embodiment (B) in terms of execution timing of the medal "1" addition processing, but the timing of outputting the insertion sound is the same as in the fifteenth embodiment (B). They are different.
The configuration of the medal selector in the fifteenth embodiment (C) is also the same as the configuration of the medal selector shown in FIG. 2 of the first embodiment.

FIG. 82 is a diagram showing execution timing of medal addition processing in the fifteenth embodiment (C).
(a) to (c) in FIG. 82 are the same as (a) to (c) in FIGS. is different from (d) and (e) in FIGS. 80 and 81, and will be described below.

At the timing of (d) in FIG. 82, the input sensor 44a is off and the input sensor 44b is on.
The state of (d) in FIG. 82 corresponds to the state of (d) in FIG. 4 in the first embodiment (B).
Then, in the fifteenth embodiment (C), when the state of (d) in FIG. 82 is reached, the main control board 50 determines that medals have been inserted, and adds "1" to the medals (bet processing or credit processing). ). At this time, when the number of bets is less than the specified number, the bet number is added to the number of "1", and when the number of bets has already reached the specified number, the credit amount reaches the maximum number of "50". If the number of credits has not yet reached, the processing of adding "1" to the number of credits is executed in the same manner as in the fifteenth embodiment (A) and (B).

However, in the fifteenth embodiment (C), unlike the fifteenth embodiment (B), the main control board 50 does not transmit the input command to the sub-control board 80 at the timing (d) in FIG.
Then, in the fifteenth embodiment (C), the main control board 50 transmits the input command to the sub control board 80 at the timing of (e) in FIG. Then, when receiving the input command, the sub-control board 80 outputs the input sound from the speaker 22 .

Here, it is assumed that the state of (d) in FIG. 82 has continued for a predetermined period of time or longer, and the main control board 50 determines that there is a medal passing error and transmits an error command to the sub control board 80 . Assume that the sub-control board 80 outputs an error sound from the speaker 22 .
In this case, the medal "1" addition processing is executed, but an error sound is output without outputting the insertion sound. Thereby, priority can be given to error notification.

When the error is cleared, the main control board 50 transmits a closing command to the sub-control board 80, and the sub-control board 80 outputs a closing sound from the speaker 22 based on the received closing command. As a result, it is possible to inform the player that medals have been inserted, so that the player can be relieved.
Further, in the state of (e) in FIG. 82, by executing the bet number "1" addition processing, when the bet number reaches the specified number, the operation of the start switch 41 can be accepted, Lighting the game start display LED 79d is the same as in the fifteenth embodiment (A) and (B).

<Sixteenth Embodiment>
The sixteenth embodiment relates to a chute passage 48 that guides medals that have passed through the insertion sensors 44a and 44b of the medal selector to the hopper 35, and a chute sensor 49 provided in the middle of the chute passage 48. FIG.
FIG. 83 is a diagram showing the medal selector, the shoot path 48, and the shoot sensor 49. A medal M inserted from the medal insertion slot 47 passes through the insertion sensor 44a, the insertion sensor 44b, and the shoot sensor 49, and passes through the hopper. 35 is a schematic diagram showing a state of reaching 35. FIG.

The chute passage 48 is a passage for guiding the medals M that have passed through the insertion sensors 44a and 44b of the medal selector to the hopper 35, and is connected to the downstream side of the medal passage of the medal selector. Then, the medal M inserted from the medal slot 47 reaches the hopper 35 through the medal passage of the medal selector and the chute passage 35 .

The shoot sensor 49 is a sensor provided for judging whether or not there is a jammed medal or an act of cheating. and electrically connected to the main control board 50 .
Since the chute passage 48 is a passage that guides the medals M that have passed through the throw-in sensors 44a and 44b to the hopper 35, the shoot sensor 49 is arranged downstream of the throw-in sensors 44a and 44b.

In the sixteenth embodiment, the insertion monitoring counter adds "1" (when the insertion sensors 44a and 44b detect the passing of the medal M (when both the insertion sensors 44a and 44b are turned off→on→off). "+1"), and is subtracted "1"("-1") when the shoot sensor 49 detects the passage of the medal M. For this reason, the input monitoring counter repeats "1" and "0" during normal operation.
The timing of adding "1" to the input monitoring counter is the timing when the input sensor 44b turns off from ON (timing of (e) in FIGS. 4 and 80 to 82).
Further, the timing of adding "1" to the input monitoring counter is not limited to the timing at which the input sensor 44b turns off from on, but for example, the timing at which the input sensor 44a turns on from off (see FIGS. 4 and 80 to 82). (b)), or the timing at which the input sensor 44a turns off from on (the timing in (c) of FIGS. 4 and 80 to 82), or the timing at which the input sensor 44b turns on from off. (timing of (d) in FIGS. 4 and 80 to 82). This is because it is considered that the medal M enters the hopper 35 when the medal M reaches these timings.
Also, when the medal M passes the shoot sensor 49, the shoot sensor 49 is turned off→on→off, but the timing of subtracting "1" from the insertion monitoring counter is the timing when the shot sensor 49 turns off from on. be.

Further, when the insertion sensors 44a and 44b detect the passage of the medal M (insertion monitoring counter=“+1”) and the shoot sensor 49 does not detect the passage of the medal M, the insertion sensors 44a and 44b detect the medal M is further detected, the insertion monitoring counter becomes "+2", and the main control board 50 determines that a medal passage error has occurred.
Furthermore, when the insertion sensors 44a and 44b do not detect the passage of the medals M, and only the shoot sensor 49 detects the passage of the medals M, the insertion monitoring counter becomes "-1", and the main control board 50 detects the medals M Judged as a passage error.

It should be noted that the main control board 50 determines that there is a medal passing error not only when the insertion monitoring counter has become "+2" or "-1". For example, the main control board 50 may determine that a medal passage error has occurred when the insertion monitoring counter reaches a predetermined value of "+2" or more and when it reaches a predetermined value of "-1" or less.
Further, the main control board 50 determines that a medal retention error occurs when the shooting sensor 49 continues to detect the medal M even after a predetermined time has elapsed after detecting the medal M. Then, when the main control board 50 determines that there is a medal retention error, the progress of the game is stopped until the error is cleared.

As shown in FIG. 83, the medal M inserted from the medal slot 47 reaches the hopper 35 through the medal passage and the chute passage 48 . At this time, it passes through the throw-in sensor 44a, the throw-in sensor 44b, and the shoot sensor 49.
Here, it is assumed that the tip of the chute passage 48 is jammed with medals M. In FIG. 83, the position of M1 indicates the position of the medals M placed in the medal slot 47, the position of M2 indicates the position of the medals M jammed at the tip of the chute passage 48, and the position of M3 indicates the position of the chute. The position of the second medal M from the tip of the passage 48 is indicated, and the position of M4 indicates the position of the third medal M from the tip of the chute passage 48 .

As shown in FIG. 83, in the sixteenth embodiment, when the tip of the shoot passage 48 is jammed with medals M, the shot is placed at a position where the third medal M (M4) from the tip of the shoot passage 48 can be detected. A sensor 49 is arranged.
Therefore, when the tip of the chute path 48 is jammed with medals M, the third medal M (M4) from the tip of the chute path 48 is detected by the shoot sensor 49, and if this state continues for a predetermined time or longer, the main control board 50 determines that there is a medal retention error, and stops the progress of the game until the error is cleared.

For example, assume that three medals M are inserted from the medal slot 47 when the prescribed number is "3" and both the bet number and the credit number are "0". In this case, when the insertion sensors 44a and 44b detect the passage of the third medal M, the main control board 50 puts the start switch 41 in a state where it can accept the operation (game can be started), and the game start display LED 79d. light up. At this time, when the first medal M (M2) is jammed at the tip of the shoot passage 48, the shoot sensor 49 detects the third medal M (M4). When this state continues for a predetermined time or more, the main control board 50 determines that a medal retention error has occurred, and stops the progress of the game. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from playing the game with the medals M clogged in the chute passage 48. - 特許庁

Note that the position of the shoot sensor 49 is not limited to the position where the third medal M (M4) from the tip of the shoot passage 48 can be detected when the medals M are jammed at the tip of the shoot passage 48 . Assuming that the specified number is "N", the shoot sensor 49 may be arranged at a position where it can detect the N-th medal M from the tip of the shoot passage 48 when medals M are jammed at the tip of the shoot passage 48. . As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from playing the game with the medals M clogged in the chute passage 48. - 特許庁

<Seventeenth Embodiment>
The seventeenth embodiment relates to a payout medal passage 134 that guides the medals ejected from the ejection portion 103 of the medal payout device 15 to the medal payout port 16 .
84 is a front view of passage forming member 130, FIG. 85 is a rear view of passage forming member 130, FIG. 86 is a left side view of passage forming member 130, and FIG. It is an AA cross-sectional view.

The slot machine 10 has a box-shaped cabinet 13 with an open front and a front door 12 closing the opening of the cabinet 13. - 特許庁
A medal payout device 15 is arranged in the lower part of the inside of the cabinet 13 .
Furthermore, a medal slot 47, a start switch 41, a stop switch 42, and the like are arranged at the front center of the front door 12, and a medal selector is located on the back side of the front door 12 at a position corresponding to the medal slot 47. are placed.
Further, a medal payout port 16 is provided at the bottom of the front door 12, and a medal receiving tray for receiving medals paid out from the medal payout port 16 is provided at the bottom front of the front door 12. A passage forming member 130 is attached to the lower portion.

84 and 85, the passage forming member 130 is formed in a bent shape, and is attached to a predetermined position on the lower back surface of the front door 12 to form the return medal passage 132 and the payout medal passage. 134.
Furthermore, the return medal passage 132 is a passage for guiding the medals that are not allowed to be inserted by the blocker 45 of the medal selector to the medal payout port 16 .
Further, the payout medal passage 134 is a passage that guides the medals ejected from the discharge section 103 of the medal payout device 15 to the medal payout port 16 .
Note that the return medal passage 132 and the paid-out medal passage 134 join in the middle to form one passage.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 84 and 85, an upper medal receiving opening 131 is provided in the upper portion of the passage forming member 130. As shown in FIGS. The upper medal receiving opening 131 is an opening for receiving medals that are not permitted to be inserted by the blocker 45, and is an opening at the upstream end of the returning medal passage 132. When the front door 12 is closed, the upper medal receiving opening 131 is opened. It is formed so as to be positioned below the blocker 45 of the medal selector in the folded state.
After passing through the upper medal reception port 131, the medals that are not allowed to be inserted by the blocker 45 are guided by the return medal passage 132, pass through the medal payout port 16, and are stored in the medal tray.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 84 and 85, a lower medal receiving opening 133 is provided at a position below the center of the passage forming member 130 and to the left when viewed from the front (to the right when viewed from the back). ing. The lower medal receiving opening 133 is an opening for receiving the medals ejected from the ejection section 103 of the medal dispensing device 15, and is an opening serving as an upstream end of the dispensing medal passage 134. It is formed so as to be located in front of the ejection part 103 of the medal payout device 15 when the medal payout device 12 is closed.
The medals ejected from the discharge part 103 of the medal payout device 15 pass through the lower medal receiving port 133, are guided by the payout medal passage 134, pass through the medal payout port 16, and are stored in the medal tray. .

86 and 87, the lower medal receiving opening 133 is formed on the back side of the passage forming member 130, and the front side of the passage forming member 130 constitutes the back side of the front door 12. Plates are placed. In this manner, there is a distance corresponding to the depth of the passage forming member 130 from the lower medal receiving opening 133 to the rear surface of the front door 12 .
Here, the medals M ejected from the ejection portion 103 of the medal payout device 15 pass through the lower medal receiving opening 133, pass through the payout medal passage 134, and reach a position facing the lower medal receiving opening 133 on the back surface of the front door 12. hit and bounce. At this time, if the distance from the lower medal receiving opening 133 to the rear surface of the front door 12 is short, the medal M bounced back from the rear surface of the front door 12 and the medal M is ejected from the discharge section 103 of the medal dispensing device 15 next. There is a possibility that it will collide with the medal M that is attached.

Therefore, in the seventeenth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 87, when the distance from the lower medal receiving opening 133 to the rear surface of the front door 12 is "L1" and the diameter of the medal M is "D", "L1 ≧2D”.
That is, the distance "L1" from the lower medal receiving opening 133 to the rear surface of the front door 12 is set to be at least twice the diameter "D" of the medal M.
As a result, the medal M bounced back from the back surface of the front door 12 and the medal M ejected from the discharge part 103 of the medal dispensing device 15 next to the medal M are prevented from colliding.

That is, the medals M ejected from the ejection portion 103 of the medal dispensing device 15 are directed toward the rear surface of the front door 12 (to the right in FIG. 87) while falling downward due to gravity. Therefore, the medal M ejected from the ejecting portion 103 of the medal payout device 15 hits the rear surface of the front door 12 at a position lower than the ejected position. Furthermore, the medal M that hits the back surface of the front door 12 and bounces back is directed toward the lower medal receiving opening 133 (leftward in FIG. 87) while dropping downward due to gravity.
If the distance "L1" from the lower medal receiving opening 133 to the rear surface of the front door 12 is set to be at least twice the diameter "D" of the medal M, the medal is ejected from the ejection section 103 of the medal dispensing device 15. A sufficient height difference can be ensured between the medal M directed toward the back side of the front door 12 and the medal M bounced off the back side of the front door 12 and directed toward the lower medal receiving port 133, and the two medals M collide with each other. can be made difficult.

Also, if the medals M are ejected one after another at short intervals from the ejection portion 103 of the medal dispensing device 15, even if the distance "L1" from the lower medal receiving opening 133 to the back surface of the front door 12 is equal to the diameter "D" of the medals M. Even if it is set to double or more, there is a possibility that the medal M ejected from the discharge part 103 of the medal payout device 15 and the medal M bounced off the back surface of the front door 12 collide.

Therefore, in the seventeenth embodiment, after the medal M ejected from the ejecting portion 103 of the medal payout device 15 bounces off the back surface of the front door 12, the next medal M is ejected from the ejecting portion 103 of the medal payout device 15. have set.
That is, the interval at which the medals M are ejected from the ejection portion 103 of the medal dispensing device 15, the ejection speed of the medals M from the ejection portion 103 of the medal dispensing device 15, and the distance from the lower medal receiving port 133 to the rear surface of the front door 12 and are set so as to satisfy the above relationship.

In this way, the medal M ejected from the ejecting portion 103 of the medal dispensing device 15 bounces off the back surface of the front door 12 at a position lower than the ejected position, and after dropping to a lower position, the next medal M is ejected from the medal dispensing device. If the medals are ejected from the ejection portion 103 of 15, the distance and height difference between the two medals can be sufficiently ensured, and the two medals M can be prevented from colliding with each other.
Here, when the medal M bounced back from the back surface of the front door 12 collides with the medal M ejected from the ejecting part 103 of the medal dispensing device 15 next to this medal M, the medal M is ejected from the vicinity of the lower medal receiving port 133 or the dispensed medal. There is a possibility that the medals M are jammed in the passage 134. - 特許庁

Therefore, in this embodiment, as described above, the medals M are set so as not to collide with each other, thereby preventing the medals M from being jammed in the vicinity of the lower medal receiving opening 133 and in the payout medal passage 134. .
In this embodiment, it is set so that the medal M bounced back from the back surface of the front door 12 and the medal M ejected from the discharge section 103 of the medal dispensing device 15 next to the medal M are unlikely to collide with each other. However, when a large number of medals M are continuously ejected from the ejecting portion 103, it does not mean that the front and rear medals M do not all collide. It is enough if there is no collision. When winning a small winning combination, two medals are most often paid out. This is because the medals M can be prevented from being clogged in the payout medal passage 134 .

Here, as described in the sixth embodiment, the hopper disk 101 is provided with a plurality of holding portions 102 capable of holding the medals M stored in the hopper along the outer circumference of the hopper disk 101. there is
Then, when the following conditions (a) and (b) are satisfied, or when the conditions (a) and (c) are satisfied, two or more medals M are consecutively ejected from the discharge section 103 of the medal payout device 15. It will be ejected.
(a) Two adjacent holding portions 102 of the hopper disc 101 hold medals M respectively.
(b) "(M−N)≧2" is satisfied, where "N" is the remaining number of medals before reaching the upper limit of the number of credits, and "M" is the number of medals M to be paid out for winning.
(c) The settlement switch 43 is operated when the number of credits is "2" or more.

For example, in FIG. 17(b) of the sixth embodiment, the holding portion 102 positioned at the letter "B" and the holding portion 102 positioned at the letter "C" each hold a medal M. When there is, the above condition (a) is satisfied even if the medal M is not held in the holding portion 102 at the position of the letter "D".
Further, for example, in FIG. 17(b) of the sixth embodiment, the holding portion 102 positioned at the character "B" does not hold the medal M, but the holding portion positioned at the character "C" When medals M are held in 102 and in the holding portion 102 at the position of the character "D", the above condition (a) is satisfied.

Furthermore, in FIG. 17B of the sixth embodiment, the holding portion 102 at the position of the letter "B", the holding portion 102 at the position of the letter "C", and the position of the letter "D" When the medal M is held in each of the holding portions 102 in and , the above condition (a) is satisfied.
Of course, even when medals M are held in all the holding portions 102 of the hopper disk 101, the above condition (a) is satisfied.

Further, for example, when the upper limit of credits is "50" and the number of credits is "47", the remaining number of cards before reaching the upper limit of credits is "3". is "5" or more, the above condition (b) is satisfied.
Furthermore, for example, when the number of credits has already reached the upper limit of "50", the remaining number of cards until reaching the upper limit of the number of credits is "0". , the above condition (b) is satisfied.

As described above, for example, in FIG. 17B of the sixth embodiment, medal If the above condition (b) or (c) is satisfied while M is being held, two or more medals M are continuously ejected from the discharge section 103 of the medal payout device 15 .
Further, for example, in FIG. 17(b) of the sixth embodiment, the holding portion 102 at the position of the character "B" does not hold the medal M, but at least the medal M is at the position of the character "C". When the above conditions (b) or (c) are satisfied under the condition that the medals M are respectively held by the holding portion 102 and the holding portion 102 at the position of the letter "D", the medals are paid out. Two or more medals M are continuously ejected from the ejection section 103 of the device 15 .

In addition, the medal M ejected from the ejection portion 103 of the medal payout device 15 may bounce off the back surface of the front door 12 and return to the vicinity of the lower medal receiving opening 133 . If the returning medal M passes through the lower medal receiving opening 133, it falls inside the cabinet 13 and cannot be paid out to the player.
Therefore, in the seventeenth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 87, when the height of the peripheral portion of the lower medal receiving opening 133 is "L2" and the thickness of the medal M is "T", "L2≧T ” is set to satisfy

That is, the height "L2" of the peripheral portion of the lower medal receiving opening 133 is set to be equal to or greater than the thickness "T" of the medal M.
As a result, even if the medal M ejected from the ejecting portion 103 of the medal payout device 15 hits the back surface of the front door 12 and bounces off and returns to the vicinity of the lower medal receiving opening 133, the returning medal M will not reach the lower medal receiving opening. 133, and can be prevented from passing through the lower medal receiving opening 133.

In addition, since the hopper disk 101 of the medal payout device 15 is arranged to be inclined with respect to the horizontal plane, the medals M are ejected from the discharge section 103 of the medal payout device 15 while being inclined with respect to the horizontal plane. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 84 and 85, the lower medal receiving opening 133 and the payout medal passage 134 are also inclined in accordance with the inclination of the ejected medals M. As shown in FIG.

Here, the direction perpendicular to the obverse and reverse surfaces of the medal M ejected in an inclined state is defined as the height direction. In the seventeenth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 87, when the height of the payout medal passage 134 is "L2" and the diameter of the medal M is "D", "L2<D" is satisfied. have set. That is, the height "L2" of the payout medal passage 134 is set to be less than the diameter "D" of the medal M.

As a result, even if the medal M bounced off the back surface of the front door 12 and rotates in the payout medal passage 134, the front and back surfaces of the medal M can be prevented from being parallel to the vertical plane in the payout medal passage 134.例文帳に追加Therefore, the medals M can be prevented from blocking the payout medal passage 134.例文帳に追加
It should be noted that all the embodiments and various modifications described in this specification are not limited to be implemented independently, and can be implemented in combination as appropriate.

<Eighteenth Embodiment>
The eighteenth embodiment relates to transmission processing of an external signal.
In the eighteenth embodiment, it is possible to output a signal indicating ON/OFF as the external signal 4 and the external signal 5 .
In the eighteenth embodiment, the external signal 4 is a setting key switch ON signal (setting key switch signal), a signal indicating that an error has been detected, a signal indicating that an error is being displayed, or a signal indicating that the power switch 11 is on. This is a signal indicating that the power has been turned on (detection of power-on).
The external signal 5 is a signal (door switch ON signal) indicating that the front door 12 of the slot machine 10 is opened.

FIG. 88 is a diagram showing major storage areas of the RWM 53 described in the eighteenth embodiment.
The input port 0 level data at address "F00A(H)" is a storage area for storing data indicating ON/OFF of input port 0. FIG. Each bit of input port 0 is configured as follows.
D0: Setting switch signal (“1” when ON, “0” when OFF)
D1: Reset switch signal (“1” when ON, “0” when OFF)
D2: Signal of setting key switch (“1” when ON, “0” when OFF)
D3: Door switch signal (“1” when ON, “0” when OFF)
D4: Not used D5: Not used D6: Power failure detection signal D7: Full detection signal

Here, the D6-bit "power-off detection signal" is input when power-off occurs (for example, when "Yes" is determined in step S482 in FIG. 54 (11th embodiment)). is a signal.
In addition, although not shown in FIG. 1, the slot machine 10 is provided with a sub-tank for storing medals overflowing from the hopper 35 . Furthermore, it has a full sensor that turns on when the sub-tank comes into contact with a medal when it is full. Then, when the full sensor is turned on, a full detection signal is input to the D7 bit of input port 0 .
Also, although not shown in FIG. 88, in addition to the storage area for input port 0 level data, each bit of input port 0 has been turned on (at the time of current interrupt processing) from off (at the time of previous interrupt processing). The input port rising data storage area for storing the data indicating that the It is also possible to provide a storage area for input port trailing edge data for storage.

Furthermore, the input port 51 shown in FIG. 1 is not limited to the input port 0. For example,
(1) Input port 1 for inputting operation switch signals such as bed switch 40 (40a and 40b), start switch 41, stop switch 42, settlement switch 43, etc.
(2) Input port 2 for inputting signals from passage sensor 46, input sensor 44, payout sensor 37, reel sensor 33, etc.
etc.
A storage area for input port level data corresponding to each input port is provided. Furthermore, as described above, it is possible to provide storage areas for input port rise data and input port fall data for each input port.
Furthermore, when only the storage area for input port level data is provided (when storage areas for input port rising data and input port falling data are not provided), the storage area for input port level data in this interrupt process In addition, a storage area for input port level data in the previous interrupt processing may be provided.

The external signal 4 output time at the time of power failure recovery at the address "F013(H)" is a storage area for a timer value for counting the time for outputting the external signal 4 at the time of power failure recovery. In this embodiment, when the power switch 11 in FIG. 1 is turned on and the main control board 50 detects recovery from power failure, the address "F013 (H)" is set to "136 (D)" as an initial value. and is decremented by "1" for each interrupt. Then, it is determined that the external signal 4 is turned on (a signal indicating ON can be output as the external signal 4) until this value becomes "0".
Also, in the eighteenth embodiment, the interrupt period is "2.235 ms", as in the other embodiments. Therefore, "136" interrupt corresponds to "303.96ms". As a result, the external signal 4 is turned on for about "300" ms at the time of recovery from power failure (a signal indicating ON can be output as the external signal 4).

The external signal 4 management time at the address “F014(H)” is a storage area for the timer value for managing the output time of the external signal 4 . In this embodiment, the initial value "24 (D)" is set when the output of the external signal 4 is started (except when returning from power failure described above), and is decremented by "1" for each interrupt. . Then, it is determined that the external signal 4 is turned on (a signal indicating ON can be output as the external signal 4) until this value becomes "0".
Also, the "24" interrupt corresponds to "53.64 ms". As a result, the external signal 4 is turned on for at least 50 ms or longer (a signal indicating ON can be output as the external signal 4).

The external signal 5 management time at the address “F015(H)” is a storage area for the timer value for managing the output time of the external signal 5 . In this embodiment, an initial value "24(D)" is set when outputting the external signal 5 is started, and "1" is subtracted for each interrupt. Then, it is determined that the external signal 5 is turned on (a signal indicating ON can be output as the external signal 5) until this value becomes "0".
As above, the "24" interrupt corresponds to "53.64ms". As a result, the external signal 5 is turned on for at least "50" ms or longer (a signal indicating ON can be output as the external signal 5).

Further, the external signal 4 output time, the external signal 4 management time, and the external signal 5 management time at the time of power failure recovery in this embodiment are all 1-byte timers to measure "255 (D)" or less. These timer values are decremented by timer measurement in step S455 during the interrupt processing of FIG.
Here, in the eighteenth embodiment, the above three timers are arranged at addresses "F013(H)" to "F015(H)". Therefore, in timer measurement, "F013 (H)" is set as the measurement start timer address in the first step. Also, "3" is set as the number of 1-byte timers. As a result, all timers including the addresses "F013(H)" to "F015(H)" are decremented by "1" by the timer measurement process.
Also, when the subtraction process is executed when the timer value is "0", in other words, when "0" is subtracted from "00 (H)", "00 (H)" is set. .

The error number at address "F051(H)" is a storage area for storing the number corresponding to the detected error when the error is detected. As shown in FIG. 88, when no error is detected, the value of address "F051(H)" is "0(D)". Then, for example, when an "E5" error is detected, a value "105(D)" corresponding to the detected error is stored in the address "F051(H)".
In FIG. 88, "E0" to "E7" are exemplified as error numbers.
Here, in the eleventh embodiment described above, "E1", "E5", "E6", and "E7" errors are exemplified as unrecoverable errors. On the other hand, the "E0" to "E7" errors in the eighteenth embodiment (FIG. 88) all correspond to recoverable errors.

When these recoverable errors occur, as a general rule, the progress of the game is stopped. Further, even during rotation of at least one reel 31, error detection is executed for at least some errors ("E7", "E6", and "E5" errors in the example of the 18th embodiment). When an error is detected during rotation of at least one reel 31, the progress of the game is continued until all the reels 31 are stopped, and when all the reels 31 are stopped, an error state ( error display) and stop the progress of the game. When the error is removed by the hall clerk, the progress of the game is resumed. Of course, if any one of the errors "E7", "E6", and "E5" occurs during rotation of the reel 31, the progress of the game is stopped (stop control by operating the stop switch 42 is not performed). ) can also be configured as

In FIG. 88, the "E0" error is an error when the insertion sensor 44 determines that the medals have accumulated.
The "E1" error is an error when it is determined that the medals have not passed through the insertion sensors 44a and 44b in order.
An "E2" error is an error when it is determined that the sub-tank is full.
An "E3" error is an error when it is determined that the medals in the hopper 35 are empty.
The "E4" error is an error when the payout sensor 37 determines that the medals are stuck (jammed) while the medal payout signal is being output.
The "E5" error is an error that occurs when the payout sensor 37 is turned on while the medal payout signal is not being output.
The "E6" error is an error when the insertion sensor 44b detects medals under the condition that the blocker 45 does not form the medal flow path.
The "E7" error is an error when it is determined that medals are stuck in the selector passage.

When any of the above errors is detected, the number corresponding to the detected error is stored in the address "F051(H)". When an error number is stored at address "F051(H)", it is possible to display an error corresponding to the stored error number. For example, the segment data corresponding to the number stored at the address "F051(H)" may be output to the obtained number display LED 78 to display the error number. Specifically, when the error code "101(D)" is stored in the address "F051(H)", the digit At the lighting timing of 3, the lighting data of the digit 3 and the segment data for displaying "E" are output. At the lighting timing of the digit 4, the lighting data of the digit 4 and the segment data for displaying "1" are output.

When any error number is stored in the address "F051(H)" (when it is not "0"), the external signal 4 is turned on (a signal indicating ON can be output as the external signal 4). ).
When the hall clerk removes the error that has occurred, he turns on the reset switch. When it is detected that the reset switch has been turned on, it is determined whether or not the error that has occurred has been eliminated. If it is determined that the error that has occurred has not been removed, the status quo (error display) is maintained. On the other hand, when it is determined that the error that has occurred has been eliminated (no error has occurred), the error number stored at the address "F051(H)" is cleared. When the error number of address "F051(H)" is cleared, the error display (display of error number by digits 3 and 4) is terminated.
The above is an example of displaying the error number on the earned number display LED 78 based on the above-described other embodiment, but it is not limited to this, and may be displayed on the credit number display LED 76, or an error display. A dedicated LED may be provided and displayed on that LED.

The error detection flag at address "F294(H)" is a storage area for storing the detection of an error in consideration of the case where the error state cannot be immediately changed when an error is detected. is. In the example of FIG. 88, D0 to D2 bits in the storage area of address "F294(H)" are used as detection flags for "E7", "E6", and "E5" errors, respectively. All of the "E7", "E6", and "E5" errors are errors that can be detected even when at least one reel 31 is rotating.

Here, for example, even when the reel 31 is rotating, it is determined whether or not an "E5", "E6", or "E7" error has occurred by interrupt processing. When the occurrence of these errors is detected while the reel 31 is rotating, the bit corresponding to the error in the error detection flag is set to "1". When the error detection flag is "1", the external signal 4 is output.
However, even if these errors are detected while the reels 31 are rotating, the error state (error display) does not immediately occur at that time, and only after all the reels 31 have stopped. The error state is entered before the payout process is executed.

If any bit of the error detection flag is "1" when all the reels 31 are stopped, the corresponding error number is stored in the address "F051(H)". When an error number is stored at address "F051(H)", the stored error number is displayed. After storing the error detection flag at the address "F294(H)", when the error number is stored at the address "F051(H)", when the error detection flag at the address "F291(H)" is cleared is arbitrary. For example, first, do not clear the error detection flag until the error is removed. In this case, after the error detection flag is stored and after all the reels 31 have stopped, the external signal 4 is turned on based on either the error detection flag or the error number. signal can be output). Then, when it is determined that the error has been eliminated, both the error detection flag and the error number are cleared. When the error detection flag and error number are cleared, the external signal 4 is turned off (a signal indicating off can be output as the external signal 4). However, even if both the error detection flag and the error number are cleared, for example, if the setting key switch is turned on, the external signal 4 is not turned off (the external signal 4 is turned off). does not output a signal indicating

Secondly, after storing the error detection flag at the address "F294(H)", when the error number is stored at the address "F051(H)", the error detection flag at the address "F291(H)" is cleared. to do. In this case, after the error detection flag is stored, the external signal 4 is turned on based on the error detection flag until the error number is stored. ). When the error number is stored and the error detection flag is cleared, the external signal 4 is turned on based on the error number (a signal indicating ON can be output as the external signal 4). After that, when it is determined that the error has been eliminated, the error number is cleared. As a result, the external signal 4 is turned off (a signal indicating off can be output as the external signal 4). However, even if both the error detection flag and the error number are cleared, for example, if the setting key switch is turned on, the external signal 4 is not turned off (the external signal 4 is turned off). does not output a signal indicating

When an error is detected while the reels 31 are rotating, the error state (error display) cannot be immediately changed (the error state cannot be changed until after all the reels 31 have stopped). Since it is necessary to turn on the external signal 4 (to be able to output a signal indicating the on state as the external signal 4), the error detection flag is provided.
Therefore, when the "E5", "E6", or "E7" errors occur in a situation where the reel 31 is stopped or in a situation where it is possible to immediately shift to an error state, "1" is stored in the error detection flag. It is optional whether or not to In order to simplify the process, even when an "E5", "E6", or "E7" error occurs under conditions where it is possible to shift to an error state, "1" is stored in the error detection flag. good too. Alternatively, when an "E5", "E6", or "E7" error occurs, if the error state cannot be shifted immediately (for example, at least one reel 31 is rotating), the error detection flag is set to "1". ' is stored, and when the situation is such that it is possible to immediately shift to an error state (for example, during game standby), the error number is stored, but "1" may not be stored in the error detection flag.

In the storage area of the RWM 53 described above, the storage areas at addresses "F00A(H)", "F013(H)" to "F015(H)", and "F051(H)" are storage areas within the used area. . On the other hand, the storage area of address "F294(H)" is a storage area outside the use area. A program for detecting errors is stored in a control area outside the use area of the ROM 54 .

89 and 90 are time charts showing output timings of external signal 4 and external signal 5, FIG. 89 showing example 1 and FIG. 90 showing example 2. FIG.
In Example 1 of FIG. 89, (a) shows the relationship between the ON/OFF state of the setting key switch and the output of the external signal 4. FIG. When the ON state of the setting key switch is detected, the external signal 4 is immediately turned ON (a signal indicating ON can be output as the external signal 4). The minimum value of the time t1 from when the setting key switch is turned on to when the external signal 4 is turned on (a signal indicating the on state can be output as the external signal 4) is "0" ms. Therefore, when the ON state of the setting key switch is detected, the external signal 4 is immediately turned ON (a signal indicating ON can be output as the external signal 4).
Further, whether or not the setting key switch is on is detected in interrupt processing. For example, during the interrupt processing shown in FIG. 53 (11th embodiment), in the input port reading processing of step S457, when the level data of the input port 0 is read and the level data of the setting key switch is "1", the external The signal 4 is turned on (a signal indicating on can be output as the external signal 4).

Also, once the setting key switch is turned on, the external signal 4 is turned on for 50 ms or longer (a signal indicating ON can be output as the external signal 4) (t3 in the figure). Therefore, even if the setting key switch is turned off immediately after being turned on (for example, after "10" ms has passed), the external signal 4 is turned on (external A signal indicating ON can be output as the signal 4).
Then, when the setting key switch is turned off, the condition is that "50" ms or more have elapsed since the external signal 4 was turned on (a signal indicating ON as the external signal 4 can be output). , the external signal 4 is turned off (a signal indicating off can be output as the external signal 4). If "50" ms or more have passed since the external signal 4 was turned on (a signal indicating ON as the external signal 4 can be output), the external signal 4 is turned off when the setting key switch is detected to be turned off. (a signal indicating off can be output as the external signal 4) (t2 in the figure).

Therefore, after detecting that the setting key switch is turned on and turning on the external signal 4 (making it possible to output a signal indicating the on state as the external signal 4), turn off the setting key switch before "50" ms elapses. When it is detected, the external signal 4 is turned off after the minimum "50" ms has elapsed as the output time of the external signal 4 (a signal indicating off can be output as the external signal 4).
On the other hand, after detecting that the setting key switch is on and turning on the external signal 4 (making it possible to output a signal indicating the on state as the external signal 4), the setting key switch is turned off after a lapse of "50" ms or longer. When detected, the external signal 4 can be immediately turned off (a signal indicating off can be output as the external signal 4).

(b) shows the relationship between error detection/non-detection and the output of the external signal 4. FIG. Here, "detection of an error" means that any bit in the error detection flag of the address "F294(H)" is "1", and "non-detection of an error" means that the error This corresponds to the detection flag being "0".
As soon as "1" is stored in the error detection flag, the external signal 4 can be turned on (a signal indicating ON can be output as the external signal 4). The minimum value of the time t1 from when "1" is stored in the error detection flag until the external signal 4 is turned on (a signal indicating ON as the external signal 4 can be output) is "0" ms.
Also, once "1" is stored in the error detection flag, the external signal is turned on for at least "50" ms (a signal indicating ON can be output as the external signal 4) (time t3). When the error detection flag is cleared, the external signal 4 can be turned off (a signal indicating off can be output as the external signal 4) (time t2). As described above, the error detection flag is cleared when the error is removed, or when the error number is stored although the error is not removed.

Therefore, after detecting that the error detection flag has become "1" and turning on the external signal 4 (making it possible to output a signal indicating ON as the external signal 4), before "50" ms elapses When it is detected that the error detection flag has become "0", after at least "50" ms has elapsed as the output time of the external signal 4, the external signal 4 is turned off (a signal indicating off as the external signal 4). can be output).
On the other hand, after detecting that the error detection flag has become "1" and turning on the external signal 4 (making it possible to output a signal indicating ON as the external signal 4), after "50" ms or more have elapsed, When it is detected that the error detection flag has become "0", the external signal 4 can be immediately turned off (a signal indicating off can be output as the external signal 4).

(c) shows the relationship between error display/non-display and the output of the external signal 4. FIG. Here, "error display" means that the error number of the address "F051(H)" is a value other than "0" (in the example of FIG. 88, any of "100(D)" to "107(D)" ) is stored, and "error non-display" corresponds to the value of the error number being "0". A storage area for storing flags indicating error display/non-display may be provided. It is possible to reduce the storage area to be used by determining whether the error is to be displayed or not.

When a value other than "0" is stored in the error number, it is possible to immediately turn on the external signal 4 (a signal indicating on can be output as the external signal 4). The minimum value of the time t1 from when a value other than the error number "0" is stored until when the external signal 4 is output is "0" ms.
Also, when a value other than "0" is once stored in the error number, the external signal 4 is turned on for at least "50" ms (a signal indicating ON can be output as the external signal 4) (time t3). In addition, after a value other than "0" is stored in the error number, the external signal 4 is turned on for at least "50" ms (a signal indicating ON as the external signal 4 can be output), and then the error number is cleared, the external signal 4 can be immediately turned off (a signal indicating off can be output as the external signal 4) (time t2).

Therefore, when the error number is stored and the error number is cleared before "50" ms elapses after turning on the external signal 4 (making it possible to output a signal indicating ON as the external signal 4), After at least "50" ms has elapsed as the output time of the external signal 4, the external signal 4 is turned off (a signal indicating off can be output as the external signal 4).
On the other hand, when the error number is stored and the error number is cleared after "50" ms or more have passed since the external signal 4 was turned on (a signal indicating ON as the external signal 4 can be output), The external signal 4 can be turned off immediately (a signal indicating off can be output as the external signal 4).

(d) shows the relationship between the power on/off and the output of the external signal 4. FIG. Here, whether or not the power is turned on (whether or not the power switch 11 in FIG. 1 is turned on) can be detected by various methods. (H)" corresponds to the time when the initial value "136 (D)" of the external signal 4 output time at the time of power failure recovery is stored.
When the power-on is detected (when the initial value is stored in the output time of the external signal 4 when power is restored), the external signal 4 can be turned on immediately (on is indicated as the external signal 4). signal can be output). The minimum value of the time t1 until the external signal 4 is output after the initial value is stored in the output time of the external signal 4 after power failure recovery is "0" ms.
In addition, when the initial value is stored in the output time of the external signal 4 when power is restored, the external signal 4 is turned on for "300" ms (a signal indicating ON can be output as the external signal 4) ( time t3). "300" ms here corresponds to the number of interrupts "136". In addition, when the output time of the external signal 4 when power is restored becomes "0", the external signal 4 can be immediately turned off (a signal indicating off can be output as the external signal 4). (time t2).

Therefore, the initial value is stored in the output time of the external signal 4 when power is restored, and the power switch 11 is turned off after turning on the external signal 4 (making it possible to output a signal indicating on as the external signal 4). When this is detected (when the D7 bit of the input port 0 level data becomes "1"), the external signal 4 is turned off (external A signal indicating OFF can be output as the signal 4).
On the other hand, the initial value is stored in the output time of the external signal 4 when the power is restored. When 300 ms has passed, the external signal 4 is turned off even if the power switch 11 is kept on (a signal indicating off can be output as the external signal 4).

(e) shows the relationship between the opening/closing of the front door 12 and the output of the external signal 5. FIG. Here, "the front door 12 is opened" corresponds to when it is detected that the door switch is turned on. Particularly in the eighteenth embodiment, this corresponds to when the D3 bit of the input port 0 level data (or input port 0 rising data) becomes "1".
When the ON state of the door switch is detected, the external signal 5 can be turned ON immediately (a signal indicating ON can be output as the external signal 5). The minimum value of the time t1 from when the door switch is detected to when the external signal 5 is output is "0" ms.
Also, when the ON state of the door switch is detected, the external signal 5 is turned ON for at least "50" ms (a signal indicating ON can be output as the external signal 5) (time t3). As a result, even if the front door 12 is closed immediately after the front door 12 is opened, the external signal 5 is turned on for at least 50 ms (the external signal 5 indicates ON). signal can be output).

Therefore, after detecting that the door switch is turned on and turning on the external signal 5 (making it possible to output a signal indicating the on state as the external signal 5), it is detected that the door switch is turned off before "50" ms elapses. When at least "50" ms has elapsed as the output time of the external signal 5, the external signal 5 is turned off (a signal indicating off can be output as the external signal 5).
On the other hand, after detecting that the door switch is on and turning on the external signal 5 (making it possible to output a signal indicating the on state as the external signal 5), the door switch is detected to be off after lapse of "50" ms or more. In this case, the external signal 5 can be immediately turned off (a signal indicating off can be output as the external signal 5).

The output destination of the external signal 4 and the external signal 5 is a hall computer or the like, but the external signal 4 or 5 is turned on for "50" ms or longer (a signal indicating ON can be output as the external signal 4 or 5). ), a hall computer (data lamp) or the like can reliably receive the external signals 4 and 5 . Therefore, even if a fraudulent act such as turning on the setting key switch for a moment (for example, about "5" to "10" ms) is performed, or a fraudulent act including opening the front door 12 for a moment is performed, the hall An external signal 4 or 5 can be received by a computer or the like.

Example 2 shown in FIG. 90 is a modification of Example 1 shown in FIG.
In FIG. 90,
The time t1 from when the setting key switch shown in (a) is detected to be turned on until the external signal 4 is turned on (a signal indicating the on state can be output as the external signal 4),
time t1 from when the error detection flag shown in (b) becomes "1" to when the external signal 4 is turned on (a signal indicating ON can be output as the external signal 4);
time t1 from when the error number shown in (c) is stored to when the external signal 4 is turned on (a signal indicating ON can be output as the external signal 4);
Time t1 from when the ON state of the door switch shown in (e) is detected to when the external signal 5 is turned ON (a signal indicating ON can be output as the external signal 5)
are both set to "0" ms.

In FIG. 90, the interval of the time t1 is shown to exceed "0", but in reality, for example, in (a), the timing when the setting key switch is turned on from off and the timing of the external signal 4 The timing when the output turns from off to on is almost the same (the timing when the output of the external signal 4 turns on from off to the timing when the setting key switch turns off to on is within "2"). .
Also, the external signal 4 shown in (a) to (c) in the figure and the external signal 5 shown in (e) in the figure are turned on (a signal indicating ON can be output as the external signals 4 and 5) time t3. is a minimum of 50 ms. This point is the same as the example of FIG.
Furthermore, the time t3 for turning on the external signal 4 (enabling the output of a signal indicating on as the external signal 4) in (d) of the figure is "300" ms as in the example of FIG.

Furthermore,
time t2 from when the setting key switch shown in (a) is detected to be off until the external signal 4 is turned off (a signal indicating off can be output as the external signal 4);
time t2 from when the error detection flag shown in (b) is cleared until the external signal 4 is turned off (a signal indicating off can be output as the external signal 4);
time t2 from when the error number shown in (c) is cleared until the external signal 4 is turned off (a signal indicating off can be output as the external signal 4);
The time t2 from when the output time of the external signal 4 at the time of power failure recovery shown in (d) becomes "0" to when the external signal 4 is turned off (a signal indicating off can be output as the external signal 4);
Time t2 from when the door switch is detected to be turned off to when the external signal 5 is turned off (a signal indicating off can be output as the external signal 5).
are both "50" ms.

In order to do this, for example, a timer for managing the output time of the external signal 4 is used when the OFF of the setting key switch is detected, when the error detection flag is cleared, or when the error number is cleared. A value of "24 (D)" is set, the timer value is decremented by "1" each time an interrupt is processed, and when the timer value becomes "0", the external signal 4 is turned off (off as the external signal 4). can be output).
Similarly, when it detects that the door switch is turned off, it sets a timer value "24 (D)" for managing the output time of the external signal 5, subtracts "1" from the timer value for each interrupt process, For example, when the timer value becomes "0", the external signal 5 is turned off (a signal indicating off can be output as the external signal 5).

Next, the output of the external signal 4 and the external signal 5 will be explained based on a flow chart. 91 to 94 are flow charts showing external signal output processing.
91 and 92 are flowcharts showing an example 1 of external signal output processing. FIG. 92 is a flow chart following FIG. Furthermore, FIG. 93 is a flow chart showing example 2 of the external signal output processing. Further, FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing an example 3 of external signal output processing.
The external signal output process (step S3221) is, for example, a process between step S455 (timer measurement) and step S456 (LED display control) in FIG.

First, Example 1 of external signal output processing will be described.
In FIG. 91, in step S3231, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch is on. In this process, it is determined whether or not the D2 bit of the input port 0 level data is "1", and if it is "1", it is determined that the setting key switch is on. If it is determined that the setting key switch is on, the process proceeds to step S3237, and if it is determined that it is not on, the process proceeds to step S3232.

In step S3232, it is determined whether or not an error has been detected. This process determines whether any bit of the error detection flag is "1". When it is determined that any bit of the error detection flag is "1", the process proceeds to step S3237, and when it is determined that none of the bits is "1" (no error is detected), the process proceeds to step S3233.
In step S3233, it is determined whether or not an error is being displayed. This process reads the error number and determines whether it is "0". If it is "0", it is judged that an error is not being displayed, and the process proceeds to step S3234.

In step S3234, it is determined whether "300" ms has elapsed since the power was turned on. As described above, when recovery from power failure is detected, the initial value "136 (D)" is set to the external signal 4 output time at power failure recovery of address "F013 (H)", and "1" is decremented. Then, in step S3234, it is determined whether or not the external signal 4 output time at the time of power failure recovery is "0". and advances to step S3235. On the other hand, when the external signal 4 output time at power-off recovery is not "0", the process proceeds to step S3241.

In step S3235, it is determined whether or not the output time of the external signal 4 has passed a predetermined time. Here, the external signal 4 management time of address "F014(H)" is set to "24(D)" in step S3240, which will be described later. Then, in step S3235, it is determined whether or not this external signal 4 control time is "0". The process proceeds to step S3236, and when it is determined that it is not "0", the process proceeds to step S3241.
In step S3236, the external signal 4 is turned off (a signal indicating off can be output as the external signal 4). The process then proceeds to step S3242 (of FIG. 92).

On the other hand, when it is determined "Yes" in step S3231, S3232, or S3233, and the process proceeds to step S3237, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch has been turned on from off in the current interrupt process. In this interrupt process, whether or not the D2 bit (setting key switch signal) of the input port 0 level data is turned on is determined, for example, firstly, if there is input port 0 rising data, input port 0 rising data is "1". Secondly, the input port 0 level data at the time of the previous interrupt processing is saved, and if the D2 bit of the input port 0 level data at the previous interrupt processing is "0" and the input port 0 level data at the current interrupt processing When the D2 bit of is "1", it is determined that the setting key switch has been turned on from off in this interrupt process. If it is determined that the setting key switch has been turned on from off, the process proceeds to step S3240, and if it is determined that the setting key switch has not been turned on from off, the process proceeds to step S3238.

In step S3238, it is determined whether or not the error detection flag has changed from off to on. Here, for example, the error detection flag in the previous interrupt process is saved, and by performing a comparison operation with the error detection flag in the current interrupt process, the error detection flag is turned on from OFF to ON in the current interrupt process. determine whether or not When it is determined that the error detection flag has changed from off to on, the process proceeds to step S3240, and when it is determined that the error detection flag has not changed from off to on, the process proceeds to step S3239.

In step S3239, it is determined whether or not the error number has changed from hidden (“0”) to displayed (other than “0”). Here, for example, the error number in the previous interrupt process is saved, and the error number in the current interrupt process is compared with the error number in the current interrupt process. determine whether it has become When it is determined that the error number has changed from "0" to other than "0", the process proceeds to step S3240, and when it is determined that the error number remains "0", the process proceeds to step S3241.

When proceeding from step S3237, S3238, or S3239 to step S3240, the external signal 4 control time of address "F014 (H)" is set to "24 (D)" corresponding to the output time "50" ms as an initial value. . Then, the process proceeds to step S3241.
In step S3241, the external signal 4 is turned on (a signal indicating ON can be output as the external signal 4). The process then proceeds to step S3242 (of FIG. 92).
In step S3242, it is determined whether the door switch is on. In this process, it is determined whether or not the D3 bit of the input port 0 level data is "1", and if it is "1", it is determined that the door switch is on. If it is determined that the door switch is on, the process proceeds to step S3245, and if it is determined that the door switch is not on, the process proceeds to step S3243.

In step S3243, it is determined whether or not the output time of the external signal 5 has elapsed. Here, the external signal 5 management time of address "F015 (H)" is set to "24 (D)" in step S3246, which will be described later. Then, in step S3243, it is determined whether or not this external signal 5 control time is "0". Proceed to S3247.
In step S3244, the external signal 5 is turned off (a signal indicating off can be output as the external signal 5). Then, the processing according to this flow chart ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the door switch is on in step S3242, and the flow advances to step S3245, it is determined whether the door switch has been turned on from off in the current interrupt process. In this interrupt process, whether or not the D3 bit (door switch signal) of the input port 0 level data is turned on is determined, for example, firstly, if there is input port 0 rising data, the input port 0 rising data Determine whether the D3 bit is "1". Secondly, the input port 0 level data at the time of the previous interrupt processing is saved, and if the D3 bit of the input port 0 level data at the previous interrupt processing is "0" and the input port 0 level data at the current interrupt processing When the D3 bit of is "1", it is determined that the door switch has been turned on from off in this interrupt process. If it is determined that the door switch has been turned on from off, the process proceeds to step S3246, and if it is determined that the door switch has not been turned on from off, the process proceeds to step S3247.

In step S3246, "24 (D)" corresponding to the output time "50" ms is set as the initial value for the external signal 5 management time of address "F015 (H)". Then, the process proceeds to step S3247.
In step S3247, the external signal 5 is turned off (a signal indicating off can be output as the external signal 5). Then, the processing according to this flow chart ends.

FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing an example 2 of external signal output processing.
In the example of FIG. 92,
(1) As shown in step S3237, when the setting key switch is turned on from off,
(2) As shown in step S3238, when the error detection flag is turned on from off,
(3) As shown in step S3239, the output time of external signal 4 is set when the error number is newly stored.
On the other hand, in the example of FIG. 93, in the current interrupt processing, it is based on whether the setting key switch is on, whether the error detection flag is on, and whether the error number is stored. to control the output of the external signal 4.

In FIG. 93, the same step numbers are given to the same processes as in FIGS. In the example of FIG. 93, steps different from those of FIGS. 91 and 92 are not provided.
In the example of FIG. 93,
(1) When it is determined in step S3231 that the setting key switch is on (when the D2 bit of the input port 0 level data at address "F00A(H)" is "1"),
(2) In step S3234, when "300" ms has not passed since the power was turned on (the external signal 4 output time at power-off recovery at address "F013(H)" is not "0"),
(3) In step S3233, when it is determined that an error is being displayed (when the error number stored at address "F051(H)" is other than "0"),
(4) In step S3232, when an error is being detected (when any bit of the error detection flag at address "F294(H)" is "1")
, respectively, proceeds to step S3240, and stores the number of interrupts "24 (D)" corresponding to the output time "50" ms of the external signal 4 in the address "F014 (H)".

Therefore, in the previous interrupt processing, for example, it was determined in step S3231 that the setting key switch was ON, and in step S3240, "24 (D)" was set as the external signal 4 management time of address "F014 (H)". After that, if it is determined in step S3231 that the setting key switch is turned on in this interrupt process as well, the process advances to step S3240 to reset the external signal 4 control time "24 (D)". When it is determined in step S3234 that "300" ms has not elapsed since the power was turned on, when it is determined in step S3233 that an error is being displayed, and when it is determined in step S3233 that an error is being detected. It is the same. After step S3240, the process proceeds to step S3241.

If it is determined in step S3232 that an error is not being detected, the process advances to step S3235. In step S3235, it is determined whether or not the output time of external signal 4 "50" ms has elapsed. Here, as described above, when the external signal 4 control time of the address "F014(H)" is "0", it is determined that the output time of the external signal 4 "50" ms has elapsed. Then, if the output time of the external signal 4 has passed, the process advances to step S3236 to turn off the external signal 4 (a signal indicating off can be output as the external signal 4), and the output time of the external signal 4 has passed. If not, the process advances to step S3241 to turn on the external signal 4 (make it possible to output a signal indicating on as the external signal 4).

Next, proceeding to step S3242, it is determined whether or not the door switch is on. If it is determined that the door switch is on, the process proceeds to step S3246, and if it is determined that the door switch is not on, the process proceeds to step S3243.
At step S3246, "24 (D)" is set to the external signal 5 management time of the address "F015 (H)". In this case, as in the above case, it is determined that the door switch is ON in the previous interrupt process, and after "24 (D)" is set as the external signal 5 control time in step S3246, step If it is determined in S3242 that the door switch is ON, the external signal 5 control time "24 (D)" is reset in step S3246. Then, the process proceeds to step S3247.

In step S3243, it is determined whether or not the output time of external signal 5 "50" ms has elapsed. Here, as described above, when the external signal 5 control time of the address "F015(H)" is "0", it is determined that the output time of the external signal 5 "50" ms has elapsed. When it is determined that the output time of the external signal 5 has passed, the process advances to step S3244 to turn off the external signal 5 (a signal indicating off can be output as the external signal 5), and the output time of the external signal 5 is determined. If it is determined that the time has not elapsed, the process advances to step S3247 to turn on the external signal 5 (a signal indicating ON can be output as the external signal 5). Then, the processing according to this flowchart is terminated.

As described above, in example 1 of FIG. 91, whether or not the setting key switch has turned from off to on, whether or not the error detection flag has turned on from off, and whether the error number has changed from "0" to other than "0" The external signal 4 control time is set in the interrupt process determined as "Yes" in each determination of whether or not it has become. , the external signal 4 is turned off (a signal indicating off can be output as the external signal 4).
On the other hand, in Example 2 of FIG. 93, when the setting key switch is on, the error detection flag is "1", and an error number other than "0" is stored, external signal is kept on (a signal indicating on can be output as the external signal 4). When the setting key switch is off, the error detection flag is "0", and "0" is stored as the error number, the external signal 4 control time becomes "0". The signal 4 is turned off (a signal indicating off can be output as the external signal 4).

In other words, after the setting key switch is off, the error detection flag is "0", and "0" is stored as the error number, the external signal 4 is turned on until "50" ms elapses. (A signal indicating ON can be output as the external signal 4). Therefore, for example, when an error is detected or when the setting key switch is turned on for only a moment (for example, only "3" interrupt), the external signal 4 is turned off (a signal indicating off is used as the external signal 4). Even if the condition for enabling output is satisfied, the external signal 4 can be turned on (a signal indicating on can be output as the external signal 4) for at least 50 ms.

Also, in the external signal output processing (interrupt processing) shown in FIG. The timer value is decremented from "24(D)" to "23(D)". After that, in the external signal output processing of the next interrupt processing, when the condition of turning on the external signal 4 (making it possible to output a signal indicating on as the external signal 4) is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S3240, and again, A timer value of "24(D)" is set.

After that, the timer value is decremented for each interrupt process, but if the condition for turning on the external signal 4 (to enable output of a signal indicating on as the external signal 4) is no longer satisfied, the process of step S3240 is performed. , the timer value eventually becomes "0 (D)". When the timer value becomes "0 (D)", it is determined "Yes" in step S3235. possible).

By doing so, the external signal 4 is turned on (turning on as the external signal 4) from the time when the conditions for turning on the external signal 4 (allowing a signal indicating on as the external signal 4 to be output) are satisfied. signal can be output). While the condition for turning on the external signal 4 (outputting a signal indicating on as the external signal 4 is possible) is satisfied, the external signal 4 is turned on (outputting a signal indicating on as the external signal 4). possible). Next, when the condition to turn on the external signal 4 (to enable the output of a signal indicating on as the external signal 4) is no longer satisfied, the timer value is set to "0 (D)" for each interrupt processing. It is decremented by "1 (D)". Until the timer value reaches "0 (D)", the external signal 4 is turned on (a signal indicating ON can be output as the external signal 4). Then, when the timer value becomes "0 (D)", the external signal 4 is turned off (a signal indicating off can be output as the external signal 4).

The same applies to the external signal 5 as described above.
In the external signal output processing (interrupt processing) shown in FIG. "24(D)" is subtracted to "23(D)". After that, in the external signal output processing of the next interrupt processing, when the door switch is ON (when the external signal 5 is turned ON (a signal indicating ON can be output as the external signal 5) is satisfied) , the process proceeds to step S3246, and the timer value "24 (D)" is set again.

After that, the timer value is decremented for each interrupt process, but the condition that the door switch is turned off (turns on the external signal 5 (makes it possible to output a signal indicating that it is on as the external signal 5) is no longer satisfied. ), the process of step S3246 is skipped, so the timer value eventually becomes "0 (D)". When the timer value becomes "0 (D)", it is determined "Yes" in step S3243. possible).

By doing so, the external signal 5 is turned on when the door switch is turned on (when the condition for turning on the external signal 5 (a signal indicating on as the external signal 5 can be output) is satisfied). (a signal indicating ON can be output as the external signal 5). Then, while the condition for turning on the external signal 5 (outputting a signal indicating on as the external signal 5 is possible) is satisfied, the external signal 5 is turned on (outputting a signal indicating on as the external signal 5). possible). Next, when the condition to turn on the external signal 5 (to enable the output of a signal indicating on as the external signal 5) is no longer satisfied, the timer value is set to "0 (D)" for each interrupt processing. "1" is decremented. Until the timer value reaches "0 (D)", the external signal 5 is turned on (a signal indicating ON can be output as the external signal 5). Then, when the timer value becomes "0 (D)", the external signal 5 is turned off (a signal indicating off can be output as the external signal 5).
In Example 2 of FIG. 93 above, there is no need to generate rise data and check the level data, etc. at the time of the previous interrupt processing. It is possible to secure a time during which a signal indicating that the signal 4 or 5 is on can be received.

FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing an example 3 of external signal output processing. In FIG. 94, steps that perform the same processing as in FIG. 93 are assigned the same numbers, and steps that perform different processing are underlined.
In Example 3 of FIG. 94, when determining whether or not to output the external signal 4, first, in step S3251, it is determined whether or not the external signal 4 management time of the address "F014 (H)" is "0". to judge whether Then, if it is not "0", the process proceeds to step S3241 to turn on the external signal 4 (make it possible to output a signal indicating on as the external signal 4). On the other hand, if the external signal 4 control time is "0" and the output condition of the external signal 4 is satisfied in the judgments of steps S3231, S3234, S3233, and S3232, the process proceeds to step S3240 and addresses "F014 (H)". )” is set to “24 (D)” corresponding to the output time “50” ms, and the process proceeds to step S3241. On the other hand, if it is determined in steps S3231, S3234, S3233, and S3232 that none of the output conditions for the external signal 4 is satisfied, the process advances to step S3236 to turn off the external signal 4. output of a signal indicating off).

As for the external signal 5, similarly to the above, when determining whether or not to output the external signal 5, first, in step S3252, if the external signal 5 management time of the address "F015 (H)" is "0", determine whether there is Then, if it is not "0", the process proceeds to step S3247 to turn on the external signal 5 (make it possible to output a signal indicating on as the external signal 5). On the other hand, when the external signal 5 control time is "0" and it is determined in step S3242 that the door switch is on, the process advances to step S3246 to determine the external signal 5 control time of address "F015(H)". is set to "24 (D)" corresponding to the output time of "50" ms, and the process proceeds to step S3247. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S3242 that the door switch is not on, the process advances to step S3244 to turn off the external signal 5 (a signal indicating off can be output as the external signal 5).

Thus, in example 3 of FIG. 94, when the set timer value (external signal 4 control time or external signal 5 control time) is "0", the timer satisfies the output condition of external signal 4 or 5. set the value. Even if the set timer value becomes "0", if the output condition of the external signal 4 or 5 is satisfied, the timer value is set again.
In the method of Example 3 of FIG. 94, as in Example 2 of FIG. 93, there is no need to generate rise data and check the level data, etc. at the time of the previous interrupt processing. While simplifying, it is possible to secure the time during which the hall computer can receive the signal indicating that the external signal 4 or 5 is turned on.

Although the eighteenth embodiment has been described above, the eighteenth embodiment is not limited to the contents described above, and various modifications such as those described below are possible.
(1) When the setting key switch is on, when an error is detected, or when any one of the error indications is met, the external signal 4 is turned on (a signal indicating on can be output as the external signal 4). ), but not limited to this, each individual external signal (for example, external signals 4, 6, 7) is turned on (a signal indicating ON can be output as the external signals 4, 6, 7). may Also, a specific external signal (e.g., external signal 5 or 6) may be turned on when either or both of the setting key switch is on or the door switch is on ( A signal indicating ON may be output as the external signal 5 or 6).

(2) Various timer values of addresses "F013(H)" to "F015(H)" are decremented by "1" for each interrupt process. It may be decremented by "N" for every "N" interrupts or by "1" for every "N" interrupts. For example, after setting "12 (D)" as the external signal 4 management time or the external signal 5 management time, "1" may be subtracted every two interrupts.
(3) Various modifications and numerical values described in the eighteenth embodiment are examples, and can be designed as appropriate. For example, in FIG. 89, the times t1 and t2 are the minimum "0" ms, so various settings such as "5" ms and "10" ms are possible.

Also, in FIG. 89, the time t3 ((a), (b), (c), and (e) in the figure) is the minimum "50" ms, so for example "75" ms or "100" ms etc., can be set in various ways.
In particular, at time t3 in FIGS. 89 and 90 ((a), (b), (c), and (e) in FIGS. 89 and 90), the hall computer or the like reliably receives the external signals 4 and 5. It may be as long as it is possible, and may be less than "50" ms depending on the performance of the hall computer or the like.
Furthermore, the time t2 in FIG. 90 is not limited to "50" ms, and can be set variously according to specifications and the like.

(4) When the setting key switch is turned on from off, or when the setting key switch is on, the external signal 4 is turned on (a signal indicating on as the external signal 4 can be output), but the setting key switch is turned on. The configuration may be such that the external signal 4 is turned on (a signal indicating on as the external signal 4 can be output) when the change mode or the setting confirmation mode is entered.
Here, as in the eighteenth embodiment, when the setting key switch is turned on from off, or when the setting key switch is on, the external signal 4 is turned on. output possible), the external signal 4 is turned on even if the setting key switch is turned on from off while the reel 31 is rotating (a signal indicating on is output as the external signal 4 possible).
On the other hand, when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is set, when the external signal 4 is turned on (a signal indicating on as the external signal 4 can be output), the reel Even if the setting key switch turns from off to on during the rotation of 31, the external signal 4 is turned off based on the state of the setting key switch (a signal indicating off can be output as the external signal 4). do). However, it is possible that the external signal 4 is turned on based on an error (a signal indicating the on state can be output as the external signal 4).

(5) In the 18th embodiment, any one of when the setting key switch is on, when an error is detected, when an error is being displayed, or when "300" ms has not elapsed since the power was turned on. When the two conditions are satisfied, the external signal 4 is turned on (a signal indicating ON can be output as the external signal 4). However, it is not necessary to provide all of these conditions, and only one or some of the conditions, for example, when the setting key switch is on, the external signal 4 is turned on (a signal indicating on can be output as the external signal 4). ) configuration. In other words, the external signal 4 is not turned on (a signal indicating ON as the external signal 4 cannot be output) even under other conditions, for example, when "300" ms has not elapsed since the power was turned on. may be
(6) All the embodiments and various modifications described in this specification, including the eighteenth embodiment, are not limited to being implemented independently, and can be implemented in combination as appropriate.

<Nineteenth Embodiment>
The nineteenth embodiment relates to a setting change end sound.
The setting change end sound will be described below for the case where the gaming machine is a slot machine (19th embodiment (A)) and the case where the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine (19th embodiment (B)). do.
In the following description, the ``setting change state (also referred to as ``setting change mode'' or ``setting change processing'') is a state in which setting values can be changed and a game is started (progressed). ) is in a game state that cannot be played. In the setting change state, it is also possible to end without changing the setting value.
The 'setting confirmation state' (also referred to as 'setting confirmation mode' or 'setting confirmation processing') is a state in which setting values cannot be changed but current setting values can be confirmed. In the setting confirmation state, the game cannot be started (progressed) as in the setting change state.
On the other hand, the 'normal state (also referred to as 'normal mode')' refers to a state other than the setting change state and the setting confirmation state. In the normal state, the game can be started (progressed) except for special circumstances such as the occurrence of an error.

<Nineteenth Embodiment (A): When Gaming Machine is Slot Machine>
FIG. 95 is a block diagram showing an outline of the control of the slot machine 10 in the nineteenth embodiment (A), corresponding to FIG. 1 of the first embodiment.
95, a door switch 17, a setting key insertion slot 151, a setting key switch 152, and a setting change (reset) switch 153 are provided as components not shown in FIG. Although the above configuration is not shown in FIG. 1, it does not mean that the above configuration is not provided in the first embodiment.
The setting key insertion slot 151, the setting key switch 152, and the setting change (reset) switch 153 are not necessarily provided on the main control board 50, and may be provided as separate devices.

The door switch 17 is attached to either the cabinet 13 or the front door 12 in FIG.
As shown in FIG. 22, the cabinet 13 and the front door 12 are normally closed, but the front door 12 is opened when changing settings or checking settings. The door switch 17 is a switch that turns on when the front door 12 is opened and detects the opening of the front door 12 . When the opening of the front door 12 is detected by the door switch 17, a door open error is notified.
A setting key insertion slot 151 , a setting key switch 152 and a setting change (reset) switch 153 are mounted on the main control board 50 .
The setting key switch 152 is turned on by inserting the setting key into the setting key insertion slot 151 and rotating the setting key 90 degrees clockwise. switch used.

Furthermore, the setting change (reset) switch 153 is a switch that serves both as a setting change switch and a reset switch. The setting change switch is a switch that is operated when changing the set value in the setting change state. Also, the reset switch is a switch that is operated after the error that has occurred is removed to restore the state before the error occurred.
In the following description, it may be referred to as "setting change (reset) switch 153", "setting change switch 153", or "reset switch 153".
In this embodiment, the setting change switch 153 and the reset switch 153 are integrally provided, but the setting change switch 153 and the reset switch 153 may be provided separately.

When shifting to the setting confirmation state, the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion opening 151 with the power turned on, and rotated clockwise by 90 degrees, for example. As a result, the setting key switch 152 is turned on. When the door switch 17 is turned on and the setting key switch 151 is turned on while the power is on, the setting confirmation state is entered. In the setting confirmation state, the setting value cannot be changed (even if the setting change switch 153 is operated, the setting value does not change), but the current setting value can be confirmed. The current set value is displayed on the set value display LED 73 . When the setting key is rotated counterclockwise to turn off the setting key switch 152, the setting confirmation state is terminated.

When the power is off, the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion slot 151, the setting key is rotated 90 degrees clockwise, the setting key switch 152 is turned on, and the power switch 11 is turned on. It becomes possible to shift to the setting change state (setting change processing in FIG. 39).

When the power of the slot machine 10 is turned on as described above, as shown in FIG. 38, a checksum is executed (step S204), the designated switch is on (step S208), and the power-off recovery is abnormal ( Step S209) or when the setting change is possible (step S210), it becomes possible to shift to the setting change process (setting change state).

In the nineteenth embodiment, the "designated switches" in step S208 are two switches, ie, the door switch 17 and the setting key switch 152. FIG.
Alternatively, in addition to the door switch 17 and the setting key switch 152, a setting door switch (a switch that turns on when a cover provided to cover the setting key insertion port 151 and the setting change (reset) switch 153 is opened) is provided. If provided, three switches including the set door switch.
In the following explanation, it is assumed that no setting door switch is provided and that the specified switches are the door switch 17 and the setting key switch 152. FIG.

In step S208 of FIG. 38, only when the door switch 17 is on and the setting key switch 152 is on, it is determined "Yes" in step S208, and the setting change state can be entered. On the other hand, when either one of the door switch 17 and the setting key switch 152 is ON, or when both switches are OFF, "No" is determined in step S208, and the setting change state is entered. does not migrate.
As a result, when the front door 12 is not opened or when the setting key is not inserted, there is a high possibility of cheating, and the setting change state is not entered.

Also, in FIG. 38, "start of setting change state" is first determined when "Yes" is determined in step S209 or when "No" is determined in step S210. . In this case, the “setting change state” includes the processing of steps S221 to S233 in FIG. 39 as well.
Alternatively, secondly, in FIG. 39, when the output request for starting the setting change is set in step S234 and the control command set 1 is executed in step S235 (the command to start changing the setting is sent to the sub-control board 80). ) is defined as "start of setting change state".

However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the period immediately before step S221 in FIG. 39 may be defined as "the start of the setting change state". Also, the period immediately after step S231 (at the end of initialization) may be defined as "the start of the setting change state". Furthermore, the interrupt activation time of step S233 or immediately after step S233 (immediately before step S234) may be defined as "start of setting change state".

Furthermore, in FIG. 39, "end of setting change state" is determined when setting key switch 152 is turned off in step S243.
Alternatively, secondly, in FIG. 39, when an output request at the end of setting change is set in step S246, and control command set 1 is executed in step S247 (a command for ending setting change is sent to the sub-control board 80). is sent) as "end of setting change state".
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the "end of the setting change state" may be determined when "Yes" is determined in step S242 (when the start switch 41 is operated and the set value is determined).

Furthermore, as will be described later, the setting change state may end on condition that the front door 12 is closed, in other words, on condition that the door switch 17 is turned off from on. In this case, even if the setting key switch 152 is turned off, the setting change state does not end when the front door 12 is open (when the door switch 17 is on).
Also, if the front door 12 is closed (when the door switch 17 is off) when the setting key switch 152 is turned off, the setting change state is not terminated. This is for anti-goto measures.
In the following description, in the nineteenth embodiment (A), when "Yes" is determined in step S243 in FIG. ”.

In steps S246 and S247 of FIG. 39, when a command indicating that the setting change is finished is transmitted to the sub-control board 80, the sub-control board 80 receives the command. When the sub-control board 80 receives the command, the sub-control board 80 executes a setting change end sound and an output (output by the effect lamp 21) visually indicating the end of the setting change.
Here, the setting change end sound corresponds to outputting a voice saying "setting change is finished" from the speaker 22 in this embodiment.

Here, there are various opinions about the speed at which words (Japanese) are spoken, but according to the idea that a speed of about 300 characters per minute is appropriate, it is possible to say, "Finish setting change." The time "T01" from the start of voice output to the end of output may be set to approximately "2000" ms.
FIG. 96 is a time chart showing the relationship between the setting change state, the setting change end sound, the lamp effect, and one game time, which will be described later, in the nineteenth embodiment.
When the sub-control board 80 receives the command indicating that the setting change has ended, it immediately outputs a setting change end sound. Here, in FIG. 39, if "Yes" is determined in step S243, in the first interrupt processing (FIG. 53) after "Yes" is determined in step S243, step S464 indicates that the setting change has ended. command is sent.

In the sub-control board 80, the sub-control board 80 independently executes interrupt processing, and determines whether or not a control command (a command indicating that the setting change has been completed) has been received for each interrupt processing. ing. Then, when it is determined that a command to the effect that the setting change is completed has been received, it starts outputting a setting change end sound.
In order to go through the above process, at least one interrupt (referring to an interrupt by the main control board 50. One interrupt time is "2.235" ms) from when "Yes" is determined in step S243 in FIG. After that, output processing of the setting change end sound by the sub-control board 80 or output of the setting change end sound is started. In other words, in FIG. 39, the setting change end sound is not output until at least one interrupt has passed after "Yes" is determined in step S243.

In FIG. 96, the timing at which the setting change state changes from ON to OFF is when the setting key switch 152 is turned OFF as described above. However, after the setting key switch 152 is turned off, a command is transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub-control board 80, and the sub-control board 80 receives the command and starts outputting the setting change end sound. Since the time is extremely short, in FIG. 96, the end timing of the setting change state coincides with the output start timing of the setting change end sound.

Further, as an effect indicating that the setting change is completed, in addition to the setting change end sound, the effect lamp 21 is set in a predetermined lighting mode (“lighting” is a concept including blinking. is a concept including the lighting color.) is executed.
Here, when the lighting of the effect lamp 21 is executed, at least the lighting mode is not the same as the lighting mode of the lighting of the effect lamp 21 when the special role (accessory) is won. For example, if it is determined that the lamp A among the effect lamps 21 is lit in the lighting mode a as an effect indicating that the special role is won, the effect lamp 21 is turned off as an effect indicating that the setting change is completed. In the case of lighting, a lamp other than the lamp A may be turned on. In this case, if a lamp different from the lamp A is lit, it may be in the same manner as the lighting manner when indicating the winning of the special role.

Further, when the effect lamp 21 is turned on as an effect indicating that the setting change is completed, the lamp A may be turned on. However, the lighting mode in this case is a mode different from the lighting mode when indicating that a special combination has been won.
As described above, when the lighting of the production lamp 21 is executed as an effect indicating that the setting change has been completed, the special role has been won (the special role has been won in the game, or the special role The lighting mode of the performance lamp 21 is not the same as that of the performance notifying that the winning is carried over. As a result, when the game is started immediately after the setting change is finished, even if the effect lamp 21 is turned on as an effect indicating that the setting change is finished, the player does not win the special combination. It is possible to prevent confusion if there is.

In addition, it is preferable that the lighting pattern of the performance lamp 21 indicating that the setting change is completed and the lighting pattern of the performance lamp 21 indicating that the special role is won are different so that they are not confused. In other words, the lighting pattern of the effect lamp 21 indicating that the setting change is completed is set to a lighting pattern that is not used for other effects, and if the lighting pattern is seen, the effect means the end of the setting change. It is preferable to make it understandable.
Further, for the effect lamp 21, the lighting pattern indicating that the setting change is completed and the lighting pattern indicating that the special combination is won are made the same, and the other lamps other than the effect lamp 21 are changed in setting. The lighting pattern indicating that the game has ended may be different from the lighting pattern that indicates that the special combination has been won.
Specifically, for example, when indicating that the setting change is completed, the effect lamp 21 and the other lamps are all lit, and when notifying that the special combination is won, the effect lamp 21 is turned on. One example is to turn on the lamp, but not to turn on the other lamp. In this way, by checking the lighting patterns of the effect lamp 21 and the other lamps (lamps of general game machines), the administrator can grasp the state.

Furthermore, when the effect lamp 21 is turned on as an effect indicating that the setting change is finished, in principle, it is output at the same time as the setting change end sound. However, without being limited to this, the lighting effect of the effect lamp 21 may be started before outputting the setting change end sound. Alternatively, after the output of the setting change end sound is started, the lighting effect of the effect lamp 21 may be started before the output of the setting change end sound is ended. Furthermore, the lighting effect of the effect lamp 21 may be started after the output of the setting change end sound is ended.
As shown in FIG. 96, in the following embodiment, lighting of the effect lamp 21 indicating that the setting change is completed is executed at the same time when the output of the setting change end sound is started.
Also, if the lighting time of the effect lamp 21 indicating that the setting change is completed is set to "T02",
T01>T02
T01=T02
T01<T02
However, as shown in FIG. 96, in this embodiment, it is assumed that "T01<T02". For example, as described above, when the time T01 is set to about "2000" ms, the time T02 may be set to about "2500" ms to about "4000" ms.

Next, consider the case where the setting change state is ended, the game is shifted to the normal state (the state in which the game can be started), and the game is immediately started.
Hereinafter, as shown in FIG. 96, the time required from the moment the setting change state ends until the game starts (until the game start condition is met) (preparation time until the game starts) is referred to as "T11". do. In addition, the time (one game time) from the start of the game (after the conditions for starting the game are satisfied) to the end of the game is defined as "T12".
In the setting change state, data stored in the RWM 53 are cleared as shown in FIG. . Therefore, immediately after the setting change state ends, the number of bets is "0" and the number of credits is also "0". Therefore, after the setting change state ends, as shown in FIG. 2, it is necessary to insert medals M from the medal slot 47 and bet a specified number before starting the game.

Here, in the normal game (when the accessory is not activated), the number of bets "3" is the commonly used prescribed number, but in the nineteenth embodiment (A), the minimum bet number "1" is the prescribed number. , the game can be started with the number of bets "1". When the specified number is "1", the game can be started earlier than when the specified number is "2" or "3".
In FIG. 2, when the medal M is at the position M1 and the medal M is released into the medal selector, as described in the first embodiment, it passes through the path in the medal selector and reaches the insertion sensors 44a and 44b. detected. If it is judged by the insertion sensors 44a and 44b that the medals have passed normally, "1" is bet.

In FIG. 2, the time from when the medal M is inserted from the position M1, detected by the insertion sensors 44a and 44b, to when the specified number is bet corresponds to the preparation time "T11" for starting the game. The preparation time "T11" in this case does not consider the operation time for closing the front door 12 or canceling the door open error.).
Here, if the prescribed number is "1", one medal must be inserted, if the prescribed number is "2", two medals must be inserted, and if the prescribed number is "3" Requires 3 medals. In FIG. 2, from the state of medal M1, the time from inserting one medal to betting "1" is "T11a", and the time from inserting two medals to betting "2". Let "T11b" be, and let "T11c" be the time from inserting three medals until "3" is betted.
T11a<T11b<T11c
becomes.
However, since 2 or 3 medals can be inserted continuously, T11b (when the prescribed number is "2") is shorter than twice the time of T11a (when the prescribed number is "1"). It is believed that there is. Similarly, T11c (when the prescribed number is "3") is considered to be less than three times the time of T11a (when the prescribed number is "1").

When the specified number is betted, the game can be started by operating the start switch 41. Therefore, in this embodiment, it is assumed that the start switch 41 is operated at the moment when "1" is bet. Therefore, the time from when the specified number is betted to when the start switch 41 is operated is set to "0".
In FIG. 41, when the start switch 41 is operated ("Yes" in step S278), rotation of the reel 31 is started in step S286.
Here, the motor 32 accelerates the reel 31 to reach a speed of 80 revolutions per minute. When the speed reaches 80 revolutions per minute, the speed is kept constant. The operation of the stop switch 42 is prohibited until the reel 31 reaches the constant speed state, and the operation of the stop switch 42 can be accepted after reaching the constant speed state.
The time from when the start switch 41 is operated (after the reel 31 starts rotating) to when the operation of the stop switch 42 can be accepted is defined as "T12a".

Next, it is assumed that the first stop switch 42 is operated at the moment when it becomes possible to accept the operation of the stop switch 42 . In other words, the time from the moment the stop switch 42 can be operated until the first stop switch 42 is operated is "0".
When the stop switch 42 is operated, as shown in FIG. 13, a reel stop control time (time until the reel 31 stops) and a four-phase excitation state time are required (note that the four-phase excitation state is Before the end, it may be possible to accept the next operation of the stop switch 42. An example of this will be described later.). The total time of these is assumed to be "T12b".
When the four-phase excitation state ends, it becomes possible to accept the operation of the next (second) stop switch 42 . Here, it is assumed that the second stop switch 42 is operated at the moment when the four-phase excitation state of the motor 32 to be stopped first ends and the operation of the next stop switch 42 can be accepted. In other words, the time from the end of the four-phase excitation state of the motor 32 that stops first to the operation of the second stop switch 42 is defined as "0".

When the second stop switch 42 is operated, similarly to the above, the operation of the third stop switch 42 can be accepted after the time "T12b", which is the reel stop control time and the time of the four-phase excitation state, has passed. becomes. Here, it is assumed that the third stop switch 42 is operated at the moment when the four-phase excitation state of the second motor 32 is completed and the operation of the next stop switch 42 can be accepted. In other words, the time from the completion of the four-phase excitation state of the motor 32 that stops second to the operation of the third stop switch 42 is set to "0".
When the third stop switch 42 is operated, the time "T12b", which is the reel stop control time and the four-phase excitation state time, is required as described above.

It should be noted that the moment when the last reel 31 stops may be defined as the end of one game. It is determined that one game has ended (when there is no payout).
Also, when the combination of symbols corresponding to any combination in the game stops, it is determined that the game is finished when the payout process is finished, specifically when the process of FIG. 49 is finished.
When the symbol combination corresponding to the replay is stopped and displayed, automatic bet processing is executed at the start of the next game as shown in FIG. For this reason, when the symbol combination corresponding to the replay is stopped and displayed, the end of the game is determined not at the end of the automatic betting process, but at the end of the four-phase excitation state for the third reel 31.例文帳に追加

For example, firstly, when the combination of symbols corresponding to the small winning combination is stopped and the addition processing to the credits is executed, the end of the addition processing to the credits is determined as the end of the game.
Further, when the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination is stopped and the actual medal payout process is executed, the payout of the last medal (driving of the hopper 36) is completed, and in step S401 of FIG. '' (when it is determined that the payout number data is "0") is defined as the end of the game. However, immediately after the setting change is completed, the number of credits is "0". All medals paid out are credited. Therefore, medals are not actually paid out in one game immediately after the setting change is completed.
"T12c" is the time from when the combination of symbols corresponding to the minor win is stopped and the four-phase excitation state of the motor 32 for the third reel 31 is completed to when the payout of medals (addition to credits) is completed. and
However, when the combination is not won (when no medals are paid out), "T12c=0".

In addition, when an effect (such as a winning combination notification effect) is output when all the reels 31 are stopped, the effect time is not included in one game time. For example, even if an effect is output for several seconds after all the reels 31 stop, when the four-phase excitation state of the motor 32 ends when the last reel 31 stops (at that point, all the reels 31 stop). (Even if the effect that started the output at the time is continued), one game shall be completed. That is, the end of one game shall be based on the control by the main control board 50 .

As described above, when an operation for starting a game is performed immediately after the setting change state ends, and a game is started, a preparatory time "T11" is required until the game is started.
Furthermore, one game time "T12" is, as described above,
(1) The time "T12a" from when the start switch 41 is operated (after the reel 31 starts rotating) until the stop switch 42 can be operated.
(2) The time from the first operation of the stop switch 42 to the stop of the reel 31 and the time of the four-phase excitation state "T12b"
(3) Time from operation of second stop switch 42 to stop of reel 31 and time of 4-phase excitation state "T12b"
(4) The time from the operation of the third stop switch 42 to the stop of the reel 31 and the time of the four-phase excitation state "T12b"
(5) Time "T12c" until the payout of medals (addition to credits) is completed when winning a small winning combination
requires.
Therefore,
T12=T12a+3×T12b+T12c
becomes.
It is assumed that the three "T12b" times are the same.

Furthermore, when the start switch 41 is operated, a lottery for a role is performed (step S282 in FIG. 41). .).
"Freeze" in this case refers to a state in which the progress of the game is stopped for a certain period of time. Therefore, for example, when the start switch 41 is operated, a lottery for a role is executed, a special role is won, and it is determined to execute a freeze as an effect corresponding to the winning of the special role, the rotation of the reel 31 starts. do not. After the freeze ends, the rotation of the reel 31 starts. Incidentally, when the progress of the game is stopped by freezing, the sub-control means 80 outputs an effect using the image display device 23 or the like.
Assuming that the freeze time in this case is "T12d", one game time "T12" when the freeze is executed is "T12a+T12b×3+T12c+T12d".

Next, the shortest time of one game time "T12" is examined. In order to make one game time the shortest time, the freeze is not executed and the combination is not won.
Therefore, the shortest time of one game time "T12" is "T12a+3×T12b".
First, assuming that the specified number is "1", the time from when the medal M is inserted (dropped) into the medal selector from the position of M1 in FIG. Assume that "T11" is about "800" ms at the shortest.
Also, it is assumed that the time "T12a" from when the start switch 41 is operated to when the reel 31 reaches a constant speed and when the stop switch 42 is permitted to be operated is approximately "1200" ms.

Furthermore, the time "T12b" from when the stop switch 42 is operated until the reel 31 is controlled to stop and the four-phase excitation state of the motor 32 ends (the next operation of the stop switch 42 can be accepted) is As exemplified in FIG. 13, the shortest is about "140" ms (the shortest reel stop control time is about "40" ms, the shortest time of the 4-phase excitation state is about "100" ms). Assume that
In this case, "T11+T12" which is the time required to start one game and one game time (shortest time) is "800 (T11) + 1200 (T12a) + 140 x 3 (T12b x 3)" = "2420" ms to some extent.
One game time "T12" when medals are paid out after all reels 31 are stopped, or when freeze is executed when the start switch 41 is operated, is longer than the above time.

On the other hand, as described above, when the setting change state ends, the setting change end sound is output for the time "T01" (approximately "2000" ms), and the effect lamp 21 notifies the end of the setting change. Lighting is output for a time "T02" (for example, about "2500" to "4000" ms).
Therefore, when the game is started immediately after the setting change state is ended, the setting change end sound "T01" to be output immediately after the setting change state is ended, the preparation time "T11" for starting the game, and one game The relationship with the time "T12 (shortest time)" is
T01<T11+T12
becomes.
As a result, even if an operation (preparation) for starting the game is performed from the moment the setting change state ends, and the game is started at the moment when the preparation for starting the game is completed, the game is finished. The output of the setting change end sound has ended before.
FIG. 96 shows the relationship between the times "T01", "T11", and "T12".

Here, the above example is an example in which the stop switch 42 is operated, and after the four-phase excitation state is terminated, the next operation of the stop switch 42 can be accepted. However, without being limited to this, after the stop switch 42 is operated, it may be possible to accept the next operation of the stop switch 42 before ending the four-phase excitation state. By controlling in this way, the game can be completed more quickly. For example, after the stop switch 42 is operated (accepting the operation of the stop switch 42), it is possible to accept the next operation of the stop switch 42 at the time of the next interrupt processing.
In this case, of the above-mentioned time "T12b", the time in the four-phase excitation state can be considered to be approximately "0", so "T12b (shortest time)=40 (ms)".
Therefore, "T11+T12", which is the time required to start one game and one game time (shortest time) in this case, is "800 (T11) + 1200 (T12a) + 40 x 3 (T12b x 3)" = "2120 ” ms.
Therefore, even if it is controlled in this way, it becomes "T01<T11+T12".

In addition, the production timing of the slot machine 10 is when the start switch 41 is operated (when the reel 31 starts rotating), when the first stop switch 42 is operated (when the first reel 31 stops), and when the second stop switch 42 is operated (when the reel 31 stops). 2 reels 31 are stopped), and the third stop switch 42 is operated (when all reels 31 are stopped). The timing to do so is often when all the reels 31 are stopped.
Therefore, in the case of outputting an effect to announce the winning combination of the game when all the reels 31 are stopped, the effect is output after the output of the setting change end sound is completed. , and the setting change end sound do not overlap (do not overlap). Therefore, even when the game is started immediately after ending the setting change state, the player can accurately understand the effect when all the reels 31 are stopped.

However, when there is an effect to be output when the start switch 41 is operated or when the first or second stop switch 42 is operated, the output timing of the effect and the output timing of the setting change end sound may overlap.
Here, the speaker 22 of this embodiment has a plurality of channels. The channel for outputting the setting change end sound is set to be different from the channel for outputting the notification effect of the winning combination. As a result, even if the effect of notifying the winning combination is output from the speaker 22 after the output of the setting change end sound is started, the setting change end sound is not erased in the middle. However, it is possible that the setting change end sound and the effect sound announcing the winning combination may overlap.

Also, the lighting time T02 of the effect lamp 21 indicating that the setting change has been completed is
T02<T11+T12
T02=T11+T12
T02>T11+T12
Both cases are possible. However, as described above, if the lighting of the effect lamp 21 indicating that the setting change is completed is not confused with the lighting of the effect lamp 21 as the notification effect of the winning combination, no problem arises.

Also, the preparation time "T11" until the start of the game is the time to close the front door 12 after finishing the setting change state, and to eliminate the door open error (error indicating that the front door 12 is open). does not take into account the time to
When the setting change state ends, at least the front door 12 should be in the open state. Therefore, even if the setting change state ends, the slot machine 10 side detects a door open error and issues an error notification. The game cannot proceed (start) when the door open error occurs. When the door open error occurs, the blocker 45 is controlled to be off (to return medals), so even if medals are inserted from the medal slot 47, they are not bet. Even if a bet is made, the game will not start even if the start switch 41 is operated.

To cancel the door open error, the front door 12 is closed and the door switch 17 is turned off. Although it is possible to configure so that the door open error is resolved at the moment the door switch 17 is turned off, generally, the key is inserted into the key insertion opening for opening the front door 12 provided in the front door 12. By inserting the key and rotating the key in the opposite direction (for example, counterclockwise) to opening the front door 12, the door open error is resolved (the error notification is terminated). Therefore, the preparation time "T11" for starting the game after the setting change state ends includes the operation time for closing the front door 12 and inserting the key to cancel the door open error. This is because the game cannot be started while the door open error has occurred.

When ending the setting change state on the condition that the setting key switch 152 is turned off, the setting change state can be ended even if the front door 12 is open. Therefore, in this case, the output of the setting change end sound is started while the front door 12 is open, and the lighting of the effect lamp 21 indicating that the setting change is finished is also started.

On the other hand, it is possible to have a specification in which the setting change state is not terminated unless the front door 12 is closed. In this case, the setting change state is not ended only by turning off the setting key switch 152, and closing the front door 12 (turning off the door switch 17) is set as one of conditions for ending the setting change state. Alternatively, the setting change state may be ended simply by closing the front door 12 . In this case, when the front door 12 is closed (when the door switch 17 is turned off), output of the setting change end sound is started. Alternatively, the setting change state may end when the front door 12 is closed and the door open error is cancelled. In this case, when the door open error is canceled, the output of the setting change end sound is started.

Even in the case of the specification that the setting change state ends when the front door 12 is closed and the door open error is canceled, the time from the end of the setting change to the end of one game (T11+T12) is required as described above. , the setting change end sound output time "T01" is shorter than the output time "T01" of the setting change end sound.
Also, if the setting key switch 152 is turned off, the output of the setting change end sound is started while the front door 12 is open when the setting change state is to be ended even if the front door 12 is open. Therefore, after the front door 12 is closed after that and the door open error is canceled, even if one game is finished after the time "T11+T12", the output of the setting change end sound is finished before the game is finished. .
If the (operation) time from the end of the setting change state to the closing of the front door 12 and the release of the door open error is "T10", then the time from the end of the setting change state to the start of one game is defined as "T10". The preparation time is "T10+T11". Therefore, it goes without saying that "T01<T10+T11+T12".

The above is the case where the setting change end sound output time "T01" is set to be shorter than the time "T11+T12" from the end of the setting change state to the end of one game. The relationship between the output time "T01" of the setting change end sound and the time "T11+T12" from the end of the setting change state to the end of one game can be set variously as follows.
(1) The output time “T01” of the setting change end sound is set shorter than the average time “T11+T12” when the winning combination is not won.
(2) The output time "T01" of the setting change end sound is set shorter than the average time "T11+T12" when the special combination is won in the combination lottery result. In addition, when a special combination is won as a result of the combination lottery, the freezing described above may or may not be executed, so the average time is "T12". For example, when a special role is won, the freeze is executed with a probability of "p"%, and the freeze is not executed with a probability of "100-p"%, the average value of one game time "T12" is
"Average 1 game time without freeze T12 x (100-p)/100" + "Average 1 game time with freeze T12 x p/100"
becomes.

<Nineteenth Embodiment (B): When the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine>
Next, the relationship between the setting change state, setting change end sound, and one game time in the pachinko game machine will be described.
First, an outline of the pachinko gaming machine will be explained.
FIG. 97 is an external perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 500 viewed from the front side (player side). Also, FIG. 98 is an external perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 500 viewed from the back side. In FIG. 98, illustration of a unit including the image display device 543 and the game board 504 is omitted, and the glass door 505 is shown from the rear side. Furthermore, in FIG. 98, illustration of board cases other than the main board case 550 is omitted as appropriate.
Furthermore, FIG. 99 is a block diagram of the pachinko game machine 500. As shown in FIG.

In the hall, the pachinko gaming machine 500 is generally installed on an island. The pachinko game machine 500 firstly includes an outer frame 501 and a front frame 502 . The outer frame 501 is a frame formed so as to surround the pachinko gaming machine 500 . Also, the front frame 502 is attached to the front side (player side) of the outer frame 501 in FIG. The front frame 502 is attached to the outer frame 501 so that it can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame 501 by means of a hinge mechanism 503 provided at the upper left end of the outer frame 501 in FIG. Therefore, when the pachinko game machine 500 is installed on the island, the outer frame 501 is fixed to the island, but the front frame 502 can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame 501, and the back side of the front frame 502 be accessible.

The front frame 502 is provided with a game board 504 . Although not shown, the game board 504 is provided with an image display device 543, a nail, an accessory, a pinwheel, and various prize-winning ports (including a starting port 532, which will be described later). In addition, portions of the front frame 502 other than the game board 504 are provided with an effect lamp 541, a speaker 542, an upper plate 506, a lower plate 507, a shooting handle 508, and the like.

A key insertion opening 521 is formed on the right side edge of the front frame 502 in FIG.
When the front frame 502 is closed to the outer frame 501 (the state shown in FIG. 97), the key is inserted through the key insertion opening 521 to unlock the outer frame 501 and the front frame 502. , the front frame 502 can be opened forward (toward the player) with respect to the outer frame 501 with the hinge mechanism 503 as the central axis. When the front frame 502 is opened with respect to the outer frame 501, the game board 504 attached to the front frame 502 side, the glass door 505, the effect lamp 541, the speaker 542, the upper plate 506, the lower plate 507, and the firing handle The whole including 508 moves forward with respect to the outer frame 501 .
When the front frame 502 is opened, a frame opening switch 523, which will be described later, is turned on. When the frame open switch 523 is turned on, a frame open error is notified.

The glass door 505 is attached so as to be able to be opened and closed so as to cover the game area on the front surface of the game board 504 . For example, when clogging of game balls occurs in the game area, it is to be resolved. By inserting the key into the key insertion opening 521 and performing the unlocking operation of the glass door 505, the lock between the glass door 505 and the game board 504 is released, and the glass door 505 can be opened. When the glass door 505 is opened, a later-described door opening switch 522 is turned on. When the door open switch 522 is turned on, a door open error is notified.

In the block diagram of FIG. 99, in the pachinko game machine 500, a main control board (main board, main control board) 530 corresponding to the main control board 50 of the slot machine 10 and a sub control board 80 corresponding to the sub control board 80 of the slot machine 10 A control board (effect control board, effect board) 540 is provided.
The main control board 530, the payout control board 520, and the sub-control board 540 are provided with CPU, RWM, ROM, etc. like the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 of the slot machine 10, respectively. In FIG. 99, illustration of the CPU, RWM, ROM, etc. is omitted.

Based on the power switch 511 being turned on, the power supply board 510 controls power supply.
The power supply board 510 and the payout control board (also referred to as "prize ball control board") 520 are connected to a harness (consisting of one or more lead wires (also referred to as "signal wires")). . It is assumed that the substrates shown in FIG. 99 are all connected by harnesses. Also, in FIG. 99, illustration of the relay board is omitted, but in reality, the boards shown in FIG. 99 may be directly connected or connected via a relay board. There is
A launch board 512 is connected to the power supply board 510 . The launch board 512 is a board for driving and controlling the launch device 513 . The shooting device 513 is a device that launches game balls onto the game board 504 (game area). When the shooting handle 508 is operated, the operation is detected and the shooting device 513 is driven and controlled to launch the game ball into the game area.

A payout control board 520 is connected to the power supply board 510 . A payout device 524 is connected to the payout control board 520 . A payout device 524 is a device that lends game balls corresponding to the requested number when there is a request for ball lending from the CR unit, and pays out prize balls corresponding to the winning when there is a winning of the game balls. be. The payout control board 520 and the CR unit are connected via an external terminal board 525 .

A door open switch 522 and a frame open switch 523 are electrically connected to the payout control board 520 . Note that the door opening switch 522 and the frame opening switch 523 may be connected to the main control board 530 .
As described above, when the glass door 505 is opened, the door opening switch 522 is turned on, and the signal is input to the payout control board 520 and further transmitted to the main control board 530 . When the main control board 530 detects that the door opening switch 522 is turned on, the sub control board 540 notifies of a door opening error, for example.
Further, when the front frame 502 is opened, the frame opening switch 523 is turned on, and the signal is input to the payout control board 520 and further transmitted to the main control board 530 . When the main control board 530 detects that the frame open switch 523 is turned on, the sub control board 540 notifies a frame open error, for example.

The main control board 530 is connected with a starting port switch 533 for detecting a winning to a starting port 532 which is one of the winning ports provided in the game area of the game board 504 . When the game ball wins the starting port 532 and the main control board 530 detects that the starting port switch 533 is turned on, a random number value is obtained as described later, and a winning/failing determination is executed (lottery processing). Then, based on the success/failure determination result, the variation time and stop design of the special design display device 531 are determined, and the variation pattern and stop design of the special design display device 531 are controlled so as to correspond to the determination result.

In addition, on the game board 504, other than the starting hole 532, there are other winning holes such as a general winning hole and a big winning hole (a winning hole opened during a special game for a big win). is omitted in the nineteenth embodiment (B).
Further, the special symbol display device 531 is provided on the game board 504, and is a device that displays the success/failure determination result based on the turn-on of the starting port switch 533 by means of special symbols. In other words, the "special symbol" is a symbol that indicates whether the result of the winning/losing determination is winning or not, depending on the stopped symbols after variation. The special symbol display device 531 is composed of, for example, a 7-segment display.
It should be noted that the flow from the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol to the stop will be described later.

The main control board 530 is provided with a setting key switch 535 having a setting key insertion opening 534 and a setting change (reset) switch 536 . The setting key insertion slot 534, the setting key switch 535, and the setting change (reset) switch 536 are not necessarily provided on the main control board 530, and may be provided as separate devices.
The setting key switch 535 is a switch that is turned on by inserting a predetermined setting key from the setting key insertion opening 534 and rotating it clockwise by 90 degrees, for example.

A setting change (reset) switch 536 is a switch that serves both as a setting change switch and a reset switch. The setting change switch is a switch that is operated when changing the set value during the setting change state. A reset switch is a switch that is operated after removing an error that has occurred to restore the state before the error occurred. In the following description, there are cases where it is called "setting change (reset) switch 536", cases where it is called "setting change switch 536", and cases where it is called "reset switch 536".
In this embodiment, the setting change switch 536 and the reset switch 536 are integrally provided, but the configuration is not limited to this, and the setting change switch 536 and the reset switch 536 may be provided separately.
In the pachinko game machine 500, when the power is off, the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion slot 534, the setting key is rotated to turn on the setting key switch 535, and the reset switch 536 is turned on. By turning on the power switch 511, it becomes possible to shift to the setting change state.

When the setting change state is entered, the current set value is displayed on the set value display LED 537 . The set value display LED 537 is equivalent to the set value display LED 73 in the slot machine 10 shown in FIG. 1, and is composed of, for example, a 7-segment display.
Then, when changing the setting value, the setting change switch 536 is operated. Each time the setting change switch 536 is operated (pushed) once, the set value is incremented by "+1". ·→"5"→"6"→"1"→... and the setting value changes cyclically. Then, when the setting key is rotated counterclockwise, for example, and the setting key switch 535 is turned off, the setting value is determined and the setting change state ends. When the setting change state ends, the setting value displayed on the setting value display LED 537 is also extinguished.

When the power is off, the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion slot 534, the setting key is rotated, and the power switch 511 is turned on while the reset switch 536 is off. Become. In the setting confirmation state, the setting value cannot be changed, but the current setting value is displayed on the setting value display LED 537 . Then, when the setting key is rotated to turn off the setting key switch 535, the setting confirmation state ends. When the setting confirmation state ends, the setting value displayed on the setting value display LED 537 is also turned off.
In the pachinko game machine 500, unlike the slot machine 10, even if the setting key switch 535 is turned on after the power is turned on, the setting confirmation state is not entered and the setting value is not displayed.

The management information display LED 538 corresponds to the management information display LED (role ratio monitor) 74 in the slot machine 10, and is called a performance display monitor in the case of the pachinko game machine 500, as described above. Like the management information display LED 74, the management information display LED 538 is composed of four 7-segments.

The sub-control board 540 is connected to the main control board 530 and is a board for determining the contents of the performance based on the command transmitted from the main control board 530 and controlling to output the determined performance. Although one sub-control board 540 is shown in FIG. 99, in reality, for example, the sub-control board 540 is divided into a sub-main board (a board for controlling the entire performance) and a sub-sub-board (for example, an image display board). board for controlling the image display of the device 23).

Similar to the slot machine 10 , the performance peripheral equipment includes a performance lamp 541 , a speaker 542 and an image (liquid crystal) display device 543 .
As shown in FIG. 97 , at least part of the effect lamp 541 is attached so as to cover the outer peripheral edge of the front frame 502 . Also, the speaker 542 is attached to the upper side of the front frame 502 . Furthermore, the image display device 543 is attached so that an image is displayed substantially in the center of the game area of the game board 504 .

Next, control processing of the pachinko gaming machine 500 will be described.
FIG. 100 is a flowchart for explaining the flow of startup after power-on of the pachinko gaming machine 500 .
When the power switch 511 is turned on and the power is turned on, in step S701, the main control board (specifically, it corresponds to the main CPU) 530 determines whether or not the condition for shifting to the setting change state is satisfied. to judge. In the present embodiment, the conditions for transitioning to the setting change state are that the frame open switch 523 is on, the setting change key switch 535 is on, and the reset switch 536 is on. If it is determined that all these conditions are satisfied, the process proceeds to step S702, and if it is determined that all three switches are not on, the process proceeds to step S703. In step S702, the process shifts to setting change processing (setting change state). Then, when the setting change processing is completed, the process proceeds to step S709.

In step S703, the main control board 530 determines whether or not the condition for shifting to the setting confirmation state is satisfied. In this embodiment, the conditions for transitioning to the setting confirmation state are that the frame open switch 523 is on, the setting change key switch 535 is on, and the reset switch 536 is off. If it is determined that these conditions are satisfied, the process proceeds to step S704, and if it is determined that these conditions are not satisfied, the process proceeds to step S706.

When the process proceeds to step S704, a setting confirmation state is entered, and the main control board 530 reads the setting value data stored in the RWM and displays the current setting value on the setting value display LED 537. FIG. Next, in step S705, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 535 is turned off. When it is determined that the setting key switch 535 is turned off, it is determined that the condition for ending the setting confirmation state is satisfied, and the process proceeds to step S710. On the other hand, when it is determined that the setting key switch 535 is not turned off, the process returns to step S704 to continue the setting confirmation state (display of setting values).

When it is determined "No" in step S703 and proceeds to step S706, the main control board 530 determines whether the reset switch 536 is on. If it is determined that the reset switch 536 is on, the process proceeds to step S709, and if it is determined that it is not on, the process proceeds to step S707.
In step S707, it is determined whether the RWM of the main control board 530 is normal. When the power is cut off, the information at the time of the power cut is stored in the RWM of the main control board 530, and when the power is turned on next time, it is determined whether the information at the time of the power cut matches the information at the time of the power cut. do. If they match, it is determined that the RWM is normal, and if they do not match, it is determined that the RWM is abnormal. If it is determined that the RWM is normal, the process proceeds to step S708, and if it is determined that the RWM is not normal, the process proceeds to step S709.
In step S708, state recovery processing is executed. This process is a process of restoring the state of the solenoid, the state of the special pattern display device 531, etc. to the state at the time of power-off. Then, the process proceeds to step S710.

When the setting change process (setting change state) in step S702 ends, when it is determined that the reset switch 536 is turned on in step S706, or when it is determined that the RWM is not normal in step S707, the process proceeds to step S709. Proceed to execute RWM clear processing. This process is a process of clearing data stored in a specified storage area of the RWM (a process of initializing the specified storage area). Note that the data to be cleared does not include set value data. Then, the process proceeds to step S710.

At step S710, the timer interrupt is permitted. This processing is processing to enable interrupt processing. Therefore, after the interrupt processing is permitted in step S710, the interrupt processing is executed when the interrupt processing timing arrives.
In the next step S711, random number update processing (random number counter increment processing) is executed. This random number is used for various lotteries (selection of stop symbols, selection of effects, etc.).

FIG. 101 is a flow chart showing the setting change process in step S702 of FIG. In this embodiment, the time when the process of step S721 is started is the time when the setting change process (setting change state) is started.
In step S721, the main control board (main CPU) 530 reads the set value written in the RWM and determines whether the set value is within the normal range. In this embodiment, the values stored in the RWM corresponding to the set values "1" to "6" are "0" to "5".

For example, if the value stored in RWM is "0", the set value will be "1". Therefore, in step S722, it is determined whether or not the value stored in the RWM is within the range of "0" to "5". On the other hand, when it is determined that the value stored in RWM is not within the range of "0" to "5", "0" is stored in RWM. When the value of RWM is "0", the set value is "1". The set value "1" is the basic set value as described later. Then, the process proceeds to step S724.

In step S724, the main control board 530 displays the set value corresponding to the value stored in the RWM on the set value display LED 537. FIG. For example, when the RWM value is "0", the set value display LED 537 displays "1".
Next, proceeding to step S725, the main control board 530 determines whether or not the setting change switch 536 has been operated. When it is determined that the setting change switch 536 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S726, and when it is determined that the setting change switch 536 has not been operated, the process proceeds to step S729. In step S726, "1" is added to the set value. For example, if the setting value display LED 537 had been displaying "1" until then, the display is updated from "1" to "2" by the process of step S726, and the setting value data stored in the RWM is changed to "0". ” to “1”. In the example of FIG. 101, when the setting value "6" is displayed in step S724, if it is determined in step S725 that the setting change switch 536 has been operated, the process of step S726 is skipped and the process proceeds to step S727. shall be taken.

In step S727, it is determined whether or not the set value exceeds the upper limit. For example, when the set value "6" is displayed in step S724 and it is determined in step S725 that the setting change switch 535 has been operated, it is determined in step S727 that the upper limit has been exceeded. On the other hand, when the set values "1" to "5" are displayed in step S724, when it is determined in step S725 that the setting change switch 536 has been operated, it is determined in step S727 that the upper limit of the set value has been exceeded. is not judged.
If it is determined in step S727 that the upper limit of the set value has been exceeded, the process proceeds to step S728, and if it is determined that the upper limit has not been exceeded, the process proceeds to step S729.

In step S728, basic setting values are set. That is, "0" is stored as RWM set value data, and "1" is displayed on the set value display LED 537. FIG. Then, the process proceeds to step S729.
In step S729, the main control board 530 determines whether or not the conditions for ending the setting change process (setting change state) are met. In this embodiment, when the setting key switch 535 is turned off, it is determined that the condition for terminating the setting change process is satisfied. Therefore, at step S729, the main control board 530 determines whether or not the setting key switch 535 is on. If so, the process proceeds to step S730.

In step S730, the set value display of the set value display LED 537 is hidden.
Next, proceeding to step S731 , the main control board 530 transmits a setting change end command to the sub control board 540 . Then, the processing according to this flow chart ends.
When the sub-control board 540 receives the setting change end command, it outputs a setting change end sound from the speaker 542 and executes lighting processing of the effect lamp 541 to indicate that the setting change is ended.

The end timing of the setting change state in the pachinko gaming machine 500 is
(1) When "Yes" is determined in step S729 (when it is detected that the setting key switch 535 is turned off).
(2) When the display of the set value by the set value display LED 537 is hidden in step S730.
(3) When a setting change end command is transmitted in step S731.
However, the end timing of the setting change state in the nineteenth embodiment (B) is "when it is detected that the setting key switch 535 is turned off" in (1) above. stipulated.
It should be noted that the above (2) and (3) may be determined as the end timing of the setting change state without being limited to this.

FIG. 102 is a flow chart showing the flow of one game in the pachinko gaming machine 500. FIG.
In the pachinko game 500, the start timing of one game may be one of the following.
(1) When the game ball is shot toward the game area of the game board 504 by the shooting device 513 . In this case, one game is started even if the game ball has not reached the game area.
(2) When the game ball is shot toward the game area of the game board 504 by the shooting device 513 and enters the game area. Although not shown in FIG. 97, a rail is provided in the range from the lower side of the game area to the left side to the upper left to guide the game ball fired by the shooting device 513 into the game area. ing. The moment when the game ball comes off the rail (the moment when the game ball enters the game area) is the start time of one game.

(3) When the game ball enters the starting port 532 provided in the game area. Alternatively, when the game ball enters the starting port 532 provided in the game area and the starting port switch 533 is turned on.
As described above, as the start time of one game in the pachinko gaming machine 500, there are various examples as to which point of time is the start time. "When entering" is set as the start timing of one game.
Also, the timing of the end of one game is when the special symbol display device 531 finishes changing and the special symbols are stopped and displayed.

In step S741, the main control board (main CPU) 530 continues to determine whether or not a game ball has entered the starting port 532, that is, whether or not the starting port switch 533 has been turned on. When it is determined that the starting port switch 533 is turned on, the process proceeds to step S742.
In step S742, various lottery processes are executed at the timing when the starting switch 533 is turned on. A random number is extracted at the timing when the starting port switch 533 is turned on, and based on the extracted random number, a big win lottery (judgment of whether it is a big hit or a loss), a special symbol lottery (a stop symbol of a special symbol) Lottery for which pattern to use), fluctuation pattern lottery (lottery for fluctuation time of special pattern).

In the next step S743, a prize ball process (a prize ball payout process) based on the winning to the starting port 532 is executed. Here, the payout control board 520 drives and controls the payout device 524 to pay out a predetermined number of game balls.
At least part of the lottery results including the fluctuation time among the various lottery processes executed in step S742 are transmitted to the sub-control board 540. FIG. When the sub-control board 540 receives the lottery result of the current game, it controls the production lamp 541, the speaker 542, and the image display device 543 so as to correspond to the lottery result.

Next, proceeding to step S744, the main control board 530 starts the special symbol display device 531 to change the special symbol based on the lottery result in step S742. It should be noted that the variation of the special symbol by the special symbol display device 531 is conditioned that the variation of the previous special symbol has been completed at that time, and when the special symbol is being varied, the next special symbol will be displayed. The variation is suspended, and after the variation of the special symbol currently being varied is completed, the variation of the next special symbol is started.

Also, in step S745, the sub-control board 540 executes the variation of the decoration pattern by the image display device 543. FIG. The variation of the decoration pattern corresponds to a part of the production in the game this time.
Here, the device that directly shows the result of the big win lottery in step S742 is the special symbol display device 531, and the stop symbol after the fluctuation by the special symbol display device 531 has a special symbol corresponding to the big win (for example, "7 ”) and a special symbol (for example, “-”) corresponding to the loss is provided.

Furthermore, the decorative design is varied by the image display device 543 so as to be linked (synchronized) with the variation of the special design. Then, when stopping at the special design corresponding to the big hit, the decorative design is also stopped at the decorative design corresponding to the big win, such as "777". On the other hand, when stopping at a special pattern corresponding to a loss (non-winning), the decorative patterns are also stopped at a decorative pattern (a pattern other than the decorative pattern corresponding to the big hit) corresponding to the loss. The special symbol display device 531 is composed of a small 7-segment display, but the image display area of the image display device 543 that displays images of decorative symbols is larger than the image display area of the special symbol display device 531 (for example, a game It is formed in a size that occupies more than half of the area). As a result, the player can confirm whether or not the current game is a big win by looking at the stop mode of the decorative symbols.

The variation of the decorative design in step S745 is controlled so as to be within the variation time determined by lottery in step S742. Then, when the variation of the decorative symbols is completed, the process proceeds to step S746, and after the special symbols are varied for the variation time determined by the lottery, the special symbols are varied so as to become the stop symbols determined by the lottery. finish.
Next, the process proceeds to step S747, and special symbol stop post-processing is executed. The post-stop process includes, for example, a process for shifting to a special game when the game is a big hit this time.

In the 19th embodiment (B) of the pachinko game machine, similarly to the 19th embodiment (A) of the slot machine, after the setting change state ends, a setting change end sound and a lamp indicating the end of the setting change are turned on. Execute. Further, assuming that the game is started at the same time as the setting change state ends, the output of the setting change end sound is ended before the game ends.
As described above, assuming that the setting change state has ended when it is determined "Yes" in step S729 in FIG. When the control board 540 receives the command, the control board 540 starts outputting a setting change end sound from the speaker 542 and the like.

The time from when "Yes" is determined in step S729 to when the output of the setting change end sound (and the predetermined lighting by the effect lamp 541) is started is longer than "0" ms. This is the timing when one interrupt time (for example, "4" ms in the case of the pachinko game machine 500) has elapsed since the determination of "Yes". In other words, the setting change end sound is not output until at least one interrupt has passed after "Yes" is determined in step S729.
Then, the setting change end sound is to output a voice saying "The setting change is finished" as in the nineteenth embodiment (A). Further, if the time from the start to the end of the output of the voice saying "Setting change is finished" is set to "T01" as in the nineteenth embodiment (A), then the time "T01" is the same as in the nineteenth embodiment (A ) is set to approximately “2000” ms.

Further, as an effect indicating that the setting change is completed, in addition to the setting change end sound, an effect of lighting the effect lamp 541 in a predetermined lighting mode is executed.
Here, when the performance lamp 541 is turned on, at least the lighting mode is not the same as when the performance lamp 541 is turned on at the time of the big win. For example, if it is determined that the lamp A among the effect lamps 541 is lit in the lighting mode a as an effect indicating that a big win has been achieved, the effect lamp 541 is lit as an effect indicating that the setting change is completed. In this case, a lamp other than the lamp A may be turned on. In this case, if a lamp different from the lamp A is lit, it may be in the same manner as the lighting manner when indicating a big win.

Further, when the effect lamp 541 is turned on as an effect indicating that the setting change is finished, the lamp A is turned on. The lighting mode in this case is different from the lighting mode when indicating the big win.
As described above, when lighting the effect lamp 541 as an effect indicating that the setting change is finished, the lighting mode of the effect lamp 541 is not the same as that when the big win is achieved. As a result, when the game is started immediately after the setting change is finished, even if the effect lamp 541 is turned on as an effect indicating that the setting change is finished, the player misunderstands that he/she has won a big win. You can prevent it from being lost.

Furthermore, it is preferable that the lighting pattern of the performance lamp 541 indicating that the setting change is finished is different from the lighting pattern of the performance lamp 541 when the big win is achieved so that the two are not confused. In other words, the lighting pattern of the effect lamp 541 indicating that the setting change has been completed is set to a lighting pattern that is not used for other effects (or the frequency of use is extremely low), and if the lighting pattern is seen, the setting change can be made. It is preferable to make it possible to understand that it is a production that means the end of the.
Furthermore, for the effect lamp 541, the lighting pattern indicating that the setting change has been completed may be the same as the lighting pattern when the jackpot is won. The lighting pattern indicating the end of the game may be different from the lighting pattern when the jackpot is won.
Specifically, for example, when indicating that the setting change is finished, the production lamp 541 and the other lamps are all turned on, and when the big win is achieved, the production lamp 541 is turned on, but the other lamps are turned on. is not lit. In this way, by checking the lighting patterns of the effect lamp 541 and the other lamps (lamps of general game machines), the administrator can grasp the state.

Furthermore, when the effect lamp 541 is turned on as an effect indicating that the setting change is finished, in principle, it may be output at the same time as the setting change end sound. However, without being limited to this, the lighting effect of the effect lamp 541 may be started before outputting the setting change end sound. Alternatively, after the output of the setting change end sound is started, the lighting effect of the effect lamp 541 may be started before the output of the setting change end sound is ended. Furthermore, the lighting effect of the effect lamp 541 may be started after the output of the setting change end sound is ended.
In the nineteenth embodiment (B), the effect lamp 541 indicating that the setting change is finished is turned on at the same time when the output of the setting change end sound is started.

Also, if the lighting time of the effect lamp 541 indicating that the setting change is completed is set to "T02" as in the nineteenth embodiment (A),
T01>T02
T01=T02
T01<T02
However, in this embodiment, it is assumed that "T01<T02". For example, as described above, when the time "T01" is set to approximately "2000" ms, the time "T02" may be set to approximately "2500" ms to approximately "4000" ms.

Next, the case where the game is started as soon as possible after ending the setting change state will be described.
In addition, in this embodiment, during the setting change state, the shooting device 513 is operated so that the game ball cannot be launched into the game area. Therefore, unless at least the setting key switch 535 is turned off, the game ball cannot be launched into the game area.

However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be possible to operate the shooting device 513 to launch the game ball into the game area even during the setting change state. In this case, even when a game ball wins in one of the winning holes during the setting change state, control may be performed so as not to pay out prize balls. Also, even if a game ball wins the starting port 532, the big winning lottery is not executed, and the variation of the special symbol display device 531 and the variation of the decorative symbol by the image display device 543 are not performed. be done.

In the setting change state, at least the front frame 502 is opened as described above. First, a case will be described where it is assumed that the game can be played even when the front frame 502 is opened.
Then, the timing of starting the game is assumed to be when the game ball enters the starting hole 532 as described above.
First, assuming that the preparation time until the start of the game is "T21", the game ball is guided to the launchable position in the launching device 513, the game ball is launched from the launchable position, and the game ball enters the starting port 532. is the time "T21".
In this case, the time "T21" is considered to be approximately "2000" ms.
In the above assumption, it is assumed that the first game ball shot from the shooting device 513 wins the starting hole 532 .

When the game ball wins the starting port 532, it is judged as "Yes" in step S741 in FIG. , stop the variation of the special symbol (step S746). Here, in FIG. 102, the time from when "Yes" is determined in step S741 to the end of the processing in step S746 is one game time, and this one game time is defined as "T22".
First, when a game ball enters the starting hole 532 in a state in which there is no reserved ball, one game time "T22" is determined, for example, within a range of about "10000" to "30000" ms. and Therefore, the shortest time of one game time "T22" is "10000" ms.

In addition, for example, when the number of held balls reaches a predetermined number (for example, 3) or more, there is known a shortening function that increases the time efficiency by shortening the variation time of the special symbol, but in this embodiment, the setting Since this is the state after the end of the change state, it does not have a pending ball. Therefore, in one game time "T22", the function of shortening the variation time of special symbols is not taken into consideration.

As described above, the time required when the game is started immediately after ending the setting change state is "T21+T22".
The shortest time of "T21+T22" is approximately "12000" ms.
Therefore,
T01 (time at which setting change end sound is output)<T21+T22 (preparation time for starting game + 1 minimum time for game)
becomes.

Furthermore, immediately after the end of the setting change state (at the same time as the output of the setting change end sound is started), the effect lamp 541 is lit to indicate that the setting change has been completed. ” is the relationship between
T02 (about "2500" to "4000" ms) < T21 + T22
becomes.
Thus, even when the game is started immediately after the setting change state is ended, the output of the setting change end sound is ended and the effect lamp indicating the end of the setting change is completed before one game is ended. It means that the lighting of 541 has ended.
FIG. 96 shows the time relationship at this time.

In addition, the above-mentioned one game does not take into consideration the time required to close the front frame 502 after the setting change state ends, or the operation time required to resolve the frame open error after closing the front frame 502 .
As with the slot machine 10, at least the front frame 502 should be in the open state when the setting change state ends. Therefore, even if the setting change state is terminated, the pachinko gaming machine 500 detects the frame opening error and performs error notification. The game cannot be started while the frame open error is being notified. Note that when a frame open error has occurred, firstly, the firing device 513 should not be operated. Secondly, the launching device 513 is in an operable state, but even if a game ball enters the starting port 532 (even if the game ball is detected by the starting port switch 533), the game does not start (lottery processing is not executed, the variation of the special symbol display device 531 is not started, and prize balls are not paid out).

To cancel the frame open error, the front frame 502 is closed and the frame open switch 523 is turned off. Furthermore, by inserting the key into the key insertion slot 521 and performing a predetermined operation, the frame open error is resolved (the error notification is terminated). Therefore, the preparation time "T21" from the end of the setting change state to the start of the game includes the operation time for closing the front frame 502 and inserting the key to cancel the frame open error. After the setting change state is completed, the front frame 502 is closed and the frame open switch 523 is turned off. Assuming that the time until the frame open error is resolved is "T20",
T01 (output time of setting change end sound)<T20+T21+T22
T02 (lighting time of effect lamp 541) <T20+T21+T22
becomes.

In the above example, the setting change state is ended when the setting key switch 535 is turned off. It is also possible to end the setting change state on the condition that the frame open error is cleared (operation such as inserting the key into the key insertion opening 521 and rotating it in a predetermined direction). In this case, the front frame 502 is closed, and when the operation for canceling the frame open error ends, the setting change state ends, and the output of the setting change end sound is started. By closing the front frame 502, the setting change state may be ended on the condition that the frame open switch 523 is turned off (without performing the operation to cancel the frame open error). In this case, when the frame open switch 523 is turned off, the setting change state is ended, and a setting change end sound is output.

Therefore, even in the case of the specification that the setting change state ends when the front frame 502 is closed and the frame open error is canceled, the time " Since the setting change end sound output time "T01" is shorter than the setting change end sound output time "T21+T22", the output of the setting change end sound is completed before the end of one game immediately after the end of the setting change.

The above is the case where one game time "T22" is finished in the shortest time.
On the other hand, not limited to this, the relationship between the output time "T01" of the setting change end sound and the time "T21+T22" from the end of the setting change until the end of one game can be set variously as follows. .
(1) The output time "T01" of the setting change end sound is shorter than the total time of the average one game time "T22" and the preparation time "T21" when the jackpot lottery is lost (not won). set.
For example, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol display device 531 when it is lost is in the range of "T22 (min1)" to "T22 (max1)", and the average time is "T22 (avg1)",
T01<T21+T22(avg1)
can be set to

(2) The output time 'T01' of the setting change end sound is set shorter than the total time of the average one-game time 'T22' and the preparation time 'T21' when the jackpot lottery results in a big win.
For example, if the variation time of the special symbol display device 531 when the jackpot is won is in the range of "T22 (min2)" to "T22 (max2)", and the average time is "T22 (avg2)",
T01<T21+T22(avg2)
can be set to

<Twentieth Embodiment>
The twentieth embodiment relates to a board case for a control board.
As a board case for housing a control board, there are known a double door type and a slide type board case, and the twentieth embodiment is a board case of the slide type.
Compared to the double door system, the slide system has a smaller exposed area of the control board, so that the number of unauthorized access points can be reduced accordingly.
In the twentieth embodiment, the upper case 560 and the lower case 570 slide while the main control board 530 is fixed to the upper case 560 . Therefore, the surface of the main control board 530 exposed during sliding movement is the solder surface.
In the control board, the surface on which the CPU, connectors and other electronic components are mounted is called the "component surface", and the surface on which the legs of the electronic components are soldered is called the "solder surface".

In the twentieth embodiment, a board case 550 for housing a main control board 530 in a pachinko game machine 500 is taken as an example. However, not limited to this, the board case 550 of the twentieth embodiment is not limited to the main control board 530 in the pachinko game machine 500, but the payout control board 520, the sub control board 540, and other control boards equipped with a CPU. It can be applied to a case that accommodates a control board that requires security.

Furthermore, the board case 550 of the twentieth embodiment is not limited to the control board of the pachinko game machine 500, but the main control board 50 of the slot machine 10, the sub-control board 80, and other control boards on which a CPU is mounted, providing security. can be applied to a case that houses a control board that requires
Specifically, the main control board 50 of the slot machine 10 is formed in the same or similar shape as the main control board 530 in the pachinko game machine 500, and the board case 550 (upper case 560 and lower case 570) of the twentieth embodiment is formed. ) can be accommodated.
The board case 56 shown in the second embodiment (FIGS. 9 and 10) can also be applied to the main control board 530 of the pachinko game machine 500 and other control boards. Furthermore, although the second embodiment and the twentieth embodiment may be implemented independently, it is also possible to implement the second embodiment and the twentieth embodiment at the same time.

FIG. 103 is an exploded perspective view of the board case 550 (the upper case 560 and the lower case 570) and the main control board 530 as seen from the front side. 104 is an exploded perspective view of the board case 550 (the upper case 560 and the lower case 570) and the main control board 530 as seen from the rear side.
Furthermore, FIG. 105 is an external perspective view of a state in which the main control board 530 is accommodated in the board case 550 as seen from the front side. Furthermore, FIG. 106 is a front view of the main control board 530 housed in the board case 550 as seen from the front side. FIG. 107 is a front view of the main control board 530 housed in the board case 550 as seen from the rear (back) side.

Here, the “front side” refers to the component side of the main control board 530 , and the “back side” refers to the solder side of the main control board 530 .
Further, the "upper" in the "upper case 560" refers to the component side of the main control board 530, and may also be referred to as the "front side case (or cover)" or the "component side case (or cover)." .
Furthermore, the "lower" in the "lower case 570" refers to the soldering surface side of the main control board 530, and is referred to as a "rear (back) side case (or cover)" or a "solder side case (or cover)." can be called.
Further, FIGS. 103 and 106 show a state in which the cover 561 is attached to the upper case 560, and FIG. 105 shows the upper case 560 without the cover 561. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 103, the main control board 530 includes the setting change (reset) switch 536 and the setting key insertion opening 534 described above. Furthermore, connectors 539a to 539h are provided for harness connection with other boards, electronic components, or electronic equipment. Various parts shown in the twentieth embodiment such as FIG. 103 are examples, and the present invention is not limited to these.
Holes 530 a are formed in the four corners of the main control board 530 for screwing when attaching (fixing) the main control board 530 to the upper case 560 .

On the other hand, in the upper case 560, as shown in FIGS. 103 and 104, the connectors 539a to 539h of the main control board 530, the setting change (reset) switch 536, and the setting key insertion opening 534 each have appropriate gaps. Openings 563a to 563i that can be passed through (passed through) are formed.
A cover 561 is attached to a portion of the upper case 560 where the setting change (reset) switch 536 and the setting key insertion opening 534 are exposed when the main control board 530 is attached. Note that in the present embodiment, opening/closing of the cover 561 is not detected by a sensor or the like, but opening/closing of the cover 561 can be detected by a sensor. Then, it is possible to shift to the setting change state under the condition that the sensor is turned on (the cover 561 is open), or the condition is set that the sensor is turned on (the cover 561 is open). The change state may be terminating.

Crimped portions 562 and 572 are provided on one end sides of the upper case 560 and the lower case 570, specifically, on the left edges as seen from the front side in FIG. The crimped portions 562 and 572 are respectively used when sealing (crimping) the upper case 560 and the lower case 570 in a fitted state. After sealing (crimping), the fitting between the upper case 560 and the lower case 570 cannot be released unless the crimped portion 562 on the upper case 560 side is destroyed.
Furthermore, in FIG. 103, side walls 565 and 571 are provided at the ends opposite to the one ends of the upper case 560 and the lower case 570 (the sides provided with the crimped portions 562 and 572, respectively) when viewed from the front side. It is These side walls 565 and 571 come into contact when the upper case 560 and the lower case 570 are fitted together.

In FIG. 104, bosses 564 (four pieces) are provided on the back side of the upper case 560 . In FIG. 104, two bosses 564 are visible. The arrangement interval of the four bosses 564 is the same as the arrangement interval of the four holes 530 a of the main control board 530 . Further, the boss 564 is formed with a screw hole.
In the state shown in FIG. 104, when the main control board 530 is brought into contact with the back side of the upper case 560, the four holes 530a of the main control board 530 and the screw holes of the four bosses 564 of the upper case 560 overlap.

Further, in this state, the connector 539a of the main control board 530 passes through the opening 563a of the upper case 560 and the connector surface is exposed to the front side of the upper case 560. As shown in FIG.
Similarly, the connectors 539b and 539c of the main control board 530 pass through the opening 563b of the upper case 560, and the connector surfaces thereof are exposed to the front side of the upper case 550. As shown in FIG.
Connectors 539 d , 539 e , 539 f of the main control board 530 pass through openings 563 c , 563 d, 563 e of the upper case 560 , respectively, and their connector surfaces are exposed to the front side of the upper case 560 .

Furthermore, the connectors 539g and 539h of the main control board 530 pass through the openings 563f and 563g of the upper case 560, respectively, and the connector surfaces thereof are exposed to the front side of the upper case 560. As shown in FIG.
In this manner, all connectors provided on the main control board 530 are exposed to the front side of the upper case 560 through openings formed in the upper case 560 . 105 and 106 show the state at this time.
Further, in this case, the gaps between the connectors 539a to 539h and the openings 563a to 563g are all set to be appropriate gaps, and the connectors 539a to 539h are connected to the openings 563a to 563g. 563g can be penetrated without resistance, and after penetration, the gaps between the connectors 539a to 539h and the openings 563a to 563g are prevented from becoming more than necessary (for example, the gaps between the connectors and the openings). is a design value of about “0.5” mm). As a result, it is difficult to use the gap between the connector and the opening to play tricks.

Furthermore, the setting change (reset) switch 536 and the setting key insertion opening 534 of the main control board 530 pass through openings 563h and 563i formed in the upper case 560, respectively, and are contacted (accessed) from the front side of the upper case 560. ) can be arranged (see FIG. 105), but since a cover 561 is attached over the setting change (reset) switch 536 and the setting key insertion opening 534 as shown in FIGS. not exposed to However, the substrate case 550 (the upper case 560 and the lower case 570) including the cover 561 is made of transparent resin, and the setting change (reset) switch 536 and the setting key insertion opening 534 can be visually confirmed from the outside of the cover 561. It has become.
In the above state, the main control board 530 is fixed to the upper case 560 by inserting screws into the holes 530a (four places) from the solder side of the main control board 530 and screwing them to the bosses 564 of the upper case 560. be done.

As a result, the main control board 530 moves integrally with the upper case 560 even when the upper case 560 and the lower case 570 are fitted together.
In this way, the main control board 530 is fixed to the upper case 560 before the upper case 560 and the lower case 570 are fitted together. There is no relative movement between case 560 and main control board 530 . Therefore, on the upper case 560 side, openings 563a to 563g slightly larger than the outer shape of the connectors 539a to 539h of the main control board 530 are formed, and the connectors 539a to 539h pass through the openings 563a to 563g. By adopting such a structure, it is possible to obtain a structure in which unnecessary gaps do not occur between the connectors 539a to 539h and the openings 563a to 563g. For example, after the upper case 560 and the lower case 5670 are fitted together, even if the positional relationship between the upper case 560 and the lower case 570 is displaced by a goto act, the upper case 560 and the main control board 530 are not connected. are not relatively displaced, it is not possible to increase the gaps between the connectors 539a to 539h and the openings 563a to 563g. As a result, cheating can be suppressed.

Next, a method of fitting the upper case 560 to which the main control board 530 is attached and the lower case 570 will be described.
108A and 108B are cross-sectional side views showing the state of fitting between the upper case 560 and the lower case 570. FIG. 108A shows the temporary fitting state (before sliding movement), and FIG. after slide movement).
In FIG. 108, the cross-sectional area is not hatched in consideration of the visibility of the drawing. Further, in the drawing, the upper case 560 is indicated by a solid line, and the lower case 570 is indicated by a chain double-dashed line.
As shown in FIGS. 103, 104 and 108, the upper case 560 is provided with side walls 565 and the lower case 570 is provided with side walls 571 .

Further, as shown in FIGS. 103, 104, and 108, the longitudinal lower edge (on the side of the lower case 570) of the upper case 560 is referred to as a lower edge 560a. A longitudinal edge of the lower case 570 is referred to as an outer edge 570a.
The upper case 560 and the lower case 570 are shaped so that when the upper case 560 and the lower case 570 are superimposed, they overlap with each other in the positional relationship shown in FIG. 108(a). When the upper case 560 and the lower case 570 are overlapped, the lower edge 560a of the upper case 560 and the outer edge 570a of the lower case 570 are formed to contact each other. This position is called a "temporarily fitted state". In the temporarily fitted state, the gap L between the side wall 565 of the upper case 560 and the side wall 571 of the lower case 570 is formed to be about several tens of millimeters (for example, about "10" to "30" mm). ing.
Further, in the temporarily fitted state, the upper case 560 and the lower case 570 can be separated at any time. In other words, in the state shown in FIG. 108( a ), the upper case 560 can be moved away from the lower case 570 without the parts or the like interfering with the lower case 570 .

FIG. 109 is a plan view of the vicinity of the side walls 565 and 571 viewed from the side of the lower case 570 in the temporarily fitted state.
In the temporarily fitted state, as shown in FIG. 109, the upper case 560 and the lower case 570 have a gap L. Through this gap L, one end of the solder surface of the main control board 530 can be seen. there is Here, among the connectors of the main control board 530, if the leg of the connector 539g is called a connector leg 539g' and the leg of the connector 539h is called a connector leg 539h', these connector legs 539g' and 539h' extend in the longitudinal direction. It has two rows of legs (see Fig. 104).
109, only one row of connector legs 539g' and 539h' on the outside is exposed in the provisionally fitted state. In other words, the connector legs 539g' and 539h' are not entirely exposed even in the provisionally mated state, and only a portion thereof is exposed.

108(a), the lower case 570 can be slid with respect to the upper case 560. As shown in FIG. The direction of sliding movement is the longitudinal direction of the board case 550, which is the leftward direction in FIG. 108(a).
When the lower case 570 is slid with respect to the upper case 560, the upper case 560, the main control board 530, and the lower case 570 can move to the end point of the sliding movement without interference. Then, as shown in FIG. 108(b), the side wall 565 of the upper case 560 and the side wall 571 of the lower case 570 can be slid to a position where they abut. The state shown in FIG. 108(b) is the fully fitted state. Note that FIG. 107 shows a state in which the side wall 565 of the upper case 560 and the side wall 571 of the lower case 570 are in contact with each other (final fitting state).

In the fully fitted state, engaging members (not shown) respectively formed on the upper case 560 and the lower case 570 are engaged. As a result, the upper case 560 cannot be moved away from the lower case 570 with respect to the lower case 570 . However, in this state, it is possible to slide the lower case 570 with respect to the upper case 560 in the opposite direction to the above. be able to.

In the temporary fitting state shown in FIG. 108(a), the crimped portion 562 of the upper case 560 and the crimped portion 572 of the lower case 570 are displaced in the vertical direction. In the fitted state, the crimped portion 562 of the upper case 560 and the crimped portion 572 of the lower case 570 overlap each other, and crimping can be performed using both. After crimping the crimped portion 562 and the crimped portion 572 at this position, unless the crimped portion 562 of the upper case 560 is cut (destroyed), the main case 560 and the lower case 570 can be separated or the upper case 560 can be separated. In contrast, the lower case 570 cannot be slid to return to the temporarily fitted state shown in FIG. 108(a).

However, it is conceivable that the lower case 570 is slid with respect to the upper case 560 in some way to return to the temporarily mated state, exposing the solder surface of the main control board 530 .
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 109, if not all of the connector legs are exposed but only a portion of the connector legs are exposed, it is possible to make it difficult to do things.
Moreover, even in the provisionally mated state, not all connector legs are exposed. The feet of 539a, 539b, 539c, 539d, 539e, 539g are not exposed.

When the board case 550 employs a sliding method, the sliding direction is usually the longitudinal direction of the board case. In this case, the amount of sliding movement is related to the number of exposed connector legs.
In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 103, connectors are arranged near the outer periphery of the main control board 530 . For example, if a connector is provided in the central portion of the main control board 530, the opening of the upper case 560 corresponding to the connector must have a substantially square shape surrounded by side walls on four sides. However, if the connector is arranged in the substantially square-shaped interior surrounded by side walls on four sides, it becomes difficult to insert and remove the connector. Therefore, in this embodiment, connectors 539a to 539h are arranged near the outer periphery of the main control board 530, as shown in FIG.

Specifically, in FIG. 103, the connector 539a is arranged near the left edge of the main control board 530, the connectors 539b, 539c, 539d, 539e and 539f are arranged near the upper edge, and the connectors 539g and 539h are arranged near the right edge. was placed.
The connector opening 563 of the upper case 560 has no wall at least on the outside. For example, as shown in FIG. 105, the periphery of the opening 563a through which the connector 539a passes has a substantially concave shape with no side wall on the left side (outside).
Further, as shown in FIG. 105, the periphery of the opening 563b through which the connectors 539b and 539c pass has a generally concave shape with no side wall on the upper side (outside).

Furthermore, the openings 563c, 563d, and 563e through which the connectors 539d, 539e, and 539f pass, respectively, are formed in a substantially L-shape without sidewalls on the upper and right sides (outer sides) in FIG. .
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 105, the openings 563f and 563g through which the connectors 539g and 539h pass respectively have side walls only on the left side (inner side) in the figure. As a result, the connector has a shape that facilitates insertion and removal of the connector.

Furthermore, when the connectors are arranged on the main control board 530 as described above, when the lower case 570 is slid as in this embodiment, the legs of the connectors that are exposed first are the legs of the connectors 539g and 539h. Feet (539g' and 539h').
Furthermore, when the amount of slide movement is set larger than that in this embodiment, the legs of the connector 539f are exposed next.

Therefore, in this embodiment, even if the lower case 570 is slid relative to the upper case 506, the legs of the connectors 530a to 539f of the connectors of the main control board 530 are not exposed. For example, in FIG. 105, if the connector group of connectors 539d, 539e, and 539f is arranged further to the left in the figure (closer to the connectors 539b and 539c), the slide movement amount can be increased more than in the present embodiment. Even if they are provided, the legs of the connector 539f can be configured so as not to be exposed.

Also, when the lower case 570 is slid with respect to the upper case 560 as in this embodiment, the legs of the connectors 539g and 539h arranged near the right edge of the main control board 530 in FIG. 105 are likely to be exposed. . Therefore, in this embodiment, when the lower case 570 is slid with respect to the upper case 560, the legs of the connectors 539g and 539h (connector legs 539g' and 539h') are exposed. Instead of exposing the entire leg, only a portion of the leg is exposed, making it difficult to act like a goto.

It is preferable that the number of connectors whose legs are at least partly exposed by sliding movement is as small as possible.
Also, when the number of rows of legs of one connector is "N (N is an integer equal to or greater than 2)", the number of exposed legs is set to "N-1" or less (that is, none of them are exposed). is preferred. Furthermore, when the number of rows of connector legs is "1", it is preferable that the connector legs are not exposed.
Alternatively, when the number of pins of the connector is "N", that is, the number of legs of the connector is "N", among the "N" pins, the "n"("n" ≤ "N-1") ”) th pin is exposed, but the “n+1” th and subsequent pins are configured not to be exposed (that is, all pins are configured not to be exposed).
Furthermore, among the pins of the connector, at least one reference pin should be configured so as not to be exposed. Having at least one pin not exposed can make cheating more difficult than if all pins were exposed.

Also, when the main control board is the main control board 530 in the pachinko game machine 500, as shown in FIG. Since it is electrically connected to the control board 540 and the like, it is connected to these boards and electronic components. Connections are made using lead wires. A plurality of lead wires are combined into one harness, and a connector terminal is attached to the end of the harness, and this connector terminal is connected to a connector on the main control board 530 .
Here, among the lead wires connected to the main control board 530, the lead wire whose security should be ensured in particular is the lead wire to which the signal of the starting switch 533 (signal relating to lottery) is input. Therefore, the connector to which the signal of the starting port switch 533 is input should be configured so that the connector leg is not exposed (at least one leg is not exposed, or at least one pin is not exposed) even if it is slid. is preferred.

Furthermore, regarding the connector connected to the payout control board 520, from the viewpoint of preventing the payout goto, even if it is slid, the connector legs are not exposed (at least one leg is not exposed, or at least one pin is not exposed). preferably not exposed).
Furthermore, a lead wire for supplying power to the main control board 530 (a lead wire connected to the power supply board 510 when the power supply board 510 and the main control board 530 are directly connected), a sub-control board 540 and For each connector to which the connecting lead wire and the lead wire connecting to the board for outputting the external signal are connected, at least one leg is not exposed, or at least one pin is not exposed. It is preferable to configure

On the other hand, when the main control board is the main control board 50 in the slot machine 10, as shown in FIG. It is electrically connected to a display device, a medal payout device, and the like.
Of the lead wires connected to the main control board 50, the lead wire for which security should be ensured in particular is the lead wire to which the signal of the start switch 41 (signal relating to lottery) is input. Therefore, regarding the connector to which the lead wire to which the signal of the start switch 41 is input is connected, the connector leg is not exposed (at least one leg is not exposed or at least one pin is not exposed) even if the connector is slid. It is preferable to configure

Furthermore, the lead wire to which the signal of the insertion sensor 44 is input also requires security from the viewpoint of preventing credit fraud. Therefore, regarding the connector to which the lead wire to which the signal of the insertion sensor 44 is input is connected, the connector leg is not exposed even if it is slid (at least one leg is not exposed or at least one pin is not exposed). preferably not exposed).

Furthermore, each connector to which the lead wire connected to the medal payout device, specifically the lead wire for outputting the driving signal of the hopper motor 36 and the lead wire for inputting the signal from the payout sensor 37 is connected Also, from the viewpoint of preventing dislodgement, it is preferable that the connector leg is not exposed (at least one leg is not exposed, or at least one pin is not exposed) even if it is slid. .
In addition, as in the case of the pachinko game machine 500, a connector having a lead wire related to the power supply, a connector having a lead wire connected to the sub-control board 80, and a lead connected to the board for transmitting external signals Preferably, each connector to which each wire is connected also has at least one unexposed leg or at least one unexposed pin.

<21st embodiment>
The twenty-first embodiment relates to the thickness (diameter) of lead wires (also referred to as “signal wires”).
In the twenty-first embodiment, the lead wire for starting is made the thinnest, and at least one other lead wire having the same thickness as the lead wire for starting is provided in one connector terminal having the lead wire for starting, In addition, by providing at least one lead wire thicker than the start-related lead wire, it becomes difficult to identify the start-related lead wire and suppresses cheating (illegal start-up or intentional start-up). It is something to do.

Here, in the pachinko game machine 500 , the lead wire for starting corresponds to the lead wire connecting the starting port switch 533 and the main control board 530 .
In the slot machine 10 , the lead wire for starting corresponds to the lead wire connecting the start switch 41 and the main control board 50 .
Note that the "starting lead wire" actually consists of two wires, one of which serves as a starting signal wire and the other one serves as a GND wire. In the present embodiment, the starting signal line is referred to as "starting lead line" and does not include the GND line. However, lead wires other than lead wires related to starting may include the GND wire.

110 is a plan view showing a state in which harnesses B to H are connected to connectors 539b to 539h of main control board 530, respectively.
110, illustration of the board case 550 is omitted. In addition, although the main control board 530 is illustrated in FIG. 110, the main control board 50 is also applicable. In other words, the twenty-first embodiment can be applied to both the slot machine 10 and the pachinko gaming machine 500.
Further, the connector terminals attached to the ends of the harnesses B to H are respectively referred to as "harness B connector terminal" to "harness H connector terminal".

The connector 539a is normally a connector to which no cable or the like is connected. The connector 539a is a connector that is connected to a verification device when, for example, the regulatory authority of the gaming machine uses the verification device to confirm data stored inside the CPU, ROM, and RWM.
Connectors 539b to 539h are concave connectors mounted on the main control board 530, and harness B connector terminals to harness H connector terminals (convex connectors) are connected to these connectors, respectively.
FIG. 111 is a front view showing details of the harnesses B to H and the connector terminals of the harnesses B to H. FIG.
Each of the harnesses B to H consists of a plurality of lead wires, and in FIG. 111, each lead wire is numbered. For example, the harness B is composed of nine lead wires 1 to 9 in the first row (upper row in the figure) and nine lead wires 10 to 18 in the second row (lower row in the figure). harness.

Each connector terminal of harnesses B, C, D, G, and H is configured in two rows. On the other hand, each connector terminal of harnesses E and F is configured in one row.
The harnesses and connector terminals shown in FIG. 111 are merely examples, and the connector terminals may be configured in three or more rows, for example. The number of lead wires in one row is determined according to the application (the number of signal wires), and is not limited to that shown in FIG. .
In addition, suppose that even if it is comprised from one lead wire, it will be called a "harness."
Furthermore, harnesses include those in which each lead wire is separated from each other (whether or not they are bound), specifically, in addition to discrete wire cables, such as flat cables and ribbon cables. includes all leads connected together (whether separable or not).

In addition, FIG. 111 shows two types of thicknesses of lead wires. In the figure, lead wires indicated by single circles indicate thin lead wires, and lead wires indicated by double circles indicate thick lead wires. Here, the "thickness of the lead wire" refers to the diameter of the lead wire. Therefore, if the diameter of the lead wire indicated by a single circle is D1 and the diameter of the lead wire indicated by a double circle is D2, then "D1<D2".
In addition, in the example of FIG. 111, two types of lead wire thicknesses are shown, but the harness is not limited to this, and may be composed of lead wires of three or more types of thicknesses.

In FIG. 111, a lead wire for starting (in the case of the pachinko game machine 500, a lead wire connecting the starter switch 533 and the main control board 530; in the case of the slot machine 10, the start switch 41 and the main control board 50 ) is the seventh lead wire of the harness D. As for the lead wire for start-up, the lead wire with the thinnest of the two thicknesses is used. This is because the thin lead wire makes the start-related lead wire as inconspicuous as possible. In addition, by using a thin lead wire, it becomes easy to disconnect when a fraudulent act (remodeling, etc.) is performed, so that an abnormality can be easily detected. In other words, thick lead wires are less likely to break even in the event of fraud than thin lead wires. This is because it is difficult to
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the lead wire for starting may be a thick lead wire. Alternatively, when using lead wires of three different thicknesses, an intermediate lead wire may be used as the starting lead wire.
In some cases, only two wires, the start-related lead wire and its GND wire, are connected to one connector terminal.
On the other hand, the harness D shown in FIG. 111 has a lead wire (No. 7) related to starting and a plurality of other lead wires.

Further, in the harness D including the start-related lead wire (No. 7), at least one lead wire having the same thickness as the start-related lead wire (No. 7) is provided. This is because even if it is known that the connector D includes a lead wire related to start-up, it is difficult to specify which lead wire it is (to make it difficult to cheat). In this example, lead wires Nos. 2, 4, and 8 have the same thickness as lead wire No. 7 (lead wire for start-up).

Furthermore, adjacent to the lead wire No. 7 of the harness D, the lead wire No. 8 having the same thickness is arranged. This is because by arranging the lead wire of the same thickness adjacent to the lead wire for starting, it is difficult to identify the lead wire for starting. In the example of FIG. 111, the lead wire No. 8 located on the right side of the lead wire No. 7 in the harness D has the same thickness as the lead wire No. 7. The thickness of the wire may be the same as the thickness of the No. 7 lead wire. Alternatively, the thickness of the No. 3 lead wire may be the thickness of the No. 7 lead wire. In the harness D, the lead wires "adjacent" to the lead wire No. 7 correspond to the lead wires No. 3, No. 6 and No. 8 in the example of FIG. At least one lead wire among these lead wires is set to have the same thickness as the lead wire No. 7.

Further, the harness D is provided with one or more lead wires having a thickness different from that of the lead wire (No. 7) relating to starting. In the example of FIG. 111, leads numbered 1, 3, 5, and 6 have different thicknesses than the start lead (numbered 7). By including a lead wire having a thickness different from that of the start-related lead wire in one connector terminal (harness D connector terminal), it is possible to make the start-related lead wire more difficult to identify.

In addition to lead wires related to start-up, important signal wires, specifically, lead wires related to inserting game media, lead wires related to payout, lead wires for transmitting external signals, etc. From the viewpoint of starting, one or more other signal wires having the same thickness and one or more other signal wires having a different thickness are provided in one connector terminal in the same manner as the lead wire for starting. is preferred.
Furthermore, it is preferable to arrange the lead wire for starting and the lead wire for power supply so as not to be adjacent to each other. This is to make the lead wires for starting less susceptible to noise.
Here, "not adjacent" means that, for example, when lead wire No. 7 of harness D is a lead wire related to starting, wire Nos. 3, 6, and 8 of harness D are not set as lead wires for power supply. Things are mentioned.

Further, as in this embodiment, for example, when the harness G connector terminal and the harness H connector terminal are arranged in a straight line on the main control board 530 and the distance between the two connector terminals is short, the fifth connector terminal of the harness G When the lead wire No. 1 is set as the lead wire for starting, it is preferable not to set the lead wire No. 1 of the harness H as the lead wire for the power supply.
On the other hand, even if the harness G connector terminal and the harness H connector terminal are arranged in a straight line on the main control board 530, if there is a constant distance between the two connector terminals, the fifth lead of the harness G No. 1 lead of harness H may be set to the lead for power supply.

Furthermore, when the connector terminal of the harness including the lead wire for starting and the connector terminal of the other harness are adjacent to each other, the harness including the lead wire for starting is arranged below the other harness. It is preferable to wire so that the lead wires for are hidden from the outside as much as possible.
FIG. 112 is a perspective view showing an example of hiding lead wires for starting. In FIG. 112, for simplification of the drawing, each of the harness D and the harness E consists of one row of lead wires, the harness D consists of three lead wires, and the harness E consists of five lead wires. Illustrated. Then, it is assumed that the lead wire closest to the harness E in the harness D is set as the lead wire for starting.
In this case, wiring is performed so that the direction in which the harness D extends is the harness E side, and the harness E passes above the harness D. As a result, the lead wires for starting the harness D are hidden from the outside as much as possible, and security can be enhanced.

<22nd Embodiment>
The twenty-second embodiment relates to the setting change state. Although the description of the twenty-second embodiment partially overlaps with the description of the nineteenth embodiment, it will be described again.
First, in the case of the slot machine 10, whether the door switch 17 is on, whether the setting key switch 152 is on, and whether the reset switch 153 is on is checked before shifting to the setting change state. is determined, and transition to the setting change state is possible on condition that all these switches are on. If only some of the three switches are on, or if all the switches are off, the setting change state is not entered. As a result, even if a hole is illegally drilled in the front door 12 and the setting key switch 152 is accessed, the setting change state is not entered unless the door switch 17 is turned on.

Even if all of the door switch 17, the setting key switch 152, and the reset switch 153 are turned on after the power is turned on, the setting change state is not entered. After the power is turned on, when the setting key switch 152 is turned on, it is possible to shift to the setting confirmation state. In the setting confirmation state, the current setting value can be confirmed, but the setting value cannot be changed. Note that the door switch 17 may be turned on as a condition for shifting to the setting confirmation state. Furthermore, when shifting to the setting confirmation state, the condition may be that the reset switch 153 is turned off.

Furthermore, the conditions for terminating the setting change state are that the setting key switch 152 is turned off and the door switch 17 is turned on. As a result, it is possible to eliminate a state in which the setting change state ends when the door switch 17 is turned off, that is, when the front door 12 is not opened (a state in which there is a high possibility of cheating).
Here, in the present embodiment, it is possible to shift to the setting change state on the condition that the door switch 17 is on, and to end the setting change state on the condition that the door switch 17 is on.
However, the present invention is not limited to this. First, it is possible to shift to the setting change state on the condition that the door switch 17 is ON, and when the setting change state ends, the ON/OFF state of the door switch 17 is not determined. may

Secondly, it is not determined whether the door switch 17 is on or off when shifting to the setting change state, but when the setting change state ends, it is determined whether the door switch 17 is on or off, and if the door switch 17 is not on. The setting change state may not be terminated.
Thirdly, it is not determined whether the door switch 17 is on or off when shifting to the setting change state. can be set to
Fourthly, when shifting to the setting change state, it is not determined whether the door switch 17 is on or off, and the setting value can be changed by operating the setting change switch 153 during the setting change state. If the door switch 17 is not on when the start switch 41, which is an operation for finalizing the value, is operated, the set value may not be finalized (a new set value is not stored in the RWM 53). .

In addition, in order to shift to the setting change state in the slot machine 10, the power is turned on with the reset switch 153 turned on. The current setting values stored in the RWM 53 are cleared before the setting values can be changed after shifting to (setting change processing). In this case, the set value data is "0". Therefore, the set value at the start of the setting change state is "1".

In addition, when the reset switch 153 is turned on and the power switch 11 is turned on in order to shift to the setting change state, the information displayed on the management information display LED 73 (role ratio monitor) in the storage area of the RWM 53 Such data is not cleared. The data related to the information displayed on the management information display LED 73 includes the number-of-games counter, the number-of-payouts counter (including ring buffer), each ratio data, and the like.

In the case of the pachinko game machine 500, when the power is turned on, whether or not the frame opening switch 523 is on, whether or not the setting key switch 535 is on, and whether or not the reset switch 536 is on is determined. is determined, and it is possible to shift to the setting change state on the condition that these three switches are ON. If only some of the three switches are on, or if all the switches are off, the setting change state is not entered. As a result, in an illegal state where the front frame 502 is not open, even if the setting key switch 535 is turned on, the setting change state is not entered.

In particular, as shown in FIG. 98, the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 500 is not closed like the slot machine 10 (see FIG. 22), but is open.
Therefore, depending on the situation of the islands installed in the hall, it is assumed that the main control board 530 is accessed without opening the front frame 502 by going around to the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 500 . However, if the frame open switch 523 is not turned on, it is determined that the state is not normal, and the state is not changed to the setting change state (the set value cannot be changed).

Even if the frame opening switch 523 is turned on, the setting key switch 535 is turned on, and the reset switch 536 is turned on after the power is turned on, the setting change state is not entered. Furthermore, after the power is turned on, even if the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion slot 534 and the setting key switch 535 is turned on, the setting change state is not entered and the setting confirmation state is entered. do not.
In the case of the pachinko game machine 500, as described above, when the power is turned on with the setting key inserted into the setting key insertion slot 534 and the setting key switch 535 turned on (the reset switch 536 is turned off), , it is possible to shift to the setting confirmation state.

Further, when the opening of the front frame 502 and the opening of the glass door 505 can be individually detected as in the present embodiment, when both the front frame 502 and the glass door 505 are opened at the same time (that is, the door (when the open switch 522 is on and the frame open switch 523 is on), the specification may allow the transition to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state.
By setting in this way, in the manufacturing process of the pachinko game machine 500, the functions of the set values can be inspected without performing unnecessary procedures. Further, after the pachinko gaming machine 500 is installed in the hall, even if the glass door 505 is removed from the pachinko gaming machine 500 during the board maintenance work in the hall, setting change and setting confirmation can be performed in parallel with the board maintenance. Therefore, convenience can be improved.

Further, the door open switch 522 (the switch that is turned on when the glass door 505 is opened) is not detected when shifting to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. Therefore, when shifting to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, it does not matter whether the glass door 505 is open or closed. However, it is determined that the glass door 505 is closed when shifting to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, and the ON/OFF state of the door opening switch 522 is determined when shifting to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, and the state is OFF. on the condition that it is possible to shift to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state.

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 103 and 106, the setting key insertion opening 534 and the setting change (reset) switch 536 are covered with a cover 561. As shown in FIG. In order to insert the setting key into the setting key insertion opening 534, the cover 561 must be opened.
Therefore, a sensor for detecting opening/closing of the cover 561 (hereinafter referred to as a "cover sensor") may be provided so that the setting change state or the setting confirmation state can be entered on condition that the cover sensor is turned on.

In the pachinko game machine 500, in the setting change state, each time the setting change switch 536 is operated, the setting value can be changed in common with the slot machine 10. FIG.
In addition, in the slot machine 10, the operation of the start switch 41 is an operation to confirm the set value, but in the case of the pachinko game machine 500, turning off the setting key switch 535 confirms the set value and , is an operation for ending the setting change state.
Furthermore, in the case of the pachinko game machine 500, the setting change state can be terminated on condition that the setting key switch 535 is turned off from on and the frame opening switch 523 is on. As a result, it is possible to eliminate a state in which the setting change state ends when the frame opening switch 523 is turned off, that is, when the front frame 502 is not opened (a state in which there is a high possibility of cheating).

In the present embodiment, the setting change state can be entered under the condition that the frame open switch 523 is turned on, and the setting change state can be ended under the condition that the frame open switch 523 is turned on.
However, the present invention is not limited to this. First, it is possible to shift to the setting change state on the condition that the frame open switch 523 is ON, and when the setting change state ends, the ON/OFF state of the frame open switch 523 is not determined. can be

Second, it does not determine whether the frame open switch 523 is on or off when shifting to the setting change state, but determines whether the frame open switch 523 is on or off when the setting change state ends, and the frame open switch 523 is turned on. Otherwise, the setting change state may not be terminated.
Thirdly, when shifting to the setting change state, it is not judged whether the frame open switch 523 is on or off. You can set it so that it does not.

Fourthly, it is possible to change the set value by operating the setting change switch 536 during the setting change state without judging whether the frame open switch 523 is on or off when shifting to the setting change state. If the frame open switch 523 is not on when the setting key switch 535, which is an operation for fixing the setting value, is turned off, the setting value is not fixed (a new setting value is not stored in the RWM). May be set.

In the case of the pachinko game machine 500, even if the power is turned on with the reset switch 536 turned on in order to shift to the setting change state, the management information display LED (performance Data relating to information displayed on display monitor 538 is not cleared. The data related to the information displayed on the management information display LED 538 is the base value.

Furthermore, the setting key insertion slot 534 and the setting change (reset) switch 536 are preferably provided on the rear side of the front frame 502 on the side closer to the hinge mechanism 503 . By doing so, it is possible to prevent easy access to the setting key insertion opening 534 and the setting change (reset) switch 536 simply by opening the front frame 502 slightly.
For example, in FIG. 98, the setting key insertion opening 534 and the setting change (reset) switch 536 are arranged inside the cover 561, but when the main control board 530 is viewed from the front, the setting key insertion opening 534 and the setting switch 536 are arranged. A change (reset) switch 536 is located to the right in the area of the main control board 530 . Thereby, the setting key insertion opening 534 and the setting change (reset) switch 536 can be arranged closer to the hinge mechanism 503 . In FIG. 98, since the left side in the figure is the open side, if it is formed as shown in FIG. can be placed.

Regarding the slot machine 10, similarly to the above, the setting key insertion slot 151 and the setting change (reset) switch 153 are set on the main control board 50 so that when the front door 12 is opened, the rotational axis of the front door 12 is adjusted. It is preferable to arrange them so as to be close to each other. For example, when the main control board 50 is arranged as shown in FIG. When the door 12 is opened and the main control board 50 is seen, it looks like FIG. 10(a). Therefore, if the setting key insertion opening 151 and the setting change (reset) switch 153 are arranged on the left side in FIG. A switch 153 can be arranged.

Furthermore, as a countermeasure to prevent the transition to the setting change state due to a goto act, for example, in the pachinko game machine 500, after inserting the setting key into the setting key insertion slot 534, the setting key is rotated counterclockwise. , the setting key switch 535 may be turned on. In this case, if the setting key is configured to be rotatable clockwise, and if it is configured not to shift to the setting change state when the setting key is rotated clockwise, the shift to the setting change state is made difficult to understand. be able to.
In particular, when a key is inserted into the key insertion opening 521 to open the front frame 502, the front frame 502 can be opened by rotating the key clockwise. The direction of rotation of the key and the direction of rotation of the setting key are opposite to each other, making it difficult to understand the transition to the setting change state.

The slot machine 10 is also similar to the above.
The setting key switch 152 may be turned on by rotating the setting key counterclockwise after inserting the setting key into the setting key insertion slot 151 . In this case, if the setting key is configured to be rotatable clockwise, and if it is configured not to shift to the setting change state when the setting key is rotated clockwise, the shift to the setting change state is made difficult to understand. be able to.
In particular, if the front door 12 is opened by rotating the key clockwise when opening the front door 12, the key rotation direction and the setting key rotation direction when the front door 12 is opened can be determined. is in the opposite direction, making it difficult to understand the transition to the setting change state.

FIG. 113 is a side sectional view showing the positional relationship between the upper case 560 of the substrate case 550, the cover 561, the setting key insertion opening 534, and the setting change (reset) switch 536. FIG. Note that in FIG. 113, as in FIG. 108, the cross section is not hatched from the viewpoint of easy viewing of the drawing.
As shown in FIGS. 105 and 113, the highest surface of the upper case 560 is surface S1, and the opening surface of the setting key insertion opening 534 and setting change (reset) switch 536 is surface S2. In this case, the surface S2 is formed lower than the surface S1. By forming in this way, for example, when an attempt is made to access the setting key insertion opening 534 or the setting change (reset) switch 536 by inserting a wire-like object from the outside, it is possible to access the surface rather than the surface S1. Accessing S2 becomes more difficult. Therefore, it is possible to suppress setting fraud.

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 103 and 113, when the cover 561 is attached to the upper surfaces of the setting key insertion opening 534 and the setting change (reset) switch 536, the surface S3 (FIG. 113) which is the upper surface of the cover 561 is , are arranged at a position lower than the surface S1 of the upper cover 560. As shown in FIG.
By forming in this way, when attempting to access the setting key insertion opening 534 or the setting change (reset) switch 536, a wire-like object may be inserted from between the upper cover 560 and the cover 561, or the cover may be closed. 561, it is possible to make it difficult to do so, so that setting acts can be suppressed.

Although the 19th to 22nd embodiments have been described above, these embodiments are not limited to the contents described above, and various modifications such as those described below are possible.
A. Nineteenth Embodiment (1) In the nineteenth embodiment, a setting confirmation end sound may be output when the setting confirmation state is ended. For example, outputting a voice saying "The setting confirmation is finished."
Furthermore, if the game is started at the same time as the end of the setting confirmation state,
a) End the output of the setting confirmation end sound before the end of the game when the game is ended in the shortest possible time.
b) End the output of the setting confirmation end sound before the end of the game when the game is ended within the average time of one game.
c) Before the end of the game when the game in which the special role was won (in the case of the slot machine 10) or the game in which the jackpot was won (in the case of the pachinko gaming machine 500) was completed within the average time of one game , ends the output of the setting confirmation completion sound.
It can be set as follows.

(2) Furthermore, simultaneously with the end of the setting confirmation state, the production lamp 21 (in the case of the slot machine 10) or the production lamp 541 (in the case of the pachinko game machine 500) outputs an effect indicating that the setting confirmation state has ended. may Also in this case, similarly to the nineteenth embodiment, the performance time by the lamp is
a) Ending the ramp performance before the end of the game when the game is completed in the shortest possible time.
b) Ending the ramp effect before the end of the game when the game is ended in the average time of one game.
c) Before the end of the game when the game in which the special role was won (in the case of the slot machine 10) or the game in which the jackpot was won (in the case of the pachinko gaming machine 500) was completed within the average time of one game , to end the lamp effect.
etc.

(3) When the setting change state is ended (or when the setting confirmation state is ended as in the above example), the setting change (or confirmation) end sound and lamp effect are output. The (or confirmation) end sound and lamp effects are controlled by the sub-control board 80 or 540 .
However, not limited to this, when ending the setting change (or confirmation) state, the output device controlled by the main control board 50 or 530 executes an output indicating that the setting change (or confirmation) state has ended. You may

(4) In the slot machine 10, the setting key insertion opening 151 (setting key switch 152) and the setting change (reset) switch 153 are provided on the main control board 50, but this is not the only option. , a setting change board may be provided, and the setting key insertion port 151 (setting key switch 152), setting change (reset) switch 153, and setting value display LED 73 may be provided on this setting change board.
The pachinko game machine 500 is similar to the above. A setting change board is provided separately from the main control board 530, and a setting key insertion port 534 (setting key switch 535), a setting change (reset) switch 536, and a set value display LED 537 are provided on this setting change board. good too.

(5) As the setting change end sound, an example of outputting the sound "The setting change is finished" is shown, but it is not necessarily limited to this wording. For example, "The setting value has been updated" There may be.
(6) In the 19th embodiment, the game is started immediately after the setting change state ends. not. For example, it is assumed that after the hall manager changes the setting, he/she tries to complete one game as a trial. In such a case, while confirming that the setting change state has ended correctly by the output of the setting change end sound and the effect lamp, the notification by the setting change end sound and the effect lamp should not be confused with the effect output in the game. One of the purposes is to make

B. Twentieth Embodiment (1) In the twentieth embodiment, the lower edge 560a of the upper case 560 and the outer edge 570a of the lower case 570 are brought into contact so that they can slide. However, there are various ways of engaging the upper case 560 and the lower case 570 before the sliding movement, and the method is not limited to the one shown in FIG. Moreover, when the upper case 560 and the lower case 570 are superimposed, they may have a shape that allows them to overlap with a certain degree of freedom. Alternatively, the upper case 560 and the lower case 570 may overlap only at a specific position.

(2) How the connectors 539a to 539h are arranged on the main control board 530, and which connector legs are exposed when the upper case 560 and the lower case 570 are temporarily mated. , various methods.
When the upper case 560 and the lower case 570 are slid as in this embodiment, connector legs 539g' and 539h' are exposed first as shown in FIG. Therefore, in the case of the connector 539a provided on the main control board 530 at symmetrical positions with respect to the connectors 539g and 539h, even if the amount of slide movement increases, the connector legs are not exposed.

Therefore, for example, on the main control board 530, from the connector 539a side in FIG. , connectors with signal lines for outputting external signals, and connectors with signal lines for presentation) are arranged in order, and signal line connectors that are not so important in terms of security are adopted as the connectors 539g and 539h. Things are mentioned.

(3) Although the substrate case 550 has the crimped portions 562 and 572 as an example, the present embodiment can also be applied to the substrate case 550 that does not have the crimped portions. For example, the board case that accommodates the sub-control board 540 of the pachinko game machine 500 may not have a crimped portion, but the twentieth embodiment can be applied even to such a board case.

C. 21st Embodiment (1) The types and numbers of connectors and the types and numbers of harnesses (connector terminals) shown in the above embodiments are examples, and are not limited to these.
For example, in FIG. 111, harnesses B and C may all be composed of thick leads or may be composed entirely of thin leads.
Also, although the harness E has only one row of thin lead wires, a harness and connector terminals having two or more rows of thin lead wires may be used.
Furthermore, the harness and connector terminals may be provided in any number of rows, and the number of lead wires (terminals) in one row may be any number.
Furthermore, in a harness in which thick lead wires and thin lead wires are mixed in a row, it is sufficient that there is at least one thick lead wire and at least one thin lead wire in the row.

(2) In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 110, a set of lead wires connected to one connector of the main control board 530 is defined as "one harness".
For example, the harness G connected to the connector 539g is one harness, and the harness H connected to the connector 539h is one harness. When the harness G and the harness H are bound together at the end thereof, it is called a "harness group" and is not called a "single harness".

(3) When the main control board 530 and another board are harness-connected, a specific connector is mounted on the main control board 530, and a harness consisting of N lead wires is connected to the specific connector. Assume that the connector terminals are connected.
On the other hand, on the other end side of the harness, N lead wires are divided into Nx (Nx≧1) and Ny (Ny≧1) lead wires, and connector terminals X are attached to the tips of the Nx lead wires, The connector terminal X is connected to another board, and the connector terminal Y (≠connector terminal X) is attached to the end of the Ny lead wires, and the connector terminal Y is connected to another board (Nx lead wires). (either the same substrate as the substrate to which the line is connected or a different substrate).
In this case, "one harness" in this embodiment refers to a set of N lead wires connected to the main control board 530 side.

D. 22nd Embodiment (1) In the pachinko game machine 500, it is possible to shift to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state when the power is turned on. It may be possible to shift to the setting confirmation state with . In this case as well, it is determined whether or not the frame open switch 523 is on, and if it is on, the setting confirmation state is entered.

(2) As described above, it is conceivable to provide a setting change board on a board different from the main control board 50 or 530 . In this case, in the case of the slot machine 10, the setting is changed to the side of the opening axis of the front door 12 inside the housing (toward the opening axis), in other words, to the side away from the open end as seen from the player side. It is preferable to arrange the substrate. Similarly, in the case of the pachinko game machine 500, it is set on the back side of the front frame 502 toward the hinge mechanism 503 (toward the hinge mechanism 503), in other words, on the side away from the open end when viewed from the player side. Preferably, a modified substrate is provided. By arranging them in this way, the setting key insertion openings 151 and 534 and the setting change (reset) switches 153 and 536 can be arranged at positions far from the open end. Even in this case, the main control board 50 or 530 is preferably arranged far from the open end.

In particular, the main control board 50 or 530 is equipped with management information display LEDs 74 or 538, respectively, and it is preferable that the information displayed by the management information display LEDs 74 or 538 is not easily visible. Therefore, it is preferable to arrange the management information display LED 74 or 538 on the main control board 50 or 530 away from the open side, and also arrange the main control board 50 or 530 away from the open end.
However, the information displayed by the management information display LED 74 or 538 can be made invisible simply by arranging the management information display LED 74 or 538 on the main control board 50 or 530, respectively, at a position away from the open side. is also possible. Similarly, even if the management information display LED 74 or 538 is mounted approximately in the center of the main control board 50 or 530, respectively, the management information can be displayed by simply arranging the main control board 50 or 530 at a position away from the open end. The information displayed by display LEDs 74 or 538 can also be easily obscured.

E. All the embodiments and various modifications described in this specification, including the 19th to 22nd embodiments, are not limited to being implemented alone, and can be implemented in combination as appropriate.

<Twenty-third Embodiment>
Next, a twenty-third embodiment will be described.
The terms used in the twenty-third embodiment have the following meanings.
“RT” means that the type (number) of the role to be selected by lottery and its winning probability are in a unique lottery state, and “RT transition” means transition from one RT to another RT By doing so, it means that the winning probability of at least one replay subject to lottery changes. Therefore, the type of replay and its winning probability in one RT are values specific to that RT, and it is impossible that the replay type and its winning probability are all the same between one RT and another RT. do not have. However, there is no problem if one RT and another RT have the same total replay winning probability.

In this embodiment, RT includes non-RT and RT1, as shown in FIG. 131, which will be described later.
Note that "non-RT" does not mean that it is not included in the concept of RT, but is equivalent to "RT0". Therefore, when we refer to "RT" in this specification, we include non-RT.
In addition, in this embodiment, a 1BB game (1BB operation state) and an RB game (RB operation state) are provided as special games (accessory product operation state). Strictly speaking, 1BB game (1BB operating state) and RB game (RB operating state) are not included in RT, but may be one of RT.

It should be noted that RB in the present embodiment is a combination drawn during a general game of 1BB game (meaning a game other than RB game). , the general game is shifted to the RB game during the 1BB game. Therefore, the RB drawn in the general game of the 1BB game is also called "SRB (shift RB)".

Furthermore, it is a concept different from RT, and has a main game state whose transition (transition) is controlled by the main control board 50 in the same way as RT. The main game state of this embodiment includes main game states 0 to 5, as shown in FIG. 132, which will be described later.
RT and the main game state may or may not be interlocked. For example, when the transition conditions for both the RT and the main game state are satisfied, both the RT and the main game state are shifted. On the other hand, when the RT transition condition is satisfied but the main game state transition condition is not satisfied, only the RT transitions while the main game state remains as it is. On the contrary, when the transition condition for the main game state is satisfied but the transition condition for RT is not satisfied, RT remains as it is and only the main game state transitions.

In the twenty-third embodiment, the winning lottery means 61 executes the lottery for the "winning number". Therefore, the role lottery means 61 is also called "winning number lottery (determination, selection) means". Winning numbers in this embodiment include winning numbers "1" to "41" as shown in FIG. 126 and the like, which will be described later.
Then, when the winning number is determined, a "condition device number" corresponding to the winning number is generated. For example, in FIG. 126, if winning number "1" is determined, winning and replay condition device number "1" is generated.

The "condition device number" (also referred to as "winning information") has a "accessory condition device number" and a "winning and replay condition device number". In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 122 to be described later, "1" to "17" are provided as accessory condition device numbers. Also, as shown in FIGS. 123 to 125 to be described later, "1" to "24" are provided as prize and replay condition device numbers.
Then, when the winning number is determined and the conditional device number is generated, the conditional device corresponding to the conditional device number is activated, so that the combination of symbol combinations corresponding to the activated conditional device can be stopped and displayed on the activated line. becomes.
Note that 1BB and RB in the present embodiment may not win a winning game, so there may be cases where 1BB and RB are inside.

In the twenty-third embodiment, the left reel 31 may be called the first reel 31 , the middle reel 31 may be called the second reel 31 , and the right reel 31 may be called the third reel 31 .
In particular, the names of the RWM 53, which will be described later, refer to the first reel 31, the second reel 31, and the third reel 31. As shown in FIG.

FIG. 114 is a diagram showing the pattern arrangement of the reels 31 in the twenty-third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 114, in this embodiment, each reel 31 consists of 20 frames.
In FIG. 114, the symbol numbers are also illustrated. For example, on the left reel 31, the symbol with symbol number 0 is "Replay". Furthermore, in FIG. 114, the symbol numbers are also displayed when the reels 31 rotate in the reverse direction. The symbol number when the reel 31 rotates in the reverse direction will be described later.

Further, in the twenty-third embodiment, the maximum number of moving symbols from the moment the stop switch 42 is operated until the reels 31 stop is set to "4". For example, when the left stop switch 42 is operated just before the number 1 "watermelon" on the left reel 31 passes through the activated line, a maximum of 4 symbols are moved from the relevant symbol to the number 5 "replay". It becomes possible to stop on the effective line.
Therefore, for example, if four specific symbols are arranged on one reel 31 at intervals of 5 symbols, the specific symbols can always be stopped on the activated line regardless of which position the stop switch 42 is operated. For example, on the left reel 31, "Replay" is arranged at Nos. 5, 10, 15, and 0. That is, the "replay" on the left reel 31 is arranged with 4 symbols at intervals of 5 symbols. Therefore, regarding the left reel 31, regardless of the timing at which the left stop switch 42 is operated, the "replay" can always be stopped on the activated line. In addition, such a symbol arrangement may be referred to as a ““PB=1” arrangement”.

On the left reel 31, "Bell A" and "Watermelon" are arranged at "PB=1".
Also, on the middle reel 31, "Replay", "Bell A", and "Cherry" are each arranged at "PB=1".
Furthermore, on the right reel 31, "Replay", "Bell A", and "Bell B" are each arranged at "PB=1".
Furthermore, on the left reel 31, the 3rd “black BAR”, the 8th “special map”, the 13th “red 7”, and the 18th “blue BAR” are “PB=1” in total of these 4 symbols. ” placement. Therefore, at any timing when the left stop switch 42 is operated, any one of "black BAR", "special map top", "red 7" or "blue BAR" can be stopped on the effective line.
Similarly to the left reel 31, the middle reel 31 also has a "PB=1" arrangement for "black BAR", "blue BAR", "red 7", or "special design top" by adding these four symbols.
Furthermore, on the right reel 31, the "blue BAR" or "special symbol bottom" is arranged at "PB=1" by adding these two symbols.

FIG. 115 shows the display window (transparent window) 18, the positional relationship of each reel 31, and the effective lines (display lines for displaying symbol combinations).
A reel 31 arranged inside can be seen through the display window 18 .
In this embodiment, three reels 31 (a left reel 31, a middle reel 31, and a right reel 31) are provided in parallel in the horizontal direction. Furthermore, each reel 31 is arranged so that three patterns that are continuous vertically can be seen from the display window 18 . Therefore, a total of nine symbols (frames) are arranged so that they can be seen from the display window 17 of the slot machine 10 .

In addition, FIG. 115 shows designations of symbol positions in this specification. In this specification, for each reel 31, the symbol positions when stopped, which can be seen from the display window 18, are referred to as "upper row", "middle row", and "lower row" in order from the top. ”, “middle left”, and “lower left”.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 115, valid lines are set for the nine symbols visible from the display window 18 .
Here, the "effective line" is a line of symbols arranged when the reels 31 are stopped, and is a symbol combination line (display line) for forming a symbol combination, and a symbol combination corresponding to any of the winning combinations is a symbol combination line. This is the line where the player wins the prize when the player stops on that line. In this embodiment, the prescribed number is three in any game state, and the same effective line is set in any game state.
The effective line in the twenty-third embodiment is a so-called right-sloping straight line (“upper left”-“middle middle”-“lower right”). Other lines are invalid lines.
In addition, the specified number may be changed for each game state (for example, the specified number during 1BB operation is set to "2"). Furthermore, the position and number of activated lines may differ for each game state or for each specified number (for example, multiple activated lines may be used for a specific specified number).

FIGS. 116 to 121 are diagrams showing the types of combinations (such as combinations corresponding to winning numbers drawn by the combination lottery means 61), symbol combinations, the number of payouts, and the like in the twenty-third embodiment.
The roles are roughly divided into special roles, replays (replay roles), and minor roles.
Then, the combination of symbols corresponding to each combination and the number of payouts at the time of winning are determined. When all the reels 31 are stopped, if the symbol combination corresponding to any of the combinations stops on the active line (the winning combination is won; the same shall apply hereinafter), the number of medals corresponding to the combination is paid out (dividend (profit ) is granted).
However, the payout number at the time of winning the special combination is set to 0. Also, in the replay, medals are automatically inserted, and a replay can be executed.

In FIGS. 116 to 121, "three (1)" corresponds to when the accessory is not activated, and particularly in the twenty-third embodiment, games other than 1BB games This corresponds to a state in which it is not in progress, a state in which 1BB winning information (condition device number) is carried over, etc.). In addition, in the 23rd embodiment, since there is a case where AT is executed during 1BB game, games other than 1BB game are non-AT. Therefore, in the twenty-third embodiment, games other than the 1BB game may be referred to as "normal game (accessory not activated, non-AT)". However, even in normal games, there are cases of advantageous sections and non-advantageous sections.
Also, "three cards (2)" corresponds to the time when RB is not activated while 1BB is in operation (during 1BB game). Furthermore, "3 cards (3)" corresponds to 1BB operation (during 1BB game) and RB operation (during RB game).
For example, in FIG. 116, 1BB with winning combination number "001" is subject to a lottery when the specified number of cards is 3 (1) (when the role is not activated), but the specified number of 3 (2) and the specified number of 3 are selected. In the case of (3), it means that the lottery is not eligible.

The winning combination numbers “001” to “017” shown in FIG. 116 correspond to special winning combinations (accessories). In this embodiment, one type of 1BB and 16 types of RBs (RBA to RBP) are provided as special roles.
In the twenty-third embodiment, only 1BB is drawn when the role is not activated, and RB is not drawn, so there is no transition from when the role is not activated to when RB is activated.
When 1BB is won and 1BB is won when the accessory is not activated, medals are not paid out in this game, but the next game is shifted to 1BB operation (1BB game) corresponding to a special game.

Also, during 1BB operation (1BB game), RB is drawn. When RB is won during 1BB operation and RB wins, medals are not paid out in this game, but from the next game, RB operation (RB game) during 1BB operation (1BB game) is performed.
In the twenty-third embodiment, the time when 1BB is in operation and RB is not in operation may be referred to as "general game of 1BB game".
In the case where the conditions for ending the RB operation are satisfied, when the conditions for ending the 1BB operation are satisfied, the 1BB operation is terminated and the game shifts to the time when the accessory is not activated (ordinary game). On the other hand, when the condition for ending the RB operation is satisfied but the condition for ending the 1BB operation is not satisfied, the operation shifts to the 1BB operation (and when the RB is not operated).

All of the combination numbers “018” to “047” shown in FIG. 117 correspond to replays (replay combinations). In the twenty-third embodiment, replays 01 to 10 are provided as types of replays. As shown in FIG. 117, when the accessory is not activated (three (1)), all of replays 01 to 10 are subject to lottery. On the other hand, when 1BB is in operation and RB is not in operation (three cards (2)), only Replay 01 is selected for the lottery. Furthermore, when 1BB is in operation and RB is in operation (three cards (3)), replays are not drawn.

Figures 118 to 121 show minor combinations of the twenty-third embodiment. Small wins 01 to 34 are provided as small wins in the twenty-third embodiment.
Among the small wins 01 to 34, the number of payouts for the small wins 01 to 12 at the time of winning is set to 15, and when the so-called pushing order bell wins (small wins A group (small wins A1 to A6) described later, and small win group B (when minor wins B1 to B6 are won).
In addition, the number of small wins 13 to 24 to be paid out at the time of winning is set to 3, which is a low bell when winning the so-called pressing order bell (when winning the small win group A (small wins A1 to A6)). is a role.
Furthermore, the number of small wins 25 to 33 to be paid out at the time of winning is set to 1, and it is a low bell when winning the so-called pushing order bell (when winning a small win group B (small wins B1 to B6)). It is a role.
Furthermore, the small winning combination 34 is a winning combination to be selected by lottery when RB is activated during 1BB activation (when 3 cards (3)).

In each of the above-mentioned roles, when the symbol combination corresponding to the role does not stop on the effective line in the game in which the role is won, the role to be carried over from the next game onwards and the role not to be carried over are determined.
The hands carried over are 1BB and RB in this embodiment. Since the symbol combinations of 1BB and RB are both set to "PB≠1", there is a case where a game in which 1BB or RB is won does not win. When 1BB or RB is won, in the game until 1BB or RB is won, the winning information of 1BB or RB is controlled so as to be carried over to the next game and thereafter.

On the other hand, when a minor combination or replay is won, the winning combination is valid only in the current game, and the winning is not carried over to the next game or later. That is, in a game in which one of these winning combinations is won, the reels 31 are controlled to be stopped so that the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination can be won. The rights to the elected role shall be extinguished.
In the 23rd embodiment, when a winning number including a small combination or a replay is won, one of the replays or the small combination is always won, and there is no chance of being missed. However, the invention is not limited to this, and it is of course possible to provide a minor combination ("PB≠1") that may be missed.

122 to 125 are diagrams showing condition device numbers, condition devices, winning combinations, and the like.
First, the combination lottery means 61 draws a winning number. Winning numbers include winning numbers "1" to "41" as shown in FIG. 126, which will be described later. Then, as shown in FIG. 126, for example, when the winning number "1" is won, the condition device "replay A" corresponding to the winning and replay condition device number "1" becomes operable.
Further, for example, when the winning number "25" is won, the condition device "1BB" corresponding to the accessory condition device number "1" becomes operable.

Here, as shown in FIG. 138 to be described later, the RWM 53 has a storage area (address "F0A9(H)") capable of storing winning and replay condition device numbers, and a storage area capable of storing role product condition device numbers. (address “F0AA(H)”). For example, assume that the winning number "11" is won when the accessory is not activated. In this case, by storing the value of the winning number ("11") in the address "F0A9(H)", it becomes possible to update the winning and replay condition device number. Also, assume that the winning number "25" is won when the accessory is not activated. In this case, a value (in the twenty-third embodiment, "1" obtained by subtracting "24" from the winning number) obtained by performing a predetermined calculation on the value of the winning number is stored in the address "F0AA(H)". By doing so, it becomes possible to update the accessory condition device number.

In the 23rd embodiment, the winning number won in the lottery by the role lottery means 61 is compared with "25", and if it is determined to be less than "25", the winning number is assigned to the address "F0A9(H)". Make it memorizable. Also, if it is determined that it is not less than "25", it is possible to derive the accessory condition device number from the winning number by a predetermined calculation (as described above, subtracting "24" in the twenty-third embodiment). A control process is performed to enable the stored accessory condition device number to be stored in the address "F0AA(H)". Especially, as in the 23rd embodiment, this is an effective derivation method when the total number of accessory condition device numbers "17" is smaller than the total number of winning and replay condition device numbers "24". .

FIG. 122 shows a accessory (particularly 1BB or RB in the twenty-third embodiment) condition device.
For example, the 1BB condition device corresponding to the accessory condition device number "1" is the accessory condition device that becomes operable when the 1BB is won. When this 1BB condition device operates, 1BB, which is a winning combination, can win.
In addition, in the remarks column of FIG. 122, the condition for terminating the operation of the accessory condition device is shown. The 1BB condition device continues until the number of medals acquired exceeds 170, and when the number of medals acquired exceeds 170, the operation end condition of the 1BB condition device is satisfied, and the operation of the 1BB condition device is terminated.
Similarly, the RBA conditional device to the RBP conditional device all terminate upon completion of 12 games or 8 wins, or the completion of the operation of the 1BB conditional device.

Figures 123-125 illustrate the prize and replay conditions device. Of the winning and replay condition device numbers, "1" to "9" are condition device numbers related to replay, and "10" to "24" are condition device numbers related to minor wins.
For example, when the replay B condition device corresponding to the winning and replay condition device number "2" is activated, the winning combinations include replays 01 and 02, so replays 01 and 02 can win. When a conditional device is activated, not all the winning combinations corresponding to the conditional device can win. For example, when the replay B conditional device is activated, Replay 02 can win in the 23rd embodiment. becomes.
Therefore, in the twenty-third embodiment, only one of the replays wins even if multiple types of replays are won. Similarly, as will be described later, multiple types of small winning combinations may be won, but in this case, only one of the small winning combinations can be won (no double winning).

When the replay A condition device corresponding to the winning and replay condition device number "1" is activated, only replay 01 can win. The symbol combinations of replay 01 are the combination numbers "018" to "021" in FIG. Therefore, "Replay"--"Blue BAR/Black BAR/Red 7/Tokuzujo"--"Bell A" stops on the active line. When the middle reel 31 stops and "blue BAR/black BAR/red 7/special map top" stops on the effective line (middle middle row), "replay" stops on the middle upper row. Further, when "Bell A" stops on the effective line (lower right) when the right reel 31 stops, "Replay" stops on the upper right. Therefore, when the symbol combination of Replay 01 stops on the active line (Replay 01 wins), "Replay"-"Replay"-"Replay" (upper replay) stops on the upper line (invalid line).

When the replay B condition device is activated, replay 02 can be won. The symbol combination of replay 02 is the combination number "022" in FIG. Therefore, "replay"-"replay"-"replay" (downward-sloping replay) stops at the active line.
When the replay C condition device is activated, replay 03 or 10 can be won. Here, the reason why the remarks column includes "weak cherry" is that it is possible to form a so-called corner cherry ("cherry" stops at the lower left). Note that the lower left row is not a valid line. The symbol on the left reel 31 of the replay 03 is "Bell A", but in FIG. stops at the bottom left (invalid line).

In the replay D1 conditional device, the remark column has "strong cherry 1" because it is possible to have a so-called middle cherry ("cherry" stops in the middle left). Note that the middle left row is not a valid line. The same applies to the "strong cherry 2" of the replay D2 conditional device and the "strong cherry 3" of the replay D3 conditional device.
When the replay D1 condition device is activated, replay 03, 04 or 10, which is a winning combination, can win a prize. Of these, the symbol combination of replay 04 is "black BAR"-"red 7/cherry"-"replay/bell B" as indicated by combination numbers "027" to "030" in FIG. When the left reel 31 is stopped and the 3rd "black bar" is stopped on the effective line (upper left), the 2nd "cherry" is stopped on the middle left.

When the replay D2 conditional device is activated, replays 02, 03, 04, or 10, which are winning combinations, can be won, and when the replay D3 conditional device is activated, replays 03, 04, 05, or 10 can be won.
When the replay 04 wins when the replay D2 condition device or the replay D3 condition device is activated, the 2nd "cherry" stops at the middle left row when the left reel 31 stops, similarly to when the replay D1 condition device is activated.

When the Replay E condition device is activated, Replay 06, which is a winning combination, can win a prize. The symbol combination of replay 06 is, as shown in FIG. 117, "watermelon"--"replay/watermelon"--"red 7/watermelon/special map/black BAR". Here, since the "watermelon" on the left reel 31 is "PB=1", the "watermelon" always stops on the activated line. "Watermelon" on the middle and right reels 31 is "PB≠1", but if "Watermelon" is pressed, "Watermelon" can be stopped on the effective line.
When the Replay F condition device is activated, Replay 07, which is a winning combination, can win a prize.

When the replay G condition device is activated, replay 08 or 09, which is a winning combination, can win a prize. Here, in order to win the replay 08, when the left reel 31 stops, the 8th "special map" stops at the upper left row, and when the right reel 31 stops, the 16th " When the replay is stopped at the bottom right, the replay 08 wins, and the top left and the bottom left are stopped. In addition, "special figure top" and "special figure bottom" also stop on the upper right and middle right. This stop type is called "strongest cherry" in the twenty-third embodiment.

In FIG. 124, when the minor combination A1 condition device to minor combination A6 condition device are operated, either minor combination 01 to 06 or minor combination 13 to 24 included in the winning combination can be won.
Here, when the small combination A1 condition device to the small combination A6 condition device are activated during the 1BB game (1BB operation), and the stop switch 42 is operated in the order of pressing the correct answer, the 15-piece combination (included in the winning combination) Any of the small wins 01 to 06) is won, and when the stop switch 42 is operated in the order of pressing the incorrect answer (the order of pressing other than the order of pressing the correct answer), a three-card combination (small wins 13 to 13 included in the winning combination) is operated. 24) will win a prize.
On the other hand, when the accessory is not activated, there is no correct pressing order when the small combination A1 condition device to the small combination A6 condition device are operated. When the small combination A1 condition device to the small combination A6 condition device are activated when the accessory is not activated, the 3-card combination is won even if all are in the order of pushing.

It should be noted that the small winning combination A1 condition device to the small winning combination A6 condition device can be operated only when RB is not operated during 1BB operation. Therefore, the small combination A1 condition device to the small combination A6 condition device operate during the general game of the 1BB game (other than the RB game).
Here, the relationship between the small combination A1 to A6 conditional devices and the order of pressing the correct answer during the 1BB operation is as follows.
Small hand A1 condition device: 123 (left middle right)
Small hand A2 condition device: 132 (left and right middle)
Small role A3 condition device: 213 (middle left and right)
Small hand A4 condition device: 231 (middle right left)
Small hand A5 condition device: 312 (right left middle)
Small hand A6 condition device: 321 (right middle left)

For example, when the small combination A1 condition device is activated during a 1BB game, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the correct order of pressing "123", in order to win the small combination 01, "watermelon" - "Cherry" - Stop "Bell A". As a result, "Bell A"-"Bell A"-"Bell A" stops on the lower line (ineffective line).
Further, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the incorrect pressing order of "132", the correct pressing order is applied at this time when the left first stop is performed. 01) are stopped. Next, at the second stop on the right side, the order of pressing the wrong answers is set at this time, so among the winning combinations 13 to 17, the small combination 17 whose left reel 31 is "Watermelon" is stopped on the activated line. That is, when the right second stop is performed, the "replay" is stopped at the lower right stage. Furthermore, at the middle third stop, "red 7/replay" is stopped at the middle middle stage.

On the other hand, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the wrong answer pressing order "213" or "231", the wrong answer pressing order is set at this point in the middle first stop. Therefore, "Bell A" is stopped at the middle middle stage at the middle first stop. When the left reel 31 is stopped, "Replay" is stopped on the upper left stage, and when the right reel 31 is stopped, "Bell A/Bell B" is stopped on the lower right stage.
Also, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the wrong answer pressing order "312" or "321", the wrong answer pressing order is set at this point in the right first stop. Therefore, the "replay" is stopped at the lower right stage at the right first stop. When the left reel 31 is stopped, "Watermelon" is stopped at the upper left stage, and "Red 7/Replay" is stopped at the middle middle stage when the middle reel 31 is stopped.

As described above, when the small combination A1 condition device is activated during the 1BB game, the 15-card combination is awarded when the stop switch 42 is operated in the correct pressing order "123". On the other hand, when the 1BB game is not in progress, that is, in the 23rd embodiment, when the accessory is not activated (during 1BB non-internal and 1BB internal), even if the minor combination A1 condition device is activated, the correct answer Has no push order. Therefore, even if the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "123" when the small winning combination A1 condition device is activated when the winning combination is not activated, the winning combination of 3 coins is won (without winning the winning combination of 15 coins). For example, a small winning combination of 14 or 17 with "PB=1" can be given as a triple winning combination.

The above is the same for the small winning combination A2 to small winning combination A6 conditional devices (conditional device numbers "11" to "15").
When the small combination A2 conditional device is activated during the 1BB game, when the stop switch 42 is operated with the correct pressing order "132", the small combination 02 with 15 cards is won, and the pressing order other than "132" is won. When the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order, any three-card combination included in the winning combination is awarded.
Furthermore, when the minor combination A2 condition device is activated while the accessory is not activated, (because there is no correct pressing order), regardless of the pressing order, one of the 3 hands included in the winning combination will be played. win a prize.

When the small winning combination A3 condition device is activated during the 1BB game, when the stop switch 42 is operated with the correct pressing order "213", the small winning combination 03 with 15 cards is won, and the pressing order other than "213" is won. When the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order, any three-card combination included in the winning combination is awarded.
Furthermore, when the minor combination A3 condition device is activated while the accessory is not activated, (because there is no correct pressing order), regardless of the pressing order, any of the 3 hands included in the winning combination will be played. win a prize.

When the small combination A4 condition device is activated during the 1BB game, when the stop switch 42 is operated with the correct pressing order "231", the small combination 04 with 15 pieces is awarded, and the pressing order other than "231" is won. When the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order, any three-card combination included in the winning combination is awarded.
Furthermore, when the small combination A4 condition device is activated while the accessory is not activated, (because there is no correct pressing order), regardless of the pressing order, one of the three hands included in the winning combination will be played. win a prize.

When the small combination A5 conditional device is activated during the 1BB game, when the stop switch 42 is operated with the correct pressing order "312", the small combination 05 with 15 pieces is awarded, and the pressing order other than "312" is won. When the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order, any three-card combination included in the winning combination is awarded.
Furthermore, when the small combination A5 condition device is activated while the accessory is not activated, (because there is no correct pressing order), regardless of the pressing order, any of the three hands included in the winning combination will be played. win a prize.

When the small combination A6 condition device is activated during the 1BB game, when the stop switch 42 is operated with the correct pressing order "321", the small combination 06 with 15 cards is won, and the pressing order other than "321" is won. When the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order, any three-card combination included in the winning combination is awarded.
Furthermore, when the minor combination A6 condition device is activated while the accessory is not activated, (because there is no correct pressing order), regardless of the pressing order, one of the 3-hands included in the winning combination will be played. win a prize.

In addition, inside the SRB during 1BB operation, the small win B1 condition device to small win B6 condition device (condition device numbers "16" to "21") were operated, and the stop switch 42 was operated in the correct order. When a 15-card hand (any of the small hands 07 to 12 included in the winning hand) is won, and the stop switch 42 is operated in the wrong answer pressing order (pressing order other than the correct answer pressing order), 1 A winning combination (any of the small winning combinations 25 to 33 included in the winning combination) wins.
On the other hand, when the role is not activated and when the SRB is not in operation during 1BB operation, there is no correct pressing order when the small combination B1 condition device to the small combination B6 condition device are operated. When the role is not activated, and when the SRB is not in operation during 1BB operation, when the small combination B1 condition device to the small combination B6 condition device are operated, even if they are all in the order of pushing, 1 piece combination is won.
Winning and replay condition device numbers "16" to "21" are selected by lottery only when 1BB is in operation and RB is not in operation.

When the stop switch 42 is operated in the correct order of pressing "123" when the small combination B1 condition device is activated during the 1BB game and inside the SRB, "Watermelon" is placed on the activated line in order to win the small combination 07. '-'Cherry'-'Bell B' to stop. As a result, "Bell A"-"Bell A"-"Bell B" stops on the lower line (ineffective line).
Also, when the small win B1 condition device is activated during the 1BB game and inside the SRB, when the stop switch 42 is operated with the wrong answer pressing order "132", at the left first stop, the correct pressing order at this point Therefore, when the left reel 31 is stopped, the "watermelon" (symbol forming the small winning combination 07) is stopped on the active line. Next, at the second stop on the right, since the order of pressing the wrong answer is set at this point, the small combination 28 whose left reel 31 is "Watermelon" among the winning combinations 25, 26 and 28 is stopped on the activated line. That is, at the right second stop, "Bell A" is stopped at the lower right stage. Furthermore, at the middle third stop, "Bell B/Watermelon" is stopped at the middle middle stage.

On the other hand, when the small win B1 condition device is activated during the 1BB game and inside the SRB, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the wrong answer pressing order "213" or "231", this time point is the middle first stop. In order to stop the small combination 25 on the effective line, for example, when stopping the middle first, "blue BAR/black BAR/red 7/special figure top" is stopped in the middle middle row. Also, when the left reel 31 stops, "Replay" is stopped on the upper left stage, and when the right reel 31 is stopped, "Black BAR/Red 7/Watermelon/Special Top" is stopped on the lower right stage.
Also, when the small win B1 condition device is activated during the 1BB game and inside the SRB, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the wrong answer pressing order "312" or "321", this point is the right first stop. In order to press the incorrect answer, for example, the small winning combination 25 is stopped on the effective line in the same manner as described above.

Also, in a game in which the small combination B1-B6 conditional device is activated during 1BB game and not inside SRB, there is no correct pressing order. Therefore, even if the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order "123" during the operation of the small winning combination B1 condition device during 1BB game and non-SRB, for example, (without winning the small winning combination 07 with 15 cards) ) to win one role. As the one-piece winning combination, for example, a small winning combination 25 or 28 with "PB=1" can be mentioned.
Similarly, when the 1BB game is not in progress, that is, when the role is not activated (during 1BB non-internal and 1BB internal), the game in which the small combination B1 condition device is activated does not have the correct pressing order. Therefore, even if the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order "123" when the small winning combination B1 condition device is activated when the accessory is not activated, the small winning combination 07 ( Instead of winning a winning combination of 15 coins, a single winning combination (for example, a small winning combination of 25 or 28 with "PB=1") is awarded.

The above is the same when operating the small win B2 condition device to the small win B6 condition device.
When the small winning combination B2 conditional device is activated during the 1BB game and inside the SRB, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the correct pressing order "132", the small winning combination 08 with 15 cards is awarded, and the correct pressing order is awarded. When the stop switch 42 is operated in a pressing order other than "132", any single combination included in the winning combination is awarded without winning the small combination 08.例文帳に追加
Furthermore, when the small winning combination B2 conditional device is activated during 1BB game while the SRB is not inside or when the accessory is not activated, (because there is no correct pressing order), regardless of the pressing order, the small winning combination 08 to win any one-piece combination included in the winning combination without winning a prize.

When the small winning combination B3 conditional device is activated during the 1BB game and inside the SRB, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the correct pressing order "213", the small winning combination 09 with 15 cards is awarded, and the correct pressing order is awarded. When the stop switch 42 is operated in a pressing order other than "213", any single combination included in the winning combination is awarded without winning the minor combination 09. - 特許庁
Furthermore, when the small winning combination B3 conditional device is activated while the 1BB game is being played and the SRB is not inside or the accessory is not operating, (because there is no correct pressing order), regardless of the pressing order, the small winning combination 09 to win any one-piece combination included in the winning combination without winning a prize.

When the small winning combination B4 condition device is activated during the 1BB game and inside the SRB, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the correct pressing order "231", the small winning combination 10 with 15 cards is awarded, and the correct pressing order is awarded. When the stop switch 42 is operated in a pressing order other than "231", any single combination included in the winning combination is awarded without winning the minor combination 10.例文帳に追加
Furthermore, when the small combination B4 conditional device is activated during 1BB game and while the SRB is not inside or when the accessory is not activated, (because there is no correct pressing order), regardless of the pressing order, the small combination 10 to win any one-piece combination included in the winning combination without winning a prize.

When the small winning combination B5 conditional device is activated during the 1BB game and inside the SRB, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the correct pressing order "312", the small winning combination 11 with 15 cards is awarded, and the correct pressing order is awarded. When the stop switch 42 is operated in a pressing order other than "312", any single combination included in the winning combination is awarded without winning the minor combination 11.例文帳に追加
Furthermore, when the small combination B5 conditional device is activated during 1BB game and while the SRB is not inside or when the accessory is not activated, (because there is no correct pressing order), regardless of the pressing order, the small combination 11 to win any one-piece combination included in the winning combination without winning a prize.

When the small combination B6 conditional device is activated during the 1BB game and inside the SRB, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the correct pressing order "321", the small winning combination 12 with 15 cards is awarded, and the correct pressing order is awarded. When the stop switch 42 is operated in a pressing order other than "321", any single combination included in the winning combination is awarded without winning the small combination 12.例文帳に追加
Furthermore, when the small combination B6 conditional device is activated during a 1BB game while the SRB is not inside or when the accessory is not activated, (because there is no correct pressing order), regardless of the pressing order, the small combination 12 to win any one-piece combination included in the winning combination without winning a prize.

The minor combination C condition device is a condition device that becomes operable when the winning number "22" is won during RB operation (game). When the small combination C condition device is activated, any one of the small combination 01 to 12 (15-piece combination) included in the winning combination is awarded. In this case, which 15-card combination is awarded is arbitrary, but for example, a small combination to be awarded may be changed according to the order in which the stop switch 42 is pressed.
The small combination D condition device is a condition device that becomes operable when the winning number "23" is won during the RB operation. When the small combination D condition device is activated, one of the small combinations 13 to 24 included in the winning combination (three-card combination) is awarded. In this case, it is arbitrary which three-card combination is awarded, but for example, a small combination to be awarded may be made different according to the order in which the stop switch 42 is pressed.
The minor combination E condition device is a condition device that becomes operable when the winning number "24" is won during the RB operation. When the small winning combination E condition device is activated, any one of the small winning combinations 25 to 34 included in the winning combination (1 piece combination) is won. In this case, it is arbitrary which one of the winning combinations is awarded, but for example, a small winning combination may be made different according to the order in which the stop switch 42 is pressed.

Figures 126 to 130 show the winning probability determined by the lottery table when the lottery lottery means 61 performs the lottery for the lottery numbers, and show the number of winning numbers set for each RT (game state) and each set value. FIG. The winning probability is obtained by dividing the numerical values shown in FIGS. For example, in FIG. 126, the winning number "1" is "4338" in common for all settings, so the winning probability is "4338/65536".
In FIGS. 126 to 130, for example, if the winning number "1" in FIG. 126 is won, the winning and replay condition device number "1", that is, the replay A condition device becomes operable, and the replay 01 becomes possible to win.

Note that the set value refers to the value displayed on the set value display LED 73 in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, and differs from the information stored in the RWM 53 as set value information. Specifically, the set value information stored in the RWM 53 ranges from "0" to "5" in the twenty-third embodiment. For example, when the set value information stored in the RWM 53 is "0", the value displayed on the set value display LED 73 is "1", and when the set value information stored in the RWM 53 is "1" The value displayed on the set value display LED 73 is "2", and when the set value information stored in the RWM 53 is "2", the value displayed on the set value display LED 73 is "3". When the stored set value information is "3", the value displayed on the set value display LED 73 is "4", and when the set value information stored in the RWM 53 is "5", the set value display LED 73 The value displayed for is "6".

Also, the combination lottery means 61 executes the combination lottery using the combination lottery table. For example, in FIG. 126, the winning number 1 (replay A) indicates that the set number "4338" is common to settings 1 to 6. In such a case, the winning number 1 (replay A) ) is won, one set number "4338" is stored in the combination lottery table. On the other hand, when at least part of the set numbers are different from setting 1 to setting 6 like the winning number 3 (replay C), the set numbers corresponding to the setting values are stored in the combination lottery table.
Specifically, in the combination lottery table, for example, "940 (D)" is stored in two-byte addresses of addresses "XXX0 (H)" and "XXX1 (H)" corresponding to setting 1, and "940 (D)" is stored in setting 2. "940 (D)" is stored in the 2-byte addresses of the corresponding addresses "XXX2 (H)" and "XXX3 (H)", and the addresses "XXX4 (H)" and "XXX5 (H)" corresponding to setting 3 are stored. "940(D)" is stored at the 2-byte address of ". Also, "950 (D)" is stored in the 2-byte addresses of addresses "XXX6 (H)" and "XXX7 (H)" corresponding to setting 4, and addresses "XXX8 (H)" and "XXX8 (H)" corresponding to setting 5 are stored. "950 (D)" is stored at the 2-byte address of "XXX9 (H)". Furthermore, "960 (D)" is stored in the 2-byte addresses of addresses "XXXA (H)" and "XXXB (H)" corresponding to setting 6. Note that the above "XXX0(H)" to "XXXB(H)" indicate consecutive arbitrary addresses in the ROM 54. FIG.

For example, when the set value information is "1" (that is, set value 2), the address "XXX0(H)" is set as the reference address, and the value obtained by multiplying the set value information by two is set as the offset value, and the address "XXX2(H)" is set. And "940 (D)" stored in "XXX3 (H)" is obtained, and the random value and the input number "940 (D)" are compared to determine whether the winning number 3 (replay C) has been won. determine whether or not In the above example, since the number is 2 bytes, the value obtained by doubling the setting value information is used as the offset value. can be an offset value without In this way, by using a specific address as the reference address and setting the setting value information or a value obtained by doubling the setting value information as the offset value, it is possible to acquire the number corresponding to the setting value information. .

In the game in which the special combination (1BB) has not been won, in the game in which the winning number "25" has been won in this game, and in the game in which the 1BB condition device has become operable, when 1BB, which is the winning combination, has not won, The winning is carried over to the next game or later. Then, from the next game onwards (inside 1BB), the winning number "25" will not be drawn, and the winning numbers "1" to "21" will be drawn. When one of the winning numbers "1" to "21" is won in 1BB, the condition device corresponding to the winning number won in the game this time becomes operable, and the accessory condition device does not operate. On the other hand, when none of the winning numbers "1" to "21" is won in the 1BB, the 1BB condition device related to the 1BB that is carrying over the winning becomes operable, and the 1BB can win. .

The same applies to RB, which is another special role.
In the game when RB is not won in the 1BB game, in the game where any of the winning numbers "26" to "41" is won in the game this time, and in the game where the RBA-RBP conditional device can be operated, the winning role RBA- When the RBP is not won, the winning is carried over to the next game or later. Then, from the next game onwards (inside the SRB), the winning numbers "26" to "41" are not drawn, and the winning numbers "10" to "21" are drawn. When one of the winning numbers "10" to "21" is won in the SRB, the condition device corresponding to the winning number won in the game this time becomes operable, and the RBA to RBP condition devices do not operate. On the other hand, if none of the winning numbers "10" to "21" are won in the SRB, the RBA to RBP conditional devices related to the RBA to RBP that are carrying over the winning become operable, and the winning is won. RBA to RBP that are in the same position can be awarded.

FIG. 126 is a diagram showing an entry table for non-RT. In non-RT, 1BB is drawn (winning number "25") for the accessory, but RB is not drawn. RB is drawn by lottery when 1BB is activated (during 1BB game), which will be described later.
In non-RT, winning numbers "1" to "9" corresponding to winning replays are all subject to lottery. In addition, the winning numbers "10" to "21" corresponding to the winning of the minor winning combination are selected by lottery. Winning numbers "10" to "27" are subject to lottery in any RT (game state) except when RB is activated.
Winning numbers "22" to "24" are subject to lottery only when RB is activated during 1BB game, which will be described later, and are not subject to lottery in other RT (game state).

FIG. 127 is a diagram showing an entry table in RT1. RT1 differs from non-RT in that the winning number "9" (replay G) is not drawn. Otherwise, it is the same as non-RT.
In addition, in both non-RT and RT1, during 1BB non-inside, 1BB (winning number "25") is drawn by lottery according to the numbers shown in FIGS. In non-RT and RT1 (inside 1BB), 1BB (winning number "25") is not drawn. That is, the set number "19930" shown in FIGS. 126 and 127 becomes "0" after winning 1BB.

FIG. 128 is a diagram showing a table of numbers in RB (SRB) non-internal during 1BB operation. The non-inside RB during 1BB operation corresponds to the general game of the 1BB game.
In this game state, the winning number "25" (1BB) is not drawn, but all RBs (winning numbers "26" to "41") are drawn. In this embodiment, all RBs are set to the same number "1807" in all setting values.
Also, replays are not drawn during non-inside RB during 1BB operation. Therefore, the winning numbers "1" to "9" are set to "0".
As for the small winning combination, the winning numbers "10" to "21" are selected by lottery as in the above-described non-RT and RT1. Also, winning numbers "22" to "24" corresponding to small wins in the RB game are not drawn.

FIG. 129 is a table of numbers in the RB (SRB) interior during 1BB operation. The time inside the RB during the 1BB operation corresponds to the normal game time of the 1BB game, similarly to the time during the non-inside the RB during the 1BB operation.
While 1BB is in operation, RB is not drawn in addition to 1BB, so all winning numbers "25" to "41" are "0".
In addition, while RB is in operation during 1BB operation, unlike during RB non-inside operation during 1BB operation, winning number "1" (replay A) is drawn.
FIG. 130 is a diagram showing a table of numbers during 1BB operation and RB operation. Only winning numbers "22" to "24" are drawn while 1BB is in operation and RB is in operation.

A description will be given of the payout rate in each game state described above.
There are various definitions of the payout rate, but in the twenty-third embodiment, the payout rate is defined as "the number of out balls/the number of in balls".
Here, the "in number" refers to the number of bets, which is "3" in any gaming state in the twenty-third embodiment.
Also, the "out number" means the number of coins to be paid out, and in terms of design, indicates the expected value of the number of coins to be paid out. For example, in a game in which the instruction function is activated (a game in which the correct pressing order is notified), when the winning numbers "10" to "21" are won (when the pressing order bell is won), a high-level bell (in the 23rd embodiment, 15 bells) shall be awarded.
Specifically, when the number of in balls is "3" and the number of out balls is "1", the payout rate is approximately "0.33".
Also, when the number of in balls is "3" and the number of out balls is "3", the payout rate is "1".
Furthermore, when the number of in balls is "3" and the number of out balls is "9", the payout rate is "3".

In addition, when the winning number "10" to "15" is won when the role (1BB) is not activated, the winning number "16" to "21" when the role is not activated will always win. At times, one hand shall always win.
Furthermore, when the RB is not inside and not AT (a game in which the instruction function does not operate) during the 1BB game, when the winning number "10" to "15" is won, there is a probability of "1/6". 15 bells) will win the prize, and an inexpensive bell (3 bells) will win with a probability of "5/6". The reason why "1/6" is used is that there are 6 choices in the pressing order, so that the winning probability is determined when the stop switch 42 is operated at random. In addition, during 1BB game, when RB is not inside and AT is not, when winning numbers "16" to "21" are won, one bell is always awarded.

In addition, during 1BB game inside RB and non-AT (game in which the instruction function does not operate), when the winning number "10" to "15" is won, there is a probability of "1/6" high bell (15 pieces Bell) wins a prize, and an inexpensive bell (three bells) wins with a probability of "5/6". In addition, during 1BB game inside RB and non-AT, when the winning numbers "16" to "21" are won, a high bell (15 bells) will win with a probability of "1/6", and "5 It is assumed that an inexpensive bell (one bell) wins with a probability of /6.

When the replay symbol combination is stopped and displayed, the first method is to set the number of out symbols in the current game to "0" and the number of in symbols in the next game to "0". Secondly, there is a method in which the out number in the current game is "3" and the in number in the next game is "3". In the following example, the latter is used for calculation.
Furthermore, although the ball payout rate differs depending on settings 1 to 6, the ball payout rate will be calculated using setting 1 as an example below.

In non-RT, the total number of winning numbers "1" to "9" corresponding to the winning of replay is "8982".
Also, the total number of winning numbers "10" to "15" corresponding to the winning of the small win group A is "16800".
Furthermore, the sum of the winning numbers "16" to "21" corresponding to the winning of the small win group B is "19824".
In the non-RT gaming state, the games with the winning numbers "10" to "15" always win the 3-card role, and the games with the winning numbers "16" to "21" always win the 1-card role.
Therefore, the expected payout number per game is
3 x (8982/65536) + 3 x (16800/65536) + 1 x (19824/65536)
≒ 1.483 (sheets)
becomes.
Also, the ball output rate is
1.483/3≈0.494
becomes.

Next, during the 1BB operation and during the RB non-internal state, the payout rate is calculated separately for the AT time and the non-AT time.
First, at the time of AT, 15 coins are paid out in games where the winning numbers "10" to "15" corresponding to the winning of the small win group A are won, and in games where the winning numbers "16" to "21" are won, 1 card will be paid out.
Therefore, the expected payout number per game is
15 x (16800/65536) + 1 x (19824/65536)
≒ 4.148 (sheets)
becomes.
Also, the ball output rate is
4.148/3≈1.383
becomes.

In addition, while 1BB is in operation and RB is not inside, at the time of non-AT, in the game where the winning number "10" to "15" corresponding to winning the small win group A is won, 15 with a probability of "1/6". 3 cards are paid out with a probability of "5/6". Also, in a game in which winning numbers "16" to "21" are won, one coin is paid out.
Therefore, the expected payout number per game is
15*(16800/65536)*(1/6)+3*(16800/65536)*(5/6)+1*(19824/65536)
≒ 1.584 (sheets)
becomes.
Also, the ball output rate is
1.584/3=0.528
becomes.

Next, during the 1BB operation and inside the RB, the payout rate is calculated separately for the AT time and the non-AT time.
First, at the time of AT, 15 coins are paid out in games where winning numbers ``10'' to ``15'' correspond to the winning of small win group A, and games where winning numbers ``16'' to ``21'' are won, 15 cards will be paid out.
Therefore, the expected payout number per game is
15 x (16800/65536) + 15 x (19824/65536)
≒ 8.383 (sheets)
becomes.
Also, the ball output rate is
8.383/3≈2.794
becomes.

In addition, during 1BB operation and inside RB, when non-AT, in the game winning the winning numbers "10" to "15" corresponding to winning the small win group A, 15 cards with a probability of "1/6" , and 3 cards are paid out with a probability of "5/6". Also, in the game in which the winning numbers "16" to "21" are won, 15 coins are paid out with a probability of "1/6", and 1 card is paid out with a probability of "5/6".
Therefore, the expected payout number per game is
15 x (16800/65536) x (1/6) + 3 x (16800/65536) x (5/6) + 15 x (19824/65536) x (1/6) + 1 x (19824/65536) x (5/ 6)
≒2.290 (sheets)
becomes.
Also, the ball output rate is
2.290/3≈0.763
becomes.

Furthermore, during the 1BB operation and the RB operation, the ball output rate is the same between the non-AT time and the AT time.
As shown in FIG. 130, when 1BB is in operation and RB is in operation, the winning number "22" has a set number of "3310" and the payout number is 15, and the winning number "23" has a set number of "16230" and the payout number. is 3, the winning number '24' has '19825' and the payout number is 1.
Therefore, the expected payout number per game is
15 x (3310/65536) + 3 x (16230/65536) + 1 x (19825/65536)
≒ 1.803 (sheets)
becomes.
Also, the ball output rate is
1.803/3≈0.601
becomes.

In the above, when the payout rate exceeds "1", the game state is increased medals, and when the payout rate is less than "1", the game state is decreased medals.
Therefore, the ball output rate exceeds "1" (the number of medals increases) at the time of AT when 1BB is in operation and not inside the RB, and at the time of AT when 1BB is in operation and inside the RB.
On the other hand, when 1BB is not activated, when 1BB is activated and RB is not inside and no AT, when 1BB is activated and RB is not AT and when 1BB is activated and RB is activated rate falls below "1" (medals decrease).
Therefore, the size relationship of the ball output rate is, in order from the smallest one,
(1) When 1BB is not activated (ball output rate "0.494")
(2) Non-AT during 1BB operation and RB non-inside (ball output rate "0.528")
(3) During 1BB operation and RB operation (ball output rate "0.601")
(4) Non-AT during 1BB operation and inside RB (ball output rate "0.763")
(5) At AT when 1BB is in operation and RB is not inside (ball output rate "1.383")
(6) At the time of AT during 1BB operation and inside RB (ball output rate "2.794")
becomes.

From the above,
(1) The payout rate exceeds "1" when RB is not activated during AT, but the payout rate does not exceed "1" during non-AT.
(2) Even during the AT, if the RB is won and the RB is activated, the ball output rate falls below "1".
(3) When 1BB is activated during non-AT, the ball output rate is higher than when 1BB is not activated during non-AT.
Therefore, for example, even if 1BB is won without having the right to execute AT and the game shifts to 1BB game, the ball output rate is less than "1" during both the general game and the RB game of 1BB game, so medals cannot be increased.
In addition, during non-AT, when 1BB is activated, the ball output rate is higher than when 1BB is not activated. However, since the AT lottery is performed only during 1BB (when 1BB is not activated), AT lottery cannot be received when 1BB is activated. Therefore, when 1BB is activated during non-AT, it is disadvantageous to the player.
Also, during AT (during operation of 1BB), when inside the RB, a 15-card hand can be won when the small hand B1-B6 condition device is activated. Therefore, during AT (during 1BB operation), the player is more advantageous while inside the RB than while not inside the RB.
Although the above-described ball payout rate is calculated with the setting 1, the other set values (settings 2 to 6) also have the same magnitude relation of the ball payout rate.

FIG. 131 is a diagram showing RT transitions in the twenty-third embodiment.
Non-RT and RT1 correspond to when 1BB is not activated. Non-RT and RT1 continue until the 1BB symbol combination is stopped. In the 23rd embodiment, the RT shift timing is set at the time when the symbol combination is stopped and displayed, that is, at the time of full stop (when all the reels 31 are stopped).
In non-RT and RT1, 1BB (the above-mentioned winning number "25") is drawn, but RT does not move just by winning 1BB and becoming inside 1BB, and non-RT or RT1 is maintained respectively. . Then, in non-RT or RT1, when the symbol combination of 1BB is stopped and displayed, it shifts to 1BB operation and RB non-inside (general game of 1BB game).

When 1BB is activated and RT is not inside, RBA (winning number "26") to RBP (winning number "41") are drawn by lottery, as shown in FIG. 123 described above. When one of RBA to RBP is won and none of the winning RBA to RBP wins, the game shifts to the inside of RB during 1BB operation. During 1BB operation and inside RB, it continues until the symbol combination of RB carrying over winning is stopped and displayed. Then, when the symbol combination of RB is stopped and displayed, the game shifts to the time of 1BB operation and the time of RB operation (RB game).
In addition, when RB is won during 1BB operation and while RB is not inside, and the symbol combination of RB is stopped and displayed in the game, when 1BB is operating and RB is operating without moving to inside RB while 1BB is operating Transition.

As shown in FIG. 122, the operation of the 1BB condition device (1BB game) ends when more than 170 medals are obtained. Also, if the RB condition device is activated during the operation of the 1BB condition device (shift to the RB game), on the condition that the medal acquisition does not exceed 170, it will continue until 12 games or 8 wins. do. When the RB condition device is activated, if 12 games or 8 wins are won, and more than 170 medals are not obtained by the operation of the 1BB condition device, the 1BB condition device is reactivated. When activated and when the RB condition device is not activated. In addition, when the 1BB condition device is activated and the RB condition device is not activated, or when the 1BB condition device is activated and the RB condition device is activated, when more than 170 medals are obtained by the operation of the 1BB condition device, Terminate the operation of the 1BB condition device (end the 1BB game) (even if 12 games or 8 wins have not been reached after the operation of the RB condition device).

After completing the operation of the 1BB condition device, the process proceeds to RT1. RT1 continues until 1400 games are completed or until the symbol combination of 1BB is stopped and displayed. After shifting to RT1, the number of games played is counted for each game and stored in the number of RT games (_CT_RT_GAME) of address "F00A (H)" to be described later. When the symbol combination of 1BB is stopped and displayed in RT1, as described above, it shifts to 1BB operation and RB non-inside. On the other hand, when 1400 games have been completed in RT1, the game shifts to non-RT. Once it shifts to non-RT, 1BB wins again, and when the 1BB operation ends, it shifts to RT1.
In the 23rd embodiment, it is set that the AT is more likely to be won in the non-RT than in the RT1. Therefore, when "1400" games are completed in RT1, it means that the so-called ceiling has been reached, and AT is likely to be won in non-RT.

Also, the advantageous section may end during RT1, and at the end of the advantageous section, the section type number, advantageous section clear counter, difference counter (MY counter), and AT-related data are cleared. On the other hand, the number of games played for RT1 ("_CT_RT_GAME" described above) is not cleared. For example, when the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied in the 1200th game of RT1, the next game will be the 1201st game of RT1 and the non-advantageous section.
Furthermore, in the 23rd embodiment, even if the state shifts from RT1 to non-RT based on the completion of 1400 games, the main game state, which will be described later, does not shift. For example, in the 1400th game of RT1, when staying in main game state 1, the next game will be non-RT and main game state 1.

However, when the conditions for shifting to the main game state are satisfied in the 1400th game of RT1, the main game state shifts as a matter of course.
For example, first, in the main game state 1, when the number of RT1 and RT games is the 1400th game, when the number of games in the advantageous section reaches 1500 games, the advantageous section ends in the current game, and the next game , non-RT and main game state 0.
Secondly, in the main game state 1, when AT is won in the 1400th game of RT1 and RT game count, the next game becomes non-RT and main game state 2 (AT sign).

Here, the transition determination of the advantageous section in the twenty-third embodiment is executed in the non-RT or RT1 non-advantageous section. In particular, in determining the transition of the advantageous section in the 23rd embodiment, when the winning numbers "1" to "4" and "6" to "21" are won, the normal section is shifted to the advantageous section. ing. Therefore, in the non-RT or RT1 non-advantageous section, if a few games are played, most of them shift to the advantageous section. Once the advantageous section is won, the transition to the advantageous section is not decided unless the conditions for ending the advantageous section are satisfied and the player transitions to the non-advantageous section. Note that the determination of the transition to the advantageous section may be made by lottery based on the winning number.

Also, the AT lottery of the twenty-third embodiment is executed in the non-RT or RT1 advantageous section. Furthermore, in the 23rd embodiment, the execution condition of the AT lottery is that the winning of 1BB is carried over. In other words, when 1BB is not won and when 1BB is in operation, AT lottery is not executed. The lottery for AT is executed when winning numbers "3" to "9" corresponding to winning in rare replay are won.
In FIG. 127 (RT1), the winning probability of AT is, for example,
Replay F condition When device is activated < Replay C condition When device is activated < Replay E condition When device is activated < Replay D (D1 to D3) condition When device is activated < Replay G condition When device is activated.

Specifically, for example, when the replay F condition device is activated: AT winning probability 10 to 30%
When the replay C condition device is activated: AT winning probability 15-30%
When the replay E condition device is activated: AT winning probability 20-35%
When replay D1 condition device is activated: AT winning probability 30-50%
When replay D2 condition device is activated: AT winning probability 40-50%
When replay D3 condition device is activated: AT winning probability 35-80%
When the replay G condition device is activated: AT winning probability 100%
is set as The reason why each winning probability has a range is that, for example, the winning probability varies depending on the production stage (low probability, normal probability, high probability, etc.) when the conditional device is activated.

In addition, when 1400 games are consumed in non-AT and RT1, reaching the so-called ceiling and shifting to non-RT, AT is drawn with the following winning probability, for example.
When the replay F condition device is activated: AT winning probability 90%
When the replay C condition device is activated: AT winning probability 90%
When the replay E condition device is activated: AT winning probability 90%
When replay D1 condition device is activated: AT winning probability 75%
When replay D2 condition device is activated: AT winning probability 80%
When the replay D3 condition device is activated: AT winning probability 85%
When the replay G condition device is activated: AT winning probability 100%
Therefore, non-RT is set to be more likely to win AT than RT1.

After winning the AT in non-RT or RT1 and satisfying the AT start condition (for example, after the AT standby counter becomes "0"), the 1BB symbol combination is displayed stopped and 1BB is in operation ( When shifting to 1BB game), AT can be started. The AT then continues until the 1BB operation ends.
In non-RT or RT1, even if the symbol combination of 1BB is stopped and displayed without having the right to execute AT (without winning AT), even if it shifts during 1BB operation, when the pushing order bell is won (winning number " 10” to “21” wins), the advantageous pushing order (the pushing order for winning the 15-card combination) is not displayed (the instruction function does not operate).
On the other hand, in non-RT or RT1, if you have the right to execute AT (winning AT), stop displaying the 1BB symbol combination after satisfying the AT start condition, and shift to 1BB operation , and AT are executed, and when a winning number having a correct pressing order is won, the correct pressing order for winning a prize of 15 cards (high bell) is displayed (an instruction function is activated).
Even if you have the right to execute AT, in situations where AT start conditions are not met (for example, when the AT precursor counter is greater than "0" or when the AT standby counter is greater than "0") ), the 1BB symbol combination is stopped and displayed, and even if the 1BB is in operation, AT is not executed. In other words, the advantageous push order is not displayed when the push order bell is won (the instruction function does not operate).

Here, when AT is in progress and 1BB is in operation and RB is not inside, winning numbers ``10'' to ``15'' (small win A1 to small win A6) are won, the correct pressing order is displayed. (Activation of indication function).
On the other hand, during AT, when 1BB is activated and RB is not inside, even if winning numbers "16" to "21" (small wins B1 to B6) are won, the indication function does not operate. As described above, when 1BB is activated and RB is not inside, when the small combination B1 to B6 condition device is activated, there is no correct pressing order, and even if the stop switch 42 is operated in any pressing order, one sheet This is because the role wins (the 15-card role does not win).
On the other hand, when AT is in progress and inside RB during 1BB operation, winning numbers ``10'' to ``15'' (small winning combination A1 to small winning combination A6) are won, the correct pressing order is displayed. (indication function is activated).
Similarly, during AT and inside RB during 1BB operation, the winning numbers "16" to "21" (small hands B1 to B6) are displayed. function works).

Also, the winning probability values of RB during 1BB operation are "28912" in total, and the winning probability is about 44%. Therefore, when 1BB is in operation, RB is elected early. However, during the AT, the 23rd embodiment is based on the premise that the game is completed without winning the winning RB. When inside the RB during 1BB operation, as shown in FIG. 129, the sum of winning numbers "1" and "10" to "21" is set to 1 and is "50424". Therefore, there is a probability of about 23% that the game will not be won, and the game that is not won has the possibility of winning RB. In the non-winning game with the possibility of winning RB, an effect is output to the player, suggesting that the game has the possibility of winning RB. When this effect is output, the player operates the stop switch 42 so as not to win the RB. Incidentally, in a game having the possibility of winning an RB, the indicator on the main control board 50 side (for example, the winning number display LED 78) does not notify the eye-pushing position or the like (indicating function does not operate).
If RB wins during 1BB operation, it shifts to RB game. As described above, the RB game has a lower ball output rate than the general game of the 1BB game. In the RB game, if the end condition of the 1BB game (acquisition of more than 170 medals) is not satisfied at that time, the general game of the 1BB game is resumed. return.

FIG. 132 is a diagram showing the transition of the main game state in the 23rd embodiment.
The main game state of the twenty-third embodiment includes main game state 0 to main game state 5. FIG.
Main game state 0 is a non-advantageous section, and main game states 1 to 5 are advantageous sections.
Further, the main game states 2 and 3 are non-AT game states although the AT is won. Further, the main game state 4 is a game state during AT. Furthermore, the main game states 0, 1 and 5 are non-AT game states in which AT is not won.

The main game state 0 is a non-advantageous section and non-AT state. In the main game state 0, an advantageous zone lottery and an AT lottery are executed. In the main game state 0, when the advantageous section is won and the AT is not won, the main game state 1 is entered. On the other hand, in the main game state 0, when the advantageous section is won and the AT is won, the main game state 2 is entered.

In the main game state 1, the advantageous zone lottery is not executed, but the AT lottery is executed. Then, when the AT is won, the game shifts to the main game state 2.例文帳に追加In addition, when the AT is won, the number of AT sets is also randomly selected, and the number of AT sets determined by the lottery is stored in the AT set number counter. The "AT set number" is a counter that determines how many times the main game state 4 (AT and 1BB operation) is to be executed.
On the other hand, in the main game state 1, when the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied without winning AT (for example, when the number of games in the advantageous section reaches 1500 games, or when the falling lottery in the advantageous section is won) ), it shifts to the main game state 0.

It should be noted that even if the conditions for transition to the main game state 0 are satisfied in the main game state 1, the RT does not shift. For example, in RT1 and main game state 1, when the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, the next game will be RT1 and main game state 0 unless 1400 games have been reached in RT1.
The main game state 2 is a game state of an AT sign. When the AT is won, the number of AT precursor games is determined by lottery or the like, and is set in the AT precursor counter. Then, the main game state 2 is executed until the AT precursor counter becomes "0". When the AT precursor counter becomes "0", the main game state 3 is entered.

The main game state 3 is a game state during AT preparation. The main game state 3 continues until the AT standby counter becomes "0" and the 1BB symbol combination is stopped and displayed. Here, in the twenty-third embodiment, when the AT has a plurality of sets, when the main game state 4 (1BB operation and AT), which will be described later, is ended and the main game state 3 is returned to, the 1BB symbol combination is quickly performed. In order to prevent the number of paid balls from increasing too much, instead of stopping the display and moving to the main game state 4, the number of balls paid out is adjusted (reduced) to some extent before moving to the main game state 4. A fixed number of games is ensured in the main game state 3. For example, when moving from the main game state 4 to the main game state 3, set one of "1" to "8" in the AT standby counter (determined by lottery), and the game winning 1BB, or a small winning combination or "1" is subtracted for games that have not been won for replay. Then, when the AT standby counter becomes "0" and the 1BB is in the middle, a notice is given to stop and display the symbol combination of the 1BB.
The reason why the ball output adjustment (reduction) is performed in the main game state 3 is that consecutive execution of a plurality of sets of AT tends to result in failure in the test shooting test. In the trial shooting test, for example, it is necessary to make the pay-out rate less than "220"% for an arbitrary number of "400" games. Therefore, when executing multiple sets of AT, after one set of AT is completed, after passing through a game interval in which AT is not executed (period of ball output adjustment (reduction)), the next set of AT is executed. I am trying to execute.

Also, in the main game state 3, addition lottery for the AT set number counter is executed. For example, when a rare combination (winning numbers "2" to "9") is won in the main game state 3, an addition lottery for the number of AT sets is executed. Then, when the lottery for addition of the number of AT sets is won, the number of AT sets won is added to the AT set number counter.
In the main game state 3, when the AT standby counter becomes "0", the winning and replay conditions after that in the game where the device number is "0", "Aim for the blue BAR!" ” is displayed as an image. In addition, "Aim for" Blue BAR "! is displayed on the condition that the winning of 1BB has been carried over or the winning of 1BB has been won. This urges the player to stop and display the 1BB symbol combination.

In addition, "Aim for" Blue BAR "! ” is displayed as an image, if the player is unable to stop and display the 1BB symbol combination, then in the game with the subsequent winning and replay condition device number “0”, again, “Aim for the “blue BAR”. ! ” is displayed as an image. Also, first, "Aim for the 'Blue BAR'! ” is displayed, the lottery for addition of the number of AT sets may not be executed. ' is displayed, until the symbol combination of 1BB is stopped and displayed, the addition lottery for the number of AT sets is executed. However, the winning probability of the lottery to add the number of AT sets is set so that there is no merit to the player even if the symbol combination of 1BB is intentionally extended (the winning probability of the lottery to add the number of AT sets is set to the AT standby set lower than before the counter reached "0").

In the main game state 3, when the AT standby counter becomes "0" and the symbol combination of 1BB is stopped and displayed, the main game state 4 is entered. The main game state 4 corresponds to 1BB operation (1BB game) and AT. Therefore, the main game state 4 is executed until the number of won medals exceeds 170 (see FIG. 122). When the number of medals acquired exceeds 170 in the main game state 4, it is determined that the end condition of the main game state 4 is met, and based on the values of the AT set number counter and the ending counter at that time, the main game state 3 (AT preparation), main game state 5 (AT withdrawal), main game state 0 (non-advantageous section).
The AT set number counter is decremented by "1" each time the main game state 4 ends. When the AT set number counter is "0", it is determined that it does not have the right to execute AT, and when it is "1" or more, it is determined that it has the right to execute AT.

The ending counter is set based on the values of the difference counter (also referred to as "MY counter") and the advantageous section clear counter, which have been described in other embodiments. The advantageous section must end when the difference counter reaches "2400 (D)" or when the number of games played in the advantageous section reaches "1500". Therefore, in this embodiment, when the difference counter value exceeds "1951 (D)" or when the advantageous section clear counter value becomes less than "200 (D)", the ending counter is set to "2". do.
At the end of the main game state 4, if the ending counter is equal to or greater than "1", "1" is subtracted. When the ending counter changes from "1" to "0", it is determined that the conditions for ending the advantageous section (and AT) are satisfied, and the main game state 0 is entered. With this setting, the advantageous section can be ended before the difference counter value reaches "2400 (D)" and before the advantageous section clear counter reaches "0".

On the other hand, at the end of the main game state 4, the main game state 3 is entered unless the AT set number counter is "1" or more and the ending counter has changed from "1" to "0". When shifting to the main game state 3, one AT standby counter value is determined by lottery from "0" to "8" and set.
Further, when the AT set number counter is "0" at the end of the main game state 4, the main game state 5 (AT withdrawal) is entered. The main game state 5 is non-AT, but when the AT is won in the main game state 5, the data of the winning number and the set number in the previous AT are inherited and displayed on the image display device 23 as an image.

When the main game state 5 is entered, a predetermined value such as "50 (D)" is set in the AT withdrawal counter, and "1" is subtracted every game. The termination condition of the main game state 5 is that the AT withdrawal counter has become "0" or that the AT has been won.
When the AT withdrawal counter becomes "0", the advantageous interval clear counter value is determined, and when the advantageous interval clear counter value is less than "600 (D)", the advantageous interval is terminated and the main game state is entered. 0. When the advantageous section clear counter value is less than "600 (D)", when shifting to AT after that, since the number of remaining games in the advantageous section is small, AT may not be able to continue. , ends the advantageous section. As described above, if the main game state 0 is entered, the advantageous section is won again after playing several games, and at least the main game state 1 is entered.

On the other hand, when the AT withdrawal counter becomes "0" in the main game state 5, when the advantageous section clear counter value is "600 (D)" or more, the main game is played without ending the advantageous section. Go to state 1. Then, the AT lottery is continued.
Further, when the AT is won before the AT pullback counter becomes "0" in the main game state 5, the main game state 3 is entered. Incidentally, when the AT is won in the main game state 5, it may shift to the main game state 2 (AT precursor), but in this embodiment, it shifts to the main game state 3 (AT preparation). When shifting to the main game state 3, the lottery for the AT standby counter value is executed in the same manner as described above, and the lottery-determined value is stored in the AT standby counter.

In the main game state 4 or 5, when the transition to the main game state 0 occurs before the advantageous interval clear counter reaches "0", and when the advantageous interval clear counter reaches "0" in the main game state 1, an advantageous When shifting to the main game state 0 based on winning the section drop lottery, before the advantageous section clear counter management of FIG. 51 is executed, the advantageous section clear counter (regardless of the value up to that point) A process of storing "1" is executed (advantageous section end preparation shown in FIG. 150 to be described later). As a result, when the advantageous section clear counter management of FIG. 51 is subsequently executed, the advantageous section clear counter value is "1" before subtraction of "1" and "0" after subtraction of "1". Therefore, it is determined that the condition for ending the advantageous section is satisfied, and the process advances from step S424 to step S435 to execute the RWM clearing process based on the end of the advantageous section.

In the main game state 0 or 1, even if the 1BB symbol combination is stopped and displayed, the main game state 4 (AT) is not entered. Therefore, in this case, the main game state is 0 or 1, 1BB operation, and non-AT.

133 to 138 are diagrams showing main data according to the twenty-third embodiment among the data stored in the RWM 53 in the twenty-third embodiment. The data shown in FIGS. 133 to 138 are part of the data, and various data other than the data shown are stored in the RWM 53. FIG. Also, in the following description (especially the RWM name), "#" indicates all of "1" (first reel 31) to "3" (third reel 31), and "1" to "3". and any one of
Numerical values shown in parentheses in the "address" column indicate the number of bytes in the storage area.

In FIG. 133, the RT state number (_NB_RT_STS) at address "F009 (H)" is a storage area for storing data indicating the current RT, and "0" is stored when it is non-RT, which is RT1. "1" is stored when As shown in FIG. 131, in the 23rd embodiment, there is a case where RT1 shifts to non-RT, but when the game reaches "1400" games in RT1, for example, at the end of the game, "0" is stored as the RT state number. be done.
Further, when the 1BB operation end condition is satisfied and the game moves to RT1, "1" is stored as the RT state number at the end of the game in which the 1BB operation end condition is satisfied.

The number of RT games (_CT_RT_GAME) at the address "F00A(H)" is a storage area of a counter for counting the number of RT1 games. When the 1BB operation ends and the game moves to RT1, "1400 (D)" is stored in this storage area, and "1" is subtracted each time one game is completed. When the number of RT games becomes "0", it is determined that the condition for shifting to non-RT is satisfied.
The role condition device number (_NB_CND_BNS) at the address "F00D(H)" is a storage area for storing data indicating the type of role currently in operation. The value stored here corresponds to the accessory condition device number shown in FIG. For example, "0" is stored when the role is not activated, "1" is stored when 1BB is activated, and "2" is stored when RBA is activated.

Acquisable number of cards during 1BB operation (_CT_BIG_PAT) at address "F00E(H)" is a storage area for storing the remaining obtainable number of cards during 1BB operation (1BB game). When 1BB is activated, "170 (D)" is stored in this storage area. During 1BB operation (during 1BB game), the value of this storage area is subtracted each time a medal is paid out. When the value of this storage area becomes "0" during 1BB operation, it is determined that the 1BB operation end condition is satisfied.

The number of games played when RB is activated (_CT_BONUS_PLAY) at the address "F00F(H)" is a storage area for storing a counter for counting the number of games when RB is activated. When RB is activated, "12 (D)" is stored in this storage area, and "1" is subtracted for each "1" game during RB activation. Then, when the number of games played during the RB operation becomes "0", the end condition of the RB operation is satisfied.
The number of wins when RB is activated (_CT_BONUS_WIN) at address "F010(H)" is a storage area for storing a counter for counting the number of wins when RB is activated. When the RB is activated, "8(D)" is stored in this storage area, and "1" is subtracted each time the winning combination is won when the RB is activated. Then, when the number of wins during the RB operation becomes "0", the end condition of the RB operation is satisfied.

The input port level data A (_PT_IN_A_LV) at the address "F012(H)" is a storage area for storing ON/OFF of the signals of the start switch 41 and the stop switch 42. FIG. In this interrupt process, the signals of the start switch 41 and the (left, middle, right) stop switch 42 are determined, and "1" is stored when they are on, and "0" when they are off. The input port level data A (previous) (_PT_IN_A_BK) at the address "F015(H)" is a storage area for storing the value of the input port level data A (_PT_IN_A_LV) in the previous interrupt process.

The input port rise data A of the address "F017(H)" is a storage area for storing the presence or absence of rise of the signals of the start switch 41 and the stop switch 42. FIG. When the level data of the previous interrupt process is "0" and the level data of the current interrupt process is "1", "1" is stored as the rise data. On the other hand, when the level data of the previous interrupt process is "1" and the level data of the current interrupt process is "1", the rise data is "0". Similarly, when the level data at the time of the previous interrupt process is "0" and the level data at the time of the current interrupt process is "0", the rising data is "0". Furthermore, when the level data of the previous interrupt process is "1" and the level data of the current interrupt process is "0", the rising data is "0" (in this case, the falling data is "0"). 1”).

In FIG. 134, the first reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR1) at address "F019(H)" is a storage area for storing which phase of the motor 32 associated with the first reel is to be excited. In the first reel motor signal data, "1" corresponds to ON (excitation), and "0" corresponds to OFF (no excitation). Based on the data stored in this storage area, the motor 32 is excited in port output processing (step S462 in FIG. 151 to be described later) during interrupt processing.
In this embodiment, the first reel corresponds to the left reel 31 , the second reel corresponds to the middle reel 31 , and the third reel corresponds to the right reel 31 .

In the first reel motor signal data, the D0 bit corresponds to φ1, the D1 bit to φ2, the D2 bit to φ3, and the D3 bit to φ4. The first reel motor signal data stores one pulse data selected from a reel drive pulse table shown in FIG. 158, which will be described later. For example, as shown in FIG. 158, in this interrupt process, when excitation is applied to turn on φ0 and φ3, pulse data "00001001 (B)" at address "1100 (H)" is changed to address "F019 ( H)”.

The second reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR2) at the address "F01A(H)" is a storage area for storing which phase of the motor 32 associated with the second reel (middle reel 31) is to be excited. Its contents are the same as the first reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR1) of the address "F019(H)".
Similarly, the third reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR3) at address "F01B(H)" is a storage area for storing which phase of the motor 32 associated with the third reel (right reel 31) is to be excited. Its contents are the same as the first reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR1) of the address "F019(H)".

The first reel designated symbol position search waiting time (_TM2_TARPIC_WAIT) at the address "F039 (H)" is a timer value for measuring the waiting time for starting the deceleration of the first reel 31 when executing the waiting effect. is a storage area for A predetermined value is stored in this storage area at the start of execution of the standby effect, and is decremented by "1" for each interrupt process. Then, the stop of the first reel 31 is permitted under the condition that the value of this storage area becomes "0". In other words, when the value of this storage area is not "0", the rotation of the first reel 31 is maintained without being stopped.

Specifically, the reel effect execution timer table corresponding to the stop symbol is selected from the reel effect execution timer tables 1 to 8 shown in FIG. 145 which will be described later. For example, in FIG. 144, which will be described later, when the stop symbol is determined to be "the middle stage 'black BAR'matching" corresponding to the standby effect number 1 o'clock, the reel effect execution timer table corresponding to the standby effect number 1 is shown in FIG. In the middle, reel effect execution timer table 1 (_TBL_TARPIC_TM1) is selected. Then, in the reel effect execution timer table 1, the specified symbol position search waiting time of the first (left) reel 31 is "14112 (D)", so this value is stored in the address "F039 (H)". .
When a predetermined value is stored in the first reel designated symbol position search waiting time of address "F039 (H)", "1" is subtracted for each interrupt processing, and when the value becomes "0", waiting time is considered to have passed. Instead of subtracting "1" for each interrupt process, the specification may be such that "1" is subtracted for each interrupt process a plurality of times.

Here, in the twenty-third embodiment, one rotation (360° rotation) of the reel 31 at the constant speed corresponds to the step “336” of the motor 32 . Since the motor 32 is driven one step every two interrupts, one rotation (360 degree rotation) of the reel 31 at constant speed corresponds to "672" interrupts.
Therefore, in FIG. 145, for example, when the reel effect execution timer table 1 (_TBL_TARPIC_TM1) (standby effect 1) is selected, after the left reel 31 first stops, the middle reel 31 rotates approximately once ("670" interrupt). Further, after the middle reel 31 stops, the right reel 31 stops after approximately two rotations (after the "1340" interruption). Similarly, when another reel effect execution timer table is selected, after the first reel 31 stops, the second reel 31 stops after one or more rotations. Further, after the second reel 31 stops, the third reel 31 stops after approximately two or more rotations.
Also, the time from the stop of the second reel 31 to the stop of the third reel 31 is longer than the time from the stop of the first reel 31 to the stop of the second reel 31. set long. This gives the player a feeling of anticipation as to which pattern the third reel 31 will stop, and gives the player time (sense of accomplishment) to enjoy watching the patterns of the first and second reels 31 stopped. becomes possible.

The above address "F039(H)" is a storage area for the first (left) reel designated symbol position search standby time, the second (middle) reel designated symbol position search standby time, and the third (right) reel designated symbol position search standby time. Addresses 'F03B(H)' and 'F03D(H)' are respectively provided as storage areas for designated symbol position search waiting times.
For example, when reel effect execution timer table 1 (_TBL_TARPIC_TM1) is selected in FIG. =14782(D)” is stored. Similarly, at the address "F03D(H)", "14112+2010=16122(D)" is stored as the third (right) reel specified symbol position search standby time.

The waiting time (_TM2_WAIT) of the address "F041 (H)" carries over the winning information of 1BB, and when the symbol combination of 1BB can be stopped and displayed at the time of the second stop, in other words, the symbol combination of 1BB is ten. In the storage area of the standby time until accepting the operation of the third stop when the symbols constituting the symbol combination of 1BB are stopped on the effective line at the time of the second stop and the third stop has not yet been performed. be.
Here, taking 1BB as an example, when one reel 31 is rotating and the remaining two reels 31 are stopped, the symbols constituting the symbol combination of 1BB are (on the active line 2) is stopped and displayed, and when the symbols constituting the 1BB symbol combination are stopped and displayed when the one reel is stopped, the 1BB symbol combination is stopped and displayed (1BB wins). For example, when the one reel 31 is the right reel 31, it corresponds to the case of "blue BAR (upper left)"-"blue BAR (middle middle)"-"rotating" on the active line.

This standby time is not set in the state where the stop display of the 1BB symbol combination is permitted (when the main game state is 3 and the AT standby counter is "0"), but in other cases, the 1BB symbol combination. Standby time is set at the timing when the temperature rises (at the time of the second stop). The initial value is "896 (D)". Then, the standby time is decremented for each interrupt processing, and when it becomes "0", the third stop operation is accepted.
Note that the interrupt cycle in the twenty-third embodiment is "1.117" ms.
In addition, in the twenty-third embodiment, 1BB is set so as not to tense unless the game is a game in which the symbol combination corresponding to 1BB can be stopped and displayed. However, not limited to this, even in a game in which the symbol combination corresponding to 1BB cannot be stopped and displayed, 1BB may be tenpai. For example, 1BB can be tenpai in a game when winning a minor combination. In a game in which the symbol combination corresponding to 1BB cannot be stopped and displayed, it is possible not to set the standby time even if 1BB is tense.

"896 (D)" is set as the standby time, and "1" is subtracted for each interrupt, so there is a standby period of about 1 second (1.117 x 896 = about 1000 ms) from the timing when the 1BB symbol combination is tense. A process (a process of not stopping the third reel 31 even if the third stop switch 42 is operated; in other words, a process of not accepting the stop operation of the third stop switch 42) is executed.
As described above, one rotation (360 degrees rotation) of the reel 31 corresponds to "336" steps of the motor 32 in the twenty-third embodiment. In the twenty-third embodiment, one step of the motor 32 corresponds to two interrupts (2.234 ms), and the time for the motor 32 to drive for "336" steps, in other words, the time for one rotation of the reel 31 is It is "2.234*336=750.624ms".
Therefore, the waiting time (about 1000 ms) from the timing when the symbol combination of 1BB is tense > the time for one rotation of the reel 31 (about 751 ms)
It has become.
With this setting, it is possible to minimize the standby time and prevent the winning of 1BB due to the player's sudden stop operation.

On the other hand, it is preferable to set the standby time to, for example, the time required for the reel 31 to rotate four times (approximately 3 seconds) or less. For example, when the third reel 31 does not stop because the waiting time has not elapsed when the third stop switch 42 is operated, the player should pay attention again to stop the third stop switch 42. This is because it is desirable that the waiting time has passed by the time the operation is attempted.

135 to 137, FIG. 135 shows the data of the first reel 31, FIG. 136 shows the data of the second reel 31, and FIG.
In FIG. 135, the first reel driving state (_WK_RL1_STS) at address “F04D(H)” is a storage area for storing data indicating the driving state of the motor 32 relating to the first reel 31 . In the present embodiment, the excitation update timing is set once every two interrupt processes. However, the excitation is not limited to this, and the excitation may be updated for each interrupt process, for example. If the excitation can be updated for each interrupt process, the period of the interrupt process may be set to every "2.235" ms. As in the present embodiment, when one excitation is performed in a plurality of interrupt processes, the D7 bit is assigned as a flag for determining whether or not it is excitation update timing. In this embodiment, when the D7 bit is "1", it indicates non-excitation update timing, and when it is "0", it indicates excitation update timing.
The D7 bit of this data is determined for each interrupt process, and if it is "0", it is updated to "1", and if it is "1", it is updated to "0".

The low-order 4 bits of D0 to D3 represent the reel drive state number. As shown in FIG. 135, "0" indicates stop, "1" indicates deceleration, "2" indicates acceleration, "3" indicates start of acceleration, "4" indicates start of deceleration, and "5" indicates constant speed. For example, when the interrupt process is the non-excitation update timing and the reel drive state is constant speed ("5"), "10000101 (B)" is stored.

The drive state of the first reel at the address "F04D(H)" is for the motor 32 associated with the first reel 31. Data indicating the drive state of the motor 32 associated with the second reel 31 is stored. As a storage area, the driving state (_WK_RL2_STS) of the second reel of address "F058(H)" (FIG. 136) is provided.
In addition, as a storage area for storing data indicating the driving state of the motor 32 related to the third reel 31, the driving state of the third reel (_WK_RL3_STS) of address "F063 (H)" (Fig. 137) is provided. .

The first reel motor index (_FL_RL1_MT_IDX) at the address "F04E (H)" is a storage area for storing the ON/OFF state of the motor index signal for the first reel 31, and the signal obtained in the previous interrupt process is stored in the D4 bit. and store the signal acquired in this interrupt process in the D0 bit.
Here, the motor index 1 signal is turned on when the reel sensor 33 detects the index of the first reel 31, and turned off when the reel sensor 33 does not detect the index of the first reel 31. is.
Therefore, for example, when the first reel motor index is "00000000 (B)", the motor index 1 signal is off (the reel sensor 33 detects the index) in both the previous interrupt process and the current interrupt process. not). When the first reel motor index is "00000001 (B)", the motor index 1 signal was off in the previous interrupt process, and the motor index 1 signal is on in the current interrupt process (reel sensor 33 detected the index) (rise).

Furthermore, when the first reel motor index is "00010001(B)", it means that the motor index 1 signal is ON in both the previous interrupt process and the current interrupt process.
Further, when the first reel motor index is "00010000 (B)", the motor index 1 signal was on in the previous interrupt processing, and the motor index 1 signal is off in the current interrupt processing (falling edge). means

The first reel motor index of the above address "F04E (H)" is a storage area for the left reel 31, but the storage area for the reel motor index of the second reel 31 is address "F059 (H)" (Fig. 136) is provided with a second reel motor index (_FL_RL2_MT_IDX).
Further, as a storage area indicating the reel motor index of the third reel 31, a third reel motor index (_FL_RL3_MT_IDX) of address "F064(H)" (FIG. 137) is provided.

The first reel drive pulse output counter (_CT_RL1_PLSOUT) at the address “F04F(H)” is a storage area for storing a value corresponding to the number of interrupts to switch the excitation of the motor 32 related to the first reel 31 . Specifically, in the acceleration/deceleration pulse output counter table (TBL_PULSE_UP) shown in FIG. 156 to be described later, the value corresponding to the current step is stored in this storage area. For example, in the case of the first step during acceleration, the value "25 (D)" corresponding to the address "1058 (H)" is stored in this storage area. Then, "1" is decremented every two interrupt processes, and when it becomes "0", the next second step value "25 (D)" is stored in this storage area, and every two interrupt processes " Subtract by 1. Furthermore, during deceleration, the value "90 (D)" corresponding to the address "1050 (H)" is stored in this storage area, and "1" is decremented every two interrupts. However, when the reel 31 is stopped, at a constant speed, or when deceleration is started, "1" is stored in this storage area, and "1" is not subtracted at the time of interrupt processing.

The first reel drive pulse output counter (_CT_RL1_PLSOUT) of the above address "F04F(H)" is a storage area for the motor 32 related to the first reel 31, but the drive pulse for the motor 32 related to the second reel 31 is As an output counter storage area, a second reel drive pulse output counter (_CT_RL2_PLSOUT) is provided at the address "F05A(H)" (FIG. 136).
Further, as a storage area for the drive pulse output counter for the motor 32 related to the third reel 31, a third reel drive pulse output counter (_CT_RL3_PLSOUT) is provided at address "F065(H)" (FIG. 137).

The first reel drive pulse switching count (_CT_RL1_PLSCHG) of the address “F050(H)” is a storage area for storing the number of drive pulse switchings during acceleration of the motor 32 relating to the first reel 31 . As shown in later-described FIG. 156 (acceleration/deceleration pulse output counter table (TBL_PULSE_UP)), when the reel 31 is accelerated, the pulse is switched eight times from the first step to the eighth step. For this reason, the initial value of the first reel drive pulse switching count is set to "9". , the value "25(D)" corresponding to the first step is stored. As described above, the first reel drive pulse output counter is decremented by "1" every two interrupt processes during acceleration or deceleration. When the first reel drive pulse output counter reaches "0", "1" is subtracted from the first reel drive pulse switching count. In this manner, each time the first reel drive pulse output counter reaches "0", the number is decremented by "1" until the first reel drive pulse switching count reaches "0".

The first reel drive pulse switching count (_CT_RL1_PLSCHG) of the above address "F050 (H)" is a storage area for the motor 32 associated with the first reel 31, but is a storage area for the motor 32 associated with the second reel 31. As such, the second reel drive pulse switching count (_CT_RL2_PLSCHG) is provided at the address "F05B(H)" (FIG. 136).
Further, as a storage area for the motor 32 related to the third reel 31, the third reel driving pulse switching count (_CT_RL3_PLSCHG) is provided at the address "F066(H)" (FIG. 137).

The first reel rotation failure detection counter (_CT_RL1_BAD) at the address "F051(H)" is a counter storage area for determining whether the rotation of the first reel 31 is normal or abnormal (out-of-step). The first reel rotation failure detection counter stores "0" as an initial value when the first reel 31 reaches a constant speed. When the first reel 31 is at a constant speed, "1" is added, and when the value after adding "1" becomes "0" (that is, the value before addition is "255 (D)"). Yes, and as a result of adding "1", the digit is carried up and the zero flag becomes "1"), it is determined that the rotation of the first reel 31 is not normal.
When it is determined that the value of the first reel motor index (_FL_RL1_MT_IDX) has changed after the first reel 31 reaches a constant speed, the first reel rotation failure detection counter is cleared.

The first reel rotation failure detection counter (_CT_RL1_BAD) at the address "F051 (H)" is a storage area for the first reel 31, but as a storage area for the second reel 31, the address "F05C (H) ' (FIG. 136) is provided with a second reel rotation failure detection counter (_CT_RL2_BAD).
As a storage area for the third reel 31, a third reel rotation failure detection counter (_CT_RL3_BAD) is provided at address "F067(H)" (FIG. 137).

The step number (_NB_RL1_STEP) of one symbol on the first reel at the address "F052(H)" is a storage area for storing the step number when the first reel drive state is constant speed or deceleration start.
When the first reel motor index (_FL_RL1_MT_IDX_) rises, "3" is stored as an initial value (design value).
Further, when the driving state of the first reel is constant speed or start of deceleration, "1" is decremented at the excitation update timing, and when it becomes "0", it is determined that one symbol has been moved.
When it is determined that one symbol has been moved, and the symbol numbers are "2", "7", "12" and "17", "16 (D)" is stored as the initial value, and other values are stored. , "17 (D)" is stored as the initial value.
In the twenty-third embodiment, the number of steps per rotation of the motor 32 is "336", and the number of symbols on the reel 31 is "20". For 16 symbols, the number of steps for one symbol is "17" (4*16+16*17=336). In other words, since one pattern is assigned to 16 steps at substantially equal intervals, when the reel 31 is stopped, it is configured to stop at the center of the pattern as much as possible.

The step number (_NB_RL1_STEP) of one symbol on the first reel at the above address "F052 (H)" is a storage area for the first reel 31, but as a storage area for the second reel 31, the address "F05D ( H)” (FIG. 136) is provided with a step number (_NB_RL2_STEP) for one symbol of the second reel.
Further, as a storage area for the third reel 31, a step number (_NB_RL3_STEP) for one symbol of the third reel is provided at the address "F068(H)" (FIG. 137).

The first reel symbol number (for passing position) (_NB_RL1_PASPIC) at the address "F053(H)" is a storage area for storing the symbol number of the first reel 31 that is currently passing. As the initial value, "255 (D) (FF (H))" is stored. When it is determined that the first reel motor index (_FL_RL1_MT_IDX) has changed, and at the rising time (the D0 bit is "1" and the D4 bit is "0"), "10 (D)" is stored. At the falling edge (D0 bit is "0" and D4 bit is "1"), "0" is stored.

Thus, "255 (D)" is stored as the initial value until the value of the first reel motor index changes. Then, when it is determined that the value of the first reel motor index has changed, "10 (D)" is stored at the rising edge, and "0" is stored at the trailing edge.
Also, the 1st reel symbol number (for passing position) (_NB_RL1_PASPIC) is incremented by "1" each time it is determined that the symbol has moved by one symbol after "10 (D)" or "0" is stored. .

The first reel pattern number (for passing position) (_NB_RL1_PASPIC) at the above address "F053(H)" is a storage area for the first reel 31, but as a storage area for the second reel 31, the address "F05E (H)” (FIG. 136) is provided with a second reel pattern number (for passing position) (_NB_RL2_PASPIC).
Further, as a storage area for the third reel 31, a third reel pattern number (for passing position) (_NB_RL3_PASPIC) is provided at the address "F069(H)" (FIG. 137).

The first reel symbol number (for stop position) (_NB_RL1_PASPIC) at the address "F054(H)" is a storage area for storing the symbol number of the stop position (applying 4-phase excitation). As the initial value, "255 (D) (FF (H))" is stored. When the first stop switch 42 is operated and the stop position is determined, the determined pattern number is stored in this storage area.

The first reel pattern number (for stop position) (_NB_PL1_STPPIC) of the above address "F054 (H)" is a storage area for the first reel 31, but as a storage area for the second reel 31, the address "F05F (H)” (FIG. 136) is provided with a second reel pattern number (for stop position) (_NB_RL2_STPPIC).
Also, as a storage area for the third reel 31, a third reel pattern number (for stop position) (_NB_RL3_STPPIC) is provided at the address "F06A(H)" (FIG. 137).

A first reel drive pulse data search counter (_CT_RL1_PLUS) at address “F055 (H)” is a storage area for a counter for determining the excitation phase of the first reel 31 . The first reel drive pulse data search counter is incremented by "1" at each excitation update timing. Further, when the first reel 31 rotates forward, "0" is added, and when it rotates in reverse, "254 (D) (FE (H))" is added. For example, when the counter value stored so far is "100 (D)", it becomes "101 (D)" by adding "1". Further, when the first reel 31 rotates in the reverse direction, "254 (D)" is added, resulting in "99 (D)". In other words, adding "254(D)" is the same as subtracting "1". In this manner, the first reel drive pulse data search counter takes a value within the range of "0" to "255 (D)".

Further, when the logical product (AND) of the first reel driving pulse data search counter value and "00000111 (B)" is executed, the values of "0" to "255 (D)" are obtained from "0" to "7 ” value. Then, drive pulse data corresponding to values of "0" to "7" are set. For example, when the converted value is "7", the drive pulse stored at address "1107 (H)" corresponding to the offset value "7" in the reel drive pulse data table (TBL_REEL_PULSE) in FIG. Data "00001000(B)" is set, and excitation is performed to turn on φ3.

The first reel drive pulse data search counter (_CT_RL1_PLUS) at the above address "F055 (H)" is a storage area for the first reel 31, but as a storage area for the second reel 31, address "F060 ( H)” (FIG. 136) is provided with a second reel drive pulse data search counter (_CT_RL2_PLUS).
As a storage area for the third reel 31, a third reel drive pulse data search counter (_CT_RL3_PLUS) is provided at the address "F06B(H)" (FIG. 137).

The first reel rotation start waiting counter (_CT_RL1_WAIT) at the address "F056(H)" is a counter for random delay of the first reel 31 after the waiting effect.
Here, "random delay" is explained.
When a standby effect is executed and the reels 31 are automatically stopped without depending on the operation of the stop switch 42 by the player, if all the reels 31 are rotated simultaneously (all at once) after the reels 31 are automatically stopped, the spot pressing assistance is performed. may lead to Therefore, when the reels 31 are restarted after the reels 31 are automatically stopped by the standby effect, a delay time at the start of rotation is set for each reel 31, and the rotation start timing of each reel 31 is random (discrete). set to be Such control is called "random delay".

When the standby performance is not executed, "0" is stored in this storage area. Also, when the standby effect is executed, a value is determined by lottery or the like from among the values "0" to "335 (D)", and the determined value is stored. Then, "1" is subtracted for each interrupt process, and when the value becomes "0", the restart of the first reel 31 is permitted.

The first reel rotation start waiting counter (_CT_RL1_WAIT) at the address "F056 (H)" is a storage area for the first reel 31, but as a storage area for the second reel 31, the address "F061 (H) ' (FIG. 136) is provided with a second reel rotation start waiting counter (_CT_RL2_WAIT).
As a storage area for the third reel 31, a third reel rotation start waiting counter (_CT_RL3_WAIT) is provided at the address "F06C(H)" (FIG. 137).

In FIG. 138, the section type number (_NB_ADV_KND) of the address "F070(H)" is a storage area for storing a number indicating whether or not it is an advantageous section. When it is an advantageous section, "1" is stored, and when it is a non-advantageous section, "0" is stored. This storage area is the same storage area as the advantageous section type flag at address "F061(H)" shown in FIG. 35 in the eleventh embodiment.
The AT flag (_FL_AT) at the address "F078(H)" is a flag for determining whether or not the AT wins. When AT is won, "1" is stored, and when AT is not won, "0" is stored. This storage area is the same storage area as the AT flag at address "F067(H)" shown in FIG. 35 in the eleventh embodiment.

The advantageous interval clear counter (_CT_ADV_CLR) at the address "F07A(H)" is a storage area for a counter (decrement counter) for the number of games played in the advantageous interval. When shifting to the advantageous section, the initial value "1500 (D)" is set, and "1" is subtracted for each game during the advantageous section. And when it becomes "0", it satisfies the condition for ending the advantageous section. This storage area is the same storage area as the advantageous section clear counter at address "F063(H)" shown in FIG. 35 in the eleventh embodiment.

The difference number counter (also referred to as "MY counter") (_CT_MY) at the address "F07C(H)" is a counter (increment counter) that stores a value corresponding to the cumulative value of the difference number during the advantageous interval.
The difference number counter does not simply store the accumulated value of the difference number of sheets, but stores the "value corresponding to" the accumulated value of the difference number of sheets. For example, when the difference number becomes a value corresponding to a minus value, the value is corrected to "0 (H)". Therefore, "accumulated value of difference number ≠ difference number counter value". In other words, the difference number counter stores a value that sets "0" to the time when the accumulated value of the number of difference cards has decreased the most during the advantageous section.

Also, when the difference counter value exceeds "2400 (D)", it is determined that the condition for ending the advantageous section is met. Therefore, the maximum value that the difference number counter can take is "2399 (D)" in the current game, and "2414 (D)" when 15 coins are paid out in the next game.
It should be noted that the difference number counter needs to count at least the cumulative value of the number of difference sheets during the advantageous section, and does not have to count during the non-advantageous section (normal section), but it continues to count including the non-advantageous section. It may be a counter.
This storage area is the same storage area as the difference number counter of the address "F065(H)" shown in FIG. 35 in the eleventh embodiment.

The main game state number (_NB_GAM_STS) at the address "F07E(H)" is a storage area for storing the number of the main game state. As shown in FIG. 132, in the twenty-third embodiment, main game states 0 to 5 are provided, and the number of the main game state in which the player is currently staying is stored in this storage area. When there is a transition to the main game state, the value of this storage area is updated.
The AT precursor counter (_CT_AT_ZN) at the address "F080(H)" is a storage area for the AT precursor game count counter. When the AT is won, the number of AT precursor games is determined, for example, within the range of "0" to "33", and the determined number of games is stored in this storage area. Then, in the AT precursor, that is, the main game state 2, every game, "1" is subtracted from the AT precursor counter, and when it becomes "0", it is determined that the end condition of the AT precursor (main game state 2) is met. do.

The ending counter (_CT_ENDING) of the address "F097 (H)" is set when the difference number counter value exceeds "1951 (D)" when the AT set number counter value (to be described later) is "1" or more, or This is a counter storage area in which the initial value "2" is set when the section clear counter value becomes less than "200 (D)".
At the end of the main game state 4, if the ending counter is equal to or greater than "1", "1" is subtracted. When the ending counter changes from "1" to "0", it is determined that the conditions for ending the advantageous section (and AT) are satisfied, and the main game state 0 is entered. Therefore, after "2" is set in the ending counter, it is possible to perform up to two sets of ATs, including the AT set to "2" in the ending counter.

The AT wait counter (_CT_AT_WAIT) at the address "F098(H)" is a counter storage area for managing AT activation. When the AT set number counter is equal to or greater than "1", after the main game state 4 (AT) ends, the main game state 3 (AT preparing) is entered. Then, in this main game state 3, the value for managing whether or not to permit the stop display of the 1BB symbol combination is the AT standby counter value. In other words, in the main game state 3, it is a counter for removing a certain number of paid balls. The AT standby counter is determined and stored within a range of "0" to "8" when, for example, the main game state 4 shifts to the main game state 3.

In the main game state 3, the AT standby counter value is subtracted by "1" in a game in which 1BB is won, or in a game in which a small winning combination or replay is not won in 1BB (game in which 1BB can be won). . Then, after the AT standby counter reaches "0", in a game in which the 1BB symbol combination can be stopped and displayed (a game in which a small winning combination or a replay has not been won), an effect that encourages a 1BB prize to be won (for example, "Aim for 'Blue BAR'!", etc.) is output. When the 1BB symbol combination is stopped and displayed, the main game state 4 is entered.

In the main game state 3, when 1BB is won before the AT standby counter reaches "0", the main game state 3 remains and the main game state 4 (AT) is not entered. Therefore, 1BB is in operation and not AT (AT is being prepared). In this case, the AT standby counter is reset after the 1BB operation ends. Note that the AT standby counter that has been stored may be taken over without resetting. By doing so, even if the symbol combination corresponding to 1BB is erroneously stopped and displayed, it is possible to prevent the player from being further disadvantaged.

The AT set number counter (_CT_AT_SET) at the address "F09C(H)" is a storage area for storing the AT set number. When an AT is won, the number of AT sets is determined by lottery, and the determined number of AT sets is stored in this storage area. Further, in the main game state 3 (AT preparation), an addition lottery for the number of AT sets is executed according to the winning combination, and when the addition lottery is won, the winning addition number is added to the AT set number counter.

At the end of the main game state 4, it is determined whether or not the AT set number counter is "1" or more, and when the AT set number counter is "1" or more, it is determined that the AT continuation condition is satisfied. Then, the main game state 3 is entered, and when the AT set number counter is "0", it is determined that the AT continuation condition is not satisfied, and the main game state 5 is entered. When shifting from the main game state 4 to the main game state 3, the AT set number counter is decremented by "1".
Also, even if the number of AT sets is "1" or more, when the ending counter changes from "1" to "0" at the end of the main game state 4, the end condition of the advantageous section (AT) is satisfied. The AT set number counter is cleared as the determination is made and the state shifts to the main game state 0. Here, as an example of a method of shifting to the main game state 0 and a method of clearing the AT set number counter, RWM initialization processing executed at the end of the advantageous interval by the advantageous interval clear counter management (step S435 in FIG. 51) are mentioned.

The AT pullback counter (_CT_AT_BACK) at the address "F09D(H)" is a storage area for the counter of the number of remaining games to be AT pullback. When moving from the main game state 4 to the main game state 5, the initial value "50 (D)" is set, and in the main game state 5, "1" is subtracted every game. Then, when the AT pull-back counter becomes "0" without winning the AT, it is determined that the end condition of the main game state 5 is satisfied, and the main game state 0 or 1 is entered.
Further, when the AT is won in the main game state 5 and the game is shifted to the main game state 3, the AT withdrawal counter is cleared.

The standby effect type (_WK_PRD) of the address "F09E(H)" is a storage area for storing the type of the standby effect number.
Here, the "standby effect" in the twenty-third embodiment means that the reels 31 are rotated in reverse when the start switch 41 is operated, and a predetermined symbol combination (for example, " This is a reel effect (also referred to as a freeze effect) that stops and displays black bars. As a standby effect, the reels 31 are rotated forward when the start switch 41 is operated, and a predetermined symbol combination (for example, "black BAR" alignment) is stop-displayed without the player's operation of the stop switch 42. may contain things. Alternatively, as a standby performance, the reels 31 are rotated forward when the start switch 41 is operated, and a predetermined symbol combination (for example, "black BAR" alignment) is stop-displayed without the player's operation of the stop switch 42.例文帳に追加It may be composed only of a single object.

In the standby effect, if it is executed as a effect indicating AT winning confirmation (for example, stopping display of "black BAR" matching or "red 7" matching), or if it is performed as a effect that fuels the expectation of AT winning (for example, , “stop displaying “watermelon” matching, etc.).
When it is decided to execute the standby performance, when any one of the standby performance numbers "1" to "4" (address "F0A0 (H)" to be described later) is determined, "2" is stored. , "5" to "8" (address "F0A1(H)" to be described later) is determined, "3" is stored. Moreover, it is cleared at step S835 at the start of standby effect (M_TARPIC_EXE) in FIG. 143, which will be described later.

The search counter update correction data (_WK_PLS_REV) at the address "F09F(H)" is a storage area for storing data that determines whether the rotation is forward rotation or reverse rotation in the standby effect. When the standby effect is forward rotation, "0" is stored, and when it is reverse rotation, "FE (H)" is stored.
When starting the standby effect, it is determined whether or not the value stored in the standby effect type (_WK_PRD) described above is "0", and when it is not "0", that is, the standby effect (in the twenty-third embodiment, When executing reverse rotation), "FE (H)" is stored in the retrieval counter update correction data (_WK_PLS_REV).
In addition, when the standby effect ends, this storage area is cleared ("0" is stored).

The standby effect number (_NB_PRD_NO) of the address “F0A0(H)” is a storage area for the number that manages the standby effect indicating AT win determination. As shown in FIG. 138, "1" to "4" are stored according to the stop symbols. Note that the standby effect number "4" corresponds to a number that temporarily stops and displays the "red 7" alignment and then changes it again to stop and display the "black BAR" alignment. The set number of winning ATs is set so as to be related to the symbol combinations stopped and displayed by the standby effect.

The three-way number (_NB_TRIO) of the address "F0A1(H)" is a storage area for numbers for managing the standby effect indicating the AT win expectation. For example, in the main game state 1, when a rare replay (winning numbers "3" to "9" in FIG. 126) is won, the three winning numbers are determined by lottery and set at the end of the game. For example, when it is determined that the three-part number "5" is selected, the operation of the start switch 41 for starting the next game is used as a trigger to stop and display the middle row "watermelon" by the waiting effect. The AT win expectation is set so as to be associated with the symbol combination stopped and displayed by the standby effect.

The winning and replay condition device number (_NB_CND_NOR) of the address "F0A9 (H)" is a memory that stores the number when the winning number is determined in the game this time and the replay and winning condition device that operates in the game this time is determined. area. As shown in FIG. 126, when the winning numbers "1" to "24" are won, "1" to "24" are respectively stored as the winning and replay condition device numbers of the game.
The role product condition device number (_NB_CRRT_BNS) of the address "F0AA(H)" is a storage area for storing the role product condition device number when winning the role product. As shown in FIG. 126, when winning numbers "25" to "41" are won, "1" to "17" are respectively stored as accessory condition device numbers for the game.

The minimum game time (_TM2_GAME) of the address "F0AB (H)" is a timer that monitors the minimum game time for one time, and when it is determined that the minimum game time has passed, the number of interrupts "3672 (D)" is set. An initial value is set for counting (step S767 in FIG. 140 to be described later). Note that the minimum playing time in this embodiment is set to approximately "4.1" seconds (1.117 ms×3672≈4100 ms).
When the minimum playing time is set in the current game, the rotation of the reels 31 starts on the condition that the minimum playing time is "0" in the next game.

Among the above data of the RWM 53, when the advantageous section ends, the data regarding the advantageous section and AT are cleared.
Also in the twenty-third embodiment, as in the eleventh embodiment, the game end check process (FIG. 148) is executed at the end of the game, and the advantageous zone clear counter management is executed in step S945. The advantageous section clear counter management is the same as the processing shown in FIG. 51 or FIG.

Therefore, when the advantageous section clear counter (“_CT_ADV_CLR” of address “F07A(H)”) becomes “0” (“Yes” in step S424 in FIG. 51 or FIG. 52), the process proceeds to step S435. clears the data of the RWM 53 regarding the advantageous section and AT.
In the twenty-third embodiment, the data cleared at the end of the advantageous section include section type number (_NB_ADV_KND), AT flag (_FL_AT), difference counter (MY counter) (_CT_MY), AT precursor counter (_CT_AT_ZN), ending counter. (_CT_ENDING), AT waiting counter (__CT_AT_WAIT), AT set number counter (__CT_AT_SET), AT withdrawal counter (_CT_AT_BACK), waiting effect type (_WK_PRD), waiting effect number (_NB_PRD_NO), three-part number (_NB_TRIO).
On the other hand, the data that are not cleared at the end of the advantageous section include RT state number (_NB_RT_STS), RT game count (_CT_RT_GAME), and main game state number (_NB_GAM_STS).
Therefore, as described above, the current game is the 1000th game of RT1, and when the advantageous section ends in the current game, the next game will be the non-advantageous section and the 1001st game of RT1.

Also, the RT status number (_NB_RT_STS) and the number of RT games (_CT_RT_GAME) are not initialized by turning on/off the power or setting change processing.
Therefore, for example, even if the power is turned off in the 1000th game of RT1 and the setting change process is executed and the game returns, the first game after the return is started from the 1001st game of RT1. However, not limited to this, when the setting change process is executed, the RT state number (_NB_RT_STS) is not initialized, but the number of RT games (_CT_RT_GAME) may be initialized. Alternatively, both the RT state number (_NB_RT_STS) and the number of RT games (_CT_RT_GAME) may be initialized when the setting change process is executed.

Furthermore, the RT state number (_NB_RT_STS) and the number of RT games (_CT_RT_GAME) are not initialized only by turning the power on/off, but at least the number of RT games (_CT_RT_GAME) is initialized when the setting change process is executed. good too.
Note that when the power is turned on/off, the number of games (non-AT) displayed on the image display device 23 is set to "0". This point will be described later.

Next, in the twenty-third embodiment, each process during a game will be described using a flowchart.
FIG. 139 is a flow chart showing main processing (M_MAIN) by the main control board 50 . This flowchart corresponds to FIG. 41 of the eleventh embodiment. In FIG. 139, the same step numbers are assigned to the same processes as in FIG. In FIG. 139, steps different from those in FIG. 41 are underlined with step numbers.
Differences from FIG. 41 will be mainly described below.
In FIG. 139, if it is determined in step S278 that the start switch 41 has been operated, the process advances to step S751 to execute start switch acceptance processing (M_START_CTL). It is determined that the start switch 41 has been operated when the D6 bit of the input port rising data A (_PT_IN_A_UP) of the address "F017 (H)" in FIG. 133 becomes "1".

Then, when proceeding to the start switch acceptance process (M_START_CTL) of step S751, the process proceeds to the process of FIG. 140, which will be described later.
Next, the process proceeds to step S752 to execute reel stop reception check (M_STOP_CHK). This process is the process shown in FIG. 146 to be described later. Then, the reel stop acceptance check (M_STOP_CHK) is executed for each reel 31 until it is determined that all the reels 31 have stopped in the next step S289.
Also, in FIG. 139, the game end check process (M_GAME_CHK) (step S753) in the twenty-third embodiment executes the process shown in FIG. 148 to be described later.

FIG. 140 is a flow chart showing the start switch acceptance process (M_START_CTL) in step S751 of FIG.
In step S761, a winning combination lottery process is executed. This process is a process of performing a lottery for a winning number by the combination lottery means 61 . For example, when the current game is non-RT, the winning number is determined according to the number table shown in FIG. When the winning number is determined, the winning and replay condition device number corresponding to the determined winning number is stored in the memory area of the address "F0A9 (H)", and the accessory condition device number corresponding to the determined winning number is stored. , is stored in the storage area at the address "F0AA(H)".

In the next step S762, the main control board 50 determines the transition to the advantageous section. As described above, when the winning numbers "1" to "4" and "6" to "21" are won, it is decided to shift from the normal section to the advantageous section.
Here, when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section, "1" is set to the section type number (address "F070(H)").

At the next step S763, a game start process in the main game state is executed. In this process, lottery, counter update, etc. are executed according to the main game state of the current game.
For example, when the main game state is 0, 1, or 5, an AT lottery is executed. As described above, when a rare replay (any of the winning numbers “3” to “9”) occurs, an AT lottery with a number “1” or more may be executed. Then, when the AT is won, the AT flag (address "F078(H)") is set to "1", and the lottery-determined AT set number is stored in the address "F09C(H)".

Further, when the main game state is 2, "1" is subtracted from the AT precursor counter (address "F080 (H)").
Furthermore, when the main game state is 3, "1" is subtracted from the AT standby counter (address "F098(H)").
Further, when the main game state is 5, "1" is subtracted from the AT withdrawal counter (address "F09D(H)").

In the next step S764, a symbol stop signal set (S_IF_SET) is executed. This process is a process shown in FIG. 141, which will be described later, and is a process for outputting a test signal regarding the operation timing and pressing order of the stop switch 42 to the tester side. When the gaming machine is actually installed in the hall (store), the gaming machine is not connected to the testing machine, so the testing machine does not actually receive the test signal. However, since the pattern stop signal set (S_IF_SET) exists in the program of the main processing, even after the gaming machine is installed in the hall, every game, test signals regarding the operation timing and pressing order of the stop switch 42 are generated. The output processing itself is executed.
In the next step S765, start of standby effect (M_TARPIC_EXE) is executed. This process is a process shown in FIG. 143, which will be described later, and corresponds to a process of executing a standby effect when the start switch 41 is operated.

In the next step S766, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the minimum playing time has passed. This process is a process of determining whether or not the value stored at the address "F0AB(H)" is "0". When it is determined that the minimum playing time has become "0", the process proceeds to step S767. In step S767, the initial value "3672 (D)" of the minimum playing time is stored in the address "F0AB (H)". From this time point, the value is decremented by "1" for each interrupt process, and it is determined whether or not the minimum game time has reached "0" in step S766 of the next game. In the next step S768, the main control board 50 sets the acceleration start state. This processing stores "3" (00000011 (B)) indicating the start of acceleration in the first reel driving state (_WK_RL1_STS), the second reel driving state (_WK_RL2_STS), and the third reel driving state (_WK_RL3_STS). is. Then, the processing according to this flow chart ends.

FIG. 141 is a flow chart showing the symbol stop signal set (S_IF_SET) in step S764 in FIG.
Before describing FIG. 141, the stop acceptance designation tables 1 and 2 will be described.
FIG. 142 shows the symbol stop signal table, (A) shows symbol stop signal table 1 (TBL_ORD_INF1), and (B) shows symbol stop signal table 2 (TBL_ORD_INF2).

As shown in FIG. 141(A), two types of symbol stop signal data are stored in the stop acceptance specification table 1 (TBL_ORD_INF1). Further, each symbol stop signal data is composed of four data.
First, the pattern stop signal data when (1) "Accessory condition device number = 1, main game state number 3 and AT standby counter = 0" is data "0, 16, 7, 2". . Here, "accessory condition device number = 1, main game state number 3 and AT standby counter = 0" means that 1BB is inside, main game state 3 (AT is in preparation), and AT standby counter is "0", that is, it means that 1BB can be won.
This data is for aiming the "blue BAR" alignment on the effective line.
The four pieces of symbol stop signal data are data of "push order, stop operation position of left reel 31, stop operation position of middle reel 31, stop operation position of right reel 31".

First, the push order data has "0" to "5". "0" indicates the pressing order 123, "1" indicates the pressing order 132, . . . , and "5" indicates the pressing order 321. Here, each symbol stop signal data in the stop acceptance designation table 1 (TBL_ORD_INF1) of (A) is actually the symbol stop signal data during the game in which the instruction function is not operating, but the pressing order is the pressing order. It is set to 123. Instead of the pressing order 123, pressing order data indicating another pressing order may be used.
In addition, the stop operation position of the left reel 31, the stop operation position of the middle reel 31, and the stop operation position of the right reel 31 all point to the pattern numbers aimed at the lower stage.
For example, among the symbol stop signal data (1) of the stop acceptance designation table 1, the data indicating the stop operation position of the left reel 31 is "16". Here, as shown in FIG. 114, if the number 16 "watermelon" on the left reel 31 is aimed to stop at the lower left stage, the number 18 "blue BAR" can be stopped on the effective line (upper left stage). Become.
In the above example, the data indicating the stop operation position centered on the lower stage is stored, but the data indicating the stop operation position centered on the middle stage or the upper stage may be stored. In either case, the effective line in the present embodiment is an irregular line that descends to the right, whereas the data indicating the stop operation position is set in a horizontal straight line (set along the effective line). ), when the tester side performs the test according to the test signal, the stop operation can be performed at a predetermined timing without being influenced by the effective line. As a result, the processing load on the testing machine side and the processing load on the gaming machine side can be reduced.

Further, among the symbol stop signal data, the data indicating the stop operation position of the middle reel 31 is "7". If you aim to stop No. 7 "Watermelon" on the middle reel 31 at the middle and lower stage, No. 8 "Blue BAR" can be stopped on the effective line (middle middle stage).
Furthermore, among the symbol stop signal data, the data indicating the stop operation position of the right reel 31 is "2". If you aim so that the No. 2 "blue BAR" of the right reel 31 stops at the lower right stage, this "blue BAR" can be stopped on the effective line (lower right stage).
Therefore, the above symbol stop signal data is data for aiming at the "blue BAR" alignment in the pressing order 123 .

In addition, if it is a game in which 1BB is inside and no small win or replay has been won in this game, if each reel 31 is stopped based on the symbol stop signal data, the "blue BAR" is complete. Stop display. On the other hand, even within 1BB, in a game in which either a small winning combination or a replay is won in this game, even if each reel 31 is stopped based on the symbol stop signal data, the "blue BAR" is displayed. Alignment does not stop appearing.

The symbol stop signal data "0, 6, 127, 127" of (2) is the symbol stop signal data under conditions other than the above (1). This symbol stop signal data is symbol stop signal data that prevents the "blue BAR" alignment.
In the symbol stop signal data "0, 6, 127, 127", "0" is data indicating the push order 123 as described above. The data indicating the stop position of the left reel 31 is "6". Here, as shown in FIG. 114, if No. 6 "Watermelon" on the left reel 31 is aimed to stop at the lower left row, No. 18 "Blue BAR" will not stop on the effective line.
Furthermore, the data "127" indicating the stop operation position of the middle and right reels 31 means that the operation timing is irrelevant (arbitrary operation position). Therefore, since the left reel 31 is set so that the "blue bar" does not stop on the effective line, it means that the operation timing of the stop switches 42 of the middle and right reels 31 is arbitrary. Although the data indicating the stop operation position of the middle reel 31 and the right reel 31 is "127", it is also possible to store data indicating a predetermined stop operation position instead of an arbitrary operation position. is.

As described above, the symbol stop signal is a signal including the pressing order of the stop switch 42 and the stop operation position of each reel 31, and is a test signal to be transmitted to the testing machine. When the testing machine side receives this pattern stop signal (test signal), it executes a simulation of operating the stop switch 42 according to this pattern stop signal. Then, when a simulation of operating the stop switch 42 according to the symbol stop signal is executed, it is judged (confirmed) whether or not the reel 31 stops at the correct position, and whether or not the payout rate is within an appropriate range. judgment (confirmation). By outputting the symbol stop signal before determining whether or not the minimum playing time has passed, the testing machine side can perform a stop operation immediately after the minimum playing time has passed.

142(B), 6 types of pattern stop signal data are stored in the stop acceptance specification table 2 (TBL_ORD_INF2), and are respectively in push order 123, push order 132, ..., push order 321. Yes.
When winning number "10" is won during AT, or when winning number "16" is won during AT and inside SRB, symbol stop signal data "0, 127, 127, 127" corresponding to push order 123 ” is selected.
Also, when winning number "11" is won during AT, or when winning number "17" is won during AT and inside SRB, symbol stop signal data "1, 127, 127" corresponding to push order 132 , 127” is selected.
Furthermore, when winning number "12" is won during AT, or when winning number "18" is won during AT and inside SRB, symbol stop signal data "2, 127, 127, 127" is selected.

Furthermore, when winning number "13" is won during AT, or when winning number "19" is won during AT and inside SRB, symbol stop signal data "3, 127, 127" corresponding to push order 231 , 127” is selected.
Similarly, when the winning number "14" is won during AT, or when the winning number "20" is won during AT and inside the SRB, symbol stop signal data "4, 127, 127, 127" is selected.
Furthermore, similarly, when winning number "15" is won during AT, or when winning number "21" is won during AT and inside SRB, symbol stop signal data "5, 127" corresponding to push order 312 , 127, 127" is selected.

As described above, in a game in which the pressing order is notified during the AT, there is a process for outputting the pressing order data corresponding to the pressing order and the stop operation position data indicating that the stop operation position is arbitrary. executed. By outputting stop operation position data indicating that the stop operation position is arbitrary, the discrepancy between the test on the testing machine side and the game method performed by the player after the game machine is actually installed in the hall is eliminated. can be reduced.

Returning to FIG. 141, the symbol stop signal set (S_IF_SET) will be described.
First, in step S771, the stop acceptance specification table 2 shown in FIG. 141(B) is set.
In the next step S772, it is determined whether or not there is a pressing order instruction. Here, when a small win group A is won during AT, or when a small win group B is won during AT and inside the SRB, the pressing order instruction number (in FIGS. 133 to 138, (not shown) is stored, so this push order instruction number is stored in the A register. When the A register value is not "0", it is determined as "Yes" (the pressing order is indicated), and when it is "0", it is determined as "No" (the pressing order is not indicated).
If it is determined that there is a pressing order instruction, the process proceeds to step S773, and if it is determined that there is no pressing order instruction, the process proceeds to step S775.

In step S773, an offset value is set. Here, it is assumed that the push order instruction numbers are set to "1", "2", ..., "6" for the six push orders 123, 132, ..., 321, respectively. . In this case, the offset values are "0", "1", ..., "5". Therefore, "1" is subtracted from the A register and the offset value is set.
Next, in step S774, symbol stop signal data corresponding to the offset value is obtained. For example, the symbol stop signal data corresponding to the offset value "0" is "0, 127, 127, 127" in FIG. 142(B), and the symbol stop signal data corresponding to the offset value "1" is "1 , 127, 127, 127", and the symbol stop signal data corresponding to the offset value "5" is "5, 127, 127, 127". Then, the process proceeds to step S781.

On the other hand, when the process proceeds from step S772 to step S775, the stop acceptance designation table 1 is set. This process is a process of setting the stop acceptance specification table 1 instead of the stop acceptance specification table 2 initially set in step S771.
Next, in step S776, it is determined whether or not the winning and replay condition device number is "0". In this process, it is determined whether or not the winning and replay condition device number (_NB_CND_NOR) stored at the address "F0A9(H)" is "0". When it is determined that there is "0" (that is, when a minor winning combination or replay is not won in the current game), the process proceeds to step S7777, and when it is determined that it is not "0", the process proceeds to step S780.

In step S777, it is determined whether or not the accessory condition device number is "1" (whether or not 1BB is won). This process determines whether or not the role product condition device number (_NB_CRRT_BNS) stored at the address "F0AA(H)" is "1". If it is determined to be "1", the process proceeds to step S778, and if it is determined not to be "1", the process proceeds to step S780.

In step S778, it is determined whether or not 1BB winning is permitted in the current game. Here, "winning of 1BB is permitted" corresponds to the main game state 3 (AT preparation) and the AT standby counter being "0". Therefore, whether or not the value of address "F07E(H)" (main game state number) is "3" and whether or not the value of address "F098(H)" (AT standby counter) is "0" determine whether When determining that the main game state number is 3 and the AT standby counter is "0", the process proceeds to step S779, and when determining that the main game state number is 3 and the AT standby counter is not "0", the process proceeds to step S780.
In step S779, the symbol stop signal data "0, 16, 7, 2" are acquired. Then, the process proceeds to step S781. On the other hand, in step S780, the symbol stop signal data "0, 6, 127, 127" are acquired. Then, the process proceeds to step S781.

In the next step S781, a serial communication circuit data register is set. Here, the address of the transmission register in the serial communication circuit of the chip incorporated in the main CPU 55 is stored in a predetermined register.
Next, the process advances to step S782 to execute processing for outputting the pressing order among the test signals. For example, when the symbol stop signal data is "0, 16, 7, 2", the processing here is to write push order data "0" to the address of the transmission register.
Next, proceeding to step S783, processing for outputting the stop operation position of the first reel 31 (the left reel 31 in this embodiment) among the test signals is executed. Here, for example, when the pattern stop signal data is "0, 16, 7, 2", the stop operation position "16 (D)" of the left reel 31 is written to the address of the transmission register. be.

Next, proceeding to step S784, processing for outputting the stop operation position of the second reel 31 (middle reel 31 in this embodiment) is executed. Here, for example, when the symbol stop signal data is "0, 16, 7, 2", the stop operation position "7" of the middle reel 31 is written to the address of the transmission register.
Next, proceeding to step S785, processing for outputting the stop operation position of the third reel 31 (the right reel 31 in this embodiment) is executed. In this process, for example, when the symbol stop signal data is "0, 16, 7, 2", the stop operation position "2" of the right reel 31 is written in the address of the transmission register.
Then, the processing according to this flow chart ends.
In steps S782 to S785, the pressing order and the stop operation position of the reel 31 are written in the transmission register, and processing for transmitting these data to the testing machine is executed. Incidentally, in the interrupt processing (I_INTR) of FIG. 151, which will be described later, the processing for transmitting these data to the testing machine may be executed by the test signal output in step S842.

As described above, when 1BB winning is permitted, the symbol stop signal data for winning 1BB is transmitted. Transmit symbol stop signal data. As a result, it is possible to transmit a test signal in accordance with the player's playing style in the market. Therefore, it is possible to bring the number of balls produced by the testing machine closer to the number of balls produced on the market.

It should be noted that the process of FIG. 141 is one process in the main process, so it is performed every game. Then, when the slot machine 10 and the testing machine are electrically connected, a pattern stop signal (test signal) is output to the testing machine every game by the process of FIG.
On the other hand, even when the slot machine 10 and the testing machine are not connected, for example, even when the slot machine 10 is installed in the hall, the process of FIG. 141 is executed every game. However, since the slot machine 10 and the testing machine are not connected, the symbol stop signal (test signal) is not output to the outside.

FIG. 143 is a flow chart showing the start of standby effect (M_TARPIC_EXE) in step S765 in FIG.
First, in step S821, the standby effect type is obtained. This process is a process of storing the data of the standby effect type (_WK_PRD) of the address "F09E(H)" in the A register.
Next, in step S822, it is determined whether or not the standby effect type is "0". Here, it is determined whether or not the A register value is "0". When it is determined that the A register value is "0", the processing according to this flowchart is ended, and when it is determined that it is not "0", the process proceeds to step S823. When the standby effect type is "0", it means that there is no standby effect when the start switch 41 is operated, and when it is not "0", it means that there is a standby effect.

In step S823, "-2" is stored in the search counter update correction data. This process is a process of storing "FE(H)" in the search counter update correction data (_WK_PLS_REV) at the address "F09F(H)". "FE(H)" is data for reverse rotation.
"Control command set 1" in the next step S824 is processing for transmitting a command to the sub-control board 80, like step S303 in FIG. 41 (eleventh embodiment), for example. Here, the information of the standby effect number (_NB_PRD_NO) of the address "F0A0 (H)" or the information of the triple role number (_NB_TRIO) of the address "F0A1 (H)" is transmitted to the sub-control board 80.
In the next step S825, "0" is stored in the trio number (_NB_TRIO) of "F0A1(H)".

Next, proceeding to step S826, based on the reel effect data table (TBL_TARPIC_DAT), # # reel pattern numbers (for stop position) of addresses "F054 (H)", "F05F (H)" and "F06A (H)" The specified position (stop position of the reel 31) is saved in (_NB_RL#_STPPIC).
FIG. 144 shows a reel effect data table (TBL_TARPIC_DAT) stored in the ROM 54. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 144, the reel effect data table (TBL_TARPIC_DAT) stores designated positions (stop positions) corresponding to standby effect numbers. And this "specified position (stop position)" corresponds to the pattern number.
For example, in the figure, the addresses "1000 (H)" to "1002 (H)" are the stop symbol designation positions of each reel 31 when the standby effect number (_NB_PRD_NO) is "1"("blackBAR" aligned). indicate. The value ``8(H)'' stored at the address ``1000(H)'' indicates the designated stop symbol position on the left reel 31, and the value ``8(H)'' at the address ``1001(H)''"3(H)" of the address "1002 (H)" indicates the stop symbol designation position of the right reel 31.

Also, the symbol number during forward rotation and the symbol number during reverse rotation are different. In the twenty-third embodiment, the index (also referred to as “initial” or “detection piece”) provided on each reel 31 covers a range of approximately half (approximately 180 degrees) of the entire circumference (360 degrees) of the reel 31. is formed in Then, the current position of the reel 31 can be grasped when the reel 31 rotates about half a turn by detection/non-detection of the index.
Although the details will be described later, in steps S897 and S899 of FIG. 155 (reel drive control), the reference symbol number is set to "10" when the rise of the #th reel motor index is detected (when the index is detected). ing. Similarly, the reference pattern number is set to "0" when the trailing edge of the #th reel motor index is detected.

Therefore, when the reel 31 is rotating in the forward direction, the symbol number "10" (for example, "replay" for the left reel 31 in FIG. 114) is displayed at the moment the rise of the #th reel motor index is detected. It is judged that it has passed through the middle stage.
Similarly, when the reel 31 is rotating in the forward direction, the symbol number “0” (for example, “Replay” for the left reel 31 in FIG. ) passes through the middle stage.

On the other hand, in the case where the reel 31 is rotating in the reverse direction, when it is determined that the symbol of symbol number "10" is passing at the moment when the rise of the #th reel motor index is detected, in reality, As shown in FIG. 114, the symbol of symbol number "1" in forward rotation has passed. Similarly, when it is determined that the symbol of symbol number "0" has passed at the moment when the trailing edge of the #th reel motor index is detected, the symbol number "11" in forward rotation is actually selected. You will pass through the middle stage.
In this way, as shown in FIG. 114, the symbol numbers passing through the middle row are different when the #th reel motor index rises and falls depending on whether the reel 31 is rotating forward or backward (9 symbols). there is a gap). Therefore, in the reel effect data table of FIG. 144, the stop position is stored in consideration of the deviation. For example, if the reverse rotation of the reel 31 is determined to be stopped at symbol number "8", it can actually be stopped at symbol number "3" as shown in FIG.

The reel effect data table in FIG. 144 defines stop symbol positions during standby effect, that is, during reverse rotation of the reels 31 . For example, in FIG. 144, if the stop symbol position at the standby performance number "1" is set to "8, 8, 3", in fact, "black BAR (number 3 during forward rotation)"-"black BAR (No. 3 during forward rotation)--Black BAR (No. 8 during forward rotation) stops.
The same applies to "2" to "8" other than the standby effect number "1".
For example, when the standby effect number is "2", the stop symbol positions are "18, 18, 8", but the symbol number "18" during reverse rotation is symbol number "13" (red 7) during forward rotation. , and the symbol number "8" for reverse rotation corresponds to the symbol number "3" (red 7) for forward rotation.
As described above, in step S826 in FIG. 143, reel pattern numbers (for stop positions) are stored based on the reel effect data table (TBL_TARPIC_DAT).

The description returns to FIG.
After step S826, the process advances to step S827 to save the specified symbol position search standby time. It should be noted that the "specified symbol position search waiting time" is, as described above, the waiting time ( In other words, it is roughly the rotation time of the reel 31).
FIG. 145 is a diagram showing reel effect execution timer table 1 (TBL_TARPIC_TM1) to reel effect execution timer table 8 (TBL_TARPIC_TM8) stored in ROM 54. FIG. The data values shown in FIG. 145 are decimal numbers. Reel effect execution timer table 1 (TBL_TARPIC_TM1) to reel effect execution timer table 8 (TBL_TARPIC_TM8) correspond to standby effect numbers "1" to "8", respectively. For example, when the standby effect number is "1", the reel effect execution timer table 1 (TBL_TARPIC_TM1) is used.
145, for example, addresses "1018(H)" and "1019(H)", "101A(H)" and "101B(H)", and "101C(H)" and "101D(H)" indicate the timer values of the left reel 31, middle reel 31, and right reel 31, respectively. In FIG. 145, the timer value of the left reel 31 is used as a reference, and how much the timer value is larger than the timer value of the left reel 31 is shown. Each timer value of "1019 (H)", "101A (H)" and "101B (H)", "101C (H)" and "101D (H)" is "14112 (D), 14782 (D) , 16122(D)".

This timer value specifies the waiting time until deceleration of the reel 31 is started. For example, when the standby effect number is "1", the left reel 31 can start decelerating after "14112 (D)" has elapsed from the start of the standby effect, that is, after "1.117×14112=about 15763 ms" has elapsed. ing.
This timer value is also subtracted during acceleration of the reels 31 in the standby effect. As shown in FIG. 156, which will be described later, the acceleration processing of the reel 31 requires a total of "62 times×2 interrupts=about 139 ms" for the 1st to 8th steps. The timer value of each reel 31 is set at least to a time longer than the time required for this acceleration process.
Further, in the reel effect execution timer tables 1 to 4, the standby time of the middle reel 31 is set longer than the standby time of the left reel 31 . Furthermore, the standby time of the right reel 31 is set longer than the standby time of the middle reel 31 . As a result, when the reel 31 stops, it stops in the order of "left→middle→right". Further, in the reel effect execution timer tables 5 to 8, the standby time of the middle reel 31 is set longer than the standby time of the right reel 31. - 特許庁Furthermore, the standby time of the left reel 31 is set longer than the standby time of the middle reel 31 . As a result, when the reel 31 stops, it stops in the order of "right→middle→left".
Thus, by setting the waiting time of each reel 31 in the reel effect execution timer table, the stop order of the reels 31 can be determined, and the stop order and stop timing of the reels 31 can be given regularity. .
On the other hand, if the waiting time of each reel 31 is not set, it becomes impossible to secure a sufficient constant speed time after the reel 31 is started, and it becomes impossible to output a necessary effect while the reel 31 is rotating. . Also, if the reels 31 are stopped in the order in which the designated symbol positions have reached the stop positions, the reels 31 may stop randomly, for example, in the order of "right→left→middle".

Furthermore, the difference between the waiting time of the reel 31 that stops first and the waiting time of the reel 31 that stops second is "670" interrupt in the reel effect execution timer table 1, and ""1008" interrupt, and "1176" interrupt is set in the reel effect execution timer tables 5-8. The number of interrupts per rotation of the reel 31 is "672" as described above. Therefore, after the first reel 31 stops, the second reel 31 is set to stop after approximately one or more rotations.
Furthermore, the difference between the waiting time of the reel 31 that stops second and the waiting time of the reel 31 that stops third is "1340" in the reel effect execution timer table 1 and "1340" in the reel effect execution timer tables 2-4. "1008" interrupt, "1176" interrupt in the reel effect execution timer tables 5 to 7, and "1848" interrupt in the reel effect execution timer table 8 are set. Therefore, after the second reel 31 stops, the third reel 31 is set to stop after approximately two or more rotations.

For example, even if the middle reel 31 is out of step after the left reel 31 has stopped (it is determined that an abnormality has occurred by the second reel rotation failure detection counter), the set timer value remains unchanged during this period as well. subtracted. Then, when the middle reel 31 cannot be stopped even if the timer value becomes "0" because it is difficult to reach a constant speed after stepping out, the timer value of the right reel 31 becomes "0". , the right reel 31 is stopped before the middle reel 31 as an irregular. Therefore, the stopping order of the reels 31 in this case is "left→right→middle". By responding in this way to irregular times such as step-out, it is possible to prevent the time required for the standby effect from being carelessly extended due to step-out. Thereby, the time until the game can be started can be shortened.

Furthermore, the fourth timer value of each reel effect execution timer table, for example, in the reel effect execution timer table 1, the values stored by the addresses "101E (H)" and "101F (H)" are wait time. For example, when the standby effect number is "1", after the complete stop, it becomes possible to restart after "1.117×5371=approximately 5999 ms" has elapsed.
Then, in step S827 of FIG. 143, for example, when the standby effect number is "1", the first reel designated symbol position search waiting time (_TM2_TAR1_WAIT) of addresses "F039 (H)" and "F03A (H)" is set to " 14112 (D)" is stored, and "14782 (D)" is stored in the second reel specified symbol position search waiting time (_TM2_TAR2_WAIT) of addresses "F03B (H)" and "F03C (H)", and address "F03D" is stored. (H)” and “F03E (H)” store “16122 (D)” in the third reel specified symbol position search waiting time (_TM2_TAR3_WAIT).

In the next step S828, acceleration start is set. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Disable interrupts.
(2) Store "10000011 (B)" in the A register.
(3) Store the A register value in the first reel drive number (_WK_RL1_STS) at address "F04D(H)".
(4) Store the A register value in the second reel drive number (_WK_RL2_STS) at address "F058(H)".
(5) Store the A register value in the third reel drive number (_WK_RL3_STS) at address "F063(H)".
(6) Allow interrupts.
This is because the reels 31 do not start rotating all at once if an interrupt process occurs between (3) to (5). For this reason, interrupt processing is prevented from occurring while the reel drive number is being updated.
With the above processing, the first reel drive number (_WK_RL1_STS) to the third reel drive number (_WK_RL3_STS) all become "10000011 (B)". Acceleration of each reel 31 is actually performed.

The lower four digits of the reel driving number are "0011(B)" at the start of acceleration, "0010(B)" at acceleration, and "0101(B)" at constant speed.
After the reels 31 reach a constant speed, the constant speed state is maintained until the reel designated symbol position search standby time set in step S827 is reached, and when the reel designated symbol position search standby time becomes "0", Start decelerating the reel. When the reel 31 starts to decelerate, the reel drive number becomes "0100(B)", and becomes "0001(B)" when it shifts to the deceleration state. When the reel 31 stops, the reel drive number becomes "0000(B)".

In the next step S829, an end check of all reels 31 is executed. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Store "0" in the A register.
(2) A logical sum (OR) operation is performed between the A register value and the first reel driving state (_WK_RL1_STS). Then, the result of the logical sum is stored in the A register.
(3) A logical sum operation is performed between the A register value and the second reel driving state (_WK_RL2_STS). Then, the result of the logical sum is stored in the A register.
(4) OR operation of the A register value and the third reel driving state (_WK_RL3_STS). Then, the result of the logical sum is stored in the A register.
(5) A logical product (AND) operation of the A register value and "01111111 (B)" is performed.

Here, when all the reels 31 stop, the first reel driving state (_WK_RL1_STS), the second reel driving state (_WK_RL2_STS), and the third reel driving state (_WK_RL3_STS) all become "10000000 (B)" or " 00000000 (B)”. Therefore, it is only when all the reels 31 are stopped that the calculation result in the above calculation (5) becomes "0".
In addition, in the calculation of (5) above, the input number for calculating the AND for determining whether or not all the reels 31 have stopped is not limited to "01111111 (B)", but "00001111 (B)". However, a calculation result similar to the above can be obtained. In other words, it is possible to determine whether or not all the reels 31 have stopped by determining whether or not the lower 4 bits are "0".
Also, in this embodiment, since the actual reel drive control is executed once every two interrupts, the most significant bit of the reel drive status (_WK_RL#_STS) changes to "0" or "1" for each interrupt process. Become. Therefore, not limited to such a specification, for example, when the most significant bit is always "0", "11111111 (11111111 ( B)” can also be used.

In the next step S830, it is determined whether or not all the reels 31 have stopped. In this process, when the calculation result of (5) above is "0" (when the zero flag is "1"), it is determined that all the reels 31 have stopped.
When it is determined in step S830 that all reels 31 have stopped, the process proceeds to step S831, and when it is determined in step S830 that all reels 31 have not stopped, the above process of step S829 is executed again.
At step S831, the waiting time for the end of the effect is set. This process is a process of acquiring the effect completion waiting time corresponding to the standby effect number in the current standby effect from the reel effect execution timer table (TBL_TARPIC_TM1-8) and storing it in the BC register. For example, when the standby effect number in the current standby effect is "1", it is stored by the addresses "101E (H)" and "101F (H)" of the reel effect execution timer table 1 (TBL_TARPIC_TM1) in FIG. The value "5371 (D)" (waiting time at the end of the effect) is stored in the BC register.

Next, the flow advances to step S832 to execute a 2-byte time wait. This process is a process of subtracting "1" from the BC register value for each interrupt process until the BC register value becomes "0".
Then, when the BC register value becomes "0", the wait for 2 bytes is ended and the process proceeds to step S833.
In step S833, a standby effect type RWM address is set. This process is a process of storing "F0A0 (H)" which is the address of the waiting effect number (_NB_PRO_NO) in the HL register.
In the next step S834, it is determined whether or not the value stored at the address indicated by the HL register value (that is, the standby effect number (_NB_PRO_NO)) is "4". When it is judged to be "4", the processing according to this flowchart is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined not to be "4", the process proceeds to step S835.
Here, when the standby effect number "4" is selected as the standby effect, as shown in FIG. 144, after the "red 7" is aligned, the "black BAR" is aligned. Therefore, when the standby effect number is "4", the process proceeds to the next process without clearing the data relating to the standby effect start process or initializing the symbol number.

On the other hand, when proceeding to step S835, search for the waiting effect type (_WK_PRD) of the address "F09E (H)", the waiting effect number (_NB_PRO_NO) of the address "F0A0 (H)", and the address "F09F (H)" Clear the counter update correction data (_WK_PLS_REV) for Specifically, a process of storing "0" in each address is executed.
Next, in step S836, the data of the pattern number (for passing position) and the pattern number (for stop position) are initialized.
in particular,
1st reel pattern number (for passing position) (_NB_RL1_PASPIC) at address “F053 (H)”,
1st reel pattern number (for stop position) (_NB_RL1_STPPIC) at address “F054 (H)”,
2nd reel pattern number (for passing position) (_NB_RL2_PASPIC) at address “F05E (H)”,
Second reel pattern number (for stop position) (_NB_RL2_STPPIC) at address "F05F (H)",
3rd reel pattern number (for passing position) (_NB_RL3_PASPIC) at address “F069 (H)”,
Third reel pattern number (for stop position) at address "F06A (H)" (_NB_RL3_STPPIC)
, the initial value "11111111 (B)" (FF (H)) is stored.

The flow then advances to step S837 to set a random delay time. This processing consists of the first reel rotation start waiting counter (_CT_RL1_WAIT) at address "F056 (H)", the second reel rotation start waiting counter (_CT_RL2_WAIT) at address "F061 (H)", and the counter at address "F06C (H)". A value determined by lottery is set in each of the third reel rotation start waiting counters (_CT_RL3_WAIT). Specifically, any one value from "0" to "335(D)" is determined, and the value is stored in each of the above three addresses. When a value is stored in the above address, "1" is subtracted for each interrupt processing, and when "0" is reached, the reel 31 can be restarted.

The standby effect start process shown in FIG. 143 is executed before the determination of whether or not the minimum game time has elapsed (step S766), as shown in FIG. In other words, the standby effect start process is executed even if the minimum game time has not elapsed. Then, after the standby effect is completed, it is determined whether or not the minimum game time has passed in step S766. In addition, in the twenty-third embodiment, since the standby effect is executed by the timer value shown in FIG. 145, the minimum game time (4.1 seconds) has definitely passed when the standby effect ends.
In this way, when the waiting effect is executed, it is started without waiting for the minimum playing time, so even if the waiting effect is executed at a time close to the closing time of the hall, the player may feel uncomfortable. can be reduced.

FIG. 146 is a flow chart showing reel stop acceptance check (M_STOP_CHK) in step S752 of FIG.
First, in step S791, it is determined whether or not the waiting time (_TM2_WAIT) stored by addresses "F041(H)" and "F042(H)" is "0" (whether or not the zero flag is "1"). to decide. When it is "0", the process proceeds to step S792, and when it is not "0", the processing according to this flowchart is terminated. In other words, as long as the waiting time (_TM2_WAIT) stored by the addresses "F041(H)" and "F042(H)" is not "0", even if the stop switch 42 is operated, the reel 31 will not be stopped. don't run

The reason for such control is as follows.
In the twenty-third embodiment, non-RT or 1BB non-internal during RT1 wins 1BB with a relatively high probability (with "19930/65536"), as shown in FIGS. When 1BB is won and 1BB is inside, the 1BB symbol combination is stopped and displayed in a game in which a small winning combination or replay is not won in the relevant game (game where the winning and replay condition device number is "0"). It becomes possible.
On the other hand, in the twenty-third embodiment, AT is executed in a 1BB game. Therefore, when it is not AT, it is not desired to win 1BB even if it is inside 1BB. Even if 1BB wins during non-AT, the 1BB game itself is executed, but AT is not executed. In addition, since AT lottery is not executed during 1BB operation, 1BB operation during non-AT is disadvantageous to the player. When the 1BB is activated, the ball output rate is slightly higher than when the 1BB is not activated, as described above, but since it is a game period in which the AT lottery is not executed, it is substantially disadvantageous to the player.

Therefore, when the stop display of the symbol combination of 1BB is not permitted, specifically, when the main game state is not "3" (AT preparation), or even if the main game state is "3", AT standby When the flag is not "0", the symbol combination of 1BB is tense in order to prevent the symbol combination of 1BB from being stopped and displayed as much as possible (when the two reels 31 are stopped, the symbol "blue BAR" related to 1BB is displayed. In this case, the stopping operation is not effective even if the third stop switch 42 is operated.

At step S791, it is determined that the standby time is "0", and the process proceeds to step S792, where all motors are checked for index passage. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) The first reel symbol number (for passing position) (_NB_RL1_PASPIC) is stored in the A register.
(2) A logical sum (OR) operation is performed between the A register value and the second reel symbol number (for passing position) (_NB_RL2_PASPIC). Then, the calculation result is stored in the A register.
(3) A logical sum (OR) operation is performed between the A register value and the third reel pattern number (for passing position) (_NB_RL3_PASPIC). Then, the calculation result is stored in the A register.
(4) Add "1" to the A register value.

Here, the 1st reel pattern number (for passing position) (_NB_RL1_PASPIC), the A register value and the 2nd reel pattern number (for passing position) (_NB_RL2_PASPIC), and the 3rd reel pattern number (for passing position) (_NB_RL3_PASPIC) are , is "FF(H)", that is, "11111111(B)" before there is a change in the #th reel motor index.
Therefore, if at least one data is "11111111(B)", the calculation result up to the above (3) is "11111111(B)", and adding "1" as shown in (4) results in "0". become. Therefore, for at least one reel 31, before the #th reel motor index changes, the above calculation result is "0", and for all the reels 31, after the #th reel motor index changes, the above calculation result becomes "0". The calculation result is a value other than "0".

As described above, when there is a change in the #th reel motor index, the #th reel pattern number (for passing position) is set to "10 (D)" (when rising) or "0" (when falling). time) is stored. Then, every time it is determined that the symbol has moved by one symbol, "1" is subtracted from the #th reel symbol number (for the passing position). In this way, after the #th reel motor index is changed, the #th reel pattern number (for passing position) changes from "0" (00000000 (B)) to "19 (D)" (00010011 (B)). will circulate. Therefore, after the #th reel motor index changes, the logical sum operation of the above (1) to (3) will not result in "11111111 (B)".

Further, as another method of the above operation (4), there is a method of performing a logical product (AND) operation with "11100000 (B)". With this method, it is possible to determine "No" in step S793, which will be described later, when the calculation result is not "0". Furthermore, as another method of the above operation (4), there is a method of performing an operation by shifting "1" bit to the left. With this method, it is possible to determine "No" in step S793, which will be described later, when the calculation result is not "0". That is, before the #th reel motor index changes, the upper 3 bits of the #th reel pattern number (for passing position) are "111". It is determined whether or not at least one bit of them is "1". If there is "1" in the upper 3 bits, it is not possible to accept the stop of the stop switch 42 in step S793, which will be described later. becomes.

Next, in step S793, it is determined whether or not the stop switch 42 can be stopped. This judgment is made by judging whether or not the calculation of the above (4) in step S792 is "0" (whether the zero flag is "1"). In other words, when there is a change in the #th reel motor index for all the reels 31, acceptance of stopping the stop switch 42 is permitted.
When it is determined in step S793 that it is possible to stop the stop switch 42, the process advances to step S794.

In step S794, the operation of the stop switch 42 (corresponding to the reel 31 not yet controlled to stop) is performed based on the values of the D0 to D2 bits of the input port rise data A (_PT_IN_A_UP) of the address "F017 (H)". determine whether it has been done. When it is determined that the stop switch 42 has been operated, the process advances to step S795, and when it is determined that the stop switch 42 has not been operated, the processing according to this flow chart ends.
In step S795, the stop position is determined based on the combination lottery result of the current game (addresses "F0A9(H)" and "F0AA(H)") and the reel position at the moment the stop switch 42 is operated.
Next, the process advances to step S796 to shift to the stop pattern set (M_STOPPIC_SET).

FIG. 147 is a flow chart showing the stop symbol set (M_STOPPIC_SET) in step S796 of FIG.
As described above, this flowchart restricts the stop display of the 1BB symbol combination when the 1BB symbol combination is tense and the situation permits the stop display of the 1BB symbol combination. However, under a situation in which the 1BB symbol combination should not be stopped and displayed, the waiting time until the third stop switch 42 becomes effective is set. When the waiting time is set here and the third stop switch 42 is operated before the waiting time elapses, the result is "No" in step S791 of FIG. 146, and the stop control of the third reel 31 is not executed.

First, in step S801, it is determined whether or not the stop operation of the second stop switch 42 has been performed. Here, in step S794 of FIG. 146, it is determined whether or not the stop switch 42 determined to have risen is the second stop switch 42 (second operated stop switch 42). When it is determined in step S801 that it is after the second stop, the process proceeds to step S802, and when it is determined that it is not after the second stop, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

In step S802, it is determined whether or not 1BB can be won. Specifically, at the time of the second stop, it is determined whether or not the 1BB symbol combination is tense on the activated line. For example, when judging whether or not the tenpai has occurred, after the second reel 31 stops, both the "blue BAR" (symbols constituting the symbol combination of 1BB) of the first reel 31 and the second reel 31 are on the active line. When it is stopped, it is determined that 1BB is tenpai (1BB can win). On the other hand, even before the second reel 31 stops (regardless of whether it has stopped), it may be determined whether or not to continue. For example, when the first reel 31 is stopped, the "blue bar" is stopped on the effective line, and the second stop switch 42 is operated at an operation timing when the "blue bar" of the second reel 31 can be stopped on the effective line. When it is done, it is judged that 1BB is tenpai (1BB can win).
When it is determined that 1BB can be won, the process proceeds to step S803, and when it is determined that 1BB cannot be won, the processing according to this flow chart is terminated.

In step S803, it is determined whether or not the winning and replay condition device number (_NB_CND_NOR) of the current game is "0". Here, it is determined whether or not the value of the address "F0A9(H)" is "0". When it is determined that the winning and replay condition device number is "0", the process proceeds to step S804, and when it is determined that it is not "0", the processing according to this flowchart is terminated.
Therefore, even if it is determined in step S802 that 1BB is tenpai, the waiting time is not set in step S810 because "No" is obtained in step S803 in the game when a minor combination is won. In the 23rd embodiment, in a game in which a minor winning combination is won, minor winning combination priority control is performed (in a game in which winning of 1BB is carried over, in a game in which a minor winning combination is won, priority is given to winning of a small winning combination, and 1BB is not won). is executed, 1BB is never won. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide a waiting time in a game in which a minor winning combination is won.
In step S804, the accessory condition device number (_NB_CRRT_BNS) is obtained. This process is a process of acquiring the value of the address "F0AA(H)" and storing it in the A register.
In the next step S805, it is determined whether or not the obtained accessory condition device number is less than "2", in other words, whether or not it is "1". Here, a comparison operation is performed between the value of the A register and "2". End the processing according to the flowchart.

In addition, in the twenty-third embodiment, unless the accessory condition device number is "1", the pattern combination of 1BB is not tense. Therefore, when the accessory condition device number is "0" in the current game, it is determined "No" in step S802. Therefore, in step S805, it is not determined whether or not the accessory condition device number is "1" (of course, in step S805, it is determined whether or not the accessory condition device number is "1". may be acceptable), and it is determined whether or not it is less than "2".

In step S806, the main game state number is obtained. This process is a process of storing the value of the main game state (_NB_GAM_STS) at the address "F07E(H)" in the A register. Then, in step S807, it is determined whether or not the value of the A register is "3" (preparing for AT). Here, a comparison operation is performed between the A register value and "3", and if the A register value and "3" are the same value, the determination is "Yes". When determining that the main game state number is "3", the process proceeds to step S808, and when determining that it is not "3", the process proceeds to step S809.

In step S808, the value of the AT wait counter (_CT_AT_WAIT) at address "F098(H)" is obtained. Then, it is determined whether or not the AT standby counter value is "0". When the AT standby counter value is "0", the processing according to this flowchart is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the AT standby counter is not "0", the process proceeds to step S809.
In step S809, "896(D)" is stored in the HL register. Next, in step S810, the HL register value (896(D)) is stored in the waiting time (_TM2_WAIT) of addresses "F041(H)" and "F042(H)". Then, the processing according to this flow chart ends.
When the standby time is stored in the addresses "F041(H)" and "F042(H)", "1" is subtracted for each interrupt processing. Also, it is determined whether or not the time set here has become "0" in step S791 of FIG.
In the above processing, when the main game state is "3" and the AT standby counter is "0", the standby time is not stored. That is, in this case, a 1BB prize is permitted.

FIG. 148 is a flow chart showing the game end check process (M_GAME_CHK) in step S753 of FIG.
First, in step S941, main game state game end processing is executed. This process is a process of determining whether or not the condition for ending the advantageous section is satisfied, and is a process shown in FIG. 149 to be described later.
Next, in step S942, 1BB operation management is executed. The 1BB operation management is a process of determining whether or not conditions for ending the 1BB game are satisfied when the current game is a 1BB game. Specifically, based on whether or not the D2 bit of the operation status flag (in the twenty-third embodiment, like the eleventh embodiment, includes "FL_ACTION" shown in FIG. 35) is "1", Determine whether 1BB is in operation.
When it is determined that 1BB is in operation, the obtainable number of cards during 1BB operation ("_CT_BIG_PAY" at address "F00E(H)") is read, and it is determined whether or not it is "0".
Then, when it is determined that the obtainable number has become "0" (when the obtainable number satisfies the 1BB operation end condition), a process of clearing the D2 bit of the operation state flag is executed.

Next, in step S943, it is determined whether or not the RB is in operation. Here, it is determined whether or not the RB is in operation by determining whether or not the D3 bit of the operating state flag (FIG. 35) is "0". When it is determined that the RB is not in operation (the RB operation state flag is "0"), the process proceeds to step S945, and when it is determined that the RB is in operation, the process proceeds to step S944.

In step S944, RB operation management is executed. In this process, it is determined whether or not the number of games played when RB is activated at address "F00F(H)" reaches "12" or the number of wins when RB is activated at address "F010(H)" reaches "8". However, when it is determined that the number of times the RB has been played is less than "12" and the number of times the minor combination has been won is less than "8", the process of step S944 is terminated and the process proceeds to step S945. On the other hand, in step S944, when it is determined that the number of times RB has been played has reached either "12" or the number of winnings of minor winning combination has reached "8", the D3 bit of the operating state flag is set to "0". , the process proceeds to step S945.
A step S945 executes advantageous section clear counter management. This processing is the processing shown in FIG. 51 or FIG. 52 shown in the eleventh embodiment, and includes the processing of updating the advantageous interval clear counter and the difference number counter, and the initialization processing when the conditions for ending the advantageous interval are satisfied. Execute. Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

FIG. 149 is a flow chart showing the processing at the end of the main game state game in step S941 of FIG.
First, in step S951, it is determined whether or not the advantageous section clear counter (_CT_ADV_CLR) of the addresses "F07A(H)" and "F07B(H)" is less than "600". If it is determined that it is less than "600", the process proceeds to step S952, and if it is determined that it is not less than "600", the process proceeds to step S955.
In step S952, it is determined whether or not the main game state 1 (advantageous section normal (non-AT)). This process is a process of determining whether or not the main game state number of the address "F07E(H)" is "1". When it is determined that the main game state is 1, the process proceeds to step S957, and when it is determined that the main game state is not 1, the process proceeds to step S953.

In step S953, it is determined whether or not it is the main game state 5 (AT withdrawal). This process is a process of determining whether or not the main game state number of the address "F07E(H)" is "5". When it is determined that the main game state is 5, the process proceeds to step S954, and when it is determined that the main game state is not 5, the processing according to this flowchart is terminated.
In step S954, it is determined whether or not the AT withdrawal counter is "0". This process is a process of determining whether or not the value of the address "F09D(H)" is "0". When it is determined that the AT withdrawal counter is "0", the process proceeds to step S957, and when it is determined that it is not "0", the processing according to this flowchart is terminated.

On the other hand, when proceeding from step S951 to step S955, it is determined whether or not the conditions for ending the main game state 4 are satisfied. In this process, it is determined whether or not the obtainable number of cards at address "F00E (H)" when 1BB is activated is "0". It is judged that it satisfies If it is determined that the conditions for ending the main game state 4 are satisfied, the process proceeds to step S956, and if it is determined that the conditions for ending the main game state 4 are not satisfied, the processing according to this flowchart is terminated.
In step S956, it is determined whether or not the ending counter has changed from "1" to "0". This process determines whether or not the ending counter of the address "F097(H)" has been updated from "1" to "0" in the current game. If it is determined that the ending counter has changed from "1" to "0", the process proceeds to step S957, and if it is determined that the ending counter has not changed from "1" to "0", the processing according to this flow chart ends.
In step S957, advantageous section end preparation (M_ADVEND_STBY) is executed. This process is the process shown in FIG. 150, which will be described later. Then, after executing preparation for the end of the advantageous section, the processing according to this flowchart is terminated.

FIG. 150 is a flow chart showing the advantageous section end preparation (M_ADVEND_STNBY) in step S957 of FIG.
In step S961, "1" is stored in the advantageous section clear counter. This process executes the following processes.
(1) Store "1 (H)" in the HL register. As a result, the H register value becomes "0 (H)" and the L register value becomes "1 (H)".
(2) Next, the L register value "1 (H)" is stored in the lower address (F07B (H)) of the advantageous section clear counter, and the H register value "0 (H)" is stored in the upper address (F07A (H)). ” is stored.
Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends. As described above, the upper byte of the advantageous section clear counter is "00000000 (B)" and the lower byte is "00000001 (B)".

By storing "1" in the advantageous interval clear counter through the above advantageous interval end preparations, it becomes unnecessary to store data indicating whether or not the advantageous interval end condition is satisfied at a predetermined address of the RWM 53 .
If the data indicating whether or not the termination condition of the advantageous section is satisfied is stored at a predetermined address of the RWM 53, the capacity of the RWM 53 will be compressed accordingly.
Further, when the conditions for ending the advantageous section are satisfied, a process of storing data indicating that the conditions for ending the advantageous section are satisfied in a predetermined address of the RWM 53 is required. Furthermore, it is necessary to read the data stored in the predetermined address every game and determine whether or not the condition for ending the advantageous section is satisfied. Therefore, that much program capacity is required, and the capacity of the ROM 54 is squeezed.

On the other hand, in the twenty-third embodiment, only "1" is stored in the advantageous interval clear counter in preparation for the end of the advantageous interval. When the process is executed, the value before the subtraction is "1" and the value after the subtraction is "0". , the RWM 53 can be cleared at the end of the advantageous section.

FIG. 151 is a flowchart showing interrupt processing (I_INTR) in the twenty-third embodiment, and is a flowchart corresponding to FIG. 53 of the eleventh embodiment. In FIG. 151, the same step numbers are assigned to the same processes as in FIG.
In FIG. 151, the reel drive control in step S461 of FIG. 53 is referred to as reel drive management (I_REEL_ADM) in step S841, and this specific process will be described in detail.
Also, in FIG. 151, a test signal output is provided in step S842. Note that the process is omitted in FIG. 53 of the eleventh embodiment, and the eleventh embodiment is not necessarily provided with no test signal output.
The output of the test signal in step S842 may include the output of the data of the push order and the indicated position of the reel 31 in the current game. Also, for example, the output of condition device information and the like may be included, but the description is omitted in the twenty-third embodiment.

Furthermore, in the twenty-third embodiment, the interrupt cycle is "1.117" ms, which is different from the other embodiments (2.235 ms).
Here, when the interrupt cycle is "2.235" ms, drive control of the reel 31 is executed for each interrupt (for example, step S461 in FIG. 53 in the eleventh embodiment), but the Thus, when the interrupt period is "1.117" ms, the driving control of the reel 31 (the processing after step S872 in FIG. 154 described later) is executed once every two interrupts.

FIG. 152 is a flow chart showing reel driving management (I_REEL_ADM) in step S841 of FIG.
Here, the program shown in FIG. 152 (including FIGS. 153, 154 to 155, 157 and 159 which will be described later) is used not only for reel control during standby performance but also for normal reel control. Therefore, it is possible to execute normal reel control and standby effect (reverse rotation of reels 31) by the program shown in FIG. 152 without providing a program dedicated to standby effect.
In FIG. 152, the number of reels is set in step S851. Note that the number of reels is "3". Here, a process of storing "00000100 (B)" in the C register is performed.
At the next step S852, reel control data address setting (C_RLDAT_SET) is executed. This process is a process shown in FIG. 153, which will be described later, and is a process of storing the value of the reel driving state to be controlled or its address in each register. By the processing of step S852, each register value becomes as follows.
A register value: Reel drive state (_WK_RL#_STS) value of reel 31 to be controlled DE register value: Address of reel drive state (_WK_RL#_STS) of reel 31 to be controlled HL register value: Control target Address of reel driving status (_WK_RL#_STS) of reel 31

In the next step S853, reel drive control (I_REEL_CTL) is executed. This processing is processing for actually accelerating, constant speed, decelerating, stopping, etc. of the reels, and is processing shown in FIGS. 154 and 155 described later.
In the next step S854, it is determined whether or not the processes of steps S852 and S853 have been executed for all the reels 31 or not. This process first shifts the C register value to the right by "1". For example, since the initial value is "00000100(B)" as described above, it becomes "00000010(B)" by shifting "1" to the right in the first step S854. Next, it is determined whether or not the value after shifting to the right by "1" is "0". When it is determined to be "0", it is determined that the processes of steps S852 and S853 have been executed for all the reels 31, and the process according to this flowchart ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not "0", the process returns to step S852.

FIG. 153 is a flow chart showing reel control data address setting (C_RLDAT_SET) in step S852 of FIG.
First, in step S861, a start RWM address request is set. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Store the address of the first reel drive state (_WK_RL1_STS), that is, "F04D(H)" in the HL register.
(2) Store the C register value in the A register. The initial value of the C register value is "00000100(B)" as described above.
(3) Shift the A register value to the right by "1" and store the result in the A register. As a result, the A register value becomes "00000010 (B)" in the first operation.
(4) Multiply the A register value by "11(D)" and store the multiplication result in the A register. Here, multiplying "00000010(B)", ie, "2(D)", by "11(D)" results in "22(D)", ie, "16(H)".

This "11(D)" is based on the address interval stored in the RWM 53. FIG. Specifically, the address for storing the drive state of the first reel is "F04D(H)", and various information about the first reel is stored up to "F057(H)". Further, the address for storing the drive state of the second reel is "F058(H)", and various information about the second reel is stored up to "F062(H)". Furthermore, the address for storing the driving state of the third reel is "F063(H)", and various information about the third reel is stored up to "F06D(H)".
In this way, the interval between the address "F04D(H)" storing the first reel driving state and the address "F058(H)" storing the second reel driving state is "11" addresses. This is because the interval from the address "F058(H)" storing the reel drive state to the address "F063(H)" storing the third reel drive state is "11" addresses. As a result, by repeatedly executing the same processing in subsequent processing, it is possible to acquire, for example, the reel driving state information of the reel to be controlled.

Further, various pieces of information for each reel 31 are also arranged at the same intervals. For example, the address of the first reel drive pulse output counter is the address "F04E(H)" obtained by adding "2" to the address "F04D(H)" in the first reel drive state. Similarly, the address of the second reel drive pulse output counter is the address "F05A(H)" obtained by adding "2" to the address "F058(H)" in the second reel drive state. Further, similarly, the address of the third reel drive pulse output counter is the address "F065 (H)" obtained by adding "2" to the address "F063 (H)" in the third reel drive state. The same is true for other information.
As a result, for example, in step S881 (FIG. 154), which will be described later, "6" is added to the address of the #th reel driving state to calculate the address of the #th reel pattern number (for passing position) (_NB_RL#_PASPIC). However, for the first reel 31, for example, "6" is added to the first reel drive state address "F04D (H)" to obtain the first reel symbol number (for passing position) address "F053 (H)". )” can be requested. Similarly, for the second reel 31, "6" is added to the second reel driving state address "F058(H)" to obtain the second reel pattern number (for passing position) address "F05E(H)". can be asked for.
In this way, by repeatedly executing the same module, processing for three reels can be executed.

Next, the process advances to step S862 to set designated address data. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Add the A register value to the HL register value and store the addition result in the HL register. In the first calculation, the A register value is "16 (H)", so adding "16 (H)" to the HL register value "F04D (H)" results in "F063 (H)".
(2) Store the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value in the A register.
(3) Store the H register value in the D register.
(4) Store the L register value in the E register.
This process
A register value: Value of the third reel drive state (_WK_RL3_STS) HL register value: Address value of the third reel drive state (_WK_RL3_STS) (H register value is the upper address, L register value is the lower address) "F063 (H )”
DE register value: "F063 (H)" which is the address value of the third reel drive state (_WK_RL3_STS) (the D register value is the upper address and the E register value is the lower address)
becomes.
Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

The reel control data address setting (C_RLDAT_SET) in FIG. 153 is executed a total of three times until it is judged "Yes" in step S854 in FIG.
The second calculation by reel control data address set (C_RLDAT_SET) is as follows.
(1) Step S861
a) Store the address of the first reel driving state (_WK_RL1_STS), that is, "F04D(H)" in the HL register.
b) Store the C register value in the A register. The second time, the C register value is "00000010(B)".
c) Shift the A register value right by '1' and store the result in the A register. As a result, the A register value becomes "00000001 (B)".
d) Multiply the A register value by "11(D)" and store the multiplication result in the A register. Here, multiplying "00000001(B)", ie, "1(D)", by "11(D)" results in "11(D)", ie, "0B(H)".

(2) Step S862
a) Add the A register value to the HL register value and store the addition result in the HL register. Here, in the second operation, since the A register value is "0B(H)", adding "0B(H)" to the HL register value "F04D(H)" yields "F058(H)". Become.
b) Store the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value in the A register.
c) Store the H register value in the D register.
d) Store the L register value in the E register.
This process
A register value: Value of second reel driving state (_WK_RL2_STS) HL register value: Address value of second reel driving state (_WK_RL2_STS) (H register value is high address, L register value is low address) "F058 (H )”
DE register value: "F058 (H)" which is the address value of the second reel drive state (_WK_RL2_STS) (the D register value is the upper address and the E register value is the lower address)
becomes.

The third calculation of reel control data address set (C_RLDAT_SET) is as follows.
(1) Step S861
a) Store the address of the first reel driving state (_WK_RL1_STS), that is, "F04D(H)" in the HL register.
b) Store the C register value in the A register. The third time, the C register value is "00000001 (B)".
c) Shift the A register value right by '1' and store the result in the A register. As a result, the A register value becomes "00000000 (B)".
d) Multiply the A register value by "11(D)" and store the multiplication result in the A register. Here, multiplying "00000000 (B)" by "11 (D)" results in "0".

(2) Step S862
a) Add the A register value to the HL register value and store the addition result in the HL register. Here, since the A register value is "0" in the third calculation, adding "0" to the HL register value "F04D(H)" results in "F04D(H)".
b) Store the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value in the A register.
c) Store the H register value in the D register.
d) Store the L register value in the E register.
This process
A register value: Value of the first reel drive state (_WK_RL1_STS) HL register value: Address value of the first reel drive state (_WK_RL1_STS) (H register value is the upper address, L register value is the lower address) "F04D (H )”
DE register value: "F04D (H)" which is the address value of the first reel driving state (_WK_RL1_STS) (the D register value is the upper address and the E register value is the lower address)
becomes.

154 and 155 are flowcharts showing the reel drive control (I_REEL_CTL) in step S853 of FIG. 152. FIG. FIG. 155 is a flowchart following FIG.
In FIG. 154, in step S871, it is determined whether or not the current interrupt process is the excitation update timing. Here, the following processing is performed.
(1) An exclusive OR (XOR) operation is performed on the A register value (#th reel drive state (_WK_RL#_STS) value) and "10000000 (B)", and the operation result is stored in the A register.
As a result, when the D7 bit of the A register value before the operation is "0", it becomes "1" by the operation, and when the D7 bit of the A register value before the operation is "1", it becomes "0" by the operation. ”. Also, D0 to D6 bits do not change before and after the operation.
(2) Store the A register value at the address indicated by the HL register value (address indicated by #th reel drive state (_WK_RL#_STS)).
(3) Determine whether or not the D7 (most significant) bit stored at the address indicated by the HL register value is "0". If "0", determine that it is the excitation update timing. .

As described above, the D7 bit of the #th reel drive state (_WK_RL#_STS) takes a value of "0" or "1" for each interrupt process. Therefore, once every two interrupts, the D7 bit becomes "0" and the excitation update timing arrives.
When it is determined that it is the excitation update timing, the process proceeds to step S872, and when it is determined that it is not the excitation update timing, the processing according to this flowchart is terminated. In other words, the process after step S872 of the reel drive control (I_REEL_CTL) is executed once every two interrupts. Therefore, the counters and data that are updated in the processing after step S872 can be updated every two interrupts. Control for driving the motor 32 (output processing from the output port) is executed for each interrupt.

In the next step S872, a reel rotation start standby counter is acquired. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Save the HL register value to the stack area.
(2) Add "9" to the HL register value to set the HL register value to the address value of the #th reel rotation start waiting counter (_CT_RL#_WAIT).
Next, proceeding to step S873, the counter value stored at the address indicated by the HL register value is counted down (subtracted by "1").
It should be noted that the # # reel rotation start waiting counter (_CT_RL #_WAIT) stores "0" when there is no waiting effect, and when there is a waiting effect, the random delay of the # # reel 31 after the waiting effect is stored. A counter value is stored.
Then, in step S874, it is determined whether or not there is a standby at the start of reel rotation. Here, when the value before subtraction of "1" in step S873 is not "0" (when the carry flag does not become "1"), it is determined that there is no standby at the start of reel rotation, and the process proceeds to step S875. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is a standby at the start of reel rotation, the processing according to this flowchart is terminated.

In the next step S875, it is determined whether or not the reel 31 is stopped. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Restore the value saved in the stack area (the address value of the #th reel driving state (_WK_RL#_STS)) to the HL register.
(2) Store the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value in the A register.
(3) When the A register value is "0", it is determined that the reel 31 is stopped.
When the process proceeds to step S875, the D7 bit of #th reel drive state (_WK_RL#_STS) is "0".
When it is determined in step S875 that the reels 31 are not stopped, the process proceeds to step S876, and when it is determined that the reels 31 are stopped, the processing according to this flowchart is terminated.

In step S876, it is determined whether the reel 31 is accelerating or decelerating. Here, when the A register value (the value of the #th reel drive state (_WK_RL#_STS)) is less than "3", it is determined that the reel 31 is accelerating or decelerating.
If it is determined that the reel 31 is accelerating or decelerating, the process proceeds to step S882, and if it is determined that the reel 31 is not accelerating or decelerating, the process proceeds to step S877.

In step S877, it is determined whether the reel 31 is at a constant speed or has started to decelerate. Here, it is determined whether or not the A register value is "0". 31 determines that the speed is constant or the deceleration is not started.
If it is determined that the reel 31 is at a constant speed or has started to decelerate, the process proceeds to step S892, and if it is determined that the reel 31 is not at a constant speed or has not started to decelerate, the process proceeds to step S878.
In step S878, acceleration set processing is executed. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Store the E register value in the L register. Since the E register value is the lower address value of the reel drive state (_WK_RL#_STS), this process stores the address of the #th reel drive state (_WK_RL#_STS) in the HL register.
(2) Store "2(D)" at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the value indicating the reel driving state becomes "2" (a value corresponding to acceleration).

In the next step S879, the reel driving pulse output counter and the number of reel driving pulse switching times are initialized. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Store "1" at the address indicated by the value obtained by adding "2" to the HL register value. Here, the address indicated by the value obtained by adding "2" to the HL register value is the address of the #th reel drive pulse output counter (_CT_RL#_PLSOUT).
(2) Store "9" at the address indicated by the value obtained by adding "3" to the HL register value. Here, the address indicated by the value obtained by adding "3" to the HL register value is the address of the #th reel driving pulse switching count (_CT_RL#_PLSCHG).

Next, the process proceeds to step S880, and it is determined whether or not the standby effect is being performed. In this process, it is determined whether or not the standby effect type (_WK_PRD) of the address "F09E(H)" is "0", and if it is "0", it is determined that the standby effect is not in progress. When it is determined that the standby effect is not being performed, the process proceeds to step S881, and when it is determined that the standby effect is being performed, the process proceeds to step S882.
In step S881, the symbol number (for passing position) and the symbol number (for stop position) are initialized. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Store the initial value "255 (D)" (FF (H)) at the address obtained by adding "6" to the HL register value. Here, the address obtained by adding "6" to the HL register value is the address of #th reel pattern number (for passing position) (_NB_RL#_PASPIC).
(2) Store the initial value "255 (D)" (FF (H)) at the address obtained by adding "7" to the HL register value. Here, the address obtained by adding "7" to the HL register value is the address of #th reel pattern number (for stop position) (_NB_RL#_STPPIC).

In the next step S882, "1" is subtracted from the reel drive pulse output counter. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Set the HL register value to the address of the #th reel drive pulse output counter (_CT_RL#_PLSOUT).
(2) Subtract "1" from the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value.
Next, in step S883, it is determined whether or not the reel driving pulse output counter is "0". This process determines whether or not the result of subtracting "1" in the above (2) is "0". If it is judged to be "0", the process proceeds to step S884, and if it is judged to be not "0", the processing according to this flowchart is terminated.

In the next step S884, it is determined whether or not the reel drive pulse switching count is "0". Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Set the HL register value to the address value of the #th reel driving pulse switching count (_CT_RL#_PLSCHG).
(2) Store the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value in the A register.
(3) Store the A register value in the B register.
(4) When it is determined that the A register value is "0", it is determined that the reel drive pulse switching count is "0".
If it is determined that the number of reel driving pulse switching times is "0", the process proceeds to step S914 (FIG. 155), and if it is determined not to be "0", the process proceeds to step S885.

In step S885, "1" is subtracted from the reel drive pulse switching count. This process is a process of subtracting "1" from the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value (the address of the #th reel drive pulse switching count (_CT_RL#_PLSCHG)). Also, the value obtained by subtracting "1" is stored in the A register.
At the next step S886, an acceleration/deceleration pulse output counter table (TBL_PULSE_UP) is set.
FIG. 156 shows an acceleration/deceleration pulse output counter table (TBL_PULSE_UP).
In FIG. 156, the numerical value "90 (D)" at the address "1050 (H)" indicates the pulse output counter value during deceleration. Numerical values of addresses "1058(H)" to "1051(H)" indicate the pulse output counter values of the 1st to 8th steps during acceleration.
Then, in step S886, the head address "1050 (H)" of the acceleration/deceleration pulse output counter table (TBL_PULSE_UP) is stored in the HL register.

In the next step S887, specified data is obtained from the acceleration/deceleration pulse output counter table (TBL_PULSE_UP). In this process, the data (pulse output counter value) stored at the address of the sum of the HL register value (1050 (H)) and the A register value (#th reel drive pulse switching count) is stored in the B register. It is a process to
Next, the flow advances to step S888 to save the reel driving pulse output counter. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Store the E register value in the L register.
(2) Store the D register value in the H register.
By this processing, the address of the #th reel driving state (_WK_RL#_STS) is stored in the HL register.
(3) Store the B register value (pulse output counter value) at the address indicated by the value obtained by adding "2" to the HL register value.
Here, the address indicated by the HL register value is the address of the #th reel drive state (_WK_RL#_STS), and the address obtained by adding "2" to this is the address of the #th reel drive pulse output counter (_CT_RL#_PLSOUT). be the address.

In the next step S889, it is determined whether or not acceleration has ended. In this process, it is determined whether or not the A register value (#th reel drive pulse switching count) is "0", and if it is "0", it is determined that the acceleration has ended. When it is determined that the acceleration has been completed, the process proceeds to step S890, and when it is determined that the acceleration has not been completed, the process proceeds to step S892.
In step S890, a constant speed is set. In this process, "5" is stored in the address indicated by the HL register value (#th reel driving state (_WK_RL#_STS)).
In the next step S891, the reel rotation failure detection counter is cleared. This process stores "0" in the address of the value obtained by adding "4" to the HL register value (the address of the #th reel rotation failure detection counter (_CT_RL#_BAD)).
In the next step S892, reel drive pulse update (I_PULSE_INC) is performed. This process is the process shown in FIG. 157, which will be described later.

Next, in step S893, it is determined whether or not the reel 31 is at a constant speed. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Store the E register value in the L register.
(2) The data stored at the address indicated by the value obtained by adding "1" to the HL register value (#th reel motor index (_FL_RL#_MT_IDX)) is stored in the A register.
(3) Add "4" to the HL register value. As a result, the HL register value becomes the address of the #th reel rotation failure detection counter (_CT_RL#_BAD).
(4) When the data stored at the address indicated by the DE register value is "5", it is determined that the speed is constant.
Here, the address indicated by the DE register value is the address of the #th reel drive state (_WK_RL#_STS) in step S888.
When it is determined that the speed is constant, the process proceeds to step S894, and when it is determined that the speed is not constant, the process proceeds to step S903.

In step S894, "1" is added to the reel rotation failure detection counter. This process is a process of adding "1" to the value stored at the address indicated by the HL register value.
Next, the process proceeds to step S895 in FIG. 155 to determine whether or not it is time to detect reel rotation failure. This process determines whether the result of adding "1" to the reel rotation failure detection counter in step S894 is "0", and if it is "0" (when the zero flag is "1") , it is determined that the reel rotation failure is detected.
When it is determined that it is time to detect that the reel does not need to be rotated, the process proceeds to step S878, and the acceleration process is executed again. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not the reel rotation failure detection time, the process proceeds to step S896.

In step S896, it is determined whether or not there is a change in the #th reel motor index (motor index # signal). In this process, it is determined whether or not there is a change in the motor index # signal based on the A register value (value of the #th reel motor index (_FL_RL#_MT_IDX)). If it is determined that there is no change, the process proceeds to step S903.
In step S897, the reference pattern number "10" and the reference number of steps "3" are set when passing through the index. This process is to store "10(D)" in the D register and "3(D)" in the E register.
Here, "10(D)" stored in the D register is the value stored in the #th reel pattern number (for passing position) (_NB_RL#_PASPIC) thereafter. Also, "3(D)" stored in the E register is the value stored in the step number (_NB_RL#_STEP) of the 1 symbol on the #th reel after this, all of which are designed values.

In the next step S898, it is determined whether or not it is time for the #th reel motor index to rise. This processing is based on the value of the A register (the value of the #th reel motor index (_FL_RL#_MT_IDX)), and when the D0 bit is "1" and the D4 bit is "0", the #th reel motor index rises. Decide it's time. If it is determined that it is time for the #th reel motor index to rise, the process proceeds to step S900, and if it is determined that it is not time for the #th reel motor index to rise, the process proceeds to step S899.

In step S899, the reference drawing number "0" and the reference number of steps "3" when passing through the index are set. This process stores "0" in the D register and stores "3(D)" in the E register. That is, "0" is stored as the value that becomes the #th reel symbol number (for passing position) (_NB_RL#_PASPIC), and "3 (D )”.
In the next step S900, the #th reel rotation failure detection counter (_CT_RL#_BAD) is cleared. This process is a process of storing "0" in the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value (the address of the #th reel rotation failure detection counter (_CT_RL#_BAD)).

In the next step S901, the #th reel drive pulse data search counter (_CT_RL#_PLUS) is obtained. This process is a process of storing in the A register the data stored at the address obtained by adding "4" to the HL register value.
Here, the HL register value is the address value of the #th reel rotation failure detection counter (_CT_RL#_BAD) as described above. The address value is (_CT_RL#_PLUS).

In the next step S902, the reference pattern number and the reference number of steps when passing the index are stored. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Store the E register value at the address obtained by adding "1" to the HL register value. Here, the address of the value obtained by adding "1" to the HL register value is the step number (_NB_RL#_STEP) of the 1 symbol on the #th reel. At this address, the E register value "3" is stored.
(2) Store the D register value at the address obtained by adding "2" to the HL register value. Here, the address of the value obtained by adding "2" to the HL register value is the #th reel pattern number (for passing position) (_NB_RL#_PASPIC). At this address, the D register value ("10 (D)" set in step S897 when the #th reel motor index rises, and "0" set in step S899 when it falls) is stored. Then, the processing according to this flow chart ends.
As described above, when steps S896 to S902 are executed, the step number (_NB_RL#_STEP) of one symbol on the #th reel and the step number (_NB_RL#_STEP) of the #th reel are displayed each time the #th reel motor index rises and falls. A reference value (design value) is set for each pattern number (for passing position) (_NB_RL#_PASPIC).

As described above, in the twenty-third embodiment, both the rising and falling times of the reel motor index are detected, and the step number of one pattern and the passing position pattern number are updated respectively, so only when the reel motor index rises. can be stopped before the reel 31 rotates once compared to the case of detecting . Also, even if there is a problem with the rotation of the reel 31, it can be corrected immediately.
As described above, the reel drive control (I_REEL_CTL) is executed regardless of whether it is normal (forward rotation) or standby effect (reverse rotation). Therefore, in step S898, regardless of whether it is normal (forward rotation) or standby effect (reverse rotation), it is determined whether it is the rising time or not, and in step S902, the rising time or the rising Predetermined values are set depending on the time.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S893 that the speed is not constant, and when it is determined in step S896 that the #th reel motor index has not changed, the process proceeds to step S903. In step S903, it is determined whether or not the index has already passed (whether or not the reel sensor 33 has detected the index). Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) The data stored at the address obtained by adding "2" to the HL register value is stored in the A register.
The HL register value is the address value of the #th reel rotation detection counter (_CT_RL#_BAD), and by adding "2" to this address value, the #th reel pattern number (for passing position) (_NB_RL#_PASPIC) It becomes an address value.
(2) Add "1" to the value stored in the A register.
(3) If the result of the addition of "1" in (2) above is "0", it is determined that the #th reel motor index has not changed from the initial value and the index has not passed.

Here, as described above, the initial value "255 (D)" (FF (H)) is stored in #th reel pattern number (for passing position) (_NB_RL#_PASPIC), and the #th reel motor index is stored. When the value has changed, "0" or "10(D)" is stored in step S902, and thereafter, "0" to "19(D)" are circulated. In other words, after the value of the #th reel motor index changes, the #th reel pattern number (for passing position) (_NB_RL#_PASPIC) will be "255" if the reel 31 is rotating normally. (D)" (when acceleration processing is executed again due to step-out, "255(D)" is stored again as the initial value).
Therefore, if "1" is added to the #th reel pattern number (for passing position) (_NB_RL#_PASPIC) and it becomes "0", it is possible to determine that the #th reel motor index has not changed yet. becomes.

If it is determined in step S903 that the index has already passed, the process proceeds to step S904, and if it is determined that the index has not passed yet, the processing according to this flowchart ends.
In step S904, "1" is subtracted from the number of steps for one symbol. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Add "1" to the HL register value and store the addition result in the HL register. Here, the HL register value before the addition of "1" is the address value of the #th reel rotation failure detection counter (_CT_RL#_BAD), so when "1" is added, the number of steps per symbol on the #th reel (_NB_RL #_STEP) address value.
(2) Subtract "1" from the value stored at the address indicated by the HL register value.

In the next step S905, it is determined whether or not the character has moved by one symbol. Here, as a result of subtracting "1" in step S904, when the value of the number of steps (_NB_RL#_STEP) for one symbol on reel # becomes "0" (when the zero flag becomes "1"), It is judged that one symbol has moved. When it is determined that the character has moved by one symbol, the process proceeds to step S906, and when it is determined that the character has not moved by one symbol (the subtraction result is not "0"), the process proceeds to step S909.
In step S906, the number of steps per symbol "16 (D)" is saved. This process is a process of storing "16 (D)" in the address indicated by the HL register value (number of steps for one symbol on reel # (_NB_RL#_STEP)).

In the next step S907, the symbol number is updated. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Add "1" to the HL register value and store the added value in the HL register. As a result, the address indicated by the HL register value becomes #th reel symbol number (for passing position) (_NB_RL#_PASPIC).
(2) Perform special addition processing to add "1" to the value stored at the address indicated by the HL register value. Here, "special addition processing" means that, in this example, the upper limit is set to "19 (D)" (corresponding to the maximum value of the symbol number), and "19 (D)" is set to "1 (D)". It is an operation that becomes "0" when added. Specifically, the calculation is performed as follows.
Example 1) 0+1=1
Example 2) 10+1=11
Example 3) 19+1=0
Thus, it is possible to circulate between "0" to "19(D)" without determining whether or not the symbol number is the maximum value.

Next, the process proceeds to step S908 to correct the number of steps per symbol. In step S906, "16 (D)" is stored as the step number (_NB_RL#_STEP) for one symbol on the #th reel.
Here, in the twenty-third embodiment, the number of steps for one symbol is set to "16" for the four symbols having symbol numbers "2", "7", "12", and "17", and the other 16 symbols. , the number of steps for one symbol is set to "17".
Therefore, in step S908, the symbol number after the update in step S907 is determined. "16 (D)" stored in the symbol step number (_NB_RL#_STEP) is maintained. On the other hand, when the symbol numbers are other than the above four symbol numbers, "17 (D)" is stored in the step number (_NB_RL#_STEP) for one symbol on the #th reel.
The number of steps for one round of the reel 31 is set to "336" in accordance with the number of steps of the motor 32. FIG. Also, the number of symbols is "20". Therefore, by setting the number of steps to "16" for 4 symbols and "17" for 16 symbols,
16×4+17×16=336
is set to be

In the next step S909, it is determined whether or not the deceleration start symbol position has been reached. Here, in order to compare the passing pattern number and the deceleration start pattern, the following processing is executed.
(1) "1" is subtracted from the HL register value (#th reel pattern number (for passing position) (_NB_RL#_PASPIC)), and the subtraction result is taken as the HL register value. As a result, the HL register value becomes the address of the step number (_NB_RL#_STEP) for one symbol on the #th reel.
Furthermore, the value stored at the address indicated by the HL register value is stored in the B register. The reason why the number of steps for one symbol on the #th reel is stored in the B register is that it is used in the deceleration start check (I_REDUCE_CHK) processing in step S910, which will be described later.
(2) Add "1" to the HL register value, and use the result of the addition as the HL register value. As a result, the HL register value becomes the address of #th reel symbol number (for passing position) (_NB_RL#_PASPIC).
(3) Store the value stored at the address indicated by the HL register value in the A register.
(4) Add "1" to the HL register value, and use the result of the addition as the HL register value.
(5) Compare the value stored in the address indicated by the HL register value (#th reel pattern number (for stop position) (_NB_RL#_STPPIC) and the A register value, and if the values are the same, judge "Yes" do.

In the next step S910, deceleration start check (I_REDUCE_CHK) is executed. This processing is to check whether or not the conditions for starting deceleration are satisfied, and is processing shown in FIG. 159 to be described later.
Then, in the next step S911, it is determined whether or not it is time to start deceleration. In this process, when the zero flag is "1" as a result of the deceleration start check in step S910, it is determined that deceleration is started.
Although the details will be described later, when the standby effect type is "0", the zero flag is "1". In addition, when the standby effect type is not "0" (reverse rotation standby effect), the # # reel designated symbol position search waiting time (TM2_TAR#_WAIT) is "0" and the current number of steps is "13" ( design value), the zero flag becomes "1".

When it is determined that it is time to start deceleration, the process proceeds to step S912, and when it is determined that it is not time to start deceleration, the processing according to this flowchart is terminated.
In step S912, deceleration is set. This process is a process of storing "1" in the A register.
In the next step S913, deceleration pulse data is set (four phases ON). This process is a process of storing "00001111 (B)" in the B register.
In the next step S914, the reel drive state is set. This process is a process of storing the A register value at the address indicated by the DE register value. Here, the DE register value is the address of the #th reel driving state (_WK_RL#_STS). As a result, the #th reel drive state becomes "1" (a value indicating deceleration).

Next, in step S915, a reel drive pulse is set. This process is a process of storing the B register value in the #th reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR#).
In the next step S916, it is determined whether or not the state has changed from the deceleration start state to the deceleration state. In this process, it is determined whether or not the B register value is "0". If it is determined that the vehicle is decelerating from the start of deceleration, the process proceeds to step S917, and if it is determined otherwise, the processing according to this flowchart is terminated.
As described above, "00001111(B)" is stored in the B register in step S913, so when the process proceeds to step S916 via step S913, it is determined that the value is not "0", and deceleration is being performed from the start of deceleration. It is determined that On the other hand, when it is judged "Yes" in step S884 and the process proceeds to step S914, the B register value is "0" in step S884, so it is judged "No" in step S916.
In step S917, an output request is set when reel rotation is stopped. This process is for transmitting the symbol number of the reel 31 to be stopped to the sub-control board 80 . Then, the processing according to this flow chart ends.

FIG. 157 is a flow chart showing reel drive pulse update (I_PULSE_INC) in step S892 of FIG.
First, in step S921, "1" is added to the reel drive pulse data search counter. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Add "8" to the HL register value and store the addition result in the HL register. Here, the HL register value before the addition of "8" is the address value of the #th reel drive state (_WK_RL#_STS), and when "8" is added, the HL register value becomes the #th reel drive pulse data search It becomes the address value of the counter (_CT_RL#_PULS).
(2) Add "1" to the value stored at the address indicated by the HL register value.
Here, for example, when the value stored in the #th reel drive pulse data search counter (_CT_RL#_PULS) is "255 (D)", the result of adding "1" is "0". becomes.

Next, the process advances to step S922 to add search counter update correction data. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Store the value of the search counter update correction data (_WK_PLS_REV) at the address "F09F(H)" in the A register. Here, when the value of the search counter update correction data (_WK_PLS_REV) is "0", it means forward rotation data, and when it is "FE (H)", it means reverse rotation data. means that
(2) Add the A register value to the value (#th reel driving pulse data search counter (_CT_RL#_PULS)) stored at the address indicated by the HL register value, and store the addition result in the A register.

Here, since the A register value is "0" when the reel 31 is rotating forward, the A register value becomes the same value as the value stored at the address indicated by the HL register value before addition.
On the other hand, when the reel 31 is rotating in the reverse direction, the A register value is "FE (H)". ” is subtracted.
for example,
Value stored at address indicated by HL register value: 100 (D)
A register value: FE(H) or 254(D)
when
The A register value becomes "98(D)".

In the next step S923, the #th reel drive pulse data search counter (_CT_RL#_PULS) is updated. This process is a process of storing the A register value at the address indicated by the HL register value.
By the processing of steps S921 to S923 described above, the #th reel drive pulse data search counter (_CT_RL#_PULS) is incremented by "1" during forward rotation, and decremented by "1" during reverse rotation.
Next, in step S924, a reel drive pulse data search offset is generated. This process is a process of executing a logical product (AND) operation of the A register value and "00000111(B)". Then, the result of the AND operation is stored in the A register.
The A register value is the value of the #th reel drive pulse data search counter (_CT_RL#_PULS), and is a value that ranges from "0" to "255 (D)". When this value and "00000111(B)" are ANDed, the result of the operation is a value from "0" to "7".

Specifically, for example, it is as follows.
Example 1) When the A register value is "00000000(B)", ANDing it with "00000111(B)" yields "00000000(B)".
Example 2) When the A register value is "00000010(B)", ANDing it with "00000111(B)" yields "00000010(B)".
Example 3) When the A register value is "000100001(B)", ANDing it with "00000111(B)" yields "00000001(B)".
Example 4) When the A register value is "111111111(B)", ANDing it with "00000111(B)" yields "00000111(B)".
That is, the maximum value after the logical product (AND) operation is "00000111 (B)" (7 (D)).

Next, in step S925, a reel drive pulse table is set. This process is to store the address of the reel drive pulse table (TBL_REEL_PULSE) in the HL register.
FIG. 158 shows a reel drive pulse table (TBL_REEL_PULSE). As shown in FIG. 158, the reel driving pulse table (TBL_REEL_PULSE) stores eight types of reel driving pulse data. The upper 4 bits (D4 to D7 bits) of the reel driving pulse data are unused bits. The D0 bit corresponds to φ0 data, the D1 bit corresponds to φ1 data, the D2 bit corresponds to φ2 data, and the D3 bit corresponds to φ3 data. "1" indicates ON, and "0" indicates OFF.
For example, "00001001(B)" stored at address "1100(H)" means that φ0 and φ3 are on. φ0 to φ3 correspond to the excitation phases of a four-phase stepping motor.
Then, in step S925, "1100 (H)", which is the head address of the reel drive pulse table (TBL_REEL_PULSE), is stored in the HL register.

In the next step S926, reel drive pulse data is acquired. In this processing, the result of adding the A register value to the HL register value is set as the HL register value, and the value of the address indicated by the HL register value is stored in the B register.
Here, the A register value is the offset value generated in step S924 (a value obtained by converting the reel driving pulse in the range of "0" to "255(D)" into "0" to "7").
For example, when the A register value is "1", the value "00000001 (B)" of "1101 (H)" obtained by adding "1 (H)" to the HL register value "1100 (H)" is stored in the B register. Remember.
Next, in step S927, reel driving pulse data is set. This process is a process of storing the B register value in the #th reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR#). Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

FIG. 159 is a flow chart showing deceleration start check (I_REDUCE_CHK) in step S910 of FIG.
First, in step S931, it is determined whether or not the standby effect type is "0". Here, it is determined whether or not the value stored in the standby effect type (_WK_PRD) of the address "F09E(H)" is "0", and if it is "0", it is determined as "Yes". to end the processing according to this flowchart. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not "0", the process proceeds to step S932.
In step S932, it is determined whether or not the search waiting time is "0". In this process, it is determined whether or not the #th reel designated symbol position search waiting time (_TM2_TAR#_WAIT) is "0", and if it is "0", it is determined "Yes" and the process proceeds to step S933. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not "0", the processing according to this flowchart is terminated.

In step S933, the deceleration start step number "13 (D)" is set. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Set "13 (D)" in the A register.
(2) Perform a comparison operation with the B register value.
Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.
The B register value is the step number (_NB_RL#_STEP) for one symbol on the #th reel stored in step S909 of FIG. Then, when the result of the comparison operation is "0", the zero flag becomes "1". When the zero flag becomes "1", "Yes" is determined in step S911 in FIG. In other words, it is set to start deceleration when the current number of steps reaches "13 (D)" (design value).

Next, control specific to the twenty-third embodiment of the sub-control board 80 will be described.
(1) Output of immersion prevention In the 23rd embodiment, an immersion prevention output may be performed after the end of one AT set and before the start of the next set. In the twenty-third embodiment, "output to prevent addiction" corresponds to displaying an image such as "Pachinko/pachislot are moderately enjoyable games. Beware of addiction." do. It should be noted that not only the image display but also voice output such as "Pachinko/Pachislot is a game to be enjoyed moderately. Be careful not to become addicted." Only image display, only sound, both image display and sound may be performed, but it is understood that it is preferable to perform at least image display.
Since the addiction prevention output is generally executed when a certain number of medals or more are paid out, in the twenty-third embodiment, one set of AT (main game state 4, 1BB operation) is completed. When the immersion prevention output condition is satisfied, the immersion prevention output is executed.

FIG. 160 is a flow chart for controlling the sub-control board 80's immersion prevention output during AT.
First, in step S971, it is determined whether or not AT is in progress. When it is determined that AT is being performed, the process proceeds to step S972, and when it is determined that AT is not being performed, the processing according to this flowchart is terminated.
The sub control board 80 receives commands regarding the main game state from the main control board 50 . When a command indicating that the main game state is "4" is received, it is determined that AT is in progress.

In step S972, it is determined whether or not a notification indicating that AT is to be continued has been output. In the twenty-third embodiment, when the next AT is determined, in other words, when the AT set counter is equal to or greater than "1", a notification indicating that the next AT will also be performed is provided during the AT. It has a case of outputting (notifying AT continuation) and a case of not outputting.
The sub control board 80 receives a command for the AT set number counter from the main control board 50 . When the next AT is not determined (when the AT set number counter is "0"), there is no case of outputting the AT continuation notification, but when the next AT is determined (when the AT set number is When the counter is "1" or more), for example, it is determined by lottery or the like whether or not to output the AT continuation notification. When it is decided to output the AT continuation notification, an effect for outputting the AT continuation notification is selected and the effect is output.

An example of outputting the AT continuation notification includes, for example, a presentation in which the main character and the enemy character face each other and the main character wins. When the main character and the enemy character face each other and an effect is output in which the main character wins, the next AT is determined and the AT does not end with the current AT (however, it is not possible to finish the AT with the announced push order). If the player does not operate the stop switch 42, there is a possibility that the advantageous interval itself will end during the current AT due to the advantageous interval clear counter management. In addition, when the main character and the enemy character confront each other and an effect is output in which the main character loses, the AT may end with the current AT or may continue.

When it is determined in step S972 that the AT continuation notification has been output, the process proceeds to step S973, and when it is determined that the AT continuation notification has not been output, the process proceeds to step S974.
In step S973, the AT continuation notification flag is turned on. The AT continuation notification flag is provided in the storage area of the RWM 83 of the sub-control board 80, and is a flag for determining whether or not the AT continuation has been notified.

In step S974, it is determined whether or not one set of AT has been completed. This judgment is based on the command transmitted from the main control board 50, when the end condition of the main game state "4" is satisfied (at the end of the operation of the 1BB game (at the end of the game)), one set of AT is determined to have ended. When it is determined that one set of AT has been completed, the process advances to step S975, and when it is determined that it has not been completed, the processing according to this flowchart is terminated.
In step S975, it is determined whether or not the AT continuation notification flag is ON. When it is determined that the AT continuation notification flag is not on, the process proceeds to step S976, and when it is determined to be on, the process proceeds to step S977.

In step S976, an AT end effect is output. Here, the "AT end effect" is a effect suggesting that the AT is terminated and the game is shifted to a non-AT. Therefore, even if the AT set number counter is "1" or more at this time, if the AT continuation notification flag is not ON, in other words, if the AT continuation notification is not output during the current set of AT, Output AT end effect. It should be noted that even if the AT end effect is output, the AT does not necessarily end.

Next, the process advances to step S978 to output the immersion prevention effect described above.
In the next step S979, it is determined whether or not there is an AT set number (whether or not the AT set number counter is "1" or more). When it is determined that there is no AT set number, the processing according to this flowchart is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is an AT set number, the process proceeds to step S980.
In step S980, an AT resurrection effect is output. That is, in step S976, the AT end effect is output, but the reverse effect for negating the AT end effect is output.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the AT continuation notification flag is ON in step S975, the process advances to step S977 to clear the AT continuation notification flag, and the processing according to this flowchart is terminated. When the process goes through step S977, the AT continuation notification has already been output, so there is no need to output the AT resurrection effect as in step S980. However, at the end of one set of AT, it is of course possible to output a new effect indicating that the AT will continue.

Also, the AT end effect in step S976, the addiction prevention effect in step S978, and the AT revival effect in step S980 may be sequentially output at predetermined time intervals without being operated by the player. Alternatively, after outputting the AT end effect and the addiction prevention effect, wait for the operation of the player's operation switch (bet switch 40, start switch 41, settlement switch 43), and when the operation switch is operated, go to step S979 You may proceed.
Further, the immersion prevention output in step S978 is ensured for a certain period of time. For example, when proceeding to step S978, a predetermined timer value is set, the predetermined timer value is subtracted for each interrupt processing, and the processing of step S978 is performed on the condition that the predetermined timer value becomes "0". Terminate.
Specifically, it is preferable that the immersion prevention output continues for at least 3 seconds.
If the power is turned off while the immersion prevention is being output, the immersion prevention is not output when the power is restored. When the power is turned off while the immersion prevention is being output and then the power is restored, the predetermined timer value is cleared (cleared).

Therefore, even if the specification is such that the process proceeds from step S978 to step S979 when the operation switch is operated, if the predetermined timer value is not "0" at the time the operation switch is operated, step Continue to output the immersion prevention in S978. Then, when the predetermined timer value becomes "0", the process proceeds to step S979.
Further, after starting the immersion prevention output in step S978, even if the predetermined timer value becomes "0", if the operation switch is not operated, the immersion prevention output may be maintained, or , the screen may be switched to a demo screen, such as displaying the logo mark of the gaming machine manufacturer.

Further, when the 1BB game ends, the main control board 50 executes wait processing (also referred to as “freeze processing” or “standby processing”) for about one second. During the period in which this wait process is being executed, control based on the operation is not executed even if any operation switch is operated. Also, the blocker 45 is controlled to return the medals even if the medals are inserted while this wait process is being executed. The control by the main control board 50 differs from the control by the sub-control board 80 because the power is turned off during execution of this wait process (for example, 0.3 seconds after the start of the wait process). After that, when the power is restored (when the power is restored without shifting to the setting change mode), the wait processing is continued. The timer managed by the main control board 50 side is not cleared when the power is turned off during the wait process and then the power is restored (the power is restored without shifting to the setting change mode). On the other hand, the timer value of the wait process is cleared when the power supply returns to the setting change mode.

By controlling as described above, the addiction prevention output is ensured for a certain period of time, so that the addiction prevention image display can be reliably shown to the player.
It should be noted that the wait processing by the main control board 50 is for about one second, and if the immersion prevention output is for about 3 seconds, even if the immersion prevention output is in progress, the operation of the operation switch is valid after the wait processing is completed. become. Therefore, when the operation switch is operated immediately after the end of the wait process, the next effect may be executed while continuing the immersion prevention output. For example, after starting the output of prevention of immersion in step S978, the wait process by the main control board 50 is completed, the operation switch becomes effective, and for example, based on the operation of the bed switch 40, the AT revival effect of step S980 is output. In such a case, the AT revival effect is output while the immersion prevention is output.

In the twenty-third embodiment, the condition for outputting the immersion prevention is that the AT end effect is output. Therefore, in the case of "Yes" in step S975, since the AT end effect is not output (because step S976 is not executed), the immersion prevention display is not output either.

As described above, at the end of one set of AT, when the player is notified of the continuation of the next AT (when the player knows the continuation of AT), the addiction prevention output is not executed, In other cases, the immersion prevention is output on the condition that the AT end screen is output. Therefore, it is possible to make it impossible to determine the continuation of the AT from the presence or absence of the immersion prevention output.
In other words, if the AT is terminated when the immersion prevention is output and is not terminated if the immersion prevention is not output, the continuation of the AT can be known by the presence or absence of the immersion prevention output.
In addition, when the player knows that the AT will continue, even if the output for prevention of immersion is not very effective, there is an effect that unnecessary output is not required.

(2) Output of confrontation production (fluctuation of output timing of the end of production)
In the twenty-third embodiment, during the AT, there is a case where a confrontation effect is output as an effect indicating whether or not the AT will continue next time.
The confrontation production of the twenty-third embodiment is a production showing that the main character and the enemy character face each other, and if the main character wins, the AT will continue next time as well. Here, when an effect in which the main character side character wins is output, it means that the above-described AT continuation notification is output, and the AT continuation notification flag is turned on. On the other hand, if the enemy character wins, it is not confirmed that the AT will continue next time. However, even if the enemy character wins, it does not mean that AT ends in this set. When the enemy character wins, the AT continuation notification flag is not turned on at that time.

In the case of outputting a confrontation effect, in a game for outputting the ending of the confrontation effect (an effect indicating whether or not the main character will win), the output timing of the effect is controlled as follows.
First, in a game that outputs an effect indicating whether or not the main character will win, the timer starts counting when the start switch 41 is operated. The timer measurement is performed by the timer of the sub-main board of the sub-control boards 80 . In FIG. 1, the sub-control board 80 consists of a sub-main board and an image control board (sub-sub-board) which belongs to the sub-main board and is specialized for controlling the image display device 23. Prepare.

Next, the sub-main board of the sub-control board 80 receives a command from the main control board 50 indicating that all reels 31 have stopped. The sub-main board judges whether or not the timer value has passed 10 seconds, and when it judges that 10 seconds have passed, the sub-sub board issues a command to allow the image to proceed (whether the main character wins or not). or, in other words, a command for permitting the output of the ending of the confrontation presentation). When the sub-sub board receives the command, it outputs an effect indicating whether or not the main character will win.
On the other hand, when the command indicating that all the reels 31 have stopped is received and the timer value has not passed 10 seconds, the game waits until the timer value passes 10 seconds. Then, when the timer value has passed 10 seconds, the sub-main board transmits the above command to the sub-sub-board.
Note that "10 seconds" is an example, and various settings such as 5 seconds and 15 seconds are possible.

FIG. 161 is a flow chart showing control of the confrontation effect output.
First, in step S991, it is determined whether or not the start switch 41 has been operated. When the start switch 41 is operated, a command indicating that the start switch 41 has been operated is transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub-control board 80 (sub-main board). , the start switch 41 is operated. When it is determined that the start switch 41 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S992.
Here, when the sub-main board receives a command indicating that the start switch 41 is operated, it selects a performance to be output in the game this time and transmits a command corresponding to the selected performance to the sub-sub board. The sub-sub board controls the output of the effect based on the received command (command corresponding to the effect). Also, when the sub-main board receives a command indicating that the stop switch 42 has been operated from the main control board 50, it transmits a command indicating that the stop switch 42 has been operated to the sub-sub-board. When the sub-sub board receives a command indicating that the stop switch 42 has been operated, the sub-sub board switches the performance as necessary (there may be no switching depending on the content of the performance).

In step S992, it is determined whether or not the current game is a game for outputting the ending of the confrontation effect. In this process, the confrontation effect has already been output before the previous game, and it is determined whether or not the current game corresponds to the game for outputting the effect indicating the end of the confrontation effect. When it is determined that the game is for outputting the ending of the confrontation effect, the process proceeds to step S993, and when it is determined that the game is not for outputting the ending of the confrontation effect, the processing according to this flowchart is terminated.

In step S993, the sub-main board sets a timer value. Then, the timer value is decremented for each interrupt process. For example, assuming that the sub-main board has an interrupt period of 1 ms, the timer value may be set to "10000 (D)" and decremented by "1" each time an interrupt is processed. Then, the process proceeds to step S994.
In step S994, it is determined whether or not all reels 31 have stopped. When all reels 31 stop, a command indicating that all reels 31 have stopped is transmitted from main control board 50 to sub-control board 80 (sub-main board) (hereinafter referred to as "all reels stop command"). Therefore, when the all reels stop command is received, it is determined that all the reels 31 have stopped. When it is determined that the all-reels stop command has been received, the process proceeds to step S995.

It should be noted that determination as to whether or not all reels 31 have stopped in the main process is executed in step S289 of FIG.
Here, it is determined that all the reels 31 have stopped for the following patterns.
(1) When the level data of the stop switch 42 operated for the final stop is OFF.
(2) When the level data of all stop switches 42 is off.
(3) When the level data of all the stop switches 42 are off and the level data of the other switches (the bed switch 40, the start switch 41, and the settlement switch 43) are off.
(4) In addition to any of the above (1) to (3), when the # reel drive state (_WK_RL#_STS) for all the reels 31 is information (“0”) indicating stop.
In the twenty-third embodiment, when the above conditions (2)+(4) are satisfied, the main control board 50 determines that all the reels 31 have stopped, and transmits an all reel stop command to the sub-main board. .

In step S995, it is determined whether or not the timer value has become "0". When it is determined that the timer value has not reached "0", it waits until it is determined that the timer value has reached "0". Then, when it is determined that the timer value has become "0", the process proceeds to step S996. In step S996, the sub-main board transmits to the sub-sub board a command permitting the output of the ending of the confrontation effect. When the sub-sub board receives the command, it outputs the ending of the confrontation effect. Then, the processing according to this flow chart ends.

As described above, when the timer value is "0" when the all reels stop command is received (when 10 seconds or more have passed since the operation of the start switch 41), the all reels stop command is received and the confrontation is performed. The ending of the performance is output. On the other hand, if the timer value is not "0" when the all reels stop command is received, the timer waits for the timer value to become "0" even after receiving the all reels stop command. , the ending of the confrontation production is output.
In the twenty-third embodiment, even after the timer value reaches "0", the end of the showdown effect is not output until the all-reels stop command is received. , the ending of the confrontation effect may be output even before receiving the all-reel stop command.

As described above, the all reels stop command is issued when the level data of all the stop switches 42 is off and the # reel drive state (_WK_RL#_STS) of all the reels 31 is information indicating stop. It is configured to be transmitted from the control board 50 to the sub-main board.
As a result, in a game in which the ending of the confrontation effect is output, the player presses and holds the last stop switch 42 (meaning the stop switch 42 operated (or operated) last; the same shall apply hereinafter), and releases the timing. (provided that 10 seconds have elapsed since the start switch 41 was operated), it is possible to output the ending of the confrontation effect.
Therefore, if the player who does not want to see the end of the confrontation effect immediately continues to press the last stop switch 42 (unless he releases his hand), the end of the confrontation effect will not be output. Then, at the timing when the hand is released from the last stop switch 42, the ending of the confrontation presentation can be output.
On the other hand, not limited to this, the all-reels stop command may be transmitted when the last stop switch 42 is turned on (when the rising data of the last stop switch 42 is turned on). By doing so, it is possible to output the ending of the confrontation effect at the timing when the last stop switch 42 is turned on.

(3) Volume setting In the twenty-third embodiment, the volume from the speaker 22 can be set. Tone setting includes an administrator (store manager) mode in which an installation manager (hall manager) of the slot machine 10 sets the tone, and a player mode in which a player playing a game on the slot machine 10 sets the tone. .
In FIG. 162, (A) shows an image display by the image display device 23 indicating the manager mode related to the tone setting, and (B) shows an image display by the image display device 23 showing the player mode related to the tone setting. FIG. 10 shows.

In (A) in the figure, when the power is turned on/off, the administrator mode tone setting is a setting change state that can be executed by turning on the setting key switch and turning the power on/off, or the setting key It is one of the system menus that can be executed under at least one of the setting confirmation states that can be executed by turning on the switch.
There are three volume levels that can be selected for the administrator mode: "loud", "standard", and "low" (of course, the volume is not limited to these three levels).
When the manager selects the volume using the cross key of the slot machine 10 and presses the chance button, the volume is determined.
Here, although not shown in FIG. 1, the sub-control board 80 has a cross key (also referred to as a “selection button”) and a chance button (also referred to as a “effect button” and a “determination button”). properly connected. The cross key is a switch operated when moving the cursor position on a menu screen or the like. In addition, the chance button is a switch that is operated when developing the effect, and is also used as a switch that is operated when deciding the target selected on the menu screen or the like.

Also, in administrator mode, when the volume is changed using the cross key, the test sound is output at the changed volume. The type of test sound may be, for example, a cursor movement sound, or a predetermined sound (pattern) may be output. For example, if the currently selected volume is "Normal" and the cursor position is changed from "Volume" to "Large" by operating the four-way controller, the test will be performed at the volume corresponding to "Large". output sound. This enables the administrator to grasp how "loud" the volume is. Similarly, when the cursor position is changed from "normal" to "small", the test sound is output at the volume corresponding to "small". In this way, the administrator can confirm the level of the set volume.

Also, the volume of the test sound is based on the volume of a predetermined effect sound. Here, the "predetermined effect sound" includes, for example, a game start sound output when the start switch 41 is operated, a stop sound output when the stop switch 42 is operated, a pattern combination tenpai sound, a prize winning sound ( or payout sound), BGM sound during AT, and the like.
Therefore, for example, when the volume is set to "normal" in the administrator mode and "volume 3" in the player mode, which will be described later, the volume of the test sound is 80 decibels. The volume of the predetermined effect sound is also set to approximately 80 decibels. On the other hand, the error sound will be described later.

Further, when "large" is selected in the administrator mode, even if the cross key is operated to move the cursor position further upward, the cursor position remains "large". However, when "loud" is selected and the cross key is operated to move the cursor upward, the test sound is output again at the volume corresponding to "loud".
Then, when any one of "loud", "standard", and "low" volume is selected, if the chance button is operated, that volume may be determined. When any one of "high", "standard", and "low" volume is selected, "close" can be selected by moving the cursor position to the right with the cross key. If the cursor position is "closed" and the chance button is operated, the volume may be determined. In this case, the administrator mode volume setting is terminated and the system menu (not shown) is returned to. Also, if the cursor position can be moved to the setting of other items (for example, energy saving mode, etc.) instead of "Close", move the cursor position to "Setting of other items" and operate the chance button. Then, the volume indicated by the cursor position at that time may be determined. In this case, the volume setting in the administrator mode is ended, and the setting of other items (not shown) is performed.

The volume selected by the administrator mode is configured to be stored in a predetermined area of the RWM 83 of the sub-control board 80 . This predetermined area is configured so as not to be erased by changing settings or turning off the power. With this configuration, once the volume is set, the hall side can save the work of setting the volume again. Further, even if an unrecoverable error occurs on the main control board 50 side and the storage area containing the set values is initialized by clearing the RWM 53 due to the setting change, the RWM 83 of the sub control board 80 The predetermined area may not be initialized. Also, when selecting the volume in the administrator mode, for example, when the cross key is set to "loud" from among "loud", "standard", and "low", "loud" corresponds to the predetermined area. Alternatively, data corresponding to "loud" may be stored in the predetermined area when the volume is determined.

After the volume is set in the manager mode as described above, the player can set the volume during game standby. FIG. 162(B) shows the display screen (player mode) at this time.
For example, when the cross key is operated during game standby, a menu screen is displayed (not shown in FIG. 162), and by selecting "tone setting" from the menu screen, it is possible to shift to the volume setting screen.
The volume setting in the player mode can be set in five levels from "volume 1" to "volume 5". Selecting the volume by moving the cursor with the cross key and confirming the volume with the chance button are the same as in the administrator mode. In the administrator mode, a test sound corresponding to the selected sound volume is output each time the cursor is moved, but in the player mode, this is not performed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a test sound corresponding to the selected volume may be output in the player mode as in the administrator mode.

FIG. 162(C) is a diagram showing the relationship between the volume setting value in the administrator mode and the volume setting value in the player mode. In the figure, for example, the volume is set to "100" (reference value) when the volume is set to "loud" in the administrator mode and "volume 5" in the player mode. Note that each numerical value shown in FIG. 162(C) indicates a value corresponding to the sound volume, and does not indicate a decibel (dB) itself.
In the example of FIG. 162(C), the maximum volume is "100" and the minimum volume is "20". Note that the volume in each mode and the range between the maximum value and the minimum value are not limited to this, and various settings can be made.
As shown in FIG. 162(C), one of the characteristic points of the twenty-third embodiment is that when the player selects "volume 1", the volume is set to "loud" in the administrator mode. Even if it is, the minimum volume is set to "20". Thus, when the lowest volume (volume 1) is selected in the player mode volume setting, the volume is set to the lowest volume regardless of the volume setting value in the administrator mode.

In other words,
a) When the volume is set to "loud" in the administrator mode and set to "volume 1 (minimum volume)" in the player mode (setting pattern A);
b) when the volume is set to "normal" in the administrator mode and "volume 1 (minimum volume)" in the player mode (setting pattern B);
c) When the volume is set to "low" in the administrator mode and "volume 1 (minimum volume)" in the player mode (setting pattern C), and are both "20" and the same.
However, it is not limited to this, but it is set to be slightly different, such as setting the volume for setting pattern A to "22", setting the volume for setting pattern B to "21", and setting the volume for setting pattern C to "20". You may
In any case, the volumes of the predetermined effect sounds output in the case of the setting patterns A to C are substantially the same (“substantially the same” is a concept including “the same”). For example, when the maximum volume is "100", the minimum volume is within the range of "±3" with "20" as the reference.

Therefore, if the player wants to play the game at the lowest possible volume, he or she selects "volume 1" to play the game at the minimum volume without being affected by the difference in volume setting between halls. can be done.
It should be noted that the minimum volume of "20" is set so that a player with normal hearing can hear the character's lines, the correct answer sequence, "Aim!" audible volume.

As shown in FIG. 162(C), one of the characteristic points of the twenty-third embodiment is the degree of change in volume. For example, if the volume is set to "normal" in the administrator mode and the volume is changed from "volume 1" to "volume 2" in the player mode, the volume will change from "20" to "50" (increase amount "30"). On the other hand, if the volume is changed from "volume 4" to "volume 5" in the player mode, the volume changes from "80" to "90" (increase amount "10"). In this way, when changing from the minimum volume "volume 1" to "volume 2", the amount of increase is greater than when changing from a volume other than "volume 1" to a volume one step higher. is set. Therefore, by changing the volume from the minimum volume to another volume, it is possible to immediately change the volume to a larger one.
In the example of FIG. 162(C), when the volume is set to "Low" in the administrator mode, when the volume is changed from "Volume 1" to "Volume 2" in the player mode, "Volume The amount of increase in volume is set to "5" in each of the cases where the volume is changed from a volume other than "1" to a one-step higher volume. As described above, depending on the volume setting in the administrator mode, it is not always the case that the greatest amount of increase occurs when the volume is changed from "volume 1" to "volume 2" in the player mode.
On the other hand, when the volume is set to "low" in the administrator mode, the volume in the player mode is set to, for example,
Volume 1:20
Volume 2:30
Volume 3:35
Volume 4:40
Volume 5:45
It is also possible to set such that the amount of increase is greatest when changing from "volume 1" to "volume 2".

In the twenty-third embodiment, if the volume is not set in the player mode after setting the volume in the administrator mode, the default volume in the player mode is set to "volume 5".
Further, when the game is not played (game standby state) for 10 minutes, the previous volume setting in the player mode is cleared, and the default "volume 5" is restored. This is to return the volume to the default when the players are replaced. Therefore, the player mode default may be "volume 3" or the like.
Further, when the power of the slot machine 10 is turned on/off, the player mode volume is set to the default "volume 5".
On the other hand, the administrator mode volume is kept at the previous value unless it is reset. For example, when the volume is set to "low" in the administrator mode, the volume is maintained at "low" even after the power is turned on/off, the setting is changed, and the setting is confirmed.

FIG. 163 is a flow chart showing control of volume setting in administrator mode.
First, in step S1001, the current volume is read. For example, "0" for "small", "1" for "standard", and "2" for "large" are stored in a predetermined area of the RWM 83, and this volume setting data is read. The process then advances to step S1002 to display the current sound volume as an image. For example, when the volume data stored in the RWM 83 is "1", an image indicating that the current set value is "standard" is displayed as in the example of FIG. 162(A).
Next, the process advances to step S1003 to determine whether or not the cross key has been operated. If it is determined that it has been operated, the process proceeds to step S1004, and if it is determined that it has not been operated, the process proceeds to step S1007.

In step S1004, it is determined whether or not the volume setting can be changed. For example, when the current volume is set to "standard" and the cross key is used to select a higher volume, it is determined that the volume setting can be changed. On the other hand, when the current volume is set to "high" and the cross key is used to select a higher volume, it is determined that the volume setting cannot be changed. If it is determined that the volume setting can be changed, the process proceeds to step S1005, and if it is determined that the volume setting cannot be changed, the process proceeds to step S1006.
In step S1005, the volume setting value is updated. As described above, when the current volume is set to "normal", the volume setting is updated to "loud" when the cross key is used to select a higher volume. Then, the process proceeds to step S1006.

In step S1006, a test sound is output at the currently set volume. As described above, for example, when the volume is changed from "normal" to "loud", the test sound is output at the volume corresponding to the changed "loud". On the other hand, for example, when the current volume is set to "loud" and a higher volume is selected with the cross key ("No" in step S1004), the current volume is set to "loud". Outputs a test sound at a volume corresponding to
Next, the process advances to step S1007 to determine whether or not the chance button has been operated. When it is determined that the chance button has been operated, the processing according to this flowchart (volume setting in administrator mode) is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the chance button has not been operated, the process returns to step S1003.

The above volume setting is for a predetermined effect sound. On the other hand, the volume of the error (recoverable error and non-recoverable error) sound is fixed and is configured so as not to change depending on the volume setting in the manager mode or player mode. This is because, for example, it is conceivable that the person who performs the act of cheating sets the volume to the minimum volume in the above-described player mode before performing the act of cheating.
For example, the error sound may be uniformly set to a volume corresponding to "100" when set to "loud" in the administrator mode and set to "5" in the player mode ( For example, the error sound is uniformly set to "90" decibels, etc.).
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and although the error sound volume cannot be changed in the player mode, it may be possible to set the error sound volume in the administrator mode. However, even if the error sound is set to the lowest volume in the administrator mode, the error sound is set to a volume sufficient to reach the surroundings.
Also, when the volume (“loud”, “standard”, “low”) is set in the administrator mode shown in FIG. The volume may be changed according to the volume). Alternatively, a dedicated menu screen for setting the volume of the error sound may be provided in the administrator mode.

(4) Effect when 1BB symbol combination is tense When 1BB is tense, the sub-control board 80 outputs a flash (light emission by the effect lamp 21) and a tenpai sound (sound from the speaker 22). The flash and tenpai sounds are executed regardless of whether the conditions for transition to main game state 4 (AT, 1BB operation) are met. As a result, the player can know the fact that 1BB is tense even when 1BB is tense by chance while the game is progressing casually.

Furthermore, as described above, when the 1BB is tenpai, when the conditions for shifting to the main game state 4 are satisfied, even if the third stop switch 42 is operated, the stop operation of the third reel 31 is not accepted. Although the time is not set, when the conditions for shifting to the main game state 4 are not satisfied, the standby time is set (steps S809 to S810 in FIG. 147). As a result, it is possible to prevent the winning of 1BB due to the player's unexpected stop operation.

Also, if the conditions for shifting to AT are satisfied, as described above, "Aim for 'Blue BAR'! ' is displayed, and a voice saying 'Aim' is also output.
Here, since there are many cases in which the conditions for transition to the main game state 4 are not satisfied during the game, when the above-described flash and tenpai sound are output each time 1BB is tenpai, the player will: It is also conceivable that the flash and tenpai sound may be recognized as an effect for avoiding the winning of 1BB.
However, if the conditions for transition to the main game state 4 are met, "Aim for the 'Blue BAR'! ' and the sound of 'Aim' are output, the player can recognize that 1BB can be won in the game this time, even if the flash and the tenpai sound are output at the same time. can.

When 1BB is tenpai, flash and tenpai sounds are output when the conditions for transition to the main game state 4 are not satisfied, and when the conditions for transition to the main game state 4 are satisfied, these flashes and tenpai are output. It is conceivable that no sound is output. However, since the effect for not stopping the symbol combination is not legally permitted, in the twenty-third embodiment, when 1BB is tenpai, regardless of whether or not the conditions for shifting to the main game state 4 are met. Flash and tenpai sounds are output uniformly.

(5) Effect during 1BB game (when AT start conditions are met/not met) The sub-control board 80 stops and displays the 1BB symbol combination when the conditions for shifting to the main game state 4 are met. When, AT (1BB game) is started from the next game.
In the case of shifting to the main game state 4 (AT, 1BB game), before winning the SRB, when winning the small combination A group (winning numbers "10" to "15"), the order of pressing the correct answer is reported. As a notification method, for example, the order of pressing the correct answer is displayed as an image, and the stop switch 42 to be operated next is output by voice.
On the other hand, in the case of shifting to the main game state 4 (AT, 1BB game), before winning the SRB, even if you win the small win group B (winning numbers "16" to "21"), you can press the correct answer. Do not report order. This is because, in a game in which the SRB is not won, there is no correct pressing order (pressing order for winning a high-ranked bell) even if a small win group B is won (see FIG. 125).

Then, in the case of shifting to the main game state 4 (AT, 1BB game), when the SRB is won and the SRB is inside, both when the small win group A wins and when the minor win group B wins , to notify the order of pressing the correct answer. Winning SRB will be carried over to the next game or later, so when you first win SRB. After the next game of the game in which the SRB has been won, the order of pressing the correct answer is informed when the minor combination B group is won.

On the other hand, even if the conditions for shifting to the main game state 4 (AT, 1BB game) are not satisfied, the 1BB game is started when the symbol combination of 1BB is stop-displayed. However, even if 1BB wins, the main game state does not shift.

When shifting to the 1BB game without shifting to the main game state 4, the main control board 50 does not operate the instruction function, and the sub control board 80 does not execute AT. Therefore, even when a small winning combination having a correct pressing order (small winning combination A group during non-SRB internal processing, small winning combination A group and small winning winning combination B group during SRB internal processing) is won, the winning number display LED 78 indicates the pressing order. The instruction number is not displayed, and the correct pressing order is not notified by the effect output device such as the image display device 23 or the like.
Also, when shifting to the 1BB game without shifting to the main game state 4, the sub-control board 80 maintains the normal performance content during the non-AT (the performance content up to that point). Therefore, when viewed from the player's side, even during the 1BB game, it feels as if the normal game (non-AT, non-special game) is continuing.

(6) Display of the number of games played in RT1 (non-AT) As described above, the number of games played in RT1 is counted. Go to non-RT.
RT1 starts with the end of 1BB operation (end of AT). Therefore, the number of RT1 games is substantially the number of non-AT games.
Then, in the twenty-third embodiment, the image display device 23 displays an image of the number of non-AT games played. As a result, the player can easily know how many games have been played since becoming non-AT. In addition, it is possible to easily know how many games are left until reaching the so-called ceiling of "1400" games (games until transition to non-RT).

It should be noted that although the advantageous section may end during RT1 and shift to a non-advantageous section, the number of games played in RT1 ("_CT_RT_GAME" of address "F00A(H)") is not cleared at the end of the advantageous section. Therefore, even when the advantageous section shifts to the non-advantageous section during RT1, the number of games played in RT1 is maintained and continues to be counted even after the shift to the non-advantageous section. The same is true when transitioning from this non-advantageous section to an advantageous section.

Further, in the twenty-third embodiment, the number of non-AT games to be displayed on the image display device 23 is determined by the RWM 83 of the sub-control board 80 without using the data of the number of RT games "_CT_RT_GAME" at the address "F00A(H)". remembered in At the end of 1BB operation, the initial value "0" is set as the number of non-AT games (increment counter) in the RWM 83, and this number of games is updated according to completion of the game, and is stored in the image display device 23 as the number of non-AT games. do.
However, when the power is turned on/off, the sub-control board 80 initializes a predetermined area of the RWM 83 and initializes the The AT game count data is also initialized (cleared). Therefore, the number of non-AT games displayed on the image display device 23 becomes "0" when the power is restored from the power-off.
In addition, the number of non-AT games can be displayed as one of the game histories on the menu screen that can display the specifications of the gaming machine, the game history, etc., and the number of games displayed on the image display device 23 is the number of games played. (displayed based on the data of the number of non-AT games stored in the RWM 83). Therefore, when the power is turned on/off, the number of non-AT games displayed on the menu screen is also "0".

Therefore, for example, when the RT1 game count "_CT_RT_GAME" on the RWM 53 (main control board 50 side) is "100" and the non-AT game count displayed on the image display device 23 is "100", the power is turned on. When / is turned off, the number of games "_CT_RT_GAME" of RT1 maintains "100", but becomes "0" displayed on the image display device 23. Next, when the first game is executed, the number of games "_CT_RT_GAME" of RT1 is updated to "101", and the number of games displayed on the image display device 23 is updated to "1". Thus, when the power is turned on/off, the RT1 game count "_CT_RT_GAME" in the RWM 53 and the non-AT game count (the game count stored in the RWM 83) displayed on the image display device 23 are changed. become different. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it impossible to grasp how many games are left until the ceiling in the first morning (when the hall opens).

Further, in the twenty-third embodiment, even when the setting change process is executed, the RT state number "_NB_RT_STS" and the number of games played for RT1 "_CT_RT_GAME" are not cleared. However, not limited to this, when the setting change process is executed, the RT1 game count "_CT_RT_GAME" may be cleared. If the number of games "_CT_RT_GAME" of RT1 is cleared when the setting change processing is executed, the data of the number of games "_CT_RT_GAME" of RT1 after the setting change processing and the number of non-AT games displayed on the image display device 23 are combined. come to match. With this configuration, it is possible to grasp the number of games played from the first morning (when the hall opens) to the number of games played until the floor is reached. It becomes possible to motivate (use it as judgment material).

Although the twenty-third embodiment has been described above, the twenty-third embodiment is not limited to the above contents, and various modifications such as those described below are possible.
(1) When the small win group A is won, the win has the correct pressing order during 1BB operation, and the small win group B has the correct pressing order during 1BB operation and inside the SRB. However, not limited to this, the small win group B may also be a win having the correct pressing order during 1BB operation (regardless of whether it is inside the SRB) like the small win group A.
On the contrary, like the small win group B, the small win group A may also have a correct pressing order only during 1BB operation and within the SRB.

(2) The payout ratios when 1BB is not activated, when AT is not activated and 1BB is activated, and when AT and 1BB are activated are examples, and are not limited to the above embodiments. However, in order to prevent shifting to 1BB operation (1BB game) even though AT is not won, it is preferable that the ball output rate at non-AT and 1BB operation is less than "1". .
On the other hand, when the 1BB is activated, by setting the ball output rate to be higher than when the 1BB is not activated even if the AT is not activated, the game machine is said to be in a state advantageous to the player due to the 1BB activation. It satisfies the principle of

(3) In the above embodiment, the AT lottery is not executed during non-AT and 1BB operation or during AT and 1BB operation. may be executed. However, in order to prevent 1BB activation during non-AT, it is preferable to set the AT winning probability during non-AT and 1BB activation to be lower than the AT winning probability when 1BB is not activated.
Furthermore, during the AT and 1BB operation, it is possible to execute a lottery for adding the number of AT sets.

(4) In the 23rd embodiment, even if the SRB is inside while the AT and 1BB are in operation, it is assumed that the game is completed without winning the SRB. This is because if the SRB is won and the game is shifted to the RB game, the payout rate will decrease.
Here, when the AT and 1BB are activated and the SRB is tense inside the SRB, the standby time may be set using the processing shown in FIG. 147 in order to avoid winning of the SRB.
On the other hand, in the case of shifting to 1BB game without having the right to execute AT, when SRB is won, even if SRB is tense, processing for avoiding SRB winning (setting of waiting time) ) need not be executed.
Also, when the AT and 1BB are activated and the SRB is tense inside the SRB, similar to when the 1BB is tense, the player may be alerted by outputting a flash or sound.

(5) In the above embodiment, when the conditions for shifting to AT are not satisfied, the waiting time when 1BB is tense is set to "896 (D)" (approximately 1000 ms). The reason for this is that the waiting time is set longer than the one rotation time of the reel 31 because the time required for one rotation of the reel 31 at a constant speed is "1.117×2×336=approximately 750 ms". . With this setting, when the "blue BAR" symbol on the third reel 31 first reaches the effective line after the second stop switch 42 is operated, the standby time has not yet passed. Even if the third stop switch 42 is operated at the timing, winning of 1BB can be avoided.
However, the standby time is not limited to this and can be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be set to about 3 seconds in order to ensure sufficient time to avoid winning 1BB.

(6) In the example of the stop symbol set (M_STOPPIC_SET) in FIG. 147, the standby time is stored in step S810 on the condition that the stop operation of the second stop switch 42 has been performed in step S801. In this case, the determination in step S802 is made when "Yes" is determined when the second stop switch 42 is operated at the timing when 1BB is tense, and when the second reel 31 actually stops and 1BB is actually tense. There are two methods of judging "Yes" when it is done, but any of them may be used.
For example, in step S802, when it is determined "Yes" before the second reel 31 actually stops, at the time of step S810, when the second reel 31 has not yet stopped, and when the second reel 31 and the case where it has already stopped.

(7) Setting a standby time during the tense of 1BB and not stopping the third reel 31 during the standby time can also be used in specifications inside 1BB.
Here, the "inside 1BB specification" means that the game is executed while the winning of 1BB is carried over, and both non-AT and AT are executed while inside 1BB. In the case of 1BB internal specs, it is premised that the game is played without winning 1BB. In such a case, the waiting time is set as shown in step S810 of FIG. 147, and if the waiting time has not elapsed as shown in step S791 of FIG. If so, it is possible to effectively suppress the transition from inside the 1BB to the 1BB operating state.

(8) The waiting effect is performed by rotating the reels 31 in the reverse direction. However, the rotation direction of the reels 31 in the waiting effect is not limited to this, and may be forward rotation. When the standby effect is executed in forward rotation (when the specification is such that the reels 31 are not rotated in reverse), the storage area for search counter update correction data at address "F09F (H)" in FIG. The processing of step S823 (storage of search counter update correction data) and the processing of step S933 in FIG. 159 (correction of deceleration start step number) are not required.
However, if the standby effect is performed in reverse rotation, the player can easily recognize that it is the standby effect. In addition, even if the standby effect is performed in normal rotation, the player can easily recognize that it is the standby effect if it is performed at a rotation speed different from the normal game rotation speed.
In addition, in the standby effect, the reel effect data table shown in FIG. 144 is used to set in advance which pattern number is to be stopped for each reel 31, so the stop position of the reel 31 before the standby effect is irrelevant. be. In other words, even if the stop numbers before execution of the standby effect (previous game) are different, a predetermined symbol combination (for example, "black BAR" alignment) is stop-displayed by the standby effect. That is, it is not necessary to stop the preparation stitches in the previous game of the game in which the standby effect is executed.

The immersion prevention output of (9) is not limited to the example described above, and may be performed even when the AT continuation notification is output, for example. Alternatively, the immersion prevention output may be executed even when the AT end effect is not output.

(10) In the confrontation effect output control shown in FIG. 161, in this example, the timer value is set based on the operation of the start switch 41 (steps S991 and S993). However, the timer value is not limited to this, and the timer value may be set (the timer may be counted) based on the operation of other operation switches such as the bed switch 40 and the first or second stop switch 42 .
Also, instead of setting the timer value (starting the timer count) when any of the operation switches is operated, the timer may start counting at a predetermined timing after the operation switch is operated. good.

For example, firstly, when the operation switch is the bed switch 40, the timer may start counting one second after the bed switch 40 is operated.
Secondly, when the operation switch is the start switch 41, after the start switch 41 is operated, the timer may start counting at the timing when the output of the current game effect is started.
Furthermore, thirdly, when the operation switch is the first or second stop switch 42, when the reel 31 corresponding to the first or second stop switch 42 is stopped, or when the first or second stop switch 42 is operated The timer may start counting at the timing when the production based on is started.

(11) In addition, in the twenty-third embodiment, when the timer value is "0", the timing for outputting the ending of the confrontation effect is when the third stop switch 42 is turned off (when the hand is released). when it is done). However, not limited to this, when another (already operated) stop switch 42 is operated before the third stop switch 42 is turned off from on, even if the third stop switch 42 is turned off from on It is also possible not to output the ending of the confrontation presentation. For example, while the player himself/herself continues to press the third stop switch 42 so as not to output the ending of the showdown performance, the next player (friend) mischievously operates the other stop switch 42. It is possible to provide a new game in which the effect ending is not output at .

(12) Furthermore, in a game that outputs the ending of the confrontation effect, when the payout process is executed based on the turning off of the third stop switch 42 from on and a hopper error (no medals) occurs, The output of the performance ending is interrupted and the continuation of the performance ending is output after the hopper error is canceled, or the performance ending is output again from the beginning after the hopper error is cancelled.
In addition, when the third stop switch 42 is turned off immediately before the timer value becomes "0" and the payout process is executed, the timer continues counting during the payout process. Therefore, when the timer value becomes "0" during the payout process, the effect ending is output based on the fact that the timer value has become "0" (regardless of whether the payout process has ended). be done.

(13) Furthermore, in the game in which the ending of the confrontation effect is output, the output of the effect ending is started based on the turning off of the third stop switch 42, but this is not the only option. is turned on, or when the third stop switch 42 is turned off from on, for example, the icon of the push button (sub button) is displayed as an image (at this point, the effect ending is not output), and the push button The effect ending may be output when is operated.

(14) In the example of FIG. 132, in the main game state 5 (AT pullback), when the AT pullback counter is "0" and the advantageous section clear counter is less than "600", the main game state 0 is entered. made it However, not limited to this, when the AT withdrawal counter becomes "0" in the main game state 5, regardless of the value of the advantageous section clear counter, the advantageous section clear counter is cleared, and the main game state 0 is entered. You may Further, in the case of high accuracy in the main game state 1, the main game state 1 may not be ended (shifted to the main game state 0) even if the advantageous interval clear counter becomes less than "600".
(15) In the twenty-third embodiment, since the number of reels 31 is three, in step S801 of FIG. 147, it is determined whether or not the second stop has been completed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in the case where four reels 31 are used as shown in FIG. 59 (thirteenth embodiment), in step S801 of FIG. It will be.

(16) In the twenty-third embodiment, the volume setting in the administrator mode is set in three stages, but the number is not limited to this, and may be set in any number of stages (eg, 5 stages, 10 stages, etc.). Also, although the volume setting in the player mode is set to 5 levels, it is not limited to this, and may be set to any number of levels (eg, 3 levels, 10 levels, etc.).
(17) Numerical values (setting values, timer values, etc.) given in the twenty-third embodiment are examples, and do not mean that the values are limited to these values.
(18) The 23rd embodiment can be implemented alone or in combination with the other 1st to 22nd embodiments.

<24th Embodiment>
FIG. 164 is a diagram showing the hardware configuration of the main CPU 55 in the slot machine 10 of FIG.
165 is a diagram showing in more detail the structures of the ROM 54 and RWM 53 in FIG. 164. As shown in FIG.
In the twenty-fourth embodiment, when the address of the built-in memory and the data stored in the storage area of the RWM 53 are represented in hexadecimal, "(H)" (initial of "hexadecimal") indicating the hexadecimal number is attached. .

In FIG. 164, the main CPU 55 is composed of a one-chip microprocessor (MPU) (hereinafter also simply referred to as a "chip" if necessary), and contains an ALU (arithmetic unit) 55d, a built-in memory and (not limited to). Note that the built-in memory refers to the user memory unless otherwise specified.
The main CPU 55 executes programs, performs calculations, and the like necessary for the progress of the game. Specifically, it executes control processing for inserted medals, lottery processing for a winning combination, drive control processing for the reels 31, payout processing at the time of winning, and the like.

The ALU 55d is an arithmetic unit of the main CPU 55 that executes logical operations, four arithmetic operations, and the like. Also, as shown in FIG. 164, an internal bus (including an address bus, a data bus, and a control bus) 55a in the main CPU 55 is connected to the ALU 55d, and the internal bus 55a and a predetermined storage area in the built-in memory are connected. linked. Here, "connected (connected)" refers to forming a path through which information can be communicated (the same shall apply hereinafter). The entire storage area of the built-in memory may be connected to the internal bus 55a, or a part of the storage area of the built-in memory (excluding, for example, a confidential storage area) may be connected to the internal bus 55a. may be

When a predetermined storage area in the built-in memory is connected to the internal bus 55a and ALU 55d, the information stored in the predetermined storage area is output (transmitted) to the outside by a program executed by the main CPU 55. Is possible.
The "program executed by the main CPU 55" is a program stored in an internal memory (eg, ROM 54) in the main CPU 55, or stored outside the main CPU 55 (slot machine 10). This includes both cases where the program can be executed.

Although not shown in FIG. 164, the memory area of the main CPU 55 is divided into a boot area and a user area. The boot area is a storage area used by the chip manufacturer, and may include boot ROM, boot RWM, and the like.
For example, the boot ROM may store a program for checking security, a program for diagnosing failures, a program for performing authentication and verification, and the like. Also, the boot RWM may be used as a work area (data area, stack area, etc.) for the boot program.

The user area is a storage area used by the manufacturer of the slot machine 10 (however, not all of the user area is used by the manufacturer of the slot machine 10). , a built-in register area 56, a decoding area 57, and the like. Note that the ROM, RWM, and other storage means may be provided outside the one-chip microprocessor (on the main control board 50) instead of being provided inside the one-chip microprocessor.

The user area of the built-in memory, as shown in FIG. 164, consists of storage areas of addresses "0000(H)" to "FFFF(H)". Here, "1" address in the user area has a storage capacity of "1" byte. Therefore, the entire user area is "65536" bytes.
The addresses of the user area ROM 54 and subsequent unused areas, RWM 53 and subsequent unused areas, built-in register area 56 and subsequent unused areas, decode area 57 and subsequent unused areas are all within the user area. is continuous with
In the user area, the storage capacities of the ROM 54 and RWM 53 shown in FIGS. 164 and 165, and the storage capacity of each area are examples, and are not limited to these.

The ROM 54 is a storage area for storing a program (user program) created by the user, that is, the manufacturer of the slot machine 10 .
The storage capacity of the ROM 54 is set to approximately "12K bytes" in this embodiment, and has a continuous storage area of addresses "0000(H)" to "2FFF(H)".
As shown in FIG. 165, the storage area of the ROM 54 has a used area and a non-used area. In addition, both the used area and the non-used area have a control area and a data area. Note that the control area within the use area may be referred to as the first control area, and the control area outside the use area may be referred to as the second control area.

"Used area" refers to a storage area in which information other than information necessary to prevent unauthorized modification or other changes is stored or will be stored (same for ROM 54 and RWM 53).
Further, the “control area” refers to a storage area other than the data area among the used areas, and is an area in which various programs executed by the main control board 50 are stored. The control area may also be referred to as the "program area". Specifically, a program (a program for executing a main process (eg, FIG. 41) or an interrupt process (eg, FIG. 53)) relating to game progress and effects is stored. Therefore, the instructions of the programs shown in FIGS. 168 to 171, which will be described later, are stored in the control area in the ROM 54's use area.
Furthermore, "data area" refers to a storage area in which only information other than programs is stored, or is to be stored, among the used areas, and is an area in which data used during program execution is stored. be.

Furthermore, in the control area (second control area) outside the use area, programs unrelated to the progress of the game, such as a program for controlling the lighting of the management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor), a program used during testing, and Programs and the like for fraud prevention are stored.
A program management area of the ROM 54 is an area for storing information necessary for the main CPU 55 to execute the user program. The program management area stores a header, manufacturer code, product code, program code end address, and the like.

The RWM 53 is used as a work area for user programs. The RWM 53 has a backup function, and can hold the information stored in the RWM 53 even after the chip (slot machine 10) is powered off.
As shown in FIG. 165, the storage area of the RWM 53 has a used area and a non-used area similarly to the ROM 54 . In addition, both the used area and the non-used area each have a working area and a stack area.
The work area in the use area of the RWM 53 includes a storage area for storing data necessary for a game, such as those shown in FIG. 35 (11th embodiment) and FIGS. 133 to 138 (23rd embodiment). (Note that in FIG. 35, part of the data storage area for the advantageous section overlaps with that in FIG. 138.).

In addition, among the areas used by the RWM 53, the stack area is used when saving the value of a register and then returning the value to the register, or when executing a predetermined instruction, the stack area is used when the instruction is executed. This area is used for storing the address of the caller to return to (also called return address or return address).
Furthermore, in the work area outside the use area of the RWM 53, data for displaying the ratio on the management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor), specifically, ring buffer, game number counter, payout number counter, ratio data and so on.
The storage capacity of the RWM 53 is set to approximately "1 Kbyte" in the twenty-fourth embodiment, and has storage areas of addresses "F000(H)" to "F3FF(H)".

Here, as shown in FIG. 165, the work area in the used area of the RWM 53 has a range of addresses "F00(H)" to "F1CF(H)". As shown in 133 to 138 (23rd embodiment), most of the storage areas for storing data necessary for progressing the game are storage areas with high-order addresses "F0(H)".
On the other hand, the storage area of the data for displaying the ratio on the management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor) is the storage area with the upper address "F2(H)".

In FIG. 164, the built-in register area 56 continuous from the RWM 53 across an unused area has storage areas of addresses "FE00(H)" to "FEBF(H)" in this embodiment, and in the twenty-fourth embodiment, It has a storage capacity of "192 bytes".
Furthermore, the decoding area 57 that is continuous from the built-in register area 56 across an unused area is a storage area consisting of "46 bytes" of addresses "FED0(H)" to "FEFD(H)".

Further, as shown in FIG. 164, the main CPU 55 is provided with a general-purpose register area (storage area). The general-purpose register area may be provided outside the built-in memory or inside the built-in memory, for example, within the built-in register area 56 .
The registers provided in the general-purpose register area consist of A register, B register, C register, D register, E register, F register, H register, L register, and Q register (each 1 byte). The type of register is not limited to this). Another general-purpose register includes an SP (stack pointer), but its description is omitted in the twenty-fourth embodiment.

The above-described ROM 54, RWM 53, built-in register area 56, decode area 57, and general-purpose registers are connected to an internal bus 55a and can be accessed by a program executed by the main CPU 55 (main program). Therefore, the information stored in the ROM 54 can be read by the main program. Also, the main program can read information stored in the RWM 53 and write information to the RWM 53 . Furthermore, the main program can read the information in the built-in register area 56 (however, limited to a part of the area). Furthermore, the main program can read information from the decode area 57 and write information to the decode area 57 . Similarly, the main program can read information from and write information to registers.

Even if data is stored in the registers when the power switch 11 is turned off, these register values are initialized to "0" when the power switch 11 is turned on.
In the twenty-fourth embodiment, when the power switch 11 of the slot machine 10 is turned on, the Q register value is "0 (H)" at the time the power is turned on. An initial value "F0(H)" is stored in the Q register at a predetermined timing during the period.

Furthermore, when the power switch 11 is turned on after the power is turned off, the unused area of the user area is initialized. Here, it is conceivable that data may be stored even in an unused area due to noise or the like. If a value is stored in an unused area, it may lead to fraud. For these reasons, the unused area is initialized when the power is turned on (usually once a day).

FIG. 166 is a diagram for explaining the registers in detail. In the figure, (A) indicates the A to F, H, L, and Q registers.
In the main CPU 55 of this embodiment, A, B, C, D, E, H, and L registers (seven registers) can be used as registers for temporarily storing data during calculation. Also, the F register is a flag register having a carry flag and a zero flag. Furthermore, as described above, the Q register is a register that stores the high-order address "F0(H)" of the work area in the area used by the RWM 53 and is used for instructions.
Here, the A and F registers, the B and C registers, the D and E registers, and the H and L registers are respectively called pair registers. Note that the F register is a register for storing the value of a specific flag, and a 2-byte value is not stored in the AF register together with the A register.

The A register is used to store 1-byte values. For example, the A register is used in the process shown in step S772 of FIG. 141 (23rd embodiment).
On the other hand, the BC, DE, and HL registers may store 2-byte data as pair registers. Here, when 2-byte data is stored in the BC register, the B register is higher and the C register is lower. Similarly, when 2-byte data is stored in the DE register, the D register is higher and the E register is lower. Furthermore, similarly, when 2-byte data is stored in the HL register, the H register is higher and the L register is lower.

For example, as an example of storing 2-byte data in the BC register, in step S831 of FIG. data) is stored in the BC register.
A pair register may be used even when storing 1-byte data. For example, in step S395 of FIG. 49 (the eleventh embodiment), in order to store the interrupt processing count "46", "00000000 (B)" is stored in the B register and "00101110 (B)" (46 (D ) corresponding to ) is stored. The reason why even 1-byte data is stored in a pair register consisting of 2 bytes is to use the program for 2-byte wait processing.

On the other hand, the BC register is not always used as a pair register, and may be used alone. For example, as shown in step S497 of FIG. 55 (eleventh embodiment), an example of storing error number display data in the B register and storing bet display data in the C register is given.
The above also applies to the DE register and HL register.

The F register is called the flag register. FIG. 166B shows the structure of the F register.
In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 166(B), the "D0" bit (least significant bit) of the F register is set in the carry flag (C). Here, the "carry flag (C)" is a flag that becomes "1" when a carry occurs or a carry (also called overflow) occurs due to an operation.
In this embodiment, the carry flag may be abbreviated as "C". In this embodiment, "C" means a carry flag and does not mean a C register. When referring to the C register, it is called the "C register". However, the BC register may be referred to as "BC" in instructions described later.
In the instructions described later, "C" means "when the carry flag becomes "1" (when a carry occurs)". On the other hand, "NC" means "when the carry flag is not "1" (when no carry occurs)".

For example, in step S434 of FIG. 51 (11th embodiment), the carry flag changes according to the comparison operation between the HL register value (difference number counter value) and "2401 (D)". In step S434 of FIG. 51, in the comparison operation between the HL register value and "2401(D)", a process of subtracting "2401(D)" from the HL register value is executed. Therefore, when the HL register value is "2400 (D)" or less, the carry flag is "1", and when the HL register value is "2401 (D)" or more, the carry flag is "0".
For example, if the HL register value is "2400 (D)",
"2400 (D)" - "2401 (D)" = "-1 (D)", carry flag = "1"
becomes.
Also, when the HL register value is "2402 (D)",
'2402(D)'-'2401(D)'='1(D)', carry flag='0'
becomes.

Therefore, since the operation result is "1", no carry occurs and the carry flag is "0" (the D0 bit of the F register is "0").
On the other hand, if the HL register value is "2402 (D)",
"2401 (D)" - "2402 (D)" = "-1 (D)" (actually, "FFFF (H)"
As a result, the carry flag becomes "1" (the D0 bit of the F register becomes "1").

Also, the carry flag may become "1" even if there is no carry-over or carry-over in the operation result.
For example, in the process of step S422 in FIG. 51 (the eleventh embodiment), even if "1" is subtracted from "0000(H)", there is no digit reduction, and "0000(H)" is maintained as is. to run. However, in the process of step S422, when "1" is subtracted from "0000(H)", the carry flag becomes "1".
Once the carry flag becomes "1", another operation is executed next and is maintained until the carry flag becomes "0" (the process of clearing the carry flag is not executed).

Also, as shown in FIG. 166B, the "D7" bit (most significant bit) of the F register is set to the zero flag (Z). Here, the "zero flag (Z)" is a flag that becomes "1" when the operation result becomes "0".
In the instructions described later, "Z" means the condition "when the zero flag is "1" (when the operation result is "0")". On the other hand, "NZ" means a condition "when the zero flag is not "1" (when the operation result is not "0")".
For example, in the process of step S422 in FIG. 51 (11th embodiment), when the value before calculation is "0001 (H)" and becomes "0000 (H)" after subtracting "1", the zero flag is becomes "1".

As with the carry flag, once the zero flag becomes "1", another operation is executed next, and is maintained until the zero flag becomes "0" (no processing to clear the zero flag is executed).
In this embodiment, only the D0 bit (carry flag) and the D7 bit (zero flag) are used in the F register, and the D1 to D6 bits are unused. However, it is also possible to use other bits of the F register for other flags.

As described above, the Q register is a register that stores "F0(H)" (the upper address of the working area of the used area in the RWM 53). , is used in an instruction to read data whose upper address is "F0(H)". Especially in the twenty-fourth embodiment, most of the high-order addresses of the work area within the used area of the RWM 53 are set to "F0(H)". For example, the first "F000(H)" is set in the set value data (_NB_RANK) as shown in FIG. 35 (eleventh embodiment).

In the examples shown in FIGS. 35 and 133 to 138 (23rd embodiment), the high-order addresses of the storage areas where each data is stored are all "F0##(H)" (where "#" stands for " Any value from 0” to “F”.). When "F0(H)" is once stored in the Q register, when the upper address "F0(H)" in the storage area of the RWM 53 is specified by an instruction, the Q register is specified.
In the area used by the RWM 53, if the main upper address of the work area is not "F0 (H)", for example, "E1 (H)", the Q register will be set to "E1 (H)” is stored.

Further, when "F0 (H)" is stored in the Q register, predetermined data related to the progress of the game is stored in a storage area other than "F0 (H)" at the upper address in the use area of the RWM 53, for example. If you need to access the data, you can use the following methods.
For example, first, the address where the data to be read is stored, for example, in the HL register, and the HL register value is specified in the program instruction (an instruction to read the contents stored in the HL register) can be used. mentioned.

Secondly, when accessing data in a storage area with a higher address other than "F0 (H)", the Q register value is temporarily changed from "F0 (H)" to another value (data to be accessed is stored). ), and then specifying the Q register with an instruction to access the data in the storage area of that higher address. After the completion of this instruction, for example, the Q register value is returned to "F0(H)".

FIG. 167 is a diagram for explaining the instruction "LDQ A, (20(H))".
This instruction corresponds to an instruction for saving (storing) the contents (also referred to as "contents" and "data"; the same shall apply hereinafter) stored at the address "F020(H)" to the A address. do.
Here, the entire description "LDQ A, (20(H))" is called an "instruction".
Also, when the instruction is actually stored in the ROM 54, it is coded (binarized data of "0" or "1") and stored. Binary data in the manner in which instructions are stored in the ROM 54 is called an "instruction code".

The command also includes command information and identification information. In this example, "LDQ A," corresponds to the instruction information, and "(20(H))" corresponds to the identification information.
In the instruction "LDQ A, (20(H))", "LD" means transfer, "Q" refers to the upper address, and "(20(H))" refers to the lower address to be accessed. . An instruction operand (a variable to be operated on) is specified in parentheses of the identification information, and becomes a lower address to be accessed. Also, "A" indicates a save destination register (A register in this example).
Therefore, the data stored in the A register will be the contents of the address "F020(H)".

In the above case, as shown in FIG. 167(B), it is assumed that data "n" is stored at address "F020(H)". In this case, the instruction "LDQ A, (20(H))" saves "n" in the A register. If any data was stored in the A register before saving 'n', the A register is overwritten with 'n'.

Next, specific examples of instructions in the twenty-fourth embodiment will be described.
168 to 171 are diagrams showing the types of instructions in the twenty-fourth embodiment, showing 37 types from No. 1 to No. 37. FIG. Note that these instructions are only examples, and are not limited to the 37 types shown in FIGS. 168 to 171, and more instructions are provided.
First, the first and second instructions indicate "JTQ" instructions.
The first "JTQ NZ, (k), e" is the content stored in the address where the contents of the Q register are higher and k is lower (hereafter, the content stored at the address to be operated , abbreviated as "target address value". be.

Also, the last "e" indicates the migration destination address. For example, if the destination address is "0010(H)", "e" is described as "0010(H)" (2 bytes).
Furthermore, "NZ" is a conditional symbol in branch instructions. Conditional symbols for the branch instructions described below include the following.
NZ: if the operation result is not "0", in other words if the zero flag is not "1" Z: if the operation result is "0", in other words if the zero flag is "1" NC: the operation result is a digit If the carry flag is not "1" C: If the operation result is a carry flag, in other words if the carry flag is "1"

In the above instruction, to determine whether or not the target address value is "0", subtract "0" from the target address value (target address value - "0"), and if the zero flag is not "1" , determines that the target address value is not "0", and shifts to e (address).
For example, if it is determined whether or not the content stored at address "F001(H)" is "0", and if it is not "0", the address is shifted to address "0010(H)", The command becomes "JTQ NZ, (01(H)), 0010(H)".
In this case, whether or not the content stored at the address where the Q register value "F0(H)" is the upper value and "01(H)" is the lower value, that is, the address "F001(H)" is "0". to judge whether
And here,
"Contents of address 'F001(H)'" - "0"
to calculate

For example, when "1(H)" is stored in "F001(H)", "1-0≠0" and the zero flag is "0". Therefore, it is determined that the content stored at the address "F001(H)" is not "0", and the process proceeds to the address "0010(H)".
On the other hand, if "0(H)" is stored at address "F001(H)", then "0-0=0" and the zero flag is "1". Therefore, it determines that the content stored at the address "F001(H)" is "0", and terminates the process (does not move the process to the address "0010(H)"; ), the instruction stored at the address contiguous to that instruction is executed).

As a method of determining whether or not the target address value is "0", "0" is subtracted from the contents stored in the target address, and when the zero flag is "1", the target address value is stored. (or, if the zero flag is not "1", the content stored at the target address is not "0") A similar operation is performed if it has a conditional sign of "Z".

Also, the contents stored in the RWM 53 do not change before and after the above instruction is executed. When the instruction "JTQ NZ, (k), e" is executed, the contents stored in the address where the contents of the Q register are higher and k is lower do not change before and after the instruction.
Furthermore, even if an interrupt processing period arrives during the execution of an instruction, the interrupt processing is not executed until the instruction is completed. When the period for interrupt processing arrives during execution of an instruction, the interrupt processing waits until the instruction is completed, and the interrupt processing is executed after the instruction is completed.

Depending on the operation executed by the instruction, the values of the zero flag and carry flag correspond to the operation result of the instruction. need to be In other words, after the zero flag and carry flag change due to the execution of the instruction, interrupt processing is executed before the instruction ends, and the zero flag and carry flag change due to the interrupt processing. Corresponding zero and carry flags are corrupted by operations based on interrupt processing). To prevent this, interrupt processing is not executed during instruction execution.

In the twenty-fourth embodiment, not only the first instruction but all the instructions shown in FIGS. , interrupt processing is executed after the instruction is completed.
For example, when at least the interval between the "N"th instruction and the "N+1"th instruction is not an interrupt disabled period and the "N"th instruction and the "N+1"th instruction are executed continuously, " If the interrupt processing cycle arrives during the execution of the "N"th instruction, the interrupt processing is not executed until the "N"th instruction is completed, and the interrupt processing is executed after the "N"th instruction is completed. do. Furthermore, the "N+1"th instruction is not executed during execution of this interrupt processing. After the interrupt processing is completed, the "N+1"th instruction is executed.
On the other hand, when the interrupt disabled period is set at least between the "N"th instruction and the "N+1"th instruction, and the "N"th instruction and the "N+1"th instruction are executed continuously. , when the cycle of interrupt processing arrives during the execution of the "N"th instruction, the interrupt processing is not executed after the "N"th instruction is completed, and the interrupt processing is performed after the interrupt disabled period has ended. to run. Here, the interrupt disabled period described above corresponds to, for example, the period from the DI instruction to the EI instruction.
Note that the instructions shown in FIGS. 168 to 171 may be executed not only in main processing but also in interrupt processing.

The second instruction "JTQ Z, (k), e" is the same as the first instruction except that the condition symbol "NZ" in the first instruction is changed to "Z". be. In this instruction, contrary to the first instruction, when it is determined that the content stored in the address where the contents of the Q register are high and k is low, that is, when the zero flag is "1" If there is, the process shifts to e (address). On the other hand, when it is determined that the target address value is not "0", the process is terminated.

An example of the second instruction is step S803 in FIG. 147 (23rd embodiment). A step S803 decides whether or not the value (winning and replay condition machine number) stored in the address "F0A9(H)" is "0". Then, when it is determined to be "0", the process proceeds to step S804. Therefore, for example, if the instruction in step S804 is stored at address "0011(H)", the instruction in step S803 will be "JTQ Z, (A9(H)), 0011(H)".

The third and fourth instructions indicate "RTQ" instructions.
These instructions are the same as the first and second instructions in that they determine whether or not the content stored in the address where the contents of the Q register are high and k is low. is different from the 1st and 2nd instructions in that it transfers to the calling source when the conditions specified in the instruction are satisfied.
First, the third "RTQ NZ, (k)" judges whether or not the content stored in the address where the content of the Q register is the high order and k is the low order is "0". If not (NZ), the process is terminated and the caller is transferred to.
Here, as in the third instruction, when the caller is transferred to after the instruction ends, the address (caller; 2 bytes) to return to after the instruction ends is stored in the stack area at the start of the instruction. do.

Also, the method of determining whether or not it is "0" is the same as the above "JTQ" instruction, and "target address value-"0" is calculated.
Then, the third "RTQ NZ, (k)" is when it is determined that the target address value (the content stored in the address where the contents of the Q register are higher and k is lower) is not "0", in other words If the zero flag is not "1", the process is terminated and the calling source is processed. command).
In addition, the fourth "RTQ Z, (k)" terminates the processing and shifts to the caller when the zero flag is "1", and when the zero flag is not "1", the next instruction (specifically is an instruction to execute an instruction stored at an address consecutive to that instruction).

An example of the fourth instruction is step S808 in FIG. 147 (23rd embodiment). In step S808, it is determined whether or not the value of the address "F098(H)" (AT standby counter) is "0". do. Therefore, for example, if the instruction at step S289 is stored at address "0021(H)", the instruction at step S808 in FIG. 147 becomes "RTQ Z, (98(H))" and , "0021(H)", which is the address of the caller, is saved.

The 5th to 8th indicate the "RCP" instruction.
The fifth instruction "RCP NZ, A, n" compares the A register value (indicating the content stored in the A register; the same shall apply hereinafter) with "n", and if the zero flag is not "1" This is an instruction to terminate processing and return to the caller. The point of comparing the A register value with "n" is the same for the sixth to eighth instructions.
The "compare" in this RCP instruction computes "A register value - 'n'".
Example 1)
A register value = 6
n=5
, the command is "RCP NZ, A, 5".
In this case, an operation of subtracting "5" from the A register value is executed.
Therefore,
6-5=1 (≠0)
and the zero flag is "0".
Since the zero flag is "0", it moves to the caller, that is, the address (2 bytes) saved in the stack area.
Example 2)
A register value = 4
n=5
, the command is "RCP NZ, A, 5".
In this case, an operation of subtracting "5" from the A register value is executed.
Therefore,
4-5=-1(FF(H))(≠0)
and the zero flag is "0".
Since the zero flag is "0", it moves to the caller, that is, the address (2 bytes) saved in the stack area.
Example 3)
A register value = 5
n=5
, the command is "RCP NZ, A, 5".
In this case, an operation of subtracting "5" from the A register value is executed.
Therefore,
5-5=0
and the zero flag is "1".
Since the zero flag is "1", the next instruction (specifically, the instruction stored at the address ).

Furthermore, in the above instruction (the same applies to the 6th to 8th instructions below), the operation of subtracting "n" from the A register value is executed, but the A register value does not change even after this operation. . For example, in example 1 above, even if the operation of subtracting n "5" from the A register value "4" is executed, the A register value remains "4".
Thus, the A register value can continue to be used after the RCP instruction because the RCP instruction does not change the A register value.

The sixth instruction "RCP Z, A, n" is different from the fifth instruction in that it is an instruction that shifts to the call source when the zero flag is "1". The comparison between the A register value and 'n' is the same as in the fifth instruction.
The seventh instruction "RCP NC, A, n" is an instruction that compares the A register value with "n" and shifts to the call source when the carry flag is not "1".

An example of this command is step S805 in FIG. 147 (23rd embodiment). At step S805, the role item condition device number is stored in the A register value, and "n" is "2". Therefore, step S805 becomes an instruction "RCP NC, A, 2".
here,
Example 1)
When the A register value (accessory condition device number) is, for example, "2" (at the time of winning the RBA or carrying over the winning information of the RBA),
2-2=0
and the carry flag is "0".
Therefore, since the carry flag is "0", it shifts to the caller. In this case, the calling source is the address after the reel stop reception check (M_STOP_CHK) (FIG. 146), that is, the address where the command of step S289 in FIG. 139 is stored.
Example 2)
When the A register value (accessory condition device number) is, for example, "0",
0-2=-2(FE(H))
and the carry flag is "1".
Therefore, since the carry flag is "1", the next instruction (instruction of step S806) is executed without shifting to the caller.
Example 3)
When the A register value (accessory condition device number) is, for example, "3",
3-2=1
and the carry flag is "0".
Therefore, since the carry flag is "0", it shifts to the caller. In this case, the calling source is the address after the reel stop reception check (M_STOP_CHK) (FIG. 146), that is, the address where the command of step S289 in FIG. 139 is stored.
Furthermore, the eighth "RCP C, A, n" is an instruction in which "NC" in the seventh instruction is changed to "C", and when the carry flag is "1", shift to the caller. On the other hand, when the carry flag is "0", it is an instruction to execute the next instruction (specifically, the instruction stored at the address consecutive to that instruction).

The ninth and tenth "LDWQ" instructions are instructions for storing predetermined values in two consecutive addresses. In this instruction, "LD" means transfer as described above, and "W" indicates that the target address is 2 addresses.
This instruction can be executed even when the register is full (a value is stored in the register). It can also be used when, for example, temporarily stored data is actually used and stored.
The ninth instruction "LDWQ (k), (k')" is an address obtained by adding the contents of the Q register to the upper address and "k'" to the lower address. For example, the contents stored in the addresses where the contents of the Q register are high order and "k'+1" are low order, and the contents of the Q register are high order and "k" is low order, and "1 " is added, in other words, the contents of the Q register are stored at addresses with "k+1" in the lower order and the contents of the Q register in the higher order.

for example,
Contents saved at upper address "Q" and lower address "k'": x
Contents saved at upper address "Q" and lower address "k'+1": y
if
Save "x" in the storage area of upper address "Q" and lower address "k",
This is an instruction to store "y" in the storage area at the upper address "Q" and the lower address "k+1".

The tenth instruction "LDWQ (k), mn" is an address obtained by adding "1" to the address with the content of the Q register as the high order and "k" as the low order, in other words, the Q register This is an instruction to store "mn" (2-byte value) at an address with the contents of "k+1" as the lower order.
This instruction is used, for example, when storing a 2-byte timer value in a 2-byte storage area.

As an example of this instruction, for example, in step S767 of FIG. 140 (23rd embodiment), the initial value of the minimum playing time "3672 (D)" is set to the addresses "F0AB (H)" and "F0AC (H)". is stored.
Here, since "3672 (D)" = "0E58 (H)", the instruction in the above example becomes "LDWQ (AB (H)), 0E58 (H)", and addresses "F0AB (H)". "0E(H)" is saved and "58(H)" is saved in "F0AC(H)".

This command is also used, for example, when setting the initial value of the number of cards to be acquired when 1BB is activated. For example, in FIG. 133 (23rd embodiment), since the number of 1BBs that can be obtained in the 23rd embodiment is 170, the storage area for storing the obtained number of 1BBs is a 1-byte storage at address "F00E(H)". area. However, when the number of obtainable 1BB cards is 256 or more, the storage area for storing the obtainable number of 1BB cards is 2 bytes. Then, at the start of the 1BB game, the initial value of the obtainable number (2-byte value) at the time of 1BB operation is stored in the storage area.

The 11th and 12th indicate the "JTWQ" instruction. This instruction is an instruction to determine whether or not the contents stored at two consecutive addresses are "0", and to shift the processing to the "e" address according to the determination result. This instruction is used, for example, to determine whether a 2-byte timer has elapsed.
First, the 11th instruction "JTWQ NZ, (k), e" stores the contents of the Q register at the address where the contents of the Q register are high and "k" is the low, Determining whether or not the content of the added address, in other words, the content stored at the address where the content of the Q register is higher and the content of "k+1" is lower (that is, 2-byte data) is "0", If it is not "0", the process is shifted to e (address), and if it is "0", the process is not shifted to e (address) and the next instruction (specifically, the instruction (instructions stored at consecutive addresses).

Here, whether or not it is "0" is determined by calculating ""2-byte data value"-"0", and when the zero flag is "1", the 2-byte data value is "0". judge there is. The same applies to the following 12th to 14th instructions.
The 12th instruction "JTWQ Z, (k), e" differs from the 11th instruction in that if the 2-byte data is "0", the process is shifted to e (address). .
An example of this instruction is step S766 in FIG. 140 (23rd embodiment). Step S766 is a process of determining whether or not the 2-byte data stored at the addresses "F0AB(H)" and "F0AC(H)" are "0". Then, when it is determined to be "0", it moves to e (address), in this example, the address where the instruction of the next step S767 is stored. On the other hand, if it is determined not to be "0", the process does not move to e (address), but moves to the address where the next instruction in step S766 is stored in this example.

The 13th and 14th are "RTWQ" instructions. This instruction determines whether or not the contents (2-byte data) stored at two consecutive addresses are "0", and transfers to the calling source according to the determination result. That is, the 11th and 12th instructions above move to e (address) if the conditions defined in the instructions are met, but the 13th and 14th instructions are defined in the instructions. It is different from the 11th and 12th instructions in that it shifts to the calling source if the above condition is satisfied. This instruction, like the 11th and 12th instructions, can be used, for example, to wait for a 2-byte timer.

The thirteenth instruction, "RTWQ NZ, (k)," stores the content of the Q register at the address where the upper value is the content of the Q register and the lower value is "k", and the address obtained by adding "1" to the address. Determining whether or not the stored contents, in other words, the contents stored at addresses where the contents of the Q register are higher and "k+1" is lower (that is, 2-byte data) are "0", If it is not "0", it moves to the calling source. be.
An example of this instruction is step S791 in FIG. 146 (23rd embodiment). In step S791, it is determined whether or not the content (standby time) of addresses "F041(H)" and "F042(H)" is "0" (whether or not the zero flag is "1"). If not, the processing according to the flow chart of FIG. 146 is ended, and the caller, in this example, the address where the instruction of step S289 in FIG. 139 is stored. On the other hand, it is determined whether the content (waiting time) of the addresses "F041(H)" and "F042(H)" is "0" (whether the zero flag is "1"). In this case, the instruction of step S792 in FIG. 146 (the instruction following step S791) is executed.
In addition, the 14th instruction "RTWQ Z, (k)" moves to the caller if the 2-byte data value is "0", and if not "0", the next instruction ( Specifically, it is different from the 11th instruction in that an instruction stored at an address consecutive to that instruction is executed. Otherwise, it is the same as the 13th instruction.

In FIG. 169, the 15th and 16th “ICPLDS” instructions are instructions for comparing the target register value with “n” (1-byte value) and executing a predetermined process according to the operation result.
First, the fifteenth instruction "ICPLDS A,n" compares the contents stored in the A register with "n". The 15th instruction includes patterns 1 to 3 shown below (however, it is not limited to these 3 patterns).

<Pattern 1>
A value obtained by adding "1" to the content stored in the A register is compared with "n", and if "A register value + 1" exceeds "n", "n" set the value.
Here, the value obtained by adding "1" to the A register value is subtracted from "n"("n" - "A register value + 1"), and when the carry flag becomes "1", When the value of "n" is set and the carry flag does not become "1", the value of "n" is not set in the A register.
For example, this instruction adds "1" to some counter each time a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, each game), and maintains that state when the value exceeds "n" (upper limit). There is a case of continuing. Specifically, when a parameter (for example, the number of games played) reaches the ceiling, the ceiling state is maintained, and when the ceiling state is reached, a specific lottery is executed every game.

<Pattern 2>
a) If the content stored in the A register is less than "1", add "1" to the content stored in the A register (A register value = A register value + 1) and end processing. do.
b) If the content stored in the A register is "1" or more, set the A register to "n" (1-byte value) (A register value = "n") and terminate the process.
Here, "1" is subtracted from the content stored in the A register (A register value - "1"), and when the carry flag is "1", the content stored in the A register is "1". ” is determined to be less than Alternatively, "0" is subtracted from the content stored in the A register (A register value - "0"), and when the zero flag is "1", the content stored in the A register is less than "1" We judge that it is.
Also, "1" is subtracted from the contents stored in the A register (A register value - "1"), and when the carry flag is "0", the contents stored in the A register are "1". It is judged that it is above.

<Pattern 3>
a) If the content stored in the A register is less than "n" (1 byte value), add "1" to the content stored in the A register and terminate the process.
b) If the content stored in the A register is "n", the process is terminated.
c) If the content stored in the A register exceeds "n", set the A register to "n" (1-byte value) and terminate the process.

Here, "n" is subtracted from the content stored in the A register (A register value - "n"), and when the carry flag is "1", the content stored in the A register is "n". ” is determined to be less than
Also, "n" is subtracted from the content stored in the A register (A register value - "n"), and when the zero flag is "1", the content stored in the A register is "n". judge there is.
Furthermore, "n" is subtracted from the contents stored in the A register (A register value - "n"), and when the carry flag is "0" and the zero flag is "0", the A register has exceeded 'n'.

The 16th instruction "ICPLDS (HL), n" is such that "A" (A register value (1-byte data)) in the 15th instruction is replaced by "(HL)" (HL register value (2-byte data) ). Otherwise, it is the same as the 15th instruction.
Note that the HL register is often used to store 2-byte data (eg, address values, etc.), and as an example, "HL" is used in the above instruction. However, the instruction is not limited to this, and may be an instruction that specifies other pair registers (BC register, DE register). In this case, they are "ICPLDS (BC), n" and "ICPLDS (DE), n" respectively.
This also applies to the instructions (26th, 29th, 30th) specifying the "HL" register, which will be described below.

Although the description partially overlaps with the 15th instruction, the 16th instruction will be described again.
"ICPLDS(HL),n" compares the contents stored in the HL register with "n". This instruction includes patterns 1 to 3 shown below (however, it is not limited to these three patterns).

<Pattern 1>
The value obtained by adding "1" to the content stored in the HL register is compared with "n" (1 byte value), and if "HL register value + 1" exceeds "n", the HL register to the value of 'n'. When "n" is set in the HL register, the H register value becomes "0" and the L register value becomes "n".
Here, the value obtained by adding "1" to the HL register value is subtracted from "n"("n" - "HL register value + 1"), and when the carry flag becomes "1", When the value of "n" is set and the carry flag does not become "1", the value of "n" is not set to the HL register.

<Pattern 2>
a) If the content stored in the HL register is less than "1", add "1" to the content stored in the HL register (HL register value = HL register value + 1) and end processing. do.
b) If the content stored in the HL register is "1" or more, set the HL register to "n" (1-byte value) (HL register value = "n") and terminate the process.
Here, "1" is subtracted from the content stored in the HL register (HL register value - "1"), and when the carry flag is "1", the content stored in the HL register is "1". ” is determined to be less than Alternatively, "0" is subtracted from the contents stored in the HL register (HL register value - "0"), and when the zero flag is "1", the contents stored in the HL register are less than "1". We judge that it is.
Also, "1" is subtracted from the contents stored in the HL register (HL register value - "1"), and when the carry flag is "0", the contents stored in the HL register are "1". It is judged that it is above.

<Pattern 3>
a) If the content stored in the HL register is less than "n" (one byte value), add "1" to the content stored in the HL register and terminate the process.
b) If the content stored in the HL register is "n", the process is terminated.
c) If the content stored in the HL register exceeds "n", set the HL register to "n" (1-byte value) and terminate the process.

Here, "n" is subtracted from the content stored in the HL register (HL register value - "n"), and when the carry flag is "1", the content stored in the HL register is "n". ” is determined to be less than
Also, "n" is subtracted from the content stored in the HL register (HL register value - "n"), and when the zero flag is "1", the content stored in the HL register is "n". judge there is.
Furthermore, "n" is subtracted from the contents stored in the HL register (HL register value - "n"), and when the carry flag is "0" and the zero flag is "0", the HL register has exceeded 'n'.

The "JCPQR" instruction, which is the 17th to 20th instructions, subtracts "n" (1 byte value) from the contents of the address where the contents of the Q register are high and k is low, and depending on the result, e This is an instruction to move the process to (address).
This "JCPQR" instruction can perform conditional branching without using the A register and the HL register, so it can be executed even in a situation where registers are insufficient.

First, the 17th instruction "JCPQR NZ, (k), n, e" is "n" (1 byte value) is not "0" as a result of subtraction, the instruction is to shift the process to e (address).
In this instruction, "target address value - "n"" is calculated, and if the zero flag is not "1", the process shifts to e (address), and if the zero flag is "1", the next instruction ( Specifically, an instruction stored at an address contiguous to that instruction) is executed.
The 18th instruction "JCPQR Z, (k), n, e" is "n" (1 byte value) from the contents stored in the address where the contents of the Q register are high and k is low. is "0" as a result of subtraction, the instruction is to shift the process to e (address).
In this instruction, "target address value - "n"" is calculated, and when the zero flag is "1", the process shifts to e (address), and when the zero flag is not "1", the next instruction ( Specifically, an instruction stored at an address contiguous to that instruction) is executed.

Furthermore, the 19th instruction, "JCPQR NC, (k), n, e", selects "n" (one-byte value ) does not result in a carry (when the carry flag is “0”), the instruction moves the process to e (address).
In this instruction, "target address value - 'n'" is calculated. instruction (specifically, an instruction stored at an address consecutive to that instruction) is executed.
Furthermore, the 20th instruction "JCPQR C, (k), n, e" is "n" (1 byte value) from the contents stored in the address where the contents of the Q register are high and k is low If a carry occurs as a result of the subtraction (if the carry flag is "1"), the instruction shifts the processing to e (address).
Here, "target address value - "n"" is calculated, and when the carry flag is "1", the process is shifted to e (address), and when the carry flag is not "1", the next instruction (Specifically, an instruction stored at an address contiguous to the instruction) is executed.

In FIG. 170, the 21st to 24th instructions are "RCPQ" instructions.
The "RCPQ" instruction is an instruction that subtracts "n" from the target address value and terminates processing according to the result of the subtraction.
Therefore, the "RCPQ" instruction terminates the processing if the condition specified in the instruction is satisfied. Like the "JCPQR" instruction, which is the 17th to 20th instructions, the "RCPQ" instruction moves to e (address). differ from

Since the "RCPQ" instruction is an instruction that directly compares the target address values, it can be executed even when there is no free space in the register, similar to the above-described "JCPQR" instruction.
The 21st instruction "RCPQ NZ, (k), n" is the result of subtracting "n" (1 byte value) from the contents stored in the address where the contents of the Q register are high and k is low. , is not "0", it is an instruction to end processing (the next instruction starts from the return address stored in the stack area).
Here, "target address value - "n"" is calculated, and if the zero flag is not "1", the process is terminated, and if the zero flag is "1", the next instruction (stored in the stack area An instruction other than the instruction corresponding to the current return address (specifically, an instruction stored at an address following the instruction) is executed.
In addition, the 22nd instruction "RCPQ Z, (k), n" subtracts "n" (1 byte value) from the contents stored in the address where the contents of the Q register are higher and k is lower. If the result is "0", it is an instruction to terminate the process.
Here, "target address value - "n"" is calculated, and if the zero flag is "1", the process is terminated, and if the zero flag is not "1", the next instruction (stored in the stack area) is executed. An instruction other than the instruction corresponding to the current return address (specifically, an instruction stored at an address following the instruction) is executed.

Furthermore, the 23rd instruction "RCPQ NC, (k), n" extracts "n" (a 1-byte value) from the contents stored in the address where the contents of the Q register are higher and k is lower. If the result of the subtraction is that no carry occurs (if the carry flag is "0"), the processing is terminated (the next instruction starts from the return address stored in the stack area). be.
Here, "target address value - "n"" is calculated, and if the carry flag is not "1", the process is terminated. Executes an instruction that is not the instruction corresponding to the returned address, specifically, the instruction that is stored at the address that follows the instruction.
Furthermore, the 24th instruction "RCPQ C, (k), n" subtracts "n" (1 byte value) from the contents stored in the address where the contents of the Q register are high and k is low. As a result, if it is less than "n", it is an instruction to end processing (the next instruction starts from the return address stored in the stack area).
Here, "target address value - "n"" is calculated, and if the carry flag is "1", the process is terminated, and if the carry flag is not "1", the next instruction (stored in Executes an instruction that is not the instruction corresponding to the returned address, specifically, the instruction that is stored at the address that follows the instruction.

The 25th instruction, "LDQ (k), (k')", stores the contents of the Q register at the upper address and k' at the lower address. This is an instruction to save at a lower address.
for example,
Contents saved at upper address "Q" and lower address "k'": x
if
This is an instruction to store "x" in the storage area of upper address "Q" and lower address "k".
This instruction is used, for example, when it is desired to move the value of a predetermined address (copy source) of the RWM to another address (copy destination) under the condition that the register is not free.

The 26th "CLRHL (HL), n" sets (clears) the contents of each address to "0" from the address indicated by the HL register to "n" addresses, in other words, to "HL+n" addresses. is an order. In this case, the contents before storing "0" are not looked at, and "0" is stored regardless of whether the contents of the address where "0" is stored is "0" or not.

In such a process, for example, as in step S435 of FIG. 51 (11th embodiment), the contents of a series of addresses (addresses for storing data relating to the advantageous section and AT) of the RWM 53 are sequentially changed to " 0” is used.
It can also be used to execute RWM clear of addresses within a predetermined range at the start of a game.
Furthermore, 'n' in this instruction is a 1-byte value, but if 'n' is applicable to a 2-byte value, for example, RWM clear of a predetermined range of addresses when settings are changed (for example, It can also be used in step S224 of FIG. 39 (eleventh embodiment).

FIG. 172 is a diagram showing the addresses of the RWM 53 for storing data on advantageous sections and ATs in the twenty-fourth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 172, the addresses for storing the data about the advantageous section and AT, in other words, the addresses to be initialized in the RWM initialization process in step S435 of FIG. do. Then, in the process of step S435, the process of storing "0" in the storage area from address "F070(H)" to "F07B(H)" is executed. For example, in the example of FIG. 172, it is "CLRHL (F070(H)), B(H)".

In the instruction "CLRHL (F070(H)), B(H)", the HL register value at the start of the instruction is "F070(H)", but the value of the HL register after the instruction ends is also "F070(H)". That is, this instruction does not change the HL register value. As a result, when the next instruction also uses the HL register value, it can be used as it is.

On the other hand, in the prior art, when the reference address is stored in the HL register and the data of addresses from the reference address to "n" addresses ahead are sequentially cleared, the following processing is performed.
For example, when the HL register value is "F070(H)" as described above and the data of the addresses up to "B(H)" addresses, that is, the addresses up to "F07B(H)" are cleared,
Save "0" to the address indicated by the HL register value (F070 (H)) ↓
HL register value = HL register value + 1
Save "0" to the address indicated by the HL register value (F071(H)) ↓
HL register value = HL register value + 1
Save "0" to the address indicated by the HL register value (F072(H)) ↓
:
↓
HL register value = HL register value + 1 (F07B(H))
"0" is saved at the address indicated by the HL register value (F07B(H)).

Therefore, when "0" is stored in the storage area from addresses "F070(H)" to "F07B(H)", the HL register value at the end of the instruction is "F07B(H)".
Therefore, in the next instruction, when executing some instruction again with "F070(H)" as the reference address, it was necessary to store "F070(H)" again in the HL register.
On the other hand, in the "CLRHL (HL), n" instruction, the initially set HL register value is maintained even after the instruction ends, so there is no need to restore the HL register value to the reference address value. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the program capacity and shorten the processing time.

In FIG. 170, the 27th instruction "DCPLDQ (k), 0" is "1" if the content stored in the address where the contents of the Q register are higher and k is lower is not "0". is an instruction to subtract
Here, whether or not the content stored at the address where the content of the Q register is the high order and k is the low order is "0" is determined by calculating "target address value -"0", and the zero flag is set to "1". , it is determined that the content stored at the target address is "0". If it is not "0", "1" is subtracted.

The following two patterns are conceivable for this command.
<Pattern 1>
If the content stored at the address where the content of the Q register is the high order and k is the low order is "0", the "1" subtraction is not performed.
<Pattern 2>
When the carry flag becomes "1" as a result of subtracting "1", "0" is stored in the target address. In this case, it means that the content before subtraction is "0".
Any of these may be adopted.

The 28th instruction "DCPWLDQ (k), 0" is an address with the contents of the Q register as the high order and k as the low order, and the address +1 (the address with the contents of the Q register as the high order and "k+1" as the low order). ) is not "0", it is an instruction to subtract "1".
This 28th instruction is different from the 27th instruction which subtracts "1" from 1-byte data in that "1" is subtracted from 2-byte data. Other points, such as pattern 1 and pattern 2 above, also apply to this instruction.

The 29th and 30th instructions indicate "LDWQ" instructions.
The 29th instruction "LDWQ (k), (HL+d)" saves the contents of the address "HL+d (1-byte value)" to an address where the Q register is the high order and k is the low order, and "HL+d ( 1 byte value) + 1” is stored at the address +1 where the Q register is the high order and “k” is the low order (an address where the Q register is the high order and “k+1” is the low order).
This instruction can be used, for example, to take out a value from the input port 51 and store it in the target address.

for example,
HL=51 (H)
d=1
Contents of F052(H)(HL+d)=1(H)
Contents of F053 (H) (HL + d + 1) = 2 (H)
k = 60 (H)
, the value "1(H)" stored at address "F052(H)" is stored at address "F060(H)" and the value stored at address "F053(H)" is The value "2(H)" is stored at the address "F061(H)".

The 30th instruction "LDWQ (HL+d), (k)" is an instruction in which "k" and "HL+d" are reversed with respect to the above 29th instruction, and the Q register is higher, The contents of the address with k as the lower order are stored in the address of "HL + d (1 byte value)", and the address with the Q register as the upper order and the k as the lower order + 1 (the address with the Q register as the upper order and "k+1" as the lower order). ) at the address “HL+d (1 byte value)+1”.
This instruction is used, for example, when writing data directly from the target address when outputting to the output port 52 .
for example,
k = 60 (H)
Contents of F060 (H) = 1 (H)
Contents of F061 (H) = 2 (H)
HL=51 (H)
d=1
, the value "1(H)" stored at address "F060(H)" is stored at address "F052(H)", and the content "2(H)" at address "F061(H)" is stored. H)” is stored at address “F053(H)”.

In FIG. 171, "cc" in the 31st to 36th instructions indicates either "NZ" or "Z".
In the 31st instruction, "JT NZ, (DE), e" is an instruction to operate the contents of the DE register, and if it is not "0", the processing is shifted to e (address). , it is an instruction for executing the next instruction (specifically, the instruction stored at the address next to the current instruction) without moving the process to e (address).
Here, "calculate the contents of the DE register" is an operation for determining whether or not the DE register value is "0". In this embodiment, "DE register value-"0" is calculated, and if the zero flag is not "1", it is determined that the content of the DE register is not "0".

On the other hand, "JT Z, (DE), e" is the opposite instruction, it operates on the contents of the DE register and if it is "0", in other words if the zero flag is "1" is an instruction to shift the process to e (address), and if the zero flag is not "1", the process does not shift to e (address), and the next instruction (specifically, the next instruction This is an instruction to execute the instruction stored at the address).
In the 31st instruction, "DE" is used to specify a register storing 2-byte data, but the BC register or HL register may also be specified. In this case, they are "JT cc, (BC), e" and "JT cc, (HL), e", respectively.
This also applies to the 32nd instruction below.

The 32nd instruction is different from the 31st instruction which shifts the processing to e (address) in that the processing is terminated when the condition of the instruction is satisfied. Others are the same as the 31st instruction.
In the 32nd instruction, "RT NZ, (DE), e" operates on the contents of the DE register, and if not "0", terminates processing (the next instruction is stored in the stack area). If it is "0", it is an instruction to execute the next instruction (specifically, the instruction stored at the next address of the instruction).
Here, "calculate the contents of the DE register" is the same as above.
Also, "RT Z, (DE), e" operates the contents of the DE register, and if it is "0", terminates the process (the next instruction is the return address stored in the stack area). ), and if it is not "0", it is an instruction to execute the next instruction (specifically, the instruction stored at the next address of this instruction).

In the 33rd instruction, "JTQ NZ, (k), e" operates on the contents stored at addresses where the Q register is high and k is low; ), and if it is "0", it is an instruction to execute the next instruction (specifically, the instruction stored at the address following the instruction).
Here, "calculate the content stored at the address where the Q register is the high order and k is the low order" means "the content of the address indicated by the target register - '0'" and the zero flag is '1'. If not, it is determined that the contents stored in the addresses with the Q register as the upper and the k as the lower are not "0".

On the other hand, in the 33rd instruction, "JTQ Z, (k), e" operates on the contents stored in the address where the Q register is the high order and k is the low order, and if it is "0", This is an instruction to move the process to e (address) and to execute the next instruction (specifically, the instruction stored at the address following the relevant instruction) if it is not "0". Here, in the same way as above, "the content of the address indicated by the target register - '0'" is calculated, and if the zero flag is '1', the Q register is stored in the upper address and the k is the lower address. It is determined that the content of the input is "0".

The 34th instruction is different from the 33rd instruction, which shifts the processing to e (address), in that the processing is terminated when the condition of the instruction is satisfied. Others are the same as the 33rd instruction.
In the 34th instruction, "RTQ NZ, (k)" operates on the contents stored at the address where the Q register is high and k is low, and if it is not "0", the process ends ( The next instruction starts from the return address stored in the stack area), and if it is "0", the next instruction (specifically, the instruction stored at the address consecutive to that instruction) is an instruction to execute
"RTQ Z, (k)" computes the contents stored in the addresses where the Q register is the high order and k is the low order. starts from the return address stored in the stack area), and if not "0", the instruction to execute the next instruction (specifically, the instruction stored at the address consecutive to the instruction) is.
In these instructions, "the content of the address indicated by the target register--"0" is calculated, and the processing ends according to the value of the zero flag.

The 35th "RTW" instruction is an instruction for judging whether or not the content saved in the target register is "0", and terminating the processing according to the judgment result.
This instruction may be used, for example, to store a timer value in a register and determine whether or not the timer value has elapsed.
In the thirty-fifth instruction, "ss" indicates either the BC register, the DE register, or the HL register.
For example, the instruction "RTW NZ, (BC)" operates on the contents of the BC register, and if it is not "0", terminates the processing (the next instruction starts from the return address stored in the stack area. start), and if it is "0", it is an instruction to execute the next instruction (specifically, the instruction stored at the address consecutive to that instruction).

Here, "operate the contents of the BC register" is an operation for determining whether or not the BC register value is "0". In this embodiment, "BC register value-"0" is calculated, and if the zero flag is not "1", it is determined that the content of the BC register is not "0". "RTW NZ, (DE)" for calculating the content of the DE register and "RTW NZ, (HL)" for calculating the content of the HL register are the same as above.

Also, "RTW Z, (BC)" is an instruction to operate the content of the BC register and terminate the process if it is "0". The calculation of the content of the BC register is performed by calculating "BC register value-"0", and if the zero flag is "1", it is determined that the content of the BC register is "0". "RTW Z, (DE)" for calculating the contents of the DE register and "RTW Z, (HL)" for calculating the contents of the HL register are the same as above.

The 36th "RBITQ" instruction is an instruction for determining whether or not a predetermined bit in the contents saved at the target address is "0", and ending the processing according to the determination result. Since this instruction does not directly judge (look at) the register value, it is an instruction that can be used even when there is no free space in the register.
In the 36th instruction, "RBITQ NZ, b, (k)" is "b" (one of 0 to 7 bits) among the contents stored in the address where the Q register is the high order and k is the low order. is not "0", the process is terminated (the next instruction starts from the return address stored in the stack area), and "b" (any of bits 0 to 7) is "0". In some cases, it is the instruction to execute the next instruction (specifically, the instruction stored at the address following the current instruction).
For example, an instruction to determine whether the D1 bit is "0" is "PBITQ NZ, 1, (k)". Here, "0" is subtracted from the target bit value, and if the zero flag is "0", it is determined that the target bit value is not "0".

On the contrary, "RBITQ Z, b, (k)" is stored in the address where the Q register is the high order and the k is the low order. is "0", it is an instruction to terminate the process. Also in this case, "0" is subtracted from the target bit value, and if the zero flag is "1", the target bit value is determined to be "0".

The 37th "BITQ" instruction indicates which bit of the content stored at the target address is set ("1") or how many bits are set (the number of bits that are "1"). number).
"BITQ A, (k)" is an instruction to check the position of the content of "A" among the contents stored in the addresses where the Q register is the high order and k is the low order.
In this instruction, the following two patterns are mainly conceivable.

<Pattern 1>
As pattern 1, it is checked whether or not the specified bit in the contents saved at the target address is "1".
For example, if the instruction is "BITQ 3, (k)", it is an instruction to check whether or not the D3 bit of the content stored at the address where the Q register is the high order and k is the low order is "1". Become.
<Pattern 2>
As pattern 2, the number of bits of "1" is retrieved from the contents stored at the target address, and the number of bits of "1" is stored in the A register.

The instructions 1 to 37 described above are binarized (coded) and stored in the ROM 54 as instruction codes. As shown in FIG. 167A, an instruction consists of instruction information and identification information, so when an instruction is coded, it consists of an instruction information code and an identification information code.
Here, in the twenty-fourth embodiment, when an instruction is coded, the code including the most significant bit of the instruction code is defined as the instruction information code.
If the code containing the most significant bit of the instruction code is the instruction information code, the main CPU 55 can quickly determine which instruction should be executed when reading the instruction code from the most significant bit. becomes.
Examples of the instruction code arrangement include "(instruction information code) (identification information code) (instruction information code)" or "(instruction information code) (identification information code)".

However, without being limited to the above, when an instruction is coded, the least significant bit of the instruction code may be determined to include the instruction information code.
In this case, the instruction code may be arranged, for example, as "(identification information code) (instruction information code)" or "(instruction information code) (identification information code) (instruction information code)". In this case, when reading the instruction code, by reading the code containing the least significant bit first, the main CPU 55 can quickly determine which instruction should be executed with that instruction code. Become.

Although the twenty-fourth embodiment has been described above, the twenty-fourth embodiment is not limited to the above contents, and various modifications such as those described below are possible.
(1) Although the initial value of the Q register is set to "F0(H)", it is not limited to this and differs depending on the upper address value of the work area in the RWM 53's use area. For example, when the high-order address of the work area in the used area of the RWM 53 is set to "E1(H)", the initial value of the Q register is "E1(H)".
(2) Bits corresponding to the carry flag (C) and zero flag (Z) in the F register shown in FIG. For example, the D3 bit may be the carry flag (C) and the D4 bit may be the zero flag (Z).
(3) The twenty-fourth embodiment is not limited to the commands illustrated in FIGS. 168 to 171, and more commands are provided for executing the program of the slot machine 10. FIG.
Also, the instructions illustrated in FIGS. 168 to 171 are not limited to the illustrated descriptions.
(4) In the twenty-fourth embodiment, the slot machine 10 (FIG. 1) is exemplified as a game machine, but it is also possible to implement it with a pachinko game machine 500 (FIG. 99).

<25th Embodiment>
Next, a twenty-fifth embodiment of the present invention will be described.
The twenty-fifth embodiment is, firstly, an invention relating to a method of determining a winning combination (symbol combination that stops on an activated line). Secondly, the invention relates to a method for determining the number of payouts at the time of winning a small winning combination.
In the twenty-fifth embodiment, the basic configuration of the slot machine 10 is the same as in the twenty-third embodiment. Therefore, the twenty-fifth embodiment includes FIGS. 114 to 163. FIG.
In the present specification (including all embodiments) and the scope of claims, the term "when stopped" of the reel 31 or the symbol means that when the stop switch 42 corresponding to the reel is operated to stop, the stop switch 42 When the stop operation of is detected (when the level data or rising data is turned on), when the stop position of the symbol is determined based on the stop operation of the stop switch 42, after the stop position of the symbol is determined When the pattern (reel 31) has not yet stopped (when it is about to stop, for example, during deceleration), the output state to the motor 32 is the excitation state for stopping the reel 31 (for example, the four-phase excitation state (fourth The same applies in this paragraph below), when the excitation state for stopping the reel 31 is finished, when the reel 31 is actually stopped, or when the symbols are displayed stopped ( It is assumed to have a meaning (either meaning) including all after the excitation state for stopping the reel 31 is completed (when the excitation output to the motor 32 is not being performed).
Therefore, when the reels 31 or symbols are referred to as "stopped", the reels 31 or symbols are not necessarily stopped.

In addition, although it partially overlaps with the matter explained at the beginning of the first embodiment, it will be explained again. It includes not only paying out from 35 but also adding credits. Furthermore, if the gaming machine is a management gaming machine that does not use medals (sometimes referred to as an enclosed gaming machine, a medalless gaming machine, or an ECO gaming machine; the same shall apply hereinafter), electronic gaming media may be provided. is also included.
Thus, in the specification (including all embodiments) and claims, "payout" can also be referred to as "grant." Therefore, for example, the "payout number table" can also be referred to as the "granted number table."

173 to 175 are diagrams showing the contents of the RWM 53 in the twenty-fifth embodiment. Note that FIGS. 173 to 175 also partially include the contents already explained in the above-described other embodiments.
In FIGS. 173 to 175, the numbers in parentheses below the addresses indicate the number of bytes in the storage area of the addresses (same as in FIGS. 133 to 138).
In FIG. 173, the operation state flag (_FL_ACTION) at the address "F00C(H)" is a flag storage area for determining whether or not the role object is activated. It corresponds to the status flag.
In the twenty-fifth embodiment, the D3 bit corresponds to 1BB and the D4 bit corresponds to RB (RBA to RBP). As in the eleventh embodiment, the operating state flag is updated in the game start set process (step S272 in FIG. 139). Also, it is cleared in the game end check process (not shown in FIG. 148).

The number of games (_CT_BONUS_PLAY) when RB is activated at address "F00F(H)" and the number of wins (_CT_BONUS_WIN) when RB is activated at address "F010(H)" are shown in FIG. 133 (25th embodiment). It is the same storage area as the object. In the twenty-fifth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 202, which will be described later, the method of updating the number of wins during RB operation is different from the other embodiments.

The stop acceptance information data (_PT_STOP_STS) at the address "F01E(H)" is a storage area for storing whether or not the stop switch 42 can accept.
The first (left) to third (right) stop switches 42 are assigned to the D0 to D2 bits of the stop acceptance information data, respectively. Before the start of rotation of the reel 31 and after the start of rotation of the reel 31 until the speed becomes constant and the operation of the stop switch 42 can be accepted, the value is "0", and when the operation of the stop switch 42 can be accepted, the ”.
Note that "until the operation of the stop switch 42 can be accepted" means that the index sensor corresponding to the reel 31 is detected and the pattern number is stored (any reel 31 whose index is not detected). Even if there is another reel 31 whose index is detected, the other reel 31 may be stopped), or the index sensor corresponding to all the reels 31 is detected and the pattern number is stored. until it is done.
Especially in this embodiment, after saving the minimum game time in the RWM 53 in step S767 in FIG. 140 (23rd embodiment), "00000111 (B)" is set as the initial value to the stop reception information data. Then, for example, when the first (left) stop switch 42 is operated, the stop reception information data is updated to "00000110(B)" with the bit corresponding to the first stop switch 42 set to "0".
This stop acceptance information data may be used when masking bits other than the D0 to D2 bits of the input port rising data A (FIG. 133).

The payout amount data (_NB_PAY_MEDAL) at the address "F023(H)" and the payout amount data buffer (_BF_PAY_MEDAL) at the address "F024(H)" are the payout amount data (_NB_PAY_MEDAL) shown in FIG. _NB_PAY_MEDAL) and payout amount data buffer (_BF_PAY_MEDAL).
In other words, when one of the small wins is won and the number of payouts is determined, the number of payouts (the same value) is stored in the number of payout data and the number of payout data buffer. The payout number data is decremented by "1" each time one medal is paid out (including the addition of credits), and becomes "0" when the payout process is completed. On the other hand, the payout number data buffer is not decremented even if the payout process is executed, and the initial value is maintained even after the payout process. The payout number data buffer is updated (overwritten) at the end of the next game. In addition, the number of payouts is updated using the value of the payout number data buffer, and the above-mentioned instructed accessory ratio (total), continuous accessory ratio (6000 games), accessory ratio (6000 games), continuous accessory ratio (cumulative total) and accessory ratio (cumulative total) can be calculated.

A reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP) at the address "F0AD(H)" is a flag storage area for determining whether or not the stop of the reel 31 has been received. When reel stop reception has not ended, it is "1", and when reel stop reception has been completed, it is "0". Therefore, when no reel 31 is stopped while the reels 31 are rotating, the result is "00000111 (B)". becomes.

The stop/control reel number data (_NB_STOP_REEL) at the address "F0AF(H)" is a storage area for storing the reel number during control or when the stop is accepted. When the reel 31 is not under control or when the stop is not accepted, it becomes "0", for example, when the third stop switch 42 is operated and the stop of the third reel 31 is accepted, or when the stop control of the third reel 31 is in progress. becomes "00000011(B)" (3(D)).

The control picture number (_BF_PICTURE) at the address "F0B4(H)" is a storage area for storing the picture number stopped at the reference position. Here, the reference position in the twenty-fifth embodiment is the "lower stage". Also, the line of "lower left" - "middle lower" - "lower right" is referred to as a "reference line" in the twenty-fifth embodiment.
On the other hand, in FIGS. 135 to 137, #th reel symbol number (for stop position) (_NB_RL#_STPPIC) indicates the symbol number of the symbol stopped in the middle row.
Therefore,
"Control picture number (_BF_PICTURE) = "No. # reel picture number (for stop position) (_NB_RL#_STPPIC)" - "1"
becomes a relationship.
Specifically, when the first (left) reel 31 is stopped at the position shown in FIG. Red 7)", and the control picture number (_BF_PICTURE) becomes "12 (D) (Bell B)".

In FIGS. 174 and 175, stop pattern data (1st group to 9th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1 to 9) of addresses "F0B7(H)" to "F0BF(H)" determine the combination of symbols to stop on the active line. It is a storage area for storing data (stop symbol data) for doing.
In the twenty-fifth embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 116 to 121,
1BB
RB (RBA-RBP)
Replay (replay 01 to replay 10)
Small role (small role 01 to small role 34)
is provided.
Then, the symbol groups related to the symbol combination of the combination are determined as follows.
Symbol group 1: RBA to RBH operating symbols Symbol group 2: RBI to RBP operating symbols Symbol group 3: 1BB operating symbols and Replay 01 to Replay 07 operating symbols Symbol group 4: Replay 08 to Replay 10 operating symbols Symbol group 5: Small Role 01 to small role 08 operating pattern Pattern 6 group: Small role 09 to small role 16 operating pattern Symbol 7 group: Small role 17 to small role 24 operating pattern Symbol 8 group: Small role 25 to small role 32 operating pattern Symbol 9 group : Small winning combination 33 and small winning combination 34 operating pattern In addition, in FIGS. 174 and 175, "operating pattern" is written, but "operating pattern" has the same meaning as "symbol combination". Hereinafter, it will be referred to as "symbol combination" or "operating symbol" as required. A symbol combination that has been determined to be stopped or a symbol combination that is actually stopped may be referred to as a "stopped symbol combination".

Stop symbol data (first group) and stop symbol data (second group) correspond to RBA to RBP.
For example, when all the reels 31 are stopped and the stop symbol data (first group) is "00000000 (B)", it means that the symbol combination of RBA to RBH is not stopped on the active line. On the other hand, when all the reels 31 are stopped and the stop symbol data (first group) is "00000010 (B)", it means that the RBB symbol combination is stopped on the active line.
In the stop symbol data (third group), the D0 bit corresponds to 1BB, and the D1 to D7 bits correspond to Replay 01 to Replay 07, respectively.

Furthermore, in the stop symbol data (fourth group), bits D0 to D2 correspond to replay 08 to replay 10, respectively. The D4-D7 bits are unused.
Further, bits corresponding to the small winning combination 01 to the small winning combination 34 are assigned to each bit of the stop symbol data (fifth group) to the stop symbol data (ninth group). Bits D2 to D7 of the stop symbol data (9th group) are unused.
Then, the stop symbol data (first group) to the stop symbol data (fourth group) are assigned the combinations (1BB, RB, and replay) with no payout, and the stop symbol data (fifth group) to the stop symbol data (fourth group) are assigned. 9 groups) are assigned small wins with payouts.
In this way, by dividing the storage area for the stop symbol data, it is possible to simplify the determination of the number of payouts when any symbol combination of a payout combination stops on the active line. It is possible to simplify the counting of the number of winnings of small wins when the object (RB) is in operation (details will be described later).
In addition, in the stop symbol data (fifth group) to stop symbol data (ninth group) having payout, D0 to D7 bits (small combination 01 to small combination 08) of the stop symbol data (fifth group), and the stop symbol D0 to D3 bits (small winning combination 09 to small winning combination 12) of the data (sixth group) correspond to the payout of 15 coins.
Furthermore, the D4 to D7 bits (small winning combination 13 to small winning combination 16) of the stop symbol data (sixth group) and the D0 to D7 bits (small winning combination 17 to small winning combination 24) of the stopping symbol data (seventh group) are , corresponds to the payout of 3 cards.
Furthermore, the D0 to D7 bits (small winning combination 25 to small winning combination 32) of the stop symbol data (8th group) and the D0 to D1 bits (small winning combination 33 to small winning combination 34) of the stopping symbol data (9th group) are It corresponds to one payout.

In the twenty-fifth embodiment, when the start switch 41 is operated, the role lottery process is performed (step S761 in FIG. 140), and based on the winning number, the accessory condition device number is stored, and the winning and replay condition device number is stored. After saving, set the initial value to the stop design data (_WK_STOP_PIC). Here, the bit corresponding to all the operating symbols of the stop symbol data (first group) to the stop symbol data (ninth group) is set to "1".
in particular,
Stop symbol data (first group): 11111111 (B)
Stop symbol data (second group): 11111111 (B)
Stop symbol data (third group): 11111111 (B)
Stop symbol data (fourth group): 00000111 (B)
Stop symbol data (fifth group): 11111111 (B)
Stop symbol data (6th group): 11111111 (B)
Stop symbol data (7th group): 11111111 (B)
Stop symbol data (8th group): 11111111 (B)
Stop symbol data (9th group): 00000011 (B)
set to

Then, after the stop position of the reel 31 is determined (or after the reel 31 actually stops), the bit corresponding to the combination that is no longer likely to stop on the activated line is updated to "0". . For example, when the left reel 31 is stopped and the symbol to be stopped on the active line is "replay", there is a possibility that all the symbol combinations of RB (RBA to RBP) will be stopped on the active line as shown in FIG. Gone. In this case, when the left reel 31 is stopped and the symbol stopped on the active line is "Replay",
Stop symbol data (first group): 00000000 (B)
Stop symbol data (second group): 00000000 (B)
is updated to

Further, for example, when the middle reel 31 is stopped and the symbol to be stopped on the active line is "Red 7", as shown in FIG. Eliminates the possibility of getting stuck in the line. On the other hand, among RB, the symbol combination of RBI to RBL has the possibility of stopping on the active line. Therefore, when the middle reel 31 is stopped in this case,
Stop symbol data (first group): 00000000 (B)
Stop symbol data (second group): 00001111 (B)
is updated to

Thus, after the stop positions of the reels 31 are determined, the stop symbol data (first group) to the stop symbol data (ninth group) are updated, and after the stop positions of all the reels 31 are determined, the reels 31 are stopped. When all of the symbol data (first group) to stop symbol data (ninth group) are "00000000 (B)", the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination in the game is not stopped on the activated line (the winning combination is has not won a prize).
On the other hand, when any bit of the stop symbol data (first group) to the stop symbol data (ninth group) is "1", the symbol combination corresponding to the bit is stopped on the active line. is determined to be
Further, when any one of the stop symbol data (first group) to the stop symbol data (fourth group) is "1", it is determined that there is no payout of medals in the game.
On the other hand, when any bit of the data of the stop symbol data (fifth group) to the stop symbol data (ninth group) is "1", it is determined that medals will be paid out in the game. .

Here, in this embodiment,
Small win 01 to small win 12: payout of 15 coins. Small win 13 to small win 24: payout of 3 coins. Small win 25 to small win 34: payout of 1 coin.
Therefore, when any bit of the stop symbol data (fifth group) or any of the D0 to D3 bits of the stop symbol data (sixth group) is "1", it is determined that 15 coins are paid out. .
Also, when any of the D4 to D7 bits of the stop symbol data (sixth group) or the D0 to D7 bits of the stop symbol data (seventh group) is "1", it is determined that three coins are paid out. .
Furthermore, when any of the D0 to D7 bits of the stop symbol data (8th group) or the D0 to D1 bits of the stop symbol data (9th group) is "1", it is determined that one coin is paid out. be.

176 to 179 are diagrams showing definition data in the twenty-fifth embodiment. In the definition data, "EQU" is an assembler instruction that defines a symbol as having an integer value, and means "equal".
FIG. 176 shows reel symbol definition and symbol definition.
The reel symbol definition shows the relationship between symbols and numerical values for 10 types of symbols in the twenty-fifth embodiment. For example, the "blue BAR" pattern is "@ZGR_01" when represented by a symbol, and is "0" when represented by a numerical value.
Also, the symbol definition indicates the relationship between each symbol in the first to ninth symbol groups and the numerical value. For example, "@_PIC1" is a symbol indicating one group of symbols. As described above, for example, the symbol group 1 consists of RBA to RBH, and each bit (D0 to D7) corresponds to RBA to RBH, respectively. For example, the D0 bit of the numerical value of the symbol group 1 is a bit corresponding to RBA.

Figures 177 to 179 show definition data of each operating symbol in the first to ninth symbol groups. Each bit of each symbol group matches a bit corresponding to each operating symbol of the stop symbol data (first group) to the stop symbol data (ninth group).
As described above, for example, the D0 bit of the stop symbol data (first group) is a bit corresponding to the RBA operation symbol. It is defined as "00000001 (B)" where the D0 bit is "1". Similarly, the numerical value corresponding to the RBB operating symbol "@SRB_B" is defined as "00000010 (B)" with the D1 bit being "1", and the numerical value corresponding to the RBH operating symbol "@SRB_H" is , D7 bit is set to "10000000 (B)".

In the definition data, "@SRB" is a symbol indicating the shift RB (SRB) operation pattern, and substantially indicates the RBA operation pattern to the RBP operation pattern.
Also, for example, "@SRB_A_H" indicates RBA operating symbols to RBH operating symbols. The numerical value is "11111111 (B)", which is equal to the case where all bits of the stop symbol data (first group) are "1".
Furthermore, "@1BB" is a symbol indicating a 1BB operating symbol.
Furthermore, "@REP" is a symbol indicating a replay operation pattern. For example, "@REP_01" is a symbol indicating the replay 01 operation symbol.
In addition, in FIG. 178, "@WIN" is a symbol indicating a minor winning pattern. For example, "@WIN_01" is a symbol indicating the 01 small winning pattern.
As described above, the symbols and numerical values of each operating symbol of each symbol group are defined.

FIG. 180 is a diagram showing an outline of various tables used in the twenty-fifth embodiment.
All the tables described below are stored in the ROM 54 at predetermined addresses.
The reel symbol search table address offset table (TBL_PIC_SRCH) shown in FIG. 180(A) specifies the head address (offset value) of the target table for each reel 31 when searching for the stop symbol of each reel 31. It is a table for
For example, when searching for a stop symbol on the first reel 31, the value (offset value) stored at the address "1200 (H)" is referred to. Since the offset value is "3 (H)", the offset value "3 (H)" is added to the address "1200 (H)" indicating the first reel 31 in the reel symbol search table address offset table (TBL_PIC_SRCH). The address "1203(H)" indicated by the value is specified as the top address of the first reel pattern arrangement table (TBL_PICARG_1). As shown in FIG. 180(B), the first reel pattern arrangement table (TBL_PICARG_1) is stored at addresses "1203(H)" to "120C(H)" (details will be described later). The address is "1203(H)".

Also, when searching for a stop symbol on the second reel 31, the value (offset value) stored at the address "1201(H)" is referred to. Since the offset value is "39 (H)", the offset value "39 (H)" is added to the address "1201 (H)" indicating the second reel 31 in the reel symbol search table address offset table (TBL_PIC_SRCH). The address "123A (H)" indicated by the value is specified as the top address of the second reel pattern arrangement table (TBL_PICARG_2) (FIG. 180(B)).
Similarly, when searching for a stop symbol on the third reel 31, the value (offset value) stored at the address "1203(H)" is referred to. Since the offset value is "8D(H)", the offset value "8D(H)" is added to the address "1202(H)" indicating the third reel 31 in the reel pattern search table address offset table (TBL_PIC_SRCH). The address "128F(H)" indicated by the value is specified as the top address of the third reel pattern arrangement table (TBL_PICARG_3) (FIG. 180(B)).

As described above, the three addresses of the reel symbol search table address offset table (TBL_PIC_SRCH) store offset values for specifying the head addresses of the symbol arrangement tables of the first to third reels 31, respectively.
A first reel pattern arrangement table (TBL_PICARG_1) corresponding to the first reel 31, a second reel pattern arrangement table (TBL_PICARG_2) corresponding to the second reel 31, and a third reel pattern arrangement table corresponding to the third reel 31. (TBL_PICARG_3) is provided.
These #th reel pattern arrangement tables (TBL_PICARG_#) are tables used when specifying symbols to be stopped on the active line from the symbol numbers to be stopped at the reference position (details will be described later).

Further, as shown in FIG. 180(B), a #th reel symbol combination table (TBL_PICCMB_#) is provided at an address continuous to the #th reel symbol arrangement table (TBL_PICARG_#).
Each data of the #th reel symbol combination table (TBL_PICCMB_#) is composed of reel symbol data information, reel symbol data information+table offset, and symbol data. Details of these data will be described later.

FIG. 181 shows the first reel pattern arrangement table (TBL_PICARG_1). FIG. 181 also shows the reel symbol definition shown in FIG.
Here, the data stored at each address of the #th reel symbol array table (TBL_PICARG_#) is referred to as "symbol data". This "design data" is data that can identify the type of design.
The first reel pattern arrangement table (TBL_PICARG_1), the second reel pattern arrangement table (TBL_PICARG_2) and the third reel pattern arrangement table (TBL_PICARG_3), which will be described later, are all tables consisting of "10" addresses. The 0th to 19th symbols (20 symbols) are specified by the address. In other words, one address specifies two pattern data.

In FIG. 181, "*16" indicates the upper 4 bits. For example, in the address "1203 (H)", the upper 4 bits are "@ZGR_08" (2nd pattern, "Cherry") and the lower 4 bits are "@ZGR_02" (3rd pattern, "Black BAR"). indicates that there is
As shown in FIG. 114, on the left reel 31, the second symbol is "Cherry" and the third symbol is "Black BAR".
According to the definition data, "@ZGR_08" is "7(H)", that is, "0111(B)". Also, "@ZGR_02" is "1 (H)", that is, "0001 (B)".
Therefore, the address "1203 (H)" has "0111 (B)" in the upper 4 bits and "0001 (B)" in the lower 4 bits, so "0111/0001 (B)" is actually ("/" indicates the boundary between the upper 4 bits and the lower 4 bits).

Here, for example, when the left (first) reel 31 is stopped, if the symbol to be stopped at the reference position (lower row) is the number 1 "watermelon", the symbol to be stopped on the activated line is the number 3 "black bar". (see FIGS. 114 and 115).
In this case, when the number 1 "watermelon" stops at the reference position (lower row), the value corresponding to the symbol stopped on the activated line is set to the address "1203 (H)" according to the program (flow chart) described later. It is configured to be specified as the value of the lower 4 bits ("@ZGR_02", ie, "black BAR").
Also, for example, when the number 2 "Cherry" stops at the reference position (lower row), the value corresponding to the symbol stopped on the active line is the value of the upper 4 bits of the address "1204 (H)", that is, "@ ZGR_05" (Bell A).

As shown in FIG. 181, in this embodiment, 20 pattern data are stored in 10 addresses. That is, in one address, the upper 4 bits specify 1 design data, and the lower 4 bits specify 1 design data. By configuring in this way, it is possible to reduce the capacity of the ROM 54 for storing the design data. In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 181, there are 10 types of patterns (@ZGR_01 to @ZGR_10) which are less than 16 types, so that "0000(B)" to "1010(B)" It can be expressed as a range. Therefore, since it becomes possible to store in the upper 4 bits and the lower 4 bits, the capacity of the ROM 54 can be reduced.
However, not limited to this, 20 pattern data may be stored in 20 addresses. In this case, one pattern data is stored per one address. This example is shown in FIG. 228 (example 1 of the twenty-seventh embodiment) described later.

182 to 184 are diagrams showing the first reel symbol combination table (TBL_PICCMB_1). In FIGS. 182 to 184 and FIGS. 186 to 188 and 190 to 192 which will be described later, ";//" means that there is no address storing the value. For example, the address "120F(H)" is an address that stores a value corresponding to "blue BAR" in the first group of symbols, and corresponds to "black BAR" to "lower special figure" in the first group of symbols. The address storing the value does not exist, and the next address "1210 (H)" is the address storing the value of the reel symbol data information of the second symbol group. In other words, the drawings are drawings for facilitating the explanation, so not all the data described in the drawings are stored in the ROM 54 (the data described in ";//" and the definitions The data is not stored in the ROM 54).

An address is also provided for the content of ";//", and "0" is stored when data is stored. In that case, the later-described reel pattern data information and table offset data (for example, "120D(H)" and "120E(H)") become unnecessary. Specifically, symbol combination data (for specifying what is the symbol combination having each symbol) corresponding to each symbol is stored in a predetermined order. For example, in symbol group 1, if the symbol combination data includes "blue BAR" on the left reel 31, the address is "XXX0 (H)", and if the symbol combination data includes "black BAR" on the left reel 31, the address is "XXX1". (H)”, . For example, symbol combination data can be stored for each symbol group at address intervals corresponding to the number of symbols (10 addresses in this example), such as address "XXX9(H)". However, in this example, even if the data is "0", it is stored in the ROM 54, so although the capacity of the ROM 54 increases, the verification is easier when re-verifying from the data stored in the ROM 54. become.

Here, at each address of the #th reel symbol combination table (TBL_PICCMB_#), for example, in the first reel symbol combination table (TBL_PICCMB_1) of FIG. and D7 and D6 bits of "120E(H)" are referred to as "reel symbol data information".
Also, data stored in bits D5 to D0 of address "120E(H)" is referred to as a "table offset".
Furthermore, the data stored at the address "120F(H)" will be referred to as "symbol combination data".

First, the D0 to D7 bits of the address "120D(H)" and the D6 and D7 bits of the next address "120E(H)" correspond to the reel pattern data information and correspond to 10 kinds of patterns.
in particular,
(1) Reel pattern data information of address "120D (H)" D7: Blue BAR
D6: Black BAR
D5: Red 7
D4: Replay D3: Bell A
D2: Bell B
D1: Watermelon D0: Cherry (2) Reel pattern data information of address "120E (H)" D7: Special figure upper D6: Special figure lower

It means that the symbol data corresponding to the bit "1" in the reel symbol data information is stored at the addresses following the addresses "120D(H)" and "120E(H)". For example, of the reel design data information stored at addresses "120D(H)" and "120E(H)", only the D7 bit of the reel design data information stored at address "120D(H)" is "1". ”. Therefore, at the next address "120F(H)", the symbol combination data ("blue BAR" data) for the D7 bit of the reel symbol data information at the address "120D(H)" is stored.

Also, the lower 6 bits (D0 to D5) of the data of the address "120E(H)" are the table offset value.
For example, the table offset value stored at address "120E(H)" is "3(H)". In this embodiment, the reel design data information and the table offset value are described separately for easy understanding of the reel design data information and the table offset value. For example, in the data of the address "120E(H)", the reel pattern data information is "00000000(B)" and the table offset value is "03(H)". At the address "120E(H)", data obtained by ORing the reel pattern data information and the table offset value, that is, "00000011(H)" is actually stored.

The above reel symbol data information and reel symbol data information+table offset are the same for symbol group 2 to symbol group 9 as well. Furthermore, the same applies to each symbol group 1 to symbol 9 group of the second reel symbol combination table (TBL_PICCMB_2) (Figs. 186 to 188) and the third reel symbol combination table (TBL_PICCMB_3) (Figs. 190 to 192). .

Here, the symbol group 1 of the first reel symbol combination table (TBL_PICCMB_1) shown in FIG. 182 will be described in more detail.
In the D0 to D7 bits of the first address "120D(H)" and the D6 and D7 bits of the next address (120E(H)), which symbol on the first (left) reel 31 is a symbol combination of symbol group 1 It shows whether it is a pattern that constitutes the
The pattern combination of the pattern 1 group is
RBA: "Blue BAR" - "Blue BAR" - "Black BAR"
RBB: "Blue BAR" - "Blue BAR" - "Red 7"
RBC: "Blue BAR" - "Blue BAR" - "Watermelon"
RBD: "Blue BAR" - "Blue BAR" - "Special map"
RBE: "Blue BAR" - "Blue BAR" - "Black BAR"
RBF: "Blue BAR" - "Black BAR" - "Red 7"
RBG: "Blue BAR" - "Black BAR" - "Watermelon"
RBH: "Blue BAR" - "Black BAR" - "Special map"
(see FIG. 116).

Therefore, in the symbol combination of the symbol group 1, the symbols on the first (left) reel 31 are all "blue BAR".
Therefore, the D7 bit of the address "120D(H)" corresponding to the "blue BAR" is "1", and the other D6 to D0 bits are "0".
Similarly, the D7 and D6 bits of address "120E(H)" are "0".
Also, the table offset value indicated by the lower 6 bits of the address "120E(H)" points to the numerical value up to the address of the next symbol group (2 symbol groups in this example). The table offset value stored at the address "120E(H)" is "3(H)", but the address "1211(H)" obtained by adding "3(H)" to the address "120E(H)" is , is the address storing the table offset of the pattern 2 group.
Similarly, at the address "1211 (H)", the offset value "3 (H)" up to the address where the table offset of the pattern 3 group is stored is stored. That is, address "1211(H)"+"3(H)"="1214(H)" (address storing table offset of pattern 3 group).
Further, in the same way, at address "1214 (H)" is stored an offset value "8 (H)" up to the address in which the table offset of the pattern 4 group is stored. That is, the address "1214(H)"+"8(H)"="121C(H)" (the address storing the table offset of the 4 groups of symbols) (description will be omitted below).

Thus, for the first two addresses,
First address: Reel pattern data information of "Blue BAR" to "Cherry" Next address: Reel pattern data information of "Special pattern upper" and "Special pattern lower" and table offset of the next pattern group are stored. The offset value up to the address is stored.
Thus, the "next address" stores two completely different data, that is, the reel symbol data information and the offset value to the address where the table offset of the next symbol group is stored. The difference in the corresponding bits of the data does not interfere with the control process. By adopting such a storage method, the capacity of the ROM 54 can be reduced.
When the number of symbols is 8 or less, the "first address" stores the reel symbol data information, and the "next address" stores the offset value up to the address where the table offset of the next symbol group is stored. You may Also, when the number of symbols is 9 or more, the reel symbol data information is stored at the "first address", the reel symbol data information is stored at the "next address", and further the reel symbol data information is stored at the "next address". It is possible to adopt various patterns such as storing the offset value up to the address where the table offset of the pattern group is stored (in this case, there are 3 addresses in total).

Further, at the next address "120F(H)", symbol combination data for specifying the symbol combination having the symbol "blue BAR" on the first (left) reel 31 is stored. there is
As described above, in the eight symbol combinations of the symbol group 1, the symbols on the first (left) reel 31 are all "blue BAR". Therefore, "@SRB_A_H" (RBA to RBH) indicating the type of combination in which the first (left) reel 31 is "blue BAR" is stored at address "120F(H)".
It should be noted that "@SRB_A_H", as shown in FIG. 177, means an operating symbol related to all of the first symbol group, and the value corresponding to this symbol is "11111111(B)". Therefore, actually, "11111111(B)" is stored at the address "120F(H)".

In the first reel symbol combination table, the symbol group 2 is also determined in the same manner as the symbol group 1.
Next, the symbol group 3 in the first reel symbol combination table will be described.
First, the D7 to D0 bits of the address "1213 (H)" and the D7 and D6 bits of the address "1214 (H)" are
(1) Reel pattern data information at address "1213 (H)" D7: "1" (blue BAR)
D6: "1" (black BAR)
D5: "0" (red 7)
D4: "1" (Replay)
D3: "1" (Bell A)
D2: "0" (Bell B)
D1: "1" (watermelon)
D0: "0" (cherry)
(2) Reel pattern data information of address "1214 (H)" D7: "1" (special drawing)
D6: "0" (lower special drawing)
It has become.
Therefore, among the three groups of symbols (1BB or a combination of symbols of Replay 01 to Replay 07), the symbols of the first (left) reel 31 are "Blue BAR", "Black BAR", "Replay", and "Bell A". , “watermelon”, or “special map”.

in fact,
1BB: "Blue BAR" - "Blue BAR" - "Blue BAR"
Replay 01: "Replay" - "Blue BAR / Black BAR / Red 7 / Special map" - "Bell A"
Replay 02: "Replay" - "Replay" - "Replay"
Replay 03: "Bell A" - "Red 7/Cherry" - "Replay/Bell B"
Replay 04: "Black BAR" - "Red 7/Cherry" - "Replay/Bell B"
Replay 05: "Special map" - "Replay" - "Bell A"
Replay 06: "Watermelon" - "Replay/Watermelon" - "Red 7/Watermelon/Special map/Black BAR"
Replay 07: "Replay" - "Replay" - "Bell A"
(see FIGS. 116 and 117).

Symbol combination data corresponding to bits (symbols) of "1" in the reel symbol data information are stored at addresses after the address "1215 (H)".
in particular,
(1) Reel pattern data information at address "1213 (H)" D7: "1" (blue BAR) → address "1215 (H)"
D6: "1" (black BAR) → address "1216 (H)"
D5: "0" (red 7) → no address (no symbol combination data)
D4: "1" (replay) → address "1217 (H)"
D3: "1" (bell A) → address "1218 (H)"
D2: "0" (bell B) → no address (no symbol combination data)
D1: "1" (watermelon) → address "1219 (H)"
D0: "0" (cherry) → no address (no symbol combination data)
(2) Reel pattern data information of address "1214 (H)" D7: "1" (special map) → address "121A (H)"
D6: "0" (lower special figure) → no address (no symbol combination data)
It has become.

First, at address "1215 (H)", symbol combination data for specifying a symbol combination in which the symbol on the first (left) reel 31 is "blue BAR" is stored. In the symbol group 3, the symbol combination in which the symbol on the first (left) reel 31 is "BLUE BAR" is 1BB as described above, so "@1BB" is stored in the address "1215 (H)". It is "@1BB" is "00000001(B)" as shown in FIG. 177, and the value is stored at address "1215(H)".
Next, at address "1216 (H)", symbol combination data for specifying a symbol combination in which the symbol on the first (left) reel 31 is "black BAR" is stored. In the symbol group 3, the symbol combination in which the symbol on the first (left) reel 31 is "BLACK BAR" is replay 04 as described above. remembered. "@REP_04" is "00010000(B)" as shown in FIG. 177, and the value is stored at address "1216(H)".

In addition, since there is no symbol combination in which the symbol of the first (left) reel 31 is "Red 7" in the symbol group 3, the symbol combination in which the symbol of the first (left) reel 31 is "Red 7" is selected. No address is provided for storing pattern combination data for identification.
At the next address "1217(H)", symbol combination data for specifying a symbol combination in which the symbol on the first (left) reel 31 is "Replay" is stored. In the symbol group 3, the symbol combinations in which the symbol on the first (left) reel 31 is "Replay" are Replay 01, Replay 02, and Replay 07 as described above. , "@REP_01 OR @REP_02 OR @REP_07" are stored. Since "@REP_01 OR @REP_02 OR @REP_07" is "00000010(B)" OR "00000100(B)" OR "10000000(B)" as shown in FIG. stores "10000110(B)".

At the next address "1218(H)", symbol combination data for specifying a symbol combination in which the symbol on the first (left) reel 31 is "bell A" is stored. In the symbol group 3, the symbol combination in which the symbol on the first (left) reel 31 is "Bell A" is replay 03 as described above. remembered. "@REP_03" is "00001000(B)" as shown in FIG. 177, and the value is stored at the address "1218(H)".
In addition, since there is no symbol combination in which the symbol of the first (left) reel 31 is "Bell B" in the symbol group 3, the symbol combination in which the symbol of the first (left) reel 31 is "Bell B" is selected. No address is provided for storing pattern combination data for identification.

At the next address "1219(H)", symbol combination data for specifying a symbol combination in which the symbol on the first (left) reel 31 is "watermelon" is stored. In the symbol group 3, since the symbol combination in which the symbol on the first (left) reel 31 is "watermelon" is replay 06 as described above, "@REP_06" is stored in the address "1219 (H)". It is Since "@REP_06" is "01000000(B)" as shown in FIG. 177, this value is stored at the address "1219(H)".

Further, since there is no symbol combination in which the symbol on the first (left) reel 31 is "cherry" in the symbol group 3, the symbol combination in which the symbol on the first (left) reel 31 is "cherry" is specified. There is no address in which the symbol combination data for is stored.
At the next address "121A(H)", symbol combination data for specifying a symbol combination in which the symbol on the first (left) reel 31 is "special symbol" is stored. In the symbol group 3, the symbol combination in which the symbol on the first (left) reel 31 is "special symbol" is replay 05 as described above. is stored. "@REP_05" is "00100000(B)" as shown in FIG. 177, and the value is stored at the address "121A(H)".

Further, in the third symbol group, there is no symbol combination in which the symbol on the first (left) reel 31 is "low", so the symbol combination in which the symbol on the first (left) reel 31 is "cherry" is selected. No address is provided for storing pattern combination data for identification.
As described above, reel symbol data information, reel symbol data information+table offset, and symbol combination data are also stored for other symbol groups.
The first reel symbol combination table (TBL_PICCMB_1) is provided with addresses "120D(H)" to "1239(H)" (FIGS. 180, 182 to 184).

185 is a diagram showing the second reel pattern arrangement table (TBL_PICARG_2), which corresponds to FIG. 181 of the first reel 31. FIG. FIG. 185 also shows the reel symbol definition shown in FIG.
For example, when the second (middle) reel 31 is stopped, if the symbol that stops at the reference position (lower stage) is the number 1 "cherry", the symbol that stops on the activated line is the number 2 "watermelon" (Fig. 114 and FIG. 115).
In this case, when the number 1 "cherry" stops at the reference position (lower row), the value corresponding to the pattern stopped on the active line is set to the address "123A (H)" by the program (flow chart) described later. It is configured to be identified as the value of the lower 4 bits. The lower 4 bits of the address "123A(H)" correspond to "@ZGR_07", that is, "watermelon" (see FIG. 114).
Also, when the second "watermelon" stops at the reference position (lower row), the value corresponding to the pattern stopped on the active line is specified as the value of the upper 4 bits of the address "123B (H)". is configured as follows. The upper 4 bits of the address "123B(H)" correspond to "@ZGR_02", that is, "black BAR".

186 to 188 are diagrams showing the second reel symbol combination table (TBL_PICCMB_2), which correspond to FIGS. 182 to 184 of the first reel 31. FIG.
The second reel symbol combination table (TBL_PICCMB_2) will be described by taking the symbol 4 group in FIG. 187 as an example.
In the D0 to D7 bits of the first address "1255 (H)" and the D6 and D7 bits of the next address "1256 (H)", which symbol of the second (middle) reel 31 is a symbol combination of the symbol combination of the four symbol groups. It shows whether it is a pattern that constitutes the
The pattern combination of the 4 groups of patterns is
Replay 08: "Special map" - "Replay" - "Replay"
Replay 09: "Bell A" - "Red 7 / Cherry" - "Blue BAR / Special map bottom"
Replay 10: "Replay" - "Red 7/Cherry" - "Bell B"
(see FIG. 117).

Therefore, in the symbol combination of the four symbol groups, the symbol on the second (middle) reel 31 is "replay", "red 7" or "cherry".
Therefore, in the reel pattern data information at the address "1255 (H)", the D5 bit corresponding to "Red 7", the D4 bit corresponding to "Replay", and the D0 bit corresponding to "Cherry" are "1". , and the other bits of the reel pattern data information are "0".
Further, since the address "125B (H)" where the table offset of the fifth pattern group is stored is five ahead from the address "1256 (H)" where the table offset of the fourth pattern group is stored, the address "1256 (H)" The table offset value stored in "(H)" is "5(H)".

In the symbol group 4, there is no symbol combination in which the symbol on the second (middle) reel 31 is "blue BAR" or "black BAR". There is no address for storing symbol combination data for specifying the symbol combination of "black BAR".
At the first address "1257 (H)" following the addresses "1255 (H)" and "1256 (H)", the symbol combination in which the symbol on the second (middle) reel 31 is "Red 7" is specified. The symbol combination data for is stored. In the symbol group 4, the symbol combinations in which the symbol on the second (middle) reel 31 is "Red 7" are Replay 09 and Replay 10, so "@REP_09 OR @REP_10" ” is stored. As shown in FIG. 178, "@REP_09" is "00000010(B)" and "@REP_10" is "00000100(B)". ” is stored.

At the next address "1258(H)", symbol combination data for specifying a symbol combination in which the symbol on the second (middle) reel 31 is "Replay" is stored. In the symbol group 4, since the symbol combination in which the symbol on the second (middle) reel 31 is "Replay" is Replay 08, "@REP_08" is stored in the address "1258 (H)". As shown in FIG. 178, "@REP_08" is "00000001(B)", so the value is stored at address "1258(H)".
Next, in the symbol group 4, since there is no symbol combination in which the symbol on the second (middle) reel 31 is "Bell A", "Bell B" or "Watermelon", the symbol on the second (middle) reel 31 is There is no address for storing symbol combination data for specifying symbol combinations of "Bell A", "Bell B" or "Watermelon".

At the next address "1259(H)", symbol combination data for specifying a symbol combination in which the symbol on the second (middle) reel 31 is "cherry" is stored. In the symbol group 4, the symbol combinations in which the symbol on the second (middle) reel 31 is "Cherry" are Replay 09 and Replay 10, so "@REP_09 OR @REP_10" is stored in the address "1259 (H)". is stored. As shown in FIG. 178, "@REP_09" is "00000010(B)" and "@REP_10" is "00000100(B)". ” is stored.

Next, in the symbol group 4, since there is no symbol combination in which the symbol of the second (middle) reel 31 is "special symbol", the symbol of the second (middle) reel 31 is "special symbol". There is no address for storing symbol combination data for specifying a symbol combination.
Further, since the second (middle) reel 31 does not have a "special figure bottom" (see FIG. 114), the symbol combination in which the symbol of the second (middle) reel 31 is "special figure bottom" is specified. There is no address in which the symbol combination data for is stored.
As described above, the second reel symbol combination table (TBL_PICCMB_2) is composed of addresses "1244(H)" to "128E(H)" (FIGS. 180, 186 to 188).

189 is a diagram showing the third reel pattern arrangement table (TBL_PICARG_3), which corresponds to FIG. 181 of the first reel 31. FIG. FIG. 189 also shows the definition data of the reel symbols shown in FIG.
Then, for example, when the right (third) reel 31 is stopped, if the pattern that stops at the reference position (lower row) is the number 1 "replay", the pattern that stops on the activated line is also the number 1 "replay" ( 114 and 115).
In this case, when the number 1 "replay" stops at the reference position (lower row), the value corresponding to the symbol stopped on the active line is set to the address "128F(H)" by the program (flowchart) described later. It is configured to be identified as the value of the lower 4 bits. The lower 4 bits of the address "128F(H)" correspond to "@ZGR_04", that is, "replay" (see FIG. 114).
Also, when the second "blue bar" stops at the reference position (lower row), the value corresponding to the pattern stopped on the active line is specified as the value of the upper 4 bits of the address "1290 (H)". configured to be The upper 4 bits of the address "1290(H)" correspond to "@ZGR_01", that is, "blue BAR".

Incidentally, as shown in FIGS. 181, 185, and 189, the symbol numbers specified by the top addresses are different in the #th reel symbol arrangement table.
Specifically, at the head address "1203(H)" of the first reel symbol arrangement table, the symbol data is stored from the second symbol. This is because, when the control pattern number (BF_PICTURE) is "0", the pattern number of the pattern on the active line on the left reel 31 is number two.
Also, at the head address "123A(H)" of the second reel symbol arrangement table, symbol data is stored from the first symbol. This is because when the control pattern number (BF_PICTURE) is "0", the pattern number of the pattern on the active line in the middle reel 31 is number one.
Furthermore, at the top address "128F(H)" of the third reel pattern arrangement table, the pattern data from the 0th pattern are stored. This is because when the control pattern number (BF_PICTURE) is "0", the pattern number of the pattern on the active line on the right reel 31 is zero.

In this way, the pattern data to be stored in the pattern arrangement table is shifted as necessary (considering the difference) and stored, so that correction is performed for each acquired control pattern number (BF_PICTURE) ( adding or subtracting the difference). Therefore, it is possible to acquire the pattern data on the effective line by a simple calculation based on the pattern number of the pattern stopped at the reference position (lower stage), thereby simplifying the program processing and reducing the capacity of the ROM 54. can be done.
The order of symbol data stored in the symbol arrangement table of each reel 31 is determined according to the reference line and the activated line. Note that the reference line (reference position) and effective line can be freely determined. However, the reference line is preferably a horizontal line.
Here, the effective line in this embodiment is "upper left"-"middle middle"-"lower right" as shown in FIG. The reference line is "lower left"-"lower middle"-"lower right". Therefore, the difference is "+2" in the first reel symbol arrangement table, the difference is "+1" in the second reel symbol arrangement table, and the difference is "0" in the third reel symbol arrangement table. In other words, the difference indicates the amount of deviation (the number of stages) between the position of the effective line and the reference position.
Therefore, for example, if the effective line is "left middle" - "middle middle" - "right middle", the difference in the symbol arrangement table of each reel 31 is "+1". In this case, the symbol arrangement table of each reel 31 is stored in order from the symbol data of the first symbol. Also, for example, if the reference line is the middle line ("left middle" - "middle middle" - "right middle") and the effective line is "left middle" - "middle middle" - "right middle" , the difference in the symbol arrangement table of each reel 31 is "0" (no difference). In this case, the symbol arrangement table of each reel 31 is stored in order from the symbol data of the 0th symbol.
The above also applies to FIG. 228 (example 1 of the twenty-seventh embodiment) described later.

On the other hand, as shown in later-described FIG. 229 (example 2 of the twenty-seventh embodiment), in each of the symbol arrangement tables of the left reel 31, the middle reel 31, and the right reel 31, the symbol data of symbol number "0" is A method of storing the difference data corresponding to each reel 31 may also be used. When acquiring the symbol data, the difference data of the relevant reel 31 is added or subtracted from the symbol number of the symbol stopped at the reference position, thereby acquiring the symbol data of the symbol on the activated line. In this case, even if there is a change in the effective line, it is only necessary to change the difference data, so the development man-hours can be reduced.

In FIG. 229 (example 2 of the twenty-seventh embodiment), the difference data corresponds to the "difference" value described above. That is, in the symbol arrangement table of each reel 31, the difference data of the left reel 31 is "+2", the difference data of the middle reel 31 is "+1", and the difference data of the right reel 31 is "0".
Therefore, similarly to the above, when the reference line is "lower left" - "lower middle" - "lower right" and the effective line is, for example, "middle left" - "middle middle" - "middle right", The difference data in the symbol arrangement table of each reel 31 are all "+1". Also, when the reference line is, for example, the middle line ("left middle" - "middle middle" - "right middle") and the effective line is, for example, "left middle" - "middle middle" - "right middle" , the difference data in the symbol arrangement table of each reel 31 are all "0". In this case, there is no need to provide differential data, and the process of adding or subtracting differential data is also unnecessary.

190 to 192 are diagrams showing the third reel symbol combination table (TBL_PICCMB_3), corresponding to FIGS. 182 to 184 of the first reel 31. FIG.
The third reel symbol combination table (TBL_PICCMB_3) will be described by taking the symbol 5 group in FIG. 191 as an example.
In the D0 to D7 bits of the first address "12B5 (H)" and the D6 and D7 bits of the next address "12B6 (H)", which symbol of the third (right) reel 31 is a symbol combination of the symbol group of 5 It shows whether it is a pattern that constitutes the
The pattern combination of the 5 groups of patterns is
Small role 01: "Watermelon" - "Cherry" - "Bell A"
Small role 02: "Watermelon" - "Bell A" - "Blue BAR / special map bottom"
Small role 03: "Bell A" - "Bell A" - "Bell A"
Small role 04: "Watermelon" - "Bell A" - "Bell A"
Small role 05: "Bell A" - "Replay" - "Blue BAR / special map bottom"
Small role 06: "Bell A" - "Bell A" - "Blue BAR / special map bottom"
Small role 07: "Watermelon" - "Cherry" - "Bell B"
Small role 08: "Watermelon" - "Bell A" - "Black BAR / Red 7 / Watermelon / Special map"
(see FIG. 118).

Therefore, the symbols on the third (right) reel 31 in the symbol combinations of the five symbol groups are "Bell A", "Blue BAR", "Special Figure Lower", "Bell B", "Black BAR", and "Red 7". , "Watermelon" or "Special map".
From this, of the reel pattern data information of the address "12B5 (H)", D7 bit corresponding to "blue BAR", D6 bit corresponding to "black BAR", D5 bit corresponding to "red 7", " The D3 bit corresponding to "bell A", the D2 bit corresponding to "bell B", and the D1 bit corresponding to "watermelon" are "1".
Further, in the reel pattern data information of the address "12B6(H)", the D7 bit corresponding to "special figure upper" and the D6 bit corresponding to "special figure lower" are "1".
Furthermore, since the address "12C0(H)" where the table offset for the 6th pattern group is stored is 10 addresses ahead of the address "12B6(H)" where the table offset for the 5th pattern group is stored, the address "12B6"(H)" is "0A(H)".

Since there is no symbol combination in which the symbol on the third (right) reel 31 is "Replay" in the symbol group 5, the symbol combination in which the symbol on the third (right) reel 31 is "Replay" No address is provided where the symbol combination data is stored.
Further, since the right reel 31 is not provided with "Cherry" (see FIG. 114), the symbol combination data for specifying the symbol combination in which the symbol of the third (right) reel 31 is "Cherry" is stored. address is not provided.
First, at the first address ``12B7(H)'' following the addresses ``12B5(H)'' and ``12B6(H)'', the symbol combination in which the symbol on the third (right) reel 31 is ``blue BAR'' is specified. The symbol combination data for doing is stored. In the symbol group 5, the symbol combination in which the symbol on the third (right) reel 31 is "BLUE BAR" is the small winning combination 02, the small winning combination 05, and the small winning combination 06. Therefore, the address "12B7 (H)" , "@WIN_02 OR @WIN_05 OR @WIN_06" is stored. As shown in FIG. 178, "@WIN_02" is "00000010(B)", "@WIN_05" is "00010000(B)", and "@WIN_06" is "00100000(B)". "00110010(B)" is stored at the address "12B7(H)".

At the next address "12B8(H)", symbol combination data for specifying a symbol combination in which the symbol of the third (right) reel 31 is "black BAR" is stored. In the symbol group 5, the symbol combination in which the symbol on the third (right) reel 31 is "BLACK BAR" is a small win 08, so "@WIN_08" is stored in the address "12B8(H)". there is As shown in FIG. 178, "@WIN_08" is "10000000(B)", so the value is stored at address "12B8(H)".
At the next address "12B9(H)" is stored symbol combination data for specifying a symbol combination in which the symbol on the third (right) reel 31 is "red 7". In the symbol group 5, since the symbol combination in which the symbol on the third (right) reel 31 is "Red 7" is a small win 08, "10000000 ( B)” is stored.

At the next address "12BA(H)", symbol combination data for specifying a symbol combination in which the symbol on the third (right) reel 31 is "bell A" is stored. In the symbol group 5, the symbol combinations in which the symbol on the third (right) reel 31 is "Bell A" are the small winning combination 01, the small winning combination 03, and the small winning combination 04. , "@WIN_01 OR @WIN_03 OR @WIN_04" is stored. As shown in FIG. 178, "@WIN_01" is "00000001(B)", "@WIN_03" is "00000100(B)", and "@WIN_04" is "00001000(B)". "00001101(B)" is stored at the address "12BA(H)".

At the next address "12BB(H)", symbol combination data for specifying a symbol combination in which the symbol on the third (right) reel 31 is "bell B" is stored. In the symbol group 5, since the symbol combination in which the symbol on the third (right) reel 31 is "Bell B" is a small win 07, "@WIN_07" is stored in the address "12BB(H)". there is As shown in FIG. 178, "@WIN_07" is "01000000(B)", so the value is stored at the address "12BB(H)".
At the next address "12BC(H)", symbol combination data for specifying a symbol combination in which the symbol on the third (right) reel 31 is "watermelon" is stored. In the symbol group 5, since the symbol combination in which the symbol on the third (right) reel 31 is "watermelon" is a small win 08, "@WIN_08" is stored in the address "12BC(H)". . As shown in FIG. 178, "@WIN_08" is "10000000(B)", so the value is stored at the address "12BC(H)".

At the next address "12BD(H)", symbol combination data for specifying a symbol combination in which the symbol on the third (right) reel 31 is "special symbol" is stored. In the symbol group 5, the symbol combination in which the symbol on the third (right) reel 31 is "special symbol" is a small win 08, so the address "12BD (H)" is the same as the address "12BC (H)". ” stores “10000000 (B)”.
At the next address "12BE(H)", symbol combination data for specifying a symbol combination in which the symbol on the third (right) reel 31 is "special symbol bottom" is stored. In the symbol group 5, the symbol combination for which the symbol on the third (right) reel 31 is "Special symbol" is a small winning combination 02, a small winning combination 05, and a small winning combination 06. stores "@WIN_02 OR @WIN_05 OR @WIN_06". As shown in FIG. 178, "@WIN_02" is "00000010(B)", "@WIN_05" is "00010000(B)", and "@WIN_06" is "00100000(B)". "00110010(B)" is stored at address "12BE(H)".
As described above, the third reel symbol combination table (TBL_PICCMB_3) is composed of addresses "1299(H)" to "12DE(H)" (FIGS. 180, 190 to 192).

FIG. 193 shows a payout number table (TBL_WIN_CTL). In the twenty-fifth embodiment, after the symbol combination to be stopped on the active line is determined, in other words, the stop positions of all the reels 31 are determined, and after the stop symbol data (_WK_STOP_PIC1-9) are updated, the symbol combination is determined. This payout number table is used to determine whether or not there is a payout corresponding to .
First, "6" stored at address "1400(H)" means the number of inspections. This means checking whether or not there is a payout six times at most.
These six times are
1st time: Small win 01 to small win 08 (15 sheets) (D0 to D7 of stop pattern data (5th group))
Second time: Small win 09 to small win 12 (15 cards) (D0 to D3 of stop pattern data (6th group))
Third time: Small win 13 to small win 16 (3 pieces) (D4 to D7 of stop pattern data (6th group))
4th time: Small winning combination 17 to small winning combination 24 (3 pieces) (D0 to D7 of stop pattern data (7th group))
5th time: Small winning combination 25 to small winning combination 32 (1 piece) (D0 to D7 of stop pattern data (8th group))
6th time: Small winning combination 33 to small winning combination 34 (1 sheet) (D0 to D1 of stop pattern data (9th group))
corresponds to
In particular, (in the stop symbol data (sixth group), D0 to D3 bits (small winning combination 09 to small winning combination 12) and D4 to D7 bits (small winning combination 13 to small winning combination 16) are different in the number of payouts, Inspect separately.

At the next address "1401(H)", the upper 3 bits (*32) indicate the transfer byte number, and the lower 5 bits indicate the payout number. Here, since the upper 3 bits are "0*32", it is "000 (B)", and the lower 5 bits are "01111 (B)" because the payout number is "15 (D)". Therefore, actually, "00001111 (B)" is stored at the address "1401 (H)".

The configuration of the transfer byte number and the payout number is the same for the addresses "1403(H)", "1405(H)", "1407(H)", "1409(H)", and "140B(H)". . For example, in "1407 (H)", the upper 3 bits (number of transferred bytes) is "1*32", so it is "001 (B)", and the lower 5 bits (payout number) is "3 (D)". Therefore, it becomes "00011 (B)". Therefore, "00100011 (B)" is stored at the address "1407 (H)".

Here, the "number of transferred bytes" means the number of transferred bytes from the address of the stop symbol data. In this example, the initial value of the address of the stop symbol data is the address "F0BB(H)" of the stop symbol data (fifth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5). The stop symbol data (first group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1) to the stop symbol data (fourth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC4) are non-payout combinations (RB, 1BB, or replay), and therefore are subject to inspection as to whether or not there is a payout. does not become Therefore, the initial value of the stop symbol data to be inspected is the address of the stop symbol data (fifth group). In the present embodiment, the payout process can be simplified by grouping the symbol groups of wins (small wins) with payouts into the fifth to ninth groups.
Therefore, for example, the number of transition bytes specified by the address "1401 (H)" is "0", but this is transferred from the address "F0BB (H)" of the stop pattern data (fifth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5). It means not to let
Also, since the number of transfer bytes specified by the address "1403 (H)" is "1", add "1" to the address "F0BB (H)" of the stop pattern data (fifth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5). Therefore, the address to be inspected is "F0BC (H)" (stop symbol data (sixth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6)).

Furthermore, "specified data" means bits (inspection data) corresponding to the symbol combination to be inspected. For example, since the address "1402(H)" is "@_PIC5", it is "11111111(B)" as shown in FIG.
In this case, the stop symbol data (fifth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5) when all the reels 31 are stopped and the data stored at the address "1402 (H)", that is, the inspection data of the stop symbol data (fifth group) "11111111(B)". Then, when the calculation result is "0", it is determined that there is no payout corresponding to the symbol combination of the fifth group. On the other hand, when the calculation result is not "0", it is determined that the value stored in the lower 5 bits of the address "1401(H)", that is, "15" coins have been paid out.

At the next address "1403(H)", the transfer byte number is "1" and the payout number is "15". The specified data (address "1404(H)") is "@WIN_09_12". Therefore, as a result of the AND operation of the stop symbol data (sixth group) of the address "F0BC(H)" and "@WIN_09_12", that is, "00001111(B)" (Fig. 178), when it is not "0", 15 It means paying out a piece.
As described above, the stop symbol data (sixth group) is the small winning combination 09 to small winning combination 16. Of these small winning combinations, the number of payouts for winning the small winning combination 09 to small winning combination 12 is 15. There is, and since the number of payouts for winning the small winning combination 13 to small winning combination 16 is 3, at the address "1404 (H)", the small winning combination 09 to small winning combination 12 are to be paid out as 15 small winning combinations to be paid out. is specified.

At the next address "1405(H)", the transfer byte number is "0" and the payout number is "3". The specified data (address "1406(H)") is "@WIN_13_16". Therefore, as a result of the AND operation of the stop symbol data (sixth group) of the address "F0BC(H)" and "@WIN_13_16", that is, "11110000(B)" (Fig. 178), when it is not "0", 3 It means paying out a piece.
As described above, the number of transfer bytes, the acquired data, and the specified data are determined for the remaining small wins and the number of payouts for the addresses "1407(H)" to "140C(H)" as well.

Next, control processing (program) in the twenty-fifth embodiment will be described using a flowchart.
FIG. 194 is a flow chart showing reel stop acceptance check (M_STOP_PIC). In the twenty-fifth embodiment, when the process proceeds to step S752 in FIG. 139 (the twenty-third embodiment), the process proceeds to the flow chart of FIG.
Note that in FIG. 194, step S1013 is the same as step S792 in FIG. Also, step S1014 is the same as step S793 in FIG. Furthermore, step S1017 is the same as step S794 in FIG.
Furthermore, although illustration is omitted in FIG. 194, after step S1012, the process of step S791 in FIG. 146 (determining whether or not the waiting time has elapsed) is executed.

Here, the standby process shown in step S791 in FIG. 146 is to set a waiting time when the 1BB is tense when the condition for permitting the winning of 1BB is not established (steps S809 and S810 in FIG. 147), It is a judgment as to whether or not the waiting time has elapsed.
On the other hand, the waiting time shown in step S1012 in FIG. 194 is a judgment as to whether or not the interrupt waiting process in step S1011 has ended.
Also, in FIG. 194, when proceeding to the stop pattern set (M_STOPPIC_SET) in step S1024, the process of FIG. 195 processing is to be executed.

Although part of the description overlaps with the description of FIG. 146, the processing of FIG. 194 will be described below.
The reel stop acceptance check (M_STOP_PIC) in FIG. 194 is a process of judging whether or not the stop switch 42 can accept a stop, and moving to the stop symbol set process when the operation of the stop switch 42 is detected.
In FIG. 194, in step S1011, an interrupt waiting process is executed. The interrupt waiting process is the same as the process of step S239 in FIG. 39 (eleventh embodiment). However, in the twenty-fifth embodiment, the interrupt period is "1.1175" ms as in the twenty-third embodiment. Then, in the next step S1012, it is determined whether or not the next interrupt has arrived (whether or not the wait time for waiting for an interrupt has become "0"). When it is determined that the next interrupt has not arrived, this flow chart ends. On the other hand, when the next interrupt arrives after starting the interrupt waiting process in step S1011, the process proceeds to step S1013.

It should be noted that this interrupt waiting process can prevent the plurality of reels 31 from stopping at the same time even when the plurality of stop switches 42 are pressed at the same time. This is because stop control is executed for one reel 31 by the processing after step S1015, and when the process returns to step S794, the rising data A is cleared by the interrupt waiting processing of step S1011.
Further, since the processes after step S1012 are executed all at once, the interrupt process can be prevented from being executed (made difficult to be executed) until the next interrupt waiting process (step S1011). As a result, after the rise data A is acquired first in step S1016, and before the rise data A is acquired next in step S1016, an interrupt process is entered, and the data acquired in the first step S1016 and the It is possible to eliminate the difference from the acquired data.

In step S1013, all motor index passage checks are performed. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) The first reel pattern number (for passing position) (_NB_RL1_PASPIC) (Fig. 135) is stored in the A register.
(2) Perform an OR operation of the A register value and the second reel pattern number (for passing position) (_NB_RL2_PASPIC) (FIG. 136). Then, the calculation result is stored in the A register.
(3) Perform an OR (logical addition) operation of the A register value and the third reel pattern number (for passing position) (_NB_RL3_PASPIC) (FIG. 137). Then, the calculation result is stored in the A register.
(4) Add "1" to the A register value.

Here, the 1st reel pattern number (for passing position) (_NB_RL1_PASPIC), the 2nd reel pattern number (for passing position) (_NB_RL2_PASPIC), and the 3rd reel pattern number (for passing position) (_NB_RL3_PASPIC) are the # reel Before there is a change in the motor index, it is "FF(H)", that is, "11111111(B)".
Therefore, if at least one data is "11111111(B)", the calculation result up to (3) above is "11111111(B)", and adding "1" as shown in (4) results in "0". become. Therefore, for at least one reel 31, before the #th reel motor index changes, the above calculation result is "0", and for all the reels 31, after the #th reel motor index changes, The result of the above calculation is a value other than "0".

When the #th reel motor index has changed, the #th reel pattern number (for passing position) is set to "10 (D)" (when rising) or " 0” (at the falling edge) is stored. Then, every time it is determined that the symbol has moved by one symbol, "1" is subtracted from the #th reel symbol number (for the passing position). In this way, after the #th reel motor index is changed, the #th reel pattern number (for passing position) changes from "0" (00000000 (B)) to "19 (D)" (00010011 (B)). will circulate. Therefore, after the #th reel motor index is changed, the OR operation of the above (1) to (3) will not result in "11111111 (B)".

Next, in step S1014, it is determined whether or not the stop switch 42 can be stopped. This determination is made by determining whether or not the calculation of (4) in step S1013 is "0" (whether the zero flag is "1"). When it is "0" (the zero flag is "1"), it is determined that stop acceptance of the stop switch 42 is not possible. In other words, when there is a change in the #th reel motor index for all the reels 31, acceptance of the stop of the stop switch 42 is permitted.
When it is determined in step S1014 that the stop of the stop switch 42 can be accepted, the process proceeds to step S1015, and when it is determined that the stop of the stop switch 42 cannot be accepted, the process proceeds to step S1021.

In step S1015, the first reel number and the first reel bit are set. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Store the address "F0AD (H)" of the reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP) in the HL register.
(2) Store "00000001(B)" in the B register.
Here, the B register value is a value corresponding to the value of stop/control reel number data (_NB_STOP_REEL) (one of "1" (first reel 31) to "3" (third reel 31)).
(3) Store "00000001 (B)" in the C register.
Here, the C register value is a value corresponding to the stop switch 42 . When the C register value is "00000001 (B)", it corresponds to the first (left) reel 31, and when it is "00000010 (B)", it corresponds to the second (middle) reel 31, and "00000100 (B)". corresponds to the third (right) reel 31 when .

Next, proceeding to step S1016, the input port rising data A (_PT_IN_A_UP) of the address "F017(H)" in FIG. 133 is acquired. Here, the value of input port rising data A is stored in the A register.
In the next step S1017, it is determined whether or not the stop switch 42 has risen (whether or not the rise data of the stop switch 42 is ON).
Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) AND (logical AND) operation of the data (reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP)) stored at the address (F0AD (H)) indicated by the HL register value and the A register value (input port rising data A) . The calculation result is stored in the A register value.
(2) Perform an AND (logical product) operation on the A register value and the C register value. The calculation result is stored in the A register value.

Here, for example, when the loop processing of steps S1016 to S1019 is performed for the first time, the C register value is "00000001 (B)", so the start-up data of the stop switch 42 corresponding to the first (left) reel 31 is A Stored in a register value.
Further, when the loop processing is performed for the second time, the C register value is updated to "00000010 (B)", and the rise data of the stop switch 42 corresponding to the second (middle) reel 31 is stored in the A register value. be done.
Furthermore, when the loop processing is performed for the third time, the C register value is updated to "00000100 (B)", and the rise data of the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third (right) reel is stored in the A register value. be done.
Further, in step S1019, which is the third loop processing, the C register value is updated to "00001000 (B)", and it is determined that the processing of all reels 31 has ended ("Yes" in step S1019).
(3) As a result of the calculation in (2) above, when it is determined that it is not "0" (zero flag ≠ "1"), it is determined that the stop switch 42 has risen, and the process proceeds to step S1022. On the other hand, when it is determined that the result of the calculation is "0" (zero flag = "1"), it is determined that the stop switch 42 has not risen, and the process proceeds to step S1018.

At step S1018, the next reel number and reel bit are set. This process is a process of adding "1" to the B register value. Therefore, during the first loop of steps S1016 to S1019, "00000001(B)" is updated to "00000010(B)", and during the second loop, "00000010(B)" is updated to "00000011(B)". Updated.

Next, proceeding to step S1019, it is determined whether or not all the reels 31 have been processed.
Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) A shift operation is performed to shift the value of the C register to the left by "1". Therefore, in the first loop, "00000001(B)" is updated to "00000010(B)", in the second loop, "00000010(B)" is updated to "00000100(B)", and in the third loop, The hour is updated from "00000100(B)" to "00001000(B)".
(2) When the D3 bit of the C register value is "1", it is determined "Yes" (processing of all reels 31 is completed).
If "No" is determined in step S1019, the process returns to step S1016, and if "Yes" is determined, the process proceeds to step S1020.

In step S1020, a reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP) is obtained. At this point, the address value of the reel stop flag is stored in the HL register (step S1015), so the value stored at the address indicated by the HL register value is stored in the A register.
Next, the process advances to step S1021 to save the stop reception information data (_PT_STOP_STS). This process is a process of storing the A register value in the address "F01E (H)" (stop reception information data (_PT_STOP_STS)). By this processing, the value of the reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP) and the value of the stop reception information data (_PT_STOP_STS) become the same.
Then, the processing according to this flow chart ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1017 that the stop switch 42 has risen and the process proceeds to step S1022, the reception of the stop switch 42 is executed. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Make the reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP) the latest information.
Here, the A register value (the value obtained by ANDing the reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP) and the input port rising data A in step S1017, and then ANDing the result of the AND operation with the C register value) and the reel stop flag ( _FL_STOP_LP) and XOR (exclusive OR), the result is stored in the A register, and the A register value is stored in the reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP).

For example, in step S1017,
Reel stop flag: 00000111 (B)
Input port rising data A: 00000001 (B)
, the AND operation of both results in "00000001 (B)".
Furthermore, when the C register value is "00000001(B)", the AND operation of both results in "00000001(B)".
Further, when this value and the reel stop flag "00000111(B)" are XORed, "00000110(B)" is obtained. This value becomes the updated reel stop flag.
(2) Update the stop/control reel number data (_NB_STOP_REEL) to the latest information. This process is a process of storing the B register value in the stop/control reel number data.

Next, the process proceeds to step S1023, and symbol combination control is executed. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Set the reel drive state (_WK_RL#_STS) (Figs. 135 to 137) to "start deceleration", that is, "4 (D)".
(2) The symbol number that will be the stop position is stored in #th reel symbol number (for stop position) (_NB_RL#_STPPIC) (FIGS. 135 to 137).
(3) A value obtained by subtracting "1" from the #th reel pattern number (for stop position) (_NB_RL#_STPPIC) is stored in the A register value. When "1" is subtracted from the symbol number "0", the subtraction (special subtraction) is performed so that "19 (D)" (the maximum value of the symbol number) is obtained.
This process is an operation to obtain the control pattern number (_BF_PICTURE) (lower row) by subtracting "1" from the #th reel pattern number (for stop position) (middle row). At this point, the control pattern number is stored in the A register. For example, when the #th reel symbol number (for stop position) is "4", "3" is stored as the control symbol number. Further, when the #th reel symbol number (for the stop position) is "0", "19" is stored as the control symbol number.
Then, the process proceeds to the stop pattern set (M_STOPPIC_SET) (FIG. 195) in step S1024.

In the example of FIG. 194, reel stop control can be executed for one reel 31 even when a plurality of stop switches 42 are pressed simultaneously.
Here, "simultaneous pressing" refers to the case where the start-up data of a plurality of (two in this example) stop switches 42 are turned on in the same interrupt process.
less than,
1. When the left and middle stop switches 42 are pressed simultaneously while all reels 31 are rotating;2. 3. When the left reel 31 is stopped and the middle and right reels 31 are rotating, and the middle and right stop switches 42 are pressed at the same time; A case where the left reel 31 is stopped and the middle and right reels 31 are rotating and the left and middle stop switches 42 are pressed at the same time will be described as an example.

1. When the left and middle stop switches 42 are pressed simultaneously while all the reels 31 are rotating In FIG.
(1) Store the address "F0AD (H)" of the reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP) in the HL register.
(2) Store "00000001 (B)" in the B register.
(3) Store "00000001 (B)" in the C register.

In the next step S1016, the value of the input port rise data A is stored in the A register. Here, when the left and middle stop switches 42 are pressed simultaneously, the input port rising data A (A register value) is "00000011 (B)".
In the next step S1017, the following processing is executed.
(1) AND (logical product) operation of the data (reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP)) stored at the address (F0AD (H)) indicated by the HL register value and the A register value (input port rising data A) . The calculation result is stored in the A register value.
The reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP) at this time is "00000111 (B)". Therefore, when this value is ANDed with the A register value "00000011(B)", the result is "00000011(B)". The value after this calculation becomes the A register value.
(2) AND (logical product) operation is performed on the A register value and the C register value, and the operation result is stored in the A register value. Therefore, the AND operation result "00000001 (B)" of the A register value "00000011 (B)" and the C register value "00000001 (B)" is set as the A register value.

Then, in step S1017, since the result of the above calculation is not "0" (zero flag ≠ "1"), it is determined that the stop switch 42 has risen, and the process proceeds to step S1022.
In step S1022, the reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP) is updated with the latest information.
Here, the A register value (00000001 (B)) and the reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP) (00000111 (B)) are XORed (exclusive logical sum), and the result of the operation is "00000110 (B)". , and the A register value is stored in the reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP).
Next, the B register value (00000001 (B)) is stored in the stop/control reel number data.

As described above, when the left and middle stop switches 42 are pressed simultaneously while all the reels 31 are rotating, the left reel 31 is stopped according to the operation of the left stop switch 42 . In other words, the stop control of the middle reel 31 corresponding to the operation of the middle stop switch 42 is not executed at this timing.
In addition, by the processing of step S1022, the reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP) is updated to data "00000110 (B)" indicating that the left stop switch 42 has accepted "0".
Furthermore, when the process returns to step S752 again after the execution of the stop control of the left reel 31, generally one interrupt time has passed, so the rise data A is cleared. However, even if one interrupt time has not passed yet, when the process proceeds to step S752, the rise data A is cleared by steps S1011 and S1012. 31 stop control is not executed.

2. When the middle and right stop switches 42 are pressed simultaneously when the left reel 31 is stopped and the middle and right reels 31 are rotating. Proceeding, as mentioned above,
(1) Store the address "F0AD (H)" of the reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP) in the HL register.
(2) Store "00000001 (B)" in the B register.
(3) Store "00000001 (B)" in the C register.

In the next step S1016, the value of the input port rise data A is stored in the A register. Here, since the middle and right stop switches 42 are pressed simultaneously, the input port rising data A (A register value) is "00000110 (B)".
In the next step S1017, the following processing is executed.
(1) AND (logical product) operation of the data (reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP)) stored at the address (F0AD (H)) indicated by the HL register value and the A register value (input port rising data A) . The calculation result is stored in the A register value.
The reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP) at this time is "00000110 (B)". Therefore, when this value and the A register value "00000110(B)" are ANDed, the result is "00000110(B)". The value after this calculation becomes the A register value.
(2) AND (logical product) operation is performed on the A register value and the C register value, and the operation result is stored in the A register value. Therefore, the AND operation result "00000000 (B)" of the A register value "00000110 (B)" and the C register value "00000001 (B)" is set as the A register value.

In step S1017, since the result of the above calculation is "0" (zero flag="1"), it is determined that the stop switch 42 has not risen, and the process proceeds to step S1018.
In step S1018, "1" is added to the B register value. Therefore, the B register value is updated to "00000010(B)".
Next, proceeding to step S1019, it is determined whether or not all the reels 31 have been processed.
Here, first, a shift operation is performed to shift the C register value to the left by "1". Therefore, the C register value is updated to "00000010 (B)".
Next, it is determined whether or not the D3 bit of the C register value is "1".

In the second step S1016, the value of the input port rise data A is stored in the A register. Therefore, the A register value becomes "00000110 (B)".
In the next step S1017, the following processing is executed.
(1) AND (logical product) operation of the data (reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP)) stored at the address (F0AD (H)) indicated by the HL register value and the A register value (input port rising data A) . The calculation result is stored in the A register value.
The reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP) at this time is "00000110 (B)". Therefore, when this value and the A register value "00000110(B)" are ANDed, the result is "00000110(B)". This value becomes the A register value.
(2) An AND (logical AND) operation is performed on the A register value "00000110(B)" and the C register value "00000010(B)", and the operation result is stored in the A register value. Therefore, the A register value becomes "00000010 (B)".

Then, in step S1017, since the result of the above calculation is not "0" (zero flag ≠ "1"), it is determined that the stop switch 42 has risen, and the process proceeds to step S1022.
In step S1022, the reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP) is updated with the latest information. In this process, the A register value "00000010 (B)" and the reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP) value "00000110 (B)" are XORed (exclusive OR), and the result of the operation is "00000100 (B)". is stored in the A register, and the A register value is stored in the reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP).
Next, the B register value (00000010(B)) is stored in the stop/control reel number data.

As described above, when the left reel 31 is stopped and the middle and right stop switches 42 are pressed simultaneously while the middle and right reels 31 are rotating, the middle reel corresponding to the operation of the middle stop switch 42 31 stop control is executed. In other words, stop control of the right reel 31 corresponding to the operation of the right stop switch 42 is not executed at this timing.
Further, by the process of step S1022, the reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP) is updated to data "00000100(B)" indicating that the left and middle stop switches 42 have received "0".
Furthermore, when the process returns to step S752 again after the stop control of the middle reel 31 is executed, the rise data A is cleared as described above. stop control is not executed.

3. When the left and right stop switches 42 are pressed simultaneously while the left reel 31 is stopped and the middle and right reels 31 are rotating. As you proceed,
(1) Store the address "F0AD (H)" of the reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP) in the HL register.
(2) Store "00000001(B)" in the B register.
(3) Store "00000001 (B)" in the C register.

In the next step S1016, the value of the input port rise data A is stored in the A register. Here, since the left and middle stop switches 42 are pressed simultaneously, the input port rising data A (A register value) is "00000011 (B)".
In the next step S1017, the following processing is executed.
(1) AND (logical AND) operation of the data (reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP)) stored at the address (F0AD (H)) indicated by the HL register value and the A register value (input port rising data A) . The calculation result is stored in the A register value.
The reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP) at this time is "00000110 (B)". Therefore, when this value is ANDed with the A register value "00000011(B)", the result is "00000010(B)". The value after this calculation becomes the A register value.
(2) AND (logical product) operation is performed on the A register value and the C register value, and the operation result is stored in the A register value. Therefore, the AND operation result "00000000 (B)" of the A register value "00000010 (B)" and the C register value "00000001 (B)" is set as the A register value.

In step S1017, since the result of the above calculation is "0" (zero flag="1"), it is determined that the stop switch 42 has not risen, and the process proceeds to step S1018.
In step S1018, "1" is added to the B register value. Therefore, the B register value is updated to "00000010(B)".
Next, proceeding to step S1019, it is determined whether or not all the reels 31 have been processed.
Here, first, a shift operation is performed to shift the C register value to the left by "1". Therefore, the C register value is updated to "00000010 (B)".
Next, it is determined whether or not the D3 bit of the C register value is "1".

In the second step S1016, the value of the input port rise data A is stored in the A register. Therefore, the A register value becomes "00000011 (B)".
In the next step S1017, the following processing is executed.
(1) AND (logical product) operation of the data (reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP)) stored at the address (F0AD (H)) indicated by the HL register value and the A register value (input port rising data A) . The calculation result is stored in the A register value.
The reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP) at this time is "00000110 (B)". Therefore, when this value is ANDed with the A register value "00000011(B)", the result is "00000010(B)". This value becomes the A register value.
(2) AND (logical product) operation is performed on the A register value "00000010(B)" and the C register value "00000010(B)", and the operation result is stored in the A register value. Therefore, the A register value becomes "00000010 (B)".

Then, in step S1017, since the above calculation result is not "0" (zero flag ≠ "1"), it is determined that the stop switch 42 has risen, and the process proceeds to step S1022.
In step S1022, the reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP) is updated with the latest information. In this process, the A register value "00000010(B)" and the reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP) value "00000110(B)" are XORed (exclusive OR), and the result of the operation is "00000100(B)". is stored in the A register, and the A register value is stored in the reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP).
Next, the B register value (00000010(B)) is stored in the stop/control reel number data.

As described above, when the left reel 31 is stopped and the left and middle stop switches 42 are pressed simultaneously while the middle and right reels 31 are rotating, the middle reel corresponding to the operation of the middle stop switch 42 31 stop control is executed. In other words, even if the left stop switch 42 corresponding to the already stopped left reel 31 is operated, the stop control of the left reel 1 is not executed.
Further, by the processing of step S1022, the reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP) is updated to data "00000100 (B)" indicating that the left and middle stop switches 42 have received "0".
As described above, even when the stop switches 42 are pressed simultaneously, only one reel 31 can be stopped.

FIG. 195 is a flow chart showing the stop symbol set (M_STOPPIC_SET) in step S1024 of FIG.
This process is a process of updating the stop symbol data (_WK_STOP_PIC1-9) based on the reel 31 to be stopped this time.
In step S1031, the control picture number (_BF_PICTURE) is saved. This process is a process of storing the A register value in the control picture number (_BF_PICTURE). Here, in the A register value, the control picture number (_BF_PICTURE) is stored in step S1023 of FIG.

In the next step S1032, the number of symbol groups is set. Since the pattern group of this embodiment consists of the first group to the ninth group, this process is a process of storing "9" in the B register. Next, the process advances to step S1033 to execute a reel pattern data set (M_PICDAT_SET). This process is a process shown in FIG. 196, which will be described later, and is a process of specifying any one address of the #th reel symbol combination table (TBL_PICCMB_#) and acquiring symbol combination data stored at that address. . The symbol combination data obtained by this process is stored in the A register.
After storing "9" in the B register in step S1032, the B register value is saved in the stack area before executing the next step S1033. After executing the reel pattern data set (M_PICDAT_SET) in step S1033, the B register value saved in the stack area is restored. This is because in step S1033, the B register is newly used and the value stored in the B register is used again.

Next, in step S1034, the RWM address of the stop symbol data corresponding to the symbol group to be updated is set. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Store the address "F0B6 (H)" before "1" address of the stop pattern data (first group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1) in the HL register.
(2) Add the B register value to the HL register value. Then, the result of the addition is used as the HL register value.

Here, since "9" is stored in the B register in step S1032, in the first step S1034,
HL register value = HL register value "F0B6 (H)" + "9 (H)" = "F0BF (H)"
becomes the address of the stop symbol data (9th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9). In step S1036, which will be described later, "1" is subtracted from the B register value, and steps S1033 to S1036 are repeated until the B register value becomes "0." As a result, the reel symbol data set (M_PICDAT_SET) is repeatedly executed from the stop symbol data (9th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9) to the stop symbol data (1st group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1).

In step S1035, the stop symbol data is saved. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) A register value (symbol combination data acquired in step S1033) and the data (stop symbol data (_WK_STOP_PIC)) stored at the address indicated by the HL register value are ANDed (logical product). Then, the calculation result is stored in the A register.
(2) The A register value is stored in the address indicated by the HL register value (stop symbol data (_WK_STOP_PIC). This updates the stop symbol data (_WK_STOP_PIC).

Next, in step S1036, it is determined whether or not the processing for the number of symbol groups has been completed. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Subtract "1" from the B register value and use the result of the subtraction as the B register value.
(2) When the value of the B register is "0", it is judged "Yes" (the processing for the number of symbol groups has been completed), and this flow chart ends. On the other hand, when it is judged "No" (the processing for the number of symbol groups has not been completed), the process returns to step S1033 to execute the reel symbol data set (M_PICDAT_SET) corresponding to the next symbol group.

FIG. 196 is a flow chart showing reel pattern data set (M_PICDAT_SET) in step S1033 of FIG.
As described above, before executing this flowchart, the B register value is saved in the stack area.
The reel symbol data set is a process of acquiring symbol combination data corresponding to the current symbol group. For example, this process
Stop/control reel number data (_NB_STOP_REEL) = "1" (first (left) reel)
Control picture number (_BF_PICTURE) = "3" (picture number to stop at the bottom)
Third group (B register value=“3”)
shall be
The following example explains the case where processing is performed under the above conditions.
Stop/control reel number data (_NB_STOP_REEL) = "1", "2" or "3" Control picture number (_BF_PICTURE) = "0" to "19" B register value = "0" to " 9”, the symbol combination data can be obtained in a similar manner.

As described above, when the control picture number (_BF_PICTURE) is "3", the picture number to be stopped on the active line is "5", and the corresponding picture is "replay".
In this case, the data "@REP_01 OR @REP_02 OR @REP_07" at the address "1217(H)" in FIG. becomes.

In FIG. 196, stop/control reel number data is acquired in step S1041. This process is a process of storing stop/control reel number data (_NB_STOP_REEL) in the A register.
In the next step S1042, a reel symbol search table address offset table (FIG. 180(A)) is set. This process is a process of storing the address "11FF (H)" obtained by subtracting "1" from the top address of the reel symbol search table address offset table (TBL_PIC_SRCH) in the HL register.
Next, the process advances to step S1043 to execute table selection (R_TBL_SET). This process is the process shown in FIG. 197, which will be described later. By this process, the HL register stores the top address of the #th reel pattern array table (TBL_PICARG_#), specifically,
1203 (H): Top address of first reel pattern arrangement table (TBL_PICARG_1) 123A (H): Top address of second reel pattern arrangement table (TBL_PICARG_2) 128F (H): Top of third reel pattern arrangement table (TBL_PICARG_3) Any value of address is stored.

Next, it progresses to step S1044 and acquires a control design number. This process is a process of storing the value stored in the control picture number (_BF_PICTURE) in the A register.
In the next step S1045, 4-bit data acquisition (M_4BITDAT_GET) is executed. This process is the process shown in FIG. 198, which will be described later. When this process is executed, the pattern data corresponding to the pattern on the activated line is stored in the A register.
In the next step S1046, the reel symbol data search count is set. This process is a process of storing the A register value (symbol data) in the C register value. The C register value storing the symbol data is used for bit count (M_BIT_COUNT), which will be described later.

Next, in step S1047, the offset of the symbol combination table is set. This process is a process of storing "11(D)" in the A register value. For example, the top address of the first reel pattern arrangement table (TBL_PICARG_1) is "1203(H)", but from this position to the address "120E(H)" where the first table offset is stored is "11". Since there is an address, it is set to "11".

In the next step S1048, designated address data is set. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Add the A register value to the HL register value. Then, the result of the addition is set as the HL register value.
(2) Store the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value in the A register.
Here, when "1203 (H)" (the top address of the first reel pattern arrangement table (TBL_PICARG_1)) is stored in the HL register in step S1043,
HL register value = 1203 (H) + 11 (D) = 120E (H)
becomes.
Therefore, the A register value becomes "00000011 (B)". Incidentally, as described above, in the data of the address "1203(H)", the upper 2 bits are the reel design data information, and the lower 6 bits indicate the table offset value.

Next, the process proceeds to step S1049 to generate the offset of the next symbol combination table. This process performs an AND (logical product) operation of the A register value and "00000011 (B)". Then, the calculation result is stored in the A register. As a result, for example, in the above example, the A register value becomes "00000011 (B)".
In the next step S1050, it is determined whether or not the symbol combination table of the number of symbol groups has been acquired. In this process, "1" is subtracted from the B register value, and when the result of the subtraction is not "0", it is determined as "No" (the symbol combination table for the number of symbol groups has not been obtained).
Here, the loop processing of steps S1048 to S1050 will be described by taking as an example the case where the HL register value is "120E(H)" and the B register value is "3" as in the above example.
(1) First time In step S1048,
HL register value = 1203 (H) + 11 (D) = 120E (H)
becomes.
In step S1049,
A register value = 3 (H)
becomes.
In step S1050,
B register value = 3 - 1 = 2
becomes.
Therefore, the determination is "No", and the process returns to step S step S1048.

(2) Second time In step S1048,
HL register value=120E(H)+3(D)=1211(H)
becomes.
In step S1049,
A register value = 00000011 (B)
becomes.
In step S1050,
B register value = 2 - 1 = 1
becomes.
Therefore, the determination is "No", and the process returns to step S step S1048.

(3) Third time In step S1048,
HL register value = 1211 (H) + 3 (D) = 1214 (H)
becomes.
In step S1049,
A register value = 8 (H) (00001000 (B))
becomes.
In step S1050,
B register value = 1 - 1 = 0
becomes.
Therefore, the determination is "Yes", and the process proceeds to step S1051.
As a result, the table offset "8(H)" of the pattern 3 group is stored in the A register.
Also, when "Yes" is determined in step S1050, the HL register value is saved in the stack area. The HL register value at this time is an address value storing "reel pattern data information+table offset".

In step S1051, the reel symbol combination table is corrected. This process is a process of subtracting "1" from the HL register value. So, for example, in the example above,
HL register value = 1214 (H) - 1 (H) = 1213 (H)
becomes.
Next, the flow advances to step S1052 to execute a bit number count (M_BIT_COUNT). This process is a process shown in FIG. 199, which will be described later, and is a process of counting how many bits are "1" in the reel pattern data information. For example, if the bit count is executed for the data "11011010(B)" at the address "1213(H)", "5" is counted. After performing the bit number count, the A register stores the bit number.
After completing the bit number counting in step S1052, the HL register value and the BC register value are restored from the stack area.

In the next step S1053, it is determined whether or not the check last bit is ON. This processing determines whether or not the carry flag is "1", and determines "Yes" when the carry flag is "1".
Details will be described later, but in the bit number count (M_BIT_COUNT), the reel pattern data information is shifted left by the number corresponding to the pattern to be stopped this time by "1", and at the last left shift by "1", "1" is changed. The carry flag is set to "1" when it is output. For example, if the symbol to be stopped this time is "replay" in the reel symbol data information "11011010 (B)" at the address "1213 (H)", shift "1" to the left four times corresponding to "replay". do. Therefore, in this case, the carry flag becomes "1" at the fourth left shift by "1".
If it is determined in step S1053 that the carry flag is not "1", the process proceeds to step S1054, and if it is determined that the carry flag is "1", the process proceeds to step S1055. In other words, in step S1053, it is determined whether or not the left reel 31 has a symbol combination that includes "replay" and belongs to the third group. In this case, when the carry flag is not "1", it is determined that there is no relevant symbol combination, and when the carry flag is "1", it is determined that there is the relevant symbol combination.
In step S1054, reel design data is set. This process executes an XOR (exclusive OR) operation of the A register value and the A register value to set the A register value to "0". Then, the processing according to this flow chart ends.

On the other hand, in step S1055, designated address data is set. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Add the A register value to the HL register value. The result of the addition is used as the HL register value.
(2) Store the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value in the A register.
Here, the HL register value is a value saved when "Yes" is determined in step S1050, and is an address storing reel pattern data information and a table offset. Also, the A register value stores the number of bits turned on in the bit number count in step S1052. For example, when the HL register value is "1214 (H)" and the A register value is "3 (H)", the HL register value is "1217 (H)".
Therefore, the data at the address "1217 (H)" is "@REP_01 OR @REP_02 OR @REP_07", that is, "10000110 (B)", and this value is stored in the A register.

FIG. 197 is a flow chart showing table selection (R_TBL_SEL) in step S1043 of FIG.
In FIG. 197, designated address data is set in step S1061. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Add the A register value to the HL register value. The result of the addition is used as the HL register value.
(2) Store the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value in the A register.
At step S1042 in FIG. 196, "11FF(H)" is stored in the HL register. Also, the A register value is the value of the stop/control reel number data (_NB_STOP_REEL) and is either "1", "2" or "3".
Therefore, the HL register value becomes one of "1200 (H)", "1201 (H)", or "1202 (H)" by the processing of step S1061.
Further, one of the offset values shown in FIG. 180(A) is stored in the A register by the processing of (2) above.

Next, in step S1062, a designated address is set. This process is a process of adding the A register value to the HL register value and using the result of the addition as the HL register value. For example, when the HL register value is "1200 (H)" and the A register value (offset value) is "3 (H)", the HL register value is "1203 (H)" and the first reel pattern array. It becomes the top address of the table (TBL_PICARG_1). Further, when the HL register value is "1201 (H)" and the A register value (offset value) is "39 (H)", the HL register value is "123A (H)" and the second reel pattern It becomes the start address of the array table (TBL_PICARG_2). Furthermore, when the HL register value is "1202 (H)" and the A register value (offset value) is "8D (H)", the HL register value is "128F (H)" and the third reel It becomes the top address of the pattern arrangement table (TBL_PICARG_3).
Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

FIG. 198 is a flowchart showing 4-bit data acquisition (M_4BITDAT_GET) in step S1045 of FIG.
This process is a process of obtaining the pattern data of the pattern to be stopped on the activated line using the #th reel pattern arrangement table (TBL_PICARG_#) based on the control pattern number (_BF_PICTURE) corresponding to the pattern to be stopped.
For example, in a game in which it is determined that the symbol to be stopped on the activated line is the number 3 "black bar" based on the acceptance of the stop operation of the left reel 31, in FIG. Design data "@ZGR_02" corresponding to bit data is obtained. As shown in the reel symbol definition in FIG. 181, "@ZGR_02" is symbol data corresponding to "black BAR". Also, "@ZGR_02" has an actual numerical value of "1 (H)" as shown in the reel symbol definition.

In FIG. 198, in step S1071, the table offset is generated. This process is a process of executing an instruction to shift the value of the A register to the right by "1".
Here, before this process, the control picture number (_BF_PICTURE) is stored in the A register at step S1044 in FIG.
Therefore, if the A register value is, for example, "00000001 (B)" (odd number), the carry flag becomes "1" when shifted to the right by "1". When the A register value is, for example, "00000010 (B)" (even number), the carry flag becomes "0" when shifted to the right by "1". Furthermore, if the A register value is, for example, "00000011 (B)" (odd number), the carry flag becomes "1" when shifted to the right by "1".
Then, the value after shifting "1" to the right is stored in the A register.

In the next step S1072, designated data is obtained. This process is a process of storing in the A register the data stored at the address obtained by adding the A register value to the HL register value.
Here, the head address of the #th reel pattern arrangement table (TBL_PICARG_#) is stored in the HL register by step S1043 of FIG. 196 (FIG. 197). Also, the A register value is a value obtained by shifting the control picture number (_BF_PICTURE) to the right by "1". Therefore, when the HL register value is, for example, "1203 (H)" (see FIG. 181) and the A register value is, for example, "1" (control picture number (_BF_PICTURE) is "3"), the post-calculation A The register value is the data at the address "1204(H)", that is, "@ZGR_05*16+@ZGR_04".
Here, as shown in FIG. 181, "@ZGR_05" (upper 4 bits) is "0100 (B)" (4 (H)), and "@ZGR_04" (lower 4 bits) is "0011 (B)". "(3(H)), the A register value becomes "0100/0011(B)".

In the next step S1073, it is determined whether or not the table data search number is an odd number. This process determines whether or not the carry flag is "1" by the process of step S1071, and determines that the number is odd when the carry flag is "1". If the table data search number is determined to be odd, the process proceeds to step S1075, and if determined not to be odd, the process proceeds to step S1074.
In step S1074, data for an even number is acquired. This process is a process of exchanging the upper 4 bits and the lower 4 bits of the data (A register value) acquired in step S1072.
For example, when the A register value is "0100/0011(B)" as in the above example, executing the process of step S1074 results in "0011/0100(B)".

In step S1075, designated data is generated. This process is a process of executing an AND (logical product) operation of the A register value and "00001111 (B)" and storing the operation result in the A register value. This process masks the upper 4 bits.
For example, when the A register value is "01000011 (B)" as described above, this value and "00001111 (B)" are ANDed (logical product), and the A register value is "00000011 (B)". )”.
Then, the processing according to this flow chart ends.

FIG. 199 is a flow chart showing bit count (M_BIT_COUNT) in step S1052 of FIG.
Here, just before the bit number counting process, the HL register value is the data updated in step S1051 of FIG. , “120D(H)” in FIG. 182).
Also, the C register value is the 4-bit data obtained by obtaining the 4-bit data in step S1045 through the processing of step S1046 in FIG.

In FIG. 199, in step S1081, the number of inspections is set. This process is a process of adding "1" to the C register value and using the result of the addition as the C register value.
In the next step S1082, "0" is set as the initial value of the number of on-bits. This process is a process of setting the A register value to "0" by performing an XOR (exclusive OR) operation of the A register value and the A register value.
Next, the process advances to step S1083 to set the number of times of processing. This process is a process of storing "8" in the B register. "8" here is a value corresponding to the number of bits.

In the next step S1084, inspection data is acquired. This process is a process of storing the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value in the D register. Therefore, the D register value becomes reel pattern data information.
Next, proceeding to step S1085, it is determined whether or not the bit is on. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Perform an operation to shift the D register value to the left by "1".
(2) If the carry flag is "1" as a result of the above calculation, it is judged "Yes".

When it is determined in step S1085 that the bit is on, the process proceeds to step S1086, and when it is determined that the bit is not on, the process proceeds to step S1087.
In step S1086, "1" is added to the number of ON bits. This process is a process of adding "1" to the A register value.
In the next step S1087, "1" is subtracted from the number of inspections. This process is a process of subtracting "1" from the C register value and using the subtraction result as the C register value.
Next, the process advances to step S1088 to determine whether or not to end the inspection. This process determines whether the C register value is "0" (whether the zero flag is "1"). When it is determined that the C register value is "0" (the zero flag is "1"), it is determined that the inspection is finished, and the processing according to this flowchart is finished.
On the other hand, when it is determined not to end the inspection, the process proceeds to step S1089.

In step S1089, it is determined whether or not the number of times of processing has been completed. In this process, "1" is subtracted from the B register value, and it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction is "0". If it is determined that the number of times of processing has not been completed, the process proceeds to step S1085. On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of times of processing has been completed, the process proceeds to step S1090.
In step S1090, "1" is added to the HL register value, and the value after the addition is set as the HL register value. Then, the process proceeds to step S1083.

The above bit count processing will be described using a specific example.
Although an example will be described below, the process can be executed in the same manner as described below, regardless of which group of symbols on which reel 31 .
In this specific example,
HL register value = 1213 (H) (3 groups of symbols on the first reel 31)
C register value=3 (replay) ("4" in step S1081)
shall be
in this case,
(1) First time Step S1083: B register value = 8 (initial value)
Step S1084: D register value "11011010 (B)" (symbol data stored at address "1213 (H)")
Step S1085: Shift D register value left by "1", carry flag = 1, hence "Yes"
Step S1086: A register value=0+1=1
Step S1087: C register value=4-1=3
Step S1088: Zero flag ≠ 1, hence "No"
Step S1089: B register value=8-1=7, hence "No"
(2) Second time Step S1085: D register value is shifted left by "1", carry flag = 1, therefore "Yes"
Step S1086: A register value=1+1=2
Step S1087: C register value=3-1=2
Step S1088: Zero flag ≠ 1, hence "No"
Step S1089: B register value=7-1=6, hence "No"
(3) Third time Step S1085: D register value is shifted left by "1", carry flag ≠ 1, therefore "No"
Step S1087: C register value=2-1=1
Step S1088: Zero flag ≠ 1, hence "No"
Step S1089: B register value=6-1=5, hence "No"
(4) Fourth time Step S1085: D register value is shifted left by "1", carry flag = 1, therefore "Yes"
Step S1086: A register value=2+1=3
Step S1087: C register value=1-1=0
Step S1088: Zero flag=1, hence "Yes" (end of process)
becomes.

In this case, when the bit number count is completed and the process proceeds to step S1053 in FIG. 196, the carry flag is "1", so the process proceeds to step S1055.
In step S1055,
HL register value = HL register value "1214 (H)" + A register value "3 (H)" = 1217 (H)
A register value = Data at address "1217 (H)" indicated by HL register value = @REP_01 OR @REP_02 OR @REP_07 (10000110 (B))
becomes.
As described above, in the bit number counting, when a stop symbol is determined, the symbol combination data of the N-th group of the #-th reel 31 corresponding to the stop symbol is specified.

Next, when each stop switch 42 is operated, how the stop symbol data (_WK_STOP_PIC) is updated by the stop symbol set (M_STOPPIC_SET) shown in FIG. 195 will be described with a specific example.
In the description below,
1. Example of non-winning role 1-1. When the left stop switch 42 is operated to stop 1-2. When the middle stop switch 42 is operated to stop 1-3. 2. When the right stop switch 42 is operated to stop; Example of Winning Special Role (RBA) 2-1. When the left stop switch 42 is operated to stop 2-2. When the middle stop switch 42 is operated to stop 2-3. 2. When the right stop switch 42 is operated to stop; Example of Winning in Replay (Replay 01) 3-1. When the left stop switch 42 is operated to stop 3-2. When the middle stop switch 42 is operated to stop 3-3. 4. When the right stop switch 42 is operated to stop; Example of Winning a Small Win (When the Pressing Order is Correct When the Pressing Order Bell Wins) 4-1. When the left stop switch 42 is operated to stop 4-2. When middle stop switch 42 is operated to stop 4-3. 5. When the right stop switch 42 is operated to stop; Example of Winning a Small Win (Incorrect Push Order when Winning the Push Order Bell) 5-1. When the right stop switch 42 is operated to stop 5-2. When middle stop switch 42 is operated to stop 5-3. The operation of stopping the left stop switch 42 will be described in order.

1. In this example, as a result of the winning lottery, the winning number is determined to be "26", and when the symbol of symbol number "18" is passing through the middle row of the left reel 31, the left stop is reached. The switch 42 is operated, and then the middle stop switch 42 is operated while the symbol of the symbol number "17" is passing through the middle stage of the middle reel 31, and then the middle stage of the right reel 41 is moved to the middle stage of the symbol number "19". By operating the stop switch 42 while the pattern is passing,
Picture control number when the left reel 31 stops (_BF_PICTURE): 1 (watermelon)
Picture control number when middle reel 31 stops (_BF_PICTURE): 0 (Bell A)
Picture control number when the right reel 31 stops (_BF_PICTURE): 2 (blue BAR)
shall stop respectively.
In this case, the symbol combination on the activated line is "black BAR (No. 3)" - "cherry (No. 1)" - "blue BAR (No. 2)", and the combination is not won.
Also, the initial value of the stop design data (_WK_STOP_PIC) is
Stop pattern data (first group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1): "11111111 (B)"
Stop pattern data (second group) (_WK_STOP_PIC2): "11111111 (B)"
Stop pattern data (third group) (_WK_STOP_PIC3): "11111111 (B)"
Stop pattern data (fourth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC4): "00001111 (B)"
Stop pattern data (5th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5): "11111111 (B)"
Stop pattern data (6th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6): "11111111 (B)"
Stop pattern data (7th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7): "11111111 (B)"
Stop pattern data (8th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC8): "11111111 (B)"
Stop pattern data (9th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9): "00000011 (B)"
is.

1-1. When the Left Stop Switch 42 is Operated to Stop In the stop symbol set of FIG. 195, in step S1031, "1" is stored in the A register value (symbol control number).
At step S1032, "9" is set in the B register (symbol group number).
(first time)
By the processing of step S1033, "00000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data). This means that there is no "black BAR" in the group of 9 symbols on the left reel 31 (see address "1236 (H)").
At step S1034, "F0BF (H)" (address of stop symbol data (9th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000000 (B)" and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC9) indicated by the HL register value (initial value is "00000011 (B)"). As a result, the stop symbol data (9th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "8" and the process returns to step S1033.

(Second time)
By the processing of step S1033, "00000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data). This means that there is no "black BAR" in the eight symbol groups on the left reel 31 (see address "1230 (H)").
At step S1034, "F0BE(H)" (address of stop pattern data (eighth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC8)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000000 (B)" and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC8) indicated by the HL register value (initial value is "11111111 (B)"). As a result, the stop symbol data (8th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC8) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "7", and the process returns to step S1033.

(3rd time)
By the processing of step S1033, "00000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data). This means that there is no "black BAR" in the symbol group 7 of the left reel 31 (see address "122B(H)").
At step S1034, "F0BD (H)" (address of stop pattern data (seventh group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000000 (B)" and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC7) indicated by the HL register value (initial value is "11111111 (B)"). As a result, the stop symbol data (seventh group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "6", and the process returns to step S1033.

(4th time)
By the processing of step S1033, the symbol combination data "01000000(B)" (@WIN_15) at the address "1226(H)" is stored in the A register. This means that the symbol group 6 on the left reel 31 has a small win 15 as a "black BAR".
At step S1034, "F0BC(H)" (address of stop symbol data (sixth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "01000000 (B)" and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC6) indicated by the HL register value (initial value is "11111111 (B)"). As a result, the stop symbol data (sixth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6) becomes "01000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "5", and the process returns to step S1033.

(Fifth time)
By the processing of step S1033, "00000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data). This means that there is no "black BAR" in the fifth group of symbols on the left reel 31 (see address "1220 (H)").
At step S1034, "F0BB(H)" (address of stop pattern data (fifth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000000 (B)" and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC5) indicated by the HL register value (initial value is "11111111 (B)"). As a result, the stop symbol data (fifth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "4", and the process returns to step S1033.

(6th time)
By the processing of step S1033, "00000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data). This means that there is no "black BAR" in the 4 groups of symbols on the left reel 31 (see address "121B(H)").
At step S1034, "F0BA(H)" (address of stop symbol data (fourth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC4)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000000 (B)" and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC5) indicated by the HL register value (initial value is "00001111 (B)"). As a result, the stop symbol data (fourth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC4) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "3", and the process returns to step S1033.

(7th time)
By the processing in step S1033, the pattern combination data "00010000(B)" (@REP_04) at the address "1216(H)" is stored in the A register. This means that the symbol group 3 on the left reel 31 has Replay 04 as a "black BAR".
At step S1034, "F0B9 (H)" (address of stop symbol data (third group) (_WK_STOP_PIC3)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00010000 (B)" and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC3) indicated by the HL register value (initial value is "11111111 (B)"). As a result, the stop symbol data (third group) (_WK_STOP_PIC3) becomes "00010000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "2", and the process returns to step S1033.

(8th time)
At step S1033, "00000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data). This means that there is no "black BAR" in the second group of symbols on the left reel 31 (see address "1210 (H)").
In step S1034, "F0B8(H)" (address of stop pattern data (second group) (_WK_STOP_PIC2)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000000 (B)" and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC2) indicated by the HL register value (initial value is "11111111 (B)"). As a result, the stop symbol data (second group) (_WK_STOP_PIC2) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "1", and the process returns to step S1033.

(9th time)
At step S1033, "00000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data). This means that there is no "black BAR" in the symbol group 1 of the left reel 31 (see address "120D(H)").
At step S1034, "F0B7(H)" (address of stop pattern data (first group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000000 (B)" and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC1) indicated by the HL register value (initial value is "11111111 (B)"). As a result, the stop symbol data (first group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "0", and it is determined as "Yes", so the stop symbol set is terminated.

By the processing as described above, the stop symbol data at the time of the stop operation of the left stop switch 42 is as follows.
Stop pattern data (first group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1): "00000000 (B)"
Stop pattern data (second group) (_WK_STOP_PIC2): "00000000 (B)"
Stop pattern data (third group) (_WK_STOP_PIC3): "00010000 (B)"
Stop pattern data (fourth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC4): "00000000 (B)"
Stop pattern data (5th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5): "00000000 (B)"
Stop pattern data (6th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6): "01000000 (B)"
Stop pattern data (7th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7): "00000000 (B)"
Stop pattern data (8th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC8): "00000000 (B)"
Stop pattern data (9th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9): "00000000 (B)"
From the above, when the black BAR stops on the effective line when the left stop switch 42 is operated to stop, there is a possibility of stopping the symbol combination of the symbol group 3 or the symbol group 6, but the other symbol groups can be stopped. It can be seen that there is no possibility of stopping the symbol combination.

Next, the reel symbol data set (FIG. 196) at step S1033 in the stop symbol set of FIG. 195 will be described with an example.
Among the above, the fourth step S1033 (symbol 6 group) is taken as an example. Note that the B register value in this case is "6".
In FIG. 196, at step S1041, stop/control reel number data (_NB_STOP_REEL), that is, "1" is stored in the A register.
In the next step S1042, "11FF(H)" is stored in the HL register.
Next, the process advances to step S1043 to execute table selection (R_TBL_SET). As a result of this processing, the head address "1203 (H)" of the first reel pattern arrangement table (TBL_PICARG_1) is stored in the HL register.

Next, in step S1044, the control picture number (_BF_PICTURE), that is, "1" is stored in the A register.
In the next step S1045, 4-bit data acquisition (M_4BITDAT_GET) is executed. As a result of this process, the pattern data "00000001 (B)" corresponding to the "black BAR" is stored in the A register.
In the next step S1046, the A register value (symbol data) is stored in the C register value. Therefore, the C register value becomes "00000001 (B)".

Next, in step S1047, "11(D)" (offset value) is stored in the A register value.
In the next step S1048, the HL register value = "1203 (H)" (head address of the first reel pattern arrangement table (TBL_PICARG_1)) + "11 (D)" (offset value) = "120E (H)". .
Also, the A register value is the table offset value of the lower 6 bits of the data at the address "120E(H)", which is "00000011(B)".

In the next step S1049, an AND (logical product) operation of the A register value and "00000011 (B)" is performed, and the operation result is stored in the A register. As a result, the A register value becomes "00000011 (B)".
In the next step S1050, "1" is subtracted from the B register value, and when the result of the subtraction is not "0", it is determined "No" (the symbol combination table for the number of symbol groups has not been obtained).
where, at the first point,
HL register value = 120E (H)
B register value = 6
is.
Therefore, the loop processing of steps S1048 to S1050 is as follows.
(first time)
HL register value = 120E (H)
A register value = 3 (H)
B register value = 6 - 1 = 5 (determined as "No" and returns to step S1048)
(Second time)
HL register value=120E(H)+3(D)=1211(H)
A register value = 3 (H)
B register value = 5 - 1 = 4 (determined as "No" and returns to step S1048)
(3rd time)
HL register value = 1211 (H) + 3 (D) = 1214 (H)
A register value = 8 (H) (00001000 (B))
B register value = 4 - 1 = 3 (determined as "No" and returns to step S1048)

(4th time)
HL register value = 1214 (H) + 8 (D) = 121C (H)
A register value = 5 (H) (00001000 (B))
B register value = 3-1 = 2 (determined as "No" and returns to step S1048)
(Fifth time)
HL register value = 121C(H) + 5(D) = 1221(H)
A register value = 4 (H)
B register value=2-1=1 (determined as "No" and returns to step S1048)
(6th time)
HL register value = 1221 (H) + 4 (D) = 1225 (H)
A register value = 7 (H)
B register value = 1 - 1 = 0 (judged as "Yes" and proceeds to step S1051)

Here, the HL register value "1225 (H)" is saved in the stack area.
At step S1051, the HL register value=“1225 (H)”−“1 (H)”=“1224 (H)”.
In step S1052, a bit number count (M_BIT_COUNT) is executed. Here, the bit count is executed for the data "01111010(B)" at the address "1224(H)". In this example, since "1" is counted, the A register value is "1".
After that, the HL register value and BC register value are restored from the stack area.

In the next step S1053, since the carry flag is "1", it is determined "Yes".
In step S1055, the data stored at the address indicated by the value "1226 (H)" obtained by adding the A register value "1" to the HL register value "1225 (H)" is stored in the A register.
Therefore, the data "@WIN_15" at the address "1226 (H)", that is, "01000000 (B)" is stored in the A register.
This A register value "01000000 (B)" is then ANDed with the initial value "11111111 (B)" stored in the stop symbol data (sixth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6) in the stop symbol set (_M_STOPPIC_SET). (logical product) is calculated. As a result, the data of the stop symbol data (sixth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6) is updated from "11111111 (B)" to "01000000 (B)".

Next, a specific example of 4-bit data acquisition (M_4BITDAT_GET) (FIG. 198) in step S1045 in the above example will be described.
Before this process,
A register = 1 (control picture number (_BF_PICTURE))
HL register = 1203 (H) (first address of first reel pattern array table (TBL_PICARG_1))
It has become.
In FIG. 198, in step S1071, the A register value is shifted to the right by "1". As a result, the carry flag becomes "1". Also, the A register value becomes "00000000 (B)".

In step S1072, the data stored at the address obtained by adding the A register value to the HL register value is stored in the A register. Since the HL register value is "1203 (H)" and the A register value is "0", the A register value after the operation is the data "@ZGR_08*16 + @ZGR_02" at the address of "1203 (H)", i.e. It becomes "0111/0001 (B)".
At step S1073, the carry flag is "1" as a result of the above calculation, so the process proceeds to step S1075.
In step S1075, an AND (logical product) operation of the A register value and "00001111 (B)" is executed. As a result, the A register value becomes "0000/0001(B)", and the pattern data "00000001(B)" corresponding to the "black BAR" is stored.

Next, a specific example of the bit number count (M_BIT_COUNT) (FIG. 199) in step S1052 of FIG. 196 in the above example will be described.
Immediately before the bit number count,
HL register = 1224 (H) (data updated in step S1051 in Fig. 196)
C register = 00000001 (B) (symbol data acquired in 4-bit data acquisition (step S1045) in Fig. 196)
It has become.
In FIG. 199, in step S1081, "1" is added to the C register value, and the result of the addition is used as the C register value. As a result, the C register value becomes "2".
At step S1082, the A register value is set to "0".
In step S1083, "8" is stored in the B register.

In step S1084, the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value "1224(H)" is stored in the D register. Therefore, the D register value is "01111010(B)".
In step S1085, the D register value is shifted left by "1". Accordingly, since the carry flag is "0", "No" is determined and the process proceeds to step S1087.
In step S1087, "1" is subtracted from the C register value. As a result, the C register value becomes "1".
Proceeding to step S1088, since the C register value is not "0", it is judged "No", and the process proceeds to step S1089.
In step S1089, "1" is subtracted from the B register value. As a result, the B register value becomes "7" and is not "0", so the process returns to step S1085.

In step S1085, the D register value is shifted left by "1". Since the carry flag is "1", "Yes" is determined.
Therefore, the process proceeds to step S1086 to add "1" to the A register value. As a result, the A register value becomes "1".
In step S1087, "1" is subtracted from the C register value. As a result, the C register value becomes "0".
Proceeding to step S1088, since the value of the C register is "0", the determination is "Yes", and the processing according to this flowchart ends.
Then, when proceeding to step S1053 in FIG. 196, it is determined that the check last bit is ON, and the process proceeds to step S1055.
In step S1055, designated address data is set.
Here, the value "1226 (H)" obtained by adding the A register value "1" to the HL register value "1225 (H)" returned from the stack area is set as the HL register value, and is stored at the address indicated by the HL register value. Store the data in the A register. Therefore, the A register value becomes the data of the address "1226 (H)", that is, "01000000 (B)".

1-2. When the middle stop switch 42 is operated to stop When the middle stop switch 42 is operated to stop, as described above,
Picture control number (_BF_PICTURE): 0 (Bell A)
Symbols that stop on the active line: "Cherry (No. 1)"
shall be
Also, the stop design data (_WK_STOP_PIC) at this time is, as described above,
Stop pattern data (first group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1): "00000000 (B)"
Stop pattern data (second group) (_WK_STOP_PIC2): "00000000 (B)"
Stop pattern data (third group) (_WK_STOP_PIC3): "00010000 (B)"
Stop pattern data (fourth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC4): "00000000 (B)"
Stop pattern data (5th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5): "00000000 (B)"
Stop pattern data (6th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6): "01000000 (B)"
Stop pattern data (7th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7): "00000000 (B)"
Stop pattern data (8th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC8): "00000000 (B)"
Stop pattern data (9th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9): "00000000 (B)"
is.

In this case, when the middle reel 31 is stopped, the process proceeds as follows.
In FIG. 195, in step S1031, "0" is stored in the A register value (symbol control number).
At step S1032, "9" is set in the B register (symbol group number).
In the first step S1033, the symbol combination data "00000001 (B)" at the address "128E (H)" is stored in the A register.
At step S1034, "F0BF (H)" (address of stop pattern data (9th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000001(B)" and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC9) ("00000000(B)") indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (9th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "8" and the process returns to step S1033.

In the second step S1033, the symbol combination data "00110000(B)" at the address "1289(H)" is stored in the A register.
At step S1034, "F0BE(H)" (address of stop pattern data (eighth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC8)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00110000(B)" and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC8) ("00000000(B)") indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (8th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC8) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "7", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the third step S1033, the symbol combination data "00000010(B)" at the address "127F(H)" is stored in the A register.
At step S1034, "F0BD (H)" (address of stop symbol data (seventh group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000010(B)" and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC7) ("00000000(B)") indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (seventh group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "6", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the fourth step S1033, "00000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data). This means that "cherry" does not exist in the six symbol groups of the middle reel 31 (see address "125F(H)").
At step S1034, "F0BC(H)" (address of stop symbol data (sixth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000000(B)" and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC6) ("01000000(B)") indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (sixth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "5", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the fifth step S1033, the symbol combination data "01000001 (B)" at the address "125E (H)" is stored in the A register.
At step S1034, "F0BB(H)" (address of stop pattern data (fifth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "01000001 (B)" and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC5) ("00000000 (B)") indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (fifth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "4" and the process returns to step S1033.

In the sixth step S1033, the symbol combination data "00000110 (B)" at the address "1259 (H)" is stored in the A register.
At step S1034, "F0BA(H)" (address of stop symbol data (fourth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC4)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000110(B)" and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC5) ("00000000(B)") indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (fourth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC4) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "3", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the seventh step S1033, the symbol combination data "00011000 (B)" at the address "1253 (H)" is stored in the A register.
At step S1034, "F0B9 (H)" (address of stop symbol data (third group) (_WK_STOP_PIC3)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00011000(B)" and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC3) (00010000(B)") indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (third group) (_WK_STOP_PIC3) becomes "00010000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "2", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the eighth step S1033, "00000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data). This means that there is no "cherry" in the second group of symbols on the middle reel 31 (see address "1248 (H)").
In step S1034, "F0B8(H)" (address of stop pattern data (second group) (_WK_STOP_PIC2)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000000(B)" and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC2) ("00000000(B)") indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (second group) (_WK_STOP_PIC2) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "1", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the ninth step S1033, "00000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data). This means that "cherry" does not exist in the symbol group 1 of the middle reel 31 (see address "1244 (H)").
At step S1034, "F0B7(H)" (address of stop pattern data (first group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000000(B)" and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC1) ("00000000(B)") indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (first group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "0", and it is determined as "Yes", so the stop symbol set is terminated.

By the above processing, the stop symbol data at the time of stop operation of the middle stop switch 42 is as follows.
Stop pattern data (first group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1): "00000000 (B)"
Stop pattern data (second group) (_WK_STOP_PIC2): "00000000 (B)"
Stop pattern data (third group) (_WK_STOP_PIC3): "00010000 (B)"
Stop pattern data (fourth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC4): "00000000 (B)"
Stop pattern data (5th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5): "00000000 (B)"
Stop pattern data (6th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6): "00000000 (B)"
Stop pattern data (7th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7): "00000000 (B)"
Stop pattern data (8th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC8): "00000000 (B)"
Stop pattern data (9th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9): "00000000 (B)"
From the above, when the "black bar" stops on the effective line when the left reel 31 stops and the "watermelon" stops on the effective line when the middle reel 31 stops, the symbol combination corresponding to replay 04 It can be seen that it has a stopping possibility.

1-3. When the right stop switch 42 is operated to stop When the right stop switch 42 is operated to stop, as described above,
Picture control number (_BF_PICTURE): 2 (blue BAR)
Design that stops on the effective line: "Blue BAR (No. 2)"
shall be
In this case, when the right stop switch 42 is operated to stop, the processing proceeds as follows.
In FIG. 195, in step S1031, "2" is stored in the A register value (symbol control number).
At step S1032, "9" is set in the B register (symbol group number).
In the first step S1033, "00000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data). This means that there is no "blue BAR" in the group of 9 symbols on the right reel 31 (see address "12DA(H)").
At step S1034, "F0BF (H)" (address of stop symbol data (9th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000000(B)" and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC9) ("00000000(B)") indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (9th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "8" and the process returns to step S1033.

In the second step S1033, the symbol combination data "10000110 (B)" of the address "12D3 (H)" is stored in the A register.
At step S1034, "F0BE (H)" (address of stop pattern data (eighth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC8)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "10000110 (B)" and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC8) ("00000000 (B)") indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (8th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC8) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "7", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the third step S1033, the symbol combination data "00011010(B)" of the address "12CA(H)" is stored in the A register.
At step S1034, "F0BD (H)" (address of stop pattern data (seventh group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00011010(B)" and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC7) ("00000000(B)") indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (seventh group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "6" and the process returns to step S1033.

In the fourth step S1033, the symbol combination data "10000000 (B)" of the address "12C1 (H)" is stored in the A register.
At step S1034, "F0BC(H)" (address of stop symbol data (sixth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "10000000(B)" and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC6) ("01000000(B)") indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (sixth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "5", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the fifth step S1033, the symbol combination data "00110010(B)" at the address "12B7(H)" is stored in the A register.
At step S1034, "F0BB(H)" (address of stop pattern data (fifth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00110010(B)" and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC5) ("00000000(B)") indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (fifth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "4", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the sixth step S1033, the symbol combination data "00000010 (B)" at the address "12B1 (H)" is stored in the A register.
At step S1034, "F0BA(H)" (address of stop symbol data (fourth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC4)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000010(B)" and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC5) ("00000000(B)") indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (fourth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC4) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "3", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the seventh step S1033, the symbol combination data "00000001 (B)" at the address "12A7 (H)" is stored in the A register.
At step S1034, "F0B9 (H)" (address of stop symbol data (third group) (_WK_STOP_PIC3)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000001 (B)" and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC3) ("00010000 (B)") indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (third group) (_WK_STOP_PIC3) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "2", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the eighth step S1033, "00000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data). This means that there is no "blue BAR" in the second group of symbols on the right reel 31 (see address "129F(H)").
In step S1034, "F0B8(H)" (address of stop pattern data (second group) (_WK_STOP_PIC2)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000000(B)" and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC2) ("00000000(B)") indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (second group) (_WK_STOP_PIC2) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "1", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the ninth step S1033, "00000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data). This means that there is no "blue BAR" in the symbol group 1 of the right reel 31 (see address "1299 (H)").
At step S1034, "F0B7 (H)" (address of stop pattern data (first group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000000(B)" and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC1) ("00000000(B)") indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (first group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "0", and it is determined as "Yes", so the stop symbol set ends.

By the above processing, the stop symbol data when the right stop switch 42 is operated to stop is as follows.
Stop pattern data (first group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1): "00000000 (B)"
Stop pattern data (second group) (_WK_STOP_PIC2): "00000000 (B)"
Stop pattern data (third group) (_WK_STOP_PIC3): "00000000 (B)"
Stop pattern data (fourth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC4): "00000000 (B)"
Stop pattern data (5th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5): "00000000 (B)"
Stop pattern data (6th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6): "00000000 (B)"
Stop pattern data (7th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7): "00000000 (B)"
Stop pattern data (8th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC8): "00000000 (B)"
Stop pattern data (9th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9): "00000000 (B)"
From the above, when the left reel 31 stops, the "black bar" stops on the effective line, when the middle reel 31 stops, the "watermelon" stops on the effective line, and when the right reel 31 stops, the "black bar" stops on the effective line. When "Blue BAR" stops, it is known that the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is not stopped on the activated line (that the winning combination is not won).

2. Winning Special Winning Next, updating of the stop symbol data (_WK_STOP_PIC) at winning of a special win will be described.
In this example, the winning number "26" is determined as a result of the winning combination lottery, and the left stop switch 42 is operated when the symbol number "16" is passing through the middle row of the left reel 31. After that, the middle stop switch 42 is operated while the symbol of the symbol number "5" is passing through the middle stage of the middle reel 31, and then the symbol of the symbol number "7" is passing through the middle stage of the right reel 31. It is assumed that the RBA wins by operating the right stop switch 42 when the
Picture control number when the left reel 31 stops (_BF_PICTURE): 16 (watermelon)
Picture control number when middle reel 31 stops (_BF_PICTURE): 7 (Bell B)
Picture control number when the right reel 31 stops (_BF_PICTURE): 8 (black BAR)
shall stop respectively.
In this case, the symbol combination on the active line is "blue BAR (number 18)"-"blue BAR (number 8)"-"black BAR (number 8)".
Also, the initial value of the stop design data (_WK_STOP_PIC) is
Stop pattern data (first group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1): "11111111 (B)"
Stop pattern data (second group) (_WK_STOP_PIC2): "11111111 (B)"
Stop pattern data (third group) (_WK_STOP_PIC3): "11111111 (B)"
Stop pattern data (fourth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC4): "00001111 (B)"
Stop pattern data (5th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5): "11111111 (B)"
Stop pattern data (6th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6): "11111111 (B)"
Stop pattern data (7th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7): "11111111 (B)"
Stop pattern data (8th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC8): "11111111 (B)"
Stop pattern data (9th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9): "00000011 (B)"
is.

2-1. When the Left Stop Switch 42 is Operated to Stop When the left stop switch 42 is operated to stop, the process proceeds as follows.
In FIG. 195, at step S1031, "16 (D)" is stored in the A register value (symbol control number).
At step S1032, "9" is set in the B register (symbol group number).
In the first step S1033, the symbol combination data "00000010 (B)" at the address "1238 (H)" is stored in the A register.
At step S1034, "F0BF (H)" (address of stop symbol data (9th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000010(B)" and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC9) ("00000011(B)") indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (9th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9) becomes "00000010 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "8", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the second step S1033, "00000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data). This means that there is no "blue BAR" in the eight symbol groups of the left reel 31 (see address "1230 (H)").
At step S1034, "F0BE(H)" (address of stop pattern data (eighth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC8)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000000 (B)" and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC8) ("11111111 (B)") indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (8th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC8) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "7", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the third step S1033, "00000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data). This means that there is no "blue BAR" in the symbol group 7 of the left reel 31 (see address "122B(H)").
At step S1034, "F0BD (H)" (address of stop pattern data (seventh group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000000 (B)" and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC7) ("11111111 (B)") indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (seventh group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "6", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the fourth step S1033, "00000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data). This means that there is no "blue BAR" in the left reel 31 symbol group 6 (see address "1224 (H)").
At step S1034, "F0BC(H)" (address of stop symbol data (sixth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000000 (B)" and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC6) ("11111111 (B)") indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (sixth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "5", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the fifth step S1033, "00000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data). This means that there is no "blue BAR" in the fifth group of symbols on the left reel 31 (see address "1220 (H)").
At step S1034, "F0BB(H)" (address of stop pattern data (fifth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000000 (B)" and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC5) ("11111111 (B)") indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (fifth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "4", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the sixth step S1033, "00000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data). This means that there is no "blue BAR" in the group 4 of symbols on the left reel 31 (see address "121B(H)").
At step S1034, "F0BA(H)" (address of stop symbol data (fourth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC4)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000000 (B)" and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC5) ("00001111 (B)") indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (fourth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC4) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "3", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the seventh step S1033, the symbol combination data "00000001 (B)" at the address "1215 (H)" is stored in the A register. This means that the third group of symbols on the left reel 31 has 1BB as the "blue BAR".
At step S1034, "F0B9 (H)" (address of stop symbol data (third group) (_WK_STOP_PIC3)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000001 (B)" and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC3) ("11111111 (B)") indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (third group) (_WK_STOP_PIC3) becomes "00000001 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "2", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the eighth step S1033, the symbol combination data "11111111 (B)" at the address "1212 (H)" is stored in the A register. This means that the second group of symbols on the left reel 31 has RBI to RBP as the "blue BAR".
In step S1034, "F0B8(H)" (address of stop pattern data (second group) (_WK_STOP_PIC2)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "11111111(B)" and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC2) ("11111111(B)") indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (second group) (_WK_STOP_PIC2) becomes "11111111 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "1", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the ninth step S1033, the symbol combination data "11111111 (B)" of the address "120F (H)" is stored in the A register. This means that the symbol group 1 on the left reel 31 includes RBA to RBH as "blue BAR".
At step S1034, "F0B7(H)" (address of stop pattern data (first group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "11111111(B)" and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC1) ("11111111(B)") indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (first group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1) becomes "11111111 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "0", and it is determined as "Yes", so the stop symbol set is terminated.

By the above processing, the stop symbol data at the time of the stop operation of the left stop switch 42 is as follows.
Stop pattern data (first group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1): "11111111 (B)"
Stop pattern data (second group) (_WK_STOP_PIC2): "11111111 (B)"
Stop pattern data (third group) (_WK_STOP_PIC3): "00000001 (B)"
Stop pattern data (fourth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC4): "00000000 (B)"
Stop pattern data (5th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5): "00000000 (B)"
Stop pattern data (6th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6): "00000000 (B)"
Stop pattern data (7th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7): "00000000 (B)"
Stop pattern data (8th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC8): "00000000 (B)"
Stop pattern data (9th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9): "00000010 (B)"
From the above, when the "blue BAR" stops on the active line when the left reel 31 stops, there is a possibility of stopping the symbol combination of the symbol groups 1 to 3 and the symbol group 9, but the symbol group 4 It can be seen that there is no possibility of stopping the symbol combination of the 8 symbol groups.

2-2. When the middle stop switch 42 is operated to stop When the middle stop switch 42 is operated to stop, as described above,
Picture control number (_BF_PICTURE): 7 (Bell B)
Design to stop on the effective line: "Blue BAR (No. 8)"
shall be
In this case, when the middle stop switch 42 is operated to stop, the processing proceeds as follows.
In FIG. 195, in step S1031, "7" is stored in the A register value (symbol control number).
At step S1032, "9" is set in the B register (symbol group number).
At step S1033 (first time), "00000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data). This means that there is no "blue BAR" in the group of 9 symbols on the middle reel 31 (see address "128B(H)").
At step S1034, "F0BF (H)" (address of stop symbol data (9th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000000(B)" and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC9) ("00000010(B)") indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (9th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "8" and the process returns to step S1033.

In the second step S1033, the symbol combination data "00000111 (B)" at the address "1283 (H)" is stored in the A register.
At step S1034, "F0BE (H)" (address of stop pattern data (eighth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC8)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000111 (B)" and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC8) ("00000000 (B)") indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (8th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC8) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "7", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the third step S1033, the symbol combination data "00010000 (B)" at the address "1279 (H)" is stored in the A register.
At step S1034, "F0BD (H)" (address of stop pattern data (seventh group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00010000(B)" and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC7) ("00000000(B)") indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (seventh group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "6", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the fourth step S1033, the symbol combination data "10000000 (B)" at the address "1271 (H)" is stored in the A register.
At step S1034, "F0BC(H)" (address of stop symbol data (sixth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "10000000(B)" and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC6) ("00000000(B)") indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (sixth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "5", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the fifth step S1033, "00000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data). This means that there is no "blue BAR" in the fifth group of symbols on the middle reel 31 (see address "125A(H)").
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000000(B)" and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC5) ("00000000(B)") indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (fifth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "4", and the process returns to step S1033.

At the sixth step S1033, "00000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data). This means that there is no "blue BAR" in the group 4 of symbols on the middle reel 31 (see address "1255 (H)").
At step S1034, "F0BA(H)" (address of stop symbol data (fourth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC4)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000000(B)" and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC5) ("00000000(B)") indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (fourth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC4) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "3", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the seventh step S1033, the symbol combination data "00000011 (B)" at the address "124E (H)" is stored in the A register.
At step S1034, "F0B9 (H)" (address of stop symbol data (third group) (_WK_STOP_PIC3)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000011 (B)" and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC3) (00000001 (B)") indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (third group) (_WK_STOP_PIC3) becomes "00000001 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "2", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the eighth step S1033, "00000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data). This means that there is no "blue BAR" in the second group of symbols on the middle reel 31 (see address "1248 (H)").
In step S1034, "F0B8(H)" (address of stop pattern data (second group) (_WK_STOP_PIC2)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000000 (B)" and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC2) ("11111111 (B)") indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (second group) (_WK_STOP_PIC2) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "1", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the ninth step S1033, the symbol combination data "00001111 (B)" at the address "1246 (H)" is stored in the A register. This means that the first group of the middle reels 31 has RBA to RBD as the “blue BAR” symbols.
At step S1034, "F0B7(H)" (address of stop pattern data (first group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00001111 (B)" and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC1) ("11111111 (B)") indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (first group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1) becomes "00001111 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "0", and it is determined as "Yes", so the stop symbol set is terminated.

By the above processing, the stop symbol data at the time of stop operation of the middle stop switch 42 is as follows.
Stop pattern data (first group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1): "00001111 (B)"
Stop pattern data (second group) (_WK_STOP_PIC2): "00000000 (B)"
Stop pattern data (third group) (_WK_STOP_PIC3): "00000001 (B)"
Stop pattern data (fourth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC4): "00000000 (B)"
Stop pattern data (5th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5): "00000000 (B)"
Stop pattern data (6th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6): "00000000 (B)"
Stop pattern data (7th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7): "00000000 (B)"
Stop pattern data (8th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC8): "00000000 (B)"
Stop pattern data (9th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9): "00000000 (B)"
From the above, when the "blue BAR" stops on the effective line when the left reel 31 stops, and when the "blue BAR" stops on the effective line when the middle reel 31 stops, RBA to RBD and 1BB It can be seen that it has a stopping possibility for the corresponding symbol combination.

2-3. When the right stop switch 42 is operated to stop When the right stop switch 42 is operated to stop, as described above,
Picture control number (_BF_PICTURE): 8 (black BAR)
Symbols that stop on the effective line: "Black BAR (No. 8)"
shall be
In this case, when the right stop switch 42 is operated to stop, the processing proceeds as follows.
In FIG. 195, in step S1031, "8" is stored in the A register value (symbol control number).
At step S1032, "9" is set in the B register (symbol group number).
At step S1033 (first time), the symbol combination data "00000001 (B)" at the address "12DC (H)" is stored in the A register.
At step S1034, "F0BF (H)" (address of stop symbol data (9th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000001(B)" and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC9) ("00000000(B)") indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (9th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "8" and the process returns to step S1033.

In the second step S1033, the symbol combination data "00010001 (B)" at the address "12D4 (H)" is stored in the A register.
At step S1034, "F0BE(H)" (address of stop pattern data (eighth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC8)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00010001(B)" and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC8) ("00000000(B)") indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (8th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC8) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "7", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the third step S1033, the symbol combination data "01100000(B)" of the address "12CB(H)" is stored in the A register.
At step S1034, "F0BD (H)" (address of stop pattern data (seventh group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "01100000(B)" and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC7) ("00000000(B)") indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (seventh group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "6", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the fourth step S1033, the symbol combination data "00001100(B)" of the address "12C2(H)" is stored in the A register.
At step S1034, "F0BC(H)" (address of stop symbol data (sixth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00001100(B)" and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC6) ("00000000(B)") indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (sixth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "5", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the fifth step S1033, the symbol combination data "10000000 (B)" at the address "12B8 (H)" is stored in the A register.
At step S1034, "F0BB(H)" (address of stop pattern data (fifth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "10000000(B)" and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC5) ("00000000(B)") indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (fifth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "4", and the process returns to step S1033.

At the sixth step S1033, "00000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data).
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000000(B)" and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC5) ("00000000(B)") indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (fourth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC4) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "3", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the seventh step S1033, the symbol combination data "01000000 (B)" at the address "12A8 (H)" is stored in the A register.
At step S1034, "F0B9 (H)" (address of stop symbol data (third group) (_WK_STOP_PIC3)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "01000000 (B)" and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC3) ("00000001 (B)") indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (third group) (_WK_STOP_PIC3) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "2", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the eighth step S1033, the symbol combination data "00011111 (B)" at the address "12A1 (H)" is stored in the A register. This means that the symbol group 2 of the right reel 31 includes RBI to RBM as symbols of "black BAR".
In step S1034, "F0B8(H)" (address of stop pattern data (second group) (_WK_STOP_PIC2)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00011111 (B)" and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC2) ("00000000 (B)") indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (second group) (_WK_STOP_PIC2) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "1", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the ninth step S1033, the symbol combination data "00010001 (B)" at the address "129B (H)" is stored in the A register. It means that RBA or RBE exists as a symbol of "black BAR" in the symbol group 1 of the right reel 31 .
At step S1034, "F0B7(H)" (address of stop pattern data (first group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, the AND operation of the A register value "00010001 (B)" and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC1) ("00001111 (B)") indicated by the HL register value is performed. ) (_WK_STOP_PIC1) becomes "00000001 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "0", and it is determined as "Yes", so the stop symbol set is terminated.

By the above processing, the stop symbol data when the right stop switch 42 is operated to stop is as follows.
Stop pattern data (first group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1): "00000001 (B)"
Stop pattern data (second group) (_WK_STOP_PIC2): "00000000 (B)"
Stop pattern data (third group) (_WK_STOP_PIC3): "00000000 (B)"
Stop pattern data (fourth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC4): "00000000 (B)"
Stop pattern data (5th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5): "00000000 (B)"
Stop pattern data (6th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6): "00000000 (B)"
Stop pattern data (7th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7): "00000000 (B)"
Stop pattern data (8th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC8): "00000000 (B)"
Stop pattern data (9th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9): "00000000 (B)"
From the above, when the left reel 31 stops, the "blue bar" stops on the effective line, when the middle reel 31 stops, the "blue bar" stops on the effective line, and when the right reel 31 stops, the "blue bar" stops on the effective line. It can be seen that when the "black BAR" stops, the symbol combination corresponding to the RBA stops on the active line.

3. Winning Replay Next, updating of the stop symbol data (_WK_STOP_PIC) when winning a replay will be described.
In this example, the winning number "1" is determined as a result of the winning lottery, and the left stop switch 42 is operated when the symbol number "11" is passing through the middle stage of the left reel 31. After that, while the symbol of symbol number "5" is passing through the middle stage of the middle reel 31, the middle stop switch 42 is operated, and then the symbol of symbol number "2" is passing through the middle stage of the right reel 31. It is assumed that Replay 01 wins by operating the right stop switch 42 when the
Picture control number when the left reel 31 stops (_BF_PICTURE): 13 (red 7)
Picture control number when middle reel 31 stops (_BF_PICTURE): 7 (Bell B)
Picture control number when the right reel 31 stops (_BF_PICTURE): 4 (Bell A)
shall stop respectively.
In this case, the symbol combination on the active line is "Replay (No. 15)" - "Blue BAR (No. 8)" - "Bell A (No. 4)".
Also, the initial value of the stop design data (_WK_STOP_PIC) is
Stop pattern data (first group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1): "11111111 (B)"
Stop pattern data (second group) (_WK_STOP_PIC2): "11111111 (B)"
Stop pattern data (third group) (_WK_STOP_PIC3): "11111111 (B)"
Stop pattern data (fourth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC4): "00001111 (B)"
Stop pattern data (5th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5): "11111111 (B)"
Stop pattern data (6th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6): "11111111 (B)"
Stop pattern data (7th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7): "11111111 (B)"
Stop pattern data (8th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC8): "11111111 (B)"
Stop pattern data (9th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9): "00000011 (B)"
is.

3-1. When the Left Stop Switch 42 is Operated to Stop When the left stop switch 42 is operated to stop, the process proceeds as follows.
In FIG. 195, at step S1031, "13 (D)" is stored in the A register value (symbol control number).
At step S1032, "9" is set in the B register (symbol group number).
At the first step S1033, "00000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data).
At step S1034, "F0BF (H)" (address of stop symbol data (9th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000000 (B)" and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC9) ("00000011 (B)") indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (9th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "8" and the process returns to step S1033.

In the second step S1033, the symbol combination data "11000001 (B)" at the address "1233 (H)" is stored in the A register. This means that the symbol group 8 on the left reel 31 has a small winning combination 25, a small winning combination 31, and a small winning combination 32 as the winning combination having the "replay" symbol.
At step S1034, "F0BE(H)" (address of stop pattern data (eighth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC8)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "11000001 (B)" and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC8) ("11111111 (B)") indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (8th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC8) becomes "11000001 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "7", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the third step S1033, the symbol combination data "11001100(B)" of the address "122E(H)" is stored in the A register. This means that the symbol group 7 on the left reel 31 has a small winning combination 19, a small winning combination 20, a small winning combination 23, and a small winning combination 24 as the winning combination having the "replay" symbol.
At step S1034, "F0BD (H)" (address of stop pattern data (seventh group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "11001100 (B)" and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC7) indicated by the HL register value (initial value is "11111111 (B)"). As a result, the stop symbol data (seventh group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7) becomes "11001100 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "6", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the fourth step S1033, the symbol combination data "10100000 (B)" at the address "1228 (H)" is stored in the A register. This means that the symbol group 6 on the left reel 31 has a small winning combination 14 and a small winning combination 16 as a combination having a "replay" symbol.
At step S1034, "F0BC(H)" (address of stop symbol data (sixth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "10100000 (B)" and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC6) indicated by the HL register value (initial value is "11111111 (B)"). As a result, the stop symbol data (sixth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6) becomes "10100000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "5", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the fifth step S1033, "00000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data).
At step S1034, "F0BB(H)" (address of stop pattern data (fifth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000000 (B)" and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC5) indicated by the HL register value (initial value is "11111111 (B)"). As a result, the stop symbol data (fifth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "4" and the process returns to step S1033.

In the sixth step S1033, the symbol combination data "00000100(B)" at the address "121D(H)" is stored in the A register.
At step S1034, "F0BA(H)" (address of stop symbol data (fourth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC4)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000100(B)" and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC4) (00001111(B)") indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (fourth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC4) becomes "00000100 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "3", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the seventh step S1033, the symbol combination data "10000110 (B)" at the address "1217 (H)" is stored in the A register. This means that Replay 01, Replay 02, and Replay 07 are present in the symbol group 3 of the left reel 31 as the combination having the "Replay" symbol.
At step S1034, "F0B9 (H)" (address of stop symbol data (third group) (_WK_STOP_PIC3)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "10000110 (B)" and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC3) ("11111111 (B)") indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (third group) (_WK_STOP_PIC3) becomes "10000110 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "2", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the eighth step S1033, "00000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data).
In step S1034, "F0B8(H)" (address of stop pattern data (second group) (_WK_STOP_PIC2)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000000 (B)" and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC2) ("11111111 (B)") indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (second group) (_WK_STOP_PIC2) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "1", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the ninth step S1033, "00000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data).
At step S1034, "F0B7(H)" (address of stop pattern data (first group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000000 (B)" and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC1) ("11111111 (B)") indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (first group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "0", and it is determined as "Yes", so the stop symbol set is terminated.

By the above processing, the stop symbol data at the time of the stop operation of the left stop switch 42 is as follows.
Stop pattern data (first group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1): "00000000 (B)"
Stop pattern data (second group) (_WK_STOP_PIC2): "00000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (third group) (_WK_STOP_PIC3): "10000110 (B)"
Stop pattern data (fourth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC4): "00000100 (B)"
Stop pattern data (5th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5): "00000000 (B)"
Stop pattern data (6th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6): "10100000 (B)"
Stop pattern data (7th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7): "11001100 (B)"
Stop pattern data (8th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC8): "11000001 (B)"
Stop pattern data (9th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9): "00000000 (B)"

3-2. When the middle stop switch 42 is operated to stop When the middle stop switch 42 is operated to stop, as described above,
Picture control number (_BF_PICTURE): 7 (Bell B)
Design to stop on the effective line: "Blue BAR (No. 8)"
shall be
In this case, when the middle stop switch 42 is operated to stop, the processing proceeds as follows.
In FIG. 195, in step S1031, "7" is stored in the A register value (symbol control number).
At step S1032, "9" is set in the B register (symbol group number).
At the first step S1033, "00000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data). This means that there is no "blue BAR" in the group of 9 symbols on the middle reel 31 (see address "128B(H)").
At step S1034, "F0BF (H)" (address of stop symbol data (9th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000000(B)" and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC9) ("00000000(B)") indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (9th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "8" and the process returns to step S1033.

In the second step S1033, the symbol combination data "00000111 (B)" at the address "1283 (H)" is stored in the A register.
At step S1034, "F0BE(H)" (address of stop pattern data (eighth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC8)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000111 (B)" and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC8) ("11000001 (B)") indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (8th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC8) becomes "00000001 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "7", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the third step S1033, the symbol combination data "00010000 (B)" at the address "1279 (H)" is stored in the A register.
At step S1034, "F0BD (H)" (address of stop symbol data (seventh group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00010000 (B)" and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC7) ("11001100 (B)") indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (seventh group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "6", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the fourth step S1033, the symbol combination data "10000000 (B)" at the address "1271 (H)" is stored in the A register.
At step S1034, "F0BC(H)" (address of stop symbol data (sixth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "10000000 (B)" and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC6) ("10100000 (B)") indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (sixth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6) becomes "10000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "5", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the fifth step S1033, "00000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data). This means that there is no "blue BAR" in the fifth group of symbols on the middle reel 31 (see address "125A(H)").
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000000(B)" and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC5) ("00000000(B)") indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (fifth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "4" and the process returns to step S1033.

At the sixth step S1033, "00000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data). This means that there is no "blue BAR" in the group 4 of symbols on the middle reel 31 (see address "1255 (H)").
At step S1034, "F0BA(H)" (address of stop symbol data (fourth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC4)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000000(B)" and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC4) ("00000100(B)") indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (fourth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC4) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "3", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the seventh step S1033, the symbol combination data "00000011 (B)" at the address "124E (H)" is stored in the A register.
At step S1034, "F0B9 (H)" (address of stop symbol data (third group) (_WK_STOP_PIC3)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000011 (B)" and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC3) ("10000110 (B)") indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (third group) (_WK_STOP_PIC3) becomes "00000010 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "2", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the eighth step S1033, "00000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data). This means that there is no "blue BAR" in the second group of symbols on the middle reel 31 (see address "1248 (H)").
At step S1034, "F0B8(H)" (address of stop pattern data (second group) (_WK_STOP_PIC2)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000000(B)" and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC2) ("00000000(B)") indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (second group) (_WK_STOP_PIC2) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "1", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the ninth step S1033, the symbol combination data "00001111 (B)" at the address "1246 (H)" is stored in the A register.
At step S1034, "F0B7 (H)" (address of stop pattern data (first group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00001111 (B)" and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC1) ("00000000 (B)") indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (first group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1) becomes "00001111 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "0", and it is determined as "Yes", so the stop symbol set ends.

By the above processing, the stop symbol data at the time of stop operation of the middle stop switch 42 is as follows.
Stop pattern data (first group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1): "00000000 (B)"
Stop pattern data (second group) (_WK_STOP_PIC2): "00000000 (B)"
Stop pattern data (third group) (_WK_STOP_PIC3): "00000010 (B)"
Stop pattern data (fourth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC4): "00000000 (B)"
Stop pattern data (5th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5): "00000000 (B)"
Stop pattern data (6th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6): "10000000 (B)"
Stop pattern data (7th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7): "00000000 (B)"
Stop pattern data (8th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC8): "00000001 (B)"
Stop pattern data (9th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9): "00000000 (B)"
Therefore, at the time of the second stop, the winning combinations that have the possibility of winning are Replay 01, Small Win 16, and Small Win 25.

3-3. When the right stop switch 42 is operated to stop When the right stop switch 42 is operated to stop, as described above,
Picture control number (_BF_PICTURE): 4 (Bell A)
Symbols that stop on the active line: "Bell A (No. 4)"
shall be
In this case, when the right stop switch 42 is operated to stop, the processing proceeds as follows.
In FIG. 195, in step S1031, "4" is stored in the A register value (symbol control number).
At step S1032, "9" is set in the B register (symbol group number).
In the first step S1033, the symbol combination data "00000010(B)" at the address "12DE(H)" is stored in the A register.
At step S1034, "F0BF (H)" (address of stop pattern data (9th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000010(B)" and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC9) ("00000000(B)") indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (9th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "8" and the process returns to step S1033.

In the second step S1033, the symbol combination data "00001000(B)" at the address "12D7(H)" is stored in the A register.
At step S1034, "F0BE (H)" (address of stop pattern data (eighth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC8)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00001000(B)" and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC8) ("00000001(B)") indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (8th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC8) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "7", and the process returns to step S1033.

At the third step S1033, "00000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data).
At step S1034, "F0BD (H)" (address of stop pattern data (seventh group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000000(B)" and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC7) ("00000000(B)") indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (seventh group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "6", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the fourth step S1033, the symbol combination data "00001100(B)" of the address "12C4(H)" is stored in the A register.
At step S1034, "F0BC(H)" (address of stop symbol data (sixth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00001100(B)" and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC6) ("10000000(B)") indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (sixth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "5", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the fifth step S1033, the symbol combination data "00001101 (B)" at the address "12BA (H)" is stored in the A register.
At step S1034, "F0BB(H)" (address of stop pattern data (fifth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00001101 (B)" and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC5) ("00000000 (B)") indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (fifth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "4" and the process returns to step S1033.

At the sixth step S1033, "00000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data).
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000000(B)" and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC4) ("00000000(B)") indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (fourth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC4) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "3", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the seventh step S1033, the symbol combination data "10100010(B)" at the address "12AB(H)" is stored in the A register.
At step S1034, "F0B9 (H)" (address of stop symbol data (third group) (_WK_STOP_PIC3)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "10100010(B)" and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC3) ("00000010(B)") indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (third group) (_WK_STOP_PIC3) becomes "00000010 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "2", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the eighth step S1033, "00000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data).
In step S1034, "F0B8(H)" (address of stop pattern data (second group) (_WK_STOP_PIC2)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000000(B)" and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC2) ("00000000(B)") indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (second group) (_WK_STOP_PIC2) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "1", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the ninth step S1033, "00000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data).
At step S1034, "F0B7 (H)" (address of stop pattern data (first group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000000 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC1) ("00000000 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. ) (_WK_STOP_PIC1) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "0", and it is determined as "Yes", so the stop symbol set ends.

By the above processing, the stop symbol data when the right stop switch 42 is operated to stop is as follows.
Stop pattern data (first group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1): "00000000 (B)"
Stop pattern data (second group) (_WK_STOP_PIC2): "00000000 (B)"
Stop pattern data (third group) (_WK_STOP_PIC3): "00000010 (B)"
Stop pattern data (fourth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC4): "00000000 (B)"
Stop pattern data (5th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5): "00000000 (B)"
Stop pattern data (6th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6): "00000000 (B)"
Stop pattern data (7th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7): "00000000 (B)"
Stop pattern data (8th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC8): "00000000 (B)"
Stop pattern data (9th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9): "00000000 (B)"
From the above, when the left reel 31 stops, "Replay" stops on the effective line, when the middle reel 31 stops, "Blue BAR" stops on the effective line, and when the right reel 31 stops, "Replay" stops on the effective line. When Bell A" stops, it can be seen that the symbol combination corresponding to replay 01 stops on the active line.

Next, before explaining "4. Winning a small winning combination (when the pressing order is correct when the bell is won in the order of pressing the bell)", the reel stop control when the bell in the order of pressing is won will be described.
Here, as an example, a case where the winning number "10" is determined as a result of the combination lottery will be described.
In the 23rd embodiment cited in the 25th embodiment, when the winning order bell (winning numbers "10" to "21") is won, a small winning combination is won with "PB = 1", and no loss occurs. is set to
In general, the following method can be used for the stop control of the reels 31 when a plurality of small wins with different numbers of payouts, such as the winning number "10", are repeatedly won.
As a first priority, when all the symbols (of the relevant reel 31) constituting the winning symbol combination can be stopped on the activated line, the reel 31 is stopped at that position.

Next, when all of the symbols that make up the winning symbol combination cannot be stopped on the active line (when the first priority cannot be adopted), the second priority is "number priority" or " The reel 31 is controlled to be stopped by either of "number priority".
Here, "preferred number" means to preferentially stop (pull in) the symbols of the relevant reel 31 constituting the symbol combination with the largest number of payouts among the symbol combinations of multiple wins. Say. Therefore, when the winning number "10" is won, the small combination 01 corresponds to the symbol combination with the largest number of payouts (15 symbols).
On the other hand, "number priority" means that the symbols of the relevant reel 31 are stopped on the activated line so that the number of symbol combinations that can be stopped on the activated line is the largest.
In this embodiment, since the number of effective lines is one, it is not possible to stop symbol combinations corresponding to all the winning combinations on the effective line (first priority). 31 is controlled to stop.
When the pressing order bell is won, the reels 31 are controlled to be stopped with priority given to the number of balls when the pressing order is correct, and the reels 31 are controlled to be stopped with priority given to the number when the pressing order is incorrect.

In a game (during a 1BB game) when the minor combination A1 condition device is activated, when the left first stop, the pressing order is correct at this time, so "Watermelon" is stopped on the effective line (upper row). As shown in FIG. 114, "Watermelon" on the left reel 31 is arranged with 4 symbols at intervals of 5 symbols (hereinafter referred to as "PB=1" arrangement). Even if it is, "PB = 1" can stop "Watermelon" in the upper stage.

Next, when it is the middle second stop, since the pressing order is correct at this point, "cherry" is stopped on the effective line (middle row). As shown in FIG. 114, "Cherry" on the middle reel 31 is arranged at "PB=1". can be stopped at
Next, when it is the third stop on the right side, the pressing order is correct, so "Bell A" is stopped on the effective line (lower line). As shown in FIG. 114, "Bell A" on the right reel 31 is arranged "PB=1". can be stopped at the bottom.

On the other hand, when the left first stop is followed by the right second stop, the pressing order is incorrect at this point, so the symbol on the left reel 31 is "watermelon" and it is included in the minor combination A1 condition device. Any one of the winning combinations (excluding the small combination 01) is stopped on the activated line.
As shown in FIG. 124, the winning combination included in the small combination A1 conditional device (excluding the small combination 01) is
Small role 13: "Red 7" - "Bell A" - "Bell A / Bell B"
Small role 14: "Replay" - "Bell A" - "Bell A / Bell B"
Small role 15: "Black BAR" - "Bell A" - "Bell B"
Small role 16: "Replay" - "Blue BAR / Black BAR / Red 7 / Special map" - "Blue BAR"
Small role 17: "Watermelon" - "Red 7 / Replay" - "Replay"
is.

Therefore, the small winning combination 17 whose symbol on the left reel 31 is "watermelon" is stopped.
As shown in FIG. 114, "Replay" on the right reel 31 is arranged at "PB=1". can be stopped at
Furthermore, at the middle third stop, "red 7/replay" is stopped on the effective line (middle row). As shown in FIG. 114, the "replay" of the middle reel 31 is arranged at "PB=1". Since it can be stopped at any time, it is possible to stipulate that "replay" is stopped at the active line. Therefore, the small winning combination 17 can be awarded. Of course, when the middle stop switch 42 is operated at a timing at which "Red 7" can be stopped on the effective line, "Red 7" may be stopped on the effective line.

On the other hand, in a game (during a 1BB game) when the small combination A1 condition device is activated, when the middle first stop is made, the pressing order is incorrect at this point. 13 to stop one of the symbols related to the small combination 17. In this case, "Bell A" is stopped on the effective line by execution of number priority. Since "Bell A" on the middle reel 31 is arranged at "PB=1", "Bell A" can be stopped at the middle stage with "PB=1" even if the middle stop switch 42 is operated at any timing. can.
Next, when it is the second stop on the left, one each of "red 7", "replay" and "black BAR" are provided, so that any one of them can be determined without any superiority. Therefore, the "replay" arranged in "PB=1" is stopped on the effective line (upper line).
Next, in the right third stop, "Bell A/Bell B" is stopped on the valid line (lower line). As for the right reel 31, both "Bell A" and "Bell B" have the "PB=1" arrangement, so either one may be stopped.

On the other hand, after the middle first stop, when it is the right second stop, "Bell B" is stopped at the lower stage according to the number priority. As described above, "Bell B" on the right reel 31 has the "PB=1" arrangement.
Furthermore, at the third stop on the left, either "red 7", "replay" or "black BAR" is stopped. For example, it may be determined to stop the "replay" with the "PB=1" arrangement. When the left stop switch 42 is operated at a timing when "red 7" or "black BAR" can be stopped on the effective line, "red 7" or "black BAR" may be stopped on the effective line, respectively. Of course.

In addition, in a game (during a 1BB game) when the minor combination A1 condition device is activated, when the first stop is on the right, the pressing order is incorrect at this point, so the effective line (lower row) has 13 to 13 small combinations. Any symbol related to the small combination 17 is stopped. In this case, "Bell B" is stopped on the effective line by execution of number priority.
Next, when it is the second stop on the left, either "red 7", "replay" or "black BAR" is stopped. In this case, similarly to the above, it may be determined that the "replay" arranged in "PB=1" is stopped on the active line (upper line).
Then, during the middle and third stop, "Bell A" is stopped on the effective line (middle line).
On the other hand, after the first stop on the right, when it is the second stop in the middle, "Bell A" is stopped on the effective line (middle).
Next, at the third stop on the left, either "red 7", "replay" or "black BAR" is stopped. In this case, similarly to the above, it may be determined that the "replay" arranged in "PB=1" is stopped on the active line (upper line).

As described above, when the small combination A1 condition device is activated during 1BB game,
Push order 123: Small role 01 prize (15 pieces)
Push order 132: Small role 17 prize (3 pieces)
Push order 213: Small role 14 prize (3 pieces)
Push order 231: Small role 14 prize (3 pieces)
Push order 312: Small role 14 prize (3 pieces)
Push order 321: Small role 14 prize (3 pieces)
becomes.

In addition, when the winning number "10" is won during the normal game (during the non-special game), since there is no correct pressing order, the reels 31 are controlled to be stopped according to the number priority.
For example, when the winning number "10" is won during the normal game and the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order "123", the "replay" is stopped on the effective line (upper row) due to the number priority at the first stop on the left. Let
Next, at the middle second stop, either "bell A" or "blue BAR/black BAR/red 7/special map top" is stopped. Here, if the "blue BAR/black BAR/red 7/special figure top" relating to the small winning combination 16 is stopped on the effective line, the "blue BAR" becomes "PB≠1" when the right reel 31 is stopped. Therefore, it may not be possible to stop on the effective line. Therefore, during the middle second stop, "Bell A" is stopped on the effective line (middle line).
Next, at the right third stop, "Bell A/Bell B" is stopped on the effective line (lower line). As a result, the small winning combination 14 is won.

4. When winning a small role (when the pressing order is correct when winning the pressing order bell)
Next, the updating of the stop symbol data (_WK_STOP_PIC) at the time of stop operation of each stop switch 42 when a small combination is won will be described.
In this example, in FIG. 124, in the game in which the winning number "10" is won during the 1BB game and the small combination A1 condition device is activated, the stop switch is operated in the correct order of pressing "123", and the 15-piece combination. It is assumed that the small winning combination 01 wins.
Further, the left stop switch 42 is operated while the symbol of symbol number "8" is passing through the middle stage of the left reel 31, and then the symbol of symbol number "8" is passing through the middle stage of the middle reel 31. When the middle stop switch 42 is operated, and then the right stop switch 42 is operated while the symbol number "2" is passing through the middle row of the right reel 31,
Picture control number when the left reel 31 stops (_BF_PICTURE): 9 (Bell A)
Picture control number when middle reel 31 stops (_BF_PICTURE): 10 (Bell A)
Picture control number when the right reel 31 stops (_BF_PICTURE): 4 (Bell A)
shall stop respectively.
In this case, the symbol combination on the activated line is "Watermelon (No. 11)"-"Cherry (No. 11)"-"Bell A (No. 4)".
Also, the initial value of the stop design data (_WK_STOP_PIC) is
Stop pattern data (first group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1): "11111111 (B)"
Stop pattern data (second group) (_WK_STOP_PIC2): "11111111 (B)"
Stop pattern data (third group) (_WK_STOP_PIC3): "11111111 (B)"
Stop pattern data (fourth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC4): "00001111 (B)"
Stop pattern data (5th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5): "11111111 (B)"
Stop pattern data (6th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6): "11111111 (B)"
Stop pattern data (7th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7): "11111111 (B)"
Stop pattern data (8th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC8): "11111111 (B)"
Stop pattern data (9th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9): "00000011 (B)"
is.

4-1. When the Left Stop Switch 42 is Operated to Stop When the left stop switch 42 is operated to stop, the process proceeds as follows.
In FIG. 195, in step S1031, "9 (D)" is stored in the A register value (symbol control number).
At step S1032, "9" is set in the B register (symbol group number).
At the first step S1033, "00000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data).
At step S1034, "F0BF (H)" (address of stop symbol data (9th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000000 (B)" and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC9) ("00000011 (B)") indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (9th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "8" and the process returns to step S1033.

In the second step S1033, the symbol combination data "00011010 (B)" at the address "1234 (H)" is stored in the A register.
At step S1034, "F0BE(H)" (address of stop pattern data (eighth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC8)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00011010(B)" and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC8) ("11111111(B)") indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (8th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC8) becomes "00011010 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "7", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the third step S1033, the symbol combination data "00000011 (B)" at the address "122F (H)" is stored in the A register.
At step S1034, "F0BD (H)" (address of stop pattern data (seventh group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000011 (B)" and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC7) ("11111111 (B)") indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (seventh group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7) becomes "00000011 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "6" and the process returns to step S1033.

In the fourth step S1033, the symbol combination data "00000010 (B)" at the address "122A (H)" is stored in the A register.
At step S1034, "F0BC(H)" (address of stop symbol data (sixth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000010 (B)" and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC6) indicated by the HL register value (initial value is "11111111 (B)"). As a result, the stop symbol data (sixth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6) becomes "00000010 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "5", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the fifth step S1033, the symbol combination data "11001011 (B)" at the address 1223 (H)" is stored in the A register.
At step S1034, "F0BB(H)" (address of stop pattern data (fifth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "11001011 (B)" and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC5) indicated by the HL register value (initial value is "11111111 (B)"). As a result, the stop symbol data (fifth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5) becomes "11001011 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "4" and the process returns to step S1033.

At the sixth step S1033, "00000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data).
At step S1034, "F0BA(H)" (address of stop symbol data (fourth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC4)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000000 (B)" and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC4) (00001111 (B)) indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (fourth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC4) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "3", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the seventh step S1033, the symbol combination data "01000000 (B)" at the address "1219 (H)" is stored in the A register.
At step S1034, "F0B9 (H)" (address of stop symbol data (third group) (_WK_STOP_PIC3)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "01000000 (B)" and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC3) ("11111111 (B)") indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (third group) (_WK_STOP_PIC3) becomes "01000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "2", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the eighth step S1033, "00000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data).
At step S1034, "F0B8(H)" (address of stop pattern data (second group) (_WK_STOP_PIC2)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000000 (B)" and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC2) ("11111111 (B)") indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (second group) (_WK_STOP_PIC2) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "1", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the ninth step S1033, "00000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data).
At step S1034, "F0B7(H)" (address of stop pattern data (first group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000000 (B)" and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC1) ("11111111 (B)") indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (first group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "0", and it is determined as "Yes", so the stop symbol set ends.

By the above processing, the stop symbol data at the time of the stop operation of the left stop switch 42 is as follows.
Stop pattern data (first group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1): "00000000 (B)"
Stop pattern data (second group) (_WK_STOP_PIC2): "00000000 (B)"
Stop pattern data (third group) (_WK_STOP_PIC3): "01000000 (B)"
Stop pattern data (fourth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC4): "00000000 (B)"
Stop pattern data (5th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5): "11001011 (B)"
Stop pattern data (6th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6): "00000010 (B)"
Stop pattern data (7th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7): "00000011 (B)"
Stop pattern data (8th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC8): "00011010 (B)"
Stop pattern data (9th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9): "00000000 (B)"

4-2. When the middle stop switch 42 is operated to stop When the middle stop switch 42 is operated to stop, as described above,
Picture control number (_BF_PICTURE): 10 (Bell A)
Symbols that stop on the active line: "Cherry (No. 11)"
shall be
In this case, when the middle stop switch 42 is operated to stop, the processing proceeds as follows.
In FIG. 195, in step S1031, "10 (D)" is stored in the A register value (symbol control number).
At step S1032, "9" is set in the B register (symbol group number).
In the first step S1033, the symbol combination data "00000001 (B)" at the address "128E (H)" is stored in the A register.
At step S1034, "F0BF (H)" (address of stop symbol data (9th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000001(B)" and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC9) ("00000000(B)") indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (9th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "8", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the second step S1033, the symbol combination data "00110000(B)" at the address "1289(H)" is stored in the A register.
At step S1034, "F0BE(H)" (address of stop pattern data (eighth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC8)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00110000(B)" and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC8) ("00011010(B)") indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (8th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC8) becomes "00010000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "7", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the third step S1033, the symbol combination data "00000010(B)" at the address "127F(H)" is stored in the A register.
At step S1034, "F0BD (H)" (address of stop pattern data (seventh group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000010(B)" and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC7) ("00000011(B)") indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (seventh group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7) becomes "00000010 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "6" and the process returns to step S1033.

In the fourth step S1033, "00000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data).
At step S1034, "F0BC(H)" (address of stop symbol data (sixth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000000(B)" and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC6) ("00000010(B)") indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (sixth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "5", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the fifth step S1033, the symbol combination data "01000001 (B)" at the address "125E (H)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "01000001 (B)" and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC5) ("11001011 (B)") indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (fifth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5) becomes "01000001 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "4" and the process returns to step S1033.

In the sixth step S1033, the symbol combination data "00000110 (B)" at the address "1259 (H)" is stored in the A register.
At step S1034, "F0BA(H)" (address of stop symbol data (fourth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC4)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000110(B)" and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC4) ("00000000(B)") indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (fourth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC4) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "3", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the seventh step S1033, the symbol combination data "00011000 (B)" at the address "1253 (H)" is stored in the A register.
At step S1034, "F0B9 (H)" (address of stop symbol data (third group) (_WK_STOP_PIC3)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00011000(B)" and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC3) ("01000000(B)") indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (third group) (_WK_STOP_PIC3) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "2", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the eighth step S1033, "00000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data).
In step S1034, "F0B8(H)" (address of stop pattern data (second group) (_WK_STOP_PIC2)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000000(B)" and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC2) ("00000000(B)") indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (second group) (_WK_STOP_PIC2) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "1", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the ninth step S1033, "00000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data).
At step S1034, "F0B7(H)" (address of stop pattern data (first group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000000(B)" and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC1) ("00000000(B)") indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (first group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "0", and it is determined as "Yes", so the stop symbol set is terminated.

By the above processing, the stop symbol data at the time of stop operation of the middle stop switch 42 is as follows.
Stop pattern data (first group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1): "00000000 (B)"
Stop pattern data (second group) (_WK_STOP_PIC2): "00000000 (B)"
Stop pattern data (third group) (_WK_STOP_PIC3): "00000000 (B)"
Stop pattern data (fourth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC4): "00000000 (B)"
Stop pattern data (5th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5): "01000001 (B)"
Stop pattern data (6th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6): "00000000 (B)"
Stop pattern data (7th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7): "00000010 (B)"
Stop pattern data (8th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC8): "00010000 (B)"
Stop pattern data (9th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9): "00000000 (B)"
Therefore, at the time of the second stop operation, the possible wins are the small winning combination 01, the small winning combination 07, the small winning combination 18, and the small winning combination 29.

4-3. When the right stop switch 42 is operated to stop When the right stop switch 42 is operated to stop, as described above,
Picture control number (_BF_PICTURE): 4 (Bell A)
Symbols that stop on the active line: "Bell A (No. 4)"
shall be
In this case, when the right stop switch 42 is operated to stop, the processing proceeds as follows.
In FIG. 195, in step S1031, "4" is stored in the A register value (symbol control number).
At step S1032, "9" is set in the B register (symbol group number).
In the first step S1033, the symbol combination data "00000010(B)" at the address "12DE(H)" is stored in the A register.
At step S1034, "F0BF (H)" (address of stop symbol data (9th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000010(B)" and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC9) ("00000000(B)") indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (9th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "8", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the second step S1033, the symbol combination data "00001000(B)" at the address "12D7(H)" is stored in the A register.
At step S1034, "F0BE(H)" (address of stop pattern data (eighth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC8)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00001000(B)" and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC8) ("00010000(B)") indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (8th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC8) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "7", and the process returns to step S1033.

At the third step S1033, "00000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data).
At step S1034, "F0BD (H)" (address of stop pattern data (seventh group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000000(B)" and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC7) ("00000010(B)") indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (seventh group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "6", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the fourth step S1033, the symbol combination data "00001100(B)" of the address "12C4(H)" is stored in the A register.
At step S1034, "F0BC(H)" (address of stop symbol data (sixth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00001100(B)" and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC6) ("00000000(B)") indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (sixth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "5", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the fifth step S1033, the symbol combination data "00001101 (B)" at the address "12BA (H)" is stored in the A register.
At step S1034, "F0BB(H)" (address of stop pattern data (fifth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00001101(B)" and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC5) ("01000001(B)") indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (fifth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5) becomes "00000001 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "4", and the process returns to step S1033.

At the sixth step S1033, "00000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data).
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000000(B)" and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC4) ("00000000(B)") indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (fourth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC4) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "3", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the seventh step S1033, the symbol combination data "10100010(B)" of the address "12AB(H)" is stored in the A register.
At step S1034, "F0B9 (H)" (address of stop symbol data (third group) (_WK_STOP_PIC3)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "10100010(B)" and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC3) ("00000000(B)") indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (third group) (_WK_STOP_PIC3) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "2", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the eighth step S1033, "00000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data).
At step S1034, "F0B8(H)" (address of stop pattern data (second group) (_WK_STOP_PIC2)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000000(B)" and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC2) ("00000000(B)") indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (second group) (_WK_STOP_PIC2) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "1", and the process returns to step S1033.

At the ninth step S1033, "00000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data).
At step S1034, "F0B7(H)" (address of stop pattern data (first group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, the AND operation of the A register value "00000000 (B)" and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC1) ("00000000 (B)") indicated by the HL register value is performed. ) (_WK_STOP_PIC1) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "0", and it is determined as "Yes", so the stop symbol set is terminated.

By the above processing, the stop symbol data when the right stop switch 42 is operated to stop is as follows.
Stop pattern data (first group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1): "00000000 (B)"
Stop pattern data (second group) (_WK_STOP_PIC2): "00000000 (B)"
Stop pattern data (third group) (_WK_STOP_PIC3): "00000000 (B)"
Stop pattern data (fourth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC4): "00000000 (B)"
Stop pattern data (5th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5): "00000001 (B)"
Stop pattern data (6th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6): "00000000 (B)"
Stop pattern data (7th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7): "00000000 (B)"
Stop pattern data (8th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC8): "00000000 (B)"
Stop pattern data (9th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9): "00000000 (B)"
From the above, when the left reel 31 stops, "watermelon" stops on the effective line, when the middle reel 31 stops, "cherry" stops on the effective line, and when the right reel 31 stops, "bell" stops on the effective line. It can be seen that when "A" stops, the symbol combination corresponding to the small win 01 stops on the active line.

5. When winning a small role (when pushing order is incorrect when winning the pushing order bell)
In this example, in FIG. 124, the winning number is determined to be "10" during the general game of the 1BB game, and the stop switch is operated in the incorrect answer pressing order "321" in the game in which the minor combination A1 condition device is activated. As in the example, it is assumed that the symbol combination "Replay"-"Bell A"-"Bell B" of the small combination 14, which is a 3-card combination, wins.
Further, when the symbol with the symbol number "1" is passing through the middle stage of the left reel 31, the left stop switch 42 is operated, and when the symbol with the symbol number "7" is passing through the middle stage of the middle reel 31. When the middle stop switch 42 is operated and the right stop switch 42 is operated while the symbol number "19" is passing through the middle row of the right reel 31 (the pressing order is right → middle → left),
Picture control number when the left reel 31 stops (_BF_PICTURE): 3 (black BAR)
Picture control number when middle reel 31 stops (_BF_PICTURE): 9 (replay)
Picture control number when the right reel 31 stops (_BF_PICTURE): 0 (Bell B)
shall stop respectively.
In this case, the symbol combination on the activated line is "Replay (No. 5)" - "Bell A (No. 10)" - "Bell B (No. 0)".
Also, the initial value of the stop design data (_WK_STOP_PIC) is
Stop pattern data (first group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1): "11111111 (B)"
Stop pattern data (second group) (_WK_STOP_PIC2): "11111111 (B)"
Stop pattern data (third group) (_WK_STOP_PIC3): "11111111 (B)"
Stop pattern data (fourth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC4): "00001111 (B)"
Stop pattern data (5th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5): "11111111 (B)"
Stop pattern data (6th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6): "11111111 (B)"
Stop pattern data (7th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7): "11111111 (B)"
Stop pattern data (8th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC8): "11111111 (B)"
Stop pattern data (9th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9): "00000011 (B)"
is.

5-1. When the right stop switch 42 is operated to stop When the right stop switch 42 is operated to stop, as described above,
Picture control number (_BF_PICTURE): 0 (Bell B)
Symbols that stop on the active line: "Bell B (No. 0)"
shall be
In this case, when the right stop switch 42 is operated to stop, the processing proceeds as follows.
In FIG. 195, in step S1031, "0" is stored in the A register value (symbol control number).
At step S1032, "9" is set in the B register (symbol group number).
At the first step S1033, "00000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data).
At step S1034, "F0BF (H)" (address of stop symbol data (9th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000000 (B)" and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC9) ("00000011 (B)") indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (9th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "8" and the process returns to step S1033.

At the second step S1033, "00000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data).
At step S1034, "F0BE(H)" (address of stop pattern data (eighth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC8)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000000 (B)" and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC8) ("11111111 (B)") indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (8th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC8) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "7", and the process returns to step S1033.

At the third step S1033, "00000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data).
At step S1034, "F0BD (H)" (address of stop pattern data (seventh group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000000 (B)" and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC7) ("11111111 (B)") indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (seventh group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "6" and the process returns to step S1033.

In the fourth step S1033, the symbol combination data "01110011 (B)" at the address "12C5 (H)" is stored in the A register.
At step S1034, "F0BC(H)" (address of stop symbol data (sixth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "0" and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC6) ("11111111(B)") indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (sixth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6) becomes "01110011 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "5", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the fifth step S1033, the symbol combination data "01000000(B)" at the address "12BB(H)" is stored in the A register.
At step S1034, "F0BB(H)" (address of stop pattern data (fifth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "01000000 (B)" and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC5) ("11111111 (B)") indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (fifth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5) becomes "01000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "4" and the process returns to step S1033.

In the sixth step S1033, the symbol combination data "00000100(B)" at the address "12B3(H)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000100 (B)" and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC4) ("0001111 (B)") indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (fourth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC4) becomes "00000100 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "3", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the seventh step S1033, the symbol combination data "00011000(B)" of the address "12AC(H)" is stored in the A register.
At step S1034, "F0B9 (H)" (address of stop symbol data (third group) (_WK_STOP_PIC3)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00011000 (B)" and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC3) ("11111111 (B)") indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (third group) (_WK_STOP_PIC3) becomes "00011000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "2", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the eighth step S1033, "00000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data).
In step S1034, "F0B8(H)" (address of stop pattern data (second group) (_WK_STOP_PIC2)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000000 (B)" and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC2) ("11111111 (B)") indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (second group) (_WK_STOP_PIC2) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "1", and the process returns to step S1033.

At the ninth step S1033, "00000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data).
At step S1034, "F0B7(H)" (address of stop pattern data (first group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, the AND operation of the A register value "00000000 (B)" and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC1) ("11111111 (B)") indicated by the HL register value is performed. ) (_WK_STOP_PIC1) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "0", and it is determined as "Yes", so the stop symbol set is terminated.

By the above processing, the stop symbol data when the right stop switch 42 is operated to stop is as follows.
Stop pattern data (first group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1): "00000000 (B)"
Stop pattern data (second group) (_WK_STOP_PIC2): "00000000 (B)"
Stop pattern data (third group) (_WK_STOP_PIC3): "00011000 (B)"
Stop pattern data (fourth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC4): "00000100 (B)"
Stop pattern data (5th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5): "01000000 (B)"
Stop pattern data (6th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6): "01110011 (B)"
Stop pattern data (7th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7): "00000000 (B)"
Stop pattern data (8th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC8): "00000000 (B)"
Stop pattern data (9th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9): "00000000 (B)"

5-2. When the middle stop switch 42 is operated to stop When the middle reel 31 is stopped, as described above,
Picture control number (_BF_PICTURE): 9 (replay)
Symbols that stop on the active line: "Bell A (No. 10)"
shall be
In this case, when the middle stop switch 42 is operated to stop, the processing proceeds as follows.
In FIG. 195, in step S1031, "8(D)" is stored in the A register value (symbol control number).
At step S1032, "9" is set in the B register (symbol group number).
In the first step S1033, the symbol combination data "00000010 (B)" at the address "128D (H)" is stored in the A register.
At step S1034, "F0BF (H)" (address of stop symbol data (9th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000010(B)" and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC9) ("00000000(B)") indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (9th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "8" and the process returns to step S1033.

In the second step S1033, the symbol combination data "11000000 (B)" of the address "1286 (H)" is stored in the A register.
At step S1034, "F0BE(H)" (address of stop pattern data (eighth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC8)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "11000000(B)" and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC8) ("00000000(B)") indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (8th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC8) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "7", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the third step S1033, the symbol combination data "01100100(B)" at the address "127D(H)" is stored in the A register.
At step S1034, "F0BD (H)" (address of stop pattern data (seventh group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "01100100(B)" and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC7) ("00000000(B)") indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (seventh group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "6", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the fourth step S1033, the symbol combination data "01111011 (B)" at the address "1275 (H)" is stored in the A register.
At step S1034, "F0BC(H)" (address of stop symbol data (sixth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "01111011(B)" and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC6) ("01110011(B)") indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (sixth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6) becomes "01110011 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "5", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the fifth step S1033, the symbol combination data "10101110(B)" of the address "125D(H)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "10101110 (B)" and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC5) ("01000000 (B)") indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (fifth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "4" and the process returns to step S1033.

In the sixth step S1033, "00000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data).
At step S1034, "F0BA(H)" (address of stop symbol data (fourth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC4)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000000(B)" and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC4) ("00000100(B)") indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (fourth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC4) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "3", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the seventh step S1033, "00000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data).
At step S1034, "F0B9 (H)" (address of stop symbol data (third group) (_WK_STOP_PIC3)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000000(B)" and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC3) ("00011000(B)") indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (third group) (_WK_STOP_PIC3) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "2", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the eighth step S1033, "00000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data).
In step S1034, "F0B8(H)" (address of stop pattern data (second group) (_WK_STOP_PIC2)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000000(B)" and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC2) ("00000000(B)") indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (second group) (_WK_STOP_PIC2) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "1", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the ninth step S1033, "00000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data).
At step S1034, "F0B7 (H)" (address of stop pattern data (first group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000000(B)" and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC1) ("00000000(B)") indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (first group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "0", and it is determined as "Yes", so the stop symbol set ends.

By the above processing, the stop symbol data at the time of stop operation of the middle stop switch 42 is as follows.
Stop pattern data (first group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1): "00000000 (B)"
Stop pattern data (second group) (_WK_STOP_PIC2): "00000000 (B)"
Stop pattern data (third group) (_WK_STOP_PIC3): "00000000 (B)"
Stop pattern data (fourth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC4): "00000000 (B)"
Stop pattern data (5th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5): "00000000 (B)"
Stop pattern data (6th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6): "01110011 (B)"
Stop pattern data (7th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7): "00000000 (B)"
Stop pattern data (8th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC8): "00000000 (B)"
Stop pattern data (9th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9): "00000000 (B)"

5-3. When the left stop switch 42 is operated to stop When the left stop switch 42 is operated to stop, as described above,
Picture control number (_BF_PICTURE): 3 (black BAR)
Symbols that stop on the active line: "Replay (No. 5)"
shall be
In this case, when the left stop switch 42 is operated to stop, the processing proceeds as follows.
In FIG. 195, at step S1031, "3(D)" is stored in the A register value (symbol control number).
At step S1032, "9" is set in the B register (symbol group number).
At step S1033 (first time), "00000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data).
At step S1034, "F0BF (H)" (address of stop symbol data (9th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000000(B)" and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC9) ("00000000(B)") indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (9th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "8" and the process returns to step S1033.

In the second step S1033, the symbol combination data "11000001 (B)" at the address "1233 (H)" is stored in the A register.
At step S1034, "F0BE (H)" (address of stop pattern data (eighth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC8)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "11000001 (B)" and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC8) ("00000000 (B)") indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (8th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC8) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "7", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the third step S1033, the symbol combination data "11001100(B)" of the address "122E(H)" is stored in the A register.
At step S1034, "F0BD (H)" (address of stop symbol data (seventh group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "11001100 (B)" and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC7) ("00000000 (B)") indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (seventh group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "6", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the fourth step S1033, the symbol combination data "10100000 (B)" at the address "1228 (H)" is stored in the A register.
At step S1034, "F0BC(H)" (address of stop symbol data (sixth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "10100000 (B)" and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC6) ("01110011 (B)") indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (sixth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6) becomes "00100000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "5", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the fifth step S1033, "00000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data).
At step S1034, "F0BB(H)" (address of stop pattern data (fifth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000000(B)" and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC5) ("00000000(B)") indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (fifth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "4" and the process returns to step S1033.

In the sixth step S1033, the symbol combination data "00000100(B)" at the address "121D(H)" is stored in the A register.
At step S1034, "F0BA(H)" (address of stop symbol data (fourth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC4)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000100(B)" and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC4) ("00000000(B)") indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (fourth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC4) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "3", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the seventh step S1033, the symbol combination data "10000110 (B)" at the address "1217 (H)" is stored in the A register.
At step S1034, "F0B9 (H)" (address of stop symbol data (third group) (_WK_STOP_PIC3)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "10000110(B)" and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC3) ("00000000(B)") indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (third group) (_WK_STOP_PIC3) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "2", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the eighth step S1033, "00000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data).
At step S1034, "F0B8(H)" (address of stop pattern data (second group) (_WK_STOP_PIC2)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000000(B)" and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC2) ("00000000(B)") indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (second group) (_WK_STOP_PIC2) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "1", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the ninth step S1033, "00000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data).
At step S1034, "F0B7 (H)" (address of stop pattern data (first group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000000(B)" and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC1) ("00000000(B)") indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (first group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "0", and it is determined as "Yes", so the stop symbol set ends.

By the above processing, the stop symbol data at the time of the stop operation of the left stop switch 42 is as follows.
Stop pattern data (first group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1): "00000000 (B)"
Stop pattern data (second group) (_WK_STOP_PIC2): "00000000 (B)"
Stop pattern data (third group) (_WK_STOP_PIC3): "00000000 (B)"
Stop pattern data (fourth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC4): "00000000 (B)"
Stop pattern data (5th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5): "00000000 (B)"
Stop pattern data (sixth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6): "00100000 (B)"
Stop pattern data (7th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7): "00000000 (B)"
Stop pattern data (8th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC8): "00000000 (B)"
Stop pattern data (9th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9): "00000000 (B)"
Therefore, the data indicates that the minor combination 14 has won.

By determining the stop pattern data as described above, even if the power is cut off, the game can be correctly restarted using the already stored stop pattern data after recovery from the power cut.
For example, as shown in FIG. 194, when it is decided to determine the stop position ("Yes" in step S1017), the stop position is determined and the stop symbol data is updated (step S1035 in FIG. 195). ) (stop symbol set in step S1024 in FIG. 194) is completed until the voltage (for example, 9.2 V. Same below. A voltage of 12 V is applied.), the interrupt processing is not executed (by the interrupt wait processing). The design data is updated. Therefore, even if the power-off process is executed after the process and the reel 31 does not stop at the determined stop position, the stop symbol data has already been updated. Normal payout processing becomes executable.

In addition, even if a plurality of stop switches 42 are operated simultaneously under the condition that all the reels 31 are rotating at a constant speed, only one stop switch 42 is operated. When it is decided to determine the position (when it becomes "Yes" in step S1017 in FIG. 194), the stop position is determined, and the processing including updating the stop symbol data (step S1035 in FIG. 195) (FIG. 194 Stop symbol set in step S1024 of step S1024) is completed. is only one, it is possible to avoid a situation in which a plurality of reels 31 do not stop at the determined stop positions.

Furthermore, for example, under the condition that all the reels 31 are rotating at a constant speed, even if the power is cut off after the stop switch 42 corresponding to the left reel 31 is operated, and the power cutoff process is executed. , Since the stop symbol data is updated, after the power is restored, the stop symbol data is generated based on the stop operation of the middle reel 31 and the stop operation of the right reel 31 using the stop symbol data before the power failure. update can be resumed (game can be resumed).

Here, generally, data that can be held in one register is 1-byte data, and there are 7 types of general-purpose registers that can be used in the 1-chip microprocessor (Z80) of the gaming machine (main control board 50). Thus, in order to hold the symbol combination data having the number of stop symbol data exceeding the types of general-purpose registers (nine in this embodiment), it is necessary to store the stop symbol data in the RWM 53. be.
When the stop design data is stored in the general-purpose register, power failure occurs, and when the power is restored after that, the stop design data (value stored in the general-purpose register) is cleared (set to the initial value). , for example, to "0"). Therefore, when the stop symbol data is stored in the general-purpose register, for example, after the stop switch 42 corresponding to the left reel 31 is operated, the power is cut off, and when the power cut-off process is executed, after the power is restored, , the possibility that the game cannot be restarted increases.
Further, when the stop symbol data is stored in the RWM 53, since the stop symbol data is updated for each stop operation of the stop switch 42, the RWM 53 checks whether the stop position is correct for each stop operation in the development stage. This can be confirmed by inspecting the stop symbol data.

As described above, when the symbol combination to be stopped on the activated line is specified, the number of payouts is determined based on the stop symbol data.
FIG. 200 is a flowchart showing 1-line display judgment (M_LINE_JUDGE). This process is executed before the payout process after all the reels 31 have stopped. For example, it corresponds to the process of step S291 in FIG.
Through this process, the number of payouts is determined from the stop symbol data (_WK_STOP_PIC).
In FIG. 200, in step S1101, a payout number table is set. This process is to store the head address "1400 (H)" of the payout number table (TBL_WIN_CTL) shown in FIG. 193 in the HL register.

Next, in step S1102, stop symbol data 5 ("5" means the fifth group) RWM address is set. This process is a process of storing the address "F0BB (H)" of the stop symbol data (fifth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5) in the DE register.
In the present embodiment, the stop symbol data (first group) to the stop symbol data (fourth group) do not have a combination that has a payout at the time of winning, and the stop symbol data (fifth group) to the stop symbol data (fourth group) are not present. Only in group 9) there is a combination that has a payout at the time of winning. Therefore, in order to determine whether or not any one of the stop symbol data (fifth group) to the stop symbol data (ninth group) is "1", the stop symbol data (fifth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5).

Next, the process advances to step S1103 to execute specified data acquisition (M_SELDAT_SET). This process is a process shown in FIG. 201, which will be described later, and is a process of specifying designated data corresponding to the payout number from the payout number table (TBL_WIN_CTL).
Next, the process advances to step S1104 to store the payout number data. Here, at the end of the process of step S1103, a value corresponding to the number of payouts is stored in the A register. Therefore, this process is a process of storing the A register value in the payout number data (_NB_PAY_MEDAL) at the address "F023(H)".
Next, the process advances to step S1105 to save the payout number buffer. This process is a process of storing the A register value in the payout number data buffer (_BF_PAY_MEDAL) at the address "F024(H)". Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

FIG. 201 is a flow chart showing specified data acquisition (M_SELDAT_SET) in step S1103 of FIG. FIG. 201 also shows the payout number table (TBL_WIN_CTL) shown in FIG. 193 for reference.
In FIG. 201, in step S1111, the number of inspections is set. This process is a process of storing the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value in the B register. Since the HL register value is "1400 (H)" and the data stored at the address "1400 (H)" is "6 (H)", "6 (H)" is stored in the B register. be.
When inspecting the number of payouts,
1st time: Stop pattern data (5th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5) 15 pieces role (11111111 (B))
2nd time: Stop pattern data (6th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6) 15 pieces role (00001111 (B))
3rd time: Stop pattern data (6th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6) 3 pieces (11110000 (B))
4th time: Stop pattern data (7th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7) 3 pieces role (11111111 (B))
5th time: Stop pattern data (8th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC8) 1 sheet role (11111111 (B))
6th time: Stop pattern data (9th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9) 1 piece role (00000011 (B))
The number of inspections is set to "6" because the inspection is performed up to 6 times.

In the next step S1112, the table address is updated. In this process, "1" is added to the HL register value, and the value after adding "1" is used as the HL register value. As a result, the HL register value becomes "1401 (H)".
Next, the process advances to step S1113 to acquire table data. This process is a process of storing the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value in the A register. In the first step S1113, the HL register value is "1401 (H)", so the data "0*32+15" (actually, "00001111 (B )”) in the A register.
Next, in step S1114, the A register value is divided by "32(D)". The quotient is then stored in the A register and the remainder is stored in the C register. As a result, for the first time, the A register value is "0" and the C register value is "15 (D)". This C register value corresponds to the payout number when there is a winning combination.

Next, the process advances to step S1115 to acquire RWM data. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Add the DE register value (the address value of the stop symbol data) to the A register, and use the result of the addition as the DE register value.
(2) Store the data stored at the address indicated by the DE register value in the A register.
Therefore, in the first step S1115, the DE register value is "F0BB(H)" stored in step S1102 of FIG. 200, and the A register value is "0", so the DE register value after addition is It is "F0BB(H)".
Next, if the data (stop pattern data (fifth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5)) stored at the address indicated by "F0BB(H)" is, for example, "00000001(B)", the A register value is "00000001(B )”.

Next, the process advances to step S1116 to update the table address. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Add "1" to the HL register value, and use the result after adding "1" as the HL register value. In the first step S1116, since the HL register value before this process is "1401 (H)", the HL register value becomes "1402 (H)" by adding "1".
(2) Perform AND (logical product) of the A register value and the value stored at the address indicated by the HL register value. When the result of the AND operation is "0", the zero flag becomes "1", and when it is not "0", the zero flag does not become "1".
Here, the value "@_PIC5" stored at the address "1402(H)" corresponds to a value in which all bits of the stop symbol data (fifth group) are set to "1" (see FIG. 176). Therefore, if this value and the A register value (the actual value of the stop pattern data (5th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5)) are ANDed, it is determined whether or not any combination of the 5th group has won. It becomes possible.

Next, the process advances to step S1117 to set acquired data. This process is a process of storing the C register value in the A register.
In the next step S1118, it is determined whether or not there is designated data. Here, if the zero flag is not "1" (as a result of the calculation in step S1116), it is determined that there is designated data. When it is determined that there is specified data, the processing according to this flowchart is terminated, and when it is determined that there is no specified data, the process advances to step S1119.

In step S1119, it is determined whether or not the number of inspections has ended. In this process, as a result of subtracting "1" from the B register value, if it is not "0", it is judged "No" (the number of inspections is not completed). If it is determined that the number of inspections has been completed, the process proceeds to step S1120, and if it is determined that the number of inspections has not been completed, the process returns to step S1112.
In step S1120, no acquired data is set. This process is a process of storing the B register value in the A register value. Then, the processing according to this flow chart ends.
Here, when the process proceeds to step S1120, the B register value is "0" because the number of inspections has been completed. Therefore, the A register value becomes "0". This A register value corresponds to the payout number. In this way, when a symbol combination with no payout number is stopped and displayed, it is possible to store the payout number data by using the data "0" of the number of inspections.

Next, the one-line display determination shown in FIG. 200 will be described with a specific example.
In this example, it is assumed that the small winning combination 19 has won (the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 19 is stopped).
Therefore, before 1-line display determination is executed,
Stop pattern data (5th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5): 00000000 (B)
Stop pattern data (6th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6): 00000000 (B)
Stop pattern data (7th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7): 00000100 (B)
Stop pattern data (8th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC8): 00000000 (B)
Stop pattern data (9th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9): 00000000 (B)
It has become.
Even if the symbol combination actually stopped on the active line is different from the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 19 due to malfunction of the motor 32 or power failure, the stopped symbol data (seventh group) ( _WK_STOP_PIC7) is "00000100(B)", so that the payout control corresponding to the small winning combination 19 can be executed.

In this case, "1400 (H)" is stored in the HL register value in step S1101 (set payout number table) in FIG.
In step S1102 (stop design data 5RWM address set), "F0BB (H)" is stored in the DE register value.
After proceeding to step S1103 (acquisition of specified data), the flow advances to step S1111 (set number of inspections) in FIG. 201 to store "6" in the B register value.
In the next step S1112 (table address update), the HL register value is updated to "1401 (H)".
In the next step S1113 (table data acquisition), the data "15(D)" stored at the address "1401(H)" is stored in the A register.

In the next step S1114 (division), the A register value "15(D)" is divided by "32(D)", the quotient "0" is stored in the A register, and the remainder "15(D)" is stored in the C register. memorize to
In the next step S1115 (RWM data acquisition), the A register value "0" is added to the DE register value "F0BB(H)", so the DE register value remains "F0BB(H)".
Next, the data (stop pattern data (fifth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5)) "00000000 (B)" stored at the address "F0BB (H)" is stored in the A register.

In the next step S1116 (update table address), the HL register value is updated to "1402 (H)".
Also, the AND (logical product) of the A register value "00000000 (B)" and the value "11111111 (B)" stored at the address indicated by the HL register value "1402 (H)" is performed. As a result, the zero flag becomes "1".
In step S1117 (acquisition data set), the C register value "15(D)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1118 (specified data present?), since the zero flag is "1", the determination is "No", and the process proceeds to step S1119.
In step S1119 (finishing the number of inspections?), "1" is subtracted from the B register value to update it to "5". Since the B register value is not "0", the determination is "No", and the process returns to step S1112.

In step S1112 (second time) (table address update), the HL register value is set to "1403 (H)".
In the next step S1113 (table data acquisition), the data "47 (D)" stored at the address "1403 (H)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1114 (division), the A register value "47 (D)" is divided by "32 (D)". As a result, the quotient "1(D)" is stored in the A register and the remainder "15(D)" is stored in the C register.
In step S1115 (RWM data acquisition), the A register value "1 (H)" is added to the DE register value "F0BB (H)" to set the DE register value to "F0BC (H)".
Then, the data stored in "F0BC(H)" (data "00000000(B)" of the stop symbol data (sixth group)) is stored in the A register.

In step S1116 (update table address), the HL register value is updated to "1404 (H)".
Also, the A register value "00000000 (B)" and the value "00001111 (B)" stored at the address "1404 (H)" indicated by the HL register value are ANDed (logical product). As a result, the zero flag becomes "1".
In step S1117 (acquisition data set), the C register value "15(D)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1118 (specified data present?), since the zero flag is "1", the determination is "No", and the process proceeds to step S1119.
In step S1119 (end of number of inspections?), the B register value is decremented by "1" and updated to "4". Since the B register value is not "0", the determination is "No", and the process returns to step S1112.

In step S1112 (third time) (table address update), the HL register value is updated to "1405 (H)".
In the next step S1113 (table data acquisition), the data "3(D)" stored at the address "1405(H)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1114 (division), "3(D)" is divided by "32(D)". As a result, the quotient "0" is stored in the A register and the remainder "3(D)" is stored in the C register.
In step S1115 (RWM data acquisition), the A register value "0 (H)" is added to the DE register value "F0BC (H)" to set the DE register value to "F0BC (H)".
Then, the data stored in "F0BC(H)" (data "00000000(B)" of the stop symbol data (sixth group)) is stored in the A register.

In step S1116 (update table address), the HL register value is updated to "1406 (H)".
Also, the A register value "00000000 (B)" is ANDed with the value "11110000 (B)" stored at the address "1406 (H)" indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the zero flag becomes "1".
In step S1117, the C register value "3(D)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1118, since the zero flag is "1", the determination is "No", and the process proceeds to step S1119.
In step S1119, the B register value is decremented by "1" and updated to "3". Since the B register value is not "0", the determination is "No", and the process returns to step S1112.

In step S1112 (fourth time) (table address update), the HL register value is updated to "1407 (H)".
In the next step S1113 (table data acquisition), the data "35 (D)" stored at the address "1407 (H)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1114 (division), "35(D)" is divided by "32(D)". As a result, the quotient "1" is stored in the A register and the remainder "3(D)" is stored in the C register.
In step S1115 (RWM data acquisition), the A register value "1 (H)" is added to the DE register value "F0BC (H)" to set the DE register value to "F0BD (H)".
Then, the data stored in "F0BD (H)" (data "00000100 (B)" of the stop symbol data (seventh group)) is stored in the A register.

In step S1116 (update table address), the HL register value is updated to "1408 (H)".
Also, the A register value "00000100 (B)" is ANDed with the value "11111111 (B)" stored at the address "1408 (H)" indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the zero flag becomes "0".
In step S1117, the C register value "3(D)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1118, since the zero flag is "0", it is determined that there is specified data, and the process proceeds to step S1104 in FIG. At this time, "3(D)" is stored in the A register.
At step S1104 in FIG. 200, the A register value "3(D)" is stored in the payout number data (_NB_PAY_MEDAL) at the address "F023(H)".
In the next step S1105, the A register value "3(D)" is stored in the payout number data buffer (_BF_PAY_MEDAL) at the address "F024(H)".
By the above processing, when the minor win 17 is won, the number of payouts "3 (D)" is stored in the number of payout data (_NB_PAY_MEDAL) and the number of payout data buffer (_BF_PAY_MEDAL).

As described above, first, it is determined whether or not any of the symbol combinations constituting the 15-symbol combination has been stop-displayed, and it is determined that any symbol combination constituting the 15-symbol combination is not stop-displayed. If so, then it is determined whether or not any of the symbol combinations forming the 3-symbol combination has been stop-displayed. Further, in the above example, since it is determined that the symbol combination corresponding to the small combination 19 forming the 3-piece combination has been stopped and displayed, the subsequent processing is not executed. If it is determined that any one of the combination of symbols is not stop-displayed, then it is determined whether or not any of the combination of symbols constituting the one-piece combination is stop-displayed.
On the other hand, it is determined whether or not any symbol combination constituting the 15-symbol combination has been stop-displayed, and when it is determined that any symbol combination constituting the 15-symbol combination has been stop-displayed, the 3-symbol combination is executed. It is not determined whether or not any of the constituent symbol combinations is stopped and displayed. By configuring in this way, the processing time can be shortened.

In addition, whether or not any of the symbol combinations that make up the 15-piece hand is stopped and displayed is determined by two addresses of stop symbol data (fifth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5) and stop symbol data (sixth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6). The determination is made based on the data (however, for the stop symbol data (sixth group), part of the bit data of the address). In this way, when the symbol combination data giving the same number of payouts cannot be stored in one address, by continuously arranging the addresses, for example, whether or not there is symbol combination data for paying out 15 is continuously determined. can be determined by In other words, between the stop symbol data (fifth group) and the stop symbol data (sixth group), there are addresses for storing symbol combination data constituting a 3-symbol combination and symbol combination data constituting a 1-symbol combination. is not provided.

Furthermore, at the same address, the bits for the same number of payouts are also continuous. , no bit 'Y' is placed between a plurality of bits 'X'. For example, if the bit "X" for a 15-card hand and the bit "Y" for a 3-card hand are arranged in the same address, they are arranged as "XXXXXYYY(B)" or "YYYXXXX(B)". .
By arranging the bits in this way, it is possible to prevent an error in the number of coins to be paid out in the development stage.
In addition, it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged by judging from the combination of symbols with a large number of payouts. For example, although the winning number "10" is actually determined and the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 01 is stopped and displayed, the noise causes not only the bit corresponding to the small winning combination 01, but also the small winning combination 25. Even if the corresponding bit is also set to "1", the number of payouts is judged at the time when the symbol combination corresponding to the small win 01 is judged to be stopped when judging from the combination of symbols with a large number of payouts. is finished, 15 cards corresponding to the small win 01 can be paid out.

FIG. 202 is a flow chart showing RB operation management in the twenty-fifth embodiment. This process corresponds to step S944 in FIG. 148 (23rd embodiment). As shown in FIG. 148, in the game end check process (M_GAME_CHK), when the RB operation state flag is not "0"("No" in step S943), RB operation management is executed.
In the example of FIG. 202, the number of wins during RB operation is updated based on the stop symbol data.
In FIG. 202, in step S1201, it is determined whether or not the RB is in operation. Here, it is determined whether or not the D4 bit of the operating state flag (_FL_ACTION) is "1", and if it is "1", it is determined that the RB is in operation. If it is determined that the RB is in operation, the process advances to step S1201, and if it is determined that the RB is not in operation, the processing according to this flowchart ends.
In step S1202, "1" is subtracted from the number of games played during RB operation. This process is a process of subtracting "1" from the number of games (_CT_BONUS_PLAY) when RB is activated.
In the next step S1203, it is determined whether or not the number of games played during RB operation is "0". This process determines whether or not the zero flag has become "1" in the process of step S1202, and when the zero flag is "1", it means that the number of games during the RB operation has become "0".
When the number of games played during RB operation is not "0", the process proceeds to step S1204, and when it is "0", the process proceeds to step S1211.

In the next step S1204, it is determined whether or not the stop symbol data (fifth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5) is "0". When it is "0", the process proceeds to step S1205, and when it is not "0", the process proceeds to step S1209.
In step S1205, it is determined whether or not the stop symbol data (sixth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6) is "0". When it is "0", the process proceeds to step S1206, and when it is not "0", the process proceeds to step S1209.
In the next step S1206, it is determined whether or not the stop symbol data (seventh group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7) is "0". When it is "0", the process proceeds to step S1207, and when it is not "0", the process proceeds to step S1209.
In step S1207, it is determined whether or not the stop symbol data (8th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC8) is "0". When it is "0", the process proceeds to step S1208, and when it is not "0", the process proceeds to step S1209.
Next, in step S1208, it is determined whether or not the stop symbol data (9th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9) is "0". If it is not "0", the process proceeds to step S1209, and if it is "0", the processing according to this flowchart is terminated.

In step S1209, "1" is subtracted from the number of winnings during RB operation. This process is a process of subtracting "1" from the number of wins (_CT_BONUS_WIN) during RB operation.
Next, proceeding to step S1210, it is determined whether or not the number of winnings during the RB operation has become "0". In this process, it is determined whether or not the zero flag has become "1" in the process of step S1209.
Then, when the number of wins during the RB operation is not "0", the processing according to this flowchart is terminated, and when it is "0", the process proceeds to step S1211.

When the process proceeds to step S1211, the RB operation state flag is cleared because the RB operation end condition is satisfied. This processing is processing to set the D4 bit of the operating state flag to "0". Then, the processing according to this flow chart ends.
As described above, when updating the number of wins during the RB operation, it is possible to update using the stop symbol data (fifth group) to the stop symbol data (ninth group). When any one of the stop symbol data (fifth group) to the stop symbol data (ninth group) is not "0", it means that a win with a payout (any of the small wins 01 to 34 in this embodiment) has been won. This is because it satisfies the condition for updating the number of wins during RB operation.

<26th Embodiment>
The twenty-sixth embodiment shows a modification of the twenty-fifth embodiment.
In addition, in the twenty-sixth embodiment, the symbol arrangement, the type of the winning combination, the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination, the payout number corresponding to the winning combination, and the definition data (FIGS. 176 to 179) are the same as in the twenty-fifth embodiment.
FIG. 203 is a diagram showing the configuration of the RWM 53 in the twenty-sixth embodiment. The types of RWM 53 in FIG. 203 indicate those used in the following description, and are not meant to be limited to these.
In FIG. 203, the same storage areas as in the twenty-fifth embodiment (FIGS. 173 to 175) have the same addresses. A description of the storage areas having the same addresses as in the twenty-fifth embodiment will be omitted unless particularly necessary.

Symbol array address buffers 1 to 3 (_BF_PICARG_ADR1 to 3) indicated by addresses "F0A0(H)" to "F0A5(H)" are storage areas for storing addresses for specifying symbol combination data when reels 31 are stopped. is. The symbol array address buffer 1 (_BF_PICARG_ADR1) of "F0A0(H)" and "F0A1(H)" is for the first (left) reel 31, and the symbols of "F0A2(H)" and "F0A3(H)" The array address buffer 2 (_BF_PICARG_ADR2) is for the second (middle) reel 31, and the symbol array address buffer 3 (_BF_PICARG_ADR3) for "F0A4 (H)" and "F0A5 (H)" is for the third (right) reel. It is for 31.
When the operation of the start switch 41 is accepted, the head address "1200 (H)" of the pattern control data table (TBL_PIC_DAT) (described later) is stored in the pattern arrangement address buffer.
Further, when the stop is accepted, any address of the #th reel symbol search table (TBL_PICARG_#) (described later) is stored in the symbol array address buffer.

In FIG. 204, (A) shows a symbol control data table (TBL_PIC_DAT), and (B) shows a reel symbol search table address offset table (TBL_PIC_SRCH).
The data stored in each address of the symbol control data table correspond to the initial values of the stop symbol data (first group) to the stop symbol data (ninth group) of the twenty-fifth embodiment.
The symbol groups (first to ninth groups) in the twenty-sixth embodiment are the same as in the twenty-fifth embodiment. i.e.
Group 1: RBA-RBH
Group 2: RBJ-RBP
Third group: 1BB, replay 01 to replay 07
Fourth group: Replay 08 to Replay 10 (D0 to D2), unused (D3 to D7)
Fifth group: small role 01 to small role 08
6th group: Small role 09 to small role 16
7th group: Small role 17 to small role 24
8th group: Small role 25 to small role 32
Ninth group: Small role 33 to small role 34 (D0 to D1), unused (D2 to D7)
It has become.

For example, "11111111(B)" is stored at the address "1200(H)", and this value corresponds to the initial value "11111111(B)" of the stop symbol data (first group).
Therefore, the D4 to D7 bits of the data (fourth pattern group) at address "1203 (H)" and the D2 to D7 bits of the data (ninth pattern group) at address "1208 (H)" are "0". Other bits are "1".

The reel symbol search table address offset table is a data table for specifying the top address of the #th reel symbol search table (TBL_PICARG_#).
Details will be described later, but
First reel symbol search table (TBL_PICARG_1): Address "1300 (H)" to "13B3 (H)"
Second reel pattern search table (TBL_PICARG_2): Address "13B4 (H)" to "1467 (H)"
Third reel pattern search table (TBL_PICARG_3): Address "1468 (H)" to "151B (H)"
consists of
Then, in the reel symbol search table address offset table, the address value immediately before the head address of the #th reel symbol search table (TBL_PICARG_#) is specified.

205 to 209 are diagrams showing the first reel symbol search table (TBL_PICARG_1).
210 to 214 are diagrams showing the second reel symbol search table (TBL_PICARG_2).
215 to 219 are diagrams showing the third reel symbol search table (TBL_PICARG_3).
The #-th reel symbol search table (TBL_PICARG_#) indicates, for each reel 31, which symbol number corresponds to the symbol of the #-th reel 31 with respect to the symbol number of the symbol stopped on the active line. is defined for all of the 1st to 9th groups.
The symbol combination data stored at each address of these #th reel symbol search table (TBL_PICCARG_#) are the symbol combinations stored at each address of the #th reel symbol combination table (TBL_PICCMB_#) in the twenty-fifth embodiment. Similar to data.

As for the left reel 31, when the control symbol number (BF_PICTURE) is "0", the symbol on the activated line corresponds to symbol number 2 "Cherry". Therefore, after the address "1300 (H)",
Address "1300 (H)" to "1308 (H)": No. 2 pattern "Cherry" (1st to 9th groups)
Address "1309 (H)" to "1311 (H)": No. 3 pattern "Blue BAR" (1st group to 9th group)
Address "1312 (H)" to "131A (H)": No. 4 pattern "Bell A" (1st to 9th groups)
:
Address "1399 (H)" ~ "13A1 (H)": 19th pattern "Bell A" (1st group ~ 9th group)
Address "13A2 (H)" to "13AA (H)": No. 0 pattern "Replay" (1st group to 9th group)
Address "13AB (H)" to "13B3 (H)": No. 1 pattern "Watermelon" (Group 1 to Group 9)
The first reel symbol search table is constructed in this order.

Further, nine addresses are assigned to each pattern, corresponding to the first to ninth groups, respectively. For example, in the second pattern "Cherry",
The address "1300 (H)" is the first group,
The address "1301(H)" is the second group,
:
The address "1308(H)" is assigned to the ninth group.
Therefore, in the first reel symbol search table (TBL_PICARG_1), the number of symbols "20"×the number of symbol groups "9"="180" addresses (1300(H) to 13B3(H)) are assigned. The same applies to the second reel symbol search table (TBL_PICARG_2) and the third reel symbol search table (TBL_PICARG_3).

Further, the symbol combination data stored in each address is such that when the symbol of the symbol number stops on the active line when the reels 31 are stopped, the symbols constituting the symbol combination of which hand in the N-th symbol group. It determines what it can be.
For example, the symbol combination data at address "1300 (H)" is "0". ~ RBH) symbol combination can not be.
On the other hand, the symbol combination data at address "1307 (H)" (eighth group) is "@WIN_27 OR WIN_30" (00100100 (B)). Therefore, when the number 2 "cherry" stops when the left reel 31 stops, it means that the symbols constituting the symbol combination of the small winning combination 27 and the small winning combination 30 among the winning combinations of the eighth group are possible. (See Figure 121).
Therefore, the same symbols on the same reel 31 have the same symbol combination data. Specifically, for example, in FIG. 205, addresses "131B(H)" to "1323(H)" store symbol combination data for the fifth symbol "Replay". A certain address "1348 (H)" to "1350 (H)" (10th symbol "Replay"), address "1375 (H)" to "137D (H)" (15th symbol "Replay"), address "13A2"(H)" to "13AA(H)" (No. 0 symbol "Replay") are also the same as the symbol combination data of addresses "131B(H)" to "1323(H)".

As described above, the first reel symbol search table (TBL_PICARG_1) stores symbol combination data from the second symbol (cherry). This is because when the control pattern number (BF_PICTURE) is "0", the pattern on the active line on the left reel 31 is number 2.
On the other hand, in the second reel symbol search table (TBL_PICARG_2) shown in FIGS. 210 to 214, symbol combination data is stored from the first symbol "Cherry". This is because when the control pattern number (BF_PICTURE) is "0", the pattern on the active line on the middle reel 31 is number one.
Similarly, in the third reel symbol search table (TBL_PICARG_3), symbol combination data is stored from the 0th symbol "Bell B". This is because when the control pattern number (BF_PICTURE) is "0", the pattern on the active line on the right reel 31 is number 0.
In this way, the pattern data to be stored in the left, middle and right reel pattern search tables are stored with an offset (difference) (the pattern number is shifted) (stored in consideration of the difference). By doing so, there is no need to correct (add or subtract the difference) for each acquired control pattern number (BF_PICTURE). Therefore, it is possible to simplify the program processing and reduce the capacity of the ROM 54 .
As shown in FIG. 229 (example 2 of the twenty-seventh embodiment) to be described later, in each of the symbol arrangement tables of the left reel 31, the middle reel 31, and the right reel 31, the symbol data of symbol number "0" is There is also a method of storing data in order from 1 to 4 and storing difference data corresponding to each reel 31 . When acquiring the symbol data, the difference data of the relevant reel 31 is added or subtracted from the symbol number of the symbol stopped at the reference position, thereby acquiring the symbol data of the symbol on the activated line. In this case, even if there is a change in the effective line, it is only necessary to change the difference data, so the development man-hours can be reduced.

115, the left, middle and right reel symbol search tables set the offset (difference) to "+2" for the left reel 31 and "+2" for the middle reel 31. "+1", and the right reel 31 is set to "0". In other words, the offset value indicates the amount of deviation (step number) between the position of the effective line and the reference position.
Therefore, for example, when the control picture number (BF_PICTURE) indicates a picture to be stopped in the lower row and the active line is "left middle row" - "middle middle row" - "right middle row", the left, middle and right reels In the pattern search table, each offset is "+1".
Also, for example, when the control picture number (BF_PICTURE) indicates a picture to be stopped in the middle row and the effective line is "left middle row" - "middle middle row" - "right middle row", the left, middle and right reels No offset is required (or "0") in the symbol search table.

Next, a specific example of the pattern array address buffer in the twenty-sixth embodiment will be described.
For example, assume that "Replay (No. 5)" - "Cherry (No. 16)" - "Bell B (No. 0)" stops on the active line.
In this case, the symbol array address buffer 1 (_BF_PICARG_ADR1) stores the address "131A (H)" which is one before the head address "131B (H)" of the 5th symbol (replay) in the first reel symbol search table (TBL_PICARG_1). ” is stored.
Also, in the symbol array address buffer 2 (_BF_PICARG_ADR2), the address "143A (H)" which is one before the top address "143B (H)" of the 16th symbol (cherry) in the second reel symbol search table (TBL_PICARG_2) is stored. is stored.
Furthermore, in the symbol array address buffer 3 (_BF_PICARG_ADR3), the address "1467 (H)" which is one before the top address "1468 (H)" of the 0th symbol (bell B) in the third reel symbol search table (TBL_PICARG_3) is stored. )” is stored.
It should be noted that the process through which the above values are stored will be described later.

220 and 221 are diagrams showing the payout number table (TBL_WIN_CTL) in the twenty-sixth embodiment.
In the twenty-sixth embodiment, one address is provided for each combination, and the payout number is stored. The address "1600 (H)" is set to the RBA payout number "0" of the symbol group 1, and the addresses of all the symbols of the first symbol group, all the symbols of the second group, . . . are provided, and each payout number is stored.
In the symbol group 4, in order to correspond to bits, addresses "1618 (H)" to "161A (H)" are set to replay 08, replay 09, and replay 10 corresponding to bits D0 to D2, and address "161B ( H)” to “161F(H)” are unused areas corresponding to bits D3 to D7.
For example, when a small win 01 is won, the address "1620(H)" is specified, and the payout number "15(D)" stored at the address "1620(H)" is the payout number. Stored in data (_NB_PAY_MEDAL).

Next, control processing in the twenty-sixth embodiment will be described using a flowchart.
FIG. 222 is a flowchart showing main processing in the twenty-sixth embodiment. The flowchart in FIG. 222 mainly shows the processing according to the twenty-sixth embodiment, and does not mean that only the processing shown in FIG. 222 is performed.
The main process is a process executed once per game by the main control board 50, and corresponds to, for example, FIG. 139 of the twenty-third embodiment.
In FIG. 222, the game start time process of step S1131 is a process corresponding to steps S271 and S272 in FIG. 139, and the operation state flag updating process and the like are executed (see FIG. 42, for example).
In the next step S1132, a medal acceptance start process is executed. This process is, for example, the process shown in steps S273 to S276 of FIG. is operated, update processing of the number of bets is performed.

In the next step S1133, a start switch acceptance process is executed. This process is the process shown in FIG. 223 to be described later, and the same process as step S751 in FIG. 139 is executed. Specifically, when it is determined that the start switch 41 has been operated, a predetermined lottery process or the like is executed. However, in FIG. 223 to be described later, the processing shown in FIG. 140 is simplified and described.
Next, in step S1134, the rotation of the reel 31 is started. In the next step S1135, reel stop control is performed. This process is a process shown in FIG. 225, which will be described later, and is a process for stopping the symbol of the corresponding reel 31 at a predetermined position based on the winning number when the operation of the stop switch 42 is detected.
In the next step S1136, it is determined whether or not all the reels 31 have stopped (corresponding to step S289 in FIG. 139). If it is determined that there is no, the process returns to step S1135.

In step S1137, display determination processing is performed. This process is the process shown in FIG. 227, which will be described later, and corresponds to step 291 in FIG.
In the next step S1138, game end check processing is performed. This process is a process corresponding to step 753 in FIG. Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

FIG. 223 is a flow chart showing the start switch acceptance processing in step S1133 of FIG.
In FIG. 223, in step S1141, a game start process is executed. This process is a process of executing a lottery for a winning number (combination), a lottery for an advantageous section (AT), and the like, and corresponds to the process including steps S761 to S768 in FIG.
In the next step S1142, reel rotation start preparation processing is executed. This process is a process shown in FIG. 224, which will be described later, and is a process of setting initial values in the pattern array address buffers 1 to 3 (_BF_PICARG_ADR1 to 3) described above. Then, the processing according to this flow chart ends.

FIG. 224 is a flow chart showing reel rotation start preparation processing in step S1142 of FIG.
In FIG. 224, at step S1151, the symbol control data table (TBL_PIC_DAT) is set. This process is a process of storing the head address "1200 (H)" of the pattern control data table in the HL register.
Next, in step S1152, the address of the pattern control data table is stored in the pattern array address buffer 1 (_BF_PICARG_ADR1). This process is a process of storing the HL register value (1200 (H)) in the pattern array address buffer 1 at the address "F0A0 (H)".
In the next step S1153, the address of the pattern control data table is stored in the pattern array address buffer 2 (_BF_PICARG_ADR2). This process is a process of storing the HL register value (1200 (H)) in the pattern array address buffer 2 at the address "F0A2 (H)".
In the next step S1154, the address of the pattern control data table is stored in the pattern array address buffer 3 (_BF_PICARG_ADR3). This process is a process of storing the HL register value (1200 (H)) in the design array address buffer 3 at the address "F0A4 (H)". Then, the processing according to this flow chart ends.
By the above processing, as the initial value at the start of reel rotation,
Pattern array address buffer 1 (_BF_PICARG_ADR1): 1200 (H)
Pattern array address buffer 2 (_BF_PICARG_ADR2): 1200 (H)
Pattern array address buffer 3 (_BF_PICARG_ADR3): 1200 (H)
is stored.

FIG. 225 is a flow chart showing reel stop control in step S1135 of FIG.
In FIG. 225, in step S1161, it is determined whether or not the stop switch 42 has been operated with respect to the spinning reel 31 . Although the details of this processing are omitted, as shown in FIG. 194 of the twenty-fifth embodiment, the input port rising data A is detected, and the rising data of the stop switch 42 corresponding to the rotating reel 31 is turned on. , it is determined "Yes" in step S1161.
When it is determined that the stop switch 42 has been operated in step S1161, the process proceeds to step S1162, and when it is determined that the stop switch 42 has not been operated, the processing according to this flow chart ends.

In step S1162, the value corresponding to the (operated) stop switch 42 is stored in stop/control reel number data (_NB_STOP_REEL). For example, if it is the left stop switch 42, "1" is saved.
In the next step S1163, stop symbol determination processing is executed. This process is a process of determining the stop position of the reel 31 based on the timing at which the stop switch 42 is operated, the winning number in the game, and the like. As a result of this process, the symbol number to be stopped in the middle stage is stored in the #th reel symbol number (for stop position) (_NB_RL#_STPPIC).
In the next step S1164, the pattern number is stored in the control pattern number (_BF_PICTURE). In this process, "1" is subtracted from the #th reel pattern number (for stop position) (_NB_RL#_STPPIC) to calculate and store the control pattern number (_BF_PICTURE). Note that, in this calculation, when "1" is subtracted from "0", a special calculation that results in "19(D)" is executed.
Next, the process advances to step S1165 to set the pattern array address buffer. This process is a process shown in FIG. 226, which will be described later, and is a process of acquiring and storing a reel symbol arrangement table address. Then, the processing according to this flow chart ends.

FIG. 226 is a flow chart showing pattern array address buffer setting in step S1165 of FIG.
In FIG. 226, stop/control reel number data is obtained in step S1171. This process is a process of storing the value stored in the stop/control reel number data (_NB_STOP_REEL) in the A register.
Next, in step S1172, the RWM address is set in the pattern array address buffer corresponding to the stop/control reel number data. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Add the A register value and the A register value, and use the result of the addition as the A register value. In other words, this process is a process of doubling the A register value.
(2) Store the value of address "F09E (H)" shifted by "2" from address "F0A0 (H)" of pattern array address buffer 1 (_BF_PICARG_ADR1) in the DE register.
(3) Add the A register value to the DE register value. The result of the addition is used as the DE register value.
Thereby, for example, when the stop/control reel number data (_NB_STOP_REEL) is "1", the DE register value becomes "F0A0 (H)".
Also, when the stop/control reel number data (_NB_STOP_REEL) is "2", the DE register value is "F0A2 (H)".
Furthermore, when the stop/control reel number data (_NB_STOP_REEL) is "3", the DE register value is "F0A4 (H)".
By the process of step S1172, the address of the pattern array address buffer (_BF_PICARG_ADR#) corresponding to the reel 31 is stored in the DE register.

In the next step S1173, a reel pattern search table address offset table is set. This process is to store the value "1207(H)" obtained by subtracting "2" from the top address "1209(H)" of the reel symbol search table address offset table (TBL_PIC_SRCH) in the HL register.
In the next step S1174, the reel symbol arrangement table address corresponding to the stop/control reel number data is obtained. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Add the A register value to the HL register value, and use the result of the addition as the HL register value.
For example, when the A register value is "2", the HL register value is "1209 (H)".
Also, when the A register value is "4", the HL register value is "120B(H)".
Furthermore, when the A register value is "6", the HL register value is "120D(H)".
Therefore, the address of the reel symbol search table address offset table (TBL_PIC_SRCH) corresponding to the reel 31 is stored in the HL register (see FIG. 204(B)).

(2) Store the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value in the HL register value.
For example, when the HL register value is "1209 (H)", the HL register value is "12FF (H)".
Also, when the HL register value is "120B(H)", the HL register value is "13B3(H)".
Furthermore, when the HL register value is "120D (H)", the HL register value is "1467 (H)".

Next, in step S1175, a reel symbol array table address corresponding to the control symbol number is obtained. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Store the data stored in the control picture number (_BF_PICTURE) in the A register.
(2) Multiply the A register value by "9" and store the operation result in the A register. Here, multiplying by "9" corresponds to the number of symbol groups.
(3) Add the A register value to the HL register value, and use the result of the addition as the HL register value.

The above processing will be described with specific examples (Examples 1 to 3).
(Example 1)
In the left reel 31, when the control picture number (_BF_PICTURE) is "10" (the 12th "Bell B" is stopped on the active line),
12FF(H)+10×9(D)(5A(H))=1359(H)
, which is one address before the start address "135A (H)" corresponding to the twelfth "Bell B" on the left reel 31 .
(Example 2)
Also, when the control picture number (_BF_PICTURE) is "10" (the 11th "cherry" is stopped on the effective line) on the middle reel 31,
13B3(H)+10×9(D)=140D(H)
, which is the address immediately before the head address "140E (H)" corresponding to the 11th "cherry" of the middle reel 31 .
(Example 3)
Furthermore, in the right reel 31, when the control picture number (_BF_PICTURE) is "10" (the 10th "Bell B" is stopped on the active line),
1467 (H) + 10 x 9 (D) = 14C1 (H)
, which is one address before the top address "14C2 (H)" corresponding to the tenth "Bell B" on the right reel 31 .
Thus, in step S1175, the first address value of the top address corresponding to the stop symbol number of the reel 31 is stored in the HL register.

Next, proceeding to step S1176, a pattern array address buffer corresponding to the stop/control reel number data (_NB_STOP_REEL) is obtained. This process is a process of storing the HL register value at the address indicated by the DE register value.
Note that as shown in step S1172,
Stop/control reel number data "1" → DE register value "F0A0 (H)"
Stop/control reel number data "2" → DE register value "F0A2 (H)"
Stop/control reel number data "3" → DE register value "F0A4 (H)"
is.
Therefore, in the case of the left reel 31, "1359 (H)" is stored in the symbol arrangement address buffer 1 at the address "F0A0 (H)" in the above example 1.
Further, in the case of the middle reel 31, "140D (H)" is stored in the symbol arrangement address buffer 2 at the address "F0A2 (H)" in the above example 2.
Furthermore, in the case of the right reel 31, "14C1 (H)" is stored in the symbol arrangement address buffer 3 at the address "F0A4 (H)" in the above example 3.
Then, the processing according to this flow chart ends.

As described above, by storing the address value in which the symbol combination data is stored in the symbol array address buffer of each reel, even if the power is cut off, the data is already stored after the power is restored from the cut off. The game can be restarted correctly using the existing address value.
For example, in a situation where all the reels 31 are rotating at a constant speed, even if a power cut occurs after the stop switch 42 corresponding to the left reel 31 is operated, and the power cut processing is executed, the symbol Since the array address buffer 1 stores the address value storing the symbol combination data of the left reel 31, after the power is restored, based on the stop operation of the middle reel 31 and the stop operation of the right reel 31, The process of storing the address values in the pattern array address buffers 2 and 3 can be restarted (the game can be restarted).

It should be noted that when the address value (the value stored in the pattern array address buffer) in which the symbol combination data is stored is stored in the general-purpose register, a power failure occurs, and when the power is restored after that, the address The value (the value stored in the general-purpose register) is cleared (set to an initial value, eg, "0"). Therefore, when the address value storing the symbol combination data is stored in the general-purpose register, for example, after the stop switch 42 corresponding to the left reel 31 is operated, the power is cut off, and the power cut-off process is executed. In this case, the possibility that the game cannot be resumed after the power is restored increases.
Further, if the RWM 53 is provided with a pattern array address buffer to store the address value in which the pattern combination data is stored, the address value is stored in the pattern array address buffer each time the stop switch 42 is operated to stop. In the development stage, it is possible to confirm whether or not the stop position is correct for each stop operation by checking the pattern array address buffer of the RWM 53 .

FIG. 227 is a flow chart showing display determination processing in step S1137 of FIG.
This process is a process of determining symbol combination data based on the address values stored in the symbol array address buffer and determining whether or not the combination corresponding to the symbol combination data has a payout.
In FIG. 227, at step S1181, the symbol group number is set to "9". This process stores "9" in the B register and "8" in the C register. "8" in the C register is a value corresponding to the number of bits.
In the next step S1182, the pattern array address buffer 1 (_BF_PICARG_ADR1) is obtained. This process is a process of storing the symbol combination data stored in the symbol array address buffer 1 in the HL register.

Next, proceeding to step S1183, the first reel symbol arrangement table data corresponding to the number of symbol groups is obtained. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Add the B register value to the HL register value, and use the addition result as the HL register value.
(2) The symbol combination data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value is stored in the A register value.
For example, when the HL register value is "12FF(H)", "12FF(H)+9(H)=1308(H)", so "@WIN_33" stored at address "1308(H)" That is, "00000001(B)" is stored in the A register.

In the next step S1184, the pattern array address buffer 2 (_BF_PICARG_ADR2) is obtained. This process is a process of storing the symbol combination data stored in the symbol array address buffer 2 in the HL register.
Next, in step S1185, a logical product of the second reel symbol arrangement table data corresponding to the number of symbol groups is executed. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Add the B register value to the HL register value, and use the addition result as the HL register value.
(2) An AND (logical product) operation is executed between the symbol combination data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value and the A register value. The calculation result is used as the A register value.

In the next step S1186, the pattern array address buffer 3 (_BF_PICARG_ADR3) is obtained. This process is a process of storing the symbol combination data stored in the symbol array address buffer 3 in the HL register.
Next, proceeding to step S1187, the logical product of the third reel symbol arrangement table data corresponding to the number of symbol groups is executed. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Add the B register value to the HL register value, and use the addition result as the HL register value.
(2) An AND (logical product) operation is executed between the symbol combination data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value and the A register value. The calculation result is used as the A register value.
It should be noted that, at this time, when the operation result is "0", the zero flag becomes "1".

By the processing of steps S1181 to S1187, for example, when the B register value is "9", the symbol combination data of the ninth group of the stop symbol data of the left reel 31 and the ninth group of the stop symbol data of the middle reel 31 The symbol combination data of the group and the symbol combination data of the ninth group of the stop symbol data of the right reel 31 are AND-operated.
Specifically, for example,
B register value = 9
Symbol array address buffer 1 (_BF_PICARG_ADR1) = 12FF (H) (2nd symbol (cherry))
Symbol array address buffer 2 (_BF_PICARG_ADR2) = 13B3 (H) (1st symbol (cherry))
Pattern array address buffer 3 (_BF_PICARG_ADR3) = 1482 (H) (3rd pattern (red 7))
when
Symbol combination data of address "1308 (H)" (@WIN_33)
AND
Symbol combination data of address "13BC(H)" (@WIN_33)
AND
Symbol combination data of address "148B (H)" (@WIN_33)
As a result, the AND data becomes "@WIN_33" (00000001 (B)).
On the other hand, if any one of the symbol combination data of address "1308(H)", address "13BC(H)" or address "148B(H)" is "0", AND The logical product data becomes "0" by the operation.

Next, proceeding to step S1188, it is determined whether or not the logical product data is "0". This process determines whether the zero flag is "1" and determines "Yes" when the zero flag is "1". If it is determined that the logical product data is "0", the process proceeds to step S1195, and if it is determined that the logical product data is not "0", the process proceeds to step S1189.
In step S1195, "1" is subtracted from the number of symbol groups. This process executes a process of subtracting "1" from the B register value.
In the next step S1196, it is determined whether or not the number of symbol groups has become "0". This process determines whether or not the result of subtracting "1" from the B register in step S1195 is "0". When the B register value after the subtraction of "1" is "0", it is judged as "Yes" (the number of symbol groups has become "0").
When it is determined in step S1196 that the number of symbol groups is "0", the processing according to this flow chart is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of symbol groups is not "0", the process returns to step S1182.

On the other hand, when proceeding from step S1188 to step S1189, a payout number table address corresponding to the number of symbol groups is set. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Multiply the B register value by the C register value "8". Then, the multiplication result is stored in the BC register.
(2) Subtract "8" from the top address "1600 (H)" of the payout number table (TBL_WIN_CTL), and then store the result of subtracting "1" in the HL register. Therefore, "15F7(H)" is stored in the HL register.
(3) Add the BC register value to the HL register value.
Next, the process advances to step S1190 to add "1" to the table address. This process is a process of adding "1" to the HL register value and using the addition result as the HL register value.

Here, in steps S1189 and S1190,
"1600 (H)" - "8 (H)" - "1 (H)" + B register value (value of symbol group) x C register value "8" (number of data included in one symbol group) + "1 (H)”
= "1600 (H)" + (value of symbol group - 1) x (number of data included in one symbol group "8")
is calculated.
Examples 1 and 2 are given below as specific examples.
(1) Example 1
When the B register value when proceeding to step S1189 is "1" (symbol 1 group),
1600 (H) + (1-1) x 8 = 1600 (H)
As a result, the head address of the first pattern group is designated.
(2) Example 2
When the B register value when proceeding to step S1189 is "5" (symbol 5 group),
1600 (H) + (5-1) x 8 = 1600 (H) + 20 (H) (32 (D))
= 1620 (H)
Thus, the head address of the 5 groups of symbols is designated.

In the next step S1191, the AND data is shifted right by "1". This process is a process of shifting the bits of the A register value to the right by "1".
Then, in the next step S1192, it is determined whether or not the carry flag has become "1" as a result of the process of shifting "1" to the right. When it is determined that the carry flag has become "1", it is determined "Yes" and the process proceeds to step S1193. On the other hand, when it is determined that the carry flag is not "1", the process returns to step S1190.

In step S1193, it is determined whether or not the payout number is "0". In this process, it is determined whether or not the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value is "0", and if it is "0", the payout amount is determined to be "0". When it is determined that the number of payouts is "0", the processing according to this flow chart is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of payouts is not "0", the process proceeds to step S1194.
In step S1194, the payout number data is saved. This process is a process of storing the value indicated by the address indicated by the HL register value in the payout amount data (_NB_PAY_MEDAL). Then, the processing according to this flow chart ends.

Examples 1 and 2 are given as specific examples of steps S1190 to S1192.
(1) Example 1 (When the symbol combination of the small win 33 is stopped)
In the first step S1190, when the B register value is "9" and the AND data is "@WIN_33" (00000001 (B)), the HL register value is "1640 (H)".
If the logical product data "00000001(B)" is shifted right by one bit in the next step S1191, the carry flag becomes "1", so the determination in step S1192 is "Yes". Therefore, in step S1194, the data "1" stored at the address "1640(H)" indicated by the HL register value is stored as the payout number data.

(2) Example 2 (When the symbol combination of the small combination 03 is stopped)
In the first step S1190, when the B register value is "5" and the AND data is "@WIN_03" (00000100 (B)), the HL register value is "1620 (H)".
If the AND data "00000100(B)" is shifted to the right by 1 bit to be "00000010(B)" in the next step S1191, the carry flag is "0", so "No" is determined in step S1192. , the process returns to step S1190.
At step S1190 (second time), the HL register value becomes "1621 (H)". In the next step S1191, if the AND data "00000010(B)" is shifted right by 1 bit to become "00000001(B)", the carry flag is "0", so "No" is determined in step S1192. and returns to step S1190.
At step S1190 (third time), the HL register value becomes "1622 (H)". In the next step S1191, when the logical product data "00000001(B)" is shifted right by one bit, the carry flag becomes "1", so the determination in step S1192 is "Yes". Therefore, in step S1194, the data "15(D)" stored at the address indicated by the HL register value "1622(H)" is stored as payout number data.

The above display determination processing will be described with specific examples (first and second examples below).
(Example 1)
In the game in which the winning number "10" is determined by the role lottery, the left stop switch 42 is operated while the symbol of the symbol number "10" is passing through the middle row of the left reel 31, and then the middle reel 31 is moved. The middle stop switch 42 is operated when the symbol with the symbol number "9" is passing through the middle stage, and then the right stop switch 42 is operated when the symbol with the symbol number "3" is passing through the middle stage of the right reel 31. is operated, "Watermelon (No. 11)" - "Cherry (No. 11)" - "Bell A (No. 4)" stop on the effective line, and a small win 01 (15 pieces) is won. do.
In this case, the pattern array address buffer set in FIG. 226 is as follows.
1. left reel 31
At step S1171, the A register value=“1” (stop/control reel number data).
In step S1172,
(1) A register value = 1 x 2 = 2
(2) DE register value = F09E (H)
(3) DE register value = DE register value + A register value = F0A0 (H)
In step S1173,
HL register value = 1207 (H)
becomes.
In step S1174,
(1) HL register value = HL register value + A register value = 1209 (H)
(2) HL register value = value of address indicated by HL register value = 12FF (H)
becomes.
In step S1175,
(1) A register value = "9" (control picture number (_BF_PICTURE))
(2) A register value = A register value x 9 = 81 (D) (51 (H))
(3) HL register value = HL register value + A register value = 1350 (H)
becomes.

2. middle reel 31
At step S1171, the A register value=“2” (stop/control reel number data).
In step S1172,
(1) A register value = 2 x 2 = 4
(2) DE register value = F09E (H)
(3) DE register value = DE register value + A register value = F0A2 (H)
In step S1173,
HL register value = 1207 (H)
becomes.
In step S1174,
(1) HL register value = HL register value + A register value = 120B (H)
(2) HL register value = value of address indicated by HL register value = 13B3 (H)
becomes.
In step S1175,
(1) A register value = "10 (D)" (control picture number (_BF_PICTURE))
(2) A register value = A register value x 9 = 90 (D) (5A (H))
(3) HL register value = HL register value + A register value = 140D (H)
becomes.

3. right reel 31
At step S1171, the A register value=“3” (stop/control reel number data).
In step S1172,
(1) A register value = 3 x 2 = 6
(2) DE register value = F09E (H)
(3) DE register value = DE register value + A register value = F0A4 (H)
In step S1173,
HL register value = 1207 (H)
becomes.
In step S1174,
(1) HL register value = HL register value + A register value = 120D (H)
(2) HL register value = value of address indicated by HL register value = 1467 (H)
becomes.
In step S1175,
(1) A register value = "4 (D)" (control picture number (_BF_PICTURE))
(2) A register value = A register value x 9 = 36 (D) (24 (H))
(3) HL register value = HL register value + A register value = 148B (H)
becomes.

From the above,
Symbol array address buffer 1: 1350 (H)
Symbol array address buffer 2: 140D (H)
Symbol array address buffer 3: 148B (H)
becomes.
In this case, in step S1181 in FIG.
B register value = 9
C register value = 8
to set.
(first time)
In step S1182,
HL register value = 1350 (H) (value of symbol array address buffer 1)
becomes.
In the next step S1183,
HL register value = 1350 (H) + 9 (H) (HL + B) = 1359 (H)
A register value = 0 (value stored at address indicated by HL register value)
becomes.

In the next step S1184,
HL register value = 140D (H) (value of symbol array address buffer 2)
becomes.
In the next step S1185,
HL register value = 140D (H) + 9 (H) (HL + B) = 1416 (H)
Data indicated by the address of the HL register value = 00000001 (B) (@WIN_33)
A register value = data indicated by the address of the HL register value (@WIN_33) AND A register value = 0
becomes.

In the next step S1186,
HL register value = 148B (H) (value of pattern array address buffer 3)
becomes.
In the next step S1187,
HL register value = 148B (H) + 9 (H) (HL + B) = 1494 (H)
A register value = HL register value (@WIN_34) AND A register value = 0
becomes.
Therefore, zero flag=“1”.
Therefore, "Yes" is determined in step S1188, and the process advances to step S1195.
B register value = 9 - 1 = 8
becomes.
"No" (B register value ≠ 0) at step S1196, and the process returns to step S1182.

(Second time)
At step S1182, the HL register value=1350 (H) (value of symbol array address buffer 1).
In step S1183,
HL register value = 1350 (H) + 8 (H) (HL + B) = 1358 (H)
A register value = 00011010 (B) (@WIN_26 OR @WIN_28 OR @WIN_29 )
becomes.

In step S1184,
HL register value = 140D (H) (value of symbol array address buffer 2)
becomes.
In step S1185,
HL register value = 140D (H) + 8 (H) (HL + B) = 1415 (H)
Data indicated by the address of the HL register value = 00110000 (B) (@WIN_29 OR @WIN_30)
A register value = data indicated by address of HL register value AND A register value = 00010000 (B)
becomes.

In the next step S1186,
HL register value = 148B (H) (value of symbol array address buffer 3)
becomes.
In the next step S1187,
HL register value = 148B (H) + 8 (H) (HL + B) = 1493 (H)
Data indicated by the address of the HL register value = 00001000 (B) (@WIN_28)
A register value = data indicated by address of HL register value AND A register value = 0
becomes.
Therefore, zero flag=“1”.
Therefore, "Yes" is determined in step S1188, and the process advances to step S1195.
B register value = 8 - 1 = 7
becomes.
"No" (B register value ≠ 0) at step S1196, and the process returns to step S1182.

(3rd time)
At step S1182, the HL register value=1350 (H) (value of symbol array address buffer 1).
In step S1183,
HL register value = 1350 (H) + 7 (H) (HL + B) = 1357 (H)
A register value = 00000011 (B) (@WIN_17 OR @WIN_18)
becomes.

In step S1184,
HL register value = 140D (H) (value of symbol array address buffer 2)
becomes.
In step S1185,
HL register value=140D(H)+7(H)(HL+B)=1414(H)
Data indicated by the address of the HL register value = 0000010 (B) (@WIN_18)
A register value = data indicated by address of HL register value AND A register value = 00000010 (B)
becomes.

In the next step S1186,
HL register value = 148B (H) (value of pattern array address buffer 3)
becomes.
In the next step S1187,
HL register value = 148B (H) + 7 (H) (HL + B) = 1492 (H)
Data indicated by the address of the HL register value = 0
A register value = data indicated by the address of the HL register value AND A register value = 0
becomes.
Therefore, zero flag=“1”.
Therefore, "Yes" is determined in step S1188, and the process advances to step S1195.
B register value = 7 - 1 = 6
becomes.
"No" (B register value ≠ 0) at step S1196, and the process returns to step S1182.

(4th time)
At step S1182, the HL register value=1350 (H) (value of symbol array address buffer 1).
In step S1183,
HL register value = 1350 (H) + 6 (H) (HL + B) = 1356 (H)
A register value = 00000010 (B) (@WIN_10)
becomes.

In step S1184,
HL register value = 140D (H) (value of symbol array address buffer 2)
becomes.
In step S1185,
HL register value=140D(H)+6(H)(HL+B)=1413(H)
Data indicated by the address of the HL register value = 0
A register value = data indicated by the address of the HL register value AND A register value = 0
becomes.

In the next step S1186,
HL register value = 148B (H) (value of pattern array address buffer 3)
becomes.
In the next step S1187,
HL register value = 148B (H) + 6 (H) (HL + B) = 1491 (H)
Data indicated by the address of the HL register value = 00110000 (B) (@WIN_13 OR @WIN_14)
A register value = data indicated by the address of the HL register value AND A register value = 0
becomes.
Therefore, zero flag=“1”.
Therefore, "Yes" is determined in step S1188, and the process advances to step S1195.
B register value = 6 - 1 = 5
becomes.
"No" (B register value ≠ 0) at step S1196, and the process returns to step S1182.

(Fifth time)
At step S1182, HL register value=1350 (H) (value of symbol array address buffer 1) At step S1183,
HL register value = 1350 (H) + 5 (H) (HL + B) = 1355 (H)
A register value = 11001011 (B) (@WIN_01_02 OR @WIN_04 OR @WIN_07_08 )
becomes.

In step S1184,
HL register value = 140D (H) (value of symbol array address buffer 2)
becomes.
In step S1185,
HL register value=140D(H)+5(H)(HL+B)=1412(H)
Data indicated by the address of the HL register value = 01000001 (B) (@WIN_01 OR @WIN_07)
A register value = data indicated by address of HL register value AND A register value = 01000001 (B)
becomes.

In the next step S1186,
HL register value = 148B (H) (value of pattern array address buffer 3)
becomes.
In the next step S1187,
HL register value = 148B (H) + 5 (H) (HL + B) = 1490 (H)
Data indicated by the address of the HL register value = 00001101 (B) (@WIN_01 OR @WIN_03 OR @WIN_04)
A register value = data indicated by address of HL register value AND A register value = 00000001 (B)
becomes.
Therefore, zero flag ≠ "1".
Therefore, it becomes "No" in step S1188, and the process proceeds to step S1189.
In step S1189,
BC register value = B register value (value of symbol group) x C register value (number of data included in one symbol group) = 5 x 8 = 40 (D) (28 (H))
HL register value = 15F7 (H)
HL register value=HL register value+BC register value=15F7(H)+28(H)=161F(H)
becomes.

In step S1190,
HL register value=161F(H)+1(H)=1620(H)
becomes.
In step S1191, the A register value "00000001(B)" is shifted right by 1 to become "00000000(B)" and the carry flag becomes "1".
In step S1192, since the carry flag is "1", it is determined "Yes" and the process proceeds to step S1193.
In step S1193,
Data indicated by the address of the HL register value = 15 (D)
Therefore, it is determined that the number of payouts is not "0", and the process proceeds to step S1194.
In step S1194, "15 (D)" is stored in payout number data (_NB_PAY_MEDAL).
As described above, when the small win 01 is won, the address "1620 (H)" of the payout number table (TBL_WIN_CTL) is specified, and the payout number "15 (D)" is stored.

Next, as a second example of the display determination process, in the game in which the winning number "26" is determined by lottery, when the symbol with the symbol number "10" is passing through the middle stage of the left reel 31, the left stop is displayed. The switch 42 is operated, and then the middle stop switch 42 is operated while the symbol of the symbol number "2" is passing through the middle stage of the middle reel 31, and then the middle stage of the right reel 31 is moved to the middle stage of the symbol number "3". By operating the right stop switch 42 while the pattern is passing, "Watermelon (No. 11)" - "Black BAR (No. 3)" - "Bell A (No. 4)" are stopped on the effective line. , shows an example of a non-winning role. This symbol combination differs from the symbol combination of the first example only in the symbols of the middle reels 31 .
First, regarding the middle reel 31, the pattern arrangement address buffer set in FIG. 226 is as follows.

At step S1171, the A register value=“2” (stop/control reel number data).
In step S1172,
(1) A register value = 2 x 2 = 4
(2) DE register value = F09E (H)
(3) DE register value = DE register value + A register value = F0A2 (H)
In step S1173,
HL register value = 1207 (H)
becomes.
In step S1174,
(1) HL register value = HL register value + A register value = 120B (H)
(2) HL register value = value of address indicated by HL register value = 13B3 (H)
becomes.
In step S1175,
(1) A register value = "2 (D)" (control picture number (_BF_PICTURE))
(2) A register value = A register value x 9 = 18 (D) (12 (H))
(3) HL register value = HL register value + A register value = 13C5 (H)
becomes.

Therefore,
Symbol array address buffer 1: 1350 (H)
Symbol array address buffer 2: 13C5 (H)
Symbol array address buffer 3: 148B (H)
becomes.
In this case, in step S1181 in FIG.
B register value = 9
C register value = 8
to set.
(first time)
In step S1182,
HL register value = 1350 (H) (value of symbol array address buffer 1)
becomes.
In the next step S1183,
HL register value = 1350 (H) + 9 (H) (HL + B) = 1359 (H)
A register value = 0 (value stored at address indicated by HL register value)
becomes.

In the next step S1184,
HL register value = 135C (H) (value of symbol array address buffer 2)
becomes.
In the next step S1185,
HL register value = 13C5(H) + 9(H) (HL + B) = 13CE(H)
Data indicated by the address of the HL register value = 0
A register value = data indicated by address of HL register value AND A register value = 0
becomes.

In the next step S1186,
HL register value = 148B (H) (value of symbol array address buffer 3)
becomes.
In the next step S1187,
HL register value = 148B (H) + 9 (H) (HL + B) = 1494 (H)
A register value = HL register value (@WIN_34) AND A register value = 0
becomes.
Therefore, zero flag=“1”.
Therefore, "Yes" is determined in step S1188, and the process advances to step S1195.
B register value = 9 - 1 = 8
becomes.
"No" (B register value ≠ 0) at step S1196, and the process returns to step S1182.

(Second time)
At step S1182, the HL register value=1350 (H) (value of symbol array address buffer 1).
In step S1183,
HL register value = 1350 (H) + 8 (H) (HL + B) = 1358 (H)
A register value = 00011010 (B) (@WIN_26 OR @WIN_28 OR @WIN_29 )
becomes.

In step S1184,
HL register value = 13C5 (H) (value of symbol array address buffer 2)
becomes.
In step S1185,
HL register value=13C5(H)+8(H)(HL+B)=13CD(H)
Data indicated by the address of the HL register value = 00000111 (B) (@WIN_25 OR @WIN_26 OR @WIN_27)
A register value = data indicated by address of HL register value AND A register value = 00000010 (B)
becomes.

In the next step S1186,
HL register value = 148B (H) (value of pattern array address buffer 3)
becomes.
In the next step S1187,
HL register value = 148B (H) + 8 (H) (HL + B) = 1493 (H)
Data indicated by the address of the HL register value = 00001000 (B) (@WIN_28)
A register value = data indicated by the address of the HL register value AND A register value = 0
becomes.
Therefore, zero flag=“1”.
Therefore, "Yes" is determined in step S1188, and the process advances to step S1195.
B register value = 8 - 1 = 7
becomes.
"No" (B register value ≠ 0) at step S1196, and the process returns to step S1182.

(3rd time)
At step S1182, the HL register value=1350 (H) (value of symbol array address buffer 1).
In step S1183,
HL register value = 1350 (H) + 7 (H) (HL + B) = 1357 (H)
A register value = 00000011 (B) (@WIN_17 OR @WIN_18)
becomes.

In step S1184,
HL register value = 13C5 (H) (value of symbol array address buffer 2)
becomes.
In step S1185,
HL register value=13C5(H)+7(H)(HL+B)=13CC(H)
Data indicated by the address of the HL register value = 00010000 (B) (@WIN_21)
A register value = data indicated by address of HL register value AND A register value = 0
becomes.

In the next step S1186,
HL register value = 148B (H) (value of pattern array address buffer 3)
becomes.
In the next step S1187,
HL register value = 148B (H) + 7 (H) (HL + B) = 1492 (H)
Data indicated by the address of the HL register value = 0
A register value = data indicated by the address of the HL register value AND A register value = 0
becomes.
Therefore, zero flag=“1”.
Therefore, "Yes" is determined in step S1188, and the process advances to step S1195.
B register value = 7 - 1 = 6
becomes.
"No" (B register value ≠ 0) at step S1196, and the process returns to step S1182.

(4th time)
At step S1182, the HL register value=1350 (H) (value of symbol array address buffer 1).
In step S1183,
HL register value = 1350 (H) + 6 (H) (HL + B) = 1356 (H)
A register value = 00000010 (B) (@WIN_10)
becomes.

In step S1184,
HL register value = 13C5 (H) (value of symbol array address buffer 2)
becomes.
In step S1185,
HL register value=13C5(H)+6(H)(HL+B)=13CB(H)
Data indicated by the address of the HL register value = 10000000 (B) (@WIN_16)
A register value = data indicated by address of HL register value AND A register value = 0
becomes.

In the next step S1186,
HL register value = 148B (H) (value of pattern array address buffer 3)
becomes.
In the next step S1187,
HL register value = 148B (H) + 6 (H) (HL + B) = 1491 (H)
Data indicated by the address of the HL register value = 00110000 (B) (@WIN_13 OR @WIN_14)
A register value = data indicated by the address of the HL register value AND A register value = 0
becomes.
Therefore, zero flag=“1”.
Therefore, "Yes" is determined in step S1188, and the process advances to step S1195.
B register value = 6 - 1 = 5
becomes.
"No" (B register value ≠ 0) at step S1196, and the process returns to step S1182.

(Fifth time)
At step S1182, HL register value=1350 (H) (value of symbol array address buffer 1) At step S1183,
HL register value = 1350 (H) + 5 (H) (HL + B) = 1355 (H)
A register value = 11001011 (B) (@WIN_01_02 OR @WIN_04 OR @WIN_07_08 )
becomes.

In step S1184,
HL register value = 13C5 (H) (value of symbol array address buffer 2)
becomes.
In step S1185,
HL register value=13C5(H)+5(H)(HL+B)=13CA(H)
Data indicated by the address of the HL register value = 0
A register value = data indicated by the address of the HL register value AND A register value = 0
becomes.

In the next step S1186,
HL register value = 148B (H) (value of pattern array address buffer 3)
becomes.
In the next step S1187,
HL register value = 148B (H) + 5 (H) (HL + B) = 1490 (H)
Data indicated by the address of the HL register value = 00001101 (B) (@WIN_01 OR @WIN_03 OR @WIN_04)
A register value = data indicated by the address of the HL register value AND A register value = 0
becomes.
Therefore, zero flag=“1”.
Therefore, "Yes" is determined in step S1188, and the process advances to step S1195.
B register value = 5 - 1 = 4
becomes.
"No" (B register value ≠ 0) at step S1196, and the process returns to step S1182.

(6th time)
At step S1182, the HL register value=1350 (H) (value of symbol array address buffer 1).
In step S1183,
HL register value = 1350 (H) + 4 (H) (HL + B) = 1354 (H)
A register value = 0
becomes.

In step S1184,
HL register value = 13C5 (H) (value of symbol array address buffer 2)
becomes.
In step S1185,
HL register value = 13C5(H) + 4(H) (HL + B) = 13C9(H)
Data indicated by the address of the HL register value = 0
A register value = data indicated by the address of the HL register value AND A register value = 0
becomes.

In the next step S1186,
HL register value = 148B (H) (value of pattern array address buffer 3)
becomes.
In the next step S1187,
HL register value = 148B (H) + 4 (H) (HL + B) = 1491 (H)
Data indicated by the address of the HL register value = 0
A register value = data indicated by the address of the HL register value AND A register value = 0
becomes.
Therefore, zero flag=“1”.
Therefore, "Yes" is determined in step S1188, and the process advances to step S1195.
B register value = 4 - 1 = 3
becomes.
"No" (B register value ≠ 0) at step S1196, and the process returns to step S1182.

(7th time)
At step S1182, HL register value=1350 (H) (value of symbol array address buffer 1) At step S1183,
HL register value = 1350 (H) + 3 (H) (HL + B) = 1353 (H)
A register value = 01000000 (B) (@REP_06)
becomes.

In step S1184,
HL register value = 13C5 (H) (value of symbol array address buffer 2)
becomes.
In step S1185,
HL register value = 13C5(H) + 3(H) (HL + B) = 13C8(H)
Data indicated by the address of the HL register value = 00000010 (B) (@REP_01)
A register value = data indicated by address of HL register value AND A register value = 0
becomes.

In the next step S1186,
HL register value = 148B (H) (value of pattern array address buffer 3)
becomes.
In the next step S1187,
HL register value = 148B(H) + 3(H) (HL + B) = 148E(H)
Data indicated by the address of the HL register value = 10100010 (B) (@REP_01 OR @REP_05 OR @REP_07)
A register value = data indicated by the address of the HL register value AND A register value = 0
becomes.
Therefore, zero flag=“1”.
Therefore, "Yes" is determined in step S1188, and the process advances to step S1195.
B register value = 3 - 1 = 2
becomes.
"No" (B register value ≠ 0) at step S1196, and the process returns to step S1182.

(8th time)
At step S1182, HL register value=1350 (H) (value of symbol array address buffer 1) At step S1183,
HL register value = 1350 (H) + 2 (H) (HL + B) = 1352 (H)
A register value = 0
becomes.

In step S1184,
HL register value = 13C5 (H) (value of symbol array address buffer 2)
becomes.
In step S1185,
HL register value = 13C5(H) + 2(H) (HL + B) = 13C7(H)
Data indicated by the address of the HL register value = 0
A register value = data indicated by the address of the HL register value AND A register value = 0
becomes.

In the next step S1186,
HL register value = 148B (H) (value of pattern array address buffer 3)
becomes.
In the next step S1187,
HL register value = 148B(H) + 2(H) (HL + B) = 148D(H)
Data indicated by the address of the HL register value = 0
A register value = data indicated by the address of the HL register value AND A register value = 0
becomes.
Therefore, zero flag=“1”.
Therefore, "Yes" is determined in step S1188, and the process advances to step S1195.
B register value = 2 - 1 = 1
becomes.
"No" (B register value ≠ 0) at step S1196, and the process returns to step S1182.

(9th time)
At step S1182, HL register value=1350 (H) (value of symbol array address buffer 1) At step S1183,
HL register value = 1350 (H) + 1 (H) (HL + B) = 1351 (H)
A register value = 0
becomes.

In step S1184,
HL register value = 13C5 (H) (value of symbol array address buffer 2)
becomes.
In step S1185,
HL register value = 13C5(H) + 1(H) (HL + B) = 13C6(H)
Data indicated by the address of the HL register value = 11110000 (B) (@SRB_E_H)
A register value = data indicated by address of HL register value AND A register value = 0
becomes.

In the next step S1186,
HL register value = 148B (H) (value of pattern array address buffer 3)
becomes.
In the next step S1187,
HL register value = 148B(H) + 1(H) (HL + B) = 148C(H)
Data indicated by the address of the HL register value = 0
A register value = data indicated by the address of the HL register value AND A register value = 0
becomes.
Therefore, zero flag=“1”.
Therefore, "Yes" is determined in step S1188, and the process advances to step S1195.
B register value = 1 - 1 = 0
becomes.
"Yes" (B register value=0) is obtained in step S1196, and the process according to this flowchart is terminated.
As a result, the payout number data remains "0".

<27th Embodiment>
The twenty-seventh embodiment relates to a pattern arrangement table.
228 and 229 are diagrams showing the symbol arrangement table in the twenty-seventh embodiment. The symbol arrangement table stores symbol data corresponding to symbol numbers at each address. In the twenty-seventh embodiment, the specific contents of the design data stored in each address are omitted.
The symbol arrangement table in the twenty-fifth embodiment is constructed as follows.
(1) First reel pattern arrangement table (TBL_PICARG_1) (Fig. 181)
1203 (H): 2nd design + 3rd design 1204 (H): 4th design + 5th design:
120B (H): 18th symbol + 19th symbol 120C (H): 0th symbol + 1st symbol (2) Second reel symbol arrangement table (TBL_PICARG_2) (Fig. 185)
123A (H): 1st design + 2nd design 123B (H): 3rd design + 4th design:
1242 (H): 17th symbol + 18th symbol 1243 (H): 19th symbol + 0th symbol (3) 3rd reel symbol arrangement table (TBL_PICARG_3) (Fig. 189)
128F (H): 0th design + 1st design 1290 (H): 2nd design + 3rd design:
1297 (H): 16th design + 17th design 1298 (H): 18th design + 19th design

As can be seen from the above, for the first (left) reel 31, the 2nd symbol (upper 4 bits) is stored at the top address (1203(H)). The reason for this setting is that the reference position of the control pattern number (_BF_PICTURE) is the lower row. is because the second symbol stops.
As for the second (middle) reel 31, the first symbol (upper 4 bits) is stored at the top address (123A(H)). This is because, in the middle reel 31, when the 0th symbol stops at the lower stage which is the reference position, the 1st symbol stops at the effective line (middle stage).
Similarly, for the third (right) reel 31, the top address (128F(H)) stores the 0th symbol (upper 4 bits). This is because, in the right reel 31, the reference position coincides with the position on the effective line.

181, 185, and 189 in the twenty-fifth embodiment, two pattern data are stored per address (one pattern data in upper 4 bits and one pattern data in lower 4 bits).
On the other hand, when one pattern data is stored in one address, it is configured as shown in FIGS.
In the symbol arrangement table of the twenty-seventh embodiment, the symbol data of the left reel 31 starts from the address "1000 (H)" and the symbol data of the middle reel 31 starts from the address "1100 (H)" for simplification of explanation. , and the symbol data of the right reel 31 starts from the address "1200 (H)".

FIG. 228 is a diagram showing an example (example 1) in which data of one design per address is used in the design arrangement table of the twenty-fifth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 228, the symbol data of the left reel 31 is stored starting from the symbol data of symbol number 2 in order from the top address. Further, the symbol data of the middle reel 31 is stored from the symbol data of symbol number 1 in order from the leading address. Furthermore, the symbol data of the right reel 31 is stored starting with the symbol data of symbol number 0 in order from the top address.

In this way, by shifting the symbol number of the symbol data of the leading address in the symbol arrangement table of the left, middle and right reels 31, the symbol number of the symbol to be stopped at the reference position (position on the reference line) is set to the offset value. , it is possible to acquire the symbol number of the symbol that stops on the active line.
For example, when the symbol number 0 stops at the reference position (lower stage) when the left reel 31 is stopped, the symbol number of the symbol to be stopped at the active line (upper stage) is set to "1000 (H) (top address value). + "0 (symbol number)" = "1000 (H)", it is possible to obtain the symbol data (for symbol number 2) stored at the address "1000 (H)".
Similarly, when the symbol of symbol number 10 stops at the reference position (lower stage) when the left reel 31 stops, the symbol number of the symbol to stop on the active line (upper stage) is set to "1000 (H)"+"10 ( D)”=“100A(H)”, it is possible to obtain the symbol data (for symbol number 12) stored at the address “100A(H)”.

Regarding the middle reel 31, for example, when the pattern number 0 stops at the reference position (lower stage) when the middle reel 31 stops, the symbol number of the symbol to stop on the active line (middle stage) is set to "1100 (H) ( It is possible to obtain the symbol data (for symbol number 1) stored at the address "1100 (H)" by "top address value)" + "0 (symbol number)" = "1100 (H)". .
Similarly, when the symbol number 10 stops at the reference position (lower row) when the middle reel 31 stops, the symbol number of the symbol to stop on the active line (middle row) is set to "1100 (H)"+"10 ( D)”=“110A(H)”, it is possible to obtain the symbol data (for symbol number 11) stored at the address “110A(H)”.

As for the right reel 31, when the symbol with symbol number 0 stops at the reference position (lower stage) of the right reel 31, the symbol number of the symbol to stop on the activated line (lower stage) is set to "1200 (H) (top position)." address value)”+“0 (symbol number)”=“1200(H)”, it is possible to obtain the symbol data (for symbol number 0) stored at the address “1200(H)”.
Similarly, when the symbol of symbol number 10 stops at the reference position (lower stage) when the right reel 31 stops, the symbol number of the symbol to stop on the active line (lower stage) is set to "1200 (H)" + "10 ( D)”=“120A(H)”, it is possible to obtain the symbol data (for symbol number 10) stored at the address “120A(H)”.

In this example, the effective line is "upper left" - "middle middle" - "lower right". " - "middle lower row" - "upper right row",
(1) Symbol arrangement table for left reel 31 1000 (H): for symbol number 2 1001 (H): for symbol number 3:
(2) Symbol arrangement table of middle reel 31 1100 (H): for symbol number 0 1101 (H): for symbol number 1:
(3) Symbol arrangement table for right reel 31 1200 (H): for symbol number 2 1201 (H): for symbol number 3:
And it is sufficient.

FIG. 229 shows an example (example 2) in which the symbol data of the left, middle, and right reels 31 are not shifted in the symbol arrangement table. Also, in this example, the reference line is “upper left”-“middle upper”-“upper right” (the effective line is the same as in FIG. 228).
Then, as shown in FIG. 229, in each of the symbol arrangement tables for the left, middle and right reels 31, the symbol data is stored in order from the symbol data for symbol number 0.
On the other hand, in this example, difference data is stored at the final address.
In the case of example 2, it is possible to obtain the symbol number to stop on the activated line by adding the difference data to the symbol number to stop at the reference position.

For example, when the symbol number 0 stops at the reference position of the left reel 31, "1000 (H) (head address value)" + "0 (symbol number)" + "0 (difference data)" = "1000 ( H)” makes it possible to acquire the symbol data (for symbol number 0) stored at the address “1000(H)”.
Similarly, when the symbol of symbol number 10 stops at the reference position of the left reel 31, address "100A" is obtained by "1000(H)"+"10(D)"+"0"="100A(H)". (H)" (for symbol number 10) can be obtained.

As for the middle reel 31, when the symbol number 0 stops at the reference position of the middle reel 31, "1100 (H) (head address value)" + "0 (symbol number)" + "1 (difference data)”=“1101(H)”, it is possible to obtain the data (for symbol number 1) stored at the address “1101(H)”.
Similarly, when the symbol of symbol number 10 stops at the reference position of the middle reel 31, "1100(H)"+"10(D)"+"1"="110B(H)" is stored. It is possible to acquire data (for symbol number 11).

Furthermore, regarding the right reel 31, when the symbol of symbol number 0 stops at the reference position of the right reel 31, "1200 (H) (head address value)" + "0 (symbol number)" + "2 ( difference data)”=“1202(H)”, it is possible to acquire the data (for symbol number 2) stored at the address “1202(H)”.
Similarly, when the symbol of symbol number 10 stops at the reference position of the right reel 31, the address "120C(H)" is obtained by "1200(H)"+"10"+"2"="120C(H)". ” (for symbol number 12) can be obtained.
As described above, in order to acquire the symbol number of the symbol to be stopped on the active line from the symbol number of the symbol to be stopped on the reference position, a method of pre-shifting and storing the symbol data in the symbol arrangement data, or a method of storing the symbol A method of storing the pattern data in the arrangement data without shifting and obtaining the pattern number using the difference data is exemplified.

In the twenty-seventh embodiment described above, in Example 1 of FIG. 228, the pattern number of the pattern data specified by the top address is different. In this way, the symbol data to be stored in the symbol arrangement tables of the first reel 31, the second reel 31, and the third reel 31 are stored with the symbol numbers shifted (stored in consideration of the difference). By doing so, there is no need to correct (add or subtract the difference) for each acquired control pattern number (BF_PICTURE). Therefore, it is possible to simplify the program processing and reduce the capacity of the ROM 54 .

On the other hand, as in Example 2 of FIG. 229, in each of the symbol arrangement tables of the left reel 31, the middle reel 31, and the right reel 31, the symbol data of symbol number 0 is stored in order, and the symbol data is acquired. In this case, if the difference data of the relevant reel 31 is added or subtracted from the symbol number of the symbol stopped at the reference position, even if there is a change in the effective line, the difference data can be changed. It is good, so development man-hours can be reduced.

Also, the example of the twenty-seventh embodiment (including the twenty-fifth embodiment) is an example in which the effective line does not change depending on the prescribed number. On the other hand, when the effective line changes according to the specified number, for example, the following is done.
First, in the case of Example 1 (including the twenty-fifth embodiment) of FIG. 228, a pattern arrangement table is provided for each prescribed number.
Further, in the case of example 2 in FIG. 228, differential data may be provided for each prescribed number. In particular, in the case of example 2 of FIG. 228, the pattern arrangement table does not change depending on the prescribed number (even if the prescribed number changes, the pattern arrangement table remains the same), so an increase in storage area can be suppressed.

Furthermore, in the example of the twenty-seventh embodiment (including the twenty-fifth embodiment), the number of effective lines is one, but when the number of effective lines is plural, for example, the following is done. .
First, in the case of Example 1 (including the twenty-fifth embodiment) of FIG. 228, a symbol arrangement table is provided for each active line.
Further, in the case of example 2 in FIG. 228, differential data may be provided for each effective line. In particular, in the case of example 2 in FIG. 228, even if the number of effective lines increases, the pattern arrangement table does not change (even if the number of effective lines changes, the pattern arrangement table remains the same), so an increase in storage area is suppressed. be able to.
Furthermore, in the case where the position and number of activated lines change according to the specified number, in the case of Example 1 (including the twenty-fifth embodiment) of FIG. In the case of the specified number of, it is possible to specify which (one or more) pattern arrangement table to use.
Similarly, in the case of example 2 in FIG. 228, differential data is provided for every effective line, and for example, in the case of a predetermined specified number, it is possible to specify which (one or more) differential data is to be used. mentioned.

<28th Embodiment>
In the twenty-fifth to twenty-seventh embodiments described above, the effective line is one.
On the other hand, in the twenty-eighth embodiment, a case of having a plurality of effective lines will be described.
FIG. 230 is a diagram showing the display window 18, active lines, and RWM area in the twenty-eighth embodiment. In the drawing, (A) shows the relationship between each pattern in the display window 18 and the RWM area, and (B) shows the relationship between the valid lines L1 to L5 and the RWM area.
In the twenty-eighth embodiment, nine patterns of "3.times.3" are displayed in the display window 18 as in the twenty-third embodiment shown in FIG.

As shown in (A) in the drawing, one RWM (storage) area is provided for each stop position (symbol). For example, in the left reel 31, the RWM area of the upper stage "1" is "_WK_PIC_LFT1", the RWM area of the middle stage "2" is "_WK_PIC_LFT2", and the RWM area of the lower stage "3" is "_WK_PIC_LFT3". Therefore, nine RWM areas corresponding to all nine stop positions (symbols) are also provided. Each RWM area consists of 2 bytes.
Furthermore, as shown in (B) in the figure, an RWM area is provided for each effective line. Valid lines in the twenty-eighth embodiment are five lines L1 to L5. Then, for example, the RWM region of the valid line L1 falling to the right is "_WK_PIC_L1".
Furthermore, an RWM area "_WK_ALL_PIC" for all valid lines is provided. "_WK_ALL_PIC" is a value obtained by ORing "_WK_PIC_L1" to "_WK_PIC_L5".

FIG. 231 is a diagram showing the pattern arrangement in the twenty-eighth embodiment. In the twenty-third embodiment shown in FIG. 114, the number of symbols per reel 31 is "20", but in the twenty-eighth embodiment, the number of symbols is "21".
FIG. 232 shows the first reel pattern arrangement table (TBL_PICARG_1) in the twenty-eighth embodiment, and corresponds to FIG. 181 in the twenty-fifth embodiment.
FIG. 233 shows the second reel pattern arrangement table (TBL_PICARG_2) in the twenty-eighth embodiment, and corresponds to FIG. 185 in the twenty-fifth embodiment.
Furthermore, FIG. 234 is a diagram showing the third reel pattern arrangement table (TBL_PICARG_3) in the twenty-eighth embodiment, and corresponds to FIG. 189 in the twenty-fifth embodiment.

In FIG. 232, in the first symbol arrangement table (TBL_PICARG_1) of the left reel 31, the symbol data of each symbol is provided sequentially from the head address toward symbol numbers "0" to "20" in FIG. Along with the addresses "1200(H)" to "1228(H)"), the last two data are pattern data with pattern numbers "0" and "1". Therefore, the design data at address "122A(H)" is the same as the design data at address "1200(H)", and the design data at address "122C(H)" is the same as the design data at address "1201(H)". are identical.
For the second symbol array table (TBL_PICARG_2) of the middle reel 31 and the third symbol array table (TBL_PICARG_3) of the right reel 31, similarly to the first symbol array table (TBL_PICARG_1), the symbol number "0" , symbol data of symbol number "1", ..., symbol data of symbol number "20", symbol data of symbol number "0", and symbol data of symbol number "1" are arranged.

Then, for example, when the left reel 31 stops, when "Bell" with symbol number "0" on the upper row, "Replay" with symbol number "1" on the middle row, and "Blank" with symbol number "2" on the lower row,
_WK_PIC_LFT1 = 00001000 (B), 00000001 (B) (Bell)
_WK_PIC_LFT2 = 00000011 (B), 00000001 (B) (replay)
_WK_PIC_LFT3=00000000(B), 00000000(B) (blank)
is stored.
The same applies when the middle reel 31 and the right reel 31 are stopped.
Further, when each reel 31 is stopped, the following method can be mentioned as a method for storing symbol data in each storage area.
(Example 1) Method based on the upper row For example, when the left reel 31 is stopped, the address corresponding to the symbol data of the symbol to be stopped on the upper row is specified. Specifically, when the address corresponding to the pattern data of the pattern to be stopped on the upper row is "1200 (H)", the pattern data stored at the address "1200 (H)" is stored in "_WK_PIC_LFT1". do.
Next, in "_WK_PIC_LFT2", the pattern data stored at the address "1202 (H)" obtained by adding "2 (H)" to the address "1200 (H)" is stored.

Furthermore, in "_WK_PIC_LFT3", the pattern data stored at the address "1204 (H)" obtained by adding "4 (H)" to the address "1200 (H)" is stored.
When the symbol number of the symbol to be stopped on the upper row is "0", the symbol data stored at the address "1200 (H)" is used instead of the symbol data stored at the address "122A (H)". do. Similarly, when the symbol number of the symbol to be stopped on the upper row is "1", the symbol data stored at the address "1202(H)" is used instead of the symbol data stored at the address "122C(H)". use.

(Example 2) Method Based on the Lower Row For example, when the left reel 31 is stopped, the address corresponding to the symbol data of the symbol to be stopped on the lower row is specified. Specifically, when the address corresponding to the pattern data of the pattern stopped at the lower stage is "1204 (H)", the pattern data stored at the address "1204 (H)" is stored in "_WK_PIC_LFT3". do.
Next, in "_WK_PIC_LFT2", the pattern data stored at the address "1202 (H)" obtained by subtracting "2 (H)" from the address "1204 (H)" is stored.
Further, "_WK_PIC_LFT1" stores the pattern data stored at the address "1200(H)" obtained by subtracting "4(H)" from the above address "1204(H)".

When the pattern number of the pattern stopped at the lower stage is "0", the pattern data stored at address "122A(H)" is used instead of the pattern data stored at address "1200(H)". do. Similarly, when the symbol number of the symbol to be stopped on the upper row is "1", the symbol data stored at the address "122C(H)" is used instead of the symbol data stored at the address "1202(H)". use.
In any of the above examples 1 and 2, it is possible to acquire symbol data of other stages for each reel 31 based on symbol data of one stage.
Then, as shown in FIGS. 232 to 234, the symbol combination data exceeding the number of symbol numbers are stored (the symbol combination data of symbol number 0 is stored again after the symbol combination data of symbol number 20, and then the symbol combination data of symbol number 0 is stored again. Next, the pattern combination data of pattern number 1 is stored again), for example, even if the pattern of pattern number 0 stops in the lower row, the pattern combination of pattern number 20 will stop in the middle row. Data and symbol combination data of symbol number 19 to be stopped on the upper stage can be easily obtained.

Next, a method for specifying symbol combination data to stop on an activated line will be described.
For example, the symbol data of the left reel 31 of the symbol combination data "_WK_PIC_L1" of the active line L1 is "_WK_PIC_L1_L", the symbol data of the middle reel 31 is "_WK_PIC_L1_C", and the symbol data of the right reel 31 is "_WK_PIC_L1_R". Other effective lines L2 to L5 are provided in the same manner.
First, as a result of the winning combination lottery, "Bell" - "Bell" - "Bell" is determined as the winning number that can be stopped on the active line, and when the symbol of symbol number 20 is passing through the middle stage of the left reel 31. After that, the middle stop switch 42 is operated while the symbol of symbol number 1 is passing through the middle stage of the middle reel 31, and then the symbol of symbol number 3 is moved to the middle stage of the right reel 31. When the right stop switch 42 is operated while all the reels 31 are stopped,
"1" (upper left): Pattern number "0" (bell)
"2" (middle left): Symbol number "1" (replay)
"3" (bottom left): Design number "2" (blank)
"4" (middle upper row): Pattern number "2" (bell)
"5" (middle middle row): Design number "3" (blue cherry)
"6" (middle and lower row): Pattern number "4" (replay)
"7" (upper right row): Design number "4" (bell)
"8" (middle right): Pattern number "5" (replay)
"9" (bottom right): Design number "6" (red cherry)
is assumed to stop.

In this case, the pattern data stored in the storage area corresponding to each stop position is
_WK_PIC_LFT1: 00001000 (B), 00000000 (B)
_WK_PIC_LFT2: 00000011 (B), 00000001 (B)
_WK_PIC_LFT3: 00000000 (B), 00000000 (B)
_WK_PIC_CEN1: 00111000 (B), 00000001 (B)
_WK_PIC_CEN2: 00110000 (B), 00000000 (B)
_WK_PIC_CEN3: 00110011 (B), 00000000 (B)
_WK_PIC_RIG1: 00111001 (B), 00000001 (B)
_WK_PIC_RIG2: 00110010 (B), 00000000 (B)
_WK_PIC_RIG3: 00110000 (B), 00000000 (B)
becomes.

For the effective line L1,
_WK_PIC_L1_L = _WK_PIC_LFT1: 00001000 (B), 00000000 (B)
_WK_PIC_L1_C = _WK_PIC_CEN2: 00110000 (B), 00000000 (B)
_WK_PIC_L1_R = _WK_PIC_RIG3: 00110000 (B), 00000000 (B)
becomes.
Then, the value obtained by performing the AND (logical product) operation between the upper bytes (three) and the AND operation between the lower bytes (three) is set to "_WK_PIC_L1".
Specifically, "00001000(B)" AND "00110000(B)" AND "00110000(B)" are set as upper bytes.
Also, "00000000(B)" AND "00000000(B)" AND "00000000(B)" are converted into lower bytes. Let the calculation result be "_WK_PIC_L1".
therefore,
_WK_PIC_L1: 00000000 (B), 00000000 (B)
becomes.

Furthermore, "_WK_ALL_PIC" is updated by OR (logical addition) operation of this data and "_WK_ALL_PIC". "_WK_ALL_PIC" is "0" before the first operation.
In the OR operation, an OR operation between upper 1-byte data and an OR operation between lower 1-byte data are performed.
Therefore,
_WK_ALL_PIC = 00000000 (B), 00000000 (B)
becomes.

Next, for the valid line L2,
_WK_PIC_L2_L = _WK_PIC_LFT1: 00001000 (B), 00000000 (B)
_WK_PIC_L2_C = _WK_PIC_CEN1: 00111000 (B), 00000001 (B)
_WK_PIC_L2_R = _WK_PIC_RIG1: 00111001 (B), 00000001 (B)
becomes.
therefore,
_WK_PIC_L2: 00001000 (B), 00000000 (B)
becomes.
Also, "_WK_ALL_PIC" after updating ("_WK_ALL_PIC" and "_WK_ALL_PIC" when valid line L1 are ORed) are:
_WK_ALL_PIC = 00001000 (B), 00000000 (B)
becomes.

For effective line L3,
_WK_PIC_L3_L = _WK_PIC_LFT2: 00000011 (B), 00000001 (B)
_WK_PIC_L3_C = _WK_PIC_CEN2: 00110000 (B), 00000000 (B)
_WK_PIC_L3_R = _WK_PIC_RIG2: 00110010 (B), 00000000 (B)
becomes.
therefore,
_WK_PIC_L3: 00000000 (B), 00000000 (B)
becomes.
Also, "_WK_ALL_PIC" after updating is
_WK_ALL_PIC = 00001000 (B), 00000000 (B)
becomes.

For effective line L4,
_WK_PIC_L4_L = _WK_PIC_LFT3: 00000000 (B), 00000000 (B)
_WK_PIC_L4_C = _WK_PIC_CEN3: 00110011 (B), 00000000 (B)
_WK_PIC_L4_R = _WK_PIC_RIG3: 00110000 (B), 00000000 (B)
becomes.
therefore,
_WK_PIC_L4: 00000000 (B), 00000000 (B)
becomes.
Also, "_WK_ALL_PIC" after updating is
_WK_ALL_PIC = 00001000 (B), 00000000 (B)
becomes.

For effective line L5,
_WK_PIC_L5_L = _WK_PIC_LFT3: 00000000 (B), 00000000 (B)
_WK_PIC_L5_C = _WK_PIC_CEN2: 00110000 (B), 00000000 (B)
_WK_PIC_L5_R = _WK_PIC_RIG1: 00111001 (B), 00000001 (B)
becomes.
therefore,
_WK_PIC_L5: 00000000 (B), 00000000 (B)
becomes.
Also, "_WK_ALL_PIC" after updating is
_WK_ALL_PIC = 00001000 (B), 00000000 (B)
becomes.
As described above, "_WK_ALL_PIC" is calculated when the symbol combination data of the five activated lines L1 to L5 are calculated (synthesized), and this symbol combination data becomes data of the symbol combination that stops on any of the activated lines. .

FIG. 235 is a diagram showing role definitions in the twenty-eighth embodiment.
An AND (logical product) operation is performed one by one on the upper byte of "_WK_ALL_PIC" and the definition of a small win or a replay win. If not, it is determined that the role has won.
Also, the low-order byte of "_WK_ALL_PIC" and the role definition of the character are ANDed (logical product) operation one by one, and if "0", it is determined that the character has not won, and "0" is obtained. If not, it is determined that the item has won a prize.

In addition, the above judgment may be performed for all small wins, replays, and accessories, but if the specification does not have duplicate winnings, when it is determined that the win has been won, subsequent Calculation may be aborted.
In the above example, the high-order byte of "_WK_ALL_PIC" is "00001000 (B)", so when performing an AND operation with the definition of a small win or a replay, the result of an AND operation with the definition of a small win B is "00001000 (B)". ”≠“0”, and it is determined that the small winning combination B has won.
Also, since the lower byte of "_WK_ALL_PIC" is "00000000(B)", the result is "0" even if it is ANDed with any role definition.

Also, as a result of the lottery, if it is a game in which the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination C (red cherry) or the small winning combination D (blue cherry) is determined to be a winning number that can be stopped and displayed, if it is a specification that there is no duplicate winning. , When the left reel 31 is stopped, payout is made regardless of whether "red cherry" or "blue cherry" stops at "1" (left upper row), "2" (left middle row) or "3" (left lower row). The number of sheets is uniform (for example, two sheets).
On the other hand, as a result of the winning lottery, in the game in which the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination C or the small winning combination D is determined to be a winning number that can be stopped and displayed, if the specifications are such that there is a duplicate winning, the left reel 31 is stopped. Sometimes, if "red cherry" or "blue cherry" stops at "2" (middle left row), it will be a single win on activated line L3. On the other hand, if "red cherry" or "blue cherry" stops at "1" (upper left), double winning of activated lines L1 and L2 occurs. Similarly, if "red cherry" or "blue cherry" stops at "3" (lower left), double winning of activated lines L4 and L5 occurs.
In the case of a single win, two coins are paid out, and in the case of a duplicate (double) win, four coins are paid out.
As a method of calculating the number of payouts in such a case, the following method can be mentioned.

(First method)
The small winning combination C (red cherry) and the small winning combination D (blue cherry) are prevented from winning independently (“red cherry” and “blue cherry” do not stop in the middle left row), and only double winning (left reel 31) When "red cherry" or "blue cherry" stops, it stops at either the upper left stage or the left lower stage).
In this case, when the number of payouts for winning the small winning combination C or D is set to "2", the number of payouts for winning the small winning combination C or small winning combination D is always doubled. For example, the number of sheets may be set to "4".

(Second method)
When the small winning combination C or the small winning combination D is won, the stop position of the "blue cherry" or "red cherry" symbol on the left reel 31 is determined.
For example, judging the symbol data of "_WK_PIC_LFT1", "_WK_PIC_LFT2", and "_WK_PIC_LFT3", and when the symbol data of "_WK_PIC_LFT2" (middle left) is the symbol data corresponding to the minor winning combination C or D, Payment will be made in units of one.
On the other hand, when the symbol data of "_WK_PIC_LFT1" or "_WK_PIC_LFT3" (upper left or lower left) is symbol data corresponding to a small winning combination C or a small winning combination D, four coins may be paid out.

(Third method)
For example, the winning combination and the number of payouts are determined for each activated line.
When "(red or blue) cherry" stops in the middle left row when the left reel 31 stops, only the symbol combination data of "_WK_PIC_L3" becomes data other than "0". As a result, it is determined that two coins are to be paid out.
On the other hand, when "(red or blue) cherry" stops in the upper left row when the left reel 31 stops, the symbol combination data of "_WK_PIC_L1" and the symbol combination data of "_WK_PIC_L2" are data other than "0". Become. As a result, it is determined to pay out 2 cards based on the symbol combination data "_WK_PIC_L1", and it is determined to pay out 2 cards based on the symbol combination data "_WK_PIC_L2". Then, the two are summed up to make a payout of 4 cards.

When set in this manner, for example, it can also be used in the case where the small winning combination C or the small winning combination D (cherry) and the small winning combination A (bell) are set to win in duplicate.
For example, when the left reel 31 is stopped, "red cherry" with symbol number 3 stops on the upper row and "bell" - "bell" - "bell" stops on the effective line L3, the payout number of bells is is assumed to be 8,
“_WK_PIC_L1” symbol combination data: 2 payouts “_WK_PIC_L2” symbol combination data: 2 payouts “_WK_PIC_L3” symbol combination data: 8 payouts, for a total of 12 payouts.

Further, it is assumed that the upper limit of the number of payouts in one game is set to 15, for example, and that the number of payouts for winning a single small combination C or small combination D is set to 8.
In this case, when the small winning combination C or the small winning combination D is won alone, 8 coins are paid out.
Also, when the small winning combination C or the small winning combination D is won twice, the number is "8×2=16". Specifically, there is a method in which a comparison operation is performed between the operation result "16" of "8+8" and the upper limit value "15", and if the upper limit value is exceeded, the upper limit value is set.

Furthermore, in the twenty-eighth embodiment, the memory areas "_WK_PIC_LFT1" to "_WK_PIC_RIG3", "_WK_PIC_L1" to "_WK_PIC_L3", and "_WK_ALL_PIC" are initialized, for example, after the payout process is completed, and the next This is until the stop operation of the reels 31 becomes possible in the game. For example, it may be set to a predetermined timing after the payout process is completed, a predetermined timing after the start switch 41 is operated, or a predetermined timing after the reels 31 start rotating.

Furthermore, in the twenty-eighth embodiment, the nine storage areas "_WK_PIC_LFT1" to "_WK_PIC_RIG3" and "_WK_ALL_PIC" shown in FIG. can be omitted.
In this case, there is a method of calculating as follows.
First, a value obtained by performing an AND (logical product) operation between the upper bytes (three) of "_WK_PIC_LFT1", "_WK_PIC_CEN2", and "_WK_PIC_RIG3" and an AND operation between the lower bytes (three) is stored in, for example, the HL register (eg store high byte in H register, low byte in L register value).
Furthermore, "_WK_ALL_PIC" is updated by OR (logical addition) operation of this data and "_WK_ALL_PIC". The initial value of "_WK_ALL_PIC" is "0".
In the OR operation, an OR operation between upper 1-byte data and an OR operation between lower 1-byte data are performed.
As a result, the symbol combination data on the activated line L1 is reflected in "_WK_ALL_PIC".

Next, perform the AND (logical product) operation between the upper bytes (three) of "_WK_PIC_LFT1", "_WK_PIC_CEN1", and "_WK_PIC_RIG1" and the AND operation between the lower bytes (three) to the HL register. Remember.
Furthermore, "_WK_ALL_PIC" is updated by OR (logical addition) operation of this data and "_WK_ALL_PIC".
As a result, the symbol combination data on the activated line L2 is reflected in "_WK_ALL_PIC".
Next, the value obtained by performing AND (logical AND) operation between the upper bytes (three) of "_WK_PIC_LFT2", "_WK_PIC_CEN2", and "_WK_PIC_RIG2", and the AND operation between the lower bytes (three), is stored in the HL register. Remember.
Furthermore, "_WK_ALL_PIC" is updated by OR (logical addition) operation of this data and "_WK_ALL_PIC".
As a result, the symbol combination data on the activated line L3 is reflected in "_WK_ALL_PIC".

Next, the value obtained by performing AND (logical product) operation between the upper bytes (three) of "_WK_PIC_LFT3", "_WK_PIC_CEN3", and "_WK_PIC_RIG3" and the AND operation between the lower bytes (three) is stored in the HL register. Remember.
Furthermore, "_WK_ALL_PIC" is updated by OR (logical addition) operation of this data and "_WK_ALL_PIC".
As a result, the symbol combination data on the activated line L4 is reflected in "_WK_ALL_PIC".
Next, the value obtained by performing the AND (logical product) operation between the upper bytes (three) of "_WK_PIC_LFT3", "_WK_PIC_CEN2", and "_WK_PIC_RIG1", and the AND operation between the lower bytes (three), is stored in the HL register. Remember.
Furthermore, "_WK_ALL_PIC" is updated by OR (logical addition) operation of this data and "_WK_ALL_PIC".
As a result, the symbol combination data on the activated line L5 is reflected in "_WK_ALL_PIC".
By executing the calculation as described above, it is not necessary to provide the storage areas "_WK_PIC_L1" to "_WK_PIC_L5", so the storage area of the RWM 53 can be reduced.

Although the twenty-fifth to twenty-eighth embodiments of the present invention have been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments, and various modifications such as those described below are possible.
(1) For example, in the twenty-fifth embodiment, the stop symbol data (_WK_STOP_PIC) is composed of 9 pieces (1st group to 9th group) based on the number of 1BB, RB, replay, and small combination. Various settings can be made according to the type and number of wins.
For example, when the number of winning combinations is 8 or less, the stop symbol data can be composed of 1-byte data.

In addition, in the twenty-fifth embodiment, in order to separate the replay and the small winning combination, the D3 to D7 bits of the stopping symbol data (fourth group) are not used, and the bits corresponding to the small winning combination 01 and later are used as the stopping symbol data (the fourth group). Group 5) and after. However, not limited to this, the D3 bit of the stop pattern data (fourth group) is set to the small winning pattern 01 winning pattern, the D4 bit is set to the small winning pattern 02 winning pattern, . . . May save space.
In this case, when calculating the payout number data, the data of the stop symbol data (fourth group) and "11111000 (B)" are AND-operated, and the data relating to the replay operation symbol is masked. .

Or, conversely,
Stop design data (5th group): Small combination 01 winning design to small combination 08 winning design (15 payouts)
Stopped pattern data (6th group): Small winning pattern 09 to small winning pattern 12 (15 payouts)
Stopped pattern data (7th group): 13 small prize winning patterns to 20 small winning prize patterns (3 payouts)
Stopped pattern data (8th group): Small winning pattern 21 to small winning pattern 24 (3 payouts)
Stopped pattern data (9th group): 25 small winning patterns to 32 small winning patterns (1 payout)
Stopped pattern data (10th group): 33 small winning patterns to 34 small winning patterns (1 payout)
, it is also possible to separate one stop symbol data so as not to include data with different numbers of payouts.
In this case, it is preferable that the addresses of the stop symbol data (fifth group) to the stop symbol data (tenth group) are continuous.

(2) In the specified data acquisition (M_SELDAT_SET) shown in FIG. 201, the flow chart is terminated when it is determined that there is specified data in step S1118. However, for example, when the specification has a duplicate winning of a small winning combination, even if it is determined that there is specified data, the flow chart is not terminated, and the number of payouts is determined for all the stop symbol data. On the other hand, in the case where there is no duplicate winning of small winnings, as shown in FIG. 201, the flow chart can be terminated when it is determined that there is designated data.
In addition, in the case of specifications having duplicate winnings of small wins, when the maximum number of payouts in one game is set to 15, the following method can be used.
Firstly, when it is determined that a 15-card combination (maximum number of payouts in one game) such as a small combination 01 has been won, acquisition of designated data is terminated in the same manner as in the present embodiment.

Second, the number of payouts is determined for all the stop symbol data, and each time it is determined that a small winning combination has been won, the number of payouts is added up and stored (for example, the number of payout data (_NB_PAY_MEDAL) or A stored in a general-purpose register such as a register), and finally, when the total value exceeds "15 (D)", the number of payouts is corrected to "15 (D)" (set to the upper limit). be done. Alternatively, each time it is determined that a small winning combination has been won, the number of payouts is added up, and it is determined whether the total value exceeds "15 (D)", and the total value exceeds "15 (D)". When the number of coins to be paid out is corrected to "15 (D)", acquisition of specified data is terminated, and when the total value does not exceed "15 (D)", acquisition of specified data is continued.

(3) In the twenty-seventh embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 232 to 234, the address of each symbol combination data in the reel symbol arrangement table consists of 2 bytes. However, not limited to this, when the number of symbol combinations is 8 or less, it can be configured from 1 byte.

(4) In the twenty-fifth embodiment, after execution of the stop symbol set (FIG. 195), the following processes may be executed before transitioning to one-line display determination (FIG. 200).
In the example shown in FIG. 173, the operating state flag is not provided with replay, but as shown in FIG. 35 (11th embodiment), a flag relating to replay is provided in the operating state flag, for example, the D0 bit.
After all the reels 31 have stopped, the operating state flags are checked, and when the operating state flags relating to replay, 1BB, and RB are ON, the process does not proceed to 1-line display determination (FIG. 200). As a result, it is possible to proceed to the one-line display determination only when a small winning combination is won or when a winning combination is not won.

(5) In FIG. 229, a difference data storage area is provided at the final address of the pattern arrangement table. However, the difference data may of course be stored outside the pattern arrangement table.

(6) In FIG. 173, the operation status flag (_FL_ACTION) of the address "F00C(H)" becomes "1" when it is determined that there is a winning of a small combination (a combination with a payout), and if there is no winning. A bit area that becomes "0" when determined may be provided. In that case, it is determined whether or not the data in the bit area is "1" in the game during the RB operation, and if it is "1", the number of wins during the RB operation of the address "F010 (H)" is determined. is updated (for example, "1" is subtracted or "1" is added).

(7) As shown in step S1017 of FIG. 194, the stop position is determined based on the rise data of the stop switch . Here, it is also possible to employ level data instead of rising data.
However, if level data is used instead of start-up data, for example, the stop switch 42 is continuously operated before the reel 31 reaches a constant speed. At the timing when it becomes acceptable, the reel 31 corresponding to the continuously operated stop switch 42 is controlled to be stopped. Therefore, the reels 31 stop regardless of the skill of the player. In this case, by adjusting the timing at which the stop operation of the reels 31 can be accepted, it becomes possible to stop a symbol combination (for example, a 1BB symbol combination) that requires eye pressing regardless of the skill of the player. In some cases. On the other hand, if the stop position is determined based on the rising data, the above problems do not arise. Therefore, from such a point of view, it can be said that it is preferable to determine the stop position based on the rising data.

(8) In the example of FIG. 194, when it is determined to determine the stop position based on the start-up data of the stop switch 42 (when "Yes" in step S1017), the stop position is determined and the Until the process (stop design set in step S1024 in FIG. 194) including the updating of the design data (step S1035 in FIG. 195) is completed, the interrupt waiting process is executed so as not to enter the interrupt process (step S1011). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and instead of interrupt waiting processing, interrupt processing may be prohibited during that period so that interrupt processing is not executed.

(9) In the twenty-fifth embodiment, the stop symbol data is updated from the ninth group. However, it is not limited to this, and may be executed from the first group.
Specifically, in FIG. 195, "9" is set in the B register in step S1032, and "1" is subtracted from the B register value in step S1036. is set, and in step S1036, a process of adding "1" to the B register value is executed. In this case, in step S1036, when the B register value after adding "1" becomes "10(D)", the process may be terminated.
Note that the above also applies to the display determination process (FIG. 227) in the twenty-sixth embodiment. Specifically, in FIG. 227, "9" is set in the B register in step S1181, "1" is subtracted from the B register value in step S1195, and whether or not the B register value is "0" is determined in step S1196. judged. Instead, "1" is set in the B register at step S1181, "1" is added to the B register value at step S1195, and whether or not the B register value is "10(D)" is checked at step S1196. When the B register value becomes "10(D)", the processing should be terminated.

(10) In the above embodiment, the slot machine 10 was taken as an example of a game machine, but the slot machine 10 is a "rotary game machine" installed at the No. 4 branch to which the Entertainment Business Law applies. (so-called "pachi-slot gaming machines"), but can also be applied to, for example, casino machines. Furthermore, regardless of whether or not the game machine is a reel-type game machine, it can also be applied to a management game machine in which the game machine does not use medals.
(11) All the embodiments and various modifications described in this specification, including the twenty-fifth to twenty-eighth embodiments, are not limited to being implemented alone, but can be implemented in combination as appropriate.

<29th Embodiment>
In the following description of the twenty-ninth to thirty-sixth embodiments, the left reel 31 may be referred to as the first reel 31, the middle reel 31 may be referred to as the second reel 31, and the right reel 31 may be referred to as the third reel 31.
Further, in the description of the twenty-ninth to thirty-sixth embodiments, the left stop switch 42 is called the first stop switch 42, the middle stop switch 42 is called the second stop switch 42, and the right stop switch 42 is called the third stop switch 42. There are cases where it is called.

Furthermore, in the description of the twenty-ninth to thirty-sixth embodiments, "#" refers to all of "1" to "3" and to any one of "1" to "3". have.
Furthermore, in FIGS. 237, 243, 249, 253, and 254, which will be described later, the numbers shown in parentheses in the column of "address" indicate the number of bytes of the storage area.
In FIGS. 237, 243, 249, 253 and 254, which will be described later, "D0" to "D7" indicate bits D0 to D7 of 8-bit data, respectively.

In the twenty-ninth embodiment, the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning is not executed before the predetermined period for performing the four-phase excitation output for stopping the reels 31 has passed, and after the predetermined period has passed, to execute the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY).
Here, "4-phase excitation output" has the same meaning as "4-phase excitation state" in the fourth embodiment and FIG.
Further, the "predetermined period of four-phase excitation output" has the same meaning as the "time from the start of the four-phase excitation state to the end of the four-phase excitation state" in the fourth embodiment and FIG.

Also in this embodiment, as in the other embodiments, the slot machine 10 includes three reels 31 (left reel 31, middle reel 31, right reel 31) and three reels corresponding to each reel 31. There are provided stop switches 42 (left stop switch 42, middle stop switch 42, right stop switch 42).
Also, the symbol arrangement of the reels 31, the effective lines, the type of combination, the symbol combination of the combination, the number of payouts, the condition device, the winning combination, the RT, and the main game state are the same as in the twenty-third embodiment.
Furthermore, also in this embodiment, as in the fourth embodiment and the twenty-third embodiment, the motor 32 for rotating the reel 31 is a four-phase stepping motor. A 1-2 phase excitation output that alternates 1 phase excitation and 2 phase excitation is performed, and when stopping the reel 31 and the motor 32, a 4 phase excitation output that simultaneously excites the 4 phases is performed.

Furthermore, also in this embodiment, as in the twenty-fifth embodiment, all motor index passage checks are performed in step S1013 of the reel stop acceptance check (M_STOP_CHK) (FIG. 194) in the main process (M_MAIN).
Here, for all the reels 31, after the #th reel motor index has changed, the first reel pattern number (for passing position) (_NB_RL1_PASPIC) (Fig. 135), the second reel pattern number (for passing position) (_NB_RL2_PASPIC) (Fig. 136) and 3rd reel pattern number (for passing position) (_NB_RL3_PASPIC) (Fig. 137) are all values other than "FF (H) (11111111 (B))". Therefore, when "1" is added to the result of the sequential logical sum (OR) operation of these values, a value other than "0" is obtained.

Further, in step S1014 in FIG. 194, it is determined whether or not it is possible to accept the operation of the stop switch 42 (stop acceptance). When the calculation result of step S1013 is a value other than "0", the result is "Yes" in step S1014. After that, when the stop switch 42 is operated, it becomes "Yes" in step S1017 of FIG. 194, and the operation of the stop switch 42 is accepted in step S1022.

Also in this embodiment, as described in the fourth embodiment and the twenty-third embodiment, when the stop switch 42 is operated (the stop button 42a of the stop switch 42 is pushed), the detection sensor 42e is turned on from off. Then, the signal of the stop switch 42 is turned on from off, and "1" is stored in the input port level data A (_PT_IN_A_LV) (FIG. 133) of the address "F012 (H)".
For example, when the left stop switch 42 is operated, the signal of the left stop switch 42 is turned on from off and "1" is stored in the D0 bit of the input port level data A (_PT_IN_A_LV). At this time, if the middle stop switch 42, the right stop switch 42, and the start switch 41 are not operated, the input port level data A (_PT_IN_A_LV) becomes "00000001 (B)".

Further, when the middle stop switch 42 is operated, the signal of the middle stop switch 42 is turned on from off, and "1" is stored in the D1 bit of the input port level data A (_PT_IN_A_LV). At this time, if the left stop switch 42, the right stop switch 42, and the start switch 41 are not operated, the input port level data A (_PT_IN_A_LV) becomes "00000010 (B)".

Furthermore, when the left stop switch 42 and the middle stop switch 42 are operated, the signals of both the left stop switch 42 and the middle stop switch 42 are turned on from off, and the input port level data A (_PT_IN_A_LV) is generated. A "1" is stored in both the D0 and D1 bits of each. At this time, if the right stop switch 42 and the start switch 41 are not operated, the input port level data A (_PT_IN_A_LV) will be "00000011 (B)".

When the input port level data A (_PT_IN_A_LV) changes from "0" to "1" and "1" is stored in the input port rising data A (_PT_IN_A_UP) of the address "F017 (H)", the stop switch 42 is determined to have been accepted.
For example, when the D0 bit of the input port level data A (_PT_IN_A_LV) at the time of the previous interrupt processing is "0" and the D0 bit of the input port level data A (_PT_IN_A_LV) at the time of the current interrupt processing is "1" , "1" is stored in the D0 bit of the input port rising data A (_PT_IN_A_UP). Accordingly, it is determined that the operation of the left stop switch 42 has been accepted.

Also, when the D1 bit of the input port level data A (_PT_IN_A_LV) at the time of the previous interrupt processing is "0" and the D1 bit of the input port level data A (_PT_IN_A_LV) at the time of the current interrupt processing is "1" , "1" is stored in the D1 bit of the input port rising data A (_PT_IN_A_UP). Accordingly, it is determined that the operation of the middle stop switch 42 has been accepted.

Furthermore, both the D0 and D1 bits of the input port level data A (_PT_IN_A_LV) at the time of the previous interrupt processing are "0", and at the time of the current interrupt processing the D0 and D1 bits of the input port level data A (_PT_IN_A_LV) When both D1 bits are "1", "1" is stored in both D0 and D1 bits of input port rising data A (_PT_IN_A_UP). Accordingly, it is determined that the two operations of the left stop switch 42 and the middle stop switch 42 have been accepted at the same time.

It should be noted that in the present embodiment, similarly to the twenty-third embodiment, the period of interrupt processing is set to "1.117 ms". When the signals of both the left stop switch 42 and the middle stop switch 42 turn from off to on during this "1.117 ms" period, both the D0 and D1 bits of the input port rising data A (_PT_IN_A_UP) are set to " 1" is stored, and it is determined that two operations of the left stop switch 42 and the middle stop switch 42 have been accepted at the same time.

Also, when the stop switch 42 is operated, the signal of the stop switch 42 is changed from off to on, but it may be changed from on to off. That is, the signal of the stop switch 42 is not limited to active high, and may be active low. Then, when the signal of the stop switch 42 changes from ON to OFF, it may be determined that the operation of the stop switch 42 has been accepted.
That is, "the operation of the stop switch 42 is accepted" means that the signal of the stop switch 42 is turned on from off when it is active high, and the signal of the stop switch 42 is turned on when it is active low. means from on to off. This applies not only to the stop switch 42 but also to other switches.

Then, in step S1022 of FIG. 194, when the operation of the stop switch 42 is accepted ("1" is stored in the input port startup data A (_PT_IN_A_UP)), the process proceeds to the next step S1023.
In step S1023, "4 (D)" indicating "deceleration start" is stored in the #th reel driving state (_WK_RL#_STS) (FIGS. 135 to 137).

Further, in step S1023, the stop position of the reel 31 is determined based on the winning combination lottery result of the current game and the position of the reel 31 at the moment when the operation of the stop switch 42 is accepted. The symbol number obtained is stored in #th reel symbol number (for stop position) (_NB_RL#_STPPIC) (FIGS. 135 to 137).

For example, when the winning number "10" is won by the winning lottery means 61, the small winning combination A1 condition device (Fig. 124) is actuated to cause the small winning combination 01 to pay out 15 coins or the small winning combination 13 to pay out 3 coins. Any one of ~17 can win a prize.
Here, when the small combination A1 condition device is activated during the general game of the 1BB game (at the time of 1BB operation) and the stop switch 42 is operated in the correct order (left, middle, right), the small combination 01 (15 sheets When the stop switch 42 is operated in the incorrect pressing order (the pressing order other than the correct pressing order), one of the minor winning combinations 13 to 17 (three-card winning combination) wins.
On the other hand, when the role is not activated, when the small role A1 condition device is activated, there is no correct pressing order, and even if all are in the pressing order, one of the small roles 13 to 17 (three roles) Win a prize.
Then, at the moment when the operation of the stop switch 42 is accepted when the small winning combination A1 condition device is activated when the winning combination is not activated, for example, a symbol forming the small winning combination 13 is displayed within the range of the maximum number of moving frames from the effective line. is located, the symbol number of that symbol is stored in #th reel symbol number (for stop position) (_NB_RL#_STPPIC).

Furthermore, in step S909 of the reel drive control (I_REEL_CTL) (FIG. 154) in the interrupt process (I_INTR) executed after the process of step S1023, the # reel pattern number (for passing position) (_NB_RL#_PASPIC) and When it is determined that the #th reel pattern number (for the stop position) (_NB_RL#_STPPIC) has become the same value, the #th reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR#) (Fig. 134) is set to deceleration pulse data " 00001111 (B)" (4-phase ON) is stored, and "1 (D)" indicating "deceleration" is stored in the # reel drive state (_WK_RL#_STS) (FIGS. 135 to 137). .
Then, in the port output process of step S462 in the interrupt process (I_INTR) executed after that, based on "00001111 (B)" stored in #th reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR#), φ1 of motor 32 is A 4-phase excitation output is performed to simultaneously excite the 4 phases of .about..phi.4. As a result, the motor 32 is braked to stop the rotation of the reel 31 and the motor 32 .

In this way, when #th reel pattern number (for passing position) (_NB_RL#_PASPIC) and #th reel pattern number (for stop position) (_NB_RL#_STPPIC) become the same value, #th reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR) #) stores pulse data "00001111 (B)" during deceleration, and four-phase excitation output is performed.
Therefore, even if the operation of the stop switch 42 is accepted, the four-phase excitation output is not immediately performed.

In addition, it is not limited to when the # # reel pattern number (for passing position) (_NB_RL#_PASPIC) and # # reel pattern number (for stop position) (_NB_RL#_STPPIC) are the same value. The symbol number (for passing position) (_NB_RL#_PASPIC) and the # reel symbol number (for stop position) (_NB_RL#_STPPIC) are the same value, and the step number (_NB_RL#_STEP) of 1 symbol on reel # 13 ) reaches a predetermined value (for example, "3"), the deceleration pulse data "00001111 (B)" is stored in #th reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR#), and the 4-phase excitation output is may be performed.

Further, in this embodiment, the 4-phase excitation output is performed every interrupt process of "1.117 ms" while "00001111 (B)" is stored in the #th reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR#).
Furthermore, at the start of deceleration, "90 (D)" corresponding to the address "1050 (H)" (the deceleration pulse output counter ) (FIG. 156) is stored, and thereafter, the value of the #th reel drive pulse output counter (_CT_RL#_PLSOUT) is decremented by "1" every two interrupts.

Then, when the #th reel drive pulse output counter (_CT_RL#_PLSOUT) reaches "0", the #th reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR#) stores "00000000 (B)", which is the pulse data at the time of stop. At the same time, "0 (D)" indicating "stop" is stored in the #th reel driving state (_WK_RL#_STS). This completes the four-phase excitation output.

In this way, while the value of the #th reel drive pulse output counter (_CT_RL#_PLSOUT) is "1" or more and "00001111 (B)" is stored in the #th reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR#), , the 4-phase excitation output continues, the value of the #th reel drive pulse output counter (_CT_RL#_PLSOUT) becomes "0", and "00000000 (B)" is stored in the #th reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR#). Then, the 4-phase excitation output stops.
In addition, the value of the #th reel drive pulse output counter (_CT_RL#_PLSOUT) becomes "0", the stop pulse data "00000000 (B)" is stored in the #th reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR#), and the #th A state in which "0 (D)" indicating "stop" is stored in the reel drive state (_WK_RL#_STS) and the four-phase excitation output is terminated is a state in which the reel 31 is stopped.

In addition, in this embodiment, the period of interrupt processing is set to "1.117 ms", and the value of #th reel driving pulse output counter (_CT_RL#_PLSOUT) is subtracted by "1" every two interrupts. .
Therefore, it takes "1.117×2×90=201.06ms" to change the value of the #th reel drive pulse output counter (_CT_RL#_PLSOUT) from "90(D)" to "0(D)". Therefore, the four-phase excitation output continues for "201.06 ms", and the four-phase excitation output ends when "201.06 ms" elapses.
That is, in this embodiment, the "predetermined period" for performing the four-phase excitation output for stopping the reel 31 corresponds to "201.06 ms".

The period of interrupt processing is not limited to "1.117 ms", and the subtraction of the value of the #th reel drive pulse output counter (_CT_RL#_PLSOUT) is not limited to every two interrupts.
For example, the period of interrupt processing may be set to "2.235 ms" and the value of the #th reel drive pulse output counter (_CT_RL#_PLSOUT) may be decremented by "1" for each interrupt.

Also, when the stop switch 42 is released (the player's hand is released from the stop button 42a of the stop switch 42 that has been pushed in, and the stop button 42a returns to its original position (the position shown in FIG. 12(a))). , the detection sensor 42e changes from ON to OFF, the signal of the stop switch 42 changes from ON to OFF, and "0" is stored in the input port level data A (_PT_IN_A_LV) (Fig. 133) of the address "F012 (H)". be done.
That is, "the stop switch 42 is released" means that the signal of the stop switch 42 is turned off from on when it is active high, and the signal of the stop switch 42 is turned off when it is active low. means that it is turned on from This applies not only to the stop switch 42 but also to other switches.

In this embodiment, after the operation of the stop switch 42 corresponding to the reel 31 to be stopped last is accepted, before a predetermined period of four-phase excitation output for stopping the reel 31 to be stopped last elapses (For example, the timing at which the 4-phase excitation output is performed to stop the third reel 31 and the timing before the 4-phase excitation output is performed to stop the third reel 31) Even if the stop switch 42 corresponding to the stopped reel 31 is released, the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning is not executed. Execute the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY).
Therefore, the stop switch 42 corresponding to the reel 31 to be stopped last is released within a predetermined period during which the four-phase excitation output for stopping the reel 31 to be stopped last is performed (during the four-phase excitation output). Also, the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning is not executed, and the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning is executed after the predetermined period elapses (after the 4-phase excitation output ends).

Further, in the present embodiment, if the operation of any one of the start switch 41 and the three (left, middle, right) stop switches 42 has been accepted, the result in step S1307 of FIG. Since the processing after S291 does not proceed, the medal payout processing (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning is not executed regardless of whether or not the predetermined period for performing the four-phase excitation output for stopping the last reel 31 to be stopped has passed. .
Then, when a predetermined period of four-phase excitation output for stopping the last reel 31 has passed, and the start switch 41 and the three (left, middle, right) stop switches 42 are released, FIG. , step S1307 becomes "Yes", and the process proceeds to step S291 and thereafter, so that the display determination process and the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning can be executed.

FIG. 236 is a flowchart showing main processing (M_MAIN) in the twenty-ninth embodiment, and is a flowchart corresponding to FIG. 139 of the twenty-third embodiment.
In the flowchart of the twenty-ninth embodiment shown in FIG. 236, the step numbers different from those in FIG. 139 are underlined, and the same steps as in FIG. 139 are given the same step numbers.

Also, in the main processing (M_MAIN) of the twenty-ninth embodiment, the processing of steps S295 to S300 of FIG. 139 is executed, but the processing of steps S295 to S300 is omitted in FIG.
Differences from FIG. 139 will be mainly described below.

As shown in FIG. 236, in the twenty-ninth embodiment, after the reel stop acceptance check (M_STOP_CHK) in step S752 is executed, the process proceeds to step S1301, and the main control board 50 detects the address "F012 (H)" of the RWM 53. The data stored in the input port level data A (_PT_IN_A_LV) (FIG. 133) is stored in the A register. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S1302.

In step S1302, the main control board 50 performs a logical product (AND) operation of the A register value and the mask data "01000111 (B)", and stores the result in the A register. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S1303.
Here, the mask data "01000111(B)" used in step S1302 is data for masking (setting to "0") bit data other than the D0 bit, the D1 bit, the D2 bit, and the D6 bit. That is, by performing AND operation of input port level data A (_PT_IN_A_LV) and "01000111 (B)", bit D0 (left stop switch signal), bit D1 (middle stop switch signal), Bit data other than the D2 bit (right stop switch signal) and the D6 bit (start switch signal) can be masked (set to "0").

In step S1303, the main control board 50 logically sums (ORs) the A register value and the data stored in the first reel drive state (_WK_RL1_STS) (FIG. 135) at the address "F04D(H)" of the RWM 53. Perform an operation and store the result in the A register. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S1304.
In step S1304, the main control board 50 logically sums (ORs) the A register value and the data stored in the second reel drive state (_WK_RL2_STS) (FIG. 136) at the address "F058(H)" of the RWM 53. Perform an operation and store the result in the A register. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S1305.

In step S1305, the main control board 50 logically sums (ORs) the A register value and the data stored in the third reel drive state (_WK_RL3_STS) (FIG. 137) at the address "F063 (H)" of the RWM 53. Perform an operation and store the result in the A register. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S1306.

At step S1306, the main control board 50 performs a logical product (AND) operation of the A register value and the mask data "01111111(B)". Then, the process proceeds to the next step S1307.
Here, the mask data "01111111 (B)" used in step S1306 is data for masking (setting to "0") the D7-bit bit data. That is, by performing a logical product (AND) operation of the #th reel drive state (_WK_RL#_STS) data and "01111111 (B)", the D7 bit (data indicating whether or not it is excitation update timing) is It can be masked (set to "0").

In step S1307, it is determined whether or not the zero flag is "1". That is, it is determined whether or not the result of the logical product (AND) operation in step S1306 is "0".
Then, when the zero flag is "1" (the result of the AND operation in step S1306 is "0"), it is determined that all the reels 31 have stopped, the result is "Yes" in step S1307, and the display determination is made in step S291. proceed to This makes it possible to execute the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning in subsequent step S294.

That is, when the data of the first reel driving state (_WK_RL1_STS), the data of the second reel driving state (_WK_RL2_STS), and the data of the third reel driving state (_WK_RL3_STS) are data indicating stop, all It is determined that the reels 31 have stopped, and display judgment and medal payout processing at the time of winning can be executed.

On the other hand, when the zero flag is not "1", it is determined that any of the reels 31 is not stopped, the result of step S1307 is "No", and the process returns to the reel stop acceptance check (M_STOP_CHK) of step S752. In this case, the processing after step S752 is repeated. As a result, the process does not proceed to the display determination in step S291, so the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning in step S294 is not executed either.

That is, if any of the data of the first reel driving state (_WK_RL1_STS), the data of the second reel driving state (_WK_RL2_STS), and the data of the third reel driving state (_WK_RL3_STS) is not data indicating stop , does not execute the medal payout process at the time of winning.
For example, the left reel 31 and the middle reel 31 are stopped, and the right reel 31 is in a deceleration start state or during deceleration (during four-phase excitation output) even though the operation of the right stop switch 42 has been accepted. When there is, the medal payout process at the time of winning is not executed.

Here, when the D0 bit, D1 bit, D2 bit, and D6 bit of the input port level data A (_PT_IN_A_LV) (FIG. 133) are all "0", that is, the left stop switch signal, the middle stop switch signal, When both the right stop switch signal and the start switch signal are off, the logical product (AND) operation in step S1302 results in "00000000 (B)".

Also, when the first reel driving state (_WK_RL1_STS), the second reel driving state (_WK_RL2_STS), and the third reel driving state (_WK_RL3_STS) are all "00000000 (B)" or "10000000 (B)", that is, , when all the reels 31 are stopped, the first reel drive state (_WK_RL1_STS), the second reel drive state (_WK_RL2_STS), and the third reel drive state (_WK_RL3_STS) are sequentially ORed, and the result is and the mask data "01111111(B)" are ANDed to result in "00000000(B)".

Therefore, the result of the logical product (AND) operation in step S1306 is "00000000 (B)" because the left stop switch signal, middle stop switch signal, right stop switch signal, and start switch signal are all off. , and only when all the reels 31 are stopped. Only at this time, the result of step S1307 becomes "Yes", and the display judgment of step S291 and the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning of step S294 can be executed.

When one or more of the left stop switch signal, the middle stop switch signal, the right stop switch signal, and the start switch signal are on, that is, the left stop switch 42, the middle stop switch 42, and the right stop switch 42 are turned on. , and the start switch 41, the result of the logical product (AND) operation in step S1306 is "00000000 (B)" even if all the reels 31 are stopped. "do not become.

Specifically, for example, even if the four-phase excitation output of the motors 32 of all the reels 31 including the motor 32 of the reel 31 to be stopped last is completed, the stop switch 42 corresponding to the reel 31 to be stopped last is not operated. If it remains accepted, the result of the logical product (AND) operation in step S1306 will not be "00000000 (B)".
In this case, since "No" is determined in step S1307, neither the display determination in step S291 nor the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning in step S294 is executed.

Further, for example, even if the four-phase excitation output of the motors 32 of all the reels 31 including the motor 32 of the reel 31 (for example, the right reel 31) that stops last is completed, the reel 31 that stops last (for example, the right reel 31) In a situation where the operation of the stop switch 42 corresponding to is accepted, the stop switch 42 corresponding to the first stopped reel 31 (for example, the left reel 31) is operated, and then the stop switch 42 corresponding to the first stopped reel 31 42 is operated, even if the stop switch 42 corresponding to the last stopped reel 31 is released, since the stop switch corresponding to the first stopped reel 31 is operated, logical product (AND) operation in step S1306 is performed. does not result in "00000000 (B)".

In this case as well, the result is "No" in step S1307, so neither the display determination in step S291 nor the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning in step S294 is executed.
In this way, under the condition that any of the stop switches 42 is operated, the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning in step S294 is not executed. or payout of medals from the hopper 35 can be performed.

Even if the left stop switch signal, the middle stop switch signal, the right stop switch signal, and the start switch signal are all off, the left stop switch 42, the middle stop switch 42, the right stop switch 42, and the start switch 41 are all released, if there is one or more reels 31 that are not stopped, the result of the logical product (AND) operation in step S1306 will not be "00000000 (B)".

Specifically, for example, even if all the stop switches 42 including the stop switch 42 corresponding to the reel 31 to be stopped last and the start switch 41 are released, the motor 32 of the reel 31 to be stopped last is four-phase excited. If the output is not finished, the result of the AND operation in step S1306 will not be "00000000(B)".
In this case, since "No" is determined in step S1307, neither the display determination in step S291 nor the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning in step S294 is executed.

Here, for example, if the winning number "10" is won by the combination lottery means 61, the small combination A1 condition device (Fig. 124) is activated, and the small combination 01 pays out 15 or 3. Suppose that any one of the 13th to 17th small wins can be won.
Furthermore, the two reels 31 stop (the excitation output for stopping the reels 31 ends), the operation of the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is accepted, and three coins are paid out. Suppose that the symbol combination (FIG. 119) corresponding to the small winning combination 13 can be stopped and displayed.

Under such circumstances, after the operation of the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is accepted, before a predetermined period of four-phase excitation output for stopping the third reel 31 elapses (For example, the timing at which the four-phase excitation output is performed to stop the third reel 31 and the timing before the four-phase excitation output to stop the third reel 31) Even if the stop switch 42 corresponding to the reel 31 is released, the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning is not executed.
Therefore, even if the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is released within a predetermined period during which the four-phase excitation output for stopping the third reel 31 is being performed, medals are paid out at the time of winning. Do not process (M_WIN_PAY).
Then, after a predetermined period of four-phase excitation output for stopping the third reel 31 has elapsed, the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning can be executed.

Also, as shown in FIG. 49, in the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning, credit amount data is acquired in step S393, and in the next step S394, the acquired credit amount data is "50 (D)". determine whether there is That is, it is determined whether or not the number of credits has reached the upper limit "50".
Then, when the number of credits has reached the upper limit value "50", the result is "Yes" in step S394, and the process proceeds to one medal payout process in step S398. In this case, it does not proceed to the process of adding the number of credits in step S397.

On the other hand, when the number of credits has not reached the upper limit value of "50", the result is "No" in step S394. In this case, the process proceeds to step S397 for adding the number of credits, and does not proceed to step S398 for paying out one medal.
Further, when proceeding to the one medal payout process of step S398, as described in the first embodiment (C), the process of outputting the drive signal for the hopper motor 36 is executed, the hopper motor 36 is driven, and the actual medals are paid out from the hopper 35. Furthermore, it is determined that one medal has been paid out from the hopper 35 by detecting the on/off state of the payout sensors 37a and 37b.

In this way, in the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning, the credit amount is added until the credit amount reaches the upper limit "50", and when the credit amount reaches the upper limit "50" , a process of outputting a drive signal for the hopper motor 36 is executed, the hopper motor 36 is driven, and actual medals are paid out from the hopper 35. - 特許庁
In addition, when the hopper motor 36 is driven to pay out medals from the hopper 35 and when the number of credits is added, common processing is executed halfway. As a result, the processing can be simplified, so that the amount of ROM used by the program can be reduced.

That is, when the number of credits is the upper limit value "50", the lottery means 61 wins the winning number "10", the small combination A1 condition device is activated, and the two reels 31 are stopped. In the game in which the operation of the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is accepted and the symbol combination corresponding to the small win 13 for which three medals are awarded is stopped and displayed, After the operation of the stop switch 42 corresponding to the reel 31 is accepted, at a predetermined timing before a predetermined period of excitation output for stopping the third reel 31 elapses, the third reel 31 Even if the corresponding stop switch 42 is released, the drive signal output process for outputting the drive signal for the hopper 35 is executed after the lapse of a predetermined period of excitation output for stopping the third reel 31. do.

As a result, while the motor 32 (stepping motor) is being 4-phase excited, the hopper motor 36 is not driven, and after the 4-phase excitation of the motor 32 is completed, the hopper motor 36 can be driven. A current required to drive the motor 36 can be secured.

On the other hand, when the number of credits is "0", the winning number "10" is won by the lottery means 61, the small combination A1 condition device is activated, and the two reels 31 are stopped. In the game in which the operation of the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is accepted and the symbol combination corresponding to the small win 13 for which three medals are awarded is stopped and displayed, After the operation of the stop switch 42 corresponding to the reel 31 is accepted, at a predetermined timing before a predetermined period of excitation output for stopping the third reel 31 elapses, the third reel 31 Even if the corresponding stop switch 42 is released, the addition processing for adding the number of credits is executed after the lapse of a predetermined period of excitation output for stopping the third reel 31 .

In this case, the drive signal output processing for the hopper 35 is not executed, but under the same conditions (stop of all reels 31, signal off of various switches (start switch 41, (left, middle, right) stop switch 42)), the number of credits By executing the addition processing of , the processing up to the medal payout processing (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning can be shared. That is, the processes up to the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning can be shared without judging the number of credits at the start of the game, so the amount of ROM used by the program can be reduced.

Also, for example, when the winning number "10" is won by the winning lottery means 61, the small winning combination A1 condition device (FIG. 124) is activated, and the small winning combination 01 with 15 coins paid out or the small winning combination with 3 coins paid out is activated. Assume that any one of the roles 13 to 17 can be won.
Further, the two reels 31 are stopped, the operation of the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 (the third reel 31) is accepted, and the combination of symbols corresponding to the small combination 13 resulting in three payouts. (FIG. 119) can be stopped and displayed.

Under such a situation (under a situation where the two reels 31 are stopped), even if a predetermined period of four-phase excitation output for stopping the third reel 31 elapses, the third reel 31 If the operation of the stop switch 42 corresponding to the reel 31 is still accepted, the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning is not executed. Then, when the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is released, the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning can be executed.

In this way, in a game in which symbol combinations for which medals are paid out (given) are stopped and displayed, if the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is continuously operated, medal payout processing (M_WIN_PAY ) is not executed and the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is released, the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning can be executed.
As a result, addition of credits or payout of medals from the hopper 35 can be performed at the timing desired by the player.

In addition, regardless of whether or not the predetermined period of four-phase excitation output for stopping the third reel 31 has passed, the start switch 41 and the three (left, middle, right) stop switches 42 236 is accepted, the result is "No" in step S1307 of FIG. 236, and the processing from step S291 onwards does not proceed, so the medal payout processing (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning is not executed.
Then, when the start switch 41 and the three (left, middle, right) stop switches 42 are all released and a predetermined period of four-phase excitation output for stopping the third reel 31 elapses, as shown in FIG. , step S1307 becomes "Yes", and the process proceeds to step S291 and thereafter, so that the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning can be executed.

Thus, in a game in which symbol combinations for which medals are paid out (given) are stopped and displayed, one of the start switch 41 and the three (left, middle, right) stop switches 42 is continuously operated. When the start switch 41 and the three (left, middle, right) stop switches 42 are all released, the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning is executed. It becomes possible.
As a result, addition of credits or payout of medals from the hopper 35 can be performed at the timing desired by the player.

In addition, even if the power switch 11 is unintentionally turned off and the power shutdown process is executed under the condition that the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is operated, By turning on the power switch 11 while the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is being operated, the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning is not executed, and the third reel 31 corresponds to the reel 31. When the stop switch 42 is released, the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning can be executed.
As a result, even if the power is turned off at an unintended timing, the addition of credits or the payout of medals from the hopper 35 can be performed at the timing desired by the player.

Similarly, for example, even if the four-phase excitation output of the motors 32 of all the reels 31 including the motor 32 of the reel 31 (for example, the right reel 31) that stops last is completed, the reel 31 that stops last (for example, the right reel 31) ), the stop switch 42 corresponding to the first stopped reel 31 (for example, the left reel 31) is operated, and then the stop switch 42 corresponding to the first stopped reel 31 is operated. When the stop switch 42 corresponding to the last stopped reel 31 is released while the switch 42 is being operated, even if the predetermined period of four-phase excitation output for stopping the third reel 31 elapses, Do not execute medal payout processing (M_WIN_PAY) when winning a prize. Then, when the stop switch 42 corresponding to the first reel 31 (for example, the left reel 31) is released (at least all the stop switches are released), the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning can be executed. Become.
As a result, the addition of credits or the payout of medals from the hopper 35 can be performed at the timing desired by the player.

Also in this embodiment, as in the sixth embodiment, the medal dispensing device 15 includes a hopper 35 for storing medals, a hopper disk 101 provided at the bottom of the hopper 35, and a hopper disk 101 that rotates. A hopper motor 36 for detecting the payout of medals, and payout sensors 37a and 37b for detecting the payout of medals.
Furthermore, the main control board 50 is electrically connected to the medal payout device 15 and controls driving of the hopper motor 36 .

Further, the hopper motor 36 is a DC motor (direct current motor). When the drive signal of the hopper motor 36 is turned on and current is supplied to the hopper motor 36, the rotation of the drive shaft is gradually accelerated from a stopped state. , eventually reaches a constant speed (constant speed). After that, when the drive signal for the hopper motor 36 is turned off, the rotation of the drive shaft gradually decelerates from the constant speed state and eventually stops.
When stopping the rotation of the drive shaft, the rotation of the drive shaft can be abruptly stopped by supplying a current to the hopper motor 36 in the direction opposite to the direction in which the medals are paid out.

Here, the maximum value of the current required to perform the four-phase excitation output to the motor 32 (stepping motor) to stop the reel 31 is set to "500 to 800 mA" for each motor 32. .
Also, the maximum value of current required to drive the hopper motor 36 is set to "2.5 to 4.0 A (2500 to 4000 mA)".
Furthermore, when the lamps and LEDs controlled by the main control board 50 (for example, the credit number display LED 76, the acquired number display LED 78, etc.) are turned on, a current of "1 A" is required.

Then, when a current exceeding "10 A" flows on the main control board 50 side, the protection circuit provided on the main control board 50 judges that there is an overcurrent (overload) and turns off the power. is set to
In this power-off, there is a case where the power-off process is not executed. Suppose that during the game (for example, the number of credits is "50", the winning number "10" is won by the role lottery means 61, all the reels 31 are stopped, and three medals are awarded. is stopped and immediately before executing the medal payout process (the process of driving the hopper motor 36 to pay out medals) at the time of winning, the power cutoff occurs, and the power cutoff process is executed. If not, an unrecoverable error will occur even if the game recovers from a power failure, and after canceling the unrecoverable error (executing the setting change process), the game will resume in the state it was in when the power failure occurred. In some cases, the player cannot be allowed to do so (for example, the process of awarding three medals is not executed), which may disadvantage the player.

It should be noted that the fuse of the power supply board may be blown when an overcurrent flows on the main control board 50 side. In this case, if the fuse blows, even if the power switch 11 is turned on, it will not recover from the power failure (damage).
In addition, on the sub-control board 80 side, power management is performed separately from that on the main control board 50 side.

Thus, the maximum value of the current required to drive the hopper motor 36 (DC motor) is the maximum value of the current required to provide the four-phase excitation output to the motor 32 (stepping motor) to stop the reel 31. It is set larger than the maximum value.
For this reason, when driving the hopper motor 36, it is preferable not to execute other controls that require a large amount of current in order to secure the required current.

Therefore, as described above, after the operation of the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is accepted, before the predetermined period of four-phase excitation output for stopping the third reel 31 elapses (For example, the timing at which the four-phase excitation output is performed to stop the third reel 31, or the timing before the four-phase excitation output to stop the third reel 31). Even if the stop switch 42 corresponding to the reel 31 is released, the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning is not executed, and the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning is executed after the elapse of a predetermined period. I have to.

As a result, the hopper motor 36 (DC motor) is not driven while the motor 32 (stepping motor) is being 4-phase excited, and the hopper motor 36 is driven after the 4-phase excitation of the motor 32 is completed. Therefore, the current required to drive the hopper motor 36 can be secured. That is, the current required to drive the hopper motor 36 can be reliably secured, and the hopper motor 36 can be reliably driven.

Further, as described in the twenty-third embodiment, in the reel drive management (I_REEL_ADM) (FIGS. 151 and 152) in step S841 during the interrupt process (I_INTR), the right reel 31, the middle reel 31, and the left reel 31 are reeled in order. , the motors 32 (stepping motors) of the three reels 31 are sequentially controlled. As a result, drive control of three motors 32 can be executed by one interrupt process.
Then, in the port output process (FIG. 151) of step S462 in the interrupt process (I_INTR), drive signals can be output to the three motors 32 at the same time.

As a result, the rotation of the three reels 31 and the motor 32 is started all at once, and then all of them can be rotated at a constant speed.
Further, in the case where the three reels 31 are rotating at a constant speed, when the operation of one of the stop switches 42 is accepted, the other two reels 31 are rotated at a constant speed and the operation is performed. 4-phase excitation output can be applied to the motor 32 of the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 for which is received to stop the rotation.

Furthermore, when the three reels 31 are rotating at a constant speed, when any two stop switches 42 are operated quickly in sequence, the remaining one reel 31 is rotated at a constant speed. 4-phase excitation output is performed to the motor 32 of the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 whose operation has been accepted first to stop the rotation, and regardless of whether or not the 4-phase excitation output has ended, the operation is performed later. 4-phase excitation output can be applied to the motor 32 of the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 for which is received to stop the rotation.

Furthermore, before the first reel 31 stops and a predetermined period of four-phase excitation output for stopping the second reel 31 elapses (for example, four-phase excitation output for stopping the second reel 31). The operation of the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is accepted at the timing during which the phase excitation output is being performed and the timing before the four-phase excitation output for stopping the second reel 31. When this occurs, the four-phase excitation output for stopping the third reel 31 can be executed even before the predetermined period elapses.
In this way, in order to stop one of the reels 31, the operation of the other stop switch 42 is accepted before the predetermined period of four-phase excitation output to the motor 32 of that reel 31 elapses. By enabling the motor 32 of the reel 31 corresponding to 42 to execute the 4-phase excitation output, the game can be smoothly progressed.

Further, as described above, the maximum value of the current required to generate a four-phase excitation output for one motor 32 (stepping motor) is "500 to 800 mA". The maximum value of current required for excitation output is "1500 to 2400 mA".
Since the maximum value of current required to drive one hopper motor 36 is "2500 to 4000 mA", the maximum value of current required to perform four-phase excitation output to one motor 32 is is less than the maximum current required to drive one hopper motor 36 . Also, the maximum value of the current required to generate the four-phase excitation output to the three motors 32 is smaller than the maximum value of the current required to drive the single hopper motor 36 .
Therefore, even if four-phase excitation outputs are simultaneously applied to three motors 32, sufficient current can be secured to stop them.

Although the twenty-ninth embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the contents described above, and various modifications such as those described below are possible.
(1) In the above embodiment, in step S1301, the data stored in the input port level data A (_PT_IN_A_LV) (Fig. 133) at the address "F012(H)" of the RWM 53 is stored in the A register. Not exclusively.
For example, the data of the input port 51 to which the left stop switch signal, the middle stop switch signal, the right stop switch signal and the start switch signal are input may be directly stored in the A register.

(2) In the above embodiment, in step S1302, a logical product (AND) operation is performed between the A register value and the mask data "01000111(B)", but the present invention is not limited to this.
For example, the D3 bit of the input port level data A (_PT_IN_A_LV) (FIG. 133) at the address "F012(H)" of the RWM 53 stores data indicating ON/OFF of the signal of the 3-bet switch 40b. Similarly, the D4 bit stores data indicating ON/OFF of the signal of the 1-bet switch 40a, the D5 bit stores data indicating the ON/OFF of the settlement switch 43 signal, and the D7 bit stores the door switch. It stores data indicating ON/OFF of 17 signals.

Then, in step S1301, the data of the input port level data A (_PT_IN_A_LV) is stored in the A register, and in the next step S1302, the AND operation of the A register value and the mask data "11111111 (B)" is performed. you can go
Thus, in addition to the start switch 41, the left stop switch 42, the middle stop switch 42, and the right stop switch 42, even when any of the signals of the 1 bed switch 40a, the 3 bed switch 40b, and the door switch 17 are ON, It is possible to determine "No" in step S1307 of FIG. That is, it is possible not to proceed to the display determination in step S291 of FIG. 236 and the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning in step S294.

(3) In the above embodiment, in step S1306, the logical product (AND) operation of the A register value and the mask data "01111111(B)" is performed, but the present invention is not limited to this.
For example, even if "00001111(B)" is used as the mask data in step S1306, the same calculation result as above can be obtained.
In addition, in this embodiment, the reel drive control (I_REEL_CTL) is executed once every two interrupts, so the D7 bit of the reel drive state # (_WK_RL#_STS) is set to "0" or "1" for each interrupt process. ”. Therefore, not limited to such specifications, for example, if the D7 bit of the #th reel drive state (_WK_RL#_STS) is always "0", then in step S1306, "11111111 (B)" is set as the mask data. It is also possible to use

(4) For example, when the # reel drive state (_WK_RL#_STS) of the reel 31 to be stopped last becomes "10000000 (B)" or "00000000 (B)", the four-phase excitation output is completed. It may be determined that the reel 31 has stopped.
Then, the input port level data A (_PT_IN_A_LV) is "00000000 (B)" and the # reel drive state (_WK_RL#_STS) of the reel 31 to be stopped last is "10000000 (B)" or "00000000 (B)". )”, the display determination in step S291 in FIG. 236 or the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning in step S294 may be performed.

(5) For example, when the #th reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR#) of the reel 31 to be stopped last becomes "00000000 (B)", that is, the data of φ1 to φ4 of the motor 32 are all "0". , it may be determined that the four-phase excitation output has ended and that the reel 31 has stopped.
When the input port level data A (_PT_IN_A_LV) is "00000000 (B)" and the # reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR#) of the last reel 31 to be stopped is "00000000 (B)", It is also possible to proceed to the display determination in step S291 of 236 or the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning in step S294.

(6) For example, when the #th reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR#) of all the reels 31 becomes "00000000 (B)", the 4-phase excitation output of all the motors 32 ends and all the reels 31 may be determined to have stopped.
That is, the first reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR1), the second reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR2), and the third reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR3) are sequentially ORed, and the result is "00000000 (B). , it may be determined that the four-phase excitation outputs of all the motors 32 are finished and all the reels 31 are stopped.
Then, when the input port level data A (_PT_IN_A_LV) is "00000000 (B)" and the # reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR#) of all the reels 31 is "00000000 (B)", the The process may proceed to the display determination in step S291 or the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning in step S294.

(7) For example, when the #th reel drive pulse output counter (_CT_RL#_PLSOUT) of the reel 31 to be stopped last becomes "00000000 (B)", it is determined that the four-phase excitation output has ended, and the reel 31 may be determined to have stopped.
When the input port level data A (_PT_IN_A_LV) is "00000000 (B)" and the # reel drive pulse output counter (_CT_RL#_PLSOUT) of the last reel 31 to be stopped is "00000000 (B)" 236, or the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning in step S294.
Note that the #th reel drive pulse output counter (_CT_RL#_PLSOUT) is updated (decremented) by interrupt processing, although this is repeated. This point also applies to other embodiments.

(8) For example, when the #th reel drive pulse output counter (_CT_RL#_PLSOUT) of all the reels 31 reaches "00000000 (B)", the 4-phase excitation output of all the motors 32 ends and all the It may be determined that the reel 31 has stopped.
That is, the first reel drive pulse output counter (_CT_RL1_PLSOUT), the second reel drive pulse output counter (_CT_RL2_PLSOUT), and the third reel drive pulse output counter (_CT_RL3_PLSOUT) are sequentially ORed, and the result is "00000000". (B)", it may be determined that the four-phase excitation output of all the motors 32 is completed and all the reels 31 are stopped.
When the input port level data A (_PT_IN_A_LV) is "00000000 (B)" and the # reel drive pulse output counter (_CT_RL#_PLSOUT) of all the reels 31 is "00000000 (B)", It is also possible to proceed to the display determination in step S291 of 236 or the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning in step S294.

(9) In the above embodiment, after the operation of one of the stop switches 42 is accepted, before a predetermined period of four-phase excitation output to the motor 32 of the reel 31 corresponding to that stop switch 42 elapses (for example, At the timing during which the four-phase excitation output for stopping the reel 31 is being performed, or at the timing before performing the four-phase excitation output for stopping the reel 31), the operation of another stop switch 42 is accepted, and the other Although the motor 32 of the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 can execute the 4-phase excitation output, it is not limited to this.
For example, after the operation of one of the stop switches 42 is accepted, before a predetermined period of four-phase excitation output to the motor 32 of the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 elapses, the operation of the other stop switch 42 is not accepted, and the stop control of the other reels 31 may not be executed.

Further, the operation of the other stop switch 42 is accepted until the four-phase excitation output to the motor 32 of the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 is accepted after the operation of one of the stop switches 42 is accepted. However, it is also possible to prevent the other reels 31 from being stopped.
Furthermore, during a predetermined period of time during which the motor 32 of any one of the reels 31 is subjected to four-phase excitation output, the operation of the other stop switch 42 is not accepted and the stop control of the other reels 31 is not executed. can also

Here, as in the above embodiment, after the operation of one of the stop switches 42 is accepted, before a predetermined period of four-phase excitation output to the motor 32 of the reel 31 corresponding to that stop switch 42 elapses ( For example, at the timing when the four-phase excitation output for stopping the reel 31 is performed, or at the timing before the four-phase excitation output for stopping the reel 31), the operation of the other stop switch 42 is accepted, If the motors 32 of the reels 31 corresponding to other stop switches 42 are allowed to execute the 4-phase excitation output, the order of operation of the stop switches 42 and the order of stopping the reels 31 may be changed.

Specifically, for example, when the three reels 31 are rotating at a constant speed, it is assumed that the left stop switch 42 and the middle stop switch 42 are quickly operated in this order. Then, it is assumed that the operation of the left stop switch 42 is accepted, and then the operation of the middle stop switch 42 is accepted before the left reel 31 stops. At this time, after the operation of the left stop switch 42 is accepted, the number of moving symbols (the number of sliding frames) until the left reel 31 stops is set to "4", and after the operation of the middle stop switch 42 is accepted. , the number of moving symbols until the middle reel 31 stops is set to "0". In such a case, the middle reel 31 may stop first and then the left reel 31 may stop.

Therefore, after the operation of one of the stop switches 42 is accepted, before a predetermined period of time during which the motor 32 of the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 is subjected to the four-phase excitation output has passed, the other stop switch 42 is operated. is not received and the stop control of the other reels 31 is not executed, it is possible to prevent the operation order of the stop switch 42 and the stop order of the reels 31 from being changed.

Similarly, after the operation of one of the stop switches 42 is accepted, until the motor 32 of the reel 31 corresponding to that stop switch 42 starts the four-phase excitation output, the other stop switches 42 are not operated. It is possible to prevent the operation order of the stop switch 42 and the stop order of the reels 31 from being changed even when the stop control of the other reels 31 is not executed.
Also, during a predetermined period during which the motor 32 of one of the reels 31 is subjected to the four-phase excitation output, the operation of the other stop switch 42 is not accepted and the stop control of the other reels 31 is not executed. , the operation order of the stop switch 42 and the stop order of the reels 31 can be prevented from being changed.

(10) In the above embodiment, when the reel 31 and the motor 32 are stopped, the motor 32 (stepping motor) is provided with a four-phase excitation output as an excitation output for stopping the reel 31. However, the present invention is not limited to this. do not have.
When stopping the reel 31 and the motor 32, the excitation output for stopping the reel 31 may be, for example, a one-phase excitation output, a two-phase excitation output, or a three-phase excitation output. may Also, first, 2-phase excitation output is performed and a weak brake is applied, then the 2-phase excitation output is switched to a 4-phase excitation output, and a strong brake is applied to stop the rotation of the reel 31 and the motor 32. You can let it run.
(11) The first to twenty-ninth embodiments and the various modifications shown in the first to twenty-ninth embodiments are not limited to being carried out independently, but can be carried out in combination as appropriate.

<Thirtieth Embodiment>
In the thirtieth embodiment, based on the data stored in the #th reel management timer (_WK_RL#_TIME) (FIG. 237) of the RWM 53, a predetermined period of four-phase excitation output for stopping the reel 31 has passed. or not. Also, the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning is not executed within a predetermined period of time during which the 4-phase excitation output is performed. Then, when the data stored in the #th reel management timer (_WK_RL#_TIME) becomes "0", it is determined that a predetermined period of four-phase excitation output has passed (four-phase excitation output has ended), and then , to execute medal payout processing (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning.

The symbol arrangement of the reels 31, the activated lines, the type of combination, the symbol combination of the combination, the number of payouts, the condition device, the winning combination, the RT, and the main game state are the same as in the twenty-third embodiment.
FIG. 237 is a diagram showing main data according to the thirtieth embodiment among the data stored in the RWM 53 in the thirtieth embodiment. Note that the data shown in FIG. 237 is only part of the data, and various data other than the data shown are stored in the RWM 53 .
In FIG. 237, the input port 2 level data (_PT_IN2_OLD) of the address "F005 (H)" is the input sensor 1 signal (D0 bit) input to each bit of the input port 2, the input sensor 2 signal (D1 bit), This is a storage area for storing ON/OFF of the full detection signal (D3 bit) and the stop cancellation signal (D4 bit).

The insertion sensor 1 signal means a signal that turns on when the insertion sensor 44a (FIG. 2) detects medals and turns off when no medals are detected.
Further, the insertion sensor 2 signal means a signal that is turned on when the insertion sensor 44b (FIG. 2) detects medals and is turned off when no medals are detected.
Furthermore, a sub-tank for storing medals overflowing from the hopper 35 and a full sensor that is turned on when the sub-tank comes into contact with the medals when the sub-tank is full is provided. Means a signal that is turned on when the medal is in contact and turned off when the medal is not in contact.

Furthermore, it is possible to execute a normal game and a special game (1BB game) that is advantageous to the player, and when the normal game is shifted to the special game, it is stopped at the end of the special game, and the progress of the game is stopped. is possible. The condition for stopping is not limited to the end of the special game, and can be set as appropriate. In addition, a stop canceling switch is provided, and when a stop condition is satisfied, the stop can be canceled by operating the stop canceling switch to allow the game to proceed. The stop canceling signal means a signal that turns on when the stop canceling switch is operated and turns off when the switch is released. It should be noted that the stopping canceling switch can also be used as other switches such as the setting switch 13 and the reset switch 14 .

Then, in the current interrupt processing, the signal input to each bit of the input port 2 is read, and the on/off state of the input sensor 1 signal, the input sensor 2 signal, the full detection signal, and the stopping cancel signal is determined. When it is, "1" is stored in the corresponding bit, and when it is off, "0" is stored in the corresponding bit.

In FIG. 237, the input port 4 level data (_PT_IN4_OLD) of the address "F006 (H)" is the setting/reset switch signal (D1 bit) input to each bit of the input port 4, the settlement switch signal (D3 bit), This is a storage area for storing ON/OFF of a 1-bet switch signal (D4 bit), a 2-bet switch signal (D5 bit), a 3-bet switch signal (D6 bit), and a start switch signal (D7 bit).
The setting/reset switch signal means a signal of a setting change (reset) switch 153 that serves as both a setting change switch and a reset switch.

The settlement switch signal means a signal that turns on when the settlement switch 43 is operated and turns off when released.
The 1-bet switch signal means a signal that turns on when the 1-bet switch 40a is operated and turns off when released.

Furthermore, the 3-bet switch signal means a signal that turns on when the 3-bet switch 40b is operated and turns off when released.
Furthermore, a 2-bet switch for inserting two medals is provided, and the 2-bet switch signal means a signal that turns on when the 2-bet switch is operated and turns off when released.
Furthermore, the start switch signal means the signal of the start switch 41 .

In this interrupt process, the signals input to each bit of the input port 4 are read, and the setting/reset switch signal, settlement switch signal, 1 bet switch signal, 2 bet switch signal, 3 bet switch signal, and start The on/off state of the switch signal is determined, and when it is on, "1" is stored in the corresponding bit, and when it is off, "0" is stored in the corresponding bit.

In FIG. 237, the input port 3 level data (_PT_IN3_OLD) of the address "F00A(H)" is the first stop switch signal (D0 bit) and the second stop switch signal (D1 bit) input to each bit of the input port 3. ), and ON/OFF of the third stop switch signal (D2 bit).

The #th stop switch signal means a signal that is turned on when the #th stop switch 42 is operated and turned off when the #th stop switch 42 is released.
Then, in the current interrupt processing, the signal input to each bit of the input port 3 is read, and the ON/OFF state of the first stop switch signal, the second stop switch signal, and the third stop switch signal is determined. When it is, "1" is stored in the corresponding bit, and when it is off, "0" is stored in the corresponding bit.

In FIG. 237, reel stop order data (_NB_STOP_ORDER) at address “F007(H)” is a storage area for storing data for managing the stop order of the reels 31 .
In step S1311 of FIG. 238, which will be described later, reel stop order data (_NB_STOP_ORDER) is initialized (cleared, initial value "0" is set). Thereafter, the value of the reel stop order data (_NB_STOP_ORDER) is incremented by "1" each time step S1323 in FIG. 239, which will be described later, is executed. Then, when the value of the reel stop order data (_NB_STOP_ORDER) reaches the number of reels "3", the result is "Yes" in step S1315 of FIG. 238, which will be described later.

In FIG. 237, the stop reel number data (_NB_STOP_REEL) at the address "F008(H)" is a storage area for storing data indicating the reel number at the time of stop acceptance.
When the first stop switch signal is turned on (the operation of the first stop switch 42 is accepted), the stop reel number data (_NB_STOP_REEL) is set to "1 ( D)” is stored.

Also, when the second stop switch signal is turned on (the operation of the second stop switch 42 is accepted), in step S1322 in FIG. 2(D)” is stored.
Furthermore, when the third stop switch signal is turned on (the operation of the third stop switch 42 is accepted), in step S1322 in FIG. 3(D)" is stored.

In FIG. 237, the first reel management timer (_WK_RL1_TIME) at address “F020(H)” is a timer that manages the four-phase excitation output time of the first reel 31 . That is, it is a storage area for storing data for measuring a predetermined time for four-phase excitation output for stopping the first reel 31 .
When the deceleration of the first reel 31 starts (when the four-phase excitation output to the motor 32 of the first reel 31 starts), the first reel management timer (_WK_RL1_TIME) is set to the initial value "108 (D)". . After that, the value of the first reel management timer (_WK_RL1_TIME) is decremented by "1" each time an interrupt process is executed. Further, when the value of the first reel management timer (_WK_RL1_TIME) is "1" or more, the motor 32 of the first reel 31 is subjected to four-phase excitation output for each interrupt processing. Then, when the value of the first reel management timer (_WK_RL1_TIME) becomes "0", the four-phase excitation output to the motor 32 of the first reel 31 ends.

In this embodiment, the period of interrupt processing is set to "2.235 ms", and the value of #th reel management timer (_WK_RL#_TIME) is decremented by "1" for each interrupt processing.
Therefore, it takes ``2.235×108=241.38 ms'' for the value of the #th reel management timer (_WK_RL#_TIME) to change from ``108 (D)'' to ``0 (D)''. The four-phase excitation output continues for "241.38 ms", and when "241.38 ms" elapses, the four-phase excitation output ends.
That is, in the present embodiment, the "predetermined period" for performing the four-phase excitation output for stopping the reel 31 corresponds to "241.38 ms".

237, the second reel management timer (_WK_RL2_TIME) at address "F030(H)" is a timer that manages the four-phase excitation output time of the second reel 31. FIG. That is, it is a storage area for storing data for measuring a predetermined time for four-phase excitation output for stopping the second reel 31 .
Further, in FIG. 237, the third reel management timer (_WK_RL3_TIME) at address “F040 (H)” is a timer that manages the four-phase excitation output time of the third reel 31 . In other words, it is a storage area for storing data for measuring a predetermined time for four-phase excitation output for stopping the third reel 31 .
These contents are the same as the first reel management timer (_WK_RL1_TIME) of the address "F020(H)".

FIG. 238 is a flowchart showing main processing (M_MAIN) in the thirtieth embodiment, and is a flowchart corresponding to FIG. 139 in the twenty-third embodiment.
In the flowchart of the thirtieth embodiment shown in FIG. 238, the step numbers different from those in FIG. 139 are underlined, and the same steps as in FIG. 139 are given the same step numbers.

Also, in the main processing (M_MAIN) of the thirtieth embodiment, the processing of steps S295 to S300 of FIG. 139 is executed, but the processing of steps S295 to S300 is omitted in FIG.
Differences from FIG. 139 will be mainly described below.

As shown in FIG. 238, in the thirtieth embodiment, after executing the start switch acceptance process (M_START_CTL) in step S751, the process proceeds to step S1311, and the main control board 50 initializes the reel stop order data (_NB_STOP_ORDER). (clear, set initial value "0"). Then, the process proceeds to the next step S1312.
Proceeding to step S1312, the main control board 50 executes a reel stop acceptance check. This process is the process shown in FIG. 239 to be described later. When the reel stop acceptance check in step S1312 is completed, the process proceeds to step S1313.

Proceeding to step S1313, the main control board 50 executes an input check. This process is the process shown in FIG. 240, which will be described later. When the input check in step S1313 is completed, the process proceeds to step S1314.
At step S1314, the main control board 50 determines whether or not there is input port level data (the carry flag of the flag register is set to "1").
Here, when proceeding to step S1337 in FIG. 240, which will be described later, the carry flag bit of the flag register is set to "1". The carry flag set in step S1337 serves as a flag indicating the presence of input port level data.
Note that the flag register is updated when some arithmetic processing is executed. Therefore, even if the carry flag bit is "1", it may be updated to "0" by another operation.

Input sensor 1 signal, input sensor 2 signal, stop cancel signal, 1st stop switch signal, 2nd stop switch signal, 3rd stop switch signal, setting/reset switch signal, settlement switch signal, 1 bet switch signal, 2 bet switch signal, 3bet switch signal, or start switch signal is on, a flag indicating that there is input port level data is set in step S1337 in FIG. "1" is set).

On the other hand, when all of the above signals are off, step S1337 in FIG. 240, which will be described later, is skipped, so the flag indicating that there is input port level data is not set.
In step S1337 of FIG. 240, which will be described later, the signal to be checked when setting the flag indicating that there is input port level data is not limited to the above signal, and can be set as appropriate.
For example, some of the above signals, such as the stop cancellation signal and the setting/reset switch signal, need not be checked when the flag indicating that there is input port level data is set.
Conversely, in addition to the above signals, signals from other switches such as the door switch 17 and the setting key switch 152 may be checked when setting the flag indicating the presence of input port level data.

Then, in step S1314, when the carry flag bit is set to "1", it is determined that there is input port level data ("Yes"), and the process returns to step S1313. In this case, the processing of steps S1313 and S1314 is repeated.
It should be noted that the flag register is updated when the input check in step S1313 is returned to and some arithmetic processing is executed. As a result, even if the bit for the carry flag is "1", it may be updated to "0" by another operation.

On the other hand, in step S1314, when the carry flag bit is not set to "1", it is determined that there is no input port level data ("No"), and the process proceeds to the next step S1315.
As a result, when any of the above signals is on, the process does not proceed to step S1315, and when all of the above signals are off, the process proceeds to step S1315.

Proceeding to step S1315, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the value of the reel stop order data (_NB_STOP_ORDER) and the number of reels "3" are the same. That is, it is determined whether or not stop control has been executed for all reels 31 .
Here, when it is determined that the value of the reel stop order data (_NB_STOP_ORDER) and the number of reels "3" are not the same value, the process returns to step S1312. Thereby, the processing from step S1312 to step S1315 is repeated until the stop control is executed for all the reels 31 . When it is determined that the value of the reel stop order data (_NB_STOP_ORDER) and the number of reels "3" are the same, it is determined that all the reels 31 have been stopped, and the process proceeds to step S1316.

Proceeding to step S1316, the main control board 50 executes an all reel stop check. This process is the process shown in FIG. 241 to be described later. When all the reel stop checks in step S1316 are completed, the process proceeds to step S291.
In step S291, the main control board 50 executes display determination. That is, it is determined whether or not the symbol combination corresponding to the combination has been stopped. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S292.

Further, when the result of step S292 is "No" and the process of step S293 is executed, the process proceeds to step S294.
Proceeding to step S294, the main control board 50 executes medal payout processing (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning. That is, when the number of credits has not reached the upper limit value "50", the number of credits is added, and when the number of credits has reached the upper limit value "50", the hopper motor 36 is driven and the actual The medals are paid out from the hopper 35. It should be noted that the determination as to whether or not the number of credits has reached the upper limit value of "50" is made, for example, in step S394 of FIG.

FIG. 239 is a flow chart showing reel stop acceptance check in step S1312 of FIG.
In step S1321, the main control board 50 determines whether or not there is a stop acceptance. That is, it is determined whether the operation of any one of the first stop switch 42 to the third stop switch 42 has been accepted.
Specifically, the main control board 50 controls the D0 bit (first stop switch signal), D1 bit (second stop switch signal), and D2 bit of the input port 3-level data (_PT_IN3_OLD) of the address "F00A(H)". (third stop switch signal) is ON. Then, step S1321 is repeated until the stop is accepted, and when the stop is accepted, the process proceeds to the next step S1322.

Proceeding to step S1322, the main control board 50 stores stop reel number data corresponding to the stop switch signal.
Specifically, when the first stop switch signal is on (the operation of the first stop switch 42 is accepted), the stop reel number data (_NB_STOP_REEL) is set to "1 (D)" indicating the first reel 31. Remember.

Also, when the second stop switch signal is ON (the operation of the second stop switch 42 is accepted), "2(D)" indicating the second reel 31 is stored in the stop reel number data (_NB_STOP_REEL).
Further, when the third stop switch signal is ON (the operation of the third stop switch 42 is accepted), "3(D)" indicating the third reel 31 is stored in the stop reel number data (_NB_STOP_REEL).
After saving the stop reel number data corresponding to the stop switch signal, the process proceeds to the next step S1323.

In step S1323, the main control board 50 adds "1" to the value of reel stop order data (_NB_STOP_ORDER) at address "F007(H)". Then, the process proceeds to the next step S1324.
Proceeding to step S1324, the main control board 50 executes a process for accepting a stoppage. In this process, the stop position of the ## reel 31 is determined based on the winning combination lottery result of the current game and the position of the ## reel 31 at the moment when the operation of the ## stop switch 42 is accepted, and the determined stop position is determined. A symbol number corresponding to the position is stored in the #th reel symbol number (for the stop position). Furthermore, the stop symbol data for judging the symbol combination to stop on the activated line is updated. Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

More specifically, in the processing at the time of stop acceptance in step S1324 of FIG. 239, processing corresponding to steps S1022 to S1024 in FIG. 194 of the twenty-fifth embodiment is executed. That is, for the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 determined to be ON in step S1321, the result of the combination lottery of the current game and the operation of the stop switch 42 are accepted by the processing corresponding to steps S1022 to S1023 in FIG. The stop position of the reel 31 is determined based on the instantaneous position of the reel 31, and the pattern number corresponding to the determined stop position is stored in the reel pattern number (for stop position). Furthermore, by processing corresponding to the stop symbol set (M_STOPPIC_SET) in step S1024 of FIG. 194, the stop symbol data (_WK_STOP_PIC1-9) for determining the symbol combination to stop on the activated line is updated. Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

It should be noted that the # # reel symbol number (for passing position) and the # # reel symbol number ( stop position) have reached the same value, the #th reel management timer (_WK_RL#_TIME) is set to the initial value "108 (D)" and the motor 32 of the #th reel 31 is stopped. Start phase excitation output.
In addition, the #th reel symbol number (for passing position) and the #th reel symbol number (for stop position) are the same value, and the step number of one symbol of #th reel 13 is a predetermined value (for example, " 3”), the #th reel management timer may be set to the initial value “108 (D)” and the four-phase excitation output for stopping the motor 32 of the #th reel 31 may be started.

FIG. 240 is a flow chart showing the input check in step S1313 of FIG.
At step S1331, the main control board 50 acquires the data stored in the input port 2 level data (_PT_IN2_OLD) (FIG. 237) of the RWM 53 at the address "F005(H)". Then, the process proceeds to the next step S1332.

Proceeding to step S1332, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the input sensor 1 signal, the input sensor 2 signal, and the stopping cancel signal are ON.
Specifically, whether the D0 bit (input sensor 1 signal), D1 bit (input sensor 2 signal), and D4 bit (stop cancel signal) of the acquired input port 2 level data (_PT_IN2_OLD) are "1" to judge.
In step S1332, when it is determined that any signal is ON, the process proceeds to step S1337, and when it is determined that both signals are OFF, the process proceeds to the next step S1333.

In step S1333, the main control board 50 acquires the data stored in the input port 3 level data (_PT_IN3_OLD) (FIG. 237) of the RWM 53 at the address "F00A(H)". Then, the process proceeds to the next step S1334.
Proceeding to step S1334, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the first stop switch signal, the second stop switch signal, and the third stop switch signal are on.

Specifically, when the D0 bit (first stop switch signal), D1 bit (second stop switch signal), and D2 bit (third stop switch signal) of the acquired input port 3 level data (_PT_IN3_OLD) are "1", determine whether there is
In step S1334, when it is determined that any signal is ON, the process proceeds to step S1337, and when it is determined that both signals are OFF, the process proceeds to the next step S1335.

At step S1335, the main control board 50 acquires the data stored in the input port 4 level data (_PT_IN4_OLD) (FIG. 237) of the address "F006(H)" of the RWM 53. FIG. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S1336.
Proceeding to step S1336, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the setting/reset switch signal, the settlement switch signal, the 1-bet switch signal, the 2-bet switch signal, the 3-bet switch signal, and the start switch signal are ON. .

Specifically, D1 bit (set/reset switch signal), D3 bit (adjustment switch signal), D4 bit (1 bet switch signal), D5 bit (2 bet switch signal) of the acquired input port 4 level data (_PT_IN4_OLD) ), D6 bit (3bet switch signal), and D7 bit (start switch signal) are "1".
When it is determined in step S1336 that any signal is ON, the process proceeds to step S1337, and when it is determined that both signals are OFF, the processing according to this flowchart is terminated.

At step S1337, the main control board 50 sets a flag indicating that there is input port level data. Specifically, the carry flag bit of the flag register is set to "1". If a flag (carry flag) indicating presence of input port level data is set here, "Yes" is obtained in step S1314 of FIG. On the other hand, if step S1337 is skipped, the flag (carry flag) indicating the presence of input port level data is not set, so the result in step S1314 of FIG. 238 is "No". Then, when step S1337 is executed, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

FIG. 241 is a flow chart showing all reel stop check in step S1316 of FIG.
In step S1341, the main control board 50 sets the address of the #th reel management timer (_WK_RL#_TIME) according to the stop reel number data (_NB_STOP_REEL).
Specifically, in step S1341, the main control board 50 first stores the data stored in the stop reel number data (_NB_STOP_REEL) of the address "F008(H)" of the RWM 53 in the A register.

Here, when proceeding to step S1316, the reel number of the reel 31 corresponding to the third (last) operated stop switch 42 is stored in the stop reel number data (_NB_STOP_REEL) of the address "F008(H)". It is
For example, when the third (last) operated stop switch 42 is the third (right) stop switch 42, the stop reel number data (_NB_STOP_REEL) of the address "F008 (H)" is , "3(D)" indicating the third (right) reel 31 is stored.

Next, "F010 (H)", which is the result of subtracting "16 (D)" from the address "F020 (H)" of the first reel management timer (_WK_RL1_TIME), is stored in the HL register. This "F010(H)" becomes the reference address.
Next, the A register value is multiplied by "16(D)" and the result is stored in the A register.
Next, add the A register value to the HL register value and store the result in the HL register.
Then, the process proceeds to the next step S1342.

Proceeding to step S1342, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the data stored in the #th reel management timer (_WK_RL#_TIME) is "0".
Then, the process of step S1342 is repeated until the data stored in the #th reel management timer (_WK_RL#_TIME) becomes "0", and the data stored in the #th reel management timer (_WK_RL#_TIME) becomes When it becomes "0", the processing according to this flowchart is terminated.
In this way, in this embodiment, when the data of the #th reel management timer (_WK_RL#_TIME) for the reel 31 corresponding to the third (last) operated stop switch 42 becomes "0", this flow chart end the processing by

Specifically, in step S1342, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value (#th reel management timer (_WK_RL#_TIME)) is "0". do.
Then, when the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value is not "0"("No"), the process of step S1342 is executed again. That is, the process of step S1342 is repeated.

On the other hand, when the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value is "0"("Yes"), the processing according to this flowchart is terminated.
Also, when the data stored in the address indicated by the HL register value (#th reel management timer (_WK_RL#_TIME)) becomes "0", the process proceeds to step S291 of FIG. Proceed to the time medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY).
As a result, after a predetermined period of four-phase excitation output to the motor 32 of the reel 31 corresponding to the third (last) operated stop switch 42 has passed, display judgment and medal payout processing (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning. can be executed.

More specifically, for example, "3(D)" indicating the third (right) reel 31 is stored in the stop reel number data (_NB_STOP_REEL) (FIG. 237) of the address "F008(H)" of the RWM 53. Suppose That is, it is assumed that the stop switch 42 operated third (last) is the third (right) stop switch 42 . In this case, "3(D)" is first stored in the A register by the processing of step S1341.

Next, "F010 (H)", which is the result of subtracting "16 (D)" from the address "F020 (H)" of the first reel management timer (_WK_RL1_TIME), is stored in the HL register. This "F010(H)" becomes the reference address.
Next, "48 (D)", which is the result of multiplying the A register value "3 (D)" by "16 (D)", is stored in the A register.
Next, "F040(H)", which is the result of adding the A register value "48(D)" to the HL register value "F010(H)", is stored in the HL register.

Then, proceeding to the next step S1342, whether the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value "F040 (H)", that is, the data stored in the third reel management timer (_WK_RL3_TIME) is "0". make a decision as to whether or not
Here, when the data stored in the address indicated by the HL register value (third reel management timer (_WK_RL3_TIME)) is not "0"("No"), the process of step S1342 is executed again. That is, the process of step S1342 is repeated. In this case, the processing from step S291 onward in FIG. 238 is not performed.

On the other hand, when the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value (third reel management timer (_WK_RL3_TIME)) is "0"("Yes"), the processing according to this flow chart ends.
Also, when the data stored in the address indicated by the HL register value (third reel management timer (_WK_RL3_TIME)) becomes "0", the process proceeds to step S291 in FIG. 238, and then to step S294.
As a result, after a predetermined period of four-phase excitation output to the motor 32 of the reel 31 corresponding to the third (last) operated stop switch 42 has passed, display judgment and medal payout processing (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning. can be executed.

Here, for example, when winning number "10" is won by the combination lottery means 61, the small combination A1 conditional device (Fig. 124) is activated, resulting in a small combination 01 payout of 15 cards or a payout of 3 cards. Suppose that any one of the 13th to 17th small wins can be won.
Furthermore, two reels 31 are stopped (under the condition that the excitation output for stopping the reels 31 is terminated for the two reels 31), and the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is activated. It is assumed that the operation is accepted and the symbol combination (FIG. 119) corresponding to the small winning combination 13 with three payouts can be stopped and displayed.

Under such circumstances, after the operation of the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is accepted, before a predetermined period of four-phase excitation output for stopping the third reel 31 elapses (For example, the timing at which the four-phase excitation output is performed to stop the third reel 31 and the timing before the four-phase excitation output to stop the third reel 31) Even if the stop switch 42 corresponding to the reel 31 is released, the result is "No" in step S1342 of FIG. 241, and the processing after step S291 of FIG. 238 does not proceed. don't run
That is, when the data stored in the #th reel management timer (_WK_RL#_TIME) for the third reel 31 is "1" or more, four-phase excitation for stopping the third reel 31 is performed. Since the output continues and step S1342 in FIG. 241 is repeated, the processing after step S291 in FIG. 238 does not proceed. Do not process (M_WIN_PAY).

Then, when the data stored in the #th reel management timer (_WK_RL#_TIME) for the third reel 31 becomes "0", the 4-phase excitation output for stopping the third reel 31 ends. 241 becomes "Yes", and the process proceeds to step S291 of FIG. 238, so that the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning in the subsequent step S294 can be executed.
In addition, in the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning, the credit amount is added until the credit amount reaches the upper limit "50". A process of outputting a drive signal for the motor 36 is executed, the hopper motor 36 is driven, and actual medals are paid out from the hopper 35. - 特許庁It should be noted that the determination as to whether or not the number of credits has reached the upper limit value of "50" is made, for example, in step S394 of FIG.

Thus, also in this embodiment, similarly to the twenty-ninth embodiment, after the operation of the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is accepted, the 4 switches for stopping the third reel 31 are Before a predetermined period of phase excitation output elapses (for example, timing of four-phase excitation output for stopping the third reel 31, four-phase excitation output for stopping the third reel 31, etc.) Even if the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is released at the timing before outputting, the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning is not executed, and after the predetermined period elapses, the processing at the time of winning Execute the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY).

As a result, the hopper motor 36 (DC motor) is not driven while the motor 32 (stepping motor) is being 4-phase excited, and the hopper motor 36 is driven after the 4-phase excitation of the motor 32 is completed. Therefore, the current required to drive the hopper motor 36 can be secured. That is, the current required to drive the hopper motor 36 can be reliably secured, and the hopper motor 36 can be reliably driven.

Further, in the present embodiment, switches (set/reset switch 153, settlement switch 43, 1-bet switch 40a, 2-bet switch, 3-bet switch 40b, start switch 41, If any one of the (left, middle, right) stop switches 42) has been operated, the result is "Yes" in step S1314 of FIG. Regardless of whether or not the predetermined period of four-phase excitation output for stopping the reel 31 has passed, the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning is not executed.

Then, when all the switches for inputting signals to the input port 3 and the input port 4 are released, it becomes "No" in step S1314 of FIG. When a predetermined period of four-phase excitation output for stopping the display elapses, display determination processing and medal payout processing (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning can be executed.
As a result, the addition of credits or the payout of medals from the hopper 35 can be performed at the timing desired by the player.

Further, in this embodiment, a #th reel management timer (_WK_RL#_TIME) for storing data for measuring a predetermined time for four-phase excitation output for stopping the #th reel 31 is provided. The #th reel management timer (_WK_RL#_TIME) is a storage area dedicated to data for measuring a predetermined time for four-phase excitation output.
Then, when the data stored in the #th reel management timer (_WK_RL#_TIME) is "1" or more (not "0"), the four-phase excitation output of the motor 32 of the #th reel 31 is continued, When the data stored in the #th reel management timer (_WK_RL#_TIME) becomes "0", the four-phase excitation output of the motor 32 of the #th reel 31 is terminated.

As a result, by checking the data stored in the #th reel management timer (_WK_RL#_TIME), it is possible to determine whether or not a predetermined period of four-phase excitation output to the motor 32 of the #th reel 31 has elapsed (four-phase (whether excitation output is being performed or not) can be easily determined.
In particular, in the present embodiment, only the data of the # reel management timer (_WK_RL#_TIME) for the reel 31 corresponding to the third (last) operated stop switch 42 is checked, so the 4-phase excitation output ends. It is possible to simplify the processing for determining whether or not, and reduce the amount of ROM used by the program.

It should be noted that two reels 31 are stopped (under the condition that the excitation output for stopping the reels 31 is terminated for the two reels 31), and the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is activated. In a situation where the operation is accepted and the symbol combination for which medals are paid out (given) can be stopped and displayed, the operation of the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is accepted. Suppose it continues.

In this case, "Yes" is determined in step S1334 of FIG. 240, and a flag (carry flag) indicating presence of input port level data is set in step S1337. 238, the processing of steps S1313 and S1314 is repeated, and the processing after step S1315 is not performed. Even if the predetermined period has passed, the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning is not executed.
Then, when the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is released, it becomes "No" in step 1314 of FIG. It becomes possible.

Similarly, for example, even if the four-phase excitation output of the motors 32 of all the reels 31 including the motor 32 of the reel 31 (for example, the right reel 31) that stops last is completed, the reel 31 that stops last (for example, the right reel 31) ) is accepted, the stop switch 42 corresponding to the first stopped reel 31 (for example, the left reel 31) is operated, and then the stop switch 42 corresponding to the first stopped reel 31 is operated. When the stop switch 42 corresponding to the last stopped reel 31 is released while the switch 42 is being operated, even if a predetermined period of four-phase excitation output for stopping the third reel 31 elapses, Do not execute medal payout processing (M_WIN_PAY) when winning a prize.
Then, when the stop switch 42 corresponding to the first reel 31 (for example, the left reel 31) is released (at least all stop switches are released), the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning can be executed. Become.

In this way, in a game in which symbol combinations for which medals are paid out (given) are stopped and displayed, if the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is continuously operated, medal payout processing (M_WIN_PAY ) is not executed and the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is released, the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning can be executed.
Similarly, when the stop switch 42 corresponding to one of the reels 31 is continued to be operated in a game in which the symbol combinations for which medals are paid out (given) are stopped and displayed, the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning is started. When the stop switches 42 corresponding to all the reels 31 are released without being executed, the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning can be executed.
As a result, addition of credits or payout of medals from the hopper 35 can be performed at the timing desired by the player.

In addition, even if the power switch 11 is unintentionally turned off and the power shutdown process is executed under the condition that the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is operated, By turning on the power switch 11 while the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is operated, the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning is not executed, and the third reel 31 corresponds to the reel 31. When the stop switch 42 is released, the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning can be executed.
As a result, even if the power is turned off at unintended timing, the credits can be added or the medals can be paid out from the hopper 35 at the timing desired by the player.

In addition, in this embodiment, the main control board 50, after the number of bets enabling the execution of a game has been bet, firstly inputs the input port 2 level data (_PT_IN2_OLD) of the address "F005 (H)" of the RWM 53 (Fig. 237). , and determines whether or not the acquired data is "0".
Furthermore, when it is determined that the acquired data is "0", next, the data stored in the input port 4 level data (_PT_IN4_OLD) (Fig. 237) of the address "F006 (H)" of the RWM 53 is A logical product (AND) operation is performed on the obtained data and "01111111(B)", and it is determined whether or not the result is "0".
Further, when it is determined that the result of the logical AND operation is "0", next, it is determined whether or not the rise data of the start switch 41 is ON.

Then, when it is determined that the rise data of the start switch 41 is ON, the rotation start control of the reel 31 based on the operation of the start switch 41 is executed.
On the other hand, when it is judged that the data stored in the input port 2 level data (_PT_IN2_OLD) of the address "F005 (H)" is not "0", it is judged that the result of the logical AND operation is not "0". When it does, the rotation start control of the reel 31 based on the operation of the start switch 41 is not executed.
As a result, the operation of the start switch 41 is performed under the condition that the operation of the bet switches 40 (1-bet switch 40a, 3-bet switch 40b) is accepted after the number of bets enabling the execution of the game has been placed. When accepted, the rotation start control of the reel 31 based on the operation of the start switch 41 can be prevented from being executed.

Also in this embodiment, the setting key switch 152 is provided as described in the eleventh embodiment and the nineteenth embodiment (A).
Then, as described in the 11th embodiment and the 19th embodiment (A), in a state where the power is turned on and the number of bets has not been placed, the front door 12 is opened and the door switch 17 is turned on. When the setting key is turned on, the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion slot 151 and rotated, for example, by 90 degrees clockwise to turn on the setting key switch 152 (when the signal of the setting key switch 152 is turned on), the setting confirmation state is entered. (setting confirmation mode).

When the number of bets has been placed, the result is "Yes" in step S274 of FIG. Don't migrate.
In the setting confirmation state, the setting value cannot be changed (even if the setting change switch 153 is operated, the setting value does not change), but the current setting value can be confirmed. The current set value is displayed on the set value display LED 73 . When the setting key is rotated counterclockwise to turn off the setting key switch 152, the setting confirmation state is terminated.

As described above, in this embodiment, when executing the rotation start control of the reel 31, the data stored in the input port 2 level data (_PT_IN2_OLD) of the address "F005 (H)" and the address "F006 (H)", the data stored in the input port 4 level data (_PT_IN4_OLD) is checked, but the data of the input port to which the signal of the setting key switch 152 is input is not checked.

For example, the data of the input port to which the signal of the setting key switch 152 is input is not checked, the level data of the RWM 53 corresponding to the input port to which the signal of the setting key switch 152 is input is not checked, and the setting key switch is not checked. The bit corresponding to the signal of the setting key switch 152 among the data of the input port to which the signal of the setting key switch 152 is input is not checked, and the level data of the RWM 53 corresponding to the input port to which the signal of the setting key switch 152 is input. Among them, the bit corresponding to the signal of the setting key switch 152 is not checked.

Therefore, the signal of the setting key switch 152 is input (the signal of the setting key switch 152 is ON) after the number of bets that allows the game to be executed (the number of bets corresponding to the specified number) has been placed. In addition, when the operation of the start switch 41 is accepted under the condition that the front door 12 is closed (the door switch 17 is off), the rotation start control of the reel 31 based on the operation of the start switch 41 can be executed. and

Here, even though the bed switch 40 is released after the bed switch 40 is operated, there is a possibility that the operation of the bed switch 40 will remain accepted due to deterioration of the bed switch 40 .
In this embodiment, even if the start switch 41 is operated while the operation of the bet switch 40 is being accepted, the rotation start control of the reels 31 based on the operation of the start switch 41 is not executed.

Similarly, even when the settlement switch 43 is operated and then released, the operation of the settlement switch 43 is still accepted due to deterioration of the settlement switch 43. 41 is operated, the rotation start control of the reel 31 based on the operation of the start switch 41 is not executed.
As a result, even if the start switch 41 is operated, the player can recognize that the slot machine 10 has some kind of abnormality because the reels 31 do not rotate. When the player informs the hall clerk of the fact, the hall clerk can also recognize that the slot machine 10 has some kind of abnormality.
It should be noted that neither the main control board 50 nor the sub-control board 80 issues an error notification even if the operation of the bed switch 40 or the settlement switch 43 remains accepted. This is because, if an error notification is given in such a case, the player may feel annoyed.

In addition, it is usually unthinkable that the setting key switch 152 is turned on (the signal of the setting key switch 152 is turned on) in the middle of the game. 152 signal is on), it is likely to be noise. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the signal of the setting key switch 152 is input (when the signal of the setting key switch 152 is ON) with the number of bets that can be played (the number of bets corresponding to the specified number) betted. Yes) and the front door 12 is closed (the door switch 17 is off), when the operation of the start switch 41 is accepted, the rotation start control of the reel 31 based on the operation of the start switch 41 be executable.
As a result, it is possible to prevent the progress of the game from being interrupted by the noise.

On the other hand, under the condition that the signal of the setting key switch 152 is ON, a predetermined external signal (for example, an external signal 4 for notifying an error or the like (11th embodiment) is generated based on the signal of the setting key switch 152 being ON. It is possible to inform the hall computer or the like by outputting the configuration diagram 33)). Therefore, the hall clerk or the like can grasp that some error has occurred in the slot machine 10 to which the predetermined external signal has been output.
Under the condition that the signal of the setting key switch 152 is ON, a predetermined external signal (for example, the external signal X (see FIG. 33 of the eleventh embodiment)) that can identify that the signal of the setting key switch 152 is ON. It may be configured to output external signals other than 1 to 5)).

In addition, in this embodiment, the main control board 50, at the timing when the stop acceptance time of the reel 31 has passed, firstly, the input port 2 level data (_PT_IN2_OLD) of the address "F005 (H)" of the RWM 53 (Fig. 237). ) and determines whether or not the acquired data is "0".
Furthermore, when it is determined that the acquired data is "0", next, the data stored in the input port 4 level data (_PT_IN4_OLD) (Fig. 237) of the address "F006 (H)" of the RWM 53 is A logical product (AND) operation is performed on the obtained data and "11111111(B)", and it is determined whether or not the result is "0".
Further, when it is determined that the result of the logical product operation is "0", next, it is determined whether or not the rise data of the #th stop switch 42 is ON.

When it is determined that the start-up data of the #th stop switch 42 is ON, the stop control of the #th reel 31 based on the operation of the #th stop switch 42 is executed.
On the other hand, when it is judged that the data stored in the input port 2 level data (_PT_IN2_OLD) of the address "F005 (H)" is not "0", it is judged that the result of the logical AND operation is not "0". When the ## stop switch 42 is operated, stop control of the ## reel 31 is not performed.
Thereby, when the operation of the ## stop switch 42 (for example, the left stop switch 42) is accepted under the condition that the plurality of reels 31 rotate at a constant speed and the operation of the start switch 41 is accepted In addition, it is possible not to perform the stop control of the #th reel 31 (eg, the left reel 31) based on the operation of the #th stop switch 42 (eg, the left stop switch 42).

Further, as described above, in the present embodiment, when executing the stop control of the #th reel 31, the data stored in the input port 2 level data (_PT_IN2_OLD) at the address "F005 (H)" and the address " F006(H)” is checked for data stored in the input port 4 level data (_PT_IN4_OLD), but the data of the input port to which the signal of the setting key switch 152 is input is not checked.

For example, the data of the input port to which the signal of the setting key switch 152 is input is not checked, the level data of the RWM 53 corresponding to the input port to which the signal of the setting key switch 152 is input is not checked, and the setting key switch is not checked. The bit corresponding to the signal of the setting key switch 152 among the data of the input port to which the signal of the setting key switch 152 is input is not checked, and the level data of the RWM 53 corresponding to the input port to which the signal of the setting key switch 152 is input. Among them, the bit corresponding to the signal of the setting key switch 152 is not checked.

Therefore, the plurality of reels 31 rotate at a constant speed, the signal of the setting key switch 152 is input (the signal of the setting key switch 152 is ON), and the front door 12 is closed (the door switch 17 is OFF). ), when the operation of the #th stop switch 42 is accepted, the stop control of the #th reel 31 based on the operation of the #th stop switch 42 can be executed.

Here, even though the start switch 41 is released after the start switch 41 is operated, there is a possibility that the operation of the start switch 41 will remain accepted due to deterioration of the start switch 41 .
In this embodiment, while the operation of the start switch 41 is still accepted, even if the # stop switch 42 is operated, the stop control of the # reel 31 is executed based on the operation of the # stop switch 42. do not.

Similarly, after operating the bed switch 40 (1 bed switch 40a, 3 bed switch 40b), even though the bed switch 40 is released, the operation of the bed switch 40 is still accepted due to deterioration of the bed switch 40 and when the operation of the adjustment switch 43 remains accepted due to deterioration of the adjustment switch 43 even though the adjustment switch 43 is released after being operated. Also, even if the #th stop switch 42 is operated, the stop control of the #th reel 31 based on the operation of the #th stop switch 42 is not performed.

As a result, even if the #th stop switch 42 is operated, the player can recognize that the slot machine 10 has some kind of abnormality because the #th reel 31 does not stop. When the player informs the hall clerk of the fact, the hall clerk can also recognize that the slot machine 10 has some kind of abnormality.
Even if the operation of the bed switch 40, the start switch 41, and the settlement switch 43 continues to be accepted, neither the main control board 50 nor the sub-control board 80 issues an error notification. This is because, if an error notification is given in such a case, the player may feel annoyed.

In addition, it is usually unthinkable that the setting key switch 152 is turned on (the signal of the setting key switch 152 is turned on) in the middle of the game. 152 signal is on), it is likely to be noise. Therefore, in this embodiment, the plurality of reels 31 rotate at a constant speed, the signal of the setting key switch 152 is input (the signal of the setting key switch 152 is ON), and the front door 12 is closed ( When the operation of the #th stop switch 42 is accepted under the condition that the door switch 17 is off, the stop control of the #th reel 31 based on the operation of the #th stop switch 42 can be executed.
As a result, it is possible to prevent the progress of the game from being interrupted by the noise.

On the other hand, under the condition that the signal of the setting key switch 152 is ON, a predetermined external signal (for example, an external signal 4 for notifying an error or the like (11th embodiment) is generated based on the signal of the setting key switch 152 being ON. It is possible to inform the hall computer or the like by outputting the configuration diagram 33)). Therefore, the hall clerk or the like can grasp that some error has occurred in the slot machine 10 to which the predetermined external signal has been output.
Under the condition that the signal of the setting key switch 152 is ON, a predetermined external signal (for example, the external signal X (see FIG. 33 of the eleventh embodiment)) that can identify that the signal of the setting key switch 152 is ON. It may be configured to output external signals other than 1 to 5)).

Although the thirtieth embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the contents described above, and various modifications such as those described below are possible.
(1) In the above embodiment, in the all reel stop check, only the data of the reel management timer # (_WK_RL#_TIME) for the reel 31 corresponding to the third (last) operated stop switch 42 is checked. It is not limited to this.
For example, in the all-reel stop check, data of the #th reel management timer (_WK_RL#_TIME) for all the reels 31 may be checked.

Specifically, in the all reel stop check, first, the data stored in the first reel management timer (_WK_RL1_TIME) is stored in the A register.
Next, the A register value and the data stored in the second reel management timer (_WK_RL2_TIME) are logically summed (OR), and the result is stored in the A register value.
Next, the A register value and the data stored in the third reel management timer (_WK_RL3_TIME) are logically summed (OR), and the result is stored in the A register value.

Then, it is determined whether or not the A register value is "0", and when it is determined that the A register value is not "0"("No"), it is stored in the first reel management timer (_WK_RL1_TIME) Return to the process of storing data in the A register. That is, the process after the process of storing the data stored in the first reel management timer (_WK_RL1_TIME) in the A register is repeated. In this case, the processing from step S291 onward in FIG. 238 is not performed.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the A register value is "0"("Yes"), the all-reel stop check is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S291 in FIG. 238, and then to step S294. As a result, display judgment and medal payout processing (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning are sequentially executed.

Here, when the left reel 31 is stopped and the middle reel 31 and the right reel 31 are rotating at a constant speed, it is assumed that the middle stop switch 42 and the right stop switch 42 are quickly operated in this order. Then, it is assumed that the operation of the middle stop switch 42 is accepted, and then the operation of the right stop switch 42 is accepted before the middle reel 31 stops. At this time, after the operation of the middle stop switch 42 is accepted, the number of moving symbols (the number of sliding frames) until the middle reel 31 stops is set to "4", and after the operation of the right stop switch 42 is accepted. , the number of moving symbols until the right reel 31 stops is set to "0". In such a case, the right reel 31 may stop first and then the middle reel 31 may stop.

That is, the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 operated third (last) stops second (first), and the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 operated second (last) comes third (last). may stop.
In this case, as in the above embodiment, in the all reel stop check, only the data of #th reel management timer (_WK_RL#_TIME) for the reel 31 corresponding to the third (last) operated stop switch 42 is checked. However, it cannot be determined that the four-phase excitation output for all the reels 31 has ended.

Therefore, as in this modified example (1), in the all reel stop check, by checking the data of the #th reel management timer (_WK_RL#_TIME) for all the reels 31, the operation sequence of the stop switch 42, Even if the stop order of the reels 31 is changed, it can be determined that the four-phase excitation output for all the reels 31 has ended, and the predetermined period for performing the four-phase excitation output for all the reels 31 has elapsed. After that, medal payout processing (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning can be executed.

(2) In the above embodiment, in step S1337 of FIG. 240, the carry flag bit of the flag register is set to "1" as a flag indicating the presence of input port level data, but the present invention is not limited to this.
For example, predetermined information may be stored in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53 as a flag indicating presence of input port level data.
In this case, the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage area of the RWM 53 is not cleared when some arithmetic processing is executed like the bit data of the flag register. Before S1331, a process of clearing predetermined information stored in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53 is executed.

(3) In the above embodiment, when the operation of the #th stop switch 42 is accepted under the condition that the plurality of reels 31 rotate at a constant speed and the operation of the start switch 41 is accepted, the #th It is assumed that the stop control of the #th reel 31 based on the operation of the stop switch 42 is not executed.
However, the present invention is not limited to this. The stop control of the #th reel 31 based on the operation of the #stop switch 42 may be executed.

As a result, for example, even though the left stop switch 42 is operated first and the middle stop switch 42 is operated second, when the left stop switch 42 is operated, deterioration of the start switch 41 or the like causes the start switch to Since the operation of 41 is still accepted, it is possible to prevent a situation in which it is determined that the middle stop switch 42 has been operated first.

In particular, in an AT machine, if it is determined that the middle stop switch 42 has been operated first despite the fact that the left stop switch 42 has been operated first, this will result in an error in the pressing order, which is disadvantageous to the player. However, even if the operation of the start switch 41 is accepted, by enabling the stop control of the #th reel 31 based on the operation of the #th stop switch 42, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the pressing order is incorrect during AT. occurrence can be prevented.

Specifically, for example, during a general game of 1BB game (when 1BB is activated), winning number "10" is won by the combination lottery means 61, and in a game in which the minor combination A1 condition device (FIG. 124) is activated, the correct answer is The pressing order is left, middle, right. At this time, if it is determined that the middle stop switch 42 was operated first despite the fact that the left stop switch 42 was operated first, the pressing order is wrong, and a small error occurs. Any one of roles 13 to 17 (three-card role) wins.
However, even if the operation of the start switch 41 is accepted, the stop control of the left reel 31 based on the operation of the left stop switch 42 can be executed. Since the small winning combination 01 (15-card winning combination) is won in order, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the pushing order is incorrect during AT.
For example, the same applies to the case where the win number "16" is won by the win lottery means 61 and the minor win B1 condition device (FIG. 125) is activated.

It should be noted that, as in this modification, even if the stop control of the #th reel 31 based on the operation of the #th stop switch 42 is made executable under the condition that the operation of the start switch 41 is accepted, the setting key Regardless of whether the signal of the switch 152 is ON/OFF, the stop control of the #th reel 31 based on the operation of the #th stop switch 42 may be executed. Further, when the signal of the setting key switch 152 is ON, the stop control of the #th reel 31 based on the operation of the #th stop switch 42 may not be executed.

(4) For example, the operation of the second stop switch 42 can be accepted under the condition that the operation of the first stop switch 42 is accepted and then the operation of the first stop switch 42 is accepted. At the same time, based on the operation of the second stop switch 42, the stop control of the corresponding reel 31 may be executable.

As a result, for example, even though the left stop switch 42, the middle stop switch 42, and the right stop switch 42 are operated in this order, when the middle stop switch 42 is operated, deterioration of the stop switch 42 or the like causes the left stop switch Since the operation of 42 is still accepted, it is possible to prevent a situation in which it is determined that the right stop switch 42 has been operated second.

In particular, in the AT machine, when the stop operation is performed in the order of the left stop switch 42, the middle stop switch 42, and the right stop switch 42, although the middle stop switch 42 was operated second, the right stop switch 42 was operated second. If it is determined that the stop switch 42 has been operated, it will result in an error in the pressing order, which is disadvantageous to the player. By making it possible to accept the operation of the stop switch 42 of the other stop switch 42 and to execute the stop control of the corresponding reel 31 based on the operation of the other stop switch 42, it is possible to make a mistake in the pressing order during AT It is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation.

Specifically, for example, during a general game of 1BB game (when 1BB is activated), winning number "10" is won by the combination lottery means 61, and the small combination A1 condition device (FIG. 124) is operated, the correct answer The pressing order is left, middle, right. At this time, if it is determined that the right stop switch 42 was operated second even though the middle stop switch 42 was operated second, the pressing order is wrong. , one of 13 to 17 small wins (three wins) wins.
This would disadvantage the player, so even if the operation of the left stop switch 42 is accepted, the stop control of the middle reel 31 based on the operation of the middle stop switch 42 can be executed. Since it becomes the pushing order and the small winning combination 01 (15-card winning combination) wins, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the pushing order is mistaken during AT.
For example, the same applies to the case where the winning number "16" is won by the combination lottery means 61 and the minor combination B1 condition device (FIG. 125) is activated.

It should be noted that even in the case where the stop control of the reel 31 based on the operation of the second stop switch 42 can be executed under the condition that the operation of the first stop switch 42 is accepted as in this modification. , the stop control of the reel 31 based on the operation of the stop switch 42 may be executed regardless of whether the signal of the setting key switch 152 is ON/OFF. Further, when the signal of the setting key switch 152 is ON, the stop control of the reels 31 based on the operation of the stop switch 42 may not be executed.

(5) In the above embodiment, when the reel 31 and the motor 32 are stopped, the motor 32 (stepping motor) is subjected to the four-phase excitation output as the excitation output for stopping the reel 31. However, the present invention is not limited to this. do not have.
When stopping the reel 31 and the motor 32, the excitation output for stopping the reel 31 may be, for example, a one-phase excitation output, a two-phase excitation output, or a three-phase excitation output. may Also, first, 2-phase excitation output is performed and a weak brake is applied, then the 2-phase excitation output is switched to 4-phase excitation output, and a strong brake is applied to stop the rotation of the reel 31 and the motor 32. You can let it run.

(6) The content and arrangement of each bit of the input port 2-4 level data shown in FIG. 237 are merely examples, and the content and arrangement are not limited to this. The content and arrangement of each bit of the input port 2-4 level data can be set as appropriate.
For example, the D4 bit of the input port 2 level data (_PT_IN2_OLD) at the address "F005(H)" may be left unused without storing the on/off state of the stop release signal.

Also, for example, for the input port 4 level data (_PT_IN4_OLD) of address "F006(H)", the ON/OFF of the set/reset switch signal may not be stored in the D1 bit, and the D0 to D2 bits may be left unused. .
Furthermore, for example, ON/OFF of the first to third stop switch signals may be stored in the D0 to D2 bits of the input port 4 level data (_PT_IN4_OLD) of "F006(H)".
Furthermore, the flow chart of input inspection in FIG. 240 can be changed as appropriate according to the contents and arrangement of each bit of the input port 2-4 level data.

It is preferable that the input port to which the signal of the setting key switch 152 is input and the input port to which the signal of the bed switch 40, the start switch 41, and the stop switch 42 are input are different. 41, the signal of the setting key switch 152 may be input to the input port to which the signal of the stop switch 42 is input.
In the above embodiment, the data stored in the storage area of the input port 2-4 level data of the RWM 53 is acquired to determine the ON/OFF state of each signal, but the data stored in the RWM 53 is acquired. Instead, the signals input to the input ports 2 to 4 may be directly obtained to determine whether each signal is on or off.

(7) In the flow chart of input inspection in FIG. Although it is determined whether or not the signal and stop cancel signal are on, for example, the processing of steps S1331 and S1332 may not be performed.

Also, for example, the ON/OFF states of the first to third stop switch signals are stored in the D0 to D2 bits of the input port 4 level data (_PT_IN4_OLD) of "F006 (H)", and the settlement switch signal is stored in the D3 bit. A 1-bet switch signal is stored in the D4 bit, a 2-bet switch signal is stored in the D5 bit, a 3-bet switch signal is stored in the D6 bit, and ON/OFF of the start switch signal is stored in the D7 bit.
Then, for example, in the flow chart of the input inspection in FIG. 240, only the processing of steps S1335 to S1337 may be performed without performing the processing of steps S1331 to S1334.
(8) The first to thirtieth embodiments and the various modifications shown in the first to thirtieth embodiments are not limited to being implemented independently, and can be implemented in combination as appropriate.

<31st embodiment>
In the 31st embodiment, based on the data stored in the #th reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR#) (FIG. 134) of the RWM 53, a predetermined period of four-phase excitation output for stopping the reel 31 has passed. or not. Also, the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning is not executed within a predetermined period of time during which the 4-phase excitation output is performed. Then, when the data stored in the #th reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR#) becomes the stop pulse data "00000000 (B)", the predetermined period for four-phase excitation output has passed (the four-phase excitation output is is completed), and then the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning is executed.

The symbol arrangement of the reels 31, the activated lines, the type of combination, the symbol combination of the combination, the number of payouts, the condition device, the winning combination, the RT, and the main game state are the same as in the twenty-third embodiment.
FIG. 242 is a flowchart showing main processing (M_MAIN) in the thirty-first embodiment, and is a flowchart corresponding to FIG. 139 in the twenty-third embodiment.
In the flowchart of the thirty-first embodiment shown in FIG. 242, the step numbers different from those in FIG. 139 are underlined, and the same steps as in FIG. 139 are given the same step numbers.

Also, in the main processing (M_MAIN) of the 31st embodiment, the processing of steps S295 to S300 of FIG. 139 is executed, but the processing of steps S295 to S300 is omitted in FIG.
Differences from FIG. 139 will be mainly described below.

As shown in FIG. 242, in the thirty-first embodiment, once the start switch acceptance process (M_START_CTL) in step S751 is executed, the process proceeds to step S1351.
Proceeding to step S1351, the main control board 50 executes a reel stop acceptance check. This process is similar to the reel stop acceptance check (M_STOP_CHK) in FIG. 194 of the twenty-fifth embodiment.
Specifically, by processing corresponding to steps S1016 to S1017 in FIG. 194, data of input port rising data A (_PT_IN_A_UP) at address “F017 (H)” in FIG. middle and right stop switch signals) is on. Thereby, it is determined whether or not the operation of any of the stop switches 42 has been accepted.

Also, when it is determined that the operation of one of the stop switches 42 has been accepted, next, by the processing corresponding to steps S1022 to S1023 of FIG. The stop position of the reel 31 is determined based on the instantaneous position of the reel 31, and the pattern number corresponding to the determined stop position is stored in the reel pattern number # (for the stop position) (FIGS. 135 to 137). do.
Furthermore, by processing corresponding to the stop symbol set (M_STOPPIC_SET) in step S1024 of FIG. 194, the stop symbol data (_WK_STOP_PIC1-9) for determining the symbol combination to stop on the activated line is updated.
Then, by the interrupt processing executed after the processing of step S1351 (processing corresponding to the reel stop acceptance check (M_STOP_CHK) in FIG. 194 of the twenty-fifth embodiment), the # # reel symbol number (for passing position) (from FIG. 135 137) and the #th reel pattern number (for the stop position) have become the same value, the #th reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR#) (FIG. 134) is set to deceleration pulse data "00001111 (B)". Set (4 phases on). As a result, the four-phase excitation output to the motor 32 of the #th reel 31 is started.

Note that the #th reel symbol number (for passing position) and the #th reel symbol number (for stop position) are the same value, and the step number of one symbol of #th reel 13 is a predetermined value (for example, " 3”), the deceleration pulse data “00001111 (B)” may be set in the #th reel motor signal data to start four-phase excitation output to the motor 32 of the #th reel 31. .
When the reel stop acceptance check in step S1351 is completed, the process proceeds to step S1352.

Proceeding to step S1352, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the reel stop acceptance check in step S1351 has been completed for all the reels 31. That is, it is determined whether or not the operation of all the stop switches 42 has been accepted.
Here, when it is determined in step S1352 that the reel stop acceptance check for all the reels 31 has not been completed, the process returns to step S1351. In this case, the processing of steps S1351 and S1352 is repeated.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1352 that the reel stop reception check for all the reels 31 has been completed, the process proceeds to the next step S1353.

In step S1353, the main control board 50 stores the data stored in the input port level data A (_PT_IN_A_LV) (FIG. 133) at the address "F012(H)" of the RWM 53 in the A register. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S1354.
Proceeding to step S1354, the main control board 50 determines whether or not any stop switch signal is ON (any stop switch 42 operation is accepted).

Specifically, the main control board 50 performs a logical product (AND) operation of the A register value and "00000111 (B)", and determines whether or not the result is "0". Thereby, it is determined whether or not any stop switch signal is ON, that is, whether or not operation of any stop switch 42 is accepted.
When the result of the logical product operation is not "0", it is determined that any of the stop switch signals is ON (operation of any of the stop switches 42 is accepted), and in step S1354 "Yes", and the process returns to step S1353.
On the other hand, when the result of the AND operation is "0", it is determined that all the stop switch signals are OFF (the operation of none of the stop switches 42 is accepted), and in step S1354 It becomes "No", and it progresses to step S291.

Here, when the operation of at least one of the left stop switch 42, the middle stop switch 42, and the right stop switch 42 is accepted, at least one stop switch signal is turned on, and the input port level data A ( _PT_IN_A_LV) becomes "1".
Also, when at least one of the D0 to D2 bits of the input port level data A (_PT_IN_A_LV) is "1", the result of the AND operation is not "0".
Then, when the result of the logical product operation is not "0", the result is "Yes" in step S1354, and the process returns to step S1353. That is, the processing of steps S1353 and S1354 is repeated. In this case, since the processing after step S291 does not proceed, the display determination is not executed, and the medal payout processing (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning is also not executed.

On the other hand, when the left stop switch 42, middle stop switch 42, and right stop switch 42 are all released, the left stop switch signal, middle stop switch signal, and right stop switch signal are all turned off. , the D0 to D2 bits of the input port level data A (_PT_IN_A_LV) are all set to "0".
Also, when the D0 to D2 bits of the input port level data A (_PT_IN_A_LV) are all "0", the result of the logical AND operation is "0".
Then, when the result of the logical AND operation is "0", the result of step S1354 is "No", and the process proceeds to step S291.

After proceeding to step S291, the main control board 50 executes display determination.
Specifically, it is determined whether or not the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is stop-displayed on the active line. Also, when a symbol combination for which medals are to be paid out (given) is stopped and displayed on the active line, the number of medals to be paid out (given number) is determined. Then, the process proceeds to step S292.
The determined number of medals to be paid out (number of awards) may be stored (saved) only in a predetermined register and not stored (saved) in the RWM 53, or may be stored (saved) in the RWM 53. good.

Further, when the result of step S292 is "No" and the process of step S293 is executed, the process proceeds to step S1355.
In step S1355, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the motor 32 of the reel 31 corresponding to the third (last) operated stop switch 42 is being output with four-phase excitation.
Specifically, the main control board 50 acquires #th reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR#) (FIG. 134) for the reel 31 corresponding to the third (last) operated stop switch 42, and is "0".

When the value of the #th reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR#) is not "0", it is determined that the 4-phase excitation is being output, the result of step S1355 becomes "Yes", and the process of step S1355 is executed again. .
On the other hand, when the value of the #th reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR#) is "0", it is determined that the 4-phase excitation output is not being performed, the result of step S1355 is "No", and the process proceeds to step S294.

Here, it is assumed that the third (last) operated stop switch 42 is the right stop switch 42 . In this case, at step S1355, the main control board 50 acquires the third reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR3) (FIG. 134) corresponding to the right reel 31. FIG.
When the right reel 31 starts to decelerate, the deceleration pulse data "00001111 (B)" (4-phase ON) is stored in the third reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR3), and a predetermined period of 4-phase excitation output elapses. Then, the stop pulse data "00000000 (B)" is stored in the third reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR3).

Then, when the value of the third reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR3) is not "0", the result is "Yes" in step S1355, and the process of step S1355 is executed again. That is, the process of step S1355 is repeated. In this case, the process does not proceed to step S294, so the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning is not executed.
On the other hand, when the value of the third reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR3) is "0", the result is "No" in step S1355, and the process proceeds to step S294. This makes it possible to execute medal payout processing (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning.

Proceeding to step S294, the main control board 50 executes medal payout processing (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning. That is, when the number of credits has not reached the upper limit value "50", the number of credits is added, and when the number of credits has reached the upper limit value "50", the hopper motor 36 is driven and the actual The medals are paid out from the hopper 35. It should be noted that the determination as to whether or not the number of credits has reached the upper limit value of "50" is made, for example, in step S394 of FIG.

Here, for example, if the winning number "10" is won by the combination lottery means 61, the small combination A1 condition device (Fig. 124) is activated, and the small combination 01 pays out 15 or 3. Suppose that any one of the 13th to 17th small wins can be won.
Further, the two reels 31 are stopped, the operation of the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is accepted, and the symbol combination (FIG. 119) corresponding to the small winning combination 13 with three payouts is stopped. Suppose that display becomes possible.

Under such circumstances, even if the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is released after the operation of the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is accepted, the third reel Deceleration pulse data "00001111 (B)" (4-phase ON ) is stored, the result is "Yes" in step S1355 of FIG. 242, and the process does not proceed to step S294, so the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning is not executed.

That is, when deceleration pulse data "00001111 (B)" is stored in #th reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR#) corresponding to the third reel 31, the third reel 31 is stopped. 242 continues, and step S1355 of FIG. 242 is repeated, so the process does not proceed to step S294. (M_WIN_PAY) Take no action.

Then, when the data stored in the #th reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR#) corresponding to the third reel 31 becomes the stop pulse data "00000000 (B)", the third reel 31 is stopped. 242 is "No" and the process proceeds to step S294, so that the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning can be executed.
In addition, in the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning, the credit amount is added until the credit amount reaches the upper limit "50". A process of outputting a drive signal for the motor 36 is executed, the hopper motor 36 is driven, and actual medals are paid out from the hopper 35. - 特許庁It should be noted that the determination as to whether or not the number of credits has reached the upper limit value of "50" is made, for example, in step S394 of FIG.

Thus, also in this embodiment, similarly to the twenty-ninth and thirtieth embodiments, after the operation of the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is accepted, the third reel 31 is opened. Before a predetermined period of four-phase excitation output for stopping elapses (for example, timing when four-phase excitation output is performed for stopping the third reel 31, or when the third reel 31 is stopped) ), even if the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is released, the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning is not executed, and the predetermined period of time is reached. After the elapse, the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning is executed.
As a result, the hopper motor 36 (DC motor) is not driven while the motor 32 (stepping motor) is being 4-phase excited, and the hopper motor 36 is driven after the 4-phase excitation of the motor 32 is completed. Therefore, the current required to drive the hopper motor 36 can be secured. That is, the current required to drive the hopper motor 36 can be reliably secured, and the hopper motor 36 can be reliably driven.

Further, in the present embodiment, when deceleration of the #th reel 31 is started, the deceleration pulse data “00001111 (B)” (4-phase ON) is stored in the #th reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR#), and 4-phase excitation is performed. When the predetermined period for outputting has elapsed, the stop pulse data "00000000 (B)" is stored in the #th reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR#).
When the deceleration pulse data "00001111 (B)" is stored in the #th reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR#), the 4-phase excitation output of the motor 32 of the #th reel 31 is continued and the #th reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR#) is stored. When the data stored in the motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR#) becomes the stop pulse data "00000000 (B)", the four-phase excitation output of the motor 32 of the #th reel 31 is terminated.

As a result, by checking the data stored in the #th reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR#), it is possible to determine whether or not a predetermined period of four-phase excitation output to the motor 32 of the #th reel 31 has elapsed (four-phase (whether excitation output is being performed or not) can be easily determined.
In particular, in this embodiment, only the #th reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR#) for the reel 31 corresponding to the third (last) operated stop switch 42 is checked, so that the 4-phase excitation output ends. It is possible to simplify the processing for judging whether or not, and reduce the amount of ROM used by the program.

Further, if the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is released after the operation of the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is accepted, the result is "No" in step S1354 of FIG. , the process proceeds to step S291, so that the display determination is executed even under the condition that the four-phase excitation output for stopping the third reel 31 is being performed. Then, in the display determination, it is determined whether or not the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is stopped on the active line. Determine the number of payouts (number of grants).

Furthermore, after determining the number of medals to be paid out (the number of medals to be awarded) in step S291, the process proceeds to step S1355 to check the data stored in #th reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR#) corresponding to the third reel 31. By doing so, it is determined whether or not the four-phase excitation output for stopping the third reel 31 has ended.
When the data stored in the #th reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR#) corresponding to the third reel 31 becomes the stop pulse data "00000000 (B)", the third reel 31 is stopped. 242, the result is "No", the process proceeds to step S294, and the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning can be executed.

Thus, in this embodiment, when the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is released, the four-phase excitation output for stopping the third reel 31 is being performed. However, the display judgment is executed to determine the number of medals to be paid out (the number of medals to be given), and after that, when the four-phase excitation output for stopping the third reel 31 is completed, the medal payout processing at the time of winning ( M_WIN_PAY ).
As a result, it is possible to determine the number of medals to be paid out (the number of medals to be awarded) before the four-phase excitation output for stopping the third reel 31 ends. It is possible to shorten the time from when the switch 42 is released until when the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning is executed.

In addition, when two reels 31 are stopped and the operation of the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is accepted, the symbol combination for which medals are paid out (given) can be stopped and displayed. , it is assumed that the operation of the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 continues to be accepted.

242, the step S1353 and step S1354 are repeated, and the processing after step S291 is not performed. Even if the period has passed, the display judgment is not executed, the number of payouts is not determined, and the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning is not executed.
Then, when the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is released, it becomes "No" in step 1354 of FIG. It becomes possible.

Specifically, for example, when the winning number "10" is won by the winning lottery means 61, the minor winning combination A1 condition device (Fig. 124) is activated, and the small winning combination 01 pays out 15 coins, or the payout of 3 coins. Suppose that any one of the small winning combinations 13 to 17 can be won.
Furthermore, the two reels 31 stop (the excitation output for stopping the reels 31 ends), the operation of the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is accepted, and three coins are paid out. Suppose that the symbol combination (FIG. 119) corresponding to the small winning combination 13 can be stopped and displayed.

Under such circumstances, it is assumed that the operation of any of the stop switches 42 including the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 or the start switch 41 continues to be accepted.
In this case, the result is "Yes" in step S1354 of FIG. 242, and steps S1353 and S1354 are repeated. Regardless of whether the period has passed or not, display judgment is not executed, therefore the number of payouts is not determined, and medal payout processing (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning is not executed.

Then, when all the stop switches 42 including the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 and the start switch 41 are released, the result of step 1354 in FIG. 242. When a predetermined period of four-phase excitation output for stopping the third reel 31 elapses, the result is "No" in step S1355 of FIG. 242, and the process proceeds to step S294. can be executed.

In this way, in a game in which symbol combinations for which medals are paid out (given) are stopped and displayed, if the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is continued to be operated, display judgment and winning medals are made. When the payout process (M_WIN_PAY) is not executed and the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is released, display judgment and medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning can be executed.
As a result, addition of credits or payout of medals from the hopper 35 can be performed at the timing desired by the player.

In addition, even if the power switch 11 is unintentionally turned off and the power shutdown process is executed under the condition that the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is operated, By turning on the power switch 11 while the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is being operated, the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning is not executed, and the third reel 31 corresponds to the reel 31. When the stop switch 42 is released, the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning can be executed.
As a result, even if the power is turned off at an unintended timing, the addition of credits or the payout of medals from the hopper 35 can be performed at the timing desired by the player.

Similarly, for example, even if the four-phase excitation output of the motors 32 of all the reels 31 including the motor 32 of the reel 31 (for example, the right reel 31) that stops last is completed, the reel 31 that stops last (for example, the right reel 31) ), the stop switch 42 corresponding to the first stopped reel 31 (for example, the left reel 31) is operated, and then the stop switch 42 corresponding to the first stopped reel 31 is operated. When the stop switch 42 corresponding to the last stopped reel 31 is released while the switch 42 is being operated, even if the predetermined period of four-phase excitation output for stopping the third reel 31 elapses, Do not execute medal payout processing (M_WIN_PAY) when winning a prize. Then, when the stop switch 42 corresponding to the first reel 31 (for example, the left reel 31) is released (at least all the stop switches are released), the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning can be executed. Become.
As a result, the addition of credits or the payout of medals from the hopper 35 can be performed at the timing desired by the player.

Although the thirty-first embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the contents described above, and various modifications such as those described below are possible.
(1) In the above embodiment, in step S1355, only the #th reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR#) data for the reel 31 corresponding to the third (last) operated stop switch 42 is checked. Not exclusively.
For example, in step S1355, #th reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR#) for all reels 31 may be checked.

Specifically, in step S1355, first, the data stored in the first reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR1) is stored in the A register.
Next, a logical sum (OR) operation is performed on the A register value and the data stored in the second reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR2), and the result is stored in the A register value.
Next, a logical sum (OR) operation is performed between the A register value and the data stored in the third reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR3), and the result is stored in the A register value.

Then, it is judged whether or not the A register value is "0", and when the A register value is not "0", it is judged that the motor 32 of any reel 31 is in the process of four-phase excitation output, and step "Yes" is determined in S1355, and the process of step S1355 is executed again. In this case, the process does not proceed to step S294.
On the other hand, when the A register value is "0", it is determined that the motors 32 of none of the reels 31 are outputting four-phase excitation. As a result, medal payout processing (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning is executed.

Here, as described in the modified example (1) of the thirtieth embodiment, the reel 31 corresponding to the third (last) operated stop switch 42 stops second, and the second operated stop The reel 31 corresponding to the switch 42 may stop third (last).
In this case, as in the above embodiment, only the #th reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR#) data for the reel 31 corresponding to the third (last) operated stop switch 42 may be checked in step S1355. , it cannot be determined that the four-phase excitation output for all the reels 31 has ended.

Therefore, as in this modification (1), in step S1355, by checking the data of the #th reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR#) for all the reels 31, the operation sequence of the stop switch 42 and the reel 31 Even if the order of stopping is changed, it can be determined that the four-phase excitation output for all the reels 31 has been completed, and after a predetermined period of time for performing the four-phase excitation output for all the reels 31 , medal payout processing (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning can be executed.

(2) In the above embodiment, when the reel 31 and the motor 32 are stopped, the motor 32 (stepping motor) is supplied with a four-phase excitation output as an excitation output for stopping the reel 31. However, the present invention is not limited to this. do not have.
When stopping the reel 31 and the motor 32, the excitation output for stopping the reel 31 may be, for example, a one-phase excitation output, a two-phase excitation output, or a three-phase excitation output. may Also, first, 2-phase excitation output is performed and a weak brake is applied, then the 2-phase excitation output is switched to a 4-phase excitation output, and a strong brake is applied to stop the rotation of the reel 31 and the motor 32. You can let it run.
(3) The 1st to 31st embodiments and the various modifications shown in the 1st to 31st embodiments are not limited to being carried out independently, but can be carried out in combination as appropriate.

<Thirty-Second Embodiment>
In the thirty-second embodiment, the operation of the third (last) stop switch 42 is accepted, and even under the situation where the operation of the stop switch 42 is accepted, the number of medals paid out (given number) can be determined, and after determining the number of medals to be paid out, it is determined whether or not any stop switch 42 has been operated, and if it is determined that none of the stop switches 42 has been operated, a prize is won. It executes the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time.

The symbol arrangement of the reels 31, the activated lines, the type of combination, the symbol combination of the combination, the number of payouts, the condition device, the winning combination, the RT, and the main game state are the same as in the twenty-third embodiment.
FIG. 243 is a diagram showing main data according to the 32nd embodiment among the data stored in the RWM 53 in the 32nd embodiment. Note that the data shown in FIG. 243 is only part of the data, and various data other than the data shown are stored in the RWM 53 .
In FIG. 243, the first reel drive state (_WK_RL1_STS) at the address "F067(H)" is a storage area for storing data indicating the drive state of the motor 32 of the first (left) reel 31. FIG.

Two bits D0 to D1 indicate the driving state of the motor 32 of the first reel 31 . As shown in FIG. 243, "0(D)" indicates that the motor 32 of the first reel 31 is in a constant speed state and that the reel sensor 33 of the first reel 31 has detected the index. "1 (D)" indicates that the motor 32 of the first reel 31 is accelerating or is in a constant speed state and the reel sensor 33 of the first reel 31 has not detected the index. "3(D)" indicates that the motor 32 of the first reel 31 is out of step.

The D2 bit indicates whether or not it is time to execute the standby effect, "1" indicates that it is time to execute the standby effect, and "0" indicates that it is not time to execute the standby effect.
The D3 bit indicates whether or not it is time to start deceleration, "1" indicates that it is time to start deceleration, and "0" indicates that it is not time to start deceleration.

The D5 bit indicates whether or not it is in preparation for stepping out (a state in which an abnormality has occurred in the rotation of the reel 31). Indicates that step-out preparation is not in progress.
The D6 bit indicates whether or not the reel sensor 33 of the first reel 31 has detected the index, "1" indicates that it has detected, and "0" indicates that it has not.
The D7 bit indicates whether the motor 32 of the first reel 31 is stopping or decelerating, "1" indicates that it is not stopping or decelerating (accelerating or constant speed), and "0 ” indicates that the vehicle is stopped or decelerated.

"1" is set to the D2 bit of the first reel drive state (_WK_RL1_STS) at the start of the standby effect.
Also, when the operation of the first stop switch 42 is accepted, the D3 bit of the first reel drive state (_WK_RL1_STS) is set to "1" (deceleration start state).
Furthermore, when the first reel pattern number (for passing position) is updated, if the first reel pattern number (for passing position) falls below "0", the D5 bit of the first reel driving state (_WK_RL1_STS) is set to "1" is set.

Further, a signal from the reel sensor 33 of the first reel 31 is called a first reel sensor signal. The first reel sensor signal turns on when the reel sensor 33 of the first reel 31 detects the index, and turns off when the reel sensor 33 of the first reel 31 does not detect the index. When the first reel sensor signal turns from ON to OFF, the D6 bit of the first reel driving state (_WK_RL1_STS) is set to "1".
Further, when the rotation of the first reel 31 is started, "81 (H)"("10000001(B)") is set to the first reel driving state (_WK_RL1_STS).

Furthermore, when the motor 32 of the first reel 31 is in a constant speed state and the D6 bit is "1", the first reel drive state (_WK_RL1_STS) is set to "80 (H)"("10000000 (B )”) is set.
Furthermore, in the deceleration start state (when the D3 bit is "1"), when the first reel pattern number (for passing position) and the first reel pattern number (for stop position) are the same value, the first "0 (H)"("00000000(B)") is set in the reel driving state (_WK_RL1_STS). That is, when the four-phase excitation output for stopping the motor 32 of the first reel 31 is started, the first reel driving state (_WK_RL1_STS) is set to "0 (H)".
The first reel symbol number (for passing position) and the first reel symbol number (for stop position) are the same value, and the step number of one symbol on the first reel 13 is a predetermined value (for example, " 3”), the first reel driving state may be set to “0 (H)”.

When the D5 bit of the first reel drive state (_WK_RL1_STS) is "1" and the D6 bit is "0", the first reel drive state (_WK_RL1_STS) is set to "83 (H)"(" 10000011(B)”) is set.
Furthermore, when the D6 bit of the first reel driving state (_WK_RL1_STS) is "1", the D5 and D6 bits of the first reel driving state (_WK_RL1_STS) are set to "0".

In FIG. 243, the second reel driving state (_WK_RL2_STS) at the address "F077 (H)" is a storage area for storing data indicating the driving state of the motor 32 of the second (middle) reel 31. H)” is a storage area for storing data indicating the driving state of the motor 32 of the third (right) reel 31 . These contents are the same as the first reel driving state (_WK_RL1_STS) of the address "F067(H)".

In FIG. 243, the input port 2 level data (_PT_IN2_OLD) of the address "F090 (H)" is the first stop switch signal (D0 bit) and the second stop switch signal (D1 bit) input to each bit of the input port 2. ), third stop switch signal (D2 bit), first reel sensor signal (D4 bit), second reel sensor signal (D5 bit), and third reel sensor signal (D6 bit). area.

The ## stop switch signal is turned on when the ## stop switch 42 is operated (the stop button 42a is pushed in), and when the ## stop switch 42 is released (the stopped button 42a that has been pushed in is released, position) to turn it off.
The #th reel sensor signal turns on when the reel sensor 33 of the #th reel 31 detects the index, and turns off when the index is not detected.
In the interrupt processing, the signal input to each bit of the input port 2 is read, and the on/off state of each signal is determined. If there is, store a '0' in the corresponding bit.

FIG. 244 is a flowchart showing main processing (M_MAIN) in the thirty-second embodiment, and is a flowchart corresponding to FIG. 139 in the twenty-third embodiment.
In the flowchart of the thirty-second embodiment shown in FIG. 244, the step numbers different from those in FIG. 139 are underlined, and the same steps as in FIG. 139 are given the same step numbers.

Also, in the main processing (M_MAIN) of the thirty-second embodiment, the processing of steps S295 to S300 of FIG. 139 is executed, but the processing of steps S295 to S300 is omitted in FIG.
Differences from FIG. 139 will be mainly described below.

As shown in FIG. 244, in the thirty-second embodiment, once the start switch acceptance process (M_START_CTL) of step S751 is executed, the process proceeds to step S1361.
Proceeding to step S1361, the main control board 50 executes a reel stop acceptance check. This process is the process shown in FIG. 245, which will be described later. When the reel stop acceptance check in step S1361 is completed, the process proceeds to step S291.

Proceeding to step S291, the main control board 50 executes display determination.
Specifically, it is determined whether or not the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is stop-displayed on the active line. Also, when a symbol combination for which medals are to be paid out (given) is stopped and displayed on the activated line, the number of medals to be paid out (given number) is determined. Then, the process proceeds to step S292.
The determined number of medals to be paid out may be stored (saved) only in a predetermined register and not stored in the RWM 53 , or may be stored in the RWM 53 .

Further, when the result of step S292 is "No" and the process of step S293 is executed, the process proceeds to step S1362.
Proceeding to step S1362, the main control board 50 determines whether or not any stop switch signal is on (any stop switch 42 operation is accepted).

Specifically, in step S1362, the main control board 50 first stores the data stored in the input port 2 level data (_PT_IN2_OLD) (FIG. 243) of the address "F090(H)" of the RWM 53 in the A register. do.
Next, the main control board 50 performs a logical product (AND) operation of the A register value and "00000111 (B)", and determines whether or not the result is "0" (the zero flag is "1"). to judge. Thereby, it is determined whether or not any stop switch signal is ON, that is, whether or not operation of any stop switch 42 is accepted.

When the result of the logical product operation is not "0" (the zero flag is not "1"), one of the stop switch signals is ON (the operation of one of the stop switches 42 is accepted). , and the result of step S1362 is "Yes", and the process of step S1362 is executed again. That is, the process of step S1362 is repeated.
On the other hand, when the result of the AND operation is "0" (zero flag is "1"), all stop switch signals are off (operation of any stop switch 42 is not accepted). No), the result of step S1362 is "No", and the process proceeds to step S294.

Here, when the operation of at least one of the left stop switch 42, the middle stop switch 42, and the right stop switch 42 is accepted, at least one stop switch signal is turned on, and the input port 2 level data ( _PT_IN2_OLD) at least one of the D0 to D2 bits becomes "1".
Also, when at least one of the D0 to D2 bits of the input port 2 level data (_PT_IN2_OLD) is "1", the result of the AND operation is not "0" (the zero flag is not "1").
Then, when the result of the logical product operation is not "0" (the zero flag is not "1"), "Yes" is obtained in step S1362, and the process of step S1362 is repeated. In this case, the process does not proceed to step S294, so the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning is not executed.

On the other hand, when the left stop switch 42, middle stop switch 42, and right stop switch 42 are all released, the left stop switch signal, middle stop switch signal, and right stop switch signal are all turned off. , the D0 to D2 bits of the input port 2 level data (_PT_IN2_OLD) all become "0".
Also, when the D0 to D2 bits of the input port 2 level data (_PT_IN2_OLD) are all "0", the result of the logical AND operation is "0" (the zero flag becomes "1").
Then, when the result of the logical product operation is "0" (the zero flag is "1"), "No" is obtained in step S1362, and the process proceeds to step S294.

Proceeding to step S294, the main control board 50 executes medal payout processing (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning. That is, when the number of credits has not reached the upper limit value "50", the number of credits is added, and when the number of credits has reached the upper limit value "50", the hopper motor 36 is driven and the actual The medals are paid out from the hopper 35. It should be noted that the determination as to whether or not the number of credits has reached the upper limit value of "50" is made, for example, in step S394 of FIG.

FIG. 245 is a flow chart showing reel stop acceptance check in step S1361 of FIG.
In step S1371, the main control board 50 executes a reel drive state inspection.
First, the data stored in the first reel drive state (_WK_RL1_STS) (FIG. 243) at the address "F067(H)" of the RWM 53 is stored in the A register.
Next, the A register value and the data stored in the second reel drive state (_WK_RL2_STS) (FIG. 243) at the address "F077 (H)" of the RWM 53 are ORed, and the result is Store in the A register.

Next, the A register value and the data stored in the third reel drive state (_WK_RL3_STS) (Fig. 243) at the address "F087 (H)" of the RWM 53 are ORed, and the result is Store in the A register.
Finally, a logical product (AND) operation of the A register value and "83 (H)"("10000011(B)" is performed.
Then, the process proceeds to the next step S1372.

Proceeding to step S1372, the main control board 50 determines whether or not all the reels 31 are stopped or decelerating.
Specifically, whether or not the result of the AND operation of the A register value and "83 (H)"("10000011(B)" in step S1371 is "0" (the zero flag is "1") to judge.

When the result of the AND operation is "0" (the zero flag is "1"), it is determined that all the reels 31 are stopped or decelerated, and the result of step S1372 is "Yes". The processing according to this flowchart ends.
On the other hand, when the result of the AND operation is not "0" (the zero flag is not "1"), the motor 32 of any of the reels 31 is not stopped or decelerated (accelerated or at constant speed). ), the result of step S1372 is "No", and the process proceeds to the next step S1373.

Here, it is assumed that the motors 32 of the two reels 31 have already stopped (already stopped). Also, although the operation of the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third (last) reel 31 has been accepted, the four-phase excitation output for stopping the motor 32 of that reel 31 has not yet been performed (four-phase excitation before output). That is, it is assumed that the motor 32 of the third (last) reel 31 is still in a constant speed state.
In this case, the ## reel drive state (_WK_RL#_STS) (FIG. 243) of the two reels 31 already stopped is "00000000 (B)", but the third (last) reel 31 Since the #th reel drive state (_WK_RL#_STS) (Fig. 243) is "10001000 (B)", the #th reel drive state (_WK_RL#_STS) (Fig. 243) of all the reels 31 is ORed. ) The result of the calculation is “10001000 (B)”.

Therefore, the result of ANDing "10001000(B)" and "83(H)"("10000011(B)" is "10000000(B)" and does not become "0" (the zero flag is is not "1"), the result is "No" in step S1372, and the process proceeds to the next step S1373.
Therefore, since the process does not proceed to step S291 in FIG. 244, display determination is not executed and the number of medals to be paid out (the number of medals to be awarded) is not determined.

It is also assumed that the motors 32 of the two reels 31 have already stopped (that is, the four-phase excitation output for stopping the reels 31 has ended). Then, the operation of the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third (last) reel 31 is accepted, and the four-phase excitation output for stopping the motor 32 of the reel 31 has already been performed (after the four-phase excitation output Yes). That is, it is assumed that the motor 32 of the third (last) reel 31 has already stopped.
In this case, since the # reel drive state (_WK_RL#_STS) (FIG. 243) of the three reels 31 is all "00000000 (B)", the # reel drive state (_WK_RL) of the three reels 31 #_STS) (FIG. 243) are logically summed (OR) to be "00000000 (B)".

Therefore, the logical AND operation result of "00000000(B)" and "83(H)"("10000011(B)" is "00000000(B)", which becomes "0" (the zero flag is "1"), so the answer in step S1372 is "Yes", and the processing according to this flowchart is terminated.
Therefore, since the process proceeds to step S291 in FIG. 244, display determination is executed, and the number of medals to be paid out (the number of medals to be awarded) can also be determined.

245, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the motors 32 are in the constant speed state and the reel sensors 33 have detected the index for all the reels 31 .
Specifically, the main control board 50 performs a logical product (AND) operation of the A register value and "03 (H)"("00000011(B)"), and the result is "0" ( The zero flag is "1"). Thereby, it is determined whether or not the motor 32 is in the constant speed state and the reel sensor 33 has detected the index for all the reels 31 .

When the result of the AND operation is not "0" (the zero flag is not "1"), it is determined that the motor 32 is not in the constant speed state and the reel sensor 33 has not detected the index for at least one reel 31. , step S1373 becomes "No", and the process proceeds to the next step S1374.
On the other hand, when the result of the logical product operation is "0" (the zero flag is "1"), all the reels 31 have the motors 32 in the constant speed state and the reel sensors 33 after index detection. It is judged that there is, and it becomes "Yes" at step S1373, skips step S1374, and proceeds to step S1375.

Here, for all reels 31, when the motors 32 are in a constant speed state and after the reel sensor 33 has detected the index, the #th reel drive state (_WK_RL#_STS) (Fig. 243) will eventually is also "80 (H)"("10000000(B)").
In this case, the result of logical sum (OR) operation of the # reel driving states (_WK_RL#_STS) (FIG. 243) of the three reels 31 is "10000000 (B)".
Therefore, when the process proceeds to step S1373, the A register value is "10000000 (B)".

Therefore, in step S1373, when the AND operation of the A register value and "03(H)"("00000011(B)") is performed, the result becomes "0" (the zero flag is "1"). ), and step S1373 results in "Yes", so step S1374 is skipped and the process advances to step S1375.
Therefore, since the process of step S1375 (the process at the time of reception of stoppage) can be executed, the stop control of the reels 31 based on the operation of the stop switch 42 can be executed.

It is also assumed that the motors 32 of all three reels 31 are in a constant speed state, but the reel sensor 33 of at least one reel 31 has not yet detected the index (before detection).
In this case, the #th reel driving state (_WK_RL#_STS) (FIG. 243) of the reel 31 before the index detection is "81 (H)"("10000001(B)"). The logical sum (OR) operation result of the #th reel drive state (_WK_RL#_STS) (FIG. 243) is "10000001 (B)".
Therefore, the value of the A register is "10000001 (B)" when the process proceeds to step S1373.

Therefore, in step S1373, when the logical product (AND) operation of the A register value and "03 (H)"("00000011(B)") is performed, the result is "00000001 (B)" and "0 (the zero flag does not become "1"), the result of step S1373 is "No", and the process proceeds to step S1374.
Therefore, the processing of step S1374 (preparation for step-out inspection) is performed, and the processing of step S1375 (processing when accepting stoppage) is not performed.

Further, when the reel 31 is in the constant speed state, the #th reel drive state (_WK_RL#_STS) is "10000000 (B)", and when the reel 31 is stopped, the #th reel drive state ( _WK_RL#_STS) is "00000000 (B)".
Therefore, in a situation where one reel 31 has already stopped (4-phase excitation output for stopping the reel 31 has ended) and the remaining two reels 31 are in a constant speed state, or two reels 31 31 has already stopped (the 4-phase excitation output for stopping the reel 31 has ended) and the remaining one reel 31 is in a constant speed state, the # # reel driving state of the three reels 31 is maintained. (_WK_RL#_STS) is logically summed (_WK_RL#_STS), and when the result is ANDed with "00000011(B)", the same result "00000000(B)" is obtained.
As a result, even if there is a reel 31 that has already stopped, it is possible to determine whether or not the stop can be accepted by the same processing, so that the processing can be simplified and the amount of ROM used by the program can be reduced. can be reduced.

Proceeding to step S1374, the main control board 50 executes step-out inspection preparation. This process is the process shown in FIG. 246, which will be described later. When the step-out inspection preparation in step S1374 is completed, the process proceeds to step S1375.
Proceeding to step S1375, the main control board 50 executes processing for stop acceptance. In this process, the stop position of the ## reel 31 is determined based on the winning combination lottery result of the current game and the position of the ## reel 31 at the moment when the operation of the ## stop switch 42 is accepted, and the determined stop position is determined. A symbol number corresponding to the position is stored in the #th reel symbol number (for the stop position). Furthermore, the stop symbol data for judging the symbol combination to stop on the activated line is updated. Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

More specifically, in the processing at the time of stop acceptance in step S1375 of FIG. 245, processing corresponding to steps S1016, S1017, 1022, S1023, and S1024 in FIG. 194 of the twenty-fifth embodiment is executed.
That is, the input port start-up data A (_PT_IN_A_UP) of the address "F017(H)" in FIG. 133 is obtained by the processing corresponding to step S1016 in FIG.
Next, by processing corresponding to step S1017 in FIG. 194, it is determined whether or not the stop switch 42 has risen (whether or not the rise data of the stop switch 42 is ON).
When it is determined that the stop switch 42 has risen (corresponding to "Yes" in step S1017 in FIG. 194), the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 determined to have risen corresponds to steps S1022 to S1023 in FIG. By the processing, the stop position of the reel 31 is determined based on the winning combination lottery result of the current game and the position of the reel 31 at the moment when the operation of the stop switch 42 is accepted, and the pattern number corresponding to the determined stop position is determined. , reel pattern number (for stop position).
Furthermore, by processing corresponding to the stop symbol set (M_STOPPIC_SET) in step S1024 of FIG. 194, the stop symbol data (_WK_STOP_PIC1-9) for determining the symbol combination to stop on the activated line is updated.
Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

It should be noted that the #th reel symbol number (for passing position) and the #th reel symbol number ( (for the stop position) have reached the same value, the four-phase excitation output for stopping the motor 32 of the #th reel 31 is started.
In addition, the #th reel symbol number (for passing position) and the #th reel symbol number (for stop position) are the same value, and the step number of one symbol of #th reel 13 is a predetermined value (for example, "3"), the 4-phase excitation output for stopping the motor 32 of the # reel 31 may be started.

FIG. 246 is a flow chart showing the step-out inspection preparation in step S1374 of FIG. 245 and step S1404 of FIG. 248 to be described later.
At step S1381, the main control board 50 sets the address "F067 (H)" of the RWM 53 in the first reel drive state (_WK_RL1_STS) (FIG. 243). Then, the process proceeds to the next step S1382.

Proceeding to step S1382, the main control board 50 refers to the address set in step S1381 and executes a step-out inspection for the first (left) reel 31. FIG. This process is the process shown in FIG. 247, which will be described later. When the step-out inspection in step S1382 is completed, the process proceeds to step S1383.
At step S1383, the main control board 50 sets the address "F077 (H)" of the RWM 53 in the second reel driving state (_WK_RL2_STS) (FIG. 243). Then, the process proceeds to the next step S1384.

Proceeding to step S1384, the main control board 50 refers to the address set in step S1383 and executes a step-out inspection for the second (middle) reel 31. FIG. This process is the process shown in FIG. 247, which will be described later, and has the same content as that of step S1382. When the step-out inspection in step S1384 is completed, the process proceeds to step S1385.
At step S1385, the main control board 50 sets the address "F087 (H)" of the RWM 53 in the third reel drive state (_WK_RL3_STS) (FIG. 243). Then, the process proceeds to the next step S1386.

Proceeding to step S1386, the main control board 50 refers to the address set in step S1385 and performs a step-out inspection for the third (right) reel 31. FIG. This process is the process shown in FIG. 247, which will be described later, and has the same content as steps S1382 and S1384. When the step-out inspection in step S1386 is completed, the process proceeds to step S1387.
Proceeding to step S1387, the main control board 50 executes stop acceptance wait. This process is the process shown in FIG. 248 to be described later. Then, when the stop acceptance wait in step S1387 ends, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

FIG. 247 is a flow chart showing the step-out inspection in steps S1382, S1384 and S1386 of FIG.
In step S1391, the main control board 50 determines whether or not it is out of step. When it is determined that the step-out state has occurred, the process proceeds to the next step S1392.

Proceeding to step S1392, the main control board 50 sets parameters for re-accelerating the reel 31 determined to be out of step. As a result, the motor 32 of the reel 31 determined to be out of step is again subjected to an excitation output for acceleration. Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

FIG. 248 is a flow chart showing stop acceptance waiting in step S1387 of FIG.
In step S1401, the main control board 50 executes a reel drive state inspection. This process is similar to step S1371 in FIG.
That is, the data stored in the first reel driving state (_WK_RL1_STS) (FIG. 243) at the address "F067(H)" of the RWM 53 is stored in the A register.
Next, the A register value and the data stored in the second reel drive state (_WK_RL2_STS) (Fig. 243) at the address "F077 (H)" of the RWM 53 are ORed, and the result is Store in the A register.

Next, the A register value and the data stored in the third reel drive state (_WK_RL3_STS) (Fig. 243) at the address "F087 (H)" of the RWM 53 are ORed, and the result is Store in the A register.
Finally, a logical product (AND) operation of the A register value and "83 (H)"("10000011(B)" is performed.
Then, the process proceeds to the next step S1402.

Proceeding to step S1402, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the motors 32 are in the constant speed state and the reel sensors 33 have detected the index for all the reels 31 . This process is similar to step S1373 in FIG.
That is, the logical product (AND) operation of the A register value and "03 (H)"("00000011(B)") is performed, and whether the result is "0" (the zero flag is "1") determine whether or not Thereby, it is determined whether or not the motor 32 is in the constant speed state and the reel sensor 33 has detected the index for all the reels 31 .

When the result of the AND operation is not "0" (the zero flag is not "1"), it is determined that the motor 32 is not in the constant speed state and the reel sensor 33 has not detected the index for at least one reel 31, "No" is determined in step S1402, and the process proceeds to the next step S1403.
On the other hand, when the result of the logical product operation is "0" (the zero flag is "1"), all the reels 31 have the motors 32 in the constant speed state and the reel sensors 33 after index detection. It is determined that there is, and "Yes" is determined in step S1402, steps S1403 and S1404 are skipped, and the processing according to this flowchart ends.

Proceeding to step S1403, the main control board 50 determines whether or not there is a step-out state. When it is determined that the step-out state is detected, the process proceeds to the next step S1404, and when it is determined that the step-out state is not detected, the process returns to step S1401.
Proceeding to step S1404, the main control board 50 prepares for a step-out inspection. This process is the process shown in FIG. 246 described above. Then, when the step-out inspection preparation in step S1404 is finished, the processing according to this flowchart is finished.

Thus, in this embodiment, two reels 31 are stopped (the four-phase excitation output for stopping the reels 31 is terminated), and the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third (last) reel 31 is activated. When the operation is accepted and the 4-phase excitation output for stopping the motor 32 of the reel 31 is performed, the # reel drive state (_WK_RL#_STS) (Fig. 243) of the three reels 31 will eventually is also "00000000(B)", the result of logical sum (OR) operation of these is "00000000(B)".
Then, the AND operation of "00000000(B)" and "83(H)"("10000011(B)" results in "00000000(B)". Since the result is "Yes" and the process proceeds to the display determination in step S291 of FIG. 244, the number of medals to be paid out (the number of medals to be awarded) can be determined.

Further, in the present embodiment, even if the period for performing the four-phase excitation output for stopping the motor 32 of the third reel 31 has not passed (even during the four-phase excitation output), the four-phase excitation At the time when the output is started, the # reel drive state (_WK_RL#_STS) of the third reel 31 is "00000000 (B)", so the answer at step S1372 in FIG. Since the process proceeds to the display determination of step S291, the number of medals to be paid out (the number of medals to be awarded) can be determined.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, even if the state in which the operation of the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is accepted continues (even if the stop switch 42 is pressed without being released), When the four-phase excitation output is started, the #th reel drive state (_WK_RL#_STS) of the third reel 31 becomes "00000000 (B)", so the answer to step S1372 in FIG. 245 is "Yes". The process advances to the display determination in step S291 of 244, and the number of medals to be paid out (the number of medals to be awarded) can be determined.
As a result, it is possible to shorten the time from when the operation of the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is accepted until the number of medals to be paid out (the number of medals to be awarded) is determined, and the subsequent payout of medals ( grant) can be executed smoothly.

For example, in a game in which the winning number "10" is won by the combination lottery means 61 during AT and the small combination A1 condition device (FIG. 124) is activated, the two reels 31 are stopped in the order of the left reel 31 and the middle reel 31. Then, the operation of the right stop switch 42 corresponding to the third (last) right reel 31 is accepted, and the symbol combination (FIG. 118) corresponding to the small winning combination 01, which is the payout of 15 symbols, can be stopped and displayed. Suppose
Under such circumstances, if the four-phase excitation output for stopping the motor 32 of the third reel 31 is started, three Even if the state in which the operation of the stop switch 42 corresponding to the eye reel 31 is accepted continues, the number of medals to be paid out can be determined.

Also, the number of medals to be paid out is determined in step S291 of FIG. Based on the data, it is determined whether or not any stop switch 42 has been operated.

When it is determined in step S1362 that none of the stop switches 42 (all stop switches 42 including the last operated stop switch 42) has been operated, the process proceeds to step S294, where the winning medal is awarded. Execute the payout process (M_WIN_PAY). As a result, the number of payouts (number of grants) determined in step S291 is paid out (given). At this time, if the number of credits has not reached the upper limit "50", the number of credits is added. is discharged from the hopper 35. It should be noted that the determination as to whether or not the number of credits has reached the upper limit value of "50" is made, for example, in step S394 of FIG.
As a result, the addition of credits or the payout of medals from the hopper 35 can be performed at the timing desired by the player.

In addition, even if the power switch 11 is unintentionally turned off and the power shutdown process is executed under the condition that the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is operated, By turning on the power switch 11 while the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is operated, the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning is not executed, and the third reel 31 corresponds to the reel 31. When the stop switch 42 is released, the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning can be executed.
As a result, even if the power is turned off at unintended timing, the credits can be added or the medals can be paid out from the hopper 35 at the timing desired by the player.

Similarly, for example, even if the four-phase excitation output of the motors 32 of all the reels 31 including the motor 32 of the reel 31 (for example, the right reel 31) that stops last is completed, the reel 31 that stops last (for example, the right reel 31) ), the stop switch 42 corresponding to the first stopped reel 31 (for example, the left reel 31) is operated, and then the stop switch 42 corresponding to the first stopped reel 31 is operated. When the stop switch 42 corresponding to the last stopped reel 31 is released while the switch 42 is being operated, even if the predetermined period of four-phase excitation output for stopping the third reel 31 elapses, Do not execute medal payout processing (M_WIN_PAY) when winning a prize. Then, when the stop switch 42 corresponding to the first reel 31 (for example, the left reel 31) is released (at least all the stop switches are released), the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning can be executed. Become.
As a result, the addition of credits or the payout of medals from the hopper 35 can be performed at the timing desired by the player.

Further, in this embodiment, each reel 31 is provided with a # reel drive state (_WK_RL#_STS) (FIG. 243) capable of storing data indicating the drive state of the motor 32 of the # reel 31 .
Then, in step S1373 of FIG. 245, the main control board 50 puts the result of logical sum (OR) operation of the # reel driving states (_WK_RL#_STS) of the three reels 31 and "03 (H)"("00000011(B)"), and determines whether the result is "0" (the zero flag is "1").
Thereby, it is determined whether or not the motor 32 is in the constant speed state and the reel sensor 33 has detected the index for all the reels 31 .

For all the reels 31, when the motors 32 are in the constant speed state and the reel sensors 33 have detected the index, the result of the AND operation is "0" (the zero flag is "1"). In this case, "Yes" is determined in step S1373, and the process proceeds to step S1375, where the process for accepting the stop can be executed.

That is, when all the reels 31 are rotating at a constant speed, when the index has been detected for all the reels 31, the # reel drive state (_WK_RL#_STS) of the three reels 31 is logically summed ( OR), and the result and "03(H)"("00000011(B)") are ANDed, the result becomes "0" (the zero flag becomes "1"). At this time, when the stop switch 42 is operated, the stop control of the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 can be executed.
In other words, when all the reels 31 are rotating at a constant speed, if the index has been detected for all the reels 31, the result is "Yes" in step S1373, and the process advances to step S1375. Processing corresponding to steps S1016, S1017, S1022, and S1023 in 194 is executed.

On the other hand, when the reel sensor 33 has not yet detected the index of any reel 31 (before detection), the result of the logical AND operation is "0" (the zero flag is "1"). not. In this case, "No" is determined in step S1373, and the process advances to step S1374 to prepare for the step-out inspection. Then, since the process does not proceed to step S1375, the process at the time of stop acceptance is not executed, and the stop control of the reel 31 based on the operation of the stop switch 42 is not executed.

That is, even if all the reels 31 are rotating at a constant speed, if the index has not yet been detected for any of the reels 31, the ## reel drive state (_WK_RL#_STS) of the three reels 31 ), and then AND the result with "03(H)"("00000011(B)"), the result will not be "0" (the zero flag is "1 "do not become). At this time, even if the stop switch 42 is operated, stop control of the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 is not executed.
In other words, even if all the reels 31 are rotating at a constant speed, if the index has not yet been detected for any of the reels 31, the result is "No" in step S1373, and in this case, the twenty-fifth embodiment. The processing corresponding to steps S1016, S1017, S1022, and S1023 in FIG. 194 of the form is not executed.

Thus, for all reels 31, it is possible to determine whether or not the motor 32 is in the constant speed state and the reel sensor 33 has detected the index, that is, whether or not the stop can be accepted by a simple calculation. Processing can be simplified, and the amount of ROM used by the program can be reduced.

Although the thirty-second embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the contents described above, and various modifications such as those described below are possible.
(1) For example, in step S1373 in FIG. 245, first, the input port rising data A (_PT_IN_A_UP) of address "F017(H)" in FIG. If it is determined that the stop switch 42 has risen, then the A register value and "03 (H)"("00000011(B)") are determined. and determines whether or not the result is "0" (the zero flag is "1"). is after index detection.

That is, it is first determined whether or not the stop switch 42 has been operated, and then it is determined whether or not the motor 32 is in the constant speed state and the reel sensor 33 has detected the index for all the reels 31. good.
When the result of the logical product operation is not "0" (the zero flag is "1"), the result is "No" in step S1373, the flow advances to step S1374, and the result of the logical product operation is "0" (the zero flag is "1"). is "1"), the result is "Yes" in step S1373, skipping step S1374 and proceeding to step S1375.

Also, as in this modification (1), in step S1373 of FIG. 245, it is first determined whether or not the stop switch 42 has been operated. When it is determined whether or not the reel sensor 33 has detected the index, the processing corresponding to steps 1022 and S1023 in FIG. 194 of the twenty-fifth embodiment is executed in the stop reception processing in step S1375 of FIG. do. That is, the stop position of the reel 31 is determined based on the winning combination lottery result of the current game and the position of the reel 31 at the moment when the operation of the stop switch 42 is accepted, and the symbol number corresponding to the determined stop position is It is stored in the reel pattern number (for the stop position).

(2) In the above embodiment, when it is determined in step S1362 of FIG. 244 whether or not the operation of any of the stop switches 42 has been accepted, and it is determined that the operation of any of the stop switches 42 has not been accepted. has proceeded to the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning in step S294 of FIG. 244, but the present invention is not limited to this.

For example, a start switch signal is input to the input port 2, and the ON/OFF of the start switch signal is stored in one of the bits of the input port 2 level data (_PT_IN2_OLD) (Fig. 243) of the address "F090 (H)" of the RWM 53. make it possible.
Also, in step S1362 of FIG. 244, based on the data stored in the input port 2 level data (_PT_IN2_OLD), it is determined whether the operation of any one of the start switch 41 and the three stop switches 42 has been accepted. to decide.

When it is determined that any switch operation has been accepted, the process of step S1362 is repeated. You may proceed to the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY).
As a result, the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning can be prevented from being executed not only when the stop switch 42 but also when the start switch 41 is being operated.
Then, the addition of credits or the payout of medals from the hopper 35 can be performed at the player's desired timing.

(3) At step S1362 in FIG. 244, it is determined whether or not the operation of the stop switch 42 (last operated stop switch 42) corresponding to the third reel 31 has been accepted. When it is determined that the operation of the last operated stop switch 42) has not been accepted, the process may proceed to the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning in step S294 of FIG.

For example, in a game in which the winning number "10" is won by the combination lottery means 61 during AT and the small combination A1 condition device (FIG. 124) is activated, the two reels 31 are stopped in the order of the left reel 31 and the middle reel 31. Then, the operation of the right stop switch 42 corresponding to the third (last) right reel 31 is accepted, and the symbol combination (FIG. 118) corresponding to the small winning combination 01, which is the payout of 15 symbols, can be stopped and displayed. Suppose
Under such circumstances, if the four-phase excitation output for stopping the motor 32 of the third reel 31 is started, three Even if the operation of the stop switch 42 corresponding to the eye reel 31 (last operated stop switch 42) continues to be accepted, the number of medals to be paid out can be determined.

Also, in step S291 of FIG. 244, the number of medals to be paid out is determined, and then the process proceeds to step S1362, in which the operation of the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 (last operated stop switch 42) is accepted. determine whether or not
Then, in step S1362, when it is determined that the operation of the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 (last operated stop switch 42) has not been accepted, the process proceeds to step S294, and the winning medal Execute the payout process (M_WIN_PAY). As a result, the number of payouts (number of grants) determined in step S291 is paid out (given).

At this time, if the number of credits has not reached the upper limit "50", the number of credits is added. is discharged from the hopper 35. It should be noted that the determination as to whether or not the number of credits has reached the upper limit value of "50" is made, for example, in step S394 of FIG.
As a result, the addition of credits or the payout of medals from the hopper 35 can be performed at the timing desired by the player.

(4) In the above embodiment, when the reel 31 and the motor 32 are stopped, the motor 32 (stepping motor) is provided with a four-phase excitation output as an excitation output for stopping the reel 31. However, the present invention is not limited to this. do not have.
When stopping the reel 31 and the motor 32, the excitation output for stopping the reel 31 may be, for example, a one-phase excitation output, a two-phase excitation output, or a three-phase excitation output. may Also, first, 2-phase excitation output is performed and a weak brake is applied, then the 2-phase excitation output is switched to 4-phase excitation output, and a strong brake is applied to stop the rotation of the reel 31 and the motor 32. You can let it run.

(5) In the above embodiment, when the 4-phase excitation output for stopping the motor 32 of the reel 31 is started, the # reel drive state (_WK_RL#_STS) is set to "0 (H)". Alternatively, for example, when the 4-phase excitation output for stopping the motor 32 of the reel 31 is finished, the #th reel driving state (_WK_RL#_STS) may be set to "0 (H)".
(6) The 1st to 32nd embodiments and the various modifications shown in the 1st to 32nd embodiments are not limited to being carried out independently, but can be carried out in combination as appropriate.

<Thirty-third embodiment>
In the thirty-third embodiment, two reels 31 are stopped (the excitation output for stopping the reels 31 is terminated), the operation of the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is accepted, and medals are awarded. When the symbol combination to be paid out (given) is stopped and displayed, even if the operation of the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 continues to be accepted, three After the four-phase excitation output for stopping the second reel 31 is completed, the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning is executed. After the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is released, there is a case where an effect related to the game result is output.

Further, in the 33rd embodiment, the types of wins, the combination of symbols for the wins, the number of payouts, the condition device, and the activated line are different from those in the 23rd embodiment.
Specifically, in the thirty-third embodiment, the winning combination is roughly divided into a special winning combination (accessory), a replay (replay winning combination), and a small winning combination. In addition, as a special role, it has 1BB (first-class accessory continuous operation device; first-class big bonus), and has bells, watermelons, and cherries as small awards.

The symbol combination corresponding to 1BB is set to "Red 7" - "Red 7" - "Red 7", and the symbol combination corresponding to Replay is set to "Replay" - "Replay" - "Replay". , the symbol combination corresponding to Bell is set to "Bell" - "Bell" - "Bell", and the symbol combination corresponding to Watermelon is set to "Watermelon" - "Watermelon" - "Watermelon", corresponding to Cherry. The symbol combination to be played is set to "Cherry"-"ANY"-"ANY".
Note that "ANY" means that any pattern is acceptable (arbitrary pattern).

The effective lines include five lines, ie, an upper line, a middle line, a lower line, an upward-sloping line, and a downward-sloping line.
When the symbol combination corresponding to 1BB is stopped and displayed on the activated line, the 1BB game is started from the next game although no medals are paid out in the current game.
If 1BB is won but the pattern combination corresponding to 1BB is not stop-displayed on the effective line, the winning information of 1BB is carried over to the next game until the pattern combination corresponding to 1BB is stop-displayed on the effective line. A game state in which winning information of 1BB is carried over is called "inside 1BB".

Furthermore, when the symbol combination corresponding to the replay is stopped and displayed on the active line, the medals are automatically inserted and the replay can be executed.
Furthermore, the number of bells to be paid out is set to 15, the number of watermelons to be paid out is set to 7, and the number of cherries to be paid out is set to 1.
In addition, both Replay and Bell are individually elected, and there is no overlap with other roles.
Furthermore, watermelon has a case of winning alone and a case of winning double with 1BB, and cherry has a case of winning alone and a case of winning double with 1BB.
Furthermore, 1BB has a case of winning alone and a case of winning with watermelon or cherry.

Further, in the thirty-third embodiment, one of winning numbers "0" to "7" is determined by lottery by the role lottery means 61. FIG. Then, when the winning number is determined, the condition device corresponding to the determined winning number is activated.
The winning number "0" corresponds to non-winning, the winning number "1" corresponds to the single winning of the replay, the winning number "2" corresponds to the single winning of Bell, and the winning number "3" The winning number "4" corresponds to the single winning of the cherry, while the winning number "4" corresponds to the single winning of the watermelon.
In addition, the winning number "5" corresponds to a single winning of 1BB, the winning number "6" corresponds to a double winning of "1BB + watermelon", and the winning number "7" corresponds to a double winning of "1BB + cherry". handle.

For example, when the winning number "1" is determined by the winning lottery means 61, the replay condition device corresponding to the winning number "1" is activated, and the symbol combination corresponding to the replay can be stopped and displayed.
In addition, when the winning number "7" is determined by the lottery by the combination lottery means 61, the "1BB+cherry" condition device corresponding to the winning number "7" is operated, and the symbol combination corresponding to 1BB or the cherry is selected. Symbol combinations can be stopped and displayed.
In the game in which the winning number "7" is determined by lottery by the role lottery means 61, the symbol combination corresponding to cherry can be stopped and displayed, but the symbol combination corresponding to 1BB is configured not to be stopped and displayed. good too.

FIG. 249 is a diagram showing main data according to the 33rd embodiment among the data stored in the RWM 53 in the 33rd embodiment.
In FIG. 249, the reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP) at the address "F0AD(H)" is a storage area for storing data indicating whether or not the operation (stop operation) of the stop switch 42 corresponding to each reel 31 has been accepted. be.

The D0 bit indicates whether or not the stop operation of the first (left) reel 31 has been accepted, "0" indicates that the stop operation has not been accepted, and "1" indicates that the stop operation has been accepted. (accepted).
The D1 bit indicates whether or not a stop operation for the second (middle) reel 31 has been accepted, and the D2 bit indicates whether or not a stop operation for the third (right) reel 31 has been accepted. These contents are similar to the D0 bit.

The reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP) at address "F0AD(H)" in FIG. 249 differs from the reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP) at address "F0AD(H)" in FIG. is reversed. That is, in FIG. 173, "1" indicates that the stop operation has not been accepted, and "0" indicates that the stop operation has been accepted (accepted). , indicates that the stop operation has been accepted (accepted), and "0" indicates that the stop operation has not been accepted.

When the operation of the left stop switch 42 is accepted, the D0 bit of the reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP) is set to "1". Similarly, when the operation of the middle stop switch 42 is accepted, the D1 bit is set to "1", and when the operation of the right stop switch 42 is accepted, the D2 bit is set to "1".
Also, the reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP) is initialized (cleared and set to the initial value "00000000 (B)") at a predetermined timing (for example, each game end or game start).

FIG. 250 is a diagram showing signals input to input port 0 in the thirty-third embodiment.
The types and arrangement of signals input to input port 0 shown in FIG. 250 are merely examples, and the types and arrangement of signals input to input port 0 can be set as appropriate.
Alternatively, the RWM 53 may be provided with a level data storage area corresponding to the input port 0, and the data stored in this level data storage area may be acquired and used for processing.
FIG. 251 is a flowchart showing main processing (M_MAIN) in the thirty-third embodiment, and is a flowchart corresponding to FIG. 139 of the twenty-third embodiment.
In the flowchart of the thirty-third embodiment shown in FIG. 251, the step numbers different from those in FIG. 139 are underlined, and the same steps as in FIG. 139 are given the same step numbers.

Also, in the main processing (M_MAIN) of the thirty-third embodiment, the processing of steps S295 to S300 of FIG. 139 is executed, but the processing of steps S295 to S300 is omitted in FIG.
Differences from FIG. 139 will be mainly described below.

As shown in FIG. 251, in the thirty-third embodiment, once the start switch acceptance process (M_START_CTL) in step S751 is executed, the process proceeds to step S1411.
Proceeding to step S1411, the main control board 50 determines whether or not there is a stop acceptance. That is, it is determined whether the operation of any one of the first stop switch 42 to the third stop switch 42 has been accepted.
Specifically, the main control board 50 acquires the data of the input port 0, and sets D0 bit (first stop switch signal), D1 bit (second stop switch signal), and D2 bit (third stop switch signal). Determine if any are on. Then, step S1411 is repeated until the stop is accepted, and when the stop is accepted, the process proceeds to the next step S1412.

Proceeding to step S1412, the main control board 50 executes a process for accepting stoppage. In this process, the stop position of the ## reel 31 is determined based on the combination lottery result and the position of the ## reel 31 at the moment when the operation of the ## stop switch 42 is accepted, and the determined stop position is determined. The symbol number obtained is set to #th reel symbol number (for stop position) (FIGS. 135 to 137). Furthermore, the stop symbol data for judging the symbol combination to stop on the activated line is updated.

More specifically, in the processing at the time of stop acceptance in step S1412 of FIG. 251, processing corresponding to steps S1022 to S1024 in FIG. 194 of the twenty-fifth embodiment is executed. That is, for the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 determined to be ON in step S1411, the result of the combination lottery of the current game and the operation of the stop switch 42 are accepted by the processing corresponding to steps S1022 to S1023 in FIG. The stop position of the reel 31 is determined based on the instantaneous position of the reel 31, and the pattern number corresponding to the determined stop position is stored in the reel pattern number (for stop position). Furthermore, by processing corresponding to the stop symbol set (M_STOPPIC_SET) in step S1024 of FIG. 194, the stop symbol data (_WK_STOP_PIC1-9) for determining the symbol combination to stop on the activated line is updated.

It should be noted that the #th reel symbol number (for passing position) and the #th reel symbol number ( stop position) have reached the same value, the #th reel driving pulse output counter (_CT_RL#_PLSOUT) (Figs. 135 to 137) is set to the deceleration pulse output counter "90 (D)" (Fig. 156). is set, the #th reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR#) (Fig. 134) is set to deceleration pulse data "00001111 (B)" (4-phase ON), and the #th reel drive state (_WK_RL#_STS) ( 135 to 137), "1 (D)" indicating "deceleration" is set.

In addition, the #th reel symbol number (for passing position) and the #th reel symbol number (for stop position) are the same value, and the step number of one symbol of #th reel 13 is a predetermined value (for example, " 3”), the #th reel driving pulse output counter is set to deceleration pulse output counter “90 (D)”, and the #th reel motor signal data is set to deceleration pulse data “00001111 (B)”. ” may be set, and “1 (D)” indicating “deceleration” may be set in the # reel drive state.

After that, the four-phase excitation output to the motor 32 of the #th reel 31 is started.
Further, in this embodiment, the period of interrupt processing is set to "1.117 ms", and the value of the #th reel drive pulse output counter (_CT_RL#_PLSOUT) is subtracted by "1" every two interrupts.
Then, when the value of the #th reel drive pulse output counter (_CT_RL#_PLSOUT) becomes "0", the #th reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR#) (Fig. 134) contains pulse data "00000000 (B)" at the time of stop. is set, and "0 (D)" indicating "stop" is set in the #th reel driving state (_WK_RL#_STS). This completes the four-phase excitation output.

Then, after executing the stop acceptance process in step S1412, the process proceeds to step S1413, and the main control board 50 determines whether or not the four-phase excitation is being output.
Specifically, when it is determined in step S1411 that the operation of the first (left) stop switch 42 has been accepted, and the process for stopping the motor 32 of the first (left) reel 31 is executed in step S1412, In step S1413, it is determined whether or not the motor 32 of the first reel 31 is outputting four-phase excitation.

When it is determined that the 4-phase excitation output is in progress, the process of step S1413 is executed again. proceed to
Here, when it is determined in step S1411 that the operation of the first (left) stop switch 42 has been accepted, in step S1413, the value of the first reel driving pulse output counter (_CT_RL#_PLSOUT) (Fig. 135) is set to "0". , it can be determined whether or not the four-phase excitation output of the motor 32 of the first (left) reel 31 has ended.

Further, in step S1413, it is determined whether or not the first reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR#) (FIG. 134) is "00000000 (B)" (stop pulse data). It can also be determined whether or not the four-phase excitation output of the motor 32 has ended.
Furthermore, in step S1413, it is determined whether or not the first reel drive state (_WK_RL#_STS) (FIG. 135) is "0 (D)" (stopped), thereby causing the motor 32 of the first (left) reel 31 to rotate. It is also possible to judge whether or not the four-phase excitation output of has ended.

Note that in this embodiment, the process of step S1413 is repeated until it is determined in step S1413 that the four-phase excitation output of the motor 32 of reel # 31 has ended, and the process does not proceed to the next step S1414.
Therefore, during a period in which the motor 32 of any reel 31 is subjected to four-phase excitation output, the operation of the stop switch 42 corresponding to the other reel 31 is not accepted, and the stop control of the other reel 31 is not executed. .
For example, while the first (left) reel 31 is being supplied with four-phase excitation output, the second (middle) stop switch 42 and the third (right) stop switch 42 are not operated. Stop control of the middle) reel 31 and the third (right) reel 31 is not executed either.

Proceeding to step S1414, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the stop switch 42 operation (stop operation) has been accepted for all the reels 31 .
Then, when it is determined in step S1414 that the stop operation has not been accepted for at least one reel 31, the process returns to step S1411. In this case, the processing of steps S1411 to S1414 is repeated.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1414 that the stop operation has been accepted for all the reels 31, the process proceeds to step S291.

Here, in step S1414, the main control board 50 stores the data stored in the reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP) at address "F0AD (H)" in FIG. compare.
Then, when both are not the same value, it is determined that the stop operation has not been accepted for at least one reel 31, the result of step S1414 is "No", and the process returns to step S1411.
On the other hand, when both are the same value, it is determined that the stop operation has been accepted for all the reels 31, the result of step S1414 is "Yes", and the process proceeds to step S291.

Further, in the present embodiment, each time a stop operation of one reel 31 is accepted, it is determined in step S1413 whether or not the four-phase excitation output is in progress. , the stop operation of the next reel 31 can be accepted.
As a result, while the motor 32 of any one of the reels 31 is being subjected to the four-phase excitation output, the stop operation of the other reels 31 cannot be accepted.

Proceeding to step S291, the main control board 50 executes display determination.
Specifically, it is determined whether or not the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is stop-displayed on the active line. Also, when a symbol combination for which medals are to be paid out (given) is stopped and displayed on the active line, the number of medals to be paid out (given number) is determined. Then, the process proceeds to step S292.

Further, when the result of step S292 is "No" and the process of step S293 is executed, the process proceeds to step S294.
Proceeding to step S294, the main control board 50 executes medal payout processing (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning. That is, when the number of credits has not reached the upper limit value "50", the number of credits is added, and when the number of credits has reached the upper limit value "50", the hopper motor 36 is driven and the actual The medals are paid out from the hopper 35. It should be noted that the determination as to whether or not the number of credits has reached the upper limit value of "50" is made, for example, in step S394 of FIG. Then, the process proceeds to step S1415.

Proceeding to step S1415, the main control board 50 determines whether the signal of the input port 0 is off.
Specifically, the main control board 50 acquires the data of the input port 0 and determines whether or not it is "00000000 (B)".
When the data of the input port 0 is not "00000000(B)", it is determined that any signal is ON (an operation of any switch including the stop switch 42 is accepted), and step S1415. is "No", and the process of step S1415 is executed again.

On the other hand, when the data of the input port 0 is "00000000 (B)", it is determined that all signals are off (operation of any switch including the stop switch 42 is not accepted), and step "Yes" is determined in S1415, and the process proceeds to the next step S1416.
Proceeding to step S1416, the main control board 50 sets a command regarding the end of the game (game end command) in the command buffer. Also, when the game end command is set in the command buffer, it is transmitted to the sub-control board 80 in an interrupt process executed thereafter.

Further, the sub-control board 80 may execute an effect related to the game result upon receiving a game end command.
Specifically, for example, it is assumed that the winning number "5" is won in the lottery by the combination lottery means 61, and the 1BB condition device corresponding to the winning number "5" is activated. In this case, the start switch 41 is operated, the lottery is performed by the combination lottery means 61, and when the 1BB condition device operates, a command (1BB operation command) relating to the operation of the 1BB condition device is sent from the main control board 50 to the sub control board. 80. As a result, it can be determined that the 1BB condition device has been activated on the sub-control board 80 side.

It is also assumed that the winning number "7" is won in the lottery by the combination lottery means 61, and the "1BB+Cherry" condition device corresponding to the winning number "7" is activated. In this case, the symbol combination corresponding to 1BB or the symbol combination corresponding to Cherry can be stopped and displayed.
As described above, in the game in which the winning number "7" is won in the lottery by the combination lottery means 61, the symbol combination corresponding to Cherry can be stopped and displayed, but the symbol combination corresponding to 1BB is not displayed stopped. can be configured to
Then, the start switch 41 is operated, a lottery is drawn by the combination lottery means 61, and when the "1BB+cherry" conditional device is activated, the 1BB operation command and the cherry operation command are sent from the main control board 50 to the sub-control board 80. sent. As a result, it can be determined that the 1BB condition device has been activated on the sub-control board 80 side.

In addition, the sub-control board 80 performs the effect lottery related to notification of winning of the 1BB condition device in the game in which the 1BB operation command and the cherry operation command are received. In this effect lottery, it is determined whether or not to announce the winning of the 1BB condition device, the timing of the announcement, the manner of the announcement, and the like.
Here, for example, it is assumed that it is decided by the effect lottery to light the effect lamp at the timing of the end of the game to notify the winning of the 1BB condition device. In this case, when the sub-control board 80 receives a predetermined command (for example, a game end command), the effect lamp is turned on to notify the winning of the 1BB condition device.

Thus, in the present embodiment, two reels 31 are stopped, the operation of the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third (last) reel 31 is accepted, and medals are paid out (given). When the combination is displayed as stopped, even if the operation of the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is accepted, the four-phase excitation output for stopping the third reel 31 is continued. is completed, "No" is obtained in step S1413, "Yes" is obtained in step S1414, and the process proceeds to step S291 and subsequent steps. Therefore, the number of medals to be paid out (given number) is determined, and paid out (given) in the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning.
As a result, even if the operation of the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is accepted, the determination of the number of medals to be paid out (the number of medals to be awarded) and the payout (granting) of medals can be smoothly performed. can be executed.

For example, in a game in which the winning number "7" is won in the lottery by the role lottery means 61 and the "1BB+cherry" condition device corresponding to the winning number "7" is activated, two reels 31 (for example, the left reel 31, In a situation where the middle reel 31) is stopped, the operation of the stop switch 42 (right stop switch 42) corresponding to the third reel 31 (for example, the right reel 31) is accepted, and the " Assume that the symbol combination of "cherry"-"ANY"-"ANY" is stop-displayed on the middle line of the activated lines.

In this case, even under the condition that the operation of the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is accepted, the four-phase excitation output for stopping the third reel 31 is not generated. After the game ends, the payout number of medals "1" is determined, and one medal is paid out. At this time, if the number of credits has not reached the upper limit of "50", the number of credits is added by "1", and if the number of credits has reached the upper limit of "50", the hopper motor 36 is driven, One medal is paid out from the hopper 35. It should be noted that the determination as to whether or not the number of credits has reached the upper limit value of "50" is made, for example, in step S394 of FIG.

Further, in the present embodiment, even if the operation of the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is accepted, the number of medals to be paid out (granted number) is determined, and the number of medals to be paid out (granted) is determined. ) can be executed, but if the state in which the operation of the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is accepted continues, the result is "Yes" in step S1415, and the process does not proceed to step S1416. A predetermined command (for example, a game end command) is not transmitted to the sub-control board 80. Therefore, the sub-control board 80 side does not execute an effect based on the reception of a predetermined command (for example, a game end command).

Then, when the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is released (at least when all the stop switches 42 are not operated), the result is "No" in step S1415, and step S1416. , a predetermined command (for example, a game end command) can be transmitted to the sub-control board 80 . Therefore, on the sub-control board 80 side, it is possible to execute an effect based on reception of a predetermined command (for example, a game end command).

In particular, in a game in which the winning number "7" is won by the winning lottery means 61 and the "1BB+cherry" condition device corresponding to the winning number "7" is activated, "cherry" - "ANY" - "ANY" corresponding to the cherry " symbol combination is stop-displayed on the middle line of the activated lines, and the stop switch corresponding to the third reel 31 is displayed even after one medal corresponding to the cherry winning is paid out (given). After 42 is released, there is a case where the performance lamp is turned on to notify the winning of the 1BB condition device.
As a result, an effect related to the game result can be executed at the timing desired by the player.

In the game in which the winning number "7" is won and the "1BB+cherry" condition device corresponding to the winning number "7" is activated, 1BB at the timing when the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is released. You may have a case where the operation of the condition device is not notified.
If the pattern combination corresponding to 1BB is not stop-displayed on the effective line although the 1BB condition device is operated, winning information of 1BB is carried over to the next game until the pattern combination corresponding to 1BB is stop-displayed on the effective line.

For example, in a game in which the winning number "7" is won in the lottery by the role lottery means 61 and the "1BB+Cherry" condition device corresponding to the winning number "7" is activated, the start switch 41 is operated and the role lottery means 61 A lottery is held, and a 1BB operation command is transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub-control board 80 when the "1BB+Cherry" condition device is activated.
Further, the situation in which the operation of the stop switch 42 (for example, the right stop switch 42) corresponding to the third reel 31 (for example, the right reel 31) is accepted continues even after the medal payout process is executed. If so, a game end command is transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub control board 80 after the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is released.

Furthermore, when the sub-control board 80 receives the 1BB operation command and the cherry operation command, it performs an effect lottery regarding the notification of the operation of the 1BB condition device. At this time, it is assumed that it is decided to light the effect lamp at the timing of the game end to notify the winning of the 1BB condition device.
Then, when the sub-control board 80 receives a predetermined command (for example, a game end command), the effect lamp is turned on to notify the winning of the 1BB condition device.

Also, for example, in a game in which the winning number "7" is won by the winning lottery means 61 and the "1BB + cherry" condition device corresponding to the winning number "7" is activated, the third reel 31 (for example, the right reel 31 ) is operated (pressed), another stop switch 42 (eg, left stop switch 42) is operated (pressed), and another stop Assume that the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is released while the switch 42 is being operated (pressed).
In this case, when the other stop switch 42 is operated (pressed), the game end command is not transmitted to the sub-control board 80 (the effect related to the game result is not executed), and all the other stop switches 42 including the When the stop switch 42 is released, a game end command can be transmitted to the sub-control board 80 (an effect related to the game result can be executed).

In addition, when the hopper motor 36 is driven and the actual medals are dispensed from the hopper 35, the medals collide with each other to make a loud noise, and a dispensation effect sound accompanying the dispensation is output, indicating the operation of the 1BB condition device. Although it becomes difficult to hear the sound of the performance (performance related to the game result), in this embodiment, if the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is continued to be operated, the game is played even if the medals are paid out. The effect related to the result is not executed, and when the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is released thereafter, the effect related to the game result is executed.
Therefore, after the medals are paid out, an effect related to the game result can be executed, so that the sound of the effect can be easily heard.

Further, in this embodiment, when the four-phase excitation is being output, the answer to step S1413 is "Yes", and the process does not proceed to step S294. Therefore, the medal payout process for winning (M_WIN_PAY) is not executed during the four-phase excitation output, and the medal payout process for winning (M_WIN_PAY) is executed after completion of the four-phase excitation output.
As a result, the hopper motor 36 is not driven during the 4-phase excitation output, and the hopper motor 36 is driven after the 4-phase excitation output is completed. can.

Further, in this embodiment, the main control board 50 first acquires the data of the input port 0 after the number of bets enabling the execution of the game is bet, and determines whether the acquired data is "10000000 (B)". determine whether or not
Then, when the acquired data is "10000000 (B)", it is determined that only the start switch signal is ON, and the rotation start control of the reel 31 based on the operation of the start switch 41 is executed.

On the other hand, for example, when the operation of the start switch 41 is accepted under the condition that the operation of the 3-bet switch 40b is accepted, the data of the input port 0 becomes "11000000 (B)". In this case, it is determined that the start switch signal and the signal other than the start switch signal (3 bet switch signal) are ON, and the rotation start control of the reel 31 based on the operation of the start switch 41 is not executed.

As a result, the operation of the start switch 41 is performed under the condition that the operation of the bet switches 40 (1-bet switch 40a, 3-bet switch 40b) is accepted after the number of bets enabling the execution of the game has been placed. When accepted, the rotation start control of the reel 31 based on the operation of the start switch 41 can be prevented from being executed.

Also in this embodiment, the setting key switch 152 is provided as described in the eleventh embodiment and the nineteenth embodiment (A).
Then, as described in the 11th embodiment and the 19th embodiment (A), in a state where the power is turned on and the number of bets has not been placed, the front door 12 is opened and the door switch 17 is turned on. When the setting key is turned on, the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion slot 151 and rotated, for example, by 90 degrees clockwise to turn on the setting key switch 152 (when the signal of the setting key switch 152 is turned on), the setting confirmation state is entered. (setting confirmation mode).

When the number of bets has been placed, the result is "Yes" in step S274 of FIG. Do not migrate.
In the setting confirmation state, the setting value cannot be changed (even if the setting change switch 153 is operated, the setting value does not change), but the current setting value can be confirmed. The current set value is displayed on the set value display LED 73 . When the setting key is rotated counterclockwise to turn off the setting key switch 152, the setting confirmation state is terminated.

Further, in this embodiment, the signal of the setting key switch 152 is not input to the input port 0 .
Furthermore, in this embodiment, when executing the rotation start control of the reel 31, the data of the input port to which the signal of the setting key switch 152 is input is not checked.

For example, the data of the input port to which the signal of the setting key switch 152 is input is not checked, the level data of the RWM 53 corresponding to the input port to which the signal of the setting key switch 152 is input is not checked, and the setting key switch is not checked. The bit corresponding to the signal of the setting key switch 152 among the data of the input port to which the signal of the setting key switch 152 is input is not checked, and the level data of the RWM 53 corresponding to the input port to which the signal of the setting key switch 152 is input. Among them, the bit corresponding to the signal of the setting key switch 152 is not checked.

Therefore, the signal of the setting key switch 152 is input (the signal of the setting key switch 152 is ON) after the number of bets that allows the game to be executed (the number of bets corresponding to the specified number) has been placed. In addition, when the operation of the start switch 41 is accepted under the condition that the front door 12 is closed (the door switch 17 is off), the rotation start control of the reel 31 based on the operation of the start switch 41 can be executed. and

Here, even though the bed switch 40 is released after the bed switch 40 is operated, there is a possibility that the operation of the bed switch 40 will remain accepted due to deterioration of the bed switch 40 .
In this embodiment, even if the start switch 41 is operated while the operation of the bet switch 40 is being accepted, the rotation start control of the reels 31 based on the operation of the start switch 41 is not executed.

As a result, even if the start switch 41 is operated, the player can recognize that the slot machine 10 has some kind of abnormality because the reels 31 do not rotate. When the player informs the hall clerk of the fact, the hall clerk can also recognize that the slot machine 10 has some kind of abnormality.
Even if the operation of the bed switch 40 remains accepted, neither the main control board 50 nor the sub-control board 80 will issue an error notification. This is because, if an error notification is given in such a case, the player may feel annoyed.

In addition, it is usually unthinkable that the setting key switch 152 is turned on (the signal of the setting key switch 152 is turned on) in the middle of the game. 152 signal is on), it is likely to be noise. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the signal of the setting key switch 152 is input (when the signal of the setting key switch 152 is ON) with the number of bets that can be played (the number of bets corresponding to the specified number) betted. Yes) and the front door 12 is closed (the door switch 17 is off), when the operation of the start switch 41 is accepted, the rotation start control of the reel 31 based on the operation of the start switch 41 be executable.
As a result, it is possible to prevent the progress of the game from being interrupted by the noise.

On the other hand, under the condition that the signal of the setting key switch 152 is ON, a predetermined external signal (for example, an external signal 4 for notifying an error or the like (11th embodiment) is generated based on the signal of the setting key switch 152 being ON. It is possible to inform the hall computer or the like by outputting the configuration diagram 33)). Therefore, the hall clerk or the like can grasp that some error has occurred in the slot machine 10 to which the predetermined external signal has been output.
Under the condition that the signal of the setting key switch 152 is ON, a predetermined external signal (for example, the external signal X (see FIG. 33 of the eleventh embodiment)) that can identify that the signal of the setting key switch 152 is ON. It may be configured to output external signals other than 1 to 5)).

Further, in this embodiment, the main control board 50 acquires the data of the input port 0 in step S1411 of FIG. Determine whether any of the bits (third stop switch signal) are on.
When only one of the D0 to D2 bits is "1", stop control of the #th reel 31 based on the operation of the #th stop switch 42 is executed.

On the other hand, when two or more of the D0 to D2 bits are "1", or one or more of the D3 to D7 bits are "1" in addition to one of the D0 to D2 bits. When the ## stop switch 42 is operated, stop control of the ## reel 31 is not executed.
In particular, when one or more of the D5 to D7 bits are "1" in addition to one of the D0 to D2 bits, stop control of the #th reel 31 based on the operation of the #th stop switch 42 is performed. don't run

As a result, under the condition that the plurality of reels 31 rotate at a constant speed and the bet switches 40 (1-bet switch 40a, 3-bet switch 40b) and the start switch 41 are being operated, the # stop switch 42 is activated. When the operation is accepted, it is possible not to perform the stop control of the #th reel 31 based on the operation of the #th stop switch 42 .

Similarly, when the operation of the middle stop switch 42 is accepted in a situation where the plurality of reels 31 rotate at a constant speed and the operation of the left stop switch 42 is accepted, the operation of the middle stop switch 42 It is possible not to perform the stop control of the middle reel 31 based on.

Further, in this embodiment, the signal of the setting key switch 152 is not input to the input port 0 .
Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when executing the stop control of the #th reel 31, the data of the input port to which the signal of the setting key switch 152 is input is not checked.
For example, the data of the input port to which the signal of the setting key switch 152 is input is not checked, the level data of the RWM 53 corresponding to the input port to which the signal of the setting key switch 152 is input is not checked, and the setting key switch is not checked. The bit corresponding to the signal of the setting key switch 152 among the data of the input port to which the signal of the setting key switch 152 is input is not checked, and the level data of the RWM 53 corresponding to the input port to which the signal of the setting key switch 152 is input. Among them, the bit corresponding to the signal of the setting key switch 152 is not checked.

Therefore, the plurality of reels 31 rotate at a constant speed, the signal of the setting key switch 152 is input (the signal of the setting key switch 152 is ON), and the front door 12 is closed (the door switch 17 is OFF). ), when the operation of the #th stop switch 42 is accepted, the stop control of the #th reel 31 based on the operation of the #th stop switch 42 can be executed.

Here, even though the start switch 41 is released after the start switch 41 is operated, there is a possibility that the operation of the start switch 41 will remain accepted due to deterioration of the start switch 41 .
In this embodiment, while the operation of the start switch 41 is still accepted, even if the # stop switch 42 is operated, the stop control of the # reel 31 is executed based on the operation of the # stop switch 42. do not.

Similarly, after operating the bed switch 40 (1 bed switch 40a, 3 bed switch 40b), even though the bed switch 40 is released, the operation of the bed switch 40 is still accepted due to deterioration of the bed switch 40 When the ## stop switch 42 is operated, the stop control of the ## reel 31 based on the operation of the ## stop switch 42 is not executed.

As a result, even if the #th stop switch 42 is operated, the player can recognize that the slot machine 10 has some kind of abnormality because the #th reel 31 does not stop. When the player informs the hall clerk of the fact, the hall clerk can also recognize that the slot machine 10 has some kind of abnormality.
Even if the operation of the bed switch 40 or the start switch 41 is still accepted, neither the main control board 50 nor the sub-control board 80 issues an error notification. This is because, if an error notification is given in such a case, the player may feel annoyed.

In addition, it is usually unthinkable that the setting key switch 152 is turned on (the signal of the setting key switch 152 is turned on) in the middle of the game. 152 signal is on), it is likely to be noise. Therefore, in this embodiment, the plurality of reels 31 rotate at a constant speed, the signal of the setting key switch 152 is input (the signal of the setting key switch 152 is ON), and the front door 12 is closed ( When the operation of the #th stop switch 42 is accepted under the condition that the door switch 17 is off, the stop control of the #th reel 31 based on the operation of the #th stop switch 42 can be executed.
As a result, it is possible to prevent the progress of the game from being interrupted by the noise.

On the other hand, under the condition that the signal of the setting key switch 152 is ON, a predetermined external signal (for example, an external signal 4 for notifying an error or the like (11th embodiment) is generated based on the signal of the setting key switch 152 being ON. It is possible to inform the hall computer or the like by outputting the configuration diagram 33)). Therefore, the hall clerk or the like can grasp that some error has occurred in the slot machine 10 to which the predetermined external signal has been output.
Under the condition that the signal of the setting key switch 152 is ON, a predetermined external signal (for example, the external signal X (see FIG. 33 of the eleventh embodiment)) that can identify that the signal of the setting key switch 152 is ON. It may be configured to output external signals other than 1 to 5)).

Although the thirty-third embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the contents described above, and various modifications such as those described below are possible.
(1) FIG. 252 is a flow chart showing a modification of the main processing (M_MAIN) by the main control board 50 in the thirty-third embodiment.
In the flowchart of the modification of the thirty-third embodiment shown in FIG. 252, the step numbers different from those in FIG. 251 are underlined, and the same steps as those in FIG. 251 are given the same step numbers. .
Differences from FIG. 251 will be mainly described below.

In the modification of the thirty-third embodiment shown in FIG. 252, the display determination in step S291 is executed, the result in step S292 is "No", and the process in step S293 is executed, the process proceeds to step S1417, and the main control board 50 determines Determine if the conditional device is working.
Here, as a state in which the specific condition device is operating, for example, a state in which the winning number "6" is won by the lottery means 61 and the "1BB + watermelon" condition device corresponding to the winning number "6" is operating. , and a state in which the winning number "7" is won by the winning lottery means 61 and the "1BB+Cherry" condition device corresponding to the winning number "7" is activated.

Then, when the specific condition device is operating (when the winning number "6" or "7" is won), it becomes "Yes" in step S1417, and the process proceeds to step S1415, and the specific condition device is not operating. When (the predetermined condition device different from the specific condition device is operating), it becomes "No" in step S1417, skips step S1415, and proceeds to step S294.
In addition, as a state in which the predetermined condition device is activated, for example, a state in which the winning number "3" is won by the winning lottery means 61 and the watermelon condition device corresponding to the winning number "3" is activated, and a winning lottery. There is a state in which the winning number "4" is won by the means 61 and the cherry condition device corresponding to the winning number "4" is activated.

Proceeding to step S1415, the main control board 50 determines whether the signal of the input port 0 is off. That is, it is determined whether or not the operation of any switch including the stop switch 42 has been accepted.
When it is determined that the operation of any switch has been accepted, the process of step S1415 is executed again, and when it is determined that the operation of any switch has not been accepted, the process proceeds to step S294.

Proceeding to step S294, the main control board 50 executes medal payout processing (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning. That is, the payout (giving) of medals is executed. At this time, if the number of credits has not reached the upper limit "50", the number of credits is added. is discharged from the hopper 35. It should be noted that the determination as to whether or not the number of credits has reached the upper limit value of "50" is made, for example, in step S394 of FIG. Then, the process proceeds to step S1416.
Proceeding to step S1416, the main control board 50 sets a game end command in the command buffer. As described above, when the game end command is set in the command buffer, it is transmitted to the sub-control board 80 in the subsequent interrupt processing.

Thus, in the modification of the thirty-third embodiment shown in FIG. 252, after executing the display determination processing in step S291 and before executing the medal payout (M_WIN_PAY) processing at the time of winning in step S294, It is determined whether or not the device is operating, and if it is determined that the specific condition device is operating, then it is determined whether or not any switch operation has been accepted. When it is determined that no switch operation has been accepted, the process proceeds to step S294.
Therefore, if the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is continuously operated in the game in which the specific condition device is activated, no medals are paid out, and the stop switch corresponding to the third reel 31 is not paid out. When 42 is released, medals are paid out.

On the other hand, in a game in which the specific condition device is not activated, medals are paid out even if the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is continuously operated.
As a result, medals are paid out even if the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is continuously operated, or medals are paid out when the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is continuously operated. When the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is released without being paid out, it is possible to determine whether or not the specific condition device is operating depending on whether or not the medals are paid out.

For example, in a game in which the winning number "4" is won by the winning lottery means 61 and the cherry condition device corresponding to the winning number "4" is activated, the symbols "cherry" - "ANY" - "ANY" corresponding to the cherry. When the combination is stopped on the activated line, medals are paid out even if the stop switch 42 (for example, the right stop switch 42) corresponding to the third reel 31 (for example, the right reel 31) is continuously operated. .

On the other hand, in the game in which the winning number "7" is won by the combination lottery means 61 and the "1BB+cherry" condition device corresponding to the winning number "7" is activated, "cherry" - "ANY" - corresponding to the cherry. When the "ANY" symbol combination is stop-displayed on the activated line, the stop switch 42 (for example, the right stop switch 42) corresponding to the third reel 31 (for example, the right reel 31) continues to be operated. And medals are not paid out. When the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is released, medals are paid out.

As a result, even if the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is continuously operated when the symbol combination of "cherry"-"ANY"-"ANY" corresponding to the cherry is stop-displayed on the activated line. , it is possible to determine whether or not the 1BB condition device has been activated, depending on whether or not medals have been paid out.

(2) In the above embodiment, in step S1415, any operation of the first stop switch 42, second stop switch 42, third stop switch 42, 1-bet switch 40a, 3-bet switch 40b, or start switch 41 is accepted. However, it is not limited to this.
For example, in step S1415, it may be determined whether or not only the first stop switch 42, the second stop switch 42, and the third stop switch 42 have been operated.

(3) In the above embodiment, the game end command is set in the command buffer in step S1416. Then, a game end command was transmitted to the sub-control board 80, and the sub-control board 80 side controlled an effect related to the game result. However, it is not limited to this.
For example, an effect related to a game result may be controlled on the main control board 50 side. Then, at step 1418, the main control board 50 may execute an effect related to the game result.

(4) In the above embodiment, when stopping the reel 31 and the motor 32, the motor 32 (stepping motor) is subjected to four-phase excitation output, but the present invention is not limited to this.
When stopping the reel 31 and the motor 32, for example, one-phase excitation output, two-phase excitation output, or three-phase excitation output may be performed. Also, first, 2-phase excitation output is performed and a weak brake is applied, then the 2-phase excitation output is switched to a 4-phase excitation output, and a strong brake is applied to stop the rotation of the reel 31 and the motor 32. You can let it run.
(5) The first to thirty-third embodiments and the various modifications shown in the first to thirty-third embodiments are not limited to being carried out independently, but can be carried out in combination as appropriate.

<34th embodiment>
In the thirty-fourth embodiment, each reel 31 is provided with a #th reel drive state (_WK_RL#_STS) capable of storing data indicating the drive state of the reel 31, and is stored in the #th reel drive state (_WK_RL#_STS). If the result is "0", it is determined that the index has been detected, and the result is not "0". When the index is detected, it is determined that the index is not detected.

Then, when the data stored in the #th reel drive state (_WK_RL#_STS) and "40 (H)" are not logically ANDed, the stop switch 42 is operated. Even if the stop switch 42 is pressed, the stop control of the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 is not executed.

The symbol arrangement of the reels 31, the activated lines, the type of combination, the symbol combination of the combination, the number of payouts, the condition device, the winning combination, the RT, and the main game state are the same as in the twenty-third embodiment.
253 and 254 are diagrams showing main data according to the thirty-fourth embodiment among the data stored in the RWM 53 in the thirty-fourth embodiment. Note that the data shown in FIGS. 253 and 254 are part of the data, and various data other than the data shown are stored in the RWM 53 .
In FIG. 254, “D0” to “D15” indicate D0 bit to D15 bit of 16-bit data, respectively.

In FIG. 253, the first reel drive state (_WK_RL1_STS) at address "F067(H)" is a storage area for storing data indicating the drive state of the motor 32 of the first (left) reel 31. FIG.
The D0 bit indicates whether deceleration is being performed by 4-phase excitation, "1" indicates that deceleration is being performed by 4-phase excitation, and "0" indicates that deceleration is not being performed by 4-phase excitation. .
The D1 bit indicates whether deceleration is being performed by 2-phase excitation, "1" indicates that deceleration is being performed by 4-phase excitation, and "0" indicates that deceleration is not being performed by 4-phase excitation. .
The D5 bit indicates whether or not the vehicle is decelerating. "1" indicates that the vehicle is decelerating, and "0" indicates that it is not decelerating.

The D1 bit is also "1" during deceleration by four-phase excitation.
Also, the D5 bit becomes "1" during both deceleration by 2-phase excitation and deceleration by 4-phase excitation.
As a result, the D0 bit is "0" and the D1 and D5 bits are "1" during deceleration by two-phase excitation.
Also, during deceleration by four-phase excitation, the D0 bit, the D1 bit and the D5 bit all become "1".

In this embodiment, when the #th reel pattern number (for passing position) (_NB_RL#_PASPIC) and the #th reel pattern number (for stop position) (_NB_RL#_STPPIC) become the same value, two-phase excitation output is first performed. I do. As a result, the motor 32 is slightly braked. After that, the two-phase excitation output is switched to the four-phase excitation output. As a result, a strong brake is applied to the motor 32 to stop the rotation of the reel 31 and the motor 32 .
Thus, in this embodiment, the load on the motor 32 is reduced.

Also, when the #th reel pattern number (for passing position) (_NB_RL#_PASPIC) and the #th reel pattern number (for stop position) (_NB_RL#_STPPIC) are the same value, the D5 bit becomes "1".
Furthermore, when the D5 bit is "1" and the step number (_NB_RL#_STEP) of one symbol on the #th reel 13 is less than "16", two-phase excitation output is performed. At this time, the D1 bit becomes "1". That is, the motor is decelerating due to two-phase excitation, the D0 bit becomes "0", and the D1 and D5 bits become "1".

When the D5 bit is "1" and the step number (_NB_RL#_STEP) of one symbol on the reel # 13 is "16" or more, the two-phase excitation output is switched to the four-phase excitation output (two-phase excitation output). deceleration ends). At this time, the D0 bit becomes "1" while the D1 and D5 bits remain "1". That is, the motor is decelerating due to four-phase excitation, and the D0, D1 and D5 bits all become "1".

The two-phase excitation deceleration period during deceleration by two-phase excitation may be measured (counted), and deceleration by four-phase excitation may be started after the two-phase excitation deceleration period has passed.
In addition, not only when the # # reel pattern number (for passing position) (_NB_RL#_PASPIC) and # # reel pattern number (for stop position) (_NB_RL#_STPPIC) are the same value, for example, # # reel The symbol number (for passing position) (_NB_RL#_PASPIC) and the # reel symbol number (for stop position) (_NB_RL#_STPPIC) are the same value, and the step number (_NB_RL#_STEP) of 1 symbol on reel # 13 ) reaches a predetermined value (for example, "3"), two-phase excitation output may be performed to apply a weak brake to the motor 32 and set the D5 bit to "1".

The D2 bit indicates whether or not the vehicle is at constant speed, "1" indicates that it is at constant speed, and "0" indicates that it is not at constant speed.
When the acceleration process ends, the D2 bit becomes "1".
Deceleration starts (after the operation of the stop switch 42 corresponding to the # reel 31 is accepted, the # # reel pattern number (for passing position) (_NB_RL#_PASPIC) and the # # reel pattern number (for stop position) (_NB_RL #_STPPIC) becomes the same value), during deceleration, during deceleration by 2-phase excitation, and during deceleration by 4-phase excitation, the D2 bit is "1".

Note that after the operation of the stop switch 42 corresponding to the #th reel 31 is accepted, the #th reel pattern number (for passing position) (_NB_RL#_PASPIC) and the #th reel pattern number (for stop position) (_NB_RL#) _STPPIC) become the same value, and the step number (_NB_RL#_STEP) of 1 symbol on the # reel 13 becomes a predetermined value (for example, "3"). The D2 bit may be "1".

The D3 bit indicates whether or not the vehicle is being accelerated, "1" indicates that it is being accelerated, and "0" indicates that it is not being accelerated.
The D4 bit indicates whether or not it is in a state of preparation for rotation, "1" indicates that it is in a state of preparation for rotation, and "0" indicates that it is not in a state of preparation for rotation.
The D6 bit indicates whether or not it is before index detection, "1" indicates that it is before index detection, and "0" indicates that it is not before index detection (after index detection).

When the operation of the start switch 41 is accepted, "50 (H)"("01010000(B)") is set in the #th reel driving state (_WK_RL#_STS).
After that, when the motor 32 of the #th reel 31 starts accelerating, the #th reel driving state (_WK_RL#_STS) is set to "48 (H)"("01001000(B)").
A period from when the operation of the start switch 41 is accepted until the acceleration of the motor 32 of the # reel 31 is started is in a state of preparation for rotation. During this time, the D4 bit becomes "1". Then, when the motor 32 of the #th reel 31 starts to accelerate, the D3 bit becomes "1" and the D4 bit becomes "0".
Thereafter, when the reel sensor 33 of the #th reel 31 detects the index, the D6 bit changes from "1" to "0" when the #th reel sensor signal rises.

The D7 bit indicates whether or not deceleration is started, "1" indicates that deceleration is started, and "0" indicates that deceleration is not started.
When the operation of the stop switch 42 corresponding to the #th reel 31 is accepted, the D7 bit becomes "1".
After the operation of the stop switch 42 corresponding to the #th reel 31 is accepted, the #th reel pattern number (for passing position) (_NB_RL#_PASPIC) and the #th reel pattern number (for stop position) (_NB_RL#_STPPIC) deceleration start state until .
The D7 bit is also "1" during deceleration, deceleration by 2-phase excitation, and deceleration by 4-phase excitation.

In FIG. 253, the second reel drive state (_WK_RL2_STS) at the address "F068 (H)" is a storage area for storing data indicating the drive state of the motor 32 of the second (middle) reel 31, and the address "F069 ( H)” is a storage area for storing data indicating the driving state of the motor 32 of the third (right) reel 31 . These contents are the same as the first reel driving state (_WK_RL1_STS) of the address "F067(H)".

In FIG. 254, the input port 0 level data (_PT_IN0_OLD) of the address "F090(H)" is the first stop switch signal (D0 bit) and the second stop switch signal (D1 bit) input to each bit of the input port 0. ), 3rd stop switch signal (D2 bit), 1 bet switch signal (D3 bit), 3 bet switch signal (D4 bit), start switch signal (D5 bit), settlement switch signal (D6 bit) on/off This is a storage area for storing.

The ## stop switch signal is turned on when the ## stop switch 42 is operated (the stop button 42a is pushed in), and when the ## stop switch 42 is released (the stopped button 42a that has been pushed in is released, position) to turn it off.
The 1-bet switch signal, 3-bet switch signal, start switch signal, and settlement switch signal are also turned on when the corresponding switch is operated, and turned off when the corresponding switch is released, in the same way as the ## stop switch signal. Become.
In interrupt processing, the signal input to each bit of input port 0 is read, and whether each signal is on or off is determined. If there is, store a '0' in the corresponding bit.

In FIG. 254, the reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP) at address "F095 (H)" is a storage area for storing data indicating whether or not the operation (stop operation) of the stop switch 42 corresponding to each reel 31 has been accepted. be.
The D0 bit indicates whether or not the stop operation of the first (left) reel 31 has been accepted, "1" indicates that the stop operation has not been accepted, and "0" indicates that the stop operation has been accepted. (accepted).
The D1 bit indicates whether or not a stop operation for the second (middle) reel 31 has been accepted, and the D2 bit indicates whether or not a stop operation for the third (right) reel 31 has been accepted. These contents are similar to the D0 bit.

Each time a game is started, the reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP) is set to the initial value "00000111 (B)".
When the operation of the first (left) stop switch 42 is accepted, the D0 bit of the reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP) is set to "0". Similarly, when the operation of the second (middle) stop switch 42 is accepted, the D1 bit is set to "0", and when the operation of the third (right) stop switch 42 is accepted, the D2 bit is set to "0". set.

FIG. 255(a) is a diagram showing a stop switch determination table (TBL_STPBTN_CHK). The data stored in the stop switch determination table (TBL_STPBTN_CHK) is compared with the data stored in the input port 0 level data (_PT_IN0_OLD). is used when determining whether or not the operation of is valid.
FIG. 255(b) is a diagram showing a stop acceptance determination table. The data stored in the stop acceptance determination table is used when inspecting whether each reel 31 is before or after index detection. It is used when determining whether or not

FIG. 256 is a flowchart showing main processing (M_MAIN) in the thirty-fourth embodiment, and is a flowchart corresponding to FIG. 139 in the twenty-third embodiment.
In the flowchart of the thirty-fourth embodiment shown in FIG. 256, the step numbers different from those in FIG. 139 are underlined, and the same steps as in FIG. 139 are given the same step numbers.

Also, in the main processing (M_MAIN) of the thirty-fourth embodiment, the processing of steps S295 to S300 of FIG. 139 is executed, but the processing of steps S295 to S300 is omitted in FIG.
Differences from FIG. 139 will be mainly described below.

As shown in FIG. 256, in the thirty-fourth embodiment, once the start switch acceptance process (M_START_CTL) of step S751 is executed, the process proceeds to step S1421.
Proceeding to step S1421, the main control board 50 executes a reel stop acceptance check. This process is the process shown in FIG. 257, which will be described later. Then, when the reel stop acceptance check in step S1421 is completed, the process proceeds to step S291.

After proceeding to step S291, the main control board 50 executes display determination.
Specifically, it is determined whether or not the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is stop-displayed on the active line. Also, when a symbol combination for which medals are to be paid out (given) is stopped and displayed on the active line, the number of medals to be paid out (given number) is determined. Then, the process proceeds to step S292.
The determined number of medals to be paid out may be stored (saved) only in a predetermined register and not stored in the RWM 53 , or may be stored in the RWM 53 .

Further, when the result of step S292 is "No" and the process of step S293 is executed, the process proceeds to step S1422.
Proceeding to step S1422, the main control board 50 determines whether any stop switch signal is ON (operation of any stop switch 42 is accepted).
Specifically, in step S1422, the main control board 50 first stores the data stored in the input port 0 level data (_PT_IN0_OLD) (FIG. 254) of the address "F090(H)" of the RWM 53 in the A register. do.
Next, the main control board 50 performs a logical product (AND) operation of the A register value and "00000111 (B)", and determines whether or not the result is "0" (the zero flag is "1"). to judge. Thereby, it is determined whether or not any stop switch signal is ON, that is, whether or not operation of any stop switch 42 is accepted.

When the result of the AND operation is not "0" (the zero flag is not "1"), one of the stop switch signals is on (one of the stop switches 42 is being operated). , and "Yes" is determined in step S1422, and the process of step S1422 is executed again. That is, the process of step S1422 is repeated.
On the other hand, when the result of the AND operation is "0" (the zero flag is "1"), all stop switch signals are off (operation of any stop switch 42 is not accepted). No), the determination in step S1422 is "No", and the process proceeds to step S294.

Here, when the operation of at least one of the left stop switch 42, the middle stop switch 42, and the right stop switch 42 is accepted, at least one stop switch signal is turned on, and the input port 0 level data ( _PT_IN0_OLD) at least one of the D0 to D2 bits becomes "1".
Also, when at least one of the D0 to D2 bits of the input port 0 level data (_PT_IN0_OLD) is "1", the result of the AND operation is not "0" (the zero flag is not "1").
Then, when the result of the logical product operation is not "0" (the zero flag is not "1"), the result is "Yes" in step S1422, and the process of step S1422 is repeated. In this case, since the processing after step S294 does not proceed, the medal payout processing (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning is not executed.

On the other hand, when the left stop switch 42, middle stop switch 42, and right stop switch 42 are all released, the left stop switch signal, middle stop switch signal, and right stop switch signal are all turned off. , the D0 to D2 bits of the input port 0 level data (_PT_IN0_OLD) are all set to "0".
Also, when the D0 to D2 bits of the input port 0 level data (_PT_IN0_OLD) are all "0", the result of the logical AND operation is "0" (the zero flag becomes "1").
Then, when the result of the logical product operation is "0" (the zero flag is "1"), the result is "No" in step S1422, and the process proceeds to step S294.

Proceeding to step S294, the main control board 50 executes medal payout processing (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning. That is, when the number of credits has not reached the upper limit value "50", the number of credits is added, and when the number of credits has reached the upper limit value "50", the hopper motor 36 is driven and the actual The medals are paid out from the hopper 35. It should be noted that the determination as to whether or not the number of credits has reached the upper limit value of "50" is made, for example, in step S394 of FIG.

Here, in the present embodiment, display determination is performed in step S291, and then it is determined in step S1422 whether or not any stop switch signal is ON. Proceeding to step S294, medal payout processing (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning is executed.
Therefore, even if the operation of the third (last) stop switch 42 is accepted, the number of medals to be paid out (the number of medals to be awarded) can be determined. is accepted, the result is "Yes" in step S1422, and the process does not proceed to step S294, so the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning is not executed. Then, when all the stop switches 42 are released, the result of step S1422 is "No", the process proceeds to step S294, and the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning can be executed.

Also, for example, in a situation where the operation of the third (last) stop switch 42 (for example, the right stop switch 42) is accepted, another stop switch 42 (for example, the left stop switch 42) is operated, and then other Suppose that the third (last) stop switch 42 (eg, right stop switch 42) is released while the first stop switch 42 (eg, left stop switch 42) is being operated.
In this case, even if the operation of the other stop switch 42 (for example, the left stop switch 42) continues to be accepted, the number of medals to be paid out (the number of medals awarded) can be determined. 42 (for example, the left stop switch 42) has been accepted, the result is "Yes" in step S1422, and the process does not proceed to step S294, so medal payout processing (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning is not executed.

In this way, under the condition that the operation of any of the stop switches 42 is accepted, the result is "Yes" in step S1422, and the process does not proceed to step S294, so the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning is not executed.
When all of the stop switches 42 are released, the result is "No" in step S1422, and the process advances to step S294 to enable execution of medal payout processing (M_WIN_PAY) upon winning.
As a result, the addition of credits or the payout of medals from the hopper 35 can be performed at the timing desired by the player.

FIG. 257 is a flow chart showing reel stop acceptance check in step S1421 of FIG.
At step S1431, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the input port 0 level data (_PT_IN0_OLD) (FIG. 254) at the address "F090(H)" of the RWM 53 is "0".
Specifically, the data stored in the input port 0 level data (_PT_IN0_OLD) (Fig. 254) at the address "F090(H)" of the RWM 53 is stored in the A register, and whether the A register value is "0" is determined. determine whether or not

Then, when it is determined that it is not "0", it becomes "No" in step S1431, and the process of step S1431 is executed again. In other words, the process of step S1431 is repeated until "Yes".
On the other hand, when it is judged to be "0", it becomes "Yes" in step S1431, and the process proceeds to the next step S1432.

Thus, in this embodiment, it is determined in step S1431 whether or not the data of the input port 0 level data (_PT_IN0_OLD) is "0", and if it is determined to be "0", the process proceeds to step S1432. .
As a result, when any switch signal input to the input port 0 is ON (any switch operation is accepted), the stop control of the reel 31 is not executed. .
In step S1431, instead of acquiring the data stored in the input port 0 level data (_PT_IN0_OLD) of the RWM 53, the data of the signal input to the input port 0 may be acquired directly.

Proceeding to step S1432, the main control board 50 executes a stop acceptance check. This process is the process shown in FIG. 258 to be described later. When the stop acceptance check in step S1432 is completed, the process proceeds to step S1433.
Proceeding to step S1433, the main control board 50 determines whether or not there is inspection data.
Specifically, in step S1433, it is determined whether or not the zero flag is "1". That is, it is determined whether or not the result of the logical product (AND) operation in step S1454 of FIG. 258, which will be described later, is "0".

When the zero flag is not "1", it is determined that there is inspection data, the result of step S1433 is "Yes", and the process advances to the stop acceptance inspection of step S1439.
On the other hand, when the zero flag is "1", it is determined that there is no inspection data, the result of step S1433 is "No", and the process proceeds to step S1434.
Proceeding to step S1434, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the input port 0 level data (_PT_IN0_OLD) (FIG. 254) at the address "F090(H)" of the RWM 53 is "0".

Specifically, the data stored in the input port 0 level data (_PT_IN0_OLD) (Fig. 254) at the address "F090(H)" of the RWM 53 is stored in the A register, and whether the A register value is "0" is determined. determine whether or not
When it is judged to be "0", it becomes "Yes" in step S1434, and the process returns to step S1432. As a result, the processing from step S1432 to step S1434 is repeated.
On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not "0", it becomes "No" in step S1434, and the process proceeds to the next step S1435.

Proceeding to step S1435, the main control board 50 determines that the data stored in the input port 0 level data (_PT_IN0_OLD) matches any of the data stored in the stop switch determination table (there is matching data). or not.
Specifically, first, it is determined whether or not the data stored in the A register in step S1434 matches "00000100 (B)" stored at the top (first row) of the stop switch determination table. .
When it is determined that they match, it determines that the operation of the third (right) stop switch 42 has been accepted, and proceeds to the next step S1436.

On the other hand, if it is determined that they do not match, then it is determined whether the data stored in the A register in step S1434 matches "00000010 (B)" stored in the second row of the stop switch determination table. determine whether or not
When it is determined that they match, it determines that the operation of the second (middle) stop switch 42 has been accepted, and proceeds to the next step S1436.
On the other hand, if it is determined that they do not match, then it is determined whether the data stored in the A register in step S1434 matches "00000001 (B)" stored in the third row of the stop switch determination table. determine whether or not

When it is determined that they match, it determines that the operation of the first (left) stop switch 42 has been accepted, and proceeds to the next step S1436.
On the other hand, when it is determined that they do not match, it is determined that they do not match any data stored in the stop switch determination table (there is no matching data), and the process returns to step S1431. As a result, the processing from step S1431 to step S1435 is repeated.

For example, when the first (left) stop switch 42 is operated, the input port 0 level data (_PT_IN0_OLD) becomes "00000001(B)".
In this case, since it matches "00000001 (B)" stored in the third row of the stop switch determination table, it is determined that the operation of the first (left) stop switch 42 has been accepted, and the process proceeds to step S1436. .

Also, for example, when the operations of the first (left) stop switch 42 and the second (middle) stop switch 42 are accepted simultaneously, the data of the input port 0 level data (_PT_IN0_OLD) becomes "00000011 (B)".
In this case, since it does not match any data stored in the stop switch determination table, it is determined that there is no matching data, and the process returns to step S1431.

Thus, in this embodiment, when the operation of a plurality of stop switches 42 is simultaneously accepted, the stop switch 42 and other switches (1 bed switch 40a, 3 bed switch 40b, start switch 41, settlement switch 43) are accepted at the same time, it is determined in step S1435 that there is no matching data, and the process returns to step S1431.
Thus, in this embodiment, when a plurality of stop switches 42 are operated at the same time, or when the stop switch 42 and another switch are operated at the same time, stop control of the reel 31 is not executed.

In other words, even if all the reels 31 rotate at a constant speed, detect the index, and are ready to accept the operation of the stop switch 42, when a plurality of stop switches 42 are operated at the same time or , when the stop switch 42 and other switches are operated at the same time, it is determined in step S1435 that there is no match data, and the process returns to step S1431 to stop the reel 31 from being controlled.

Proceeding to step S1436, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the stop switch signal for the reel 31 whose stop has been accepted has been turned on (operation of the stop switch 42 has been accepted).
Specifically, the data stored in the A register in step S1434 and the data of the reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP) at the address "F095 (H)" of the RWM 53 are ANDed. ” (the zero flag is “1”).

When the result of the AND operation is "0" (the zero flag is "1"), it is determined that the stop switch signal for the reel 31 for which stop acceptance has been accepted has been turned on, and in step S1436 " Yes", and the process returns to step S1431. As a result, the processing from step S1431 to step S1436 is repeated. In this case, the process does not proceed to step S1437, so stop control of the reel 31 is not executed.

On the other hand, when the result of the AND operation is not "0" (the zero flag is not "1"), it is determined that the stop switch signal for the reel 31 that has not been stopped (can be stopped) has been turned on. Then, "No" is obtained in step S1436, and the process proceeds to step S1437. In this case, the stop control of the reel 31 can be executed.
In this way, in the present embodiment, stop control is not executed for the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 for which the stop operation has already been accepted, and the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 for which the stop operation has not yet been accepted. I am trying to execute stop control about.

Proceeding to step S1437, the main control board 50 executes a process for accepting a stoppage. In this process, the stop position of the ## reel 31 is determined based on the winning combination lottery result of the current game and the position of the ## reel 31 at the moment when the operation of the ## stop switch 42 is accepted, and the determined stop position is determined. A symbol number corresponding to the position is stored in the #th reel symbol number (for the stop position). Furthermore, the stop symbol data for judging the symbol combination to stop on the activated line is updated.

More specifically, in the processing at the time of stop acceptance in step S1437 of FIG. 257, processing corresponding to steps S1022 to S1024 in FIG. 194 of the twenty-fifth embodiment is executed. That is, for the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 determined to be ON in steps S1434 to S1436, the process corresponding to steps S1022 to S1023 in FIG. The stop position of the reel 31 is determined based on the position of the reel 31 at the moment of determination, and the pattern number corresponding to the determined stop position is stored in the reel pattern number (for stop position). Furthermore, by processing corresponding to the stop symbol set (M_STOPPIC_SET) in step S1024 of FIG. 194, the stop symbol data (_WK_STOP_PIC1-9) for determining the symbol combination to stop on the activated line is updated.

It should be noted that the #th reel symbol number (for passing position) and the #th reel symbol number ( stop position) have reached the same value, the motor 32 of the #-th reel 31 is decelerated by two-phase excitation, and then switched to deceleration by four-phase excitation.

In addition, the #th reel symbol number (for passing position) and the #th reel symbol number (for stop position) are the same value, and the step number (_NB_RL#_STEP) of one symbol of #th reel 13 is determined in advance. When the value (for example, "3") is reached, the motor 32 of the #-th reel 31 may be decelerated by two-phase excitation, and then switched to deceleration by four-phase excitation.

Then, after executing the stop acceptance processing in step S1437, the process proceeds to step S1438, and the main control board 50 determines whether or not all the reels 31 have stopped.
Specifically, it is determined whether or not the data of the reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP) at the address "F095(H)" of the RWM 53 is "0".
Here, when the data of the reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP) is not "0", it is determined that one of the reels 31 is not stopped, the result of step S1438 is "No", and the process returns to step S1431. As a result, the processing after step S1431 is repeated.

On the other hand, when the data of the reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP) is "0", it is determined that all the reels 31 have stopped, the result of step S1438 is "Yes", and the processing according to this flowchart is terminated.
After completing the processing according to this flowchart, the process proceeds to step S291 in FIG. 256 to execute display determination. Then, in the display judgment of step S291 in FIG. 256, it is judged whether or not the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination has been stop-displayed on the active line, and the symbol combination for which medals are to be paid out (given) is stop-displayed on the active line. If so, determine the number of medals to be paid out (the number of medals to be awarded).

As described above, even if the operation of the third (last) stop switch 42 is accepted, the process proceeds to step S291 in FIG. be.
However, if the operation of the third (last) stop switch 42 continues to be accepted, it becomes "Yes" in step S1422 of FIG. Do not execute the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY).
Then, when all the stop switches 42 are released, the result is "No" in step S1422 of FIG. 256, and the process proceeds to step S294 of FIG.

257, the main control board 50 executes a stop acceptance check. This process is the process shown in FIG. 258 to be described later. When the stop acceptance check in step S1439 is completed, the process advances to step S1440.
Proceeding to step S1440, the main control board 50 determines whether or not there is inspection data.
Specifically, in step S1440, it is determined whether or not the zero flag is "1". That is, it is determined whether or not the result of the logical product (AND) operation in step S1454 of FIG. 258, which will be described later, is "0".

When the zero flag is not "1", it is determined that there is inspection data, the result of step S1440 is "Yes", and the process returns to the stop acceptance inspection of step S1439. As a result, the processing of steps S1439 and S1440 is repeated.
On the other hand, when the zero flag is "1", it is determined that there is no inspection data, the result of step S1440 is "No", and the process returns to step S1431. As a result, the processing after step S1431 is repeated.

FIG. 258 is a flow chart showing the stop acceptability check in steps S1432 and S1439 of FIG.
In step S1451, the main control board 50 sets a stop acceptance determination table (FIG. 255(b)). Then, the process proceeds to the next step S1452.
Proceeding to step S1452, the main control board 50 acquires the number of inspections from the stop acceptance determination table. Specifically, the number of inspections "3" stored at the top (first row) of the stop acceptance determination table is acquired and stored in the B register. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S1453.

Proceeding to step S1453, the main control board 50 acquires the lower address of the mask data and inspection RWM address from the stop acceptance determination table. Specifically, the mask data "40 (H)" stored in the second to fourth rows of the stop acceptance determination table is acquired and stored in the C register, and the lower address of the inspection RWM address "LOW_WK_RL1_STS ” to “LOW_WK_RL1_STS” (“67(H)” to “69(H)”) are acquired and stored in the A register. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S1454.

Here, in the first inspection, the mask data "40 (H)" stored in the second row and the lower address "LOW_WK_RL1_STS"("67(H)") of the inspection RWM address are obtained. In the inspection, the mask data "40(H)" stored in the third line and the lower address "LOW_WK_RL2_STS"("68(H)") of the inspection RWM address are obtained. and the lower address "LOW_WK_RL3_STS"("69(H)") of the inspection RWM address stored in the mask data "40(H)".
After the first inspection, if "No" is determined in step S1456, which will be described later, the second inspection is performed, and if "No" is determined in step S1456 again, the third inspection is performed. conduct. In this manner, each reel 31 is inspected (checked whether it is before or after index detection).

Proceeding to step S1454, the main control board 50 acquires the data in the storage area indicated by the inspection RWM address. Specifically, the data stored in the storage area of the RWM 53 having the A register value as the lower address is stored in the A register. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S1455.
Here, in the first inspection, the data of the first reel drive state (WK_RL1_STS) is stored in the A register. Also, in the second inspection, the data of the second reel driving state (WK_RL2_STS) are stored in the A register, and in the third inspection, the data of the third reel driving state (WK_RL3_STS) are stored in the A register.

Proceeding to step S1455, the main control board 50 performs a logical product (AND) operation between the data acquired in step S1454 and the mask data. Specifically, in step S1455, the #th reel driving state (WK_RL#_STS) data stored in the A register in step S1454 and the mask data "40 (H)" ("01000000") stored in the C register in step S1453. (B)”) is ANDed. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S1456.

Here, when the rotation of the #th reel 31 reaches a constant speed but before the reel sensor 33 of the #th reel 31 detects the index, the D6 bit of the #th reel driving state (WK_RL#_STS) is is "1". For this reason, the result of the above AND operation does not become "0" (the zero flag does not become "1").
Further, when the motor 32 of the #th reel 31 is out of step after the rotation of the #th reel 31 reaches a constant speed, re-acceleration processing is performed. At this time, "1" is set to the D6 bit of the #th reel drive state (WK_RL#_STS), and re-acceleration processing is performed. Also in this case, the result of the logical AND operation is not "0" (the zero flag is not "1").

On the other hand, when the #th reel 31 rotates at a constant speed and after the reel sensor 33 of the #th reel 31 detects the index, the D6 bit of the #th reel driving state (WK_RL#_STS) is is "0". Therefore, the result of the logical product operation is "0" (the zero flag becomes "1").
Proceeding to step S1456, the main control board 50 determines whether or not there is inspection data. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the result of the AND operation executed in step S1455 is "0", and if it is "0" (zero flag is "1"), it is determined that there is no inspection data. Then, "No" is obtained in step S1456, and the process proceeds to the next step S1457.

Here, when the rotation of the reel 31 reaches a constant speed and after the reel sensor 33 detects the index, when the four-phase excitation output for stopping the reel 31 is performed, and when the reel 31 stops If it has been completed, the D6 bit of the #th reel drive state (WK_RL#_STS) is "0", so the result of the logical AND operation is "0" (the zero flag is "1"). In this case, "No" is determined in step S1456, and the process proceeds to the next step S1457.
On the other hand, when the result of the AND operation is not "0" (the zero flag is not "1"), it is determined that there is inspection data, the result of step S1456 is "Yes", and the processing according to this flowchart is terminated.

Proceeding to step S1457, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the number of inspections has ended. Specifically, "1" is subtracted from the B register value and the result is stored in the B register. Then, it is determined whether or not the B register value is "0", and if it is "0", it is determined that the number of inspections has ended, and the result of step S1457 is "Yes", and the processing according to this flowchart is terminated. .
On the other hand, when the B register value is not "0", it is determined that the number of inspections has not been completed, the result of step S1457 is "No", and the process returns to step S1453. In this case, the processing after step S1453 is repeated.

When the result of step S1456 is "Yes" (existence of inspection data) and the processing according to this flowchart is finished, the result of step S1433 in FIG. 257 is "Yes", and the result of step S1440 in FIG. Therefore, since the process does not proceed to step 1437 in FIG. 257, the stop control of the reel 31 is not executed. That is, before the reel sensor 33 detects the index, the stop control of the reel 31 is not executed.

Further, for example, the first (left) reel 31 has already stopped, the second (middle) reel 31 is rotating at a constant speed and after index detection, and the third (right) reel 31 is also rotating at a constant speed. It is assumed that it is during and after index detection.
In this case, since the D6 bit of the first reel driving state (WK_RL1_STS) is "0", the data of the first reel driving state (WK_RL1_STS) and "40 (H)"("01000000 (B )”) becomes “0” (the zero flag is “1”).

In addition, since the D6 bit of the second reel drive state (WK_RL2_STS) is also "0", in the second inspection, the AND operation of the data of the second reel drive state (WK_RL2_STS) and "40 (H)" The result is "0".
Furthermore, since the D6 bit of the third reel drive state (WK_RL3_STS) is also "0", the logical AND operation of the data of the third reel drive state (WK_RL3_STS) and "40 (H)" is performed in the third inspection. The result is "0".
Then, in the third inspection, "No" is obtained in step S1456, "Yes" is obtained in step S1457, and the processing according to this flowchart ends.

Also, for example, the first (left) reel 31 has already stopped, the second (middle) reel 31 is rotating at a constant speed and before index detection, and the third (right) reel 31 is also rotating at a constant speed. It is assumed that it is during and after index detection.
In this case, as described above, in the first inspection, the AND operation result of the data of the first reel driving state (WK_RL1_STS) and "40 (H)" becomes "0".

However, since the D6 bit of the second reel drive state (WK_RL2_STS) is "1", in the second inspection, the AND operation of the data of the second reel drive state (WK_RL2_STS) and "40 (H)" The result is "01000000(B)" (not "0").
Then, in the second inspection, "Yes" is determined in step S1456, and the processing according to this flowchart is terminated.

In this manner, in the stop reception inspection shown in FIG. 258, each reel 31 is inspected (checked) whether it is before or after index detection. Since each reel 31 can be inspected by common processing, the processing can be simplified and the amount of ROM used by the program can be reduced.

As described above, in the present embodiment, each reel 31 is provided with the # reel driving state (_WK_RL#_STS) (FIG. 253) capable of storing data indicating the driving state of the reel 31 . Also, in step S1455 in FIG. 258, the AND operation of the data stored in the #th reel drive state (_WK_RL#_STS) and the mask data "40 (H)" is executed.
Here, when the rotation of the #th reel 31 reaches a constant speed and after the reel sensor 33 of the #th reel 31 detects the index, the D6 bit of the #th reel driving state (WK_RL#_STS) is set to " 0”. Therefore, the result of the logical AND operation is "0" (the zero flag is "1"). At this time, it is determined that the index has been detected, and the result in step S1456 of FIG. 258 is "No".

On the other hand, when the rotation of the #th reel 31 reaches a constant speed but before the reel sensor 33 of the #th reel 31 detects the index, the D6 bit of the #th reel driving state (WK_RL#_STS) is "1". For this reason, the result of the above AND operation is not "0" (the zero flag is "1"). At this time, it is determined that the index has not yet been detected, and the result in step S1456 of FIG. 258 is "Yes".
When the result of the logical product operation is not "0" (the zero flag is "1"), "Yes" is obtained in steps S1433 and S1440 of FIG. 42 is operated, stop control of the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 is not executed.

That is, in the reel drive state # (WK_RL#_STS), information is stored as information relating to the drive state of the reel 31 that enables identification of whether the index is detected before or after index detection, even in a constant speed state. When a predetermined calculation is executed using the data of the #th reel drive state (WK_RL#_STS), the result of the predetermined calculation is different before and after index detection.
Based on the result of a predetermined calculation, it is determined whether the index is detected before or after the index detection, and by further determining whether or not the reel 31 can be controlled to stop. It is possible to make it possible to judge whether it is executable or not.

In addition, in this embodiment, the main control board 50, after the number of bets (the number of bets corresponding to the prescribed number) that allows the game to be executed has been betted, first, the input port 0 of the address "F090(H)" of the RWM 53. The data stored in the level data (_PT_IN0_OLD) (Fig. 254) is obtained, and it is determined whether or not the obtained data is "0".
Furthermore, when it is determined that the acquired data is not "0", then the logical product (AND) operation of the input port 0 level data (_PT_IN0_OLD) and "11011111 (B)" is performed, and the result is is "0".

When it is determined that the result of the logical AND operation is "0", it is determined that only the start switch signal is ON, and control to start rotation of the reel 31 based on the operation of the start switch 41 is executed.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the data of the input port 0 level data (_PT_IN0_OLD) is "0" and the result of the AND operation is not "0", the operation of the start switch 41 is performed. The rotation start control of the reel 31 is not executed.

As a result, after the number of bets capable of executing the game (the number of bets corresponding to the specified number) is bet, the bet switches 40 (1 bet switch 40a, 3 bet switch 40b), (left, middle, right) To prevent execution of rotation start control of a reel 31 based on the operation of a start switch 41 when the operation of the start switch 41 is accepted under the condition that the operations of the stop switch 42 and the settlement switch 43 are accepted. can be done.

Also in this embodiment, the setting key switch 152 is provided as described in the eleventh embodiment and the nineteenth embodiment (A).
Then, as described in the 11th embodiment and the 19th embodiment (A), in a state where the power is turned on and the number of bets has not been placed, the front door 12 is opened and the door switch 17 is turned on. When the setting key is turned on, the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion slot 151 and rotated, for example, by 90 degrees clockwise to turn on the setting key switch 152 (when the signal of the setting key switch 152 is turned on), the setting confirmation state is entered. (setting confirmation mode).

When the number of bets has been placed, the result is "Yes" in step S274 of FIG. Don't migrate.
In the setting confirmation state, the setting value cannot be changed (even if the setting change switch 153 is operated, the setting value does not change), but the current setting value can be confirmed. The current set value is displayed on the set value display LED 73 . When the setting key is rotated counterclockwise to turn off the setting key switch 152, the setting confirmation state is terminated.

As described above, when executing the rotation start control of the reel 31, the data stored in the input port 0 level data (_PT_IN0_OLD) is checked. data is not checked.
For example, the data of the input port to which the signal of the setting key switch 152 is input is not checked, the level data of the RWM 53 corresponding to the input port to which the signal of the setting key switch 152 is input is not checked, and the setting key switch is not checked. The bit corresponding to the signal of the setting key switch 152 among the data of the input port to which the signal of the setting key switch 152 is input is not checked, and the level data of the RWM 53 corresponding to the input port to which the signal of the setting key switch 152 is input. Among them, the bit corresponding to the signal of the setting key switch 152 is not checked.

Therefore, the signal of the setting key switch 152 is input (the signal of the setting key switch 152 is ON) after the number of bets that allows the game to be executed (the number of bets corresponding to the specified number) has been placed. In addition, when the operation of the start switch 41 is accepted under the condition that the front door 12 is closed (the door switch 17 is off), the rotation start control of the reel 31 based on the operation of the start switch 41 can be executed. do.

Here, even though the bed switch 40 is released after the bed switch 40 is operated, there is a possibility that the operation of the bed switch 40 will remain accepted due to deterioration of the bed switch 40 .
In this embodiment, even if the start switch 41 is operated while the operation of the bet switch 40 is being accepted, the rotation start control of the reels 31 based on the operation of the start switch 41 is not executed.

Similarly, even if the start switch 41 is operated when the stop switch 42 (left, middle, right) or the adjustment switch 43 is in a state where these operations are accepted due to deterioration, the start switch 41 The rotation start control of the reel 31 based on the operation is not executed.
As a result, even if the start switch 41 is operated, the player can recognize that the slot machine 10 has some kind of abnormality because the reels 31 do not rotate. When the player informs the hall clerk of the fact, the hall clerk can also recognize that the slot machine 10 has some kind of abnormality.
In addition, even if the operation of the bed switch 40, the (left, middle, right) stop switch 42, or the settlement switch 43 is still accepted, both the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 will not notify the error. not performed. This is because, if an error notification is given in such a case, the player may feel annoyed.

In addition, it is usually unthinkable that the setting key switch 152 is turned on (the signal of the setting key switch 152 is turned on) in the middle of the game. 152 signal is on), it is likely to be noise. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the signal of the setting key switch 152 is input (when the signal of the setting key switch 152 is ON) with the number of bets that can be played (the number of bets corresponding to the specified number) betted. Yes) and the front door 12 is closed (the door switch 17 is off), when the operation of the start switch 41 is accepted, the rotation start control of the reel 31 based on the operation of the start switch 41 be executable.
As a result, it is possible to prevent the progress of the game from being interrupted by the noise.

On the other hand, under the condition that the signal of the setting key switch 152 is ON, a predetermined external signal (for example, an external signal 4 for notifying an error or the like (11th embodiment) is generated based on the signal of the setting key switch 152 being ON. It is possible to inform the hall computer or the like by outputting the configuration diagram 33)). Therefore, the hall clerk or the like can grasp that some error has occurred in the slot machine 10 to which the predetermined external signal has been output.
Under the condition that the signal of the setting key switch 152 is ON, a predetermined external signal (for example, the external signal X (see FIG. 33 of the eleventh embodiment)) that can identify that the signal of the setting key switch 152 is ON. It may be configured to output external signals other than 1 to 5)).

Further, in this embodiment, the main control board 50, in step S1435 of the reel stop reception check in FIG. It is determined whether or not any of the data matches (there is matching data).
When it is determined that the data stored in the input port 0 level data (_PT_IN0_OLD) matches "00000100 (B)" stored at the top (first row) of the stop switch determination table, the 3 (Right) It is determined that the operation of the stop switch 42 has been accepted, and the process proceeds to step S1436.

Also, when it is determined that the data stored in the input port 0 level data (_PT_IN0_OLD) matches "00000010 (B)" stored in the second row of the stop switch determination table, the second (intermediate) ) It determines that the operation of the stop switch 42 has been accepted, and proceeds to step S1436.
Furthermore, when it is determined that the data stored in the input port 0 level data (_PT_IN0_OLD) matches "00000001 (B)" stored in the third row of the stop switch determination table, the first (left ) It determines that the operation of the stop switch 42 has been accepted, and proceeds to step S1436.

On the other hand, when it is determined that it does not match any data stored in the stop switch determination table (no matching data), the process returns to step S1431.
As a result, when the operation of the # stop switch 42 is accepted under the condition that the plurality of reels 31 rotate at a constant speed and the operation of the start switch 41 is accepted, the operation of the # stop switch 42 is performed. The stop control of the #th reel 31 based on is not executed.

In addition, as described above, when executing the stop control of the #th reel 31, the data stored in the input port 0 level data (_PT_IN0_OLD) is checked. Do not check port data.
For example, the data of the input port to which the signal of the setting key switch 152 is input is not checked, the level data of the RWM 53 corresponding to the input port to which the signal of the setting key switch 152 is input is not checked, and the setting key switch is not checked. The bit corresponding to the signal of the setting key switch 152 among the data of the input port to which the signal of the setting key switch 152 is input is not checked, and the level data of the RWM 53 corresponding to the input port to which the signal of the setting key switch 152 is input. Among them, the bit corresponding to the signal of the setting key switch 152 is not checked.

Therefore, the plurality of reels 31 rotate at a constant speed, the signal of the setting key switch 152 is input (the signal of the setting key switch 152 is ON), and the front door 12 is closed (the door switch 17 is OFF). ), when the operation of the #th stop switch 42 is accepted, the stop control of the #th reel 31 based on the operation of the #th stop switch 42 can be executed.

Here, even though the start switch 41 is released after the start switch 41 is operated, there is a possibility that the operation of the start switch 41 will remain accepted due to deterioration of the start switch 41 .
In this embodiment, while the operation of the start switch 41 is still accepted, even if the # stop switch 42 is operated, the stop control of the # reel 31 is executed based on the operation of the # stop switch 42. do not.

Similarly, after operating the bed switch 40 (1 bed switch 40a, 3 bed switch 40b), even though the bed switch 40 is released, the operation of the bed switch 40 is still accepted due to deterioration of the bed switch 40 and when the operation of the adjustment switch 43 remains accepted due to deterioration of the adjustment switch 43 even though the adjustment switch 43 is released after being operated. Also, even if the #th stop switch 42 is operated, the stop control of the #th reel 31 based on the operation of the #th stop switch 42 is not performed.

As a result, even if the #th stop switch 42 is operated, the player can recognize that the slot machine 10 has some kind of abnormality because the #th reel 31 does not stop. When the player informs the hall clerk of the fact, the hall clerk can also recognize that the slot machine 10 has some kind of abnormality.
Even if the operation of the bed switch 40, the start switch 41, and the settlement switch 43 continues to be accepted, neither the main control board 50 nor the sub-control board 80 issues an error notification. This is because, if an error notification is given in such a case, the player may feel annoyed.

In addition, it is usually unthinkable that the setting key switch 152 is turned on (the signal of the setting key switch 152 is turned on) in the middle of the game. 152 signal is on), it is likely to be noise. Therefore, in this embodiment, the plurality of reels 31 rotate at a constant speed, the signal of the setting key switch 152 is input (the signal of the setting key switch 152 is ON), and the front door 12 is closed ( When the operation of the #th stop switch 42 is accepted under the condition that the door switch 17 is off, the stop control of the #th reel 31 based on the operation of the #th stop switch 42 can be executed.
As a result, it is possible to prevent the progress of the game from being interrupted by the noise.

On the other hand, under the condition that the signal of the setting key switch 152 is ON, a predetermined external signal (for example, an external signal 4 for notifying an error or the like (11th embodiment) is generated based on the signal of the setting key switch 152 being ON. It is possible to inform the hall computer or the like by outputting the configuration diagram 33)). Therefore, the hall clerk or the like can grasp that some error has occurred in the slot machine 10 to which the predetermined external signal has been output.
Under the condition that the signal of the setting key switch 152 is ON, a predetermined external signal (for example, the external signal X (see FIG. 33 of the eleventh embodiment)) that can identify that the signal of the setting key switch 152 is ON. It may be configured to output external signals other than 1 to 5)).

Although the thirty-fourth embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the contents described above, and various modifications such as those described below are possible.
(1) In the above embodiment, when the operation of the #th stop switch 42 is accepted under the condition that the plurality of reels 31 rotate at a constant speed and the operation of the start switch 41 is accepted, the #th It is assumed that the stop control of the #th reel 31 based on the operation of the stop switch 42 is not executed.
However, the present invention is not limited to this. The stop control of the #th reel 31 based on the operation of the #stop switch 42 may be executable.

As a result, for example, even though the left stop switch 42 is operated first and the middle stop switch 42 is operated second, when the left stop switch 42 is operated, deterioration of the start switch 41 or the like causes the start switch to Since the operation of 41 is still accepted, it is possible to prevent a situation in which it is determined that the middle stop switch 42 has been operated first.

In particular, in an AT machine, if it is determined that the middle stop switch 42 has been operated first despite the fact that the left stop switch 42 has been operated first, this will result in an error in the pressing order, which is disadvantageous to the player. However, even if the operation of the start switch 41 is accepted, by enabling the stop control of the #th reel 31 based on the operation of the #th stop switch 42, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the pressing order is incorrect during AT. occurrence can be prevented.

It should be noted that, as in this modification, even if the stop control of the #th reel 31 based on the operation of the #th stop switch 42 is made executable under the condition that the operation of the start switch 41 is accepted, the setting key Regardless of whether the signal of the switch 152 is ON/OFF, the stop control of the #th reel 31 based on the operation of the #th stop switch 42 may be executed. Further, when the signal of the setting key switch 152 is ON, the stop control of the #th reel 31 based on the operation of the #th stop switch 42 may not be executed.

(2) In the above embodiment, the stop control of the reel 31 is not executed when the operations of the plurality of stop switches 42 are accepted.
However, not limited to this, for example, the operation of the first stop switch 42 is accepted, and then the operation of the second stop switch 42 is operated while the operation of the first stop switch 42 is still accepted. In addition to enabling acceptance, the stop control of the corresponding reel 31 may be enabled based on the operation of the second stop switch 42 .

As a result, for example, even though the left stop switch 42, the middle stop switch 42, and the right stop switch 42 are operated in this order, when the middle stop switch 42 is operated, deterioration of the stop switch 42 or the like causes the left stop switch Since the operation of 42 is still accepted, it is possible to prevent a situation in which it is determined that the right stop switch 42 has been operated second.

In particular, in the AT machine, when the stop operation is performed in the order of the left stop switch 42, the middle stop switch 42, and the right stop switch 42, although the middle stop switch 42 was operated second, the right stop switch 42 was operated second. If it is determined that the stop switch 42 has been operated, it will result in an error in the pressing order, which is disadvantageous to the player. By making it possible to accept the operation of the stop switch 42 of the other stop switch 42 and to execute the stop control of the corresponding reel 31 based on the operation of the other stop switch 42, it is possible to make a mistake in the pressing order during AT It is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation.

It should be noted that even in the case where the stop control of the reel 31 based on the operation of the second stop switch 42 can be executed under the condition that the operation of the first stop switch 42 is accepted as in this modification. , the stop control of the reel 31 based on the operation of the stop switch 42 may be executed regardless of whether the signal of the setting key switch 152 is ON/OFF. Further, when the signal of the setting key switch 152 is ON, the stop control of the reels 31 based on the operation of the stop switch 42 may not be executed.

(3) In the above embodiment, when stopping the reel 31 and the motor 32 (stepping motor), first, the two-phase excitation output is performed, a weak brake is applied, and then the two-phase excitation output is changed to the four-phase excitation output. to apply a strong brake, but this is not the only option.
When stopping the reel 31 and the motor 32, for example, a 1-phase excitation output, a 2-phase excitation output, a 3-phase excitation output, or a 4-phase excitation output may be performed. good too.
(4) The first to thirty-fourth embodiments and the various modifications shown in the first to thirty-fourth embodiments are not limited to being carried out independently, but can be carried out in combination as appropriate.

<35th embodiment>
The thirty-fifth embodiment stores information for determining which stop switch 42 the stop control of the reel 31 corresponding to can be executed when the operations of a plurality of stop switches 42 are simultaneously accepted. A stop switch reception table (TBL_STOP_BTN) (FIG. 259) is provided.

Then, under the condition that the plurality of reels 31 are rotating at a constant speed, the operation of the first (any one) stop switch 42 and the operation of the second (other one different from the first) stop switch 42 When the operation is accepted at the same time, the stop control of the reel 31 corresponding to the first stop switch 42 can be executed based on the information acquired using the stop switch acceptance table (TBL_STOP_BTN).

Also, the reel 31 corresponding to the first (any one) stop switch 42 is stopped, and the reel 31 corresponding to the second (other one different from the first) stop switch 42 rotates at a constant speed. In this situation, if the operation of the first stop switch 42 and the operation of the second stop switch 42 are accepted at the same time, based on the information acquired using the stop switch acceptance table (TBL_STOP_BTN), Stop control of the reel 31 corresponding to the second stop switch 42 can be executed.

The symbol arrangement of the reels 31, the activated lines, the type of combination, the symbol combination of the combination, the number of payouts, the condition device, the winning combination, the RT, and the main game state are the same as in the twenty-third embodiment.
The thirty-fifth embodiment also has a reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP) at the address "F0AD(H)" of the RWM 53, as in the twenty-fifth embodiment shown in FIG.
The reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP) is a storage area for storing data indicating whether or not the operation (stop operation) of the stop switch 42 corresponding to each reel 31 has been accepted.
The contents of each bit are the same as in FIG. 173 of the twenty-fifth embodiment.

Each time a game is started, the reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP) is set to the initial value "00000111 (B)".
When the operation of the first (left) stop switch 42 is accepted, the D0 bit of the reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP) is set to "0". Similarly, when the operation of the second (middle) stop switch 42 is accepted, the D1 bit is set to "0", and when the operation of the third (right) stop switch 42 is accepted, the D2 bit is set to "0". set.

FIG. 259 is a diagram showing a stop switch reception table (TBL_STOP_BTN).
The data stored in the stop switch reception table (TBL_STOP_BTN) indicates which stop switch 42 can be controlled to stop the reel 31 when the operations of a plurality of stop switches 42 are simultaneously received. It is used when making decisions.
259, "00000001 (B)" is data indicating that the first (left) reel 31 is to be stopped, and "00000010 (B)" is data indicating that the second (middle) reel 31 is stopped. This is data indicating that the stop control is to be executed.

Next, control processing in the thirty-fifth embodiment will be described using a flowchart.
FIG. 260 is a flow chart showing reel stop acceptance check in the thirty-fifth embodiment. In the thirty-fifth embodiment, instead of the reel stop acceptance check in step S752 in FIG. 139, the reel stop acceptance check in step S1460 in FIG. 260 is executed.
In step S1461, the main control board 50 acquires the data stored in the reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP) at the address "F0AD(H)" in FIG. 173, and stores it in the B register. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S1462.

Proceeding to step S1462, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the operation of the stop switch 42 corresponding to the spinning reel 31 has been accepted.
Specifically, first, the data stored in the input port rise data A (_PT_IN_A_UP) at the address "F017(H)" in FIG. 133 is stored in the A register.
Next, a logical product (AND) operation is performed on the A register value and the B register value, and the result is stored in the A register. That is, the data stored in the input port rise data A (_PT_IN_A_UP) and the data stored in the reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP) are ANDed, and the result is stored in the A register.

When the result of the AND operation is not "0" (the zero flag is "1"), it is determined that the operation of the stop switch 42 corresponding to the rotating reel 31 has been accepted, and "Yes" in step S1462. Therefore, the process proceeds to the next step S1463.
On the other hand, when the result of the AND operation is "0" (the zero flag is "1"), it is determined that the operation of the stop switch 42 corresponding to the rotating reel 31 is not accepted, and step The result of S1462 is "No", and the processing according to this flowchart is terminated.
Proceeding to step S1463, the main control board 50 sets the stop switch reception table (TBL_STOP_BTN). Specifically, "1100 (H)" (reference address) obtained by subtracting "1" from the head address "1101 (H)" of the stop switch reception table (TBL_STOP_BTN) is set in the HL register. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S1464.

Proceeding to step S1464, the main control board 50 sets the designated address data. Here, the HL register value (“1100 (H)”) at the time of proceeding to step S1464 is used as the reference address, and the A register value is used as the offset value. An address obtained by adding an offset value to the reference address is used as the designated address. Then, in step S1464, first, the A register value (offset value) is added to the HL register value (reference address), and the result (specified address) is stored in the HL register. Next, the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value (specified address) is acquired and stored in the A register. The A register value at this time indicates the reel 31 to be stopped. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S1465.

Proceeding to step S1465, the main control board 50 executes processing for stop acceptance. Here, the A register value at the time of proceeding to step S1465 indicates the reel 31 to be stopped. Then, in step S1465, for the reel 31 indicated by the A register value, the stop position of the reel 31 is determined based on the combination lottery result and the position of the reel 31 at the moment when the operation of the corresponding stop switch 42 is accepted. , the symbol number corresponding to the determined stop position is stored in the reel symbol number (for stop position). Then, the process proceeds to the next step S1466. Furthermore, the stop symbol data for judging the symbol combination to stop on the activated line is updated.

More specifically, in the processing at the time of stop acceptance in step S1465 of FIG. 260, processing corresponding to steps S1022 to S1024 in FIG. 194 of the twenty-fifth embodiment is executed. That is, for the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 determined to be ON in step S1462, the result of the combination lottery of the current game and the operation of the stop switch 42 are accepted by the processing corresponding to steps S1022 to S1023 in FIG. The stop position of the reel 31 is determined based on the instantaneous position of the reel 31, and the pattern number corresponding to the determined stop position is stored in the reel pattern number (for stop position). Furthermore, by processing corresponding to the stop symbol set (M_STOPPIC_SET) in step S1024 of FIG. 194, the stop symbol data (_WK_STOP_PIC1-9) for determining the symbol combination to stop on the activated line is updated.

It should be noted that the processing of step S1465 (processing corresponding to steps S1022 to S1024 in FIG. 194 of the twenty-fifth embodiment) is performed by the interrupt processing executed after the reel design number (for passing position) and reel design number (for stop position) are equal to each other, the four-phase excitation output for stopping the motor 32 of the reel 31 is started.
When the reel symbol number (for passing position) and the reel symbol number (for stop position) have the same value, and the step number of one symbol on the reel 13 has reached a predetermined value (for example, "3"). , the four-phase excitation output for stopping the motor 32 of the reel 31 may be started.
Proceeding to step S1466, the main control board 50 updates the reel stop flag. Specifically, the bit of the reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP) corresponding to the reel 31 indicated by the A register value is updated (rewritten) to "0". Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

Here, it is assumed that all reels 31 are rotating at a constant speed and that all stop switches 42 are ready to be operated. At this time, the reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP) is "00000111 (B)".
Under such circumstances, it is assumed that the operations of the first (left) stop switch 42 and the second (middle) stop switch 42 are accepted at the same time.

Here, both the D0 bit and the D1 bit of the input port level data A (_PT_IN_A_LV) (FIG. 133) at the time of the previous interrupt processing are "0", and the input port level data A (_PT_IN_A_LV) at the time of the current interrupt processing is "1", "1" is stored in both D0 and D1 bits of input port rising data A (_PT_IN_A_UP). Accordingly, it is determined that the two operations of the first stop switch 42 and the second stop switch 42 have been accepted at the same time.
In this case, since the input port level data A (_PT_IN_A_LV) is "00000011 (B)", in step S1462, the A register value (input port rise data A (_PT_IN_A_UP)) and the B register value (reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP) )), the result is "00000011 (B)".

Furthermore, when this "00000011 (B)" is added as an offset value to the reference address ("1100 (H)"), the result (specified address) becomes "1103 (H)".
The data corresponding to the address "1103(H)" in the stop switch reception table (TBL_STOP_BTN) is "00000001(B)" as shown in FIG. As described above, this "00000001(B)" is data indicating that the stop control of the first (left) reel 31 is to be executed. be done.

In this way, when the operations of the first stop switch 42 and the second stop switch 42 are accepted simultaneously under the condition that all the reels 31 are rotating at a constant speed, the stop switch acceptance table (TBL_STOP_BTN) is used. The stop control of the first reel 31 corresponding to the first stop switch 42 is executed based on the information acquired by the first stop switch 42 .

Also, the first reel (left reel 31) stops, the second (middle) reel 31 and the third (right) reel 31 rotate at a constant speed, the second (middle) stop switch 42 and the third (right) reel 31 rotate at a constant speed. Assume that the operation of the stop switch 42 is acceptable. At this time, the reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP) is "00000110 (B)".

Assume that the operations of the first stop switch 42 and the second stop switch 42 are simultaneously accepted under such circumstances. In this case, since the input port rise data A (_PT_IN_A_UP) is "00000011 (B)", in step S1462, the A register value (input port rise data A (_PT_IN_A_UP)) and the B register value (reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP) )), the result is "00000010(B)".
Furthermore, when this "00000010 (B)" is added as an offset value to the reference address ("1100 (H)"), the result (designated address) becomes "1102 (H)".

The data corresponding to the address "1102(H)" in the stop switch reception table (TBL_STOP_BTN) is "00000010(B)" as shown in FIG. As described above, this "00000010(B)" is data indicating that the stop control of the second reel 31 is to be executed.
In this manner, under the condition that the first reel 31 is stopped and the second reel 31 and the third reel 31 are rotating at a constant speed, the operations of the first stop switch 42 and the second stop switch 42 are simultaneously accepted. When the second reel 31 corresponding to the second stop switch 42 is stopped, control is executed based on the information acquired using the stop switch reception table (TBL_STOP_BTN).

Also, assume that all the reels 31 are rotating at a constant speed and that the operations of the first stop switch 42 and the third stop switch 42 are simultaneously accepted in a state where the operations of all the stop switches 42 are acceptable.
In this case, the reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP) is "00000111 (B)" and the input port rising data A (_PT_IN_A_UP) is "00000101 (B)". When the rising data A (_PT_IN_A_UP)) and the B register value (reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP)) are ANDed, the result is "00000101 (B)".

Furthermore, when this "00000101 (B)" is added as an offset value to the reference address ("1100 (H)"), the result (designated address) becomes "1105 (H)".
The data corresponding to the address "1105 (H)" in the stop switch reception table (TBL_STOP_BTN) is "00000001 (B)" as shown in FIG. , the stop control of the first reel 31 is executed in step S1465.

Further, it is assumed that the operations of the second stop switch 42 and the third stop switch 42 are simultaneously accepted in a state where all the reels 31 are rotating at a constant speed and the operations of all the stop switches 42 are acceptable.
In this case, the reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP) is "00000111 (B)" and the input port rising data A (_PT_IN_A_UP) is "00000110 (B)". When the rising data A (_PT_IN_A_UP)) and the B register value (reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP)) are ANDed, the result is "00000110(B)".

Furthermore, when this "00000110 (B)" is added as an offset value to the reference address ("1100 (H)"), the result (designated address) becomes "1106 (H)".
The data corresponding to the address "1106 (H)" in the stop switch reception table (TBL_STOP_BTN) is "00000010 (B)" as shown in FIG. , the stop control of the second reel 31 is executed in step S1465.

Further, it is assumed that all the reels 31 are rotating at a constant speed and the operations of all the stop switches 42 are accepted at the same time in a state where the operations of all the stop switches 42 are acceptable.
In this case, the reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP) is "00000111 (B)" and the input port rising data A (_PT_IN_A_UP) is also "00000111 (B)". When the rising data A (_PT_IN_A_UP)) and the B register value (reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP)) are ANDed, the result is "00000111 (B)".

Furthermore, when this "00000111 (B)" is added as an offset value to the reference address ("1100 (H)"), the result (designated address) becomes "1107 (H)".
The data corresponding to the address "1107 (H)" in the stop switch reception table (TBL_STOP_BTN) is "00000001 (B)" as shown in FIG. , the stop control of the first reel 31 is executed in step S1465.

Further, in a state where the first reel is stopped, the second reel 31 and the third reel 31 rotate at a constant speed, and the operations of the second stop switch 42 and the third stop switch 42 are acceptable, the first stop switch 42 and the operation of the third stop switch 42 are accepted at the same time.
In this case, the reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP) is "00000110 (B)" and the input port rising data A (_PT_IN_A_UP) is "00000101 (B)". When the rising data A (_PT_IN_A_UP)) and the B register value (reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP)) are ANDed, the result is "00000100(B)".

Furthermore, when this "00000100(B)" is added as an offset value to the reference address ("1100(H)"), the result (specified address) becomes "1104(H)".
The data corresponding to the address "1104 (H)" in the stop switch reception table (TBL_STOP_BTN) is "00000100 (B)" as shown in FIG. , the process proceeds to step S1465 to execute the stop control of the third reel 31 .

Further, in a state where the first reel is stopped, the second reel 31 and the third reel 31 rotate at a constant speed, and the second stop switch 42 and the third stop switch 42 can be operated, the second stop switch 42 and the operation of the third stop switch 42 are accepted at the same time.
In this case, the reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP) is "00000110 (B)" and the input port rising data A (_PT_IN_A_UP) is also "00000110 (B)". When the rising data A (_PT_IN_A_UP)) and the B register value (reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP)) are ANDed, the result is "00000110(B)".

Furthermore, when this "00000110 (B)" is added as an offset value to the reference address ("1100 (H)"), the result (designated address) becomes "1106 (H)".
The data corresponding to the address "1106 (H)" in the stop switch reception table (TBL_STOP_BTN) is "00000010 (B)" as shown in FIG. , the stop control of the second reel 31 is executed in step S1465.

Here, the reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP) is "00000000 (B)", "00000001 (B)", "00000010 (B)", "00000100 (B)", "00000011 (B)", "00000101 (B)" )”, “00000110(B)”, and “00000111(B)”.
Also, the input port rising data A (_PT_IN_A_UP) is also "00000000 (B)", "00000001 (B)", "00000010 (B)", "00000100 (B)", when focusing only on the signals of the three stop switches 42. )”, “00000011(B)”, “00000101(B)”, “00000110(B)”, and “00000111(B)”.

Therefore, the AND operation result of the input port rise data A (_PT_IN_A_UP) and the reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP) is also "00000000 (B)", "00000001 (B)", and "00000010 (B)". , "00000100(B)", "00000011(B)", "00000101(B)", "00000110(B)", and "00000111(B)".

When the result of the logical product operation is "00000000 (B)", the result is "No" in step S1462, and the processing after step S1463 does not proceed. The offset value to be added is one of "1(D)" to "7(D)".
Therefore, regardless of the driving state of each reel 31 and the combination of the plurality of stop switches 42 simultaneously operated, based on the information acquired using the stop switch reception table (TBL_STOP_BTN), Any one of the reels 31 can be appropriately controlled to stop.

<Thirty-sixth embodiment>
In the thirty-sixth embodiment, the stop switch 42 corresponding to the first (any one) reel 31 is operated at the first timing, and then at the second timing before the first reel 31 stops. When the stop switch 42 corresponding to the second (different from the first) reel 31 is operated, the first reel 31 may stop after the second reel 31 stops. .

Also, the symbol arrangement of the reels 31, the activated lines, the type of combination, the symbol combination of the combination, the number of payouts, the condition device, the winning combination, the RT, and the main game state are the same as in the twenty-third embodiment.
As a result of the first reel 31 stopping after the second reel 31 stops, the symbols forming a specific symbol combination (for example, "blue BAR" - "blue BAR" - "blue BAR") are aligned. In the case of stop display, a predetermined effect (for example, tenpai sound) can be output in accordance with the timing at which the first reel 31 stops.

261 to 263 are schematic diagrams showing the relationship between the order of operation of the stop switch 42, the order of stopping the reels 31, the stop display of symbols, and the output of tenpai sound in the thirty-sixth embodiment.
In the present embodiment, after the operation of one of the stop switches 42 is accepted, before a predetermined period of four-phase excitation output to the motor 32 of the reel 31 corresponding to that stop switch 42 elapses (for example, four-phase excitation 4-phase excitation output to the motor 32 of the reel 31 corresponding to the other stop switch 42 by accepting the operation of the other stop switch 42 at the timing when the output is being performed or the timing before the 4-phase excitation output is performed. configured to run.
Therefore, in the present embodiment, the operation order of the stop switches 42 and the stop order of the reels 31 may be interchanged.

For example, the winning number "25" is won by the lottery means 61, the 1BB condition device corresponding to the winning number "25" is activated, and the "blue BAR" - "blue BAR" - "blue BAR" corresponding to 1BB is activated. In a game in which the symbol combination can be stopped and displayed on the activated line, as shown in FIGS. Assume that these are quickly operated in order of the middle stop switch 42 . Further, it is assumed that the operation of the left stop switch 42 is accepted first, and then the operation of the middle stop switch 42 is accepted before the left reel 31 stops. At this time, the number of moving symbols (the number of sliding frames) from when the operation of the left stop switch 42 is accepted until the left reel 31 stops is set to "4", and after the operation of the middle stop switch 42 is accepted, the middle Assume that the number of moving symbols until the reel 31 stops is set to "0". In such a case, the middle reel 31 may stop first and then the left reel 31 may stop.

Furthermore, when the middle reel 31 stops first, as shown in FIG. 261(b), "BLUE BAR" is stop-displayed in the middle stage, and after that, when the left reel 31 stops, FIG. Assume that "Blue BAR" is stopped and displayed in the upper row as shown in FIG. That is, it is assumed that the symbols constituting the symbol combination of "blue BAR"--"blue BAR"--"blue BAR" are stopped and displayed on a right-down straight valid line.

Here, when the two reels 31 are stopped and the remaining one reel 31 is rotating, the symbols constituting the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination are stopped and displayed on the activated line, and the remaining one reel 31 is displayed. When the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is stopped and the symbols forming the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination are stopped and displayed on the active line, the situation in which the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination is stopped and displayed is called "tenpai". . That is, when the two reels 31 are stopped, a part of the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is stop-displayed on the active line, which is called tenpai.
In the case where four reels 31 are provided, when the three reels 31 are stopped, part of the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is stop-displayed on the activated line, which is called tenpai. In other words, when there are N reels 31, when the N-1 reels 31 are stopped, part of the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is stop-displayed on the activated line, which is called tenpai.

As a result of the left reel 31 stopping after the middle reel 31 stops, as shown in FIG. When the stop display is made on the downward effective line, the timing of stopping the left reel 31, not the timing of stopping the middle reel 31, is used during the tenpai (particularly, the number of symbols constituting the symbol combination corresponding to the special role). Outputs a tenpai sound, which is a sound effect peculiar to tenpai). That is, the tenpai sound is output based on the order in which the reels 31 are stopped, not the order in which the stop switches 42 are operated.

For example, the winning number "25" is won by the lottery means 61, the 1BB condition device corresponding to the winning number "25" is activated, and the "blue BAR" - "blue BAR" - "blue BAR" corresponding to 1BB is activated. In a game in which symbol combination can be stopped and displayed on the effective line, it is assumed that "blue bar" is set to be stopped and displayed on the upper stage of the left reel 31 only when the left stop switch 42 is first operated. .
In this case, when the left reel 31 stops for the first time and the "blue BAR" is stop-displayed on the upper stage of the left reel 31, the player can "blue BAR" - "blue BAR" - "blue BAR". It can be recognized that the conditional device corresponding to the symbol combination is activated.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when the left reel 31 stops for the first time, and the "blue BAR" is stop-displayed on the upper stage of the left reel 31, "blue BAR" - "blue BAR" - "blue BAR" is displayed. A confirmation effect (for example, an effect of outputting a sound such as “Ichikakuu~” or “Congratulations”) indicating that the conditional device corresponding to the symbol combination is operating is executed.
However, in a game in which the condition device corresponding to the symbol combination of "blue BAR"-"blue BAR"-"blue BAR" is activated, the left stop switch 42 is activated as shown in FIGS. , the middle stop switch 42 is operated in this order, but when the middle reel 31 and the left reel 31 are stopped in that order, even if the "blue bar" is stopped and displayed on the upper stage of the left reel 31, the final effect is not performed. don't run

In addition, in this embodiment, when the symbols forming a specific symbol combination are stopped and displayed on a linear invalid line, the same effect sound as during tenpai is output.
For example, in a game in which winning number "2" is won by the combination lottery means 61, the replay B condition device corresponding to the winning number "2" is activated, and either replay 01 or 02 can be won. As shown in (a) to (c), when the three reels 31 are rotating at a constant speed, it is assumed that the left stop switch 42 and the middle stop switch 42 are quickly operated in this order. Then, the left stop switch 42 is operated at the first timing (the moving pattern number of the left reel 31 is set to "4"), and the middle stop switch 42 is operated at the second timing (the movement of the middle reel 31 is The number of symbols is set to "1").

Also, when the middle reel 31 stops first, as shown in FIG. 262(b), "REPLAY" is stop-displayed in the middle row, and "BLUE BAR" is stop-displayed in the bottom row, and then the left reel. 31 is stopped, as shown in FIG. 262(c), "Replay" is stop-displayed in the upper row and "Blue BAR" is stop-displayed in the lower row. That is, it is assumed that the symbols constituting the symbol combination of "blue BAR"--"blue BAR"--"blue BAR" are stop-displayed on the straight invalid line in the lower stage. In such a case, the sound effect similar to that during tenpai is output according to the timing at which the left reel 31 stops, not at the timing at which the middle reel 31 stops.

For example, in a game in which winning number "2" is won by the combination lottery means 61, the replay B condition device corresponding to the winning number "2" is activated, and either replay 01 or 02 can be won. As shown in (a) to (d), when the three reels 31 are rotating at a constant speed, the left stop switch 42, the middle stop switch 42, and the right stop switch 42 are quickly operated in this order. Suppose Then, the left stop switch 42 is operated at the first timing (the moving symbol number of the left reel 31 is set to "4"), and the middle stop switch 42 is operated at the second timing (the moving symbol of the middle reel 31 is number is set to "1"), and the right stop switch 42 is operated at the third timing (the moving symbol number of the right reel 31 is set to "0"). In such a case, the middle reel 31 may stop first, the right reel 31 may stop second, and the left reel 31 may stop last.

Furthermore, when the middle reel 31 stops for the first time, as shown in FIG. When the reel 31 stops, as shown in FIG. 263(c), "REPLAY" is stopped and displayed in the lower row, and "BLUE BAR" is stopped and displayed in the middle row, and finally when the left reel 31 stops. 263(d), "Replay" is stop-displayed in the upper row and "Blue BAR" is stop-displayed in the lower row.

In the example shown in FIGS. 263(a) to 263(d), "blue BAR" is stop-displayed at the bottom of the left reel 31 and at the bottom of the middle reel 31. 31, the middle reel 31, and the right reel 31 are stopped in this order, when the middle reel 31 is stopped, the same effect sound as in tenpai is outputted.
However, unlike the operation order of the stop switch 42, when the reels 31 stop in the order of the middle reel 31, the right reel 31, and the left reel 31, when the right reel 31 stops second, "blue BAR" - "blue BAR"''-Since the symbols constituting the symbol combination of ``Blue BAR'' are not stop-displayed on the straight invalid line, the same effect sound as in Tenpai is not output.

FIG. 264 is a flowchart showing main processing (M_MAIN) in the thirty-sixth embodiment, and is a flowchart corresponding to FIG. 139 of the twenty-third embodiment.
In the flowchart of the thirty-sixth embodiment shown in FIG. 264, the step numbers different from those in FIG. 139 are underlined, and the same steps as in FIG. 139 are given the same step numbers.

Also, in the main processing (M_MAIN) of the thirty-sixth embodiment, the processing of steps S295 to S300 of FIG. 139 is executed, but the processing of steps S295 to S300 is omitted in FIG.
Differences from FIG. 139 will be mainly described below.

As shown in FIG. 264, in the thirty-sixth embodiment, once the start switch acceptance process (M_START_CTL) in step S751 is executed, the process proceeds to step S1441.
Proceeding to step S1441, the main control board 50 determines whether or not a stop reception has been received. That is, it is determined whether or not the operation of any one of the first stop switch 42 to the third stop switch 42 has been accepted.

Specifically, the main control board 50 controls the D0 bit (left stop switch signal), D1 bit (middle stop switch signal), D2 Determine if any of the bits (right stop switch signal) are on. Here, when it is determined that the operation of any of the stop switches 42 has been accepted, the process proceeds to the next step S1442. On the other hand, when it is determined that the operation of any stop switch 42 has not been accepted, steps S1442 and S1443 are skipped and the process proceeds to step S1444.

Proceeding to step S1442, the main control board 50 executes the processing for stop acceptance. In this process, the stop position of the reel 31 is determined based on the combination lottery result and the position of the reel 31 at the moment when the operation of the stop switch 42 is accepted, and the symbol number corresponding to the determined stop position is displayed on the reel. Set the pattern number (for the stop position) (Figs. 135 to 137). Furthermore, the stop symbol data for judging the symbol combination to stop on the activated line is updated.

More specifically, in the processing at the time of stop acceptance in step S1442 of FIG. 264, processing corresponding to steps S1022 to S1024 in FIG. 194 of the twenty-fifth embodiment is executed. That is, for the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 determined to be ON in step S1441, the result of the combination lottery of the current game and the operation of the stop switch 42 are accepted by the processing corresponding to steps S1022 to S1023 in FIG. The stop position of the reel 31 is determined based on the instantaneous position of the reel 31, and the pattern number corresponding to the determined stop position is stored in the reel pattern number (for stop position). Furthermore, by processing corresponding to the stop symbol set (M_STOPPIC_SET) in step S1024 of FIG. 194, the stop symbol data (_WK_STOP_PIC1-9) for determining the symbol combination to stop on the activated line is updated.

It should be noted that the interrupt processing executed after the processing of step S1442 (processing corresponding to steps S1022 to S1024 in FIG. 194) makes the reel design number (for passing position) and the reel design number (for stop position) the same value. When it is determined that it has, the four-phase excitation output for stopping the motor 32 of the reel 31 is started.
Also, the reel pattern number (for passing position) and the reel pattern number (for stop position) are the same value, and the step number of one pattern on the reel 13 is a predetermined value (for example, "3"). At times, a 4-phase excitation output may be initiated to stop the motor 32 of the reel 31 .

After executing the stop acceptance process in step S1442, the process proceeds to step S1443, and the main control board 50 sets a stop acceptance command indicating that the operation of the stop switch 42 has been accepted in the command buffer.
Here, the stop acceptance command includes, for example, information indicating which stop switch 42 operation has been accepted, and information indicating the position of the reel 31 at the moment the operation of the stop switch 42 is accepted. , information indicating which stop switch 42 has been operated, and information for determining the stop position of the reel 31 at which the operation of the stop switch 42 has been accepted.
Note that the stop acceptance command set in the command buffer is transmitted to the sub-control board 80 by interrupt processing executed after the processing of step S1442.

After executing the stop acceptance command set process in step S1443, the process proceeds to step S1444, and the main control board 50 determines whether or not the four-phase excitation output for stopping the motor 32 of the reel 31 has started. . Here, when it is determined that the four-phase excitation output has started for the motor 32 of any reel 31, the process proceeds to the next step S1445. On the other hand, when it is determined that the four-phase excitation output has not started for the motors 32 of any of the reels 31, step S1445 is skipped and the process proceeds to step S1446.

Proceeding to step S1445, the main control board 50 sets in the command buffer a stop command indicating that the four-phase excitation output for stopping the motor 32 of the reel 31 has started.
Here, the stop command includes information indicating which motor 32 of which reel 31 has started the four-phase excitation output.
Note that the stop command set in the command buffer is transmitted to the sub-control board 80 by interrupt processing executed after the processing of step S1445.

Proceeding to step S1446, the main control board 50 determines whether or not all the reels 31 have stopped.
When it is determined in step S1446 that at least one reel 31 has not stopped, the process returns to step S1441. In this case, the processing after step S1441 is repeated.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1446 that all the reels 31 have stopped, the process advances to display determination in step S291.

Here, the lottery for the winning number is performed by the lottery lottery means 61, and when the condition device corresponding to the determined winning number is activated, the main control board 50 sends the condition device command corresponding to the activated condition device to the sub control board 80. Send to Thereby, the sub-control board 80 can determine which condition device has been activated.
In the example shown in FIGS. 261(a) to (c), the main control board 50 first transmits a stop acceptance command to the sub control board 80 to indicate that the operation of the left stop switch 42 has been accepted. Next, a stop acceptance command indicating that the operation of the middle stop switch 42 has been accepted is transmitted, then a stop command indicating that the middle reel 31 is stopped is transmitted, and finally the left reel 31 is stopped. A stop command is sent indicating that

Furthermore, when receiving a stop acceptance command from the main control board 50, the sub-control board 80 can determine which reel 31 stops at which position based on the condition device command and the stop acceptance command. . As a result, it is determined, for example, that the ``blue BAR'' on the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed in the upper row, or that the symbols constituting the ``blue BAR''-``blue BAR''-``blue BAR'' symbol combination are increasing. can do.

Further, when receiving a stop command from the main control board 50, the sub-control board 80 can determine the stop order and stop timing of each reel 31. FIG.
Then, the sub-control board 80 outputs tenpai sound based on the stop position of each reel 31 determined from the condition device command and the stop acceptance command, and the stop order and stop timing of each reel 31 determined from the stop command. , can output the same sound effects as in Tenpai.

In the example shown in FIGS. 261(a) to (c), the sub-control board 80 judges the stop timing of the left reel 31 based on the stop command indicating that the left reel 31 is to stop. At the stop timing, output a tenpai sound.
As a result, even if the order of operation of the stop switch 42 and the order of stopping the reels 31 are different, it is possible to output a tenpai sound or an effect sound similar to that of tenpai at an appropriate timing that does not make the player feel uncomfortable.

In the example shown in FIGS. 263(a) to (c), first, a stop acceptance command indicating that the operation of the left stop switch 42 has been accepted is transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub control board 80. Next, a stop acceptance command indicating that the operation of the middle stop switch 42 has been accepted is transmitted, and then a stop acceptance command indicating that the operation of the right stop switch 42 has been accepted is transmitted. Next, a stop command indicating that the middle reel 31 stops is transmitted, then a stop command indicating that the right reel 31 stops is transmitted, and finally a stop command indicating that the left reel 31 stops is transmitted. is sent.

Further, the sub-control board 80 determines that the "blue bar" of the right reel 31 is stop-displayed in the middle stage based on the stop acceptance command indicating that the operation of the right stop switch 42 has been accepted, and then Based on the stop command indicating that the reel 31 will stop, it is determined that the right reel 31 will stop second.
Then, when the right reel 31 stops, the sub-control board 80 judges that two "blue bars" do not line up on a straight invalid line, and does not output the same effect sound as during tenpai. can be done.

Here, in the examples shown in FIGS. 263(a) to (d), “BLUE BAR” is stop-displayed on the lower stage of the left reel 31 and the lower stage of the middle reel 31. FIG.
Therefore, if the reels 31 are stopped in the order of the left reel 31, the middle reel 31, and the right reel 31, which is the same order as the operation order of the stop switch 42, when the middle reel 31 stops, the "blue BAR" is displayed in the lower row. It will be stopped and displayed on a straight invalid line.
However, in the example shown in FIGS. 263(a) to (d), the middle reel 31 stops first, so outputting the same effect sound as during tenpai at this time would make the player feel uncomfortable.

In addition, in the examples shown in FIGS. 263(a) to (d), the right reel 31 is the second to stop, and at this point it is determined that two "blue BARs" do not line up on a straight invalid line. Therefore, outputting the same effect sound as in Tenpai will give the player a sense of incompatibility.
Then, in this embodiment, the sub-control board 80 determines that the reels 31 stop in the order of the middle reel 31, the right reel 31, and the left reel 31 based on the stop command for each reel 31, and the middle reel 31 comes first. , and when the right reel 31 stops second, it is determined that two "blue BARs" are not aligned on the straight invalid line, and the same effect sound as during tenpai is not output. , it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

Further, as described in the first embodiment, in the slot machine 10 in which the main control board 50 side controls and manages the AT, the main control board 50 sends the winning numbers and condition device commands to the sub control board 80. Sends the performance group number without sending.
In this case, the stop position of the reel 31 cannot be determined from the performance group number and the information indicating the position of the reel 31 at the moment when the operation of the stop switch 42 is accepted.

Therefore, in the slot machine 10 that controls and manages the AT on the main control board 50 side, the main control board 50 sends information indicating which stop switch 42 operation has been accepted to the sub control board 80 and the stop switch 42 operation. A stop acceptance command including information for determining the stop position of the reel 31 for which the operation of the switch 42 is accepted is transmitted.
Then, the sub-control board 80 can determine which reel 31 stops at which position based on the information for determining the stop position of the reels 31 included in the received stop acceptance command. As a result, for example, it is determined that the "blue BAR" on the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed in the upper row, or that the symbols forming the symbol combination of "blue BAR" - "blue BAR" - "blue BAR" are tense. can do.

Although the thirty-sixth embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the contents described above, and various modifications such as those described below are possible.
(1) In the above-described embodiment, the sub-control board 80 determines the stop order and stop timing of each reel 31 based on the stop command received from the main control board 50, and at appropriate timing the sound of the balance and the timing of the balance. Outputs the same sound effect.

However, not limited to this, for example, based on the condition device command and the stop acceptance command received from the main control board 50, the stop position, stop order, and stop timing of each reel 31 may be determined. Then, based on the stop position, stop order, and stop timing of each reel 31 determined from the condition device command and the stop acceptance command, a tenpai sound or a sound effect similar to the tenpai may be output.
In this case, the stop command for each reel 31 may not be transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub control board 80 .

(2) In the above embodiment, when the reel 31 and the motor 32 are stopped, the motor 32 (stepping motor) is supplied with a four-phase excitation output, but the present invention is not limited to this.
When stopping the reel 31 and the motor 32, for example, one-phase excitation output, two-phase excitation output, or three-phase excitation output may be performed. Also, first, 2-phase excitation output is performed and a weak brake is applied, then the 2-phase excitation output is switched to a 4-phase excitation output, and a strong brake is applied to stop the rotation of the reel 31 and the motor 32. You can let it run.

(3) Although three reels 31 are provided in the twenty-ninth to thirty-sixth embodiments, the number of reels 31 is not limited to three, and may be, for example, four or more.
(4) In the twenty-ninth to thirty-sixth embodiments, the slot machine 10 is used as an example of a gaming machine, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, parrots that use game balls as game media, sealed game machines (medal-less game machines) that use electronic information (electronic medals) instead of physical (tangible) medals, and casino machines. The invention can be applied.
(5) The first to thirty-sixth embodiments and the various modifications shown in the first to thirty-sixth embodiments are not limited to being carried out independently, but can be carried out in combination as appropriate.

<Thirty-seventh embodiment>
Next, a thirty-seventh embodiment will be described.
The thirty-seventh embodiment is a slot machine designed to avoid the winning of the special combination (1BB), which is carried over, according to the pressing order.
In the thirty-seventh embodiment, the meanings of "RT", "non-RT", "winning number", and "condition device number ("accessory condition device number" and "winning and replay condition device number") are the same as in the twenty-third embodiment. is similar to
In addition, as in the other embodiments, the operation of the instruction function and the suggestion of the pushing order can be performed only during the advantageous section, and the operation of the instruction function and the suggestion of the pushing order can be performed in the non-advantageous section (normal section). Unable to perform performance. Therefore, in the following, it is assumed that the operation of the instruction function and the performance suggesting the pressing order are performed in the advantageous section.
Furthermore, in the thirty-seventh embodiment, as in the twenty-third embodiment, a 1BB game (1BB operating state) and an RB game (RB operating state) are provided as special games (accessory product operating state). Strictly speaking, 1BB game (1BB operating state) and RB game (RB operating state) are not included in RT, but may be one of RT.
In addition, in the thirty-seventh embodiment and the embodiments described later, "when the role product is not activated" includes a state in which the prize has been won but has not yet been activated. For example, if 1BB has not been won or 1BB has been won and 1BB is inside, if 1BB is not being played, it is called "when 1BB is not activated", and if 1BB is being played, it is called "1BB". "when activated". The same is true for RB.

In addition, RB in the thirty-seventh embodiment is a combination that is drawn during a general game of 1BB game (meaning a game other than RB game in 1BB game), and RB is won during general game of 1BB game. When , RB wins, the general game is shifted to the RB game during the 1BB game. For this reason, RBs are also referred to as shifted RBs (SRBs).
In the thirty-seventh embodiment, as in the twenty-third embodiment, the lottery for the winning number is executed by the combination lottery means 61 . The winning numbers of the thirty-seventh embodiment include winning numbers "0" to "100"("0" corresponds to non-winning (so-called losing)), as shown in FIGS. 286 and 287, which will be described later.
Then, when the winning number is determined, a "condition device number" corresponding to the winning number is generated. For example, in FIG. 286, if winning number "4" is determined, accessory condition device number "1" (FIG. 275) and winning and replay condition device number "2" (FIG. 276) are generated.

FIG. 265 is a diagram showing the pattern arrangement of the reels 31 in the thirty-seventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 265, in the thirty-seventh embodiment, each reel 31 consists of 20 frames. In addition, in FIG. 265, the symbol numbers are also illustrated in the same manner as in FIG.
Further, in the thirty-seventh embodiment, the maximum number of moving symbols from the moment the stop switch 42 is operated until the reels 31 stop is set to "4".

Therefore, as in the twenty-third embodiment, for example, if four specific symbols are arranged at intervals of five symbols on one reel 31, the specific symbols are always placed on the effective line regardless of which position the stop switch 42 is operated. can be stopped at Specifically, on the left reel 31, “Replay” is arranged at Nos. 5, 10, 15, and 0. That is, the "replay" on the left reel 31 is arranged with 4 symbols at intervals of 5 symbols. Therefore, regarding the left reel 31, regardless of the timing at which the left stop switch 42 is operated, the "replay" can always be stopped on the activated line. In addition, such a symbol arrangement may be referred to as a ““PB=1” arrangement”. On the other hand, the case where such a symbol arrangement is not used may be referred to as "the 'PB≠1' arrangement".

Then, on the left reel 31, "Replay" and "Bell A" are each arranged at "PB=1".
In addition, on the middle reel 31, "Replay", "Bell A", and "Bell B" are each arranged at "PB=1".
Furthermore, on the right reel 31, "Replay", "Bell A", and "Bell B" are each arranged at "PB=1".
Furthermore, on the middle reel 31, No. 1 "Blank", No. 6 "Black BAR", No. 11 "Red 7", and No. 16 "Cherry" are placed at "PB=1" by adding these four symbols. be. Therefore, any one of "blank", "black BAR", "red 7" or "cherry" can be stopped on the effective line regardless of the timing at which the middle stop switch 42 is operated. The same applies to the right reel 31 as well.

Furthermore, on the middle reel 31, "Watermelon A" or "Watermelon B" is placed at "PB=1" by adding these two symbols.
Further, on the right reel 31, "blue BAR", "watermelon A", or "watermelon B" are placed at "PB=1" by adding up these three symbols.
Also, since the effective line in the thirty-seventh embodiment is the same as that in the twenty-third embodiment shown in FIG. 115 (one line of "upper left"-"middle middle"-"lower right"), illustration thereof is omitted.

FIGS. 266 to 273 are diagrams showing types of roles (such as roles corresponding to winning numbers drawn by the winning lottery means 61), symbol combinations, payout numbers, etc., in the thirty-seventh embodiment.
First, as shown in FIG. 266, the game state of the thirty-seventh embodiment includes when the role is not activated, when RB is not activated when 1BB is activated, and when RB is activated. The specified number is set to "3" in all cases.
In FIGS. 266 to 274, "three (1)" corresponds to when the accessory is not activated, and in the thirty-seventh embodiment, it corresponds to a game other than the 1BB game.

Also, "three cards (2)" corresponds to the time when RB is not activated while 1BB is in operation (during 1BB game). Furthermore, "three (3)" corresponds to 1BB operation (during 1BB game) and RB operation (during RB game).
For example, in FIG. 266, 1BB with winning number "001" is subject to a lottery when the specified number is 3 (1) (when the role is not activated), but the specified number is 3 (2) and the specified number is 3. In the case of (3), it means that the lottery is not applicable.

In FIG. 266, winning numbers “001” to “003” correspond to special winnings (accessories). In this embodiment, one type of 1BB and two types of RBs (RBA and RBB) are provided as special roles.
When 1BB is won and 1BB is won when the accessory is not activated, medals are not paid out in this game, but the next game is shifted to 1BB operation (1BB game) corresponding to a special game.
Also, during 1BB operation (1BB game), RB is drawn. When RB is won during 1BB operation and RB wins, medals are not paid out in this game, but from the next game, RB operation (RB game) during 1BB operation (1BB game) is performed.

In addition, the time when 1BB is in operation and RB is not in operation may be referred to as "general game of 1BB game". In the general game of the 1BB game, the state in which RB is not won is sometimes called 1BB operation and RB non-inside, and the state in which RB is won is called 1BB operation and RB inside.
In the case where the conditions for ending the RB operation are satisfied, when the conditions for ending the 1BB operation are satisfied, the 1BB operation is terminated and the game shifts to the time when the accessory is not activated (ordinary game). On the other hand, when the condition for ending the RB operation is satisfied but the condition for ending the 1BB operation is not satisfied, the operation shifts to the 1BB operation (and when the RB is not operated).

The combination number “004” shown in FIG. 266 to the combination number “149” shown in FIG. 269 all correspond to replay (replay combination). In the thirty-seventh embodiment, replays 01 to 15 are provided as types of replays. As shown in FIGS. 266 to 269, when the accessory is not activated (three cards (1)) and when RB is not activated when 1BB is activated (three cards (2)), all of replays 01 to 15 are drawn by lottery. Be eligible. On the other hand, when 1BB is in operation and RB is in operation (three cards (3)), no replay is drawn.
Also, in any replay, the symbol combination is set to "PB=1". For example, the symbol combination of replay 03 is "Cherry"-"Black BAR/Red 7/Blank/Cherry"-"Bell A", but "Cherry" on left reel 31 and "Bell A" on right reel 31 It is a "PB=1" arrangement. In addition, "black BAR/red 7/blank/cherry" on the middle reel 31 has an arrangement of "PB=1" in total of these four symbols.

Figures 270 to 273 show the tricks of the thirty-seventh embodiment. Small wins 001 to 118 are provided as small wins in the thirty-seventh embodiment.
For the small winning combination 001 to small winning combination 008, the payout number at the time of winning is set to 7, which is set to the maximum payout number among the small winning combinations. The small winning combination 001 to small winning combination 008 are so-called high bell combinations when winning the pressing order bell (described later).
In addition, the small winning combination 009 to small winning combination 117 are set to 1 in the number of coins to be paid out at the time of winning, and are so-called low-level bells and the like when winning the pressing order bell.
Furthermore, the small winning combination 118 is a special winning combination drawn only when 1BB is activated and when RB is activated, and the payout number at the time of winning is set to 1.

In each of the above-described winning combinations, there are winning combinations that are carried over to the next game and those that are not carried over, and these are the same as in the above-described other embodiments. 1BB and RB are hands that can be carried over to the next game or later, and small winnings and replays are hands that cannot be carried over to the next game or later.

FIG. 274 is a diagram showing pattern design combinations in the thirty-seventh embodiment. In the thirty-seventh embodiment, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the incorrect pressing order when the pressing order bell is won, there are cases where the above-described one-piece winning combination wins and cases where the winning combination does not win (dropped). have Then, when the combination is not won, one of the pattern symbol combinations shown in FIG. 274 is displayed. A pattern design combination is also called a spilled pattern. Although the details will be described later, the pattern symbol combination is set as one of the RT transition conditions.
In FIG. 274, the pattern symbol combination is not the role itself, but for convenience of explanation, the pattern symbol combination is also assigned a role number as the serial number of FIGS.

275 to 285 are diagrams showing condition device numbers, condition devices, winning combinations, and the like.
First, the combination lottery means 61 draws a winning number. Winning numbers include winning numbers "0" to "100" as shown in FIGS. 286 and 287, which will be described later. Then, for example, in FIG. 286, when the winning number "4" is won, the condition device "1BB" corresponding to the accessory condition device number "1" (FIG. 275) and the winning and replay condition device number "2" ( 276) is enabled.

FIG. 275 shows the accessory (particularly 1BB and RB in the thirty-seventh embodiment) condition device.
The 1BB condition device corresponding to the accessory condition device number "1" is the accessory condition device that becomes operable when the 1BB is won. When this 1BB condition device operates, 1BB, which is a winning combination, can win.
In addition, the remarks column in FIG. 275 shows the condition for terminating the operation of the accessory condition device. The 1BB condition device continues until the number of medals acquired exceeds 218, and when the number of medals acquired exceeds 218, the operation end condition of the 1BB condition device is satisfied, and the operation of the 1BB condition device is terminated.
Similarly, both the RBA conditional device and the RBB conditional device end upon 8 wins or 12 games played, or upon termination of the 1BB conditional device.

Figures 276-285 show the Winning and Replay Conditions device. Among the winning and replay condition device numbers, "1" to "19" are condition device numbers related to replay, and "20" to "98" are condition device numbers related to minor wins.
For example, replays 01 to 07 (7 kinds of replays) are included in the winning combination of the replay A condition device corresponding to the winning and replay condition device number "1". In this way, when one condition device includes a plurality of winning hands, when the condition device is activated, the symbol combinations corresponding to all winning hands may be stopped, or some (at least 1), the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination may be stopped.
In the present embodiment, even if multiple types of replays are won, only one of the replays wins. Similarly, as will be described later, there are cases where a plurality of types of minor winning combinations are won, but in this case, in this embodiment, there is no case where the minor winning combination wins multiple times, and only one of the minor winning combinations wins. It becomes possible.

In the replay A condition device to the replay K condition device, the remark column also shows the relationship between the pressing order and the stop symbol combination (type of replay). In the remarks column, for example, "left 1st" means left first stop.
In the thirty-seventh embodiment, the replay wins in any pressing order (left first stop, middle first stop, right first stop).
In addition, in the remarks column of the replay A condition device to the replay I condition device, during the right first stop, "?" , "blue BAR" can stop in the middle, and "?" indicates that "blue BAR" does not stop in the middle. Although detailed explanation is omitted, in the thirty-seventh embodiment, during 1BB operation, when the replay A to replay I condition devices are activated, the right push (right first stop) and "blue BAR" are aimed at the middle row. is output, and an effect suggesting an advantage is output according to the reel 31 and the number of the "blue BAR" stopped in the middle stage.

The replay A condition device includes replays 01 to 07 as winning hands, and when the replay A condition device is activated, in this embodiment, when the left or middle first stop, replay 01 or replay 02 is stopped, right first When stopping, replay 01 is stopped.
The symbol combinations of replay 01 are the combination numbers "004" to "007" in FIG. Therefore, when replay 01 wins, "replay" - "black BAR/red 7/blank/cherry" - "Bell A" stops on the active line. When "black BAR/red 7/blank/cherry" stops on the effective line (middle middle row) when the middle reel 31 stops, "replay" stops on the middle upper row. Further, when "Bell A" stops on the effective line (lower right) when the right reel 31 stops, "Replay" stops on the upper right. Therefore, when the symbol combination of Replay 01 stops on the active line (Replay 01 wins), "Replay"-"Replay"-"Replay" (upper replay) stops on the upper line (invalid line).
On the other hand, when replay 02 wins, "replay" - "replay" - "replay" stops at the activated line.

Since both Replay 01 and Replay 02 are "PB=1", any one of them can be stopped. Therefore, when the replay A condition device is activated, when the left or middle first stop is performed, the case of stopping replay 01 and the case of stopping replay 02 are assigned according to the pressing order and operation timing of the stop switch 42, The stop rolls are diversified. This also applies to the left or middle first stop during operation of the replay B to replay K condition devices described below.

Further, when the replay A condition device is activated, the "blue BAR" does not stop in the middle row of any reel 31 in the right first stop. When the right reel 31 is stopped, if the right stop switch 42 is operated aiming at the 4th "blue BAR" in the middle stage, the 3rd "Bell B" does not stop at the lower right stage, and the 5th "Bell A" does not stop. Stop at bottom right. Similarly, when the middle stop switch 42 is operated aiming at the 19th "blue BAR" at the middle stage when the middle reel 31 is stopped, the 19th "blue BAR" does not stop at the middle middle stage, and the 1st "blank bar" is not stopped. ” stops in the middle.
Similarly, when the left reel 31 is stopped, if the left stop switch 42 is operated aiming at the 16th "blue bar" in the middle row, the 17th "cherry" does not stop at the upper left row, and the 0th "replay bar" is not stopped. ” stops at the top left. Replay 01 is thereby stopped.

The replay B condition device includes replay 01 to replay 08 as winning hands, and its stop control is the same as when the replay A condition device is activated. Also, when the button is pressed in reverse, the "blue BAR" does not stop in the middle stage, just like when the replay A condition device is activated.
The replay C condition device includes replay 01 to replay 07 and replay 09 as a winning role, and when the replay C condition device is operated, replay 01 or replay 02 can be stopped when the left or middle first stop, right first When stopped, replay 04 can be stopped.

When the replay C condition device is activated, in the right first stop, as shown in FIG. 276, only the right reel 31 stops the "blue BAR" in the middle row. When the right stop switch 42 is operated while aiming at the 4th "blue bar" in the middle when the right reel 31 is stopped, the right reel 31 stops at that position, and the 3rd "bell B" is in the lower right row (effective line). to stop. In addition, "black BAR/red 7/blank/cherry" stops in the middle middle stage, and "blue BAR" does not stop. Furthermore, "Cherry/Bell A" stops in the upper left row, and "Blue BAR" does not stop in the middle left row.

The replay D condition device includes replay 01 to replay 07 and replay 10 as winning hands, and when the replay D condition device is activated, replay 01 or replay 02 can be stopped at the left or middle first stop, and right first stop At time, replay 05 of winning combination number "021" can be stopped.
At the right first stop when the replay D condition device is activated, only the middle reel 31 can stop the "blue BAR" in the middle middle row. On the other hand, when No. 4 "Blue BAR" is aimed at the middle row when the right reel 31 stops, it does not stop at this position (No. 3 "Bell B" does not stop at the lower right row), "Bell A" stops. In addition, "Replay" stops in the upper left row, and "Blue BAR" does not stop in the middle left row. As a result, the replay 05 of the combination number "021" is stopped.

The replay E condition device includes replay 01 to replay 07 and replay 11 as winning hands, and when the replay E condition device is activated, replay 01 or replay 02 can be stopped at the left or middle first stop, and right first stop When replay 03 can be stopped.
At the right first stop when the replay E condition device is activated, only the left reel 31 can stop the "blue BAR" in the middle left row. When "Blue BAR" stops at the middle left row, "Cherry" stops at the upper left row (effective line). "Bell A" is stopped on the effective line on the right reel 31, and "BLACK BAR/RED 7/BLANK/CHERRY" is stopped on the effective line on the middle reel 31. - 特許庁
The replay F condition device includes replay 01 to replay 07 and replay 12 as winning hands, and when the replay F condition device is activated, replay 01 or replay 02 can be stopped at the left or middle first stop, and right first stop At time, replay 05 of winning combination number "022" can be stopped.

At the right first stop when the replay F condition device is activated, the "blue BAR" can be stopped in the middle row of the right and middle reels 31 . When the "blue BAR" stops at the middle stage of the right reel 31, the "bell B" stops at the lower right stage. When the middle reel 31 stops, the "blue BAR" stops at the middle stage. Furthermore, when the left reel 31 stops, "Replay" stops in the upper left row, and "Blue BAR" does not stop in the middle left row. As a result, the replay 05 of the combination number "022" is stopped.

The replay G condition device includes replay 01 to replay 07 and replay 13 as winning hands, and when the replay G condition device is activated, replay 01 or replay 02 can be stopped at the left or middle first stop, and right first stop Replay 04 can now be stopped.
At the right first stop when the replay G condition device is activated, the "blue BAR" can be stopped in the middle of the right and left reels 31 . When the right reel 31 stops, the "blue BAR" stops in the middle right row, and the "bell B" stops in the lower right row. Also, when the middle reel 31 is stopped, if the player aims at the "blue bar" in the middle row, the "blue bar" does not stop, but the "black bar/red 7/blank/cherry" stops. Furthermore, when the left reel 31 stops, when the "blue bar" stops at the middle left row, the "cherry" stops at the upper left row.

The replay H condition device includes replay 01 to replay 07 and replay 14 as winning hands, and when the replay H condition device is operated, replay 01 or replay 02 can be stopped at the left or middle first stop, and right first stop Replay 05 can be stopped at this time.
At the right first stop when the replay H condition device is activated, the middle and left reels 31 can stop the "blue bar" in the middle row. When the right reel 31 stops, "Bell A" stops at the lower right stage, and "Blue BAR" does not stop at the middle right stage.
Also, when the middle reel 31 is stopped, if the player aims at the "blue bar" in the middle stage, it stops at that position. Furthermore, when the left reel 31 is stopped, if the player aims at the "blue bar" on the middle left row, it will stop at that position, and "cherry" will stop on the upper left row. As a result, the replay 05 of the combination number "023" is stopped.

The replay I condition device includes replay 01 to replay 07 and replay 15 as winning hands, and when the replay I condition device is activated, replay 01 or replay 02 can be stopped at the left or middle first stop, and right first stop. When replay 05 can be stopped.
At the right first stop when the replay I condition device is activated, the "blue BAR" can be stopped in the middle of the right, middle and left reels 31 . When the right reel 31 is stopped, if you aim at the "blue bar" in the middle right row, it will stop at that position, and "Bell B" will stop in the lower right row.
Also, when the middle reel 31 is stopped, if the player aims at the "blue bar" in the middle row, it stops at that position. Furthermore, when the left reel 31 is stopped, if the player aims at the "blue bar" on the middle left row, it will stop at that position, and "cherry" will stop on the upper left row. As a result, the middle line is aligned with the "blue BAR", and the replay 05 of the combination number "024" is stopped.

The replay J condition device includes replay 01, replay 02 and replay 15 as winning hands, and when the replay J condition device is activated, replay 01 or replay 02 can be stopped at the left or middle first stop, and right first stop When the replay 15 can be stopped.
Also, at the right first stop, "red 7" can be stopped in the middle stages of the right, middle and left reels 31.例文帳に追加When "Red 7" stops on the middle row of the right reel 31, "Bell A" stops on the lower right row. Also, if you aim for "red 7" in the middle row of the middle reel 31, it will stop at that position. Furthermore, if "Red 7" is aimed at the middle stage of the left reel 31, it will stop at that position, and "Bell B" will stop at the upper left stage. As a result, the replay 15 of the combination number "147" is stopped, and "red 7" is stopped in the middle row.
For example, when a condition that is advantageous to the player is established, such as winning a lottery related to AT (adding the number of AT games played, etc.), when the replay J condition device is activated, the player presses "Red 7". Output the effect to make it look like "Red 7" matching.

The replay K condition device includes replay 01 and replay 02 as winning hands, and when the replay K condition device is activated, replay 01 or replay 02 can be stopped when the left or middle first stop is performed, and when the right first stop is replay 01 can be stopped.
Also, at the right first stop, "Red 7" can be stopped on the middle stage of the right and middle reels 31, but "Red 7" is not stopped on the middle stage of the left reel 31. - 特許庁When "Red 7" stops on the middle row of the right reel 31, "Bell A" stops on the lower right row. In addition, "Red 7" can be stopped on the middle stage of the middle reel 31 . Furthermore, when "Red 7" is aimed at the middle stage of the left reel 31, the 15th "Replay" stops at the upper left stage and "Red 7" does not stop at the left middle stage. As a result, the replay 01 of the combination number "005" is stopped.
Even when the replay K condition device is activated, similarly to when the replay J condition device is activated, an effect of pressing "red 7" is output to prevent the appearance of "red 7".

When the replay L condition device is activated, replay 08 is stopped on the active line. Here, when the replay 08 is stopped on the effective line, it becomes possible to stop "watermelon A/watermelon B"-"watermelon A/watermelon B"-"watermelon A/watermelon B" on the effective line.
Also, when the replay M condition device is activated, the replay 09 is stopped on the effective line. Here, when the replay 09 is stopped on the active line, the watermelon patterns are not aligned on the active line, but the "upper left row" - "middle middle row" - "upper right row" and "watermelon A / watermelon B" - "Watermelon A/Watermelon B"-"Watermelon A/Watermelon B" can be stopped.

When the replay N condition device is activated, the replay 06 can be stopped, and the chance eye consisting of "Replay" - "Bell A/Bell B" - "Bell A/Bell B" is stopped on the effective line.
When the Replay O condition device is activated, Replay 07 can be stopped, and the effective line consists of "Replay" - "Bell A/Bell B" - "Bell A/Bell B", just like when the Replay N condition device is activated. stop chances.
When the replay P condition device is activated, the replay 10 can be stopped, and the chance eye consisting of "replay" - "watermelon A/watermelon B" - "watermelon A/watermelon B" is stopped on the effective line.
The reliability of the chance is "strong chance>chance A≈chance B". In FIG. 286, which will be described later, when winning numbers "16" to "18" are won, a chance eye appears and an AT lottery is executed. Therefore, the AT winning expectation is "winning number '18'>winning number '16' ≈ '17'".

The replay Q condition device includes replay 11 and replay 12 as winning hands, and stops replay 11 or replay 12 when the replay Q condition device is activated. When the left reel 31 is stopped, if a "cherry" is aimed at the upper left row (replay 11), it stops at that position. Also, when the left reel 31 is stopped, if "Bell A" is aimed at the upper left stage (replay 12), it will stop at that position, and "Cherry" will be stopped at the lower left stage. Let the stop shape (square cherry) of the "cherry" in the upper left or lower left row represent a weak cherry.
The replay R condition device includes replay 11 to replay 13 as winning hands, and either replay 11 or replay 13 is stopped when the replay R condition device is activated. When the left reel 31 stops, it is possible to stop No. 8 or No. 18 "blank" (replay 13) or No. 3 "black BAR" (replay 13) on the upper left row, and stop "cherry" on the middle left row. do. This stop form (middle cherry) represents a strong cherry.
The replay S condition device includes replay 11 to replay 14 as winning hands, and any one of replay 11, replay 13 or replay 14 is stopped when the replay S condition device is activated. Similarly to when the replay R condition device is activated, it is possible to stop "cherry" (strong cherry) in the middle left row.

In the replay condition device described above, as shown in FIG. 286, replay A wins alone, and 1BB and 1BB do not win together.
On the other hand, Replay B to Replay S are always duplicated with 1BB in non-internal games. In a game in which the 1BB condition device and the replay B to replay S condition devices operate simultaneously, reel stop control based on the replay B to replay S condition devices is given priority, and one of the replays always wins, and 1BB never wins. .
On the other hand, in the internal middle game after winning 1BB (Fig. 290, Fig. 292), in the game when the replay A to replay S condition device is activated, the 1BB condition device is also activated, but the winning of the replay is given priority and the replay is always performed. will win and 1BB will not win.

During 1BB operation and inside RB, as shown in FIG. ), which always wins replays.
During 1BB operation and inside RB, in the game when the replay A to replay S condition device is activated, the RBA or RBB condition device is also activated at the same time, but the replay win is prioritized, the replay is always won, and the RBA or RBB is There is no chance of winning.

The so-called push-order bell conditioning device consists of the following types:
Small win group A condition device: Small win A01 condition device ~ Small win A24 condition device Small win group B condition device: Small win B01 condition device ~ Small win B24 condition device Small win group C condition device: Small win C01 condition device ~ Small win Combination C24 condition device For example, in a game in which the winning number "22" is won in FIG. 286 to be described later, the small combination A01 condition device operates.
First, the relationship between the small winning combination A01 conditional device to the small winning combination A24 conditional device and the correct pressing order is as follows.
Small combination A01 condition device to small combination A04 condition device: correct order 123 (left middle right)
Small combination A05 condition device to small combination A08 condition device: correct order 132 (left and right middle)
Small combination A09 condition device to small combination A12 condition device: correct answer pressing order 213 (middle left and right)
Small combination A13 condition device to small combination A16 condition device: correct order 231 (middle right left)
Small combination A17 condition device to small combination A20 condition device: correct order 312 (right left middle)
Small combination A21 condition device to small combination A24 condition device: correct order 321 (right middle left)
Below, some conditional devices are extracted, and the reel stop control when the conditional device is activated will be described.

In FIG. 277 (the same applies to the figures after FIG. 278), for example, "123" in the remark column of the minor combination A01 condition device indicates the pressing order 123 (left, middle, right). Also, for example, "2--" indicates that the first stop is "2 (medium)" and the second and third stops are optional.
In FIG. 277, the small winning combination A01 condition device includes winning combinations of small winning combinations 001, 009 to 016, 025, 026, 041, 042, 065, and 066 (15 in total). It is a conditional device that enables a predetermined minor combination to be won.
When the small combination A01 condition device is activated, the small combination 001 is won at "PB=1 (1/1)" at the push order 123. On the other hand, when the pressing order is 132, the small winning combination 009 to the small winning combination 016 can be won at a rate of "1/2". In other words, when the pressing order is 132, the winning combination is not won at a rate of "1/2", and the pattern symbol combination described above appears.
When the small winning combination A01 condition device is activated, the left reel symbol "replay" of the small winning combination 001 is stopped at the top left at the first left stop. Next, at the middle second stop, "Bell A" is stopped at the middle middle stage. Furthermore, at the right third stop, "Watermelon A/Watermelon B/Blue BAR" is stopped at the lower right stage. As a result, the small win 001 wins with "PB=1".
It should be noted that when the small win 001 is won, "Replay" - "Bell A" - "Watermelon A / Watermelon B / Blue BAR" stops on the active line, but "Bell A" - "Bell A" - on the middle line. "Bell A" stops.

On the other hand, after the "replay" is stopped in the upper left at the first stop on the left, when it is the second stop on the right, in order to be able to win any of the small wins 009 to 016, Stop "Red 7/Black BAR/Blank/Cherry". Since the sum of these four symbols is "PB=1" arrangement, one of these symbols is always stopped at the lower right row at the second stop on the right.
Next, at the middle and third stop, "black BAR/red 7/blank/cherry" is stopped in the middle and middle stages so that any one of the small winning combination 009 to the small winning combination 016 can be won. When the symbols corresponding to the minor combination cannot be stopped, the symbols corresponding to the pattern symbol combination are stopped.

For example, firstly, when "replay"-"rotating"-"black BAR", if it is possible to stop "black BAR/red 7" in the middle and middle stages, a small winning combination 010 or a small winning combination 012 can be obtained. A prize is awarded, but if the "black BAR/red 7" cannot be stopped in the middle stage, the role is not awarded.
In the case of "replay"-"rotating"-"black BAR", the rate at which "black BAR/red 7" stops when the middle reel 31 stops is "1/2".
When the stop form is "Replay"-"Black BAR/Red 7"-"Black BAR", a small winning combination 010 or a small winning combination 012 is won.
On the other hand, in the case of "replay" - "rotating" - "black BAR", if "black BAR/red 7" cannot be stopped when the middle reel 31 is stopped, "bell B" is stopped. Let As a result, the stop form becomes "Replay"-"Bell B"-"Black BAR", resulting in pattern 02 (hand number "301").

Second, when "replay" - "rotating" - "red 7", if "black BAR/red 7" can be stopped in the middle stage, a small winning combination 009 or a small winning combination 011 is won. However, when "black BAR/red 7" cannot be stopped in the middle stage, the combination is not won.
In the case of "replay"-"rotating"-"red 7", the rate at which "black BAR/red 7" stops when the middle reel 31 stops is "1/2".
When the stop form is "Replay" - "Black BAR/Red 7" - "Red 7", a small winning combination 009 or a small winning combination 011 is won.
On the other hand, in the case of "replay" - "rotating" - "red 7", if "black BAR/red 7" cannot be stopped when the middle reel 31 is stopped, "bell B" is stopped. Let As a result, the stop form becomes "Replay"-"Bell B"-"Red 7", resulting in pattern 02 (hand number "300").

Thirdly, when "replay" - "rotating" - "blank", if "blank/cherry" can be stopped in the middle stage, a small winning combination 013 or a small winning combination 015 will be won. , when the "blank/cherry" cannot be stopped in the middle stage, the role is not awarded.
In the case of "replay" - "rotating" - "blank", the rate at which "blank/cherry" stops when the middle reel 31 stops is "1/2".
When the stop form is "Replay"-"Blank/Cherry"-"Blank", a small winning combination 013 or a small winning combination 015 is won.
On the other hand, in the case of "replay" - "rotating" - "blank", if "blank/cherry" cannot be stopped when the middle reel 31 is stopped, "bell B" is stopped. As a result, the stop form becomes "Replay"-"Bell B"-"Blank", resulting in pattern 02 (hand number "302").

Fourthly, when "Replay"-"Rotating"-"Cherry", if "Blank/Cherry" can be stopped in the middle stage, a small winning combination 014 or a small winning combination 016 will be won. , when the "blank/cherry" cannot be stopped in the middle stage, the role is not awarded.
In the case of "replay" - "rotating" - "cherry", the rate at which "blank/cherry" stops when the middle reel 31 stops is "1/2".
When the stop form is "Replay" - "Blank/Cherry" - "Cherry", a small winning combination 014 or a small winning combination 016 is won.

On the other hand, in the case of "replay" - "rotating" - "cherry", if "blank/cherry" cannot be stopped when the middle reel 31 is stopped, "bell B" is stopped. As a result, the stop form becomes "Replay"-"Bell B"-"Cherry", resulting in pattern 02 (hand number "303").
From the above, at the time of pressing order 132 when the small combination A01 condition device is activated, the small combination 009 to small combination 016 wins at a rate of "1/2", and the pattern 02 stops at a rate of "1/2" ( will not win a prize).

In addition, when the small winning combination A01 condition device is activated, at the middle first stop, as shown in FIG. It becomes non-winning (stop of pattern design combination) in the ratio.
Specifically, at the time of the middle first stop, "Bell B" is stopped in the middle middle stage (PB=1). Also, at the time of left stop after middle first stop, "red 7" is pulled into the upper left row. Since "Red 7" on the left reel 31 is provided only at one position, the draw-in rate, that is, the stop rate is "1/4".
Furthermore, at the right stop after the middle first stop, the "red 7/black BAR" is pulled into the lower right stage. Since the "red 7/black BAR" on the right reel 31 is provided at one position at intervals of 5 symbols, the draw-in rate, that is, the stop rate is "1/2".
On the other hand, in the case of "Rotating" - "Bell B" - "Red 7/Black BAR", if "Red 7" cannot be stopped when stopping on the left, "Replay" (PB = 1) is selected. stop.

Also, in the case of "Red 7" - "Bell B" - "Rotating", if "Red 7/Black BAR" cannot be stopped when stopping to the right, "Bell A" (PB = 1) to stop
From the above, the ratio of "Red 7" - "Bell B" - "Red 7/Black BAR" at the middle first stop is "1/8".
In addition, the stop form when the small winning combination 025 to small winning combination 026 does not win,
"Replay" - "Bell B" - "Red 7/Black BAR" (Pattern 02)
"Red 7" - "Bell B" - "Bell A" (Pattern 03)
be either

Furthermore, when the small winning combination A01 condition device is activated, when the right first stop is made, as shown in FIG. It becomes non-winning (stop of pattern symbol combination) at the ratio of.
Specifically, at the first stop on the right, the "Bell B" is stopped at the lower right stage (PB=1). Also, at the time of left stop after right first stop, "red 7" is pulled into the upper left stage. As mentioned above, the pull-in rate of "Red 7" is "1/4".
Furthermore, at the middle stop after the right first stop, the "red 7/black BAR" is pulled into the middle middle stage. As described above, the pull-in rate of "red 7/black BAR" is "1/2".
On the other hand, in the case of "Rotating" - "Red 7/Black BAR" - "Bell B", if "Red 7" cannot be stopped when stopped on the left, "Replay" (PB = 1). stop.

Also, in the case of "Red 7" - "Rotating" - "Bell B", if it is not possible to stop "Red 7 / Black BAR" during the middle stop, "Replay" (PB = 1) stop.
From the above, the ratio of "Red 7"-"Red 7/Black BAR"-"Bell B" at the first right stop is "1/8".
In addition, the stop form when the small winning combination 041 to small winning combination 042 is not won is
"Replay" - "Red 7/Black BAR" - "Bell B" (Pattern 05)
"Red 7" - "Replay" - "Bell B" (Pattern 04)
be either

Next, when the small combination A01 conditional device is activated, during the RB during the 1BB game (during the general game), stop control is performed so that the small combination 001 is won regardless of the pressing order of the stop switch 42 . The stop control when winning the small winning combination 001 is the same as the correct pressing order 123 o'clock.
On the other hand, when the minor winning combination A01 condition device is activated, during the general game (while the RB is not inside) during the 1BB game, regardless of the pressing order of the stop switch 42, stop control is performed so that the small winning combination 065 or the small winning combination 066 is won. . The small winning combination 065 and the small winning combination 066 do not stop during the normal game (when the accessory is not activated). A role 066 can be stopped. This is because it is necessary to make it possible to appear in one of the game states with respect to the winning combination of the minor combination included in the conditional device. This is the same for the small winning combination 067 to small winning combination 112 of the small winning combination A02 to small winning combination A24.
In addition, like the small winning combination 065 or the small winning combination 066, the combination that can be won during the general game (while the RB is not inside) in the 1BB game is "PB ≠ 1"("Red7" on the left reel 31 is "1/4", and the symbols on the middle and right reels 31 are "PB=1". Therefore, the winning ratio is "1/4".

Even when the small winning combination A02 to small winning combination A04 conditional device is activated, the small winning combination 001 (high bell (7-card combination)) is won at the time of correct pressing order 123 in the same manner as described above. In addition, in the case of the first stop push order correct answer (left) and the second stop push order incorrect answer (right), one role is awarded at the rate of "1/2", and at the rate of "1/2" It is controlled so as to be a dropout (pattern symbol combination display).
In addition, in the case of the first stop pushing order incorrect (middle or right), one role is awarded at the rate of "1/8", and it is lost at the rate of "7/8" (pattern symbol combination display). control so that

When the small winning combination A05 conditional device is activated, when the correct pressing order is 132, the small winning combination 002 is won with "PB=1". When the small winning combination 002 is won, ``Replay'' - ``Bell A'' - ``Replay'' stops on the active line, but ``Bell A'' - ``Bell A'' - ``Bell B'' stops on the middle line. .
On the other hand, at the pressing order 123, the small wins 009 to 016 are won at a rate of "1/2", and the wins are not won at a rate of "1/2" (pattern symbol combination is stopped).
When the small winning combination A05 conditional device is activated, the left reel symbol "replay" of the small winning combination 002 is stopped at the top left at the first left stop. Next, at the right second stop, "replay" is stopped at the lower right stage. Furthermore, at the time of the middle third stop, "Bell A" is stopped at the middle middle stage. As a result, the small win 002 wins with "PB=1".

On the other hand, after "replay" is stopped at the upper left at the first stop on the left, when it is the second stop at the middle, in order to be able to win any of the small wins 009 to 016, Stop "Red 7/Black BAR/Blank/Cherry" (total "PB=1").
Next, at the time of the right third stop, the pattern corresponding to the minor winning combination is stopped in the lower right row. Stop the corresponding symbol.
In this case, even if any of the patterns of "red 7/black BAR/blank/cherry" stops in the middle and middle rows, the rate at which the minor combination that is tense can be stopped is "1/2". For example, when "replay" - "red 7" - "rotating", "red 7/black BAR" is stopped at a ratio of "1/2", and small winning combination 011 or small winning combination 012 is won. be able to.
Therefore, at the time of pressing order 123 when the small winning combination A05 condition device is activated, the small winning combination 009 to 016 wins at a rate of "1/2", and the pattern symbol combination stops at a rate of "1/2". will not win a prize).

In addition, when the small winning combination A05 condition device is activated, at the middle first stop, as shown in FIG. It becomes non-winning (stop of pattern design combination) in the ratio.
Specifically, at the time of the middle first stop, "Bell B" is stopped in the middle middle stage (PB=1). Also, at the time of left stop after middle first stop, "red 7" is pulled into the upper left row (proportion "1/4").
Furthermore, at the right stop after the middle first stop, "red 7/black BAR" is pulled into the lower right stage (proportion "1/2").
On the other hand, the stop form when the small winning combination 033 to small winning combination 034 does not win is
"Replay"-"Bell B"-"Red 7/Black BAR" (Pattern 02)
"Red 7" - "Bell B" - "Bell A" (Pattern 03)
be either

Furthermore, when the small win A05 condition device is activated, when the right first stop is made, as shown in FIG. It becomes non-winning (stop of pattern symbol combination) at the ratio of.
Specifically, at the first stop on the right, the "Bell B" is stopped at the lower right stage (PB=1). Also, at the time of left stop after right first stop, "red 7" is pulled into the upper left stage. As mentioned above, the pull-in rate of "Red 7" is "1/4".
Furthermore, at the middle stop after the right first stop, "blank/cherry" is pulled into the middle middle stage. The pull-in rate of "blank/cherry" is "1/2".
From the above, the ratio of "Red 7"-"Red 7/Black BAR"-"Bell B" at the first right stop is "1/8".
On the other hand, the stop form when the small winning combination 049 to small winning combination 050 is not won is
"Replay" - "Red 7/Black BAR" - "Bell B" (Pattern 05)
"Red 7" - "Replay" - "Bell B" (Pattern 04)
be either

Furthermore, when the small combination A05 condition device is activated, during the inside of the RB during the 1BB game (during the general game), regardless of the pressing order of the stop switch 42, stop control is performed so that the small combination 002 is won. The stop control in this case is the same as that of the correct pressing order 123 o'clock.
On the other hand, when the minor winning combination A05 conditional device is activated, during the general game (while the RB is not inside) during the 1BB game, regardless of the pressing order of the stop switch 42, stop control is performed so that the small winning combination 075 or the small winning combination 076 is won. .

Even when the small winning combination A06 to small winning combination A08 conditional device is activated, the small winning combination 002 (high bell (7-piece winning combination)) is won in the correct pressing order 132 in the same manner as described above. Also, in the case of the first stop push order correct answer (left) and the second stop push order incorrect answer (middle), one role wins at the rate of "1/2", and at the rate of "1/2" It becomes a dropout (pattern symbol combination display).
In addition, if the first stop push order is incorrect (middle or right), 1 piece wins at a rate of ``1/8'', and it is lost at a rate of ``7/8'' (pattern pattern combination display). Become.

When the small winning combination A09 conditional device is activated, when the correct pressing order is 213, the small winning combination 003 or the small winning combination 004 is won with "PB=1". On the other hand, when the pressing order is 231, the small winning combination 025 to 032 are won at a rate of "1/2", and the winning combination is not won at a rate of "1/2" (stop of combination of pattern symbols).
When the small winning combination A09 conditional device is activated, the medium reel symbol "Bell B" of the small winning combination 003 is stopped at the middle middle row (PB=1) at the middle first stop. Next, at the second stop on the left, if the "blue BAR" or "bell B" (both "PB≠1") can be stopped, the "blue BAR" or "bell B" is stopped, respectively. If "Blue BAR" or "Bell B" cannot be stopped, "Bell A" (PB=1) is stopped.
Next, when "Bell A/Blue BAR"-"Bell B"-"Rotating" at the right third stop, "Bell B" is stopped at the lower right stage (PB=1). As a result, the small winning combination 003 wins.

Further, at the right third stop, if "Bell B" - "Bell B" - "Rotating", "Bell A" is stopped at the lower right stage (PB=1). As a result, the small winning combination 004 wins.

When the small winning combination 003 is won, "Bell A/Blue BAR"-"Bell B"-"Bell B" stops on the active line.
Further, when the small winning combination 004 is won, "Bell B"-"Bell B"-"Bell A" (all bells) stop on the activated line.
In addition to the above-mentioned small combination A09 condition device operation, there are two types of small combinations that can be won, such as the correct pressing order 312 when the small combination A17 condition device is operated, which will be described later. There is a case where ``PB=1'' only in the small winning combination, but in order to diversify the stop results, when the small winning combination of ``PB≠1'' can be stopped, the small winning combination is stopped. Sometimes.

On the other hand, after the "Bell B" is stopped at the middle middle stage at the middle first stop, when it is the right second stop, in order to win any of the small winnings 025 to 032, it is placed at the lower right stage. , "Red 7/Black BAR/Blank/Cherry" (total "PB=1").
Next, at the time of left third stop, the pattern corresponding to the minor winning combination is stopped in the upper left row, and when the pattern corresponding to the minor winning winning combination cannot be stopped, the pattern symbol combination is executed. Stop the corresponding symbol.
In this case, even if any one of the symbols "red 7/black BAR/blank/cherry" stops in the lower right row, the rate at which the minor combination that is tense can be stopped is "1/2". For example, when "rotating" - "Bell B" - "Red 7", "Red 7 / Blue BAR" is stopped at a ratio of "1/2", and a small winning combination 025 or a small winning combination 027 is won. can be made
Therefore, at the time of pressing order 231 when the small combination A09 condition device is activated, small combination 025 to small combination 032 are won at a rate of "1/2", and the pattern symbol combination is stopped at a rate of "1/2". will not win a prize).

In addition, when the small winning combination A09 condition device is activated, as shown in FIG. It becomes non-winning (stop of pattern design combination) in the ratio.
Specifically, when left first stop, "replay" is stopped at the upper left (PB=1). Also, at the middle stop after the left first stop, the "black BAR" is pulled into the middle middle stage (proportion "1/4").
Furthermore, at the time of right stop after left first stop, "red 7/black BAR" is pulled into the lower right stage (proportion "1/2").
On the other hand, the stop form when the small winning combination 009 to small winning combination 010 does not win is
"Replay"-"Bell B"-"Red 7/Black BAR" (Pattern 02)
"Replay" - "Bell B" - "Bell A" (Pattern 03)
be either

Furthermore, when the small winning combination A09 condition device is activated, as shown in FIG. No winning (stop of pattern symbol combination).
Specifically, at the first right stop, "replay" is stopped in the lower right row (PB=1). Also, at the time of left stop after right first stop, "watermelon A/watermelon B" is pulled into the upper left stage. The attraction rate of "watermelon A/watermelon B" is "1/2".
Furthermore, at the middle stop after the right first stop, the "black BAR" is pulled into the middle middle stage. The pull-in rate of "black BAR" is "1/4".
From the above, the ratio of "Watermelon A/Watermelon B"-"Black BAR"-"Replay" at the first right stop is "1/8".
On the other hand, the stop form when the small winning combination 057 does not win is
"Watermelon A/Watermelon B/Red 7/Blue BAR"-"Replay"-"Replay" (Pattern 04)
"Replay"-"Black BAR/Red 7/Blank/Cherry"-"Replay" (Pattern 01)
be either

Next, when the small winning combination A09 conditional device is activated, during the inside of the RB during the 1BB game (during the general game), regardless of the pressing order of the stop switch 42, stop control is performed so that the small winning combination 003 or the small winning combination 004 is won. The stop control in this case is the same as at 213 o'clock in the correct order of pressing.
On the other hand, when the minor winning combination A09 conditional device is activated, during the general game (while the RB is not inside) during the 1BB game, regardless of the pressing order of the stop switch 42, stop control is performed so that the small winning combination 081 or the small winning combination 082 is won. .

Even when the small winning combination A10 to small winning combination A12 condition device is activated, the small winning combination 003 or the small winning combination 004 (high bell (7-piece combination)) is won in the correct pressing order 213 in the same manner as described above, and the first stop pressing order In the case of the correct answer (middle) and the second stop pressing order incorrect answer (right), the winning of one piece is awarded at a rate of "1/2", and the pattern symbol combination is stopped at a rate of "1/2".
Also, if the first stop pressing order is incorrect (left or right), the winning combination is awarded at a rate of "1/8", and the pattern symbol combination is stopped at a rate of "7/8".
Furthermore, in the same manner as described above, when the small winning combination A13 to small winning combination A16 condition device is activated, the small winning combination 005 (high bell (7 pieces combination)) is won at the correct pressing order 231, and the first stop pressing order correct answer. In the case of (middle) and the second stop pressing order is incorrect (left), the one-card role is won at a rate of "1/2", and the pattern symbol combination is stopped at a rate of "1/2".
Also, if the first stop pressing order is incorrect (left or right), the winning combination is awarded at a rate of "1/8", and the pattern symbol combination is stopped at a rate of "7/8".

When the small winning combination A17 condition device is activated, when the correct pressing order is 312, the small winning combination 006 or the small winning combination 007 is won with "PB=1". On the other hand, when the pressing order is 321, the small winning combination 041 to 048 are won at a rate of "1/2", and the winning combination is not won at a rate of "1/2" (stop of combination of pattern symbols).
When the small winning combination A17 condition device is activated, at the right first stop, "Bell B", which is the right reel symbol of the small winning combination 006 and the small winning combination 007, is stopped at the lower right row. Next, at the second stop on the left, if the "blue BAR" or "bell B" (both "PB ≠ 1") can be stopped, the "blue BAR" or "bell B" is stopped at the upper left stage, If "blue BAR" or "bell B" cannot be stopped, "bell A" (PB=1) is stopped at the upper left.
Further, at the middle and third stop, when "blue BAR/Bell A" - "rotating" - "Bell B", "Bell A" is stopped at the middle middle stage. As a result, the small winning combination 006 wins.
On the other hand, when "Bell B" - "Rotating" - "Bell B" at the middle third stop, "Replay" is stopped at the middle middle stage. As a result, the small winning combination 007 wins.

On the other hand, after the "Bell B" is stopped at the lower right stage at the time of the right first stop, when it is the middle second stop, in order to be able to win any of the small winning combination 041 to the small winning combination 048, it is placed at the middle middle stage. , "Red 7/Black BAR/Blank/Cherry" (total "PB=1").
Next, at the time of left third stop, the pattern corresponding to the minor winning combination is stopped in the upper left row, and when the pattern corresponding to the minor winning winning combination cannot be stopped, the pattern symbol combination is executed. Stop the corresponding symbol.
In this case, even if any of the patterns of "red 7/black BAR/blank/cherry" stops in the middle and middle row, the rate at which the minor combination that is tense can be stopped is "1/2". For example, when "rotating" - "red 7" - "bell B", "red 7 / blue BAR" is stopped at a ratio of "1/2", and a small winning combination 042 or a small winning combination 044 is won. can be made
Therefore, at the time of pressing order 321 when the small combination A17 condition device is activated, small combination 041 to small combination 048 are won at a rate of "1/2", and the pattern symbol combination is stopped at a rate of "1/2". will not win a prize).

In addition, when the small win A17 condition device is activated, when the left first stop is made, as shown in FIG. It becomes non-winning (stop of pattern design combination) in the ratio.
Specifically, when left first stop, "replay" is stopped at the upper left (PB=1). Also, at the middle stop after the left first stop, the middle middle row is drawn in with "black BAR/red 7" (proportion "1/2").
Furthermore, at the time of right stop after left first stop, "red 7" is pulled into the lower right stage (proportion "1/4").
On the other hand, the stop form when the small winning combination 009 or the small winning combination 011 does not win is
"Replay"-"Black BAR/Red 7/Blank/Cherry"-"Replay" (Pattern 01)
"Replay"-"Bell B"-"Black BAR/Red 7/Blank/Cherry" (Pattern 02)
be either

Furthermore, when the small win A17 condition device is activated, at the middle first stop, as shown in FIG. It becomes non-winning (stop of pattern symbol combination) at the ratio of.
Specifically, at the middle first stop, "Bell B" is stopped at the lower right stage (PB=1). Also, at the left stop after the middle first stop, "watermelon A/watermelon B" is pulled into the upper left stage (pull-in rate "1/2").
Furthermore, at the right stop after the middle first stop, "red 7" is pulled into the lower right stage (pull-in rate "1/4").
On the other hand, the stop form when the small winning combination 037 or the small winning combination 039 does not win is
"Watermelon A / Watermelon B / Red 7 / Blue BAR" - "Bell B" - "Bell A" (Pattern 03)
"Replay"-"Bell B"-"Red 7/Black BAR/Blank/Cherry" (Pattern 02)
be either

Next, when the minor winning combination A17 condition device is activated, during the inside of the RB during the 1BB game (during the general game), stop control is performed so that the small winning combination 006 or the small winning combination 007 is won regardless of the pressing order of the stop switch 42 . The stop control in this case is the same as that of the pressing order correct answer 312 o'clock.
On the other hand, when the small winning combination A01 condition device is activated, during the general game (while the RB is not inside) during the 1BB game, the small winning combination 097 or the small winning combination 098 (winning ratio "1/4") is selected regardless of the order in which the stop switch 42 is pressed. ) to win a prize.

Even when the small winning combination A18 to small winning combination A20 condition device is activated, the small winning combination 006 or the small winning combination 007 (high bell (7-piece combination)) is won in the correct pressing order 312 in the same manner as described above, and the first stop pressing order In the case of the correct answer (right) and the second stop pressing order incorrect answer (middle), the one-card role is awarded at a rate of "1/2", and the pattern symbol combination is stopped at a rate of "1/2".
Also, if the first stop pressing order is incorrect (left or middle), the one-card role is won at a rate of "1/8", and the pattern symbol combination is stopped at a rate of "7/8".
In addition, when the small combination A21 to small combination A24 condition device is activated, the small combination 008 (high bell (7 pieces combination)) is awarded at the correct pressing order 321, and the first stop pressing order correct (right) and second In the case of an incorrect stop pressing order (left), a winning combination is awarded at a rate of "1/2", and the pattern symbol combination is stopped at a rate of "1/2".
Also, if the first stop pressing order is incorrect (left or middle), the one-card role is won at a rate of "1/8", and the pattern symbol combination is stopped at a rate of "7/8".

The small winning combination B01 to small winning combination B24 condition device is a condition device similar to the small winning combination A01 to small winning combination A24 conditional device, respectively. When the first stop pushing order is correct and the second stop pushing order is incorrect, one role is awarded at a rate of ``1/2'', and the pattern symbol combination is stopped at a rate of ``1/2''. .
Also, if the first stop pressing order is incorrect, the winning combination is awarded at a rate of "1/8", and the pattern symbol combination is stopped at a rate of "7/8".
The small win B01 to small win B24 conditional devices are obtained by adding a small win 116 as a winning hand to the small win A01 to small win A24 conditional devices, respectively, and the other small wins A01 to small win A24 conditional devices. is the same as
In addition, the small winning combination B01 to small winning combination B24 conditional devices are the same as the small winning combination A01 to small winning combination A24 conditional devices in the correct pressing order and the incorrect pressing order when the accessory is not activated. Furthermore, the small winning combination B01 to small winning combination B24 conditional device can win a winning combination in the correct pressing order when the accessory is not activated and a winning combination in the incorrect pressing order for the small winning combination A01 to small winning combination A24 conditional device, respectively. The same is true for the winning combination and its winning rate.

For example, the small winning combination B01 conditional device is the same as the small winning combination A01 conditional device in that the correct pressing order 123 wins the small winning combination 001 with "PB=1".
In addition, the minor winning combination B01 conditional device is the same as the minor winning combination A01 conditional device in that the small winning combination 009 to small winning combination 016 can be won at a rate of "1/2" in the incorrect answer pressing order 132.
Furthermore, the small winning combination B01 conditional device is the same as the small winning combination A01 conditional device in that the small winning combination 025 to small winning combination 026 can be won at the rate of "1/8" at the first stop during the incorrect answer pressing order. .
Furthermore, the small winning combination B01 conditional device is the same as the small winning combination A01 conditional device in that the small winning combination 041 to small winning combination 042 can be won at a rate of "1/8" in the right first stop in the order of incorrect answers.

On the other hand, the small winning combination B01 conditional device to the small winning combination B24 conditional device are different from the small winning combination A01 to small winning combination A24 conditional device in terms of winning combination when the accessory is activated.
Small win B01 to small win B04 In the conditional device, during 1BB operation, the small win 001 is won with "PB=1" when left first stop.
Further, in the small winning combination B05 to small winning combination B08 conditional device, during 1BB operation, when left first stop, "PB=1" and small winning combination 002 is won.
Furthermore, in the small winning combination B09 to small winning combination B12 conditional device, during the 1BB operation, the small winning combination 003 or the small winning combination 004 is won with "PB=1" at the middle first stop.
Furthermore, in the small winning combination B13 to small winning combination B16 conditional device, during 1BB operation, the small winning combination 005 is won with "PB=1" at the middle first stop.
In addition, in the small winning combination B17 to small winning combination B20 condition device, during 1BB operation, when the right first stop is "PB=1", the small winning combination 006 or the small winning combination 007 is won.
Furthermore, in the small winning combination B21 to small winning combination B24 conditional device, during the 1BB operation, the small winning combination 008 is won with "PB=1" when the right first stop.

The small win C01 to small win C24 condition devices are condition devices similar to the small win B01 to small win B24 condition devices, respectively. It is a conditional device that wins a winning combination of 7 cards in the pressing order, and results in a winning combination of 1 card or a loss in the incorrect pressing order.
The small win C01 to small win C24 conditional devices are obtained by adding a small win 117 as a winning hand to the small win A01 to small win A24 conditional devices, respectively, and the other small wins A01 to small win A24 conditional devices. is the same as
Furthermore, the small winning combination C01 to small winning combination C24 conditional devices are conditional devices in which the same stop control as the small winning combination B01 to small winning combination B24 conditional devices is executed.

As shown in FIGS. 287 and 289, the small winning combination D01 to small winning combination D04 condition device operates at the same time as the 1BB conditional device in the non-internal medium game of 1BB (1BB and any of the small winning combinations D1 to D4 There is a case where one wins twice).
In addition, the small winning combination D01 to small winning combination D04 condition device, as shown in FIG. 291 and FIG. Any one of D1 to D4 wins alone).
Furthermore, the small winning combination D01 to small winning combination D04 condition device may operate during 1BB operation, as shown in FIGS. 295 and 297.

The small win D1 condition device stops the small wins 025 to 040 with "PB=1" at the first left stop when 1BB is not activated (during non-inside and inside).
On the other hand, when the 1BB is not activated, the 1BB is displayed at the maximum during the middle or right first stop. Here, "maximum display of 1BB" is stop control for stopping the symbol combination of 1BB on the effective line as much as possible. For example, when it is the middle first stop, "Watermelon B" is stopped at the middle middle stage. After that, when stopping left, "Bell B" is stopped at the upper left stage, and when stopping right, "Bell A" is stopped at the lower right stage. Here, "Bell B" on the left reel 31 and "Watermelon B" on the middle reel 31 are "PB≠1". On the other hand, "Bell A" on the right reel 31 is "PB=1". Therefore, the symbol combination of 1BB is "PB≠1".

For example, in the case of "rotating" - "rotating" - "Bell A", if "Watermelon B" cannot be stopped when the middle reel 31 stops, "Black BAR/Red 7/Blank/Cherry (“PB=1” in total), and further, when the left reel 31 is stopped, “Red 7/Blue BAR/Watermelon A/Watermelon B” (“PB=1” in total) are stopped. Win 115.
On the other hand, in the case of "Bell B" - "Rotating" - "Bell A", if "Watermelon B" cannot be stopped when the middle reel 31 is stopped, "Blue BAR/Watermelon A" is stopped. (“Watermelon B/Blue BAR/Watermelon A” with “PB=1”), and the small winning combination 113 is awarded.
Similarly, in the case of "rotating" - "watermelon B" - "bell A", if "bell B" cannot be stopped when the left reel 31 is stopped, "cherry" is stopped (""Cherry/BellB" and "PB=1"), and the small winning combination 114 is awarded.
Therefore, when 1BB cannot be stopped, any one of the small wins 113 to 115 can be stopped, so there is no chance of losing a win (non-winning).

In addition, when 1BB is activated, the small combination D1 condition device wins a single combination with "PB=1" regardless of the order in which the stop switch 42 is pressed. In this case, ``Red 7/Blue BAR/Watermelon A/Watermelon B''-``Bell B''-``Red 7/Black BAR/Blank/Cherry'', which are the small wins 025 to 040, are stopped (in total "PB=1").

The small winning combination D2 condition device stops the small winning combination 025 to small winning combination 040 with "PB=1" at the time of medium first stop when 1BB is not activated.
On the other hand, when 1BB is not activated, 1BB is displayed at maximum when the left or right first stop is made. When 1BB cannot be stopped, small wins 113 to 116 are won (no wins are lost).
In addition, when 1BB is activated, the small combination D2 condition device wins a single combination with "PB=1" regardless of the order in which the stop switch 42 is pressed. In this case, the small winning combination 025 to small winning combination 040 are stopped.

The small combination D3 condition device wins a small combination 115 with "PB=1" at the push order 312 when 1BB is not activated. On the other hand, when 1BB is not activated, 1BB is maximally displayed if the pressing order is other than 312 . When 1BB cannot be stopped, a small winning combination 113 to a small winning combination 115 or a small winning combination 117 is awarded (there is no loss of winning combination).
In addition, when 1BB is activated, the small combination D3 condition device wins a single combination with "PB=1" regardless of the order in which the stop switch 42 is pressed. In this case, the small winning combination 025 to small winning combination 040 are stopped.

The small combination D4 condition device wins the small combination 115 with "PB=1" at the push order 321 when 1BB is not activated. On the other hand, when 1BB is not activated, 1BB is maximally displayed if the pressing order is other than 321 . When 1BB cannot be stopped, the small wins 113 to 117 are awarded (there is no loss of win).
In addition, when 1BB is activated, the small combination D4 condition device wins a single combination with "PB=1" regardless of the pressing order of the stop switch 42.例文帳に追加In this case, the small winning combination 025 to small winning combination 040 are stopped.

The small win E condition device includes small wins 009 to 023, 025 to 039, and 041 to 055 as winning hands, but even if the symbol combinations of all these hands are summed up, the symbol arrangement will be "PB≠1". there is Therefore, when the small winning combination E condition device is activated, the eye pressing is required, and the "PB≠1" combination is achieved.
The small winning combination F condition device includes all the small winning combinations 001 to 117 except for the small winning combination 118 as the winning combination. to small winning combination 008) (PB=1). Further, according to the pressing order of the stop switch 42, for example, when the pressing order is 123, the small winning combination 001 is awarded, when the pressing order is 132, the small winning combination 002 is awarded, and so on.
The small winning combination G condition device includes small winning combinations 001 to 117 and a small winning combination 118 drawn only during 1BB operation. Since the small winning combination 118 is drawn only during 1BB operation, the small winning combination 118 may be referred to as an "increasing combination". When the small winning combination G condition device is activated, "PB=1" wins a small winning combination 118 (1 piece winning combination).

FIGS. 286 to 299 are diagrams showing numerical table (winning probability for each winning number) in the thirty-seventh embodiment. The table of numbers indicates numbers to be registered for each RT (game state) and each set value. The winning probability is obtained by dividing the numerical values shown in FIGS. For example, in FIG. 286, the winning number "4" is "1524" in common for all settings, and the winning probability is "1524/65536".
Of the winning numbers "0" to "100", the winning number "0" corresponds to non-winning, and the winning numbers "1" to "100" correspond to winning any combination.
In FIGS. 286 to 299, for example, in FIG. 286, if the winning number "4" is won, the 1BB condition device (FIG. 275) of the accessory condition device number "1", and the winning and replay condition device number "2" The Replay B conditional device (Fig. 276) is enabled and Replay 01 or Replay 02 can be stopped.
Note that the set values are the same as in the other embodiments described above.

In addition, in each numerical table, the presence or absence of the lottery for the advantageous section (lottery for shifting to the advantageous section) is also displayed. '○' means that the advantageous zone lottery will be executed when the winning number is won, and '?' means that the advantageous zone lottery will not be executed when the winning number is won. "-" means that the lottery is not subject to the lottery (because the number is "0"), and thus the advantageous section is not subject to the lottery. Furthermore, in the thirty-seventh embodiment, when the advantageous section lottery is executed, it is set so that the advantageous section is won with a probability of "1/1".
In the thirty-seventh embodiment, the lottery for the advantageous section is not executed at the time of non-winning, RBA, RBB, replay A, 1BB, replay B, and small combination G winning.

Here, for winning numbers having different winning probabilities between non-internal and internal, the lottery for the advantageous section is set so as not to be performed. For this reason, for example, when the winning number "3" (replay A) is won, which has different winning probabilities between non-RT non-internal and non-RT internal, the advantageous zone transition lottery is not executed.
In addition, the winning number "4" has a different winning probability when the RB is not inside the RB and inside the RB (see FIGS. 294 and 296) when the accessory is in operation (1BB is in operation). At times, the advantageous section transition lottery will not be executed.

Similarly, the winning numbers "1" and "2" have different winning probabilities when the RB is not inside the RB and inside the RB when the accessory is in operation (1BB is in operation), so the winning numbers "1" and "2" At the time of winning, the advantageous section transition lottery is not executed.
Furthermore, the probability of winning the winning number "100" is different between 1BB operation and RB operation (FIG. 299) and other game states. Therefore, when the winning number "100" is won, the advantageous zone transition lottery is not executed.
Furthermore, in the number table for each game state, the last part shows the total value of 1BB, replay, and minor combination.

First, FIGS. 286 and 287 are diagrams showing winning numbers "1" to "100" during non-RT and non-inside (during 1BB non-inside). In the non-internal, 1BB is drawn for accessories (winning numbers "4" to "21" and "94" to "97"), but RB (winning numbers "1" and "2") is drawn not. The RB is selected by lottery among RB non-internal during 1BB operation, which will be described later.
Also, in the non-RT, unlike the case of RT1, which will be described later, the winning number "3" (replay A) is not drawn. Replay B to Replay S other than Replay A are set so that 1BB can be won in duplicate.
In addition, the winning numbers "22" to "93" corresponding to the pressing order bell are all selected by lottery. In addition, the small winning combination D01 to small winning combination D04 as rare small winning combinations are set so as to win multiple wins with 1BB (winning numbers "94" to "97").
Furthermore, the winning numbers "98" and "99" are drawn as a rare minor combination, but the winning number "100" is not drawn. The winning number "100" is drawn only during 1BB operation and RT operation, which will be described later.

Figures 288 and 289 are diagrams showing numbers in RT1 and non-internal. In RT1 and non-internal, the difference from non-RT and non-internal is that the winning number "3" (replay A) is drawn. In addition, since the number "3638" corresponding to the probability of non-winning in non-RT and non-internal is the winning number of winning number "3", the probability of non-winning in RT1 and non-internal is "0". be.
Figures 290 and 291 are diagrams showing placement numbers in non-RT and inside 1BB. When the 1BB is inside, the 1BB is not selected by lottery, so the winning numbers "4" to "21" are single winnings in the replay. Similarly, the winning numbers “94” to “97” are single wins of the small combination D. The winning numbers "4" to "21" and "94" to "97" are the same during non-RT non-internal and 1BB internal.
In addition, when the winning number "4" to "21" or "94" to "97" is won in the inside, the condition device corresponding to the winning number is activated while the 1BB condition device is operating. do. Therefore, there is a combination of the condition device that operates when winning the winning number '4' to '21' or '94' to '97' in the non-internal, and the condition device that operates when the winning number is selected in the internal. are the same.

Figures 292 and 293 are diagrams showing the placement within RT1 and 1BB. In the same manner as above, the winning numbers "4" to "21" are single winnings of replay, and the winning numbers "94" to "97" are single winnings of the small combination D. The winning numbers "4" to "21" and "94" to "97" are the same in non-inside RT1 and in 1BB inside.
Figures 294 and 295 are diagrams showing the number of entries during 1BB operation and during RB non-interior. Since 1BB and replay are not drawn during 1BB operation, all of winning numbers "3" to "21" are "0". Also, in non-RB, RBA and RBB are drawn by lottery. Furthermore, the winning numbers "22" to "100" corresponding to the winning of the minor combination are the same as in the inside of 1BB when 1BB is not activated. Furthermore, the non-winning probability is "0".

Figures 296 and 297 are diagrams showing the numbers during 1BB operation and inside the RB (RT2). Since the RB is not drawn when inside the RB, the winning numbers "1" and "2" are both "0". Also, unlike the RB non-internal, all replays (single winning) are drawn by lottery (winning numbers "3" to "21"). Here, the winning numbers "3" and "4" are different from those in RT1 and 1BB by "1". Furthermore, the winning numbers "22" to "100" corresponding to the winning of the minor combination are the same as those during the 1BB operation and during the non-inside RB. Furthermore, the non-winning probability is "0".
Figures 298 and 299 are diagrams showing the numbers during 1BB operation and RB operation. In this game state, only winning numbers "99" and "100" are drawn. The non-winning probability is "17291/65536".

Next, RT transition in the thirty-seventh embodiment will be described.
FIG. 300 is a diagram showing RT transitions in the thirty-seventh embodiment. First, when the RWM 53 is initialized, it transitions to non-RT. Here, "RWM initialization" indicates the initialization of the entire range of the RWM 53, and includes information on winning 1BB and RT status. When the RT state data is initialized, it becomes "0", but when the RT state data is "0", it corresponds to non-RT.
The first non-RT is in non-RT and 1BB non-internal. The non-RT and 1BB non-internal state is maintained until the pressing order bell is won and the pattern symbol combination is stopped or 1BB is won. In the non-RT and 1BB non-inside, when 1BB is won before the pattern symbol combination stops, it becomes non-RT and 1BB inside, and even if the pattern symbol combination appears in this non-RT and 1BB inside, RT1 does not migrate.

On the other hand, in non-RT and 1BB non-inside, when a pattern symbol combination appears before 1BB is won, it shifts to RT1 and 1BB non-inside. When it shifts to RT1, it does not shift to non-RT unless it goes through a 1BB game. Then, if 1BB is won during RT1 and 1BB non-inside, it becomes RT1 and 1BB inside.
Non-RT and inside 1BB and RT1 and inside 1BB are maintained until 1BB wins.

Here, in non-RT and 1BB non-inside, the winning probability of 1BB is the number "16682" as described above (see FIG. 287), so winning is relatively early.
On the other hand, the total value of the winning numbers of the pressing order bell (winning numbers "22" to "93" is "45216", and the ratio of pattern symbol combinations to appear is
0 x 1/6 + 1/6 x 1/2 + 1/3 x 7/8 + 1/3 x 7/8
≈0.667
is.
Therefore,
The ratio of winning the push order bell and the appearance of the pattern pattern combination (value equivalent to the set number) is
45216 x 0.667
≒30159
becomes.

Therefore, "percentage of appearance of pattern symbol combination" / (percentage of appearance of pattern symbol + percentage of winning 1BB)
=30159/(30159+16682)
≈ 0.644
becomes.
Therefore, about 64% of non-RT and 1BB non-internal are RT1 and 1BB non-internal, and about 36% non-RT and 1BB internal.

When 1BB wins during non-RT and inside 1BB or during RT1 and inside 1BB, it shifts to 1BB operation. During 1BB operation, initially, 1BB operation and RB non-inside. RB is drawn during 1BB operation and RB non-inside. Then, when RB is won, 1BB is activated and RB is in progress, and this game state becomes RT2. Then, in RT2, when RB wins, 1BB is in operation and RB is in operation.
As shown in FIG. 275, the 1BB operation ends with the payout of more than 218 medals. Also, during 1BB operation and RB operation, the game ends after 8 or 12 wins. When the conditions for ending the 1BB operation and the RB operation are satisfied and the conditions for ending the 1BB operation are not satisfied, the operation shifts again to the 1BB operation and RB non-internal state.
When the conditions for ending the 1BB operation are satisfied in the 1BB operation, the 1BB operation is ended and the non-RT mode is entered.

FIG. 301 is a diagram showing an instruction function in the thirty-seventh embodiment. The instruction monitor uses one 7 segment in the thirty-seventh embodiment. Therefore, the indication monitor may use the lower digits of the win number display LED 78, as in the other embodiments described above, or may be a separate dedicated display.
The instruction function is activated (the instruction monitor lights up) when the start switch 41 is operated. More specifically, when the start switch 41 is operated, a lottery for a combination is executed, and a winning number is determined, it is determined that the operation condition of the instruction function is satisfied in the game.
Also, the end of the operation of the instruction function (the instruction monitor is turned off) is after the complete stop (here, this corresponds to the time when all the stop switches 42 are released from the player's fingers).

The pressing order instruction numbers have "A1" to "A7". "A1" to "A6" correspond to "123 (left center right)" to "321 (right center left)" in the 6-option pressing order. For example, when the minor combination A01 condition device is activated, the push order instruction number "A1" is selected and the push order instruction information "1" is displayed on the instruction monitor.
Further, for example, when the push order instruction number "A1" is selected and the push order instruction information "1" is displayed on the instruction monitor, the sub-display content (the content displayed on the image display device 23) is "1. 2, 3” or “left, center, right”, and the like.

Further, the pressing order instruction number "A7" is the pressing order instruction number for winning 1BB in a game when the small wins D1 to D4 conditional device is activated while AT is being executed in non-RT and inside 1BB. and "7" is displayed on the instruction monitor.
As shown in FIG. 285, when the small win D1 condition device is activated, 1BB is displayed at maximum except for left first stop. Also, when the small win D2 condition device is activated, 1BB is displayed at maximum except for the middle first stop. Furthermore, when the small combination D3 condition device is activated, 1BB is displayed at maximum except for the order of pressing 312. Furthermore, when the small combination D4 condition device is activated, 1BB is the maximum display except for the pressing order 321.
Therefore, in the case of winning 1BB when the small combination D condition device is activated, when the small combination D1 condition device is activated, "7" is displayed on the instruction monitor, and as a sub display content, reverse push ("←" is displayed) Suggest (announce) On the other hand, when the small winning combination D2 to small winning combination D4 conditional device is activated, "7" is displayed on the instruction monitor, and forward pressing ("→" is displayed) is suggested as a sub-display content. Furthermore, in addition to the above display, a suggestion (announcement) by voice and/or display such as "Aim!" may be executed.

FIG. 302 is a diagram showing an image display example when the minor combination D condition device operates during execution of AT in non-RT (when 1BB is not activated) and 1BB is to be won.
In the example of FIG. 302, first, the 1BB winning symbol combination “bell B (upper left)”-“watermelon B (middle middle)”-“bell A (lower right)” is displayed.
Furthermore, on the left side, the pattern arrangement of the reels 31 of the gaming machine is displayed as an image, and the position of the pattern to be aimed at for each reel 31 is displayed as an image. In this example, the left reel 31 is number 12 (bell B), the middle reel 31 is either number 4 or 14 (watermelon B), and the right reel 31 is number 5, 10, 15, or 0. It indicates that you should aim for or (Bell A). In FIG. 302, the symbols on the symbol array of the reels 31 are shown only by numbers, but the symbols are actually displayed.
Furthermore, in the case of executing the notification to prompt the winning of 1BB, when the small win D1 condition device is activated, the word "Please aim" and the reverse arrow are displayed as an image. On the other hand, when the small winning combination D2 to small winning combination D4 condition device is activated, an image of a forward-pressing arrow is displayed together with the word "Please aim".

In the thirty-seventh embodiment, the AT lottery is executed for both non-RT and RT1, and when the AT lottery is won, the AT is executed after a predetermined number of games have been played. The initial number of AT games is determined when the AT is won or when the AT is started, and the number of AT games is added during the AT. Details of the AT lottery method and the like are omitted in the thirty-seventh embodiment.
During the AT, when the small winning combination A01 to small winning combination C24 conditional device is activated, the correct pressing order for winning the 7-card combination is notified. In order to notify the pressing order, the pressing order instruction information shown in FIG. 301 is displayed on the instruction monitor by activating the instruction function on the main control board 50 side. In addition, on the sub-control board 80 side, the image display device 23 displays an image of the order of correct keystrokes ("1, 2, 3", "left, middle, right", etc.).

If you win 1BB in non-RT and 1BB non-inside, if you win the winning numbers "4" to "21" in Figure 286 and Figure 287 (when 1BB and replay are won at the same time), and win This is the case where numbers "94" to "97" are won (when 1BB and minor combination D are won in duplicate).
In non-RT and 1BB non-inside games, in a game in which winning numbers "4" to "21" are won (a game in which 1BB and replay are overlapped), replay always wins, and 1BB never wins. Also, in the game, there is no case where the instruction function is activated or the image display device 23 suggests a specific pressing order.

In a non-RT and 1BB internal game, when the combination is not won (when the winning number is "0"), only 1BB is the operating condition device, so 1BB can be won in the game. However, since the symbol combination of 1BB is "PB≠1", 1BB will not win unless the symbols are pressed. Also, in a non-RT and 1BB internal game, when a winning combination is not won, regardless of the pressing order of the stop switch 42, 1BB can be won by aiming for a 1BB symbol combination.
In the non-RT and 1BB inside game, when 1BB wins when the role is not won, the operation shifts to 1BB operation, and when 1BB does not win, the non-RT and 1BB inside game is continued even after the next game.
In the non-RT and 1BB internal game, when the combination is not won, the operation information of the stop switch 42 for avoiding the winning of 1BB is not reported. However, when the combination is not won in non-RT and 1BB internal games (games in which 1BB can be won), an effect (for example, reel flash, etc.) suggesting that 1BB can be won may be executed.

Also, in non-RT (non-internal or internal), 1BB may be won when the small combination D condition device is activated (when the winning numbers "94" to "97" are won). As shown in FIG. 285, for example, firstly, when the small win D1 condition device is activated, if the left first stop is "PB=1", any one of the small wins 025 to 040 (1 piece win). This is because, although the player wins, the maximum display is 1BB at the middle or right first stop.
In this case, the content of notification differs depending on whether or not the game is in AT.

In non-RT, when the AT is not being executed, when the small combination D condition device is activated, the pressing order for winning the one-piece combination is reported in order to avoid winning the 1BB. For example, when the small combination D1 condition device is activated, the left first stop is notified. Specifically, the main control board 50 selects either the push order instruction number "A1" or "A2" in FIG. As a method of selection, a lottery may be used to select "A1" or "A2" with a probability of 50%. Then, the push order instruction information corresponding to the selected push order instruction number is displayed on the instruction monitor (operation of the instruction function).
Further, the sub-control board 80 displays an image of the pressing order corresponding to the pressing order instruction number. For example, when the selected pressing order instruction number is "A1", the sub-control board 80 instructs the image display device 23 to indicate the pressing order ("1, 2, 3", "left, middle, right", etc.). Display an image.

Also, in non-RT, when the AT is not being executed, when the small combination D2 condition device is activated, in order to avoid the winning of 1BB, the middle first stop is notified. Specifically, the main control board 50 selects either the push order instruction number "A3" or "A4" in FIG. As a method of selection, selection by lottery as in the above can be mentioned. Then, the push order instruction information corresponding to the selected push order instruction number is displayed on the instruction monitor (operation of the instruction function), and the image display device 23 displays the push order corresponding to the push order instruction number.

Furthermore, in non-RT, when the AT is not being executed, when the small combination D3 conditional device is activated, the pressing order "312" is notified in order to avoid winning 1BB. Specifically, the main control board 50 selects the push order instruction number "A5" in FIG. Then, the push order instruction information "5" corresponding to the selected push order instruction number "A5" is displayed on the instruction monitor (operation of the instruction function), and the push order information corresponding to the push order instruction number is displayed on the image display device 23. "312" is displayed as an image.

Furthermore, in non-RT, when the AT is not being executed, when the small combination D4 conditional device is activated, the pressing order "321" is notified in order to avoid winning 1BB. Specifically, the main control board 50 selects the push order instruction number "A6" in FIG. Then, the push order instruction information "6" corresponding to the selected push order instruction number "A6" is displayed on the instruction monitor (operation of the instruction function), and the image display device 23 displays the push order information corresponding to the push order instruction number "A6". "321" is displayed as an image.
As described above, when the AT is not being executed in non-RT, when the small combination D condition device is activated, the pressing order for winning the one-piece combination is notified by the operation of the instruction function. If the stop switch 42 is operated according to the order, 1BB having winning will not win in the game.

On the other hand, in non-RT, when AT is being executed, when the small combination D condition device is activated, in order to win 1BB, production that suggests the order of pushing 1BB (The operation mode for winning 1BB is played performance that can be understood by a person).
Here, in non-RT, when the small combination D condition device is activated after AT is won and before execution of AT (during AT sign), whether to execute an effect suggesting the order of pushing to win 1BB No is optional. By executing an effect suggesting a pushing order for winning 1BB during the AT sign, the player can know that the AT is winning (that the AT will be executed from now on). Therefore, if it is desired to avoid the player knowing that the AT has been won, after the start of the AT, in a game in which the small combination D condition device is activated, an effect suggesting the pushing order for winning 1BB may be executed. . Alternatively, if an effect suggesting the pushing order of winning 1BB is executed during the AT sign and the effect is used as the win confirmation effect for the AT, the effect may be output during the AT sign.

As a method of executing an effect suggesting the pressing order for winning 1BB when the small combination D condition device is activated, the content shown in FIG. 302 described above is displayed as an image.
Also, in this case, the pressing order instruction number "A7" is selected, and "7" in FIG. 301 is displayed on the instruction monitor.
In non-RT, when 1BB is won when the small combination D condition device is activated while AT is being executed, 1BB is activated and AT is performed from the next game.

In addition, the total number of winning numbers "94" to "97" is "7360" (the winning probability is about "11.2"%), so in most cases, winning numbers "94" to " 97” and is considered to be given an opportunity to win a prize of 1BB. However, when winning numbers "94" to "97" are not won during AT, AT is executed without RT.
Furthermore, even when AT is executed without RT, the non-winning combination number is "3638", so there is a possibility of winning 1BB when the combination becomes a non-winning game. . Even during the AT, in the game in which the role is not won, the effect suggesting the winning of 1BB is not executed. The game progresses in this state.
However, in a game in which the combination in the AT is not won, an effect (such as the above-described reel flash) that suggests winning 1BB may be executed. This is because an early transition from non-RT to RT1 (via 1BB game) is advantageous to the player in the long run.

Regardless of whether AT is running or not, when 1BB is finished operating, it goes into non-RT and 1BB non-internal. If the pattern symbol combination stops before 1BB is won, the game shifts to RT1 and 1BB non-inside, and if 1BB is won after that, RT1 and 1BB inside.
On the other hand, when 1BB is won before the pattern symbol combination stops, it becomes non-RT and inside 1BB. And the inside of 1BB is maintained.

In addition, as described above, the ball payout rate differs between non-RT and inside 1BB and RT1 and inside 1BB. For this reason, after finishing the 1BB operation and shifting to non-RT, there is an advantage/disadvantage in the payout rate depending on whether the game shifts to non-RT and inside 1BB or RT1 and inside 1BB. Specifically, non-RT has a lower payout rate than RT1.
Therefore, in the 37th embodiment, when moving to non-RT and inside 1BB, in order to approach the ball payout rate in RT1 and inside 1BB, when the pushing order bell is won (small win A01 to small win C24 condition device is activated) Then, the order of pressing the correct answer is notified at a predetermined rate (instruction function is activated).
Also, non-RT has a non-winning role, and non-RT and non-AT requires a push to avoid winning a prize of 1BB when the role is non-winning. Therefore, in order to encourage the transition from non-RT to RT1, when AT is started in non-RT, a 1BB win is instructed in a game in which 1BB can be won.
It should be noted that the set number during 1BB operation and inside RB is substantially the same as the set number during RT1 and inside 1BB. Therefore, if the AT is executed while the 1BB is in operation and inside the RB, the same number of balls can be obtained as if the AT is executed during the RT1 and the inside of the 1BB.

Here, the ball payout rate and the like for non-RT and RT1 will be described.
For non-RT, as described above, the non-winning probability is "3638/65536". On the other hand, the non-winning probability in RT1 is "0". In addition, the probability of winning a minor combination is the same between non-RT and RT1. Therefore, the ball output rate is higher for RT1 than for non-RT.
Here, the "out put rate" is defined as "the number of out balls/the number of in balls", as in the twenty-third embodiment described above. The "in number" refers to the number of bets (predetermined number), which is "3" when the accessory is not activated.

Also, the "out number" refers to the expected value of the number of payouts. For example, when the pressing order bell is won, the correct pressing order is set at a rate of "1/6", and the 7-card combination is awarded. In addition, if the first stop is correct and the second stop is incorrect (ratio "1/6"), one role will be won at the rate of "1/2", and the rate will be lost at the rate of "1/2". shall be Furthermore, in the case of the first stop incorrect answer (proportion of "2/3"), the ratio of "1/8" will result in winning one prize, and the ratio of "7/8" will result in a loss.

Furthermore, when the replay symbol combination is stopped and displayed, the first method is to set the out number in the current game to "0" and the in number in the next game to "0". Secondly, there is a method of setting the number of outs in the current game to "3" and the number of ins in the next game to "3". In the following example, the latter is used for calculation.
Furthermore, although the ball payout rate differs depending on settings 1 to 6, the ball payout rate is calculated using setting 1 as an example.

The expected payout number of non-RT is as follows.
(a) Expected number of payouts based on replay 8978/65536
(b) Expected payout number based on push order bell 45216/65536 x (7 x 1/6 + 1 x 1/2 x 1/6 + 1 x 1/3 x 1/8 + 1 x 1/3 x 1/8)
(c) Expected payout number based on small combination D 1840/65536×1×4
It should be noted that when the small combination D condition device is activated, the one-piece combination is awarded with "PB=1".
(d) Expected payout number based on small combination E and small combination F 340/65536×1+4/65536×7
It should be noted that when the small combination E condition device is activated, the one-piece combination wins with "PB=1".
From the above, the expected payout number for non-RT is approximately "1.4488".
Therefore, the payout rate is
1.4488/3≈0.4829 (48.29%)
becomes.

On the other hand, in RT1, only the probability of winning the replay is different.
In RT1, the expected payout number based on the replay is
12616/65536
is.
Therefore, the expected payout number at RT1 is approximately "1.6153".
Therefore, the payout rate is
1.6153/3≈0.5384 (53.84%)
becomes.

In addition, the difference in the expected payout number between RT1 and non-RT is
1.6153 - 1.4488 = 0.1665
becomes.
Therefore, in order to increase the payout number expected value by "0.1665" when the press order bell is won, if the correct press order is notified at a rate of once every x times,
45216/65536×7×1/x=0.1665
should be satisfied.

Note that, with the above formula, it is not possible to calculate an accurate value for making the non-RT ball payout rate and the RT1 ball payout rate the same. Since the probability of the correct answer order becomes low, it is necessary to subtract that amount from the probability of the incorrect answer order.) However, in order to simplify the calculation formula, an approximate value is calculated.
Therefore,
x≈29
becomes.
That is, when the push order bell is won, if the correct push order is notified at a rate of once in 29 times (about 3.45%), the expected payout number (ball payout rate) is approximately the same for non-RT and RT1. It becomes possible to

For this reason, in the thirty-seventh embodiment, during RT1 and 1BB non-inside, the correct pressing order is not reported (indicating function is not activated) when the pressing order bell wins unless AT is in progress. On the other hand, in the non-RT and 1BB non-inside, the correct pressing order is reported (the instruction function is activated) at a rate of about 3.45%.
In order to control in this way, for example, when the pressing order bell is won, a lottery is executed with a probability of about 3.45%, and when the lottery is won, the correct pressing order is notified. .

Secondly, since the total input number of the pressing order bell is "45216" as described above, the correct pressing order is reported for the input number corresponding to "1560", which corresponds to about 3.45% of that. can be set in advance.
For example, since the total value of the set number of the small winning combination B24 "1520" and the total number of values "10×4" of the small winning combination C15 to small winning combination C24 is "1560", the small winning combination B24 and the small winning combination C15 to small winning combination For example, it may be set in advance so that the correct answer pressing order is notified when the combination C24 is won.

In the thirty-seventh embodiment, it is assumed that when RT1 and inside 1BB are reached, the game is completed while still inside 1BB without winning 1BB.
Also, in RT1 and 1BB, the probability of non-winning is "0" as described above, so there is no case where 1BB wins based on non-winning of a role. Within RT1 and 1BB, 1BB has the possibility of winning when the small combination D condition device is activated. Therefore, when the small combination D condition device is activated, the pressing order for not winning 1BB but for winning the one-piece combination (with PB=1) is reported. This point is the same as during non-RT.

In the non-RT and 1BB non-internal state, based on the fact that the pattern symbol combination is stopped, after the RT1 and 1BB non-internal state, the following will occur.
First, in RT1 and 1BB non-inside, in a game in which winning numbers "4" to "21" are won (a game in which 1BB and replay are duplicately won), replay always wins, and 1BB never wins. Also, in the game, there is no case where the instruction function is activated or the image display device 23 suggests a specific pressing order. Therefore, in the game, regardless of the pressing order of the stop switch 42, the replay always wins, and there is no case where 1BB wins. Then, from the next game onwards, it will be RT1 and inside 1BB.
In addition, during RT1 and 1BB non-inside, in games where winning numbers "94" to "97" are won (games in which 1BB and small combination D are duplicated), a pushing order to avoid winning 1BB is instructed. Therefore, there is no case where 1BB wins if the pushing order is followed.

As described above, in the thirty-seventh embodiment, the following is executed as the actuation of the instruction function and the effect of suggesting the pressing order. It should be noted that the operation of the instruction function and the effect of suggesting the pressing order can be executed only in the advantageous section, and the operation of the instruction function and the effect of suggesting the pressing order cannot be executed in the non-advantageous section (normal section). In the following, it is assumed that the operation of the instruction function and the performance suggesting the pressing order are performed in the advantageous section.
(1) Non-RT a) Non-AT medium Small hand D When the device is activated, the instruction function is operated to win a single hand (not to win 1BB), and the pushing order for winning a single hand is notified. .
In addition, when the small win A1 to small win C24 condition device is activated, the instruction function is activated at a predetermined rate (1 time in 29 times in the above example) in order to bring the ball output rate close to that of RT1, and the 7-card win is won. It notifies the pressing order to cause. However, as will be described later, there may be cases where the pointing function is not activated.
b) AT medium and small hand A1 to small hand C24 conditions When the device is activated, the instruction function is activated and the pushing order for winning the 7-card hand is notified. However, as will be described later, there may be cases where the pointing function is not activated.
Also, when the small combination D condition device is activated, a pushing order suggesting effect for winning 1BB is executed (may be executed during the AT precursor). In this case, "7" is displayed on the instruction monitor.

(2) During RT1 a) When the non-AT medium and small hand D condition device is activated, the instruction function is operated to win a single hand (not to win 1BB), and the pushing order for winning a single hand is notified.
b) AT medium and small hand A1 to small hand C24 conditions When the device is activated, the instruction function is activated and the pushing order for winning the 7-card hand is notified. However, as will be described later, there may be cases where the pointing function is not activated.
In addition, when the small combination D condition device is activated, an instruction function is operated to win a single combination (not to win 1BB), and the pressing order for winning a single combination is reported.

The instructed accessory ratio should be less than 70% in 175000 games. Therefore, when the instructed role ratio in 175,000 games is a predetermined value or more (for example, 68% or more), the pushing order bell For example, the operation of the instruction function at the time of winning is not executed.
Alternatively, a conditional device is provided such that when the stop switch 42 is operated in the order of pressing the correct answer, a small winning combination of 1 or 3 is won, and the designated role ratio is a predetermined value or more (for example, 68% or more). ), the instruction function is not activated for the 7-card hand, but the instruction function may be activated when the conditional device that enables the winning of the 1-card hand or the 3-handed hand is activated.
Also, when the instructed role ratio is equal to or higher than a predetermined value (for example, 68% or higher), the instruction function is not operated, but for example, when the minor role A1 condition device is activated, the image is displayed as "1.?.?" Then, the notification is executed to increase the winning probability of the 7-card combination as compared to the case where the instruction function is not activated.

If the specification is set as in the thirty-seventh embodiment, the winning probability of replay can be set low even during 1BB. As a result, the winning probability of the pressing order bell can be increased accordingly, so that the game machine can have a high instantaneous rate.
In addition, when the small combination D condition device is activated, it is possible to avoid winning 1BB by activating the instruction function. can. However, when compared with the 38th embodiment described later, the possibility of erroneously winning 1BB is higher than in the 38th embodiment.

As is clear from the thirty-seventh embodiment, the pointing function may be operated even during non-AT. On the other hand, there may be cases where the instruction function is not activated even during AT.
Therefore, "non-AT" is not necessarily a game state in which the instruction function is not activated. Similarly, "AT" is not necessarily a gaming state that activates the pointing function.
However, it is clear that during the non-AT period, the percentage of not activating the pointing function is higher than the percentage of activating the pointing function when a winning number capable of activating the pointing function is won.
Similarly, during AT, it is clear that the ratio of activating the indicating function is higher than the percentage of not activating the indicating function when winning numbers that can activate the indicating function are won.
Here, the above-mentioned "proportion of activating (not activating) the instruction function" particularly indicates the rate when the minor combination A to minor combination C condition device is activated (when the bell is won in the order of pressing).
In other words, the ratio (100%) of activating the instruction function to avoid winning 1BB when the small win D condition device is activated in non-AT, and the ratio of activating the instruction function when the small win D condition device is activated in AT ( 100%) are the same. Here, in AT and RT1, when the small combination D condition device is activated, the instruction function is activated so as to avoid the winning of 1BB. On the other hand, in non-RT and AT, when the small combination D condition device is activated, the instruction function is operated so as to prompt the winning of 1BB.

It should be noted that the ratio of activating the pointing function in non-AT is not always constant, and in the thirty-seventh embodiment, the ratio of activating the pointing function is higher in non-RT than in RT1. Specifically, in RT1, as a general rule, the rate at which the indication function is activated when the minor combination A to minor combination C condition device is activated during non-AT is "0". On the other hand, in the case of non-RT and non-AT, the instruction function is operated at a predetermined rate (in the above example, once every 29 times) when the small win A to minor win C condition device is activated.
In addition, in the above interpretation, since the instruction-inclusive accessory ratio in 175,000 games was always at a predetermined value (for example, 68% or more), the instruction function could hardly be operated even during AT. Extremely rare cases are excluded.

The non-AT of the thirty-seventh embodiment as described above (the state in which the ratio of not activating the instruction function is higher than the ratio of activating the instruction function when winning a winning number capable of activating the instruction function) is defined as " It may be referred to as "first notification control state".
In addition, the AT of the thirty-seventh embodiment (the state in which the ratio of activating the instruction function is higher than the ratio of not activating the instruction function when winning a winning number capable of activating the instruction function) is referred to as the "second notification It may be referred to as "control state".
In any case, in the thirty-seventh embodiment, "non-AT" is a gaming state that has both a case where the pointing function is not activated and a case where the pointing function is activated. Similarly, "AT" is a game state that has both a case where the pointing function is not activated and a case where the pointing function is activated.

<38th Embodiment>
The thirty-eighth embodiment confirms which RT is the current RT in the first game of the advantageous section, and executes determination (preferential treatment, cold treatment, etc.) related to AT according to the RT. "Determination regarding AT (preferential treatment, cold treatment, etc.)" relates to the number of AT ceiling games in the following example.
In the thirty-eighth embodiment, an AT ceiling game number is provided. Here, the "AT ceiling game number" means the maximum (upper limit) number of games that can be reached without winning the AT in non-AT during the advantageous section. When the AT ceiling game number is reached in non-AT, it is decided to execute AT (here, it means "first stage AT" described later), and (first stage) AT is activated. In addition, when the AT ceiling game number is reached, the AT (first stage) may be activated immediately, or the AT (first stage) may be activated via a predetermined number of games. good too.
In addition, in the thirty-eighth embodiment, the AT includes a first-stage AT and a second-stage AT. The AT in the first stage is the AT drawn when 1BB is not activated. When the AT of the first stage is won and the game shifts to the 1BB game, the AT of the second stage is drawn during the 1BB game while the AT of the first stage is executed during the 1BB game. The AT of the first stage ends with the end of the 1BB game. When the second stage AT is won, the second stage AT is executed when the 1BB is not activated after the end of the 1BB game.

FIG. 303 is an RT transition diagram in the thirty-eighth embodiment.
Here, in the thirty-seventh embodiment, only when the gaming state is non-RT, 1BB is won after the execution of AT, but 1BB is not won when staying in RT1.
On the other hand, in the thirty-eighth embodiment, if the 1BB (RT2 in FIG. 303) is in an advantageous section and the AT of the first stage is not won, the 1BB is not allowed to win. For example, similarly to the thirty-seventh embodiment, when the small combination D condition device is activated, the pressing order that does not allow 1BB to be won is reported.
On the other hand, in the inside of 1BB (RT2 in FIG. 303), when the first stage AT is won, 1BB is won regardless of staying at any RT, and the first stage AT is executed in the 1BB game. . Furthermore, during the AT and 1BB game (in particular, RT3 during the inside of RB, which will be described later), it is decided by lottery or the like whether to execute the second stage AT. Then, when the lottery is won, the AT of the second stage is executed in RT1 or RT2 after the 1BB game ends. On the other hand, when the lottery is not won, the AT of the first stage is ended at the end of the 1BB game. That is, in this case, the process does not shift to the second stage AT.

As shown in FIG. 303, non-RT, RT1 and RT2 are provided as RTs when 1BB is not activated (during a normal game). Non-RT is a game state (one type of RT) that shifts after RWM initialization, and RT1 is RT during 1BB non-internal that shifts after 1BB game ends. RT2 is an RT inside 1BB that moves when winning 1BB in non-RT or RT1.

When 1BB wins in RT2, it shifts to 1BB operation and RB non-inside. In the 1BB game of the thirty-eighth embodiment, the general game is first executed, and the RB lottery is executed in this general game. If the RB is won, the game moves to RT3 (1BB active and inside RB). Then, when the RB that has the win over wins, the operation shifts to 1BB operation and RB operation.
The 1BB operation is set when the number of coins obtained in the 1BB game reaches a predetermined number. Further, the RB operation ends after two games or two wins, and when the end condition of the 1BB operation is not satisfied when the RB operation ends, the 1BB operation and the RB non-inside operation are performed again.
When the 1BB operation termination condition is satisfied, the 1BB operation is terminated and the process proceeds to RT1 (RT after 1BB). When 1BB is won in RT1, the game moves to RT2.

Although the description of the types and numbers of the conditional devices in the thirty-eighth embodiment is omitted, they may be the same as the conditional devices and numbers described in the thirty-seventh embodiment, for example.
For example, in FIG. 303, non-RTs (RTs after RWM initialization) can be set to the numbers shown in FIGS. Also, in FIG. 303, the numbers of RT1 (RT after 1BB) may be the numbers shown in FIGS. Furthermore, in FIG. 303, the numbers assigned to RT2 (RT inside 1BB) are the numbers shown in FIGS. 292 and 293. FIG.

Further, in FIG. 303, the numbers during 1BB operation and not inside RB are the numbers shown in FIG. 294 and FIG.
In addition, in FIG. 303, the numbers of RT3 (in operation of 1BB and inside of RB) may be the numbers shown in FIGS.
Furthermore, in FIG. 303, the numbers for 1BB operation and RB operation are set to numbers shown in FIGS. 298 and 299. FIG.

In the thirty-eighth embodiment, when AT is won in non-RT or RT1, it waits until 1BB is won.
Also, in RT2, when the AT of the first stage is not won, an instruction function is operated to avoid winning of 1BB as in the 37th embodiment when the minor combination D condition device is activated.
Then, when the AT of the first stage is won, an effect suggesting the winning of 1BB is executed when the small winning combination D condition device is activated (an effect that the player can understand the operation mode for winning the 1BB). .
The same applies when AT is won in non-RT or RT1 and then 1BB is won.

In addition, when winning the second stage AT in 1BB operation and inside RB (RT3), ending the 1BB game and shifting to RT1, and executing the second stage AT in this RT1, the second stage AT Even if 1BB is won during the execution of the stage AT and shifts to RT2, the effect for winning 1BB is not output when the small combination D condition device is activated, and the 1st stage AT is won. The instruction function is operated so as to avoid winning 1BB as in the case of non-existence.

In the thirty-eighth embodiment, even if the power is turned on/off or the settings are changed, the winning information of 1BB is not erased. Therefore, even if the power is turned on/off or the settings are changed, it does not shift to non-RT. After factory shipment, the transition to non-RT is limited to the case where the entire range of the storage area of the RWM 53 is initialized when an unintended event such as the RWM 53 is inserted or removed. When the RWM 53 is removed and inserted, the entire range of the storage area of the RWM 53 including the set value information is initialized as a countermeasure against fraud.
Here, in this embodiment, the main CPU 55, RWM 53, and ROM 54 in FIG. erased). Therefore, if the entire range of the storage area of the RWM 53 is initialized, there is a possibility that fraudulent acts such as cheating have been performed.

FIG. 304 is a time chart showing the relationship between the RT transition, the start and end of the advantageous section, and the presence or absence of AT winning in the thirty-eighth embodiment.
The example of the RT transition diagram shown in FIG. 303 shows that when RB wins during 1BB operation and RB inside (RT3), it shifts to 1BB operation and RB operation, but in fact, RB inside RB To continue a game while operating 1BB and inside an RB without winning a prize.

Also, as described above, in the advantageous section and when 1BB is not activated (non-RT, RT1, or RT2), the first stage AT lottery is executed, and when the first stage AT lottery is won, 1BB is awarded. Then, the AT lottery of the second stage is executed in the RB of the 1BB game. When the second stage AT lottery is won, the second stage AT is started at RT1 after the end of the 1BB game. On the other hand, when the second stage AT lottery is not won in the RB of the 1BB game, the first stage AT is terminated with the end of the 1BB game (1BB operation), and the second stage AT is not executed.

In FIG. 304, "non-advantageous" indicates a non-advantageous section (normal section). Similarly, "advantageous" indicates an advantageous section. In addition, in the example of FIG. 304, for the sake of simplification of explanation, it is assumed that in the non-advantageous section, the advantageous section shift lottery is won in the first game, and when the transfer to the advantageous section is decided, the next game will be the advantageous section. . However, actually, in the non-advantageous section, the advantageous section transition lottery is performed based on the winning combination of the game, so winning the advantageous section transition lottery is not always the first game in the non-advantageous section.
In the normal route, the only non-RT time is when it is first shipped from the factory. The first non-RT game is a non-advantageous section, but when the advantageous section shift lottery is won in the first game and the shift to the advantageous section is determined, the second game is shifted to the advantageous section. Also, if 1BB is won in non-RT, the game shifts to RT2 (RT in 1BB inside) from the next game. Then, when the first step AT lottery is won in RT2, 1BB is awarded. When 1BB wins, the game shifts to RB non-inside of the 1BB game. In the non-inside game of the 1BB game, in this example, the second stage AT lottery is not executed. When the RB is won and the game shifts to the inside of the RB of the 1BB game, the AT lottery of the second stage is executed.
In FIG. 304, four types of route A, route B, route C, and route E are shown in the RB of the 1BB game.

Route A shows an example in which the AT of the second stage is won during the RB of a 1BB game. In this case, when the 1BB game ends and shifts to RT1, the AT of the second stage is started. In this example, 1BB is won during the second stage AT, and after shifting to RT2, the second stage AT ends in RT2. When ending the second stage AT in RT2, the advantageous section is ended at the same time. Then, in the next game, the advantageous interval transition lottery is executed again, and when the advantageous interval transition lottery is won and the transition to the advantageous interval is determined, the transition to the advantageous interval is made.
In the thirty-eighth embodiment, if the advantageous section is to be ended intentionally, as shown in FIGS. 149 and 150 (23rd embodiment), the advantageous section end preparation ( M_ADVEND_STBY) saves "1" in the advantageous zone clear counter. As a result, in the advantageous interval clear counter management, the advantageous interval clear counter value after subtraction becomes "0", and the advantageous interval end processing (RWM area related to the instruction function (for example, the main game state, the storage area for the difference counter, etc.) initialization) is executed.
Route A is an example in which the first game in the advantageous section is RT2. When the first game in the advantageous section is RT2, the number of AT ceiling games is set high (for example, "777" games).

Route B shows an example (1) when the second stage AT is not won in the RB of the 1BB game. In this case, even if the 1BB game is ended and the game is shifted to RT1, the second stage AT does not start. Then, when the AT of the second stage is not won in the RB of the 1BB game, the end lottery of the advantageous section is executed. Route B is an example in which the end lottery for the advantageous section was not won. In this case, as shown in route B, when 1BB is won in RT1 (at the end of RT1), the advantageous section is terminated. Then, an advantageous zone shift lottery is executed in the first game of RT2 of the next game, and when the advantageous zone shift lottery is won and the shift to the advantageous zone is determined, the player is shifted to the advantageous zone. In this case, as in route A, the first game in the advantageous section is RT2, so the number of AT ceiling games is the same as in route A (for example, "777" game).

Route C shows an example (2) when the second stage AT is not won in the RB of the 1BB game.
Route B and route C both show an example in which the second stage AT is not won in the RB of a 1BB game, but route C executes an effect in which the hero loses in a special way, for example. This is an example in which the player wins a lottery as to whether or not to play, and the effect is executed. In such a case, it is set so as to give preferential treatment to the number of AT ceiling games. Here, there is a flag (AT ceiling preferential treatment flag) for determining whether or not to give preferential treatment to the number of AT ceiling games. When a special effect such as is executed, the AT ceiling preferential treatment flag is turned on.

In Route C, as in Route B, AT does not start even if the 1BB game ends and shifts to RT1. However, in the route C, since the AT ceiling preferential treatment flag is ON, it is set to end the advantageous section when the 1BB game ends. In other words, when the AT ceiling preferential treatment flag is off, it is set to maintain the advantageous section at the end of the 1BB game.
After the end of the 1BB game, it shifts to RT1, but in the first game of this RT1, an advantageous zone shift lottery is executed, and when the advantageous zone shift lottery is won and the shift to the advantageous zone is decided, the advantageous zone is entered. migrate. In this case, unlike the route B, since the first game in the advantageous section is RT1, the number of AT ceiling games is set low (for example, "333" games).

Route E shows an example of an irregular bonus. As described above, when the first stage AT lottery is won in RT2, 1BB is awarded. is (accidentally) awarded. In this case, the AT lottery of the second stage is not executed or treated coldly inside the RB of the 1BB game, and the advantageous section end lottery is not executed. Therefore, after the end of the 1BB game, even if it shifts to RT1 and further to RT2, the advantageous section remains.

Route D indicates a special route different from the normal route described above.
As described above, the RT information and the winning carry-over information of 1BB are maintained when the setting change is executed. However, since the information related to the advantageous section is erased by changing the setting, it shifts to the non-advantageous section. Therefore, as shown in RT2 at the beginning of the normal route, when the setting is changed in RT2 and in the advantageous section, the first game is in the non-advantageous section, but the advantageous section transition lottery is performed in this first game. When the lottery for transition to the advantageous section is won and the transition to the advantageous section is determined, the game is shifted to the advantageous section from the next game.
Therefore, when it becomes non-RT after it is installed in the hall, there is a high possibility that it is a fraudulent act. Therefore, the advantageous section transition lottery is executed in non-RT, and when the transition is made to the advantageous section, the number of AT ceiling games is set as high as in route A (for example, "777" games).

Furthermore, when moving from a non-advantageous section to an advantageous section in non-RT, store the RT information of the first game in the advantageous section, first shift to 1BB game, and inside the RB of 1BB game (RT3) When the transfer is made, the AT in the second stage is not elected (AT not elected (3)). Furthermore, after ending the advantageous section within the RB of the 1BB game and making it a non-advantageous section, an advantageous section transition lottery is executed in the non-advantageous section, the advantageous section transition lottery is won, and the transition to the advantageous section is determined. Then, the next game is shifted to the advantageous section. When shifting to an advantageous section during the RB of a 1BB game, the number of AT ceiling games is set high.
By setting in this way, it is possible to prevent the unintentional and easy acquisition of the put out ball by a fraudulent act.
Even when the special route is selected, after winning 1BB and becoming inside 1BB, if the setting is changed, it is possible to shift to RT2 (normal route).

As described above, in the example of FIG. 304, the number of AT ceiling games is varied depending on which RT the first game in the advantageous section is.
in particular,
When the first game in the advantageous section is non-RT (special route): AT ceiling height When the first game in the advantageous section is RT1 (Route C): AT low ceiling When the first game in the advantageous section is RT2 (Route A, B): AT ceiling height When the first game in the advantageous section is 1BB game (Route D): AT ceiling height is set.
By setting in this way, it is possible to vary the expected value until winning AT, depending on which RT is the first game in the advantageous section.

Therefore, for example, a lottery or the like is executed as to whether or not to give preferential treatment to decisions regarding AT, and when the lottery is won, a predetermined flag is turned on. When the predetermined flag is ON, the advantageous section is terminated at a predetermined RT (inside the RB of the 1BB game in the above example). Then, if it is set so that the advantageous section transition lottery is won immediately after the end of the advantageous section, it is possible to shift to the advantageous section at a desired RT. This allows arbitrary preferential treatment of decisions on ATs.

In the above example, when the first game in the advantageous section is RT1, the AT ceiling is lowered, and when the first game in the advantageous section is RT other than RT1, the AT ceiling is raised, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the first game in the advantageous section is RT1, the AT ceiling is lowered, when the first game in the advantageous section is RT2, the AT ceiling is set to normal, and the first game in the advantageous section is RT1 and RT2. If the RT is other than the above, the AT ceiling may be increased, or the like. In addition, not limited to the AT ceiling, when the first game in the advantageous section is RT1, the AT winning probability is set to high probability, and when the first game in the advantageous section is RT2, the AT winning probability is set to normal probability, and the advantageous section When the first game is RT other than RT1 and RT2, setting the AT winning probability to a low probability.
In the thirty-eighth embodiment, an example is shown in which AT determination (preferential treatment, cold treatment, etc.) is executed according to the RT of the first game in the advantageous section, but not limited to this, in the game won in the advantageous section AT decisions may be made depending on the conditional devices and RTs in action.
Also, the RT information at the time of transition to the advantageous section may be held, and determination (preferential treatment, cold treatment, etc.) relating to AT may be executed in accordance with the RT information in the first game of the advantageous section.

<Thirty-ninth embodiment>
In the thirty-seventh embodiment described above, the prescribed number when the accessory is not activated is "3" in any gaming state (RT) (see FIG. 266, etc.).
On the other hand, in the thirty-ninth embodiment, the game is executed with the prescribed number of "2" until the 1BB is won, and after the 1BB is won (inside the 1BB), the game is executed with the prescribed number of "3". It is assumed.
When 1BB is won with the prescribed number of "2", 1BB can be won only in the game with the prescribed number of "2". In other words, after winning 1BB with the prescribed number of "2", when the game is executed with the prescribed number of "3", the 1BB will not win even if the game is not won. .
Therefore, in the thirty-ninth embodiment, after winning 1BB with the prescribed number of "2", the game is executed with the prescribed number of "3". There is no case where 1BB wins in the game inside 1BB with the specified number "3", and non-AT and AT are repeated while still inside 1BB. Note that the specifications for preventing 1BB from winning due to the different prescribed numbers are the same as those of the above-described twelfth embodiment (FIG. 58).

The pattern arrangement of the reels 31 in the thirty-ninth embodiment is the same as in the thirty-seventh embodiment (Fig. 265).
Also, in the thirty-ninth embodiment, the combination of roles is different from that in the thirty-seventh embodiment.
Figures 305 to 311 are diagrams showing the combination of symbols for a winning combination, the number of payouts, etc. in the thirty-ninth embodiment.
In the thirty-ninth embodiment, two types of 1BBA and 1BBB are provided as 1BB. As shown in FIG. 305, when the accessory is not activated, 1BBA is 1BB drawn in the game with the prescribed number of "3", and 1BBB is 1BB drawn in the game with the prescribed number of "2".
In the thirty-ninth embodiment, during 1BB operation, RB is continuously activated (without stopping the symbol combination corresponding to RB), so there is no symbol combination corresponding to RB.

In the thirty-ninth embodiment, Replay 01 to Replay 12 are provided.
Here, the replay 01 of the winning combination number "003" to the replay 07 of the winning combination number "027" are the same symbol combinations as the replay 01 of the winning combination number "004" to the replay 07 of the winning combination number "028" in the thirty-seventh embodiment. be.
Also, Replay 08 of winning combination number '028' to Replay 12 of winning combination number '091' are the same symbol combinations as Replay 11 of winning combination number '086' to Replay 15 of winning combination number '149' in the 37th embodiment. .

The small winning combination has a small winning combination 001 to a small winning combination 117 . Small wins 001 to 008 are different from the thirty-seventh embodiment in that they are 15-piece wins.
In addition, the small winning combination 001 of the winning combination number "092" to the small winning combination 112 of the winning combination number "215" are the same as the small winning combination 001 of the winning combination number "150" to the small winning combination 112 of the winning combination number "273" in the 37th embodiment. It is a combination of symbols.
Furthermore, the small winning combination 113 of winning combination number "216" to the small winning combination 117 of winning combination number "262" are unique to the thirty-ninth embodiment.

Figures 312 to 318 are diagrams showing condition device numbers, condition devices, winning combinations, etc. in the thirty-ninth embodiment.
First, FIG. 312 shows a condition device for a role item (especially 1BBA and 1BBB in the thirty-ninth embodiment).
The 1BBA conditional device corresponding to the accessory conditional device number "1" is the accessory conditional device that becomes operable when the 1BBA is won. When this 1BBA conditional device operates, 1BBA, which is a winning combination, can win a prize.
Similarly, the 1BBB condition device corresponding to the role condition device number "2" is a role condition device that becomes operable when 1BBB is won, and when the 1BBB condition device operates, 1BBB can be won.

1BBA condition When the device is activated, the RBA is continuously operated, and the end condition is satisfied when the payout exceeds 33 sheets. Therefore, no accessory condition device number corresponding to RBA is provided.
Similarly, when the 1BBB condition device is activated, the RBB is continuously activated, and the end condition is satisfied when more than 7 coins are paid out. Therefore, no accessory condition device number corresponding to RBB is provided.
Both RBA and RBB end after two games or two wins, or end with the end of 1BB.
When the operation of RBA or RBB is terminated and the operation termination condition of 1BB is not satisfied, RBA or RBB is activated again.

Figures 313-318 illustrate the prize and replay conditions device. Of the winning and replay condition device numbers, "1" to "16" are condition device numbers related to replay, and "17" to "70" are condition device numbers related to small wins.
The conditional device numbers "1" to "9" for the replay have winning combinations that are partially different from the conditional device numbers "1" to "9" for the replay in the 37th embodiment. The types of replays that can be stopped according to the pressing order of the stop switch 42 are the same as in the thirty-seventh embodiment. The same is true for the reel 31 on which the "blue bar" can be stopped at the right first stop.

The replay condition device number "10" is different from the replay condition device number "10" in the thirty-seventh embodiment in that the replay that stops when "red" is aligned at the first stop on the right is replay 12. differ.
The replay-related device number "11" is the same as the replay-related device number "11" in the thirty-seventh embodiment.

The replay condition device number "12" is different from the replay condition device number "14" in the 37th embodiment in terms of the winning hand included in the 37th embodiment, but the chance number that can appear is the 37th It is the same as the condition device number "14" related to replay in the embodiment.
Similarly, the replay-related device number "13" is different from the replay-related device number "15" in the thirty-seventh embodiment in that the winning hand included is different from that in the thirty-seventh embodiment, but the chance number that can appear is is the same as the replay condition device number "15" in the thirty-seventh embodiment.
Replay condition device numbers "14" to "16" are different from the replay condition device numbers "17" to "19" in the 37th embodiment in terms of winning hands included in the 37th embodiment. , and possible stop forms (upper left cherry or left middle cherry) are the same as the condition device numbers "17" to "19" for replay in the thirty-seventh embodiment.

The condition device related to the pushing order bell in the 39th embodiment is provided with a small combination A01 to small combination A24 condition device and a small combination B01 to small combination B24 condition device. A minor C24 conditional device is not provided.
The small winning combination A01 to small winning combination A24 conditional devices are the same as the small winning combination A01 to small winning combination A24 conditional device in the 37th embodiment, and the winnable combination corresponding to the pressing order of the stop switch 42 is the same. is set to However, in the thirty-ninth embodiment, during 1BB operation (during RBA operation and RBB operation), there is no case where the minor combination A01 to minor combination A24 condition device operates (as shown in FIGS. 331 to 334 described later, Winning numbers "19" to "42" are not drawn during 1BB operation), which is different from the thirty-seventh embodiment.

In addition, the small winning combination B01 to small winning combination B24 conditional device includes a small winning combination 113 as a winning combination and a small winning combination 116 as a winning combination, respectively, in contrast to the small winning combination B01 to small combination B24 conditional device in the thirty-seventh embodiment. It differs from the thirty-seventh embodiment in that it is not included. However, in the small winning combination B01 to small winning combination B24 conditional device, the winable winning combination corresponding to the pressing order of the stop switch 42 is set to be the same as the small winning combination B01 to small winning combination B24 conditional device in the 37th embodiment. there is In addition, in the thirty-ninth embodiment, during 1BB operation (during RBA operation and RBB operation), there is no case where the small win B01 to small win B24 condition device operates (as shown in FIGS. 331 to 334 described later, Winning numbers "43" to "66" are not drawn during 1BB operation), which is different from the thirty-seventh embodiment.

The small win C condition device is a condition device that includes small wins 113 and 114 as winning hands and is "PB≠1". When the small win C condition device is activated, it is possible to stop "watermelon A/B"-"watermelon A/B"-"watermelon A/B" (watermelon alignment) by eye pressing.
The small combination D condition device includes a small combination 115 as a winning combination, and is a condition that makes it possible to stop "Watermelon A/B"-"Watermelon A/B"-"Replay" (watermelon collapsing), which is a strong chance eye A. It is a device. The strong chance eye A corresponds to a small winning combination 115 (three-card winning combination).
The small winning combination E condition device includes a small winning combination 116 as a winning combination, and is a condition that makes it possible to stop "replay"-"watermelon A/B"-"watermelon A/B" (watermelon collapsing), which is a strong chance eye B. It is a device. The strong chance eye B corresponds to the small winning combination 116 (three-card winning combination).

The small winning combination F condition device includes small winning combinations 009 to 056 (1-card combination) as winning combinations, but even if the symbol combinations of all these combinations are added up, the symbol arrangement shows "PB≠1". Therefore, when the small combination F condition device is activated, the eye-pushing is required, and the combination is "PB≠1".
The small winning combination G condition device includes all the small winning combinations 001 to 116 except for the small winning combination 117 as the winning combination. to small winning combination 008) (PB=1). Further, according to the pressing order of the stop switch 42, for example, when the pressing order is 123, the small winning combination 001 is awarded, when the pressing order is 132, the small winning combination 002 is awarded, and so on.
The small winning combination H condition device includes small winning combinations 009 to 114 and a small winning combination 117 drawn only during 1BB operation. Since the small winning combination 117 is drawn only during the 1BB operation, the small winning combination 117 may be referred to as an "increasing combination". When the small winning combination H condition device is activated, "PB=1" wins a small winning combination 117 (one-piece winning combination).

FIGS. 319 to 334 are diagrams showing the number table (winning probability for each winning number) in the thirty-ninth embodiment. In the thirty-ninth embodiment, when the accessory is not activated, the game can be played with either the specified number of "2" or the specified number of "3". For this reason, in the thirty-ninth embodiment, in the gaming state when the accessory is not activated, the number tables for both the specified number "2" and the specified number "3" are displayed.
In the thirty-ninth embodiment, in the non-RT and non-internal middle game, the game is executed with the prescribed number of "2", and when 1BBB is won, the game shifts to RT1 from the next game. At RT1, the game is executed with the specified number "3".

First, FIG. 319 and FIG. 320 are diagrams showing input numbers in the non-RT and non-internal medium and the prescribed number "2".
In FIG. 319, only 1BBB is selected as 1BB (1BBA is not selected) for non-RT and non-internal medium and specified number "2". As for the replay, only replay A is selected by lottery. In the non-RT and non-internal medium and the prescribed number "2", the winning probability of 1BBB is "16384/65536", so 1BBB is won early.
In a non-RT, non-internal game and a game with a prescribed number of "2", 1BBB may be won in a game in which 1BBB is won. If 1BBB is not won in a game in which 1BBB is won, the game moves to RT1 and 1BBB from the next game, and thereafter 1BBB is not won (however, not limited to this, 1BBB can be won). is also good.). On the other hand, when 1BBB is won in a game in which 1BBB is won, the player returns to the non-RT and non-internal game via the 1BB game.
Figures 321 and 322 are diagrams showing the numbers placed in the non-RT and non-internal medium and the prescribed number "3". As described above, it is desired to play the game with the specified number of "2" in the non-RT and non-internal mode, but the game can also be played with the specified number of "3". Therefore, when the game is executed with the prescribed number of "3" in non-RT and non-internal, the winning probability is as shown in FIGS.

In addition, in the number table, when the specified number is not intended in the game state, it is described as "irregular".
In the non-RT and non-internal medium and the prescribed number "3", 1BBB is not drawn and 1BBA is drawn. Since the winning probability of 1BBA is "17065/65536", 1BBA is won early. Details will be described later, but when 1BBA is won in non-RT and non-inside, and the winning of 1BBA is carried over, the next game shift remains non-RT and does not shift to RT1.

Figures 323 and 324 are diagrams showing the set numbers inside RT1 and 1BBB and at the prescribed number "3".
Here, it is set so that 1BBB, which is won with the specified number of "2", is not won unless the game with the specified number of "2" is played. Similarly, 1BBA winning with the prescribed number of "3" is set so as not to win unless the game with the prescribed number of "3" is played.
Therefore, if 1BBB is won in non-RT and non-internal and specified number "2", and if it becomes RT1 and 1BBB internal, if the game is executed with the specified number "3", 1BBB will win. no.

As shown in FIG. 323, in RT1 and 1BBB inside and the prescribed number "3", the probability of non-winning is "17065/65536". .
In the thirty-ninth embodiment, it is assumed that the game continues to be executed within RT1 and 1BBB and with the prescribed number "3". Run until satisfied. In other words, it is assumed that non-AT and AT repeat during RT1 and 1BBB and in the prescribed number "3".

Figures 325 and 326 are diagrams showing placement numbers in non-RT and inside 1BBA and at the prescribed number "3". During non-RT and non-inside, 1BBA wins in the game with the specified number "3", so in non-RT and 1BBA inside and the specified number "3", when the role is not won, 1BBA Winning is possible.
Figures 327 and 328 are diagrams showing the placement numbers in non-RT and inside 1BBA and at the prescribed number "2". As described above, 1BBA is a special combination that is won with the prescribed number of "3", so in the gaming state with this prescribed number of "2", 1BBA will not win even if the role is not won.

Figures 329 and 330 are diagrams showing the set numbers inside RT1 and 1BBB and at the prescribed number "2". As described above, in the thirty-ninth embodiment, it is assumed that the game is played at RT1, inside 1BBB, and with the specified number "3". However, during RT1 and 1BBB, the game can be played even with the specified number "2", so the set number corresponding to this specified number "2" is also specified.
In RT1 and inside 1BBB and the specified number "2", the non-winning probability of the role is set to "0". Therefore, even if the prescribed number is "2", there is no case where 1BBB, which carries over winning, wins.

Here, the ball payout rate in RT1 and inside 1BBB and in the prescribed number "3" (FIGS. 323 and 324) is as follows.
(a) Expected payout number based on replay 8978/65536×3 (≈0.411)
(b) Expected payout number based on push order bell 38472/65536 x (15 x 1/6 + 1 x 1/2 x 1/6 + 1 x 1/3 x 1/8 + 1 x 1/3 x 1/8) (≈1 .565)
(c) Expected number of payouts based on small combination C 656/65536×1 (≈0.01)
It should be noted that when the small combination C condition device is activated, the one-piece combination is awarded with "PB=1".
(d) Expected payout number based on small combination D and small combination E 164/65536×3×2 (≒0.015)
(e) Expected payout number based on small win G 37/65536×15 (≈0.00847)
From the above, the expected value of the number of payouts within RT1 and 1BBB and the prescribed number "3" is approximately "2".
Therefore, the payout rate is
2/3≈0.67
becomes.

On the other hand, the ball payout percentages in RT1 and 1BBB inside and the prescribed number "2" (FIGS. 329 and 330) are as follows.
(a) Expected payout number based on replay 25632/65536×3 (≈1.173)
(b) Expected number of payouts based on push order bell 9600/65536 x (15 x 1/6 + 1 x 1/2 x 1/6 + 1 x 1/3 x 1/8 + 1 x 1/3 x 1/8) (≈ 0) .391)
(c) Expected payout number based on minor combination F 30754/65536×1 (≈0.4693)
It should be noted that when the small combination F condition device is activated, the one-piece combination wins with "PB=1".
From the above, the expected value of the number of payouts within RT1 and 1BBB and the prescribed number "2" is approximately "2".

Therefore, the payout rate is
2/3≈0.67
becomes.
As a result, the ball payout rate is substantially the same regardless of whether the specified number is "2" or the specified number is "3" in RT1 and 1BBB, so there is no advantageous/disadvantageous ball payout rate.
However, the advantageous section transition lottery and the AT lottery are executed only in games with a prescribed number of "3". Therefore, there is no advantage for the player even if the game is executed with the specified number "2".

Figures 331 and 332 are diagrams showing the placement of the prescribed number "3" during RBA operation. It should be noted that while the RBA is in operation, the game can only be played with the prescribed number "3".
In non-RT and 1BBA, when the game is executed with the specified number "3", 1BBA can be won by pressing the symbol combination of 1BBA when the combination is not won. When 1BBA is won, 1BBA is in operation from the next game. During operation of 1BBA, RBA is continuously operated.
Note that the payout rate during the RBA operation is as follows.
(a) Expected number of payouts based on replay 1571/65536×3 (≈0.0719)
(b) Expected payout number based on small combination G 6450/65536×15 (≈1.476)
(c) Expected payout number based on small combination H 33045/65536×1 (≈0.504)
From the above, the expected number of payouts during RBA operation is approximately "2".
Therefore, the payout rate is
2/3≈0.67
becomes.

As a result, even if 1BBA is won by intentionally executing the game with the prescribed number "3" in non-RT, and 1BBA is won in non-RT and 1BBA inside, and 1BBA game is executed, the ball payout rate is "1", there is no benefit to the player.
Furthermore, in the 39th embodiment, the AT lottery is not executed during non-RT and non-inside game, non-RT and 1BBA inside game, and during 1BBA operation. As a result, the player cannot receive the merit of AT winning in these gaming states, so there is no merit in finishing the game in these irregular states.

However, in RT1 and 1BBB, if the player tries to insert three medals but only inserts two medals due to an operation error, the start switch 42 is operated, or the 1 bet switch 40a is changed to two. When the start switch 42 is operated only by rotating, the game may be executed with the prescribed number of "2". However, in the game, there is a disadvantage that the AT lottery is not executed. Also, in this case, the player is notified that the game has been played with the prescribed number of "2" by means of an effect which will be described later.

Figures 333 and 334 are diagrams showing the numbering at the prescribed number "3" during RBB operation. As described above, 1BBB never wins within RT1 and 1BBB. However, in the non-RT, non-internal middle and regulation number "2" games, as shown in FIG. 319, 1BBB wins alone. Therefore, in a game in which 1BBB is won alone, if the symbol combination of 1BBB is highlighted, 1BBB can be won. When 1BBB is won, the game shifts to 1BB game. In the 1BB game based on the winning of 1BBB, the RBB is continuously activated as described above. During the RBB operation, a lottery is executed according to the numbers shown in FIGS.

FIG. 335 is a diagram showing RT transitions in the thirty-ninth embodiment.
When RWM initialization is performed, go to non-RT (and non-internal). Note that "RWM initialization" in FIG. 335 means RWM initialization (at the time of occurrence of an unrecoverable error) that is performed during setting change processing when power-off recovery cannot be performed normally.
In other words, the RWM initialization shown in FIG. 335 is executed when the entire range of the RWM 53 is initialized based on the insertion or removal of the RWM 53 or the occurrence of an unrecoverable error. be. In other cases, such as turning on/off the power, or when normal setting change processing is executed, the winning carry-over information of 1BB is maintained without being erased. However, when the setting change process is executed, the winning carry-over information of 1BB may be erased.

When the RWM initialization shown in FIG. 335 is executed, the RT information is also erased, and the state becomes non-RT and non-internal.
In the non-RT and non-internal mode, as described above, it is assumed that the game is played with the specified number "2". When a game is played with the specified number "2" in non-RT and non-inside, the non-RT and non-inside is maintained until 1BBB is won. Then, when 1BBB is won, the game shifts to RT1 (inside 1BBB) from the next game. When 1BBB is won in a game in which 1BBB is won, 1BB is in operation (RBB is in operation) from the next game. In addition, as described above, in non-RT and non-internal games and games with a prescribed number of "2", there is a case where 1BBB wins in a game where 1BBB is won, so in FIG. 335, 1BBB wins and 1BB is in operation The figure shows the case of shifting to . When 1BBB wins and shifts to 1BBB operation, it becomes continuous operation of RBB. When the end conditions for 1BBB operation are satisfied, the transition is made to non-RT and non-internal.

On the other hand, if 1BBB is won in a non-RT and non-internal game with a specified number of "2", and 1BBB does not win in the game, and the game moves to RT1 and 1BBB inside, as described above, the specified number " 2" and the prescribed number of "3", the symbol combination of 1BBB is not stopped and displayed. Therefore, the inside of RT1 and 1BBB is maintained unless RWM is initialized. The market continues throughout RT1 and 1BBB inside.

On the other hand, during non-RT and non-inside, if a game is played with an unintended prescribed number "3" and 1BBA is won, the non-RT remains non-RT and shifts to non-RT and inside 1BBA from the next game. When it becomes non-RT and inside 1BBA, it does not shift to RT1 unless 1BBA is won and 1BBA game is passed.
During non-RT and inside 1BBA, it continues until the symbol combination of 1BBA is stopped (winning). When the symbol combination of 1BBA is stopped and displayed, 1BBA is in operation. During 1BBA operation, RBA is continuously operated. When the end conditions for 1BBA operation are satisfied, the transition is made to non-RT and non-internal.

Next, control processing in the thirty-ninth embodiment will be described. The control process described below shows the difference between the specified number "2" and the specified number "3".
FIG. 336 is a flow chart showing processing at the time of starting by main game state in the thirty-ninth embodiment. This process is the main process, for example, the process executed after "Yes" is determined in step S278 in FIG. 41 (eleventh embodiment). It is assumed that the combination lottery process has been executed before the process of FIG. 336 is executed.
In FIG. 336, in step S2601, it is determined whether or not 1BB has been won in the game this time. As described above, 1BB is won during non-RT and non-inside games. When it is determined that 1BB has been won in the game this time, the processing according to this flow chart is terminated, and when it is determined that 1BB has not been won, the process proceeds to step S2602. In step S2601, if 1BB has been won before the current game and it is already inside 1BB, "No" is determined.

In step S2602, it is determined whether or not the current game is in 1BB operation. When it is determined that 1BB is in operation, the process according to this flow chart is terminated, and when it is determined that 1BB is not in operation, the process advances to step S2603.
In step S2603, it is determined whether or not the prescribed number for the current game is three. If it is determined that the specified number is 3, the process advances to step S2604, and if it is determined that the specified number is not 3 (in other words, it is 2), the processing according to this flowchart ends.
In step S2604, it is determined whether or not the main game state of the current game is "0". In the thirty-ninth embodiment, the main game state is "0" when it is a non-advantageous section (normal section), and it is "1" or more when it is an advantageous section. Therefore, in step S2604, it is determined whether or not the current game is in the advantageous section. When it is determined that the main game state is "0" in step S2064, the process proceeds to step S2606, and when it is determined that the main game state is not "0", the process proceeds to step S2605.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 319 and 320, in non-RT and non-internal games and in games with a prescribed number of "2", the advantageous section lottery is not executed. When it becomes, it is a non-advantageous section (normal section). 323 and 324, when 1BBB is won and the game moves to RT1 and 1BBB inside and the prescribed number "3" from the next game, as shown in FIGS. Advantageous section lottery is executed. Furthermore, in the thirty-ninth embodiment, the advantageous section transition lottery is set with a probability of "9000/16384" when winning replays C to P, and "12000/16384" when winning small hands A to G, for example. is set. Therefore, it is set so that if one or two games are completed, the advantageous section is won.

In FIG. 336, instruction processing is executed in step S2605. Here, it is determined whether or not the current game corresponds to a game that activates the instruction function, and if it is a game that activates the instruction function, a process related to the instruction function is executed. This processing includes, for example, the pressing order instruction number setting processing shown in FIG. 48 (eleventh embodiment). Then, the process advances to step S2606.
In step S2606, start-time processing corresponding to the main game state is executed. For example, when the current game is in the main game state "0" (non-advantageous section), an advantageous section transition lottery is executed, when it is an advantageous section and non-AT, an AT lottery is executed, and when it is an advantageous section and AT AT addition lottery is executed. Then, the processing according to this flow chart ends.

As is clear from the processing in FIG. 336, when the prescribed number is "3", the start processing corresponding to the main game state is executed, but when the prescribed number is not "3" (when the number is "2"). , the start-time processing corresponding to the main game state is not executed.
Specifically, when the specified number is "2", firstly, the advantageous section transition lottery is not executed even in a non-advantageous section. This is also clear from FIGS. 319-330. Secondly, regardless of whether it is an advantageous section or not, the lottery for AT is not executed. Furthermore, thirdly, even during AT, a lottery related to AT (a lottery for increasing the number of games played during AT, etc.) is not executed.

FIG. 337 is a flow chart showing the processing at the time of total stop by main game state in the thirty-ninth embodiment. This process corresponds to the main process, for example, the game end check process in step S301 in FIG. 41 (eleventh embodiment). As shown in FIG. 50, which corresponds to the game end check process in step S301, the all-stop process includes clearing of various flags and the like, but FIG. 337 shows only the process related to the thirty-ninth embodiment.
In FIG. 337, in step S2611, it is determined whether or not 1BB has been won in the game this time. This process is similar to step S2601. When it is determined that 1BB has been won in the game this time, the process proceeds to step S2615, and when it is determined that 1BB has not been won, the process proceeds to step S2612. In step S2611, if 1BB has been won before the current game and it is already inside 1BB, "No" is determined.

In step S2612, it is determined whether or not the current game is in 1BB operation. This process is similar to step S2602. When it is determined that 1BB is in operation, the process proceeds to step S2615, and when it is determined that 1BB is not in operation, the process proceeds to step S2613.
In step S2613, it is determined whether or not the prescribed number for the current game is three. This process is similar to step S2603. If it is determined that the specified number is 3, the process proceeds to step S2614, and if it is determined that the specified number is not 3 (in other words, it is 2), the process proceeds to step S2615.

In step S2614, all-stop processing is executed according to the main game state. This processing includes, for example, update processing of the main game state, update processing related to AT (update of AT game number counter, update of AT flag, update of pullback game number counter, update of CZ game number counter, etc.). This processing corresponds to, for example, the processing of steps S951 to S956 in FIG. 149 in the twenty-third embodiment. Then, the process advances to step S2615.
In step S2615, advantageous section clear counter processing is executed. Then, the processing according to this flow chart ends.

In the above processing, the all-stop processing according to the main gaming state is executed only when the prescribed number is "3", and is not executed when the prescribed number is "2". Therefore, for example, when the game is executed with the prescribed number "2" during AT, the AT game number counter is not updated. However, as will be described later, the AT acquisition number (a value based on a difference number counter described later) is updated.
On the other hand, regardless of whether the specified number is "2" or "3", the advantageous interval clear counter management process in step S2615 is executed, so the advantageous interval clear counter and the difference number counter, which will be described later, are updated.

FIG. 338 is a flowchart showing advantageous section clear counter management processing in step S2615 of FIG. The advantageous section clear counter management processing here is substantially the same processing as in FIGS. 51 and 52 (11th embodiment), but will be described again.
In step S2621, "1" is subtracted from the advantageous section clear counter. Next, proceeding to step S2622, it is determined whether or not the advantageous section clear counter value before subtraction of "1" in step S2621 is "0". If it is determined to be "0", the process proceeds to step S2623, and if it is determined not to be "0", the process proceeds to step S2625.

In step S2623, it is determined whether or not the main game state is "0". As described above, when the main game state is "0", it means that it is a non-advantageous section (normal section). Also, even if the main game state is "0" at the start of the game this time, the main game state has a value other than "0" at the time of step S2623 when winning the transfer lottery for the advantageous section. .
When it is determined that the main game state is "0", the processing according to this flow chart is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the main game state is not "0", the process proceeds to step S2624. In step S2624, the upper limit value (initial value) "1500 (D)" of the number of games played in the advantageous section is stored (set) in the advantageous section clear counter. Then, the processing according to this flow chart ends. When the advantageous section clear counter value before subtraction is "0" and the main game state is not "0", it means that the advantageous section transition lottery has been won in the current game.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2622 that the value before subtraction is not "0", and the process proceeds to step S2625, it is determined whether or not the subtraction result (advantageous section clear counter value after subtraction of "1") is "0". do. If it is determined to be "0", the end condition of the advantageous section (the number of games played is "1500") is satisfied, so the process proceeds to step S2629. On the other hand, when it is determined that the subtraction result is not "0", the process proceeds to step S2626.
In step S2626, it is determined whether or not a replay has been displayed in the current game. This is because the difference counter is not updated when the replay is displayed. If it is determined that the replay has been displayed, the process proceeds to step S2628, and if it is determined that the replay has not been displayed, the process proceeds to step S2627.

In step S2627, "the number of payouts - the prescribed number" is added to the difference counter to update the difference counter value. When the difference counter value after addition becomes negative, it is corrected to "0". That is, the lower limit value of the difference number counter is "0". Then, the process proceeds to step S2628.
In step S2628, it is determined whether or not the difference counter has exceeded "2400 (D)". When the replay is displayed, step S2628 may be skipped because the difference counter has not been updated in the current game. are doing.

If it is determined that the difference counter value exceeds "2400", the process advances to step S2629 in order to satisfy the conditions for ending the advantageous section. On the other hand, when it is determined that the difference counter value does not exceed "2400", the processing according to this flowchart is terminated.
In step S2629, all parameters related to the instruction function are set to "0". This process is similar to step S435 in FIG. 51 (eleventh embodiment), for example. Then, the processing according to this flow chart ends.

As described above, the advantageous interval clear counter management process is executed regardless of whether the prescribed number is "2" or "3", so the advantageous interval clear counter and the difference number counter are always updated. Here, the number of sheets acquired during AT is counted based on the difference number counter. For example, the difference number counter value (usually "0") in the first game of AT is calculated as the winning number "0". As a result, the acquired number displayed on the image display device 23 during AT is a value based on the difference number counter value. And since the difference number counter is updated regardless of whether the specified number is "2" or "3", the acquired number during AT is updated regardless of whether the specified number is "2" or "3" be done. On the other hand, as described above, when the game is played with the specified number "3" during AT, the number of AT games is updated, but when the game is played with the specified number "2" during AT, the AT game The count is not updated. However, even in this case, the number of AT games is displayed on the image display device 23 although it is not updated.
In addition, when the game is played with the specified number "2" during AT, the number of games during AT is not updated, so although the end condition of AT based on the number of AT games is not satisfied, the advantageous section clear counter and the difference Since the number counter is updated, the AT and the advantageous section may end by satisfying the advantageous section end condition based on the advantageous section clear counter or the difference number counter.

Next, the specific control when the game is executed with the prescribed number "2" will be described.
(1) Display of a unique image in a game with a specified number of "2" is displayed, and there is no sound or a unique sound.Hereinafter, the image unique to the specified number "2" is referred to as a "unique image"). Furthermore, in this case, an image display of characters such as "playing two cards" may be used. If the peculiar effect is executed only when the prescribed number is "2", the player can immediately know that the game has been played with the prescribed number "2" by mistake. Also, by outputting the unique image, it is possible to suggest to the player that the AT lottery will not be executed.
Note that the "specific image" in this embodiment is sometimes referred to as a "single picture" or the like, but is not limited to a completely still image, and includes a case where a part of the image is moving. For example, when a character is displayed as a unique image, the character's hair may be blowing in the wind, or the character may blink periodically.

Incidentally, when the game is executed with the prescribed number of "2", the main control board 50 may not transmit the effect command to the sub control board 80. FIG. By doing so, in the game with the specified number "2", the effect of the previous game continues to be output as it is. Alternatively, when outputting an effect corresponding to the prescribed number "2", a specific command indicating that the game has been executed with the prescribed number "2" may be transmitted.

Here, in a game with a prescribed number of "2" in RT1 (non-AT), a unique image is displayed, but in a game with a prescribed number of "2" in non-RT (non-internal), a normal effect (inside 1BB) is displayed. When , the same effect as the effect when the game is played with the specified number "3") is output. In this embodiment, since it is assumed (normal) that the game is played with the specified number "2" in order to win 1BBB in non-RT, the game was played with the specified number "2" during non-RT Whether or not the player is staying in a normal game state can be determined based on the effect that is executed from time to time.
In addition, when the AT or 1BB game ends, there is a case where an immersion prevention display is output. When the game is executed with the specified number of "2" during the immersion prevention display, the immersion prevention display is output before the special image (Between the special image and the immersion prevention display, the immersion prevention display layer is displayed in front. to.). Accordingly, since the immersion prevention display is not blocked by the unique image, the immersion prevention display can be reliably displayed.

Further, when the game is executed with the prescribed number "2", the specific image is displayed simultaneously with the operation of the start switch 41 (simultaneously with the start of the game) so that the prescribed number is determined by the operation of the start switch 41.例文帳に追加This unique image continues at least until the third stop switch 42 is operated (at the time of full stop), and the display of the unique image may end when the payout process ends or when the betting process for the next game is executed. mentioned.

(2) Image display during non-AT For each game, "1" or more points are given (the number of points given varies depending on the winning combination, etc.), and an AT lottery is executed according to the accumulated points. be done. In this case, points are given for games with the prescribed number of "3", but no points are awarded for games with the prescribed number of "2". Therefore, the number of points is not updated in the game with the prescribed number of "2".

(3) AT ceiling game number counter Counts the number of games played during non-AT, and when the number of games reaches a predetermined value, AT ceiling that counts the number of games up to the ceiling in the case of having a ceiling function that activates AT As for the number-of-games counter, it is updated when the prescribed number of games is "3", but is not updated when the prescribed number of games is "2".

(4) Omen Counter During the false omen and the real omen, the remaining number of games until the AT is scheduled to be activated may be displayed as an image. The number of games played is managed by an omen counter. In games with the prescribed number of "3", the omen counter is updated and the number of remaining games (image) is updated, but in games with the prescribed number of "2", the omen counter is not updated and the number of remaining games (image) is updated. Do not update.
(5) Lottery for AT During the non-AT period, as described above, the lottery for AT can be executed with the prescribed number of "3", but the lottery for AT is not executed with the prescribed number of "2".

(6) Effect at the time of operating the start switch 41 When the start switch 41 is operated, a role lottery is executed, and an effect corresponding to the result of the role lottery is executed. Although the performance corresponding to the result of the winning lottery is executed, the performance corresponding to the result of the winning lottery is not executed when the game is started with the specified number "2". However, when the game is started with the specified number of "2", there is a case where a special effect (display of the above-mentioned specific image, etc.) corresponding to the start of the game with the specified number of "2" is executed.
Further, during execution of the continuous performance, when the game is started with the specified number "3" when the performance is set to progress (develop) when the start switch 41 is operated, the continuous performance progresses. , when the game is started with the specified number "2", the continuous performance is not progressed. In this case, the effect up to that point (at the end of the previous game) may be maintained, or a specific effect corresponding to the start of the game with the specified number "2" may be executed.
Furthermore, during execution of the continuous performance, when the next game is played with the specified number of "3" after the game is played with the specified number of "2", the continuous presentation is performed in the next game.
Specifically, in the case where the continuous performance of three games can be executed, when the first game is played with the specified number "3", the continuous performance of the first game is executed. Next, when the second game is played with the prescribed number "2", the continuous performance of the second game is not executed, and a unique performance is executed. Then, when the third game is played with the specified number "3", the continuous effect of the third game is executed.

(7) Effect during AT When the game is played with the prescribed number "2" during AT, as described above, the number of AT games is not updated. That is, the AT game number counter is not updated. As a result, the number of remaining AT games is not subtracted, so even if the player erroneously plays the game with the specified number "2", the number of AT games will not be lost. Although the AT game number counter is not updated, the AT game number itself is displayed during the AT.
During the AT, the number of acquired coins is continuously displayed, and the number of acquired coins during the AT is updated at the start and end of the game. The number of wins in AT is updated based on the difference counter value as described above. However, not limited to this, it is also possible to provide an acquired number counter in the sub control board 80 and update the acquired number during AT based on the acquired number counter of the sub control board 80 (independently on the sub control board 80 side). is.

(8) When displaying a milestone of the number of acquired cards during AT (for example, "Get 1000 cards!" etc.), when the number of acquired cards reaches 1000 with the specified number "3", "Get 1000 cards!" etc. is displayed as an image, but when the number of acquisitions of 1000 is achieved with the prescribed number of "2", an image such as "Get 1000!" is not displayed.
In this case, the image display of "Get 1000 cards!" For example, a flag is provided to indicate whether or not the fact that the number of acquired cards has reached 1000 has already been displayed. The flag is turned on when the specified number is "3" and the obtained number is 1000, but when the specified number is "2" and the obtained number is 1000, the flag is not turned on. After that, the prescribed number of games "3" is played, the image "Get 1000 cards!" is displayed, and the flag is turned on. After reaching 1000 in the game with the prescribed number of "2", in the game with the prescribed number of "3", the image "Get 1000!" good too. Of course, after waiting for the win of the winning combination in the game with the prescribed number of "3", the image of "Get 1000 coins!" may be displayed.

(9) When there is an ending flag Based on the advantageous section clear counter, the ending flag is set when, for example, the number of games played in the advantageous section reaches "1400" to "1450". The player may be informed that the AT will be terminated or that the AT for the next set will not be transferred. Here, as a result of playing the game with the prescribed number "2", when the number of games for which the ending flag should be set has been reached, the ending flag may be set or may not be set. When the ending flag is set, the performance can be switched for the ending, so that the player can be informed that the advantageous section is about to end even if the game is played with the prescribed number "2". On the other hand, when the ending flag is not set, the effect is not switched for the ending. However, when the game is played with the specified number "3" after that, the ending flag is set. In this case, the number of times the game is played from when the effect is switched to the ending to when the AT ends is smaller than when the game is played with the prescribed number "3" all the time.

Also, based on the advantageous interval clear counter, when the upper limit of the number of games played in the advantageous interval (1500 games) is approaching, a countdown display may be executed. This countdown may be executed even with the specified number "2". However, it is possible to display different images for the countdown when the specified number is "2" and the countdown when the specified number is "3". For example, the countdown when the specified number is "2" can be achieved by displaying the above-described specific image.

(10) Effect at End of Advantageous Section When the number of final games played in the advantageous section is the specified number “2”, the end screen of the advantageous section may or may not be displayed.
(11) Effect after the end of the advantageous section After finishing the advantageous section, when the first game of the non-advantageous section is executed with the specified number of "2", an effect (image display) indicating that it has moved to the non-advantageous section will be displayed. Execute. Furthermore, when the second game in the non-advantageous section is also executed with the specified number "2", the effect of the first game in the non-advantageous section is maintained. As a result, when the advantageous section shifts to the non-advantageous section, even if the game is played with the prescribed number of "2", it is possible to inform the player of that effect.

(12) When 1BB is won in non-RT and 1BB is won in the game, a unique image indicating that the 1BB game is in progress and the number of wins are displayed until the 1BB game ends. It also updates the number of acquisitions. Also, during the 1BB game in this case, even if the game is played with the prescribed number "3" (the 1BB game of the thirty-ninth embodiment is limited to the prescribed number "3"), No performance is performed. As in such a case, even if the specified number is "3", the normal effect may not be executed. By controlling in this way, the player can be notified that the 1BB game is an irregular game.

<Fortieth Embodiment>
The 40th embodiment relates to effective management of push buttons (also referred to as "effect switch", "effect button", "sub-button", etc.).
1 (first embodiment) and FIG. 95 (nineteenth embodiment (A)), illustration of the push buttons is omitted, but actually the push buttons are electrically connected to the sub-control board 80. ing. Also, the sub-control board 80 and the push buttons are configured to be capable of two-way communication.
The push button is used, for example, to progress (develop) an effect based on the operation of the button. When the performance is advanced based on the operation of the push button, the image of the push button is displayed and the performance at that time is maintained. Then, when the push button is operated, the image display of the push button is erased and the performance is advanced. Hereinafter, such an effect will be referred to as a "push button effect" as required. Note that the push button effect may be executed once in one game, or may be executed a plurality of times in one game.

1 and 95, the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 are one-way communication from the main control board 50 to the sub-control board 80. FIG. 1 and 95, the sub-control board 80 is shown as a single board. It may be divided into a first sub-control board) and a sub-sub-board (second sub-control board). On the other hand, the sub-control board 80 may be composed of a single board including a sub-main board (first sub-control board) and a sub-sub-board (second sub-control board). When the sub-control board 80 is divided into a sub-main board (first sub-control board) and a sub-sub-board (second sub-control board), the sub-main board (first sub-control board) and the sub-sub-board (second 2 sub-control board) are configured to enable two-way communication.
The main control board 50 is also referred to as main control means 50 , main control board 50 , and main control means 50 .
The sub-control board 80 is also called sub-control means 80 , sub-control board 80 , and sub-control means 80 .
Furthermore, the sub-main board is also called the first sub-control board, the first sub-control means, the effect control board, and the effect control means.
Furthermore, the sub-sub-board is also called a second sub-control board, a second sub-control means, an image control board, or an image control means.

Further, when the sub-main CPU and the sub-sub CPU are mounted on one sub-control board 80, the sub-main CPU and the sub-sub CPU are of course configured to be capable of two-way communication. .
Hereinafter, the "sub-main board (first sub-control board) or sub-main CPU" is simply referred to as "sub-main", and the sub-sub-board (second sub-control board) or sub-sub-CPU is simply referred to as "sub-sub".
It should be noted that the sub-main is a board (CPU) that integrates and controls the entire presentation. Also, sub-sub belongs to sub-main and is a circuit board (CPU) that specializes in video control among effects.

When the sub-main executes the performance lottery and determines the performance, the sub-main transmits to the sub-sub a performance designation command corresponding to the determined performance (command capable of specifying the performance to be executed by the sub-sub side). When the sub-sub receives the effect designation command, the sub-sub selects an image according to the effect designation command and displays the image as an image. Here, a delay (time lag) occurs between when the sub-main transmits the effect designation command and when the sub-sub starts displaying the video image. This is because it takes a certain amount of time for image output processing and the like.
Also, the sub-main does not always activate the push button, but activates it within a predetermined period of time. As with the stop switch 42, for example, the push button is always on/off detected, but if it is not effective, its operation is ignored even if it is turned on.

Here, if the sub-main activates the push button when the sub-main sends the effect designation command to the sub-sub, and the sub-sub displays the image of the push button (this image enables the push button to be activated for the player) and prompts the user to operate the push button.), there is a lag between the timing when the sub-main activates the push button and the timing when the sub-sub starts displaying the image related to the push button. occurs. Therefore, in the 40th embodiment, the following method is adopted to eliminate this deviation.

The first method is a method (timer management) of enabling the push button based on the sub-main timer value. Specifically, the RWM 53 is provided with a storage area for storing the timer value, and the timer value (initial value) is set in the storage area when the effect designation command is transmitted (before transmission, during transmission, or after transmission). do. Then, the timer value is decremented at regular time intervals (for example, each interrupt processing), and when the timer value reaches a predetermined value (for example, "0"), it is determined that the predetermined time has passed, and the push button is activated. to On the other hand, by displaying the image at the timing when the predetermined time has passed since the reception of the effect specifying command, the image display timing and the activation timing of the push button can be substantially matched. Note that the timing to activate the push button may be slightly earlier than the timing to start displaying the video.
Also, in the case of timer management, there are cases where the push button effects are executed multiple times in one game.

Depending on the effect, in one game, the push button may be activated after N1 seconds (eg, "3" seconds) have elapsed, and then activated after N2 seconds (eg, "10" seconds) have elapsed. In this case, a timer value corresponding to N2 seconds is stored in the storage area, and when the timer value reaches a value corresponding to N1 seconds elapsed, the push button is enabled, and then the timer value reaches N2 seconds. When the value (for example, "0") corresponding to is reached, the push button is enabled.
Further, there are cases where the push button is enabled after N1 seconds (eg, "3" seconds) and cases where the push button is enabled after N2 seconds (eg, "10") seconds. In this way, when the timer value differs depending on the effect specifying command, a value corresponding to the lapse of N1 seconds and a value corresponding to the lapse of N2 seconds are respectively stored in the above storage areas, but in this case the storage areas are the same. storage area.

Here, in the case of timer management, when a power failure occurs while the timer is measuring time,
(1) A method of restarting timer measurement after recovery from power failure (in this case, the timer value at that time is held when power is switched off, and the timer value is held even when power is restored) and,
(2) Set the initial value of the timer value (initial value of the timer value determined by the effect specifying command selected before power off) again when returning from power off, and count the time with the timer after returning from power off. a method to initiate a
(3) A method in which the timer value is cleared when the power is restored and the timer value is not counted after the power is restored (in this case, the push button effect is not executed).
Here, in the case of (2) above, when the initial value of the timer value is set, the effect designation command is resent to Sab-Sab.
In the case of (3) above, there are cases where the push button is assumed not to have been operated and is recovered, and where it is assumed that the push button has been operated and is recovered. When the push button is considered to be operated and returns, an effect corresponding to the operation of the push button is executed.

Furthermore, in the event that a power failure occurs during time counting by the timer, if the game state at the time of the power failure is a specific game state that is advantageous to the player (such as CZ or the final game as an omen), the power supply is turned off. A specific image (such as the above-described "single picture") is displayed when returning from interruption. In order to control in this way, for example, at the time of recovery from power failure, determination is made by referring to the data of the main game state and the precursor counter value.
The storage area for the main game state and the storage area for the precursor counter described above are provided in both the RWM 53 of the main control board 50 and the RWM 83 of the sub control board 80 . The main control board 50 transmits information on the main game state and the precursor counter value to the sub control board 80 every game, for example, when the start switch 41 is operated. When the sub-control board 80 receives these pieces of information, it stores them in the RWM 83 on the sub-control board 80 side. Therefore, if the sub-control board 80 side holds the information of the main game state and the precursor counter value at the time of recovery from the power interruption, the sub-control board 80 side determines the main game state and the precursor counter value before the power interruption. can do. Therefore, in this case, the main game state information and the precursor counter value are not transmitted again from the main control board 50 to the sub control board 80 when the power is restored from the power-off.

Also, when the start switch 41 is operated and the correct pressing order is notified by the operation of the instruction function, and before the first stop switch 42 is operated (while all the reels 31 are rotating), if the power is cut off, When the power is restored from the power cutoff, the rotating state of all the reels 31 is restored again. In this case, the instruction function is activated again, and the sub-control board 80 displays an image of the order of correct keystrokes. Therefore, the specific image is not displayed in this case.
On the other hand, after all the reels 31 have stopped, if the power is cut off before the betting for the next game is made, the specific image is displayed when the power is restored from the cut. A command to stop the reels 31 is transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub-control board 80, and the sub-control board 80 stores information based on the stop command. Therefore, when returning from power-off, the sub-control board 80, based on the information based on the stop command (information stored in the sub-control board 80), determines whether all reels 31 are rotating or all reels are rotating. It can be determined whether to return to the stop state of 31.

It should be noted that the display of the specific image need not be limited to the time being measured by the timer. At the time of recovery from power failure (here, as described above, this corresponds to the case where power failure occurs when all the reels 31 are stopped and before betting is performed, and the power is recovered from the power failure). If displayed, the hall manager and the players can know at a glance that the game state at the time of power failure was a specific game state advantageous to the player. In addition, in the event that a power failure unintended by the player occurs in a specific advantageous gaming state, if the normal screen is displayed upon recovery from this power failure, a reset will be applied based on the power failure, resulting in a specific advantageous game state. It is possible to prevent the player from erroneously recognizing that the game state has been cleared (shifted to a normal game state).

A second method is a method in which the sub-main does not have the above timer and uses a feedback command. Specifically, when the sub-sub selects an image (before, at the start, or after the start of image output processing), the sub-sub sends a feedback command to the sub-main (the commands). The submain then activates the push button when it receives this feedback command. In particular, in the first method, it is necessary to provide a storage area for storing the timer value in the RWM 53, but the method of transmitting the feedback command has the advantage that it is not necessary to provide the storage area. Also, in the method by timer management, it is necessary to set a timer value for each effect specifying command, but in the method of transmitting the feedback command, even if the number of effect specifying commands increases, individual timer values can be managed. becomes unnecessary, and the capacity can be reduced.

In the second method, it becomes easier to synchronize not only the push button effect but also the image display start timing with the lamp lighting mode change timing and the volume change timing.
Here, when an image is displayed, the sub-main is given to the sub-sub with a command related to the background (stage screen) effect (also referred to as a 2-system effect) and a character effect (also referred to as a 4-system effect). and the relevant command. Each of the sub-subs executes image generation related to the background when receiving a command related to the background effect, and executes image generation related to the character when receiving a command related to the character effect.

Then, when both the background and character images have been generated, Sub-Sub sends a feedback command (image completion command) to Sub-Main. When the sub-main receives this feedback command, the sub-main changes the effect corresponding to the start of the display of the image, for example, changes the lighting mode of the lamp or changes the volume. Therefore, it is possible to more accurately synchronize the video with the lamps and sound.

In some push button effects, a fade effect is executed. Whether or not to execute the fade effect is determined by the effect specifying command. Here, the fade effect of the push button means that the push button is displayed as an image in a mode other than the final display mode during the introductory effect (initial stage), and the push button is not yet activated at the time of this image display. It is a performance in a state where there is nothing. In this introductory effect, for example, an effect suggesting that a push-button effect will occur from now on is executed.
After executing the fade effect, when displaying the final push button image (before displaying, when displaying, or after displaying), the sub-sub sends a feedback command to the sub-main. When the submain receives this feedback command, it enables the pushbutton.

When the submain determines that the push button has been operated, the sub main transmits a command indicating that the push button has been operated to the sub main. Also, when the sub-main detects that the push button has been operated, it disables the push button. Here, if the push button is operated once, it is determined that the push button has been operated and the push button is disabled. In some cases, the operation of the push button is valid even if it is operated. In the latter case, the effect may be changed each time the push button is operated.

When the push button is disabled, the push button operation command is not transmitted to Sab-Sav even if the player operates the push button during the subsequent push-button disable period.
Also, when the push button effect is executed, if the player does not operate the push button, the push button is valid until the next game is played. Here, "until the transition to the next game" corresponds to, for example, "until the next game bet is made" when the replay does not stop in the current game, and when the replay stops in the current game This corresponds to "until the start switch 41 is operated in the next game".
It should be noted that the timing of "until the transition to the next game" may be the same when the replay does not stop in the current game and when the replay stops in the current game. For example, both timings may be "until the start switch 41 is operated in the next game".

FIG. 339 is a time chart showing an example of a slot machine in the case of using a timer to manage the effectiveness of push buttons in the 40th embodiment. In the figure, the two dashed double-dot lines are lines that indicate the separation between the main side and the sub-main side, and the separation between the sub-main side and the sub-sub side (the same applies to FIGS. 340 to 344 described later). ).

In FIG. 339, when the start switch 41 is operated by the player, the main (main control board 50) detects the signal and executes the winning lottery. Then, the lottery result command is transmitted to the sub-main. The sub-main executes the effect lottery according to the lottery result command (lottery result of the game this time). In this example, it is assumed that an effect having a push button effect is determined (the same applies to the following examples). The sub-main transmits an effect designation command corresponding to the determined effect to the sub-sub. Simultaneously with the transmission of the effect designation command, a timer value corresponding to the determined effect (measurement of the time until the push button is activated) is started. The measurement time is determined by the determined effect, and is time T01 in this example.

When the submain determines that the timer has measured the time T01, it activates the push button.
On the other hand, when receiving the effect specifying command, Sav-Sub starts effecting (video processing). In addition, in the effect designation command received by Sab-Sab, it is defined that the display of the push buttons will start after the time T01 has elapsed from the start of the effect. Therefore, Sav-Sav starts displaying the push buttons after time T01 has elapsed from the start of the effect according to this effect specifying command. As a result, the timing at which the push button becomes effective and the timing at which the display of the push button starts can be substantially the same from the start of the presentation.
When the push button is operated by the player, the signal is sent to the sub-main. The submain disables the push button when it receives this signal. In addition, the submain sends a push button operation command to the submain. Upon receiving the push-button operation command, Sab-Sab develops an effect (performs an effect corresponding to the operation of the push button). Furthermore, the display of the push buttons is ended.

It should be noted that the timing of transmitting the effect specifying command is not limited to when the start switch 41 is operated, as long as it is before the effect execution timing determined by the effect specifying command, when the stop switch 42 is operated (first stop, second Either at the time of the second stop or at the time of the third stop). This also applies to the following examples.
Further, it is conceivable that other operations (operations other than push button operations) by the player, such as operation of the stop switch 42, are performed between the time the start switch 41 is operated and before the push buttons are operated. In this case, even after the other operation by the player, the performance develops by operating the push button. In other words, the development of the performance by operating the push button is not affected by the other operations by the player. This also applies to the following examples.

FIG. 340 is a time chart showing an example of a slot machine in which the effectiveness of push buttons is managed by feedback commands in the 40th embodiment. In the example of FIG. 340, unlike the example of FIG. 339, the submain does not have a timer for measuring the activation time of the push button.
In FIG. 340, when the start switch 41 is operated by the player, the main detects the signal and executes the combination lottery. Then, the lottery result command is transmitted to the sub-main. The sub-main executes the effect lottery according to the lottery result command (lottery result of the game). The sub-main transmits an effect designation command corresponding to the determined effect to the sub-sub.

Upon receiving the effect specifying command, Sav-Sub starts effecting (video processing). In addition, in the effect designation command received by Sab-Sab, it is defined that the display of the push buttons will start after the time T01 has elapsed from the start of the effect. Therefore, Sav-Sav starts displaying the push buttons after time T01 has elapsed from the start of the effect according to this effect specifying command. When the sub-sub starts displaying the push buttons, it sends a feedback command (a command indicating that the display of the push buttons has been completed or has started to display the push buttons) to the sub-main. When the submain receives this feedback command, it activates the pushbutton. As a result, the timing at which the display of the push button is started and the timing at which the push button is activated can be substantially the same.

When the push button is operated by the player, the signal is sent to the sub-main. The submain disables the push button when it receives this signal. In addition, the submain sends a push button operation command to the submain. Upon receiving the push-button operation command, Sab-Sab develops an effect (performs an effect corresponding to the operation of the push button). Furthermore, the display of the push buttons is terminated.

FIGS. 341 to 344 are time charts showing push button effectiveness management when the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Like the slot machine 10, the pachinko game machine also has a main, a sub-main, and a sub-sub. Specifically, "main" corresponds to the main control board 530 in FIG. 99 (nineteenth embodiment (B)). Also, in FIG. 99, the sub-control board 540 has a sub-main and a sub-sub. The sub-main controls the output of the production lamp 541 and the speaker 542 , and the sub-sub controls the output of the image display device 543 .

FIG. 341 is a time chart showing Example 1 of effective management of the push buttons in the pachinko game machine according to the 40th embodiment, and is an example of activating the push buttons by timer management. Therefore, FIG. 341 is an example corresponding to FIG. 339 of the slot machine 10 . This FIG. 341 and FIG. 342 to be described later show an example of activating the push button twice during one game.
In FIG. 341, when a game ball enters the starting port 532 (FIG. 99) and the starting port switch 533 (FIG. 99) is turned on, the main part starts to change the special symbol display device 531 (FIG. 99). , to execute a jackpot lottery or a fluctuation pattern lottery. After determining the variation pattern, the main transmits a variation pattern command to the sub-main.

The sub-main executes a performance lottery based on the received variation pattern, determines the performance, and transmits a performance designation command corresponding to the determined performance to the sub-sub. The effect specified in this example is assumed to be a effect output in the order of advance notice A to D→normal reach→super reach. Note that the "notice" is an effect that suggests the frequency of appearance of normal reach and super reach after that, and the degree of expectation for winning, depending on the type. "Normal reach" is an effect suggesting low to medium winning expectation depending on the type. Furthermore, "super reach" is an effect suggesting medium to high winning expectation depending on the type. During the execution of each of these effects, the effect pattern is changed. Also, the sub-main uses a timer to measure the time from the transmission of the effect designation command. Then, after the time T11 has elapsed, the push button is validated.

Upon receiving the effect specifying command, Sav-Sav executes the effect (video) in the order of notice A, B → notice C, D → normal reach → super reach.
Further, when Sav-Sav determines that the time T11 has elapsed from the start of the presentation based on the presentation specifying command, it starts displaying the push buttons. In this example, the display of the push buttons is started in the middle of notices C and D. The effect designation command transmitted from the sub-main to the sub-sub is defined to start displaying the push buttons after the time T11 has elapsed from the start of the effect. As a result, at the point of time T11 from the start of the effect, the activation timing of the push buttons in the sub-main and the display start timing of the push buttons in the sub-sub can be substantially matched.

Also, in this example, the player does not operate the push button during the first push button effect (the same applies to FIG. 342 to be described later). After activating the push button, the submain uses a timer to start timing from the time the push button is activated. In this example, the effective time of the push button is time T13, and if the push button is operated before the time T13 has elapsed since the push button was activated, an effect corresponding to the operation of the push button is executed, When the push button is not operated even after a time T13 has elapsed since the push button was activated, the push button is deactivated.
The sub-main disables the push button because the push button has not been operated even after time T13 has elapsed since the push button was enabled. Then, send a push button disable command to Subsub. This causes Sabusa to end the display of the push buttons.

Although not shown in FIG. 341, when the push button is operated before time T13 has elapsed since the push button was activated, the sub-main deactivates the push button and activates the push button. Sends operational commands to Savusavu. Upon receiving this command, Sav-Sav develops the effect (executes the effect corresponding to the operation of the push button) and ends the display of the push button.

Furthermore, the sub-main continues to measure the time from the transmission of the effect designation command with a timer, and activates the push button after the time T12 has elapsed from the transmission of the effect designation command. When the sub-main activates the push button, the sub-main uses a timer to start counting from the time the push button is activated. In this example, the effective time of the push button is time T14, and if the push button is operated before time T14 has elapsed since the push button was activated, an effect corresponding to the operation of the push button is executed. , the push button is disabled when the push button has not been operated even after the time T14 has elapsed since the push button was enabled.

On the other hand, when Sav-Sav determines that the time T12 has passed from the start of the effect based on the effect specifying command, it starts displaying the push buttons. In this example, the display of the push button is started in the middle of super reach. The effect specifying command transmitted from the sub-main to the sub-sub is defined to start displaying the push buttons after the time T12 has elapsed from the start of the effect. As a result, in the same manner as described above, at time T12, it is possible to substantially match the display start timing of the push buttons in the sub-sub and the activation timing of the push buttons in the sub-main.
This example shows an example in which the push button is operated by the player before time T14 has elapsed since the push button was activated.
In addition, in FIG. 341, when the push button is operated within time T14 (effective time), the timer measurement of time T14 is ended. In FIG. 341, the effective time range of time T14 is shown for convenience (the same applies to time T14 in FIG. 342, time T14 in FIG. 343, and time T43 in FIG. 344). .

When the push button is operated by the player, the signal is sent to the sub-main. The submain disables the push button when it receives this signal. Further, the submain sends a push button operation command to the submain. Upon receiving the push-button operation command, Sav-sub switches the production (executes the production corresponding to the push-button operation). Furthermore, the display of the push buttons is ended.
After that, the sub-sub continues to execute the effect based on the effect specifying command received from the sub-main, and ends the effect according to the effect specifying command.
On the other hand, when the main stops the fluctuation of the special symbol display device 531, it transmits a fluctuation stop command to the sub-main. Furthermore, this fluctuation stop command is also sent from the submain to the subsub. This allows the sub-main and sub-sub to know that the fluctuation on the main side has ended.

FIG. 342 is a time chart showing example 2 of effective management of push buttons in the pachinko gaming machine according to the 40th embodiment. This example is different from FIG. 341 in that the push button is activated by a feedback command without using a timer for activating the push button. Otherwise, it is the same as in FIG.
In FIG. 342, the main is to start the variation of the special symbols and execute the big winning lottery and the variation pattern lottery. After determining the variation pattern, the main transmits a variation pattern command to the sub-main.
Based on the received variation pattern, the sub-main executes a performance lottery, designates a performance, and transmits a performance designation command to the sub-sub.

When Sav-Sav determines that the time T11 has passed from the start of the performance based on the performance specifying command, it starts displaying the push buttons. Then, when the display of the push buttons is started, a feedback command (a command to the effect that the display of the push buttons has been completed or the display of the push buttons has started) is transmitted to the sub-main. When the submain receives this feedback command, it enables the pushbutton. Thus, the activation timing of the push button by sub-main and the timing of starting display of the push button by sub-sub can be substantially matched at time T11 from the start of performance without using a timer.

Further, when the sub-main activates the push button, the sub-main uses a timer to start timing from the time the push button is activated. After time T13 has elapsed, the submain disables the pushbutton. Then, send a push button disable command to Subsub. This causes Sabusa to end the display of the push buttons.

Similarly, when Sav-Sav determines that the time T12 has passed from the start of the effect based on the effect specifying command, it starts displaying the push buttons. Then, when the push button is displayed, it sends a feedback command to the submain. When the submain receives this feedback command, it enables the pushbutton. The subsequent processing is the same as that in FIG. 341 described above, so the description is omitted.

FIG. 343 is a time chart showing Example 3 of effective management of push buttons in the pachinko gaming machine according to the 40th embodiment, and this example is an example of activating push buttons by a feedback command as in FIG. 342. .
In FIG. 343, the main is to start the variation of the special symbols and execute the big win lottery and the variation pattern lottery. After determining the variation pattern, the main transmits a variation pattern command to the sub-main.

The sub-main executes an effect lottery based on the received variation pattern, designates an effect, and transmits an effect designation command to the sub-sub. In the example of FIG. 343, unlike the example of FIG. 342, the effect specifying command is divided and transmitted. The first effect designation command is for outputting advance notices A and B. FIG. Upon receiving this effect specifying command, Sub-Sub executes effects related to the notices A and B. - 特許庁Also, the sub-main starts timing by a timer at the same time as the transmission of the first effect specifying command.
Next, when the sub-main judges that the time T31 has passed, the sub-main transmits an effect designation command for outputting the advance notices C and D to the sub-main. Upon receiving this effect designation command, Sub-Sub executes the effect related to the notices C and D. - 特許庁
Further, when the sub-main judges that the time T32 has passed since the transmission of the first effect designation command, the sub-main transmits the effect designation command for outputting normal reach to the sub-sub. Upon receiving this effect specifying command, Sub-Sub executes the effect related to normal reach.

Further, when the sub-main judges that the time T33 has passed since the transmission of the first effect designation command, the sub-main transmits the effect designation command for outputting super reach to the sub-sub. Upon receiving this effect specifying command, Sub-Sub executes the effect related to Super Reach.
In this manner, the sub-main transmits the effect specifying command to the sub-sub four times, and the sub-sub sequentially switches the effect each time it receives the effect specifying command.
Furthermore, when Sav-Sav determines that the time T12 has passed from the start of the presentation based on the presentation specifying command, it starts displaying the push buttons. Since the subsequent processing is the same as the example in FIG. 342, the description is omitted.

344 is a time chart showing example 4 of effective management of push buttons in the pachinko gaming machine according to the 40th embodiment. FIG. In this example, the push button has a function of popping out toward the ceiling. This push button can be pushed like a normal push button. Further, the push button is projected toward the ceiling and deformed into a lever shape so that the player can operate the lever.
In FIG. 344, the main starts fluctuations, executes various lotteries, and sends fluctuation pattern commands to the sub-mains. When the sub-main receives the variation pattern command, the sub-main decides the performance by lottery and transmits the performance designation command to the sub-sub. The outline of the effect specifying command is the same as in FIG.

Sub-sub transmits a feedback command to sub-main based on the effect specifying command at the timing when time T41 has elapsed from the start of the effect. This feedback command requests the sub-main to transform the push button into a lever shape. When the submain receives this feedback command, it starts transforming the push button into a lever shape. When the sub-main has completed transforming the push button into a lever shape, the sub-main transmits an effect specifying command to the sub-sub. This effect designation command is a command indicating that the push button has been transformed into a lever shape. Further, Sav-Sav starts displaying the lever at the timing when time T42 has passed from the start of the effect based on the effect specifying command. Further, the sub-sub sends a feedback command to the sub-main on the condition that the above-described effect specifying command (a command indicating completion of transforming the push button into a lever shape) is received from the sub-main. This feedback command is a command for validating the lever.

When the submain receives the feedback command, it activates the lever. Furthermore, from the time the lever is activated, the measurement of the effective time of the lever is started. In this example, the effective time of the lever is set to time T43.
This example shows an example in which the player operates the lever before the time T43 has elapsed since the lever was activated.
When the player operates the lever, the signal is sent to the sub-main. Submain disables the lever when it receives this signal. Further, the sub-main sends a lever operation command to the sub-sub. Sub-sub, upon receiving the lever operation command, develops the production (executes the production corresponding to the operation of the lever). Furthermore, the display of the lever ends.
After that, the sub-sub continues to execute the effect based on the effect specifying command received from the sub-main, and ends the effect according to the effect specifying command.

On the other hand, when the main stops the fluctuation of the special symbol display device 531, it transmits a fluctuation stop command to the sub-main. In addition, this fluctuation stop command is also sent to Sabusa. This allows the sub-main and sub-sub to know that the fluctuation on the main side has ended.
Also, although not shown in FIG. 344, after the lever is disabled, the sub-main executes a process of restoring the deformation of the lever to the push button form by the end of the game.

Although the thirty-seventh to fortieth embodiments have been described above, the present invention is not limited to the contents described above, and various modifications such as those described below are possible.
A. Thirty-seventh Embodiment (1) In the thirty-seventh embodiment, in non-AT non-RT and RT1, the correct pressing order is notified at a predetermined rate in non-RT when the pressing order bell is won, and in RT1, the correct pressing order is announced when the pressing order bell is won. The specification is such that the order is not reported. However, without being limited to this, even in non-AT and RT1, a specification may be adopted in which the correct pressing order is notified at a specific rate when the pressing order bell is won. During non-AT, if there is a case where the correct pressing order is notified when the pressing order bell is won in both non-RT and RT1, the player is asked whether the current RT is non-RT or RT1. can be obfuscated. In this case, let "x" be the ratio of informing the correct pushing order when the bell is won in non-AT and RT1, and let "y" be the ratio informing the correct pushing order when the bell is won in non-AT and non-RT. Then, "y=x+the predetermined ratio (about 3.45% in the embodiment)" may be set.

(2) During AT, if the instructed role ratio in 175,000 games is a predetermined value or more (for example, 68% or more), until the instructed role ratio reaches a predetermined ratio (for example, less than 65%) , It is not necessary to activate the instruction function when the winning order of the bell is pressed. However, in such a case, instead of not operating the indicating function at all, the operating ratio of the indicating function may be reduced. For example, a lottery may determine whether to activate the pointing function. In other words, during the AT, when the instructed accessory ratio in 175,000 games is a predetermined value or more (for example, 68% or more), the operation ratio of the instruction function is set to "100%" instead of "0%". should be less than %.

(3) At AT and non-RT, when the small combination D condition device is activated, an effect that suggests winning of 1BB is executed, and when the combination is not won (when the winning number of the game is "0"), 1BB The performance that suggests winning the prize is not executed. However, not limited to this, when the combination is not won at AT and non-RT, it is possible to win 1BB (1BB may be won) within the range that does not conflict with the rules. You may perform the production which a person can understand. In this way, in AT and non-RT, it is possible to win 1BB without waiting for the operation of the small combination D condition device.

(4) After winning 1BB in AT and non-RT, the performance during AT is continued during execution of the 1BB game unless the end condition of AT is satisfied. Therefore, when winning the pressing order bell during an AT and 1BB game, the correct pressing order is notified by the operation of the instruction function.
On the other hand, when the end condition of AT is satisfied during the 1BB game, from the next game, it becomes non-AT and 1BB game. In this case, even if the push order bell is won, the instruction function is not activated. Therefore, the order of pressing the correct answer is not reported.
In addition, during an AT and 1BB game, in a game in which RB is won, an effect suggesting that RB winning should be avoided may be executed. This is because when RB wins and shifts to the RB game, the payout percentage decreases.

(5) In AT and RT1, when the player accidentally wins 1BB when the small win D condition device is activated, there are cases where AT is continued as it is and where AT is terminated as a penalty. .
In the former case, similarly to the above-mentioned AT and 1BB game, unless the end condition of AT is satisfied, when winning the push order bell, the instruction function is activated to notify the correct push order. On the other hand, when the AT end condition is satisfied during the 1BB game, from the next game onwards, it becomes a non-AT and 1BB game. In this case, even if the push order bell is won, the instruction function is not activated. Therefore, the order of pressing the correct answer is not reported.
Also, in the latter case, it becomes a non-AT and 1BB game. In the non-AT and 1BB game, even if the winning order bell is won, the instruction function is not activated. Therefore, the order of pressing the correct answer is not reported.

(6) In the thirty-seventh embodiment, 1BB can be won when the small combination D condition device is activated. For this reason, during non-RT and non-AT and during RT1, the instruction function is operated so as not to win 1BB when the small combination D condition device is operated, and during non-RT and AT, 1BB is operated when the small combination D condition device is operated. The instruction function was operated to encourage the winning of the prize. However, not limited to this, during non-RT and non-AT or during RT1, do not operate the instruction function for not winning 1BB when the small combination D condition device is activated, and during non-RT and AT, small combination D It is also possible not to activate the instruction function for prompting the winning of 1BB when the conditional device is activated. Furthermore, although the instruction function is not activated, it is possible to execute an effect suggesting avoidance of winning 1BB or a suggestive effect (effect by reel flash, sound, etc.) to encourage winning of 1BB.
In this case, the instruction function is not activated when the small combination D condition device is activated, and the instruction function is activated only when the minor combination AC condition device is activated. Therefore, in this case, during non-RT and non-AT, the instruction function is operated at a predetermined rate (approximately once in 29 times in the above example) when the minor combination A to C condition device is activated, but RT1 and In non-AT, it is also possible to set the ratio of activating the indication function to "0".

(7) In the thirty-seventh embodiment, in order to make the designated role ratio in 175,000 games less than 70%, when the designated role ratio in 175,000 games becomes, for example, 68% or more, AT It is also possible to restrict the operation of the instruction function even during However, such regulation is arbitrary, and the ratio of operating the indication function in AT may be set to "100"%.
From the above, the "proportion of operating the instruction function" may be "0" or "100"%.

B. Thirty-Eighth Embodiment (1) In the thirty-eighth embodiment, FIG. 303 is shown as an example of RT transition. It is possible to change the advantage of lottery for AT depending on whether the transition from the non-advantageous section to the advantageous section is made.
Further, in the thirty-eighth embodiment, the AT lottery is executed during the RB of the 1BB game, but the AT lottery can be executed while the RB is not inside or while the RB is operating. Furthermore, it is also possible to arbitrarily set how the AT-related advantage is changed when what condition is satisfied in what game state.
For example, a lottery for a special role is drawn during a 1BB game, and when this special role is won, the lottery for AT is preferentially treated. In addition, if it is predetermined that the lottery relating to AT is preferentially treated when shifting from a non-advantageous section to an advantageous section in a specific game state, when a special combination is won during a 1BB game, the state is shifted to the specific game state thereafter. Sometimes, it is sufficient to shift from a non-advantageous section to an advantageous section.

C. Thirty-ninth Embodiment (1) In the thirty-ninth embodiment, when the specified number of non-RT is "2", the same effect as when the specified number of RT1 is "3" is executed, and the intended specified number is played. I wanted to show it to people. Here, in a non-RT game where the prescribed number is "3", the player may be notified that the prescribed number is unintended by displaying a unique image or the like.
(2) When a game is played with a prescribed number of "2" in non-AT and RT1, the AT lottery is not executed. However, it is not limited to this, and although the AT lottery itself is executed, it is also possible to disfavor the AT winning probability (the winning probability exceeds "0", but the probability of hardly winning is set).
In addition, in the case of executing the extra lottery for the number of games played during AT, when the game is played with the specified number "2", the extra lottery is not executed and the extra lottery itself is executed but the extra winning probability is treated coldly. case.

D. 40th Embodiment (1) In the 40th embodiment, as an example of sending a feedback command from sub-sub to sub-main, the image display of the push button is started.
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and, for example, firstly, a feedback command may be transmitted at the timing of completion of display of the above-described 4-system effect. As a result, it is possible to change the lighting mode and volume of the lamps in accordance with the start timing of the 4-system presentation.
Secondly, a feedback command may be transmitted at the start timing of the fade effect of the push button described above. As a result, it is possible to change the lighting mode and volume of the lamp in accordance with the start timing of the fade effect.

Furthermore, thirdly, in the pachinko game machine, by displaying an image corresponding to the held ball on the image display device 23 and changing the image corresponding to the held ball (for example, changing the color), the jackpot of the held ball is achieved. There is a case where a suspended ball promotion effect that suggests high expectations is executed. In this case, the feedback command may be transmitted at the start timing of the pending ball promotion effect. As a result, it is possible to change the lighting mode and volume of the lamp in accordance with the start timing of the reserved ball promotion effect.
Fourthly, there is a case where a pachinko game machine executes a V display effect suggesting that a big win is confirmed. In this case, the feedback command may be transmitted at the start timing of the V display effect. As a result, it is possible to change the lighting mode and sound volume of the lamp in accordance with the start timing of the V display effect.

E. Others (1) The first to 40th embodiments and modifications of each of these embodiments are not limited to being implemented independently, but can be implemented in combination as appropriate.
(2) In the thirty-seventh to fortieth embodiments, the slot machine 10 and the pachinko gaming machine 500 are given as examples of gaming machines. It can also be applied to enclosed-type game machines (medal-less game machines) and the like.

<41st embodiment>
In the forty-first embodiment, as in the nineteenth embodiment (A), as shown in FIG. 95, a power switch 11, a door switch 17, a setting key insertion slot 151, a setting key switch 152, and a setting change (reset) switch are provided. 153 is provided.
The door switch 17 , setting key switch 152 , and setting change (reset) switch 153 are electrically connected to the main control board 50 via the input port 51 .

The power switch 11 is a switch that is operated when turning on/off the power.
In the following description, turning on the power switch 11 may be referred to as "turning on the power", "turning on the power", or "resuming the supply of power".
Also, turning off the power switch 11 may be referred to as "turning off the power" or "cutting off the supply of power."

The door switch 17 is a switch for detecting opening of the front door 12 (see FIG. 22), and is attached to the cabinet 13 (see FIG. 22) or the front door 12. FIG.
The front door 12 is normally closed. However, the front door 12 is opened, for example, when the power is turned on, when settings are changed, when settings are checked, when an error occurs, when medals are supplied, and the like.

When the front door 12 is closed, the door switch 17 is turned off, and when the front door 12 is opened, the door switch 17 is turned on. Thereby, the opening of the front door 12 can be detected.
The door switch 17 is turned on when the front door 12 is closed, and is turned off when the front door 12 is open. Opening may be detected.

The setting key switch 152 is in a setting change state in which setting values can be changed (also referred to as "setting change mode" or "setting change in progress") or in a setting confirmation state in which setting values cannot be changed but can be confirmed ("setting confirmation mode"). Alternatively, it is also referred to as "setting checking".).
By inserting the setting key from the setting key insertion opening 151 and rotating the setting key clockwise by 90 degrees, the setting key switch 152 is turned on (also referred to as "first mode"), and the setting key is turned on from this state. The setting key switch 152 is set to be turned off (also referred to as “second mode”) by rotating it counterclockwise by 90 degrees.

A setting change (reset) switch 153 is a switch that also serves as the setting change switch 153 , the reset switch 153 , and the RWM clear switch 153 .
The setting change switch 153 is a switch that is operated when changing the set value in the setting change state.
Also, the reset switch 153 is a switch that is operated to return to the state before the error occurrence (to cancel the error state) after removing the error that has occurred.
Furthermore, the RWM clear switch 153 is a switch operated when initializing (clearing) a predetermined storage area in the RWM 53 .

In the following description, the term "setting change (reset) switch 153", the "setting change switch 153", the "reset switch 153", and the "RWM clear switch 153" will be used. have
Various switches such as the setting key switch 152 and the setting change switch (reset switch/RWM clear switch) 153 are called "operated" when they are in an on state, and "operated" when they are in an off state. There are cases where it is referred to as "not
In this embodiment, the setting change switch 153, the reset switch 153, and the RWM clear switch 153 are integrated. may

Further, in the forty-first embodiment, the "game section" includes a "normal section" and an "advantageous section".
"Normal section" is a game section that prohibits the transmission of signals related to the instruction function to the peripheral board (for example, the sub-control board 80) and does not affect the performance of the instruction function at all (the instruction function is not activated) is a game section. That is, the normal section is a game section in which an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch 42 is not notified. In addition, there is a case where the normal section is referred to as a "non-advantageous section".
The “advantageous section” is a game section having performance related to the instruction function (in which the instruction function may be operated). That is, the advantageous section is a game section in which the operation mode of the stop switch 42 (for example, correct pressing order) can be notified.

Further, in the forty-first embodiment, an advantageous section display LED 77 capable of displaying to the player that it is an advantageous section is provided. In a normal section, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned off, and in an advantageous section, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on. That is, when the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned off, it indicates a normal section, and when the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit, it indicates an advantageous section. As described above, in the forty-first embodiment, the display mode (turned off or lit) of the advantageous section display LED 77 and the game section (normal section or advantageous section) correspond to each other in a one-to-one relationship.
For example, as shown in FIG. 31, the segment P of the digit 4a of the acquisition number display LED78 can be used as the advantageous section display LED77. Also, an advantageous section display LED 77 can be provided separately from the acquired number display LED 78 .

It should be noted that the advantageous section display LED 77 is not turned on immediately after the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section, and when a predetermined condition is satisfied after the transition to the advantageous section (for example, an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch 42). When the notification is started), the advantageous section display LED 77 may be lit. In this case, when the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit, it indicates an advantageous section, but when the advantageous section display LED 77 is not lit, it may be a normal section or an advantageous section.

FIG. 345 is a diagram for explaining the configurations of the main CPU 55, ROM 54, and RWM 53 in the 41st embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 95 of the nineteenth embodiment (A), the main control board 50 is provided with the main CPU 55, the RWM 53, and the ROM .
Also, as shown in FIG. 345, a one-chip microprocessor (hereinafter simply referred to as "chip") is mounted on the main control board 50, and a main CPU 55 is provided in this chip. Furthermore, the main CPU 55 has a built-in memory, and this built-in memory has a (built-in) ROM 54 and a (built-in) RWM 53 . Furthermore, the addresses of the ROM 54 and RWM 53 are consecutive.

The storage area of the ROM 54 has a used area and a non-used area, and the used area and the non-used area each have a control area and a data area.
Here, the "usage area" is a storage area in which information related to progress of the game is stored.
A "control area" is a storage area in which various programs executed by the main control means 50 are stored, and is also called a "program area".
Furthermore, the "data area" is a storage area in which information other than the program is stored, and is a storage area in which data used when the program is executed is stored.

Furthermore, the "outside use area" is a storage area in which information unrelated to the progress of the game is stored. This is a storage area in which programs, etc. for fraud prevention are stored.
In addition, the "outside use area" has a control area and a data area like the use area. The control area of the used area may be called "first control area" or "first program area", and the control area outside the used area may be called "second control area" or "second program area".
Furthermore, the program stored in the control area (first control area, first program area) of the use area is called "first program", and the control area outside the use area (second control area, second program area) The program stored in is sometimes referred to as a "second program".

During execution of the program (first program) stored in the control area of the used area of the ROM 54, reference (access) to the data stored in the data area of the used area of the ROM 54 is permitted, but the used area of the ROM 54 is permitted. Referencing data stored in the external data area is prohibited.
Similarly, during the execution of the program (second program) stored in the control area outside the use area of the ROM 54, reference to the data stored in the data area outside the use area of the ROM 54 is permitted, but the ROM 54 Reference to data stored in the data area of the used area is prohibited.

Like the ROM 54, the storage area of the RWM 53 has a used area and a non-used area, and the used area and the non-used area each have a work area and a stack area.
As shown in FIG. 345, addresses "F000(H)" to "F1FF(H)" are used areas, addresses "F200(H)" to "F20F(H)" are unused areas, and addresses "F000(H)" to "F1FF(H)" are unused areas. F210(H)” to “F3FF(H)” are outside the use area.

During the execution of the program (first program) stored in the control area of the used area of the ROM 54, the data stored in the used area of the RWM 53 are permitted to be referenced (accessed) and rewritten (overwritten). However, data stored outside the use area of the RWM 53 is permitted to be referenced, but prohibited to be rewritten.
Similarly, while the program (second program) stored in the control area outside the use area of the ROM 54 is being executed, the data stored outside the use area of the RWM 53 is permitted to be referenced and rewritten. , and RWM 53, reference is permitted, but rewriting is prohibited. This is to prevent the processing from becoming complicated.

In addition, in order to prevent data in the RWM 53 usage area from being rewritten (overwritten) due to program runaway or the like during execution of a program (second program) outside the usage area, the RWM 53 usage area An unused area is provided between and outside the used area.
Furthermore, if interrupt processing enters during the execution of a program (second program) outside the usage area, there is a possibility that the data in the usage area of the RWM 53 will be rewritten (overwritten) by the interrupt processing. Interrupt processing is prohibited during execution of (second program).

As shown in FIG. 345, the ROM 54 has a program management area and the like as other areas in addition to the used area and the non-used area.
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 345, the RWM 53 has an unused area and the like as other areas in addition to the used area and the non-used area.

Furthermore, among the storage areas of the entire built-in memory, areas other than the ROM 54 and RWM 53 include built-in register areas, unused areas, and the like.
Further, the built-in register area is provided with, for example, A registers to L registers, a transmission register, and the like.

FIG. 346 is a diagram showing addresses, label names, number of bytes, and names of data stored in the used area of the RWM 53 in the forty-first embodiment, and corresponds to FIG. 35 of the eleventh embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 345, the address of the used area is set in the range from "F000(H)" to "F1FF(H)".
Note that the data shown in FIG. 346 is for use in the explanation of the 41st embodiment, and the data stored in the use area of the RWM 53 is not limited to these.
346, description of the same data as in FIG. 35 of the eleventh embodiment will be omitted, and data different from FIG. 35 of the eleventh embodiment will be described.

The address "F001(H)" is a 1-byte storage area in which set value display data (_NB_RANK_DSP) is stored. As described in the eleventh embodiment, when the set value is "N", "N-1" is stored as the set value data (_NB_RANK) at the address "F000(H)". Then, "N" obtained by adding "1" to the set value data (_NB_RANK) is stored at the address "F001 (H)" as the set value display data (_NB_RANK_DSP).

In this embodiment, there are set values "1" to "6", and address "F000 (H)" has set value data (_NB_RANK) of "0 (D)" to "5 (D)". Any value is stored, and any value from "1 (D)" to "6 (D)" is stored as set value display data (_NB_RANK_DSP) at address "F001 (H)" , the value of the set value display data (_NB_RANK_DSP) is displayed on the set value display LED 73 as the set value.

The address "F044(H)" is a 1-byte storage area in which the status display LED lighting data is stored.
As shown in FIG. 349(A), which will be described later, in the forty-first embodiment, the display substrate 75 is provided with state display LEDs 79 such as a 1-bet display LED 79a, a 2-bet display LED 79b, a 3-bet display LED 79c, a game start display LED 79d, and a put-in display. It has six LEDs, a display LED 79e and a replay display LED 79f.
The state display LED lighting data is data indicating whether or not three of the six LEDs, the game start display LED 79d, the insertion display LED 79e, and the replay display LED 79f, should be lit.

As shown in FIG. 346, the D0 bit of the status display LED lighting data is assigned to the game start display LED 79d, the D1 bit is assigned to the insertion display LED 79e, and the D2 bit is assigned to the replay display LED 79f. there is Each bit of the status display LED lighting data matches each bit of the LED display counter 1 in FIG. 353(A) described later.
Then, "1" is set to the bit corresponding to the LED to be turned on, and "0" is set to the bit corresponding to the LED to be turned off.
For example, when the game start display LED 79d is turned on and the insertion display LED 79e and replay display LED 79f are turned off, "00000001 (B)" is stored as the state display LED lighting data.

The address "F051(H)" is a 1-byte storage area in which the LED display counter 1 (_CT_LED_DSP1) is stored.
The LED display counter 1 is a counter for determining which of digits 1 to 5 is to be lit, and is continuously updated for each interrupt.
Here, "digit" means a display unit (display), and in this embodiment, it is composed of one 7-segment display. Of the digits of this embodiment, digit 1 corresponds to the upper digits of the credit number (stored number) display LED 76 and digit 2 corresponds to the lower digits of the credit number display LED 76 . Digit 3 corresponds to the upper digit of the acquired number display LED 78 , digit 4 corresponds to the lower digit of the acquired number display LED 78 , and digit 5 corresponds to the set value display LED 73 .
As for each bit of the LED display counter 1, the D0 bit is assigned to the digit 1 signal, the D1 bit to the digit 2 signal, . . . , and the D4 bit to the digit 5 signal. Then, in one interrupt process, dynamic lighting of digits 1 to 5 is performed so that the digit corresponding to the bit "1" in the LED display counter 1 is lit.

In the forty-first embodiment, the LED display counter 1 takes a value of "00010000 (B)" as an initial value. Then, the LED display counter 1 updates the bit "1" of the LED display counter 1 so as to shift the bit "1" of the LED display counter 1 to the right by one digit as it progresses from interrupt "1"→"2"→... (for each interrupt). . In addition, in the interrupt following the interrupt "5", the LED display counter 1 becomes "00000000 (B)" by shifting it to the right by one digit. Set counter 1 to "00010000 (B)". As a result, the LED display counter 1 repeats the values "5"→"4"→...→"1"→"5"→"4"→... for each interrupt process. That is, five interrupts constitute one cycle.

From the above, the value of the LED display counter 1 is
"N" interrupt: 00010000 (B)
"N+1" interrupt: 00001000 (B)
"N+2" interrupt: 00000100 (B)
"N+3" interrupt: 00000010 (B)
"N+4" interrupt: 00000001 (B)
"N+5" interrupt: 00000000 (B) → 00010000 (B) (initialization; same value as "N" interrupt)
"N+6" interrupt: 00001000 (B)
:
becomes.

In the forty-first embodiment, five interrupts form one cycle, and digits 1 to 5 are dynamically lit. Specifically, when the value of the LED display counter 1 is "00010000 (B)", the digit 5 signal is output. By outputting the digit 5 signal, the digit 5 (setting value display LED 73) can be lit (digits 1 to 4 are extinguished). At the time of the next interrupt processing, the LED display counter becomes "00001000 (B)", a digit 4 signal is output, and digit 4 (lower digit of acquisition number display LED D78) can be lit (digits 1 to 3 and 5 are extinguished). Become.

The address "F052(H)" is a storage area for the LED display request flag (_FL_LED_DSP). The LED display request flag takes a value corresponding to normal operation, setting change operation, or setting confirmation operation.
In the 41st embodiment, the value "00001111 (B)" is taken because digits 1 to 4 are lit and digit 5 is not lit during normal operation. During setting change and setting confirmation, digit 5 is lit and digits 1 to 4 are not lit, so the value is "00010000 (B)".

A 48-byte storage area at addresses "F1D0(H)" to "F1FF(H)" is a stack area of the used area.

Here, the management information display LED 74 is also called a "role ratio monitor" or a "ratio indicator", and is composed of four LEDs (digits 6 to 9 in order from the left).
Also, of the four LEDs constituting the management information display LED 74, the two LEDs (digits 6 and 7) on the left side are also called "identification segments" and display the type of information. The two LEDs (digits 8 and 9) on the right are also called "ratio segments" and display the calculated ratio.

Furthermore,
Digit 6: Identification segment upper digit Digit 7: Identification segment lower digit Digit 8: Ratio segment upper digit Digit 9: Ratio segment lower digit There are cases where these are also referred to.

In the forty-first embodiment, the management information display LED 74 repeatedly displays the following six items of information 1) to 6) as management information at predetermined time intervals.
1) Directed role ratio (cumulative) (7P.)
2) Continuous accessory ratio (6000 games) (6y.)
3) Accessory ratio (6000 games) (7y.)
4) Continuous accessory ratio (cumulative) (6A.)
5) Role ratio (cumulative) (7A.)
6) Accessory condition ratio (cumulative) (5H.)

For example, when displaying the role ratio (total), when the ratio is "50"%, the symbol "7A." indicating the role ratio (total) is displayed in the identification segment, and "50" is displayed. Show on ratio segment.
Here, "total" refers to the total sum of the numbers that have been counted up to that point, and in the present embodiment, the number of games is counted until it reaches at least "175000" games.
When the total number of games is less than "175000", the ratio is displayed in the ratio segment by blinking display, and when the total number of games is "175000" or more, the ratio is displayed in the ratio segment by lighting display, for example.
Even after the cumulative number of games reaches "175000" or more, the cumulative total continues to be added until it reaches a value (upper limit) that can be stored in a predetermined address of the RWM 53 .
Also, "6000 games" is the total number of games played for 15 sets of "400" games for one set.

The "instruction-including role ratio" is a value obtained by dividing the sum of the number of payouts when the role is activated and the number of payouts in the game in which the instruction function is activated, by the total number of payouts.
In the case of a slot machine in which no role is installed, the "indicated role ratio" is a value obtained by dividing the number of payouts in the game in which the instruction function is activated by the total number of payouts.
In addition, the sum total of the number of payouts at the time of operating the role and the number of payouts in the game in which the instruction function is operated is counted by the instructed role product counter.

Regarding "the number of payouts in the game in which the instruction function is activated", for example, when a 15-piece combination is won based on the operation of the stop switch 42 in the displayed pressing order in the game in which the instruction function is activated. adds the number of payouts "15" to the instructed accessory counter and the total payout (cumulative) counter.
Taking FIG. 124 of the 23rd embodiment as an example, the small combination condition device A1 to small combination A6 condition device were operated during the 1BB game, and the instruction function was operated (correct answer order (push order for winning 15 (order) is displayed), the stop switch 42 is operated in the displayed pressing order (correct pressing order), and when a 15-card combination (any of the small winning combination 01 to small winning combination 06) is won, an instructed combination. The payout number "15" is added to the item counter and the total payout (cumulative) counter.

On the other hand, in a game in which the instruction function is activated, when the stop switch 42 is operated in a different order from the displayed order, for example, when a 3-card combination is won, the instruction-inclusive accessory counter and the total payout ( Cumulative) Add the number of payouts "3" to the counter.
124 of the 23rd embodiment will be described as an example. In a game in which the minor combination condition device A1 to minor combination A6 condition device are activated during the 1BB game and the instruction function is activated (the order of pressing the correct answer is displayed), the display When the stop switch 42 is operated in a different pressing order (incorrect pressing order) from the pressing order (incorrect answer pressing order), and a 3-piece combination (any of the small winning combination 13 to 24) is won, the instructed accessory counter and The payout number "3" is added to the total payout (cumulative) counter.

In addition, in the game in which the instruction function is activated, when the stop switch 42 is operated in a different order from the displayed order of pushes, and the winning combination is missed (when the combination is not won), the indicated role counter and The total payout (cumulative) counter has the same value as the previous game.
In the example of FIG. 124 of the twenty-third embodiment, when the stop switches 42 are operated in the order of pressing the incorrect answers, a winning combination of 3 is won. It is also possible to configure so as to be non-winning (no winning of any combination). Then, in a game in which the minor combination condition device A1 to minor combination A6 condition device is activated during the 1BB game and the instruction function is activated (correct pressing order is displayed), the pressing order different from the displayed pressing order (incorrect pressing order) When the stop switch 42 is operated in order), when the winning combination is lost (when the combination is not won), the values of the instructed role counter and total payout (cumulative) counter become the same values as in the previous game. .

In the present embodiment, when the stop switch 42 is operated in a different pressing order than the displayed pressing order in the game in which the instruction function is activated, and the winning combination is missed, the instructed accessory counter and the total payout are displayed. By executing the process of adding the payout number "0" to the (total) counter, the values of both counters are set to the same values as in the previous game.
When a winning combination is missed, the process of adding the number of payouts may be skipped. In other cases, it is necessary to configure the program so as to skip the process of adding the number of payouts.
Therefore, in this embodiment, when a winning combination is lost, a process of adding the payout number "0" to both counters is executed. As a result, the values of both counters can be set to the same values as in the previous game without inserting the process of judging whether or not the winning combination has been missed, so that the amount of use of the ROM 54 can be reduced and the processing of the main CPU 55 can be performed. The burden can also be reduced.

"Continuous bonus ratio" refers to the ratio of the number of payouts at the time of activation of the first class special bonus (RB) to the total number of payouts.
For example, when the total number of payouts in the number of games played is "6000" is "2000", and the number of payouts when the "first class special bonus (RB)" is activated is "500". Ratio (6000 games)” becomes “25 (%)”.

"Accessory ratio" refers to the ratio of the number of payouts at the time of activation of the accessory to the total number of payouts.
Here, the "accessories" are, in addition to the above-mentioned first-class special-accessories (RB), second-class special-accessories (CB) and MB (also referred to as 2BB). Equipment. CB is continuous operation.), SB (single bonus) is included.

The "accessory state ratio" is a value obtained by dividing the sum of the number of games played when the accessory is activated and the number of games played when the accessory continuous actuating device is activated, by the total number of games played.
In addition, the total sum of the number of games played when the accessory is activated and the number of games played when the accessory continuous actuating device is activated is counted by the accessory state counter.
In addition, in the above six items, in a game machine that does not have the function corresponding to the item, the ratio segment is lit and displayed as "--".
For example, if "RB (first class special role)" is not provided, there is no continuous role ratio, so when ratio display numbers "2" and "4" are displayed, the ratio segment is set to "-- ” lights up.

According to the regulations, the instructed role ratio should be set to less than 70%, the role ratio to less than 70%, the continuous role ratio to less than 60%, and the role ratio to less than 50%. there is
By looking at the information displayed on the management information display LED 74, it is possible to confirm whether or not the information is within the range defined by the regulations.

In addition, in order to allow devices outside the slot machine 10, such as the hall computer 300, to grasp the various ratio information, the various ratio information may be output as an external signal.
For example, the designated role ratio data, continuous role ratio (cumulative) data, role ratio (cumulative) data, and role ratio state ratio data displayed on the management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor) are used as external signals. It may be configured to enable output. At this time, a predetermined number of games (for example, "17500 times" for the continuous role ratio (cumulative) data and the role ratio (cumulative) data, the instructed role ratio data, and the role condition ratio data , "175,000 times", etc.) is not satisfied, predetermined information different from the current ratio information (eg, "FF (H)", etc.) is output as an external signal, and a predetermined number of games is output. When the conditions are satisfied, various ratio information may be output as an external signal.
Furthermore, the advantageous section ratio data, which is not displayed on the management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor), may be configured to be output as an external signal. In this case, an advantageous interval game number counter for counting the number of games played in the advantageous interval and a storage area for advantageous interval ratio data indicating the ratio of the number of games played in the advantageous interval to the total number of games may be provided outside the use area of the RWM 53 .

347 and 348 are diagrams showing addresses, label names, number of bytes, and names of data stored outside the use area of the RWM 53 in the forty-first embodiment.
Addresses outside the use area are set in the range from "F210(H)" to "F3FF(H)" as shown in FIG.
The data shown in FIGS. 347 and 348 are used in the explanation of the 41st embodiment, and the data stored outside the use area of the RWM 53 is not limited to these.

The 400 game counter at the address "F210(H)" adds the number of games played at 400 games. This 400 game counter is a counter that cycles from "0" to "399 (D)" and is incremented by "1" each time a game is played. When "1" is added when the value of the 400 game counter is "399 (D)", the value of the 400 game counter becomes "0".

Contrary to the above, "399 (D)" may be set as the initial value of the 400 game counter, and "1" may be subtracted each time the game is played. In this case, when the value of the 400 game counter becomes "0", it is determined that 400 games have been executed. When "1" is subtracted when the value of the 400 game counter is "0", the initial value "399 (D)" is set to the 400 game counter.

The ring buffer number of the address "F212(H)" is for designating to which ring buffer the number of payout medals is added when medals are paid out in the game.
Specifically, at the address "F212(H)", any one of "0" to "14(D)" is stored as the ring buffer number.

Addresses "F213(H)" to "F230(H)" are storage areas of total payout ring buffers 0 to 14. FIG. The total payout ring buffers 0-14 consist of 15 ring buffers. Each total payout ring buffer consists of 2 bytes. For example, total payout ring buffer 0 consists of addresses "F213(H)" and "F214(H)", where address "F213(H)" is the lower digit and address "F214(H)" is the upper digit. In FIGS. 347 and 348, the lowest address number is displayed for the storage area with the number of bytes of "2" or more.

One ring buffer stores the total number of payouts for 400 games. For example, the payout numbers for the 1st game to the 400th game are stored in the addresses "F213(H)" and "F214(H)", and the next payout numbers for the 401st game to the 800th game are stored in the address "F215 ( H)” and “F216(H)”.
Here, whether or not the 400th game has been played is determined by referring to the 400th game counter at the address "F210(H)". Further, it is determined by referring to the ring buffer number of the address "F212(H)" to which ring buffer value the number of medals to be paid out in the game is added (the value is updated).

When the total number of payouts from the 1st game to the 400th game is stored in the total payout ring buffer 0 at the addresses "F213(H)" and "F214(H)", the total number from the 5601st game to the 6000th game is stored. The payout number is stored in the total payout ring buffer 14 at addresses "F22F(H)" and "F230(H)". Next, at the end of the 6000th game, the data stored in the total payout ring buffer 0 at addresses "F213(H)" and "F214(H)" is cleared, and the number of payouts from the 6001st game to the 6400th game is cleared. is stored in the total payout ring buffer 0 at addresses "F213(H)" and "F214(H)".

Each of the total payout ring buffers 0 to 14 consists of 2 bytes. Assuming that the maximum number of payouts in one game is "15", the maximum number of payouts in 400 games is 6000, so the storage capacity is 2 bytes.
This point also applies to the continuous bonus ring buffers 0 to 14 and the bonus bonus ring buffers 0 to 14, which will be described later.

Further, addresses "F231(H)" to "F24E(H)" are storage areas of the continuous award payout ring buffers 0 to 14. FIG.
Furthermore, the addresses "F24F(H)" to "F26C(H)" are storage areas of the prize payout ring buffers 0 to 14. FIG.

The total number-of-games counter of addresses "F26D(H)" to "F26F(H)" is a counter for storing the number of games played (accumulated), and consists of 3 bytes. Since it is necessary to count "175000 (D)" games as the total number of games played, the total number of games counter is composed of 3 bytes.
The total number of games counter continues counting even after the number of games exceeds "175000 (D)" games, and stops counting when 3 bytes are full ("FFFFFF (H)").

The instructed role product counter of the addresses "F270(H)" to "F272(H)" is a counter that counts the number of payouts when the role product is activated and the number of payouts in the game in which the instruction function is activated, Consists of 3 bytes.
The total payout (6000 times) counter of addresses "F273(H)" to "F275(H)" is a counter that counts the total number of payouts of medals during 6000 games. Even if 15 medals are paid out per game in 6,000 games, the total number is 90,000. The same applies to the payout (6000 times) counter).

The continuous accessory payout (6000 times) counter of the addresses "F276(H)" to "F278(H)" is a counter for counting the number of payouts when the continuous accessory is activated during 6000 games.
The accessory payout (6000 times) counter of addresses "F279(H)" to "F27B(H)" is a counter that counts the number of payouts when the accessory is activated during 6000 games.

Then, when there is a payout while the continuous accessory is not operating and the accessory is not operating, only the total payout (6000 times) counter is updated (added), and the continuous accessory payout (6000 times) counter and the accessory payout are updated (added). (6000 times) The counter is not updated.
Further, when there is a payout while the continuous accessory is not activated and the accessory is activated, the total payout (6000 times) counter and the accessory payout (6000 times) counter are updated, and the continuous accessory payout (6000 times) counter is updated. is not updated.
Furthermore, when there is a payout during continuous accessory operation, the total payout (6000 times) counter, the accessory payout (6000 times) counter, and the continuous accessory payout (6000 times) counter are all updated.

The values of the total payout (6000 times) counter, the continuous bonus payout (6000 times) counter, and the bonus bonus payout (6000 times) counter are updated every 400 games.
First, when there is a payout of medals from the first game to the 6000th game, the total payout (6000 times ) counter, continuous bonus payout (6000 times) counter, and bonus bonus payout (6000 times) counter.
At the end of the 6000th game, the continuous role ratio (6000 times) and the role ratio (6000 times) are calculated. After this calculation, the number of payouts in each 400 game number from before "400 × 15-1" game (5999 games) to before "400 × 15-400" game (5600 games) from the game is the total payout (6000 times) counter value, continuous bonus payout (6000 times) counter value, and bonus bonus payout (6000 times) counter value.

For example, when it is the 6000th game, the total payout ring buffer 0 (F213(H) to F214(H)) value is subtracted from the total payout (6000 times) counter value. Then, the value of total payout ring buffer 0 (F213(H) to F214(H)) is cleared. Furthermore, the number of payouts from the 6001st game to the 6400th game is added to the total payout ring buffer 0 and the total payout (6000 times) counter.

Similarly, when the game reaches the 6000th game, the value of the continuous accessory payout ring buffer 0 (F231(H) to F232(H)) is subtracted from the continuous accessory payout (6000 times) counter value. Then, the value of the continuous bonus payout ring buffer 0 is cleared. Further, the number of payouts at the time of continuous role payout operation from the 6001st game to the 6400th game is added to the continuous role payout ring buffer 0 and the continuous role payout (6000 times) counter.

Furthermore, similarly, when the 6000th game is reached, the value of the award payout ring buffer 0 (F24F(H) to F250(H)) is subtracted from the award payout (6000 times) counter value. Then, the value of the prize payout ring buffer 0 is cleared. Furthermore, the number of payouts during the operation of the accessory from the 6001st game to the 6400th game is added to the accessory payout ring buffer 0 and the accessory payout (6000 times) counter.

More specifically, for example, the total payout ring buffer stores the number of payouts for the following number of games played.
Total payout ring buffer 0: "1" game to "400" game Total payout ring buffer 1: "401" game to "800" game Total payout ring buffer 2: "801" game to "1200" game Total payout ring buffer 3: "1201" game to "1600" game Total payout ring buffer 4: "1601" game to "2000" game Total payout ring buffer 5: "2001" game to "2400" Game item Total payout ring buffer 6: "2401" game item to "2800" game item Total payout ring buffer 7: "2801" game item to "3200" game item Total payout ring buffer 8: "3201" game item to "3600" game item '' Game total payout ring buffer 9: ``3601'' game to ``4000'' game Total payout ring buffer 10: ``4001'' game to ``4400'' game Total payout ring buffer 11: ``4401'' game to `` 4800" game total payout ring buffer 12: "4801" game to "5200" game Total payout ring buffer 13: "5201" game to "5600" game Total payout ring buffer 14: "5601" game to "6000" game total payout (6000 times) counter: "1" game to "6000" game

Then, assuming that the 6000th game has been completed, all of the total payout ring buffers 0 to 14 store the number of payouts for each number of games.
Also, the value of the total payout (6000 times) counter and the sum of the values stored in the total payout ring buffers 0-14 match.
Let Σ1 be the value stored in the total payout (6000 times) counter at this time, and Z1 be the value stored in the total payout ring buffer 0.
Total payout (6000 times) counter = Σ1-Z1
perform the operation of
Also,
Total payout ring buffer 0 = 0 (clear)
perform the operation of
That is, the value "Z1" of the total payout ring buffer 0 storing the number of payouts for 400 games from 5999 (400×15−1) games to 5600 (400×15−400) games is changed to the total payout ( 6000 times) A process of subtracting from the value "Σ1" stored in the counter is executed.

Next, a process of clearing the value "Z1" of the total payout ring buffer 0 storing the number of payouts for 400 games from 5999 (400×15−1) games to 5600 (400×15−400) games. to run.
After such calculation, the 6001st game is started. When there is a payout from the 6001st game to the 6400th game (here, it is assumed that the accessory did not operate from the 6001st game to the 6400th game), it is added to the total payout ring buffer 0, and Add to the total payout (6000 times) counter.

Next, assuming that the 6400th game has been completed, the total payout ring buffer stores the number of payouts for the following number of games.
Total payout ring buffer 0: “6001” game to “6400” game Total payout ring buffer 1: “401” game to “800” game :
Total payout ring buffer 14: "5601" game to "6000" game Total payout (6000 times) counter: "401" game to "6000" game, and "6001" game to "6400" game

Similarly to the above, if the value stored in the total payout (6000 times) counter at this time is Σ2, and the value stored in the total payout ring buffer 1 is Z2, then:
Total payout (6000 times) counter = Σ2-Z2
and
and,
total payout ring buffer 1=0
and
After such calculation, the 6401st game is started. When there is a payout from the 6401st game to the 6800th game (here, it is assumed that the accessory did not operate from the 6401st game to the 6800th game), it is added to the total payout ring buffer 1, and Add to the total payout (6000 times) counter. The above processing is repeated.

Also, although the total payout ring buffer and the total payout (6000 times) counter have been described, the same processing as above is performed when the role product is activated or when the continuous role product is activated.
Specifically, when the role product is activated, the total payout ring buffers 0 to 14 are replaced with the role product payout ring buffers 0 to 14, and the total payout (6000 times) counter is replaced with the role product payout (6000 times) counter. Execute the process. Incidentally, when the accessory is activated, as described above, one of the total payout ring buffers 0 to 14 and the total payout (6000 times) counter are also updated.

Similarly, when the continuous accessory is operated, the total payout ring buffers 0 to 14 are replaced with the continuous accessory payout ring buffers 0 to 14, and the total payout (6000 times) counter is replaced with the continuous accessory payout (6000 times) counter. process. In addition, at the time of continuous role product operation, any of the total payout ring buffers 0 to 14, any of the role product payout ring buffers 0 to 14, the total payout (6000 times) counter, and the role product payout (6000 times) counter Also update.

The total payout (cumulative) counter of addresses "F27C(H)" to "F27E(H)" is a counter that counts the cumulative number of payouts, and counts the total number of payouts during at least "175000 (D)" games. .
Similarly, the continuous bonus payout (cumulative) counter for the addresses "F27F(H)" to "F281(H)" is a counter that counts the total number of payouts when the continuous bonus is activated. At least "175000 (D)" counts the number of payouts at the time of continuous accessory operation during the game.

Furthermore, in the same way, the bonus payout (total) counter for the addresses "F282(H)" to "F284(H)" is a counter that counts the total number of payouts when the bonus is activated. "175000 (D)" Counts the number of payouts when the accessory is activated during the game.
It should be noted that the above-mentioned three types of payout (6000 times) counters subtract the number of payouts from before 5999 games to before 5600 games every 400 games, but these three types of payout (cumulative) counters subtract values. never do.

The three types of payout (cumulative) counters consist of 3 bytes. For example, in 175000 games, assuming that 15 coins were paid out per game, the value is "175000×15=2625000", which is smaller than the value that can be stored in 3 bytes. Therefore, it can be stored with a storage capacity of 3 bytes.

Accessory item state counters at addresses "F285(H)" to "F287(H)" are counters that count the total number of games played when the accessory is activated and the number of games played when the accessory continuous operation device is activated. Yes, and consists of 3 bytes.
The instructed role ratio data at the address "F288(H)" is the total ratio of the payout number at the time of operating the role and the number of payouts in the game in which the instruction function is operated to the total number of payouts. This is a storage area for storing material ratios.

The continuous role ratio (6000 times) data at the address "F289(H)" is a storage area for storing the ratio of the number of payouts at the time of continuous role operation to the total number of payouts during 6000 games.
The role ratio (6000 times) data at the address "F28A(H)" is a storage area for storing the ratio of the number of payouts at the time of operating the role to the total number of payouts during 6000 games.

The consecutive role ratio (cumulative) data at the address "F28B(H)" is a storage area for storing the ratio of the number of payouts at the time of continuous role operation to the total number of payouts in the total number of games played.
The role ratio (total) data at the address "F28C(H)" is a storage area for storing the ratio of the number of payouts at the time of operating the role to the total number of payouts in the total number of games played.

The accessory state ratio data at the address "F28D(H)" is the ratio of the sum of the number of games when the accessory is activated and the number of games when the accessory continuous operating device is activated to the total number of games played. This is a storage area for storing state ratios.
The calculation result buffer at the address "F28E(H)" is a storage area for temporarily storing the calculation result during the ratio calculation process.

The count upper limit flag of the address "F28F (H)" is the total number of games counter (addresses "F26D (H)" to "F26F (H)") or the total number of payouts (cumulative) counter (addresses "F27C (H)" to This flag is turned on when the storage capacity of "F27E(H)") is the upper limit value (3 bytes full, that is, "FFFFFF(H)").
Of the 1-byte (8-bit) data, the "D0" bit is assigned to the upper limit flag of the number of games played, and the "D1" bit is assigned to the upper limit flag of the number of payouts. The 'D2' to 'D7' bits are unused in the forty-first embodiment.
For example, when the total game number counter reaches the count upper limit value, the value of the count upper limit flag becomes "00000001 (B)".

The payout number upper limit buffer at the address "F290 (H)" is 3 bytes full when the number of payouts in the game is added to the total payout (cumulative) counter, and if it exceeds 3 bytes full, the value after addition becomes 3 bytes full. is a storage area for storing the value of
For example, when the total payout (cumulative) counter value before payout in the game is "FFFFFE (H)" and the number of payouts in the game is "8 (H)", the counter value is set to "8 (H)". )” will cause overflow. Therefore, in order not to cause overflow of the total payout (cumulative) counter value, a value for becoming full of 3 bytes is calculated, and the calculation result is stored in the payout number upper limit buffer.
In the above example, "FFFFFE(H)"+"1(H)"="FFFFFF(H)", so "1(H)" is stored in the payout number upper limit buffer.

The blinking request flag at the address "F291(H)" is a flag for specifying an object that satisfies the blinking display condition when displaying the identification seg and the ratio seg.
Regarding the instructed accessory ratio, continuous accessory ratio (total), accessory ratio (total), and accessory state ratio, the total number of games played (the value stored in the total number of games counter) is less than "175000". When there is, control is performed so that the identification segment is displayed blinking.
With respect to the continuous role ratio (6000 times) and the role ratio (6000 times), when the total number of games played (the value stored in the total number of games counter) is less than "6000", the identification segment is displayed blinking. control to

It is desirable that the instructed character ratio, continuous character ratio (cumulative), character ratio (cumulative), and character state ratio are ratios among 175,000 games (in order to reduce variations). is the ratio calculated from the number of games played in less than 175,000 games, a blinking identification seg is displayed to indicate this.
Similarly, the continuous role ratio (6000 times) and the role ratio (6000 times) are originally ratios between 6000 times, but when the ratio is calculated based on the number of games played less than 6000 times, To indicate this, the identification segment is displayed blinking.

In addition, when the displayed value of the instructed accessory ratio, the accessory ratio (cumulative), and the accessory ratio (6000 times) is '70' or more, the ratio segment is controlled to blink. .
Furthermore, when the displayed value of the continuous role product ratio (total) and the continuous role product ratio (6000 times) is "60" or more, the ratio segment is controlled to blink.
Furthermore, when the displayed value of the role item status ratio is "50" or more, control is performed so that the ratio seg blinks.

The reason why the slot machine of this embodiment is set as described above is that the instructed role ratio and the role ratio are designed to be less than "70"%, and the continuous role ratio is set to "60". %, and the state ratio of accessories, etc. is designed to be less than "50"%, and when the measured value does not fall within the range of the design value, the ratio seg blinks. to let them know by letting them know.

In addition, in the blinking request flag, the D0 bit corresponds to the instructed role product ratio flashing flag, the D1 bit corresponds to the continuous role product ratio (6000 times) flashing flag, and the D7 bit corresponds to the 175000 times flashing flag.
For example, when the calculated instructed accessory ratio is less than "70", the D0 bit of the flashing request flag is "0", and when it is "70" or more, the D0 bit of the flashing request flag is "1 ”.
Similarly, when the calculated continuous role product ratio (6000 times) is less than "70", the D1 bit of the flash request flag is "0", and when it is "70" or more, the D1 bit of the flash request flag bit becomes "1".

In addition, when the calculated state ratio of the accessory, etc. is less than "50", the D5 bit of the flashing request flag is "0", and when it is "50" or more, the D5 bit of the flashing request flag is "1". ”.
Furthermore, when the total game number counter value is less than "6000", the D6 bit of the flashing request flag is set to "1", and when it is "6000" or more, the D6 bit of the flashing request flag is set to "0". Become.
Furthermore, when the total number of games counter value is less than '175000', the D7 bit of the blinking request flag becomes '1', and when it is '175000' or more, the D7 bit of the blinking request flag becomes '0'. .

The ratio display number of the address "F292(H)" is a storage area for storing the number corresponding to the ratio displayed in the interrupt process.
When the ratio to be displayed in the interrupt process is the instructed accessory ratio, "1" is stored in the ratio display number of the address "F292(H)". Similarly, "2" is stored when the continuous role ratio (6000 times), "3" is stored when the role ratio (6000 times), and "3" is stored when the continuous role ratio (total). stores "4", stores "5" when it is the role product ratio (total), and stores "6" when it is the role product etc. state ratio.

The blinking switching flag at the address "F293(H)" is a flag for determining whether it is lit or extinguished when blinking the identification seg or the ratio seg during the interrupt process.
In this embodiment, when the blinking display is performed, it is set to repeat turning on and off about every 0.3 seconds. For about 0.3 seconds during lighting, the blinking switching flag is "0" (value indicating lighting), and for about 0.3 seconds during lighting, the blinking switching flag is "1" (value indicating lighting). is set to be

The display switching time of address "F294(H)" is a counter that counts about 5 seconds, which is the time to display one ratio, and is updated by "1" each time an interrupt process is performed.
In the present embodiment, the instructed character ratio display (about 5 seconds) → character continuous ratio (6000 times) display (about 5 seconds) → … → character ratio (cumulative) display (about 5 seconds) → role Item condition ratio display (approximately 5 seconds)→Indicated accessory ratio (approximately 5 seconds)→ . . . are repeatedly displayed.
Therefore, the display switching time is stored in order to determine whether or not approximately five seconds have elapsed, that is, whether or not the display ratio switching time has been reached.

The blinking switching time of the address "F296 (H)" is a counter that counts about 0.3 seconds when blinking the identification segment or the ratio segment, as described above. is a counter that is updated to "1".

Address "F297(H)" is a 1-byte storage area in which LED display counter 2 (_SC_LED_DSP2) is stored.
The LED display counter 2 is a counter for determining which of the digits 6 to 9 is to be lit, and is continuously updated for each interrupt. For each bit of the LED display counter 2, the D0 bit is assigned to the digit 6 signal, the D1 bit to the digit 7 signal, the D2 bit to the digit 8 signal, and the D3 bit to the digit 4 signal. Then, in one interrupt process, dynamic lighting of digits 6 to 9 is performed so that the digit corresponding to the bit "1" in the LED display counter 2 is lit.

In the forty-first embodiment, the LED display counter 2 takes a value of "00001000 (B)" as an initial value. Then, the LED display counter 2 updates the bit "1" of the LED display counter 2 so as to shift the bit "1" of the LED display counter 2 to the right by one digit as the interrupt proceeds from "1" to "2" to . . . (for each interrupt). . In addition, in the interrupt following the interrupt "4", the LED display counter 2 becomes "00000000 (B)" by shifting it to the right by one digit. Set counter 2 to "00001000 (B)". As a result, the LED display counter 2 repeats the values "4"→"3"→"2"→"1"→"4"→ . That is, four interrupts constitute one cycle.

From the above, the value of the LED display counter 2 is
"N" interrupt: 00001000 (B)
"N+1" interrupt: 00000100 (B)
"N+2" interrupt: 00000010 (B)
"N+3" interrupt: 00000001 (B)
"N+4" interrupt: 00000000 (B) → 00001000 (B) (initialization; same value as "N" interrupt)
"N+5" interrupt: 00000100 (B)
:
becomes.

In the forty-first embodiment, four interrupts form one cycle, and digits 6 to 9 are dynamically lit. Specifically, when the value of the LED display counter 2 is "00001000 (B)", the digit 9 signal is output. By outputting the digit 9 signal, the digit 9 (lower digit of the ratio segment) can be lit. At the time of the next interrupt processing, the LED display counter becomes "00000100 (B)", a digit 8 signal is output, and digit 8 (ratio segment upper digit) can be lit. Also, when the LED display counter is "00000010 (B)", a digit 7 signal is output to enable lighting of the digit 7 (identification segment lower digit), and when the LED display counter is "00000001 (B)" , a digit 6 signal is output, and the digit 6 (higher order digit of the identification segment) can be lit.

The RWM checksum data (_SW_SUM_CHK) at the address "F2A0(H)" is a storage area for storing the RWM checksum data calculated by the RWM checksum set processing (S_SUM_SET) during the power-off processing (I_POWER_DOWN).
Here, the "RWM checksum data" is also called "complement data", "error detection data" or "error detection information", and is located at addresses "F000(H)" to When added to the data of "F1FF(H)" and the data of addresses "F210(H)" to "F3FF(H)" outside the use area (excluding "F2A0(H)"), it becomes "0". is a value.
That is, the data of the addresses "F000(H)" to "F1FF(H)" in the use area of the RWM 53 and the addresses "F210(H)" to "F3FF(H)" outside the use area ("F2A0(H)" are ) is added to the added value of the data of "F2A0(H)", the result is "0". In other words, the sum of the data at addresses "F000(H)" to "F1FF(H)" and the data at addresses "F210(H)" to "F3FF(H)" is "0".

The power-off processing completion flag (_SF_POWER_OFF) at the address "F2A1(H)" is a flag for determining whether or not the power-off processing has been executed normally, and is stored during the power-off processing.
When the power-off processing is executed normally, "55 (H)" is stored as the power-off processing completion flag (_SF_POWER_OFF), and when the power-off processing is not executed normally, the power-off processing completion flag is stored. A value other than "55 (H)" is stored as (_SF_POWER_OFF).

The power-off recovery data (_SW_POWER_ON) at the address "F2A2(H)" is a flag for determining whether the checksum calculation result of the RWM 53 and the power-off processing completion flag are normal. It is stored during processing.
The RWM 53 checksum calculation result is normal (RWM checksum data (complement data) of "F2A0(H)" is added to the sum of the data in the RWM 35 use area and outside the use area (excluding "F2A0(H)") is "0") and the power-off processing completion flag is a normal value ("55 (H)"), "55 (H)" is set as the power-off recovery data (_SW_POWER_ON). is stored.
On the other hand, when at least one of the checksum calculation result of the RWM 53 and the power-off processing completion flag is not normal (abnormal), "00 (H)" is set as the power-off recovery data (_SW_POWER_ON). remembered.

The stack pointer temporary storage buffer 2 (_SB_STACK2) at the address "F2A3 (H)" is a storage area (save) where the stack pointer of the used area is stored (saved) when a program (second program) outside the used area is executed. buffer).
Here, the "stack area" refers to a storage area of the RWM 53 in which data such as various registers and program return addresses can be temporarily saved (stored).
Also, the "stack pointer" is for holding an address indicating the save (storage) destination of data in the stack area.

Then, when executing a program (second program) outside the used area, the stack pointer of the used area is stored in the stack pointer temporary storage buffer 2, the program (second program) outside the used area is terminated, and the used area is restored. (first program), the stack pointer of the used area is restored from the stack pointer temporary storage buffer 2.例文帳に追加

A 24-byte storage area at addresses "F3E8(H)" to "F3FF(H)" is a stack area outside the use area.

Next, initialization of data in the used area of the RWM 53 and data outside the used area will be described.
Data in the use area of the RWM 53 and data outside the use area are maintained without being initialized only by interruption/restart of power supply (power on/off, power switch 11 on/off).
In addition, even when recovering from a recoverable error state, the data in the use area of the RWM 53 and the data outside the use area are maintained without being initialized.

Further, it is assumed that an operation for shifting to the setting change state (turning on the power while the setting key switch 152 is turned on) is performed, and it is determined that there is a power-off recovery abnormality. In this case, step S2707 of program start processing (M_PRG_START) in FIG. 354, which will be described later, becomes "Yes", and the flow advances to step S2711 to set the initialization range of the RWM 53 at the time of setting change start at power failure recovery failure. Also, since it is a power-off/recovery abnormality, "Yes" is determined in step S2712 of FIG.
Therefore, in steps S2732 to S2736 of the initialization process (M_INI_SET) in FIG. ”) and the entire range outside the use area (addresses “F210(H)” to “F3FF(H)” are initialized.
Even when recovering from the unrecoverable error state, the initialization process of the RWM 53 is executed in the same range as when an operation for shifting to the setting change state is performed and power failure recovery abnormality is determined.

It is also assumed that an operation for shifting to the setting change state is performed and it is determined that power-off recovery is normal. In this case, "Yes" in step S2707 of the program start processing (M_PRG_START) in FIG. the scope is set.
Therefore, in steps S2732 to S2736 of the initialization process (M_INI_SET) in FIG. ” to “F3FF(H)” are executed.

Therefore, when the operation for shifting to the setting change state is performed and it is determined that the power failure recovery is normal, the setting value data (_NB_RANK) of the address "F000 (H)" of the RWM 53 and the address "F210 ( H)” to “F291(H)” are maintained without being initialized.
In other words, the address "F292(H)" (ratio display number) of the RWM 53 is initialized. For this reason, for example, the power is turned off when the role product ratio (cumulative) data (ratio display number "5") is displayed on the management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor), and then the setting change state is entered. When it is determined that the power is restored normally, the management information display LED 74 displays from the instruction-inclusive accessory ratio data (ratio display number “1”), which is the first display item of various ratio information. is started.

It is also assumed that the power is turned on with the setting key switch 152 turned off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 turned on, and it is determined that the power failure recovery is normal. In this case, step S2707 of the program start processing (M_PRG_START) in FIG. the scope is set.
Therefore, in steps S2732 to S2736 of the initialization process (M_INI_SET) in FIG. ” to “F3FF(H)” are executed.

In other words, the address "F292(H)" (ratio display number) of the RWM 53 is initialized. Therefore, for example, when the role ratio (total) data (ratio display number “5”) is displayed on the management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor), the power is turned off, and then the setting key switch 152 is turned off. and the power is turned on with the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 turned on. Display is started from a given instruction-containing accessory ratio data (ratio display number “1”).

Therefore, when the power is turned on while the setting key switch 152 is turned off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is turned on, and it is determined that the recovery from the power failure is normal, an operation for shifting to the setting change state is performed. , and the initialization process of the RWM 53 is executed in the same range as when it is determined that the power-off recovery is normal.
Therefore, even if you do not have the setting key or do not switch to the setting change state, the same range as when the operation to switch to the setting change state is performed and it is determined that the recovery from power failure is normal. , the RWM 53 can be initialized.

Also, at the end of the advantageous interval, a predetermined range (for example, addresses "F061(H)" to "F068(H)" in FIG. 346) of the use area of the RWM 53 storing data relating to the advantageous interval is initialized. be.
Also, even if the advantageous section ends, the address "F292(H)" of the RWM 53 is not initialized. Therefore, for example, when the role ratio (cumulative) data (ratio display number "5") is displayed on the management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor), the advantageous section ends and the data relating to the advantageous section is stored. 346), the display items displayed on the management information display LED 74 are , Accessory product ratio (total) data is followed by accessory condition ratio data (ratio display number “6”).

It is also assumed that the power is turned off and then turned on while both the setting key switch 152 and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 are turned off, and it is determined that the power-off recovery is normal. That is, it is assumed that the normal power supply is turned on/off. In this case, since the RWM 53 is not initialized, the data in the RWM 53 used area and data outside the used area at the time of power failure are maintained.
Therefore, for example, when the management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor) displays the role ratio (cumulative) data (ratio display number “5”), the power is turned off, and then the setting key switch 152 and the reset switch are turned off. When both switches (RWM clear switch) 153 are turned off, the power is turned on, and if it is determined that the recovery from power failure is normal, the state at the time of power failure is restored. The object ratio (cumulative) data is displayed, and then the accessory state ratio data (ratio display number “6”), which is the display item next to the accessory ratio (cumulative) data, is displayed.

Also, assume that the power is turned off, and then the power is turned on while both the setting key switch 152 and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 are turned off, and it is determined that a power failure recovery error has occurred. In this case, the step S2708 in FIG. 354 becomes "Yes", and the flow advances to step S2801 to execute unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) (unrecoverable error state), so initialization processing of the RWM 53 is not executed. . Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the unrecoverable error process (C_ERROR_STOP) in step S2801 is executed, the interrupt process is prohibited (step S1490 in FIG. 356), and the outputs of output ports 0 to 7 are turned off ( step S1495 in FIG. 356).
Therefore, for example, when the management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor) displays the role ratio (cumulative) data (ratio display number “5”), the power is turned off, and then the setting key switch 152 and the reset switch are turned off. When both switches (RWM clear switch) 153 are turned off and the power is turned on and it is determined that there is a power failure recovery abnormality, interrupt processing is prohibited and the outputs of output ports 0 to 7 are turned off. The management information display LED 74 remains off.

Incidentally, for example, in the unrecoverable error process (C_ERROR_STOP) of step S2801, digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 may each display "8". In this case, the power is turned off, and then the power is turned on while both the setting key switch 152 and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 are turned off. "8888" is displayed in the

Further, for example, even if the processing shifts to unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) in step S2801, the interrupt processing may not be prohibited, and the output of output ports 0 to 7 may be maintained without being turned off. In this case, for example, when the management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor) displays the role ratio (cumulative) data (ratio display number “5”), the power is turned off, and then the setting key switch 152 and the reset button are turned off. Even if the power is turned on with both switches (RWM clear switch) 153 turned off and it is determined that there is a power failure recovery abnormality, the management information display LED 74 first displays the role ratio (cumulative) data, Next, the accessory state ratio data (ratio display number “6”), which is the display item next to the accessory ratio (cumulative) data, is displayed.

FIG. 349(A) is a diagram showing various LEDs on the display board 75 in the 41st embodiment, and FIG. 349(B) is a diagram showing the management information display LED 74 in the 41st embodiment. This FIG. 349 is a diagram corresponding to FIG. 31 of the eleventh embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 349(A), in the forty-first embodiment, the display substrate 75 is provided with a credit number display LED 76, an acquired number display LED 78, and a status display LED 79. FIG.
The credit number display LED 76 consists of digit 1 (upper digit) and digit 2 (lower digit), and the acquired number display LED 78 consists of digit 3 (upper digit) and digit 4 (lower digit). Also, digits 1-4 use a 7-segment display with no dot segments.
Digits 1 to 4 may be constructed using a 7-segment display with dot segments, but the dot segments may not be illuminated.

As status display LEDs 79, a 1-bet display LED 79a, a 2-bet display LED 79b, a 3-bet display LED 79c, a game start display LED 79d, a throw-in display LED 79e, and a replay display LED 79f are provided. .
Furthermore, although not shown in FIG. 349, the advantageous section display LED 77 is configured using a segment P of digit 4 as shown in FIG.
349, the set value display LED 73 is provided on the main control board 50 and is composed of digits 5, as shown in FIG. Digit 5 also uses a seven-segment display with no dot segments.
Digit 5 may be configured using a 7-segment display with dot segments, but the dot segments may not be illuminated.

As shown in FIG. 349B, the management information display LED 74 includes digit 6 (identification segment upper digit), digit 7 (identification segment lower digit), digit 8 (ratio segment upper digit), and digit 9 (ratio segment lower digit). digits).
Digits 6-9 also use a 7-segment display with dot segments (segment P).
In addition, segment P of digit 7 (identifying segment lower digit) functions as a digit separator LED. The digit separator display LED is used to clearly distinguish between the information type (identification segment) and the ratio (ratio segment).

FIG. 350 is a diagram explaining details of digits and segments in the forty-first embodiment, and corresponds to FIG. 32 of the eleventh embodiment.
In the forty-first embodiment, the digits 1-5 seven-segment display itself consists of segments AG and has no dot segment (segment P).
However, the segment P of the digit 1 constitutes the game start display LED 79d, the segment P of the digit 2 constitutes the input display LED 79e, the segment P of the digit 3 constitutes the replay display LED 79f, and the segment P of the digit 4. constitutes the advantageous section display LED 77 .

FIG. 351 shows output ports 2 to 7 in the 41st embodiment, and corresponds to FIG. 33 in the 11th embodiment.
In the forty-first embodiment, two output ports (output ports 3 and 6) for outputting digit signals are provided, and two output ports (output ports 4 and 7) for outputting segment signals are provided. characterized by
In the forty-first embodiment, digits 1 to 9 are provided unlike the eleventh embodiment.
A segment of digits 1 to 5 is called segment 1 (segments 1A to 1P), and a segment of digits 6 to 9 is called segment 2 (segments 2A to 2P).

In the forty-first embodiment, the output port 3 is an output port for outputting digit signals for digits 1 to 5 (digit 1 to 5 signals), and the output port 6 is for outputting digit signals for digits 6 to 9 (digit 6 to 9 signals).
Furthermore, in the forty-first embodiment, output port 4 is an output port for outputting segment signals for digits 1 to 5 (segment signals 1A to 1P), and output port 7 is for outputting segment signals for digits 6 to 9 (segment signals). 2A to 2P signals).
When lighting digits 1 to 5, the digit signal is output from the output port 3 and the segment 1 signal is output from the output port 4. FIG.
When the digits 6 to 9 are lit, the digit signal is output from the output port 6 and the segment 2 signal is output from the output port 7 .

Next, the external signal will be explained. The “external signal” is a signal output to the outside of the slot machine 10 (hall computer 200, data counter installed in the hall, etc.) via the external centralized terminal board 100 .
As shown in FIG. 351, in the forty-first embodiment, external signals 1 to 6 are output from output port 5 . Specifically, the D0 bit (external signal 1) of the output port 5 is assigned a "setting change signal", and the D1 bit (external signal 2) is assigned a "setting confirmation signal". Each signal shown in FIG. 351 is also assigned to the D2 to D5 bits.

The "setting changing signal" is an external signal indicating that the setting is being changed and that the setting has been changed. The setting change signal is generated during the setting change and at the end of one game after the setting change (all reels 31 are stopped and medal payout processing (process corresponding to "payout of medals due to winning" in step S294 in FIG. 41). is finished). This is to reliably inform the outside that the setting has been changed. When the D0 bit of the output port 5 is "1", it indicates that the setting changing signal is ON (the setting is being changed, or one game has not ended after the setting has been changed). When the D0 bit is "0", it indicates that the setting change signal is off (not during setting change and not before the end of one game after the setting change).

The "setting confirmation signal" is an external signal indicating that the setting is being confirmed. The setting confirmation signal is output during setting confirmation. When the D1 bit of the output port 5 is "1", it indicates that the setting confirmation signal is on (setting is being confirmed), and when the D1 bit is "0", the setting confirmation signal is off. Indicates that there is (not checking the settings).

"Fraud detection signal 1" is an external signal indicating that there is a possibility of fraud. For example, when the door switch 17 is turned on (when the opening of the front door 12 is detected), the fraud detection signal 1 is output. When the D2 bit of the output port 5 is "1", it indicates that the fraud detection signal 1 is ON (the door switch 17 is ON and the front door 12 is open), and the D2 bit is "0". , it indicates that the fraud detection signal 1 is off (the door switch 17 is off and the front door 12 is closed).

“Fraud detection signal 2” is an external signal indicating that there is a possibility of fraud, like the fraud detection signal 1. FIG. For example, when a recoverable error state occurs, the fraud detection signal 2 is output. When the D3 bit of the output port 5 is "1", it indicates that the fraud detection signal 2 is on (recoverable error state), and when the D3 bit is "0", the fraud detection signal 2 is off. (not a recoverable error state).

Like the fraud detection signals 1 and 2, the "fraud detection signal 3" is an external signal indicating that there is a possibility of fraud. For example, when an unrecoverable error state occurs, the fraud detection signal 3 is output. When the D4 bit of the output port 5 is "1", it indicates that the fraud detection signal 3 is on (unrecoverable error state), and when the D4 bit is "0", the fraud detection signal 3 is Indicates off (no unrecoverable error condition).

The "security signal" is an external signal indicating that any one of the setting change signal, setting confirmation signal, and fraud detection signals 1 to 3 is on. When any one of the setting change signal, setting confirmation signal, and fraud detection signal 1 to 3 is output, the security signal is also output at the same time. When the D5 bit of the output port 5 is "1", it indicates that the security signal is ON (any one of the setting change signal, setting confirmation signal, and fraud detection signal 1 to 3 is being output), When the D5 bit is "0", it indicates that the security signal is off (none of the setting change signal, setting confirmation signal, and fraud detection signals 1 to 3 are output).

As described above, the setting changing signal is continuously output until one game ends after the setting is changed. Therefore, if the setting confirmation state is entered before the end of the first game after the setting change, both the setting changing signal and the setting confirming signal are output. Specifically, for example, it is assumed that the setting change state is ended and medals (game medium, game value) can be betted. At this time, when the setting key switch 152 is turned on while the number of bets is "0", both the setting changing signal and the setting confirming signal are output.
Furthermore, when any one of the setting change signal, setting confirmation signal, and fraud detection signal 1 to 3 is output, a security signal is also output. Therefore, if the setting confirmation state is entered before the end of the first game after setting change, the D0, D1 and D5 bits of the output port 5 are turned on ("1"). After that, if the setting confirmation state is terminated before the end of the first game after the setting change, the D0 and D5 bits of the output port 5 remain on (“1”) and the D1 bit is off (“0”). become. When the first game after the setting change is completed, the D0 bit and the D5 bit of the output port 5 are also turned off ("0").

Next, lighting control of digits 1 to 9 will be described.
Digits 1 to 5 (credit number display LED 76, acquired number display LED 78, set value display LED 73) are controlled to be lit by LED display control (I_LED_OUT) in FIG. 362, which will be described later. Also, the LED display control processing (I_LED_OUT) is processing by the program (first program) of the used area.

On the other hand, the lighting of digits 6 to 9 (management information display LED 74) is controlled by ratio display preparation processing (S_DSP_READY) in FIG. 364, which will be described later. Also, the ratio display preparation processing (S_DSP_READY) is processing by a program (second program) outside the use area.
In the forty-first embodiment, the digits 1 to 5 that control lighting by the program in the usage area (first program) and the digits 6 to 9 that control lighting by the program outside the usage area (second program) Separate output ports for use.

FIG. 352 is a diagram showing the relationship between digits and segments in the forty-first embodiment.
In the forty-first embodiment, digits 1 to 9 are provided, the segment of digits 1 to 5 is segment 1 (segments 1A to 1P), and the segment of digits 6 to 9 is segment 2 (segments 2A to 2P). .
Segments 1A to 1G of digit 1 form the upper digits of the credit number display LED 76, and segment 1P of digit 1 forms a game start display LED 79d.
The segments 1A to 1G of the digit 2 constitute the lower digits of the credit amount display LED 76, and the segment 1P of the digit 2 constitutes the insertion display LED 79e.

Furthermore, segments 1A to 1G of digit 3 constitute the upper digits of the acquisition number display LED 78, and segment 1P of digit 3 constitutes a replay display LED 79f.
Further, segments 1A to 1G of digit 4 constitute the lower digits of the winning number display LED 78, and segment 1P of digit 4 constitutes the advantageous section display LED 77. FIG.
Also, the segments 1A to 1G of the digit 5 constitute a set value display LED73.
Furthermore, the segments 2A to 2G of the digit 6 constitute the identification segment upper digits of the management information display LED74.

Furthermore, segments 2A to 2G of digit 7 constitute the identification segment lower digits of management information display LED 74, and segment 2P of digit 7 constitutes a digit division display LED.
In addition, segments 2A to 2G of digit 8 constitute ratio segment upper digits of management information display LED 74. FIG.
Furthermore, segments 2A to 2G of digit 9 constitute identification segment lower digits of management information display LED 74. FIG.

FIG. 353(A) is a diagram showing the relationship between the LED display counter 1 (_CT_LED_DSP1) and the signal output from the output port 3 in the 41st embodiment. FIG. 4B is a diagram showing the relationship between the LED display counter 2 (_SC_LED_DSP2) and the signal output from the output port 6 in the 41st embodiment. Furthermore, FIG. 4C is a diagram showing the LED display request flag (_FL_LED_DSP) in the 41st embodiment.
In this example, an LED display counter 1 (_CT_LED_DSP1) (address "F051 (H)" in FIG. 346) is provided in the RWM 53 usage area, and an LED display counter 2 (_SC_LED_DSP2) (in FIG. 348) is provided outside the RWM 53 usage area. The address "F297(H)") is provided.

The LED display counter 1 (_CT_LED_DSP1) is a counter for outputting a digit 1 signal to a digit 5 signal for each interrupt, and is a counter with 5 interrupts per cycle.
The LED display counter 2 (_SC_LED_DSP2) is a counter for outputting a digit 6 signal to a digit 9 signal for each interrupt, and is a counter with 4 interrupts per cycle.
Thus, in the forty-first embodiment, an LED display counter for lighting digits 1 to 5 and an LED display counter for lighting digits 6 to 9 are provided independently.
Also, since one cycle of the LED display counters of the two is different, the lighting timing of digits 1 to 5 and the lighting timing of digits 6 to 9 are different.

The LED display request flag (_FL_LED_DSP) is data indicating a digit whose lighting is permitted, and is stored at the address "F052(H)" of the use area of the RWM 53 (see FIG. 346).
As shown in FIG. 353(C), the LED display request flag is 8-bit data in which the D0 bit corresponds to the digit 1 signal, the D1 bit corresponds to the digit 2 signal, and the D4 bit corresponds to the digit 5 signal. be. Each bit of the LED display request flag matches the bit of output port 3 shown in FIG.
Also, as shown in FIG. 353(C), digits 1 to 4 can be illuminated (digit 5 is off) during normal operation, and digit 5 can be illuminated (digits 1 to 4 are off during setting change and setting confirmation). lights off). In addition. "Normal" refers to game standby and game play.

Then, in the interrupt process, the value of the LED display counter 1 in the used area and the value of the LED display request flag are ANDed, and the digit corresponding to the bit set to "1" is the digit to be lit in this interrupt process. Become.
For example, if the value of the LED display counter 1 of the used area is "00001000 (B)" and the value of the LED display request flag is "00001111 (B) (normal)", the AND operation of the two results in "00001000 (B)". (B)", and only the digit 4 signal becomes "1".
During setting change and setting confirmation, for example, at the interrupt timing when the digit 5 signal is turned on (the LED display counter 1 of the used area is "00010000 (B)"), the segment signal is output from the output port 4, The set value display LED 73 (digit 5) can be lit.

Next, recoverable errors and unrecoverable errors will be described.
A "recoverable error" is an error that can be recovered without turning the power on/off. For recoverable errors, for example,
“HP” error: Medal clogging (retention) error in hopper 35 “HE” error: Empty medal error in hopper 35 “H0” error: Discharge sensor 37 error in hopper 35 “CE” error: Medal retention error in medal selector "CP" error: Illegal passing of medals in the medal selector "CH" error: Error in the path sensor 46 located in the medal selector "C0" error: Error in the insertion sensor 44 located in the medal selector C1" error: medal insertion error "FE" error: sub-tank full "dE" error: front door 12 open
Note that recoverable errors are not limited to those described above.

In step S457 of interrupt processing (I_INTR) in FIG. 359, which will be described later, read processing of the input port 51 is executed to read input signals of various switches (start switch 41, etc.) and various sensors (insertion sensor 44, etc.). After that, based on the read input signal, various data (level data, rising data, falling data) are generated and stored in the RWM 53 at a predetermined address. After that, in step S463 of the interrupt processing (I_INTR), an input error check process is executed, and when any recoverable error is detected by referring to the above various data, an error detection flag indicating the detected recoverable error is detected. is stored in the RWM 53 at a predetermined address.

Further, in the main process (M_MAIN) (the main process of the 41st embodiment is assumed to be the process shown in FIG. 41), the timing before detecting the operation of the start switch 41 and after all the reels 31 stop , the error detection flag is checked, and if any bit of the error detection flag is "1", it is determined that a recoverable error has occurred, the progress of the game is stopped, and a recoverable error state is established. .
If a recoverable error occurs during the period from when the start switch 41 is operated under the condition that the prescribed number of medals are betted until all the reels 31 are stopped, all the reels 31 are stopped. After all the reels 31 are stopped, the progress of the game is continued until the medal payout process (process corresponding to "payout of medals due to winning" in step S294 in FIG. 41) is executed. It may be stopped and put into a recoverable error state.
Furthermore, when it is determined that a recoverable error has occurred, error information of the recoverable error that has occurred is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 . This error information display (error display) is performed in LED display control (I_LED_OUT) in interrupt processing (I_INTR) in FIG.

Then, when a restorable error occurs, the manager (hall clerk) removes the cause of the restorable error, and when the reset switch 153 is operated, the restorable error state is canceled and the progress of the game is resumed. .
Thus, when a recoverable error occurs, the cause of the recoverable error is removed and the reset switch 153 is operated without turning on/off the power or operating the setting key switch 152. The recoverable error state can be canceled and the game can be returned to a state in which progress can be made.

On the other hand, an "unrecoverable error" cannot be recovered unless the power is turned off and an operation for shifting to the setting change state (turning on the power while the setting key switch 152 is turned on) is performed. Fatal error. As an unrecoverable error, for example,
"E1" error: when recovery from power failure is not normal (when power failure recovery is abnormal) (when "Yes" in step S2712 of FIG. 354 described later)
"E5" error: When the stop symbol is not normal when the reel 31 is stopped (when a display error occurs)
"E6" error: when the set value is out of the normal range (when a set value error occurs) (when "No" in step S458 in Fig. 359)
"E7" error: when a random number error occurs (when "Yes" in step S460 in Fig. 359)
etc.
Unrecoverable errors are not limited to those described above.

If any unrecoverable error occurs, error information is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 . For example, when an "E1" error occurs, display an "E" on digit three and a "1" on digit four. The same is displayed for other unrecoverable errors.
In addition, it is determined that the recovery from power failure is not normal (power failure recovery error), and the "E1" error is determined by the processing of step S2715 in the program start processing (M_PRG_START) in FIG. (processing by the first program)).
Furthermore, it is determined during the main process (M_MAIN) (corresponding to the process shown in FIG. 41) that the stop symbols are not normal (display error has occurred) when the reel 31 is stopped, and that an "E5" error has occurred. This is the processing of step S292 (processing by the used area program (first program)).

On the other hand, it is determined that the set value is out of the normal range (a set value error has occurred) and an "E6" error is determined by the process of step S458 (out of use area) in the interrupt process (I_INTR) in FIG. (second program)).
Similarly, it is determined that the random number value is not normal (a random number error has occurred) and an "E7" error is determined by the processing of step S460 in the interrupt processing (I_INTR) in FIG. second program)).
Then, when the program (first program) in the used area determines that there is an unrecoverable error, the unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) in FIG. 356, which will be described later, is executed.
On the other hand, when it is determined that there is an unrecoverable error in the program outside the usage area (second program), unrecoverable error processing 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) in FIG. 363, which will be described later, is executed.

Then, when an unrecoverable error occurs, the power supply is cut off (the power is turned off and the power switch 11 is turned off), and then the power supply is restarted under the condition that the setting key switch 152 is turned on ( The power is turned on, and the power switch 11 is turned on. As a result, "Yes" is obtained in step S2707 of the program start processing (M_PRG_START) in FIG. 354, and the process proceeds to step S2711. Also, when an unrecoverable error occurs, power-off processing (I_POWER_DOWN) in FIG. 360, which will be described later, is not executed, so step S2712 in FIG.

Furthermore, in steps S2732 to S2736 of the initialization process (M_INI_SET) in FIG. ), and the entire range outside the use area (addresses “F210(H)” to “F3FF(H)” are initialized. After that, the process advances to the setting change confirmation process (M_RANK_CTL) in step S2742 in FIG. 357. If the set value is set again here, the unrecoverable error state is canceled and the process proceeds to the main process (M_MAIN) (FIG. 41) of step S248.
In this way, when an unrecoverable error occurs, the power is turned off once, the setting key switch 152 is turned on, and then the power is turned on to cancel the unrecoverable error state and proceed with the game. can be restored to a state in which

Also, when a recoverable error occurs, the error is displayed by the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) in FIG. 362, but when an unrecoverable error occurs, the interrupt processing (I_INTR) in FIG. Display control (I_LED_OUT) is also not executed. When an unrecoverable error occurs, the error is displayed by unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) in FIG. 356 or unrecoverable error processing 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) in FIG.
Furthermore, when recovering from a recoverable error state, the data in the RWM 53 use area and data outside the use area are maintained without being initialized. Data in the entire range outside are initialized.
Data such as an error detection flag stored at a predetermined address in the RWM 53 may be initialized when recovering from a recoverable error state.

FIG. 354 is a flow chart showing program start processing (M_PRG_START) by the main control board 50 in the forty-first embodiment.
When the power is turned on (the power switch 11 is turned on, or the power supply is restarted), the program start processing in FIG. 354 is executed.
354, when the program is started in step S2701, the main control board 50 saves the AF registers (A register and F register (flag register)) to the stack area of the RWM 53 in the next step S2702. .

Next, proceeding to step S2703, the main control board 50 executes checksum calculation processing of the RWM 53. FIG.
Specifically, in step S2703, data of addresses "F000(H)" to "F1FF(H)" in the use area of the RWM 53 and data of addresses "F210(H)" to "F3FF(H)" outside the use area are Add data.
That is, the data of addresses "F000(H)" to "F1FF(H)" in the use area of the RWM 53 and the addresses "F210(H)" to "F3FF(H)" outside the use area are added.
When the result is "0", it is determined that the checksum calculation result of the RWM 53 is normal, and when the result is not "0", the checksum calculation result of the RWM 53 is abnormal. is).

In step S2703, it is determined whether or not the power-off processing completion flag (_SF_POWER_OFF) of the address "F2A1 (H)" of the RWM 53 is "55 (H)". , it is determined that the power-off processing flag is normal, and when it is not "55 (H)", it is determined that the power-off processing flag is not normal (abnormal).
Here, in this embodiment, during power-off processing, a power-off processing completed flag (_SF_POWER_OFF) is set to the address "F2A1(H)" of the RWM 53 (step S2784 of RWM checksum set (S_SUM_SET) in FIG. 361). . Then, in step S2703, it is determined whether or not the power-off processing completed flag set at the time of power-off processing is a normal value ("55 (H)").

In step S2703, the checksum calculation result of the RWM 53 is normal (the result of adding the data in the used area and the data outside the used area of the RWM 35 is "0"), and the power-off processing completed flag (_SF_POWER_OFF) is normal. When it is the value ("55 (H)"), "55 (H)" is stored at the address "F2A2 (H)" of the RWM 53 as the power failure recovery data (_SW_POWER_ON).
On the other hand, in step S2703, when at least one of the checksum calculation result of the RWM 53 and the power-off processing completion flag is not normal (abnormal), the power-off recovery data (_SW_POWER_ON) is set to "00 (H)". )” in the RWM 53 at the address “F2A2(H)”. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S2704.

Proceeding to step S2704, the main control board 50 restores the AF registers (A register and F register (flag register)) saved in step S2702. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S2705.

Here, the program for program start processing is stored in the control area (first control area, first program area) of the ROM 54 . That is, the program for program start processing is the first program.
On the other hand, the program for the checksum calculation processing of the RWM 53 in step S2703 is stored in a control area (second control area, second program area) outside the use area of the ROM 54 . That is, the program for the checksum calculation process in step S2703 is the second program.

Therefore, in FIG. 354, in the program start processing, which is the processing by the program in the usage area (first program), if the process proceeds to step S2703, the checksum calculation of RWM53, which is the processing by the program outside the usage area (second program), is performed. When the process is executed and the checksum calculation process is completed, the process returns to the program start process, which is the process by the program (first program) of the used area.
Also, when the processing by the program in the usage area (first program) shifts to the processing by the program outside the usage area (second program), the AF register (A register and F register (flag register)) is used by the RWM 53. After saving to the stack area of the area, the AF register is restored when the process by the program outside the use area (second program) is finished and the process by the program in the use area (first program) is returned to.

Proceeding to step S2705, the main control board 50 acquires the power failure recovery data (_SW_POWER_ON) from the address "F2A2(H)" of the RWM 53 and stores it in the A register. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S2706.

Proceeding to step S2706, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the door switch signal is on. As described above, when the front door 12 is open, the door switch 17 is turned on and the door switch signal is turned on. When it is determined that the door switch signal is ON (the front door 12 is open), the process proceeds to the next step S2707. On the other hand, when it is determined that the door switch signal is off (the front door 12 is closed), the process proceeds to step S2715.

At step S2707, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the setting key switch signal is on. As described above, when the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion slot 151 and rotated clockwise by 90 degrees, the setting key switch 152 is turned on and the setting key switch signal is turned on. When it is determined that the setting key switch signal is on, the process proceeds to step S2711. On the other hand, if it is determined that the setting key switch signal is off, the process proceeds to step S2708.

Proceeding to step S2708, the main control board 50 determines whether or not there is a power failure recovery abnormality. Specifically, when the value of the A register (power-off recovery data (_SW_POWER_ON) acquired in step S2705) is "55 (H)", it is determined that there is no power-off recovery abnormality, and the process proceeds to the next step S2709. . On the other hand, when the value of the A register is "00 (H)", it is determined that there is a power failure recovery abnormality, and the process advances to unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) in step S2801. The specific contents of the unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) will be described later.

In step S2709, the main control board 50 sets reset determination data. Specifically, "7" is stored in the D register. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S2710.
Proceeding to step S2710, the main control board 50 determines whether the reset switch signal is on. As described above, in this embodiment, the setting change switch 153, reset switch 153, and RWM clear switch 153 are configured as an integrated switch. Then, when the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on, the reset switch signal is turned on, and the process proceeds to step S2713. On the other hand, when the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is off, the reset switch signal is turned off, and the process proceeds to power restoration processing (M_POWER_ON) in step S2721. The specific contents of the power restoration process (M_POWER_ON) will be described later.

Proceeding to step S2711, the main control board 50 sets the initialization range of the RWM 53 for abnormal recovery from power failure. In this embodiment, when the power failure recovery is abnormal (the power failure recovery data (_SW_POWER_ON) is "00 (H)"), the setting value data (_NB_RANK) of the address "F000 (H)" of the RWM 53 is included. The use area and the entire range outside the use area (addresses "F000(H)" to "F1FF(H)" and "F210(H)" to "F3FF(H)") are set as the initialization range. Note that the initialization range is specified by the start address and the number of bytes of the initialization range. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S2712.

In step S2712, the main control board 50 determines whether or not there is a power failure recovery abnormality. Specifically, it is similar to step S2708. When it is determined that there is no power failure recovery abnormality, data "7" for determining the setting change state is stored in the D register, the process proceeds to the next step S2713, and it is determined that there is a power failure recovery failure. If not, the process proceeds to initialization processing (M_INI_SET) in step S2731. The specific contents of the initialization process (M_INI_SET) will be described later.

Proceeding to step S2713, the main control board 50 sets the initialization range of the RWM 53 for normal recovery from power failure. In this embodiment, when the power failure recovery is normal (the power failure recovery data (_SW_POWER_ON) is "55 (H)"), the set value data (_NB_RANK) of the address "F000 (H)" of the RWM 53 and the use The addresses "F210(H)" to "F291(H)" outside the area are maintained without being initialized (cleared). Therefore, in step S2713, the addresses "F001(H)" to "F1FF(H)" of the RWM 53 used area and the addresses "F292(H)" to "F3FF(H)" outside the used area are initialized. set as As described above, the initialization range is specified by the initial address and the number of bytes of the initialization range. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S2714.

At step S2714, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the setting can be changed. In the present embodiment, during the period from the start switch reception process (step S279 in FIG. 41) to the game end check process (step S301 in FIG. 41) including the rotation of the reel 31, the setting cannot be changed. , the setting change disabled flag is turned on. Then, in step S2714, it is determined whether or not the setting change is permitted by determining whether or not the setting change prohibition flag is ON. If it is determined that the setting cannot be changed (the setting cannot be changed), the process proceeds to the next step S2715, and if it is determined that the setting can be changed, the process proceeds to the initialization process (M_INI_SET) in step S2731. The specific contents of the initialization process (M_INI_SET) will be described later.
It should be noted that the setting change may be allowed at all times without setting the setting change prohibition period and therefore without setting the setting change prohibition flag.

Proceeding to step S2715, the main control board 50 determines whether or not there is a power failure recovery abnormality. Specifically, it is similar to step S2708. When it is determined that there is a power failure recovery error, the process proceeds to step S2801 for unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP). . The specific contents of the power recovery process (M_POWER_ON) and the unrecoverable error process (C_ERROR_STOP) will be described later. Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

FIG. 355 is a flowchart showing power restoration processing (M_POWER_ON) in step S2721 in FIG.
First, in step S2722, the main control board 50 restores the stack pointer. In this embodiment, the stack pointer is saved during power-off processing (step S2774 of power-off processing (I_POWER_DOWN) in FIG. 360). Then, in step S2722, the stack pointer saved during the power-off process is restored.

Proceeding to the next step S 2723 , the main control board 50 executes read processing of the input port 51 . As a result, each data of the input port 51 is updated to the latest data.
In the next step S2724, the main control board 50 clears the power-off processing completed flag. Then, the process proceeds to the main process (M_MAIN) (FIG. 41) of step S248, and the process according to this flowchart ends.
Note that in this embodiment, after executing the process of step S2724, the interrupt process (I_INTR) of FIG. 359 is started at the timing before proceeding to the main process (M_MAIN) of step S248.

FIG. 356 is a flowchart showing unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP).
A program for unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) is stored in the ROM 54, and a program for unrecoverable error processing 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) is stored outside the ROM 54. That is, the program for unrecoverable error handling (C_ERROR_STOP) is the first program, and the program for unrecoverable error handling 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) is the second program.

Interrupt processing is prohibited in unrecoverable error processing.
An unrecoverable error is a serious error that cannot normally occur, and processing based on abnormal data (update of data of RWM 53 based on input signal from input port 51, transmission of control command to sub-control board 80) , control based on the signal output from the output port based on the data of the RWM 53, etc.), interrupt processing is prohibited in the non-recoverable error processing.

Here, the unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) is processing by the first program. When the unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) is started, first, the interrupt processing (I_INTR) is executed in step S1490 to disable interrupts. prohibited.
On the other hand, unrecoverable error processing 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) is processing by the second program. 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) is not provided with processing to disable interrupts.

In FIG. 356, proceeding to step S1491, the main control board 50 sets the error display data for the lower digits of the unrecoverable error. This process is a process of storing data ("00001000(B)") for lighting digit 4 (data in which only the digit 4 signal is set to "1") in the H register.
Next, proceeding to step S1492, the main control board 50 sets the error display data for the upper digits of the unrecoverable error. This process is a process of storing data for lighting digit 3 (data in which only the digit 3 signal is set to "1") ("00000100(B)") in the D register.

Further, in this step S1492, the main control board 50 stores the segment data ("01111001B") for displaying "E" in the upper digit (digit 3) of the unrecoverable error in the E register.
Before proceeding to unrecoverable error processing, segment data for displaying the lower digits of the unrecoverable error is stored in the L register. For example, when the unrecoverable error is an "E1" error, the lower digit (digit 4) is "1", so segment data ("00000110B") for displaying "1" is stored in the L register. is stored.
In the following example, it is assumed that the unrecoverable error 1 this time is an "E1" error.

From the above, the D, E, H, and L register values are, at this point,
D register value: Data for lighting the upper digit (digit 3) of an unrecoverable error (data with only the digit 3 signal set to "1") ("00000100(B)")
E register value: segment data (“01111001 (B)”) for displaying “E” in the upper digit (digit 3) of an unrecoverable error
H register value: Data for lighting the lower digit (digit 4) of an unrecoverable error (data with only the digit 4 signal set to "1") ("00001000(B)")
L register value: segment data (“00000110 (B)”) for displaying “1” in the lower digit (digit 4) of an unrecoverable error
becomes.

In the next step S1493, the main control board 50 sets the address of the output port to be cleared and the number of output ports. In this embodiment, the output ports to be cleared by the unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) are output ports 0 to 7, and since an address is set for each output port, the address and the number of output ports (8 pieces).
In the next step S1494, the main control board 50 sequentially turns off the outputs of the output ports 0-7. Specifically, output ports 0 to 7 are turned off (“00000000 (B)”) one by one.

In the next step S1495, the main control board 50 sets the address of the next output port. That is, the address indicating the output port is incremented by "1". For example, when the address of output port 0 is "00F1(H)", the address of output port 1 "00F2(H)" is set as the next address.
Next, proceeding to step S1496, the main control board 50 determines whether or not all the output ports have been turned off, that is, whether or not the outputs up to the output port 7 have been turned off. When it is determined that the processing has not ended, the process returns to step S1494, and when it is determined that the processing has ended, the process proceeds to step S1497. In this way, the processing of steps S1494 to S1496 is repeated until the outputs of all output ports are turned off, and when it is determined that the outputs of all output ports have been turned off, the process advances to step S1497.

By turning off all the output ports in this way, all active signals output before execution of this process are turned off. As a result, all the LEDs including the digits 1 to 9 (the credit number display LED 76, the acquired number display LED 78, the set value display LED 73, and the management information display LED 74) are extinguished, thereby preventing burn-in of the LEDs.

If an unrecoverable error occurs while the excitation signal for the motor 32 is being output, unless the output port is turned off, the excitation signal for the motor 32 will continue to be output until the unrecoverable error is cancelled. However, by turning off all the output ports, the excitation signal of the motor 32 is turned off, so that the seizure of the motor 32 can be prevented.
Furthermore, if an unrecoverable error occurs while the blocker signal is being output, the blocker 45 will remain on (medals will remain in the hopper) even though the medal detection process will not be executed unless the output port is turned off. 35) will continue, so the medals will be swallowed up. Swallowing can be prevented.

In the next step S1497, the main control board 50 outputs error display data from the output ports 3 and 4 in order to display errors in the upper digits. The output port 3 outputs the data stored in the D register, and the output port 4 outputs the data stored in the E register.

Next, proceeding to step S1498, the main control board 50 executes standby (wait) processing for preventing flickering of the LED. Here, how long to wait depends on the performance of the LED, but for example, it may be set to about "0.1 ms". Here, for example, a predetermined value (for example, "255") is stored in the B register, and this value is subtracted by, for example, the internal system clock. When the B register value becomes "0", it is determined that the waiting time has elapsed. and advances to the next step S1499.

In step S1499, the main control board 50 turns off (“0”) the outputs of the output ports 3 and 4. FIG. This process is for preventing afterimages.
Next, proceeding to step S1500, the main control board 50 executes standby (wait) processing for preventing LED flickering. This process is for ensuring that the LEDs are extinguished after the outputs of the output ports 3 and 4 are turned off (“0”).

Next, proceeding to step S1501, the main control board 50 switches between the upper digits and the lower digits.
Specifically, the DE register value and the HL register value are exchanged. This will
<Before replacement>
D register value: Data for lighting the upper digit (digit 3) of an unrecoverable error (data with only the digit 3 signal set to "1") ("00000100(B)")
E register value: segment data (“01111001 (B)”) for displaying “E” in the upper digit (digit 3) of an unrecoverable error
H register value: Data for lighting the lower digit (digit 4) of an unrecoverable error (data with only the digit 4 signal set to "1") ("00001000(B)")
L register value: segment data (“00000110 (B)”) for displaying “1” in the lower digit (digit 4) of an unrecoverable error
<After replacement>
D register value: Data for lighting the lower digit (digit 4) of an unrecoverable error (data with only the digit 4 signal set to "1") ("00001000(B)")
E register value: segment data (“00000110 (B)”) for displaying “1” in the lower digit (digit 4) of an unrecoverable error
H register value: Data for lighting the upper digit (digit 3) of an unrecoverable error (data with only the digit 3 signal set to "1") ("00000100(B)")
L register value: segment data (“01111001 (B)”) for displaying “E” in the upper digit (digit 3) of an unrecoverable error
becomes.

Then, proceeding to step S1502, the main control board 50 outputs error display data from the output ports 3 and 4 in order to display errors in the lower digits. As in step S1497, output port 3 outputs the D register value, and output port 4 outputs the E register value. As a result, "00001000 (B)" (data in which only the digit 4 signal is set to "1") is output from the output port 3 to light up the digit 4, and from the output port 4, a segment for displaying "1" is output. Data "00000110(B)" is output.

Next, proceeding to step S1503, the main control board 50 executes standby processing for flicker prevention. This process is the same as step S1498.
Next, proceeding to step S1504, the main control board 50 turns off (“0”) the outputs of the output ports 3 and 4 as in step S1499.
In the next step S1505, the main control board 50 executes standby processing for flicker prevention. This process is similar to step S1500. Then, the process returns to step S1497.

As a result of the above processing, for example, when an "E1" error occurs, the display of "E" by digit 3 and the display of "1" by digit 4 are alternately and repeatedly displayed at predetermined time intervals.
Although LED display control (I_LED_OUT) is executed by interrupt processing (I_INTR), as described above, interrupt processing (I_INTR) is not executed (prohibited) in the event of an unrecoverable error. As shown, non-recoverable errors are indicated by arithmetic processing using registers and hardware configuration.

FIG. 357 is a flow chart showing initialization processing (M_INI_SET) in step S2731 in FIG.
The main control board 50 first initializes the designated address of the RWM 53 in step S2732, sets (designates) the next address in the initialization range of the RWM 53 in the next step S2733, and proceeds to the next step S2734. When proceeding, it is determined whether or not initialization has been completed for the entire initialization range of the RWM 53 . When it is determined that the initialization has not been completed, the process returns to step S2732, and when it is determined that the initialization has been completed, the process proceeds to step S2735. As a result, the processing of steps S2732 to S2734 is repeated until the initialization of all the initialization ranges of the RWM 53 is completed.

As described above, in step S2711 or S2713 of the program start processing (M_PRG_START) in FIG. 354, the initialization range of the RWM 53 (starting address and number of bytes of the initialization range) is set.
In steps S2732 to S2734 of the initialization process (M_INI_SET), the initialization range of the used area is initialized out of the initialization range of the RWM 53 set in step S2711 or S2713.
The processing of steps S2732 to S2734 of the initialization processing (M_INI_SET) is executed by the program of the used area (first program). Therefore, in steps S2732 to S2734 of the initialization process (M_INI_SET), initialization is executed only for the used area initialization range of the initialization range of the RWM 53 .

Then, when it is determined that the initialization has been completed in step S2734, the process proceeds to the next step S2735, and the main control board 50 saves the AF registers (A register and F register (flag register)) to the stack area of the RWM 53 usage area. Let
Proceeding to the next step S2736, the main control board 50 initializes the initialization range outside the use area out of the initialization range of the RWM 53 set in step S2711 or S2713 of the program start processing (M_PRG_START) of FIG. to run.

As described above, in steps S2732 to S2734, initialization of the used area within the initialization range of RWM 53 is executed, but in step S2736, initialization of the area outside the used area within the initialization range of RWM 53 is executed. .
Note that the process of step S2736 of the initialization process (M_INI_SET) is executed by a program (second program) outside the use area. Therefore, in step S2736 of the initialization processing (M_INI_SET), initialization is executed only for the initialization range outside the use area of the initialization range of the RWM 53 .
When the initialization of the initialization range outside the use area is completed in step S2736, the process proceeds to the next step S2737, and the main control board 50 saves the AF register (A register and F register (flag register) in step S2735). ) is restored. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S2738.

In step S2738, the main control board 50 determines whether or not it is time to reset. Specifically, it is determined whether or not step S2710 of the program start process (M_PRG_START) in FIG. 354 is "Yes". In this embodiment, in step S2709 of the program start processing (M_PRG_START) in FIG. 354, "7" is stored in the D register as reset determination data. Furthermore, when "Yes" in step S2710 of FIG. 354, "7" is maintained in the D register, and when "No" in step S2710 of FIG. 354, the D register is cleared (stored "0"). . Then, in step S2738 of FIG. 357, it is determined whether or not the D register is "7", and when the D register is "7", it is reset ("Yes" in step S2710 of FIG. 354). and advances to step S2739. On the other hand, when the D register is "0", it is determined that it is not reset time ("No" in step S2710 in FIG. 354), skipping step S2739 and proceeding to step S2740.

Proceeding to step S2739, the main control board 50 sets the display at reset. Specifically, "70 (H)" is stored in the acquisition number data (_NB_PAYOUT) of the address "F011 (H)" of the RWM 53. As a result, "70" can be displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78 (digits 3 and 4) by the interrupt processing executed after the processing of step S2739, and the manager (hall clerk) is informed that it is time to reset. be able to.

Proceeding to the next step S2740, the main control board 50 sets the setting command in the control command buffer of the RWM53. The setting command set in step S2740 indicates whether to reset or change settings. As a result, the setting command set in the control command buffer is transmitted to the sub-control board 80 by the interrupt process executed after the process of step S2740. can be determined by

Note that in this embodiment, the interrupt process (I_INTR) in FIG. 359 is started at the timing after executing the process of step S2740 and before proceeding to the process of step S2741. In other words, the process of initializing the initialization range of the RWM 53 (the process of steps S2732 to S2734 and S2736 in FIG. 357) is finished before the interrupt process (I_INTR) starts. By configuring in this manner, interrupt processing (I_INTR) is prevented from being executed while the RWM 53 is being initialized. As a result, it is possible to prevent the contents of the RWM 53 from being changed (rewritten or overwritten) by interrupt processing (I_INTR) while the RWM 53 is being initialized.

Proceeding to the next step S2741, the main control board 50 determines whether or not it is reset time. Specifically, it is similar to step S2738. When it is determined that it is not reset time, the process proceeds to step S2742, and when it is determined that it is reset time, step S2742 is skipped and the process proceeds to step S2743.
When proceeding to step S2742, the main control board 50 executes setting change confirmation processing (M_RANK_CTL). The specific contents of this processing will be described later. When the setting change confirmation process (M_RANK_CTL) ends, the process proceeds to the next step S2743.

At step S2743, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the waiting time has elapsed. This waiting time is for waiting for transmission of the setting command. When it is determined that the waiting time has passed, the process proceeds to the next step S2744, where the main control board 50 sets the initialization waiting time, and in the next step S2745, waits for 2 bytes (wait process). . The processing of steps S2744 and S2745 is for waiting until the initialization of the RWM 83 of the sub-control board 80 is completed.

When the 2-byte time waiting process is completed, the main control board 50 advances to the next step S2746 to set the setting command in the control command buffer of the RWM53. The setting command set in step S2746 indicates that the setting change confirmation process (M_RANK_CTL) has ended and the setting value. As a result, the setting command set in the control command buffer is transmitted to the sub-control board 80 by the interrupt processing executed after the processing of step S2746. The value can be determined on the sub-control board 80 side.

Proceeding to the next step S2747, the main control board 50 clears (stores "0") the acquisition number data (_NB_PAYOUT) of the address "F011(H)" of the RWM 53. FIG. As a result, "00" is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78 (digits 3 and 4) by the interrupt processing executed after the processing of step S2747.
When the acquisition number data is cleared in step S2747, the process advances to the main process (M_MAIN) (FIG. 41) in step S248 to end the process according to this flowchart.

FIG. 358 is a flowchart showing setting change confirmation processing (M_RANK_CTL) in step S2742 in FIG.
When the setting change confirmation process (M_RANK_CTL) of step S2742 is started, first, in step S2751, the main control board 50 acquires the setting value data (_NB_RANK) from the address "F000 (H)" of the RWM 53, Store in the A register. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S2752.

Proceeding to step S2752, the main control board 50 generates set value display data. Specifically, in step S2752, first, the A register value is stored in the C register, and then "1" is added to the A register value. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S2753.
As described above, in this embodiment, setting values "1" to "6" are provided, and setting value data is managed as "0" to "5". When the setting value is "N", "N-1" is stored as set value data. Therefore, "N" obtained by adding "1" to the set value data "N-1" is used as the set value display data.

Proceeding to step S2753, the main control board 50 saves the generated set value display data. Specifically, in step S2753, the A register value is stored in the setting value display data (_NB_RANK_DSP) of the RWM 53 at the address "F001(H)". Then, the process proceeds to the next step S2754.
At step S2754, the main control board 50 executes an interrupt waiting process. This process is a process of waiting until one interrupt time (2.235 ms) elapses. This is because by waiting for the interrupt processing (I_INTR) to be executed once, it waits for the rising data of the signal of the reset switch (setting change switch) 153 to turn off (“0”).

In other words, when the reset switch (setting change switch) 153 is operated (turned on), the rising data of the signal of the reset switch (setting change switch) 153 is turned on (“1”). After that, if the interrupt process (I_INTR) is executed even once, the rising data of the signal of the reset switch (setting change switch) 153 is turned off (“0”).
However, after the rising data of the signal of the reset switch (setting change switch) 153 is turned on (“1”), the processing of steps S2752 to S2758 is looped multiple times before the interrupt processing (I_INTR) is executed. Otherwise, the process of adding "1" to the set value data will be repeatedly executed.
Therefore, by waiting for the interrupt process (I_INTR) to be executed once in step S2754, the processes of steps S2752 to S2758 are looped multiple times, and the process of adding "1" to the set value data is repeatedly executed. This prevents the product from being lost.
Then, after waiting until one interruption time elapses in step S2754, the process proceeds to the next step S2755.

When the level data of the signal of the reset switch (setting change switch) 153 is "0" at the time of the previous interrupt processing, and the level data of the signal of the reset switch 153 is "1" at the time of the current interrupt processing, , the rising data of the signal of the reset switch 153 becomes "1".
When the level data of the signal of the reset switch 153 is "1" at the time of the previous interrupt processing and the level data of the signal of the reset switch 153 is "1" at the time of the current interrupt processing, the reset switch 153 The rising data of the signal becomes "0".

Similarly, when the level data of the signal of the reset switch 153 is "0" at the time of the previous interrupt processing and the level data of the signal of the reset switch 153 is "0" at the time of the current interrupt processing, the reset switch 153 The rising edge data of the signal of becomes "0".
When the level data of the signal of the reset switch 153 is "1" at the time of the previous interrupt processing and the level data of the signal of the reset switch 153 is "0" at the time of the current interrupt processing, the reset switch 153 The falling edge data of the signal becomes "1".
Other switches such as the start switch 41 , the stop switch 42 and the setting key switch 152 are similar to the reset switch (setting change switch) 153 .

In step S2755, the main control board 50 determines whether or not it is time to start checking the settings. This process is a process for determining whether it is the time to confirm the settings or the time to change the settings. In this embodiment, when the setting key switch 152 is turned on while the bet number is "0" before the start of the game, "1" is stored in the D register. Then, in step S2755, first, the D register value is stored in the A register, and then it is determined whether or not the A register value is "1". When the A register value is "1", it is determined that it is time to confirm the setting, and the process proceeds to step S2760. ), it is determined that it is not the time to confirm the settings (it is the time to change the settings), and the process advances to step S2756. After determining whether the A register value is "1", the C register value is stored in the A register. As described above, since the A register value is stored in the C register in step S2752, the set value data is stored in the C register. Therefore, when the C register value is stored in the A register, the A register value becomes set value data.
When the power is restored (when the power is turned on and the program start process (M_PRG_START) is started), the registers A to L are set to the initial values ("0").

Proceeding to step S2756, the main control board 50 refers to the rise data of the signal of the start switch 41 stored at the predetermined address of the RWM 53. FIG. When the rising data of the signal of the start switch 41 is "1", that is, when it is determined that the start switch 41 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S2759. On the other hand, when the rise data of the signal of the start switch 41 is "0", that is, when it is determined that the start switch 41 is not operated, the process proceeds to step S2757.

At step S2757, the main control board 50 refers to the rising data of the signal of the reset switch (setting change switch) 153 stored at the predetermined address of the RWM 53. FIG. When the rise data of the signal of the reset switch 153 is "1", that is, when it is determined that the reset switch 153 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S2758. On the other hand, when the rise data of the signal of the reset switch 153 is "0", that is, when it is determined that the reset switch 153 is not operated, the process returns to step S2752.

Proceeding to step S2758, the main control board 50 adds "1" to the set value data. Specifically, "1" is added to the A register value. As described above, at the end of step S2755, the A register value is set value data. If "Yes" in step S2757, that is, if it is determined that the setting change (reset) switch 153 has been operated, "1" is added to the set value data. Note that when the A register value becomes "6" due to the addition, the A register value is rewritten to "0". Then, the process returns to step S2752.

Also, when proceeding to step S2759, the main control board 50 saves the set value data. Specifically, the A register value is stored in the set value data (_NB_RANK) of the address “F000(H)” of the RWM 53 . As described above, at the end of step S2755, the A register value is set value data. Then, the A register value remains the set value data even when the determination in step S2756 becomes "Yes" and the process proceeds to step S2759. Then, in step S2759, the A register value is stored in the RWM 53 at the address "F000(H)". Thereby, the set value data can be saved in the RWM 53 .

Proceeding to the next step S2760, the main control board 50 refers to the fall data of the signal of the setting key switch 152 stored at the predetermined address of the RWM 53. FIG. Then, the process of step S2760 is repeated until the falling data of the setting key switch 152 signal becomes "1", that is, until the setting key switch 152 is turned off. becomes "1", that is, when the setting key switch 152 is turned off, the process proceeds to step S2761.

In step S2761, the main control board 50 clears (sets to "0") the set value display data (_NB_RANK_DSP) of the address "F001 (H)" of the RWM 53. Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.
Also, when the setting is changed, upon completion of the processing according to this flowchart, the processing proceeds to step S2743 in FIG.

Here, the transition to the setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode, setting confirmation in progress) will be described.
In this embodiment, when the power is turned on (on), the door switch 17 is on (the front door 12 is open), and the number of bets is "0", the setting key switch 152 is turned on, "1" is stored in the D register and the state is shifted to the setting confirmation state. In the setting confirmation state, the setting value cannot be changed (even if the setting change switch 153 is operated, the setting value does not change), but the current setting value can be confirmed. Also, the current set value is displayed on the set value display LED 73 . Then, when the setting key switch 152 is turned off, the setting confirmation state is ended, and the state returns to the state in which medals can be betted.

More specifically, in the main process (M_MAIN) (FIG. 41), the main control board 50 determines whether or not the setting key switch 152 is on before detecting the operation of the start switch 41 . When the door switch 17 is ON (the front door 12 is open) and the number of bets is "0", if it is determined that the setting key switch 152 is ON, the setting change confirmation in FIG. Proceed to processing (M_RANK_CTL). Also, steps S2751 to S2754 of the setting change confirmation process (M_RANK_CTL) in FIG. 358 are as described above.

Furthermore, in the forty-first embodiment, when the setting key switch 152 is turned on in a state where the number of bets before the start of the game is "0", "1" is set to be stored in the D register. ing. Then, when proceeding to step S2755 of the setting change confirmation process (M_RANK_CTL) in FIG. 358, the main control board 50 determines whether or not it is time to start setting confirmation. Specifically, first, the D register value is stored in the A register, and then it is determined whether or not the A register value is "1". When the A register value is "1", it is determined that it is time to start confirming the settings ("Yes"), and the process proceeds to step S2760.

After that, the process of step S2760 is repeated until the setting key switch 152 is turned off. During this time, the current set value continues to be displayed on the set value display LED 73 . When it is determined in step S2760 that the setting key switch 152 is off, the process proceeds to step S2761, and the main control board 50 clears (" 0”). Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.
Also, at the time of setting confirmation, when the processing according to this flow chart ends, the main processing (M_MAIN) (FIG. 41) judges whether or not the setting key switch 152 is on (whether to shift to the setting confirmation state). Proceed to next processing.

Thus, in the forty-first embodiment, the setting change process and the setting confirmation process can be executed by the same module. That is, the setting change state and the setting confirmation state are created in the same module. Based on the information stored in the D register, it is determined whether to enter the setting change state or the setting confirmation state.
It should be noted that it is also possible to determine whether to enter the setting change state or the setting confirmation state based on information stored in another register instead of the D register. may be used to determine whether the setting change state or the setting confirmation state should be set.

FIG. 359 is a flowchart showing interrupt processing (I_INTR) by the main control board 50 in the 41st embodiment, and corresponds to FIG. 53 in the 11th embodiment.
In FIG. 359, step numbers different from those in FIG. 53 are underlined, and steps identical to those in FIG. 53 are assigned the same step numbers.
Differences from FIG. 53 will be mainly described below.

In the interrupt process (I_INTR) shown in FIG. 359, step S452 is followed by step S2770, and the main control board 50 determines whether or not a power failure has occurred. Then, when it is determined that a power shutdown has occurred, the process proceeds to step S2771, and the main control board 50 executes power shutdown processing (I_POWER_DOWN). On the other hand, when it is determined that power failure has not occurred, step S2771 is skipped and the process proceeds to step S454.
Thus, the power-off process (I_POWER_DOWN) is executed in the interrupt process (I_INTR). For this reason, when interrupt processing (I_INTR) is not executed due to interrupts being disabled, or when interrupt processing (I_INTR) is not executed because a program (second program) is being executed outside the use area, the power-off processing (I_POWER_DOWN ) is also not executed. The specific contents of the power-off processing (I_POWER_DOWN) will be described later. When the power-off process (I_POWER_DOWN) is completed, the process proceeds to step S454.

Also, in the interrupt process (I_INTR) shown in FIG. 359, step S455 is followed by step S2821, and the main control board 50 executes LED display control (I_LED_OUT). Thus, LED display control (I_LED_OUT) is executed in interrupt processing (I_INTR). The specific content of the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) will be described later.
After completing the LED display control (I_LED_OUT), the process proceeds to step S2765, and the main control board 50 saves the AF registers (A register and F register (flag register)) to the stack area of the RWM 53's use area. Then, the process proceeds to step S2221, and the main control board 50 executes ratio display preparation processing (S_DSP_READY).

Here, the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) is processing for controlling the lighting of the credit number display LED 76, the acquired number display LED 78, and the set value display LED 73 (digits 1 to 5). ).
On the other hand, the ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY) is a process for controlling lighting of the management information display LED 74 (digits 6 to 9), and is executed by a program (second program) outside the use area. The specific contents of the ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY) will be described later. After completion of the ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY), the process proceeds to step S458.

At step S458, the main control board 50 determines whether the set value is within the normal range. Specifically, the set value data (_NB_RANK) stored at the address "F000(H)" of the RWM 53 is read and stored in the A register. Next, a comparison operation is performed between the A register value and "5" ("5" is subtracted from the A register value), and it is determined whether or not the carry flag="1". When the carry flag ≠ "1", it is determined that the set value data is within the normal range (the set value data is within the range of "0" to "5"), and when the carry flag = "1" determines that the set value data is not within the normal range. If it is determined that it is within the normal range, the process proceeds to step S459, and if it is determined that it is not within the normal range, the process proceeds to unrecoverable error processing 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) of step S2811.

In the interrupt process (I_INTR) shown in FIG. 359, if "No" in step S458 or "Yes" in step S460, the process proceeds to step S2811, and the main control board 50 performs unrecoverable error process 2. Execute (S_ERROR_STOP). The specific contents of the unrecoverable error process 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) will be described later.
Furthermore, in the interrupt process (I_INTR) shown in FIG. 359, when "No" in step S460, the process proceeds to step S2766, and the main control board 50 saves the AF register (A register and F register ( flag register)). Then, the process proceeds to step S457.

Here, in the interrupt process (I_INTR) shown in FIG. 359, the processes of steps S2221, S458, S459, and S460 are executed by the program outside the usage area (second program).
Then, when the process by the program in the used area (first program) shifts to the process by the program outside the used area (second program), in step S2765 the AF register (A register and F register (flag register)) is set to When saving to the stack area of the RWM 53 usage area, ending the processing by the program (second program) outside the usage area, and returning to the processing by the program (first program) in the usage area, the AF register is cleared in step S2766. bring back.

FIG. 360 is a flowchart showing power-off processing (I_POWER_DOWN) in step S2771 in FIG.
When the power-off process (I_POWER_DOWN) in step S2771 is started, first, in step S2772, the main control board 50 saves the register. This process is a process of saving various registers to the stack area of the used area of the RWM 53 .

Proceeding to the next step S2773, the main control board 50 clears all the output ports 52. FIG. As a result, the output of all the output ports 52 is turned off. Stop driving it.
In the next step S2774, the main control board 50 saves the stack pointer at a predetermined address in the work area of the RWM 53's use area. Note that the stack pointer saved in step S2774 is restored in step S2722 of the power restoration process (M_POWER_ON) in FIG.

Proceeding to the next step S2775, the main control board 50 saves the AF registers (A register and F register (flag register)) to the stack area of the RWM 53's use area. Then, proceeding to step S2776, the main control board 50 executes RWM checksum set processing (S_SUM_SET). The specific contents of the RWM checksum set processing (S_SUM_SET) will be described later. When the RWM checksum set process (S_SUM_SET) is completed, the process proceeds to the next step S2777, and the main control board 50 restores the AF register saved in step S2775. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S2778.

The RWM checksum set processing (S_SUM_SET) is executed by a program (second program) outside the used area.
Then, when the process by the program in the used area (first program) shifts to the process by the program outside the used area (second program), the AF register (A register and F register (flag register)) is changed in step S2775. When saving to the stack area of the RWM 53 usage area, ending the processing by the program (second program) outside the usage area, and returning to the processing by the program (first program) in the usage area, the AF register is cleared in step S2777. bring back.

Proceeding to step S2778, the main control board 50 prohibits access to the RWM53. Then, proceeding to the next step S2779, the main control board 50 is brought into a reset wait state (loop processing state). Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

FIG. 361 is a flow chart showing the RWM checksum set processing (S_SUM_SET) in step S2776 in FIG.
When the RWM checksum set process (S_SUM_SET) in step S2776 is started, the main control board 50 first saves the stack pointer (SP register) to a specific address in the work area outside the use area of the RWM 53 in step S2781. In the next step 2782, a stack pointer ("F400(H)") outside the use area is set, and when proceeding to the next step S2783, a plurality of registers are saved in the stack area outside the use area of the RWM 53. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S2784.

Here, in step S2781, the stack pointer (SP register) is stored in stack pointer temporary storage buffer 2 (address "F2A3(H)" in FIG. 348).
As described above, the RWM checksum set processing (S_SUM_SET) is processing by a program (second program) outside the usage area, so during the execution of the program (second program) outside the usage area, The stack pointer used in (first program) is saved, and the stack pointer is restored when returning to the program (first program) in the used area.
Also, in step S2782, the stack pointer (address "F400(H)") outside the use area is stored in the stack pointer (SP register).
Furthermore, in step S2783, various registers are saved in the stack area outside the use area.

Proceeding to step S2784, the main control board 50 sets a power-off processing completed flag (_SF_POWER_OFF) to the address "F2A1(H)" of the RWM 53. FIG. Here, when power-off processing is executed, "55 (H)" is stored as a power-off processing completed flag (_SF_POWER_OFF).
When the power is restored, the power-off processing completed flag is cleared (set to "0") in step S2724 of the power restoration processing (M_POWER_ON) in FIG. Therefore, after executing the process of step S2724, the address "F2A1(H)" of the RWM 53 becomes "00(H)". If the power-off process is not executed, the power-off process completed flag (_SF_POWER_OFF) is not set, so the address "F2A1(H)" of the RWM 53 remains "00(H)".
Proceeding to the next step S2785, the main control board 50 clears (sets to "0") the RWM checksum data (_SW_SUM_CHK) of the address "F2A0(H)" of the RWM 53. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S2786.

Proceeding to step S2786, the main control board 50 sets the start address ("F000 (H)") of the used area of the RWM 53 in an addressing register (eg, B register), and proceeding to the next step S2787. , the number of bytes (number of checksum calculations) of the area used by the RWM 53 is set in the register for the number of calculations (for example, the C register), and the process proceeds to the next step S2788. , the initial data (“00000000 (B)”) is set.

Then, proceeding to the next step S2789, the main control board 50 executes checksum calculation processing of the used area of the RWM 53. FIG.
In this embodiment, the use area of the RWM 53 is set in the range of addresses "F000(H)" to "F1FF(H)". The processing of steps S2789 and S2790 is repeated until it is determined that the calculation processing has ended. As a result, the checksum of the used area of the RWM 53 (addresses “F000(H)” to “F1FF(H)”) is calculated.

More specifically, in this embodiment, in step S2789, the data indicated by the addressing register (B register) value is subtracted from the checksum calculation register (D register) value. In the next step S2790, the value of the register (C register) for the number of calculations is updated (subtracted by "1"), and it is determined whether or not the result is "0". When it is determined to be "0", it is determined that the checksum calculation processing of the used area of the RWM 53 has ended, and the process proceeds to step S2791. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not "0", the value of the addressing register (B register) is updated ("1" is added), and the process returns to step S2789.

Then, when the checksum calculation processing of the used area of the RWM 53 is completed, the process advances to step S2791, and the main control board 50 stores the start address ("F210 (H )”) is set, and in the next step S2792, the number of bytes (the number of checksum calculations) outside the use area of the RWM 53 is set in the register for the number of calculations (C register).

Then, proceeding to the next step S2793, the main control board 50 executes checksum calculation processing outside the use area of the RWM 53. FIG.
In this embodiment, the area outside the use area of the RWM 53 is set to addresses "F210(H)" to "F3FF(H)", and in the next step S2794, the checksum is calculated up to the address "F3FF(H)" of the RWM 53. The processing of steps S2793 and S2794 is repeated until it is determined that the processing has ended. As a result, the checksum outside the use area of the RWM 53 (addresses “F210(H)” to “F3FF(H)”) is calculated.

More specifically, in this embodiment, the checksum calculation result of the used area of the RWM 53 is stored in the checksum calculation register (D register) at the time when the process proceeds to step S2793. Then, in step S2793, the data indicated by the value of the addressing register (B register) is subtracted from the value of the checksum calculation register (D register). In the next step S2794, the value of the register (C register) for the number of calculations is updated (subtracted by "1"), and it is determined whether or not the result is "0". When it is determined to be "0", it is determined that the checksum calculation processing outside the use area of the RWM 53 has ended, and the flow advances to step S2795. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not "0", the value of the addressing register (B register) is updated ("1" is added), and the process returns to step S2793.

Thus, in this embodiment, the RWM checksum data (also called complement data, error detection data, or error detection information) is calculated by executing the processing of steps S2785 to S2794.
This RWM checksum data (complement data) is, as described above, the data of addresses "F000(H)" to "F1FF(H)" in the use area of the RWM 53 and the address "F210(H)" outside the use area. ∼ "F3FF(H)" (excluding "F2A0(H)") is a value that becomes "0" when added to the addition value of the data.

Then, when the checksum calculation processing outside the use area of the RWM 53 is completed, the process proceeds to step S2795, and the main control board 50 stores (saves) the RWM checksum data (complement data) in the address "F2A0(H)" of the RWM 53. )do.
Proceeding to the next step S2796, the main control board 50 restores the register saved in step S2783, and restores the stack pointer saved in step S2781 in the next step S2797. Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

FIG. 362 is a flow chart showing LED display control (I_LED_OUT) in step S2821 in FIG.
First, in step S2822, output ports 3 and 4 (FIG. 351) are turned off. Output port 3 is an output port corresponding to digit 1 signal to digit 5 signal, and output port 4 is an output port corresponding to segment 1A to segment 1P signal. By outputting "00000000 (B)" to these output ports 3 and 4, the output of digits 1 to 5 is temporarily disabled. As a result, when switching the display of the LEDs, it is possible to prevent different LEDs from appearing to light up at the same time (overlaid display) even for a moment (prevention of afterimage).

In the next step S2823, the used area LED display counter 1 (_CT_LED_DSP1) (FIGS. 346 and 353(A)) is updated. Updating the LED display counter 1 is a process of shifting the bit "1" to the right by one digit. This updated value is stored in the RWM 53 at address "F051(H)" (FIG. 346). Then, the process proceeds to step S2824.

In step S2824, it is determined whether or not the value of the LED display counter 1 is "00000000 (B)". Then, when it is determined to be "00000000(B)", the process proceeds to step S2825. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not "00000000(B)", step S2825 is skipped and the process proceeds to step S2826.

In step S2825, the LED display counter 1 is initialized. Here, the value of the LED display counter 1 is set to "00010000 (B)" and stored in the RWM 53 at the address "F051 (H)" (FIG. 346). Then, the process proceeds to step S2826.
In step S2826, the values of the LED display counter 1 (address "F051(H)" in FIG. 346) and the LED display request flag (address "F052(H)" in FIG. 346) stored in the RWM 53 are acquired. Here, the value of the LED display counter 1 is stored in the E register, and the value of the LED display request flag is stored in the A register.

The flow then advances to step S2827 to set the segment display confirmation of the digits to be displayed this time. In this process, an AND operation is performed on the A register value (the value of the LED display request flag) and the E register value (the value of the LED display counter 1) to create the data of the LED to be lit this time.

for example,
LED display counter value: 00001000B
LED display request flag value: 00001111B
After AND operation: 00001000B
becomes.
Or, for example,
LED display counter value: 10000000B
LED display request flag value: 00001111B
After AND operation: 00000000B
becomes.
Then, the calculation result is stored in the A register. Furthermore, the value stored in the A register is stored in the D register.

Next, proceeding to step S2828, it is determined whether or not the A register value (the value obtained by ANDing the value of the LED display counter 1 and the value of the LED display request flag) is "0". Here, when it is "0", it is determined that there is no display request ("No"), and the process proceeds to step S2844. On the other hand, if it is not "0", it is determined that there is a display request ("Yes"), and the process proceeds to step S2829.

In step S2829, error display data is obtained. When an error occurs, error display data is stored in the RWM 53 at a predetermined address. Then, in step S2829, the error display data is read from the RWM 53 and stored in the B register.
In the next step S2830, LED segment table 2 is set. In this embodiment, an LED segment table 1 storing data for displaying English characters on the 7-segment display and an LED segment table 2 storing data for displaying numbers on the 7-segment display are provided. These are stored in the used area of the ROM 54 . A description of the specific configurations of the LED segment tables 1 and 2 will be omitted. Then, in step S2830, the head address of LED segment table 2 is read and the value is stored in the HL register.

Next, proceeding to step S2831, the set value display data (address "F001(H)" in FIG. 346) is read from the RWM 53 and stored in the A register.
Next, proceeding to step S2832, it is determined whether or not there is a set value display request. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the D4 bit (the bit corresponding to digit 5) of the AND-operated value stored in the D register is "1"("00010000(B)"). When the D4 bit is "1", it is determined that there is a set value display request ("Yes"), and the process proceeds to step S2843. On the other hand, when the D4 bit is "0", it is determined that there is no set value display request ("No"), and the process proceeds to step S2833.

In step S2833, credit number data (address "F010(H)" in FIG. 346) is read from the RWM 53 and stored in the A register.
In the next step S2834, the upper digit offset is obtained. In this process, the A register value (credit amount data obtained in step S2833) is divided by 10 (decimal number), the quotient value is stored in the A register, and the remainder value is stored in the C register. It is a process to

In the next step S2835, it is determined whether or not there is a request to display the upper digits of the credit amount. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the D0 bit (the bit corresponding to digit 1) of the AND-operated value stored in the D register is "1". When the D0 bit is "1", it is determined that there is a request to display the upper digits of the credit number ("Yes"), and the process proceeds to step S2843. On the other hand, when the D0 bit is "0", it is determined that there is no request to display the upper digits of the credit number ("No"), and the process proceeds to step S2836.

Proceeding to step S2836, it is determined whether or not there is a request to display the lower digits of the credit amount. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the D1 bit (the bit corresponding to digit 2) of the AND-operated value stored in the D register is "1". When the D1 bit is "1", it is determined that there is a request to display the lower digits of the credit number ("Yes"), and the process proceeds to step S2842. On the other hand, when the D1 bit is "0", it is determined that there is no request to display the lower digits of the credit number ("No"), and the process proceeds to step S2837.

In step S2837, acquisition number data (address "F011 (H)" in FIG. 346) is read from the RWM 53 and stored in the A register.
In the next step S2838, it is determined whether or not an error is being displayed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the B register value is "0", and if it is "0", it is determined that an error is not being displayed ("No"), and the process proceeds to step S2840. On the other hand, when the B register value is not "0", it is determined that an error is being displayed ("Yes"), and the process proceeds to step S2839.

In step S2839, LED segment table 1 is set. When proceeding to step S2839, the HL register stores the head address of the LED segment table 2 for displaying numbers on the 7-segment display. display the corresponding alphabetic character. Therefore, in step S2839, the head address of the LED segment table 1 for displaying English characters on the 7-segment display is read, and the value is stored in the HL register. As a result, the head address of LED segment table 1 is set in the HL register instead of the head address of LED segment table 2 set in step S2830.

In the next step S2840, the offset for the upper digits is obtained. At the time when the process proceeds to step S2840, the A register stores the acquisition number data acquired in step S2837, and the B register stores the error display data acquired in step S2829. If an error does not occur, the acquired number data stored in the A register is divided by "10 (decimal number)", the quotient is stored in the A register, and the remainder is stored in the C register. do. On the other hand, when an error occurs, the error display data stored in the B register is divided by "10 (decimal number)", the quotient is stored in the A register, and the remainder is stored in the C register.

In the next step S2841, it is determined whether or not there is a request to display the upper digits of the acquisition number display LED78. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the D2 bit (the bit corresponding to digit 3) of the ANDed value stored in the D register is "1". When the D2 bit is "1", it is determined that there is a request to display the upper digits of the obtained number ("Yes"), and the process proceeds to step S2843. On the other hand, when the D2 bit is "0", it is determined that there is no request to display the upper digits of the obtained number ("No"), and the process proceeds to step S2842.

In step S2842, the offset for lower digits is acquired. This process is a process of storing the data stored in the C register in the A register. At the time the process proceeds to step S2842, the A register stores the quotient calculated by the division in step S2834 or S2840, and the C register stores the remainder calculated by the division in step S2834 or S2840. Then, in step S2842, the C register value (remainder of division) is stored in the A register.

The flow then advances to step S2843 to acquire segment output data. Specifically, the data stored in the HL register (the head address of the LED segment table 2 stored in step S2830 or the head address of the LED segment table 1 stored in step S2839) and the data stored in the A register ( The offset value corresponding to the display data) is added, and the data corresponding to the address after the addition is acquired from the LED segment table 1 or 2 of the ROM 54 and stored in the D register.

The flow then advances to step S2844 to determine whether or not there is a segment P display request.
Specifically, first, the D3 bit of the LED display counter 1 (E register value) is “1” (lighting timing of digit 4), and the advantageous section display LED flag (address “F062 (H) of RWM 53 in FIG. 346) )”) is “1”. When the D3 bit of the LED display counter 1 is "1" and the D0 bit of the advantageous section display LED flag is "1", it is determined that there is a display request for the segment P ("Yes"), and step Proceed to S2845.
On the other hand, when the D3 bit of the LED display counter 1 is "1" and the D0 bit of the advantageous section display LED flag is not "1", it is determined that there is no segment P display request ("No"), and step S2845. and proceed to step S2846.

Next, if the D3 bit of the LED display counter 1 is not "1", proceed to the following processing.
LED display counter 1 (E register value) and status display LED lighting data (obtained from address "F044 (H)" of RWM 53 in FIG. 346) are ANDed, and it is determined whether the result of the AND operation is "0". . Then, when the AND operation result is not "0", it is determined that there is a request to display segment P ("Yes"), and the process proceeds to step S2845. On the other hand, when the AND operation result is "0", it is determined that there is no display request for segment P ("No"), step S2845 is skipped, and the process proceeds to step S2846.

Proceeding to step S2845, segment P output data is set. Specifically, the segment output data (D register value) acquired in step S2843 and "10000000 (B)" are ORed, and the result of the OR operation is stored in the D register. As a result, the D7 bit (the bit corresponding to segment P) of the segment output data becomes "1".

Then, proceeding to the next step S2846, the digit signal is output from the output port 3 and the segment signal is output from the output port 4. Specifically, the data (LED display counter 1) stored in the E register is output from the output port 3 as a digit signal, and the data (segment output data) stored in the D register is output as a segment signal to the output port. Output from 4. Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

FIG. 363 is a flowchart showing unrecoverable error processing 2 (S_ERROR_STOP).
As described above, unrecoverable error processing 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) is processing by the second program. No interrupt prohibition processing is provided after the start of error processing 2 (S_ERROR_STOP). Except for this point, the unrecoverable error process 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) in FIG. 363 is the same as the unrecoverable error process (C_ERROR_STOP) in FIG.
In FIG. 363, the same step numbers are assigned to the same processes as in FIG.

FIG. 364 is a flow chart showing ratio display preparation (S_DSP_READY) in step S2221 of interrupt processing (I_INTR) in FIG.
Ratio display preparation (S_DSP_READY) is executed during interrupt processing (I_INTR). Also, during the setting change state, the setting confirmation state, the start switch acceptance process (step S279 in FIG. 41) to the game end check process (step S301 in FIG. 41) (during the game), and in the recoverable error state, Since interrupt processing (I_INTR) can be executed, ratio display preparation (S_DSP_READY) can also be executed, so various ratio information can be displayed on the management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor).

When the ratio display preparation (S_DSP_READY) process is started, first, in step S2461, the main control board 50 sets the stack pointer (SP register) to the stack pointer temporary storage buffer 2 (address "F2A3 (H)" in FIG. 348). memorize to
As described above, ratio display preparation (S_DSP_READY) is a process performed by a program outside the usage area (second program). 1 program) is saved, and the stack pointer is restored when returning to the program in the used area (first program).

In the next step S2462, the main control board 50 sets a stack pointer outside the use area. This process is a process of storing "F400 (H)" in the stack pointer (SP register).
In the next step S2463, the main control board 50 saves the register. This process is a process of saving various registers to a stack area outside the used area.
Next, proceeding to step S2464, the main control board 50 executes flashing request flag generation (S_LED_FLASH). This process is a process shown in FIG. 365, which will be described later, and is a process of updating the flashing request flag (address "F291(H)").

In the next step S2465, the main control board 50 updates the ratio display timer (S_RATE_TIME). This process is the process shown in FIG. 367, which will be described later, and includes a blinking switching flag (address "F293(H)"), a display switching time (address "F294"), and a blinking switching time (address "F296(H)"). This is the process of updating the
In the next step S2466, the main control board 50 performs ratio display processing (S_LED_OUT). This process is a process shown in FIG. 368, which will be described later, and is a process of actually displaying (lighting up or extinguishing) the ratio in the interrupt process.

Next, proceeding to step S2467, the main control board 50 restores the register. This process is a process of restoring various registers saved in step S2463.
In the next step S2468, the main control board 50 restores the stack pointer. This process stores the stack pointer saved in step S2461, ie, the data stored in the stack pointer temporary storage buffer 2, in the stack pointer (SP register). In other words, the processing causes the stap pointer to indicate the address of the used area. Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the setting change state, the setting confirmation state, the start switch acceptance process (step S279 in FIG. 41) to the game end check process (step S301 in FIG. 41) (during the game), and return Since interrupt processing (I_INTR) can be executed even in the possible error state, ratio display preparation (S_DSP_READY) can also be executed.
For this reason, the ratio By the display preparation processing (S_DSP_READY), it is possible to sequentially display information types and various ratios related to game results on the digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor).

Further, in this embodiment, ratio display preparation (S_DSP_READY) can be executed regardless of ON/OFF of the door switch 17 (opening/closing of the front door 12). That is, the ratio display preparation (S_DSP_READY) is executed both when the door switch 17 is on (the front door 12 is open) and when the door switch 17 is off (the front door 12 is closed). It is possible.
Therefore, both when the door switch 17 is on (the front door 12 is open) and when the door switch 17 is off (the front door 12 is closed), the ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY) is executed. Thus, it is possible to sequentially display information types and various ratios related to game results on digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor).

On the other hand, an unrecoverable error occurs, an unrecoverable error state (unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) in FIG. 356 or unrecoverable error processing 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) in FIG. 363 is executed, and the progress of the game stops. When it comes to a stopped state), the interrupt process (I_INTR) is prohibited, so the ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY) is not executed. Various ratios related to game results are no longer displayed.
Furthermore, in this embodiment, in an unrecoverable error state, in step S1494 of unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) in FIG. 356 described above or unrecoverable error processing 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) in FIG. Outputs 0 to 7 are turned off (“00000000 (B)”).

As a result, in an unrecoverable error state, outputs from output port 6 (output port for digits 6 to 9 signals) and output port 7 (output port for segment signals for digits 6 to 9) are "00000000 (B)". Therefore, all the digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 remain extinguished until the unrecoverable error state is canceled and the interrupt process (I_INTR) is restarted.
The fact that digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 all remain unlit is a mode specific to the unrecoverable error state. You can let us know what happened.

FIG. 365 is a flow chart showing flashing request flag generation (S_LED_FLASH) in step S2464 of FIG.
When the flashing request flag generation (S_LED_FLASH) process is started, the main control board 50 first sets the number of repetitions and initial values in step S2481. This process stores "6(H)" in the B register and "0" in the C register.
Here, the number of repetitions "6" is a value for determining whether or not to blink the 6 ratio segments.

In the next step S2482, the main control board 50 sets the address of the flashing/non-corresponding item determination value table. This process is a process of storing the top address of the flashing/non-corresponding item determination value table (TBL_SEG_FLASH) in the DE register.
FIG. 366 is a diagram showing a flashing/non-corresponding item determination value table (TBL_SEG_FLASH). The flashing/non-applicable item determination value table defines predetermined values for the ratios of the six items. For example, the instructed accessory ratio "70" means that the display is blinked when the instructed accessory ratio is "70" or more.
As shown in FIG. 366, the leading address of the blinking/non-applicable item determination value table is "2500 (H)". Therefore, "2500 (H)" is stored in the DE register.

"Non-applicable item" means that the function (performance) corresponding to the item is not provided. For example, in a gaming machine that does not have "RB (first class special role)", the continuous role ratio is not displayed, so when the continuous role ratio is displayed, the ratio segment is lit and displayed with "--".
In the forty-first embodiment, the ratios of all six items are displayed. However, when there is a non-applicable item, "DE ( H)” is stored.

For example, in a gaming machine that does not have "RB (first class special accessory)", the addresses "2502 (H)" and "2504 (H)" are replaced with "60 (H)" in FIG. , "DE(H)".
In this way, even if the game machine is not equipped with "RB (first class special accessory)", it can be managed simply by correcting a part of the data of the flashing/non-applicable item judgment value table. A control process is provided to enable lighting control of information. Therefore, the control program can be easily used for other products.
Note that the value corresponding to the non-applicable item is not limited to "DE(H)".

In the next step S2483, the main control board 50 sets the RWM address of the ratio data. This process is a process of storing the address (“F28D(H)” in FIG. 348) where the role product etc. state ratio data is stored in the HL register.
Next, proceeding to step S2484, the main control board 50 acquires a blinking or non-corresponding item determination value. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Store the data at the address indicated by the DE register value in the A register.
(2) Subtract "1" from the A register value.

In the next step S2485, the main control board 50 determines whether or not it is a non-applicable item value. In this process, "DD(H)" is subtracted from the A register value, and when the operation result is "0" (zero flag="1"), it is determined to be a non-corresponding item value.
That is, when the item is a non-applicable item, "DE(H)" is stored in the flashing/non-applicable item determination value table as described above, so "1" is subtracted from "DE(H)". After that, if "DD(H)" is further subtracted, it becomes "0" and the zero flag="1".

When a predetermined value other than "DE(H)" is stored as the value corresponding to the non-applicable item, for example, "predetermined value -1 - (predetermined value -1)" is calculated, and the result of the calculation is "0". When (zero flag=“1”), it is determined to be a non-corresponding item value.
In addition, the "predetermined value" may be a value exceeding "70 (H)" in the case of the instructed accessory ratio, the accessory ratio (total), and the accessory ratio (6000 times), and the continuous accessory ratio ( Cumulative total) and continuous role product ratio (6000 times) may be a value exceeding "60 (H)", and in the case of role product condition ratio, a value exceeding "50 (H)" may be used.
If it is determined that the item value is not a non-applicable item value, the process proceeds to the next step S2486.

In step S2486, the main control board 50 acquires ratio data. This process is a process of storing the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value in the A register.
In the next step S2487, the main control board 50 saves the ratio data or non-applicable item values. This process is a process of storing the A register value at the address indicated by the HL register value. This process has the following meanings.

If there is a non-applicable item, no data is stored in the storage area of the RWM 53 in which the ratio data is stored before the save process.
For example, if "RB (first class special bonus)" is not provided, continuous bonus ratio (6000 times) data (address "F289 (H)") and continuous bonus ratio (cumulative) data (address "F28B(H)") stores "00(H)".

Although the details will be described later, when the ratio is displayed in the ratio segment of the management information display LED 74, the ratio is displayed based on the information stored in the address. At that time, if "00 (H)" is stored in the continuous role product ratio (6000 times) data, when displaying the continuous role product ratio (6000 times), the ratio segment of the management information display LED 74 is "00" is displayed. In order to prevent this, the value of the A register obtained in step S2485 ("DD(H)" in this embodiment) is stored as ratio data, so that "--" is displayed.
It should be noted that the program processing is incorporated so that this can also be used in common between gaming machines that have non-applicable items and gaming machines that do not have non-applicable items.

In the next step S2488, the main control board 50 performs blinking determination. This process is a process of subtracting the data at the address indicated by the DE register value from the A register value. As a result of the operation, when there is a carry-down, the carry flag is set to "1".
Although the details will be described later, when the carry flag is set to "1", it means that the item is lit without blinking when the item is displayed, and when the carry flag is set to "0", It means that when the item is displayed, it lights up in a blinking manner.

Next, proceeding to step S2489, the main control board 50 generates a flashing request flag. This process performs arithmetic processing to rotate-shift the carry flag and the C register value to the left.
Specifically, if the value of the carry flag is "CY" and the value of the C register is "D7, D6, D5, D4, D3, D2, D1, D0",
"CY", C register value "D7, D6, D5, D4, D3, D2, D1, D0"
of,
"D7", C register value "D6, D5, D4, D3, D2, D1, D0, CY"
Calculation is performed as follows.

For example, when the C register value is the initial value "00000000 (B)" as shown in step S2481 and the carry flag = "1" in step S2488,
"1", C register value "00000000 (B)"
of,
"0", C register value "00000001 (B)"
Calculation is performed as follows.
Therefore, the C register value is "00000001 (B)".
This C register value finally becomes the flashing request flag.
In other words, the process of step S2488 registers information for determining whether or not to blink the ratio segment of the item by calculation based on the ratio data and the specific value stored in the blinking/non-corresponding item determination value table. (storage area).

In the next step S2490, the main control board 50 sets the RWM address of the next ratio data. This process is a process of subtracting "1" from the HL register value.
For example, the HL register value in the first blink determination is "F28D(H)" (accessory item state ratio data) as described above. Here, when "1" is subtracted, the HL register value becomes "F28C(H)" (accessory ratio (accumulated) data), which is the second flashing determination target.

In the next step S2491, the main control board 50 sets the address of the next blinking/non-corresponding item determination value table. This process is a process of adding "1" to the DE register value. For example, when "2500 (H)" was initially stored as the DE register value, it becomes "2501 (H)" by this processing.
Here, as shown in FIG. 366, the state ratio of the role, etc., the ratio of the role (cumulative), the ratio of the continuous role (cumulative), the ratio of the role (6000 times), the ratio of the continuous role (6000 times), Blinking/non-corresponding item determination values are stored in addresses "2500(H)" to "2505(H)" in order of character ratio.
As a result, a loop processing (step S2484 to S2492) allows the target address to be specified, thereby simplifying the processing.

Next, proceeding to step S2492, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the repetition has ended. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Subtract "1" from the B register value.
(2) If the B register value is not "0", it is determined that the iteration has not ended.
Here, since the B register value is set to "6" in the first step S2481, the number of repetitions is "6". If it is determined that the repetition has been completed, the process proceeds to step S2493, and if it is determined that the repetition has not been completed, the process returns to step S2484.
As described above, six items of flashing determination are performed.

When the flashing determination of the 6 items is completed and the process proceeds to step S2493, the main control board 50 acquires the total number of games counter value. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Store the value of the lower 2 bytes of the total number-of-games counter (address "F26D(H)") in the HL register.
(2) Store the value of the upper 1 byte of the total number of games counter (address "F26D(H)") in the A register.
As described above, the total number-of-games counter consists of 3 bytes, "F26D(H)" is a storage area for storing the first digit, and the value is stored in the L register.
"F26E(H)" is a storage area for storing the second digit, and the value is stored in the H register.
Furthermore, "F26F(H)" is a storage area for storing the third digit, and its value is stored in the A register.

In the next step S2494, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the upper 1 byte of the total number of games counter is "0". This process determines whether the A register value stored in step S2493 is "0". If it is determined to be "0", the process proceeds to step S2495, and if it is determined not to be "0", the process proceeds to step S2496.
In step S2495, the main control board 50 determines whether or not 6000 games have passed. In this process, "6000 (D)" is subtracted from the HL register value (lower 2-byte data of the total number-of-games counter). As a result of the operation, when there is a carry-down, the carry flag is set to "1". When the carry flag is "1", it is determined that 6000 games have not passed, and the process proceeds to step S2497.
On the other hand, when it is determined that 6000 games have passed, the process proceeds to step S2496.

At step S2496, the main control board 50 updates the blink request flag data. This process is to set the D6 bit of the C register to "1". Here, the C register value is set to a value corresponding to the flashing request flag at address "F291(H)" in FIG. Therefore, when 6000 games have passed, the process of setting the D6 bit to "1" is executed.

In the next step S2497, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the upper byte of the total number of games counter exceeds "2" ("3" or more). Here, a process of subtracting "3" from the A register value is performed. If there is no carry-down in this subtraction, the carry flag ≠ "1". Then, when the carry flag is not "1", it is determined that the upper 1 byte of the total number-of-games counter exceeds "2" ("3" or more).

The reason for doing this is that the upper 1 byte is first compared with "3" in order to determine whether or not the number of games has reached 175,000. Here, "175000 (D)" is "2AB98 (H)" in hexadecimal, so it is inevitable that the A register value exceeds "2" (the A register value is "3" or more). In general, it can be seen that the value of the total number-of-games counter exceeds "175000 (D)".
At step S2497, when the carry flag ≠ "1", it is determined that the upper 1 byte of the total number of games counter exceeds "2", and the process proceeds to step S2500. It is determined that the upper 1 byte of the number-of-games counter does not exceed "2", and the process proceeds to step S2498.

At step S2498, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the value of the upper byte of the total number of games counter is "2". In this process, "2" is subtracted from the A register value, and when it is determined that it is not "0", it is determined that the value of the upper 1 byte of the total number of games counter is not "2". If it is determined that the value of the upper byte of the total number of games counter is not "2", the process proceeds to step S2501, and if it is determined that the value of the upper byte of the total number of games counter is "2", step S2499. proceed to

In step S2499, the main control board 50 determines whether or not 175000 games have passed. Specifically, "AB98(H)" is subtracted from the HL register value, and if the result of the calculation is a carry flag, the carry flag is set to "1". When the carry flag is "1", it is determined that 175000 games have not passed.
If it is determined in step S2499 that 175,000 games have passed, the flow advances to step S2500, and if it is determined that 175,000 games have not passed, the flow advances to step S2501.

At step S2500, the main control board 50 updates the blinking request flag data. This process sets the D7 bit of the C register to "1". The D7 bit of the C register corresponds to the D7 bit (175000 game blink flag) of the blink request flag at address "F291(H)" in FIG. Then, the process advances to step S2501.

At step S2501, the main control board 50 generates a flashing request flag. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Store "01111111 (B)" in the A register.
(2) An exclusive OR operation (XOR) is performed on the A register value and the C register value, and the operation result is stored in the A register.

Before execution of the process of step S2501, "0" is stored in the blinking items (bits) of the data stored in the C register, as described above. For example, when 175000 games have been played, the D7 bit is "1" as described above. In other words, when 175000 games have not been played, it is "0".
Therefore, by inverting the bit of the C register value, a flashing request flag is generated so that the flashing item (bit) becomes "1".

In the next step S2502, the main control board 50 saves the flashing request flag generated in step S2501. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Store the address of the blinking request flag (“F291(H)” in FIG. 348) in the HL register.
(2) Store the A register value at the address indicated by the HL register value ("F291(H)" in FIG. 348).
As a result, the blinking item becomes "1" and the non-blinking item becomes "0". In this way, the information corresponding to each bit is represented by "1" or "0", and the flashing request flags related to eight items including whether or not to flash are stored at address "F291(H)" in FIG. remembered.

FIG. 367 is a flow chart showing the rate display timer update (S_RATE_TIME) in step S2465 in FIG.
When the ratio display timer update (S_RATE_TIME) process is started, the main control board 50 first updates the display switching time in step S2511. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Store the address (“F294(H)” in FIG. 348) storing the display switching time in the HL register.
(2) Subtract "1" from the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value, and store the result of the subtraction at that address.
This process executes a cyclic subtraction process that circulates between "0" and "2144 (D)" when the display switching time is expressed in decimal notation.

Therefore, if the processing is performed when the display switching time is "0", "2144 (D)" (860 (H)) is stored as the display switching time.
Also, when the flag is "0", the processing is performed, and when "2144 (D)" (860 (H)) is stored as the display switching time, the carry flag becomes "1".
Since interrupt processing is executed every 2.235 ms, the value changes from "0" to "2144 (D)" and the carry flag becomes "1" every approximately 4792 ms.
As a result, the content of the ratio display is switched approximately every five seconds.

In the next step S2512, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the display switching time has elapsed. This determination is to determine whether or not the carry flag=“1” in the process of step S2511. When the carry flag=“1”, it is determined that the display switching time has elapsed.
When it is determined that the display switching time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S2513, and when it is determined that the display switching time has not elapsed, the process proceeds to step S2518.

In step S2513, the main control board 50 saves the blink switching time. In this process, "134 (D) (86 (H))" is stored at the address (blink switching time) indicated by the data obtained by adding "2" to the HL register value (that is, "F296 (H)").
That is, when it is determined that the display switching time has passed, the flashing switching time is saved. A time of "2.235×134=299.49 (ms)" is stored as the flashing switching time.

Next, proceeding to step S2514, the main control board 50 turns off the flashing switching flag. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Store the address of the flashing switching flag (“F293 (H)” in FIG. 348) in the HL register.
(2) Store "0" at the address indicated by the HL register value.
As described above, when the data stored in the flashing switching flag is "0", it indicates lighting, and when it is "1", it indicates lighting off.
That is, at the timing when the display switching time has elapsed, the flashing switching flag becomes "0" (lit).

Next, proceeding to step S2515, the main control board 50 updates the ratio display number. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Subtract "1" from the HL register value.
In other words, the address of the RWM 53 ("F292(H)" in FIG. 348) corresponding to the ratio display number is stored in the HL register.
(2) Add "1" to the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value.
This process executes a cyclic addition process that circulates between "0" and "5" for the ratio display number. Therefore, if the processing is performed when the ratio display number is "5", "0" is stored as the ratio display number. Also, if the process is performed when the ratio display number is less than "5", the carry flag is set to "1".

In the next step S2516, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the updated ratio display number is "0". Here, when the carry flag=“1”, it is determined that the ratio display number is not “0”. In other words, if the process of step S2515 is executed when the ratio display number is "5", the carry flag ≠ "1" (= "0"), and at this time it is determined that the ratio display number is "0". do.

In step S2516, when it is determined that the updated ratio display number is "0", the process proceeds to step S2517, and when it is determined that it is not "0", the processing according to this flowchart is terminated.
At step S2517, the main control board 50 corrects the ratio display number. This process is to add "1" to the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value ("F292(H)" in FIG. 348). By this processing, when "0" is stored in the ratio display number, it is updated to "1". As a result, the ratio display number circulates from "1" to "6". Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

In step S2512, it is determined that the display switching time has not elapsed, and when proceeding to step S2518, the main control board 50 updates the flashing switching time. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Store the flashing switching time address (“F296 (H)” in FIG. 348) in the HL register.
(2) Subtract "1" from the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value, and store the result of the subtraction at that address.
This process executes a cyclic subtraction process that circulates between "0" and "134 (D)" when the flashing switching time is expressed in decimal notation.
Therefore, if the processing is performed when the flashing switching time is "0", "134 (D)" (86 (H)) is stored as the flashing switching time.
Also, when the flag is "0", the relevant processing is performed, and when "134 (D)" (86 (H)) is stored as the blink switching time, the carry flag becomes "1".

Next, proceeding to step S2519, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the blink switching time has elapsed. This judgment is made by judging whether or not the carry flag is "1", and when the carry flag ≠ "1", it is judged that the flashing switching time has not elapsed. If it is determined that the flashing switching time has elapsed, the process advances to step S2520, and if it is determined that the flashing switching time has not elapsed, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

At step S2520, the main control board 50 updates the flashing switching flag. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Store the address of the flashing switching flag (“F293 (H)” in FIG. 348) in the HL register.
(2) Add "1" to the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value, and store the addition result at the address.
This process executes a cyclic addition process that circulates between "0" and "1" for the flashing switching flag. Therefore, if this process is performed when the flashing switching flag is "1", "0" is stored as the flashing switching flag.
Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

FIG. 368 is a flow chart showing the ratio display process (S_LED_OUT) in step S2466 in FIG.
When the ratio display process (S_LED_OUT) is started, the main control board 50 first acquires the value of the LED display counter 2 (_SC_LED_DSP2) (address "F297(H)" in FIG. 348) in step S1471. This process is a process of acquiring the value of the LED display counter 2 (_SC_LED_DSP2) and storing it in the D register.

In the next step S1472, the main control board 50 determines whether or not there is a ratio display request. Here, it is determined whether or not there is a display request for any of the digits 6-9. Specifically, the value of the LED display counter 2 stored in the D register and "00001111 (B)" are ANDed. Then, when the result of the AND operation is "0", it is determined that there is no ratio display request, and the processing according to this flowchart is terminated. On the other hand, when the AND operation result is not "0", it is determined that there is a ratio display request, and the process proceeds to step S1475.
In the forty-first embodiment, the result of the AND operation between the value of the LED display counter 2 and "00001111(B)" never becomes "0", so the result of step S1472 never becomes "No".

In the next step S1475, the ratio display number (address "F292(H)" in FIG. 348) is acquired. This process acquires the ratio display number, stores it in the A register, and further stores the A register value in the E register.
Here, based on the ratio display number, the number of flashing bit inspections, which will be described later, is determined. For example:
Example 1)
Ratio display number is "1": Acquire the number of flashing bit inspections of the instructed accessory ratio.
Example 2)
The ratio display number is "2": The number of blinking bit inspections for the continuous role ratio (6000 times) is acquired.
Example 3)
The ratio display number is "5": Acquires the number of blinking bit inspections for the role product ratio (total cumulative total).
Example 4)
Ratio display number is "6": Acquire the number of blinking bit inspections of the state ratio of accessories, etc.
Also, by executing the process of storing the A register value in the E register, the A register value and the E register value become the same value.

In the next step S2531, the address of the blinking bit inspection frequency table is set. In this process, the HL register stores an address obtained by subtracting "1" from the leading address of the flashing bit check count table (TBL_FLASH_CHK).
FIG. 369 is a diagram showing a blink bit check count table (TBL_FLASH_CHK).
As shown in FIG. 369, a predetermined value is stored for each ratio (for example, the value corresponding to the instructed accessory ratio is "8(H)").
Its top address is "2510(H)". Therefore, "250F(H)" is stored in the HL register.

The "blinking bit inspection count" is a value indicating how many bits ahead from the D0 bit in the blinking request flag of the address "F292(H)" to reach the bit to be inspected.
For example, in FIG. 369, "8 (H)" is stored in the instructed accessory ratio, continuous accessory ratio (total), accessory ratio (total), and accessory state ratio. , is a value for determining whether or not the value of the eighth D7 bit counted from the D0 bit in the flashing request flag is "1". The D7th bit is a flag that becomes "1" when the total number of games has not reached 175000 times, and when the D7th bit is "1", the instructed accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio are indicated. (Total), Accessory ratio (Total), and Accessory state ratio identification segs are blinking targets.

In addition, in FIG. 369, "7 (H)" is stored in the continuous role product ratio (6000 times) and the role product ratio (6000 times). This is a value for judging whether or not the value of the seventh D6 bit after counting is "1". The D6th bit is a flag that becomes "1" when the total number of games has not reached 6000 times. The identification seg with the character ratio (6000 times) is to be blinked.

In the next step S2532, the main control board 50 sets the identification segment blinking bit check count. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Data obtained by adding the A register value to the HL register value is stored in the HL register.
(2) Store the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value in the B register.
For example, when the A register value (ratio display number stored in step S1475) is "3",
250F(H)+3(H)=2512(H) (=HL register value)
7 (H) (=B register value)
becomes.

In other words, "250F(H)" is the reference address, and the data stored in the ratio display number (address "F292(H)") is used as the offset value to calculate the address of the blinking bit check table and store it at that address. It is possible to acquire the data that is stored.
In the above example, "7 (H)", which is the information for determining whether or not to blink the identification seg at the character ratio (6000 times) stored at the address "2512 (H)", is obtained. be done.

Next, proceeding to step S1476, the main control board 50 sets the identification segment offset table. This process is to store the start address of the identification segment offset table (TBL_SEGID_DATA) in the HL register. The head address is "2520(H)", and "251F(H)" obtained by subtracting "1" from this address is stored in the HL register.

In the next step S1477, the main control board 50 acquires the identification segment offset value. This process is a process of reading from the identification segment offset table using the ratio display number stored in the A register in step S1475 as the offset value.
Specifically, the following processing is executed.
(1) Data obtained by adding the A register value to the HL register value is stored in the HL register.
(2) Store the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value in the A register.
As a result, for example, when the ratio display number is "1", "2520 (H)" obtained by adding "1 (H)" to "251F (H)" is stored in the HL register and stored at the address. The received data "7A(H)" is stored in the A register. Further, when the ratio display number is "2", "2521(H)" obtained by adding "2(H)" to "251F(H)" is stored in the HL register, and the data stored at the address is is stored in the A register.

In the next step S1478, the main control board 50 determines whether or not there is a request to display the ratio (1000 digits) (request to display digit 6). Here, it is determined whether or not the D0 bit of the value stored in the D register (the value of the LED display counter 2) is "1", and if it is "1", it is determined that there is a display request. If there is a request to display the ratio (1000 digits), the process proceeds to step S1482, and if there is no request to display it, the process proceeds to step S1479.

In step S1479, the main control board 50 determines whether or not there is a request to display the ratio (100 digits) (request to display digit 7). Here, it is determined whether or not the D1 bit of the value stored in the D register (the value of the LED display counter 2) is "1", and if it is "1", it is determined that there is a display request. If there is a request to display the ratio (100 digits), the process proceeds to step S1483, and if there is no request to display it, the process proceeds to step S2533.

In step S2533, the main control board 50 sets the ratio segment blinking bit inspection count. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Store the E register value in the A register.
(2) Store the A register value in the B register.
Here, the E register stores the ratio display number obtained in step S1475. Therefore, the same value is stored in the E register, A register, and B register.
The process then advances to step S1480. When the process proceeds to step S1480, there is no request to display the ratio (1000 digits) or the ratio (100 digits), that is, when there is no request to display the identification segment (when displaying the ratio segment). Therefore, in step S1480, ratio data is obtained.
At this step S1480, the main control board 50 acquires the numerical value corresponding to the ratio display number stored in the E register. For example, when the E register value is "00000001 (B)" corresponding to the ratio display number "1", the instructed accessory ratio data is obtained.

Acquisition of specific ratio data is as follows.
(1) Store the value ("F287 (H)") obtained by subtracting "1" from the address ("F288 (H)" in FIG. 348) of the RWM 53 where the instructed bonus ratio data is stored in the HL register do.
(2) Store the data obtained by adding the A register value to the HL register value in the HL register.
(3) Store the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value in the A register.
That is, with "F287(H)" as the reference address and the ratio display number as the offset value, the RWM address where the ratio data is stored is calculated (designated), and the data stored at the RWM address is transferred to the register (storage area). can be obtained (stored) in

By this process, the A register stores the instructed role ratio data, continuous role ratio data (6000 times), role ratio data (6000 times), continuous role ratio data (cumulative total), and role ratio data (cumulative total). ), and an offset value for displaying the ratio of any of the state ratios of accessories, etc. is stored. This offset value (A register value) is used when acquiring ratio display segment data in step S1484.

Next, proceeding to step S1481, the main control board 50 determines whether or not there is a request to display the ratio (1 digit) (request to display digit 9). This process is to determine whether or not the D3 bit of the value stored in the D register (the value of the LED display counter 2) is "1". If there is a request to display the ratio (1 digit), the process proceeds to step S1483, and if there is no request to display it, the process proceeds to step S1482.
When there is no ratio (1-digit) display request in step S1481, it means that there is a ratio (10-digit) display request.

Through the above processing, if there is a request to display the ratio (1000 digits) or the ratio (10 digits), the process proceeds to step S1482, and if there is a request to display the ratio (100 digits) or the ratio (1 digit), the process proceeds to step S1483. .
At step S1482, the main control board 50 sets the upper digit offset. This is because the upper digits of the identification seg or ratio seg are lit when the process proceeds to step S1482. At this point, the A register stores the identified segment offset value (step S1477) or ratio data (step S1480). Here, the following processing is executed.

(1) Replace the lower 4 bits and the upper 4 bits stored in the A register.
For example, if the data before replacement is "0011/1001(B)"("/" indicates the boundary between the upper 4 bits and the lower 4 bits), the lower 4 bits and the upper 4 bits are replaced. and becomes "1001/0011(B)".
(2) An AND operation is performed on the A register value and "00001111(B)", and the operation result is stored in the A register. This process is a process of masking (setting to "0") the upper 4 bits since the lower 4 bits of the A register are used as an offset value.
Of the 1-byte data of the identification segment offset value and the 1-byte data of the offset value for displaying the ratio, the upper 4 bits correspond to the upper digit offset value, and the lower 4 bits correspond to the lower digit offset value. ing. Therefore, by performing the above process, an offset value for obtaining the segment data of the upper digits is generated.

In the next step S1483, the main control board 50 sets the ratio display segment data table. This process is a process of storing the start address of the ratio display segment data table in the HL register. The head address is "2530(H)", and "2530(H)" is stored in the HL register. A description of the specific configuration of the ratio display segment data table will be omitted.

Next, proceeding to step S1484, the main control board 50 acquires segment output data. In this process, the A register value (offset value) is added to the HL register value (head address of the ratio display segment data table), and the data corresponding to the address of the ratio display segment data table after the addition is stored in the E register. processing.
Specifically, for example,
HL register value = 2530 (H) (before addition; start address value of ratio display segment data table)
A register value = 5 (H)
when
HL register value = 2535 (H) (after addition)
E register value = 01101101 (B) ("5" display data)
becomes.

Next, proceeding to step S1485, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the segment P is displayed. In this embodiment, when digits 6 to 9 are displayed, segment P (dot) of digit 7 is always displayed. Therefore, when there is a request to display a ratio (100 digits), it is determined that segment P is to be displayed. . On the other hand, when there is a request to display the ratio (1 digit), the ratio (10 digits), and the ratio (1000 digits), it is determined that the display of the segment P is not requested.

Here, for example, it is determined whether or not the D1 bit of the value stored in the D register is "1". determines that there is no display request for segment P. Specifically, the following processing is executed.
(1) Store "00000010 (B)" in the A register.
(2) An AND operation is performed on the A register value and the D register value (the value of the LED display counter 2 stored in step S1471).
If it is determined that there is a display request for segment P, the process proceeds to step S1486, and if it is determined that there is no display request, the process proceeds to step S2534.

At step S1486, the main control board 50 sets the output data corresponding to the segment P. FIG. Since the segment P corresponds to the D7 bit of the 8-bit data, the segment data (E register value) acquired in step S1484 and "10000000 (B)" are ORed, and the operation result is stored in the E register. Remember.

In the next step S2534, the main control board 50 acquires a flashing request flag. This process is a process of storing the data of the flashing request flag (address "F291(H)" in FIG. 348) in the A register.
Next, proceeding to step S2535, the main control board 50 performs a blinking bit test. This process is a process of shifting the A register to the right by "1" and storing the overflowed result in the carry flag. That is, the value of the D0 bit before the "1" shift is stored in the carry flag. Therefore, if the value of the D0 bit before the "1" shift is "0", the carry flag is "0", and if the value of the D0 bit before the "1" shift is "1", the carry flag is "1". Become.

In the next step S2536, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the inspection has ended. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Subtract "1" from the B register value.
(2) When it is determined that the B register value is "0", it is determined that the inspection is completed.
If it is determined that the inspection has been completed, the process proceeds to step S2537, and if it is determined that the inspection has not been completed, the process returns to step S2535.
By the above processing, the value of the flashing request flag is shifted to the right by the number of times that it was first stored in the B register, and the result of the shift and overflow is stored in the carry flag.

For example, when the value of the blink request flag is "10000000 (B)" (175000 times blink flag of D7th bit is ON) and the B register value is "8 (H)",
First time: "10000000 (B)"→"01000000 (B)", carry flag = "0"
B register value = 8 - 1 = 7 (H)
Second time: "01000000 (B)"→"00100000 (B)", carry flag = "0"
B register value = 7-1 = 6 (H)
Third time: "00100000 (B)"→"00010000 (B)", carry flag = "0"
B register value = 6-1 = 5 (H)
Fourth time: "00010000 (B)"→"00001000 (B)", carry flag = "0"
B register value = 5 - 1 = 4 (H)
Fifth time: "00001000 (B)"→"00000100 (B)", carry flag = "0"
B register value = 4 - 1 = 3 (H)
Sixth time: "00000100 (B)"→"00000010 (B)", carry flag = "0"
B register value = 3-1 = 2 (H)
Seventh time: "00000010 (B)"→"00000001 (B)", carry flag = "0"
B register value = 2-1 = 1 (H)
Eighth time: "00000001 (B)"→"00000000 (B)", carry flag = "1"
B register value = 1 - 1 = 0 (H)
becomes.

At step S2537, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the blinking request flag is on. In this process, it is determined whether or not the carry flag is "1" when it is determined in step S2536 that the inspection has been completed. When it is determined that the flashing request flag is on, the process proceeds to step S2538, and when it is determined that the flashing request flag is not on, the process proceeds to step S1487.

At step S2538, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the flashing switching flag is on. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) The data of the flashing switching flag (address "F293(H)" in FIG. 348) is stored in the A register.
(2) When the A register value is "0" (second zero flag = "1"), it is determined that the flashing switching flag is not on.
If it is determined that the flashing switching flag is on, the process proceeds to step S2539, and if it is determined that it is not on, the process proceeds to step S1487.
From steps S2537 and S2538,
a) If the flashing request flag is off ("No" in step S2537), the process does not proceed to step S2538, so even if the flashing switching flag is on, the light is not turned off.
b) Even if the flashing request flag is on ("Yes" in step S2537), if the flashing switching flag is off ("No" in step S2538), the light is turned on.
c) If the flashing request flag is on (“Yes” at step S2537) and the flashing switching flag is on (“Yes” at step S2538), the process advances to step S2539 to turn off the light.

At step S2539, the main control board 50 clears the segment data. This process is a process of storing the B register value in the E register.
Here, the B register value is always "0" when it is determined that the inspection has ended in step S2536. Therefore, this process is a process of setting "0" to the E register. That is, when the blink request flag is on (“1”) and the blink switching flag is on (“1”, i.e., extinguished), the interrupt process extinguishes the display to be illuminated. In order to set the data (E register value) to "00000000 (B)", the process of step S2539 is executed. Then, the process proceeds to step S1487.

In step S1487, the main control board 50 outputs the segment signal from the output port 7 and the digit signal from the output port 6 in order to output the digit signal and the segment signal. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Swap the DE and HL register values.
Here, a digit signal is stored in the D register. A segment signal is stored in the E register. and,
exchange the data stored in the D register with the data stored in the H register,
The data stored in the E register and the data stored in the L register are exchanged.
This will
A digit signal is stored in the H register,
A segment signal is stored in the L register.
(2) output the L register value to output port 7 and the H register value to output port 6;
This completes the processing according to this flowchart.

Next, the operation when the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 in the 41st embodiment is operated will be described.
When the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit and medals can be betted, and a recoverable error state occurs (for example, medal selector error ("CE" error), etc.), the reset switch ( Assume that the RWM clear switch 153 is operated to cancel the recoverable error state.
In this case, as described above, even if the recoverable error state is canceled, the data in the use area and outside the use area of the RWM 53 are maintained without being initialized, so the data regarding the advantageous section is also maintained without being initialized. Therefore, the advantageous section display LED 77 is also kept lit.
It should be noted that error-related data such as an error detection flag stored at a predetermined address in the RWM 53 may be initialized when recovering from a recoverable error state.

On the other hand, when the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit and medals can be bet, and a recoverable error state occurs, the power is turned off, and then the setting key switch 152 is turned off. , and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on (operated), the power is turned on.
In this case, when the power is turned on under the condition that the setting key switch 152 is off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on, in step S2707 of the program start processing (M_PRG_START) in FIG. "No", "Yes" in step S2710, and the process advances to step S2713 to set the initialization range of the RWM 53 at the start of the setting change when the power is restored normally.

Also, since the setting change disabled flag is off because medals can be betted, the result is "Yes" in step S2714, and the process proceeds to the initialization process (M_INI_SET) in step S2731. Then, in steps S2732 to S2736 of the initialization process (M_INI_SET) in FIG. ~ "F3FF (H)" initialization processing is executed. As a result, the data relating to the advantageous interval is initialized, and the advantageous interval display LED 77 is extinguished. However, since the set value data (_NB_RANK) of the address "F000(H)" is maintained without being initialized, the set value is not changed. Further, since it is reset time, "Yes" is determined in step S2741 of FIG. 357, and the setting change confirmation process (M_RANK_CTL) in step S2742 is skipped, so that the setting change state is not changed either. After that, the process proceeds to the main process (M_MAIN) (FIG. 41) of step S248, and returns to the state where medals can be betted.

In this way, when the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit and medals can be bet, and a recoverable error state occurs, if the reset switch 153 is operated to cancel the recoverable error state, It is possible to maintain the game in the advantageous section.
On the other hand, when the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit and medals can be betted, and a recoverable error state occurs, the power is turned off once, and then the reset switch 153 is turned on. When the power is turned on in , the recoverable error state can be canceled and the game can be restarted from the normal section instead of the advantageous section.
As a result, it is possible for the administrator (hall clerk) to select whether to maintain the game in the advantageous section or restart the game from the normal section.

Also, for example, assume that the player has stopped playing the game during the game in the advantageous section (midway through the game in the advantageous section). In such a case, if the next player starts the game in the middle of the game in the advantageous section, that player becomes too advantageous.
On the other hand, it is not preferable to change the settings during the operation of the hall, as it may arouse the gambling spirit of the players.
In addition, if the operation of the game machine is stopped by turning off the power supply of the game machine during the operation of the hall, the operation rate of the game machine will decrease, which is not preferable in terms of the management of the hall.
Therefore, when the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit and medals can be betted, the power is turned off once, and then the power is turned on while the reset switch 153 is turned on. As a result, the game can be resumed from the normal section without changing the settings.

Also, in a situation where medals can be betted, the power is turned off, and then the setting key switch 152 is on and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is off (not operated). , is turned on.
In this case, it is possible to shift to a setting change state (setting change mode, during setting change), after which the start switch 41 is operated, the setting key switch 152 is turned off, and when the setting change state ends, medals can be betted. back to a normal situation.

Specifically, in a situation where medals can be bet, the power is turned off, then the setting key switch 152 is turned on, and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is turned off (not operated). Under these circumstances, when the power is turned on, "Yes" is determined in step S2707 of the program start processing (M_PRG_START) in FIG. 354, and the process proceeds to step S2711. Also, since the power failure recovery is not abnormal, the result is "No" in step S2712, and the flow advances to step S2713 to set the initialization range of the RWM 53 at the start of the setting change when the power failure recovery is normal. Furthermore, since it is possible to bet medals, the setting change disabled flag is off, so the result is "Yes" in step S2714, and the process proceeds to initialization processing (M_INI_SET) in step S2731.

Furthermore, since it is not reset time, the result is "No" in step S2741 of the initialization process (M_INI_SET) in FIG. Then, since it is not the time to start setting confirmation, the processing of steps S2752 to S2758 is repeated until "No" is obtained in step S2755 of the setting change confirmation processing (M_RANK_CTL) of FIG. 358 and "Yes" is obtained in step S2756. In other words, the setting change state is entered. Thereafter, when the start switch 41 is operated, "Yes" is determined in step S2756, and when the setting key switch 152 is turned off, "Yes" is determined in step S2760, and the setting change state ends. Then, through the processing of steps S2743 to S2747 in FIG. 357, the process proceeds to the main processing (M_MAIN) (FIG. 41) of step S248, and returns to the state where medals can be betted.

Further, as described above, in the main process (M_MAIN) of FIG. 41, during the period from the start switch acceptance process (step S279 in FIG. 41) to the game end check process (step S301 in FIG. 41) including during rotation of the reel 31, is set to be unchangeable, and during this time, the unchangeable setting flag is turned on.
The power is turned off when the setting change disable flag is on, and then the power is turned on under the condition that the setting key switch 152 is on and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is off. 354, the step S2714 of FIG. 354 results in "No", so the initialization process (M_INI_SET) in step S2731 is not performed, and therefore the setting change state is not entered.

On the other hand, when medals can be betted, the setting change disabled flag is off, so the power is turned off, and then the setting key switch 152 is on and the reset switch is turned on. When the (RWM clear switch) 153 is turned off and the power is turned on, the result is "Yes" in step S2714 of FIG. can be moved to

Also, as described above, if an operation for shifting to the setting change state is performed when the power is restored normally, the flow advances to step S2713 in FIG. ” to “F1FF(H)” and addresses “F292(H)” to “F3FF(H)” outside the use area are set. Further, the initialization range of the use area of the RWM 53 includes credit amount data (_NB_CREDIT) at address "F010(H)" and bet amount data (_NB_PLAY_MEDAL) at address "F043(H)".

Therefore, when medals can be bet, the number of bets is one of "1" to "3", and the number of credits is one of "1" to "50", the power is turned off. After that, when the power is turned on under the condition that the setting key switch 152 is on and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is off, the setting change state is entered. is finished and medals can be betted, the number of bets becomes "0" and the number of credits becomes "0".

Also, in a situation where medals can be bet, the number of bets is any one of "1" to "3", and the number of credits is "0", the power is turned off, and then the setting key switch 152 is turned off. is on and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is off, the power is turned on, and when the setting change state is entered, the setting change state ends and medals can be bet. In such a situation, the number of bets becomes "0" and the number of credits also becomes "0".

Furthermore, when medals can be betted, the bet number is "0", and the credit number is one of "1" to "50", the power is turned off, and then the setting key switch is turned off. 152 is on and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is off, when the power is turned on and the setting change state is entered, the setting change state ends and medals are bet. When the situation becomes possible, the number of bets becomes "0" and the number of credits also becomes "0".

Furthermore, when medals can be bet, the bet amount is "0", and the credit amount is "0", the power is turned off, and then the setting key switch 152 is turned on and reset. When the switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is turned off and the power is turned on and the setting change state is entered, when the setting change state ends and medals can be bet , the number of bets is "0" and the number of credits is also "0".

Also, in a situation where medals can be bet, the power is turned off, then the setting key switch 152 is turned off, and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is turned on (operated). , is turned on. In this case, it becomes possible to execute the initialization processing of the predetermined storage area of the RWM 53, and after executing the initialization processing, it becomes possible to bet medals without shifting to the setting change state.

Specifically, the power is turned off under the condition that medals can be bet, and then the power is turned off under the condition that the setting key switch 152 is turned off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is turned on. When it is turned on, "No" is obtained in step S2707 of the program start processing (M_PRG_START) in FIG. The RWM 53 initialization range is set. Also, since the setting change disabled flag is off because medals can be betted, the result is "Yes" in step S2714, and the process proceeds to the initialization process (M_INI_SET) in step S2731.

Then, in steps S2732 to S2736 of the initialization process (M_INI_SET) in FIG. ~ "F3FF (H)" initialization processing is executed.
Also, since it is the time of resetting, "Yes" is obtained in step S2741 of the initialization processing (M_INI_SET) of FIG. Therefore, it does not move to the setting change state. After that, through the processing of steps S2744 to S2747, the process proceeds to the main processing (M_MAIN) (FIG. 41) of step S248, and returns to the state in which medals can be betted.

Also, the power is turned off when the setting change prohibition flag is on, and then the power is turned on under the condition that the setting key switch 152 is off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on. Then, since it becomes "No" in step S2714 of FIG. 354, the initialization process (M_INI_SET) of step S2731 is not performed, and therefore the initialization process of the RWM 53 is not executed.

On the other hand, in a situation where medals can be betted, the setting change disabled flag is off. Under such a situation, the power is turned off. When the power is turned on under the condition that the RWM clear switch 153 is on, the result of step S2714 in FIG. Processing is performed.

Also, the power is turned off under the condition that medals can be bet, and then the power is turned on under the condition that the setting key switch 152 is off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on. Then, in step S2713 of FIG. 354, as the initialization range of the RWM 53, the used area addresses "F001(H)" to "F1FF(H)" and the addresses outside the used area "F292(H)" to "F3FF (H)" is set. This initialization range is the same as the initialization range that is set when an operation is performed to shift to the setting change state when power is restored normally.

That is, under the condition that the power failure recovery is normal (not the power failure recovery failure), the setting key switch 152 is on and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is off. When the power is turned on and when the power is turned on under the condition that the setting key switch 152 is off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on, the RWM 53 is in the same range. Initialization processing is executed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, even if the setting key switch 152 is not operated, and accordingly, even if the setting key is not in possession, the same range as when the operation for shifting to the setting change state is performed is performed. , RWM 53 can be initialized.
Further, in the present embodiment, the initialization process of the RWM 53 can be executed within the same range as when shifting to the setting change state without shifting to the setting change state.

Therefore, when medals can be bet, the number of bets is one of "1" to "3", and the number of credits is one of "1" to "50", the power is turned off. After that, when the power is turned on under the condition that the setting key switch 152 is off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on, the RWM 53 is initialized. , when it becomes possible to bet medals, the number of bets becomes "0" and the number of credits also becomes "0".

Also, in a situation where medals can be bet, the number of bets is any one of "1" to "3", and the number of credits is "0", the power is turned off, and then the setting key switch 152 is turned off. is off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on, even if the power is turned on, the initialization process of the RWM 53 is executed, and then medals can be betted. When it becomes, the bet amount becomes "0" and the credit amount also becomes "0".

Furthermore, when medals can be betted, the bet number is "0", and the credit number is one of "1" to "50", the power is turned off, and then the setting key switch is turned off. 152 is off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on, even if the power is turned on, the initialization process of the RWM 53 is executed, and then medals can be bet. When , the bet amount becomes "0" and the credit amount also becomes "0".

Furthermore, when medals can be bet, the bet amount is "0", and the credit amount is "0", the power is turned off, and then the setting key switch 152 is turned off and reset. Even when the power is turned on while the switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on, the initialization process of the RWM 53 is executed. becomes "0", and the number of credits also becomes "0".

Also, the power is turned off under the condition that medals can be bet, and then the power is turned on under the condition that the setting key switch 152 is on and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on. Suppose That is, it is assumed that the power is turned on while both the setting key switch 152 and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 are on. In this case, it becomes possible to shift to the setting change state, and after that, the start switch 41 is operated, the setting key switch 152 is turned off, and when the setting change state ends, the state returns to the state in which medals can be bet.

As shown in FIG. 354, in the program start process (M_PRG_START), it is determined at step S2707 whether or not the setting key switch signal is on, and then at step S2710 it is determined whether or not the reset switch signal is on. That is, first, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch signal is on, and then it is determined whether or not the reset switch signal is on.
Therefore, when the power is turned on while both the setting key switch 152 and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 are on, the result is "Yes" in step S2707, and the process does not proceed to step S2710. That is, when the power is turned on while both the setting key switch 152 and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 are on, the setting key switch 152 has priority. Then, when proceeding to the initialization processing (M_INI_SET) in FIG. 357, it becomes "No" in step S2741, and the processing proceeds to setting change confirmation processing (M_RANK_CTL) in step S2742, so that it is possible to shift to the setting change state.

It is also assumed that the setting value display LED 73 initially displays the setting value "M" (for example, "2") when the setting change state is entered. At this time, the value of the set value data (_NB_RANK) at the address "F000 (H)" of the RWM 53 is "M-1", and the value of the set value display data (_NB_RANK_DSP) at "F001 (H)" is "M". is.
After that, it is assumed that the setting change switch 153 is operated and the set value "N" (for example, "3") is displayed on the set value display LED 73 . At this time, the value of the set value data (_NB_RANK) at the address "F000 (H)" of the RWM 53 remains "M-1", and the value of the set value display data (_NB_RANK_DSP) at "F001 (H)" is " N”.

Furthermore, it is assumed that the power is turned off without the start switch 41 being operated while the set value display LED 73 is displaying the set value "N". In this case, since the start switch 41 is not operated, the set value data after change is not saved (stored) in the address "F000 (H)" of the RWM 53, so the value of "F000 (H)" is "M -1" is maintained. Also, since the start switch 41 is not operated and the setting key switch 152 is not turned off, the power is turned off without ending the setting change state (while the setting change state remains).

After that, assume that the power is turned on while the setting key switch 152 is off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is off. In this case, the power is only turned on/off, and the data in the use area and outside the use area of the RWM 53 are maintained without being initialized. return to state. Also, "M-1" is stored in the set value data (_NB_RANK) of the address "F000 (H)" of the RWM 53, and "N" is stored in the set value display data (_NB_RANK_DSP) of "F001 (H)". Therefore, when the setting change state is restored, the set value display LED 73 displays the set value "N".

On the other hand, it is assumed that the set value display LED 73 first displays the set value "M" (for example, "2") when the setting change state is entered. After that, it is assumed that the setting change switch 153 is operated and the set value "N" (for example, "3") is displayed on the set value display LED 73 . Furthermore, it is assumed that the power is turned off without the start switch 41 being operated while the set value display LED 73 is displaying the set value "N". Up to this point, the process is the same as the above case. Next, assume that the power is turned on while the setting key switch 152 is off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on.

In this case, step S2707 of the program start processing (M_PRG_START) in FIG. 354 is "No", and step S2710 is "Yes". the scope is set. Then, in steps S2732 to S2736 of the initialization process (M_INI_SET) in FIG. ~ "F3FF (H)" initialization processing is executed. Therefore, the value of the set value data (_NB_RANK) of the address "F000(H)" of the RWM 53 remains "M-1".
Also, since it is the time of resetting, "Yes" is obtained in step S2741 of the initialization processing (M_INI_SET) of FIG. Therefore, it does not move to the setting change state. After that, through the processing of steps S2744 to S2747, the process proceeds to the main processing (M_MAIN) (FIG. 41) of step S248, and a medal can be betted. At this time, the value of the set value data (_NB_RANK) of the address "F000(H)" of the RWM 53 is maintained as "M-1", so the set value becomes "M".

Also assume that the power is turned off in an unrecoverable error state, and then turned on while the setting key switch 152 is off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on.
In this case, in an unrecoverable error state, interrupt processing (I_INTR) is not executed, and therefore power-off processing (I_POWER_DOWN) is not executed. No data is saved.

Since the setting key switch 152 is turned off and the power is turned on, "No" is obtained in step S2707 of the program start processing (M_PRG_START) in FIG. 354, and the process proceeds to step S2708. Further, since the power-off processing completion flag is not set and the RWM checksum data is not saved, the result is "Yes" in step S2708, and the process advances to unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) in step S2801.
That is, when the power is turned off in an unrecoverable error state and then turned on under the condition that the setting key switch 152 is off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on, , it becomes an unrecoverable error state.

Although the power is turned on under the condition that the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is turned on, the program start processing (M_PRG_START) in FIG. 354 does not proceed to step S2710. ) is never executed, nor is the initialization process (M_INI_SET) executed.
Also, during execution of processing by the second program, interrupt processing (I_INTR) is not executed and power-off processing (I_POWER_DOWN) is not executed. When the power is turned on, the power-off processing completion flag is not set, and the RWM checksum data is not saved. ). That is, an unrecoverable error state occurs.

Also, while the non-recoverable error process 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) is being executed by the program (second program) outside the usage area, the power is turned off. When the power is turned on under the condition that the switch 153 is on, the program start processing (M_PRG_START) in FIG. Therefore, the non-recoverable error process (C_ERROR_STOP) is executed by the program in the used area (first program).

Similarly, during execution of unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) by the program in the usage area (first program), the power is turned off, and then the setting key switch 152 is off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch ) 153 is on, even if the power is turned on, the result in step S2707 of the program start processing (M_PRG_START) in FIG. Therefore, unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) is executed by the program (first program) of the used area.

Also assume that the power is turned off in an unrecoverable error state, and then turned on while the setting key switch 152 is on and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is off.
In this case, the step S2707 of the program start processing (M_PRG_START) in FIG. 354 becomes "Yes", and the process advances to step S2711 to set the initialization range of the RWM 53 at the time of starting the setting change at the time of power failure recovery failure. Also, since it is a power-off/recovery abnormality, "Yes" is determined in step S2712, and the process proceeds to initialization processing (M_INI_SET) in step S2731. Then, in steps S2732 to S2736 of the initialization process (M_INI_SET) in FIG. And the entire range outside the use area (addresses "F210 (H)" to "F3FF (H)" is initialized. Therefore, the set value data (_NB_RANK) of the address "F000 (H)" of the RWM 53 becomes "0", the set value becomes "1".

Also, since it is not reset time, "No" is obtained in step S2741 of the initialization processing (M_INI_SET) in FIG.
In this setting change state, it is assumed that the power is turned off without operating the setting change switch (reset switch/RWM clear switch) 153 . In this case, since interrupt processing (I_INTR) is executed in the setting change state, power-off processing (I_POWER_DOWN) is executed.
After that, it is assumed that the power is turned on while the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on. In this case, since it is not a power-off/recovery abnormality, step S2708 of the program start process (M_PRG_START) in FIG. 354 is "No". Also, since the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on, the result is "Yes" in step S2710. Then, the flow advances to step S2713 to set the initialization range of the RWM 53 at the start of the setting change when the power is restored normally.

Also, since the setting change disable flag is off, "Yes" is determined in step S2714 of the program start processing (M_PRG_START) in FIG. 354, and the process proceeds to initialization processing (M_INI_SET) in step S2731. Further, since it is reset time, "Yes" is obtained in step S2741 of the initialization processing (M_INI_SET) of FIG. 357, and the setting change confirmation processing (M_RANK_CTL) of step S2742 is skipped. Therefore, this time, it does not move to the setting change state. After that, through the processing of steps S2744 to S2747, the process proceeds to the main processing (M_MAIN) (FIG. 41) of step S248, and a medal can be betted. At this time, since the setting value data (_NB_RANK) of the address "F000(H)" of the RWM 53 is "0" as described above, the setting value becomes "1".

Also, in this embodiment, power-off processing (I_POWER_DOWN) is executed in step S2771 of the interrupt processing (I_INTR) in FIG. 359 . Furthermore, in step S2776 of the power-off process (I_POWER_DOWN) in FIG. 360, the RWM checksum set process (S_SUM_SET) is executed. Then, in the RWM checksum set processing (S_SUM_SET) of FIG. 361, the processing of steps S2785 to S2794 is executed to calculate the RWM checksum data (complement data), and the calculated RWM checksum data is transferred to the It is stored in the address "F2A0(H)" of the RWM 53 by processing.

As described above, this RWM checksum data consists of the data of addresses "F000(H)" to "F1FF(H)" in the use area of the RWM 53 and the data of addresses "F210(H)" to "F3FF(H)" outside the use area of the RWM 53. H)” (excluding “F2A0(H)”) is a value that becomes “0” when added to the added value of the data.

In addition, in this embodiment, even if a recoverable error occurs and the recoverable error state (the error detection flag is turned on and the progress of the game is stopped), the interrupt processing (I_INTR ) can be executed. Therefore, even if an event occurs in which the supply of power is interrupted (the power is turned off) in a recoverable error state, power-off processing (I_POWER_DOWN) can be executed.
On the other hand, an unrecoverable error occurs, an unrecoverable error state (unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) in FIG. 356 or unrecoverable error processing 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) in FIG. 363 is executed, and the progress of the game stops. In this state, interrupt processing (I_INTR) is prohibited as described above. Therefore, if an event occurs in which the power supply is interrupted (the power is turned off) in an unrecoverable error state, power-off processing (I_POWER_DOWN) is not executed.

In this way, when the power is turned off in an unrecoverable error state, by not executing the power-off processing (I_POWER_DOWN), the program start processing (I_POWER_DOWN) in FIG. M_PRG_START), it can be determined in step S2708 that there is an abnormality in recovery from power failure, and the process proceeds to unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) in step S2801.
That is, when an unrecoverable error state occurs, the unrecoverable error state occurs again simply by turning on/off the power supply.
When an unrecoverable error state occurs, the power must be turned off once and an operation (turning on the power with the setting key switch 152 turned on) to shift to the setting change state must be performed. It is possible to make it impossible to return to a state in which medals can be betted (a state in which the game can be played).

Further, when an unrecoverable error state occurs, even if the power is turned off with the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 turned on, the program start processing (M_PRG_START) in FIG. In step S2708, it is determined that there is a power failure recovery error, and the process proceeds to the unrecoverable error process (C_ERROR_STOP) in step S2801, so the main process (M_MAIN) (Fig. 41) is not performed. It cannot be returned to (a state in which the game can be progressed).

Also, even if a recoverable error occurs and a recoverable error state (the error detection flag is turned on and the progress of the game has stopped), interrupt processing (I_INTR) can be executed, but recovery is not possible. When a possible error occurs and it becomes an unrecoverable error state (unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) in FIG. 356 or unrecoverable error processing 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) in FIG. 363 is executed and the progress of the game is stopped) , interrupt processing (I_INTR) is disabled.
Furthermore, LED display control (I_LED_OUT) for controlling lighting of digits 1 to 5 (credit number display LED 76, acquired number display LED 78, set value display LED 73) and lighting of digits 6 to 9 (management information display LED 74) are controlled. The ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY) is executed in the interrupt process (I_INTR).

Therefore, in a recoverable error state, interrupt processing (I_INTR) can be executed, so LED display control (I_LED_OUT) and ratio display preparation processing (S_DSP_READY) can also be executed. Therefore, even in the recoverable error state, error information is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78 (digits 3 and 4) by LED display control (I_LED_OUT), and management information is displayed by ratio display preparation processing (S_DSP_READY). The LED 74 (digits 6 to 9) can sequentially display information types and various ratios related to game results.

On the other hand, in an unrecoverable error state, interrupt processing (I_INTR) is prohibited, so neither LED display control (I_LED_OUT) nor ratio display preparation processing (S_DSP_READY) is executed.
Therefore, during the unrecoverable error state, the above-described unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) in FIG. 356 or unrecoverable error processing 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) in FIG. Display error information.

Also, in step S1494 of the unrecoverable error process (C_ERROR_STOP) in FIG. 356 or the unrecoverable error process 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) in FIG. .
As a result, during an unrecoverable error state, outputs from output port 6 (output port for digits 6 to 9 signals) and output port 7 (output port for segment signals for digits 6 to 9) are "00000000 (B)". , all digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 remain extinguished until the unrecoverable error state is canceled and the interrupt process (I_INTR) is restarted.
The fact that digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 all remain unlit is a mode specific to the unrecoverable error state. You can let us know what happened.

Although the forty-first embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the contents described above, and various modifications such as those described below are possible.
(1) In the above embodiment, during an unrecoverable error state, the outputs of output port 6 (digit 6-9 signal output port) and output port 7 (segment signal output port for digits 6-9) are turned off. By setting it to (“00000000(B)”), all the digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 remain off.
However, the display mode of the digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 in the unrecoverable error state is not limited to this.

For example, digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 may each display "8" during an unrecoverable error state. That is, the management information display LED 74 may display "8888".
FIG. 370 is a flowchart showing a modified example of unrecoverable error processing 2 (S_ERROR_STOP), and corresponds to FIG.
In FIG. 370, step numbers different from those in FIG. 363 are underlined, and steps identical to those in FIG. 363 are assigned the same step numbers.
Differences from FIG. 363 will be mainly described below.

In the non-recoverable error process 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) shown in FIG. 370, step S1505 is followed by step S1506. Output.
Specifically, output port 6 outputs "00000001 (B)" (data in which only digit 6 signal is "1"), and output port 7 outputs "01111111 (B)" (segment 2A to 2G signals is "1").

Next, proceeding to step S1507, the main control board 50 executes standby (wait) processing for preventing flickering of the LED. How long to wait depends on the performance of the LED, but can be set to about "0.1 ms", for example. For example, a predetermined value (for example, "255") is stored in the B register, and this value is subtracted by the internal system clock. The process advances to step S1508.

In step S1508, the main control board 50 turns off the outputs of the output ports 6 and 7 (“00000000 (B)”). This process is for preventing afterimages.
Next, proceeding to step S1509, the main control board 50 executes standby (wait) processing for preventing flickering of the LED. This process is to ensure that the LEDs are extinguished after the outputs of the output ports 6 and 7 are turned off.

Proceeding to the next step S1510, the main control board 50 outputs data for displaying "8" in the digit 7 from the output ports 6 and 7.
Specifically, output port 6 outputs "00000010 (B)" (data in which only digit 7 signal is "1"), and output port 7 outputs "01111111 (B)" (segment 2A to 2G signals is "1").
Steps S1511 to S1513 are the same as steps S1507 to S1509.

Proceeding to step S1514, the main control board 50 outputs data for displaying "8" as the digit 8 from the output ports 6 and 7. FIG.
Specifically, output port 6 outputs "00000100 (B)" (data in which only digit 8 signal is "1"), and output port 7 outputs "01111111 (B)" (segment 2A to 2G signals is "1").
Steps S1515-S1517 are the same as steps S1507-S1509.

Proceeding to step S1518, the main control board 50 outputs data for displaying "8" in the digit 9 from the output ports 6 and 7. FIG.
Specifically, output port 6 outputs "00001000 (B)" (data in which only digit 9 signal is "1"), and output port 7 outputs "01111111 (B)" (segment 2A to 2G signals is "1").
Steps S1519 to S1521 are the same as steps S1507 to S1509. After executing the process of step S1521, the process returns to step S1497.

In this manner, digits 6 through 9 of the management information display LED 74 may each display "8" during an unrecoverable error state.
The display of all digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 becomes "8", which is peculiar to an unrecoverable error state. It is possible to notify that an error state has occurred.

The display of the management information display LED 74 may be "----" instead of "8888". That is, only segments G of digits 6 to 9 may be illuminated.
Also, the display of the management information display LED 74 may be "...". That is, only segments P of digits 6 to 9 may be illuminated.
Furthermore, the display of the management information display LED 74 may be set to "8.8.8.8.". That is, as shown in FIG. 30(a) or (c), all segments of digits 6 to 9 (segments A to G and P) may be illuminated.

(2) In the above embodiment, during an unrecoverable error state, the outputs of output port 6 (digit 6-9 signal output port) and output port 7 (segment signal output port for digits 6-9) are turned off. By setting it to (“00000000(B)”), all the digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 remain off.
However, in step S1494 of unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) in FIG. 356 or unrecoverable error processing 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) in FIG. may be maintained instead of In this case, the display of digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 is as follows.

As described above, the digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 are dynamically lit with four interrupts as one cycle. Therefore, for example, when "7P.65" is displayed in digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74, digit 9 "5", digit 8 "6", digit 7 "P." The "7" of the digit 6 are illuminated sequentially. Assume, for example, that digits 6 to 8 of the management information display LED 74 are extinguished and digit 9 is illuminated with "5", and an unrecoverable error state occurs. In this case, the interrupt processing (I_INTR) stops while the signal (digit signal and segment signal) that causes digits 6 to 8 to turn off and digit 9 to light up and display "5" is output from output ports 6 and 7. do.

Specifically, output port 6 outputs "00001000 (B)" (digit 9 signal is "1" and others are "0"), and output port 7 outputs "01101101 (B)" (segment 2G, 2F, 2D, 2C, and 2A signals are "1" and the others are "0" data), interrupt processing (I_INTR) is stopped, and then output from output ports 6 and 7 The signal (data) to be rewritten is not performed.
Therefore, the output of the signals (digit signal and segment signal) from the output ports 6 and 7 is maintained until the unrecoverable error state is released and the interrupt process (I_INTR) is restarted. remains unlit, and digit 9 remains illuminated with "5".

Similarly, for example, assume that digit 6 of the management information display LED 74 is illuminated with "7" and digits 7 to 9 are extinguished, and an unrecoverable error state occurs.
In this case, until the unrecoverable error state is cleared and the interrupt processing (I_INTR) is restarted, the signal (digit signal and segment signal) that causes digit 6 to display "7" and digits 7 to 9 to go out. Since the state of being output from the output ports 6 and 7 continues, the digit 6 is illuminated with "7" and the digits 7 to 9 remain extinguished.

Further, for example, assume that the non-recoverable error process 2 is executed by the second program under the condition that the digit 6 of the management information display LED 74 is lit and the digits 7 to 9 are not lit. Assume that the outputs of the output ports 6 and 7 are maintained without being turned off in the unrecoverable error process 2 by the second program. In this case, as described above, the state in which the signal (digit signal and segment signal) causing the digit 6 to light up and the digits 7 to 9 to go out (the digit signal and the segment signal) continues to be output from the output ports 6 and 7. Digit 6 is illuminated with "7", and digits 7-9 remain unlit.

When the power is turned off in this state, the digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 are extinguished. After that, when the power is turned on with the setting key switch 152 turned off, "Yes" is given in step S2708 of the program start processing (M_PRG_START) in FIG. Processing is performed. In this case, the data in the RWM 53 are maintained without being initialized, since the process does not proceed to the initialization process of step S2731. For this reason, data related to lighting control of the management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor) in the RWM 53 (for example, ratio display number (_SN_DSP_NO) of address “F292 (H)” to LED display counter 2 (_SC_LED_DSP2) of “F297 (H)” etc.) are also maintained without being initialized.

Here, it is assumed that interrupt processing (I_INTR) is made executable without being prohibited in the unrecoverable error processing by the first program. In this case, lighting control of the management information display LED 74 is performed by the ratio display preparation processing (S_DSP_READY) in the interrupt processing (I_INTR). The ratio information immediately before the possible error process 2 is executed, that is, "7P.65" (instruction-containing accessory ratio, ratio display number "1") is displayed.

Further, it is assumed that "7P.65" was displayed, for example, for "2000 ms" in digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 immediately before the unrecoverable error process 2 by the second program was executed. In this case, when the ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY) is resumed in the non-recoverable error process by the first program, the digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 show "7P.65" and "4791.84ms". - "2000ms" = displayed for "2791.84ms". After that, the display items after the ratio display number "2" are sequentially displayed on the management information display LED 74 by the ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY).

In this way, when the ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY) is resumed in the unrecoverable error process by the first program, the display continues from the ratio information immediately before the unrecoverable error process 2 by the second program is executed. is started (restarted).
On the other hand, if the interrupt processing (I_INTR) is prohibited in the non-recoverable error processing by the first program, the ratio display preparation processing (S_DSP_READY) in the interrupt processing (I_INTR) is not executed either. to 9 remain unlit.

In addition, as described above, regarding the instructed accessory ratio, the continuous accessory ratio (cumulative), the accessory ratio (cumulative), and the accessory state ratio, when the total number of games played is less than “175000”, that Blinks the identification segment. With respect to the continuous role ratio (6000 times) and the role ratio (6000 times), when the total number of games played is less than "6000", the identification seg is blinked. In addition, when the displayed value of the instructed role product ratio, the role product ratio (accumulated), and the role product ratio (6000 times) is "70" or more, the ratio segment is displayed blinking. When the displayed value of the continuous role product ratio (accumulated) and the continuous role product ratio (6000 times) is "60" or more, the ratio segment is displayed blinking. When the displayed value of the state ratio of the role product is "50" or more, the ratio seg blinks. In addition, when the blinking display is performed, lighting and extinguishing are repeated every about 0.3 seconds.

Therefore, digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 may all go out. For example, under the condition that digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 are all extinguished, that is, when the output from the output ports 6 and 7 is "00000000 (B)" (off), recovery is impossible. Assume that an error has occurred.
In this case, the outputs from the output ports 6 and 7 are maintained as "00000000 (B)" (off) until the unrecoverable error state is released and the interrupt processing (I_INTR) is restarted. All digits 6 to 9 of the display LED 74 remain off.

The display mode of the digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 as described above is a display mode peculiar to the non-recoverable error state. It is possible to notify that a possible error state has occurred.

(3) In the above embodiment, the setting key switch 152 is on and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is off on condition that the power failure recovery is normal (not the power failure recovery failure). When the power is turned on (to shift to the setting change state), the setting key switch 152 is off, and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on. The initialization process of the RWM 53 was executed in the same range as when it was turned on.

However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the power is turned on (when transitioning to the setting change state) under the condition that the setting key switch 152 is on and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is off. , the setting key switch 152 is off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on.
For example, when the setting key switch 152 is off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on, when the power is turned on, the RWM 53 is initialized in the same range as when the advantageous section ends. conversion processing may be performed.
Specifically, a predetermined range (for example, addresses “F061(H)” to “F068(H)” in FIG. 346) of the use area of the RWM 53 storing data relating to the advantageous section is initialized. Other ranges (for example, credit amount data (_NB_CREDIT) at address "F010(H)" in FIG. 346, bet amount data (_NB_PLAY_MEDAL) at "F043(H)", etc.) can be maintained without being initialized. .
In any case, the initialization range when the power is turned on with the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 turned on is set to be narrower than the initialization range when shifting to the setting change state. is preferred.

(4) In the above embodiment, it is determined in step S458 of the interrupt processing (I_INTR) in FIG. 359 whether or not the set value is within the normal range. Go to 2 (S_ERROR_STOP). However, it is not limited to this.
For example, it may be determined whether or not the set value is within the normal range at the timing immediately after it is determined that the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) in the main process (M_MAIN).
Specifically, for example, when "Yes" is determined in step S278 of the main process (M_MAIN) of FIG. If so, the process proceeds to step S279 in FIG. 41, and if it is determined to be out of the normal range, the process proceeds to unrecoverable error process 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) in FIG.

(5) In the above embodiment, when the power is turned off while staying in the setting change state and then turned on while the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is turned on, the setting change state is entered. The medal was moved to a situation where it was possible to bet without letting
However, this is not the only option. When this occurs, an unrecoverable error state may occur.

Specifically, for example, a setting change state flag is provided, and when the setting change state is entered, the setting change state flag is set in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53, and when the termination condition of the setting change state is satisfied, Clear the configuration change status flag.
Then, when the power is turned off in the setting change state and then turned on while the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is turned on, in step S2714 of the program start processing (M_PRG_START) in FIG. It is determined whether or not the setting change status flag is on. When it is determined that the setting change status flag is ON, the process advances to unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) in step S2801 to set the unrecoverable error status.
As a result, it is possible to prevent the setting value from being set even though the operation for finalizing the setting value (for example, turning on the start switch 41) has not been performed.

(6) In the above embodiment, any value from "0(D)" to "5(D)" is stored at the address "F000(H)" of the RWM 53 as the set value data (_NB_RANK). That is, the set value data is managed by "0(D)" to "5(D)".
However, the address "F000 (H)" of the RWM 53 may store any value from "1 (D)" to "6 (D)" as the set value data (_NB_RANK). good. That is, the set value data may be managed as "1(D) to "6(D)".

Then, when shifting to the setting change state, the setting value data (_NB_RANK) of the address "F000 (H)" of the RWM 53 is cleared (to "0"), and the setting value is fixed (for example, by pressing the start switch 41). turn on) is performed, any value from "1 (D)" to "6 (D)" is stored as the set value data (_NB_RANK) at the address "F000 (H)" of the RWM 53. good too.
In this case, when the power is turned off in the setting change state and then turned on while the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is turned on, in step S458 in FIG. It may be determined that a set value error has occurred), proceed to unrecoverable error processing 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) in step S2811, and enter an unrecoverable error state.

(7) In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 351, digit signals for digits 1 to 5 (digit 1 to 5 signals) are output from the output port 3, and segment signals for digits 1 to 5 (segments 1A to 5) are output from the output port 3. 1P signal) is output from output port 4, digit signals for digits 6 to 9 (digit 6 to 9 signals) are output from output port 6, and segment signals for digits 6 to 9 (segment 2A to 2P signals) are output from output port 6. Output from output port 7.
When lighting digits 1 to 5, the digit signal was output from the output port 3 and the segment 1 signal was output from the output port 4. FIG. When the digits 6 to 9 are lit, the digit signal is output from the output port 6 and the segment 2 signal is output from the output port 7 . That is, the output ports to be used are divided into digits 1 to 5 that control lighting by the program in the usage area (first program) and digits 6 to 9 that control lighting by the program outside the usage area (second program). Ta.

However, not limited to this, for example, digits 1 to 5 that control lighting by a program in the usage area (first program) and digits 6 to 9 that control lighting by a program outside the usage area (second program). , the output port may be shared.
371 is a diagram showing a modification of the output port in the forty-first embodiment. FIG.
As shown in FIG. 371, segment signals for digits 1 to 9 (segment A to P signals) may be output from output port 3. FIG. Digit signals for digits 1 to 5 (digits 1 to 5 signals) are output from output port 2, and digit signals for digits 6 to 9 (digits 6 to 9 signals) are output from output port 4. can do.
In this case, during an unrecoverable error state, by turning off the output of output port 4 (the output port for digits 6 to 9 signals) ("00000000 (B)"), digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 can be left off.

(8) In the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. An LED display counter 2 (_SC_LED_DSP2) is provided for outputting digit 6 to digit 9 signals. That is, an LED display counter for lighting digits 1 to 5 and an LED display counter for lighting digits 6 to 9 are provided independently. However, it is not limited to this.

FIG. 372 is a diagram showing a modified example of the LED display counter in the 41st embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 372, an LED display counter 1 (_CT_LED_DSP1) with 5 interrupts per cycle is provided in the RWM 53 usage area. , and digit 6 to digit 9 signals may be output. That is, the LED display counter for lighting the digits 1 to 5 and the LED display counter for lighting the digits 6 to 9 may be used in common.

In this case, in step S1471 of the ratio display process (S_LED_OUT) in FIG. 368, the value of the LED display counter 1 (_CT_LED_DSP1) is obtained and stored in the D register.
In the next step S1472, it is determined whether or not there is a ratio display request. Specifically, the value of the LED display counter 1 stored in the D register and "11110000 (B)" are ANDed, and when the AND operation result is "0", it is determined that there is a ratio display request, and step S1475. , and when the AND operation result is not "0", it is determined that there is no ratio display request, and the processing according to this flowchart is terminated.

Here, when the value of the LED display counter 1 is "00001000 (B)", "00000100 (B)", "00000010 (B)", or "00000001 (B)", the AND operation result is "0". Therefore, it is determined that there is a ratio display request, and the process proceeds to step S1475.
On the other hand, when the value of the LED display counter 1 is "00010000 (B)", the result of the AND operation does not become "0". In this case, since the outputs of the output ports 6 and 7 are maintained, the display mode of the digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 is the same as the display mode during the previous interrupt processing. For example, when the digit 6 was lit and displayed as "7" during the previous interrupt processing, the digit 6 is lit and displayed as "7" also during the current interrupt processing.

If it is determined in step S1472 that there is no ratio display request, the outputs of output port 6 (output port for digits 6 to 9 signals) and output port 7 (output port for segment signals for digits 6 to 9) are turned off. ("00000000(B)"), and all the digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 may be extinguished.

(9) For example, under the condition that the setting key switch 152 is on and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is off under the condition that the power failure recovery is normal (not the power failure recovery failure). Even if the initialization range of the RWM 53 is changed when the power is turned on and when the power is turned on while both the setting key switch 152 and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 are on. good.
Specifically, when the power is turned on under the condition that the setting key switch 152 is on and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is off, the initialization range of the RWM 53 is, for example, the use area. addresses "F001(H)" to "F1FF(H)" of the area and addresses "F292(H)" to "F3FF(H)" outside the use area are set. In this case, the set value data (_NB_RANK) of the address "F000 (H)" of the RWM 53 and the addresses "F210 (H)" to "F291 (H)" outside the use area are not initialized (cleared). maintain.

On the other hand, when the power is turned on while both the setting key switch 152 and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 are on, the initialization range of the RWM 53 is, for example, the address "F000(H)". Including the set value data (_NB_RANK), the entire range of the used area (addresses "F000 (H)" to "F1FF (H)"), and the addresses outside the used area "F292 (H)" to "F3FF (H) ” is set. In this case, the addresses "F210(H)" to "F291(H)" outside the use area are maintained without being initialized (cleared). is initialized (cleared). In this case, the set value data (_NB_RANK) is "0", so the set value is "1". As a result, the set value can be changed to "1" simply by shifting to the setting change state.

Also, when the power is turned on under the condition that the setting key switch 152 is on and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is off, the setting key switch 152 and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 Even when the power is turned on under the condition that both are on, both can be allowed to transition to the setting change state.

(10) In the above embodiment, as the initialization range of the RWM 53 for normal recovery from power failure, the addresses "F001 (H)" to "F1FF (H)" in the use area of the RWM 53 and the address "F292" outside the use area (H)” to “F3FF (H)” are set.
However, the initialization range of the RWM 53 is not limited to the range described above, and can be appropriately set according to the specifications of the slot machine 10 .

For example, the initialization range of the RWM 53 can be varied according to the contents of the action status flag (_FL_ACTION) at the address "F030(H)" of the RWM 53 in FIG.
Specifically, for example, when the D2 bit of the operation status flag (_FL_ACTION) of "F030 (H)" is "1" and 1BB is in operation, the address "F030 (H )” action status flag (_FL_ACTION) can be removed.
On the other hand, when the D2 bit of the operation status flag (_FL_ACTION) of "F030(H)" is "0" and 1BB is not in operation, the address "F030(H)" operation A status flag (_FL_ACTION) can be included.

(11) In the above embodiment, interrupt processing is prohibited in step S1490 of the unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) in FIG. However, the present invention is not limited to this and, for example, interrupt processing may not be prohibited in unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP).
Specifically, when "Yes" is determined in step S2708 or S2715 of the program start processing (M_PRG_START) in FIG. good.

359 can be executed even while the unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) is being executed, and LED display control (I_LED_OUT) in step S2821 and ratio display preparation (S_DSP_READY) in step S2221 are executed. It may be possible.
As a result, even during execution of unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP), lighting of digits 1 to 5 (credit number display LED 76, acquired number display LED 78, set value display LED 73) and digits 6 to 9 (management information display LED 74) Control may be executable.

(12) In the above embodiment, the operation for shifting to the setting change state (turning on the power while the setting key switch 152 is turned on) is performed, and when it is determined that the power is restored normally, the address of the RWM 53 is changed. "F292(H)" (ratio display number) is initialized. For this reason, for example, the power is turned off when the role product ratio (cumulative) data (ratio display number "5") is displayed on the management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor), and then the setting change state is entered. When it is determined that the power is restored normally, the management information display LED 74 displays from the instruction-inclusive accessory ratio data (ratio display number “1”), which is the first display item of various ratio information. is started.

However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, if an operation for shifting to the setting change state (turning on the power while the setting key switch 152 is turned on) is performed and it is determined that the power failure recovery is normal, the management information The display LED 74 first displays specific information different from the ratio information such as "8888" or "8.8.8.8." The display may start from the ratio data (ratio display number “1”).
As a result, it is possible to check whether or not all the segments of digits 6 to 9 are lit, so that it is possible to check whether there is a failure in the segments or whether there is a disconnection in the signal lines of the segments.
Similarly, when an operation is performed to shift to the setting change state and it is determined that there is a power failure recovery error, the management information display LED 74 first displays a ratio such as "8888" or "8.8.8.8." Specific information different from the information may be displayed, and then the display may be started from the instructed accessory ratio data (ratio display number “1”), which is the first display item of the various ratio information.

(13) For example, when the power is turned on with the setting key switch 152 turned off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 also turned off, the setting key switch 152 is turned on and the reset switch 153 is turned off. When the power is turned on with the setting key switch 152 turned off and the reset switch 153 turned on, the setting key switch 152 is turned on and the reset switch 153 is also turned on. In any case when the power is turned on in the state where the You can display specific information that is different from

After that, the digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor) show the on/off status of various switches when the power is turned on, and whether it was determined that the power failure recovery was normal or that the power failure recovery was abnormal. Display information according to As a result, it is possible to check whether or not all the segments of digits 6 to 9 are lit when the power is turned on, so it is possible to check whether there is a failure in the segment or whether there is a disconnection in the signal line of the segment. be able to.

When the power is turned on with the setting key switch 152 turned on and the reset switch 153 turned off, the power is turned on with the setting key switch 152 turned off and the reset switch 153 turned on. When the power is turned on while the setting key switch 152 is turned on and the reset switch 153 is also turned on, "8888" or "8. 8, 8, 8.”, etc., when the power is turned on with the setting key switch 152 turned off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 turned off. may not display the above specific information on the management information display LED 74 .

(14) In the above embodiment, the operation for shifting to the setting change state (turning on the power while the setting key switch 152 is turned on) is performed, and when it is determined that the power failure recovery is normal, the RWM 53 Initialize the data related to the lighting control of the management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor) (for example, ratio display number (_SN_DSP_NO) of address "F292 (H)" to LED display counter 2 (_SC_LED_DSP2) of "F297 (H)", etc.) did.
However, not limited to this, when an operation for shifting to the setting change state is performed and it is determined that the power failure recovery is normal, data (for example, address " F292 (H)" ratio display number (_SN_DSP_NO) to "F297 (H)" LED display counter 2 (_SC_LED_DSP2), etc.) may be maintained without being initialized.

For example, when the management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor) displays the role ratio (cumulative) data (ratio display number “5”), the power is turned off, and then the operation for shifting to the setting change state. is performed, and it is determined that the recovery from power failure is normal. In this case, when the interrupt process (I_INTR) is activated and the ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY) is restarted, the management information display LED 74 first displays the ratio information immediately before turning off the power, that is, the character ratio ( Cumulative) data is displayed.

It is also assumed that the role ratio (cumulative) data (ratio display number “5”) was displayed on the management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor) immediately before the power was turned off, for example, for “1000 ms”. In this case, when the interrupt processing (I_INTR) is activated and the ratio display preparation processing (S_DSP_READY) is restarted, the management information display LED 74 displays the role product ratio (cumulative) data as "4791.84 ms" - "1000 ms". ”=“3791.84 ms”. After that, the display items after the ratio display number "6" are sequentially displayed on the management information display LED 74 by the ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY).
In this way, when the operation for shifting to the setting change state is performed and it is determined that the recovery from power failure is normal and the ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY) is resumed, the ratio information immediately before the power is turned off Display starts (resumes) from the continuation.

(15) In the above embodiment, when the power is turned on while the setting key switch 152 is turned off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is turned on, and it is determined that the recovery from power failure is normal, the RWM 53 Data related to the lighting control of the information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor) (for example, ratio display number (_SN_DSP_NO) at address "F292 (H)" to LED display counter 2 (_SC_LED_DSP2) at address "F297 (H)") has been initialized. .
However, not limited to this, when the power is turned on with the setting key switch 152 turned off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 turned on and it is determined that the power failure recovery is normal, the management information in the RWM 53 Data related to the lighting control of the display LED 74 (role ratio monitor) (for example, the ratio display number (_SN_DSP_NO) of the address "F292 (H)" to the LED display counter 2 (_SC_LED_DSP2) of "F297 (H)") is not initialized may be maintained at

For example, when the continuous role ratio (6000 games) data (ratio display number “2”) is displayed on the management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor), the power is turned off, and then the setting key switch 152 is turned off. , and the power is turned on with the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 turned on, and it is determined that the power failure recovery is normal. In this case, when the interrupt process (I_INTR) is activated and the ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY) is restarted, the management information display LED 74 first displays the ratio information immediately before the power is turned off, that is, the continuous character ratio (6000 games) Data is displayed.

Also, it is assumed that the continuous role ratio (6000 games) data (ratio display number "2") is displayed on the management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor) immediately before the power is turned off, for example, for "3000 ms". . In this case, when the interrupt process (I_INTR) is activated and the ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY) is restarted, the management information display LED 74 displays the continuous role ratio (6000 games) data as "4791.84 ms"- “3000ms”=“1791.84ms” is displayed. After that, the display items after the ratio display number "3" are sequentially displayed on the management information display LED 74 by the ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY).
In this way, the power is turned on while the setting key switch 152 is turned off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is turned on. When the power is turned off, the display starts (resumes) from the continuation of the ratio information just before the power was turned off.

(16) In the above embodiment, settings cannot be changed during the start switch acceptance process (step S279 in FIG. 41) to the game end check process (step S301 in FIG. 41) (during play), including when the reels 31 are rotating. , and during this time, turned on the unchangeable flag.
However, the configuration is not limited to this, and the setting change may be allowed at all times without providing a period during which the setting cannot be changed and therefore without setting the setting change disabled flag.

(17) In the above embodiment, it is determined in step S2770 of the interrupt processing (I_INTR) in FIG. 359 whether or not a power failure has occurred. I_POWER_DOWN), and when it is determined that the power failure has not occurred, the power failure processing (I_POWER_DOWN) in step S2771 is skipped and the process proceeds to step S454.
However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the occurrence of power shutdown is detected without executing power shutdown processing (I_POWER_DOWN) during interrupt processing (I_INTR) in FIG. 359, interrupt processing (I_INTR) in FIG. A separate interrupt process may be executed, and the power-off process (I_POWER_DOWN) may be executed in this separate interrupt process.
In this case, when the occurrence of power failure is detected during the execution of interrupt processing (I_INTR) in FIG. After the end of the I_POWER_DOWN, another interrupt process is started, and the power-off process (I_POWER_DOWN) is executed in this another interrupt process.

(18) In the above embodiment, the slot machine 10 is used as an example of a gaming machine, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as game media, parrots that use game balls, sealed game machines that use electronic information (electronic medals) instead of physical medals (medals as tangible objects) (medal-less game machines), and casino machines. The present invention can be applied.
(19) The 1st to 41st embodiments and the various modifications shown in the 1st to 41st embodiments are not limited to being implemented alone, but can be implemented in combination as appropriate.

<42nd embodiment>
FIG. 373 is a diagram showing the built-in memory of the main CPU 55 in the 42nd embodiment. In the figure, (A) is a diagram showing an overview of the built-in memory, and (B) is a diagram showing a built-in register area among storage areas in the built-in memory. FIG. 373 shows only a portion of the built-in memory related to this embodiment, and does not show all of the built-in memory.
The built-in memory is also shown in FIG. 165 (24th embodiment) and FIG. 345 (41st embodiment). Here, in the forty-second embodiment, "within the usage area" in FIGS. 164 and 345 is referred to as "first", and "outside the usage area" is referred to as "second". Also, the "control area" in FIGS. 164 and 345 is referred to as a "program area". As described above, the 42nd embodiment is different from the 24th embodiment and the 41st embodiment in terms of names, but the substantial functions are not different.

In the area of the ROM 54, the first program area and the first data area correspond to the use area (area for storing data related to the progress of the game), and the second program area and the second data area correspond to the use area. It corresponds to an outside area (an area for storing data unrelated to the progress of the game, particularly an area for storing data relating to the display of the role ratio monitor).

As in FIG. 165, the ROM 54 has a range of addresses "0000h" to "2FFFh" and a storage area of "12K" bytes. In this storage area, the first program area is set to "4.5K" bytes, and the first data area is set to "3.0K" bytes.
Furthermore, in the RWM 53, the first work area and the first stack area are used (updated, referenced) during the execution of the first program (program related to the progress of the game) stored in the first program area. storage area). Similarly, the second work area and the second stack area are used during the execution of the second program (program unrelated to the progress of the game, for example, a program related to the display of the role ratio monitor) stored in the second program area. It is a storage area to be updated (updated, referenced).
The first program stored in the first program area cannot update the data in the second work area and the second stack area, but can refer to the data in the second work area and the second stack area. .
Similarly, the second program stored in the second program area cannot update the data in the first work area and the first stack area, but can refer to the data in the first work area and the first stack area. be.

The example of FIG. 345 (forty-first embodiment) has one built-in register area. In the example of FIG. 164 (24th embodiment), the built-in register area is provided with general-purpose registers.
On the other hand, in the 42nd embodiment, the built-in register area (synonymous with the built-in register area) includes register bank 0 and register bank 1 . Each register bank includes main registers (front registers) and sub-registers (back registers). The main register includes general-purpose registers shown in FIG. 164 (24th embodiment).
In the following description, sub-registers will be omitted, and the term "register" will refer to the main register.

Each register of register bank 0 is a register used when executing the program stored in the first program area. Similarly, each register in register bank 1 is a register used when executing the program stored in the second program area. For example, A registers, F registers, etc. are provided in both register bank 0 and register bank 1, respectively. In other words, the A register of register bank 0 and the A register of register bank 1 are different registers.

The A register is an accumulator.
The F register is a flag register, the structure of which will be described later.
The B, C, D, E, H, and L registers are general purpose registers.
The IX and IY registers are index registers and are used, for example, when specifying addresses.
The SP register is the stack pointer register. The SP register is a register that specifies to which address data should be saved to the stack area, and to specify which address data should be returned to when returning data from the stack area.
Specifically, the SP register of register bank 0 designates the address of the first stack area (range of "F1D0h" to "F1FFh"). Similarly, the SP register of register bank 1 specifies the address of the second stack area (range of "F3E8h" to "F3FFh").

In addition to register banks 0 and 1, there are I, R, PC and IFF registers.
The I register is an interrupt register and is used when executing interrupt processing.
The R register is a refresh register and used for refreshing the RWM 53 .
The PC register is a program counter and is a register that holds the currently executing address in memory.

The IFF register is an interrupt enable register. The IFF register consists of an IFF1 register for determining whether to enable or disable a maskable interrupt (INT), and an IFF2 register for restoring IFF1 after processing a non-maskable interrupt (NMI). The IFF2 register is used not only for returning from non-maskable interrupt processing, but also for returning by a RETEX instruction (described later) after execution of a CALLEX instruction (described later).
When a nonmarkable interrupt is accepted or the CALLEX instruction is executed, the IFF1 register is cleared (set to a value (“0”) that disables interrupt processing), maskable interrupts are disabled, and the IFF2 register is in the current state (nonmarkable (whether the interrupt was disabled or enabled when the interrupt was accepted or when the CALLEX instruction was executed). Also, by executing the RET instruction or RETEX instruction, the IFF2 register value is moved to the IFF1 register, and the maskable interrupt acceptance state is restored to the previous state.

FIG. 374 shows a detailed configuration of an F register. The F register consists of 1 byte (8 bits, indicated by "D0" to "D7" in the figure). In the twenty-fourth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 166B, the carry flag is assigned to the D0 bit, the zero flag is assigned to the D7 bit, and the D1 to D6 bits are unused.
On the other hand, the structure of the F register of the 42nd embodiment is as follows.
(1) D0 bit: carry flag (C)
The carry flag is a flag that becomes "1" if a carry or a carry down occurs as a result of an operation, and becomes "0" if a carry or a carry down does not occur.
(2) D1 bit: subtraction flag (N)
A subtraction flag is also called a subtraction flag. This flag becomes "1" if the instruction executed immediately before is a subtraction instruction, and becomes "0" if it is not a subtraction instruction.

(3) D2 bit: parity/overflow flag (P/V)
The parity/overflow flag is a flag that becomes "1" if the number of "1" bits (parity) in the operation result is even, and becomes "0" if it is odd. It is also a flag that becomes "1" when an overflow occurs as a result of the operation, and becomes "0" when no overflow occurs.
(4) D3 bit: register bank monitor (RB)
The register bank monitor is a flag that becomes "0" when register bank 0 is in use and becomes "1" while register bank 1 is in use. Therefore, it is possible to determine whether the register bank in use is 0 or 1 by referring to the D3 bit of the F register.

(5) D4 bit: half carry flag (H)
The half carry flag is a flag that becomes "1" when there is a carry from the lower 4 bits to the upper 4 bits during an operation, and becomes "0" when there is no carry.
(6) D5 bit: second zero flag (TZ)
The second zero flag is a flag that becomes "1" when the operation result is "0" and becomes "0" if the operation result is not "0".
(7) D6 bit: Zero flag (Z)
The zero flag is a flag that becomes "1" when the operation result is "0", and becomes "0" if the operation result is not "0", as described above.
(8) D7 bit: sign flag (S)
The sign flag is a flag that becomes "0" if the operation result is positive (plus) and becomes "1" if the operation result is negative (minus).

FIG. 375 is a diagram showing stack areas in the forty-second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 373, the RWM 53 has a first stack area (“F1D0h” to “F1FFh”) for the first program and a second stack area (“F3E8h” to “F3FFh”) for the second program. Prepare.
As described above, when data is stored in the first stack area (also referred to as stacking, saving, stacking, etc.), data is stacked in ascending order (reverse order) from the final address. For example, when 2-byte data is first stacked in the first stack area, the data is stored in "F1FFh" and "F1FEh".
The second stack area is similar to the above, and stacks sequentially from the last address (F3FFh).

The SP register stores a value indicating at which address data is to be stacked in the stack area. The SP register is provided in both register banks 0 and 1, as shown in FIG. 373, and the SP register in register bank 0 stores at which address in the first stack area data is to be stacked. Similarly, the SP register in register bank 1 stores at which address in the second stack area data is to be stacked.

As shown in FIG. 375, the initial value "F200h" is stored in the SP register of register bank 0 by the command "LD SP, F200h" when the power is turned on.
Next, some program (CALL instruction (also called "first call instruction"), CALLEX instruction (also called "second call instruction"), PUSH instruction (also called "register save instruction"), etc. ) is executed to stack data in the 2-byte areas of "F1FFh" and "F1FEh" in the first stack area, the SP register value of register bank 0 is updated to "F1FEh". Note that the example in FIG. 375 shows an example in which "CALL mn" is executed.
Next, when calling the data stored in "F1FFh" and "F1FEh" of the first stack area, some program (RET instruction (also referred to as "first return instruction"), RETEX instruction ("second ), POP instructions (also called "register return instructions"), etc.). By this instruction, the data stored in the 2-byte storage areas of "F1FEh" and "F1FFh" are called. For example, the RET instruction (example in FIG. 375) returns to the instruction after CALL (returns to the program of the program counter stored in the stack area (returns to the program at the return address)), and the SP register value of register bank 0 is "F1FEh" is updated to "F200h".

The same applies to the second stack area.
When the power is turned on, an initial value "F400h" is stored in the SP register of register bank 1 by the command "LD SP, F400h".
Next, when some program (CALL instruction, PUSH instruction, etc.) is executed and data is stacked in "F3FFh" of the second stack area, the SP register value of register bank 1 is updated to "F1FFh". .
Next, when calling the data stored in "F3FFh" of the second stack area, some program (RET instruction, RETEX instruction, POP instruction, etc.) is executed. By this instruction, the data stored in the 1-byte storage area of "F3FFh" is called, and the RET or RETEX instruction returns to the instruction after CALL, and the SP register value of register bank 1 changes from "F3FFh" to " F400h”.

Here, although the details of the instructions will be described later, in this embodiment, the CALLEX instruction is an instruction that the first program (in the case of register bank 0) has, and the second program (in the case of register bank 1) has It is an instruction that does not have
The RETEX instruction is an instruction that is not included in the first program (for register bank 0) and is included in the second program (for register bank 1).

FIG. 376 is a diagram showing main instructions in the forty-second embodiment. In the forty-second embodiment, there are thousands of types of instructions, and FIG. 376 shows three representative types.
(A) in the figure indicates an LDF instruction.
In FIG. 376, first, the operation code and operand in the imperative sentence will be described.
As shown in (A) in the figure, when the instruction is "LDF HL, mn", the first half "LDF" is called an operation code (function) and the second half "HL, mn" is called an operand (argument). There is The LDF instruction is one aspect (a special form; the reason why it is special will be described later) of the LD (load) instruction. "HL" indicates an HL register, and "mn" indicates an address. The instruction "LDF HL, mn" is an instruction to store the address "mn" value in the HL register.
As will be described later, the LDF instruction is not limited to an instruction to store an address value in a predetermined register. .) is stored in a predetermined register.

Specifically, for example, when "LDF HL, 1200h" is executed,
1200h = 0001/0010/0000/0000 ("/" is inserted every 4 bits. Same below.)
Since
H register value = 0001/0010
L register value = 0000/0000
becomes.

Furthermore, LDF instructions are limited to instructions that store a value in the range of "1200h" to "1DFF" in a register (the HL register in this example). Other load instructions use "LD" instead of "LDF" as the opcode.
i.e.
LDF HL, mn (mn = 1200h to 1DFFh)
LD HL, mn (mn≠1200h to 1DFFh)
is.

FIG. 377 is a diagram showing aspects of LDF and LD instructions. As shown in FIG. 373, the range of the first data area is addresses "1200h" to "1DF3h". Therefore, all load instructions that specify the address of the first data area can be executed with the LDF instruction.
On the other hand, the second data area ranges from addresses "2600h" to "2FBEh". Therefore, in the case of a load instruction specifying the address of the second data area, the opcode "LDF" cannot be used, and the opcode "LD" is used.
In FIG. 377, (A) indicates an LDF instruction specifying the range of addresses "1200h" to "1DF3h" (first data area), and (B) indicates the range of addresses "2600h" to "2FBEh" (first data area). 2 data area).

Moreover, the load instruction is not limited to an instruction to store a predetermined address value in a predetermined register, but can also be used, for example, to store any register value in any other register.
FIG. 377(C) shows "LDF HL, xy" which is an instruction for storing a predetermined value "xy" (within the range of "1200h" to "1DFFh") in the HL register using the LDF instruction. Thus, when the value of "xy" is within the range of "1200h" to "1DFFh", the LDF instruction can also be used for the instruction to store the value in the predetermined register.
For example, an instruction to store the timer value "5000 (D)" (1388h) in the HL register would be "LDF HL, 1388h".
Furthermore, FIG. 377(D) shows an instruction "LD A, (HL)”. In an instruction that copies a predetermined register value to another predetermined register, if the predetermined register value or the predetermined value of the copy source is outside the range of "1200h" to "1DFFh", the (LDF instruction LD instruction is used.

Also, all instructions such as "LDF HL,mn" and "LD HL,mn" are actually encoded and stored in the ROM 54 program area.
Here, in the 42nd embodiment, the code size of "LDF HL, mn" is 2 bytes, and the code size of "LD HL, mn" is 3 bytes.
First, in the case of the instruction "LDF HL, mn", the range of "mn" is from "1200h" to "1DFFh". Expressed in base and binary numbers,
1200h = 4608 (D) = 0001/0010/0000/0000 (B)
1DFFh=7679(D)=0001/1101/1111/1111(B)
becomes.

When "1200h" is a reference value of "0", "1DFFh" is "3070(D)" or "1011/1111/1110(B)" (12 bits).
Therefore, in the LDF instruction, "1200h" is set to the value "0" in the operation code for designating the address value. As a result, 12 bits are sufficient to specify the address value "mn"(mn="1200h" to "1DFFh").

Also assume that the total number of instructions is, for example, "3000" and that each instruction is assigned a unique value.
in this case,
3000 (D) = 1011/1011/1000 (B) (12 bits)
Therefore, it can be assigned to "0000/0000/0000 (B)" to "1011/1011/1000 (B)".
A small value is assigned to a particularly important instruction, specifically, for example, an instruction with a high frequency of use. In this embodiment, the code value of "LDF HL" is assigned to "1101" (4 bits).
Thus, "LDF HL" is 4 bits and "mn" is 12 bits, for a total of 16 bits or 2 bytes. Therefore, the code size of "LDF HL, mn (mn=1200h to 1DFFh)" is 2 bytes.

On the other hand, when the range of "mn" in the load instruction is outside the range of "1200h" to "1DFFh", especially when specifying the range of the second data area of "2600h" to "2FBEh", the following become that way.
Since "2FBEh" has the largest address value in the range of the second data area,
"2FBEh" - "1200h"
= 1 DBEh
= 1/1101/1011/1110 (B)
and becomes 13 bits.
That is, when "1200h" is set to the reference value "0" as described above, "2FBEh" can be represented by 13 bits.
Therefore, when "LD HL" is coded, it is 4 bits like "LDF HL", and "LD HL, mn" (mn≠1200h to 1DFFh) is "4+13=17 bits (3 bytes)". Represented by

Also, in the case of other load instructions such as "LD A, (HL)", the code size is set to 3 bytes in the same manner as described above.
If the code size of "LD HL, mn" is 3 bytes, "LD HL" does not necessarily have to be 4 bits. 1DFFh) is 13 bits, so the total of these can be contained within 24 bits (3 bytes).

From the above, in the 42nd embodiment, the code size of the load instruction is
LDF HL, mn (mn=1200h to 1DFFh): 2 bytes (16 bits)
LD HL, mn (mn≠1200h to 1DFFh): 3 bytes (17 bits)
LD A, (HL) ("A" and "HL" are optional): 3 bytes.
As a result, the code size of "LDF HL, mn (mn=1200h to 1DFFh)", which specifies the address of the first data area and is stored in the HL register, is 1 byte smaller than the code size of other load instructions. Therefore, it is possible to save the storage capacity of the first program area.

In particular, since programs related to the progress of the game are stored in the first program area, the capacity is larger than that of programs stored in the second program area, in other words, programs unrelated to the progress of the game (programs related to the role ratio monitor). tends to increase. For example, lottery processing related to games, processing for shifting game states, processing for driving reels, processing for giving game values (game media) according to game results (symbol combination displayed stopped), etc. , running in the first program. Therefore, among the load instructions stored in the first program area, by reducing the code size of the load instructions that call the addresses "1200h" to "1DFFh", it is possible to store more programs in the first program area. It becomes possible.
On the other hand, among the programs stored in the second program area, all the operation codes of the load instructions specifying the addresses in the second data area are unified to "LD". As a result, the program stored in the second program area can more easily confirm the correctness of the program source. In other words, it is possible to implement a design that emphasizes ease of viewing the program rather than reducing the program capacity (code size).

Specifically, the LDF and LD instructions described above are used, for example, as follows.
(1) Example 1
In the 1-line display determination (M_LINE_JUDGE) shown in FIG. 200, in step S1101, processing for setting a payout number table is executed. This process is a process of storing the head address "1400h" of the payout number table (TBL_WIN_CTL; FIG. 193) in the HL register. Since the address specified here is "1400h", it can be executed by the LDF instruction. So this command
LDF HL, 1400h
becomes.

(2) Example 2
In the preparation for starting reel rotation shown in FIG. 224, in the pattern control data table set in step S1151, a process of storing the head address "1200h" of the pattern control data table (TBL_PIC_DAT; FIG. 204(A)) in the HL register is executed. . Since the address specified here is "1200h", it can be executed by the LDF instruction. So this command
LDF HL, 1200h
becomes.

(3) Example 3
In the reel control data address set (C_RLDAT_SET) shown in FIG. 153, the top RWM address request set in step S861 has a process of storing the C register value in the A register as one of the processes. Since this process is similar to the process shown in FIG.
LD A, C
becomes.
(4) Example 4
In the reel control data address set (C_RLDAT_SET) shown in FIG. 153, in the specified address data set in step S862, as one of the processes concerned, the process of storing the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value in the A register. have. Since this process is similar to the process shown in FIG.
LD A, (HL)
becomes.

The data area of the ROM 54 referred to by the second program is outside the range of "1200h" to "1DFFh". Therefore, "LD HL, mn" (mn≠1200h to 1DFF) is used when specifying the address of the data area of the ROM 54 to be referred to by the second program.
An example of this is shown below.
(5) Example 5
In the ratio display process (S_LED_OUT) shown in FIG. 368, in the flashing bit check count table address setting in step S2531, "1" is set to the HL register from the start address "2510h" of the flashing bit check count table (TBL_FLASH_CHK; FIG. 369). Execute processing to store the subtracted value. The command in this case is
LDHL, 250Fh
becomes.

(6) Example 6
In the ratio display process (S_LED_OUT) shown in FIG. 368, in the identification segment blinking bit check count set in step S2532, one of the processes is to store the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value in the B register. have The command in this case is
LD B, (HL)
becomes.
(7) Example 7
In the ratio display process (S_LED_OUT) shown in FIG. 368, the identification segment offset acquisition in step S1477 includes a process of storing the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value in the A register. . The command in this case is
LD A, (HL)
becomes.

In this way, there are a plurality of LD instructions (an instruction with LD as an opcode; also referred to as a "first load instruction") as instructions constituting the first program, and there are also a plurality of instructions constituting the second program. . However, although there are a plurality of LDF instructions (instructions with LDF as the opcode; also referred to as "second load instructions" or "special load instructions") as instructions that make up the first program, the instructions that make up the second program does not have as
Also, even an LD instruction can be an instruction for storing 2-byte data in the HL register. However, the code size can be reduced by storing 2-byte data in the HL register using the LDF instruction. However, in the case of the LDF instruction, the range of 2-byte data is limited.

Specific examples 1 to 7 in the LDF command and LD command described above illustrate various processes in a slot machine (for example, a reel-type game machine under the Fueiho), but all of them are applied only to specific examples 1 to 7. It can be applied to various types of general-purpose processing in a pachinko game machine without any problem.
Like the slot machine, the pachinko game machine also has a first program area and a second program area. (For example, a program related to the base monitor that displays the base (in normal times, it refers to the value calculated by "number of prize balls / total number of discharge x 100"; the same shall apply hereinafter)) . Therefore, the capacity of the first program area tends to increase more easily than that of the second program area. Therefore, a capacity reduction effect can be expected by adopting the LDF instruction for the program stored in the first program area.

In addition, the programs stored in the first program area in the pachinko gaming machine include, for example, processing related to win/fail lottery processing, processing related to special symbol fluctuation stop control, processing related to display of special symbols or normal symbols, game information ( game status, error status, base, etc.), processing related to jackpot control, processing related to movement control of various movable objects (big prize opening, electric accessories that activate the opening extension function, etc.), payout control The processing etc. which concern are mentioned. LDF instructions can be used for these programs.
In particular, the display control of the base monitor of the pachinko game machine and the display control of the role ratio monitor of the slot machine differ in the process of calculating the display content, but are similar in that the game information is finally displayed as data. display control is performed. Therefore, the specific examples 5 to 7 can also be applied to the display control of the base monitor in the pachinko game machine.
It should be noted that it is of course possible to use LDF instructions in other processes controlled by the main CPU in both slot machines and pachinko games, not limited to the above.

The description returns to FIG.
FIG. 376(B) shows the CALLEX instruction. The CALLEX instruction is one of call instructions.
When the "CALLEX mn" instruction is executed,
(1) disabling non-maskable interrupts (NMI) and maskable interrupts (INT) regardless of whether interrupts are enabled or disabled at that time;
(2) Switch the register bank to "1",
(3) Call (call) the address specified by mn
carry out
In this embodiment, the program in the second program area can be executed by executing the CALLEX instruction when executing the program in the second program area from the program in the first program area.

In the load instruction described above, either the LDF instruction or the LD instruction is used depending on the range of mn, but the call instruction of the 42nd embodiment uses the CALLEX instruction regardless of the range of mn. The CALLEX instruction is used when reading the second program from the first program.
Here, the second program area ranges from addresses "2000h" to "25FFh" as shown in FIG. In the CALLEX instruction, the code size of "CALLEX mn" when calling the range of addresses "2000h" to "20FFh" among the addresses "2000h" to "25FFh" is 2 bytes. The code size of "CALLEX mn" when calling a range other than "" is configured to be 4 bytes.

Here, the range of addresses "2000h" to "20FFh" is "FFh", that is, 1 byte. In this case, the code value of the address value "2000h" is set to "0h". As a result, the code value when calling the address value "20FFh" can be set to "FFh". You can set the size to 1 byte.
Further, when encoding the operation code of "CALLEX", in the forty-second embodiment, the code is set to "0100/1000", that is, 1 byte. As a result, the code size of "CALLEX mn" (mn=2000h to 20FFh) can be set to 2 bytes.

FIG. 378 is a diagram showing aspects of the CALLEX instruction.
(A) in the figure indicates "CALLEX 2000h". The code value corresponding to "2000h" in this case is "0000/0000" as described above. Also, the code value of "CALLEX" when the range of "mn" is "2000h" to "20FFh" is "0100/1000". Therefore, the code for "CALLEX 2000h" is
0100/1000/0000/0000
becomes.
When this instruction is executed, it calls the instruction at address "2000h" in the second program area.

In addition, (B) in the figure indicates "CALLEX 20FFh". The code value corresponding to "20FFh" in this case is "1111/1111". Also, similarly to the above, the code value of "CALLEX" when the range of "mn" is "2000h" to "20FFh" is "0100/1000". Therefore, the code for "CALLEX 20FFh" is
0100/1000/1111/1111
becomes.
When this instruction is executed, it calls the instruction at address "20FFh" in the second program area.

Furthermore, (C) in the figure indicates "CALLEX 2100h". Here, when "mn" changes from "20FFh" to "2100h", a carry occurs, and "mn" cannot be expressed in 1 byte, and the code size of "mn" becomes 2 bytes. If "mn" = "2100h", the code for "mn" is
0000/0001/0000/0000
becomes.

Furthermore, the code of "CALLEX" in this case is also different. When the range of "mn" is from "2000h" to "20FFh", the code of "CALLEX" is 1 byte, but when the range of "mn" is from "2100h" to "25FFh", the code of "CALLEX" is Instead of using 1 byte as a code, use 2 bytes. As described above, if the opcode consists of 1 byte, it is limited to 256 out of several thousand instructions. However, if the range of "mn" is not "2000h" to "20FFh", a 2-byte code is assigned as the code of "CALLEX". In the example of Fig. 378, the code of "CALLEX" in this case is
1010/0000/1000/0000
and
Therefore, the code of "CALLEX mn" when "mn" = "2100h" is
1010/0000/1000/0000/0000/0001/0000/0000
becomes.
When this instruction is executed, it calls the instruction at address "2100h" in the second program area.

Further, (D) in the figure indicates "CALLEX 25FFh" (instruction specifying the last address of the second program area). The maximum value when specifying the address of the second program area is "25FFh".
When the code of "2000h" is "0", "25FFh" is
0000/0101/1111/1111
becomes.
Therefore, the code for "CALLEX 25FFh" is
1010/0000/1000/0000/0000/0101/1111/1111
becomes.
When this instruction is executed, it calls the instruction at address "25FFh" in the second program area.

As described above, in the "CALLEX mn" instruction of the 42nd embodiment, if the range of "mn" is within the range of "2000h" to "20FFh", the instruction has a code size of 2 bytes. is outside the above range, the code size of the instruction is 4 bytes.
Therefore, if instructions that are called more frequently are grouped within the range of addresses "2000h" to "20FFh", the number of instructions whose code size can be reduced to 2 bytes increases accordingly. This makes it possible to save the storage capacity of the ROM 54 for storing instructions.
Further, by storing the addresses when calling the second program from the first program in the range of addresses "2000h" to "20FFh" in the range of addresses "2000h" to "25FFh" in the second program area, , when checking the second program, it is possible to easily grasp that the program is called from the first program.

The description returns to FIG.
FIG. 376(C) shows the RETEX instruction. This RETEX instruction is an instruction corresponding to the conventional return instruction.
The RETEX instruction is
(1) Set the non-maskable interrupt (NMI) and maskable interrupt (INT) to the state before the CALLEX instruction,
(2) switch the register bank to "0",
(3) Return (RET) (Return to the state before CALLEX (command following CALLEX (program at return address)))
carry out
This makes the program in the first program area executable.
When the state at the time of the CALLEX instruction is the interrupt enabled state, the interrupt enabled state is set by the RETEX instruction. On the other hand, when the state at the time of the CALLEX instruction is the interrupt disabled state, the interrupt disabled state is set by the RETEX instruction.

A conventional general call/return instruction calls a program by a call instruction, executes the program, and then returns after the call instruction by a return instruction.
On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the program is called by the CALLEX instruction, and after the program is executed, the RETEX instruction returns after the CALLEX instruction.
The above points will be explained in more detail.

FIG. 379 is a diagram showing an example of conventional CALL and RET instructions.
This example shows an example in which the second program is called during execution of the first program.
If the second program is called during execution of the first program, at least the following processing should be executed.
[1] Interrupt Management Processing In order to prevent processing from becoming complicated, interrupt processing is not executed during execution of the second program.
[2] SP register switching process Since the stack area used in the second program is different from the stack area used in the first program, it is necessary to switch the SP register.
[3] Register Management Processing When a register is used during execution of the second program, it is necessary to take over the register value and not return to the first program.

To comply with the above, the program illustrated in FIG. 379 includes the instructions shown below.
First, when the second program is executed while the first program is being executed, interrupt processing is prohibited. The interrupt disable instruction is the DI instruction in the figure. This is the instruction corresponding to "1" above. The EI instruction, which is an interrupt enable instruction, is paired with the DI instruction, which is an interrupt disable instruction. The DI instruction can inhibit maskable interrupt processing, but cannot inhibit non-maskable interrupt processing (NMI).

After executing the DI instruction, "PUSH AF" is executed to save the AF register. This instruction is an instruction corresponding to "3" above. Note that the PUSH instruction is an instruction for storing data in the stack area. That is, it executes an instruction to store the A register value and the F register value in the stack area.
The next "CALL S_CHERR_CHK" command is a command to call "S_CHERR_CHK" (input/discharge sensor abnormality management), which is one of the second programs. In this example, "S_CHERR_CHK" is listed as the second program.
When this "S_CHERR_CHK" (second program) is terminated, the saved AF register is restored by the "POP AF" instruction. This instruction is an instruction for calling data in the stack area, and is an instruction corresponding to "3" above. Next, the EI instruction permits interrupt processing (instruction corresponding to "1" above).

In "S_CHERR_CHK" (second program), "LD (_SB_STACK2), SP" is an instruction to save (store) the SP register value for the first program to a predetermined address in the second stack area ("2" above). corresponding instruction).
The next "LD SP, @STACK2" is an instruction for setting the SP register for the second program (an instruction corresponding to "2" above).
Next, "PUSH GPR" and "PUSH QI" are executed respectively to save the registers. Here, "GPR" indicates the type of saved register, and corresponds to the A, F, B, C, D, E, H, and L registers. Also, since "GPR" does not include the Q and I registers, "PUSH GPR" and "PUSH QI" are executed to save the Q and I registers (instruction corresponding to "3" above). .

After executing the second program, the register and the SP register are restored. "POP QI" restores the Q and I registers. In addition, "POP GPR" restores the A, F, B, C, D, E, H, and L registers (these are the instructions corresponding to "3" above).
Next, "LD SP, (_SB_STACK2)" restores the SP register (an instruction corresponding to "2" above).
Then, by RET, the state before the CALL instruction is restored.

As described above, in general call/return instructions, the first program has the following instructions corresponding to the above "1" to "3":
D.I.
PUSH AF
POP AF
EI
need to run.
Also, in the second program,
LD (), SP
PUSH GPR
PUSH QI
POP QI
POP GPR
LD SP, ()
need to run.

On the other hand, the CALLEX instruction in the present embodiment includes processing for disabling interrupts and processing for switching the register bank from 0 to 1, as described above. Therefore, the program in the second program area can be executed by the CALLEX instruction (one instruction), and there is no need to independently provide an interrupt disable instruction (DI instruction) or a register save instruction (PUSH instruction).
Also, the RETEX instruction includes processing for setting the interrupt to the state before the CALLEX instruction and processing for switching the register bank from 1 to 0. Therefore, it is possible to return to the program in the first program area by the RETEX instruction (one instruction), and independently execute an interrupt enable instruction (EI instruction) for restoring an interrupt and an instruction (POP instruction) for restoring a register. There is no need to set
Therefore, it is possible to reduce the program capacity.

Furthermore, the CALLEX instruction and the RETEX instruction can return to the interrupt state of the first program immediately before executing the second program.
Therefore, if the state immediately before the CALLEX instruction is the interrupt enabled state, the RETEX instruction can be used to return to the interrupt enabled state of the first program after execution of the second program.
On the other hand, if the state immediately before the CALLEX instruction is the interrupt disabled state, the RETEX instruction can be used to return to the first program in the interrupt disabled state after execution of the second program.

Also, the register bank is switched from 0 to 1 when the CALLEX instruction is executed. In addition, the register bank is switched from 1 to 0 when the RETEX instruction is executed.
Therefore, when the CALLEX instruction is executed, the D3 bit of the F register of register banks 0 and 1 is updated from "0" to "1". Also, when the RETEX instruction is executed, the D3 bit of the F register of register banks 0 and 1 is updated from "1" to "0".
Incidentally, when the CALLEX instruction is executed, the D3 bit of the F register of either register bank 0 or 1 may be updated from "0" to "1".

Also, the data stored in the registers of register banks 0 and 1 are not updated by the CALLEX and RETEX instructions themselves, except for the D3 bit of the F register.
This point will be described with a specific example.
In the following description, the A, B, H, and L registers of register bank 0 are referred to as 0A, 0B, 0H, and 0L registers, respectively.
Also, the A, B, H, and L registers of register bank 1 are referred to as 1A, 1B, 1H, and 1L registers, respectively.
It is assumed that the registers of register banks 0 and 1 currently store the following data.
0A register: 00000001 (B)
0B register: 00000000 (B)
0H register: 11110001 (B)
0L register: 00000001 (B)
1A register: 00000000 (B)
1B register: 00000011 (B)
1H register: 11110010 (B)
1L register: 00000001 (B)

When the CALLEX instruction is executed in this state, the state of using the 0A, 0B, 0H, and 0L registers is switched to the state of using the 1A, 1B, 1H, and 1L registers. Immediately before and after the CALLEX instruction, the values of the 0A, 0B, 0H, 0L, 1A, 1B, 1H, and 1L registers do not change. As mentioned above, only the D3 bit of the F register is updated.
Execution of the second program then uses the 1A, 1H, and 1L registers, e.g.
1A register: 00000011 (B)
1B register: 00000011 (B)
1H register: 11110001 (B)
1L register: 00000000 (B)
Suppose that

Then, when the RETEX instruction is executed based on the end of the second program, the values of the 1A, 1B, 1H, and 1L registers are kept as they are, and the state is switched to use the 0A, 0B, 0H, and 0L registers. The values of the 0A, 0B, 0H, and 0L registers at this point are the values immediately before the CALLEX instruction, that is,
0A register: 00000001 (B)
0B register: 00000000 (B)
0H register: 11110001 (B)
0L register: 00000001 (B)
is.
Note that the 0H register value maintains the value immediately before the CALLEX instruction, and is not replaced with the 1H register value.
Then, when the first program is executed to add "1" to the value of the 0A register, for example,
0A register: 00000010 (B)
becomes.

As described above, focusing on a specific register (for example, the A register), if the specific register value immediately before the CALLEX instruction is "x", the specific register value becomes "y" by executing the CALLEX instruction. This is because the CALLEX instruction did not change the value of the specific register, but instead changed the specific register to be used from the specific register of register bank 0 to the specific register of register bank 1 .

Then, it is assumed that the specific register is used and the specific register value is updated from 'y' to 'y'' by executing the program of the second program area. After that, when the RETEX instruction is executed, the specific register to be used switches from the specific register of register bank 1 to the specific register of register bank 0 . Therefore, the specific register value immediately after the RETEX instruction becomes the value immediately before the CALLEX instruction, that is, "x". Note that the specific register value of the register bank 1 remains "y'" immediately after the RETEX instruction.

Specifically, the CALLEX and RETEX instructions described above are used, for example, as follows.
(1) Example 1
FIG. 380 is a flowchart showing program start (M_PRG_SET) in the 42nd embodiment, and corresponds to FIG. 354 in the 41st embodiment. The same step numbers are assigned to the same processes as in FIG. Also, the step numbers specific to the forty-second embodiment are underlined.
In FIG. 380, when program start (M_PRG_START) processing is started, an initial value is first set in the SP register of register bank 0 in step S2851. At power-on, the SP register value in register bank 0 is "0". Here, "F200h" is stored in the SP register of register bank 0 by the instruction "LD SP, F200h".

The value "F200h" stored here is a value obtained by adding "1" to the last address of the first stack area, as shown in FIG. When the SP register value of register bank 0 is "F200h", it indicates that data is stored (stacked) in "F1FFh".
Secondly, in step S2851, "CALLEX 2000h" is executed. In this example, it is assumed that the start address of the RWM checksum calculation instruction in step S2852 is "2000h".
Next, proceeding to step S2852, the second program (RWM checksum calculation) is started based on "CALLEX 2000h". When the second program is first started after power-on, the SP register of register bank 1 is set to an initial value. At power-on, the SP register value of register bank 1 is "0". Here, "F400h" is stored in the SP register of register bank 1 by the instruction "LD SP, F400h".

The value "F400h" stored here is a value obtained by adding "1" to the last address "F3FFh" of the second stack area, as shown in FIG. When the SP register value of register bank 1 is "F400h", it indicates that data is stored (stacked) in "F3FFh".
Furthermore, when the RWM checksum calculation ends, RETEX is executed, and the program (instruction) in the first program, which is the program after CALLEX in step S2851 (S2705), is returned to.
Description of the processing after step S2705 is omitted.

In the program start (M_PRG_START) of the 41st embodiment shown in FIG. 354, it is necessary to execute "PUSH AF" by saving the AF register in step S2702. Also, it is necessary to execute "POP AF" by restoring the AF register in step S2704. Furthermore, although not shown in FIG. 354, a RET instruction is executed after step S2703.
On the other hand, in the 42nd embodiment, since the CALLEX instruction includes register saving, there is no need to define separate register saving instructions (“PUSH AF”, “PUSH GPR”, and “PUSH QI”). Similarly, since the RETEX instruction is an instruction that includes register return, there is no need to define separate register return instructions ("POP AF", "POP GPR", and "POP QI").

Also, when the second program is executed for the first time after power-on (step S2852), after storing the initial value "F400h" in the SP register of the register bank 1, the program returns to the first program and executes the second program again. When executing the program, there is no need to store the initial value "F400h" in the SP register of the register bank 1 again.
In other words, when the power is turned on, the process (instruction) for storing the initial value "F400h" in the SP register of the register bank 1 is executed when the second program is first executed, but the second program is executed thereafter. Sometimes it is not necessary to execute the processing (instruction) for storing the initial value "F400h" in the SP register of the register bank 1 . This makes it possible to reduce the capacity of the second program.

However, the process (instruction) for storing the initial value "F400h" in the SP register of the register bank 1 may be executed each time the second program is executed. Alternatively, when the second program is executed and a specific condition is satisfied, a process (instruction) for storing the initial value "F400h" in the SP register of the register bank 1 may be executed.
Assume that the initial value "F400h" is stored in the SP register of register bank 1 when the second program is executed for the first time after the power is turned on, and the second program is executed. Then, when storing data in the second stack area during execution of the second program, the SP register value of the register bank 1 is updated.

As described above, for example, when 2-byte data is first stored in the second stack area, the SP register value of register bank 1 is updated from "F400h" to "F3FEh". After that, data is normally returned from the second stack area before the second program ends. Therefore, at the end of the second program, the SP register value of register bank 1 is normally "F400h".
When the second program ends and returns to the first program, the SP register of register bank 0 is used. The SP register value of register bank 0 maintains the value immediately before shifting to the second program. For example, if the SP register value of register bank 0 immediately before shifting to the second program is "F1FDh", when returning to the first program after ending the second program, the SP register value of register bank 0 is "F1FDh". becomes.

(2) Example 2
In the initialization process (M_INI_SET) of the 41st embodiment shown in FIG. 357, if the start address of the RWM initialization 2 instruction in step S2736 is "2020h", the instruction in steps S2735 to S2737 is "CALLEX 2020h". and "RETEX" (similar to the above, a register save instruction (PUSH instruction) and a register restore instruction (POP instruction) are unnecessary). Although not shown in FIG. 357, a RET instruction is executed at the end of the program corresponding to step S2736 (processing outside the use area). An instruction corresponding to this RET instruction is the RETEX instruction in this embodiment.

(3) Example 3
In the interrupt processing (I_INTR) of the forty-first embodiment shown in FIG. It can be composed of instructions including "RETEX" (the register save instruction (PUSH instruction) and return instruction (POP instruction) are unnecessary). Although not shown in FIG. 359, the RET instruction is executed at the end of the program (processing outside the use area) corresponding to the determination processing of step S460. An instruction corresponding to this RET instruction is the RETEX instruction in this embodiment.

(4) Example 4
In the power-off process (I_POWER_DOWN) of the forty-first embodiment shown in FIG. 360, if the start address of the RWM checksum set (S_SUM_SET) in step S2776 is "2060h", the instructions in steps S2775 to S2777 are "CALLEX 2060h" and "RETEX" (the register save instruction (PUSH instruction) and restore instruction (POP instruction) are unnecessary). Although not shown in FIG. 360, a RET instruction is executed at the end of the program (processing outside the use area) corresponding to the processing of step S2776. An instruction corresponding to this RET instruction is the RETEX instruction in this embodiment.

Next, how to use the CALLEX instruction (example of application) will be described.
FIG. 381 shows an example using the CALLEX instruction and the JR instruction (jump instruction).
As described above, the CALLEX instruction can be a 2-byte instruction if the range of addresses to be called is from "2000h" to "20FFh". is used as much as possible, the storage capacity for instructions can be saved.

For example, an instruction "CALLEX 2000h" is provided, and when this instruction is executed, the program stored at address "2000h" is called. If the program occupies most of addresses "2000h" to "20FDh", many CALLEX instructions cannot be provided. In extreme cases, when a program starts from address "2000h" and continues to address "20FFh", in other words, when there is only one program in the range of addresses "2000h" to "20FFh", two Only one byte CALLEX instruction can be provided.

Therefore, in the example of FIG. 381, a JR (jump) instruction is placed in the range of addresses "2000h" to "20FFh", and the jump destination of the JR instruction is specified outside the range of addresses "2000h" to "20FFh". In addition, the actual program is stored at the destination of the JR instruction.
For example, "JR 2200h" is stored at address "2000h". If the instruction is "JR 2200h", it means to jump to address "2200h". As a result, when "CALLEX 2000h" is executed, the address "2000h" is called, but since "JR 2200h" is stored at the address "2000h", it jumps to the address "2200h". . If the actual program ("program A" in FIG. 381) is stored after address "2200h", the actual program (program A) can be placed outside the range of addresses "2000h" to "20FFh". can be done.

In this embodiment, the code size required for the "JR mn (mn=2000h to 20FFh)" instruction is 3 bytes. Therefore, as shown in FIG.
2000h JR mn1 (mn1=2200h in the example of FIG. 381)
2003h JR mn2 (mn2=2250h in the example of FIG. 381)
2006h JR mn3 (mn3=22A0h in the example of FIG. 381)
:
JR instructions are arranged in increments of 3 bytes.

However, not limited to this, if the code size required for the "JR mn (mn = 2000h to 20FFh)" instruction can be configured from 2 bytes,
2000h JR mn1
2002h JR mn2
2004h JR mn3
:
becomes.
Also, if the code size required for the "JR mn (mn = 2000h to 20FFh)" instruction is 4 bytes,
2000h JR mn1
2004h JR mn2
2008h JR mn3
:
becomes.

In the example of FIG. 381, it is possible to put all JR instructions in the range of addresses "2000h" to "20FFh". In this case
(1) 2000h JR mn1
(2) 2003h JR mn2
(3) 2006h JR mn3
:
(84) 20F9h JR mn84
(85) 20FCh JR mn85
(86) 20FFh JR mn86
can be Therefore, a total of 86 JR instructions consisting of 3 bytes can be stored within the range of addresses "2000h" to "20FFh".

In the example of Figure 381,
2000h JR 2200h
, and the actual program (program A) at address "2000h" is stored within the range of addresses "2200h" to "224Fh".
Also,
2003h JR 2250h
, and the actual program (program B) at address "2003h" is stored within the range of addresses "2250h" to "229Fh".

Furthermore,
2006h JR 22A0h
, and the actual program (program C) at address "2006h" is stored after address "22A0h".
In this way, it is desirable that almost no actual program to be executed by the CALLEX instruction be stored in the address range "2000h" to "20FFh" of the CALLEX instruction, which is possible with a code size of 2 bytes. In other words, the address of the second program called by the CALLEX instruction is contained in the address range "2000h" to "20FFh". However, as will be described later, the second program called by the CALLEX instruction, which is closest to the address "20FFh" in the address range "2000h" to "20FFh", does not need to use the JR instruction. . Thus, if the majority (including "most" or "all") of the instructions of the second program called by the CALLEX instruction use the JR instruction and the actual program is stored after address "2100h", The second program area can be used efficiently.

For example, if there are only 10 CALLEX instructions, the JR instruction is stored at the addresses corresponding to the 1st to 9th CALLEX instructions, but the address corresponding to the 10th CALLEX instruction is stored as the JR instruction. may directly store the actual program without using the JR instruction.
On the other hand, regardless of the number of CALLEX instructions, only JR instructions are stored in the address range "2000h" to "20FFh". The storage area before "20FFh" may be reserved as a spare.

As mentioned above, in the CALLEX instruction, the code size is 2 bytes when calling within the range of addresses "2000h" to "20FFh", and when calling outside the range of addresses "2000h" to "20FFh" has a code size of 4 bytes.
Therefore, "2 bytes of the CALLEX instruction + 3 bytes of the JR instruction" is a total of 5 bytes, which is larger than the code size (4 bytes) of the CALLEX instruction that calls out of the range of addresses "2000h" to "20FFh".

However, in chips of gaming machines (such as reel-type gaming machines and pachinko gaming machines) that comply with the regulations of the Entertainment Business Law, the memory capacity of the first program area is not sufficient, and the memory capacity of the second program area is sufficient. is the actual situation.
Therefore, even if the JR instruction stored in the second program area increases by 3 bytes, the first program area can be used more efficiently if the code size of the CALLEX instruction stored in the first program area is set to 2 bytes. is advantageous in terms of

Also, at the end approaching the address "20FFh", the program itself may be stored without providing the JR instruction.
As described above, when 3-byte JR instructions are sequentially arranged after the address "2000h", the instruction "JR mn86" is stored at the address "20FFh". In this case, the instruction "JR mn86" is stored in the 3-byte storage area of addresses "20FFh" to "2101h".

However, it is better to store the program directly from address "20FFh" than to store the JR instruction in the 3-byte storage area after address "20FFh" and store the actual program for that instruction in another storage area. It saves capacity.
Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 381, no JR instruction is placed at address "20FFh", and the program (program D) is stored from address "20FFh".
Thus, when "CALLEX 20FFh" is executed, program D stored after address "20FFh" is executed.

In the above, the address "20FFh" is taken as an example, but this also applies to the case where the JR instruction is placed at the address "20FDh" or "20FEh".
Specifically, it is better to store the program directly after address "20FDh" than to store the JR instruction in the 3-byte storage area of addresses "20FDh" to "20FFh" and store the program in another storage area. is preferable in terms of saving storage capacity.
Similarly, it is better to store the program directly after address "20FEh" than to store the JR instruction in the 3-byte storage area of addresses "20FEh" to "2100h" and store the program in other storage areas. It can be said that this is preferable in terms of capacity saving.

Although the 42nd embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the contents described above, and various modifications such as those described below are possible.
(1) In FIG. 373, the ROM 54 has a program management area and an unused area, but the ROM 54 is not limited to this. Any device having two data areas may be used. Also, although the top address and the end address are shown in FIG. 373 for each of these storage areas, the storage capacity shown in FIG. 373 is an example and is not limited to this. Therefore, the start address and end address of each storage area shown in FIG. 373 are only examples, and can be set arbitrarily.

Therefore, in the example of FIG. 373, since the address range of the second program area is "2000h" to "25FFh", the address range capable of reducing the code size of the CALLEX instruction to 2 bytes is "2000h" to "25FFh". 20FFh" is exemplified, but if the address range of the second program area changes, the address range in which the code size of the CALLEX instruction can be set to 2 bytes also changes.
For example, if the address range of the second program area is "2150h" to "264Fh", the address range where the code size of the CALLEX instruction can be set to 2 bytes is "2150h" to "224Fh".

(2) In the example of FIG. 373, the first program area, the first data area, the second program area, and the second data area are arranged in this order in the ROM 54, but this is not restrictive. The area and the second data area may be arranged before the first program area and the first data area. Also, a predetermined management area or the like may be arranged at the top address of the ROM 54 (before the first program area in FIG. 373).
Similarly, the RWM 53 is not limited to being arranged in the order of the work area and the stack area, and may be arranged in the order of the stack area and the work area. Also, although the first work area, the first stack area, the second work area, and the second stack area are arranged in this order, the arrangement is not limited to this. and the first stack region. Furthermore, a predetermined management area or the like may be arranged at the start address of the RWM 53 (before the first work area in FIG. 373).

(3) In the built-in register area, each register bank is provided with a main register and a sub-register, but the present invention is not limited to this, as long as at least a main register is provided.
(4) In FIG. 374, the register bank monitor is assigned to the D3 bit of the F register, but it is not limited to this and any bit may be assigned. For example, if the second zero flag is not used, the D5 bit may be used.
It is also possible to provide a dedicated register bank monitor instead of assigning a register bank monitor to a specific bit in the F register.

(5) In the example of FIG. 373, it has been explained that the address range of the first data area is "1200h" to "1DF3h", and that the range of "mn" can be represented by 12 bits within that range.
here,
1200h = 0000/0000/0000 (B)
When
1111/1111/1111(B)=FFFh
is.
and,
1200h+FFFh=21FFh
is.
Therefore, if the range of the first data area is within the range of "1200h" to "21FFh", the range of "mn" can be represented by 12 bits, and the code size of "LDF HL, mn" is 2 bytes. can be configured with

(6) The address ranges and sizes of the first stack area and the second stack area shown in FIG. 373 are examples, and are not limited to these. For example, if the range of the first stack area is addresses "F1D0h" to "F2FFh", then in step S2851 of FIG. 380, it becomes "LD SP, F300h".

(7) The forty-second embodiment can be applied to both reel-type gaming machines and pachinko gaming machines under the Fueiho. It can also be applied to, for example, parrots that use game balls, sealed game machines (medal-less game machines) that use electronic information (electronic medals) instead of physical (tangible) medals, and casino machines. can.
(8) The first to forty-second embodiments and the various modifications shown in the first to forty-second embodiments are not limited to being carried out independently, but can be carried out in combination as appropriate.

<43rd embodiment>
The forty-third embodiment relates to a pseudo-game effect.
"Pseudo game effect" means that the stop switch 42 for operating the rotation stop device for the spinning reel 31 during the period from the start of rotation of the reel 31 until the rotation speed of the reel 31 becomes constant. Triggered by the operation, the reel 31 is stopped in a pseudo manner (also referred to as "pseudo"; hereinafter the same.) It means the effect of displaying an arbitrary symbol combination.
The “pseudo-game effect” is also called a “reel effect”.

On the other hand, a game for displaying a symbol combination as a game result (a symbol combination corresponding to the winning lottery result) is called a "real game" in contrast to the above "pseudo game effect".
The symbol combination temporarily stopped by the pseudo-game effect does not display the game result. After the symbol combination is temporarily stopped by the pseudo game effect, the game result is displayed by stopping and displaying the symbol combination by the main game.
The pseudo-game effect is not limited to one time, and may be performed multiple times in succession.
For example, it may be "main game -> pseudo game effect -> main game", or "main game -> pseudo game effect (first time) -> pseudo game effect (second time) -> main game".

Also, during the pseudo-game production, it may be possible to notify the player that the pseudo-game production is in progress, in other words, that the main game is not in progress. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from misidentifying and confusing the pseudo-game effect and the main game. In particular, this is to prevent the player from misunderstanding that a game result has been obtained by the pseudo-game effect and stopping the game even though the main game is not being played.
As a method of informing the player that the pseudo-game effect is in progress, for example, firstly, there is a method of changing the lighting mode of the stop switch lamp. Here, the “stop switch lamp” is a lamp (for example, an LED provided around the stop switch 42) that indicates whether the operation of the stop switch 42 is valid/invalid, and the operation of the stop switch 42 is valid. Blue light is emitted when it is, and red light is emitted when it is invalid. Also, the lighting control of the stop switch lamp may be executed by the main control board 50 or may be executed by the sub control board 80 .

When it is possible to accept the operation of the stop switch 42 during the rotation of the reels 31 in this game, the stop switch lamp is caused to emit light in a predetermined color (for example, blue as described above), but the rotation of the reels 31 during the pseudo game production If it is possible to temporarily stop the reel 31 based on the operation of the stop switch 42, the stop switch lamp is set to a color different from a predetermined color (for example, purple. Especially when the operation of the stop switch 42 is invalid in this game (eg, red in the above example)) or extinguished.

Also, when it is possible to accept the operation of the stop switch 42 during the rotation of the reel 31 in this game, the stop switch lamp is caused to emit light in a predetermined color (for example, blue as described above), but the reel 31 during the pseudo game production If it is possible to temporarily stop the reel 31 based on the operation of the stop switch 42 during rotation, the stop switch lamp is displayed in a color different from a predetermined color (for example, when the operation of the stop switch 42 is invalid in this game Illuminating in the same color as the luminous color (eg, red in the above example) or extinguishing.

Furthermore, when it is possible to accept the operation of the stop switch 42 during the rotation of the reel 31 in this game, the stop switch lamp is caused to emit light in a predetermined color (for example, blue as described above), but the reel during the pseudo game production When it is possible to temporarily stop the reel 31 based on the operation of the stop switch 42 while the reel 31 is rotating, the stop switch lamp may be made to have the same color as the predetermined color and be illuminated in a blinking manner.
In this way, in the present game and the pseudo-game, the luminous color (including extinguished) and / or the luminescence mode (lighting, blinking, etc.) is different, in this embodiment, in the present game and the pseudo-game , the lighting mode of the stop switch lamp is made different.

Secondly, during the pseudo-game production, a lamp that lights up only during the pseudo-game production (in particular, a lamp that is not used with other functions and is used only to indicate that the pseudo-game production is in progress. By lighting the "pseudo-game display lamp 21a"), it is possible to inform the player that the pseudo-game effect is in progress. Furthermore, not only the dedicated lamp, but also the image display device 23, etc., can display images such as "Pseudo-game production in progress", "FREEPLAY", etc., and output the voice from the speaker 22 saying "Pseudo-game production is in progress". Things are mentioned.
Furthermore, thirdly, when all the reels 31 are temporarily stopped during the pseudo game production, the reels 31 are not stopped, and the symbols move up and down at predetermined time intervals (so that the symbols vibrate vertically). By driving and controlling the motor 32 (hereinafter referred to as “swing fluctuation” or “swing fluctuation control”), it is not a stop (main stop) that displays the game result in this game, but a temporary stop in a pseudo game effect. to the player.

Here, the shaking fluctuation is not limited to the fluctuation that allows the player to recognize (distinguish) that the reels 31 are swinging when looking at the reels 31, but to the extent that the shaking of the reels 31 cannot be recognized by the human eye. It also includes variation.
Further, the "shake variation" in this embodiment corresponds to turning on and off the reel drive signal at intervals of less than 500 ms or 500 ms or less.
It should be noted that "turning on the reel drive signal" means that the reel 31 is excited and output in a predetermined pattern.
Furthermore, "turning off the reel drive signal" refers to performing the excitation output of the reel 31 in a pattern different from the predetermined pattern (including not performing the excitation output).
Furthermore, the swing fluctuation is not limited to being executed only when all the reels 31 are temporarily stopped, and may be executed when the first reel 31 is temporarily stopped and the second reel 31 is temporarily stopped. good.
The swing variation executed when the first reel 31 is temporarily stopped and when the second reel 31 is temporarily stopped may be the same control as the swing fluctuation executed when all the reels 31 are temporarily stopped. Alternatively, the swing fluctuation executed when the first reel 31 is temporarily stopped and when the second reel 31 is temporarily stopped has a fluctuation amount that is greater than the swing fluctuation executed when all the reels 31 are temporarily stopped. Small fluctuations (micro vibrations) may be used. Furthermore, when the first and second reels 31 are temporarily stopped, slight vibration may be set to such an extent that the player can recognize that the reels 31 are shaking when the player looks at the reels 31. The shaking of the reel 31 may be such that it cannot be recognized.

Any one of the first to third methods may be adopted. However, if the first and second methods are used at the same time, the first and third methods are used at the same time, the second and third methods are used at the same time, all the first to third methods are used. may be adopted. By adopting a plurality of methods, it is possible to reduce confusion between the main game and the pseudo-game effect for the player.

FIG. 382 is a diagram showing an example of temporarily stopping "7"-"7"-"7" on the middle line by a pseudo-game effect in the 43rd embodiment.
"Waiting" on the upper left is a state in which the game is finished and all the reels 31 are stopped. Next, when the start switch 41 is operated in a situation where a predetermined number of bets (for example, "3") are betted, all the reels 31 start rotating to start a pseudo-game effect. there is In the drawing, "↓" of the reel 31 indicates that the reel 31 is rotating. When the left stop switch 42 is operated in this state, the left reel 31 is temporarily stopped. In this example, "7" is temporarily stopped in the middle row. Incidentally, the temporary stop control of the reels 31 may temporarily stop the reels 31 within the maximum number of moving symbols "4" in the same manner as the stop control of the reels 31 in this game. It is also possible to temporarily stop the reel 31 beyond. When the reels 31 are temporarily stopped within the maximum number of moving symbols "4", "7"-"7"-"7" is not temporarily stopped unless the eyes are pressed correctly. On the other hand, when the maximum moving symbol number exceeds "4" and the reels 31 are temporarily stopped, "7"-"7"-"7" is temporarily stopped regardless of the operation timing of the stop switch 42.
Further, when only the left reel 31 is temporarily stopped, the left reel 31 remains stationary without swinging fluctuations. Therefore, the stop mode in this case is the same as the stop mode in this game.

When the middle stop switch 42 is operated, the middle reel 31 is temporarily stopped similarly to when the left stop switch 42 is operated. When the middle reel 31 is temporarily stopped (when the left reel 31 is temporarily stopped and the right reel 31 is rotating), the left and middle reels 31 are stationary and do not fluctuate.
Next, when the right stop switch 42 is operated and the right reel 31 is temporarily stopped (in other words, when all the reels 31 are temporarily stopped), all the reels 31 are shaken. As a result, the player can be informed that the temporarily stopped "7"-"7"-"7" does not display the game result of the main game. Further, the image display device 23 shows an example of effect (an example of displaying "7") corresponding to the temporary stop symbol.

Then, when the start switch 41 is operated, all temporarily stopped reels 31 are restarted, and the main game is started. When the reels 31 start rotating when shifting to the main game, the rotation start timings of the reels 31 become different due to a random delay process described later.
A specific symbol combination is temporarily stopped by a pseudo-game effect, and when all the reels 31 are simultaneously rotated while maintaining the relative positional relationship of the reels 31 on which the specific symbol combination is temporarily stopped, the temporary stop is specified. Depending on the combination of symbols, there is a risk that it will lead to eye pushing assistance in this game. Therefore, when the pseudo game performance is terminated and the game is shifted to the main game, the rotation start timing of the reels 31 is randomized so as to destroy the relative positional relationship of the reels 31 temporarily stopped by the pseudo game performance.
As described above, when the left reel 31 is temporarily stopped and when the middle reel 31 is temporarily stopped, the reel 31 is not limited to being stationary and may be shaken.

FIG. 383 is a time chart showing drive signal control (of the motor 32) (example 1) during pseudo-game presentation.
FIG. 383 shows an example in which a pseudo-game effect is executed when the start switch 41 is operated for the first time. When the start switch 41 is operated, the driving signals for the first to third reels 31 are turned on, and all the reels 31 start rotating, and at the same time, the pseudo-game effect is started. Then, for example, when the first stop switch 42 is operated, the motor 32 of the first reel 31 corresponding to the first stop switch 42 is controlled to temporarily stop, and the drive signal for the first reel 31 is turned off. As a result, the first reel 31 is temporarily stopped. When only the first reel 31 is temporarily stopped, the first reel drive signal remains off. However, the shaking fluctuation control may be executed at an interval of less than 500 ms or 500 ms or less after the temporary stop.

Similarly, when the second stop switch 42 is operated, the motor 32 of the second reel 31 corresponding to the second stop switch 42 is controlled to temporarily stop, and the drive signal for the second reel 31 is turned off. As a result, the second reel 31 is temporarily stopped. At this point, the second reel drive signal remains off. However, the shaking fluctuation control may be executed at an interval of less than 500 ms or 500 ms or less after the temporary stop.
Next, when the third stop switch 42 is operated, the motor 32 of the third reel 31 corresponding to the third stop switch 42 is controlled to temporarily stop, and the drive signal for the third reel 31 is turned off. As a result, the third reel 31 is temporarily stopped.
Further, before reaching 500 ms (less than 500 ms) after the last temporary stop of the third reel 31 (however, it may be until reaching 500 ms (500 ms or less)), swing fluctuation control is executed for all reels 31. do. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 383, for example, control is executed to turn on/off the reel drive signal for a moment. In this example, after driving the motor 32 one step in the forward direction (the direction in which the pattern moves downward), control is executed to drive the motor 32 in the reverse direction (the direction in which the pattern moves upward) by one step. do. As a result, the pattern moves up and down for a moment (shake fluctuation).

In addition, after all the reels 31 are temporarily stopped, such swing fluctuation control is executed at intervals of at least less than 500 ms (may be 500 ms or less) until the reels 31 are restarted. In other words, the reel 31 is controlled so as not to stay at the same position for 500 ms or longer. As a result, the player can be prevented from mistakenly assuming that the game is stopped (main stop).
Further, in this example, the driving timings of swing fluctuations of all the reels 31 are made the same. As a result, all reels 31 behave in the same manner. However, it is not limited to this, and the drive timings of swing fluctuations of all the reels 31 may be varied (example in FIG. 384 to be described later).

In the example of FIG. 383, the timing at which the bet switch 40 is operated by the player after all the reels 31 are temporarily stopped is indicated by a chain double-dashed line. Even if the bet switch 40 is operated by the player after the pseudo-game presentation is finished, the bet switch 40 is not turned on and medals are not betted. When the start switch 41 is operated with medals bet before the start of the main game and the pseudo-game production, the pseudo-game production is started with the medals in the main game bet, but the main game is still executed. Since it has not been executed, medals remain bet.

When the start switch 41 is operated after temporarily stopping all the reels 31, the operation of the start switch 41 serves as a trigger for ending the pseudo-game effect. Therefore, a random delay time (time until the reel 31 is restarted) is determined for each reel 31, and when the determined random delay time elapses, the rotation of the reel 31 is started to shift to the main game. do.
After the start switch 41 is operated and before the random delay time arrives, when the swing fluctuation timing arrives, the swing fluctuation control is executed. In the example of FIG. 383, after the start switch 41 is operated, the first reel 31 shows an example in which the reel 31 is restarted based on the elapse of the random delay time before the swing fluctuation timing arrives, As for the second and third reels 31, an example is shown in which swing fluctuation control is executed based on the fact that the swing fluctuation timing has arrived before the random delay time has elapsed.

FIG. 384 is a time chart showing drive signal control (of the motor 32) during pseudo-game presentation (example 2).
In FIG. 383 above, the swing fluctuation control of all the reels 31 is started after all the reels 31 are temporarily stopped, but in the example of FIG. This is an example of execution.
For example, when the first reel 31 is temporarily stopped, swing fluctuation control is executed at intervals of less than 500 ms before 500 ms elapses after the first reel 31 is temporarily stopped. The same applies to the second reel 31 and the third reel 31 . Therefore, in this case, in most cases, the drive timings of the swing fluctuations are not the same among the reels 31, and are scattered. For example, only the first reel 31 swings while the second reel 31 and the third reel 31 are stationary, and then the second reel 31 swings while the first reel 31 and the third reel 31 are stationary. only swings and fluctuates.

Thus, the swing fluctuation control after temporarily stopping the reels 31 may be started after all the reels 31 are temporarily stopped, or may be started each time the reels 31 are temporarily stopped.
Further, the swing fluctuation may be performed at the same timing for all the reels 31 or may be performed independently (discretely) for each reel 31 . However, each reel 31 performs swing fluctuation control at intervals of less than 500 ms.
Further, the swing fluctuation amplitude when the first and second reels 31 are temporarily stopped (the third reel 31 is rotating) may be different from the swing fluctuation amplitude after the third reel 31 is temporarily stopped. For example, the swing fluctuation amplitude of all the reels 31 after the temporary stop of the third reel 31 is set to a level that can be easily recognized visually, but when the first and second reels 31 are temporarily stopped (the third reel 31 is rotating) ) can be set to such an extent that the swing fluctuation is not noticed unless the first and second reels 31 are carefully observed.

FIG. 385 is a time chart showing drive control of the motors 32 of the reels 31 during the pseudo-game presentation. Note that FIG. 385 shows an example of the shake fluctuation control shown in FIG.
In FIG. 385, when the start switch 41 is operated, each reel 31 is accelerated, and a pseudo-game effect is started. Then, after all the reels 31 are in a constant speed state, the stop switch 42 is in a state where operation reception is permitted.
In this way, even during the pseudo-game production, all the reels 31 are accelerated based on the operation of the start switch 41, and after the constant speed state, the operation of the stop switch 42 can be accepted. It is similar to gaming.
The rotational speed of the reels 31 in the pseudo-game effect may be the same rotational speed of the reels 31 as in the main game, or may be the rotational speed of the reels 31 different from that in the main game.
Then, even during the pseudo-game effect, the first, second and third reels are temporarily stopped each time the first, second and third stop switches 42 are operated as in the main game. . As described above, when the first and second reels 31 are temporarily stopped and the third reel 31 is rotating, the temporarily stopped first and second reels 31 are stationary. After the third reel 31 is temporarily stopped, all the reels 31 are shaken.

After all the reels 31 are temporarily stopped, the pseudo-game effect is continued until a predetermined time elapses after the third reel 31 is temporarily stopped or the start switch 41 is operated. Incidentally, the end condition of the pseudo-game effect is set when a predetermined time elapses from a predetermined timing, or when the start switch 41 is operated after all the reels 31 are temporarily stopped.
The example of FIG. 385 is an example of ending the pseudo-game effect based on the start switch 41 being operated. When the start switch 41 is operated, a random delay time is determined for each reel 31 by lottery or the like, and the reel 31 that has passed the determined random delay time is restarted. When all the reels 31 are in a constant speed state and the operation of the stop switch 42 can be accepted, the game can proceed.

FIG. 386 is a time chart showing control of various lamps during pseudo-game presentation. It should be noted that the lamp that lights up during the pseudo-game effect is not limited to that shown in FIG.
In FIG. 386, when the number of credits is less than the upper limit of "50", the input display LED 79e (see FIG. 31(A)) can be turned on (step S2868 in FIG. 395 to be described later).
The insertion display LED 79e is an LED that lights up when medals can be inserted as described in the eleventh embodiment. That is, after the game is over, it lights up before medals are inserted for shifting to the next game (indicating a so-called bet waiting state). It should be noted that even after the replay is activated, it lights up when it is possible to bet according to the number of credits (for example, when the number of credits is less than the upper limit ("50")). Then, when the number of bets reaches the upper limit and the number of credits reaches the upper limit, the input display LED 79e is extinguished. In the example of FIG. 386, it is assumed that the number of credits is not the upper limit.

Also, when the number of bets reaches the specified number, the game start display LED 79d (see FIG. 31A) can be turned on (step S2887 in FIG. 396 to be described later). The game start display LED 79d is an LED that lights up when a prescribed number of medals have been inserted and the start switch 41 is ready for operation. Therefore, when the specified number of medals is not betted (or when automatic insertion based on replay is not performed), the indicator does not light up.
When the start switch 41 is operated, the rotation of all the reels 31 is started as described above, and the pseudo-game effect is started.
When the start switch 41 is operated, the insertion display LED 79e and the game start display LED 79d are extinguished.

Also, in this example, the stop switch lamp lights up in purple when the operation of the stop switch 42 can be accepted during the pseudo-game production, and lights up in blue when the operation of the stop switch 42 can be accepted during the game, (Regardless of whether it is during the pseudo game production or during the main game) In the situation where the operation of the stop switch 42 cannot be accepted, it is assumed to be lit in red (the lighting mode of the stop switch lamp is changed).
Therefore, before the start switch 41 is operated, all stop switch lamps are lit in red. When the start switch 41 is operated, a pseudo-game effect is started, all the reels 31 are in a constant speed state, and the operation of the stop switch 42 can be accepted, all the stop switch lamps light up in purple.
Further, each time the stop switch 42 is operated, the emission color of the stop switch lamp corresponding to the operated stop switch 42 is switched from purple to red.

Further, before all the reels 31 are temporarily stopped and the start switch 41 is operated, the insertion display LED 79e and the game start display LED 79d remain off.
This is because if the game start display LED 79d is lit again after temporarily stopping all the reels 31, the player may be misled. For example, the pseudo-game effect may be misunderstood as a replay winning game.
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the game start display LED 79d may remain lit when the start switch 41 is operated when the pseudo game effect is executed. Then, after all the reels 31 are temporarily stopped, the game start display LED 79d may be turned off when the start switch 41 is operated (when shifting to the main game).
Alternatively, when executing a pseudo-game effect, the game start display LED 79d is turned off when the start switch 41 is operated, but after all the reels 31 are temporarily stopped and before the start switch 41 is operated, a dummy ( As an effect), the game start display LED 79d may be turned on.
After temporarily stopping all the reels 31, even before the start switch 41 is operated, the blocker 45 remains off (medals cannot be inserted), so the insertion display LED 79e remains off. be.

When the start switch 41 is operated and the pseudo-game effect ends, the reels 31 are restarted through the random delay processing described above. Then, when the reels 31 are in a constant speed state, the stop switch 42 is in an operation acceptance permission state, and the game can proceed. Also, when the reel 31 is in a constant speed state in this game, the stop switch lamp lights up in blue.

FIG. 387 is a diagram showing an example of swing variation control during pseudo-game production. In the figure, it progresses from (a) to (h).
(a) in the drawing shows a state in which the pseudo-game effect is started and all the reels 31 are rotating. Next, in (b), when the left stop switch 42 is operated and the left reel 31 is temporarily stopped, the left reel 31 becomes stationary.
Next, in (c), when the middle stop switch 42 is operated and the middle reel 31 is temporarily stopped, the middle reel 31 becomes stationary. Note that the left reel 31 is stationary at this point as well.
Next, in (d), when the right stop switch 42 is operated and the right reel 31 temporarily stops, all the reels 31 are stationary at this moment (time).

After all reels 31 are temporarily stopped, as described above, all reels 31 are shaken and fluctuated at intervals of less than 500 ms. For example, when swinging all the reels 31 at intervals of 450 ms, after maintaining the state of (d) for 450 ms, the reels 31 are driven up and down by a predetermined step (for example, one step), and (e) in FIG. The motor 32 is driven and controlled so as to operate as shown in (h). Although there is no particular limitation on the time from (e) to (h) in the figure, it is desirable to perform the process in an instant. This is because the stationary time of the reel 31 can be lengthened, and the temporarily stopped symbols can be easily seen. Then, when the state (h) in the figure is reached, the state is maintained for 450 ms, and the operations (e) to (h) in the figure are executed again after 450 ms.

It should be noted that the motion is not limited to that shown in FIG. 387, and for example, first, the shake fluctuation may repeat the state of (e) in the figure→the state of (f) in the figure→the state of (e) in the figure. Alternatively, secondly, the shake fluctuation may repeat the state of (f) in the figure→the state of (g) in the figure→the state of (f) in the figure.
The example of FIG. 387 shows an example in which the reels 31 are stationary when the first and second reels 31 are temporarily stopped. At the time of temporary stop, the temporary stop may be accompanied by shaking fluctuation.

Figure 388 is a diagram showing random delay processing after the end of the pseudo-game effect. After all the reels 31 are temporarily stopped, the pseudo game effect is terminated based on the operation of the start switch 41, and random delay processing is executed.
After all the reels 31 are temporarily stopped, when the start switch 41 is operated, the time until the reels 31 are restarted by lottery using random numbers (referred to as “random delay time”). equivalent). A storage area (RWM 53) for storing a timer value, which is a random delay time, is provided for each reel 31, and the timer value for each reel 31 is determined at the timing when the start switch 41 is operated, and stored in each storage area. Then, each timer value is decremented for each interrupt process, and when it becomes "0", the rotation of the reel 31 is started.

In the example of FIG. 388, the random delay time of the left reel 31 is determined as "t1", the random delay time of the middle reel 31 is determined as "t2", and the random delay time of the right reel 31 is determined as "t3". This is an example.
Until the timer value becomes "0", the shake fluctuation control is continued, for example, every 450 ms.
In the example of FIG. 388, since "t1<t3<t2", the reels 31 are restarted in the order of the left reel, the right reel, and the middle reel 31. Thus, which reel 31 restarts first varies each time due to the random delay time.
Then, when the reel 31 (middle reel 31 in the example of FIG. 388) rotated lastly becomes a constant speed state and the index of the reel 31 is detected, operation acceptance of the stop switch 42 is started in this game. be done.
Although the delay time is random, the reels 31 may be restarted in a predetermined order.

In the pseudo-game effect, by executing the swing fluctuation control described above, it is possible to inform the player that the reels 31 are temporarily stopped (the stop is not for displaying the game result in the main game). .
On the other hand, the player may be notified that the pseudo-game effect is in progress by the following method.
In the following, a method for lighting the pseudo-game display lamp 21a indicating that the pseudo-game effect is in progress, and a method for displaying the fact that the pseudo-game effect is in progress on the image display device 23 will be exemplified. Any one of the fluctuation controls may be implemented. However, not limited to this, any two or all three may be implemented.

FIG. 389 is a diagram showing lighting/extinguishing of the pseudo-game display lamp 21a during the pseudo-game presentation.
The pseudo-game display lamp 21a of this example is provided on the right side of the image display device 23 (indicated by a star in the figure). In the pseudo-game display lamp 21a, a white star indicates an off state, and a black star indicates a lighted state. Incidentally, the position of the pseudo-game display lamp 21a is not limited to the position shown in FIG. The position where the pseudo-game display lamp 21a can be provided will be described later.
During standby (while all reels 31 are stopped), the pseudo-game display lamp 21a is turned off.
Then, when the start switch 41 is operated and the pseudo-game effect is started, the pseudo-game display lamp 21a is immediately turned on. As a result, the player can be informed that the pseudo-game effect has started.
Then, the left, middle, and right stop switches 42 are operated in order, and the left, middle, and right reels 31 are temporarily stopped in order. never). Then, when the pseudo-game effect ends based on the operation of the start switch 41, the pseudo-game display lamp 21a is extinguished.
In addition, when the pseudo-game display lamp 21a is provided and the pseudo-game display lamp 21a is lit during the pseudo-game presentation, it is not necessary to execute the swing fluctuation when the reel 31 is temporarily stopped during the pseudo-game presentation. The example of FIG. 389 shows an example in which the reel 31 is stationary when the reel 31 is temporarily stopped, and there is no shaking fluctuation.
However, in order to make it difficult for the player to visually confirm the swing fluctuation (not accompanied by swing fluctuation), after the temporary stop of each reel 31, the reel drive signal is output at intervals of less than 500 ms or 500 ms or less. You can turn it on or off. By configuring in this way, it is possible to distinguish between the stop of the symbols in the main game and the temporary stop of the symbols in the pseudo-game effect on the program (on the test).

FIG. 390 is a diagram showing a display indicating that the pseudo-game effect is in progress during the pseudo-game effect. Hereinafter, in the description of FIG. 390, this display is referred to as "pseudo-game display".
The pseudo-game display in this example is an example in which "FREE PLAY" is displayed near the lower side of the image display area of the image display device 23. FIG. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be a display such as "Pseudo game effect in progress" or "Reel automatic effect in progress".
Also, the pseudo-game display is located in the forefront of all layers in the display image. Therefore, the pseudo-game display is not hidden by other effects, and the player does not overlook it.
Pseudo game display is not performed during game standby (while all reels 31 are stopped).
Then, when the start switch 41 is operated and the pseudo-game effect is started, the pseudo-game display is immediately executed. As a result, the player can be informed that the pseudo-game effect has started.
Then, the left, middle, and right stop switches 42 are operated in order, and the left, middle, and right reels 31 are temporarily stopped in order. never). Then, when the pseudo-game effect ends based on the operation of the start switch 41, the pseudo-game display is terminated (erased).
It should be noted that, when the pseudo-game display is executed during the pseudo-game production, it is not necessary to execute the swing fluctuation when the reel 31 is temporarily stopped during the pseudo-game production, so in the example of FIG. The reel 31 is stationary at the time of stop, showing an example without swing fluctuation.
However, in order to make it difficult for the player to visually confirm the swing fluctuation (not accompanied by swing fluctuation), after the temporary stop of each reel 31, the reel drive signal is output at intervals of less than 500 ms or 500 ms or less. You can turn it on or off. By configuring in this way, it is possible to distinguish between the stop of the symbols in the main game and the temporary stop of the symbols in the pseudo-game effect on the program (on the test).

391 is a schematic diagram showing the front appearance of the slot machine 10. FIG.
In FIG. 391, the above-described pseudo-game display is located below the (upper) production lamp 21, and the control panel 12c (the portion where the medal slot is provided. See FIG. 59.), the start switch 41, the stop switch 42, and the like. It is provided in a range above the position. This is to ensure the visibility of the player. Therefore, an image such as “FREEPLAY” may be displayed in the image display area of the image display device 23 arranged below the (upper) effect lamp 21 .
In addition, a pseudo-game display lamp 21a (example 1) may be provided next to the display window 18 (on the right side in the example of FIG. 391).
Furthermore, a pseudo-game display lamp 21a (example 2) may be provided below the display window 18 and above the upper surface of the control panel 12c.
When the pseudo-game display lamp 21a is provided, it is lit during the pseudo-game presentation while displaying characters such as "FREEPLAY".

On the other hand, the credit number display LED 76 and the acquired number display LED 78 may be provided on the control panel 12c in the form shown in FIG. may be set in
The credit number display LED 76 and the acquired number display LED 78 are composed of a 7-segment display, and in the example of FIG. there were.
Therefore, it is conceivable to use at least a part of the segments of the 7-segment display to indicate that the pseudo-game effect is in progress. However, in such a display, the 7-segment display is not used for the pseudo-game display because it cannot clearly indicate to the player that the pseudo-game presentation is in progress.

For example, the pseudo-game display lamp 21a is a lamp and a lamp explanation (an indication (description) that the player can recognize that it is a lamp for pseudo-game production, such as "FREEPLAY", "pseudo-game production", or "reel automatic It is preferable that one side of the display range including the display of "demonstrating" etc., the same applies hereinafter) exceeds 10 mm and the area exceeds 642 mm ² .
Further, it is preferable that the lamp explanation of the pseudo-game display lamp 21a occupies "1/3" or more of the display area. By setting the lamp surface and the lamp description of the pseudo-game display lamp 21a to the size as described above, it is possible to reliably notify the player that the pseudo-game presentation is in progress during the pseudo-game presentation.
Furthermore, when the pseudo-game display lamp 21a is composed of LEDs, the number of LEDs of the pseudo-game display lamp 21a is less than the number of LEDs of the ART lamp (lamp indicating that ART is in progress), and the advantageous section lamp is preferably greater than the number of LEDs in (for example, one in the example of the advantageous section display LED 77 in FIG. 31 (the eleventh embodiment)).
Also, the lighting color of the pseudo-game display lamp 21a is preferably different from the lighting color of the ART lamp and the lighting color of the advantageous section lamp.
As a result, it is possible to ensure appropriate visibility of the pseudo-game display lamp 21a, and to correctly inform the player of that fact during the pseudo-game presentation.

In order for the player to easily know that the pseudo-game presentation is in progress, the pseudo-game display needs to be of a certain size.
As shown in FIG. 391, the longitudinal length (horizontal width) of “FREEPLAY” (pseudo game display) displayed by the image display device 23 is “W (mm)”, and the lateral length (height) is “W (mm)”. Let it be "H (mm)".
In this case, the length "W" is preferably "10 mm" or more, and "H" is preferably "10 mm" or more.
Furthermore, when the area of the pseudo-game display is "S (=W×H)", the area S is preferably set according to the image display area of the image display device 23, for example, as follows.

First, when the size of the image display device 23 is less than 7 inches, it is preferable to set the area S to 642 mm ² or more.
Secondly, when the image display device 23 is 7 inches or more, it is preferable to set the area S to be equal to or more than "the display area of the image display device 23×0.082".
Thirdly, when the image display device 23 exceeds 16 inches, it is preferable to set the area S to about "5770 mm ² ".
By setting the size of the pseudo-game display as described above, it is possible to reliably notify the player that the pseudo-game presentation is in progress during the pseudo-game presentation.

FIG. 392 is a time chart showing pseudo game display lamps and pseudo game displays.
When the start switch 41 is operated and the pseudo-game effect is executed, the pseudo-game display is output simultaneously with the start of the pseudo-game effect (in other words, immediately after the start switch 41 is operated). For example, lighting up the pseudo-game display lamp 21a, or displaying on the image display device 23 that a pseudo-game effect is in progress.
After all the reels 31 are temporarily stopped, when ending the pseudo-game effect based on the operation of the start switch 41, the pseudo-game display is ended at the timing when the start switch 41 is operated.

Also, when the AT is in progress and the push order bell is won when the start switch 41 is operated, and the push order is displayed on the instruction monitor (acquisition number display LED 78) (activates the instruction function), in the game When the pseudo-game effect is executed, the instruction monitor is not lit (the order of pushing is not displayed) during the pseudo-game effect. However, during the pseudo-game production, the image display device 23 may display an image showing the operation timing and an image display of the pressing order for production (for example, "Aim for 7!" or "Aim for 7 from the right!"). is possible. The image display does not correspond to the operation of the pointing function.

When all the reels 31 are temporarily stopped and the pseudo game performance is terminated based on the operation of the start switch 41, the instruction monitor can be turned on at the timing when the start switch 41 is operated. Therefore, after the start switch 41 is operated, the instruction monitor can be turned on even when the reels 31 have not yet restarted due to the fact that the random delay processing is being executed.
As described above, the instruction monitor is turned off during the display indicating that the pseudo-game effect is being performed. On the other hand, while the instruction monitor is lit, the display indicating that the pseudo-game effect is in progress is not performed. In other words, there is no case where the pseudo-game display is being output and the instruction monitor is lit. Thus, when the instruction monitor is on, the player can know that the main game is in progress (not in the pseudo-game presentation).
In addition, if the instruction monitor is turned on during the pseudo-game presentation, the player misunderstands that an advantageous game result cannot be obtained unless the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order displayed on the instruction monitor during the pseudo-game presentation. However, by turning off the instruction monitor during the pseudo-game effect, the possibility of misrecognition can be eliminated.

FIG. 393 is a time chart showing a pseudo-game signal, a pseudo-game progress signal, and the like.
The test signal is output from the main control board 50 to the testing machine 400. In this case, the interface board 300 (relaying the testing machine 400 and the game machine (slot machine 10) for testing) to the main control board 50 and is provided outside the gaming machine), and the test signal from the main control board 50 can be output to the testing machine 400 via the interface board 300 .
On the other hand, the test signal is not transmitted to the test machine 400 side during the pseudo-game presentation.
When the start switch 41 is operated and the pseudo-game effect is started, the main control board 50 turns on the pseudo-game signal. Thereby, a pseudo-game signal can be transmitted to the interface board 300 . Since the pseudo-game in-progress signal is kept on during the pseudo-game presentation, it continues to be sent to the interface board 300, but is not sent to the testing machine 400. - 特許庁

The interface board 300 can transmit a pseudo-game progress signal to the main control board 50 when the pseudo-game signal is received. The pseudo-game progress signal includes first to third stop switch signals, bet switch signals, and start switch signals. By transmitting these operation switch signals to the main control board 50, the main control board 50 can execute processing (temporary stop control of the reels 31, etc.) for proceeding with the pseudo-game effect.
After temporarily stopping all the reels 31, it is not necessary to operate the bet switch 40, so the bet switch signal may be unnecessary as the pseudo-game progress signal.
However, when the termination condition of the pseudo-game effect is set to the operation of the bet switch 40 and the operation of the start switch 41, the bet switch signal is required as the pseudo-game progress signal.

After temporarily stopping all the reels 31, the main control board 50 receives a start switch signal as a pseudo-game progress signal from the interface board 300, and makes it possible to end the pseudo-game presentation. This turns off the pseudo-game signal. In the market, the main control board 50 temporarily stops all the reels 31, and then allows the pseudo-game effect to be terminated based on the operation of the start switch 41 by the player.
When the pseudo-game effect is completed and the signal during pseudo-game is turned off, the condition device signal is turned on. This condition device signal corresponds to the winning combination information (test signal) when a combination is drawn based on the operation of the start switch 41 immediately before starting the pseudo-game effect. In other words, when the start switch 41 is operated and the conditional device number in the game is determined, the conditional device signal is not output before the pseudo-game effect or during the pseudo-game effect when the pseudo-game effect is executed. , control to transmit the condition device signal to the test machine 400 after the pseudo game effect is completed.

When the pseudo-game effect is completed and the reels 31 are restarted and set to a constant speed state, the reel stop possible signal is sent from the main control board 50 to the test machine via the interface board 300 in the same manner as before execution of the pseudo-game effect. 400. A stop switch signal is also output from the main control board 50 to the testing machine 400 via the interface board 300 .
On the other hand, when it is the advantageous interval, the signal during the advantageous interval is maintained in the ON state regardless of whether or not the pseudo-game effect is executed. Therefore, when it is an advantageous section before the execution of the pseudo-game effect, the processing for outputting the signal during the advantageous section continues to be executed, and the ON state of the signal during the advantageous section during and after the execution of the pseudo-game effect is maintained. As a result, it is possible to notify the testing machine 400 that it is in the advantageous section even during the pseudo-game presentation.

As described above, the interface board 300 does not transmit the pseudo-game signal to the testing machine 400 when receiving the pseudo-game signal. Further, the interface board 300 has a function for outputting a pseudo-game progress signal. On the other hand, the interface board 300 does not receive the pseudo-game signal for gaming machines that do not have the pseudo-game effect, so the pseudo-game progress signal is not output. For this reason, the interface board 300 is provided with a selector switch 300a for switching between outputting and not outputting the pseudo-game progress signal. When the changeover switch 300a is on, the function of outputting the pseudo-game progress signal is enabled, and when it is off, the function is disabled.

FIG. 394 is a diagram showing the main storage areas of the RWM 53, which will be described later in the flow chart, in the forty-third embodiment.
The bet number data (_NB_PLAY_MEDAL) at the address "F021(H)" is the same as the bet number data in FIG. 3” is stored.
The payout amount data (_NB_PAY_MEDAL) of the address "F022(H)" is the same as the payout amount data in FIG. 35 (11th embodiment). , is a storage area in which a value corresponding to the number of payouts is stored. When a minor winning combination is won, payout number data corresponding to the winning minor winning combination is stored, and medal payout processing is executed. Here, each time one medal is paid out ("1" is added to the number of credits or one actual medal is paid out (from the hopper 35)), the number of payout data is subtracted by "1". That is, it has a role as the number of times the payout process is executed. Thus, when the medal payout process is completed, the payout number data becomes "0".

The payout number data buffer (_BF_PAY_MEDAL) at the address "F023(H)" is the same as the payout number data buffer in FIG. It is sometimes a storage area for a value corresponding to the number of payouts. Here, unlike the payout number data, the payout number data buffer is not decremented for each medal payout process, and the initially stored value is maintained. Then, the value is maintained until the medal payout number update process of the next game. For example, when a small winning combination of 8 payouts is won in the relevant game, "8 (H)" is stored as the payout number data buffer, and in the next game when the winning combination is not won, the payout number data buffer is stored. "0" is overwritten.

The medal bet signal output count (_CT_MEDAL_IN) at the address “F024(H)” is a storage area for the medal bet (insertion) signal output count, and stores values from “0” to “6”. In this embodiment, the medal bet signal output count indicates the number of times the medal bet number is output as a signal to the outside, and the number of times the bet number is doubled is output. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the maximum number of bets is "3", so the maximum number of medal bet signal outputs is "6". For example, when outputting the number of bets "3", "ON (1st time) → OFF (2nd time) → ON (3rd time) → OFF (4th time) → ON (5th time) → OFF (6th time)" Become.

The medal payout signal output count (_CT_MEDAL_OUT) at the address "F025(H)" is a storage area for the number of times the medal payout signal is output, and a value of "0" to "30" is stored. The medal payout signal output count indicates the number of times the medal payout number is output as a signal to the outside, and the number of times the payout number is doubled is output. This point is the same as the number of medal bet signal outputs described above. Therefore, in this embodiment, since the maximum number of payouts is "15" (see FIGS. 118 to 121), the maximum number of medal payout signal outputs is "30".

The medal signal data (_PT_MEDAL_IO) at the address "F026(H)" is an area for storing the medal signal data, and the medal bet signal is assigned to the D6 bit and the medal payout signal is assigned to the D7 bit. This bit assignment is set to be the same as the assigned bits of the medal bet signal and the medal payout signal of the output port for outputting the medal bet signal and the medal payout signal. The medal bet signal is turned on when outputting the medal bet signal to the outside. Similarly, the medal payout signal is turned on when outputting the medal payout signal to the outside.

The LED display data (_PT_STS_LED) of the address "F027 (H)" turns on/off the game start display LED 79d (D3), the insertion display LED 79e (D4), and the replay display LED 79f (D5) among the status display LEDs 79 (FIG. 31). This is a storage area for storing OFF. For example, in a state in which medals can be inserted before the start of a game, the D4 bit of the LED display data is "1", and the insertion display LED 79e can be lit. In this case, the lighting processing of the input display LED 79e is executed in interrupt processing when the lighting timing of the LED display counter comes.

Similarly, when the game can be started, the D3 bit of the LED display data becomes "1", and the game start display LED 79d can be turned on. In this case, the lighting process of the game start display LED 79d is executed in the interruption process when the lighting timing of the game start display LED 79d comes.
Further, similarly, when the replay operation state is entered (the replay operation symbol is stopped and displayed), the D5 bit of the LED display data becomes "1", and the replay display LED 79f becomes ready to light. In this case, the lighting processing of the replay display LED 79f is executed in interrupt processing when the lighting timing of the replay display LED 79f comes.

In the medal management flag (_FL_MEDAL_STS) of the address "F028 (H)", the D0 bit indicates the acceptance state of the start switch 41, and when the operation of the start switch 41 is accepted, that is, when the start switch 41 is operable ( For example, it is set to "1" when medals are bet and before the game starts, and is set to "0" when the operation of the start switch 41 cannot be accepted (for example, while the reels 31 are rotating).

The setting change disable flag of the D1 bit is data that becomes "0" when the setting change is possible, and becomes "1" otherwise. In this embodiment, the data is set to "1" when the start switch 41 is operated and the game progresses, and the data is set to "0" when medal acceptance for the next game is started. . When changing the setting, the value of the setting change permission flag is referred to, and when the setting change prohibition flag is "1", the setting change is not permitted. However, even when the setting change disabled flag is "1", if an unrecoverable error (for example, an error in updating random numbers determined for each interrupt process) is determined, setting changes are permitted. Based on this, it becomes possible to cancel the unrecoverable error.

The winning and replay condition device number (_NB_CND_NOR) of the address "F0A9 (H)" is the same as the winning and replay condition device number shown in FIG. 138 (23rd embodiment). This is a storage area for storing the number when a replay and winning condition device operated in a game is determined. As shown in FIG. 126, when the winning numbers "1" to "24" are won, "1" to "24" are respectively stored as the winning and replay condition device numbers of the game.
The role product condition device number (_NB_CRRT_BNS) of the address "F0AA(H)" is the same as the role product condition device number shown in FIG. 138 (23rd embodiment). This is a storage area for storing numbers. As shown in FIG. 126, when winning numbers "25" to "41" are won, "1" to "17" are respectively stored as accessory condition device numbers for the game.

The minimum game time (_TM2_GAME) of addresses "F0B0(H)" and "F0B1(H)" is the same as the minimum game time shown in FIG. This is a storage area for a timer value, and an initial value is set to count the number of interrupts "3672 (D)" when it is determined that the minimum game time has elapsed. The minimum playing time in this embodiment is set to approximately "4.1" seconds (1.117 ms×3672≈4100 ms).
When the minimum game time is set in the game this time, a count of subtracting "1" is executed for each interrupt processing. Then, in the next game, the rotation of the reels 31 is started on condition that the minimum game time is "0".
"TM2" indicates a 2-byte timer, and "TM1" indicates a 1-byte timer.

Pseudo-game effect time (_TM2_FREEPLAY) of addresses "F0B2(H)" and "F0B3(H)" is a storage area for a timer value that counts a predetermined time during pseudo-game effect. In this embodiment, when 20 seconds have passed without the player operating the start switch 41 or the stop switch 42, the pseudo-game effect is terminated. Therefore, when the start switch 41 is operated at the start of the pseudo-game effect, or when the stop switch 42 is operated during the pseudo-game effect, the timer value "17897 (D)" corresponding to 20 seconds is set as the initial value, Executes a count that subtracts "1" for each interrupt processing. Then, even if the timer value becomes "0", the start switch 41 is not operated after the temporary stop of all the reels 31, or the stop switch 42 is not operated during the rotation of the reels 31 during the pseudo-game presentation. When, terminate the pseudo-game production.
For example, when the start switch 41 is operated at the start of a game, the timer value "17897 (D)" is reset. When the first stop switch 42 is operated before the timer value reaches "0", the timer value "17897 (D)" is reset.
Next, when the second stop switch 42 is operated before the timer value reaches "0", the timer value "17897 (D)" is reset. Similarly, when the third stop switch 42 is operated before the timer value reaches "0", the timer value "17897 (D)" is reset.

In contrast,
(1) Before the first stop switch 42 is operated (while all reels 31 are rotating)
(2) After the first stop switch 42 is operated and before the second stop switch 42 is operated (only the first reel 31 is temporarily stopped)
(3) After the second stop switch 42 is operated and before the third stop switch 42 is operated (state in which the first and second reels 31 are temporarily stopped)
(4) After the third stop switch 42 is operated and before the start switch 41 is operated (state in which all the reels 31 are temporarily stopped (shaking fluctuation))
Second, when the respective timer values become "0", the pseudo-game presentation is terminated.
In the cases (1) to (3) above, when ending the pseudo-game effect, the rotating reels 31 are temporarily stopped, and then the reels 31 are restarted after performing random delay processing.
In the case of (4) above, when the pseudo-game effect is terminated, the reels 31 are restarted after random delay processing is performed.

However, the control is not limited to the above, and can be controlled as follows.
When 20 seconds elapse without any stop switch 42 being operated after the start switch 41 is operated, the left reel 31 is temporarily stopped assuming that the left stop operation is accepted at that timing.
Next, 20 seconds are measured again from that point, and when 20 seconds have passed without any stop switch 42 being operated, the middle reel 31 is temporarily stopped assuming that the middle stop operation is accepted at that timing. do.
Next, 20 seconds are measured again from that point, and when 20 seconds have passed without the right stop switch 42 being operated, the right reel 31 is temporarily stopped assuming that the right stop operation is accepted at that timing. . Furthermore, after the temporary stop of all the reels 31, swing fluctuation control is executed.
In addition, 20 seconds are measured again from the temporary stop point of all the reels 31, and when 20 seconds have passed without the start switch 41 being operated, a pseudo-game effect is performed assuming that the start switch 41 was operated at that timing. Terminate, determine a random delay time, start the random delay process, and restart the reels 31 after the random delay process.

The external signal output time (_TM1_OUT_CNT) of the address "F0B4(H)" is a storage area for a timer value for measuring the output time of the medal bet signal and the medal payout signal. In this embodiment, when it is determined that the timer value has reached "0", the timer value "92 (D)" is set again (step S2972 in FIG. 399 to be described later), and "1" is subtracted for each interrupt processing. to perform a count.
The conditional device output time (_TM1_COND_OUT) at the address "F0B5(H)" is a storage area for storing the timer value for measuring the output time of the conditional device signal. is stored (step S2926 in FIG. 397), and thereafter decremented by "1" at each predetermined cycle (interrupt processing). Then, in the test signal output (FIG. 400) during interrupt processing, a conditional device signal corresponding to the conditional device output time is output as a test signal.

A replay operation state flag (_FL_REPLAY) at address "F0C1(H)" is a storage area for storing that replay is in operation. When the replay symbol combination is stopped and displayed at the end of the game, the replay operation state flag is turned on ("1"). Further, when the replay operation state flag is ON, a replay is performed, and the regame operation state flag is turned OFF ("0") at the end of the relevant game. In the present embodiment, "1" is stored when the replay operation state flag is ON. You can remember.

The action state flag (_FL_ACTION) at the address "F0C2(H)" is the same as the storage area corresponding to the action state flag shown in FIG. 35 (eleventh embodiment), and stores the action state flag of the character. It can be determined whether or not the character is in operation by checking whether any bit corresponding to the character is "1". The role of this embodiment is 1BB and RB (see FIG. 122), and 1BB is assigned to the D0 bit and RB is assigned to the D1 bit. The operating state flag is updated, for example, in the game end check process (not shown in FIG. 50).

The replay state identification information flag (_FL_RT_INF) at the address "F0C3(H)" is a storage area for storing data indicating whether or not it is time to output the replay state identification signal. A value of "FF (H) (ON)" is stored when the replay state identification signal is output, and a value of "00 (H) (OFF)" is stored otherwise.
The replay state identification information flag is turned on at the start of the game, and turned off at the start switch acceptance processing described later. In addition, it may be configured to be turned off after a predetermined period (for example, about 6 ms (6 interrupts)) has elapsed.

The section type number (_NB_ADV_KND) of the address "F0C4(H)" is the same as the section type number in FIG. 138 (23rd embodiment), and is a storage area for storing a number indicating whether or not it is an advantageous section. . When it is an advantageous section, "1" is stored, and when it is a non-advantageous section, "0" is stored.
The advantageous interval clear counter (_CT_ADV_CLR) of addresses "F0C5(H)" and "F0C6(H)" is the same as the advantageous interval clear counter in FIG. decrement counter). When shifting to the advantageous section, the initial value "1500 (D)" is set, and "1" is subtracted for each game during the advantageous section. And when it becomes "0", it satisfies the condition for ending the advantageous section.

The pseudo-game effect number (_NB_FREEPLAY) of the address "F0C7 (H)" stores a value other than "0" when it is decided to execute the pseudo-game effect, and "0" when the pseudo-game effect is not executed. ” is a storage area for the flag. In this embodiment, three types of pseudo-game effects are provided, and a value corresponding to this storage area is stored according to which type of pseudo-game effect is to be executed.
The types of pseudo-game effects include, for example, what kind of symbol combination can be temporarily stopped, how many times the pseudo-game effects are executed, and the like.
A predetermined value other than "0" is stored in the pseudo-game performance number, the pseudo-game performance is executed, and when the pseudo-game performance is finished, the pseudo-game performance number is updated to "0".

The pseudo-game effect state flag (_FL_FREEPLAY) at the address "F0C8(H)" is a storage area in which a predetermined value is stored during the pseudo-game effect, and "0" is stored otherwise. If the pseudo-game effect state flag is not "0", it indicates that the pseudo-game effect is being performed, and if the pseudo-game effect state flag is "0", it indicates that the pseudo-game effect is not being performed.

Next, the flow of information processing in the 43rd embodiment will be described using a flowchart.
FIG. 395 is a flowchart showing game start set processing (M_GAME_SET) in the 43rd embodiment. The game start set process is described, for example, in FIG. 42 (11th embodiment), but this does not mean that the process of FIG. 42 is not executed. It executes the processing according to the embodiment.
First, in step S2861, the main control board 50 turns on the replay state identification information flag (_FL_RT_INF). This process is a process of storing the value "FF (H)" corresponding to the output of the replay state identification signal in the replay state identification information flag. In addition, although "FF (H)" is stored in this embodiment, it is possible to grasp whether or not the replay state identification signal is to be output (whether or not the condition device signal is to be output). Any value may be stored as long as the information is sufficient.
Next, proceeding to step S2862, the main control board 50 determines whether or not an interrupt process has occurred. When interrupt processing has not occurred, it waits until interrupt processing occurs, and when it is determined that interrupt processing has occurred, the process proceeds to step S2863. In step S2863, the same processing as in step S2862 is executed again. When it is determined that interrupt processing has occurred, the process proceeds to step S2864.

Through steps S2862 and S2863 described above, standby processing (also referred to as "wait processing") for waiting until two interrupt processing occurs is executed. By means of steps S2862 and S2863, standby processing is executed for a maximum of "2.235 ms". Note that the interrupt process is executed even while the standby process is being executed.
In this embodiment, steps S2862 and S2863 are configured to execute standby processing for waiting until two interrupt processing occurs. It may be about 5 times.
At the next step S2864, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the replay operation state flag (_FL_REPLAY) is on. When it is determined that the replay operation state flag is ON, the process proceeds to step S2865, and when it is determined that it is not ON, the process proceeds to step S2867.

In step S2865, the main control board 50 sets the specified number to the bet number data (_NB_PLAY_MEDAL). For example, when the prescribed number in the current game is "3", "3" is stored as the bet number data.
Next, proceeding to step S2866, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the number of credits is "50 (D)". When it is determined that the number of credits is "50 (D)", that is, the upper limit, the process proceeds to step S2869 (processing at the start of medal acceptance (Fig. 396)), and when it is determined that the number of credits is not "50 (D)". goes to step S2867.
In step S2867, the main control board 50 turns on the blocker 45 (a state in which passage of medals is permitted). Note that the blocker 45 is off before step S2867. Next, the flow advances to step S2868 to turn on the input display LED 79e. This process is to set the D4 bit in the LED display data (_PT_STS_LED) to "1". Then, the process advances to step S2869 to shift to medal reception start processing.

FIG. 396 is a flow chart showing processing at the start of medal acceptance in step S2869 of FIG.
First, in step S2881, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the input switch signal is on. If it is determined that the input switch signal is on, the process proceeds to step S2882, and if it is determined that it is not on, the process proceeds to step S2886.
In step S2882, "1" is added to the bet number data (_NB_PLAY_MEDAL). Next, proceeding to step S2883, it is determined whether or not medals cannot be inserted. This judgment is "Yes" when the number of bets reaches the specified number and the number of credits reaches the upper limit number "50". When it is determined that medals cannot be inserted, the process proceeds to step S2884, and when it is determined that medals can be inserted, the process proceeds to step S2886.

In step S2884, the main control board 50 turns off the blocker 45 (a state in which passage of medals is not permitted). Next, the flow advances to step S2885 to turn off the input display LED 79e. This process is to set the D4 bit of the LED display data (_PT_STS_LED) to "0". Then, the process proceeds to step S2886.
In step S2886, it is determined whether or not the number-of-bets data (_NB_PLAY_MEDAL) has reached a specified number (the number of bets on which a game can be started). If it is determined to be the specified number, the process proceeds to step S2887, and if it is determined to be not the specified number, the process returns to step S2881.

In step S2887, the game start display LED 79d is turned on. This process is to set the D3 bit of the LED display data (_PT_STS_LED) to "1".
At the next step S2888, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the start switch 41 is turned on. When the start switch 41 is detected to be turned on, the process advances to step S2889 to execute the start switch acceptance process (M_START_CTL).
Whether or not the start switch 41 is turned on is determined by determining whether or not the D6 bit of the input port rising data A (_PT_IN_UP) is "1" in FIG. 133 (23rd embodiment). If there is, it is determined that the start switch 41 has been operated.
Although not shown in FIG. 394, the input port level data A (_PT_IN_A_LV), the input port level data A (previous time) (_PT_IN_A_BK), and the Input port rising data A (_PT_IN_UP) is provided.

FIG. 397 is a flow chart showing the start switch acceptance process (M_START_CTL) in step S2889 of FIG.
At step S2901, the main control board 50 turns the blocker 45 off. In other words, after the start switch 41 is operated, it is controlled so as not to accept medals even if they are inserted. At the next step S2902, the main control board 50 turns off the game start display LED 79d. This process is to set the D3 bit in the LED display data (_PT_STS_LED) to "0".
In the next step S2903, the main control board 50 turns off the input display LED 79e. This process is to set the D4 bit in the LED display data (_PT_STS_LED) to "0". Therefore, the input display LED 79e can be turned off immediately after the blocker 45 is turned off.
When the start switch acceptance process is executed by the above process, the blocker 45 is turned off, and the game start display LED 79d and the insertion display LED 79e are extinguished.

Next, proceeding to step S2904, the main control board 50 turns off the replay state identification information flag (_FL_RT_INF). This process is a process of setting the replay state identification information flag to "0". It should be noted that the replay state identification information flag is turned on at step S2861 in FIG. 395 (when the game is started). Further, when the ON state of the start switch 41 is detected, the replay state identification signal is turned OFF, so that the replay state identification information flag is set to "0" based on the ON state of the start switch 41 being detected. When the replay state identification information flag becomes "0", the replay state identification signal is not output in the interrupt process.
In the next step S2905, the built-in random number is stored in the MPU register (random number soft latch register). Here, a random number is latched (acquired), and whether or not the acquired random number is a random number corresponding to winning is determined in step S2917, which will be described later.
In the next step S2906, the start switch acceptance permission flag is cleared. This process is to set the D0 bit of the medal management flag (_FL_MEDAL_STS) to "0".
The flow advances to step S2907 to clear the setting change permission flag. This process is a process of setting the D1 bit of the medal management flag to "1". This makes it impossible to change the settings.

In the next step S2908, reading of bet medals is executed. The number of bet medals read here is stored in the A register. In the next step S2909, the main control board 50 sets an output request for starting reel rotation.
Next, proceeding to step S2910, the number of bet medals (A register value) read in step S2908 is set in the E register.

In the next step S2911, control command set 1 is executed. This process is a process of storing the information set in steps S2909 and S2910 in the control command buffer.
In step S2912, reading of bet medals is executed. Then, the read number of bet medals is stored in the A register. Although the bet medals are read in step S2908, the A register value can be changed by the control command set 1 of step S2911, so the bet medals are read again.
It should be noted that the number of automatically bet medals is set as the number of bet medals when the replay wins. Next, the process advances to step S2913 to double the read number of bet medals. This process is a process of adding the A register value and the A register value and storing the added value in the A register. Furthermore, the address (F024 (H)) of the medal bet signal output count is stored in the HL register.

In the next step S2914, interrupt processing is prohibited. Next, the process advances to step S2915 to set the medal bet signal output count. In this process, the value stored at the address indicated by the HL register value (the number of medal bet signal outputs) is added to the A register (number of medals bet after doubling), and the value after the addition is stored in the A register. It is a process to Furthermore, the value of the A register is stored at the address (F024(H)) indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the medal bet signal output count is updated. Then, the flow advances to step S2916 to permit interrupt processing.

The processing of steps S2914 to S2916 described above prohibits interrupts before and after updating the medal bet signal output count. By prohibiting the interruption, it is possible to prevent the interruption processing from being executed while the medal bet signal is being updated, and the processing for updating the medal bet signal output count from being executed. That is, after the processing for updating the medal bet signal output frequency is finished, the interrupt processing is permitted to permit the medal bet signal to be updated.

Further, in this embodiment, when outputting the medal bet signal, the actual number of bets is doubled, and this value is set as the number of outputs. The reason for this control is that when the bet medal belt signal is output to the outside as a pulse signal that repeats on and off, the number of bets is controlled by two times of on and off. This also applies to the medal payout signal. When the medal payout signal is output to the outside, the number of payouts is doubled, the value is set as the number of times the medal payout signal is output, and control is performed so that the number of payouts is represented by two times of ON and OFF. .

Next, proceeding to step S2917, the combination lottery means 61 executes lottery processing for a winning combination. This process is a process of drawing a winning number based on the random number obtained in step S2905. When the winning number is determined, the winning and replay condition device number corresponding to the determined winning number is stored in the memory area of the address "F0A9 (H)", and the accessory condition device number corresponding to the determined winning number is stored. , is stored in the storage area at the address "F0AA(H)".

In the next step S2918, the main control board 50 determines the transition to the advantageous section. In the present embodiment, the winning numbers are associated with the presence or absence of winning in the advantageous zone transition lottery, and when the winning number is determined, the lottery result of the advantageous zone transition lottery is determined. Here, when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section, "1" is set to the section type number (address "F0C4(H)").

In the next step S2919, a game start process in the main game state is executed. In this process, lottery, counter update, etc. are executed according to the main game state of the current game.
In the next step S2920, a symbol stop signal set (S_IF_SET) is executed. This process is a process for outputting a test signal regarding the operation timing and pressing order of the stop switch 42 to the tester side, and corresponds to the process shown in FIG. 141 (23rd embodiment).
When the gaming machine is actually installed in the hall (store), the gaming machine is not connected to the testing machine, so the testing machine does not actually receive the test signal. However, since the pattern stop signal set (S_IF_SET) exists in the program of the main processing, even after the gaming machine is installed in the hall, every game, test signals regarding the operation timing and pressing order of the stop switch 42 are generated. The output processing itself is executed.

In the next step S2921, a lottery process for pseudo-game effects is executed. This process is a process for determining whether or not to execute a pseudo-game effect, and when the pseudo-game effect number is "0", the random value obtained in step S2905, and various lotteries in steps S2917 to S2919 Based on the result, it is determined whether or not to execute a pseudo-game effect. It should be noted that there is a case where it is decided to execute the pseudo-game effect before the game this time, in this case the lottery (decision) in step S2921 is not executed.
Also, when it is determined to execute a pseudo-game effect in step S2921, the determined pseudo-game effect number is stored in the address "F0C7 (H)".

Next, the process proceeds to step S2922, and it is determined whether or not to execute a pseudo-game effect in the game this time. When it is determined that the pseudo-game effect is to be executed in the game this time, the process proceeds to step S2923, and the pseudo-game effect processing (FIG. 398 to be described later) is executed. After that, the process proceeds to step S2924. On the other hand, when it is determined not to execute the pseudo-game effect in step S2922, the process proceeds to step S2924.
In addition, even if it is determined to execute the pseudo-game effect in step S2921, it may be executed after several games from the current game, and the pseudo-game effect is not necessarily executed in the game this time.

In step S2924, it is determined whether or not the minimum playing time has elapsed. This process is a process of determining whether or not the minimum game time timer value of the addresses "F0B0(H)" and "F0B1(H)" is "0".
If it is determined that the minimum playing time has passed, the process advances to step S2925 to set the minimum playing time. This process is a process of setting the minimum game time timer value "3672 (D)" to the addresses "F0B0 (H)" and "F0B1 (H)". When the minimum game time is set in step S2925, the timer value is decremented by "1" for each interrupt from this time point, and in step S2924 in the next game, it is determined whether or not the timer value is "0". be.

The flow then advances to step S2926 to store the condition device information output time. This process is a process of storing the timer value "58 (D)" in the condition device output time of the address "F0B5 (H)". Although the details will be described later, in the present embodiment, for a predetermined period of time between “58×1.1175 ms=64.815 ms”, the accessory condition device signal and the winning and replay condition device signal are output to the testing machine 400. process. The condition device output time set here is subtracted by "1" from the next interrupt process in step S455 (timer measurement) of FIG. 151 (23rd embodiment).
The condition device signal is a signal to be output to the testing machine, and is not actually output in the market. However, the RWM 53 (storage area) capable of storing the ROM 54 that stores the program processing necessary for outputting and the information that is the basis of the conditional device signal and the output time of the conditional device signal is the gaming machine (slot machine 10) on the market. is also provided. In other words, in the market, the ROM 54 and RWM 53 provided in the gaming machine execute processing for outputting the condition device signal, but the condition device signal is not output.

Next, the process advances to step S2927 to execute push order instruction number setting (M_ORG_INF). This processing is the same as the processing shown in FIG. 48 (11th embodiment), and when the current game is a game in which the instruction function is activated (lights up the instruction monitor), the push order instruction number is set to the acquired number of RWM53. This corresponds to the process of storing data.
The process then advances to step S2928 to set the acceleration start state. This process is similar to step S768 in FIG. 140 (23rd embodiment), and the first reel drive state (_WK_RL1_STS), the second reel drive state (_WK_RL2_STS), and the third reel drive state (_WK_RL3_STS). , to store "3" (00000011 (B)) indicating the start of acceleration. After this process, the reel 31 starts rotating.

When the pseudo-game effect is executed, the reel driving state is set to "3" under the condition that the random delay time has passed. For example, as shown in FIG.
Random delay time for the first (left) reel: t1
Random delay time for the third (right) reel: t3 (t3>t1)
Second (middle) reel random delay time: t2 (t2>t3)
is set to
Random delay time "t1" for the first reel has passed ↓
Store "3" in the 1st reel drive state (_WK_RL1_STS) ↓
The random delay time "t3" for the 3rd reel has passed ↓
"3" is stored in the 3rd reel drive state (_WK_RL3_STS) ↓
Random delay time "t2" for the second reel has passed ↓
"3" is stored in the second reel drive state (_WK_RL2_STS) and processed in order.

In the start switch acceptance process described above, the processes before and after the pseudo-game effect (step S2923) are as follows.
1. (1) Output of medal bet signal Since the output number of medal bet signals is set in step S2915, an interrupt process (FIG. 151 (23rd A medal bet signal is output in external signal output in step S466 of embodiment). Therefore, even in the game in which the pseudo game effect is executed, the output processing of the medal bet signal is started before the pseudo game effect.
(2) Design stop signal set The design stop signal set in step S2920 is executed before the pseudo-game effect. Therefore, the stop operation position information corresponding to the winning combination of the current game is output to the testing machine 400 before the pseudo-game effect, so that the test can proceed without waiting for the end of the pseudo-game effect. .

2. Processing executed after the pseudo-game effect (1) Determining whether the minimum playing time has elapsed and saving the minimum playing time It is considered that "4.1 seconds" have passed since the minimum playing time saving process in step S2925 of the game.
Therefore, there is no problem even if it is determined whether or not the minimum game time has elapsed after the pseudo-game effect is completed.
(2) Preservation of conditional device output time After the end of the pseudo-game effect in step S2923, the conditional device output time is saved in step S2926. Therefore, no condition device signal is output to the testing machine 400 during the pseudo-game presentation. As a result, it is possible to prevent the output of a signal that may mislead the testing machine 400 .
(3) Push order instruction number set After the pseudo-game effect is completed in step S2923, the push order instruction number is set in step S2927. For this reason, it is after the pseudo game effect that the push order instruction information is displayed on the instruction monitor when the push order bell is won during the AT. In other words, the pushing order instruction information is not displayed on the instruction monitor during the pseudo-game effect. Therefore, when the pressing order instruction information is displayed on the instruction monitor, the player can know that the main game is being played.

FIG. 398 is a flow chart showing pseudo-game effect processing in step S2923 of FIG.
At step S2940, the main control board 50 stores "10 (H)" in the pseudo-game effect state flag. When the value of the pseudo-game effect state flag is "10 (H)", it indicates that the pseudo-game effect is in progress.
In the next step S2941, the main control board 50 sets a temporary stop table. This processing defines the temporary stop positions of the reels 31 during the pseudo-game effect, and is different from the stop position determination table used in this game. Also, only one type of temporary stop table may be provided, or a plurality of types may be provided according to the combination of symbols to be temporarily stopped, and a temporary stop table corresponding to the pseudo-game effect to be executed may be selected.
As in this game, the temporary stop table may determine the temporary stop position so that the maximum number of moving symbols is within 4 symbols from the moment the stop switch 42 is operated, or the maximum number of moving symbols is 5 symbols. The temporary stop position may be determined as described above.

In the next step S2942, the rotation of the reel 31 is started. Next, proceeding to step S2943, the initial value of the pseudo-game presentation time (timer value) is set to the address "F0B2 (H)".
In the next step S2944, it is determined whether or not the pseudo-game presentation time has become "0". When it is determined that the pseudo-game effect time is not "0", the process proceeds to step S2945, and when it is determined that the pseudo-game effect time is "0", the process proceeds to step S2954.
In step S2945, it is determined whether the stop switch 42 has been operated. When it is determined that the stop switch 42 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S2946, and when it is determined that the stop switch 42 has not been operated, the process returns to step S2944.

Although details will be described later, for example, in this game, when the stop switch 42 is operated, the level data of the start switch 41 is determined, and when the level data of the start switch 41 is "1", that is, the start switch When the stop switch 42 is operated with the switch 41 turned on, the operation of the stop switch 42 is not accepted and the reel 31 is not controlled to stop.
On the other hand, in the pseudo-game effect, when the stop switch 42 is operated, the level data of the start switch 41 is not judged. Therefore, even if the stop switch 42 is operated while the start switch 41 is turned on, the reel 31 is temporarily stopped. As a result, the stop switch 42 is activated under the condition that the start switch 41 is operated during the pseudo-game production, and the stop switch 42 is activated under the condition that the start switch 41 is operated. The player can identify that the game is in progress.

In step S2946, the reel 31 corresponding to the operated stop switch 42 is temporarily stopped. Then, the process advances to step S2947 to reset the pseudo-game production time.
Next, in step S2948, it is determined whether or not all the reels 31 have been temporarily stopped. When it is determined that all the reels 31 have been temporarily stopped, the process proceeds to step S2949, in which it is determined that all the reels 31 have not been temporarily stopped. If not, the process returns to step S2944.

In step S2949, shake fluctuation control is executed for all reels 31 that are temporarily stopped. Next, proceeding to step S2950, it is determined whether or not the pseudo-game presentation time is "0". When it is determined that the pseudo-game effect time is "0", the process proceeds to step S2952, and when it is determined that the pseudo-game effect time is not "0", the process proceeds to step S2951.
In step S2951, it is determined whether or not the start switch 41 has been operated. If it is determined that the start switch 41 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S2952, and if it is determined that the start switch 41 has not been operated, the process returns to step S2949.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the pseudo-game effect time is "0" in step S2944 and the process proceeds to step S2954, the spinning reels 31 are temporarily stopped. Then, the process proceeds to step S2952. When the rotating reel 31 is temporarily stopped, the swing fluctuation control executed when all the reels 31 are temporarily stopped based on the operation of the stop switch 42 is performed until the reel 31 is restarted. It may or may not run.
In step S2954, all the rotating reels 31 may be temporarily stopped, or only one reel 31 may be temporarily stopped as described above.
In step S2952, the pseudo-game effect state flag and the pseudo-game effect number are cleared ("0" is stored in both storage areas). Next, the flow advances to step S2953 to execute random delay processing, and the processing according to this flowchart ends. It should be noted that reels 31 are re-changed sequentially from the reel 31 for which the random delay time has passed (step S2928 in FIG. 397).
The order of steps S2952 and S2953 may be reversed. In other words, the random delay processing may be the processing that is executed after the pseudo-game effect is completed (random delay processing is executed after clearing the pseudo-game effect state flag and the pseudo-game effect number), or random The delay process may be the process during the pseudo-game effect (clear the pseudo-game effect state flag and the pseudo-game effect number after the end of the random delay process).

Further, as is clear from FIG. 398, the update processing of the advantageous section clear counter is not executed at the end of the pseudo-game effect.
The advantageous section clear counter is updated at step S945 during the game end check process of FIG. 148 (23rd embodiment). In other words, the advantageous section clear counter is updated at the end of the game (not updated at the end of the pseudo-game effect).
Therefore, when the pseudo game effect is executed, the advantageous zone clear counter is subtracted by "1" when the pseudo game effect is executed and then the main game is executed. Therefore, no matter how many times the pseudo-game effect is executed, the player will not be disadvantaged.
Also, even if the pseudo-game effect is executed, the processing related to the instruction function such as subtraction of the number of games in the information game state (AT) and the addition of the information game state based on the temporary stop pattern in the pseudo-game effect is not executed. It is configured.

FIG. 399 is a flow chart showing external signal output in step S466 of FIG. 151 in the forty-third embodiment.
It is assumed that the interrupt processing in the 43rd embodiment is the same as that in FIG. 151 (23rd embodiment).
In FIG. 399, in step S2971, the following processing is executed.
(1) Store the address (F026(H)) of the RWM 53 storing medal signal data in the DE register.
(2) Store the external signal output time of address "F0B4(H)" in the A register.
(3) When the A register value is "0" (zero flag = "1"), it is determined that the external signal output time has ended. If it is determined that the external signal output time has ended, the process advances to step S2972, and if it is determined that the external signal output time has not ended, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

In step S2972, the timer value "92 (D)" is set as the external signal output time.
In the next step S2973, the following processing is executed.
(1) The address (F024(H)) of the RWM 53 storing the medal bet signal output count is stored in the HL register.
(2) Store the value stored at the address indicated by the HL register value in the A register.
(3) When the A register value is "0", it is determined that there is no medal bet signal output. When it is determined in step S2973 that the medal bet signal has been output the number of times, the process proceeds to step S2974, and when it is determined that the medal bet signal has not been output, the process proceeds to step S2976.

In the next step S2974, "1" is subtracted from the value (the bet signal output count) stored at the address (F024(H)) indicated by the HL register value.
In the next step S2975, the D6 bit of the C register is set to "1". Here, a predetermined output port for outputting an external signal is provided, and a medal bet signal is output from the D6 bit of the predetermined output port, and a medal payout signal is output from the D7 bit of the predetermined output port. In step S2975, the D6 bit of the C register is set to "1" in order to store the signal output from the predetermined output port in the C register.

In the next step S2976, the following processing is executed.
(1) Set the address value indicated by the HL register value to "+1". As a result, the HL register value changes from the address "F024(H)" indicating the number of medal bet signal outputs to the address "F025(H)" indicating the number of medal payout signal outputs.
(2) The value (the number of medal payout signal outputs) stored at the address indicated by the HL register value is stored in the A register.
(3) When the A register value is not "0", it is determined that the medal payout signal has been output. When it is determined in step S2976 that the medal payout signal has been output the number of times, the process proceeds to step S2977, and when it is determined that the medal payout signal has not been output, the process proceeds to step S2979.

In step S2977, "1" is subtracted from the medal payout signal output count. Specifically, "1" is subtracted from the value stored at the address (F025(H)) indicated by the HL register value.
In the next step S2978, the D7 bit of the C register is set to "1". The D7 bit corresponds to the D7 bit (medal payout signal) of the predetermined output port. Then, the process advances to step S2979.

In step S2979, ON/OFF inversion of the output bit is performed. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) The value (medal signal data) stored at the address "F026(H)" is stored in the A register.
(2) Perform an XOR operation on the A register value and the C register value, and store the operation result in the A register.
(3) Store the A register value at address "F026(H)" (medal signal data).

Here, in the C register value, the D7 bit is always "1" when the medal payout signal output count is not "0". Also, when the medal bet signal output count is not "0", the D6 bit is always "1".
On the other hand, in the medal signal data (F026(H)) which is the A register value, the D7 bit is "1" when the medal payout signal is on, and is "0" when it is off. Similarly, in the medal signal data, the D6 bit is "1" when the medal bet signal is on, and is "0" when the medal bet signal is off.

Therefore, for example, when the medal payout signal is "1" and the medal payout signal output count is not "0",
A register value: 10000000
C register value: 10000000
After XOR operation: 00000000 (A register value after update)
Thus, the updated medal payout signal becomes "0".
Further, when the medal payout signal is "0" and the medal payout signal output count is not "0",
A register value: 00000000
C register value: 10000000
After XOR operation: 10000000 (A register value after update)
Thus, the updated medal payout signal becomes "1".

The same applies to medal bet signals. For example, when the medal payout signal is "0", the medal bet signal is "1", the medal payout signal output count is not "0", and the medal bet signal output count is not "0",
A register value: 01000000
C register value: 11000000
After XOR operation: 10000000 (A register value after update)
Thus, the updated medal payout signal is "1" and the medal bet signal is "0".
Similarly, for example, when the medal payout signal is "1", the medal bet signal is "0", the medal payout signal output count is not "0", and the medal bet signal output count is not "0",
A register value: 100000000
C register value: 11000000
After XOR operation: 01000000 (A register value after update)
Thus, the updated medal payout signal is "0" and the updated medal bet signal is "1".

Next, the process advances to step S2980 to set the output data of the medal bet signal and the medal payout signal. This process is a process of storing the value stored in the address "F026(H)" (medal signal data) in the A register.
By this processing, when the medal payout signal is on, the D7 bit of the A register becomes "1", and when the medal bet signal is on, the D6 bit of the A register becomes "1".
Then, the A register value is stored in the predetermined output port. As a result, an external signal is output from a predetermined output port. Then, the processing according to this flow chart ends.

With the above processing, when the medal bet signal and the medal payout signal are output, the signal is turned on at a period corresponding to the external signal output time timer value "92 (D)" (92 x 1.1175 ms = 102.81 ms). A signal and an off signal are repeatedly output. Further, each time the timer value "92(D)" of the external signal output time becomes "0", the number of times the medal bet signal is output and the number of times the medal payout signal is output are subtracted by "1".

FIG. 400 is a flow chart showing test signal output in step S842 of FIG. 151 in the forty-third embodiment.
First, in step S2991, the main control board 50 sets OFF data of the closing request lamp signal. The OFF data of the closing request lamp signal is "00000000 (B)". This data is stored in a predetermined register (eg, A register).

At the next step S2992, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the replay operation state flag (_FL_REPLAY) is on. In this process, the replay operation state flag is read, and when it is not "0", it is determined that the regame operation state flag is ON, and when it is "0", it is determined that the regame operation state flag is not ON. When it is determined that the replay operation state flag is ON, the process proceeds to step S2995, and when it is determined that it is not ON, the process proceeds to step S2993.

At step S2993, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the input display LED 79e is on. In this process, it is determined whether or not the D4 bit of the LED display data (_PT_STS_LED) is "1". When it is determined that the input display LED 79e is on, the process proceeds to step S2994, and when it is determined that it is not on, the process proceeds to step S2995.
In step S2994, ON data of the closing request lamp signal is set. In this embodiment, the ON data of the closing request lamp signal is "01000000 (B)" (6th bit is "1"). An OR operation is performed on this data and the data stored in the predetermined register, and the value after the operation is stored in the predetermined register. Then, the process advances to step S2995. When the data stored in the predetermined register is "00000000(B)", the process of simply storing "01000000(B)", which is the ON data of the turn-on request lamp signal, in the predetermined register. may be This is because in this case, even if the OR operation is omitted, the same result as when the OR operation is performed can be obtained.
As described above, when the replay operation state flag (_FL_REPLAY) is ON, the ON data of the input request lamp signal is not generated, so the input request lamp signal is not output.

In step S2995, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the advantageous section clear counter (_CT_ADV_CLR) is "0". When it is determined that the advantageous section clear counter is not "0", the process proceeds to step S2996, and when it is determined to be "0", the process proceeds to step S2997.
In step S2996, ON data of the signal during the advantageous section is set. The ON data of the signal during the advantageous section is "10000000 (B)" (the 7th bit is "1"). An OR operation is performed on this data and the data stored in the predetermined register, and the operation result is stored in the predetermined register.

For example, when the ON data of the input request ramp signal is set in step S2993 and "01000000 (B)" is stored in the predetermined register, the ON data of the signal during the advantageous interval is "10000000 (B)". If there is, "11000000(B)" obtained by ORing "01000000(B)" and "10000000(B)" is stored in the predetermined register. Then, the process advances to step S2998.
On the other hand, in step S2997, off data of the signal during the advantageous section is set. The OFF data of the signal during the advantageous interval is "00000000 (B)". An OR operation is performed on this data and the data stored in the predetermined register, and the operation result is stored in the predetermined register. Then, the process advances to step S2998. Since the OFF data of the signal during the advantageous period is "00000000(B)", the OR operation of this data and the data stored in the predetermined register may be omitted.

In step S2998, it is determined whether or not the replay state operation flag (_FL_REPLAY) is on. This determination is made by reading the value of the replay operation state flag, and when it is "0", it is determined that the regame operation state flag is not ON, and when it is not "0", it is determined that the regame operation state flag is ON. do. When it is determined that the replay operation state flag is not ON, the process proceeds to step S2999, and when it is determined to be ON, the process proceeds to step S3000.
In step S2999, off data of the replaying signal is set. The OFF data of the replaying signal is "00000000 (B)". An OR operation is performed on this data and the data stored in the predetermined register, and the operation result is stored in the predetermined register. Then, the process proceeds to step S3001. Note that the OR operation may be omitted as in step S2997.

On the other hand, in step S3000, ON data of the replaying signal is set. The ON data of the replaying signal is the value "20 (H)" (00100000 (B)) when the replaying state operation flag (_FL_REPLAY) is ON (see FIG. 394). An OR operation is performed on this data and the data stored in the predetermined register, and the operation result is stored in the predetermined register. For example, when the data stored in the predetermined data is "11000000 (B)", the value "11100000 (B)" obtained by ORing this value and the ON data "00100000 (B)" of the replaying signal )” in the predetermined register. Then, the process proceeds to step S3001.

In step S3001, signal data during the role is set from the operation state flag (_FL_ACTION). This process is a process of reading the data of the operating state flag, executing an OR operation with the data stored in the predetermined register, and storing the operation result in the predetermined register. When the data stored in the predetermined register is, for example, "11100000 (B)" mentioned above, and the data of the operation status flag (_FL_ACTION) is, for example, "00000011 (B)" (1BB and RB in operation), "11100011(B)" obtained by ORing both data is stored in the predetermined register.

FIG. 401 shows Example 1 of the flowchart following FIG.
When proceeding to step S3002 in FIG. 401, it is determined whether or not the pseudo-game effect state flag (_FL_FREEPLAY) is ON. Here, when the pseudo-game effect state flag is not "0", it is determined to be ON, and when the pseudo-game effect state flag is "0", it is determined to be OFF.
When it is determined that the pseudo-game effect state flag is not ON, the process proceeds to step S3003, and the OFF data of the pseudo-game effect signal is set. Here, the value "00000000 (B)" of the pseudo-game effect state flag and the data stored in the predetermined register are ORed, and the result of the calculation is stored in the predetermined register. Then, the process advances to step S3005. Note that the OR operation may be omitted as in step S2997.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the pseudo-game effect state flag is ON in step S3002 and the process proceeds to step S3004, the ON data of the pseudo-game effect signal is set. Here, the value "10 (H)" or "00010000 (B)" of the pseudo-game effect state flag and the data stored in the predetermined register are ORed, and the result of the calculation is stored in the predetermined register. Then, the process advances to step S3005.

At step S3005, the data stored in the predetermined register is output as a test signal. By the above processing, as shown on the right side of step S3005, the 0th to 3rd bits are the operating state flag signal, the 4th bit is the simulated game effect signal, the 5th bit is the replaying signal, and the 6th bit is turned on. A request ramp signal and a test signal in which the 7th bit is a signal during an advantageous interval are output. After outputting the test signal in step S3005, the predetermined register is cleared.
Next, proceeding to step S3006, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the replay state identification information flag (_FL_RT_INF) is on. When the replay state identification information flag is "0", it is determined that it is not ON, and the process proceeds to step S3008. On the other hand, when the replay state identification information flag is other than "0", it is determined that it is ON, and the process proceeds to step S3007.

In step S3007, replay state identification signal data is set. This process is a process of reading the data of the RT state number (_NB_RT_STS) (see FIG. 133) and storing it in the predetermined register. For example, when the current RT is RT1, the RT state number (_NB_RT_STS) is, for example, "00000001 (B)", so this data is read and stored in the predetermined register. Then, in step S3012, the data stored in the predetermined register can be processed for outputting as a replay state identification signal. This completes the processing according to this flowchart.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the replay state identification signal is not ON in step S3006 and the process proceeds to step S3008, the main control board 50 reads data of the conditional device output time (_TM1_COND_OUT), and according to the value of the conditional device output time , the process proceeds to steps S3009 to S3011. For example, when the conditional device output time is a value of "58 (D)" to "49 (D)" or "0 (D)", the process proceeds to step S3009, and data "00000000 (B)" is set to the conditional device signal. set.
Here, the conditional device output time is between 10 interrupts (11.175 ms) and has a value of "58 (D)" to "49 (D)". As a result, processing for outputting "00000000 (B)" as the condition device signal can be executed for about 10 ms. Therefore, during 10 interrupts (11.175 ms), processing for outputting "00000000 (B)" as the condition device signal can be executed.
Since the main process continues while "00000000(B)" is being output as the condition device signal, no game delay occurs.

Also, when the condition device output time is between "48 (D)" and "25 (D)", the process advances to step S3010 to set the data of the accessory condition device signal.
Here, when setting the data of the role product condition device signal, the 0 to 5 bits of the role product condition device number are 0 to 5 bits, the 6 bit is "0", and the 7 bit is "1". data is stored in the predetermined register.

Furthermore, when the condition device output time is between "24 (D)" and "1 (D)", the process advances to step S3011 to set winning and replay condition device signal data.
Here, when setting the data of the winning and replay condition device signal, the 0 to 5 bits of the winning and replay condition device number, the 6th bit is "1", and the 7th bit is "0". ” is stored in the predetermined register.
Then, each advances to step S3012 to output the condition device signal as the test signal.
As described above, in the test signal output, the operating state flag signal, the simulated game effect signal, the replay signal, the input request lamp signal, and the advantageous section signal are output as the test signal. A conditional device signal is then output as the test signal.

In addition, in the example 1 of FIG. 401, among the test signals output in step S3005, it is an example in which the 4th bit is assigned to the pseudo-game effect signal.
However, not limited to this, it is also possible to output the pseudo-game effecting signal independently from the test signal in step S3005.
FIG. 402 shows example 2 of the flowchart following FIG.
In FIG. 402, a test signal is output in step S3005. In this test signal, the 0th to 4th bits are the operating state flag signal.

In step S3002 of FIG. 402, when it is determined that the pseudo-game effect state flag is not ON, the process proceeds to step S3021, and when it is determined that the pseudo-game effect state flag is ON, the process proceeds to step S3022.
In step S3021, a process for outputting "00 (H)" indicating that the pseudo-game effect is not in progress can be executed as the pseudo-game effect signal. On the other hand, in step S3022, it is possible to execute a process for outputting "FF (H)" indicating that the pseudo-game effect is in progress as the signal during pseudo-game effect.
Therefore, in Example 2, in the test signal output, a 1-byte test signal (operation state flag signal, replaying signal, input request lamp signal, advantageous section signal), a 1-byte pseudo-game effect signal, and 1 Processing will be performed to output the byte's conditional unit signal.

<44th embodiment>
The forty-fourth embodiment relates to the indication of the main reel when a video reel, a sub-reel, etc. are provided. In a broader sense, video reels, sub-reels, and the like may also be referred to as "reels for effect."
Here, the meanings of "main reel", "sub reel" and "video reel" are as follows.
The "main reel" is for displaying a symbol combination as a game result, and corresponds to the left, middle and right reels 31 in FIG. The main reel is simply referred to as the "reel" or "pachislot" and is also referred to as the "main reel." In the following description, the main reel is denoted by reference numeral "31" and is referred to as "reel 31" or "main reel 31".

The "sub-reel" indicates symbols in the same manner as the reel 31, but does not display the game result according to the symbols or the combination of symbols at the time of stop, but displays the symbols or the combination of symbols as one of the effects. is. The symbols on the main reel and the symbols on the sub-reels may be the same, similar, or dissimilar.
The sub-reel, like the main reel, is a substantially cylindrical (annular) tangible object. Therefore, sub reels do not include intangible objects such as video reels whose images are displayed by the image display device 23 .
The sub-reels may start rotating in accordance with the operation timing of the start switch 41 or may not start rotating.

Further, the sub-reels may stop rotating in accordance with the operation timing of the stop switch 42, may not stop rotating, or may start rotating after having been stopped.
Furthermore, the sub-reels may rotate and stop during one game, or may not rotate (continue to stop) during one game.
The sub-reels are also called “effect reels”, “auxiliary reels”, “pseudo reels” and the like. In the following description, the sub-reel is denoted by reference numeral "34" and referred to as "sub-reel 34".
One sub-reel 34 may be provided, or the same number of sub-reels 34 as the number of stop switches 42 (for example, three) may be provided.
In the forty-fourth embodiment, a sub-reel 34 which may be misidentified as displaying a game result and a sub-reel 34 which may not be misidentified as displaying a game result are exemplified.
It should be noted that even if the sub-reel 34 may be misidentified as displaying a game result, providing the sub-reel 34 is not prohibited.

Further, "video reel" means an image displayed by the image display device 23, such as an image simulating a reel, an image suggesting a reel, an image similar to a reel, or the like. .
The video reel is not limited to the case where the image is displayed as if the reel were rotating, but there is also the case where only the symbols are variably displayed. Furthermore, when displaying an image simulating a reel, the image is displayed stereoscopically (three-dimensionally) (for example, FIG. 405 described later), and when the image is displayed planarly (two-dimensionally) ( For example, FIG. 407) to be described later can be mentioned.

The "image display device 23" is composed of a dot display, a liquid crystal display, an organic EL display, a micro LED display, a quantum dot film display, and the like.
In the forty-fourth embodiment, an image that may be mistakenly recognized as displaying a game result by displaying an image simulating a reel is referred to as a "video reel".
On the other hand, an image that is not likely to be misidentified as displaying a game result is called a "decorative variation image" and distinguished from a "video reel".
In the following, the video reel is denoted by reference numeral "23a" and referred to as "video reel 23a". Also, the ornamental variation image is denoted by reference numeral "23b" and is referred to as an "ornamentation variation image 23b".

When displaying the image of the video reel 23a, or when providing the sub-reel 34 which may be misunderstood as displaying a game result, it is preferable to clearly indicate the main reel 31. FIG. This is to prevent the player from confusing the main reel 31 with the video reel 23a or sub-reel 34 and erroneously thinking that the symbols or combination of symbols displayed by the video reel 23a or sub-reel 34 is the game result.
FIG. 403 shows an example in which three reels 31 (main reels) can be seen from the display window (also called “glass plate”) 18 . FIG. 403 shows an example in which “main reel” or the like is displayed (printed, etc.) near the reel 31 . In this way, when the video reel 23a is displayed as an image, or when the sub-reel 34 that may be misidentified as displaying the game result is provided, in order to clearly indicate that the reel 31 is the reel showing the game result, It is necessary to specify as shown in Fig. 403.

FIG. 404 shows an example in which the viewing area of the reel 31 is formed within the area of the image display device 23 . Also in this case, when the image of the video reel 23a is displayed or when the sub-reel 34, which may be misunderstood as displaying the game result, is provided, it is clearly indicated that the reel 31 is the reel showing the game result. Therefore, the image display device 23 displays an image such as "reel". In this case, the image display such as "reel" is not erased during the game. However, when a demo screen or the like is displayed by the image display device 23 after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the game is on standby, it is possible to erase the image display such as "reels".
In the example of FIG. 403, "main reel" is displayed, but "main reel", "reel", "pachislot", "REEL", etc. may be displayed.
Similarly, although "reel" is displayed in the example of FIG. 404, it may be displayed as "main reel", "main reel", "pachislot", "REEL", or the like.
Also, in the descriptions shown in FIGS. 403 and 404, the size of the characters should be 30 points or more to make them stand out.

FIGS. 405 to 409 are diagrams showing examples of whether or not they correspond to the "video reel" described above. 405 to 407 show examples (examples 1 to 3) corresponding to the video reel 23a, and FIGS. 408 and 409 show examples (example 4) not corresponding to the video reel 23a (corresponding to the decorative variation image 23b). and Example 5).
405 to 409 are only examples of one standard, and the display modes of FIGS. 405 to 407 always correspond to video reels, and the display modes of FIGS. It does not mean that it does not apply to reels.
"Applicable to video reels" does not mean that the conditions for whether or not to correspond to video reels are clearly defined in advance and that the conditions are met, and that "game results are displayed. It means that it is judged according to social norms that there is a risk of misidentification as

FIG. 405 shows an example of image display of the video reel 23a by the image display device 23. FIG. In this example, like the reels 31, three video reels 23a (three-dimensional reel images) are displayed, and each of the video reels 23a, like the reels 31, has three patterns: upper, middle, and lower. This is an example of displaying an image.
Then, based on the operation of the start switch 41, all the video reels 23a become a rotating image, and based on the operation of the stop switch 42, the video reel 23a corresponding to the operated stop switch 42 becomes a still image. The symbol image of the video reel 23a may be the same symbol as the symbol of the reel 31, may be similar, or may be different.
The video reel 23a shown in FIG. 405 has almost the same form as the rule 31, and may be misidentified as indicating the game result. Therefore, the example shown in FIG. 405 is considered to correspond to a video reel.

FIG. 406 shows an example of image display of the video reel 23a by the image display device 23. FIG. In this example, three video reels 23a are displayed in the same manner as the reel 31, but each video reel 23a displays one symbol image.
In this example, as in the example of FIG. 405, all the video reels 23a become rotating images based on the operation of the start switch 41, and based on the operation of the stop switch 42, the video reel 23a corresponding to the operated stop switch 42 is displayed. It becomes a still image. The symbol image of the video reel 23a may be the same symbol as the symbol of the reel 31, may be similar, or may be different.
Like the example shown in FIG. 405, the example shown in FIG. 406 has almost the same form as the rule 31, and there is a possibility of mistaking that it shows the game result. Therefore, the example shown in FIG. 406 is considered to correspond to a video reel.

FIG. 407 shows an example of image display of the video reel 23 a by the image display device 23 . The video reel 23a of this example has a "3×3" matrix pattern image display area, and nine pattern images vary independently or according to a predetermined rule.
In this case also, all the pattern images become rotating images based on the operation of the start switch 41, and the predetermined pattern images corresponding to the operated stop switch 42 become the static images based on the operation of the stop switch 42. Further, the symbol image may be the same symbol as the symbol on the reel 31, may be a similar symbol, or may be a different symbol.
In the example shown in FIG. 407, since each symbol image fluctuates independently, although the form is different from the spinning state of the reel, the expression imitating the reel is used, and there is a risk of misunderstanding that it indicates the game result. There is Therefore, the example shown in FIG. 407 is considered to correspond to a video reel.
Also, when images are displayed in a matrix, the size is not limited to "3×3".

In the example of FIG. 408, the image display device 23 displays an ornamental variation image 23b (an image consisting of numbers, characters, figures, symbols, patterns, etc.; the same shall apply hereinafter). Three decorative variable images 23 b in this example are provided according to the number of reels 31 . Then, based on the operation of the start switch 41, the ornamental variation image 23b is changed to the variable state, and based on the operation of the stop switch 42, the ornamental variation image 23b corresponding to the operated stop switch 42 is brought to the stationary state. However, it is not limited to this, and may not change according to the operation of the start switch 41 or the stop switch 42 . Also, the decorative variation image 23b is different from the pattern of the reel 31 .
It is conceivable that the video reel 23a shown in FIG. 407 can be approached by providing three rows of ornamental variable images 23b in FIG. However, in the example of FIG. 408, there is no representation imitating reels, and the target image only changes, so there is no possibility of erroneously recognizing that the game result is shown.
Therefore, the example in FIG. 408 is considered not applicable to video reels.

In the example of FIG. 409, the image display device 23 displays an ornamental variation image 23b. The image display device 23 of this example is provided, for example, on the left or right side of the display window 18 of the reel 31 . Then, based on the operation of the start switch 41, the ornamental variation image 23b is changed to the variable state, and based on the operation of the stop switch 42, the ornamental variation image is brought to the stationary state. However, it is not limited to this, and there are cases where it does not change according to the operation of the start switch 41 or the stop switch 42 . Also, the decorative variation image 23b is different from the pattern of the reel 31 .
In the example of FIG. 409, there is no representation imitating reels, and the target image simply changes, so there is no possibility of erroneously recognizing that the game result is shown.
Therefore, the example in FIG. 409 is considered not applicable to video reels.

405 to 409, the examples of FIGS. 405 to 407 are considered to correspond to the video reel 23a. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. It is necessary to clearly indicate that it is a reel, reel) and that it is a display of game results.
On the other hand, the examples of FIGS. 408 and 409 do not correspond to the video reel 23a, so the reel 31 as shown in FIGS. 403 and 404 need not be indicated. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the reel 31 may be clearly indicated as shown in FIGS.

Next, the sub-reel 34 will be described.
410 to 414 are diagrams showing examples 1 to 5 of the sub reel 34. FIG.
In Example 1 of FIG. 410, three sub-reels 34 are provided in the same manner as the reel 31, and the symbols can be seen through the display window 18'. Further, like the reels 31, each sub-reel 34 displays three symbols of upper, middle and lower stages. In Example 1 of FIG. 410, the video reel 23a of FIG. 405 is used as the actual sub-reel 34.
Then, based on the operation of the start switch 41, the rotation of the reel 31 and the sub-reel 34 is started, and based on the operation of the stop switch 42, the rotation of the reel 31 and the sub-reel 34 corresponding to the operated stop switch 42 is stopped. . Therefore, when all the sub-reels 34 are stopped, the sub-reels 34 stop displaying the symbols or the combination of symbols.
In this case, since the sub-reel 34 is an effect device having substantially the same structure as the reel 31, there is a possibility that the sub-reel 34 is misidentified as displaying a game result.

Example 2 of FIG. 411 has three sub-reels 34 similar to the reel 31, and is constructed so that the symbols can be seen through the display window 18'. Furthermore, each sub-reel 34 displays one symbol (this point differs from the structure of example 1 in FIG. 410). In Example 2 of FIG. 411, the video reel 23a of FIG. 406 is used as the actual sub-reel 34.
Then, based on the operation of the start switch 41, the rotation of the reel 31 and the sub-reel 34 is started, and based on the operation of the stop switch 42, the rotation of the reel 31 and the sub-reel 34 corresponding to the operated stop switch 42 is stopped. . Therefore, when all the sub-reels 34 are stopped, the sub-reels 34 stop displaying the symbols or the combination of symbols.
In this case, since the sub-reel 34 is an effect device having substantially the same structure as the reel 31, there is a possibility that the sub-reel 34 is misidentified as displaying a game result.

In Example 3 of FIG. 412, the leftmost reel in the drawing is the sub-reel 34 . Also, the first reel 31 (corresponding to the left reel 31) is provided on the far right side, and the display window 18' for the first reel 31 has a structure in which only the lower pattern can be seen through.
Furthermore, the pattern of the sub reel 34 is the same as the pattern of the reel 31 . For example, the middle symbol “7” on the sub-reel 34 is the same as the middle symbol “7” on the second and third reels 31 .

Then, based on the operation of the start switch 41, the rotation of the first to third reels 31 and the sub-reel 34 is started.
Further, when the left stop switch 42 is operated, the sub reel 34 and the first reel 31 are stopped. Furthermore, when the middle stop switch 42 is operated, the second reel 31 is stopped. Further, when the right stop switch 42 is operated, the third reel 31 is stopped.
In this example, the sub-reel 34 is arranged right beside the reel 31, and the pattern of the sub-reel 34 also uses the pattern of the reel 31, so there is a possibility that the sub-reel 34 displays the game result. In other words, there is a possibility that the player may misunderstand that the game result is displayed by the combination of symbols consisting of the sub-reels 34, the second reels 31, and the third reels 31. FIG.

Since the sub-reels 34 of Examples 1 to 3 described above may be misidentified as displaying game results, the (main) reels 31 are clearly indicated as shown in FIGS. 403 and 404. I do.

In example 4 of FIG. 413, a display window 18' is provided above three reels 31, and the sub-reels 34 are arranged so that one pattern of the sub-reel 34 can be seen from the display window 18'. In this case, the rotation axis of the sub-reel 34 is vertical in the figure. In other words, the pattern of the sub-reel 34 moves in the horizontal direction in the figure.
In the case of this sub-reel 34, it may not rotate at all during one game. In addition, when the start switch 41 is operated, it may rotate and then stop. Furthermore, although it does not rotate when the start switch 41 is operated, it may rotate when the first to third stop switches 42 are operated, and then stop.

Furthermore, the pattern of the sub-reel 34 may be the same as the pattern of the reel 31, may be similar, or may be different.
In this example, since the sub-reel 34 is arranged independently (separately from the reel 31), the sub-reel 34 is not mistakenly recognized as one of the reels 31, and the sub-reel 34 is recognized as a performance reel. can do. Therefore, it is considered that the sub-reel 34 will not be mistaken for displaying the game result.

In Example 5 of FIG. 414, a display window 18' is provided on the further right side of the three reels 31, and the sub-reel 34 is arranged so that it can be seen from this display window 18'.
In the case of this sub-reel 34, it may not rotate at all during one game. In addition, when the start switch 41 is operated, it may rotate and then stop. Furthermore, although it does not rotate when the start switch 41 is operated, it may rotate when the first to third stop switches 42 are operated, and then stop.
Furthermore, the symbol on the sub-reel 34 is different from the symbol on the reel 31 . Incidentally, as shown in FIG. 414, the background color of the sub-reels 34 may differ from the background color of the reels 31 .
In this example, although the sub-reel 34 is arranged side by side with the reel 31, since the pattern of the sub-reel 34 is completely different from the pattern of the reel 31, the sub-reel 34 is not misidentified as one of the reels 31, and the 34 can be recognized as a performance reel. Therefore, it is considered that the sub-reel 34 will not be mistaken for displaying the game result.

Since the sub-reels 34 shown in Examples 4 and 5 above are unlikely to be mistaken for displaying game results, it is considered unnecessary to clearly show the (main) reels 31 as shown in FIGS. 403 and 404. . However, even when the sub-reel 34 as in Example 4 or Example 5 is provided, the indication shown in FIGS. 403 and 404 may be provided.

Although the forty-third and forty-fourth embodiments of the present invention have been described above, the present invention is not limited to the contents described above, and various modifications such as those described below are possible.
A. 43rd Embodiment (1) As shown in FIG. 386, the lighting color of the stop switch lamp (at the time of accepting the operation of the stop switch 42) during the pseudo-game effect is purple. However, not limited to this, for example, the stop switch lamp may be turned off during the pseudo-game production. Alternatively, the lighting color of the stop switch lamp may be the same between the simulated game effect and the main game (blue when operation is accepted, red when operation is not accepted).
By making the lighting mode (lighting color and lighting pattern) of the stop switch lamp different between the main game and the pseudo-game production, it is determined whether it is the main game or the pseudo-game production based on the lighting mode of the stop switch lamp. It becomes possible.
On the other hand, when the lighting mode (lighting color and lighting pattern) of the stop switch lamp is the same for the main game and the pseudo-game production, the main game or the pseudo-game production is based on the lighting mode of the stop switch lamp. It is possible to make it impossible to determine whether there is
Also in this game, the lighting color of the stop switch lamp may differ depending on whether the push order instruction information is displayed or not displayed on the instruction monitor. For example, when the operation of the stop switch 42 is being accepted, it may be lit in white while the push order instruction information is being displayed, and may be lit in blue while the push order instruction information is not being displayed.

(2) During the game, the time during which the stop switch 42 is not operated is counted, and when the stop switch 42 is not operated for 60 seconds, an image such as "Please stop the reels." display.
On the other hand, when the stop switch 42 is not operated during the pseudo-game effect, the following control may be performed.
First, as described in FIG. 398, when 20 seconds have passed without the stop switch 42 being operated, the rotating reel 31 is temporarily stopped. In this way, during the pseudo-game effect, the image display such as "Please stop the reels."

Secondly, when, for example, 30 seconds (shorter time than the main game) have passed without the stop switch 42 being operated during the pseudo-game effect, an image such as "Please stop the reels" is displayed. (In this case, automatic temporary stop is not performed in 20 seconds).
In this way, for example, if the user waits for 30 seconds without operating the stop switch 42 and an image such as "Please stop the reels" is displayed, it means that the pseudo-game effect is being performed, and the stop switch 42 is pressed. If an image such as "Please stop the reels" is not displayed even after 30 seconds have elapsed without any operation, it is possible to determine that this is the game.

It should be noted that during the pseudo-game effect, after displaying an image such as "Please stop the reels." , the reel 31 may be automatically temporarily stopped. Alternatively, as in the present game, when displaying an image such as "Please stop the reels."
On the other hand, in both the main game and the pseudo-game effect, when 60 seconds have passed without the stop switch 42 being operated, an image such as "Please stop the reels." In this way, it is possible to make it impossible to determine whether the game is a real game or a pseudo-game effect from the timing at which an image such as "Please stop the reels" is displayed.

Also, in the pseudo-game effect, it is assumed that the time until the image display such as "Please stop the reels." In this case, after the temporary stop of all the reels 31, wait until 60 seconds for the start switch 41 to be operated, and when the start switch 41 is not operated even after 60 seconds, the pseudo-game effect is terminated, The reels 31 may be restarted after a random delay process. Alternatively, after all reels 31 are temporarily stopped, the operable time of the start switch 41 is set to a predetermined time shorter than 60 seconds (for example, 20 seconds described in FIG. 398) from the time when all reels 31 are temporarily stopped, and the time is When the time has elapsed, the reels 31 may be restarted through a random delay process.
Further, after the temporary stop of all the reels 31, unless the start switch 41 is operated, the pseudo-game effect may not end, and the player may wait until the start switch 41 is operated. In this case, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has passed without the start switch 41 being operated, an image such as "Please operate the start switch 41" may be displayed.

(3) In this game, after the start switch 41 is turned on, when the start switch 41 is kept on and the stop switch 42 is operated, the reel 31 stop control is executed or not executed. and
In the former case, when the stop switch 42 is operated, it is determined whether or not the D6 bit of the input port level data A is "0" in FIG. executes stop control of the reel 31, but does not execute stop control of the reel 31 when the D6 bit is not "0".
On the other hand, in the latter case, when the stop switch 42 is operated, the stop control of the reel 31 is performed without determining the value of the D6 bit of the input port level data A.

Further, even during the pseudo-game production, when the stop switch 42 is operated while the ON state of the start switch 41 is maintained, the temporary stop control of the reels 31 may or may not be executed.
Also in this case, as in this game, in the former case, when the stop switch 42 is operated, it is determined whether or not the D6 bit of the input port level data A is "0". When the D6 bit is "0", the temporary stop control of the reel 31 is executed, but when the D6 bit is not "0", the temporary stop control of the reel 31 is not executed.
On the other hand, in the latter case, when the stop switch 42 is operated, the temporary stop control of the reel 31 is performed without determining the value of the D6 bit of the input port level data A.

Further, the same control may be performed in the main game and the pseudo-game effect. For example, when the start switch 41 is maintained in the ON state in this game and the stop switch 42 is operated, the stop control of the reel 31 is performed, the ON state of the start switch 41 is maintained in the pseudo-game effect. This is the case where the temporary stop control of the reel 31 is executed when the stop switch 42 is operated.
In this way, if the stop control or temporary stop control of the reel 31 is the same between the main game and the pseudo-game effect, the stop control or the temporary stop using the same control processing (module) between the main game and the pseudo-game effect Since the control can be executed, the program capacity can be reduced. In addition, by setting the same control processing in the main game and the pseudo-game effect, even if it is confirmed whether or not the stop switch 42 can be operated while the start switch 41 is turned on, It is possible to make it impossible to determine whether there is a pseudo-game presentation.

On the other hand, for example, when the start switch 41 is maintained in the ON state and the stop switch 42 is operated in this game, the stop control of the reels 31 is not executed, but in the pseudo-game effect, the start switch 41 is maintained in the ON state. When the stop switch 42 is operated in response, the temporary stop control of the reel 31 may be executed.
Thus, when the stop control or temporary stop control is different between the main game and the pseudo-game effect, it is possible to operate the stop switch 42 with the start switch 41 turned on. It becomes possible to determine whether a game is being played or a pseudo-game presentation is being performed.

(4) A method of controlling the reels 31 to temporarily stop when the stop switch 42 is operated while the reset switch 153 (FIG. 95) is pressed at a predetermined timing during execution of the pseudo-game effect. and a method of controlling the reel 31 so as not to temporarily stop.
Similarly, when the stop switch 42 is operated while the bet switch 40 is pressed during execution of the pseudo-game effect, a method of controlling to temporarily stop the reel 31 and a method of controlling the reel 31 so as not to temporarily stop and a method of controlling to
Furthermore, similarly, when the stop switch 42 is operated while the settlement switch 43 is pressed during execution of the pseudo-game effect, a method of controlling to temporarily stop the reel 31 and a method of not temporarily stopping the reel 31 and a method of controlling so as to
As described above, when the stop switch 42 is operated while the reset switch 153, the bet switch 40, and the settlement switch 43 are pressed during the execution of the pseudo-game effect, the reel 31 is not temporarily stopped. , by executing the operation during the pseudo-game effect, it becomes possible to determine whether these switches are functioning normally.

(5) When the power is turned off during execution of the acceleration process of the reels 31 in the pseudo-game effect, when the power-on process is executed after that, the main control board 50 accelerates the reels 31 in the pseudo-game effect. Execute from the continuation of processing.
However, not limited to this, if power failure occurs during execution of the acceleration processing of the reels 31 in the pseudo-game effect, the main control board 50 stops the pseudo-game effect and accelerates the reels 31 in this game. may be executed.
(6) The period of swing fluctuation in the pseudo-game production is less than 500 ms as described above. On the other hand, one rotation time of the reel 31 is set to 750 ms. Therefore, the period of swing fluctuation is set to a time (different time) shorter than the time for one rotation of the reel 31 .
For this reason, for example, when some reels 31 are temporarily stopped in a pseudo-game effect, and some other reels 31 are rotating, specifications that sequentially start shaking fluctuation control from the temporarily stopped reels 31 (Fig. 384) When , there are reels 31 temporarily stopped and reels 31 in motion and reels 31 in rotation. In this case, since the period of swing fluctuation is different from the rotation period of the reel 31, the period of swing fluctuation can be prevented from assisting eye pressing.

(7) The specified number in this embodiment is only "3" because it conforms to the twenty-third embodiment (see FIG. 116).
On the other hand, for example, as shown in FIG. 58 (twelfth embodiment), the game can be played with either the specified number "2" or "3".
In this case, since the operation of the instruction function is limited to one prescribed number, for example, if the prescribed number for activating the instruction function is set to "3", in the game with the prescribed number of "2", the pushing order bell is won. Even when the indicator function is disabled.
Under the above circumstances,
a) It is assumed that after how many games it is decided to execute the pseudo-game effect (so-called time limit type). For example, when it is decided to execute a pseudo-game effect after playing "3" games, "3" is stored in the predetermined storage area of the RWM 53, and after that, "1" is subtracted for each game, and stored in the predetermined storage area. A pseudo-game effect is executed in a game with a value of "0".

In this case, the value in the predetermined storage area may be subtracted only when the game is executed with the specified number "3". In other words, when the game is executed with the specified number "2", the value in the predetermined storage area is not subtracted.
Therefore, when a game in which a pseudo-game effect is scheduled to be executed is executed with the specified number "2", the value of the predetermined storage area is not subtracted from "1" to "0" but is maintained at "1". However, the pseudo-game effect is not executed in the game. In this case, the pseudo-game effect is carried over to the next game or later.
Then, when the game is executed with the specified number "3" in the next game, the value of the predetermined storage area is subtracted from "1" to "0", and the pseudo game effect is executed in the next game.

b) When determining whether or not to execute a pseudo-game effect by lottery in the game, the lottery is executed when the game is played with the specified number "3", but the game is played with the specified number "2" When the lottery is performed, the lottery may not be executed.
Alternatively, when the game is played with the prescribed number of "3", a lottery is executed to win with a prescribed probability, but when the game is played with the prescribed number of "2", the winning probability is lower than the prescribed probability. Conducting a lottery.

Also, in the case of executing the pseudo-game effect in a timed manner during the advantageous interval, the 1500th game, which is the upper limit number of games in the advantageous interval, is executed with the prescribed number “2” during the latency of the pseudo-game effect, and once, the normal In the case of returning to the section, it is preferable that the pseudo-game effect is not executed even if the game is executed with the specified number "3" after the next game. At this time, it is preferable to clear the pseudo-game number or the like that manages the pseudo-game effect at the end of the game of the final game in the advantageous section. With such a configuration, in the case of transition from advantageous section → normal section → advantageous section, the pseudo-game effect scheduled to be executed in the advantageous section before shifting to the normal section is changed to the advantageous section after shifting to the normal section You can prevent it from running with

(8) If any of the recoverable errors, any of the non-recoverable errors, or the door open error occurs during the pseudo-game effect (when a predetermined error occurs), the pseudo-game display lamp 21a is turned on. It may be turned off, or the pseudo-game display may be hidden. By configuring in this way, priority is given to notification of the occurrence of an error, and the player can take measures such as calling a hall clerk.
On the other hand, even if one of the recoverable errors, one of the non-recoverable errors, or the door opening error occurs during the pseudo-game effect (when a predetermined error occurs), the pseudo-game display lamp 21a Lighting and pseudo-game display may be continued. By configuring in this way, it becomes possible to grasp that an error has occurred during the pseudo-game presentation.

(9) The image display device 23 may be provided on the lower panel provided on the front door. In other words, the image display device 23 provided above the stop switch 42 and the image display device 23 provided below the stop switch 42 may be provided. In such a case, during the pseudo-game effect, the notification that the pseudo-game effect is in progress (for example, the display of "FREEPLAY" shown in FIG. 390) is the image provided at the top when the stop switch 42 is used as a reference It is preferable to display on the display device 23 (not display on the image display device 23 provided below the stop switch 42). In this way, by displaying on the image display device 23 provided above when the stop switch 42 is used as a reference, the image is displayed on the image display device 23 provided below when the stop switch 42 is used as a reference. Compared to , the player is easier to see the notification that it is a pseudo-game effect, so it is difficult to confuse this game and the pseudo-game effect. In addition, when the stop switch 42 is used as a reference, the image display device 23 provided at the top is used to notify that the pseudo-game effect is in progress. Even if the display device 23 notifies that it is a pseudo-game effect, the effect described above can be obtained.
On the other hand, the notification that the pseudo-game effect is being performed is not displayed on the image display device 23 provided above when the stop switch 42 is used as a reference, but is displayed below when the stop switch 42 is used as a reference. By displaying by the provided image display device 23, compared with the case of notifying by the image display device 23 provided at the top when the stop switch 42 is used as a reference, the player can see that the simulated game effect is being performed. can not be easily grasped, it becomes difficult to distinguish between the main game and the pseudo-game performance, and when the reels 31 are temporarily stopped during the pseudo-game performance, a surprise can be given and the amusement of the game can be enhanced. .

(10) The 43rd embodiment is not limited to the reel-type game machine under the Entertainment Law, but for example, a parrot that uses game balls, or uses electronic information (electronic medals) without using physical medals (as tangible objects). It can also be applied to enclosed-type gaming machines (medal-less gaming machines) and casino machines.
(11) The first to forty-third embodiments and the various modifications shown in the first to forty-third embodiments are not limited to being implemented independently, and can be implemented in combination as appropriate.

B. 44th Embodiment (1) When the video reel 23a is displayed as an image, or when the sub-reel 34 that may mislead the game result is provided, the main reel is clearly indicated. In this case, it is not necessary to clearly indicate that the video reel 23a is a video reel or that the sub-reel 34 is a sub-reel. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the video reel 23a may be clearly indicated as a video reel, or the sub-reel 34 may be indicated as a sub-reel.
(2) In the forty-fourth embodiment, a "video reel" is uniformly defined as a game result that may be misunderstood. , and can be divided into video reels that may misidentify the game result and video reels that do not misidentify the game result.
(3) As shown in FIG. 404, when the main reel is clearly indicated by the image display device 23, the main reel is not clearly indicated during the setting change, and the image display area clearly indicating that it is the main reel, Information (for example, setting value information) related to setting changes may be displayed as an image.
Similarly, during setting confirmation, the main reel may not be clearly indicated, and information regarding the setting change (for example, setting value information) may be displayed as an image in the image display area indicating that it is the main reel.

(4) Also, the main reel may be indicated even during game standby. Furthermore, in this case, the main reel may be clearly indicated even during the demo screen. When executing a specific display (for example, display of the name of the game machine manufacturer) on the demo screen, the main reel may be clearly indicated on the front layer of the specific display.
Furthermore, when an unrecoverable error occurs, information about the error (for example, the content of the unrecoverable error that has occurred) is displayed in the image display area that clearly indicates that it is the main reel, without clearly indicating the main reel. may be displayed as an image.
Similarly, when a recoverable error occurs, the main reel is not clearly indicated, and information about the error (for example, the content of the recoverable error that has occurred) is displayed in the image display area that clearly indicates that it is the main reel. may be displayed.
(5) On the other hand, the main reel may be clearly indicated even during setting change, setting confirmation, unrecoverable error occurrence, or recoverable error occurrence.

(6) The swing fluctuation control of the reels 31 in the 43rd embodiment is executed to notify the player that a pseudo-game effect is in progress. Therefore, when the image of the video reel 23 is displayed or when the sub-reel 34 is provided, it is not necessary to swing the pattern image of the video reel 23 or swing the sub-reel 34 during the simulated game effect.
However, it is not limited to this, and it is also possible to swing and fluctuate the pattern image of the video reel 23 or swing and fluctuate the sub-reel 34, for example, as an anticipation effect.
For example, when the pattern image of the video reel 23 fluctuates or the sub-reel 34 fluctuates, if the reel 31 does not swing and fluctuate (that is, if it is not a pseudo-game production), it means that the expectation is low. to do.
Further, when the reels 31 shake and fluctuate (during the pseudo-game presentation), when the symbol images on the video reels 23 shake and fluctuate, and when the sub-reels 34 shake and fluctuate at the same time, the effect means that the expectation is high. To be mentioned.

(7) The forty-fourth embodiment is not limited to the reel-type game machine under the Entertainment Law, but for example, a parrot that uses game balls, or uses electronic information (electronic medals) without using physical medals (as tangible objects). It can also be applied to enclosed-type gaming machines (medal-less gaming machines) and casino machines.
(8) The first to forty-fourth embodiments and the various modifications shown in the first to forty-fourth embodiments are not limited to being carried out independently, but can be carried out in combination as appropriate.

<45th embodiment>
The forty-fifth embodiment relates to a production lamp (decorative lamp section) 541. FIG.
Here, the term "substantially identical" is a concept that includes items that are approximately the same but are not exactly the same due to manufacturing errors or the like, and items that are not exactly the same but appear to be the same. Also, "substantially identical" is a concept that includes "identical."
Although the description of the forty-fifth embodiment partially overlaps with the description of the nineteenth embodiment (B), it will be described again.
415 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 500, and FIG. 416 is an external perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 500 viewed from the front side (player side).

417 is a front view of the right base member 650 with the upper parts of the upper lamp cover 613 and the right lamp cover 622 removed, and FIG. 418 is the upper side of the upper lamp cover 613 and the right lamp cover 622. 419 is a perspective view from the right side of the right base member 650 with parts removed, and FIG. 419 is a rear view of the right base member 650 with the upper parts of the upper frame lamp cover 613 and the right frame lamp cover 622 removed. is.

420 is an enlarged front top view of the right base member 650 with the upper frame lamp cover 613 and the right frame lamp cover 622 removed, and FIG. 422 is an upper enlarged perspective view of the right base member 650 with the upper part removed, as seen from the left side, and FIG. 422 shows the right base member with the upper parts of the upper frame lamp cover 613 and right frame lamp cover 622 removed. 650 is a left side upper enlarged view.

423 is an enlarged bottom view of the upper part of the right base member 650 with the upper frame lamp cover 613 removed, and FIG. 424 is an enlarged cross-sectional view taken along line AA of FIG. 420. FIG.
425 is a front view of the right base member 650 with the upper frame lamp cover 613, the upper portion of the right frame lamp cover 622, and the right frame lamp substrate 621 removed, and corresponds to FIG.
FIG. 426 is an enlarged rear view of the right base member 650 with the upper frame lamp cover 613 removed and the right frame lamp cover 622 attached.
427 is an enlarged sectional view of the lens portion 670 of the right frame lamp cover 622. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 415 and 416, the pachinko game machine 500 has a rectangular outer frame 501 fixed to an island (not shown) and a front frame 502 attached to the front side of the outer frame 501. It has
A game board 504 is attached to the center of the front frame 502 with the game area (not shown) facing the front side. A glass door (glass frame) 505 is attached so as to cover the game area of the game board 504 .

Furthermore, on the front side of the front frame 502 and below the glass door 505, an upper tray 506, a lower tray 507, a shooting handle 508, and the like are attached.
Furthermore, a hinge mechanism 503 is provided on the left side of the outer frame 501 .
The front frame 502 is attached to the outer frame 501 by a hinge mechanism 503 so that it can be opened and closed, and the glass door 505 is attached to the front frame 502 by a hinge mechanism 503 so that it can be opened and closed.

A locking device (not shown) is provided on the right side of the front frame 502, and a key insertion opening 521 into which a key for operating the locking device is inserted is provided on the right side of the glass door 505. .
When the front frame 502 is closed to the outer frame 501 and the key is inserted through the key insertion opening 521 to unlock the outer frame 501 and the front frame 502, the front frame 502 With the hinge mechanism 503 as the central axis, the outer frame 501 can be opened (moved) forward (toward the player).

Also, when the front frame 502 is opened with respect to the outer frame 501, the game board 504, the glass door 505, the upper plate 506, the lower plate 507, the firing handle 508, and the like attached to the front frame 502 move forward. Together with the frame 502, it moves forward with respect to the outer frame 501 with the hinge mechanism 503 as the central axis.
Note that when the front frame 502 is opened, the frame open switch 523 (see FIG. 99 of the nineteenth embodiment (B)) is turned on, whereby the opening of the front frame 502 is detected.

When the glass door 505 is closed with respect to the front frame 502 and the key is inserted through the key insertion opening 521 to unlock the front frame 502 and the glass door 505, the glass door 505 With the hinge mechanism 503 as the central axis, the front frame 502 can be opened forward.
Note that when the glass door 505 is opened, the door open switch 522 (see FIG. 99 of the nineteenth embodiment (B)) is turned on, whereby the opening of the glass door 505 is detected.

In addition, the game area of the game board 504 is provided with a starting port 532, a special symbol display device 531, and an image display device 543 (see FIG. 99 of the nineteenth embodiment (B)).
Furthermore, in the center of the glass door 505, two transparent glass plates (not shown) are arranged parallel to each other with a predetermined interval. A production lamp (decorative lamp portion) 541 is attached to the left side so as to surround the periphery of the glass plate.
Furthermore, when the glass door 505 is closed with respect to the front frame 502 , the glass plate is positioned in front of the game area of the game board 504 . As a result, the game area of the game board 504 can be visually recognized from the front side of the pachinko game machine 500 through the glass plate.

415 and 416, the effect lamp (decorative lamp portion) 541 includes the upper frame lamp portion 610 arranged along the front upper edge of the glass door 505 and the front right edge of the glass door 505. and a left frame lamp portion 630 arranged along the front left edge of the glass door 505 .

That is, the upper frame lamp portion 610 is a decorative lamp portion that is formed horizontally from near the right end to near the left end of the upper front surface of the glass door 505 .
The right frame lamp portion 620 is a decorative lamp portion formed vertically from the vicinity of the upper end to the vicinity of the lower end of the front right portion of the glass door 505 .
Furthermore, the left frame lamp portion 630 is a decorative lamp portion formed vertically from the vicinity of the upper end of the front left portion of the glass door 505 to the vicinity of the lower end.

Furthermore, the right end portion of the upper frame lamp portion 610 and the upper end portion of the right frame lamp portion 620 are continuous, and the left end portion of the upper frame lamp portion 610 and the upper end portion of the left frame lamp portion 630 are continuous.
Thereby, the glass plate arranged in the center of the glass door 505 is surrounded by the upper frame lamp portion 610, the right frame lamp portion 620, and the left frame lamp portion 630 at the upper edge, the right edge, and the left edge. .

415 and 416, the upper frame lamp section 610 includes an upper frame right lamp substrate 611, an upper frame left lamp substrate 612, and an upper frame lamp cover 613. As shown in FIGS.
The upper frame right lamp substrate 611 includes a connector 642a to which a light emitting element (also referred to as "light emitting means") for emitting light from the right side of the upper frame lamp section 610 and a harness for transmitting control signals to the light emitting element are connected. 1 to b are mounted lamp substrates, which are arranged on the right side of the front upper portion of the glass door 505 with the mounting surface of the light emitting element facing the front side (player side).

The upper frame left lamp substrate 612 is a lamp substrate on which a light emitting element for causing the left side of the upper frame lamp section 610 to emit light and a connector to which a harness for transmitting a control signal to the light emitting element is connected are mounted. It is arranged on the left side of the front upper part of the glass door 505 with the element mounting surface facing the front side.
As shown in FIGS. 417, 420 and 421, the upper frame right lamp substrate 611 is mounted with four LEDs 641a to 641d as light emitting elements. Although not shown, the upper frame left lamp substrate 612 also has four LEDs mounted thereon as light emitting elements in the same manner as the upper frame right lamp substrate 611 . All of these LEDs are full-color LEDs.

In addition, the full-color LED has three LEDs that emit red light, an LED that emits green light, and an LED that emits blue light, and by adjusting the output of these three LEDs, it is possible to express full color. It is.
In other words, it has three light-emitting elements that emit red light, a light-emitting element that emits green light, and a light-emitting element that emits blue light, and by adjusting the outputs of these three light-emitting elements, it is possible to express full color. The means is a full-color LED.

Further, the light emitting element mounting surfaces of the upper frame right lamp substrate 611 and the upper frame left lamp substrate 612 are white.
Specifically, a white coating film is formed on the entire mounting surfaces of the light emitting elements of the upper frame right lamp substrate 611 and the upper frame left lamp substrate 612 . A white coating film is formed by applying a white resist or by silk screen printing (also referred to as silk printing or screen printing).

The upper frame lamp cover 613 is a lamp cover that covers the front side (player side) of the upper frame right lamp substrate 611 and the upper frame left lamp substrate 612. As shown in FIGS. mounted on top.
The upper frame lamp cover 613 has a horizontally long shape extending from near the right end to near the left end of the upper front surface of the glass door 505, and is made of colorless translucent resin.
Furthermore, the upper frame lamp cover 613 faces the light emitting element mounting surfaces of the upper frame right lamp substrate 611 and the upper frame left lamp substrate 612 . Therefore, the upper frame lamp cover 613 is irradiated with light emitted from the light emitting elements mounted on the upper frame right lamp substrate 611 and the upper frame left lamp substrate 612 . Thus, when the light emitting elements mounted on the upper frame right lamp substrate 611 and the upper frame left lamp substrate 612 emit light, the upper frame lamp cover 613 appears to glow.

Here, in the present embodiment, as described above, the upper frame lamp cover 613 is made of colorless translucent resin. Therefore, through the upper frame lamp cover 613, the light emitting element mounting surfaces of the upper frame right lamp substrate 611 and the upper frame left lamp substrate 612 can be seen through. Therefore, if the mounting surfaces of the light emitting elements of the upper frame right lamp substrate 611 and the upper frame left lamp substrate 612 are green or black, the appearance of the upper frame lamp section 610 becomes poor when the light emitting elements are turned off. When the light-emitting element emits light, it may appear that the light-emitting element emits light in a color different from the set color.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the entire mounting surfaces of the light emitting elements of the upper frame right lamp substrate 611 and the upper frame left lamp substrate 612 are white. As a result, the appearance of the upper frame lamp portion 610 is not degraded even if the mounting surfaces of the light emitting elements on the upper frame right lamp substrate 611 and the upper frame left lamp substrate 612 are seen through the upper frame lamp cover 613. can be done.
In addition, by making the entire surface of the light emitting element mounting surface of the upper frame right lamp substrate 611 and the upper frame left lamp substrate 612 white, the light emitted from the light emitting element is reflected on the mounting surface of the light emitting element to the upper frame lamp cover. It reflects efficiently toward the 613 side. As a result, the upper frame lamp cover 613 can appear to shine brighter. Furthermore, by forming the entire mounting surface of the light emitting element in white, the color development of the light emitting element can be made to look beautiful. In particular, when the light-emitting element emits light, it can be made to appear to emit light in the set color.

415 and 416, the right frame lamp section 620 includes a right frame lamp substrate 621 and a right frame lamp cover 622. As shown in FIGS.
The right frame lamp substrate 621 is a lamp substrate on which a light emitting element for causing the right frame lamp portion 620 to emit light and a connector 642c to which a harness for transmitting a control signal to the light emitting element is connected are mounted. It is arranged on the front right side of the glass door 505 with the mounting surface facing the front side (player side).

Also, the right frame lamp substrate 621 is formed in a vertically long substantially rectangular shape extending from the vicinity of the upper end to the vicinity of the lower end of the front right portion of the glass door 505 .
Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 417 and 418, on the upper portion of the right frame lamp board 621, seven LEDs 641e to 641k are mounted as light emitting elements. Although not shown, a plurality of LEDs are mounted as light emitting elements on the lower portion of the right frame lamp substrate 621 as well. All of these LEDs are full-color LEDs.
Further, the mounting surface of the light emitting elements on the right frame lamp substrate 621 is white. A white coating film is formed by coating or silk-screen printing a white resist on the entire mounting surface of the light emitting element on the right frame lamp substrate 621 in the same manner as the upper right frame lamp substrate 611 .

The right-frame lamp cover 622 is a lamp cover that covers the front side (player side) of the right-frame lamp substrate 621, and is attached to the front right portion of the glass door 505 as shown in FIGS.
The right frame lamp cover 622 has a vertically long shape extending from the vicinity of the upper end to the vicinity of the lower end of the front right portion of the glass door 505, and is made of colorless translucent resin.
Furthermore, the right frame lamp cover 622 faces the light emitting element mounting surface of the right frame lamp substrate 621 . Therefore, the right frame lamp cover 622 is irradiated with light emitted from the light emitting elements mounted on the right frame lamp substrate 621 . As a result, when the light-emitting elements mounted on the right-frame lamp substrate 621 emit light, the right-frame lamp cover 622 appears to glow.

By making the entire mounting surface of the light emitting element on the right frame lamp substrate 621 white, the appearance of the right frame lamp portion 620 is not deteriorated, and the light emitted from the light emitting element is Efficient reflection toward the cover 622 side so that the right frame lamp cover 622 looks brighter and the color development of the light emitting element looks beautiful is the above-described upper frame lamp portion 610 . is similar to

415 and 416, the left frame lamp section 630 includes a left frame lamp substrate 631 and a left frame lamp cover 632. As shown in FIGS.
The left-frame lamp board 631 is a lamp board on which a light-emitting element for causing the left-frame lamp section 630 to emit light and a connector to which a harness for transmitting a control signal to the light-emitting element is connected are mounted. It is arranged on the front left side of the glass door 505 with the surface facing the front side (player side).

Also, the left frame lamp substrate 631 is formed in a vertically long substantially rectangular shape extending from the vicinity of the upper end to the vicinity of the lower end of the front left portion of the glass door 505 .
Furthermore, although not shown, the left frame lamp substrate 631 is mounted with a plurality of LEDs as light emitting elements. All of these LEDs are full-color LEDs.
Further, the mounting surface of the light-emitting elements on the left frame lamp substrate 631 is white. A white coating film is formed by coating or silk-screen printing a white resist on the entire surface of the left frame lamp substrate 631 on which the light emitting elements are mounted, as in the case of the upper right frame lamp substrate 611 .

The left frame lamp cover 632 is a lamp cover that covers the front side (player side) of the left frame lamp substrate 631, and is attached to the front left side of the glass door 505 as shown in FIGS.
The left frame lamp cover 632 has a vertically long shape extending from the vicinity of the upper end to the vicinity of the lower end of the front left portion of the glass door 505, and is made of colorless translucent resin.
Furthermore, the left frame lamp cover 632 faces the light emitting element mounting surface of the left frame lamp substrate 631 . Therefore, the left frame lamp cover 632 is irradiated with light emitted from the light emitting element mounted on the left frame lamp substrate 631 . As a result, when the light-emitting element mounted on the left-frame lamp substrate 631 emits light, the left-frame lamp cover 632 appears to glow.

By making the entire mounting surface of the light emitting element on the left frame lamp substrate 631 white, the appearance of the left frame lamp portion 630 is not deteriorated, and the light emitted from the light emitting element is To make the left frame lamp cover 632 look brighter and to make the color development of the light emitting elements look beautiful by efficiently reflecting the light toward the cover 632 side, the upper frame lamp portion 610 described above is used. is similar to

Also, the glass door (glass frame) 505 includes a right base member 650 (see FIGS. 417 to 422) and a left base member (not shown).
The right base member 650 is a member that forms the skeleton of the right portion of the glass door 505 , and the left base member is a member that forms the skeleton of the left portion of the glass door 505 . Also, the left base member is formed in a shape substantially symmetrical with the right base member 650 . The skeleton of the glass door 505 is configured by the right base member 650 and the left base member.

As shown in FIGS. 420 to 422, an upper frame right board mounting portion 651 to which the upper frame right lamp board 611 is mounted and the right side portion of the upper frame lamp cover 613 are mounted on the upper front portion of the right base member 650 . An upper frame right side cover attachment portion 652 is provided.
Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 420 to 422, on the front right side of the right base member 650, a right frame board mounting portion 653 to which a right frame lamp board 621 is mounted, and a right frame board mounting portion 653 to which a right frame lamp cover 622 is mounted. A cover mounting portion 654 is provided.

Also, although not shown, the left base member has an upper frame left substrate mounting portion to which the upper frame left lamp substrate 612 is mounted, and an upper frame left cover mounting portion to which the left portion of the upper frame lamp cover 613 is mounted. is provided.
Further, although not shown, the left base member is provided with a left frame board mounting portion to which the left frame lamp board 631 is mounted and a left frame cover mounting portion to which the left frame lamp cover 632 is mounted on the front left side of the left base member. .

Upper frame right lamp substrate 611, upper frame left lamp substrate 612, upper frame lamp cover 613, upper frame right substrate mounting portion 651, upper frame left substrate mounting portion (not shown), upper frame right cover mounting portion 652, and an upper frame left cover mounting portion (not shown) constitute an upper frame lamp portion 610 .
As shown in FIGS. 415 and 416, the upper frame lamp cover 613 is attached so as to straddle the upper front surface of the right base member 650 and the upper front surface of the left base member.
A right frame lamp portion 620 is composed of the right frame lamp substrate 621 , the right frame lamp cover 622 , the right frame substrate mounting portion 653 , and the right frame cover mounting portion 654 .
Further, a left frame lamp portion 630 is composed of a left frame lamp substrate 631, a left frame lamp cover 632, a left frame substrate mounting portion (not shown), and a left frame cover mounting portion (not shown).

The upper frame right side board mounting portion 651 is a portion to which the upper frame right side lamp board 611 is mounted, and is provided on the front upper portion of the right base member 650 as shown in FIGS.
Further, as shown in FIGS. 421 to 423, the upper frame right side board mounting portion 651 is provided with a board support rib 661a shaped along the outer peripheral edge of the upper frame right side lamp board 611. As shown in FIGS. The board support rib 661a is for supporting the upper frame right lamp board 611. As shown in FIG. When the right upper frame lamp substrate 611 is placed at a predetermined position on the right upper frame substrate mounting portion 651, the outer peripheral edge of the right upper frame lamp substrate 611 rests on the substrate supporting ribs 661a.

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 417, 418, 420 and 421, the upper frame right board mounting portion 651 is provided with three positioning bosses 682a-c. These positioning bosses 682a to 682c are used to position the upper frame right lamp board 611 at a predetermined position of the upper frame right board mounting portion 651, and are formed in a cylindrical shape.
Further, as shown in FIG. 424, a screw boss 681 is provided on the upper frame right board mounting portion 651 . This screw boss 681 is used when fixing the upper frame right lamp substrate 611 to the upper frame right substrate mounting portion 651, and is formed in a cylindrical shape. A screw hole 684 is provided in the center of the screw boss 681 .

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 424, a positioning hole 685a is provided in the upper frame right lamp substrate 611 at a position corresponding to the positioning boss 682a. This positioning hole 685a is a hole into which the positioning boss 682a is inserted when positioning the upper frame right lamp board 611 at a predetermined position of the upper frame right side board mounting portion 651. It penetrates from one side to the other side.
In addition, as shown in FIG. 424, fixing holes 686 a are provided at positions corresponding to the screw bosses 681 on the right lamp substrate 611 of the upper frame. This fixing hole 686a is a hole used when fixing the upper frame right lamp substrate 611 to the upper frame right side substrate mounting portion 651, and extends from one surface of the upper frame right lamp substrate 611 to the other surface. penetrates.

When the positioning boss 682a is inserted into the positioning hole 685a from the opposite side of the mounting surface of the LED 641a in the upper frame right lamp substrate 611, the upper frame right lamp substrate 611 is positioned at the predetermined position of the upper frame right substrate mounting portion 651. At this time, the position of the screw hole 684 provided in the center of the screw boss 681 matches the position of the fixing hole 686a. Then, a screw 683a is inserted into the fixing hole 686a from the mounting surface side of the LED 641a in the upper frame right lamp substrate 611, and screwed into the screw hole 684, so that the upper frame right lamp substrate 611 is attached to the upper frame right substrate. It is fixed to the part 651 .

As shown in FIG. 424, the positioning hole 685a and the fixing hole 686a are provided close to each other.
In this embodiment, the diameter of the screw shaft 688 of the screw 683a is set larger than the diameter of the positioning boss 682a. The fixing hole 686a is formed in a circular shape, and the inner diameter of the fixing hole 686a is set to be substantially the same as the diameter of the screw shaft 688 of the screw 683a.

Furthermore, the positioning hole 685a is formed in an elliptical shape. It is set larger than the diameter of the screw shaft 688 .
Furthermore, the opening area of the positioning hole 685a and the opening area of the fixing hole 686a are set to be different. In this embodiment, the opening area of the fixing hole 686a is set larger than the opening area of the positioning hole 685a.

Thus, the positioning hole 685a and the fixing hole 686a have different shapes and different opening areas. As a result, when the upper frame right lamp board 611 is fixed to the upper frame right board mounting portion 651, the positioning hole 685a and the fixing hole 686a are not confused with each other, and the assembling work can proceed smoothly. so that it can be
In addition, since the short diameter of the positioning hole 685a is set smaller than the diameter of the screw shaft 688, the screw shaft 688 cannot be inserted into the positioning hole 685a. This is so as not to be mistaken for the use hole 686a.

Further, when the positioning boss 682a is inserted into the positioning hole 685a and the upper frame right lamp board 611 is positioned at the predetermined position of the upper frame right board mounting portion 651, the positioning boss 682a is positioned as shown in FIGS. protrudes toward the mounting surface of the LED 641a on the right lamp substrate 611 of the upper frame. A tip of the positioning boss 682a that protrudes toward the mounting surface of the LED 641a is referred to as a protruding portion 687. As shown in FIG. The projecting portion 687 is formed in a convex curved surface shape (dome shape). As a result, the light emitted from the LED 641a is reflected by the projecting portion 687 formed in a convex curved shape, so that the upper frame lamp portion 610 can be seen to shine beautifully.

Further, a screw 683a is inserted into the fixing hole 686a from the mounting surface side of the LED 641a in the upper frame right lamp substrate 611, and this screw 683a is screwed into the screw hole 684 to attach the upper frame right lamp substrate 611 to the upper frame right substrate. When fixed to the mounting portion 651, as shown in FIGS. 423 and 424, the screw head 689 of the screw 683a is exposed on the mounting surface side of the LED 641a in the upper frame right lamp substrate 611. FIG.
As shown in FIG. 424, the height T1 of the screw head 689 from the mounting surface of the LED 641a is set larger than the height T2 of the LED 641a from the mounting surface of the LED 641a.

That is, when the height of the screw head 689 from the mounting surface of the LED 641a is "T1" and the height of the LED 641a from the mounting surface of the LED 641a is "T2", "T1>T2" is set. .
That is, the height of the screw head 689 from the mounting surface of the LED 641a is set larger than that of the LED 641a.

Furthermore, the screw head 689 of the screw 683a is surface-treated to reflect the light emitted from the LED 641a. Specifically, silver plating is applied to the screw head 689 of the screw 683a as a surface treatment for reflecting the light emitted from the LED 641a. Silver plating includes silver plating, chrome plating, nickel plating, tin plating, tin cobalt plating, and zinc plating.

Thus, the height of the screw head 689 from the mounting surface of the LED 641a is set to be greater than the height of the LED 641a from the mounting surface of the LED 641a. The emitted light is reflected by the screw head 689 of the screw 683a, so that the upper frame lamp portion 610 looks beautiful.

The upper frame right cover attachment portion 652 is a portion to which the right side portion of the upper frame lamp cover 613 is attached, and is provided on the front upper portion of the right base member 650 as shown in FIGS. 420 and 421 .
Also, the upper frame right side cover mounting portion 652 is provided with a cover fitting groove 662a. The cover fitting groove 662 a is a groove into which the upper edge of the upper frame lamp cover 613 is fitted, and is formed along the upper edge of the right base member 650 . Then, when the upper edge of the upper frame lamp cover 613 is fitted into the cover fitting groove 662 a and the upper frame lamp cover 613 is screwed from the back side of the right base member 650 , the upper frame lamp cover 613 is attached to the upper frame right cover mounting portion 652 . fixed to

The right frame board mounting part 653 is a part to which the right frame lamp board 621 is mounted, and is provided on the front right side of the right base member 650 as shown in FIGS.
Further, as shown in FIG. 425, the right frame board mounting portion 653 is provided with board support ribs 661b to 661e shaped along the outer peripheral edge of the right frame lamp board 621. As shown in FIG. The substrate supporting ribs 661b to 661e are for supporting the right frame lamp substrate 621. As shown in FIG. When the right-frame lamp substrate 621 is placed at a predetermined position on the right-frame substrate mounting portion 653, the outer peripheral edge of the right-frame lamp substrate 621 rests on the substrate support ribs 661b to 661e.

As shown in FIGS. 417, 418, 420, and 421, the right frame lamp substrate 621 is provided with a positioning hole 685b and a fixing hole 686b close to each other.
The positioning hole 685b is a hole into which a positioning boss is inserted when the right frame lamp board 621 is positioned at a predetermined position of the right frame board mounting portion 653, and extends from one surface of the right frame lamp board 621 to the other side. penetrates to the surface.
The fixing hole 686b is a hole used when fixing the right-frame lamp board 621 to the right-frame board mounting portion 653, and penetrates from one side surface of the right-frame lamp board 621 to the other side surface. .

Although not shown, the right frame board mounting portion 653 is provided with positioning bosses at positions corresponding to the positioning holes 685b, and screw bosses are provided at positions corresponding to the fixing holes 686b. ing. Then, when the positioning boss provided in the right frame board mounting portion 653 is inserted into the positioning hole 685b, the right frame lamp board 621 is positioned at a predetermined position of the right frame board mounting portion 653. FIG. Then, a screw is inserted into the fixing hole 686b from the mounting surface side of the LEDs 641e to 641k on the right frame lamp board 621, and the screw is screwed to the screw boss provided in the right frame board mounting portion 653, so that the right frame lamp A substrate 621 is fixed to the right frame substrate mounting portion 653 .
417, 418, 420, and 421, illustration of positioning bosses and screws is omitted in order to make it easier to see the positioning holes 685b and the fixing holes 686b.

Moreover, as shown in FIG. 420, in this embodiment, both the positioning hole 685b and the fixing hole 686b are formed in a circular shape. Furthermore, the inner diameter of the fixing hole 686b is set larger than the inner diameter of the positioning hole 685b. Therefore, the opening area of the fixing hole 686b and the opening area of the positioning hole 685b are different. Specifically, the opening area of the fixing hole 686b is set larger than the opening area of the positioning hole 685b.
As a result, when the right-frame lamp board 621 is fixed to the right-frame board mounting portion 653, the positioning hole 685b and the fixing hole 686b are not mistaken, so that the assembly work can proceed smoothly. .

The right frame cover attachment portion 654 is a portion to which the right frame lamp cover 622 is attached, and is provided on the front right portion of the right base member 650 as shown in FIGS.
Further, the right frame cover attachment portion 654 is provided with a cover fitting groove 662b. The cover fitting groove 662 b is a groove into which the right edge of the right frame lamp cover 622 is fitted, and is formed along the right edge of the right base member 650 .

Then, when the right edge of the right frame lamp cover 622 is fitted into the cover fitting groove 662b and the right frame lamp cover 622 is screwed from the back side of the right base member 650, the right frame lamp cover 622 is formed as shown in FIGS. A cover 622 is fixed to the right frame cover mounting portion 654 .
419 and 426, the left edge of the right frame lamp cover 622 (edge on the game board 504 side) covers the outside of the left edge of the right base member 650 (edge on the game board 504 side). is formed as

Further, as described above, the right frame lamp board 621 is formed in a vertically long, substantially rectangular shape (see FIG. 417), and the right frame board mounting portion 653 is shaped along the outer peripheral edge of the right frame lamp board 621. (see FIG. 425). The width W1 (FIG. 417) of the right frame lamp substrate 621 in the lateral direction is substantially the same as the width W2 (FIG. 425) of the right frame substrate mounting portion 653 in the lateral direction.
That is, when the width of the right-frame lamp substrate 621 in the width direction is "W1" and the width of the right-frame substrate mounting portion 653 in the width direction is "W2", it is set to satisfy "W1≈W2". It is As a result, the right frame lamp board 621 covers the right frame board mounting portion 653 .

The entire surface of the right-frame lamp substrate 621 on which the light-emitting elements are mounted is white. The entire mounting surface of the element can be made to function as a reflector, thereby making it possible to make the color development of the light emitting element look beautiful.
In addition, "substantially rectangular shape" means "approximately rectangular shape". Therefore, as long as the shape is approximately rectangular, for example, the long sides and short sides may have unevenness in the middle, and all or part of the long sides and short sides may be curved or inclined. Moreover, the corners may not be right angles, and the corners may be rounded. In addition, "substantially rectangular" is a concept including "rectangular".

Further, the right frame board mounting portion 653 is formed along the outer peripheral edge of the right frame lamp board 621, and the right frame cover mounting portion 654 is formed along the outer peripheral edge of the right frame board mounting portion 653. formed. The edge of the right frame lamp cover 622 on the right frame cover mounting portion 654 side is formed in a shape along the outer peripheral edge of the right frame lamp substrate 621 .
Therefore, when the right frame lamp board 621 is attached to the right frame board mounting portion 653 and the right frame lamp cover 622 is attached to the right frame cover mounting portion 654, the entire inside of the right frame lamp cover 622 is covered with the right frame lamp. It appears to be covered with substrate 621 . Therefore, even if the molding color of the right base member 650 is not white (for example, even if it is black), the entire inside of the right frame lamp cover 622 looks white, so that the light emitting element looks beautiful.

Further, as shown in FIG. 416, a lens portion 670 is provided at a position facing the right frame lamp substrate 621 in the right frame lamp cover 622 . As shown in FIGS. 427(a) and 427(b), the lens portion 670 is formed by connecting curved surfaces having different curvatures but the same thickness.
FIG. 427(a) shows a partial cross-sectional view of the lens portion 670 that the right frame lamp cover 622 has, and FIG. 427(b) shows another partial cross-sectional view of the lens portion 670 that the right frame lamp cover 622 has. showing.

As shown in FIGS. 427(a) and 427(b), the lens portion 670 has the same thickness at all locations, but different curvatures depending on the location.
In this way, by forming the lens portion 670 into a shape in which curved surfaces having different curvatures but the same thickness are joined together, the manufacturing cost of the mold for molding the right frame lamp cover 622 can be reduced. The light emitted from the light emitting element can be displayed clearly.
The upper frame lamp cover 613 and the left frame lamp cover 632 also have a lens portion at a position facing the lamp substrate, and the shape of the lens portion is formed by connecting curved surfaces having different curvatures but the same thickness. The shape is similar to the right frame lamp cover 622 .

Further, as described in the nineteenth embodiment (B), the pachinko game machine 500 includes a main control board (main board, main control board) 530 corresponding to the main control board 50 of the slot machine 10, A sub control board (effect control board, effect board) 540 corresponding to the sub control board 80 and a payout control board (prize ball control board) 520 are provided.
The main control board 530 controls the progress of the game, the sub-control board 540 controls the output of effects, and the payout control board 520 controls the operation of the payout device 524 . All of these control boards are harness-connected.

The sub-control board 540, the upper frame right lamp board 611, the upper frame left lamp board 612, the right frame lamp board 621, and the left frame lamp board 631 are harness-connected.
The sub-control board 540 controls light emission of the light-emitting elements mounted on these lamp boards.
Connectors mounted on these lamp boards are used for harness connection between the sub-control board 540 and these lamp boards.

Specifically, the sub-control board 540 is connected to the main control board 530, determines the contents of the effect based on commands transmitted from the main control board 530, and controls to output the determined effect. At this time, the sub control board 540 controls the light emission of the light emitting elements mounted on the upper frame right lamp board 611 , the upper frame left lamp board 612 , the right frame lamp board 621 , and the left frame lamp board 631 .
The sub-control board 540 includes a sub-main board for controlling the entire presentation and a sub-sub-board for controlling image display of the image display device 23 .

As described in the nineteenth embodiment (B), the main control board 530 includes a starting port switch 533 for detecting that a game ball has entered a starting port 532 provided in the game area of the game board 504. are connected (see FIG. 99). When the game ball wins the start port 532 and detects that the start port switch 533 is turned on, the main control board 530 acquires a random number value, executes various lotteries based on the acquired random number value, and special symbol display device. The variable display of special symbols in 531 is started. Then, the main control board 530 determines the fluctuation time of the special symbols in the special symbol display device 531 and the stop symbols based on the results of various lotteries, and the special symbols in the special symbol display device 531 correspond to the determination. Control display.

Specifically, the main control board 530 continues to determine whether or not a game ball has entered the starting port 532 (the starting port switch 533 has been turned on) (step S741 in FIG. 102). Then, when it is determined that the starting port switch 533 is turned on, the main control board 530 acquires a random number value, and based on the acquired random number value, a jackpot lottery (lottery for a big win or a loser), a special symbol. A lottery (a lottery to determine which symbol should be used as the stop symbol of the special symbol) and a variation pattern lottery (a lottery to determine the time to variably display the special symbol) are executed (step S742 in FIG. 102).
Further, when the above various lotteries are executed, the main control board 530 transmits commands indicating at least part of the lottery results to the sub-control board 540 . Then, when the sub-control board 540 receives a command indicating the lottery result, it controls the production lamp 541, the speaker 542, and the image display device 543 so as to correspond to the lottery result.

Specifically, when the main control board 530 wins a big win in a big win lottery, the main control board 530 transmits a command (jackpot command) to the sub-control board 540 indicating that the big win has been won.
Then, when the sub-control board 540 receives the jackpot command, the sub-control board 540 controls the light-emitting elements mounted on the upper frame right lamp board 611, the upper frame left lamp board 612, the right frame lamp board 621, and the left frame lamp board 631 for the big win. to emit light in a corresponding light emission pattern.
Also, as a light emission pattern corresponding to the big win, each output value of red (R), green (G), and blue (B) of the light emitting element is changed in a predetermined pattern within the range of "0" to "255". As a result, the light-emitting element can emit light in so-called rainbow colors, and the player can be notified that the jackpot lottery has won a jackpot.

Further, the lamp covers such as the upper frame lamp cover 613 are made of a colorless translucent resin, and the entire mounting surface of the light emitting element on the lamp substrate such as the upper frame right lamp substrate 611 is white. Therefore, by causing the light emitting element to emit light in rainbow colors at the time of a big hit, the color development of the light emitting element can be made to look beautiful.
When a big win is achieved, the light-emitting elements mounted on one or more lamp substrates among the plurality of lamp substrates are caused to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the big win. Therefore, only the light emitting elements mounted on the upper frame right lamp substrate 611 and the upper frame left lamp substrate 612 may be caused to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the big win, or all lamp substrates may emit light. The element may be illuminated in a lighting pattern corresponding to a big win.

In addition, when the jackpot is won, the light emitting elements mounted on the upper frame right lamp substrate 611 and the upper frame left lamp substrate 612 are caused to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the jackpot, and the right frame lamp substrate 621 and The light-emitting element mounted on the left frame lamp substrate 631 may emit white light.
By setting the output values of red (R), green (G), and blue (B) of the light emitting element to "255", the light emitting element can emit white light.

As described in the nineteenth embodiment (B), the payout control board 520 is electrically connected to the door opening switch 522 and the frame opening switch 523 (see FIG. 99).
When the glass door 505 is opened, the door open switch 522 is turned on, and the signal is input to the payout control board 520 and further transmitted to the main control board 530 . When detecting that the door open switch 522 is turned on, the main control board 530 transmits a command (door open command) indicating that the door open switch 522 is turned on to the sub control board 540 .
When the sub-control board 540 receives the door open command, the light emitting elements mounted on the upper frame right lamp board 611, the upper frame left lamp board 612, the right frame lamp board 621, and the left frame lamp board 631 are displayed in white. Control to emit light.

Further, when the front frame 502 is opened, the frame opening switch 523 is turned on, and the signal is input to the payout control board 520 and further transmitted to the main control board 530 . When detecting that the frame open switch 523 is turned on, the main control board 530 transmits a command indicating that the frame open switch 523 is turned on (frame open command) to the sub control board 540 .
When the sub-control board 540 receives the frame open command, the light emitting elements mounted on the upper frame right lamp board 611, the upper frame left lamp board 612, the right frame lamp board 621, and the left frame lamp board 631 are displayed in white. Control to emit light.

As described above, by setting each output value of red (R), green (G), and blue (B) of the light emitting element to "255", the light emitting element can emit white light.
Further, when it is detected that the door open switch 522 or the frame open switch 523 is turned on, the light emitting elements mounted on the lamp substrates such as the upper frame right lamp substrate 611 emit light in white, so that the glass door 505 and the front frame are illuminated. Hall clerk can be notified that 502 is open.

Further, the lamp covers such as the upper frame lamp cover 613 are made of a colorless translucent resin, and the entire mounting surface of the light emitting element on the lamp substrate such as the upper frame right lamp substrate 611 is white. Therefore, when the light-emitting element emits white light, it is conspicuous, so that the hall clerk can easily notice that the glass door 505 or the front frame 502 is open.

Note that when the glass door 505 or the front frame 502 is open, the light-emitting elements mounted on one or more of the plurality of lamp substrates may emit white light. Therefore, only the light-emitting elements mounted on the right-frame lamp substrate 621 and the left-frame lamp substrate 631 may emit white light, or all the light-emitting elements mounted on the lamp substrates may emit white light. good too.
Furthermore, when the glass door 505 or the front frame 502 is opened, the light emitting element may blink in a predetermined pattern corresponding to when the glass door 505 or the front frame 502 is opened.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 500, when a game ball enters the starting hole 532 and the ON state of the starting hole switch 533 is detected, the main control board 530 acquires a random number value, and based on the acquired random number value , jackpot lottery (lottery for winning or losing), special pattern lottery (lottery for which pattern to stop the special pattern), variation pattern lottery (lottery for the time to display the special pattern in a variable manner). At the same time, the special symbol display device 531 starts the variable display of the special symbols.

In addition, the main control board 530 determines the fluctuation time and the stop pattern of the special symbols in the special symbol display device 531 based on the results of the above various lotteries, and the special symbols in the special symbol display device 531 correspond to the determination. Controls the display of symbols.
Then, in the pachinko game machine 500, when the game ball enters the starting port 532 and the ON state of the starting port switch 533 is detected, one game starts, and the special symbol display device 531 ends the variable display of the special symbols. One game can be finished when the special symbol is stopped and displayed.

Further, when the above various lotteries are executed, the main control board 530 transmits commands indicating at least part of the lottery results to the sub-control board 540 . Then, when the sub-control board 540 receives a command indicating the lottery result, it controls the production lamp 541, the speaker 542, and the image display device 543 so as to correspond to the lottery result.
Specifically, when the main control board 530 loses in the jackpot lottery, the main control board 530 transmits to the sub-control board 540 a command indicating the loss (loss command).

In addition, when the sub-control board 540 receives the losing command, it executes a drawing for the effect pattern at the time of losing (a lottery for selecting either the effect pattern 1 or the effect pattern 2).
The sub-control board 540 is mounted on the upper frame right lamp board 611, the upper frame left lamp board 612, the right frame lamp board 621, and the left frame lamp board 631 in a mode according to the result of the production pattern lottery. The light emitting element is caused to emit light, and the red LED mounted on the decoration substrate on the game board 504 is controlled to emit light.

Figures 428(a) and (b) show production patterns when the jackpot lottery is lost, (a) is a time chart showing production pattern 1 when the game is lost, and (b) is , is a time chart showing effect pattern 2 at the time of miss.
In FIGS. 428(a) and (b), “LED1” indicates LEDs 641e to 641k (all full-color LEDs) mounted on the right frame lamp substrate 621, and “LED2” indicates the upper frame right lamp substrate 611. Mounted LEDs 641a to 641d (all full-color LEDs) are shown.

In addition, in FIGS. 428(a) and (b), "LED3" indicates one red LED mounted on a board provided with decorations on the game board 504, and "LED4" indicates decorations on the game board 504. 2 shows another red LED mounted on a board with FIG. The mounting surface of the red LED on the board provided with the decoration on the game board 504 is green.

In this embodiment, both when the effect pattern 1 is determined and when the effect pattern 2 is determined, the variation time of the special symbol is set to 10 seconds.
As shown in FIG. 428 (a), when the production pattern 1 is determined, LED1 (LED641e ~ 641k mounted on the right frame lamp board 621) is lit (on) at the same time as the special symbols start to fluctuate. , Turn off (turn off) before the end of the special symbol fluctuation. Also, in effect pattern 1, the lighting time of LED 1 is set to 6 seconds.

Further, as shown in FIG. 428(a), when the production pattern 1 is determined, LED2 (LED641a to 641d mounted on the upper frame right lamp substrate 611) lights up after the start of fluctuation of the special symbol. , before the end of the fluctuation of the special symbol, and goes out at the same time as the LED 1 goes out. Also, in effect pattern 1, the lighting time of LED 2 is set to 1 second.
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 428(a), when production pattern 1 is determined, LED3 (one red LED mounted on the board provided with the decoration on the game board 504) changes the special symbol. Lights up after the start and turns off before the end of the special symbol fluctuation. Also, in effect pattern 1, the lighting time of LED 3 is set to 2 seconds.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 428(a), when production pattern 1 is determined, LED4 (another red LED mounted on a board provided with a decoration on the game board 504) starts fluctuating special symbols. After that, it lights up at the same time as the LED3 lights up, and before the end of the variation of the special symbol, it goes out at the same time as the LED2 lights up. Also, in the production pattern 1, the lighting time of the LED 4 is set to 3 seconds.

As shown in FIG. 428(b), when production pattern 2 is determined, LED 1 lights up at the same time as the special symbol variation starts, and the special symbol variation ends, in the same way as when production pattern 1 is determined. turn off earlier. Also in effect pattern 2, similarly to effect pattern 1, the lighting time of LED 1 is set to 6 seconds.
Also, as shown in FIG. 428(b), when effect pattern 2 is determined, LED2 does not light up, unlike when effect pattern 1 is determined. Therefore, in effect pattern 2, the lighting time of LED 2 is 0 second.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 428(b), when the effect pattern 2 is determined, the LED 3 lights up after the start of the variation of the special symbols, and before the end of the variation of the special symbols, the LED 1 goes out. turn off at the same time. Also, in effect pattern 2, the lighting time of LED 3 is set to 4 seconds.
Further, as shown in FIG. 428(b), when the effect pattern 2 is determined, LED4 is after the start of the special symbol variation, and is lit at the same time as LED3 is lit, and from the end of the special symbol variation. It is before and goes out before the LED 3 goes out. Also in the effect pattern 2, similarly to the effect pattern 1, the lighting time of the LED 4 is set to 3 seconds.

As described above, in the present embodiment, in a game that is lost in the jackpot lottery, either the production pattern 1 or the production pattern 2 is determined by the production pattern lottery, and the LEDs 1 to 4 emit light according to the decided production pattern. Control.
Then, the LED 1 is lit (lighted) for 6 seconds regardless of whether the performance pattern 1 or the performance pattern 2 is determined.
Therefore, the average value of the lighting (emission) time of the LED 1 is 6 seconds in the games that failed in the jackpot lottery.

When the performance pattern 1 is determined, the LED 2 is lit for one second, and when the performance pattern 2 is determined, the LED 2 is not lit.
For this reason, the average value of the lighting time of the LED 3 in the games that failed in the big winning lottery is 1 second or less.
Furthermore, the LED 3 is lit for 2 seconds when the performance pattern 1 is determined, and is lit for 4 seconds when the performance pattern 2 is determined.
Therefore, the average value of the lighting time of the LED 4 in the games that failed in the jackpot lottery is 2 seconds or more and 4 seconds or less.

Further, the LED 4 is lit (lighted) for 3 seconds regardless of whether the performance pattern 1 or the performance pattern 2 is determined.
Therefore, the average value of the lighting time of the LED 4 is 3 seconds in the games that failed in the jackpot lottery.
As described above, the average value of the lighting time of the LED 1 in the game lost in the big winning lottery is set longer than the average value of the lighting time of the LEDs 2 to 4 in the game lost in the big winning lottery.

As described above, the entire mounting surface of the LEDs 641e to 641k on the right-frame lamp substrate 621 is white, and the right-frame lamp cover 622 is made of colorless translucent resin. Therefore, the light emission of the LED 1 (the LEDs 641e to 641k mounted on the right frame lamp substrate 621) can be displayed beautifully, so even in a game that is lost in the jackpot lottery, a beautiful effect using the LED 1 can be displayed. can.

Although the forty-fifth embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the contents described above, and various modifications such as those described below are possible.
(1) In the forty-fifth embodiment, the lamp covers such as the upper frame lamp cover 613 are made of colorless translucent resin, but the present invention is not limited to this.
The lamp cover such as the upper frame lamp cover 613 may be colorless or white and have a translucent part.

Therefore, the lamp cover such as the upper frame lamp cover 613 may be entirely colorless and translucent, or may be entirely white and translucent.
Further, the lamp cover such as the upper frame lamp cover 613 is colorless and translucent only in the portion corresponding to the front of the light emitting element, for example, and the other portion is colored such as red or blue and translucent. It may have transparency or may not have translucency.
Furthermore, the lamp cover such as the upper frame lamp cover 613 has, for example, only the portion corresponding to the front of the light emitting element white and translucent, and the other portions are translucent with a color such as red or blue. It may or may not have translucency.

Furthermore, all or part of the lamp covers such as the upper frame lamp cover 613 may be configured to be visible in a color substantially the same as or similar to one emission color of the full-color LED as the light emitting means.
Specifically, for example, the LEDs 641e to 641k of the right frame lamp board 621 are set to blue (red (R) output value “0”, green (G) output value “0”, blue (B) output value “ 255”), and the entire right frame lamp cover 622 is made of a blue resin that looks substantially the same color as when the LEDs 641e to 641k emit light in the above blue color, or a blue resin that looks similar to the above blue color. It can be made of resin.

Note that due to manufacturing errors, the color of the right frame lamp cover 622 may vary, for example, from output value "0" for red (R), output value "0" for green (G), and output value "250" for blue (B). The emission color may be the same as the color of the light emitted at the time, or the emission color when the output value of red (R) is "5", the output value of green (G) is "5", and the output value of blue (B) is "255". It may be the same color as
Considering such a point, it is described as "substantially the same color".
In addition, "substantially the same color" is a concept including "same color". Also, "substantially the same color" is a concept that includes colors that are not exactly the same color but look the same color.
FIG. 429 is a diagram for explaining substantially the same color using a chromaticity diagram according to the CIE (Commission International de l'Eclairage) standard color system (XYZ color system).
FIG. 429 shows the range of “substantially the same color” as blue, taking blue as an example.
In FIG. 429, black circles indicate blue (output value “0” for red (R), output value “0” for green (G), and output value “255” for blue (B)). shows an example of the range of "almost the same color" as blue.

In addition, "similar color" is a concept that does not include the target color, but includes colors in the vicinity of the target color.
FIG. 430 is a diagram for explaining analogous colors using a chromaticity diagram according to the CIE standard color system.
FIG. 430 shows the range of “similar colors” of blue, taking blue as an example.
In FIG. 430, white circles indicate blue (output value “0” for red (R), output value “0” for green (G), output value “255” for blue (B)), and hatching around the white circles The circle marked with indicates an example of the range of "similar colors" of blue.

Also, the range of blue "similar colors" is not limited to the range of the hatched circle in FIG. It can be the range of "similar colors".
For example, in the chromaticity diagram according to the CIE standard color system shown in FIG. Since it is a range recognized as , it can be set as a range of "similar colors" of blue.

The same applies to the range of “similar colors” of colors other than blue.
For example, in the chromaticity diagram according to the CIE standard color system shown in FIG. 430, general players are green in the range of 0 to 0.3 on the x-axis and 0.6 or more on the y-axis. Therefore, it can be regarded as a range of "similar colors" of green.
Further, for example, in the chromaticity diagram according to the CIE standard color system shown in FIG. is the range that is recognized as red, it can be regarded as the range of "similar colors" of red.

In the forty-fifth embodiment, the mounting surface of the light-emitting element (light-emitting means) on the lamp substrate such as the upper frame right lamp substrate 611 is entirely white, but at least part of it is substantially white. It is good if it is.
For example, of the mounting surface of the LEDs 641a to 641d on the upper frame right lamp substrate 611, the periphery of the LEDs 641a to 641d may be substantially white, and the outer peripheral edge of the upper frame right lamp substrate 611 may be black.
In addition, "substantially white" is a concept including "white". Also, "substantially white" is a concept that includes colors that are not completely white but appear to be white.

Even when at least part of the lamp cover is configured to be visible in a color substantially the same as or similar to the color of light emitted by the light emitting means, at least part of the mounting surface of the light emitting means on the lamp substrate is substantially white. By configuring with, even if the mounting surface of the light emitting means on the lamp substrate can be seen through the lamp cover, it can be prevented from looking bad, the color development of the light emitting means can be made to look beautiful, and furthermore, the light is emitted. When the means emits light, it can be made to appear to emit light in the set color.

(2) In the forty-fifth embodiment, the opening area of the fixing hole 686a is set larger than the opening area of the positioning hole 685a, but this is not restrictive.
For example, the opening area of the fixing hole 686a may be set smaller than the opening area of the positioning hole 685a.
FIG. 431 is a view showing a modification of the AA cross section of FIG. 420, and is a view corresponding to FIG. As shown in FIG. 431, the diameter of the positioning boss 682a may be set larger than the inner diameter of the fixing hole 686a. In this case, the opening area of the fixing hole 686a becomes smaller than the opening area of the positioning hole 685a, and the positioning boss 682a cannot be inserted into the fixing hole 686a. Even in this way, it is possible to prevent confusion between the positioning hole 685a and the fixing hole 686a.

(3) In the forty-fifth embodiment, the positioning hole 685a is formed in an oval shape, but it is not limited to this, and may be formed in a circular shape, for example.
(4) In the forty-fifth embodiment, the screw head 689 of the screw 683a is plated with silver as a surface treatment for reflecting the light emitted from the LEDs 641a to 641d, but the present invention is not limited to this. As a surface treatment for reflecting the light emitted from the LEDs 641a to 641d, the screw head 689 of the screw 683a may be painted white, for example.

(5) In the forty-fifth embodiment, the upper frame lamp section 610 includes two lamp substrates, the upper frame right lamp substrate 611 and the upper frame left lamp substrate 612, but is not limited to this. lamp substrates alone, or three or more lamp substrates.
Also, the upper frame lamp cover 613 may be formed as one integral member. Alternatively, for example, a first member (upper frame right member) located in the right portion and a second member located in the central portion may be provided. It may be composed of three members: a member (upper frame center member) and a third member (upper frame left member) positioned on the left side.

(6) In the forty-fifth embodiment, the right-frame lamp section 620 includes only one of the right-frame lamp substrates 621 as the lamp substrate. .
Also, the right frame lamp cover 622 may be one integrally formed member. Alternatively, for example, a first member (right frame upper member) located in the upper portion and a first member located in the lower portion. You may comprise from two members of 2 members (right frame lower side member).

(7) In the forty-fifth embodiment, the left-frame lamp section 630 includes only one left-frame lamp substrate 631 as a lamp substrate. .
That is, as described in the forty-fifth embodiment and modifications (5) to (7), each of the upper frame lamp portion 610, the right frame lamp portion 620, and the left frame lamp portion 630 has only one lamp substrate. Alternatively, a plurality of lamp substrates may be provided.
Also, the left frame lamp cover 632 may be formed as one integral member. Alternatively, for example, a first member (left frame upper member) located in the upper portion and a first member located in the lower portion (left frame upper member) may be provided. It may be composed of two members (left frame lower member).

Further, for example, the upper frame right lamp substrate 611 and the upper frame left lamp substrate 612 are attached to the front upper portion of the glass door 505, and the upper frame lamp is mounted so as to cover the upper frame right lamp substrate 611 and the upper frame left lamp substrate 612. The cover 613 may be attached to configure the upper frame lamp portion 610 .
Similarly, a right-frame lamp substrate 621 is attached to the front right portion of the glass door 505, and a right-frame lamp cover 622 is attached so as to cover the right-frame lamp substrate 621 to form a right-frame lamp section 620. The left frame lamp portion 630 may be configured by attaching the left frame lamp substrate 631 to the front left portion of the glass door 505 and attaching the left frame lamp cover 632 so as to cover the left frame lamp substrate 631 .

That is, the effect lamp (decorative lamp portion) 541 such as the right frame lamp portion 620 may be unitized, but the lamp substrate such as the right frame lamp substrate 621 is directly attached to a predetermined position of the glass door 505, and the lamp The effect lamp 541 may be configured by directly attaching a lamp cover such as the right frame lamp cover 622 so as to cover the substrate.

(8) In the forty-fifth embodiment, when it is detected that the door open switch 522 or the frame open switch 523 is turned on, the light emitting element mounted on the upper frame right lamp substrate 611 or the like emits white light, and the glass door 505 is opened. and the opening of the front frame 502 is notified to the staff in the hall.
However, not limited to this, for example, in the setting change state or setting confirmation state, the light emitting element mounted on the upper frame right side lamp substrate 611 or the like emits white light, and is controlled to the setting change state or setting confirmation state. You can also notify the hall clerk that you are there.

Here, the setting change state and the setting confirmation state will be described, although the description partially overlaps with that of the nineteenth embodiment (B).
As described in the nineteenth embodiment (B), the main control board 530 is provided with a setting key switch 535 having a setting key insertion opening 534 and a setting change (reset) switch 536 (see FIG. 99). .

The setting key switch 535 is a switch that is turned on by inserting a predetermined setting key from the setting key insertion opening 534 and rotating it clockwise by 90 degrees, for example.
A setting change (reset) switch 536 is a switch that serves both as a setting change switch and a reset switch. The setting change switch is a switch that is operated when changing the set value during the setting change state. A reset switch is a switch that is operated after removing an error that has occurred to restore the state before the error occurred.

In the pachinko game machine 500, the setting key switch 535 and the reset switch 536 are turned on with the power switch 511 turned off (power off state). Transition.
Specifically, when the power switch 511 is turned on, the main control board 530 determines whether the frame opening switch 523 is on, the setting key switch 535 is on, and the reset switch 536 is on. is determined (step S701 in FIG. 100).
When it is determined that the frame opening switch 523 is on, the setting key switch 535 is on, and the reset switch 536 is on ("Yes" in step S701 in FIG. 100), the setting change state is entered. (Step S702 in FIG. 100).

When the setting change state is entered, the current set value is displayed on the set value display LED.
In addition, in the setting change state, the set value is incremented by "1" each time the setting change switch 536 is operated once. In this embodiment, the setting value has six levels from setting 1 to setting 6. In the setting change state, the setting value changes from "1" to "2" each time the setting change switch 536 is operated once. ]→...→"5"→"6"→"1"→... cyclically.
Then, when the setting key switch 535 is turned off, the setting value is confirmed and the setting change state is terminated.

When the power switch 511 is turned off and the setting key switch 535 is turned on, and the reset switch 536 is turned off and the power switch 511 is turned on, the setting confirmation state is entered.
Specifically, when the main control board 530 determines that the conditions for shifting to the setting change state are not satisfied when the power switch 511 is turned on ("No" in step S701 of FIG. 100), the following First, it is determined whether the frame open switch 523 is on, the setting key switch 535 is on, and the reset switch 536 is off (step S703 in FIG. 100).

When it is determined that the frame open switch 523 is on, the setting key switch 535 is on, and the reset switch 536 is off ("Yes" in step S703 in FIG. 100), the state is shifted to the setting confirmation state. (step S704 in FIG. 100).
In the setting confirmation state, the setting value cannot be changed, but the current setting value is displayed on the setting value display LED. This makes it possible to check the current set value.
Then, when the setting key switch 535 is turned off, the setting confirmation state ends.

Further, when shifting to the setting change state, the main control board 530 transmits to the sub control board 540 a command (setting change start command) indicating that it has shifted to the setting change state.
When the sub-control board 540 receives the setting change start command, the sub-control board 540 turns on the light emitting elements mounted on the upper frame right lamp board 611, the upper frame left lamp board 612, the right frame lamp board 621, and the left frame lamp board 631. , to emit white light.

Furthermore, when the setting change state ends, the main control board 530 transmits a command indicating the end of the setting change state (setting change end command) to the sub control board 540 .
Then, when the sub-control board 540 receives the setting change end command, it ends the control for causing the light-emitting element to emit white light.
As a result, while the setting change state (step S702 in FIG. 100) continues, the light emitting element continues to emit white light, and when the setting change state ends, the light emitting element stops emitting white light.

In addition, when shifting to the setting confirmation state, the main control board 530 transmits to the sub control board 540 a command (setting confirmation start command) indicating that the setting confirmation state has been entered.
When the sub-control board 540 receives the setting confirmation start command, the light emitting elements mounted on the upper frame right lamp board 611, the upper frame left lamp board 612, the right frame lamp board 621, and the left frame lamp board 631 are switched to white. to emit light.

Furthermore, when the setting confirmation state ends, the main control board 530 transmits a command indicating the end of the setting confirmation state (setting confirmation end command) to the sub control board 540 .
Then, when the sub-control board 540 receives the setting confirmation end command, it ends the control for causing the light-emitting element to emit white light.
As a result, while the setting confirmation state (step S704 in FIG. 100) continues, the light emitting element continues to emit white light, and when the setting confirmation state ends, the white light emission of the light emitting element ends.

As described above, by setting each output value of red (R), green (G), and blue (B) of the light emitting element to "255", the light emitting element can emit white light.
Also, in the setting change state or setting confirmation state, the light emitting element mounted on the lamp substrate such as the upper frame right side lamp substrate 611 emits white light, thereby indicating that the setting change state or setting confirmation state is being controlled. can inform the store clerk.

Further, the lamp covers such as the upper frame lamp cover 613 are made of a colorless translucent resin, and the entire mounting surface of the light emitting element on the lamp substrate such as the upper frame right lamp substrate 611 is white. Therefore, if the light-emitting element emits white light, it will be conspicuous, so that the hall clerk can easily notice that the setting change state or the setting confirmation state is being controlled.

When the setting change state or the setting confirmation state is controlled, the light-emitting elements mounted on one or more of the plurality of lamp substrates may emit white light. Therefore, only the light-emitting elements mounted on the right-frame lamp substrate 621 and the left-frame lamp substrate 631 may emit white light, or all the light-emitting elements mounted on the lamp substrates may emit white light. good too.

Further, when the setting change state or the setting confirmation state is controlled, the light emitting element may blink in a predetermined pattern corresponding to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state.
Furthermore, when the glass door 505 or the front frame 502 is opened, and when the light emitting element is blinked while being controlled to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, the glass door 505 or the front frame 502 is opened. The blinking pattern of the light-emitting element can be made different between when it is being controlled and when it is controlled to be in the setting change state or setting confirmation state.

Furthermore, the condition for shifting to the setting change state is not limited to turning on the setting key switch 535 and the reset switch 536 with the power switch 511 turned off, and turning on the power switch 511 in this state.
For example, turning on the setting key switch 535 with the power switch 511 turned off, and then turning on the power switch 511 in this state may be set as a transition condition to the setting change state. That is, it is not necessary to set the reset switch 536 ON as a condition for transition to the setting change state.

Furthermore, the conditions for shifting to the setting confirmation state are not limited to turning on the setting key switch 535 while the power switch 511 is off, and turning on the power switch 511 while the reset switch 536 is off.
For example, turning on the setting key switch 535 while the power switch 511 is on may be set as a transition condition to the setting confirmation state.

(9) In the forty-fifth embodiment, when it is detected that the door open switch 522 or the frame open switch 523 is turned on, the light emitting element mounted on the upper frame right lamp substrate 611 or the like emits white light, and the glass door 505 is opened. and the opening of the front frame 502 is notified to the staff in the hall.
Further, in the above modified example (8), in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, the light emitting element mounted on the upper frame right lamp substrate 611 or the like emits white light to control the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. I tried to inform the hall clerk that it was done.
However, the present invention is not limited to these. For example, when the power is restored, the light-emitting element mounted on the upper frame right lamp substrate 611 or the like emits white light to indicate that the power is being restored from the power interruption. can also inform

As described in the nineteenth embodiment (B), the pachinko game machine 500 executes the processing according to the flowchart shown in FIG. 100 when the power switch 511 is turned on (recovering from power failure). FIG. 100 is a flow chart showing the flow of processing when recovering from power failure.
When the power switch 511 is turned off (when the power is cut off), the main control board 530 stores the information at the time of the power cut off in the RWM.
Also, when the power switch 511 is turned on (when recovering from power interruption), the main control board 530 determines whether or not the information at the time of recovery from power interruption matches the information at the time of power interruption. (Step S707 in FIG. 100).

Then, when the information at the time of recovery from power failure matches the information at the time of power failure, it is determined that the RWM is normal (“Yes” in step S707 in FIG. 100), and the state recovery process is executed. (Step S708 in FIG. 100).
On the other hand, if the information at the time of recovery from the power failure does not match the information at the time of the power failure, it is determined that there is an RWM abnormality (“No” in step S707 in FIG. 100), and the RWM clear process is executed ( step S709 in FIG. 100).

In addition, the state restoration processing (step S708 in FIG. 100) is processing for restoring the state of the solenoid, the state of the special design display device 531, etc. to the state at the time of power failure.
Furthermore, the RWM clearing process (step S709 in FIG. 100) is a process of clearing data stored in a predetermined storage area of the RWM (a process of initializing the predetermined storage area). If the setting change process (step S702 in FIG. 100) is executed, or if it is determined that there is an RWM abnormality ("No" in step S707 in FIG. 100), then the RWM clear process is executed.

Furthermore, when the setting confirmation state ends, the state return processing (step S708 in FIG. 100) is executed, or the RWM clear processing (step S709 in FIG. 100) is executed, then the timer interrupt permitting processing ( 100 step S710) is executed.
Then, when the processing for permitting the timer interrupt is executed, the series of processing executed when returning from power-off ends.

Further, when the power switch 511 is turned on (when recovering from power interruption), the main control board 530 transmits a command (power recovery start command) indicating recovery from power interruption to the sub control board 540. .
When the sub-control board 540 receives the power restoration start command, the sub-control board 540 turns on the light emitting elements mounted on the upper frame right lamp board 611, the upper frame left lamp board 612, the right frame lamp board 621, and the left frame lamp board 631. , to emit white light.

Furthermore, when executing the processing for permitting the timer interrupt, the main control board 530 sends a command (power recovery end command) to the sub control board 540 to indicate that the series of processes executed when recovering from power failure has ended. Send.
Then, when the sub-control board 540 receives the power restoration end command, it ends the control for causing the light-emitting element to emit white light.
As a result, the light emitting element continues to emit white light during the execution of the series of processes when recovering from power failure, and the light emitting element emits white light when the series of processes performed when recovering from power failure is completed. ends.

As described above, by setting each output value of red (R), green (G), and blue (B) of the light emitting element to "255", the light emitting element can emit white light.
In addition, when the power is restored from the power interruption, the light-emitting elements mounted on the lamp substrates such as the lamp substrate 611 on the right side of the upper frame emit white light, thereby informing the hall clerk that the power is being restored from the interruption. can.

Further, the lamp covers such as the upper frame lamp cover 613 are made of a colorless translucent resin, and the entire mounting surface of the light emitting element on the lamp substrate such as the upper frame right lamp substrate 611 is white. Therefore, when the light-emitting element emits white light, it is conspicuous, so that the store clerk in the hall can easily notice that the power supply is being restored.
It should be noted that, during recovery from power-off, the light-emitting elements mounted on one or more of the plurality of lamp substrates may emit white light. Therefore, only the light-emitting elements mounted on the right-frame lamp substrate 621 and the left-frame lamp substrate 631 may emit white light, or all the light-emitting elements mounted on the lamp substrates may emit white light. good too.

Also, during recovery from power interruption, the light-emitting element may blink in a predetermined pattern corresponding to recovery from power interruption.
Furthermore, when the glass door 505 or the front frame 502 is open, when the setting change state or the setting confirmation state is controlled, and when the light emitting element is blinked during recovery from power failure, the glass door The flickering pattern of the light emitting element can be made different when the 505 or the front frame 502 is open, when the setting change state or setting confirmation state is controlled, and when the power is restored from the power off.

(10) In the forty-fifth embodiment and modifications (8) to (9), when it is detected that the door opening switch 522 or the frame opening switch 523 is on, when it is controlled to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, or When the power is turned off, the light-emitting elements mounted on the lamp substrate 611 on the right side of the upper frame emit white light to indicate that the glass door 505 and the front frame 502 are open, and that the settings are changed or confirmed. The hall clerk is notified that the machine is being controlled or that the machine is recovering from a power cut.

However, the emission color of the light emitting element is not limited to white. For example, when it detects that the door open switch 522 or the frame open switch 523 is turned on, when it is controlled to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, or when it recovers from power failure, it is mounted on the upper frame right lamp substrate 611 or the like. The light-emitting elements in the game may be caused to emit light in a color that is not emitted during normal games.

Further, as a color that is not emitted during a normal game, for example, a specific red color can be mentioned. Furthermore, as a specific red color, for example, when the output value of red (R) is set to "255" and the output values of green (G) and blue (B) are set to "0", the light emitting element Emitting red color can be mentioned. Such a red color is a red color that is not emitted during normal games. It is possible to make it easier for the staff in the hall to notice that it is being controlled to the setting confirmation state or that it is in the process of recovering from power-off.

(11) In the forty-fifth embodiment, the production lamp (decorative lamp section) 541 in which the mounting surface of the light-emitting element on the lamp substrate is configured in white was described by taking the case where the gaming machine is the pachinko gaming machine 500 as an example. The 45th embodiment can also be applied when the gaming machine is the slot machine 10 .
FIG. 432 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 10 in the modified example of the forty-fifth embodiment, viewed from the front side (player side).
Although the following description partially overlaps with the seventh embodiment (FIG. 22), it will be described again.

As shown in FIG. 432, the slot machine 10 has a box-shaped cabinet 13 with an opening on the front side, and a front door 12 attached to open and close the opening on the front side of the cabinet 13 .
A door sensor (not shown) for detecting opening of the front door 12 is provided at a predetermined position of the cabinet 13 . When the front door 12 is opened, the door sensor is turned on, thereby detecting the opening of the front door 12 .

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 22 of the seventh embodiment, a pattern display device 14 in which three reels 31 are arranged side by side is arranged inside the cabinet 13. A main control board 50 housed in a main board case 56 is arranged at a position corresponding to a position above the device 14 .
The main control board 50 controls the progress of the game, and includes an input port 51, an output port 52, an RWM 53, a ROM 54, a main CPU 55, and the like. Further, the main control board 50 is electrically connected to the door sensor, the bed switch 40, the start switch 41, the stop switch 42, the pattern display device 14, the sub control board 80, etc. via the input port 51 or the output port 52. ing.

A transparent display window (not shown) is provided in the central portion of the front door 12 . This display window is arranged at a position corresponding to the front of the pattern display device 14 . As a result, the three symbols attached to each reel 31 of the symbol display device 14 can be visually recognized from the front side of the slot machine 10 through the display window.
A bet switch 40, a start switch 41, a stop switch 42, a settlement switch 43, a medal slot 47, and the like are arranged on the front side (player side) of the front door 12 and below the display window. .

Furthermore, an image display device 23 is arranged on the upper part of the front side (player side) of the front door 12, and production lamps (decorative lamp part ) 21 is attached.
Further, a sub-control board 80 housed in a sub-board case 87 is arranged at a position corresponding to the back side of the image display device 23 on the upper side of the back side of the front door 12 .

The sub-control board 80 controls effects, and includes an input port 81, an output port 82, an RWM 83, a ROM 84, a sub-CPU 85, and the like. Also, the sub-control board 80 is electrically connected to the effect lamp 21 , the speaker 22 , the image display device 23 , the main control board 50 and the like via the input port 81 or the output port 82 . Then, based on the command received from the main control board 50, the sub-control board 80 determines at what timing and what kind of effect is to be output. It controls the output of the display device 23 .

Also, as shown in FIG. 432, the effect lamps (decorative lamp portions) 21 are arranged along the front upper edge of the front door 12 and the upper frame lamp portion 26 arranged along the front upper edge of the front door 12. A right frame lamp portion 27 is arranged, and a left frame lamp portion 28 is arranged along the front left edge of the front door 12 .
That is, the upper frame lamp portion 26 is a decorative lamp portion that is formed horizontally from near the right end to near the left end of the front upper portion of the front door 12 .
The right frame lamp portion 27 is a decorative lamp portion formed vertically from the vicinity of the upper end to the vicinity of the lower end of the front right portion of the front door 12 .
Furthermore, the left frame lamp portion 28 is a decorative lamp portion formed vertically from the vicinity of the upper end to the vicinity of the lower end of the front left portion of the front door 12 .

As shown in FIG. 432, the upper frame lamp portion 26 includes an upper frame lamp substrate 26a and an upper frame lamp cover 26b.
The upper frame lamp board 26a is a lamp board on which a light emitting element for causing the upper frame lamp section 26 to emit light and a connector to which a harness for transmitting a control signal to the light emitting element is connected are mounted. It is arranged on the front upper part of the front door 12 with the surface facing the front side (player side).
The upper frame lamp board 26a is formed in a horizontally long shape extending from near the right end to near the left end of the front upper portion of the front door 12. As shown in FIG.

Furthermore, although not shown, eight LEDs are mounted as light emitting elements on the upper frame lamp substrate 26a. All of these eight LEDs are full-color LEDs.
Further, the mounting surface of the light emitting element in the upper frame lamp substrate 26a is white. Specifically, similarly to the example of the pachinko game machine 500 of the forty-fifth embodiment, a white coating film is formed on the entire mounting surface of the light emitting elements in the upper frame lamp substrate 26a. The white coating film is formed by applying a white resist or by silk screen printing.

The upper frame lamp cover 26b is a lamp cover that covers the front side (player side) of the upper frame lamp board 26a, and is attached to the front upper portion of the front door 12. As shown in FIG.
Furthermore, the upper frame lamp cover 26b has a horizontally long shape extending from near the right end to near the left end of the front upper portion of the front door 12, and is made of colorless translucent resin.
Furthermore, the light emitted from the light emitting elements mounted on the upper frame lamp substrate 26a is irradiated onto the upper frame lamp cover 26b.

As shown in FIG. 432, the right frame lamp portion 27 includes a right frame lamp substrate 27a and a right frame lamp cover 27b.
The right-frame lamp board 27a is a lamp board on which a light-emitting element for causing the right-frame lamp section 27 to emit light and a connector to which a harness for transmitting a control signal to the light-emitting element is connected are mounted. It is arranged on the front right side of the front door 12 with the surface facing the front side (player side).

The right frame lamp board 27a is formed in a vertically long substantially rectangular shape extending from the vicinity of the upper end to the vicinity of the lower end of the front right portion of the front door 12. As shown in FIG.
Furthermore, although not shown, 16 LEDs are mounted as light emitting elements on the right frame lamp substrate 27a. All of these 16 LEDs are full-color LEDs.
Further, the mounting surface of the light emitting element on the right frame lamp substrate 27a is white like the upper frame lamp substrate 26a.

The right frame lamp cover 27b is a lamp cover that covers the front side (player side) of the right frame lamp substrate 27a, and is attached to the front right portion of the front door 12. As shown in FIG.
Furthermore, the right frame lamp cover 27b has a vertically long shape extending from the vicinity of the upper end to the vicinity of the lower end of the front right portion of the front door 12, and is made of colorless translucent resin.
Furthermore, the light emitted from the light emitting element mounted on the right frame lamp substrate 27a is irradiated to the right frame lamp cover 27b.

As shown in FIG. 432, the left frame lamp section 28 includes a left frame lamp substrate 28a and a left frame lamp cover 28b.
The left frame lamp board 28a is a lamp board on which a light emitting element for causing the left frame lamp section 28 to emit light and a connector to which a harness for transmitting a control signal to the light emitting element is connected are mounted. It is arranged on the front left side of the front door 12 with the surface facing the front side (player side).

The left frame lamp board 28a is formed in a vertically elongated substantially rectangular shape extending from the vicinity of the upper end of the front left portion of the front door 12 to the vicinity of the lower end.
Furthermore, although not shown, 16 LEDs are mounted as light emitting elements on the left frame lamp substrate 28a. All of these 16 LEDs are full-color LEDs.
Further, the mounting surface of the light emitting element on the left frame lamp substrate 28a is white like the upper frame lamp substrate 26a and the right frame lamp substrate 27a.

The left frame lamp cover 28b is a lamp cover that covers the front side (player side) of the left frame lamp board 28a, and is attached to the front left side of the front door 12. As shown in FIG.
Further, the left frame lamp cover 28b has a vertically long shape extending from the vicinity of the upper end to the vicinity of the lower end of the front left portion of the front door 12, and is made of colorless translucent resin.
Furthermore, the light emitted from the light emitting element mounted on the left frame lamp substrate 28a is irradiated to the left frame lamp cover 28b.

Then, as in the case where the gaming machine is the pachinko gaming machine 500, the upper frame lamp cover 26b, the right frame lamp cover 27b, and the left frame lamp cover 28b are formed of a colorless translucent resin, and the upper frame lamp is The appearance of the upper frame lamp portion 26, the right frame lamp portion 27, and the left frame lamp portion 28 is improved by forming the entire mounting surfaces of the light emitting elements of the substrate 26a, the right frame lamp substrate 27a, and the left frame lamp substrate 28a in white. While preventing deterioration, the color development of the light emitting element is made to look beautiful.

Also, although not shown, the front right portion of the front door 12 is provided with a right frame board mounting portion to which the right frame lamp board 27a is mounted and a right frame cover mounting portion to which the right frame lamp cover 27b is mounted. .
Further, the right-frame lamp board 27a is formed in a vertically long, substantially rectangular shape, and the width of the right-frame lamp board 27a in the short direction is substantially the same as the width of the right-frame board mounting portion in the short direction. It is As a result, the right frame board mounting portion is covered with the right frame lamp board 27a.

The entire surface of the right-frame lamp board 27a on which the light-emitting elements are mounted is white. The entire mounting surface of can be made to function as a reflector, thereby making it possible to make the color development of the light-emitting element look beautiful.

Similarly, the front left portion of the front door 12 is provided with a left frame board mounting portion to which the left frame lamp board 28a is mounted and a left frame cover mounting portion to which the left frame lamp cover 28b is mounted.
The left-frame lamp board 28a is formed in a vertically long, substantially rectangular shape, and the width of the left-frame lamp board 28a in the short direction is substantially the same as the width of the left-frame board mounting portion in the short direction. It is As a result, the left frame board mounting portion is covered with the left frame lamp board 28a. The entire surface of the left-frame lamp substrate 28a on which the light-emitting elements are mounted functions as a reflector so that the colors of the light-emitting elements can be clearly seen.

Further, as in the case where the game machine is the pachinko game machine 500, the right frame lamp board 27a has a positioning boss inserted when the right frame lamp board 27a is positioned at a predetermined position of the right frame board mounting portion. A mounting hole and a fixing hole used for fixing (screwing) the right-frame lamp board 27a to the right-frame board mounting portion are provided adjacent to each other. The opening area of the positioning hole and the opening area of the fixing hole are set to be different. As a result, the positioning hole and the fixing hole are not mistaken, so that the assembly work can proceed smoothly.

Further, the positioning boss has a protrusion that protrudes toward the mounting surface of the light emitting element when the right frame lamp board 27a is positioned at a predetermined position on the right frame board mounting portion.
That is, the positioning boss is inserted into the positioning hole from the side opposite to the light emitting element mounting surface of the right frame lamp substrate 27a, and the tip of the positioning boss protrudes from the light emitting element mounting surface of the right frame lamp substrate 27a. The tip of this positioning boss is called a protrusion. This projecting portion is formed in a convex curved surface shape (dome shape). As a result, the light emitted from the light emitting element is reflected by the protruding portion formed in the convex curved shape, so that the right frame lamp portion 27 can be seen to shine beautifully.

Further, as in the case where the game machine is the pachinko game machine 500, when fixing the right frame lamp board 27a to the right frame board mounting part, the right frame board mounting part is mounted from the light emitting element mounting surface side of the right frame lamp board 27a. and secure it with a screw. At this time, the screw head is exposed on the light emitting element mounting surface side of the right frame lamp substrate 27a. The height of the screw head from the light emitting element mounting surface is set higher than the height of the light emitting element from the light emitting element mounting surface.

Furthermore, as in the case where the gaming machine is the pachinko gaming machine 500, the screw head is subjected to a surface treatment that reflects light emitted from the light emitting element.
As a result, the light emitted from the light emitting element is reflected by the head of the screw so that the right frame lamp portion 27 can be seen to shine beautifully.

Further, similarly to the case where the gaming machine is the pachinko gaming machine 500, a lens portion is provided at a position facing the right frame lamp substrate 27a in the right frame lamp cover 27b. The lens portion is formed by connecting curved surfaces having different curvatures but the same thickness. As a result, the manufacturing cost of the mold for molding the right frame lamp cover 27b can be reduced, and the light emitted from the light emitting element can be clearly seen.
The upper frame lamp cover 26b and the left frame lamp cover 28b also have a lens portion at a position facing the lamp substrate, and the shape of the lens portion is formed by connecting curved surfaces having different curvatures but the same thickness. The shape is similar to that of the right frame lamp cover 27b.

As described above, the slot machine 10 has the main control board 50 and the sub control board 80 .
In addition, the main control board 50 and the sub control board 80 are connected by a harness so that information (commands) necessary for outputting effects can be transmitted in one direction from the main control board 50 to the sub control board 80. there is

Furthermore, the sub-control board 80, the upper frame lamp board 26a, the right frame lamp board 27a, and the left frame lamp board 28a are connected by harnesses.
Then, the sub-control board 80 determines the content of the effect based on the command transmitted from the main control board 50, and controls to output the determined effect. At this time, the sub-control board 80 controls the light emission of the light emitting elements mounted on the upper frame lamp board 26a, the right frame lamp board 27a, and the left frame lamp board 28a.

Also, when the start switch 41 is operated with a specified number of medals bet, a signal generated at that time is input to the main control board 50 . Then, when this signal is input to the main control board 50, the combination lottery means 61 obtains a random number value and draws a winning number based on the obtained random number value. All motors 32 are driven and controlled to rotate all reels 31 .

After that, when the stop switch 42 is operated, a signal generated at that time is input to the main control board 50 . When this signal is input to the main control board 50, the reel control means 65 drives and controls the motor 32 corresponding to the operated stop switch 42 so as to correspond to the lottery result of the combination lottery means 61. , the rotation of the reel 31 associated with the motor 32 is stopped.
Then, the game result of the current game is displayed by the combination of symbols when all the reels 31 are stopped. At this time, if the combination of symbols corresponding to any of the winning combinations stops on the activated line, that winning combination is won, and medals corresponding to the winning combination are paid out.

Further, when a lottery is drawn by the combination lottery means 61 , the main control board 50 transmits a command corresponding to the lottery result to the sub control board 80 .
Then, when the sub-control board 80 receives a command corresponding to the lottery result, the sub-control board 80 is mounted on the upper-frame lamp board 26a, the right-frame lamp board 27a, and the left-frame lamp board 28a so as to correspond to the lottery result. Controls the light emission of the device.

Specifically, when the winning number corresponding to the special combination is won by the combination lottery means 61 , the main control board 50 transmits a command (special combination command) to that effect to the sub control board 80 .
Then, when the sub-control board 80 receives the special combination command, the sub-control board 80 causes the light emitting elements mounted on the upper frame lamp board 26a, the right frame lamp board 27a, and the left frame lamp board 28a to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the special combination. light up.
In addition, as a light emission pattern corresponding to the special role, each output value of red (R), green (G), and blue (B) of the light emitting element is changed in a predetermined pattern within the range of "0" to "255". . As a result, the light-emitting element can emit light in so-called rainbow colors, and the player can be notified that the special combination has been won.

Furthermore, the lamp covers such as the upper frame lamp cover 26b are made of colorless translucent resin, and the entire surface of the lamp substrate such as the upper frame lamp substrate 26a on which the light emitting elements are mounted is white. Therefore, by causing the light-emitting element to emit light in rainbow colors when the special role is won, the color development of the light-emitting element can be made to look beautiful.
When winning a special role, the light-emitting elements mounted on one or more of the plurality of lamp substrates may be caused to emit light in a pattern corresponding to the special role. Therefore, only the light emitting elements mounted on the upper frame lamp board 26a may be caused to emit light in a pattern corresponding to the special role, and all the light emitting elements mounted on the lamp boards may be made to emit light in a pattern corresponding to the special role. It can be made to emit light.

Also, when a special role is won, the light-emitting elements mounted on the upper frame lamp board 26a emit light in a pattern corresponding to the special role, and are mounted on the right frame lamp board 27a and the left frame lamp board 28a. The light-emitting element with the white light may be made to emit white light.
By setting the output values of red (R), green (G), and blue (B) of the light-emitting element to "255", the light-emitting element can emit white light.

Further, as described above, the door sensor is electrically connected to the main control board 50, and when the front door 12 is opened, the door sensor is turned on, and its signal is input to the main control board 50. . Then, when the main control board 50 detects that the door sensor is turned on, the main control board 50 transmits a command to that effect (door open command) to the sub control board 80 .
Upon receiving the door open command, the sub control board 80 controls the light emitting elements mounted on the upper frame lamp board 26a, the right frame lamp board 27a, and the left frame lamp board 28a to emit white light. Thus, it is possible to notify the hall clerk that the front door 12 is open.

Furthermore, the lamp covers such as the upper frame lamp cover 26b are made of colorless translucent resin, and the entire surface of the lamp substrate such as the upper frame lamp substrate 26a on which the light emitting elements are mounted is white. Therefore, if the light-emitting element emits white light, it will be conspicuous, so that the store clerk in the hall can easily notice that the front door 12 is open.
When the front door 12 is open, the light-emitting elements mounted on one or more of the plurality of lamp substrates may emit white light. Therefore, only the light-emitting elements mounted on the right-frame lamp board 27a and the left-frame lamp board 28a may emit white light, or all the light-emitting elements mounted on the lamp boards may emit white light. good too.
Also, when the front door 12 is open, the light emitting element may blink in a predetermined pattern corresponding to when the front door 12 is open.

In addition, in the slot machine 10, when the start switch 41 is operated with a specified number of medals bet, one game is started, all the reels 31 are stopped, and processing such as payout of medals is performed. At times, a game may end.
Furthermore, when the winning combination lottery means 61 does not win, the main control board 50 transmits a command to that effect (non-winning command) to the sub control board 80 .

Furthermore, when the sub-control board 80 receives a non-win command, it executes a drawing for the effect pattern at the time of non-win (lottery for selecting either the effect pattern 1 or the effect pattern 2).
Then, the sub-control board 80 causes the light-emitting elements mounted on the upper frame lamp board 26a, the right frame lamp board 27a, and the left frame lamp board 28a to emit light in a mode according to the result of the production pattern lottery, and displays Control is performed so that the red LED mounted on the substrate provided in the decoration around the window emits light.

Figures 433(a) and (b) show production patterns when the combination lottery means 61 does not win, and (a) is a time chart showing production pattern 1 at the time of non-winning, (b) is a time chart showing effect pattern 2 at the time of non-winning.
In FIGS. 433(a) and 433(b), "LED1" indicates the LED mounted on the right frame lamp substrate 27a, and "LED2" indicates the LED mounted on the upper frame lamp substrate 26a.
In addition, in FIGS. 433(a) and (b), “LED3” indicates one red LED mounted on the board provided with the decoration around the display window, and “LED4” indicates the decoration provided around the display window. Figure 3 shows another red LED mounted on the board. The mounting surface of the red LED on the board provided for the decoration around the display window is green.

Furthermore, in FIGS. 433(a) and 433(b), "reel rotation start" indicates when the reel 31 starts rotating. "First stop operation" indicates when the first stop operation is performed (when the stop switch 42 corresponding to the reel 31 to be stopped first is operated (turned on)). "Second stop operation" indicates when the second stop operation is performed (when the stop switch 42 corresponding to the reel 31 to be stopped second is operated (turned on)). "Third stop operation" indicates when the third stop operation is performed (when the stop switch 42 corresponding to the reel 31 to be stopped last is operated (turned on)). "Payout" indicates the time of processing such as payout of medals.

As shown in FIG. 433(a), in a game in which the role lottery means 61 has not been won, when the production pattern lottery determines the production pattern 1, LED1 (the LED mounted on the right frame lamp board 27a ) is turned on (turned on) when the reel 31 starts to rotate, and turns off (turned off) when the second stop operation is performed.
In addition, in production pattern 1, LED2 (the LED mounted on the upper frame lamp board 26a) is lit after the first stop operation and before the second stop operation, and is turned off during the second stop operation. do. Moreover, LED1 and LED2 are turned off at the same time.

Furthermore, in the effect pattern 1, the LED 3 (one red LED around the display window) is lit after the start of rotation of the reel 31 and before the first stop operation, and is turned off during the first stop operation. .
Furthermore, in effect pattern 1, LED 4 (other red LEDs around the display window) lights up after the start of rotation of reel 31 and before the first stop operation, and after the first stop operation. Therefore, the light is extinguished before the second stop operation. Also, LED3 and LED4 are lit at the same time. Furthermore, the LED4 is turned off at the same time when the LED2 is turned on.

As shown in FIG. 433(b), in a game in which the role lottery means 61 has not been won, when the production pattern lottery determines the production pattern 2, LED1 (the LED mounted on the right frame lamp board 27a ) lights up (turns on) when the reel 31 starts rotating, and turns off (turns off) when the second stop operation is performed, similarly to when the effect pattern 1 is determined.
Also, in the effect pattern 2, the LED2 (the LED mounted on the upper frame lamp board 26a) does not light up, unlike when the effect pattern 1 is determined.

Furthermore, in the production pattern 2, the LED 3 (one red LED around the display window) lights up after the start of rotation of the reel 31 and before the first stop operation, and goes out at the second stop operation. . Also, LED1 and LED3 are turned off at the same time.
Furthermore, in effect pattern 2, LED4 (the other red LED around the display window) is turned on after the start of rotation of reel 31 and before the first stop operation, similarly to when effect pattern 1 is determined. , and turns off after the first stop operation and before the second stop operation. Also, LED3 and LED4 are lit at the same time.

In this way, in the game in which the role lottery means 61 does not win, either the performance pattern 1 or the performance pattern 2 is determined by the performance pattern lottery, and the light emission of the LEDs 1 to 4 is controlled according to the determined performance pattern. .
The LED 1 lights up when the reels 31 start rotating and goes out when the second stop operation is performed in both the effect pattern 1 and the effect pattern 2 .
As for the LED 2, in the effect pattern 1, it lights up after the first stop operation and before the second stop operation, and turns off in the second stop operation, but does not light up in the effect pattern 2. - 特許庁

Furthermore, with effect pattern 1, LED 3 is lit after the start of rotation of reel 31 and before the first stop operation, and is turned off during the first stop operation. It lights up after the start of rotation and before the first stop operation, and goes out during the second stop operation.
Furthermore, in both of the production pattern 1 and the production pattern 2, the LED 4 is lit after the start of rotation of the reel 31 and before the first stop operation, and after the first stop operation. It goes off before the second stop operation.

As described above, the average value of the lighting time of LED1 in the game in which the winning combination lottery means 61 is not won is set longer than the average value of the lighting time of LED2 to LED4 in the game in which the winning combination lottery means 61 fails to win. It is
Since the entire mounting surface of the LEDs on the right-frame lamp substrate 27a is white, and the right-frame lamp cover 27b is made of colorless and translucent resin, the LEDs 1 (right-frame lamp substrate Since the light emission of the LED mounted on the 27a can be displayed beautifully, even in a game in which the winning lottery means 61 is not won, a beautiful performance using the LED 1 can be displayed.

Further, even when the gaming machine is the slot machine 10, similarly to the case where the gaming machine is the pachinko gaming machine 500, the light-emitting element mounted on the upper frame lamp substrate 26a or the like in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. By emitting white light, it is possible to notify the hall clerk that the setting change state or setting confirmation state is being controlled.
In the slot machine 10, the setting key switch is turned on while the power is off (power off state), and when the power is turned on in this state, the setting change state is entered (step S212 in FIG. 38).

When the setting change state is entered, the current set value is displayed on the set value display LED 73 .
Also, in the setting change state, the set value is updated ("+1") each time the setting change switch is operated (steps S240 to S241 in FIG. 38).
When the start switch 41 is operated in the setting change state (“Yes” in step S242 of FIG. 38), the setting value is confirmed, and when the setting key switch is turned off (“Yes” in step S243 of FIG. 38), The configuration change state ends.

When the setting key switch is turned on while the power is on, the slot machine 10 shifts to the setting confirmation state.
Furthermore, in the setting confirmation state, the current setting value is displayed on the setting value display LED 73 although the setting value cannot be changed. This makes it possible to check the current set value.
Then, when the setting key switch is turned off, the setting confirmation state ends.

Further, when shifting to the setting change state, the main control board 50 transmits to the sub control board 80 a command (setting change start command) indicating that it has shifted to the setting change state.
When the sub-control board 80 receives the setting change start command, the sub-control board 80 controls the light emitting elements mounted on the upper frame lamp board 26a, the right frame lamp board 27a, and the left frame lamp board 28a to emit white light. do.

Furthermore, when the setting change state ends, the main control board 50 transmits a command indicating the end of the setting change state (setting change end command) to the sub control board 80 .
Then, when the sub-control board 80 receives the setting change end command, it ends the control for causing the light-emitting element to emit white light.
As a result, while the setting change state continues (during execution of the setting change process in FIG. 39), the light emitting element continues to emit white light, and when the setting change state ends, the light emitting element stops emitting white light.

Further, when shifting to the setting confirmation state, the main control board 50 transmits to the sub control board 80 a command (setting confirmation start command) indicating that it has shifted to the setting confirmation state.
When the sub-control board 80 receives the setting confirmation start command, it controls the light emitting elements mounted on the upper frame lamp board 26a, the right frame lamp board 27a, and the left frame lamp board 28a to emit white light.

Furthermore, when the setting confirmation state ends, the main control board 50 transmits a command indicating the end of the setting confirmation state (setting confirmation end command) to the sub control board 80 .
Then, when the sub-control board 80 receives the setting confirmation end command, it ends the control for causing the light-emitting element to emit white light.
Thus, while the setting confirmation state continues, the light emitting element continues to emit white light, and when the setting confirmation state ends, the white light emission of the light emitting element ends.

As described above, by setting each output value of red (R), green (G), and blue (B) of the light emitting element to "255", the light emitting element can emit white light.
In addition, in the setting change state or setting confirmation state, the light emitting elements mounted on the lamp substrates such as the upper frame lamp substrate 26a emit white light, thereby indicating that the hall is controlled in the setting change state or setting confirmation state. You can let the dealer know.

Furthermore, the lamp covers such as the upper frame lamp cover 26b are made of colorless translucent resin, and the entire surface of the lamp substrate such as the upper frame lamp substrate 26a on which the light emitting elements are mounted is white. Therefore, if the light-emitting element emits white light, it will be conspicuous, so that the hall clerk can easily notice that the setting change state or the setting confirmation state is being controlled.

When the setting change state or the setting confirmation state is controlled, the light-emitting elements mounted on one or more of the plurality of lamp substrates may emit white light. Therefore, only the light-emitting elements mounted on the right-frame lamp board 27a and the left-frame lamp board 28a may emit white light, or all the light-emitting elements mounted on the lamp boards may emit white light. good too.

Further, when the setting change state or the setting confirmation state is controlled, the light emitting element may blink in a predetermined pattern corresponding to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state.
Furthermore, when the front door 12 is open and when the setting change state or the setting confirmation state is controlled to blink the light emitting element, the light emitting element is flashed when the front door 12 is open and when the setting change is performed. The blinking pattern of the light emitting element can be made different between when it is controlled to the state or the setting confirmation state.

Also, in the case where the gaming machine is the slot machine 10, similarly to the case where the gaming machine is the pachinko gaming machine 500, the light-emitting elements mounted on the upper frame lamp substrate 26a and the like are switched to the white color when the power is restored from power-off. By emitting light at , it is possible to notify the staff in the hall that the power is being restored.
Here, in the slot machine 10, when the power is turned off (when the power is turned off), the main control board 50 executes the power-off processing shown in FIG.

Also, when the power is turned on (when recovering from power failure), the main control board 50 executes the power recovery process shown in FIG.
Furthermore, when starting the power restoration process, the main control board 50 transmits a command to that effect (power restoration start command) to the sub-control board 80 .
Further, when the sub-control board 80 receives the power restoration start command, the sub-control board 80 controls the light emitting elements mounted on the upper frame lamp board 26a, the right frame lamp board 27a, and the left frame lamp board 28a to emit white light. do.

Further, when the main control board 50 ends the power restoration process, it transmits a command to that effect (power restoration end command) to the sub control board 80 .
Then, when the sub-control board 80 receives the power restoration end command, it ends the control for causing the light-emitting element to emit white light.
As a result, the light emitting element continues to emit white light while the power restoration process of FIG. 40 is being executed, and when the power restoration process of FIG. 40 ends, the white light emission of the light emitting element ends.

As described above, by setting each output value of red (R), green (G), and blue (B) of the light emitting element to "255", the light emitting element can emit white light.
In addition, by causing the light-emitting elements mounted on the lamp substrates such as the upper frame lamp substrate 26a to emit white light during the execution of the power restoration process, it is possible to notify the staff in the hall that the power restoration process is being executed. can.

Furthermore, the lamp covers such as the upper frame lamp cover 26b are made of colorless translucent resin, and the entire surface of the lamp substrate such as the upper frame lamp substrate 26a on which the light emitting elements are mounted is white. Therefore, if the light-emitting element emits white light, it will be conspicuous, so that the hall clerk can easily notice that the power restoration process is being executed.
During execution of the power restoration process, the light emitting elements mounted on one or more of the plurality of lamp substrates may emit white light. Therefore, only the light-emitting elements mounted on the right-frame lamp board 27a and the left-frame lamp board 27a may emit white light, or all the light-emitting elements mounted on the lamp boards may emit white light. good too.

Further, during execution of the power restoration process, the light emitting element may blink in a predetermined pattern corresponding to the execution of the power restoration process.
Furthermore, when the front door 12 is open, when the setting change state or the setting confirmation state is controlled, and when the light emitting element is blinked during the execution of the power restoration process, the front door 12 is opened. The flashing pattern of the light-emitting element can be made different between when the power supply is on, when it is controlled to the setting change state or setting confirmation state, and when the power restoration process is being executed.

(12) In the forty-fifth embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 500 was taken as an example of the gaming machine, and in the modified example (11), the slot machine 10 was taken as an example of the gaming machine, but the present invention is not limited to these.
For example, in a parrot as a game machine, a sealed game machine (medalless game machine), and a casino machine, the mounting surface of the light emitting element on the lamp substrate provided in the decorative lamp part is configured in white, and the decorative lamp part is provided. By forming the lamp cover with a colorless or white translucent resin, light emitted from the light emitting element can be clearly seen.
“Parrot” is a slot machine that uses game balls as game media.

(13) The first to forty-fifth embodiments and the various modifications shown in the first to forty-fifth embodiments are not limited to being implemented independently, and can be implemented in combination as appropriate.

<Appendix>
The invention described in the original specification, etc. of the present application (original invention) can be, for example, the following original inventions 1 to 85. The means and effects of the original invention are as follows. However, the inventions described in this specification are not meant to be limited to Inventions 1 to 85 originally.

1. Original Invention 1
(a) Problems to be Solved by Original Invention 1 The original invention relates to a game machine that does not execute processing related to game media after a power failure occurs.
In a conventional game machine, by turning off a blocker before executing backup processing as power-off processing, even if medals are inserted during execution of backup processing, the medals are returned to the player via the blocker. Therefore, there is known a technique of not performing the medal addition process (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2015-173832).
However, for example, if a power failure occurs at the moment a medal is inserted from the medal slot, the medal will pass through the blocker before the power shutdown process is executed, and the medal will be counted. It was possible. In terms of control, it is not preferable to execute the medal addition process (the medal bet process or the medal credit process) after the power failure.
The problem to be solved by the original invention is to prevent addition processing of game media from being executed even when a power failure occurs substantially at the same time as game media are inserted from a game medium slot. .

(b) Means for Solving the Problem of Invention 1 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (first embodiment (A)) is
a game medium slot (medal slot 47);
It is provided in a passage (medal passage) for game media (medals) inserted from a game medium slot, and is in a state (on state) that permits passage of game media or a state (off state) that disallows passage of game media. ) controllable blocker (45);
Detection means A (insertion sensor 44a) and B (insertion sensor 44b) provided in the path of the game medium inserted from the game medium insertion port and capable of detecting the game medium (the detection means B is downstream of the detection means A). ) and
When an event occurs in which power supply is interrupted while the blocker is controlled to permit the passage of game media, the power supply interrupt event is detected, and the game media is removed. Let T1 (T1 in FIGS. 2 and 3) be the time until the blocker is controlled to disallow passage,
When the game medium is released from the game medium inlet into the gaming machine under the condition that the blocker is controlled to allow passage of the game medium, the game medium is invisible from the front of the gaming machine. From when it becomes possible (position M2 in FIG. 2) to when the game medium is detected by the detection means B and until the game medium is no longer detected by the detection means B (position M4 in FIG. 2) When the time is T2 (T2 in FIGS. 2 and 3),
T1<T2
It is characterized by

(c) Effect of Original Invention 1 According to the original invention, the game medium is released from the game medium inlet into the gaming machine, and when the game medium becomes invisible from the front of the gaming machine, the power is cut off. In this case, until the detection means B stops detecting the game medium, the blocker is controlled so as to disallow passage of the game medium by detecting an event in which the supply of power is interrupted. , at least not detected by the detection means B.
Therefore, since the game media are not normally detected by the detecting means A and B, the addition processing (betting processing and credit processing) of the game media is not executed. Therefore, even if the power is cut off when the game medium becomes invisible from the front of the gaming machine, that is, even if the power is cut immediately after the game medium is released into the gaming machine, the game You can choose not to accept media. As a result, it is possible to prevent the addition processing of the game media from being executed after the power failure occurs.

2. Original invention 2
(a) Problems to be Solved by Original Invention 2 The original invention relates to a gate mark of a substrate case in a game machine having a substrate case in which a control substrate is accommodated.
2. Description of the Related Art In a conventional gaming machine, a board case is known which accommodates a main control board inside. Here, since the substrate case is generally formed by molding, gate traces remain on the substrate case. A technique using this gate mark as a mark has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-042270).
However, the trace of the gate on the substrate case is unclear when viewed from the outside because it has a cut portion of the resin. Therefore, there is a problem that the inside of the main control board may be accessed by opening the gate mark.
The original problem to be solved by the invention is to suppress the use of the gate traces of the substrate case.

(b) Means for solving the problem of invention 2 (the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses)
The original invention (second embodiment) is
a predetermined IC (main CPU 55) having an arithmetic function;
a control board (main control board 50) having the predetermined IC mounted on one surface (the surface facing the upper surface of the upper cover 57);
A substrate case (substrate case 56 consisting of an upper cover 57 and a lower cover 58) that has a plurality of surfaces (upper surface, side surface, etc.) and accommodates the control substrate,
The substrate case is formed so that the inside can be visually recognized,
A gate trace (57b) at the time of molding of the substrate case is arranged on a surface (outside the upper surface of the upper cover 57) that is outside the substrate case and faces the one surface of the control substrate,
It is characterized in that the predetermined IC of the control substrate is not positioned in the direction perpendicular to the surface facing the gate trace.

(c) Effect of Original Invention 2 According to the original invention, since the predetermined IC on the control substrate is not positioned in the vertical direction of the gate trace of the substrate case, the gate trace is illegally opened to access the predetermined IC. can be prevented.
In addition, since there is no gate trace of the substrate case in the vertical direction of the predetermined IC on the control substrate, the predetermined IC can be visually confirmed without being blocked by the gate trace. Accordingly, it is possible to easily visually confirm whether or not a predetermined IC has been tampered with.

3. Original invention 3
(a) Problem to be Solved by Original Invention 3 The original invention relates to a process when communication is restored from a disconnection after a disconnection occurs in communication between the main control board and the sub-control board.
2. Description of the Related Art In a conventional game machine, a game machine is known in which a command is transmitted from a main control board to a sub-control board, and the sub-control board controls an image display device or the like based on the received command.
Here, there is known a technique in which the sub-control board compares the command received last time with the command received this time, and determines that command reception is abnormal based on the consistency of these received commands (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2014-226503).
However, when a command is transmitted from the main control board to the sub control board, disconnection may occur between the main control board and the sub control board. Then, when the communication is restored, there is a possibility that the sub-control board cannot output a normal effect.
The original problem to be solved by the invention is to provide an appropriate effect when communication is restored after disconnection occurs between the main control board and the sub-control board.

(b) Means for solving the problem of invention 3 (the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses)
The original invention (third embodiment) is
a main control board (50);
A sub-control board (80) that controls the performance based on the information received from the main control board,
The sub-control board can receive information on the operated stop switch (42) from the main control board,
In a predetermined game state (AT), the sub-control board can output an effect corresponding to the operation of the stop switch based on receiving information of the operated stop switch,
The sub-control board is
When a predetermined stop switch is operated in the "N" game in the predetermined game state, when information that the predetermined stop switch is operated is received, a predetermined stop switch corresponding to the operation of the predetermined stop switch is received. An effect (effect when the reel corresponding to the predetermined stop switch is stopped) is output, and then information from the main control board becomes unreceivable before all the remaining stop switches in the "N" game are operated. After that, at the "N+a" game, information from the main control board can be received, and thereafter, at the "N+a" game, information is received that a specific stop switch different from the predetermined stop switch has been operated. When, an effect corresponding to the operation of the specific stop switch and related to the predetermined effect (an effect following the predetermined effect, and an effect when the reel corresponding to the specific stop switch is stopped) is output. After that, when predetermined information is received in the "N+a+1" game, an effect for the "N+a+1" game is output based on the predetermined information.

(c) Effect of the Original Invention 3 According to the original invention, when the communication is restored in the middle of the "N+a" game, an effect related to the predetermined effect of the "N" game that has been output until then is output. Therefore, in the "N+a" game, an effect following the "N" game can be output. Since the normal performance is restored when the game shifts to the "N+a+1" game, the sudden change of the performance due to the return of communication during the "N+a" game can be eliminated. As a result, it is possible to output an effect that does not cause discomfort before and after the disconnection occurs.

4. Original Invention 4
(a) Problems to be Solved by Original Invention 4 The original invention relates to a game machine in which a stop switch can be operated at high speed.
In a conventional game machine, when a stop switch is operated, the reel corresponding to the stop switch is stopped at a predetermined position corresponding to the lottery result. After stopping the reel at a predetermined position, the motor is energized for a predetermined time. Here, when the operated stop switch is in the ON state or when the motor is in the excited state, the next stop switch operation is not accepted.
Here, there is a known technique that does not accept the stop operation even if the second stop switch is operated from the time the first stop switch is operated until the reel status becomes the stopped state ( For example, see JP-A-2017-093576).
However, in the conventional technology described above, there is a problem that the game cannot be completed at high speed if it takes a long time after the stop switch is operated until the next stop switch operation can be accepted.
The original problem to be solved by the invention is to enable the stop switch to be operated at high speed.

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 4 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (fourth embodiment) is
a reel (31);
a motor (32) for rotating the reel;
Reel control means (65) for driving and controlling the motor to stop the rotation of the reel based on detection of the operation of the stop button (stop button 42a);
Internal lottery means (role lottery means 61) and
Until the stop button is pushed to the deepest part (position shown in FIG. 12(c)), a sensor (detection sensor 42e) that detects the operation of the stop button is turned on, and when the stop button is released, the stop button is pushed. The button is configured to be movable to the initial position (the position shown in FIG. 12(a)) by the biasing force, and the sensor is turned off until the stop button moves to the initial position,
In a game in which the internal lottery means has determined a predetermined result, the stop button is operated for a predetermined reel at a predetermined timing under the condition that all the reels are rotated by the reel control means, and the predetermined result is obtained. After detecting that the sensor of the stop button for the reel is turned on, an excitation state (four-phase excitation state) for stopping the predetermined reel is set, and a predetermined time (T12 in FIG. 13) elapses after the excitation state. is configured to terminate the excitation state when
Let T1 (T11 in FIG. 13) be the time from the moment when the stop button pushed to the deepest part is released until the sensor is turned off, and let T2 be the predetermined time,
T1<T2
It is characterized by

(c) Effect of Original Invention 4 According to the original invention, it was assumed that the start of the excitation state of the motor when the reel is stopped and the instant when the push of the stop button pushed to the deepest position is released are simultaneous. Sometimes the energized state ends after the sensor turns off. Therefore, the next operation of the stop button can be accepted at the timing when the excitation state of the motor ends.

5. original invention 5
(a) Problems to be Solved by Original Invention 5 The original invention relates to the control of the medal payout device.
In conventional gaming machines, it is known that it takes about 100 ms to pay out one medal (for example, JP-A-2016-214434).
Here, a DC motor (direct current motor) is used as the hopper motor for rotating the hopper disk. When a constant current is supplied to the DC motor, the drive shaft gradually accelerates from the stopped state. After that, it reaches a constant speed (constant speed).
For this reason, the rotation of the drive shaft of the hopper motor gradually accelerates from the start of driving the hopper motor until the first medal is discharged. The required time is longer than the medal discharge interval when the drive shaft of the hopper motor rotates at a constant speed, and there is a possibility that the player may feel that the discharge of the first medal is delayed.
The original problem to be solved by the invention is to prevent the player from feeling that the discharge of the first medal is delayed.

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 5 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (sixth embodiment) is
a hopper (35) for storing medals;
a hopper disk (101) provided in the hopper;
a hopper motor (36) for rotating the hopper disc;
A control means (main control board 50) for controlling the driving of the hopper motor,
The hopper disk is provided with a plurality (eight pieces) of holding portions (102) capable of holding medals stored in the hopper along the outer circumference of the hopper disk,
When the hopper motor is driven and the hopper disc rotates, the medals held in the holding section are sequentially discharged from the discharge section (103),
A first position is defined as a position of the holding section holding the last discharged medal at the moment when the last discharged medal in one payout process is discharged from the discharging section;
A second position is a position of the holding section that holds the first ejected medal in the next payout process at the moment when the last ejected medal in the one payout process is ejected from the ejecting section,
When the one payout process ends, the control means is configured such that the holding section holding the first ejected medal in the next payout process is positioned between a first position and a second position. and controlling the driving of the hopper motor so as to stop the rotation of the hopper disk.

(c) Effect of the Original Invention 5 According to the original invention, if the holder for holding the first ejected token is stopped between the first position and the second position, it takes a long time to reach the first position. The distance is shorter than when stopped at the second position. As a result, the time it takes to reach the first position is shorter than when it stops at the second position, so even if the rotation of the hopper motor's drive shaft gradually accelerates, the ejection of the first medal is delayed. Feelings can be hidden from the player.

6. original invention 6
(a) Problems to be Solved by Original Invention 6 The original invention relates to the arrangement of the main control board mounted inside the cabinet and the sub-control board mounted on the rear surface of the front door.
In a conventional game machine, there is known one having an electrolytic capacitor for storing electricity on a sub-control board for controlling effects (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-131656).
Here, the electrolytic capacitor for power storage is filled with an electrolytic solution, but if the electrolytic capacitor ruptures due to a malfunction and the filled electrolytic solution scatters and adheres to the main CPU on the main control board, There is a possibility that the main CPU will malfunction. Moreover, there is a possibility that the main CPU will be damaged by the impact when the electrolytic capacitor explodes.
The original problem to be solved by the invention is to prevent the main CPU from malfunctioning even if the electrolytic capacitor ruptures due to a defect and the electrolytic solution scatters. Another object of the present invention is to prevent the main CPU from being damaged by the impact even if the electrolytic capacitor ruptures due to a defect.

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 6 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (seventh embodiment) is
a cabinet (13);
a front door (12) openably attached to the cabinet;
a main control board (50) for controlling the progress of the game;
A sub-control board (80) that controls the production,
The main control board is mounted inside the cabinet,
The sub-control board is attached to the back surface of the front door,
The main control board and the sub-control board are arranged to face each other when the front door is closed,
A main CPU (55) is arranged on the main control board,
An electrolytic capacitor (86) is arranged on the sub-control board at a position other than the position facing the main CPU.

(c) Effect of Original Invention 6 According to the original invention, the electrolytic capacitor is arranged at a position other than the position facing the main CPU on the sub-control board. Even if the electrolyte scatters, the scattered electrolytic solution can be prevented from adhering to the main CPU, thereby preventing malfunction of the main CPU.
Also, even if the electrolytic capacitor explodes, the main CPU can be prevented from directly receiving the impact, thereby preventing damage to the main CPU.

7. original invention 7
(a) Problems to be Solved by Original Invention 7 The original invention relates to reel stop control on the main control board side and effect output control on the sub control board side.
In the conventional game machine, it is possible to execute a plurality of types of performance contents, and each performance content is different when the special role is won (internal) and when the special role is not won (non-internal). have different selection probabilities (for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2013-146608).
However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, the effect content is selected regardless of the lottery results of the internal lottery both during internal and non-internal operations.
The original problem to be solved by the invention is to appropriately determine the effect to be output according to the lottery result of the internal lottery.

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 7 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (ninth embodiment) is
a plurality of reels (31) displaying a plurality of symbols;
a plurality of stop switches (42) operated by the player when stopping each reel;
Main control means (main control board 50) for controlling the progress of the game;
A sub-control means (sub-control board 80) that controls the production,
The main control means is
Internal lottery that draws lots so that there are cases where the first lottery results (e.g., "BB" won alone while not inside) or the second lottery results (e.g., "no win" while inside BB) Means (role lottery means 61),
a plurality of stop position determination tables that define stop positions of the reels corresponding to positions of the reels at the moment the stop switch is operated;
reel control means (65) for determining the stop position of the reel using one of the stop position determination tables and stopping the reel at the determined stop position;
The reel control means determines the stop positions of the reels in the game in which the first lottery result is obtained and in the game in which the second lottery result is obtained, using the same stop position determination table;
The sub-control means is
a plurality of effect determination tables that define effects to be output;
An effect output control means (91) that determines the effect to be output using any of the effect determination tables and outputs the determined effect,
The effect output control means determines the effect to be output using different effect determination tables for the game resulting in the first lottery result and the game resulting in the second lottery result.

(c) Effect of Original Invention 7 According to the original invention, the reel control means on the side of the main control means stops in the same manner in the game in which the internal lottery means results in the first lottery result and the game in which the internal lottery means results in the second lottery result. The position determination table is used to determine the stop position of the reel, but on the side of the sub-control means, the effect output control means determines the effect to be output using a different effect determination table.
Thus, even if the reel stop control on the main control means side is the same, different effects can be output on the sub control means side, and the effects can be diversified.

8. original invention 8
(a) Problem to be Solved by Original Invention 8 The original invention relates to the gap between the cabinet and the front door.
In a conventional game machine, a protruding side protruding outward is provided at the edge of the opening on the front side of the cabinet, and the protruding side is accommodated inside the front door when the front door is closed. Therefore, it is known that the gap between the cabinet and the front door is bent to make it difficult for foreign matter to enter (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-198949).
However, it is conceivable that the front door is slightly opened so that the protruding side is separated from the front door so that foreign matter can enter through the gap between the cabinet and the front door.
The original problem to be solved by the invention is to prevent the fraudulent act of slightly opening the front door to allow a foreign object to enter through the gap between the cabinet and the front door.

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 8 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (eighth embodiment) is
a cabinet (13);
a front door (12) openably attached to the cabinet;
a door sensor that detects opening of the front door,
A first closing portion (13c) protruding toward the front door when the front door is closed is provided at the bottom of the cabinet,
A second closing portion (12a) protruding toward the cabinet when the front door is closed is provided at a lower portion of the front door below the first closing portion,
A third closing portion (12b) projecting toward the cabinet when the front door is closed is provided at a position above the first closing portion in the lower portion of the front door,
When the front door is closed, the first closing portion is arranged between the second closing portion and the third closing portion,
The position of the front door when the door sensor first detects the opening of the front door is defined as a detection start position,
The first closing portion is arranged between the second closing portion and the third closing portion even when the front door is at the detection start position.

(c) Effect of Original Invention 8 According to the original invention, when the front door is opened from the closed state, the door sensor first detects the opening of the front door, and then the second closing portion and the third closing portion are detected. The first blocking part is pulled out from between. Also, when the door sensor detects that the front door is open, it is possible to notify that the front door is open.
Therefore, the fact that the front door is open can be notified without the first closing portion coming out from between the second closing portion and the third closing portion before it becomes possible to notify that the front door is open. Even in the possible position, the gap between the cabinet and the front door has a curved shape, so it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts (stolen acts) of entering foreign objects through the gap between the cabinet and the front door.

9. original invention 9
(a) Problems to be Solved by Original Invention 9 The original invention relates to a gaming machine provided with an advantageous section display.
BACKGROUND ART Conventionally, a game machine having an advantageous section display is known (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2018-000797).
However, in a conventional gaming machine equipped with an advantageous interval indicator, lighting control of the advantageous interval indicator at the time of recovery from power failure has not been sufficiently studied.
The original problem to be solved by the present invention is to appropriately control the advantageous section indicator when returning from power failure.

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 9 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (11th embodiment) is
A notification game state (AT) that can notify the operation mode (correct order of pressing) of the stop button (stop switch 42);
An advantageous section in which the information game state can be executed,
Equipped with an advantageous section indicator (advantageous section display LED 77) indicating that it is an advantageous section,
After the power supply is interrupted while the advantageous interval indicator is illuminated, when the power supply is resumed with the setting change switch turned off, the advantageous interval indicator is turned off after the activation of interrupt processing. Make it possible to execute processing for lighting,
Processing for turning off the advantageous interval indicator when the power supply is restarted while the setting change switch is on after the power supply is interrupted while the advantageous interval indicator is lit. After executing

(c) Effect of Original Invention 9 According to the original invention, the advantageous section indicator can be appropriately controlled according to the situation when the power is restored from power-off.

10. original invention 10
(a) Problem to be Solved by Original Invention 10 The original invention relates to a gaming machine having four reels and a stop button.
A conventional gaming machine generally has three reels and three stop buttons (see, for example, JP-A-2018-000797).
It has also been proposed to use four reels and stop buttons in conventional gaming machines. However, if the number of stop buttons is four, there is a problem that the stop button operation error tends to occur at the time of AT.
The original problem to be solved by the invention is to make it difficult for the stop button to be erroneously operated when the number of stop buttons is set to four.

(b) Means for Solving the Problem of the Original Invention 10 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (13th embodiment) is
four reels (31A-31D);
Four stop buttons (stop switches 42A to 42D) corresponding to each of the four reels,
A predetermined operation button (24) is arranged above the four stop buttons,
At least part of the stop button (stop switch 42A) on the left end side is positioned vertically downward from the left end of the predetermined operation button,
At least part of the stop button (stop switch 42D) on the right end side is positioned vertically downward from the right end of the predetermined operation button.

(c) Effect of Original Invention 10 According to the original invention, even when the number of stop buttons is four, both the left and right stop buttons can be operated using the left and right ends of the operation button as marks. , the operation error of the stop button can be made less likely to occur.

11. original invention 11
(a) Problem to be Solved by Original Invention 11 The original invention relates to a game machine capable of indicating a specified number.
Conventionally, there is known a gaming machine that allows a game to be played with any one of a plurality of types of prescribed numbers (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-000797).
However, in conventional gaming machines, even in a game that can be played with any one of a plurality of types of prescribed numbers, there are cases where an appropriate prescribed number and an inappropriate prescribed number occur.
The original problem to be solved by the invention is to make it possible to play a game with an appropriate prescribed number.

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 11 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (12th embodiment) is
Equipped with a notification game state (AT) that can notify the operation mode of the stop button (stop switch 42),
When an operation mode is notified in the notification game state, information corresponding to the operation mode (push order instruction information) can be displayed on a predetermined display unit (acquisition number display LED 78),
In the informing game state, a game can be started when at least one of a plurality of prescribed numbers (“2” or “3”) of game values is inserted,
In the information game state, information corresponding to a specified number can be displayed on the predetermined display unit,
In the information game state, when the information corresponding to the specified number is displayed on the predetermined display unit, a predetermined timing (in FIG. 42 , displayed in step S322),
When displaying the information corresponding to the specified number on the predetermined display unit, it should be displayed in a display mode that is identifiable from the information corresponding to the operation mode ("0A" is displayed when the specified number is "2"). Characterized by

(c) Effect of Original Invention 11 According to the original invention, it is possible to display the information corresponding to the specified number at a predetermined timing until the start switch is detected to be turned on. , it is possible to notify an appropriate specified number in the game.
Also, it is possible to prevent the player from confusing the information corresponding to the operation mode with the information corresponding to the specified number.

12. original invention 12
(a) Problems to be Solved by Original Invention 12 The original invention relates to a gaming machine provided with a counter for counting the difference number in an information game state.
Conventionally, there is known a gaming machine provided with a counter that counts the difference number during AT (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2018-000797).
In conventional gaming machines, it is requested to initialize information regarding the advantageous section at the end of the advantageous section. However, there is a case where the next AT is won early after the AT is finished, and there is a case where it is desired to take over the difference in the number of cards from the previous AT.
The original problem to be solved by the invention is to enable the transfer of the difference number of sheets from the previous informing game state (AT) while initializing the information on the advantageous interval at the end of the advantageous interval.

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 12 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (11th embodiment) is
A notification game state (AT) that can notify the operation mode (correct order of pressing) of the stop button (stop switch 42);
An advantageous section in which the information game state can be executed,
In the first control means (main control board 50), the cumulative value of the difference number indicating the difference between the number of bets of game value and the number of payouts (including addition to credits; the same shall apply hereinafter), and the minimum value is set to "0". a first difference counter (difference counter) that stores a value of
a second difference number counter (sub-difference number counter) for storing an accumulated difference number indicating the difference between the number of bets and the number of payouts of the game value in the second control means (sub-control board 80);
At the end of the advantageous interval, the first difference counter may be cleared (step S435 in FIG. 51 or FIG. 52), and the second difference counter may not be cleared.

(c) Effect of Original Invention 12 According to the original invention, the first difference counter is cleared at the end of the advantageous interval, so that the rule of initializing the information on the advantageous interval can be complied with. In addition, there is a case where the second difference number counter is not cleared, and in that case, it is possible to take over the difference number of the previous information game state at the start of the next information game state.

13. original invention 13
(a) Problems to be Solved by Original Invention 13 The original invention relates to a gaming machine provided with a counter for counting the difference number in an information game state.
Conventionally, there is known a game machine provided with a counter that counts the difference number during AT (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-000797).
However, in conventional gaming machines, sufficient consideration has not been given as to how to count (update) the difference number at the time of winning a replay.
The original problem to be solved by the invention is to appropriately execute the process of updating the difference number at the time of winning a replay.

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 13 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (11th embodiment) is
A notification game state (AT) that can notify the operation mode of the stop button (stop switch 42);
An advantageous section in which the information game state can be executed,
a differential number counter for storing a cumulative difference number indicating the difference between the number of gaming value bets and the number of payouts (including addition to credits; the same shall apply hereinafter), with the minimum value being "0";
Equipped with an advantageous section counter (advantageous section clear counter) that counts the number of games played in the advantageous section,
1. In a game in which at least a minor win is won, after all reels have stopped (after step S289 in FIG. 41), it is determined whether or not the value of the advantageous interval counter satisfies the conditions for ending the advantageous interval ( Step S424 in FIG. 51 or FIG. 52),
1) When it is determined that the value of the advantageous interval counter satisfies the conditions for ending the advantageous interval, the advantageous interval is terminated without judging the value of the difference counter (without executing the process of step S434). The process for ending (step S435) can be executed,
2) When it is determined that the value of the advantageous interval counter does not satisfy the conditions for ending the advantageous interval ("No" in step S424), the difference counter updating process (steps S428 and W429) is executed. After that, it is determined whether or not the value of the difference counter satisfies the conditions for ending the advantageous section (step S434). ”) makes it possible to execute the process (step S435) for ending the advantageous section,
2. In the game winning the replay, after all the reels have stopped (after step S289 in FIG. 41), it is determined whether or not the value of the advantageous interval counter satisfies the conditions for ending the advantageous interval (FIG. 51). or step S424 in FIG. 52),
1) When it is determined that the value of the advantageous section counter satisfies the condition for ending the advantageous section ("Yes" in step S424), the value of the difference number counter is not judged (step S434). without executing the process) to execute the process (step S435) for ending the advantageous section,
2) When it is determined that the value of the advantageous interval counter does not satisfy the conditions for ending the advantageous interval ("No" in step S424), the difference counter is not updated. is a value that satisfies the conditions for ending the advantageous section (in FIG. 51 or FIG. 52, if "Yes" in step S426, proceed to step S434), and the value that satisfies the conditions for ending the advantageous section ("Yes" in step S434), the processing for ending the advantageous section (step S435) can be executed.

(c) Effect of Original Invention 13 According to the original invention, in a game in which a replay is won, regardless of whether or not the value of the advantageous interval counter satisfies the conditions for ending the advantageous interval, the difference counter is updated. is not executed, it is possible to appropriately execute the process of updating the difference number in the game in which the replay is won. Furthermore, speeding up of program processing can be achieved.

14. original invention 14
(a) Problems to be Solved by Original Invention 14 The original invention relates to a game machine capable of executing a process related to an instruction function in a predetermined prescribed number.
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, game machines having an instruction function have been known (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2018-000797).
However, in conventional gaming machines, the relationship between the specified number and the processing related to the instruction function and the processing related to the advantageous section has not been sufficiently studied.
The problem to be solved by the original invention is to appropriately execute the processing related to the instruction function and the processing related to the advantageous section according to the prescribed number.

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 14 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (11th embodiment) is
An information game state (AT) in which an instruction function for informing the operation mode of the stop button (stop switch 42) can be executed;
An advantageous section in which the information game state can be executed,
an advantageous interval counter (advantageous interval clear counter) for counting a predetermined variable related to the advantageous interval;
An information game counter (AT game number counter or AT difference number counter) for counting a specific variable (for example, the number of games played or the difference number) related to the information game state,
Having a game in which at least a first specified number (specified number "3") or a second specified number (specified number "2") of gaming values can be inserted,
In the game (AT) in the advantageous section, in the game started based on the first specified number being inserted, the processing related to the instruction function (for example, notification of the correct pressing order) can be executed (see FIG. 48 , "Yes" in step S382), and in the game started based on the second specified number being inserted, the process related to the instruction function cannot be executed ("No" in step S382 in FIG. 48). ,
In the information game state, in the game started based on the first specified number being inserted, it is possible to update the advantageous interval counter (step S422 in FIG. 51 or 52), and the information game making it possible to update the counter (step S333 in FIG. 43),
In the game started based on the introduction of the second specified number in the information game state, it is possible to update the advantageous section counter (step S422 in FIG. 51 or 52), and the information game counter Make update impossible (“No” in step S332 in FIG. 43)
It is characterized by

(c) Effect of Original Invention 14 According to the original invention, the advantageous interval counter can be updated by either the first specified number or the second specified number of games, thereby optimizing the advantageous interval. .
In addition, by not updating the information game counter in the second specified number of games in which the process related to the instruction function cannot be executed, consistency can be achieved between the execution of the process related to the instruction function and the update of the information game counter. can.

15. original invention 15
(a) Problem to be Solved by Original Invention 15 The original invention relates to a game machine having a signal line for starting.
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, it is known to use a harness composed of a plurality of signal lines (lead wires) when electrically connecting control boards of a game machine. One of the signal lines is a signal line for starting.
In the prior art, since the start-related signal is used in a lottery, it is necessary to suppress any bullying on the start-related signal line.
The original problem to be solved by the invention is to make it difficult to identify the signal line related to the start and to suppress the goto behavior.

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 15 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (21st embodiment) is
In a game machine (slot machine 10, pachinko game machine 500) having a control board (main control board 50, 530),
Having a plurality of signal lines (lead wires) electrically connected to the control board,
The plurality of signal lines include at least a first signal line, a second signal line, and a third signal line,
The first signal line is a signal line related to the start of a game (for example, lead wire No. 7 of harness D in FIG. 111),
The second signal line (e.g., lead wire No. 8 of harness D in FIG. 111) and the third signal line (e.g., lead wire No. 3 of harness D in FIG. 111) are both A signal line different from the signal line for starting a game,
the first signal line and the second signal line have substantially the same diameter,
The first signal line and the third signal line have different diameters.

(c) Effect of Original Invention 15 According to the original invention, it is possible to make it difficult to specify which signal line is the signal line related to starting. As a result, it is possible to suppress tampering with the signal line related to starting.

16. original invention 16
(a) Problems to be Solved by Original Invention 16 The original invention relates to a game machine capable of outputting a setting change end sound.
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, gaming machines are known in which any one of a plurality of setting values can be set.
In the prior art, for example, when the setting key is turned off, the setting change process ends, and it was not possible to easily grasp the timing at which the setting change process ended from the outside.
Therefore, it is conceivable to notify the user when the setting change process is completed.
However, in the case where the game is started immediately after the setting change process is completed, if the completion of the setting change process is notified, the notification of the completion of the setting change process and the notification output in the game are the same. There is a risk that it will be output (overlapping) at the same time, and there is a risk that it will be difficult to understand the important information that is output in the game.
The original problem to be solved by the invention is to appropriately output an end sound indicating that the setting change state has ended.

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 16 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (19th embodiment) is
A gaming machine (slot machine 10, pachinko gaming machine 500) capable of changing the degree of advantage for a player,
Specific operation detecting means for detecting that a specific operation is performed in order to control either a setting change state in which the advantage can be changed or a normal state in which the advantage cannot be changed and a game can be started. (setting key switches 152, 535);
a speaker (22, 542);
In the setting change state, when the condition for shifting to the normal state is satisfied, an end sound indicating that the setting change state has ended can be output for a time T1 ("T01" in FIG. 96) from the speaker. and
The game start condition (in the case of the slot machine 10, the specified number has been bet and the start switch 41 has been operated. In the case of the pachinko game machine 500, the game ball has entered the start port 532). In one game that is satisfied, it is possible to end the game at time T2 (“T12” or “T22” in FIG. 96),
In the setting change state, at least time T3 (“T11” or “T12” in FIG. 96) is required until the game start condition is satisfied after shifting to the normal state,
When one game is started immediately after shifting from the setting change state to the normal state, the following equation is established: T1<T2+T3 (T1>0, T2>0, T3>0) )
It is characterized by

(c) Effect of Original Invention 16 According to the original invention, even if the game is started at the same time as the setting change state ends, the end sound indicating that the setting change state has ended is played before the game ends. Since the output is finished, the effect output at the end of the game does not overlap with the end sound indicating the end of the setting change state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the effect output at the end of the game from becoming difficult to understand due to the end sound indicating the end of the setting change state.

17. original invention 17
(a) Problems to be Solved by Original Invention 17 The original invention relates to a gaming machine capable of setting the net increase and the base value to appropriate values.
Conventionally, there has been known a game machine in which both non-AT and AT are inside 1BB (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2018-029839).
However, in the 1BB internal medium specs as described above, the ball output rate cannot exceed "1" even when the game is played in the order that is most advantageous to the player, so the net increase during AT is increased. There is a problem that it is difficult to
The original problem to be solved by the invention is to make it possible to achieve a high net increase during AT without increasing the base value.

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 17 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (23rd embodiment) is
In the advantageous section, it is possible to execute an information game state (AT) that can notify the operation information (correct order of pressing) of the stop switch,
When the symbol combination corresponding to the special combination (1BB) is stopped and displayed, the special game (1BB game) can be executed,
The first situation (inside 1BB) in which the winning information of the special combination is carried over in the advantageous section,
and a second situation (1BB in operation) in which it is an advantageous section and a special game is in progress,
In the first situation, there is no case of executing the information game state,
In the second situation, there is a case where the information game state is executed,
Let α be the ball payout rate in the first situation (refers to the value obtained by dividing the number of game media awarded by the number of bets; the same shall apply hereinafter), let β be the ball payout rate in the second situation and non-notification gaming state, and Let γ be the ball payout rate in the state of 2 and the notification game state (in a game in which the operation information of the stop switch is notified, the ball payout rate when the stop switch is operated according to the notified operation information). when
α<β<1<γ
and
Let the probability of deciding to execute the information game state in the non-information game state of the second situation be x (a value greater than "0"),
When the probability of deciding to execute the information game state in the non-information game state of the first situation is y ("0" in the twenty-third embodiment),
x < y
and
The second situation is characterized in that the predetermined value (advantage zone clear counter value) relating to the advantageous zone can be updated according to the execution of the game even in the non-reporting game state.

(c) Effect of the original invention 17 According to the original invention, in the special game, the ball payout rate increases more than in the non-special game. rate can be increased. Also, since the information game state is not executed in the non-special game, the base value can be lowered.
Furthermore, when the transition to the special game is made in the non-informative game state, the payout rate does not exceed "1", and the predetermined value regarding the advantageous section is updated, so that the special game is performed without the right to the informal game state. Even if it shifts to a game, it can be made so that a player does not have a merit. In particular, when transitioning to the special game in the non-informative game state, the probability of being determined to be in the informal game state is set lower than during the non-special game, so as to check the transition to the special game in the non-informative game state. can do.

18. original invention 18
(a) Problem to be Solved by Original Invention 18 The original invention relates to a gaming machine that outputs a test signal.
Conventionally, there has been known a game machine in which both non-AT and AT are inside 1BB (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2018-029839).
However, in the 1BB internal medium specs as described above, the ball output rate cannot exceed "1" even when the game is played in the order that is most advantageous to the player, so the net increase during AT is increased. hard to let
Here, various specifications have been proposed that realize a low base and achieve a high net increase during AT.
The problem is what kind of test signal should be output in such low-base and purely increased AT specs.
The original problem to be solved by the invention is to enable the output of an appropriate test signal even with a low-base specification and a high-medium-to-high AT net addition.

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 18 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (23rd embodiment) is
A game in which the winning information of the special role (1BB) is carried over and the symbol combination corresponding to the special role can be stopped and displayed (the accessory condition device number is "1" and the winning and replay condition device number is "0 ”),
When the predetermined conditions are satisfied (main game state "3" and AT standby counter "0"), a test signal (" 0, 16, 7, 2") can be executed,
If the predetermined condition is not satisfied, processing for outputting a test signal ("0, 6, 127, 127") including stop switch operation information that does not stop and display the symbol combination corresponding to the special combination can be executed. It is characterized by

(c) Effect of the Original Invention 18 According to the original invention, when the predetermined conditions are satisfied, a test signal capable of stopping and displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the special combination can be output, and when the predetermined conditions are not satisfied, the special symbol combination can be output. Since it is possible to output a test signal that does not stop and display the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination, a gaming machine with specifications that induces a special game when executing the notification game state (AT) can be used in the same way as a player (market). It is possible to conduct a test in a different way of hitting.

19. original invention 19
(a) Problem to be Solved by Original Invention 19 The original invention relates to a gaming machine that prevents erroneous winning of a special combination.
Conventionally, gaming machines are known which execute non-AT and AT in a state inside MB. In this case, in order to avoid the winning of the MB that carries over the winning, it is known to inform the target symbol to avoid the winning of the MB (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-147537).
However, there is a problem that the above notification may mislead the player. Also, even if the notification is given after the MB has been tempered, if the time between the second stop and the third stop of the stop switch is short, the notification may not be in time and the MB may win.
The problem to be solved by the original invention is to prevent the winning of a special role from being erroneously won when the winning is carried over and the special role that should be avoided from winning a prize is tense.

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 19 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (23rd embodiment) is
When the symbol combination corresponding to the special combination (1BB) is stopped and displayed, the special game (1BB game) can be executed,
In a game in which a symbol combination corresponding to a special combination can be stopped and displayed, a special reel is played under a situation where a predetermined reel (third reel 31) is rotating and the other reels (first and second reels 31) are stopped. When the symbols constituting the symbol combination corresponding to the role are stopped and displayed (so-called special role is tenpai), until a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, until the waiting time elapses), the predetermined The predetermined reel is not stopped even if a stop switch corresponding to one of the reels is operated.

(c) Effect of Original Invention 19 According to the original invention, until a predetermined condition is met, even if the stop switch corresponding to the predetermined reel is operated, the predetermined reel does not stop, thereby preventing an erroneous winning of the special combination. be able to.

20. original invention 20
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 20 Same as original invention 19.
(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 20 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (23rd embodiment) is
When the symbol combination corresponding to the special combination (1BB) is stopped and displayed, the special game (1BB game) can be executed,
In the special game, an information game state (AT) capable of informing operation information (correct pressing order) of the stop switch (42) can be executed,
In the game in which the symbol combination corresponding to the special combination can be stopped and displayed, the stop switch corresponding to the reel other than the predetermined reel (the third reel 31) is operated, and the symbol combination corresponding to the special combination can be stopped and displayed. When the predetermined condition is not satisfied (when the waiting time has not passed) in the case of becoming (so-called, when the special combination is tenpai), the stop switch corresponding to the reel other than the predetermined reel is operated. From the subsequent predetermined timing (initially, when the standby time is saved in step S810 in FIG. 147) until at least one rotation of the predetermined reel (at least 750.624 ms from the time of step S810 (one rotation time of reel 31) ), the predetermined reel is not stopped even if the stop switch corresponding to the predetermined reel is operated.
(c) Effect of original invention 20 Same as original invention 19.

21. original invention 21
(a) Problems to be Solved by Original Invention 21 The original invention is intended to make it possible to realize a ceiling function in a gaming machine provided with an advantageous section.
Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine that is provided with a ceiling counter and counts the number of games played without shifting to AT (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2018-061760).
However, there are cases where the advantageous section ends while the number of games is being counted by the ceiling counter. Here, since the ceiling counter is data relating to the indicating function, it is considered to be subject to data that is cleared when the advantageous section ends. Therefore, there is a problem that the ceiling counter is cleared when the advantageous section ends while the number of games is being counted by the ceiling counter.
The problem to be solved by the original invention is to enable the ceiling function to be realized even when the advantageous section is provided.

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 21 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (23rd embodiment) is
a first lottery state (RT1) and a second lottery state (non-RT);
An advantageous section capable of executing an informing game state (AT) capable of informing the operation information of the stop switch,
When the number of games played in the first lottery state satisfies a predetermined condition (when 1400 games are played), it is possible to shift to the second lottery state,
In the first lottery state, which is an advantageous section, when the condition for ending the advantageous section is satisfied, it is possible to shift to the first lottery state, which is a non-advantageous section,
The number of games played in the first lottery state is continuously counted even when the first lottery state of the advantageous section shifts to the first lottery state of the non-advantageous section.

(c) Effect of the Original Invention 21 According to the original invention, even if the advantageous section ends in the middle, the number of games in the first lottery state continues to be counted. It becomes possible to provide a ceiling function.

22. original invention 22
(a) Problems to be Solved by Original Invention 22 The original invention relates to a gaming machine capable of executing a reel effect.
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine that carries out a reel effect of temporarily stopping reels in a pseudo game (for example, Japanese Patent No. 5709176).
However, the pseudo game in the prior art was a reel performance based on the operation of the stop switch by the player.
The original problem to be solved by the invention is to execute a reel effect without being based on the operation of a stop switch by a player, and to give regularity to the stop timing of the reels.

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 22 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (23rd embodiment) is
Each reel (31) is stopped at a predetermined stop position, and a reel effect (standby effect) of stopping and displaying a predetermined symbol combination is executable (standby effect start (M_TARPIC_EXE)),
When executing the reel effect, for each reel, information on the expected stop position (information in the reel effect data table (TBL_TARPIC_DAT)) and a timer value until the reel can be stopped (reel effect execution timer table (TBL_TARPIC_TM# ) information) can be stored,
The timer value corresponding to the predetermined reel is a value that allows the predetermined reel to be stopped even when the predetermined reel can be stopped at the predetermined stop position during the execution of the reel effect. When not, the predetermined reel is not stopped.

(c) Effect of Original Invention 22 According to the original invention, it is possible to impart regularity to the timing at which each reel stops by a simple method in the reel effect.

23. original invention 23
(a) Problems to be Solved by Original Invention 23 The original invention relates to a game machine that outputs information on prevention of addiction.
Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine that outputs information on prevention of addiction when an AT ends (for example, Japanese Patent No. 6288357).
However, the conventional output of information on prevention of immersion has been uniform.
The original problem to be solved by the invention is to appropriately output information related to immersion prevention.

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 23 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (23rd embodiment) is
A notification game state (AT) capable of informing operation information (correct pressing order) of the stop switch (42) can be executed,
In the case where it is determined that a plurality of sets of information game states can be executed, there is a case where it is notified that the next set of information game states will be executed during the execution of one set of information game states,
In a situation where multiple sets of information game states can be executed, when it is notified that the next set of information game states will be executed during the execution of one set of information game states, one set of information game states After executing the state and before the next set of information game states are executed, the information regarding the prevention of addiction is not output ("Yes" in step S975 in FIG. 160),
In a situation where multiple sets of the information game state can be executed, if it is not notified that the next set of information game states will be executed during the execution of one set of information game states, one set of information game states After executing the information game state, before the information game state of the next set is executed, it is possible to output information on prevention of immersion (in FIG. 160, if "No" in step S975, step S978 is executed do)
It is characterized by

(c) Effect of the Original Invention 23 According to the original invention, the output of information on prevention of addiction can be made to correspond to the information content in one set of information game states. In addition, it is possible to make it impossible to know whether or not the next set of information game states will be executed depending on whether or not the information regarding prevention of addiction is output.

24. original invention 24
(a) Problems to be Solved by Original Invention 24 The original invention relates to a game machine capable of outputting a continuation effect based on the operation of a stop switch.
In the prior art, it is known to include a message with a delay function that delays the execution of the effect message after a set time has elapsed when the effect message is transmitted from the control device to the effect device (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2018-042759. publication).
In the prior art, if the effect is to be delayed during the third stop, it is necessary to transmit a command indicating the delay during the third stop.
The original problem to be solved by the invention is to make it possible to delay the output timing of the effect without transmitting a command indicating delay at the time of the third stop.

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 24 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (23rd embodiment) is
A timer value from a predetermined timing after a predetermined switch (start switch 41) is operated can be stored (step S993 in FIG. 161),
In a game that outputs a specific effect (end of effect), when the last operated stop switch is turned off from on and the timer value has reached a predetermined value ("Yes" in step S995) When) can output a specific effect at the timing when the last operated stop switch turns from on to off,
In a game that outputs a specific effect, when the last operated stop switch is turned off from on and the timer value is not the predetermined value, at the timing when the timer value becomes the predetermined value (step It is characterized in that it is possible to output a specific effect (when "Yes" in S995).

(c) Effect of Original Invention 24 According to the original invention, it is possible to delay the timing of outputting a specific effect. Also, a player who does not want to output a specific effect immediately can delay the output timing of the specific effect at his/her own will.

25. original invention 25
(a) Problems to be Solved by the Original Invention 25 The original invention relates to a game machine in which the output sound volume can be set.
In the prior art, it is known that the administrator (store side) sets the standard for the volume of the effect, and the player can set the volume (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-074301). .
However, in the above conventional technology, the volume is often set to a high value on the store side. There is a problem that it is not possible to
The original problem to be solved by the invention is to enable a player who desires a low volume to reduce the volume regardless of the store's settings.

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 25 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (23rd embodiment) is
As modes for setting the volume, a first volume setting mode (administrator mode in FIG. 162 (A)) and a second volume setting mode (player mode in FIG. 162 (B)) are provided,
The first volume setting mode is executable when a predetermined condition is satisfied (at power on/off, in setting change state, or in setting confirmation state),
A second volume setting mode is executable by the player,
The output volume is determined based on the volume set in the first volume setting mode and the volume set in the second volume setting mode,
A predetermined effect sound (for example, start The volume of the operation sound of the switch 41, the operation sound of the stop switch 42, the tenpai sound, the winning sound of the role, GBM during AT, etc.) (“20” in FIG. 162 (C)) and the first volume setting mode the volume of a predetermined effect sound (“20” in FIG. 162(C)) output when the volume is set to a specific volume (for example, “small”) and the minimum volume is set in the second volume setting mode; are substantially the same.

(c) Effect of the original invention 25 According to the original invention, when the volume is set to a predetermined volume in the first volume setting mode and when the volume is set to a specific volume, the volume is changed in the second volume setting mode. If the volume is set to the minimum volume, the predetermined effect sound is output with substantially the same volume. Thereby, the volume can be set to the minimum volume in the second volume setting mode without being affected by the volume setting in the first volume setting mode.

26. original invention 26
The original invention relates to a game machine in which the output sound volume can be set.
In the prior art, it is known that the administrator (store side) sets the standard for the volume of the effect, and the player can set the volume (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-074301). .
However, in the conventional technology described above, since it is not possible to grasp the specific volume level on the volume setting screen, the administrator cannot try the game after setting the volume. was necessary.
The original problem to be solved by the invention is to make it possible to know a concrete guideline of the volume when setting the volume.

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 26 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (23rd embodiment) is
As modes for setting the volume, a first volume setting mode (administrator mode in FIG. 162 (A)) and a second volume setting mode (player mode in FIG. 162 (B)) are provided,
The first volume setting mode is executable when a predetermined condition is satisfied (at power on/off, in setting change state, or in setting confirmation state),
A second volume setting mode is executable by the player,
The output volume is determined based on the volume set in the first volume setting mode and the volume set in the second volume setting mode,
In the first volume setting mode, icons corresponding to a plurality of selectable levels of volume are displayed as images, and when any icon is selected, a predetermined sound can be output at the volume corresponding to the selected icon. characterized by

(c) Effect of the Original Invention 26 According to the original invention, when setting the volume in the first volume setting mode, it is possible to grasp the level of the set volume.

27. original invention 27
(a) Problems to be Solved by Original Invention 27 The original invention relates to a game machine that executes predetermined instructions by a program.
In conventional game machines, it is known that a plurality of modules (processes) are configured to execute game control (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-104160).
However, in the conventional technology described above, the instructions that make up the modules are complicated, and there is room for improvement.
The original problem to be solved by the invention is to simplify the instructions.

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 27 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (24th embodiment) is
having a plurality of storage areas (RWM 53) capable of storing data based on program execution;
As a program command,
storing the value of the reference address in a predetermined register (HL register);
A specific instruction (CLRHL ( HL), n);
A value of the reference address is stored in the predetermined register even after the specific instruction is executed.

(c) Effect of Original Invention 27 According to the original invention, it is possible to clear (store "0") all of the specified range with one command.
Also, the value of the reference address is stored in a predetermined register, and the value of the predetermined register does not change even after executing a specific instruction (the value of the reference address is stored). As a result, even after a specific instruction is completed, the value of the reference address can be read based on the value stored in the predetermined register. becomes unnecessary, and simplification of processing can be achieved.

28. original invention 28
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 28 Same as original invention 27.
(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 28 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (24th embodiment) is
having a storage means (RWM 53) having a stack area;
Main processing (for example, FIG. 41) and interrupt processing (for example, FIG. 53) executed at predetermined intervals can be executed,
As a program command,
A predetermined value stored in a predetermined register (for example, A register) is compared with "n (n is an integer)" (for example, "n" is subtracted from the A register value), and carry is performed by the comparison operation. When the flag becomes "1", a specific instruction ("RCP C, A, n ”),
Even if the predetermined cycle of interrupt processing arrives during execution of the specific instruction, the interrupt processing is permitted after the specific instruction is completed.

(c) Effect of the Original Invention 28 According to the original invention, since interrupt processing is not executed while a specific instruction is being executed, the value of the carry flag corresponding to the operation by the specific instruction is the value of the operation executed by the interrupt processing. does not change with This prevents the value of the carry flag from being corrupted by interrupt processing, enabling correct processing to be executed.

29. original invention 29
(a) Problems to be Solved by Original Invention 29 The original invention relates to a method for specifying a combination of stop symbols on an active line.
In the conventional game machine, even if an abnormality occurs after the stop switch operation is accepted and an unintended symbol combination stops on the active line, the payout process is executed based on the stop switch operation. (for example, Japanese Patent No. 6229810).
The original problem to be solved by the invention is to better identify the stopping symbol combination.

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 29 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (25th embodiment) is
Equipped with a storage area (stop symbol data (first group) to (ninth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1 to 9)) that can store data that can specify the stop symbol combination,
A predetermined initial value (11111111 (B), 00001111 (B), or 00000011 (B)) can be stored in the storage area at a predetermined timing before the stop switch (42) is operated,
Stop symbol data (symbol combination data stored in the # # reel symbol combination table (TBL_PICCMB_#)) corresponding to symbols to be stopped and displayed on the active line of the reel corresponding to the operated stop switch is acquired and acquired. An operation is performed based on the stop symbol data and the data stored in the storage area, and a predetermined process can be executed to store data corresponding to the result of the operation in the storage area (stop symbol set in FIG. 195). (M_STOPPIC_SET)),
The data stored in the storage area can be updated by making it possible to execute the predetermined processing each time the stop switch corresponding to the spinning reel is operated.

(c) Effect of the Original Invention 29 According to the original invention, even if the power is cut off in the middle of the game, the stop symbol data until the middle of the game can be held. In addition, after the stop position was determined, before the symbols stopped, the reel could not be stopped at the correct position due to an abnormality due to power failure or motor drive abnormality (the correct symbols did not stop on the effective line). ), it can be regarded as having stopped at the correct position, and the payout process can be executed. Therefore, the player is not disadvantaged.

30. original invention 30
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 30 Same as original invention 29.
(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 30 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (26th embodiment) is
A data table (# # reel symbol search table (TBL_PICARG_#)) storing data capable of specifying a stop symbol combination is provided,
Storage means (symbol array address buffers 1 to 3 (_BF_PICARG_ADR1 to 3)) capable of storing address values of the data table are provided for each reel,
The address value corresponding to the stop symbol can be stored in the storage means,
data can be obtained from the data table based on the address value stored in the storage means;
It is characterized in that it is possible to execute a predetermined calculation for specifying the stop symbol combination based on the acquired data.

(c) Effect of the Original Invention 30 According to the original invention, even if the power is cut off in the middle of the game, it is possible to retain the data about the stopped symbols until the middle of the game. In addition, after the stop position was determined, before the symbols stopped, the reel could not be stopped at the correct position due to an abnormality due to power failure or motor drive abnormality (the correct symbols did not stop on the effective line). ), it is possible to perform the payout process by assuming that the ball has stopped at the correct position without using up the storage capacity of the RWM. Therefore, the player is not disadvantaged.

31. original invention 31
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 31 Same as original invention 29.
(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 31 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (28th embodiment) is
A first position on the first reel (e.g., "1" in FIG. 230), a second position on the second reel (e.g., "5" in FIG. 230), and a third position on the third reel (e.g., "5" in FIG. 230). "9") has a predetermined effective line (for example, effective line L1),
A first storage area (_WK_PIC_LFT1) capable of storing pattern data at the first position, a second storage area (_WK_PIC_CEN2) capable of storing pattern data at the second position, and a third storage capable of storing pattern data at the third position. with a region (_WK_PIC_RIG3),
The stop symbol combination of the predetermined activated line can be specified based on the symbol data stored in the first storage area, the second storage area, and the third storage area.

(c) Effect of the original invention 31 According to the original invention, after the stop position is determined, before the symbols stop, the reel cannot be stopped at the correct position due to an abnormality due to a power failure or a motor drive abnormality. Even if the correct symbol does not stop on the effective line, it is possible to regard the symbol as having stopped at the correct position and execute the payout process without putting pressure on the capacity of the program. Therefore, the player is not disadvantaged.

32. original invention 32
(a) Same as original invention 29.
(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 32 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (28th embodiment) is
As the activated lines in a predetermined game, there are from the first activated line (activated line L1) to the Nth (N>1) activated line (activated line L5),
having a specific storage area (_WK_ALL_PIC) capable of storing data for specifying stop symbol combinations for all active lines in a given game;
In a given game,
It is possible to calculate the first data (_WK_PIC_L1) corresponding to the stop symbol combination of the first effective line,
It is possible to calculate the Nth data (_WK_PIC_L5) corresponding to the stop symbol combination of the Nth effective line,
The first data corresponding to the stop symbol combination on the first effective line to the Nth data corresponding to the stop symbol combination on the Nth effective line are combined by a predetermined operation (logical sum), and the combined data is stored in a specific storage area. It is characterized in that it can be stored in

(c) Effect of the original invention 32 According to the original invention, after the stop position is determined, before the pattern stops, the reel cannot be stopped at the correct position due to an abnormality due to power failure, motor drive abnormality, or the like. Even if the correct symbol does not stop on the effective line, it is possible to regard the symbol as having stopped at the correct position and execute the payout process without putting pressure on the capacity of the program. Therefore, the player is not disadvantaged.
In addition, since winning determination is performed based on the specific storage area instead of performing winning determination for each activated line, the number of payouts can be determined collectively.

33. Original invention 33
(a) Problems to be Solved by Original Invention 33 The original invention relates to a data table for obtaining symbol data of symbols on an active line.
In a conventional gaming machine, it is known to store a pattern arrangement in order to specify a pattern on an activated line (for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2015-039456).
The original problem to be solved by the invention is to acquire more appropriately the symbol data of the symbols on the activated line.

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 33 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (example 1 of the twenty-seventh embodiment (or the twenty-fifth embodiment)) is
As reels, at least a predetermined reel (left reel 31) and a specific reel (middle reel 31) are provided,
The position of the active line of the predetermined reel (upper stage) and the position of the active line of the specific reel (middle stage) are positions that do not match on the horizontal line,
A predetermined data table (left reel symbol arrangement table in FIG. 228(B)) storing symbol data of the predetermined reel, and a specific data table (in FIG. 228(B), middle) storing symbol data of the specific reel. reel pattern arrangement table),
In the predetermined data table, the design data corresponding to the design number X (design number 2) is stored at the top address (1000 (H)) storing the design data,
In the specific data table, the design data corresponding to the design number Y (Y≠X) (design number 1) is stored at the head address (1100 (H)) storing the design data. .

(c) Effect of Original Invention 33 According to the original invention, it is possible to obtain the symbol data on the activated line by a simple method without complicated calculations.

34. original invention 34
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 34 Same as original invention 33.
(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 34 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (example 1 of the twenty-seventh embodiment (or the twenty-fifth embodiment)) is
A first position (lower left), which is a reference position of a predetermined reel (left reel 31), and a second position (the second position is different from the first position), which is a symbol position on at least one effective line of the predetermined reel. ) (upper left) and
Equipped with a data table (design arrangement table in FIG. 228 (B)) storing design data,
In a game in which the symbol of the predetermined symbol number (0) of the predetermined reel stops at the first position, the symbol data ( It is characterized in that the pattern data of pattern number 2) can be acquired.

(c) Effect of the Original Invention 34 According to the original invention, it is possible to acquire the symbol data on the activated line by a simple method without performing complicated calculations.
In addition, since a reference position (reference line) is provided separately from the effective line and the pattern on the effective line is specified based on this reference position, even if there is a change in the effective line, the change can be easily dealt with. be able to. In other words, data and programs can be simply modified.

35. original invention 35
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 35 Same as original invention 33.
(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 35 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The invention of claim 1 (example 1 of the twenty-seventh embodiment) is
As reels, at least a predetermined reel (right reel 31) and a specific reel (middle reel 31) are provided,
a first position (lower right), which is a reference position of the predetermined reel and is a symbol position on at least one activated line of the predetermined reel;
A second position (the second position and the first position are located on the same horizontal line) (middle and lower row), which is a reference position of the specific reel, and a symbol on at least one effective line of the specific reel and a third position (third position ≠ second position) (middle middle row),
A predetermined data table storing symbol data of the predetermined reel (right reel symbol arrangement table in FIG. 228(B)) and a specific data table storing symbol data of the specific reel (middle reel symbol in FIG. 228). array table) and
In the predetermined data table, the symbol data of symbol number X (0) is stored at the head address storing the symbol data,
In the specific data table, the design data of the design number Y (Y≠X) (No. 1) is stored at the head address storing the design data,
In the game in which the symbol of the specific symbol number of the specific reel stops at the second position, the symbol of the symbol to stop at the third position of the specific reel based on the specific symbol number and the specific data table. It is characterized by being able to acquire data.
The invention of claim 2 originally
As reels, at least a predetermined reel (left reel 31) and a specific reel (middle reel 31) are provided,
A first position (lower left) that is a reference position of the predetermined reel, and a second position that is a symbol position on at least one activated line of the predetermined reel (the second position may be the same as the first position) ( upper left) and
A third position (the third position and the first position are located on the same horizontal line) (middle and lower row) serving as a reference position of the specific reel, and a symbol on at least one effective line of the specific reel. and a fourth position (fourth position ≠ third position) (middle middle row),
A predetermined data table storing symbol data of the predetermined reel (symbol arrangement table of the left reel in FIG. 228(B)) and a specific data table storing symbol data of the specific reel (in the middle of FIG. 228(B)) reel pattern arrangement table),
In the predetermined data table, the design data of design number X (2) is stored at the head address (1000 (H)) storing the design data,
In the specific data table, the symbol data of symbol number Y (Y≠X) (No. 1) is stored at the leading address (1100 (H)) storing the symbol data,
In a game in which the symbol of the predetermined symbol number (0) of the predetermined reel stops at the first position, the predetermined reel stops at the second position based on the predetermined symbol number and the predetermined data table. It is possible to acquire the design data of the design (design data of design number 2),
In a game in which the symbol of the specific symbol number (0) of the specific reel stops at the third position, the specific reel stops at the fourth position based on the specific symbol number and the specific data table. It is characterized in that it is possible to acquire the pattern data of the pattern (the pattern data of the pattern number 1).

(c) Effect of Original Invention 35 Same as Original Invention 34.

36. original invention 36
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 36 Same as original invention 33.
(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 36 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (Example 2 of the 27th embodiment) is
A first position (upper right), which is a reference position of a predetermined reel (right reel 31), and a second position (the second position is different from the first position), which is a symbol position on at least one effective line of the predetermined reel. ) (bottom right) and
a storage means (ROM 54 or RWM 53) that stores or can store information (difference data) for specifying the second position of the predetermined reel from the first position of the predetermined reel;
A data table (Fig. 229 (B)) storing pattern data and
Based on the first position of the predetermined reel, the information of the storage means, and the data table, it is possible to obtain the symbol data of the symbol to be stopped at the second position of the predetermined reel.

(c) Effect of the Original Invention 36 According to the original invention, it is possible to obtain the symbol data on the activated line by a simple method without performing complicated calculations.
In addition, since a reference position (reference line) is provided separately from the effective line and the pattern on the effective line is specified based on this reference position, even if there is a change in the effective line, the change can be easily dealt with. be able to. In other words, data and programs can be easily modified.
Furthermore, even if there is a change in the effective line, it is sufficient to change only the data in the storage means without changing the data table.

37. original invention 37
(a) Problems to be Solved by Original Invention 37 The original invention relates to a method for determining the number of game media to be provided corresponding to a stop symbol combination on an active line.
In conventional gaming machines, there is known a method of determining the number of payouts using a payout table when a combination of symbols corresponding to a small combination stops on an active line (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open Publication No. 2006-130066). ).
The original problem to be solved by the invention is to more appropriately determine the number of game media to be provided corresponding to the stop symbol combination on the active line.

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 37 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (25th embodiment) is
Equipped with a predetermined storage area (stop symbol data (first group) to (ninth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1 to 9)) capable of storing data for specifying a stop symbol combination,
The data stored in the predetermined storage area and the data for determining whether or not the combination of symbols to give the game value "X" is stopped (stored in the payout number table (TBL_WIN_CTL) in FIG. 195). data) and a predetermined operation (processing shown in FIG. 200) can be executed,
Based on the calculation result of the predetermined calculation, it is possible to decide whether to give the game value "X" (for example, 15 cards),
If it is not determined to give the game value "X" based on the result of the predetermined calculation (in FIG. 201, all bits of the stop symbol data (fifth group) and the stop symbol data (sixth group ), as a result of checking the D0 to D3 bits of step S1118, the data stored in the predetermined storage area and the game value “Y” (Y≠X) (three cards ) can be executed based on data for determining whether or not the symbol combination to be given is stopped,
It is characterized in that it is possible to decide whether or not to give the game value "Y" based on the calculation result of the predetermined calculation.

(c) Effect of the Original Invention 37 According to the original invention, since the number of payouts is used as a reference, the number of payouts is searched in order, so it is possible to specify the number of payouts by a simple method.

38. original invention 38
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 38 Same as original invention 37.
(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 38 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (25th embodiment) is
a predetermined storage area (stop symbol data (first group) to (ninth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1 to 9)) capable of storing data for specifying a stop symbol combination;
a grant number table (payout number table (TBL_WIN_CTL) in FIG. 193) storing data capable of specifying the number of game value grants;
The given number table stores at least matching data (specified data) for matching with data for specifying a stop symbol combination, and data for the given number of game values (acquired data),
In a situation where predetermined data is stored in the predetermined storage area, the number of game values to be given can be determined based on the predetermined data and collation data stored in the number-of-given number table. do.

(c) Effect of Original Invention 38 Same as Original Invention 37.

39. original invention 39
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 39 Same as original invention 37.
(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 39 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The invention of claim 1 (the twenty-fifth embodiment) is
Equipped with a predetermined storage area (stop symbol data (first group) to (ninth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1 to 9)) capable of storing data for specifying a stop symbol combination,
As a symbol combination that gives the game value "X" (15 cards), there are a plurality of symbol combinations (a symbol combination of a small winning combination 01 to a small winning combination of 12),
At least one symbol combination (for example, a symbol combination of a small combination of 13) is provided as a symbol combination that provides a game value "Y" (three cards),
Data storage areas (bits or addresses) for specifying a symbol combination to give a game value "X" in the predetermined storage area are continuous,
Among the predetermined storage areas, there is a data storage area for specifying the symbol combination for giving the game value "Y" between the plurality of data storage areas for specifying the symbol combination for giving the game value "X". do not
After judging whether or not the combination of symbols to give the game value 'X' is stopped, it is possible to judge whether or not the combination of patterns to give the game value 'Y' is stopped.

The invention of claim 2 (the twenty-fifth embodiment) is
Equipped with a predetermined storage area (stop symbol data (first group) to (ninth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1 to 9)) capable of storing data for specifying a stop symbol combination,
As a symbol combination that gives the game value "X" (15 cards), there are a plurality of symbol combinations (a symbol combination of a small winning combination 01 to a small winning combination of 12),
At least one symbol combination (for example, a symbol combination of a small combination of 13) is provided as a symbol combination that provides a game value "Y" (three cards),
Data storage areas (bits or addresses) for specifying a symbol combination to give a game value "X" in the predetermined storage area are continuous,
Among the predetermined storage areas, there is a data storage area for specifying the symbol combination for giving the game value "Y" between the plurality of data storage areas for specifying the symbol combination for giving the game value "X". do not
After judging whether or not the combination of symbols to give the game value 'Y' has stopped, it is possible to judge whether or not the combination of patterns to give the game value 'X' has stopped.

When the "data storage area for specifying the symbol combination to give the game value 'X'" is in units of bits as in the twenty-fifth embodiment, the "symbol combination to give the game value 'X' is specified." The data storage area for specifying is continuous," for example, in the stop symbol data (fifth group), pay 15 from the D0 bit corresponding to the small win 01 winning symbol to pay out 15. It shows that up to the D7 bit corresponding to the small combination 08 winning pattern to be put out is continuous.
In addition, "a data storage area for specifying a symbol combination for imparting a game value 'Y' shall not exist among a plurality of data storage areas for specifying a symbol combination for imparting a game value 'X', ” means, in the stop symbol data (fifth group), from the D0 bit corresponding to the small combination 01 winning symbol that pays out 15 to the D7 bit corresponding to the small combination 08 winning symbol that pays out 15. , indicates that there is no bit corresponding to a small combination winning symbol that pays out 3 or 1.

On the other hand, when the "data storage area for specifying the symbol combination to give the game value 'X'" is in units of addresses, as shown in the modified example described above,
Stop design data (5th group): Small combination 01 winning design to small combination 08 winning design (15 payouts)
Stopped pattern data (6th group): Small winning pattern 09 to small winning pattern 12 (15 payouts)
Stopped pattern data (7th group): 13 small prize winning patterns to 20 small winning prize patterns (3 payouts)
Stopped pattern data (8th group): Small winning pattern 21 to small winning pattern 24 (3 payouts)
Stopped pattern data (9th group): 25 small winning patterns to 32 small winning patterns (1 payout)
Stopped pattern data (10th group): 33 small winning patterns to 34 small winning patterns (1 payout)
, corresponding to the case where each number of payouts has a separate address.
In this case, ``the data storage area for specifying the symbol combination to give the game value 'X' is continuous' means, for example, the stop symbol data (fifth group) for paying out 15 symbols and the stop symbol data. It indicates that the addresses of the data (sixth group) are continuous.
In addition, "a data storage area for specifying a symbol combination for imparting a game value 'Y' shall not exist among a plurality of data storage areas for specifying a symbol combination for imparting a game value 'X', ” means that the address of the stop symbol data (seventh group) to the stop symbol data ( 10th group) does not exist.

(c) Effect of Original Invention 39 According to the original invention, predetermined operations can be executed in the order of addresses in the predetermined storage area, and the program can be simplified.

40. original invention 40
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 40 Same as original invention 37.
(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 40 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (26th embodiment) is
Equipped with a grant number table (payout number table (TBL_WIN_CTL) in FIGS. 220 and 221) for determining the number of game values to be granted,
Predetermined data can be generated based on the stop symbol combination,
making it possible to specify the address of the given number table based on the bit position having the predetermined value in the predetermined data (steps S1189 to S1192 in FIG. 227),
The number of grants can be determined based on the data stored in the address of the number of grants table (steps S1192 and S1193 in FIG. 227).
It is characterized by

(c) Effect of the Original Invention 40 According to the original invention, only the bit corresponding to winning becomes a predetermined value, so the number of payouts can be specified by a simple method.

41. original invention 41
(a) Problems to be Solved by Original Invention 41 The original invention relates to a game machine using a stepping motor as a motor for rotating reels.
In conventional gaming machines, it is known that a stepping motor is used as a motor for rotating the reel, and a four-phase excitation output is applied to the stepping motor when stopping the reel (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-016110 publication).
Here, in a conventional game machine, a DC motor (direct current motor) is generally used as a hopper motor for rotating the hopper disc.
However, since the DC motor requires a relatively large current to drive, if the game medium can be applied while the stepping motor is being supplied with a four-phase excitation output, the drive control of the hopper associated with the application of the game medium will be affected. There is a possibility that the necessary current cannot be secured.
The original problem to be solved by the invention is to ensure a current necessary for drive control of the hopper associated with the provision of game media.

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 41 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (29th embodiment) is
Equipped with "N" (3) reels (31),
When the number of credits is the upper limit value ("50"), a predetermined lottery result is obtained (for example, the lottery means 61 wins the winning number "10", the minor combination A1 condition device is activated, and 15 Either a small winning combination 01 that pays out 1 or a small winning combination 13 to 17 that pays out 3 coins can be won), and in a situation where "N-1" (2) reels are stopped, Operation of the stop switch (42) corresponding to the "N"th (third) reel is accepted, and a specific symbol combination (for example, a small coin that pays out three coins) is awarded with a game medium (medal). In a game in which symbol combination corresponding to combination 13) is stop-displayed, an excitation output for stopping the "N"th reel after the operation of the stop switch corresponding to the "N"th reel is accepted. Even if the stop switch corresponding to the "N"th reel is released at a predetermined timing before the predetermined period for performing It is possible to execute drive signal output processing that outputs
When the number of credits is "0", the predetermined lottery result is obtained, and under the condition that "N-1" reels are stopped, the stop switch corresponding to the "N"th reel is operated. is received and the specific symbol combination is stop-displayed, after the operation of the stop switch corresponding to the "N"th reel is received, excitation for stopping the "N"th reel Even if the stop switch corresponding to the "N"th reel is released at a predetermined timing before the predetermined period for outputting has passed, the number of credits is added after the predetermined period has passed. It is characterized in that processing can be executed.

(c) Effect of the Original Invention 41 According to the original invention, the hopper driving signal can be output after a predetermined period of time during which the excitation output for stopping the reels has passed, so that the hopper is driven when the game medium is provided. The current required for control can be secured.
In addition, when the number of credits is the upper limit value and the hopper is driven to give the game medium, and when the number of credits is "0" and the number of credits is added to give the game medium, the reel It is possible to perform common processing until a predetermined period of time during which the excitation output for stopping is passed. As a result, the processing can be simplified, and the amount of ROM used by the program can be reduced.

42. original invention 42
(a) Problem to be solved by the original invention 42 Same as the original invention 41.
(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 42 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (29th embodiment) is
Equipped with "N" (3) reels (31),
A predetermined lottery result is obtained (for example, the lottery means 61 wins the winning number "10", the small combination A1 condition device is activated, and the small combination 01 pays out 15 cards, or pays out 3 cards. Any of the small wins 13 to 17 can be won), and under the situation where "N-2" (1) reels are stopped, "N-1" (2nd) reel When the operation of the stop switch (42) corresponding to the "N"th (third) reel is accepted at a predetermined timing before the predetermined period of time for the excitation output for stopping has passed Also, it is possible to execute control for stopping the "N"th reel,
Under the condition that the predetermined lottery result is obtained and the "N-1" reels are stopped, the operation of the stop switch corresponding to the "N"th reel is accepted, and the game media (medals) are distributed. In a game in which a specific symbol combination to be awarded (for example, a symbol combination corresponding to a small win 13 with three payouts) is stopped and displayed, an operation of the stop switch corresponding to the "N"th reel is accepted. After that, the stop switch corresponding to the "N"th reel is released at a predetermined timing before the predetermined period for performing the excitation output for stopping the "N"th reel has passed. However, after the predetermined period of time has passed, the control of giving the game medium can be executed.

(c) Effect of the original invention 42 According to the original invention, after a predetermined period of time during which the excitation output for stopping the reels is performed, the control for giving the game medium can be executed. It is possible to secure the current necessary for the drive control of the
Further, the control for stopping the "N"th reel can be executed even before the predetermined period for performing the excitation output for stopping the "N-1"th reel has elapsed. , the game can be progressed smoothly.

43. original invention 43
(a) Problem to be Solved by Original Invention 43 Same as Original Invention 41.
(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 43 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (29th embodiment) is
Equipped with "N" (3) reels (31),
A predetermined lottery result is obtained (for example, the lottery means 61 wins the winning number "10", the small combination A1 condition device is activated, and the small combination 01 pays out 15 or 3). Any of the small wins 13 to 17 can be won), and under the situation where "N-2" (1) reels are stopped, "N-1" (2nd) reel When the operation of the stop switch (42) corresponding to the "N"th (third) reel is accepted at a predetermined timing before the predetermined period of time for the excitation output for stopping has passed Also, it is possible to execute control for stopping the "N"th reel,
Under the condition that the predetermined lottery result is obtained and the "N-1" reels are stopped, the operation of the stop switch corresponding to the "N"th reel is accepted, and the game media (medals) are distributed. In a game in which a specific symbol combination to be awarded (for example, a symbol combination corresponding to a small winning combination 13 with three payouts) is stopped and displayed, an operation of the stop switch corresponding to the "N"th reel is accepted. After that, the stop switch corresponding to the "N"th reel is released at a predetermined timing before the predetermined period for performing the excitation output for stopping the "N"th reel has passed. However, after the predetermined period of time has passed, the control of giving the game medium can be executed,
The maximum current required for the excitation output to stop the reel is designed to be smaller than the maximum current required for driving the hopper.

(c) Effect of the original invention 43 According to the original invention, after the lapse of a predetermined period of time during which the excitation output for stopping the reels is performed, it is possible to execute the control to apply the game medium, so that the hopper associated with the application of the game medium can be executed. It is possible to secure the current necessary for the drive control of the
Further, the control for stopping the "N"th reel can be executed even before the predetermined period for performing the excitation output for stopping the "N-1"th reel has elapsed. , the game can be progressed smoothly.
Furthermore, since the maximum current required for the excitation output to stop the reels is designed to be smaller than the maximum current required to drive the hopper, multiple reels can be stopped simultaneously. can be

44. original invention 44
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 44 Same as original invention 41.
(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 44 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (the thirtieth embodiment) is
"N" (three) reels (31);
Storage means (# reel management timer (_WK_RL#_TIME) of RWM 53) capable of storing information (data of "0 to 108 (D)") for measuring the period of excitation output for stopping the reel (Fig. 237) ) and ,
A predetermined lottery result is obtained (for example, the lottery means 61 wins the winning number "10", the small combination A1 condition device is activated, and the small combination 01 pays out 15 cards, or pays out 3 cards. Any one of the 13th to 17th small wins can be won), and under the situation where "N-1" (2) reels are stopped, it corresponds to the "N"th (3rd) reel In a game in which an operation of a stop switch (42) is accepted and a specific symbol combination (for example, a symbol combination corresponding to a small winning combination 13 in which three coins are paid out) in which game media (medals) are awarded is stopped and displayed. , at a predetermined timing after the operation of the stop switch corresponding to the "N"th reel has been accepted and before the period during which the excitation output for stopping the "N"th reel has elapsed. , the stop switch corresponding to the "N"th reel is released ("No" in step S1314 in FIG. 238), the information stored in the storage means is the predetermined value ("0"). ) (“Yes” in step S1342 of FIG. 241), the control of providing game media (payout of medals at the time of winning in step S294 of FIG. 238) can be executed.

(c) Effect of the original invention 44 According to the original invention, there is provided a storage means capable of storing information for measuring the period during which the excitation output for stopping the reel is performed, and the information stored in the storage means is a predetermined value. After that, it is possible to execute the control to apply the game medium, so that it is possible to secure the electric current necessary for the drive control of the hopper accompanying the application of the game medium.
Also, based on the information stored in the storage means, it is possible to easily determine that the period for performing the excitation output for stopping the reel has elapsed.

45. original invention 45
(a) Problem to be Solved by Original Invention 45 Same as Original Invention 41.
(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 45 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (31st embodiment) is
"N" (three) reels (31);
storage means (# reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR#) of RWM 53 (Fig. 134)) capable of storing information about the excitation output of the motor related to the reel;
A predetermined lottery result is obtained (for example, the lottery means 61 wins the winning number "10", the small combination A1 condition device is activated, and the small combination 01 pays out 15 or 3). Any one of the 13th to 17th small wins can be won), and under the situation where "N-1" (2) reels are stopped, it corresponds to the "N"th (3rd) reel In a game in which an operation of a stop switch (42) is accepted and a specific symbol combination (for example, a symbol combination corresponding to a small winning combination 13 in which three coins are paid out) in which game media (medals) are awarded is stopped and displayed. , after the operation of the stop switch corresponding to the "N"th reel is accepted, information indicating that an excitation output for stopping the "N"th reel (deceleration pulse data " 00001111 (B)” (4-phase ON)) is stored in the storage means (“Yes” in step S1355 in FIG. 242), and the stop switch corresponding to the “N”th reel has been released ( If "No" in step S1354 of FIG. 242), the control of giving game media (payout of medals at the time of winning in step S294 of FIG. 242) is not executed, and the information stored in the storage means is the predetermined information ("00000000 (B)" at the time of stop) ("No" in step S1355 of FIG. 242), the control of giving game media can be executed.

(c) Effect of the original invention 45 According to the original invention, the storage means is provided to store information about the excitation output of the motor associated with the reel, and the information indicating that the excitation output for stopping the reel is to be performed is stored in the storage means. , the control for giving the game medium is not executed, and the control for giving the game medium can be executed after the information stored in the storage means becomes the predetermined information. It is possible to secure the electric current necessary for the drive control of the hopper accompanying the application of the medium.
Further, based on the information stored in the storage means, it can be easily determined that the period for performing the excitation output for stopping the reel has elapsed.

46. original invention 46
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 46 Same as original invention 41.
(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 46 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (31st embodiment) is
Equipped with "N" (3) reels (31),
A predetermined lottery result is obtained (for example, the lottery means 61 wins the winning number "10", the small combination A1 condition device is activated, and the small combination 01 pays out 15 or 3). Any one of the 13th to 17th small wins can be won), and under the situation where "N-1" (2) reels are stopped, it corresponds to the "N"th (3rd) reel In a game in which an operation of a stop switch (42) is accepted and a specific symbol combination (for example, a symbol combination corresponding to a small winning combination 13 in which three coins are paid out) in which game media (medals) are awarded is stopped and displayed. , after the stop switch corresponding to the "N"th reel has been released ("No" in step S1354 in FIG. 242), and after the excitation output for stopping the "N"th reel is performed. 242 (“Yes” in step S1355 of FIG. 242), the number of game media to be given can be determined (display determination in step S291 of FIG. 242), and after the number of game media to be given is determined 242, and after the excitation output for stopping the “N”th reel (“No” in step S1355 of FIG. payment) can be executed.

(c) Effect of the original invention 46 According to the original invention, after the excitation output for stopping the "N"th reel is completed, the control for giving the game medium can be executed, so the game medium is given. It is possible to secure the current necessary for the drive control of the hopper associated with the
Further, if the stop switch corresponding to the "N"th reel is released, even under the condition that the excitation output for stopping the "N"th reel is performed, the number of game media to be given can be determined, it is possible to shorten the time from when the stop switch corresponding to the "N"th reel is released to when the control for giving the game medium is executed.

47. original invention 47
(a) Problems to be Solved by Original Invention 47 The original invention relates to a gaming machine that provides game media when a predetermined symbol combination is stopped and displayed.
In a conventional gaming machine, when all reels are stopped, it is determined whether or not all stop switches are released (none of the stop switches are operated), and all stop switches are released. It is known to determine whether or not a symbol combination that provides a game medium is stopped and displayed (a prize determination) when it is determined that there is a game medium (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-026717).
However, if winning determination is performed after all the stop switches are released, the processing of winning determination is delayed when the player continues to operate the stop switch corresponding to the last reel to be stopped.
The problem to be solved by the original invention is to shorten the time from when the operation of the stop switch corresponding to the "N"th reel is accepted until the number of game media to be given is determined, and to reduce the amount of game media after that. It is to enable granting to be executed smoothly.

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 47 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (32nd embodiment) is
Equipped with "N" (3) reels (31),
A predetermined lottery result is obtained (for example, the lottery means 61 wins the winning number "10", the small combination A1 condition device is activated, and the small combination 01 pays out 15 cards, or pays out 3 cards. Any of the small wins 13 to 17 can be won), and a specific symbol combination (medal) is awarded by operating the stop switch (42) in a predetermined operation mode (correct order of pressing) ( For example, in a game in which a symbol combination corresponding to a small win 01 with 15 payouts) is stopped and displayed, an operation of a stop switch corresponding to the "N"th (third) reel is accepted, and the stop switch is received. Even in a situation where the operation of the switch is accepted, the number of game media to be given can be determined (display determination in step S291 in FIG. 244), and after the number of game media to be given is determined, It is determined whether or not a predetermined switch including a stop switch corresponding to at least the "N"th reel has been operated, and if it is determined that the predetermined switch has not been operated (" No”) is characterized in that it is possible to execute control for giving game media (payout of medals at the time of winning in step S294 in FIG. 244).
Also, the original invention
Equipped with "N" reels,
A stop corresponding to the "N"th reel in a game in which a specific symbol combination to which a game medium is provided is stopped and displayed when a predetermined lottery result is obtained and a stop switch is operated in a predetermined operation mode. Even in a situation where the operation of the switch is accepted and the operation of the stop switch is accepted, it is possible to determine the number of game media to be given, and after determining the number of game media to be given, " It is characterized in that it is determined whether or not a stop switch corresponding to the N'-th reel is operated, and if it is determined that it is not operated, the control of giving game media can be executed.

(c) Effect of the original invention 47 According to the original invention, even if the operation of the stop switch corresponding to the "N"th reel continues to be accepted, the number of given game media can be determined. Therefore, it is possible to shorten the time from when the operation of the stop switch corresponding to the "N"th reel is accepted until the number of game media to be provided is determined, and the subsequent provision of game media is smoothly executed. be able to.
After determining the number of game media to be provided, it is determined whether or not the stop switch corresponding to the “N”th reel has been operated. Since it is made executable, it is possible to execute the provision of game media at a timing desired by the player.

48. original invention 48
(a) Problem to be Solved by Original Invention 48 Same as Original Invention 41.
(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 48 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (33rd embodiment) is
Equipped with "N" (3) reels (31),
In a game in which a predetermined lottery result was obtained (for example, winning number "7" was won by the role lottery means 61 and the "1BB+cherry" condition device corresponding to the winning number "7" was activated), "N-1" In a situation where the number (two) reels are stopped, the operation of the stop switch (42) corresponding to the "N"th (third) reel is accepted and a specific symbol combination (for example, cherry When the symbol combination of "cherry" - "ANY" - "ANY" corresponding to (1-card hand) is stopped and displayed, the operation of the stop switch corresponding to the "N"th reel has been accepted. Even if the state continues, after the excitation output for stopping the “N”th reel is completed (“No” in step S1413 in FIG. 251), the game medium (medal) is removed. The control to award (payout of medals at the time of winning in step S294 in FIG. 251) can be executed, and the situation in which the operation of the stop switch corresponding to the “N”th reel is accepted, the control to award game media is executed. If the game continues after the game is played, after the stop switch corresponding to the "N"th reel is released ("No" in step S1415 in Fig. 251), a predetermined effect relating to the game result is output. It is characterized by having a case (notifying the winning of the 1BB condition device by lighting the production lamp).

(c) Effect of the original invention 48 According to the original invention, after the excitation output for stopping the "N"th reel is completed, the control for giving the game medium can be executed, so the game medium is given. It is possible to secure the current necessary for the drive control of the hopper associated with the
Further, when the stop switch corresponding to the "N"th reel is released, there is a case where a predetermined effect related to the game result is executed, so the predetermined effect related to the game result is executed at the timing desired by the player. can be made

49. original invention 49
(a) Problems to be Solved by Original Invention 49 The original invention relates to a gaming machine having a plurality of reels and a plurality of stop switches operated by the player when stopping the reels.
In a conventional game machine, when the rotation of all the reels reaches a constant speed and the index of all the reels is detected, it is known that all the reels can be controlled to stop based on the operation of a stop switch. (for example, JP-A-2016-026717).
The original problem to be solved by the invention is to make it possible to determine whether or not indexes of all reels have been detected by simple arithmetic processing.

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 49 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (34th embodiment) is
Equipped with "N" (3) reels (31),
Each reel is provided with a storage means (#th reel driving state (_WK_RL#_STS) (Fig. 253)) capable of storing information about the driving state of the reel,
Using the information stored in each of the storage means, it is possible to execute a predetermined operation (logical product operation of data stored in the #th reel driving state (_WK_RL#_STS) and "40 (H)"),
Even if a plurality of reels are rotating at a constant speed, if the index has not yet been detected for any of the reels, the predetermined result (“0” (the zero flag is “1 ”)),
Even if the stop switch (42) is operated, if the predetermined result is not obtained as a result of executing the predetermined calculation, the stop control of the reel corresponding to the stop switch is not executed.
Also, the original invention
Equipped with "N" reels,
Each reel is provided with storage means capable of storing information about the drive state of the reel,
making it possible to execute a predetermined calculation using the information stored in each of the storage means;
Even when a plurality of reels are rotating at a constant speed, if the index has not yet been detected for any of the reels, the predetermined result is not obtained even if the predetermined calculation is executed,
When the predetermined result is not obtained as a result of executing the predetermined calculation, the stop control of the reel corresponding to the stop switch is not executed even if the stop switch is operated.

(c) Effect of the original invention 49 According to the original invention, it is possible to determine whether or not the indices of all the reels have been detected based on whether or not a predetermined result has been obtained as a result of executing a predetermined calculation. It is possible to determine whether or not the stop control of the reels based on the operation of the stop switch can be executed by such arithmetic processing.

50. original invention 50
(a) Problems to be Solved by the Original Invention 50 The original invention relates to a gaming machine that starts spinning reels based on the operation of a start switch.
In a conventional gaming machine, when all reels are stopped, it is determined whether or not all stop switches are released (none of the stop switches are operated), and all stop switches are released. It is known to determine whether or not a symbol combination that provides a game medium is stopped and displayed (a prize determination) when it is determined that there is a game medium (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-026717).
The original problem to be solved by the invention is to execute appropriate control according to the type of other input signals when the operation of the start switch is accepted.

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 50 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (34th embodiment) is
After the number of bets that allow the game to be executed has been bet, and the operation of the start switch is accepted under the condition that the operation of the bet switch is accepted (input port 0 level data (_PT_IN0_OLD) of RWM 53) ( 254) and "11011111 (B)" is not "0"), the reel rotation start control based on the operation of the start switch is not executed,
After the game executable bet number has been bet, if the operation of the start switch is accepted under a predetermined situation in which the signal of the setting key switch is input, the operation of the start switch is performed. It is possible to execute reel rotation start control,
It is characterized by being able to shift to a mode in which the set value can be confirmed when a setting key switch signal is input under a specific situation in which no bets have been placed.

(c) Effect of the original invention 50 According to the original invention, when the operation of the start switch is accepted in the situation where the operation of the bet switch is accepted, the reel rotation start control is not executed, so the bet switch It is possible to make a player or a hall clerk recognize that an abnormality such as failure to return to an original state due to deterioration of a carriage has occurred.
When the operation of the start switch is accepted under the condition that the setting key switch signal is input, the reel rotation start control is executed, but the setting key switch signal during the progress of the game is noise. Since there is a high possibility that there is, it is possible not to interrupt the progress of the game due to noise.

51. original invention 51
(a) Problems to be Solved by Original Invention 51 The original invention relates to a gaming machine that stops reels based on the operation of a stop switch.
In a conventional gaming machine, when all reels are stopped, it is determined whether or not all stop switches are released (none of the stop switches are operated), and all stop switches are released. It is known to determine whether or not a symbol combination that provides a game medium is stopped and displayed (a prize determination) when it is determined that there is a game medium (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-026717).
The original problem to be solved by the invention is to perform appropriate control according to the type of other input signals when the operation of the stop switch is accepted.

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 51 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (34th embodiment) is
Equipped with a plurality (three) of reels (31),
In a situation where a plurality of reels rotate at a constant speed and the operation of the start switch (41) is accepted, if the operation of a predetermined stop switch is accepted, the reel based on the operation of the predetermined stop switch (The input port 0 level data (_PT_IN0_OLD) (Fig. 254) does not match any data in the stop switch determination table (Fig. 255), so step S1435 in Fig. 257 becomes "No". , do not proceed to step S1437),
When a predetermined stop switch operation is accepted under a predetermined situation in which a plurality of reels are rotating at a constant speed and a setting key switch signal is input, reels based on the operation of the predetermined stop switch (Even if the setting key switch signal is input, the data of the input port 0 level data (_PT_IN0_OLD) (Fig. 254) and any of the data of the stop switch determination table (Fig. 255) If they match, it becomes "Yes" in step S1435 of FIG. 257, and the process proceeds to step S1437)
It is characterized by being able to shift to a mode in which the set value can be confirmed when a setting key switch signal is input under a specific situation in which no bets have been placed.

(c) Effect of the original invention 51 According to the original invention, when the operation of the stop switch is accepted under the condition that the operation of the start switch is accepted, the stop control of the reel is not executed. It is possible to make a player or a hall clerk aware of the occurrence of an abnormality such as failure to return to the original state due to deterioration.
In addition, when the operation of the stop switch is accepted under the condition that the signal of the setting key switch is input, the stop control of the reel is executed, but the signal of the setting key switch during the progress of the game is noise. Since the possibility is high, it is possible to prevent the progress of the game from being interrupted by the noise.

52. original invention 52
(a) Problems to be Solved by Original Invention 52 The original invention relates to a gaming machine that stops reels based on the operation of a stop switch.
In a conventional gaming machine, when all reels are stopped, it is determined whether or not all stop switches are released (none of the stop switches are operated), and all stop switches are released. It is known to determine whether or not a symbol combination that provides a game medium has been stopped and displayed (a prize determination) when it is determined that there is a game medium (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-026717).
The original problem to be solved by the invention is to perform appropriate control when operations of a plurality of stop switches are accepted at the same time.

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 52 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (35th embodiment) is
Equipped with a plurality (three) of reels (31),
When the operation of the first stop switch (42) and the operation of the second stop switch are accepted at the same time under the condition that the plurality of reels are rotating at a constant speed, the operation corresponding to the first stop switch is performed. Reel stop control can be executed (the result of the AND operation of the input port rise data A (_PT_IN_A_UP) (Fig. 133) and the reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP) (Fig. 173) is used as an offset value, which is the reference address "1100 (H)" is used as a specified address, and the stop control of the reel 31 is executed based on the data indicated by the specified address in the stop switch reception table (TBL_STOP_BTN) (Fig. 259)),
When the reel corresponding to the first stop switch is stopped and the reel corresponding to the second stop switch is rotating at a constant speed, the operation of the first stop switch and the operation of the second stop switch are different. When both are accepted at the same time, the stop control of the reel corresponding to the second stop switch can be executed.

(c) Effect of Original Invention 52 According to the original invention, when operations of a plurality of stop switches are accepted at the same time, stop control of any one reel can be appropriately executed.

53. original invention 53
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 53 Same as original invention 52.
(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 53 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (35th embodiment) is
a plurality (three) of reels (31);
A predetermined table (stop switch reception table (TBL_STOP_BTN) (Fig. 259)) and
When the operation of the first stop switch and the operation of the second stop switch are accepted at the same time under the condition that the plurality of reels are rotating at a constant speed, the predetermined information is acquired using the predetermined table. (The result of the AND operation of the input port rising data A (_PT_IN_A_UP) (Fig. 133) and the reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP) (Fig. 173) is used as an offset value, which is added to the reference address "1100 (H)". The result is specified address, the data indicated by the specified address is acquired from the stop switch reception table (TBL_STOP_BTN) (Fig. 259)), and based on the predetermined information, the stop control of the reel corresponding to the first stop switch can be executed. year,
When the reel corresponding to the first stop switch is stopped and the reel corresponding to the second stop switch is rotating at a constant speed, the operation of the first stop switch and the operation of the second stop switch overlap. When both are received at the same time, specific information is acquired using the predetermined table, and based on the specific information, stop control of the reel corresponding to the second stop switch can be executed. .

(c) Effect of Original Invention 53 According to the original invention, when operations of a plurality of stop switches are accepted at the same time, stop control of any one reel can be appropriately executed.

54. original invention 54
(a) Problems to be Solved by Original Invention 54 The original invention relates to a gaming machine that stops reels based on the operation of a stop switch.
In a conventional gaming machine, when all reels are stopped, it is determined whether or not all stop switches are released (none of the stop switches are operated), and all stop switches are released. It is known to determine whether or not a symbol combination that provides a game medium has been stopped and displayed (a prize determination) when it is determined that there is a game medium (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-026717).
The problem to be solved by the original invention is that the stop switch corresponding to the predetermined reel is operated, and then, before the predetermined reel stops, the stop switch corresponding to the specific reel is operated, and the specific reel stops first. , to perform appropriate control later when a given reel stops.

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 54 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (36th embodiment) is
Equipped with a plurality (three) of reels (31),
A predetermined lottery result (for example, winning the winning number "25" in the role lottery means 61, the 1BB condition device corresponding to the winning number "25" is activated, and the "blue BAR" - "blue BAR" corresponding to 1BB ”-“Blue BAR” symbol combination can be stopped and displayed on the active line) In the game, the stop switch (42) corresponding to the predetermined reel is operated at the first timing, and then the predetermined reel is stopped. Previously, when the stop switch corresponding to the specific reel was operated at the second timing, the predetermined reel stopped after the specific reel stopped,
As a result of the predetermined reel stopping after the specific reel stops, when the symbols forming the specific symbol combination (“blue BAR”-“blue BAR”-“blue BAR”) stop and display in a straight line, the predetermined reel is stopped. It is characterized by being capable of outputting a predetermined effect (tenpai sound) according to the timing of stopping.

(c) Effect of Original Invention 54 According to the original invention, even if the order of operation of the stop switch and the order of stopping the reels are different, it is possible to output a predetermined effect at an appropriate timing that does not make the player feel uncomfortable. .

55. original invention 55
(a) Problems to be Solved by Original Invention 55 The original invention relates to a game machine having a plurality of notification control states.
In the prior art, there is known a game machine (slot machine) that notifies the correct pressing order when the pressing order bell is won during AT, but does not notify the correct pressing order even if the pressing order bell is won during non-AT. In addition, there is also known a game machine that does not notify the correct pressing order in the inside even during AT publications, etc.).
However, since the payout rate differs for each RT based on the probability of winning a replay, etc., there is a problem that if the player stays at an RT with a low payout rate for a long time, it is disadvantageous to the player.
The original problem to be solved by the invention is to make the ball output rate almost the same as when staying in another RT even when staying in an RT (lottery state) with a low ball output rate. is.

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 55 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (37th embodiment) is
A first lottery state (non-RT);
A second lottery state (RT1) in which the winning probability of at least one lottery target (replay) is higher than that of the first lottery state,
Specific lottery results (winning small wins A01-A24, ),
In the game with the specific lottery result, the ratio of not informing the player of the stop switch operation mode (correct pressing order) that is advantageous to the player is higher than the ratio of informing the player of the stop switch operation mode that is advantageous to the player. 1 notification control state (non-AT) and the ratio of notifying the operation mode of the stop switch that is more advantageous to the player than the percentage of notifying the operation mode of the stop switch that is advantageous to the player in the game with the specific lottery result. a second annunciation control state (AT) higher than
In the first lottery state and the first notification control state, the ratio of notifying the operation mode of the stop switch that is advantageous to the player in the game in which the specific lottery result is obtained is higher than in the second lottery state and the first notification control state. High (Non-RT and non-AT reported about 3.45% of the time, but RT1 and non-AT did not report)
It is characterized by

(c) Effect of the Initial Invention 55 According to the initial invention, in the first lottery state and the first notification control state, the player can obtain the specific lottery result more than in the second lottery state and the first notification control state. Since the ratio of notifying the operation mode of the stop switch that is advantageous to the second lottery state and first notification control state is increased to).

56. original invention 56
(a) Problems to be Solved by Original Invention 56 The original invention relates to a game machine having a plurality of notification control states.
Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine (slot machine) that completes a game in the state inside the BB and executes AT in the state inside the BB when the AT is won (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2014-155645 (see publication).
However, in the gaming machine with the above specifications, the BB game may be designed to reduce medals. In this case, if BB wins, there is a problem that it is disadvantageous to the player.
The original problem to be solved by the invention is to prevent medals (game media) from decreasing even if a special role is won.

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 56 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (37th embodiment) is
First lottery state (non-RT);
A second lottery state (RT1) in which the winning probability of at least one lottery target (replay) is higher than that of the first lottery state,
Specific lottery results (winning small wins A01-A24, ),
In the game with the specific lottery result, the ratio of not informing the player of the stop switch operation mode (correct pressing order) that is advantageous to the player is higher than the ratio of informing the player of the stop switch operation mode that is advantageous to the player. 1 notification control state (non-AT);
A second notification control state ( AT) and
In the first lottery state and the second lottery state, respectively, the winning information of the special role (1BB) can be carried over,
A specification suggesting that the symbol combination corresponding to the special combination is stopped and displayed when the state of the first notification control state is changed to the second notification control state when the winning information of the special combination is carried over in the first lottery state. making production possible,
When the winning information of the special combination is carried over in the second lottery state and the state is shifted from the first information control state to the second information control state, the specific effect is not executed.

(c) Effect of the Original Invention 56 According to the original invention, when the first lottery state shifts from the first information control state to the second information control state, it is possible to shift to a special game by making it possible to execute a specific effect. Therefore, the special game can be executed only in the second notification state. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game value from decreasing by shifting to a special game when in the first notification control state.

57. original invention 57
(a) Problems to be Solved by the Original Invention 57 The original invention relates to a gaming machine in which it is possible to set conditions for transition to a specific notification control state.
In the prior art, there is a gaming machine (slot machine) that has a plurality of RTs and has a high AT winning probability in CZ when winning CZ during the stay of a higher RT (for example, JP 2019 -005550).
However, there is a problem that the game tends to become monotonous because it is not possible to establish a relationship between the advantageous interval and the next advantageous interval.
The original problem to be solved by the invention is to make it possible to establish a relationship between an advantageous section (second section) and the next advantageous section.

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 57 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (38th embodiment) is
a plurality of lottery states (non-RT, RT1, RT2) with different winning probabilities for at least one lottery target (replay);
A first section (normal section) in which the operation mode of the stop switch is not notified;
A second section (advantageous section) capable of informing the operation mode of the stop switch,
Specific lottery results (winning small wins A01-A24, ),
In the second section, when the result of the specific lottery is obtained, the ratio of informing the operation mode of the stop switch that is advantageous to the player is higher than the ratio of not informing the operation mode of the stop switch that is advantageous to the player. Provided with a notification control state (AT),
To make it possible to set at least one of the conditions for shifting to the specific notification control state (for example, the number of ceiling games until the AT is activated) based on which lottery state is the lottery state when the second section is started. characterized by

(c) Effect of the initial invention 57 According to the initial invention, if the second section is completed in the desired lottery state and the transition is made to the first section, and then the transition is made to the second section again, the specific notification control state can be obtained. It becomes possible to change the transition conditions.

58. original invention 58
(a) Problems to be Solved by Original Invention 58 The original invention relates to a gaming machine in which a game can be played with at least a first prescribed number or a second prescribed number.
In a conventional gaming machine (slot machine), for example, when a game can be executed with a prescribed number of "2" and a prescribed number of "3", and the prescribed number of "3" is the intended prescribed number, the prescribed number of "2" It is known that when a game is played, a warning such as "3 coins!"
However, even if the above-mentioned attention is issued, there is a problem that the information regarding the game (the number of games played, etc.) is updated during the AT, for example.
The problem to be solved by the original invention is to control the updating of predetermined information regarding a game when an unintended prescribed number of games are played.

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 58 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (39th embodiment) is
In a predetermined game state (when the accessory is not activated), the game can be played with at least the first specified number (specified number "3") or the second specified number (specified number "2"),
Depending on the operation mode of the stop switch (42), there is a case where a specific lottery result (winning small winning combination A01 to A24 and small winning combination B01 to B24) is displayed, which allows the stop display of symbol combinations with different numbers of game values. ,
In the game with the specific lottery result, a specific notification control state (AT) that can notify the operation mode (correct pressing order) of the stop switch that is advantageous to the player is provided,
In the game of the first specified number and the specific information control state, the display of the total number of game values given in the specific information control state and the number of games played in the specific information control state can be updated,
In the game of the second specified number and the specific information control state, the display of the total number of game values given in the specific information control state can be updated, and the display of the number of games in the specific information control state is not updated. and

(c) Effect of the original invention 58 According to the original invention, in the game of the second specified number and the specific information control state, the display of the total number of game values given in the specific information control state can be updated, but the specific information Since the display regarding the number of games played in the control state is not updated, it is possible to prevent the number of games played in the specific notification control state from decreasing in the second specified number. As a result, even if the player plays a game with the prescribed number in error in the specific notification control state, the player can be rescued.
On the other hand, even if the game is played with the second specified number, the total given number of game values in the specific notification control state can be updated, so that the increase or decrease in the game value can be accurately notified to the player.

59. original invention 59
(a) Problems to be Solved by Original Invention 59 The original invention relates to a gaming machine in which a game can be played with at least a first prescribed number or a second prescribed number.
In a conventional gaming machine (slot machine), for example, when a game can be executed with a prescribed number of "2" and a prescribed number of "3", and the prescribed number of "3" is the intended prescribed number, the prescribed number of "2" It is known that when a game is played, a warning such as "3 coins!"
However, even if the above attention is called, the effect is executed as before, so there is a problem that the player hardly notices that the specified number is unintended.
Further, for example, during AT, there is a problem that predetermined information (the number of games played, etc.) about the game is updated.
The original problem to be solved by the invention is to make it easier for the player to notice that the game is played with an unintended prescribed number. Another object of the present invention is to control the updating of predetermined information regarding a game when the game is played with an unintended prescribed number.

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 59 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (39th embodiment) is
In a predetermined game state (when the accessory is not activated), the game can be played with at least the first specified number (specified number "3") or the second specified number (specified number "2"),
A first section (normal section) in which the operation mode of the stop switch (42) is not notified;
A second section that can notify the operation mode of the stop switch (advantageous section)
with
There is a case where a specific lottery result (winning small winning combination A01 to A24 and small winning combination B01 to B24) is obtained, in which symbol combinations with different numbers of awarded game values can be stopped and displayed according to the operation mode of the stop switch,
In the second section, when the specific lottery result is obtained, a specific notification control state (AT) is provided that can notify the player of the operation mode (correct order of pressing the correct answer) of the stop switch that is advantageous to the player,
In the first specified number of games, it is possible to execute a predetermined effect according to the result of the winning lottery,
In the second prescribed number of games, a predetermined effect is not executed according to the winning combination lottery result,
In the game of the first specified number and the specific information control state, the display regarding the total number of game values given in the specific information control state and the number of games played in the second information control state can be updated,
In the game of the second specified number and the specific information control state, the display of the total number of game values given in the specific information control state can be updated, and the display of the number of games in the specific information control state is not updated. and

(c) Effect of Original Invention 59 According to the original invention, since the predetermined effect is not executed in the second specified number of games, it is easy to notice that the game is played in the second specified number at the start of the game. can.
In addition, in the game of the second specified number and the specific information control state, the display of the total number of game values given in the specific information control state can be updated, but the display of the number of games played in the specific information control state is not updated. , it is possible to prevent the number of games in the specific notification control state from decreasing in the second specified number. As a result, even if the player plays a game with the prescribed number in error in the specific notification control state, the player can be rescued.

60. original invention 60
(a) Problems to be Solved by the Original Invention 60 The original invention relates to a gaming machine in which a game can be played with at least a first specified number or a second specified number.
In a conventional gaming machine (slot machine), for example, when a game can be executed with a prescribed number of "2" and a prescribed number of "3", and the prescribed number of "3" is the intended prescribed number, the prescribed number of "2" It is known that when a game is played, a warning such as "3 coins!"
However, even if the above attention is given, there is a possibility that a continuous effect or the like will be executed, and there is a problem that the player is unlikely to notice that the specified number is unintended.
Further, for example, during AT, there is a problem that predetermined information (the number of games played, etc.) about the game is updated.
The original problem to be solved by the invention is to make it easier for the player to notice that the game is played with an unintended prescribed number.

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 60 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (39th embodiment) is
In a predetermined game state (when the accessory is not activated), the game can be played with at least the first specified number (specified number "3") or the second specified number (specified number "2"),
A first section (normal section) in which the operation mode of the stop switch is not notified;
A second section (advantageous section) capable of informing the operation mode of the stop switch,
There is a case where a specific lottery result (winning small winning combination A01 to A24 and small winning combination B01 to B24) is obtained in which symbol combinations with different numbers of game values to be awarded can be stopped and displayed according to the operation mode of the stop switch,
In the second section, when the specific lottery result is obtained, a specific notification control state (AT) is provided that can notify the player of the operation mode (correct pressing order) of the stop switch that is advantageous to the player,
In a game determined to execute a continuous performance over a plurality of consecutive games, the continuous performance can be progressed in a first specified number of games,
In the game determined to execute the continuous performance, in the second prescribed number of games, the continuous performance is not progressed,
In the game of the first specified number and the specific information control state, the display regarding the total number of game values given in the specific information control state and the number of games played in the specific information control state can be updated,
In the game of the second prescribed number and the specific information control state, the display of the total number of game values given in the specific information control state can be updated, and the display of the number of games in the specific information control state is not updated. and

(c) Effect of the Initial Invention 60 According to the initial invention, since continuous effects are not executed in the second specified number of games, it is possible to make it easier for the player to notice that the second specified number of games are being played. .
In addition, in the game of the second prescribed number and the specific information control state, the display of the total number of game values given in the specific information control state can be updated, but the display of the number of games played in the specific information control state is not updated. , It is possible to prevent the number of games in the specific notification control state from decreasing in the second specified number. As a result, even if the player plays a game with the prescribed number in error in the specific notification control state, the player can be rescued.

61. original invention 61
(a) Problems to be Solved by Original Invention 61 The original invention relates to a game machine provided with effect switches.
It is known that in a conventional game machine (slot machine), an effect switch (push button) is provided, the effect switch is activated while performing an effect prompting the operation of the effect switch, and the effect develops when the effect switch is operated. (See, for example, JP-A-2013-052111 and JP-A-2018-057814).
However, there is a gap between the timing at which the effect prompting the operation of the effect switch is displayed and the timing at which the effect switch is activated. is not enabled in some cases.
The first problem to be solved by the invention is to match the timing of displaying an image indicating that the effect switch can be operated and the timing of validating the effect switch.

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 61 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (40th embodiment) is
Production control means (sub control board 80) for controlling the output of production;
A production switch (push button) connected to the production control means,
The effect control means can display an image indicating that the effect switch can be operated at a predetermined timing during the effect based on the determined effect,
The effect control means measures the time until the effect switch is activated based on the determined effect, and activates the effect switch based on the measurement result of the time.

(c) Effect of the original invention 61 According to the original invention, the time until the effect switch is activated is measured, and the timing of displaying an image indicating that the effect switch can be operated and the timing of validating the effect switch. is to match

62. original invention 62
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 62 Same as original invention 61.
(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 62 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (40th embodiment) is
Production control means (sub control board 80) for controlling the output of production;
A production switch (push button) connected to the production control means,
The effect control means can display an image indicating that the effect switch can be operated at a predetermined timing during the effect based on the determined effect,
The effect control means measures the time until the effect switch is activated based on the determined effect, activates the effect switch based on the measurement result of the time,
When a power cut occurs, if the game state when the power cut occurs is a specific game state (CZ or the like) advantageous to the player, a specific image can be displayed when the power is restored from the cut. It is characterized by

(c) Effect of the original invention 62 According to the original invention, the time until the effect switch is activated is measured, and the timing of displaying an image indicating that the effect switch can be operated and the timing of validating the effect switch. is to match
In addition, when a power outage occurs and the power is restored from the power outage, if the state before the power outage was in the specific gaming state, the player or the hall manager, etc. can let you know.

63. original invention 63
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 63 Same as original invention 61.
(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 63 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (40th embodiment) is
Production control means (sub control board 80) for controlling the output of production;
A production button (push button) connected to the production control means,
The production control means is
A first effect control means (sub-main);
It has a second effect control means (sub-sub) for controlling image display,
The second effect control means can display a predetermined image indicating that the effect button can be operated at a predetermined timing during the effect based on the effect determined by the first effect control means,
The second effect control means can transmit a specific command to the first effect control means in accordance with the start of display of the predetermined image,
The first effect control means enables the effect button based on the reception of the specific command.

(c) Effect of the original invention 63 According to the original invention, by transmitting a specific command, it is possible to match the timing of enabling the effect switch with the timing of displaying an image indicating that the effect switch can be operated. Both timings can be matched without depending on time measurement (without having a timer).

64. original invention 64
(a) Problems to be Solved by Original Invention 64 The original invention relates to a game machine having a reset switch.
Conventionally, game machines with reset switches have been known (for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2018-029668).
Here, in the conventional gaming machine described above, when the power is turned on with the reset switch being operated (turned on), all the contents of the RAM of the main control board are cleared.
However, in a game machine that has set values, if all the contents of the RAM of the main control board are cleared, the set values will also be cleared. end up
The original problem to be solved by the invention is to shift to an appropriate state according to the type of switch being operated when the power is turned on in a gaming machine having a reset switch.

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 64 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (41st embodiment) is
As a play area,
a first section (normal section) in which an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch (42) is not notified;
a second section (advantageous section) capable of reporting an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch;
Equipped with a game section notification means (advantageous section display LED 77),
When the game section notification means is in the first notification mode (lights off), it indicates that it is the first section,
When the game section notification means is in the second notification mode (lighted), it indicates that it is the second section,
It may be in a predetermined error state (recoverable error state),
When the game section notification means is in the second notification mode and the game value (medal) can be betted, and the predetermined error state occurs, the reset switch (153) is operated (turned on) state) when the predetermined error state is canceled, the game interval notification means is in the second notification mode even after the predetermined error state is canceled,
When the predetermined error state occurs under the condition that the game interval notification means is in the second notification mode and the game value can be betted, the supply of power is interrupted (the power is turned off), and then, The power supply is restarted (turned on) while the setting key switch (152) is in a specific mode (on state) and the reset switch is operated (on state). When, the set value is not changed, and the game interval notification means is in the first notification state.
Also, the original invention (41st embodiment) is
As a play area,
a first section (normal section) in which an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch (42) is not notified;
a second section (advantageous section) capable of reporting an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch;
Equipped with a game section notification means (advantageous section display LED 77),
When the game section notification means is in the first notification mode (lights off), there is a case where it is the first section,
When the game section notification means is in the second notification mode (lighted), it indicates that it is the second section,
It may be in a predetermined error state (recoverable error state),
When the game section notification means is in the second notification mode and the game value (medal) can be betted, and the predetermined error state occurs, the reset switch (153) is operated (turned on) state) when the predetermined error state is canceled, the game interval notification means is in the second notification mode even after the predetermined error state is canceled,
When the predetermined error state occurs under the condition that the game interval notification means is in the second notification mode and the game value can be betted, the supply of power is interrupted (the power is turned off), and then, The power supply is restarted (turned on) while the setting key switch (152) is in a specific mode (on state) and the reset switch is operated (on state). When, the set value is not changed, and the game interval notification means is in the first notification state.

(c) Effects of the original invention 64 According to the original invention, when the power supply is restarted while the reset switch is being operated, the setting value is not changed, so there is no need to reset the setting value. Since the operation is not troublesome, the performance of the game machine can be improved.

65. original invention 65
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 65 Same as original invention 64.
(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 65 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (41st embodiment) is
Under a predetermined situation in which gaming value (medals) can be betted (for example, under a situation where the number of bets is any one of '1' to '3' and the number of credits is any one of '1' to '50') ), the power supply is cut off (the power is turned off), after which the setting key switch (152) is in the first mode (on state) and the reset switch (153) is not operated (off state). When the power supply is restarted (power is turned on) under the circumstances, it is possible to shift to the setting change mode, and if the condition for ending the setting change mode is satisfied, the game value can be bet. Situation and
The supply of power is interrupted under the predetermined situation in which gaming value can be bet, and then the setting key switch is in the second mode (off state) and the reset switch is operated (on state). ), the predetermined storage areas (“F001 (H)” to “F1FF (H)” in the use area of the RWM 53 and “F292 (H)” outside the use area) are restored. )” to “F3FF(H)”) can be executed, and after the initialization process is executed, a game value can be betted without shifting to the setting change mode,
The supply of power is interrupted under the predetermined situation in which gaming value can be bet, and then the setting key switch is in the first mode (on state) and the reset switch is operated (on state). If the power supply is restarted under such circumstances, it is possible to shift to the setting change mode, and if the conditions for ending the setting change mode are satisfied, the gaming value can be betted. and

(c) Effect of the original invention 65 According to the original invention, in a game machine equipped with a reset switch, when the supply of power is restarted, the switch is shifted to an appropriate state according to the type of switch being operated. Therefore, the performance of the game machine can be improved.

66. original invention 66
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 66 Same as original invention 64.
(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 66 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (41st embodiment) is
Predetermined display means (setting value display LED 73) capable of displaying the setting value is provided,
A setting value "M" (M is a numerical value) (for example, "2") is displayed as a setting value first displayed on the predetermined display means when shifting to the setting change mode, and then a setting change switch (153) is displayed. is operated and the set value "N" (N is a numerical value different from M) (for example, "3") is displayed on the predetermined display means, the power supply is cut off (the power is turned off), After that, the power supply is restarted (the power is turned on) under the condition that the setting key switch (152) is in a specific mode (off state) and the reset switch (153) is not operated (off state). ), it is possible to shift to the setting change mode, and the set value "N" (for example, "3") is displayed as the set value first displayed on the predetermined display means when shifting to the setting change mode. make it possible
A setting value "M" is displayed as a setting value first displayed on the predetermined display means when the mode is shifted to the setting change mode. When the power supply is interrupted under the condition that "N" is displayed, and then the power supply is resumed under the condition that the setting key switch is in the specific mode and the reset switch is operated. , the game value (medals) can be betted without transitioning to the setting change mode.

(c) Effect of the original invention 66 According to the original invention, when the power supply is interrupted in the setting change mode and then the power supply is restarted, depending on whether the reset switch is operated or not, Since it is possible to shift to an appropriate state, the performance of the game machine can be improved.

67. original invention 67
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 67 Same as original invention 64.
(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 67 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (41st embodiment) is
It may become a specific error state (unrecoverable error state),
The power supply is interrupted (power is turned off) in the specific error state, and then the setting key switch (152) is in the first state (off state) and the reset switch (153) is operated. If the supply of power is resumed (turned on) under the circumstances (in the on state), the specified error state,
When the power supply is cut off in the specific error state, and then the setting key switch is in the second mode (on state) and the reset switch is not operated (off state). When the power supply is restarted, it is possible to shift to the setting change mode,
If the power supply is interrupted without operating (turning on) the setting change switch (153) during the setting change mode, and then the power supply is resumed while the reset switch is being operated. , the game value (medal) can be bet without moving to the setting change mode,
When the power supply is cut off in the specific error state, and then the setting key switch is in the second mode (on state) and the reset switch is not operated (off state). When the power supply is restarted and the setting change mode is entered, the power supply is interrupted without the setting change switch being operated during the setting change mode, and then the reset switch is operated. When the power supply is restarted, the set value information (set value data (_NB_RANK)) is set to a specific value (“0”).

(c) Effect of the original invention 67 According to the original invention, in a game machine equipped with a reset switch, when the power supply is interrupted in a specific error state and then the power supply is restarted, the reset switch is operated. Since it is possible to shift to an appropriate state according to the type of switch that is present, the performance of the game machine can be improved.

68. original invention 68
(a) Problems to be Solved by the Original Invention 68 The original invention relates to a gaming machine that has a recoverable error state and an unrecoverable error state.
Conventionally, there is known a game machine having a recoverable error state and an unrecoverable error state (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2018-192206).
However, in the above-described conventional game machine, the processing when the power is turned off in a recoverable error state and the processing when the power is turned off in an unrecoverable error state have not been sufficiently considered. .
The problem to be solved by the original invention is to perform appropriate processing according to each state when the power is turned off in a recoverable error state and when the power is turned off in an unrecoverable error state. It is to be.

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 68 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (41st embodiment) is
There are cases where it becomes a predetermined error state (recoverable error state) and cases where it becomes a specific error state (non-recoverable error state),
In the power-off processing (power-off processing (I_POWER_DOWN) in FIG. 360), predetermined storage means (addresses “F000 (H)” to “F1FF (H)” of the use area of the RWM 53 and addresses “F210 (H)” outside the use area H)" to "F3FF(H)") based on the information stored, generating and storing error detection information (RWM checksum data),
In the predetermined error state, when an event occurs in which the supply of power is interrupted (the power is turned off), it is configured to be able to execute power-off processing,
It is characterized in that, in the specific error state, when an event that cuts off the power supply occurs, the power cutoff process is not executed.

(c) Effects of the original invention 68 According to the original invention, when the power is turned off in a recoverable error state and when the power is turned off in an unrecoverable error state, an appropriate processing can be performed.

69. original invention 69
(a) Problems to be Solved by the Original Invention 69 The original invention relates to a gaming machine that can be in a recoverable error state and in a non-recoverable error state.
Conventionally, there is known a gaming machine that has a recoverable error state and an unrecoverable error state (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-192206).
However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, sufficient consideration has not been given to the display mode of the ratio display means when a recoverable error state or an unrecoverable error state occurs.
The problem to be solved by the original invention is to set the display mode of the ratio display means to an appropriate display mode according to each state when a recoverable error state and an unrecoverable error state occur. That is.

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 69 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (41st embodiment) is
Ratio display means (management information display LED 74 (digits 6 to 9)) capable of displaying multiple types of ratios (indicated character ratio, continuous character ratio, character ratio, etc.) related to game results,
There are cases where it becomes a predetermined error state (recoverable error state) and cases where it becomes a specific error state (non-recoverable error state),
When the predetermined error state occurs, the ratio display means can display a plurality of types of ratios related to game results,
When the specific error state occurs while the predetermined information is being displayed on the predetermined display of the ratio display means (for example, "5" is displayed in the digit 9 of the management information display LED 74), the above maintaining the display mode so that the predetermined information is displayed on the predetermined display of the ratio display means;
The specific error state is characterized in that it is configured so that it cannot be cleared even by operating the reset switch (153).

(c) Effect of Original Invention 69 According to the original invention, even if a predetermined error state occurs, the ratio display means can display a plurality of types of ratios related to the game result. Then, since the predetermined information remains displayed in the predetermined segment of the ratio display means, it is possible to determine which error state it is based on the display mode of the ratio display means.

70. original invention 70
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 70 Same as original invention 69.
(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 70 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (41st embodiment) is
Equipped with ratio display means (management information display LED 74 (digits 6 to 9)) capable of displaying multiple types of ratios (indicated character ratio, continuous character ratio, character ratio, etc.) related to game results,
There are cases where it becomes a predetermined error state (recoverable error state) and cases where it becomes a specific error state (non-recoverable error state),
When the predetermined error state occurs, the ratio display means can display a plurality of types of ratios related to game results,
When the specific error state occurs, the display mode of the ratio display means is set to a specific mode (for example, all lights off),
The specific error state is configured such that it cannot be canceled even by operating a reset switch.

(c) Effect of the Original Invention 70 According to the original invention, even if a predetermined error state occurs, the ratio display means can display a plurality of types of ratios related to the game result. Then, since the display mode of the ratio display means becomes the specific mode, it is possible to determine which error state is present by the display mode of the ratio display means.

71. original invention 71
(a) Problems to be Solved by the Original Invention The original invention relates to a gaming machine that enables the use of instructions with a small code size.
In the prior art, game control is composed of a plurality of modules (processes) (for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2017-104160).
In the prior art, since the memory capacity of the ROM is limited, there is a demand for instructions that can efficiently use the memory area.
The original problem to be solved by the invention is the efficient use of storage space.

(b) Means for Solving the Problems of the Original Invention (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention was
A ROM area arranged in order of a first program area, a first data area, a second program area, and a second data area,
A first instruction (LDF HL, mn (mn=1200h to 1DFFh)) in the first program area enables storage of a predetermined address value (mn) in the first data area in a predetermined register (HL register);
enabling a specific address value (mn) in the second data area to be stored in a predetermined register (HL register) by a second instruction (LD HL, mn) in the second program area;
the first instruction is an instruction using a predetermined opcode (LDF), and the specific address value of the second data area cannot be stored in a predetermined register using the first instruction;
The code size (2 bytes) of the first instruction is smaller than the code size (3 bytes) of the second instruction.

(c) Effects of the Original Invention According to the original invention, the code size of the first instruction is made smaller than the code size of the second instruction, so the first program area can be saved.

72. original invention 72
(a) Problem to be solved by the original invention Same as original invention 71.
(b) Means for Solving the Problems of the Original Invention (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention was
a ROM area having a first program area, a first data area, a second program area, and a second data area;
Among the instructions in the first program area, there are a plurality of instructions using the first opcode (LDF),
Among the instructions in the first program area, there are a plurality of instructions using the second opcode (LD),
Among the instructions in the second program area, there are a plurality of instructions using the second opcode,
the instructions in the second program area do not have an instruction using the first opcode;
The first instruction among the instructions using the first operation code is a 2-byte value, and is an instruction that can store a predetermined value within a specific range (1200h to 1DFFh) in a predetermined register (HL register). can be,
the second instruction among the instructions using the second operation code is a 2-byte value, and is an instruction that allows a specific value outside a specific range to be stored in a predetermined register (HL register);
The code size (2 bytes) of the first instruction is smaller than the code size (3 bytes) of the second instruction.

(c) Effect of the Original Invention According to the original invention, the code size of the instruction using the first opcode is made smaller than the code size of the instruction using the second opcode, so the first program area can be saved. can be done.

73. original invention 73
(a) Problem to be solved by the original invention Same as original invention 71.
(b) Means for Solving the Problems of the Original Invention (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention was
A ROM area having a first program area, a first data area, a second program area, and a second data area,
The operation code (CALLEX) that constitutes the specific instruction (CALLEX mn) can be executed with the first code size (2 bytes) when calling a program at an address within a specific range (2000h to 20FFh),
Operation codes that make up a specific instruction are executed with a second code size (4 bytes) (the second code size is larger than the first code size) when calling a program with an address outside the specific range. is possible and
In the second program area, a program is stored in a range (2000h to 25FFh) larger than the specific range,
When executing a specific program in the second program area from a program in the first program area, the specific program in the second program area can be executed by executing a specific instruction,
The address of a particular program is characterized by being within a particular range.

(c) Effect of the Original Invention According to the original invention, the code size of the specific instruction that calls the program of the address within the specific range is reduced, so the first program area can be saved.

74. original invention 74
(a) Problem to be solved by the original invention Same as original invention 71.
(b) Means for Solving the Problems of the Original Invention (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention was
a ROM area having a first program area, a first data area, a second program area, and a second data area;
an RWM area having a first storage area and a second storage area;
a first register bank and a second register bank;
The first register bank has a plurality of registers (A, F, B, C, D, E, H, L, SP registers, etc.),
The second register bank has a plurality of registers (A, F, B, C, D, E, H, L, SP registers, etc.),
using a first register bank when executing a program in the first program area;
When executing the program in the second program area from the program in the first program area, switching from the first register bank to the second register bank by executing a specific instruction (CALLEX mn); enabling execution of programs in the second program area (mn);
When returning from the program in the second program area to the program in the first program area, a predetermined instruction (RETEX) is executed to switch from the second register bank to the first register bank and to switch to the first register bank. It is characterized by enabling the execution of programs in the program area.

(c) Effects of the Original Invention According to the original invention, when executing a program in the second program area from a program in the first program area, and from a program in the second program area to a program in the first program area, Since save processing and restoration processing of registers are not required when returning, the program capacity can be reduced.

75. original invention 75
(a) Problem to be solved by the original invention Same as original invention 71.
(b) Means for Solving the Problems of the Original Invention (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention was
a ROM area having a first program area, a first data area, a second program area, and a second data area;
a first register bank and a second register bank;
The first register bank has a plurality of registers (A, F, B, C, D, E, H, L, SP registers, etc.) including a first register (eg, A register),
The second register bank has a plurality of registers (A, F, B, C, D, E, H, L, SP registers, etc.) including the first register (eg, A register),
using a first register bank when executing a program in the first program area;
When executing a specific program in the second program area from a program in the first program area, a specific instruction (CALLEX mn ) to enable switching from the first register bank to the second register bank and execution of a specific program within the second program region (mn),
By switching to the second register bank, the program can be executed in a situation where the first register of the second register bank stores a specific value different from the predetermined value (the specific value may be "0"). year,
When returning from the program in the second program area to the program in the first program area, a predetermined instruction (RETEX) is executed to switch from the second register bank to the first register bank and to switch to the first register bank. enabling the execution of programs in the program area;
A predetermined value is stored in the first register when switching to the first register bank.
(c) Effect of original invention Same as original invention 74.

76. original invention 76
(a) Problem to be solved by the original invention Same as original invention 71.
(b) Means for Solving the Problems of the Original Invention (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention was
a ROM area having a first program area, a first data area, a second program area, and a second data area;
a first register bank and a second register bank;
The first register bank has a plurality of registers (A, F, B, C, D, E, H, L, SP registers, etc.),
The second register bank has a plurality of registers (A, F, B, C, D, E, H, L, SP registers, etc.),
using a first register bank when executing a program in the first program area;
When executing a program in the second program area from a program in the first program area in the interrupt enabled state, a specific instruction (CALLEX mn) is executed to disable interrupts and to change the number from the first register bank to the second register bank. and the execution of the program in the second program area (mn),
When returning from the program in the second program area to the program in the first program area, a predetermined instruction (RETEX) is executed to enable interrupts and switch from the second register bank to the first register bank. and execution of the program in the first program area.
(c) Effect of original invention Same as original invention 74.

77. original invention 77
(a) Problem to be solved by the original invention Same as original invention 71.
(b) Means for Solving the Problems of the Original Invention (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention was
a ROM area having a first program area, a first data area, a second program area, and a second data area;
a first register bank and a second register bank;
The first register bank has a plurality of registers (A, F, B, C, D, E, H, L, SP registers, etc.) including an SP register,
The second register bank has a plurality of registers (A, F, B, C, D, E, H, L, SP registers, etc.) including an SP register,
using a first register bank when executing a program in the first program area;
When executing a specific program in the second program area (step S2852 in FIG. 380) from a program in the first program area, a specific instruction (CALLEX mn) is executed to disable interrupts and to a second register bank and execution of a specific program within a second program region (mn);
The specific program in the second program area is characterized by being composed of a program including at least an instruction to store a specific value (F400h) in the SP register of the second register bank.

(c) Effects of the Original Invention According to the original invention, when executing a program in the second program area from a program in the first program area, and from a program in the second program area to a program in the first program area, Since save processing and restoration processing of registers are not required when returning, the program capacity can be reduced.
In addition, since a specific value is stored in the SP register by a specific program in the second program area, and the specific value is not stored in the SP register in a subsequent predetermined program, the program can be simplified and the program capacity can be reduced. can.

78. original invention 78
(a) Problems to be Solved by the Original Invention The original invention relates to a gaming machine capable of executing a pseudo-game effect.
In the prior art, there is known a game in which a pseudo-game effect can be executed (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2014-124417).
However, in the above-mentioned prior art, if the control processing during the pseudo-game production and the control processing during the main game are the same, there is a risk that it will not be possible to distinguish between the pseudo-game production and the main game. .
The problem to be solved by the original invention is to differentiate between a specific control process during a pseudo-game production and a specific control process during a main game, thereby distinguishing between a pseudo-game production and a main game. It is possible.

(b) Means for Solving the Problems of the Original Invention (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention was
N (three) reels (31);
A stop switch (42),
By satisfying a predetermined condition, it is possible to execute a pseudo-game effect that makes it possible to temporarily stop the reels based on the operation of the stop switch,
In the pseudo-game effect, under the condition that up to "N-1" reels are temporarily stopped, the swing fluctuation control is not executed for the temporarily stopped "N-1" reels,
In the pseudo-game presentation, after the N reels are temporarily stopped, swing fluctuation control can be executed for the temporarily stopped N reels.

(c) Effect of the Original Invention According to the original invention, it is possible to execute swing fluctuation control after all reels are temporarily stopped, so it is possible to determine whether or not a pseudo-game effect is being performed based on the presence or absence of swing fluctuation control. can.
In addition, since the swing fluctuation control is not executed under the condition that only some reels are temporarily stopped, it is possible to make it difficult to determine whether or not the pseudo-game presentation is in progress until the middle of the pseudo-game presentation.

79. original invention 79
(a) Problem to be solved by the original invention Same as original invention 78.
(b) Means for Solving the Problems of the Original Invention (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention was
a stop switch (42);
Equipped with a stop switch lamp that indicates whether the operation of the stop switch is valid or invalid,
By satisfying a predetermined condition, it is possible to execute a pseudo-game effect that makes it possible to temporarily stop the reels based on the operation of the stop switch,
The lighting mode of the stop switch lamp is differentiated between a situation in which the operation of the stop switch is valid in the pseudo game performance and a situation in which the operation of the stop switch is valid in the main game for displaying the game results.
(c) Effects of the Original Invention According to the original invention, it is possible to determine whether or not a pseudo-game effect is being performed by looking at the lighting state of the stop switch lamp.

80. original invention 80
(a) Problem to be solved by the original invention Same as original invention 78.
(b) Means for Solving the Problems of the Original Invention (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention was
By satisfying a predetermined condition, it is possible to execute a pseudo-game effect that makes it possible to temporarily stop the reels (31) based on the operation of the stop switch (42),
In this game for displaying the game result, when the operation of the stop switch is valid and the situation where the stop switch is not operated continues, a notification prompting the operation of the stop switch can be executed,
During a pseudo game presentation, when the operation of the stop switch is effective, even when the stop switch is not operated, the notification for prompting the operation of the stop switch is not executed.
(c) Effect of the Original Invention According to the original invention, it is possible to determine whether or not a pseudo-game effect is being performed, depending on whether or not notification prompting the operation of the stop switch is executed.

81. original invention 81
(a) Problem to be solved by the original invention Same as original invention 78.
(b) Means for Solving the Problems of the Original Invention (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention was
By satisfying a predetermined condition, it is possible to execute a pseudo-game effect that makes it possible to temporarily stop the reels (31) based on the operation of the stop switch (42),
In the pseudo-game production, when the stop switch corresponding to the spinning reel is operated while the start switch remains on, the reel corresponding to the stop switch can be temporarily stopped. Characterized by
(c) Effect of the Original Invention According to the original invention, by operating the stop switch corresponding to the spinning reel in a situation where the start switch remains on, whether or not the pseudo-game effect is being performed can be determined.

82. original invention 82
(a) Problem to be solved by the original invention Same as original invention 78.
(b) Means for Solving the Problems of the Original Invention (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention was
By satisfying a predetermined condition, it is possible to execute a pseudo-game effect that makes it possible to temporarily stop the reels (31) based on the operation of the stop switch (42),
In this game for displaying the game result, the operation mode of the stop switch is displayed on the instruction monitor (acquisition number display LED 78) based on the fact that a specific condition is satisfied (for example, winning the push order bell during AT). make it possible
In a game that satisfies both a predetermined condition and a specific condition, the operation mode of the stop switch is not displayed on the instruction monitor during the pseudo-game effect, and the stop switch is displayed on the instruction monitor after the pseudo-game effect is completed and the game is shifted to the main game. It is characterized by being able to display the operation mode of
(c) Effect of the Original Invention According to the original invention, since the operation mode of the stop switch is not displayed on the instruction monitor during the pseudo-game presentation, it is possible to avoid misleading the player.

83. original invention 83
(a) Problem to be solved by the original invention Same as original invention 78.
(b) Means for Solving the Problems of the Original Invention (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention was
A predetermined lamp (game start display LED 79d) capable of notifying that the operation of the start switch (41) is valid based on the betting of the prescribed number of game media,
After the start switch is operated, a pseudo-game effect can be executed to temporarily stop the reels (31) based on the operation of the stop switch (42),
A plurality of reels are temporarily stopped, and the case where the pseudo-game effect is terminated based on the operation of the start switch under the condition that the predetermined lamp informs that the operation of the start switch is not effective. characterized by having
(c) Effect of the Original Invention According to the original invention, after the pseudo-game effect is completed, when shifting to the main game, a predetermined lamp notifies that the operation of the start switch is not effective, so that the player is misunderstood. can be avoided. For example, the pseudo-game effect can prevent the misunderstanding that the game was a replay winning game.

84. original invention 84
(a) Problem to be solved by the original invention Same as original invention 78.
(b) Means for Solving the Problems of the Original Invention (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention was
By satisfying a predetermined condition, it is possible to execute a pseudo-game effect that makes it possible to temporarily stop the reels (31) based on the operation of the stop switch (42),
When a specific lottery result is obtained in a game that executes a pseudo-game effect, the process for outputting a test signal corresponding to the specific lottery result is not executed during the execution of the pseudo-game effect, and the pseudo-game effect ends. It is characterized by being able to execute processing for outputting a test signal corresponding to the result of the specific lottery later.
(c) Effect of the original invention According to the original invention, since the test signal corresponding to the result of the specific lottery is not output during the simulated game presentation, it is possible to prevent the output of the test signal that may mislead the test machine. can be done.

85. original invention 85
(a) Problem to be solved by the original invention Same as original invention 78.
(b) Means for Solving the Problems of the Original Invention (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention was
By satisfying a predetermined condition, it is possible to execute a pseudo-game effect that makes it possible to temporarily stop the reels (31) based on the operation of the stop switch (42),
Equipped with a counter (advantageous section clear counter) that is updated by the execution of the game in the advantageous section,
In the game in which the pseudo-game effect is executed during the advantageous interval, it is possible to execute processing for outputting a test signal indicating that it is in the advantageous interval and a test signal indicating that the pseudo-game effect is being executed. ,
The counter is not updated even when the pseudo-game effect is executed once.
(c) Effect of the Original Invention According to the original invention, even if the pseudo-game effect is executed, the counter of the advantageous section is not updated, so that the player is not disadvantaged by the pseudo-game effect being executed. can.

10 slot machine (gaming machine)
11 Power switch 12 Front door 12a Second closing part 12b Third closing part 12c Control panel 12d Index 13 Cabinet 13a Bottom plate 13b Back plate 13c First closing part 14 Symbol display device 14a Reel frame 15 Medal payout device 16 Medal payout port 17 Door Switch 21 Production lamp (decorative lamp part)
21a Pseudo-game display lamp 22 Speaker 23 Image display device 23a Video reel 23b Decorative variation image 24 Operation button 25 Operation instruction lamp 26 Upper frame lamp portion 26a Upper frame lamp substrate 26b Upper frame lamp cover 27 Right frame lamp portion 27a Right frame lamp substrate 27b right frame lamp cover 28 left frame lamp portion 28a left frame lamp substrate 28b left frame lamp cover 31 reel 32 motor 33 reel sensor 34 sub reel 35 hopper 36 hopper motor 37a, 37b payout sensor 38a fixed shaft 38b movable shaft 39a movable piece 39b spring 40a 1-bet switch 40b 3-bet switch 41 start switch 42 stop switch 42a stop button 42b stopper 42c coil spring 42d moving piece 42e detection sensor 43 checkout switch 44a, 44b insertion sensor 45 blocker 46 passage sensor 47 medal slot 47a medal guard 47b Medal holder 48 Shoot passage 49 Shoot sensor 50 Main control board (main control means)
50a screw hole 51 input port 52 output port 53 RWM
54 ROMs
55 Main CPU
56 board case (main board case)
57 Upper cover 57a Crimped portion 57b Gate mark 57c Hollow portion 57d Projection 57e Projection 58 Lower cover 58a Crimped portion 58b Gate mark 58c Boss 61 Role lottery means 62 Winning flag control means 63 Push order instruction number selection means 64 Effect group number selection means 65 reel control means 66 winning judgment means 67 payout means 71 control command transmission means 73 set value display LED
74 management information display LED (role ratio monitor)
75 display substrate 76 credit number display LED
77 Advantageous section display LED
78 Acquisition number display LED
79 Status display LED
79a 1 bet display LED
79b 2bet indicator LED
79c 3bet indicator LED
79d Game start display LED
79e Input indicator LED
79f Replay display LED
80 sub-control board (sub-control means)
81 Input port 82 Output port 83 RWM
84 ROMs
85 Sub CPU
86 electrolytic capacitor 87 sub board case 91 performance output control means 101 hopper disc 102 holding section 103 discharge section 110 reel base 120 reel control board 121 reel board case 130 passage forming member 131 upper medal receiving opening 132 returning medal passage 133 lower medal receiving opening 134 payout medal passage 151 setting key insertion slot 152 setting key switch 153 setting change (reset) switch 200 hall computer 300 interface board 400 testing machine 500 pachinko game machine 501 outer frame 502 front frame 503 hinge mechanism 504 game board 505 glass door (glass frame)
506 upper tray 507 lower tray 508 firing handle 510 power board 511 power switch 512 firing board 513 firing device 520 payout control board 521 key insertion slot 522 door open switch 523 frame open switch 524 payout device 525 external terminal board 530 main control board 530a hole 531 special pattern display device 532 starting port 533 starting port switch 534 setting key insertion port 535 setting key switch 536 setting change (reset) switch 537 setting value display LED
538 management information display LED (performance display monitor)
539a to 539h Connectors 539b' to 539h' Connector legs 540 Sub-control board 541 Production lamp (decorative lamp part)
542 speaker 543 image display device 550 substrate case 560 upper case 560a lower edge 561 cover 562 crimped portion 563a-563g opening 564 boss 565 side wall 570 lower case 570a outer edge 571 side wall 572 crimped portion BH harness 610 upper frame lamp portion 611 top Frame right lamp substrate 612 Upper frame left lamp substrate 613 Upper frame lamp cover 620 Right frame lamp portion 621 Right frame lamp substrate 622 Right frame lamp cover 630 Left frame lamp portion 631 Left frame lamp substrate 632 Left frame lamp cover 641a-k LED ( full color LED)
642a-c connector 650 right base member 651 upper frame right board mounting part 652 upper frame right cover mounting part 653 right frame board mounting part 654 right frame cover mounting part 661a-e board supporting ribs 662a-b cover fitting groove 670 lens part 681 screw boss 682a-c positioning boss 683a-c screw 684 screw hole 685a-b positioning hole 686a-b fixing hole 687 protrusion 688 screw shaft 689 screw head

Claims (1)

having a reel,
having a start switch,
having a stop switch,
having an RWM region,
Having a first display means capable of displaying advantageous operation information of the stop switch,
Having a second display means capable of displaying character ratio information,
It is possible to execute a predetermined pseudo-game effect that can temporarily stop the reels by operating the stop switch,
A game in which a predetermined pseudo-game effect is performed and in which a predetermined lottery result is determined by an internal lottery (a game is an advantage of the stop switch corresponding to the predetermined lottery result on the first display means) (refers to a game that displays such operation information), the first display means corresponds to the predetermined lottery result from the time when the predetermined lottery result is determined by the internal lottery until all the reels are temporarily stopped as a predetermined pseudo-game effect. Advantageous operation information of the stop switch is not displayed, all the reels are temporarily stopped as a predetermined pseudo-game effect, and then advantageous operation information of the stop switch corresponding to the predetermined lottery result is displayed on the first display means. be visible,
When the start switch is operated as a trigger for executing the internal lottery of the certain game, the process of outputting an external signal corresponding to the number of bets is started before the execution process of a predetermined pseudo-game effect,
When the start switch is operated as a trigger for executing the internal lottery of the certain game, a process for outputting a test signal regarding the operation mode of the stop switch can be executed before the execution process of a predetermined pseudo-game effect. year,
In the certain game, during the period in which a predetermined pseudo-game effect is being executed, a process for outputting a test signal indicating that the pseudo-game effect is in progress can be executed,
A predetermined process capable of determining which stop switch among all the stop switches is being operated before starting the game medium imparting process, and by the predetermined process, which one of all the stop switches is operated can be executed. If it is determined that the stop switch is operated, the process of giving game media is not started,
The predetermined processing includes a logical operation using specific data capable of determining whether or not data in a specific region storing information regarding operation of each stop switch in the RWM region is "0". and
When the result of the logical operation is not "0", it is determined that one of all the stop switches is operated,
The second display means has a first display section, a second display section, a third display section, and a fourth display section,
The first display has a plurality of segments including a DP segment,
The second display has a plurality of segments including a DP segment,
The third display has a plurality of segments including a DP segment,
The fourth display has a plurality of segments including a DP segment,
A gaming machine characterized in that a test pattern can be displayed on the second display means.

Images